2011-2012 Honda CR-Z Service Manual

INTRODUCTION
General Information
- How to Use This Manual---------------------------------
This manual is divided into multiple sections. The first page of
each section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its
corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover.
You can quickly find the first page of each section without
Specifications specs
looking through a full table of contents. The symbols printed at
the top corner of each page can also be used as a quick reference
system. Maintenance
Each section includes:
1. A table of contents, or an exploded view index showing:
Parts disassembly sequence.
Bolt torques and thread sizes. Êngine Electrical
Page references to descriptions in text.
2. Disassembly/assembly procedures and tools.
3. Inspection. *Engine Mechanical
4. Testing/troubleshooting.
5. Repair.
6. Adjustments.
Engine Cooling
k
~Safety Messages
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help
you make informed decisions, we have provided safety
*Fuel and Emissions
messages, and other safety information throughout this manual.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. You must use
your own good judgment. IM A System | | IMA^ | j
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms
including:
Safety Labels on the vehicle. *Transaxle
Safety Messages preceded by a safety alert symbol A and
one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean: *
Steering [ i
DANGER You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if

you don't follow instructions.
AWARNI NG You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if Suspension {Including
TPMS)
A CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
Instructions howto service this vehicle correctly and safely. * Brakes (Including VS A)
All information contained in this manual is based on the latest
product information available at the time of printing. We reserve
the right to make changes at anytime without notice. No part of
this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a retrieval
Body
system, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text, ^Heating, Ventilation,
images, and tables. and Air osi<Ii t;oning
As you read this manual, you will find information that is
preceded by a INOTICE Isymbol. The purpose of this message is to *
help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the Body Electrical
environment.
First Edition 10/2011

All Rights Reserved
Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
Service Publication Office
*Audio, Navigation,, and
Specifications apply to USA and Canada Telematics
As sections w ith * include SRS and IMA
components; special precautions are required
when servicing. * Restraints
* w # * * ' marked sections are not included in this
manual, see Volume 2.
2011-12 Honda CR-Z

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
The CR-Z SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a front passenger's airbag in the dashboard
above the glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the sides of the
roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this
Service Manual. Items marked with an asterisk (*) on the contents page include or are located near SRS
components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items requires special precautions and tools, and
should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe
frontal or side collision, all SRS service work should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags, side airbags, side curtain airbags, and/or seat belt
tensioners.
Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors, especially when the
ignition switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0); otherwise, the
system may fail in a collision, or the airbags may deploy.
SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the
steering column, center console, dashboard, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats, in the
roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) SYSTEM'

IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a high-voltage system. The high voltage cables and their
covers are identified by orange coloring. The safety labels are attached to high voltage and other related parts
(see page 1-7). You must be familiar with the IMA system before working around it. Make sure you have read the
Service Precautions in the IMA section before doing repairs or service (see page 12-3).
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes
'11 M odel. .............................. ...................... ................ 1-2
'12 M o d el........................................... ................... ......1 - 4
Identification Number Locations....... .......................... .1-6
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations................... 1-7
Under-Hood Emission Control Label.................... . 1-9
Lift and Support Points.................................................... 1-10
Tow ing.................................................................................1-11
Parts M arking................................................. . 113
Service Precautions....................................... ..................1-13
Chassis and Paint Codes - '11 Model
Vehicle Identification Number
jhm zfi c 4 * b s mmm
a b c de f g h
f
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle
JHM: Honda Motor Go., Ltd.
Honda passenger vehicle Vehicle Identification Number,
b. Line, Body and Engine Type Federal M otor Vehicle
ZFI: CR-Z/LEA1 Safety Standard Certification,
and Paint Code Label
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
C: 2-door Hatchback/6-speed Manual Vehicle Identification Number,
D: 2-door Hatchback/CVT Canadian M otor Vehicle
Safety Standard Certification,
d. Vehicle Grade (Series) and Paint Code Label
USA models Canada models
4: CR-Z 6: CR-Z
6: CR-Z EX
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
B: '11
g. Factory Code
S: Suzuka Factory in Japan
h. Serial Number
000001 USA models
800001 : Canada models
m
Engine Number Paint Code
Code Color USA Canada
LEA1 -1000001 models models
NH-624P Premium White Pearl o O
NH-642M Storm Silver Metallic o O
a b NH-731P Crystal Black Pearl o
BG-57P North Shore Blue o o
a. Engine Type Pearl
LEA1:1.5 L SOHC i-VTEC Sequential Multiport R-81 Milano Red o o
Fuel-injected engine
b. Serial Number
Motor Number m
MF6- - 1000001
a b
a. Motor Type
MF6: DC brushless-3 phases
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
STXM - 1000001
a b
a. Transmission Type
STXM; 6-speed Manual
STYA; CVT
b. Serial Number
Chassis and Paint Codes - '12 Model
Vehicle Identification Number
JHM ZFI C 4 * C S 000001
i b c def g h
Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

JHM: Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
Honda passenger vehicle
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
ZF1: CR-Z/LEA1
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
C: 2-door Hatch back/6-speed Manual
D: 2-door Hatchback/CVT Canadian M otor Vehicle
Safety Standard Certification,
d. Vehicle Grade (Series) and Paint Code Label
USA models Canada models
4: CR-Z 6: CR-Z
6: CR-Z EX
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
C: '12
g. Factory Code
S: Suzuka Factory in Japan
h. Serial Number
0 0 0 0 0 1 USA models
800001 Canada models
Engine Number Paint Code
Code Color USA Canada
LEA1 - 2000001 models models
NH-624P Premium White Pearl O O
NH-642M Storm Silver Metallic O O
a b NH-731P Crystal Black Pearl o o
BG-57P North Shore Blue o
a. Engine Type Pearl
LEA1: 1.5 L SOHC i-VTEC Sequential Multiport R-81 Milano Red o o
Fuel-injected e n g in e
b. Serial Number
Motor Number
MF6 - 1000001
a b
a. M otor Type
MF6: DC brushless-3 phases
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
STXM - 2000001
a b
a. Transmission Type
STXM: 6-speed Manual
STYA: CVT
b. Serial Number
Identification Number Locations
Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) Number (VIN)
Engine IMA (CVT)

N um ber M o to r N um ber
N um ber
Danger/W arning/Caution Label Locations
Passenger's Compartment:
Steering W heel:
ROOF-SIDE AIRBAG
MODULE DANGER
GABLE REEL CAUTION
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE DANGER
(cont'd)
General Information
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations (cont'd)
Rear Compartment; Doorjamb Area:
REAR CARGO CONSOLE

W ARNING LABEL
Engine Compartment:
AIR CONDITIONING EMISSION CONTROL passenger's doorjam bs

INFORMATION INFORMATION and
ENGINE COOLANT
INFORMATION
Cargo Area:
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY HANDLING

W ARNING INFORMATION
BATTERY DISPOSAL HIGH VOLTAGE

INFORMATION HANDLING DANGER
Located on battery
DISPOSAL DANGER DANGER

INFORMATION
Under-Hood Emission Control Label
Emission Group Identification Test Group and Evaporative Family

Example: Test Group:
B HNX V 01.5 1D3
a b e d e
a. Model Year
B: 11
C : i2
b. Manufacturer Subcode
'11 Model HNX: Honda
CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS: 2011 MY HEV c. Family Type
V: LDV
'12 Model
d. Displacement Group
CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS: 2012 MY HEV
e. Sequence Characters
1D3: '11 model
6D2:'12 model
Evaporative Family:
B HIMX R 0096 VZA
a b c d e
a. Model Year
B: '11
C: '12
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: Honda
c. Family Type
R: Refueling
d. Canister Working Capacity Group
e. Sequence Characters
VZA: '11 model
VZB:'12 model
Lift and Support Points
NOTE; If you are going to remove heavy components Floor Jack

such as suspension or the IMA battery from the rear of
the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with; tall 1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking
safety stands. When substantial weight is removed from brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the shift
the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change, lever in reverse for manual transmission, or in P for
causing the vehicle to tip forward on the lift. CVT.
Vehicle Lift 2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking bracket
1. Position the lift pads (A), under the vehicle's front
(A) or the rear jacking bracket (B). Center the jacking
support points (B) and. rear support points (C).
bracket on the jack lift platform (C), and jack up the
INOTICE l vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands under it.
This vehicle has low ground clearance. To avoid INOTICE I
damaging the vehicle, make sure there, is enough
This vehicle has low ground clearance. To avoid
clearance around the support points.
damaging the vehicle, make sure there is enough
Be sure the lift pads are properly placed to avoid clearance around the support points.
damaging the vehicle.
Be sure the floor jack is properly placed to avoid
damaging the vehicle.
2. Raise the lift a few inches, and rock the vehicle gently
to be sure it is firmly supported.
3. Raise the lift to its full height, and inspect the vehicle
support points for solid contact with the lift pads.
Safety Stands and adjust them so the vehicle is level side-to-side.
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same 5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.
support points as for a vehicle lift. Always use safety
stands when working on or under any vehicle that is
supported only by a jack.
Towing
If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional Rear:

towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.
Emergency Towing
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle.
Flat-bed Tow Truck Equipment The operator loads
the vehicle on the back of a flat-bed tow truck. This is the
best way of transporting the vehicle.
To accommodate the flat-bed tow truck equipment, the
vehicle is equipped with a detachable front towing hook
(A), front tie down hook slots (B), a rear towing hook (C),
and rear tie down hook slots (D).
The towing hooks can be used with a winch to pull the
vehicle onto the flat-bed tow truck, and the tie down
hook slots can be used to secure the vehicle to the
flat-bed tow truck.
NOTE: The tie down hook slots has rubber plugs (E) over
the openings. Be sure to reinstall the plugs after use.
Front:
E E '
R B
E E
(cont'd)
Towing (cont'd)
Front Towing Hook Installation Wheel Lift Equipment The tow truck uses two
pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and
The detachable front towing hook is for towing very
lifts them off the ground. The other two wheels remain
short distances, such as freeing the vehicle. The hook on the ground. This is an acceptable way of towing the
attaches to the anchor in the front bumper. vehicle.
INOTICE I Sling-type Equipment The tow truck uses metal
To avoid damage to the vehicle, use the towing hook cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around
for straight flat ground towing only. Do not tow on an parts of the frame or suspension, and the cables lift that
angle. end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's
Do not use the detachable tow hook as a tie down for suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this
securing the vehicle on a flat-bed tow truck. To secure method of towing is attempted. This method of towing
the vehicle on a flat-bed tow truck, use the tie down the vehicle is unacceptable.
hook slots provided.
If the vehicle cannot be transported by a flat-bed tow
1. Remove the cover (A) from the front bumper by truck, it should be towed with the front wheels off the
pushing its edge. ground. If the vehicle is damaged, and must be towed
with the front wheels on the ground, or with all four
wheels on the ground, do this:
Manual Transmission
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to neutral.
Leave the ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I) so the
y . steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure all accessories are turned off to minimize
battery current draw.
ewr
2. Remove the detachable towing hook from the tool kit Release the parking brake.
under the cargo area floor. Start the engine.
Shift to D, then to N.
3. Screw in the detachable towing hook (B), and tighten
it securely by hand. Turn off the engine.
Leave the ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I) so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure all accessories are turned off to minimize
battery current draw.
It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles
(80 km), and keep the vehicle speed below 35 mph
(55 km/h).
INOTICE I
Improper towing preparation will damage the
transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If
you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine
(CVT model), the vehicle must be transported on a
flat-bed tow truck.
Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
Parts Marking Service Precautions
To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are IMA System

marked with the vehicle identification number (VIN).
Original parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement The CR-Z has an Auto-Stop system that shuts the engine
body parts have generic self-adhesive labels. These off under certain conditions to improve fuel economy
labels should not be removed. The original engine or when the vehicle comes to a stop. In Auto-Stop mode,
transmission VIN plates are not transferable to the driver input, such as releasing the brake pedal, causes
replacement engine or transmission. the engine to restart.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels Before servicing the CR-Z, turn the ignition switch to
during body repair. Mask the labels before repairing the LOCK (0), and remove the key so the engine cannot be
part. started.
Before doing any service on the CR-Z's IMA system,
make sure to turn the battery module switch OFF and
wait at least 5 minutes before working on the vehicle
(see page 12-3).
specs
Specifications
Standards and Service Lim its..............................2-2

Torque Summary
Torque Specifications........................... .......................... .2-12
Design Specifications....... ...................................2-17

Body Specifications..................... ................... ................ 2-19
Standards and Service Limits
Engine Electrical
Stem Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Lim it
Ignit i on coil Rated voltage 12V
CO
CM
Fir i ng order
I
I
I
Spark plug Type NGKC11 model) DIFR6A13G
NGK ('12 model) DIFR6D13
DENSO DK20PR-D13
Gap 1 .2 -1 .3 mm (0.047-0.051 in) | -
Ignit i on tim ing At idle M/T in neutral, 10 + 2 BTDC
Check the red mark CVT in N or P
Starter Output 1.0 kW
Commutator mica depth 0.40-0.50 mm (0.0157-0.0197 in) 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
Commutator runout 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) max. 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
Commutator O.D. 28.0-28.1 mm (1.102-1.106 in) 27.5 mm (1.083 in)
Brush length 11.1-11.5 mm (0.437-0.453 in) 4.3 mm (0.169 in)
Engine Assembly
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Compression Pressure M inimum 980 kPa (9.99 kgf/cm2,
(checked w ith engine starter cranking 142.1 psi)
at wide-open throttle) Maximum 200 kPa (2.04 kgf/cm2,
variation 29.0 psi)
Cylinder Head
Head Warpage 0.08 mm (0.003 in) max. -
Height 119.9-120.1 mm (4.720-4.728 i n) -
Camshaft End play 0.05-0.25 mm (0.0020-0.0098 in) 0.5 mm (0.020 in)

Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance 0.045-0.084 mm (0.00177-0.00331 0.100 mm (0.00394
in) in)
Total runout 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) max. 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
Cam lobe height Intake PRI 34.945 mm (1.37578 in) -
Intake SEC 30.529 mm (1.20193 in) -
Exhaust 35.614 mm (1.40212 in) -

Valve Clearance (cold) Intake 0.15-0.19 mm (0.006-0.007 in) -
Exhaust 0.26-0.30 mm (0.011 -0.011 in) -
Stem O.D. Intake 5.48-5.49 mm (0.2157-0.2161 in) 5.45 mm (0.2146 in)
Exhaust 5.45-5.46 mm (0.2146-0.2150 in) 5.42 mm (0.2134 in)
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0.02-0.05 mm (0.0008-0.0020 in) 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
Valve seat Width Intake 0.850-1.150 mm (0.03346-0.04528 1.60 mm (0.0630 in)
in)
Exhaust 1.250-1.550 mm (0.04921-0.06102 2.00 mm (0.0787 in)
in)
Stem installed height Intake 46.1-46.5 mm (1.815-1.831 in) 46.8 mm (1.843 in)
Valve guide Installed height Intake 15.85-16.35 mm (0.6240-0.6437 in) -
Exhaust 15.85-16.35 mm (0.6240-0.6437 in) -
Rocker arm Arm-to-shaft clearance Intake 0.019-0.050 mm (0.00075-0.00197 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
in)
Exhaust 0.019-0.050 mm (0.00075-0.00197 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
in)
2-2
specs
Engine Block
Block Warpage o f deck 0.07 mm (0.002 in) max. -
Bore diameter 73.000-73.015 mm (2.87401-2.87460 73.065 mm (2.87657
in) in)
Bore taper Difference 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
between first and
third
measurement
Rebori ng lim it - 0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
Piston Skirt O.D. at 16 mm (0.63 in) from 72.98-72.99 mm (2.8732-2.8736 in) 72.97 mm (2.8728 in)
bottom of skirt
Clearance in cylinder 0.010-0.035 mm (0.00039-0.00138 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
in)
Piston ring Ring-to-groove clearance Top (RIKEN) 0.065-0.090 mm (0.003-0.003 in) 0.15 mm (0.005 in)
Top (NIPPON) 0.061 -0 .0 9 0 m m (0.003-0.003 in) 0.15 mm (0.005 in)
Second 0.030-0.055 mm (0.002-0.002 in) 0.12 mm (0.004 in)
Ring end gap Top 0.15-0.30 mm (0.006-0.011 in) 0.60 mm (0.023 in)
Second (RIKEN) 0 .30-0.42 mm (0.012-0.016 in) 0.65 mm (0.025 in)
Second 0.35-0.50 mm (0.014-0.019 in) 0.65 mm (0.025 in)
(NIPPON)
Oil 0.20-0.70 mm (0.008-0.027 in) 0.80 mm (0.031 in)
Piston pin O.D. 17.996-18.000 mm (0.70850-0.70866 _
in)
Pin-to-piston clearance 0.010-0.017 mm (0.00039-0.00067
in)
Connecting rod Pin-to-rod clearance -0.036 0.019 mm (-0.00142
0.00075 in)
Small end bore diameter 17.964-17.977 mm (0.70724-0.70775
in)
Big end bore diameter 43.0 mm (1.693 in)
End play 0.15-0.35 mm (0.006-0.013 in) 0.40 mm (0.015 in)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter 49.976-50.000 mm (1.96756-1.96850
in)
Rod journal diameter 39.976-40.000 mm (1.57386-1.57480 ._
in)
Rod/main journal taper 0.005 mm (0.00020 in) max. 0.010 mm (0.00039
in)
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.005 mm (0.00020 in) max. 0.010 mm (0.00039
in)
End play 0.10-0.35 mm (0.0039-0.0138 in) 0.45 mm (0.0177 in)
Total runout 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) max. 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
Crankshaft Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance 0.016-0.034 mm (0.00063-0.00134 0.050 mm (0.00197
bearing in) in)
Connecting rod bearing-to-journal oil 0.020-0.038 mm (0.00079-0.00150 0.050 mm (0.00197
clearance in) in)
Engine Lubrication
Engine oil Capacity Engine overhaul 4.2 L (4.4 US qt) -
Oil change 3.6 L (3.8 US qt)
including filter
Oil change 3.4 L (3.6 US qt)
w ithout filter
Oil pump Inner rotor-to-outer rotor radial 0.06-0.16 mm (0.003-0.006 in) 0.20 mm (0.007 in)
clearance
Pump housing-to-outer rotor radial 0.100-0.175 mm (0.004-0.006 in) 0.20 mm (0.007 in)
clearance
Pump housing-to-rotor axial clearance 0.02-0.06 mm (0.001 -0.0 0 2 in) 0.15 mm (0.005 in)
Oil pressure with oil temperature at At idle 69 kPa (0.70 kgf/cm2, 10.0 psi) min. -
176 F (80 C) At 3,000 rpm 343 kPa (3.50 kgf/cm2, 49.8 psi) min. -
Cooling System
Radiator Coolant capacities (including engine, Engine overhaul 4.92 L (1.300 US gal) -
heater, hoses, and reservoir) (M/T Coolant change 4.42 L (1.168 US gal) . .
model)
Coolant capacities (including engine, Engine overhaul 4.841(1.279 US gal) -
heater, hoses, and reservoir) (CVT Coolant change 4.351(1.149 US gal)
model)
Coolant type Honda Lomg Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
Coolant Coolant capacity 0.44 L (0.116 US gal)
reservoir
Radiator cap Opening pressure 93.3-122.7 kPa (0.951-1.251 kgf/cm2, ,_
13.53-17.79 psi)
Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open 169176 F (7680 C) -
Fully open 194 F (90 C) -
Valve lift at fully open 8.0 mm (0.315 in) min.
Drive belt Tension Auto-tensioner
Fuel and Emissions

Fuel pressure Pressure w ith fuel pressure gauge 3 2 0 -3 7 0 kPa (S .3-3.8 kgf/cm2, 4 7 -5 4
regulator connected psi)
Fuel tank Capacity 40 L (10.6 US gal) -
Engine idle Idle speed w ithout load M/T in neutral, 750 50 rpm
CVT in N or P
Idle speed with high electrical load - M/T in neutral, 750 50 rpm
CVT in N or P
Clutch
Clutch pedal Height from floor With clutch pedal 203.3 mm (8.004 in)
pad cover
W ithout clutch 201.5 mm (7.933 in)
pedal pad cover
Stroke 1 2 0-130 mm (4.72-5.12 in) -
Play 4 .5 -1 8 .5 mm (0.177-0.728 in) -
Disengagement height from the floor With clutch pedal 117.5 mm (4.626 in)
pad cover
W ithout clutch 115.7 mm (4.555 in)
pedal pad cover
Flywheel Runout on clutch mating surface 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) max. 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
Clutch disc Rivet head depth 1 .2 -1 .7 mm (0.047-0.067 in) 0.4 mm (0.016 in)
Thickness 8.39.0 mm (0.327-0.354 in) 6.5 mm (0.256 in)
Pressure plate Warpage 0.03 mm (0.001 in) max. 0.15 mm (0.005 in)
Evenness of the height of the 0.6 mm (0.024 in) max. 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
diaphragm spring fingers
Manual Transmission and M /T Differential

Manual Capacity, use Honda MTF Fluid change 1.4 L (1.5 US qt)
transmission Overhaul 1.6 L (1.7 US qt)
fluid
specs
Item Measurement Q ualification Standard or New Service Lim it

Mainshaft End play 0.11 -0 .1 8 mm (0.0043-0.0071 in) Adjust
Diameter of bushing contact area 18.800-18.850 mm (0.74016-0.74212 18.750 mm (0.73819
in) in)
Diameter of ball bearing contact area 25.977-25 .9 9 0 mm (1.02271 -1.02323 25.920 mm (1.02047
(clutch housing side) in) in)
Diameter of needle bearing contact 34.984-35.000 mm (1.37732-1.37795 34.930 mm (1.37519
area in) in)
Diameter of ball bearing contact area 24.987-25.000 mm (0.98374-0.98425 24.930 mm (0.98149
(transmission housing side) in) in)
Diameter of 4th/5th gear distance 28.992-29.005 mm (1.14142-1.14193 28.930 mm (1.13897
collar contact area in) in)
Runout 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) max. 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
Mainshaft 3rd I.D.- 39.009-39.025 mm (1.53578-1.53641 38.95 mm (1.5335 in)
gear in)
Clearance 2nd3rd 0.06-0.21 mm (0.003-0.008 in) 0.30 mm (0.011 in)
Thickness 27.02-27.07 mm (1.0638-1.0657 in) 26.95 mm (1.0610 in)
Mainshaft 4th I.D. 39.009-39.025 mm (1.53578-1.53641 38.95 mm (1.5335 in)
gear in)
End play (distance collar side) 0.06-0.19 mm (0.0024-0.0075 in) 0.28 mm (0.0110 in)
Mainshaft 5th I.D. 39.009-39.025 mm (1.53578-1.53641 38.95 mm (1.5335 in)
gear in)
End play (distance collar side) 0 .06-0.14 mm (0.0024-0.0055 in) 0.23 mm (0.0091 in)
Mainshaft 6th I.D. 35.009-35.025 mm (1.378301.37893 35.09 mm (1.3815 in)
gear in)
End play (ball bear i ng side) 0 .06-0.16 mm (0.003-0.006 in) 0.25 mm (0.009 in)
Mainshaft I.D. 29.014-29.024 mm (1.14228-1.14267 29.03 mm (1.1429 in)
4th/5th gear in)
distance collar O.D. 34.989-35.000 mm (1.37752-1.37795 34.940 mm (1.37559
in) in)
Overall length 48.97-49.03 mm (1.9279-1.9303 in) -
Length of needle bearing contact area 4th, 5th 22.53-22.56 mm (0.8870-0.8882 in) - -
Mainshaft 6th I.D. 25.00-25.01 mm (0.9843-0.9846 in) 25.02 mm (0.9850 in)
gear distance O.D. 30.989-31.000 mm (1.22004-1.22047 30.940 mm (1.21811
collar in) in)
Length 24.03-24.08 mm (0.9461 -0.9480 in)
Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact 34.000-34.015 mm (1.33858-1.33917 33.950 mm (1.33661
area (clutch housing side) in) in)
Diameter of ball bearing contact area 26.020-26.033 mm (1.02441-1.02492 25.970 mm (1.02244
(transmission housing side) in) in)
Diameter o f 1st gear distance collar 38.987-39.000 mm (1.53492-1.53543 38.940 mm (1.53307
contact area in) in)
Runout 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) max. 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
32 mm shim-to-bearing inner race 0.04-0.10 mm (0.002-0.003 in) Adjust
clearance
Countershaft 1st, I.D. 48.509-48.525 mm (1.90980-1.91043 48.58 mm (1.9126 in)
2nd gear in)
Clearance 2nd3rd 0.0 6-0 .1 4 mm (0.003-0.005 in) 0.23 mm (0.009 in)
End play 1st 0.06-0.21 mm (0.003-0.008 in) 0.25 mm (0.009 in)
Thickness 1st 27.42-27.47 mm (1.0795-1.0815 in) 27.35 mm (1.0768 in)
2nd 26.42-26.47 mm (1.0402-1.0421 in) 26.35 mm (1.0374 in)
Countershaft 1st I.D. 39.00-39.01 mm (1.5354-1.5358 in) 39.02 mm (1.5362 in)
gear distance O.D. 44.489-44.500 mm (1.75153-1.75196 44.44 mm (1.7496 in)
collar in)
Overall length 30.40 -3 0 .4 4 m m (1.1968 -1.1 9 8 4 i n) __
Length of needle bearing contact area 26.53-26.58 mm (1.0445-1.0465 in)
Countershaft I.D. 39.00-39.01 mm (1.5354-1.5358 in) 39.02 mm (1.5362 in)
2nd gear O.D. 44.489-44.500 mm (1.75153-1.75196 44.44 mm (1.7496 in)
distance collar in)
Length 26.53-26.56 mm (1.0445-1.0457 in) -
Manual Transmission and M /T Differential (cont'd)

Reverse idler I.D. 18.016-18.043 mm (0.70929-0.71035 18.08 mm (0.7118 in)
gear in)
Gear-to-reverse idler gear shaft 0.032-0.077 mm (0.00126-0.00303 0.14 mm (0.0055 in)
clearance in)
Synchro ring Ring-to-gear clearance (ring pushed 0.655-1.334 mm (0.025-0.052 in) 0.4 mm (0.016 in)
againstgear)
Double cone Outer synchro ring-to-synchro cone 0 .70-1.19 mm (0.028-0.046 in) 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
synchro clearance (ring pushed against gear)
Synchro cone-to-gear clearance (ring 0.50-1.04 mm (0.020-0.040 in) 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
pushed against gear)
Outer synchro ring-to-gear clearance 0.95-1.68 mm (0.038-0.066 in) 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
(ring pushed against gear)
Shift fork Finger thickness 1st/2nd 6.76.9 mm (0.264-0.272 in) -
3rd/4th, 5th/6th 7.47.6 mm (0.291 -0 .2 9 9 in) -
Fork-to-synchro sleeve clearance 0.35-0.65 mm (0.014-0.025 in) 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Reverse shift Fingerwidth 14.7-14.9 mm (0.579-0.587 in) -
fork Fork-to-reverse idler gear clearance 0.20.6 mm (0.01 -0 .0 2 in) 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Detent ball Free length 1st/2nd, 3rd/4th, 26.0 mm (1.024 in) When worn or
spring 5th/6th damaged
Steel ball Ball s i ze 7.94 mm (0.3126 in) When worn or
damaged
Shift arm I.D. 14.013-14.058 mm (0.55169-0.55346
in)
Fingerwidth 15.584-15.794 mm (0.61354-0.62181
in)
Shift arm-to-shift piece clearance 0.206-0.616 mm (0.009-0.020 in) 0.7 mm (0.028 in)
Select lever O.D. 13.941-13.968 mm (0.54886-0.54992 t
in)
M/T differential Pinion shaft contact area I.D. 18.010-18.028 mm (0.70905-0.70976
carrier in)
Clearance between carrier and pinion 0.027-0.057 mm (0.00106-0.00224 0.100 mm (0.00394
shaft in) in)
Driveshaft contact area I.D. 28.025-28.045 mm (1.10334-1.10413 _
in)
M/T differential Backlash 0.05-0.15 mm (0.0020-0.0059 in) -
pinion gear I.D. 18.042-18.066 mm (0.71031 -0.71126
in)
Clearance between pinion gear and 0.059-0.095 mm (0.00232-0.00374 0.150 mm (0.00591
pinion shaft in) in)
M/T differential 80 mm shim-to-bearing outer race 0.01 -0 .1 0 mm (0.001 -0 .0 0 3 in) Adjust
80 mm shim clearance in transmission housing
Shift piece I.D. 16.000-16.018 mm (0.62992-0.63063 16.03 mm (0.6311 in)
in)
Shift piece groove width 16.00-16.20 mm (0.6299-0.6378 in) -
Shift piece finger width 15.9-16.0 mm (0.626-0.630 in) -

Shift piece-to-shift fork clearance 0.20-0.50 mm (0.008-0.019 in) 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
Select arm I.D. 13.973-14.000 mm (0.55012-0.55118 14.01 mm (0.5516 in)
in)
Shift piece width at contact area 12.9-13.0 mm (0.508-0.512 in) -
Select arm-to-interlock clearance 0.01 -0 .2 1 mm (0.001 -0 .0 0 8 in) 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
CVT and CVT Differential

Continuously Capacity: use genu i ne Honda CVTF Fluid change 2.8 L (3.0 US qt) -
variable Overhaul 5.2 L (5.5 US qt)
transmission
fluid
specs

Hydraulic Forward clutch pressure A t 1,700 rpm in D1,570-1,840 kPa (16.01-18.76
pressure kgf/cm2, 227.7-266.8 psi)
Reverse brake pressure At 1,700 rpm in R 1,570-1,840 kPa (16.01 -1 8 .7 6
kgf/cm2, 227.7-266.8 psi)
Drive pulley pressure At 1,700 rpm in N 2 4 0 -5 4 0 kPa (2.45-5.51 kgf/cm2, 34.8
-7 8 .4 psi)
Driven pulley pressure At 1,700 rpm in N 830-1,130 kPa (8.46-11.52 kgf/cm2,
120.3-163.8 psi)
Lubrication pressure At 3,000 rpm in N 25 0 -4 0 0 kPa (2.55-4.08 kgf/cm2, 36.3
58.0 psi)
Stall speed Check with vehicle on level ground D position: 2,050 rpm
Standard or new
D position: 1,900-2,200 rpm
Service lim it
R position: 2,500 rpm
Standard or new
R position: 2,4002,600 rpm .
Service lim it
Clutch Clearance between clutch end-plate Forward clutch 0.60.8 mm (0.024-0.031 in) _
and top disc Reverse brake 0 .55-0.70 mm (0.0217-0.0276 in)

Clutch return spring free length Reverse brake 18.1 mm (0.713 in) 16.1 mm (0.634 in)
Clutch disc thickness Reverse brake 2.00 mm (0.0787 in) When worn or
damaged
Clutch plate thickness Reverse brake 1.95 mm (0.0768 in) When discolored
Reverse brake end-plate thickness Mark 2 3.8 mm (0.150 in) When discolored
Mark B 3.9 mm (0.154 in) When discolored
Mark 3 4.0 mm (0.157 in) When discolored
Mark C 4.1 mm (0.161 in) When discolored
Mark D 4.3 mm (0.169 in) When discolored
Mark E 4.5 mm (0.177 in) When discolored
Mark F 4.7 mm (0.185 in) When discolored
CVT and CVT Differential (cont'd)

Input shaft Diameter of needle bearing contact At flywheel side 19.987-20.000 mm (0.78689-0.78740 When worn or
area in) damaged
At forward clutch 19.987-20.000 mm (0.78689-0.78740 When worn or
side in) damaged
Thrust clearance CVTF pump 0.37-0.65 mm (0.015-0.025 in)
drive sprocket
hub
Planetary carrier 0.050-0.115 mm (0.002-0.004 in) -
Feed pipe O.D. Drive pulley feed 6.97-6.98 mm (0.2744-0.2748 in) 6.95 mm (0.2736 in)
pipe
Forward clutch 11.470-11.480 mm (0.45157-0.45197 11.450 mm (0.45079
feed pipe in) in)
Feed pipe bushing I.D. Drive pulley feed 7.000-7.015 mm (0.27559-0.27618 7.030 mm (0.27677
pipe in) in)
Forward clutch 11.500-11.518 mm (0.45276-0.45346 11.533 mm (0.45405
feed pipe in) in)
Sealing ring groove width 2.000-2.100 mm (0.07874-0.08268 2.105 mm (0.08287
in) in)
Thrust shim thickness (25 x 31 mm: A 1.05 mm (0.0413 in) When worn or
planetary carrier) damaged
B 1.12 mm (0.0441 in) When worn or
damaged
C 1.19 mm (0.0469 in) When worn or
damaged
D 1.26 mm (0.0496 in) When worn or
damaged
E 1.33 mm (0.0524 in) When worn or
damaged
F 1.40 mm (0.0551 in) When worn or
damaged
G 1.47 mm (0.0579 in) When worn or
damaged
H 1.54 mm (0.0606 in) When worn or
damaged
I 1.61 mm (0.0634 in) When worn or
damaged
J 1.68 mm (0.0661 in) When worn or
damaged
K 1.75 mm (0.0689 in) When worn or
damaged
L 1.82 mm (0.0717 in) When worn or
damaged
M 1.085 mm (0.04272 in) When worn or
damaged
N 1.155 mm (0.04547 in) When worn or
damaged
0 1.225 mm (0.04823 in) When worn or
damaged
P 1.295 mm (0.05098 in) When worn or
damaged
Q 1.365 mm (0.05374 in) When worn or
damaged
R 1.435 mm (0.05650 in) When worn or
damaged
S 1.505 mm (0.05925 in) When worn or
damaged
T 1.575 mm (0.06201 in) When worn or
damaged
U 1.645 mm (0.06476 in) When worn or
damaged
V 1.715 mm (0.06752 in) When worn or
damaged
W 1.785 mm (0.07028 in) When worn or
damaged
specs

Input shaft Thrust shim thickness (22 x 28 mm: C 1.15 mm (0.0453 in) When worn or
(cont'd) CVTF pump drive sprocket hub) damaged
D 1.40 mm (0.0551 in) When w orn or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
Drive pulley Diameter of needle bearing contact At flywheel side 24.007-24.020 mm (0.94516-0.94567 When worn or
shaft area in) damaged
At forward clutch 24.00724.020 mm (0.94516-0.94567 When worn or
side in) damaged
I.D, At seali ng ring 24.007-24.020 mm (0.94516-0.94567 When worn or
in) damaged
Driven pulley Diameter of needle bearing contact At start clutch 43.981-43.991 mm (1.73153-1.73193 When worn or
shaft area side in) damaged
Thrust clearance At start clutch 0 -0 .1 3 mm (0.00-0.005 in)
side
Cotter thickness (25.5 mm: start clutch A 2.90 mm (0.1142 in) When worn or
hub) damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
Feed pipe O.D. Canceler 6.97-6.98 mm (0.2744-0.2748 in) 6.95 mm (0.2736 in)
pressure
Clutch pressure 8.97-8.98 mm (0.3531 -0.3535 in) 8.95 mm (0.3524 in)
Feed pipe bushing I.D. Canceler 7.000-7.015 mm (0.27559-0.27618 7.030 mm (0.27677
pressure in) in)
Clutch pressure 9.000-9.015 mm (0.35433-0.35492 9.030 mm (0.35551
in) in)
Driven pulley shaft pressure feed pipe O.D. 11.470-11.480 mm (0.45157-0.45197 11.450 mm (0.45079
in) in)
Bushing I.D. 11.500-11.518 mm (0.45276-0.45346 11.533 mm (0.45405
in) in)
Secondary drive gear sealing ring 2.500-2.650 mm (0.09843-0.10433 2.655 mm (0.10453
groove width in) in)
Park gear and When worn or
pawl damaged
CVT and CVT Differential (cont'd)

Item Measurement Q ualification Standard or New Service Lim it
Final drive shaft Secondary drive gear thrust clearance 0 -0 .1 5 mm (0.00-0.0059 in) -
Thrust shim thickness (25 x 35 mm) A 2.80 mm (0.1102 in) When worn or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
I 3.60 mm (0.1417 in) When worn or
damaged
J 3.70 mm (0.1457 in) When worn or
damaged
K 3.80 mm (0.1496 in) When worn or
damaged
L 3.90 mm (0.1535 in) When worn or
damaged
M 4.00 mm (0.1575 in) When worn or
damaged
CVT differential Pinion shaft contact area I.D. 18.010-18.028 mm (0.70905-0.70976
carrier in)
Clearance between carrier and pinion 0.023-0.057 mm (0.00091-0.00224 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
shaft in)
Driveshaft/intermediate shaft contact 26.025-26.045 mm (1.02460-1.02539 __
area I.D. in)
Clearance between carrier and 0.045-0.086 mm (0.00177-0.00339 0.12 mm (0.0047 in)
driveshaft/intermediate shaft in)
Clearance between set ring and carrier 0 -0 .1 5 mm (0.00-0.005 in) Adjust
bearing outer race
CVT differential Backlash 0.05-0.15 mm (0.0020-0.0059 in)
pinion gear
Steering
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Lim it
Steering wheel Rotational play measured at outside 010 mm (0.000.39 in)
edge
Initial turning load measured at 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf)
outside edge with engine running
Suspension
!
Wheel alignment Camber Front

o
o
o
Rear 1 30 1
Caster Front 3 22 ' 1 0
Total toe-in Front 0 3 mm (00.12 in)
Rear 3+2_3 mm (0.12+008_o,12 in)
Front wheel turning angle Inward 38 0 08 ' 2
Outward 31 46 ' 1
(reference)
Wheel Runout Axial 0 -0 .7 mm (0.00-0.028 in) 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Radial 0 -0 .7 mm (0.00-0.028 in) 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
Wheel bearing End play Front 0 -0 .0 5 mm (0.00-0.0020 in) -
Rear 0 -0 .0 5 mm (0.00-0.0020 in) -
specs
Brakes
Parking brake Number of clicks when lever pulled 6 to 8
with 196 N (20.0 kgf, 44.1 Ibf) of force
Brake pedal Height from floor (M/T) W ith clutch pedal 170 mm (6.69 in)
pad cover
W ithout clutch 168 mm (6.61 in)
pedal pad cover
Height from floor (CVT) W ith clutch pedal 196 mm (7.72 in)
pad cover
W ithout clutch 194 mm (7.64 in)
pedal pad cover
Free play 1.07.2 mm (0.039-0,283 i n) -
Brake disc Thickness Front 21.0 mm (0.827 in) 19.0 mm (0.748 in)
Rear 9.0 mm (0.354 in) 8.0 mm (0.315 in)
Runout _ 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
Parallelism 0.015 mm (0.00059
in)
Brake pad Thickness Front 10.0 mm (0.394 in) 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
Rear 9.0 mm (0.354 in) 1.6 mm (0,063 in)
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R~134a)
Capacity o f system 4 5 0 -5 0 0 g (15.87-17.64 oz) I -
Refrigerant oil Type SP-10 (P/N 38897-P13-A01AH)
Capacity of components Condenser 25 mL (5/6 fl-oz)
Evaporator 35 mL (1 1/6 fl-oz)
Each line and 10 m l (1/3 fl-oz)
hose
Dryer desiccant 10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
Compressor 8 0 -9 0 mL (2 2 /3 -3 fl-oz)
Compressor ('11 Field coil resistance A t 20 C (68 F) 3 .35-3.45 0
model) Pulley-to-pressure plate clearance 0 .35-0.65 mm (0.014-0.025 in) || _
Compressor ('12 Field coil resistance A t 20 C (68 F) 3 .35-3.65 0
model) Pulley-to-pressure plate clearance 0.35-0.65 mm (0.014-0.025 in) | -
Torque Summary
Torque Specifications
NOTE
Refer to the S/M section for the precautions and complete procedures.
Refer to the S/M section for the bo Its/nuts not indicated here.
*1: Parts to be tightened in a parti cular order.
*2: Follow the S/M procedures closely for torque, sequence, and special steps.
Engine Electrical
Location Item Remark Torque
Starting system Starter bolts 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 32 Ibf-ft)
Positive starter cable nut 9.0 N*m (0.92 kgf-m, 6.6 Ibf-ft)
Ignition system Spark plugs 18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft)
Engine Mechanical
Engine assembly Side engine mount bracket bolt Use new bolt 69 N-m (7.0 kgf-m, 51 Ibf-ft)
Side engine mount bracket nuts Use new nuts 93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)
Side engine mount bolts Use new bolts 59 N-m (6.0 kgf-m, 44 Ibf-ft)
Transmission mount bolts Use new bolts 59 N-m (6.0 kgf-m, 44 Ibf-ft)
M/T model: Transmission mount bracket bolt Use new bolt 54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibf-ft)
M/T model: Transmission mount bracket nuts Use new nuts 74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibf-ft)
CVT model: Transmission m ount bracket bolt (10 Use new bolt 54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibf-ft)
mm)
CVT model: Transmission m ount bracket bolt (12 Use new bolt 74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 ibf-ft)
mm)
CVT model: Transmission mount bracket nuts Use new nuts 74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibf-ft)
Torque rod bolt Use new bolt 83 N-m (8.5 kgf-m, 61 Ibf-ft)
Torque rod nut Use new nut 93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)
M/T model: Torque rod bracket bolt (14 mm) Use new bolt 83 N-m (8.5 kgf-m, 61 ibf-ft)
M/T model: Torque rod bracket bolts (12 mm) 83 N-m (8.5 kgf*m, 61 Ibf-ft)
CVT model: Torque rod bracket bolts 83 N-m (8.5 kgf-m, 61 Ibf-ft)
Engine lubrication Oil filter 12 N-m (1.2 kgf*m, 9 ibf-ft)
Oil f i lter feed pipe Use oil on threads 39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft)
Oil pan drain bolt Use new washer 39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft)
Oil pressure switch Use liquid gasket 18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft)
on threads
Intake air system and Intake manifold chamber bolts (8 mm) Qty 5 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
exhaust system Intake manifold bolts (8 mm) Qty 5 24 N-m (2.4 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft)
Intake manifold nuts 24 N-m (2.4 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft)
Intake manifold bracket A bolt 24 N-m (2.4 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft)
Intake manifold bracket B bolts 24 N-m (2.4 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft)
Exhaust pipe self-locking nuts Use new nuts 33 N-m (3.4 kgf-m, 25 Ibf-ft)
M uffler bo Its* 1 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
specs
Engine Cooling
Location item Remark Torque
Cooling system Engine block drain bolt Use new washer 78 N-m (8.0 kgf-m, 58 Ibf-ft)
Drive belt auto-tensioner bolts 24 N-m (2.4 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft)
Tensioner pulley bolt 40 N-m (4.1 kgf-m, 30 Ibf-ft)
Fuel Emissions
Fuel and emissions A/Fsensor 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 Ibf-ft)
EGR pipe bolts 24 N-m (2.4 kgf-m, 17.7 Ibf-ft)
EGR pipe nuts 24 N-m (2.4 kgf-m, 17.7 Ibf-ft)
EGR valve nuts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.2 Ibf-ft)
EVAP canister bracket bolts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.2 Ibf-ft)
EVAP canister bracket nuts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.2 Ibf-ft)
Fuel tank locknut*2 125 N-m (12.7 kgf-m, 92.2 Ibf-ft)
Fuel tank support straps bolts 38 N-m (3.9 kgf-m^ 28 Ibf-ft)
Knock sensor 32 N-m (3.3 kgf-m, 23.6 Ibf-ft)
Trailing arm braces bolts 38 N-m (3.9 kgf-m, 28 Ibf-ft)
Trailing arm braces nuts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.2 Ibf-ft)
Rocker arm oil control valve bolts 11 N-m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.1 Ibf-ft)
Rocker arm oil pressure switch 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.2 Ibf-ft)
Secondary H02S 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 Ibf-ft)
Throttle body bolts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.2 Ibf-ft)
Under floor three way converter cover Use new nuts 33 N-m (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 Ibf-ft)
self-locking nuts
Warm up TWC bracket bolt 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 Ibf-ft)
Warm up TWC lower bolts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.2 Ibf-ft)
Warm up TWC upper bolts 31 N-m (3.2 kgf-m, 22.9 Ibf-ft)
Warm up TWC upper nuts 31 N-m (3.2 kgf-m, 22.9 Ibf-ft)
Clutch
Clutch Clutch pedal nut 13 N-m (1.3 kgf-m, 10 Ibf-ft)
Clutch pedal position switch locknuts 9.4 N-m (0.96 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
Master cylinder nuts 13 N-m (1.3 kgf-m, 10 Ibf-ft)
Master cylinder push rod nut 17 N-m (1.7 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft)
Clutch line flare nuts 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft)
Slave cylinder bolts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Flywheel bolts*2 Use oil on the 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 32 Ibf-ft)
seating surface
Pressure plate bolts* 1 25 N-m (2.5 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft)
Release fork bolt 29 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 21 Ibf-ft)
Torque Summary
NOTE
9 Refer to the S/M section for the precautions and complete procedures.
6 Refer to the S/M section for the bolts/nuts not indicated here.
*1: Parts to be tightened in a particular order.
*2: Follow the S/M proceduers closely for torque, sequence, and special steps.
Manual Transmission and M /T Differential

Manual transmission MTF drain plug Use new sealing 39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft)
washer
MTF fille r plug Use new sealing 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 32 Ibf-ft)
washer
Back-up light switch Use new washer 29 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 21 Ibf-ft)
Back-up light switch harness bracket bolt 27 N-m (2.8 kgf-m, 20 Ibf-ft)
Neutral position switch Use liquid gasket 29 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 21 Ibf-ft)
on threads
Transmission housing bolts 64 N-m (6.5 kgf-m, 47 Ibf-ft)
Transmission m ount bracket base bolts 74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 55 Ibf-ft)
Transmission hanger bolts 27 N-m (2.8 kgf-m, 20 Ibf-ft)
Shift cable bracket bolts 27 N-m (2.8 kgf-m, 20 Ibf-ft)
Shift lever housing bolts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Shift lever boot ring 7.4 N-m (0.75 kgf-m, 5.5 Ibf-ft)
CVT
CVT CVTF drain plug Use new sealing 49 N-m (5.0 kgf-m, 36 Ibf-ft)
washer
Shift cable holder bolts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Transmission housing mounting bolts 64 N-m (6.5 kgf-m, 47 Ibf-ft)
Drive plate bolts*2 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 32 Ibf-ft)
Shift lever assembly bolts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Shift cable end nut 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Driveline/Axle
Driveline/axle Driveshaft spindle nut Use oil on the 181 N-m (18.5 kgf-m, 133 Ibf-ft)
seating surface
Use new nut
Intermediate shaft dowel bolts 39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft)
Intermediate shaft flange bolt 39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft)
Heat shield bolts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
specs
Steering
Steering Steering wheel bolt 39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 ibf-ft)
Steering joint bolt 28 N-m (2.9 kgf-m, 21 Ibf-ft)
Steering column bolts*1 22 N*m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Steering column nuts*1 13 N-m (1.3 kgf-m, 10 Ibf-ft)
Steering gearbox bolts* 1 Use new bolts 60 N-m (6.1 kgf-m, 44 Ibf-ft)
Steering gearbox stiffener plate bolts* 1 Use new bolts 59 N-m (6.0 kgf-m, 44 Ibf-ft)
Tie-rod end ball jo in t nut 54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibf-ft)
Tie-rod end locking nut 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 32 Ibf-ft)
Suspension
Front suspension Wheel nuts 108 N-m (11.0 kgf-m, 80 Ibf-ft)
Knuckle damper pinch bolts/nuts Use new bolts/nuts 90 N-m (9.2 kgf-m, 66 Ibf-ft)
Lower arm ball jo in t castle nut Use new nut 6 4 -7 4 N-m (6 .5 -7 .5 kgf-m, 4 7 -5 5
Ibf-ft)
Lower arm bolts Use new bolts 93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)
Stabilizer bar bushing holders flange bolts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Stabilizer link flange nut (to damper) Use new nut 30 N-m (3.1 kgf-m, 22 Ibf-ft)
Stabilizer link self-locking nut (to stabilizer bar) Use new nut 38 N-m (3.9 kgf-m, 28 Ibf-ft)
Damper upper nut 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 32 Ibf-ft)
Rear suspension Wheel nuts 108 N-m (11.0 kgf-m, 80 Ibf-ft)
Axle beam bolts Use new bolts 93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)
Dynamic damper nuts Use new nuts 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 9 Ibf-ft)
Damper lower flange bolt Use new bolt , 54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibf-ft)
Damper upper self-locking nut Use new nut 30 N-m (3.1 kgf-m, 22 Ibf-ft)
Brakes
Conventional brake Front brake caliper bolts 23 N-m (2.3 kgf-m, 17 Ibf-ft)
Front brake caliper bracket bolts 108 N-m (11.0 kgf-m, 80 Ibf-ft)
Front brake hose banjo bolt Use new washers 35 N-m (3.6 kgf-m, 26 Ibf-ft)
Rear brake caliper bolts 23 N-m (2.3 kgf-m, 17 Ibf-ft)
Rear brake caliper bracket bolts 55 N-m (5.6 kgf-m, 41 Ibf-ft)
Rear brake hose banjo bolt Use new washers 35 N-m (3.6 kgf-m, 26 Ibf-ft)
Master cylinder nuts 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft)
Master cylinder brake line 22 N-m (2.2 kgf*m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Brake booster/brake pedal nuts 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 9 Ibf-ft)
Brake pedal bolt 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Parking brake lever bolts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf*m, 16 Ibf-ft)
VSA VSA m odulator-control unit brake line (10 mm) 15 N-m (1.5 kgf*m, 11 Ibf-ft)
VSA m odulator-control unit brake line (12 mm) 22 N*m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
2-15
Torque Summary
NOTE
Refer to the S/M section for the precautions and complete procedures.
Refer to the S/M section for the bolts/nuts not indicated here.
*1: Parts to be tightened in a particular order.
*2: Follow the S/M proceduers closely for torque, sequence, and special steps.
Body
Frame Front subframe bolts Use new bolts 93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)
Rear trailing arm brace bolts 38 N-m (3.9 kgf-m, 28 Ibf-ft)
Rear trailing arm brace nuts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Exterior trim Under-cowl panel bolts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Bumpers Front bumper absorber bolts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning

A/C compressor A/C compressor bolts 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
A/C compressor center nut Use new nut 26 N-m (2.7 kgf-m, 19 Ibf-ft)
A/C compressor relief valve Use new O-ring 9.8 N-m (1.00 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
Receiver line A/C pressure sensor Use new O-ring 11 N-m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.1 Ibf-ft)
Body Electrical
Wipers/washers Windshield wiper arm nut 18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft)
Windshield wiper linkage nut 18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft)
Rear w indow wiper m otor m ount nut 8.4 N-m (0.86 kgf-m, 6.1 Ibf-ft)
Design Specifications
specs
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
DIMENSION Overall length 4,079 mm (160.6 in)
Overall width 1,740 mm (68.5 in)
Overall height 1,394 mm (54.9 in)
Wheelbase 2,435 mm (95.9 i n)
Track Front 1,515 mm (59.6 in)
Rear 1,500 mm (59.1 in)
Seating capacity Two (2)
WEIGHT Gross Vehicle W eight Rating 1,435 kg (3,164 lbs)
(GVWR)
ENGINE Type Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC i-VTEC gasoline engine
Cylinder arrangement Inline 4-cylinder, transverse
Bore and stroke 73 x 89 mm (2.87 x 3.50 in)
Displacement 1,497 cm3 (91 cu in)
Compression ratio 10.4
Valve train Chain drive, SOHC i-VTEC 4 valves per cylinder
Lubrication system Forced, wet sump, w ith trochoid pump
Fuel required Regular UNLEADED gasoline with 87 Pump Octane
Number or higher
STARTER Type Gear reduction
Nominal output 1.0 kW
Nominal voltage 12V
Hour rating 30 seconds
Rotation direction Counterclockwise as viewed from drive end
IMA MOTOR Type DC brushless-3 phases
BATTERY MODULE Type 7.2 V Ni-MH
Number 14
Output 100 V
CLUTCH Type Single plate dry, diaphragm spring
MANUAL Type Synchronized six-speed forward, one reverse
TRANSMISSION Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio 1st 3.142
2nd 1.870
3rd 1.303
4th 1.054
5th 0.853
6th 0.689
Reverse 3.307
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 4.111
CVT Type Electronically-controlled continuously variable
transmission, multi plates wet sump, hydraulic
Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio LowHigh 2.526-0.421
Reverse 4.510-1.725
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 5.274
STEERING Type Electrical power-assisted rack and pinion
Overall ratio 12.75
Turns, lock-to-lock 2.48
Steering wheel diameter 360 mm (14.17 in)
SUSPENSION Type Front Macpherson strut with stabilizer, coil spring
Rear Torsion beam, coil spring
Shock absorber Front and rear Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
TIRES Size See tire information label attached to the doorjamb
WHEEL Camber Front 0 00'
ALIGNMENT Rear -1 3 0 '
Caster Front 3 22'
Total toe-in Front 0 mm (0 in)
Rear 3 mm (0.12 in)
Front wheel turning angle Inward 38 08'
Outward (reference) 31 46'
Design Specifications
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
BRAKES Type of service brake Front Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Type o f parking brake Mechanical actuating, rear wheels
AIR CONDITIONING Compressor Type Scroll
Capacity 77.1 mL (4.7 cu in)/rev.
Maximum speed 10,000 rpm
Lubricant capacity 80 mL (2 2/3 fl-oz)
Lubricant type SP-10
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin
Blower Type Radial
M otor type 220W/12 V
Speed control infinitely variable
M aximum capacity 400 m3 (14,126 cu ft)/h
Temperature control Air-m ix type
Compressor clutch Type Dry, single plate, Poly V-belt drive
Electrical power 42 W maximum at 12 V
consumption at 68 F
(20 C)
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R~134a)
Capacity 4 5 0 -5 0 0 g (15.8-17.6 oz)
ELECTRICAL Battery 12 V - 3 4 Ah/5 HR (12 V - 4 0 Ah/20 HR)
RATINGS 12 V -3 2 Ah/5 HR (12 V - 4 0 Ah/20 HR)
Fuses Battery term inal fuse box 100 A, 70 A, 20 A
Under-dash fuse/relay 50 A, 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
box
Light bulbs Headlight high beam 12 V 60 W
Headlight low beam 12 V 55 W
Headlight low beam (HID) 12 V 35 W
Fog light 12 V 55 W
Front turn signal lights 12 V - 2 8 W
Front side marker lights 12 V 8 W
Side turn signal lights LED
Rear turn signal lights 12 V -2 1 W
Rear side marker l i ghts 3CP
Brake/taillights LED
High mount brake light LED
Back-up lights 12 V - 1 6 W
License plate lights 12 V 5 W
Individual map lights 12 V 8 W
Cargo area light 12 V 5 W
Console box lights LED
Footwell lights LED
Door courtesy lights 12 V 3.8 W
Vanity m irror lights 12 V 1.8 W
Am bient light LED
Rear tray lights 12 V 3.4 W
Glove box light 12 V - 1 .4 W
Gauge lights LED
Indicator lights LED
specs
Body Specifications
1,394 mm (54.9 in)

Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids
Maintenance Minder
General Information
Maintenance Main Items
Maintenance Sub Items
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids
Application Lubricant or Fluid

Engine Honda Motor Oil: 0W-20
Look for the API certification seal on the oil container.
Make sure it says "Tor Gasoline Engines/'
SAE viscosity: See chart.
Manual transmission Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF):
Always use Honda MTF. Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting
because it does not contain the proper additives.
CVT Honda CVTF:
Always use Honda CVTF. Using a non-Honda CVTF can affect
shift quality.
Brake system (including VSA lines) Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid:
Clutch system (Manual transmission) Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake
fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system.
Cooling system Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
API CERTIFICATION SEAL Recom m ended Engine O il

For the details of the lubrication points and the type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and the
various work procedures (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each
section.
Application Lubricant or Fluid

A Brake pedal pin Multipurpose grease
B Clutch pedal pin (manual transmission)
C Slave cylinder push rod (manual
transmission)
D Battery terminals
E Fuel fill door (lock rod sliding area)
F Hatch hinges
G Hood hinges and hood latch
H Caliper piston boots, caliper piston seals, Honda silicone grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M
caliper pins, and caliper pin boots
1 Shift cable ends (manual transmission)
J Air conditioning compressor Compressor oil: SP-10 (P/N 38897-P13-A01AH ) for refrigerant
HFC-134a (R-134a)
NOTE;
Lubricate the following areas using the recommended lubricants and fluids.
In corrosive areas, more frequent lubrication is necessary.
General Information
Maintenance Minder
The Maintenance Minder is an important feature of the multi-information display. Based on engine and transmission
operating conditions, and accumulated engine revolutions, the CR-Z's onboard computer (ECM/PCM) calculates the
remaining engine oil and transmission fluid life. The system also displays the remaining engine oil life along with the
code(s) for other scheduled maintenance items needing service.
Meter;
Steering Wheel:
SEL/RESET BUTTON
Service Information 3. When the ignition switch is ON (II) and the remaining
engine oil life is 5 % to 1 %, the Maintenance Minder
1. The remaining engine oil life (A) is shown as a message "SERVICE DUE NOW" is displayed along
percentage on the multi-information display. To see with the same maintenance item eode(s). If the
the current engine oil life, turn the ignition switch to Maintenance Minder message display is canceled, a
ON (II), then push and release the SEL/RESET button "SERVICE" message appears.
repeatedly until the engine oil life displays.
SERVICE
lllllfe ;. H
DUE NOW
75 f
OIL LIFE A23
80%
X
4. When the ignition switch is ON (II) and the remaining
2. When the ignition switch is ON (II) and the remaining engine oil life is 0 %, the Maintenance Minder
engine oil life is 15 % to 6 %, the remaining engine oil message "SERVICE PAST DUE" is displayed along
life and other scheduled maintenance item(s) needing with the same maintenance item code(s).
service are displayed.
The Maintenance Minder message "SERVICE DUE
SOON" (A)'also comes on. To cancel the message,
press the INFO button. The display continues to show
the remaining engine oil life (B) and the message
indicator (C) until it is reset.
Complete list of maintenance main items (D) (see
page 3-7).
Complete list of maintenance sub items (E) (see 5. If the indicated maintenance is not done, the
page 3-8). "SERVICE, PAST DUE" message shows a total -
distance traveled, for example "10 miles," on the
display. If the total distance traveled is between 0 and
A 9, the message is displayed for only a few seconds
when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II). The total
distance traveled (A) remains displayed after the
vehicle is driven more than 10 miles (or 10 km) after
D E 0 % oil life is reached, and the display cannot be
canceled. This means the indicated maintenance
item(s) should have been done more than 10 miles (or
10 km) ago.
75 f A23
OIL LIFE
15% 0 10 miles A
SERVICE
PAST DUE
^ A23
(contd)
General Information (cont'd)
Resetting the Maintenance Minder Resetting Individual Maintenance Items

NOTE: 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
The vehicle must be stopped to reset the Maintenance data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
Minder.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
If a required service is done and the Maintenance
Minder is not reset, or if the Maintenance Minder is 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
reset without doing the service, the system will not and the engine control module/powertrain control
show the proper maintenance timing. This can lead to module (ECM/PCM). If it doesn't communicate,
serious mechanical problems because there will be no troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -383).
accurate record of when the required maintenance is 4. Select GAUGES in the BODY ELECTRICAL with the
needed. HDS.
The engine oil life and maintenance item(s) can be
independently reset with the HDS. 5. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Select MAINTENANCE MINDER in the ADJUSTMENT
with the HDS.
2. If system message(s) are displayed, press the INFO
button to cancel the display. 7. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the
HDS.
3. Push the SEL/RESET button repeatedly until the
engine oil life indicator is displayed. 8. Select the individual maintenance item you wish to
reset with the HDS.
4. Press and hold the SEL/RESET button for about
10 seconds, the "OIL LIFE RESET" mode display
appears.
N O TE;
If you are resetting the Maintenance Minder when
the engine oil life is more than 15 %, make sure any
maintenance item(s) requiring service are done
before resetting the display.
To cancel the "OIL LIFE RESET" mode, press the
INFO button repeatedly until the "CANCEL"
indicator is displayed, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
OIL LIFE RESET

SEL.+* J iJ ..
0 A i CANCEL
SERVICE A23
OIL LIFE
20 %
5. Press INFO button repeatedly until the "RESET"

indicator is displayed, then press the SEL/RESET
button. The maintenance item code(s) will disappear,
and the engine oil life will reset to "100%."
3-6
Maintenance Main Items
If the message "SERVICE DUE NOW" does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine
oil every year.
NOTE:
Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-information display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1,2, or 3 if they are noisy. _____________________
Symbol Maintenance Main Items
A Replace engine oil (see page 8-10)

-Engine oil capacity without oil filter: 3.4 L (3.6 US qt)
B Replace engine oil and oil filter (see page 8-11)

- Engine oil capacity with oil filter: 3.6 L (3.8 US qt)
Check front and rear brakes (see page 19-3)

Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mounting bolts.
Check parking brake adjustment (see page 19-8)

-Check the number of clicks (5 to 7) when parking brake lever is pulled with 196 N (20.0 kgf, 44.1
Ibf) of force.
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and gearbox boots (see page 17-5)
Check steering linkage.
Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
Inspect suspension components (see page 18-3)

Check bolts for tightness.
Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
Inspect driveshaft boots (see page 16-4)

- Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness.
Inspect brake hoses and lines including VSA lines (see page 19-36)
- Check master cylinder and VSA modulator-control unit for damage or leakage.
Inspect all fluid levels, and condition of fluids

Engine coolant (see page 10-8)
Manual transmission fluid (see page 13-41)
CVT fluid (see page 14-153)
Brake fluid (see page 19-10)
Windshield washer fluid
Inspect exhaust system* (see page 9-17)

- Check catalytic converter heat shields, exhaust pipes, and muffler for damage, leaks, and
tightness.
Inspect fuel lines* (see page 11-291), and connections* (see page 11 -293)
- Check for loose connections, cracks, and deterioration; retighten loose connections and
replace damaged parts.
NOTE: According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk (*) will
not void the customer's emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at
the recommended interval, to ensure long-term reliability.
3-7
Maintenance Sub Items
Number Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires, and check tire inflation and condition

1
- Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual.
Replace air cleaner element (see page 9-3)

- If the vehicle is driven primarily in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter (see page 21-99)

If the vehicle is driven mostly in areas that have high concentrations of dust, pollen, or soot in
2 the air, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace filter whenever airflow from the heating and air conditioning system is less than
normal.
Inspect drive belt (see page 10-17)

- Look for cracks and damage, and inspect auto-tensioner; no adjustment is needed.
Replace manual transmission fluid (MTF) (see page 13-41)

- Manual transmission fluid capacity: 1.4 L (1.5 US qt); use Honda MTF
A
3
Replace CVT fluid (CVTF) (see page 14-154)
- CVT flu id capacity: 2.8 L (3.0 US qt); use Honda CVTF
Replace spark plugs (see page 4-21)

- Use DIFR6A13G (NGK) or DK20PR-D13 (DENSO).
4
Inspect the valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-8)
Intake: 0.150.19 mm (0.0060.007 in)
Exhaust: 0.260.30 mm (0.011 0.011 in)
Replace engine coolant (see page 10-8)

Use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coo Ia nt Type 2.
5 Capacity (including engine, heater, hoses , and reservoir)
- M/T model: 4.42 L (1.168 US gal)
-CVTm odel: 4.35 L (1,149 US gal) .
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If engine electrical maintenance is required)
tensioners.
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) SYSTEM (If engine electrical maintenance is required)
Engine Electrical
Starting System
Component Location In dex....................................... .4-2
Symptom Troubleshooting Index................................. 4-3
Circuit D iagram .................................................................. 4-4
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting.......................4-5
Clutch Pedal Position Switch A T est.............................. 4-8
Starter Performance Test................................................. 4-9
Starter Removal and Installation........................ ........... 4-10
Starter Overhaul......................................... .......................4-12
Ignition System
Component Location Index............................................. 4-19
Ignition Timing Inspection.......... . . .......................... .....4 -2 0
Ignition Coil and Spark Plug Removal/Installation. ...4-21
Spark Plug Inspection............................ ...................... ..4-21
Cruise Control
Component Location In d e x ............................................4-23
Symptom Troubleshooting Index. ........................... . 4-24
Circuit D iagram .............................. ................................... 4-26
Cruise Control Input Test................................................ 4-27
* Cruise Control Combination Switch
Test/Replacement.......................................................... 4-29
Clutch Pedal Position Switch B Test.............................. 4-29
Starting System
Component Location Index
UNDER-DASH STARTER CUT RELAY

FUSE/RELAY BOX Test, page 22-92
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH A

(M/T model)
Test, page 4-8
Adjustm ent, page 13-6
Replacement, page 13-9
. TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(CVT m odel)
Test, page 14-199
.EC M /PC M
/ General
Troubleshooting
Inforrrtation, page 11-3
BATTERY
Test, page 22-85
STARTER
C ircuit Diagram , page 4-4
S tarter System C ircuit
T roubleshooting, page 4-5
Perform ance Test, page 4-9
Removal and Installation, page 4-10
O verhaul, page 4-12
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

Engine does not crank 1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections. Poor ground at G101
2. Test the 12 volt battery for a low state of charge (see (CVT model), G403
page 22-85). (M/T model)
3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). Seized engine
4. Check the starter (see page 4-9).
5. Check the starter cut relay (see page 22-92).
6. Check the starter system circuit troubleshooting (see
page 4-5).
7. Check the transmission range switch (CVT model) (see
page 14-199).
8. Check the clutch pedal position switch A (M/T model)
(see page 4-8).
9. Check the ignition switch or related circuits (see page
22-100).
Engine cranks, but does 1 Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 -3). Fuel level in tank
not start 2. Check for IMMOBI status and function (see page Weak or fouled spark
22-193). plugs
3. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-290).
4. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-291).
5. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-304).
6. Check the throttle body (see page 11-246).
7. Check for low engine compression (see page 6-6).
8. Check the camshaft timing (see page 6-12).
9. Do the ECM/PCM reset in the PGM-FI INSPECTION
menu to cancel ALL INJECTORS STOP with the HDS.
Engine is hard to start 1 Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). Weak or fouled spark
2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-290). plugs
3. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-291).
4. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-304).
Engine cranks slowly 1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections.
2. Test the 12 volt battery for a low state of charge (see
page 22-85).
3. Check the starter for binding (see page 4-12).
4. Check for excessive drag in the engine.
5. Check for excessive drag in the transmission.
Starting System
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL
(M/T model) (CVT model)

Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting
Special Tools Required 6. Select ALL INJECTORS STOP in the PGM-FI

Alternator, Regulator, Battery, and Starter Tester INSPECTION menu with the HDS.
OTC3131* 7. Select STARTER TEST in the PGM-FI INSPECTION
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment menu with the HDS.
Program 888-424-6857
8. Set the parking brake, then with the clutch pedal
pressed (M/T model) or the shift lever in P or N (CVT
NOTE;
model), turn the ignition switch to START (III).
Air temperature must be within 59100 F (1538 C)
during this procedure. Does the starter crank the engine normally?
After this inspection, you must reset PGM-FI YES-The starting system is OK. Go to step 17.
ECM/PCM in the PGM-FI INSPECTION menu with the
HDS to cancel ALL INJECTORS and STARTER TEST NO-Go to step 9.
functions.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
The 12 V battery must be in good condition and fully
charged. 10. Check the electrical connections at the battery, the
negative battery cable to the body, the engine ground
1. Connect the alternator, regulator, battery, and starter cables, and the starter for looseness and corrosion.
tester (OTC3131) to the battery as shown. Then try cranking the engine again.
NOTE: The probe is not used for battery testing. Does the starter crank the engine normally?
YES-Repairing the loose connection corrected the
OTC3131
problem. The starting system is OK. Go to step 17.
NO-Based on the following symptoms, take the
appropriate action:
If the starter does not crank the engine at all, go to
step 11.
If the starter cranks the engine erratically or too
slowly, go to step 14.
If the starter does not disengage from the flywheel
ring gear (M/T model) or the torque converter ring
gear (CVT model) when you release the key, replace
the starter (see page 4-10), or remove and
disassemble it (see page 4-12), and check for the
following:
- Starter solenoid and switch malfunction
- Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch
2. Do the BATTERY TEST. - Damaged flywheel ring gear (M/T model)
Does the display indicate GOOD or LOW CHARGE? - Damaged torque converter ring gear (CVT model)
YES-The battery is OK. Charge the battery if

necessary, then go to step 3.
NO-lf the display indicates BAD BATTERY, replace
the battery, then retest. If the display indicates
CHARGE & RETEST, charge the battery, then retest.
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11 -3).
5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and the ECM/PCM, If it does not communicate,
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-383).
(cont'd)
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Remove the intake air tube (A) and the resonator 12. Make sure the shift lever is in neutral (M/T model) or
chamber joint (B). P or N (CVT model), and set the parking brake, then
disconnect the S terminal connector (A) from the
starter S terminal. Connect a jumper wire from the
battery positive terminal to the S terminal.
M /T model
Does the starter crank the engine?
YES-Go to step 13.

NO-Remove the starter (see page 4-10), or remove
and disassemble it (see page 4-12) as necessary.
4-6
13. Check the follow ing items in the order listed until you 14. Connect the alternator, regulator, battery, and starter
find the problem in the circuit: tester (OTC3131) to the battery.
NOTE: After the problem in the circuit is found and
repaired, go to step 17.
A blown No. B44 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Check for an open or short in the RED wire and
connectors between the under-dash fuse/relay box
and the ignition switch.
Check for an open or short in the BLU wire and
and the ECM/PCM.
Check for an open or short in the LT GRN wire and
and the ECM/PCM.
Check for an open or short in the BRN wire,
BLK/WHT wire, and connectors between the
under-dash fuse/relay box and the starter.
Check for an open or short in the RED wire, BLU
wire and connectors between the clutch pedal 15. Do the STARTER TEST.
position switch A and the ECM (M/T model).
Does the display indicate cranking voltage greater than
Check for an open or short in the RED/BLK wire and or equal to 8.5 V and is the current draw less than or
connectors between the transmission range switch equal to 350 A ?
and the PCM (CVT model).
Check for an open or short in the BLU/BLK wire and YES-Go to step 16.
connectors between the transmission range switch NO-Replace the starter (see page 4-10), or remove
and the PCM (CVT model). and disassemble it (see page 4-12), and check for
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at these problems:
the clutch pedal position switch A and body ground Drag in the starter armature
(G403) (M/T model).
Shorted armature winding
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at Excessive drag in the engine
the transmission range switch and body ground
Open circuit in starter armature commutator
(G101) (CVT model).
segments
Check for a faulty ignition switch (see page 22-100).
Excessively worn starter brushes
Check a faulty starter cut relay (see page 22-92).
Open circuit in starter brushes
Check for a faulty clutch pedal position switch A
Dirty or damaged helical splines or drive gear
(M/T model) (see page 4-8).
Check for a faulty transmission range switch (CVT Faulty overrunning clutch
model) (see page 14-199). 16. Remove the starter (see page 4-10), and inspect its
drive gear and the flywheel ring gear (M/T model) or
the torque converter ring gear (CVT model) for
damage. Replace any damaged parts.
17. Select PGM-FI ECM/PCM reset (see page 11-4) in the
PGM-FI INSPECTION menu with the HDS to cancel
ALL INJECTORS STOP and STARTER TEST.
18. If the IMA battery level indicator displays no level,
start the engine, and hold the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm without load (in P or N (CVT
model)) or (in neural (M/T model)) until the level in the
indicator is half full.
(cont'd)
Starter System Circuit Clutch Pedal Position Switch A Test
Troubleshooting (cont'd)
19. Install the resonator chamber joint (A) and the intake M /T model
air tube (B).
1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover (see page
NOTE: When tightening the screw (C) of the hose 20 - 86 ).
band, align the edge of the hose band (D) with the
mark (E) painted on the hose band. If you tighten the 2. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page
screw over the mark, replace the hose band. 20-85).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the clutch pedal
position switch A.
4. Check for continuity between the terminals according

to the table.
If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
clutch pedal position switch A (see page 13-9), and
adjust the pedal height (see page 13-6).
If OK, connect the clutch pedal position switch A 2P
connector.
\ Terminal
1 2 .
Clutch Pedal \
PRESSED o -o
RELEASED
5. Install the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page

20-85).
6. Install the driver's dashboard undercover (see page
20 - 86 ).
Starter Performance Test
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-10), 6. Connect the starter to the battery as shown, and
confirm that the motor runs.
2. Clamp the starter firmly in a vise.
3. Make the connection for this test using the thickest
(gauge) wire possible (preferably the same gauge as
used on the vehicle).
NOTE: To avoid damaging the starter, never leave the
battery connected for more than 5 seconds.
7. If the electric current meets the specification when the

battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is working
properly.
Specification
4. Connect the battery as shown, and check for Electric Current: 80 A or less
continuity between the B terminal and the starter
body. If there is continuity, it is working properly.
5. Disconnect the battery from the starter body as
shown, and check for continuity between the B
terminal and the starter body. If there is no continuity,
it is working properly.
Starter Removal and Installation
Removal 5. Disconnect the positive starter cable (A) and the

harness connector (B) from the S terminal, then
1. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection remove the heater hose bracket (C) and the harness
procedure (see page 22-86). clamps (D).
2. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3). M /T model
3. M/T model: Remove the clutch hose bracket bolts (A) c
and nut (B).
CVT model
4. CVT model: Disconnect the solenoid wire harness
c
connector (A) and the CVT input shaft (drive pulley)
speed sensor connector (B).
6. Remove the two bolts securing the starter, then

remove the starter.
Installation 3. M/T model: Install the clutch hose bracket bolts (A)
and nut (B).
1. Install the starter, then tighten the starter mounting
f B
bolts (A). 6 x 1.0 mm
M /T model
8 x 1.25 mm
9.0 N lm
(0.92 kgf-m
1 ,
6.61Ibf-ft)
A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.0 N-m (0.92 kgf-m , 6.6 Ibf-ft)
4. CVT model: Install the solenoid wire harness

A A connector (A) and the CVT input shaft (drive pulley)
10 10 x 1.25 mm speed sensor connector (B).
44 N-m 44 N-m
(4.5 kgf-m , 32 Ibf-ft) (4.5 kgf-m , 32 Ibf-ft)
CVT model
6 x 1.0 m m 8 x 1.25 mm
10 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7 Ibf-ft) 9.0 N-m
(0.92 kgf-m,
6.6 Ibf-ft)
5. Install the air cleaner (see page 9-3).

A
10 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
44 N-m 6. Do the 12 volt battery terminal reconnection
44 N-m
(4.5 kgf-m , 32 Ibf-ft) (4.5 kgf-m , 32 Ibf-ft) procedure (see page 22-87).
2. Connect the positive starter cable (B) and the harness
connector (C) to the S terminal, then install the heater
hose bracket (D) and the harness clamps (E). Make
sure the crimped side of the ring terminal is facing
out.
Starting System
Starter Overhaul
Exploded View
I NTERNAL GEAR UNIT
(Apply m olybdenum
disulfide.)
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View if needed during this Armature Inspection and Test
procedure.
4. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from contact
Starter Disassembly with the permanent magnet. If there is wear or
damage, replace the armature.
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-10).
2. Remove the engine wire harness bracket (A) and the
end cover (B).
5. Check the commutator (A) diameter with a digital

caliper or dial type caliper. If the diameter is below the
service limit, replace the armature.
3. Remove the armature housing (A) and the armature Commutator Diameter
(B). Standard (New): 28.028.1 mm (1.102- 1.106 in)
Service Limit: 27.5 mm (1.083 in)
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
6. Measure the commutator (A) runout: 8. Use a digital caliper or dial type caliper to check the
If the commutator runout is within the service limit, m ica depth (A). If the mica depth is below the service
check the commutator for carbon dust or brass limit, replace the armature.
chips between the segments. Commutator Mica Depth
If the commutator runout is not within the service Standard (New): 0.40-0.50 mm (0.0157-0.0197 in)
limit, replace the armature. Service Limit; 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
Commutator Runout
Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) max.
Service Lim it: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
9. Use an ohmmeter to check for continuity between the

segments of the commutator. If there is an open
circuit between any segments, replace the armature.
7. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is
dirty or burnt, resurface it with an emery cloth or a
lathe to the specification in step 5, or recondition with
#500 or #600 sandpaper (B).
10. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester -(B). Hold Starter Brush Holder Test
a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If the blade
12. Check for continuity between the (+ ) brushes (A) and
is attracted to the core while the core is turned, the
the () brushes (B). If there is continuity, replace the
armature is shorted. Replace the armature.
brush holder set.
11. Use an ohmmeter to check for continuity between the

commutator (A) and the armature coil core (B), and
between the commutator and the armature shaft (C).
If there is continuity, replace the armature. Starter Brush Inspection
13. Measure the brush length. If it is shorter than the
service limit, replace the brush holder set.
Brush Length
Standard (New); 11.1-11.5 mm (0.437-0.453 in)
Service Limit; 4.3 mm (0.169 in)
Planetary Gear Inspection Overrunning Clutch Inspection

14. Remove the push nut (A), contact spring (B) and 16. Holding the drive gear (A), turn the gear shaft (B)
moving contact (C), then remove the brush holder set clockwise. Check that the drive gear comes out to the
other end. If the drive gear does not move smoothly,
replace the gear cover set.
17. Holding the drive gear, turn the gear shaft

counterclockwise. The gear shaft should rotate freely.
If the gear shaft does not rotate smoothly, replace the
15. Check the planetary gears (A), the armature shaft gear gear cover set.
(B) and the internal ring gear (C). Replace them if they
are worn or damaged.
B
S tarter Reassembly 20. Install the brush into the brush holder, and set the
armature (A) in the brush holder (B).
18. When the brush holder is replaced: Replace the brush
holder set with the moving contact (A), the contact NOTE: To seat the new brushes, slip a strip of #500 or
spring (B), and the push nut (C). #600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between the
commutator and each brush, and smoothly rotate the
armature. The contact surface of the brushes will be
sanded to the same contour as the commutator.
19. When the gear cover/reduction gear/plunger is 21. While squeezing a brush spring (C), insert it in the
replaced: Replace the new parts set with the contact hole on the brush holder, and push it until it bottoms.
spring (A) and the push nut (B). Repeat this for the other three springs (D, E, and F).
22. Install the armature and the brush holder assembly
(A) into the armature housing (B).
NOTE: Make sure the armature brackets in the holder.
(cont'd)
23. Install the end cover (A) with the engine wire harness
bracket (B).
The illustration shows M/T m odel.

24. Install the 'starter (see page 4-11).
Ignition System
i I OI I i u v a i / u l O L a i i a u w i i, |
Inspecti on, page 4-21 SERVICE LOOP
Ig n it i on T i m ing Inspect i on, page 4-20
Ignition Timing Inspection
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11-3). 9. Aim the light toward the pointer (A) on the chain case.
Check the ignition timing under no load condition
(headlights, blower fan, rear window defogger, and
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle air conditioner are turned off).
and the ECM/PCM. If it does not communicate, Ignition Timing
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -383). M/T model; 10 2 BTDC (RED mark (B))
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11 -3). If a DTC is present, at idle in neutral
diagnose and repair the cause before continuing with CVT model; 10 2 BTDC (RED mark (B))
at idle in P or N
this test.
5. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
with no load (M/T in neutral, CVT in P or N) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
6. Check the idle speed (see page 11 -273).
7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
8. Connect the timing light to the service loop (A).
10. If the ignition timing differs from the specification,

check the camshaft timing (see page 6-12). if the
camshaft timing is OK, update the ECM/PCM if it does
not have the latest software (see page 11-207), or
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then recheck. If the system works properly, and the
ECM/PCM was substituted, replace the original
ECM/PCM (see page 11-209).
11. Disconnect the HDS and the timing light.
Ignition Coil and Spark Plug Spark Plug Inspection
Removal/Installation
1. Remove the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel. 1. Remove the ignition coils and the spark plugs (see
(see page 20-153). page 4-21).
2. Disconnect the ignition coil connectors (A), then 2. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator:
remove the ignition coils (B). Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by these
conditions:
- Advanced ignition timing
- Loose spark plug
- Plug heat range too hot
- Insufficient cooling
Fouled plugs may be caused by these conditions:
- Retarded ignition timing
- Oil in combustion chamber
- Incorrect spark plug gap
- Plug heat range too cold
- Excessive idling/low speed running
- Clogged air cleaner element
- Deteriorated ignition coils
3. Remove the spark plugs (C), and inspect them (see

page 4-21).
4. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the
plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder
head, finger-tight, then tighten the plugs to the
specified torque.
Specified Torque
18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft)
5. Install all remaining parts in the reverse order of
removal.
Spark Plug Inspection (cont'd)
3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the

center electrode (A) is rounded, or if the spark plug
gap (B) is out of specification, or if the spark plug
electrode is dirty or contaminated. Use only the spark
plugs listed.
NOTE:
Do not adjust the gap of iridium tip plugs.
Do not use a plug cleaner.
Spark Plugs
NGK ('11 model): DIFR6A13G
NGK ('12 m o d e l); DIFR6D13
DENSO: DK20PR-D13
Electrode Gap
Standard (New): 1.21.3 mm (0.0470.051 in)
4. Install the spark plugs and the ignition coils (see page
4-21).
g
ENGINE
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

Self-Diagnostic Function, page 22-325
CRUISE M AIN INDICATOR/

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
[Built into gauge control module]
' CRUISE CONTROL

COMBINATION SWITCH
Circu i t Diagram , page 4-26
Test/Replacement, page 4-29
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

Test, page 22-246
(M /T model) IDLE STOP SWITCH
Test, page 4-29 (CVT model)
Replacement, page 13-9 Replacement, page 12-229
A djustm ent, page 13-6 Adjustm ent, page 19-6
ECM/PCM
Cru i se Control Input Test, page 4-27
Sympt om Troubleshooting Index
Symptom Diagnostic' procedure Also check fo r

Cruise control cannot be 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). Poor ground
set 2. Check the No. B24 (10 A) fuse and the No. B12 (10 A) G502, T10
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
3. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-29).
4. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-27).
Cruise control can be set, 1. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function Faulty gauge control
but cruise main indicator procedure (see page 22-325). module
does not come on 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-27).
3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11 -3).
Cruise control can be se t 1. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function Faulty gauge control
but cruise control procedure (see page 22-325). module
indicator does not come 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-27).
on Test the cruise control indicator signal input."
Vehicle does not 1. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page Open circuit, loose or
accelerate accordingly 4-29). disconnected
when the resume/accel 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-27). terminals: BRN or BLU
button is pressed Test the cruise control resume/accel switch signal input. wire
Set speed does not cancel 1. Do the brake pedal position switch test (M/T model) (see Short to power on the
when the brake pedal is page 22-246). BRN wire
pressed 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-27). Faulty brake pedal
Test the cruise brake pedal position switch signal input position switch (M/T
(M/T model). model)
Test the idle stop switch signal input (CVT model). Faulty idle stop
3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). switch (CVT model)
Set speed does not cancel 1. Do the clutch pedal position switch B test (see page Short to power on the
(engine rpm stays high) 4-29). LT GRN wire
when the clutch pedal is 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-27). Faulty clutch pedal
pressed (M/T model) Test the clutch pedal position switch B signal input position switch B
3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Set speed does not cancel 1. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page Short to ground on the
when the cruise control 4-29). LT GRN, PNK wire
main button is pressed 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-27).
Test the cruise control main switch signal input.
Set speed does not cancel 1. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page Open circuit, loose or
when the cancel button is 4-29). disconnected
pressed 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-27). terminals: GRY, RED or
Test the cruise control cancel switch signal input BRN, BLU wire
Set speed does not 1. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page Open circuit, loose or
resume when the 4-29). disconnected
resume/ accel button is 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-27). terminals: BRN, BLU
pressed (with the cruise Test the cruise control resume/accel switch signal input. wire
control main button Test the brake pedal position switch signal input. Faulty brake pedal
pressed on, and set speed 3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). position switch
temporarily canceled by
pressing the brake pedal)
Set speed does not 1. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page Open circuit, loose or
resume when the 4-29). disconnected
resume/accel button is 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-27). terminals: BRN, BLU
pressed (with the cruise Test the cruise control resume/accel switch signal input. wire
control main button Test the clutch pedal position switch B signal input. Faulty clutch pedal
pressed on, and set speed 3. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). position switch B
temporarily canceled by
pressing the clutch pedal)
(M/T model)
Light switch turned on, 1. Check the No. B29 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash Open circuit, loose or
the cruise control fuse/relay box. disconnected
combination switch 2. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page terminals: RED, BLU
illumination does not 4-29). and WHT wire
come on 3. Do the audio remote switch test (see page 23-125).
Circuit Diagram
CAN line
CVT model
M/T model
BATTERY TERMINAL
FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE THROTTLE BODY

Cruise Control Input Test
NOTE: Always make sure that you have the latest HDS software.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11-3).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it does not communicate, troubleshoot the
DLC circuit (see page 11-383).
4. Check for and troubleshoot any DTCs (see page 11-3).
5. Do the following tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS.
6. If the input tests prove OK, replace the ECM/PCM (see page 11-209).
NOTE: Intermittent failures are often caused by loose circuit connections. While monitoring cruise control inputs, flex
their circuits, and note if any of the test results change.
Signal to be Test condition Parameter: Desired Possible cause if result is not obtained
tested result
Cruise brake Brake pedal pressed, CRUISE BRAKE Faulty brake pedal position switch
switch signal then released SW/IDLE STOP SW Blown No. B12 (10 A) fuse in the
(M/T model) should indicate OPEN under-dash fuse/relay box
when the brake pedal is An open in the wire between the ECM
pressed and CLOSE and the brake pedal position switch
when the brake pedal is A wire shorted to ground between the
released. ECM and the brake pedal position switch
Idle stop Brake pedal pressed, CRUISE BRAKE Faulty idle stop switch
switch signal then released SW/IDLE STOP SW Blown No. B12 (10 A) fuse in the
(CVT model) should indicate OPEN under-dash fuse/relay box
when the brake pedal is An open in the wire between the PCM
pressed and CLOSE and the idle stop switch
when the brake pedal is A wire shorted to ground between the
released. PCM and the idle stop switch
Clutch pedal Clutch pedal pressed, SHIFT/CLUTCH SW Faulty clutch pedal position switch B
position then released should indicate OFF An open in the wire between the ECM
switch B signal when the clutch pedal and the clutch pedal position switch B
(M/T model) is pressed and ON A wire shorted to ground between the
when the clutch pedal ECM and the clutch pedal position switch
is released. B
Poor ground at G403
Cruise control Cruise control main CRUISE MASTER Faulty cruise control combination switch
main switch button ON and OFF (MAIN) SW should An open in the wire between the gauge
signal indicate ON when the control module and the cruise control
cruise control main combination switch
button is pressed and A wire shorted to ground between the
OFF when the cruise gauge control module and the cruise
control main button is control combination switch
released. An open in the wire between the cruise
control combination switch and ground
G502, T10
Set switch Decel/set button CRUISE SET SW Faulty cruise control combination switch
signal pressed and released should indicate ON An open in the wire between the gauge
when the decel/set control module and the cruise control
button is pressed and combination switch
OFF when the decel/set A wire shorted to ground between the
button is released. gauge control module and the cruise
control combination switch
(cont'd)
Cruise Control Input Test (cont'd)
Signal to be Test condition Parameter: Desired Possible cause if result is not obtained
tested result
Resume Resume/accel button CRUISE RESUME SW Faulty cruise control combination switch
switch signal pressed and released should indicate ON An open in the wire between the gauge
when the resume/accel control module and the cruise control
button is pressed and combination switch
OFF when the A wire shorted to ground between the
resume/accel button is gauge control module and the cruise
released. control combination switch
Cancel switch Cancel button CRUISE CANCEL SW Faulty cruise control combination switch
signal pressed and released should indicate ON An open in the wire between the gauge
when the cancel button control module and the cruise control
is pressed and OFF combination switch
when the cancel button * A wire shorted to ground between the
is released. gauge control module and the cruise
control combination switch
Cruise control Start the engine, CRUISE INDICATOR Faulty gauge control module
indicator press the cruise should indicate ON Faulty cruise control combination switch
signal control main button when the cruise control An open in the wire between the gauge
on, and drive the is set and OFF when the control module and the cruise control
vehicle above 25 cruise control is combination switch
mph (40 km/h), with canceled. A wire shorted to ground between the
cruise control set and gauge control module and the cruise
cancel the cruise control combination switch
control.
Cruise Control Combination Switch Clutch Pedal Position Switch B Test
T est/Replacement
There are SRS components located in this area. Review M/T model
the SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13), in the SRS 1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover (see page
before doing repairs or service. 20-86).
1. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-166), then 2. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page
remove the steering wheel (see page 17-6). 20-85).
2. Disassemble the steering wheel (see page 17-7). 3. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch B 2P
connector (A) from the clutch pedal position switch B.
3. Remove the cruise control combination switch.
* -
Term inal side of

m ale term inals
4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each

cruise control combination switch position according
to the table:
If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but
the cruise control combination switch failure 4. Check for continuity between the terminals according
occurred on the cruise control input test, check and to the table:
repair the wire harness on the switch circuit.
If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
If there is no continuity in one or more positions, clutch pedal position switch B (see page 13-9) and
replace the cruise control combination switch. adjust the pedal height (see page 13-6).
If OK, connect the clutch pedal position switch B 2P
connector.
\ Terminal
1 2 3 6 7 10 12
Position \
Cruise control Pi p
main (ON)
\ Terminal
Cruise control 1 2
main (OFF) Clutch Pedal \
Decel/set
(PRESSED) P
w P
KJ PRESSED
Resume/accel Pi r\ P PJ
(PRESSED) KJ RELEASED k
Cancel
(PRESSED) Pi iHT - " P
pHkfPI-
Combination
light switch r\ r
.H P
(ON) L@J 5. Install the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page
20-85).
5. Install all remaining parts in the reverse order of 6. Install the driver's dashboard undercover (see page
removal. 20 - 86 ).
Engine Assem bly................. .................................. 5-1
Cylinder H ead......................................................... 6-1
Engine Block........................................................... 7-1
Engine Lubrication................ ......................... . .8-1
Intake Air System and Exhaust System ............ 9-1
Engine Assembly
Special Tools................................... ........................... ....... 5-2
Engine Rem oval.................................................................5-3
Engine Installation.............................................................5-11
Side Engine Mount Replacem ent.. . ..............................5-20
Transmission Mount Replacement................................ 5-24
Torque Rod Replacement................................................5-28
Side Engine Mount Bracket Replacement............... . 5-29
Transmission Mount Bracket Replacem ent................5-32
Torque Rod Bracket Replacement..................................5-35
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Description Qty

CD 07AAK-S NAA120 Universal Lifting Eyelet 2
Special Tools Required 8. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3).
Universal Lifting Eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120
9. Remove the starter cable (A) and the harness clamp
Engine Support Hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256*
(B).
Engine Hanger Adapter VSB02C000026*
*: Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment M /T model
Program 888-424-6857
NOTE;
IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a
high-voltage system. You must be familiar with the
IMA system before working on or around it. Make sure
you have read the IMA service precaution before
doing repairs or service (see page 12-3).
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
To avoid damaging the wiring and terminals, unplug
the wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.
Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
1.Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
CVT model
2. Before removing the engine/transmission, read the
Service Precautions for the IMA System (see page
12-3).
3. Open the hood, and secure it with the hood support
rod (A) in the wide-open position (B).
Ill
4. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-287).

5. Do the 12 volt battery removal procedure (see page
22-87).
6. Remove the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel (see
page 20-153).
7. Remove the front bumper center upper beam (see
page 20-149).
Engine Removal (cont'd)
10. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (B). 15. Disconnect the EVAP canister hose (A) and the brake
booster vacuum hose (B).
relay box A, and the ECM/PCM (D). 16. Remove the fuel feed hose clamp bracket (A) and the
quick-connect fitting cover (B), then disconnect the
12. CVT model; Remove the harness clamp (E).
fuel feed hose (C) (see page 11 -295).
13. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness
connectors (A).
14. Remove the harness clamp (B)and the harness holder

(C).
17. Disconnect the EPS connectors (A). 20. M/T model; Remove the cable guard bracket and the
clutch line bracket (see step 7 on page 13-44).
21. M/T model: Remove the slave cylinder, then carefully
move the slave cylinder out of the way to avoid
bending the clutch line (see step 8 on page 13-44).
NOTE:
Do not disconnect the clutch line joints.
Do not press the clutch pedal after the slave
cylinder has been removed.
22. M/T model: Remove the harness bracket (see step 9
on page 13-44).
23. M/T model: Remove the lock pins and the shift cable
bracket bolts, then carefully remove both cables and
the shift cable bracket together out of the way to avoid
bending the cables (see step 10 on page 13-44).
24. M/T model: Disconnect the reverse lockout solenoid
2P connector (see step 11 on page 13-44).
25. CVT model: Remove the clamp bracket (see step 24
18. Disconnect the secondary H02S connector (A), then on page 14-159).
remove the secondary H02S harness from the 26. CVT model: Remove the lock pin and the control pin
clamps (B). from the selector control lever (see step 25 on page
14-159).
A
27. CVT model: Remove the bolts securing the shift cable
holder, then separate the shift cable end from the
selector control lever (see step 26 on page 14-159).
28. Remove the drive belt (see page 10-17).
29. Remove the radiator cap.
NOTE: Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully
remove the radiator cap.
30. Raise the vehicle on the lift.
31. Remove the front wheels.
32. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-163).
33. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, and drain the
B
engine coolant (see page 10-8).
19. Remove the steering joint cover, then disconnect the 34. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-10).
steering joint from the steering gearbox pinion shaft
(see page 17-64). 35. Drain the transmission fluid:
M/T model (see page 13-41)
NOTE:
CVT model (see page 14-154)
Hold the steering wheel in the steering wheel
holder tool
Hold the lower slide shaft on the column with a
piece of wire between the joint yokes.
36. Remove the harness clamp (A). 44. Remove the A/C compressor without disconnecting
the A/C hoses. Do not bend the A/C hoses excessively.
NOTE: Hang the A/C compressor with a wire tie.
37. Remove the under-floor TWC (B).

38. Remove the stabilizer links from the stabilizer bar on
both sides (see page 18-20).
39. Remove the cotter pin from the tie-rod end ball joint,
then remove the nut on both sides (see step 11 on
page 17-65).
40. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint from the knuckle
using the ball joint remover and the ball joint thread
protector on both sides (see step 12 on page 17-65).
41. Remove the lock pin from the lower arm ball joint, and
remove the castle nut from both sides (see step 13 on
page 17-66).
42. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the knuckle
protector on both sides (see step 14 on page 17-66).
43. Remove the drives hafts (see page 16-4). Coat all
precision-finished surfaces with clean engine oil. Tie a
plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.
45. Lower the vehicle on the lift. 49. Attach the first universal lifting eyelet (A) to the
cylinder head with a spacer (B) and an 8 x 1.25 mm
46. Remove the radiator (see page 10-24). bolt (C).
47. Disconnect the IMA motor power cable connector (A) NOTE: Select a spacer that is long enough that the
and the harness clamp (B). universal lifting eyelet does not interfere with the fuel
NOTE: Make sure you have read the IMA system feed tube (D).
service precautions (see page 12-3).
D
A
50. Install the engine hanger adapter (VSB02C000026) to 52. Support the transmission with a transmission jack
the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256), then install and a wood block under the transmission.
the engine support hanger onto the vehicle, and
53. Remove the torque rod (A).
attach the hook (A) to the first universal lifting eyelet
(B). Tighten the wing nut (C) by hand, and lift and NOTE: Make sure the tab (B) on the bolt head aligned
support the engine/IMA motor/transmission. with the guide (C) on the front subframe.
NOTE: Be careful when working around the M /T model
windshield.
VSB02C000026
54. Remove the transmission jack and the wood block

from under the transmission.
55. Support the front subframe with a transmission jack
and a wood block under the front subframe.
56. Remove the front subframe bolts. 60. Attach a chain hoist to the second universal lifting
eyelet (A) and the transmission hanger (B), then lift
the engine/IMA motor/transmission until it is securely
supported by the chain hoist, then remove the engine
support hanger.
NOTE: Wrap the VSA modulator-control unit with the
clean shop towel.
57. Lower the front subframe and steering gearbox as an

assembly by lowering the jack slowly, then remove
the assembly from under the vehicle.
58. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
59. Attach the second universal lifting eyelet to the chain
case.
61. Remove the ground cable (A) and the harness holder 63. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side
(B). engine mount/bracket assembly (B).
M /T model
CVT model 64. Check that the engine/IMA motor/transmission is

completely free of the vacuum hoses, the fuel hoses,
the coolant hoses, and electrical wiring.
65. Slowly lower the engine/IMA motor/transmission
about 150 mm (5.91 in). Check once again that all the
hoses and the electrical wiring are disconnected and
free from the engine/IMA motor/transmission, then
lower it all the way and support it.
66. Disconnect the chain hoist from the engine/IMA
motor/transmission.
67. Raise the vehicle, and remove the engine/IMA
motor/transmission from under the vehicle.
62. Remove the transmission mount bolts (C) and nuts

(D), then remove the transmission mount bracket (E).
Special Tools Required 2. Install the side engine mount/bracket assembly (A),
Universal Lifting Eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120 then tighten new side engine mount/bracket
Engine Support Hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256* assembly mounting bolts (B).
NOTE: Refer to the installation of the side engine
*: Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment mount bracket if you take the side engine mount and
Program 888-424-6857 the side engine mount bracket apart (see page 5-20).
NOTE: IMA components are located in this area. The

IMA is a high-voltage system. You must be familiar with
the IMA system before working on or around it. Make
sure you have read the IMA service precaution before
1. Raise the vehicle on the lift, and position the engine/
IMA motor/transmission under the vehicle.
Be sure that they are properly aligned. Carefully lower
the vehicle until the engine/IMA motor/transmission
are properly positioned in the engine compartment.
Make sure the vehicle is not resting on any part of the
engine/IMA motor/transmission. Support the
engine/IMA motor/transmission with a chain hoist (A)
and carefully raise the engine/IMA
motor/transmission into place.
NOTE:
Attach the first universal lifting eyelet (B) to the
chain case (see step 59 on page 5-9).
Reinstall the mounting bolts and support nuts in the
sequence given in the following steps. Failure to
follow this sequence may cause excessive noise
3. Loosely install new side engine mount/bracket
and vibration, and reduce engine mount life.
assembly mounting nuts (C).
Wrap the VSA modulator-control unit with the clean
shop towel. 4. Install the ground cable (D).
M /T m odel
CVT m odel
Engine Installation (cont'd)
5. Install the transmission mount bracket (A), and 7. Attach the second universal lifting eyelet (A) to the
loosely install new transmission mount bracket cylinder head with a spacer (B) and an 8 x 1.25 mm
mounting bolts (B) and nuts (C). bolt (C).
M /T model NOTE: Select a spacer that is long enough that the
universal lifting eyelet does not interfere with the fuel
6 x 1.0 m m
feed tube (D).
D
8. Install the engine hanger adapter (VSB02C000026) to 11. Support the front subframe with a transmission jack
the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256), then install and a wood block under the front subframe.
attach the hook (A) to the second universal lifting 12. Install the front subframe, then loosely install the new
front subframe mounting bolts.
eyelet (B). Tighten the wing nut (C) by hand, and lift
and support the engine/IMA motor/transmission. NOTE:
NOTE; Be careful when working around the Be sure that the pinion shaft grommet is in place
windshield. securely. Make sure the pinion shaft grommet is not
turned up. Incorrect installation can cause leakage
VSB02C000026 of water or mud, and noise.
Take care not to damage the lower arm ball joint
boot with the edge of the knuckle, etc.
14 x 1.5 mm 14 x 1.5 mm
Replace. Replace.
07AAK-SNAA120 13. Align the front subframe, then torque the subframe
mounting bolts to specification (see page 20-173).
9. Remove the chain hoist from the engine/IMA
motor/transmission, then remove the first universal 14. Remove the transmission jack and the wood block
lifting eyelet from the chain case. from under the subframe.
15. Support the transmission with a transmission jack 17. Remove the transmission jack and the wood block
and a wood block under the transmission. from under the transmission.
16. Install the torque rod (A). Install the bolt (B) with the 18. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
tab (C) on the bolt head aligned with the guide (D) on
19. Remove the engine support hanger and the second
the front subframe, then loosely install a new torque
universal lifting eyelet.
rod mounting bolt (E) and nut (F).
NOTE: Be sure to install the torque rod with the "UP" 20. Tighten the side engine mount/bracket assembly
mounting nuts.
mark facing up.
M /T model
c
Replace.
CVT model
c
Replace.
21. Tighten the transmission mount mounting bolts and 23. Tighten the torque rod mounting bolt and nut in the
nuts in the numbered sequence shown. numbered sequence shown.
M /T model M /T model

14 x 1.5 mm
83 N*m (8.5 kgf-m, 61 Ibf-ft)

1 4 x 1 .5 mm
93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)
CVT model
CVT model

12 x 1.25 mm
74 N-m
l"T JFSk I IIVIII

93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)
54 N-m
(5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
24. Install the A/C compressor. 31. Install the under-floor TWC (A) and the harness clamp
(B).
NOTE: Use new gaskets (C) and new self-locking nuts
(D).
25. Install the driveshafts (see page 16-19).

26. Wipe off any grease contamination from the tapered
section and threads of the ball joint. Connect the
lower arm to the knuckle. Install a new castle nut, and
tighten it to the specified torque on both sides (see
step 18 on page 17-70).
32. Install the splash shield (see page 20-163).
27. Install the lock pin on both sides (see step 19 on page
33. Install the front wheels.
17-70).
section and threads of the tie-rod end ball joint. 35. Install the heater hoses (A).
Connect the tie-rod end to the knuckles. Install the nut,
and tighten it to the specified torque on both sides
(see step 20 on page 17-71).
29. Install a new cotter pin/and bend it as shown on both
sides (see step 21 on page 17-71).
30. Install the stabilizer links to the stabilizer bar on both
sides (see page 18-20).
36. Connect the IMA motor power cable connector (A) 40. M/T model: Connect the reverse lockout solenoid 2P
and the harness clamp (B). connector (see step 38 on page 13-54).
NOTE: Make sure you have read the IMA system 41. M/T model: Apply a light coat of silicone grease (P/N
service precautions (see page 12-3). 08C30-B0234M) to the cable ends, and connect the
cable end to the change lever assembly, then install
the shift cable bracket, the harness bracket, and the
lock pins. Do not bend or damage the shift cables,
NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the
terminal part of the connectors and switches,
especially if you have silicone grease on your hands
or gloves.
42. M/T model: Apply a light coat of super high temp urea
grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the end of the slave
cylinder push rod. Install the slave cylinder. Be careful
not to bend the clutch line (see step 40 on page 13-55).
43. M/T model: Install the cable guard bracket and the
clutch line bracket (see step 41 on page 13-55).
44. CVT model: Secure the shift cable holder on the
transmission with the bolts (see step 36 on page
14-171).
45. CVT model: Install the clamp bracket (see step 37 on
page 14-171).
46. CVT model: Apply molybdenum grease to the hole in
the shift cable end collar (A). Attach the shift cable end
to the selector control lever. Insert the control pin
through the selector control lever hole, through the
shift cable end collar hole, and into the selector
control lever slotted hole in the direction shown. Push
the control pin until its flange contacts the selector
control lever surface (see step 38 on page 14-171).
47. CVT model: Insert the lock pin in the direction shown
through the control pin hole and out the opening of
the selector control lever so that the hooked end of the
lock pin locks into the countersunk hole of the control
pin (see step 39 on page 14-171).
48. Connect the steering joint onto the steering gearbox
38. Install the radiator (see page 10-24). pinion shaft, then install the steering joint cover (see
page 17-64), then remove the steering wheel holder
39. Install the drive belt (see page 10-17). tool.
(cont'd)
49. Connect the secondary H02S connector (A), then 51. Install the EVAP canister hose (A) and the brake
install the secondary H02S harness to the clamps (B). booster vacuum hose (B).
50. Connect the fuel feed hose (A) (see page 11-297), then
install the quick-connect fitting cover (B) and the fuel
feed hose clamp bracket (C).
52. Connect the engine compartment wire harness
connectors (A), then install the harness clamp (B).
9.3 N-m
(0.95 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
53. Install the harness holder (C).

H 3 3
54. Install the ECM/PCM with the bracket, then connect 57. Install the starter cable (A) and the harness clamp (B).
ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C.
M /T model
NOTE: ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C have
symbols (A=D, B=A, C=0) embossed on them for
identification.
CVT model,
55. Install the harness clamps (D) and auxiliary

under-hood relay box A (E).
56. CVT model: Install the harness clamp (F).

59. Install the front bumper center upper beam (see page
20-149).
60. Install the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel (see
page 20-153).
61. Do the 12 volt battery installation procedure (see page
22- 88 ).
62. Turn the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).

Engine Installation (cont'd) Side Engine Mount Replacement
63. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to ON 1. Support the engine with a jack and a wood block
(II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump runs under the oil pan.
for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line.
Repeat this operation three times, then check for fuel 2. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side
engine mount bracket (B).
leakage at any point in the fuel line.
64. Refill the engine with engine oil (see step 6 on page
8 - 10 ).
65. Refill the transmission fluid:
M/T model (see step 5 on page 13-41)
CVT model (see step 9 on page 14-155)
66. M/T model: Check that the transmission shifts into all
gears smoothly.
67. CVT model: Move the shift lever to each gear, and
verify that the CVT gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch.
68. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed air
from the cooling system (see step 8 on page 10-9).
69. Do the ECM/PCM reset procedure (see page 11-4).
70. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure
(see page 11-5).
71. Do the IMA motor rotor position calibration procedure
(see page 12-7).
72. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-273).
73. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-20).
4. Install the side engine mount, then tighten new side

engine mount mounting bolts (B).
5. Install the side engine mount bracket (A) with a new 9. Loosen the transmission mount bracket mounting
bolt (B). bolts (A) and nuts (B).
NOTE: Make sure to align the projection (C) with the M /T model
mark (D) when you install the bracket as shown in the
illustration.

assembly mounting nuts (E), and install the ground
cable (F).
7. Remove the jack and the wood block from under the
oil pan.
8. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3).
Side Engine Mount Replacement (cont'd)
11. Loosen the torque rod mounting bolt (A) and nut (B). 13. Tighten the side engine mount/bracket assembly
mounting nuts.
M /T model
CVT model
n S
(9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft) 83 N-m (8.5 kgf-m , 61 Ibf-ft)

CVT model
(D
12 x 1.25 mm
93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 ibf-ft)

54 N-m
Transmission Mount Replacement
1. Do the 12 volt battery removal procedure (see page 7. Remove the ground cable (A) and the harness holder
22-87). (B).
2. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3). M /T model
3. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (B).
4. Remove the harness clamps (C), auxiliary under-hood CVT model

relay box A, and the ECM/PCM (D).
5. CVT model: Remove the harness clamp (E).
6. Support the transmission with a jack and a wood
block under the transmission.

rc 3 )
9. Remove the transmission mount (A). 11. Install the transmission mount bracket (A), and
loosely install new transmission mount bracket
M /T model
mounting bolts (B) and nuts (C).

12 x 1.25 m m M /T model
59 N-m
(6.0 kgf-m , 44 Ibf-ft)

12 x 1.25 m m
59 N-m
(6.0 kgf-m , 44 Ibf-ft)
Replace. 12 x 1.25 m m
59 N-m (6.0 kgf-m , 44 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
CD
12 x 1.25 m m CD
59 N-m 12 x 1.25 mm
(6.0 kgf-m, 44 Ibf-ft) 59 N-m
Replace. (6.0 kgf-m, 44 Ibf-ft)
Replace. 12. Install the harness holder (D) and the ground cable (E).
10. Install the transmission mount, and loosely install 13. Remove the jack and the wood block from under the
new transmission mount mounting bolts, then tighten transmission.
the transmission mount mounting bolts in the 14. Raise the vehicle on the lift.
numbered sequence shown.
(cont'd)
Transmission Mount Replacement (cont'd)
15. Loosen the torque rod mounting bolt (A) and nut (B). 17. Tighten the transmission mount mounting bolts and
nuts in the numbered sequence shown.
M /T model
M /T model
CD
12 x 1.25 mm

19. Tighten the torque rod mounting bolt and nut in the 20. Install the ECM/PCM with the ECM/PCM bracket. Then
numbered sequence shown. connect ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C.
M /T model NOTE: ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C have

symbols (A=D, B = ^ t C =0) embossed on them for
CD identification.
14 x 1.5 mm
83 N-m (8.5 kgf-m, 61 Ibf-ft)
14 x 1.5 mm
93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)
CVT model
21. install the harness clamps (D) and auxiliary

22 - 88 ).

25. Do the ECM/PCM reset procedure (see page 11-4).
14 x 1.5 mm
93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)
Torque Rod Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle on the lift. 4. Install the torque rod (A).
2. Support the transmission with a transmission jack NOTE: Be sure to install the torque rod with the "UP"
and a wood block under the transmission. mark facing up.
3. Remove the torque rod (A). M /T model
NOTE; Make sure the tab (B) on the bolt head aligned
with the guide (C) on the front subframe.
M /T model
Replace.
CVT model
CVT model
Replace.
5. Install the bolt (B) with the tab (C) on the bolt head
aligned with the guide (D) on the front subframe, then
loosely install a new torque rod mounting bolt (E) and
nut (F).
Side Engine Mount Bracket
Replacement
7. Tighten the torque rod mounting bolt and nut in the 1. Support the engine with a jack and a wood block
numbered sequence shown. under the oil pan.
M /T model 2. Remove the ground cable (A) and the side engine
mount bracket (B)

14 x 1.5 mm
83 N-m (8.5 k g f m, 61 Ibf-ft)
14 x 1.5 mm
93 N-m (9.5 k g fm , 69 Ibf-ft)
CVT model
NOTE: Make sure to align the projection (C) with the

mark (D) when you install the bracket as shown in the
illustration.
assembly mounting nuts (E), and install the ground
cable.
93 N-m (9.5 kgf m, 69 Ibf-ft) oil pan.
(cont'd)
Side Engine Mount Bracket Replacement (cont'd)
7. Loosen the transmission mount bracket mounting 9. Loosen the torque rod mounting bolt (A) and nut (B).
bolts (A) and nuts (B).
M /T model
M /T model
CVT model
CVT model

Itasi
11. Tighten the side engine mount/bracket assembly 12. Tighten the transmission mount mounting bolt and
mounting nuts. nuts in the numbered sequence shown.
M /T model
(D
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 k g fm , 40 Ibf-ft)
Side Engine Mount Bracket Transmission Mount Bracket
Replacement (cont'd) Replacement
14. Tighten the torque rod mounting bolt and nut in the 1. Do the 12 volt battery removal procedure (see page
numbered sequence shown. 22-87).
M /T modal 2. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3).
3. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (B).
(9.5 kgf-m, 69 ibf-ft) 83 N-m (8.5 kgf-m, 61 Ibf-ft)

CVT model
4. Remove the harness clamps (C), auxiliary under-hood
relay box A, and the ECM/PCM (D).
5. CVT model: Remove the harness clamp (E).
6. Support the transmission with a jack and a wood
block under the transmission.
93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)

te a
7. Remove the ground cable (A) and the harness holder 13. Loosen the torque rod mounting bolt (A) and nut (B).
(B).
M /T model
M /T model
CVT model

9. Install the transmission mount bracket, and loosely
install new transmission mount bracket mounting
bolts and nuts.
10. Install the harness holder and the ground cable.
transmission.
(cont'd)
Transmission Mount Bracket Replacement (cont'd)
(D
14 x 1.5 mm
83 N-m (8.5 kgfm, 61 Ibf-ft)
14 x 1.5 mm
93 N-m (9.5 k g fm , 69 Ibf-ft)
CVT model
12 x 1.25 mm
93 N-m (9.5 kgfm, 69 Ibfft)

Torque Rod Bracket Replacement
19. install the ECM/PCM with the ECM/PCM bracket. Then 1. Raise the vehicle on the lift.
connect ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C.
2. Support the transmission with a transmission jack
NOTE: ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C have and a wood block under the transmission.
symbols (A=D, B=A, C =0) embossed on them for
3. Remove the torque rod (A).
identification.
NOTE: Make sure the tab (B) on the bolt head aligned
M /T model
20. Install the harness clamps (D) and auxiliary

22 - 88 ). CVT model

24. Do the ECM/PCM reset procedure (see page 11 -4).
Torque Rod Bracket Replacement (cont'd)
4. Remove the torque rod bracket (A). 6. Install the torque rod (A).
M /T model NOTE: Be sure to install the torque rod with the "UP"
mark facing up.
14 x 1.5 m m
83 N-m (8.5 kgf-m, 61 Ibf-ft) M /T model
Replace.
12 x 1.25 m m
83 N-m (8.5 kgf-m , 61 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
CVT model
Replace.
aligned with the guide (D) on the front subframe, then
nut (F).
le g )
9. Tighten the torque rod mounting bolt and nut in the

M /T model

1 4 x 1 .5 mm
83 N-m (8.5 kgf m, 61 Ibf-ft)
14 x 1.5 mm
93 N-m (9.5 kgf m, 69 Ibf-ft)
CVT model
14x1.5 mm
93 N-m (9.5 kgfm , 69 Ibf-ft)
C y lin d e r H e a d
Special Tools.................. .....................................................6-2
Component Location Index.............................................. 6-3
Engine Compression Inspection....................................6-6
VTEC Rocker Arm Te s t....... .............................................. 6-7
Valve Clearance Adjustm ent...........................................6-8
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation................ 6-10
Cam Chain Rem oval.........................................................6-12
Cam Chain Installation......................................................6-14
Cam Chain Case Oil Seal Installation.............................6-21
Cylinder Head Cover Rem oval........................................6-22
Cylinder Head Cover Installation.....................................6-22
Cylinder Head Rem oval.................................................... 6-24
CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation.......... .........6-26
Camshaft Sprocket Rem oval...........................................6-29
Camshaft Sprocket Installation.. . . .................................6-30
Cylinder Head Inspection for W arpage..........................6-32
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal.....................................6-32
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly.......6-34
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection................................... 6-35
Camshaft Removal............................................................ 6-36
Camshaft Inspection.........................................................6-37
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal........................ 6-39
Valve Inspection.................................................................6-40
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection.................. 6-40
Valve Guide Replacement............................................... 6-41
Valve Seat Reconditioning..............................................6-43
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation................ 6-44
Camshaft Installation........................................................6-45
Rocker Arm Assembly Installation................................. 6-46
Cylinder Head Installation.............................. ................ 6-46
Special Tools

070AJ-001A101 VCM Air Adapter 1
07742-0010100 Valve Guide Driver, 5.35 x 9.7 mm 1
07746-0010400 Bearing Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 mm
07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 1
07757-PJ1010A Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 1
07AAB-RJAA100 Crankshaft Pulley Holder 1
07AAJ-PNAA101 Air Pressure Regulator 1
07HAH-PJ7A100 Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 1
07J AA-001020A Socket, 19 mm 1
07JAB-001020B Holder Handle 1
07PAD-0010000 Stem Seal Driver 1
M S

Component Location Index (cont'd)
INTAKE M ANIFOLD BRACKET A
AIR CLEANER BRACKET A
PLUG TOP COIL

HEAT INSULATOR
WATER OUTLET
CYLINDER HEAD
Engine Com pression Inspection, page 6-6
Removal, page 6-24
Inspection fo r W ar page, page 6-32
Valve Seat Reconditioning, page 6-43
Installation, page 6-46
CYLINDER HEAD
GASKET
DOWEL PINS
ROCKER ARM ASSSEMBLY
VTEC Rocker A rm Test, page 6-7
Valve Clearance A d ju s tm e n t page 6-8
Removal, page 6-32
Rocker A rm and Shaft Disassem bly/
Reassembly, page 6-34
Rocker A rm and Shaft Inspection, page 6-35
CAMSHAFT THRUST
COVER
SPRING CMP PULSE PLATE

RETAINER Removal and Installation, page 6-26
EXHAUST VALVE
SPRING
VALVE COTTERS
SPRING RETAINER
EXHAUST VALVE
INTAKE VALVE SPRING
SEAL
Removal, page 6-39
ROCKER ARM OIL

CONTROL FILTER
VALVE SPRING
SEAT /
ROCKER ARM OIL

CONTROL VALVE
Rem oval/Installation, page 11-260
INTAKE VALVE SEAL

Removal, page 6-39
VALVE SPRING SEAT

INTAKE VALVE
Removal, page 6-39 INTAKE VALVE GUIDE
Inspection, page 6-40 Valve Stem -to-G uide Clearance Inspection, page 6-40
Installation, page 6-44 Replacement, page 6-41
EXHAUST VALVE
Engine Compression Inspection
NOTE: After this inspection, you must reset PGM-FI 11. Step on the accelerator pedal to open the throttle
ECM/PCM in the PGM-FMNSPECTION menu with the fully, then crank the engine with the starter motor and
HDS to cancel ALL INJECTORS and STARTER TEST measure the compression.
functions.
Compression Pressure
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature Above: 980 kPa (9.99 kgf/cm2, 142.1 psi)
(cooling fan comes on). 12. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Maximum Variation
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11 -3). Within 200 kPa (2.04 kgf/cm2, 29.0 psi)
13. If the compression is not within specifications,
perform a cylinder leak down test to determine the
5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle problem area. Then check the following items, and
and the ECM/PCM. If it does not communicate, remeasure the compression:
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-383). Incorrect valve clearance
6. Select ALL INJECTORS STOP in the PGM-FI Confirmation of cam timing
INSPECTION menu with the HDS. Damaged or worn cam lobes
Damaged or worn valves and seats
7. Select STARTER TEST in the PGM-FI INSPECTION
menu with the HDS. Damaged cylinder head gasket
Damaged or worn piston rings
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore
9. Remove the four ignition coils and the four spark 14. Remove the compression gauge from the spark plug
plugs (see page 4-21). hole.
10. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug hole. 15. Install the four spark plugs and the four ignition coils
(see page 4-21).
16. Select PGM-FI ECM/PCM reset (see page 11-4) in the
PGM-FI INSPECTION menu with the HDS to cancel
ALL INJECTORS STOP and STARTER TEST.
VTEC Rocker Arm Test
Special Tools Required 5. Install the VCM air adapter (A) to the inspection hole,
Air Pressure Regulator 07AAJ-PNAA101 then connect the air pressure regulator (B).
VCM Air Adapter 070AJ-001A101
1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22).

2. Rotate the crankshaft pulley clockwise. Make sure that
the primary rocker arm (A) and the secondary rocker
arm (B) are separated and that the primary rocker arm
should move independently:
If the primary rocker arm and the secondary rocker
arm move together, remove the primary rocker arm
and the secondary rocker arm as an assembly, and
check that the pistons in the primary and secondary
rocker arms move smoothly (see page 6-36). If any
rocker arm needs replacing, replace the rocker arm
set, then retest.
If all the primary rocker arms and the secondary
rocker arms move independently, go to step 3.
6. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the

specified air pressure.
Specified Air Pressure:
340 kPa (3.47 kgf/em2, 49.3 psi)
7. With the specified air pressure applied, rotate the
crankshaft pulley clockwise. The primary rocker arm
(A) should move together with the secondary rocker
arm (B):
If the primary rocker arm and the secondary rocker
arm move independently of each other, remove the
primary rocker arm and the secondary rocker arm
as an assembly, and check that the pistons in the
primary and secondary rocker arms move
3. Check that the air pressure on the shop air smoothly (see page 6-36). If any rocker arm needs
compressor gauge indicates over replacing, replace the rocker arm set, then retest.
340 kPa (3.47 kgf/cm2, 49.3 psi). If all the primary rocker arms and the secondary
rocker arms move together, go to step 8.
4. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-8).
8. Remove the air pressure regulator and the VCM air

adapter.
9. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22).
Valve Clearance Adjustment
NOTE: Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting
11-3), and monitor ECT SENSOR 1. Adjust the valve screw and the end of the valve stem on No. 1 cylinder,
clearance only when the engine coolant temperature is and slide it back and forth; you should feel a slight
less than 100 F (38 C ). amount of drag.
2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The
"UP" mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be at
the top, and the TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft
sprocket should line up with the top edge of the head.
5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the

locknut, and turn the adjusting screw (A) until the drag
on the feeler gauge is correct.
3. Select the correct feeler gauge for the valve clearance

you are going to check.
Valve Clearance
Intake: 0.15-0.19 mm (0.006-0.007 in)
Exhaust; 0.26-0.30 mm (0.011-0.011 in)
EXHAUST
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
6. While holding the adjusting screw with the screw

driver, tighten the locknut, then recheck the clearance.
Repeat the adjustment, if necessary.
Specified Torque
7 x 0.75 mm
14 N-m (1.4 kgf m, 10 Ibf-ft)
Apply new engine oil to the nut threads.
INTAKE
7. Rotate the crankshaft pulley clockwise. Align the No. 3 11. Rotate the crankshaft pulley clockwise. Align the No. 2
piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with
the top edge of the head. the top edge of the head.
8. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on 12. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on
the No. 3 cylinder. the No. 2 cylinder.
9. Rotate the crankshaft pulley clockwise. Align the No. 4 13. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22).
piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket with
the top edge of the head.
10. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on

the No. 4 cylinder.
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation
Special Tools Required Installation

Holder Handle 07JAB-001020B
Crankshaft Pulley Holder 07AAB-RJAA100 1. Remove any oil and clean the crankshaft pulley (A),
Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A or equivalent the crankshaft (B), the bolt (C), and the washer (D).
Lubricate with new engine oil as shown.
Removal
O: Clean
1. Raise the vehicle on the lift. : Lubricate with new engine oil
2. Remove the right front wheel.
5. Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and the
crankshaft pulley holder (B).
c
07 J AA-001020A
2. Install the crankshaft pulley.
6. Remove the bolt with a socket, 19 mm (C) and a

breaker bar, then remove the crankshaft pulley.
resb
3. When a new crankshaft or a new pulley bolt is 4. When the crankshaft or the pulley bolt is reused:
installed: Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. Do not Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. Do not use an
use an impact wrench. impact wrench.
-1. Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and
-1. Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and
crankshaft pulley holder (B), torque the bolt to 177
crankshaft pulley holder (B), then torque the bolt to
N-m (18.0 kgfm, 130 Ibf-ft) with a torque wrench
37 N-m (3.8 kgfm, 27 Ibf-ft) with a torque wrench
and a socket (C), then remove the bolt.
and a socket (C).
-2. Torque the bolt to 39 N-m (4.0 kgfm, 29 Ibf-ft) with a -2. Tighten the bolt an additional 90 .
torque wrench and a socket.
-3. Tighten the bolt an additional 94 .
c
c
07 J A A -001020A
5. Install the drive belt (see page 10-17).

7. Install the right front wheel.
Cam Chain Removal
NOTE: Keep the cam chain away from magnetic fields. 6. Loosen the water pump pulley mounting bolts (A).
1, Turn the crankshaft pulley so its top dead center (TDC)
mark (A) lines up with the pointer (B).

B 8. Remove the water pump pulley (B).
2. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22). 9. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-10).
3. Check the No. 1 piston at TDC. The "UP" mark (A) on 10. Remove the A/C line bracket mounting bolt.
the camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the
TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft sprocket should line
up with the top edge of the head.
11. Support the engine with a jack and a wood block

under the oil pan.
4. Remove the right front wheel.
12. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side 14. Measure the cam chain separation. If the distance is
engine mount/bracket assembly (B). less than the service limit, replace the cam chain and
the cam chain tensioner.
Standard Distance: 19 mm (0.75 in)
Service Limit: 15 mm (0.59 in)
13. Remove the chain case.

15. Apply new engine oil to the sliding surface of the cam
chain tensioner slider (A).
16. Hold the cam chain tensioner slider with a

screwdriver, then remove the upper bolt (B), and
loosen the lower bolt (C).
(cont'd)
Cam Chain Removal (cont'd) Cam Chain Installation
17. Remove the cam chain tensioner slider. NOTE: Keep the cam chain away from magnetic fields.
1. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC). Align the
TDC mark (A) on the crankshaft sprocket with the
pointer (B) on the oil pump.
18. Remove the cam chain tensioner (A) and the cam
chain guide (B). 2. Remove the crankshaft sprocket (C).
3. Set the camshaft to TDC. The "UP" mark (A) on the
camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the TDC
grooves (B) on the camshaft sprocket should line up
with the top edge of the head.
A
19. Remove the cam chain.
B
4. Install the cam chain on the crankshaft sprocket with 6. Install the cam chain tensioner (A) and the cam chain
the colored piece (A) aligned with the TDC mark (B) on guide (B).
the crankshaft sprocket, then install the crankshaft
sprocket with the special key (C) to the crankshaft.
5. Install the cam chain on the camshaft sprocket with

7. Install the cam chain tensioner slider (A), and loosely
the pointers (A) aligned with the three colored pieces
install the bolt (B).
(B) as shown.
Cam Chain Installation (cont'd)
8. Apply new engine oil to the sliding surface of the cam 13. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0004) to the cylinder
chain tensioner slider (A). head and the engine block mating surfaces of the
chain case and to the inside edge of the bolt holes.
A Install the component within 5 minutes of applying
the liquid gasket.
NOTE;
Apply a 2.5 mm (0.098 in) diameter bead of liquid
gasket along the broken line (A).
gasket to the upper surface contact areas of the
engine block (B).
If too much time has passed after applying the
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.
9. Rotate the cam chain tensioner slider clockwise to

compress the cam chain tensioner, and install the
remaining bolt, then tighten the bolts to the specified
torque.
10. Check the cam chain case oil seal for damage. If the oil
seal is damaged, replace the cam chain case oil seal
(see page 6-21).
11. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the chain
case mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes.
12. Clean and dry the chain case mating surfaces.
A: 2.5 mm (0.098 in)

B: 3.0 mm (0.118 in)
A, B
14. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0004) to the oil pan 16. Tighten the chain case mounting bolts. Wipe off the
mating surface of the chain case and to the inside excess liquid gasket from the oil pan and the chain
edge of the bolt holes. Install the component within 5 case mating area.
minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
8 x 1.25 mm
32 M m
NOTE: (3.3 k g f m , 24 Ibf-ft)
gasket to the shaded area (B).
(3.3 kgf m , 24 Ibf-ft) 12 N-m

A ,B 17. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22).
15. Set the edge of the chain case (A) on the edge of the
oil pan (B), then install the chain case on the engine
block (C).
NOTE:
When installing the chain case, do not slide the
bottom surface onto the oil pan mounting surface.
Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
with oil.
Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the chain case.
(cont'd)
18. Install the side engine mount/bracket assembly (A), 23. Loosen the transmission mount bracket mounting
then tighten new side engine mount/bracket bolts (A) and nuts (B).
assembly mounting bolts (B).
M /T model
B
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N-m (6.0 kgf*m , 44 Ibf-ft)
Replace.

assembly mounting nuts (C).
20. Install the ground cable (D).
oil pan.

25. Loosen the torque rod mounting bolt (A) and nut (B), 27. Tighten the side engine mount/bracket assembly
mounting nuts.
M /T model
(cont'd)
CD
14 x 1.5 mm
83 N-m (8.5 k g fm , 61 Ibf-ft)
93 N-m (9.5 kg fm , 69 Ibf-ft)

12 x 1.25 mm
74 N-m
10 x 1.25 mm CVT model
54 N-m
(7.5 kgfm , 54 Ibf-ft)
(5.5 k g fm , 40 Ibf-ft)
CVT model
93 N-m (9.5 k g fm , 69 Ibf-ft)

74 N-m
(7.5 k g fm , 54 Ibf-ft)
te a
Cam Chain Case Oil Seal

Installation
33. Install the A/C line bracket mounting bolt. Special Tools Required
Bearing Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
1. Clean and dry the cam chain case oil seal housing.
2. Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the lip of the
cam chain case oil seal.
3. Use the driver handle, 15 x 135 L, and the bearing
driver attachment, 52 x 55 mm, to drive a new oil seal
squarely into the chain case to the specified installed
height.
34. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-10).

35. Install the water pump pulley (A), and loosely install
the water pump pulley mounting bolts (B).
B
6 x 1.0 mm
16 N-m
4. Measure the distance between the chain case surface

and the oil seal.
Oil Seal Installed Height
30.3-31.0 mm (1.1 9 3 -1 .2 2 0 in)

37. Tighten the water pump pulley mounting bolts.
(see page 11-5).
30.331.0 mm
(1.193-1.220 in)
Cylinder Head Cover Removal Cylinder Head Cover Installation
1. Remove the intake manifold chamber (see page 9-6). 1. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the
groove of the cylinder head cover.
2. Disconnect the four ignition coil connectors (A).
NOTE: Check and if necessary, replace the head cover
gasket.
2. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of the
cylinder head cover (B). Make sure the head cover
gasket is seated securely.
3. Remove the harness holder (B), and disconnect the

breather hose (C).
4. Remove the cylinder head cover (A).
3. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the cylinder

head.
4. Clean the head cover contacting surfaces with a shop
towel.
5. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0004) to the chain case 6. Place the cylinder head cover (A) on the cylinder head,
contact areas (A). Install the component within 5 then slide the cover slightly back and forth to seat the
minutes of applying the liquid gasket. head cover gasket.
NOTE: NOTE:
Apply a 3.0 mm (0.118 in) diameter bead of liquid Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
gasket to the chain case contact areas. with oil.
If too much time has passed after applying the Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and installing the head cover.
mm
r*--------3.0
(0.118 in)
D
7. Tighten the bolts in three steps. In the final step,

torque all bolts, in sequence, to 10 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7 Ibf-ft).
(cont'd)
Cylinder Head Cover Installation Cylinder Head Removal
(cont'd)
8. Connect the breather hose (A), and install the harness NOTE:
holder (B). Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors
carefully while holding the connector portion.
Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11-3),
and monitor ECT SENSOR 1. To avoid damaging the
cylinder head, wait until the engine coolant
temperature drops below 100 F (38 C) before
loosening the cylinder head bolts.
Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
Keep the cam chain away from magnetic fields.
page 20-153).
9. Connect the four ignition coil connectors (C). 2. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-287).
10. Install the intake manifold chamber (see page 9-11). 3. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-8).
22-87).
5. Remove the throttle body (see page 11-248).
6. Remove the intake manifold/chamber assembly (see
page 9-13).
7. Remove the injectors (see page 11-200).
8. Remove the four ignition coils (see page 4-21).
9. Remove the warm-up TWC (see page 11 -313).
10. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (A) and the
secondary H02S connector (B).
B
11. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector (A) and 14. Disconnect the upper radiator hose (A), the water
the knock sensor connector (B). bypass hose (B), and the heater hose (C).
12. Remove the heater hose bracket (A) and the ground 15. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 connector (D).
cable (B). 16. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22).
17. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-12).
18. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent warpage,
loosen the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat
the sequence until all bolts are loosened.
13. Remove the harness holder bolt (C), then remove the
harness holder (D) from the bracket.
19. Remove the cylinder head.

CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation
Removal 5. Remove the heater hose bracket (A) and the ground
cable bolt (B).
1. Remove the throttle body (see page 11-248).
NOTE: Plug the water bypass hoses.
page 9-13).
3. Disconnect the following engine wire harness
connectors, and remove the wire harness clamps
from the cylinder head:
Four injector connectors
Rocker arm oil control valve connector
Rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
ECT sensor 1 connector
CMP sensor connector
A/F sensor connector
Secondary H02S connector 6. Remove the harness holder bolt (C), then remove the
Oil pressure switch connector harness holder (D) from the bracket.
Knock sensor connector 7. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22).
4. Remove the harness clamps (A) with the harness 8. Remove the camshaft thrust cover (A).
holders (B).
9. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then Installation
loosen the bolt
1. Install the CMP pulse plate (A).
10. Remove the CMP pulse plate (A).

2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then
tighten the bolt
Specified Torque
14 x 1.5 mm
35 N m (3.6 kgfm, 26 Ibf-ft)
CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation (cont'd)
3, Install the camshaft thrust cover (A) with a new O-ring 7. Install the harness clamps (A) with the harness
(B). holders (B).
4. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22). 8. Connect the following engine wire harness
connectors, and install the wire harness clamps to the
5. Install the harness holder (A), cylinder head:
c Four injector connectors
Secondary H02S connector
Oil pressure switch connector
Knock sensor connector
9. Install the intake manifold/chamber assembly (see
page 9-14).
10. Install the throttle body (see page 11-248).
6 x 1.0 mm 11. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the
10 N-m air from the cooling system (see step 8 on page 10-9).
(1.0 kgfm, 7 Ibf-ft)
6. Install the heater hose bracket (B) and the ground
cable (C).
Camshaft Sprocket Removal
NOTE: Keep the cam chain away from magnetic fields. 4. Remove the cylinder head plug (A).
2. Make a reference mark (A) across the camshaft
sprocket and the cam chain.
A
5. Hold the crankshaft pulley, and set the socket wrench

(A) on the camshaft sprocket bolt.
3. Apply new engine oil to the slider surface of the cam

chain tensioner slider through the oil return hole in
the cylinder head.
6. Remove the maintenance bolt (B), and turn the

camshaft clockwise to compress the cam chain
tensioner, then install the 6 x 1.0 mm bolt (C) in the
bolt hole (D) in the engine block through the
maintenance hole and cam chain tensioner (E).
NOTE:
The turning torque should not exceed 57 N-m
(5.8 kgf-m, 42 Ibf-ft) when turning the camshaft.
Do not turn the camshaft counterclockwise.
(cont'd)
Camshaft Sprocket Removal Camshaft Sprocket Installation
(cont'd)
7. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then NOTE: Keep the cam chain away from magnetic fields.
remove the camshaft sprocket.
1. Install the cam chain to the camshaft sprocket by
NOTE: Hang the cam chain with a wire. aligning the reference mark (A), then install the
camshaft sprocket on the camshaft.
2. Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange of

camshaft sprocket bolt.
3. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then
tighten the bolt.
Specified Torque
57 N-m (5.8 kgf-m, 42 Ibf-ft)
te a
4. Apply new engine oil to the slider surface of the cam 8. Install a new cylinder head plug (A).
chain tensioner slider through the oil return hole in
the cylinder head.
5. Hold the crankshaft pulley, and set the socket wrench

(A) on the camshaft sprocket bolt.
A
6. Turn the camshaft clockwise to compress the cam

chain tensioner, then remove the 6 x 1.0 mm bolt (B).
NOTE;
The turning torque should not exceed 57 N-m
(5.8 kgf-m, 42 Ibf-ft) when turning the camshaft.
Do not turn the camshaft counterclockwise.
7. Install the maintenance bolt (C) with a new washer
(D).
Cylinder Head Inspection for Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
Warpage
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-24). 1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22).
2. Inspect the camshaft (see page 6-37). 2. Loosen the rocker arm adjusting screws (A).
3. Check the cylinder head for warpage. Measure along A
the edges, and three ways across the center.
If warpage is less than 0.08 mm (0.003 in) cylinder
head resurfacing is not required.
Maximum resurface is limited to the cylinder head
height standard as shown.
Cylinder Head Warpage
Cylinder Head Height
Standard (New); 119.9-120.1 mm (4.720-4.728 In)
3. Unscrew the rocker shaft mounting bolts two turns at

a time, in the sequence below.
NOTE: Bundle the intake rocker arms with rubber
bands (A) to keep them together as a set.
(D
4. Remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts, then remove
the rocker arm assembly (A).
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE:
Identify each part as it is removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original location.
Inspect the rocker arm shaft and the rocker arms (see page 6-35).
If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in the their original locations.
Bundle the rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set, and remove the bands after the rocker arms
have been installed.
Remove the rocker shaft bolt before removing the rocker shaft from the No. 5 rocker shaft holder.
Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply new engine oil to any contact points, the
bearing surfaces.
When replacing the rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware from new rocker arm assembly.
When reassembling the rocker arm and shaft assembly, position the arrows on the rocker shaft holders facing the
cam chain side.
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection
1. Remove the roeker arm assembly (see page 6-32). 5. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and
check it for an out-of-round condition.
2. Disassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
6-34). Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance
Standard (New): 0.0190.050 mm
3. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker (0.00075-0.00197 in)
location. Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
4. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.
6. Repeat for all rockers and shaft. If the clearance is

beyond the service limit, replace the rocker shaft and
all out of service limit rocker arms. If any VTEC rocker
arm needs replacement, replace the rocker arms as an
assembly.
(cont'd)
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection Camshaft Removal
(cont'd)
W EC Rocker Arms 1. Remove the camshaft sprocket (see page 6-29).
7. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Push on them 2. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-32).
manually. If they do not move smoothly, replace the
3. Remove the CMP sensor (see page 11-203).
rocker arm set.
4. Remove the CMP pulse plate (see page 6-26).
NOTE:
When removing the rocker arm piston from the 5. Remove the camshaft (A).
primary rocker arm, carefully apply air pressure to
the oil passage of the rocker arm.
Apply new engine oil to the rocker arm pistons
when reassembling.
8. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-34),

9. Install the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-46).
Camshaft Inspection
1. Remove the camshaft sprocket (see page 6-29). 6. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the
camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth, and read
2. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-32).
the end play. If the end play is beyond the service
3. Disassemble the rocker arm (see page 6-34). limit, replace the thrust cover and recheck. If it is still
beyond the service limit, replace the cylinder head. If
4. Put the rocker shaft holder bridge/rocker shaft holders it is still beyond the service limit, replace the
on the cylinder head, then tighten the bolts to the camshaft.
specified torque.
Camshaft End Play
Specified Torque Standard (New): 0.050.25 mm (0.00200.0098 in)
6 x 1.0 mm Service Limit; 0.5 mm (0.020 in)
; 15 N-m (1.5 k g fm , 11 Ibf-ft)
10-N-m {1.0 kg fm , 7 Ibf-ft)
7. Remove the camshaft (see page 6-36).
5. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of the 8. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift ramps.
cylinder head. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored,
or excessively worn.
9. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal.
(cont'd)
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
10. Zero the gauge (A) to the journal diameter. 12. Check the total runout with the camshaft supported
on V-blocks:
If the total runout is within the standard, replace the
cylinder head.
# If the total runout is not within the standard, replace
the camshaft, and recheck the oil clearance. If the oil
clearance is still out of tolerance, replace the
cylinder head.
Camshaft Total Runout
11. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder

head. Measure the inside diameter of each camshaft
bearing surface, and check for an out-of-round
condition:
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within limits,
go to step 13.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit, and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the 13. Measure the cam lobe height.
service limit, and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 12. Cam Lobe Height Standard (New)
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance INTAKE EXHAUST
Standard (New): 0.0450.084 mm 34.945 mm
(0.00177 -0.00331 in) PRI
(1.37578 in) 35.614 mm
Service Limit: 0.100 mm (0.00394 in) 30.529 mm (1.40212 in)
SEC
(1.20193 in)
PRI SEC
-e/c
PRI: Prim ary SEC: Secondary IN: Intake

EX: Exhaust C/C: Cam Chain
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal
Special Tools Required 7. Install the valve guide seal remover.

Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 07757-PJ1010A
Identify the valves and the valve springs as they are

removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-24).
2. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-32).
3. Remove the camshaft (see page 6-36).
4. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A), and a plastic
mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen the
valve cotters.
8. Remove the valve seal.
5. Install the valve spring compressor and the

attachment. Compress the valve spring, and remove
the valve cotters.
9. Remove the valve spring seat.
6. Remove the valve spring compressor and the valve

spring compressor attachment, then remove the
spring retainer, the valve spring, and the valve.
Valve Inspection Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Inspection
1. Remove the valves (see page 6-39). 1. Remove the valves (see page 6-39).
2. Measure the valve in these areas. 2. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with a
micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide,
Intake Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 118.55-119.15 mm measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge.
(4.6673-4.6910 in) Take the measurements in three places along the
B Standard (New): 27.8528.15 mm valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
(1.0965-1.1083 in)
C Standard (New): 5.485.49 mm The difference between the largest guide
(0.2157-0.2161 in) measurement and the smallest stem measurement
C Service Limit: 5.45 mm (0.2146 in) should not exceed the service limit.
Exhaust Valve Dimensions Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
A Standard (New): 117.25--117.85 mm Standard (New): 0.020.05 mm (0.00080.0020 in)
(4.6161-4.6398 in) Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
B Standard (New): 22.8523.15 mm
(0.8996-0.9114 in) Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
C Standard (New): 5.45 5.46 mm Standard (New): 0.050.08 mm (0.00200.0031 in)
(0.2146-0.2150 in) Service Limit: 0.11 mm (0.0043 in)
C Service Limit: 5.42 mm (0.2134 in)
nSl
Valve Guide Replacement
Special Tools Required 5. Working from the camshaft side, use the valve guide
Valve Guide Driver, 5.35 x 9.7 mm 07742-0010100 driver and an air hammer to drive the guide about 2
Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7A100 mm (0.08 in) towards the combustion chamber. This
will knock off some of the carbon and make removal
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line with the
6-40). valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Wear
safety goggles or a face shield.
2. As illustrated below, use a commercially available
air-impact valve guide driver, 5.35 x 9.7 mm (A) 6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out toward
modified to fit the diameter of the valve guides. In the camshaft side of the head.
most cases, the same procedure can be done using
the valve guide driver and a conventional hammer.
A 5.3 mm
(0.209 in)
L J.
I 87 mm
SC 57 mm
f - (3.43 in )' (2.24 in)
H10.8i mm
(0.425 in)
3. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill them

in the freezer section of a refrigerator for at least an
hour.
4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder
head to 300 F (150 C). Monitor the temperature with
a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head hotter
than 300 F (150 C); excessive heat may loosen the
valve seats.
7. If a valve guide will not move, drill it out with an 8 mm

(5/16 in) bit, then try again.
NOTE: Drill guides only in extreme cases; you could
damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks.
8. Remove the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a
time, as you need them.
(cont'd)
Valve Guide Replacement (cont'd)
9. Apply a thin coat of new engine oil to the outside of 14. Check the clearances with a valve (see page 6-40).
the new valve guide. Install the guide from the Verify that a valve slides in the intake and exhaust
camshaft side of the head; use the valve guide driver valve guides without sticking.
to drive the guide in to the specified installed height
15. Inspect the valve seat. If necessary renew the valve
(A) of the guide (B). If you have all 16 guides to do, you
seat using a valve seat cutter (see page 6-43).
may have to reheat the head.
Valve Guide Installed Height
15.85-16.35 mm (0.6240-0.6437 in)
10. Coat both the valve guide reamer, 5.5 mm and the
valve guide with cutting oil.
11. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the
valve guide bore.
12. Continue to rotate the valve guide reamer, 5.5 mm

clockwise while removing it from the bore.
13. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water to
remove any cutting residue.
Valve Seat Reconditioning
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page 6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect for even valve
6-40). If the valve guides are worn, replace them (see seating: Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the
page 6-41) before cutting the valve seats. valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the seat
2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a
several times.
valve seat cutter.
B
7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by the

blue compound, should be centered on the seat:
If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you must
3, Carefully cut a 45 seat, removing only enough make a second cut with the 67.5 cutter (intake seat)
material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat. or 60 cutter (exhaust seat) to move it down, then
one more cut with the 45 cutter to restore seat
4. Bevel the upper and lower edges at the angles shown
width.
in the illustration. Check the width of the seat and
adjust accordingly. If it is too low (close to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut with the 30 cutter to move it up,
then make one more cut with the 45 cutter to
restore seat width.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made with the
45 cutter.
5. Make one more very light passes with the 45 cutter

to remove any possible burrs caused by the other
cutters.
Intake Valve Seat Width
(0.03346-0.04528 in)
Service Lim it: 1.60 mm (0.0630 in)
Exhaust Valve Seat Width
(0.04921 0.06102 in)
Valve Seat Reconditioning (cont'd) Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal
Installation
8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the headr and Special Tools Required
measure valve stem installed height (A). Stem Seal Driver 07PAD-0010000
Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 07757-PJ1010A
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height
Standard (New): 46.1-46.5 mm (1.815-1.831 in)
1. Coat the valve stems with new engine oil. Install the
Service Li mit: 46.8 mm (1.843 in)
valves in the valve guides.
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height
Standard (New); 4 6.2-46.6 mm (1.819-1.835 in) 2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly.
Service Limit: 46.9 mm (1.846 in) 3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the 5.5 mm side
of the stem seal driver (B).
NOTE: The exhaust valve seal (C) has a black spring
(D), and the intake valve seal (E) has a white or silver
spring (F); they are not interchangeable.
^
a
9. If valve stem installed height is over the service limit,

replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over the
service limit, replace the cylinder head; the valve seat
in the head is too deep.
5. Install the valve spring and the spring retainer. Place

the end of the valve spring with closely wound coils
toward the cylinder head.
Camshaft Installation
6. install the valve spring compressor attachment and 1. Install the camshaft (A).
the valve spring compressor. Compress the valve
spring and install the valve cotters.
2. Install the CMP pulse plate (see page 6-27).

3. Install the CMP sensor (see page 11-203).
7. Remove the valve spring compressor and the valve
spring compressor attachment. 4. Install the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-46).
8. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three 5. Install the camshaft sprocket (see page 6-30).
times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
seating of the valve and the valve cotters. Tap the
valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend the
stem.
NOTE: Be sure to raise the head off the work bench so
the valve is not possibly damaged.
Rocker Arm Assembly Installation Cylinder Head Installation
1. If the rocker arm assembly is disassembled, 1. Clean the cylinder head and the engine block surface.
reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-34).
2. Install a new coolant separator (A) in the engine block
2. Apply engine oil to the end of the valve stem. whenever the engine block is replaced.
3. Install the rocker arm assembly (A), then remove the B
rubber bands (B).
3. Install a new cylinder head gasket (B) and the dowel

pins (C) on the engine block. Always use a new
cylinder head gasket.
4. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC). Align the
TDC mark (A) on the crankshaft sprocket with the
pointer (B) on the oil pump.
4. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in sequence.
Specified Torque
6 x 1.0 mm
15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 ibf-ft)
; 10 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7 Ibf-ft)
5. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-8).

5. Set the camshaft TDC. The '"UP": mark (A) on the 9. Tighten all cylinder head bolts an additional 130 .
camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the TDC
grooves (B)on the camshaft sprocket should line up
with the top edge of the head.
10. Install the cam chain (see page 6-14).

11. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22),
7. Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange of all
cylinder head bolts. 12. Connect the upper radiator hose (A), the water bypass
8. Torque the cylinder head bolts in sequence to 29 N*m hose (B), and the heater hose (C).
(3.0 kgf*m, 22 Ibf-ft) with a beam-type torque wrench if
possible. When using a preset-click-type torque
wrench, be sure to tighten slowly and do not
overtighten. If a bolt makes any noise while you are
torquing it, loosen the bolt and retighten it from the
'first step.
@ 9 :6
13. Connect the ECT sensor 1 connector (D).

Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
14. Install the harness holder (A). 17. Connect the CMP sensor connector (A) and the
secondary H02S connector (B).
C
18. Install the warm-up TWC (see page 11-313).

15. Install the heater hose bracket (B) and the ground 19. Install the four ignition coils (see page 4-21).
cable (C).
20. Install the injectors (see page 11-200).
16. Connect the oil pressure switch connector (A) and the
knock sensor connector (B). 21. Install the intake manifold/chamber assembly (see
page 9-14).
23. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and
connectors are installed correctly.
22 - 88 ).
25. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to

ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump
runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line.
Repeat this operation three times, then check for fuel
leakage at any point in the fuel line.
26. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the
air from the cooling system (see step 8 on page 10-9).
(see page 11-5).
28. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-273).
29. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-20).
Engine Block
Special Tools.................. ................ ....... .............7-2
Component Location Index............... .............................. 7-3
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection. 7-5
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement....... .......... . 7-6
Connecting Rod Bearing R eplacem ent.........................7-8
Oil Pan Rem oval............. .......... 7-10
Crankshaft and Piston Rem oval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 11
Crankshaft Inspection.................. .............................. 7-13
Block and Piston Inspection------- -------------------- . . . . . . . 7-14
Cylinder Bore Honing......... ................ . . . . . . . . 7-16
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement . ......... 7-17
Piston Ring Replacem ent.......................................... ....7-19
Piston Installation.............................................. ............7-21
Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection....... ............................ 7-23
Crankshaft Installation...................... ......................... . . . 7-23
CKP Pulse Plate Replacem ent..................................... ..7-27
Oil Pan Installation............. ................................ . ... 7-27
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation In -
C ar.......... ......................................................... ........ . . . 7 - 3 0

Drain Bolt/Sealing Bolt Installation................ ............ 7-31
Block Cover Removal and Installation........................... 7-32
Special Tools
ReiNo. Tool Number Description Qty

070AF-PWC0110 Pilot Pin 1
070AF-PWC0120 Insert Adjust 1
070AF-PWC0130 Pilot Collar, O.D. 18 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 1
07973-6570500 Piston Base 1
07973-6570600 Piston Base Spring 1
07 PAF-0010700 Insert Pin 1
07TGF-001000A Piston Base Head 1
07ZAD-PNAA100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 96 mm 1
KBS
. SEALING BOLT
KNOCK SENSOR
Replacement, page 11 -204
THRUST WASHERS
SEALING BOLT
CRANKSHAFT
End Play, page 7-5
Rem oval, page 7-11
Inspection, page 7-13
CKP PULSE PLATE

D RAIN BOLT
TRANSMISSION END
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
Installation, step 25 on page 7-25
Installation-in car, page 7-30
M AIN BEARINGS
Replacement, page 7-6 O-RING
DOWEL PIN
DIPSTICK TUBE
BEARING CAP O-RING
OIL PAN GASKET

DOWEL PIN
BEARING CAP
BRIDGE DOWEL PIN
OIL PAN
Removal, page 7-10
PISTON RINGS
PISTON
Rem oval, page 7-11
Disassem bly, page 7-17
CONNECTING ROD
End Play, page 7-5
ENGINE BLOCK
C ylinder Bore Honing, page 7-16
COOLANT SEPARATOR
BLOCK COVER
CONNECTING ROD
CONNECTING ROD BEARING BEARING CAP
CONNECTING ROD BOLT

Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play inspection
1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-14). 5. If the end play is beyond the service limit, replace the
thrust washers, and recheck. If it is still beyond the
2. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler
service limit, replace the crankshaft (see page 7-11),
gauge (A) between the connecting rod (B) and the
crankshaft (C).
Connecting Rod End Play
Standard (New): 0.150.35 m m (0.0060.013 in)
Service Limit: 0.40 mm (0.015 i n)
B
3. If the connecting rod end play is beyond the service

limit, install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it is
still beyond the service limit, replace the crankshaft
(see page 7-11).
4. To check crankshaft end play, push the crankshaft
firmly away from the dial indicator by prying, and zero
the dial against the end of the crankshaft. Then pull
the crankshaft firmly back toward the indicator by
prying; the dial reading should not exceed the service
limit.
Crankshaft End Play
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement
Main Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. Remove the bearing cap bridge, the main bearing
caps, and the main bearings haves, and measure the
1. Remove the bearing cap bridge, the main bearing widest part of the plastigage.
caps, and the main bearing halves (see page 7-11).
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance
2. Clean each main journal and main bearing half with a Standard (New): 0.0160.034 mm
clean shop towel. (0.00063 - 0.00134 in)
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main
journal.
4. Reinstall the main bearings, the main bearing caps,
and bearing cap bridge, then torque the bearing cap
bolts to 25 N-m (2.5 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft) in the proper
sequence.
NOTE:
Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges.
Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
7. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,

remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of
the main bearing. Install a new, complete main
bearing with the same color code, and recheck the
clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape the main
bearings or the main bearing caps to adjust clearance
8. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect,
try the next larger or smaller main bearing (the color
listed above or below that one), and check the
clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be
obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller
main bearings, replace the crankshaft (see page 7-11)
and start over.
5. Tighten the bearing cap bolts an additional 40 .

Main Bearing Selection Main Journal Code Location
Block Bore Code Location

Letters have been stamped on the end of the engine
block as a code for the size of each of the five main
journal bores.
Use them, and the numbers stamped on the crankshaft
(codes for main journal size), to choose the correct main
bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a
wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or
detergent.
No. 5 JOURNAL No. 1 JOURNAL

(Transmission end) (Pulley end)

Bearing - Larger block bore
Color code is on the

A B c D
Smaller bearing (Thicker)
Red Pink Yellow Green
Pink Yellow Green Brown
Yellow Green Brown Black
Green Brown Black Blue
Smaller Smaller
main bearing
journal (Thicker)
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. Remove the connecting rod cap and the eonnecting
rod bearing half, and measure the widest part of the
1. Remove the bearing cap bridge (see page 7-11). plastigage.
2. Remove the connecting rod cap and the connecting Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journai Oil
rod bearing half. Clearance
Standard (New); 0.0200.038 mm
3. Clean the connecting rod journal and the connecting (0.00079-0.00150 in)
rod bearing half with a clean shop towel. Service Limit: 0.050 mm (0.00197 in)
4. Place one strip of plastigage across the connecting
rod journal.
5. Reinstall the connecting rod bearing half and
connecting rod cap, and torque the bolts to 10 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7 Ibf-ft) + 9 0 .
NOTE;
Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges.
Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
7. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,

remove the upper half of the connecting rod bearing,
install a new, complete connecting rod bearing with
the same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do
not file, shim, or scrape the connecting rod bearings
or the connecting rod caps to adjust clearance.
8. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect,
try the next larger or smaller connecting rod bearing
(the color listed above or below that one), and check
clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be
obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller
connecting rod bearing, replace the crankshaft (see
page 7-11) and start over.
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Beari ng - Larger big rod bore
Identification
Each connecting rod falls into one of four tolerance
Color code is on the
ranges (from 0 to 0.024 mm (0.0009 in), in 0.006 mm edge of the bearing
(0.0002 in) increments) depending on the size of its big - Smaller bearing (Thicker)
end bore. Green
A Red Pink Yellow
It's then stamped with a number (1 ,2 ,3, or 4) indicating
the range. You may find any combination of 1 ,2,3, or 4 B Pink Yellow Green Brown
in any engine.
C Yellow Green Brown Black
Big End Bore Size: 43.0 m m (1.693 in) D Green Brown Black Blue
Inspect each connecting rod for cracks and heat
V
Smaller Sm aller
damage. rod bearing
journal (Thicker)
Connecting Rod Big End Bore Code Locations
Connecting Rod Journal Code Location
Numbers have been stamped on the side of each
connecting rod as a code for the size of the big end. Use
them, and the letters stamped on the crank (codes for
connecting rod journal size), to choose the correct
connecting rod bearings. If the codes are indecipherable
because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not
scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them
only with solvent or detergent.

stam ped on the connecting

rod and the other h alf is
stam ped on the rod cap.
Oil Pan Removal
1. If the engine is already out of the vehicle, go to step 7, 9. CVT model: Remove the driveshaft heat shield.
3. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-10).
5. Remove the A/C compressor without disconnecting
the A/C hoses (see step 44 on page 5-6).
6. Remove the torque rod (see page 5-28).
7. Remove the dipstick, then remove the dipstick tube.
10. Remove the torque rod bracket (see page 5-35).

11. Remove the transmission mounting bolts.
8. Remove the CKP sensor cover (A), then disconnect

the CKP sensor connector (B).
t o
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
12. Remove the oil pan bolts. 1. Remove the engine/IMA motor/transmission
assembly (see page 5-3).
13. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the oil pan
from the engine block in the places shown. 2. Remove the transmission:
3. Remove the IMA motor rotor (see page 12-224), the
IMA motor housing (see page 12-227), and the IMA
motor rotor position sensor (see page 12-228).
4. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-24).
5. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-10).
6. Remove the oil screen (A), then remove the oil pump
(B).
14. Remove the oil pan.

NOTE: Lower the oil pan carefully so as not to damage
the IMA motor (resolver stator).
(cont'd)
Crankshaft and. Piston Removal (cont'd)
7. Remove the bearing cap bolts. To prevent warpage, 13. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around
loosen the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the top of each cylinder, remove it with a ridge reamer
the sequence until all bolts are loosened. (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. If
the ridge is not removed, it may damage the pistons
CD as they are pushed out.
8. Remove the bearing cap bridge and the main bearing

caps.
9. Remove the connecting rod caps/bearings. Keep all
connecting rod caps/bearings in order.
10. Lift crankshaft (A) out of the engine block, being
careful not to damage the journals and the CKP pulse
plate (B).
11. Remove the CKP pulse plate.

12. Remove the upper connecting rod bearing halves
from the connecting rods, and set them aside with
their respective caps.
Crankshaft Inspection
14. Use the wooden handle of a hammer (A) to drive out Out-of-Round and Taper
the piston/connecting rod assembly (B). Take care not
1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block (see
to damage the cylinder with the connecting rod.
page 7-11).
2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe cleaners
or a suitable brush.
3. Check the keyway slot and threaded holes for
damage.
4. Measure the out-of-round at the middle of each
connecting rod and the main journal in two places.
The difference between measurements on each
journal must not be more than the service limit.
Journal Out-of-Round
15. Reinstall the bearing cap bridge, the main bearing

caps, and the main bearings on the engine block in
the proper order.
16. Reinstall the connecting rod bearings and the
connecting rod caps after removing each
piston/connecting rod assembly.
17. Mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its
cylinder number to make sure they are reused in
original order.
NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod i __ i
does not indicate its position in the engine, it indicates
the rod bore size.
5. Measure the taper at the edges of each connecting

rod and the main journal. The difference between
measurements on each journal must not be more
than the service limit.
Journal Taper
Crankshaft Inspection (cont'd) Block and Piston Inspection
Straightness 1. Remove the crankshaft and the pistons (see page

7-11).
6. Place the V-blocks on a flat surface.
2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks.
7. Check the total runout with the crankshaft supported
on V-blocks. 3. Measure the piston skirt diameter (A) at a point 16 mm
(0.63 in) from the bottom of the skirt.
8. Measure the runout on all of the mai n journals. Rotate
the crankshaft two complete revolutions. The Piston Di ameter
difference between measurements on each main Standard (New): 72.9872.99 mm
journal must not be more than the service limit. (2,8732-2.8736 in)
Crankshaft Total Runout
Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) max. Oversize Piston Diameter
Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.0016 in) 0.25: 73.23-73.24 mm (2.8831 -2.8835 in)
te s t
4. Measure wear and taper in direction Y at three levels 6. Check the top of the engine block for warpage.
in each cylinder as shown. If measurements in any Measure along the edges and across the center as
cylinder are beyond the oversize bore service limit, shown.
replace the engine block. If the engine block is to be
Engine Block Warpage
rebored, refer to step 7 after reboring.
Cylinder Bore S ize
(2.87401-2.87460 in)
Oversize
0.25: 73.250-73.265 mm (2.8839-2.8844 in)
Reboring limit: 0.25 mm (0.0098 in) max.
Bore Taper
Limit: (Difference between first and third
measurement)
0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
(cont'd)
Block and Piston Inspection (cont'd) Cylinder Bore Honing
7. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore 1. Measure the cylinder bores (see page 7-14).
diameter and the piston diameter. If the clearance is
If the engine block is to be reused, hone the cylinders
near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the piston
and remeasure the bores. Only scored or scratched
and the engine block for excessive wear.
cylinder bore must be honed.
Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance
Standard (New): 0.0100.035 mm 2. Hone the cylinder bores with honing oil and a fine
(0.000390.00138 in) (400 grit) stone in a 60 degree cross-hatch pattern (A).
Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) NOTE:
Use only a rigid hone with 400 grit or finer stone
such as Sunnen, Ammco, or equivalent.
Do not use stones that are worn or broken.
3. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the

engine block of all metal particles. Wash the cylinder
bores with hot soapy water, then dry and oil them
immediately to prevent rusting.
NOTE: Never use solvent, it will only redistribute the
grit on the cylinder walls.
4. If scoring or scratches are still present in the cylinder
bores after honing to the service limit, rebore the
engine block. Some light vertical scoring and
scratching is acceptable if it is not deep enough to
catch your fingernail and does not run the full length
of the bore.
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement
Speci al Tools Required 4. Assemble and adjust the length of the insert pin (A)
. Pilot Pin 070AF-PWC0110 and the insert adjust (B) to 45 mm (1.77 in).
Piston Base 07973-6570500
Piston Base Spring 07973-6570600
Piston Base Head 07TGF-001000A
Pilot Collar, O.D. 18 mm 070AF-PWC0130
. Insert Adjust 070AF-PWC0120
Insert Pin 07PAF-0010700
Disassembly
1. Remove the piston from the engine block (see page
7-11).
2. Assemble the special tool as shown.
5. With the arrow on top of the piston pointing up, place

the piston assembly (A) on the piston base head (B).
Be sure you position the recessed flat area of the
piston against the area of the piston base head (C) as
shown.
3. Temporarily install the pilot collar, O.D. 18 mm (A)

over the pilot pin (B), and adjust the piston base head A .
(C) as shown, then tighten the screws (D). Remove the
pilot collar.
6. Press the piston pin (D) out with the insert pin and the
insert adjust (E), the pilot collar (F), and a hydraulic
press.
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont'd)
Inspection 3. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter

and the piston pin hole diameter in the piston.
NOTE: Inspect the piston, the piston pin, and the
connecting rod when they are at room temperature. Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. (0.00039-0.00067 In)
Piston Pi n Diameter
(0.708500.7086S in)
4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.

2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter.
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance
Standard (New): -0.036-0.019 mm
(-0.00142 0.00075 in)
Piston Ring Replacement
Reassembly 1. Remove the piston from the engine block (see page
7-11).
1. Assemble the piston and the connecting rod with the
arrow (A) and the embossed mark (B) on the same 2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston
side. rings (B).
2. Insert the pilot collar (A) into the piston and the
connecting rod.
3. Clean all the ring grooves thoroughly with a

squared-off broken ring, or a ring groove cleaner with
a blade to fit the piston grooves. File down the blade,
if necessary. The top and second ring grooves are
1.0 mm (0.039 in) wide, and the oil ring groove is
2.0 mm (0.079 in) wide. Do not use a wire brush to
clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring grooves deeper
with the cleaning tool.
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the
connecting rod, do not install new rings yet.
3. With the arrow on top of the piston and the embossed

mark on the connecting rod facing up, place the
piston assembly (B) on the piston base head (C).
Be sure you position the recessed flat area of the
piston against the area of the piston base head (D) as
shown.
4. Press the piston pin (E) in with the insert pin and the
insert adjust (F) and a hydraulic press.
Piston Ring Replacement (cont'd)
4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the cylinder 6. Install the rings as shown. The top ring (A) has a R or
bore 1520 mm (0.590.78 in) from the bottom. 1N mark, and the second ring (B) has a 2R or 2N mark.
The manufacturing marks (C) must be facing upward.
15-20 m m (0.59-0.78 i n)
5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler

gauge;
If the gap is too small, check to see if you have the
proper rings for your engine.
If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
diameter against the wear limits (see page 7-14).
If the bore is over the service limit, the engine block
must be rebored.
Piston Ring End-Gap
cz>
Top Ring:
Service Limit: 0.60 mm (0.023 i n)
Second Ring;
RIKEN
NIPPON
Oil Ring:
Piston Installation
7. After installing a new set of rings, measure the If the Crankshaft is Already Installed
ring-to-groove clearances:
1. Set t he crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for
Top Ring Clearance each cylinder as its piston is installed.
RIKEN
Standard (New): 0.0650.090 mm (0.0030.003 in) 2. Remove the connecting rod caps, and check that the
Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.005 in) connecting rod bearing is securely in place.
NIPPON
Standard (New): 0.061 0.090 mm (0.0030.003 in) 3. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the ring
Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.005 in) compressor, and the cylinder bore, then attach the
ring compressor to the piston/connecting rod
Second Ring Clearance
assembly.
Service Limit: 0.12 mm (0.004 in) 4. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly with the
arrow (A) facing the cam chain side of the engine
block.
5. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly in the

8. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they do
cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a
not bind.
hammer (A).
9. Position the ring end gaps as shown:
Maintain downward force on the ring compressor (B)
to prevent the rings from expanding before entering
About 90
the cylinder bore.
Piston Installation (cont'd)
6. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and check If the Crankshaft is Not Installed
the connecting rod-to-rod journal alignment before
pushing the piston into place. 1. Remove the connecting rod caps, and check that the
connecting rod bearing is securely in place.
7. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with
plastigage (see page 7-8). 2. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the ring
compressor, and the cylinder bore, then attach the
8. Inspect the connecting rod bolts (see page 7-23). ring compressor to the piston/connecting rod
9. Apply new engine oil to the connecting rod bolt assembly.
threads, then install the connecting rod caps with the 3. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly with the
connecting rod bearings. Torque the bolts to 10 N-m arrow (A) facing the cam chain side of the engine
(1.0 kgf-m, 7 Ibf-ft). block.
10. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90 .
NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you
tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go back
to step 8 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to the
specified angle.
4. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly in the

cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a
hammer (A).
Maintain downward force on the ring compressor (B)
to prevent the rings from expanding before entering
the cylinder bore.
5. Position all pistons at top dead center (TDC).

Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection Crankshaft Installation
1. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt at Special Tools Required
point A and point B with a micrometer. . Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 96 mm 07ZAD-PNAA100
30 mm (1.18 in)
1. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage
(see page 7-6).
2. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with
plastigage (see page 7-8).
3. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and the
connecting rods.
4. Apply new engine oil to the inside of the main
bearings and the connecting rod bearings.
15 mm (0.59 in)
5. Install the CKP pulse plate (A) on the crankshaft (B);
2. Calculate the difference in diameter between point A face the marked side (C) toward the transmission, and
and point B. align the tab (D) on the CKP pulse plate with the
groove (E) on the crankshaft.
Point A Point B = Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter 8x 1.0 mm
Specification: 00.05 mm (00.0019 in)
3. If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance,
replace the connecting rod bolt.
6. Hold the crankshaft so connecting rod journal No. 2

and connecting rod journal No. 3 are straight up, and
lower the crankshaft into the engine block.
Crankshaft Installation (cont'd)
7. Apply new engine oil to the side with the thrust 12. Torque the connecting rod bolts to 10 N-m ( 1.0 kgfm,
washer groove. Install the thrust washers (A) in the 7 Ibf-ft).
No. 4 journal.
13. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90 .
NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you
tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go back
to step 8 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to the
specified angle.
8. Inspect the connecting rod bolts (see page 7-23).

9. Apply new engine oil to the threads and flanges of the
connecting rod bolts.
10. Seat the connecting rod journals into connecting rod
No. 1 and connecting rod No. 4. Line up the mark (A) 14. Install the main bearing caps with the arrows facing
on the connecting rod and the connecting rod cap, (A) the cam chain side on the bearing cap bridge.
then install the connecting rod caps and the
connecting rod bolts finger-tight.
A
11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise, and seat the

connecting rod journals into connecting rod No. 2 and 15. Remove old liquid gasket from the bearing cap
connecting rod No. 3. Line up the mark on the bridge/No. 5 main bearing cap mating surfaces.
connecting rod and the connecting rod cap, then 16. Clean and dry the bearing cap bridge/No. 5 main
install the connecting rod caps and the connecting rod bearing cap mating surfaces.
bolts finger-tight.
17. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0004) to the engine 21. Tighten the bearing cap bolts an additional 40 .
block mating surface of the bearing cap bridge/No. 5
main bearing cap. Install the component within 5
NOTE:
illr r
^ il
o o o o o. o o o o
c5 cT c? o 22. Clean the excess liquid gasket off the engine block.
L_ J TT /
JiI' /
23. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
12 mm
2.5 mm (0.47 in)
crankshaft oil seal.
(0.098 in)
25. Use the driver handle, 15 X 135 L (A), and the oil seal
driver attachment, 96 mm (B), to drive a new
crankshaft oil seal squarely into the block to the
specified installed height.
18. Put the bearing cap bridge on the engine block. A
07749-0010000
19. Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange of the
bearing cap bolts.
20. Torque the bearing cap bolts in sequence to 25 N-m
(2.5 kgfm, 18 Ibf-ft).
(cont'd)
Crankshaft Installation (cont'd)
26. Measure the distance between the cylinder block (A) 32. Install the transmission:
and the oil seal (B). M/T model (see page 13-49)
Oil Seal Installed Height CVT model (see page 14-165)
0 . 2 - 1.2 mm (0.0 0 8 -0 .0 4 7 in) 33. Install the engine/IMA motor/transmission (see page
5-11).
NOTE: When any crankshaft main or connecting rod
bearing is replaced, run the engine at idle speed until
it reaches normal operating temperature, then
continue to run it for about 15 minutes.
27. Install the oil pump (A) with a new O-ring (B).
28. Install the oil screen (C) w ith a new gasket (D).
29. Install the oil pan (see page 7-27).
30. Install the cylinder head (see page 6-46).
31. Install the IMA motor rotor position sensor (see page
12-228), the IMA motor housing (see page 12-227),
and the IMA motor rotor (see page 12-224).
CKP Pulse Plate Replacement Oil Pan Installation
1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block (see 1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil pan
page 7-11). mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes.
2. Remove the CKP pulse plate (A). 2. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces and the
O-ring groove.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the journals and the
CKP pulse plate. 3. Install a new oil pan gasket (A), a new O-ring (B), and
the dowel pins (C) on the oil pan.
8 x 1 . 0 mm
3. Install the CKP pulse plate on the crankshaft (B); face

the marked side (C) toward the transmission, and
align the tab (D) on the CKP pulse plate with the
groove (E) on the crankshaft.
4. Install the crankshaft on the engine block (see page
7-23).
(cont'd)
Oil Pan Installation (cont'd)
4. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0004) to the engine 5. Install the oil pan.
block mating surface of the oil pan and to the inside
NOTE:
edge of the bolt holes. Install the component within 5
minutes of applying the liquid gasket. Raise the oil pan carefully not to damage IMA motor
rotor position sensor.
NOTE: Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
Apply a 2.5 mm (0.098 in) diameter bead of liquid with oil.
gasket along the broken line (A). Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
Apply a 5.0 mm (0.197 in) diameter bead of liquid installing the oil pan.
gasket to the shaded area (B). Make sure to install the bolts in the correct locations
Apply a 3.0 mm (0.118 in) diameter bead of liquid according to size.
gasket along the broken line (C).
A
6. Tighten the bolts in three steps. Wipe off the excess 9. CVT model: Install the driveshaft heat shield.
liquid gasket from crankshaft pulley end and the drive
plate end.
Specified torque
: 24 N*m (2.4 kgfm , 18 Ibf-ft)
: 12 N-m (1.2 kgfm , 9 Ibfft)
(2.2 k g fm , 16 Ib fft)
10. Connect the CKP sensor connector (A), then install the
CKP sensor cover (B).
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N-m (6.5 k g fm , 4 7 Ib fft)
8. Install the torque rod bracket (see page 5-35).
(cont'd)
Oil Pan Installation (cont'd) Transmission End Crankshaft Oil
Seal Installation - In Car
11. Install the dipstick tube (A) with a new O-ring (B), then Special Tools Required
install the dipstick. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 96 mm 07ZAD-PNAA100
1. Remove the transmission:

2. Remove the IMA motor rotor (see page 12-224), the
IMA motor housing (see page 12-227), and the IMA
motor rotor position sensor (see page 12-228).
3. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
crankshaft oil seal.
5. Use the driver handle, 15 X 135 L (A), and the oil seal
driver attachment, 96 mm (B), to drive a new
crankshaft oil seal squarely into the block to the
specified installed height.
12. If the engine is still in the vehicle, do steps 14 through

17.
13. Install the torque rod (see page 5-28).
14. Install the A/C compressor (see step 24 on page 5-16).
8 - 10).
6. Measure the distance between the cylinder block (A)

and the oil seal (B).
Oil Seal Installed Height
0 .2 -1 .2 mm (0.008-0.047 in)
taSb
Drain Bolt/Sealing Bolt Installation
7. Install the IMA motor rotor position sensor (see page NOTE:
12-228), the IMA motor housing (see page 12-227), When installing the drain bolt (A), always use a new
and the IMA motor rotor (see page 12-224). washer (B).
8. Install the transmission: When installing the sealing bolt(s) (C), always use a
new bolt(s) and washer(s).
# CVT model (see page 14-165) a e
2 8 x 1 .0 m m 2 4 x 1 .5 m m
24 x 1.5 mm
75 N-m(7.6 kg f m, 55 Ibf ft)
Replace.
Block Cover Removal and Installation
1. Remove the block cover (A).
2. Install the block cover in the reverse order of removal.

Engine Lubrication
Special Tools................ .....................................................8-2
Symptom Troubleshooting Index................... ............. 8-4
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram ................ 8-5
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
(O pen)....................................................... .......................8-6
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
(Short)..............................................................................8-7
Oil Pressure Switch T e s t.............................................. ...8 -8
Oil Pressure Switch Replacement................................. 8-8
Oil Pressure Test.................................................................8-9
Engine Oil Level Check......................................................8-9
Engine Oil Replacement........................... .......................8-10
Engine Oil Filter Replacement......................................... 8-11
Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement................................... 8-12
Oil Pump Overhaul........................................................... 8-13
Oil/Air Separator Removal/Installation..........................8-17
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Description Gty

07AAA-PLCA100 Oil Filter Wrench 1
(D 07AAK-SNAA600 Support Eyelet 1

te a
OIL/AIR SEPARATOR
O-RING Rem oval/Installation, page 8-17
OIL PUMP
O verhaul, page 8-13
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator C ircuit
Troubleshooting (Open), page 8-6
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit
T roubleshooting (Short), page 8-7
Test, page 8-8
Oil Pressure Test, page 8-9
DIPSTICK TUBE
OIL FILTER
OIL FILTER FEED PIPE

OIL PAN GASKET
OIL PAN
Removal, page 7-10
Engine Oil Level Check, page 8-9
Engine Oil Replacement, page 8-10
O-RING
CKP SENSOR
DRAIN BOLT Replacement, page 11-203

Excessive engine oil consumption 1. Check for oil leaks. Check the
2. Check for worn valve guide(s) (see page 6-40) or maintenance
worn valve stem seal(s) (see page 6-40). records as engine
3. Check for damaged or worn piston ring(s) (see oil that is worn out
page 7-19). burns off at a
4. Check for damaged or worn engine internal parts higher rate
(cylinder wall, pistons, etc.) (see page 7-14).
Low oil pressure indicator stays on 1. Check the engine oil level (see page 8-9). A wire shorted to
2. Do the low oil pressure indicator circuit ground between
troubleshooting (Short) (see page 8-7). the ECM/PCM and
the oil pressure
switch
Low oil pressure indicator does not 1. Do the low oil pressure indicator circuit An open in the wire
come on with the ignition switch in troubleshooting (Open) (see page 8-6). between the
ON (II) 2. Test the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8). ECM/PCM and the
oil pressure switch
tm
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL UNDER-DASH

12V FUSE BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. A1 (100 A) T3 T9
-------cr\^3 ------- WHT -
&
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

(Closed : Low or lost pressure)
(Open: Normal pressure)
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open)
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11-3). 10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B7 and the oil pressure switch 1P connector
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). terminal No. 1.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
and the ECM/PCM. If it does not communicate, OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-383). IP CONNECTOR OPSW
(YEL/RED)
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present,
diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing with OPSW
(YEL/RED) M 3 |4 5 6 |7 8 |9 |
this test. ll 10 11 12 13|14|l5|16 17 18 19 HJ
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the OIL l 20 21 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
W ire side o f 136 37 38 39 40 41 j 42 431441
Is ON indicated? fem ale term inal
Term inal s i de o f fem ale term inals
YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-354).B
Is there continuity?
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). latest software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck.
7. Check the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8).
If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
Is the oil pressure switch OK? good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see
page 11-209).H
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between ECM/PCM
NO-Replace the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8) . connector terminal B7 and oil pressure switch 1P
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and jump the SCS connector terminal No. 1.H
line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0).
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the
ECM/PCM from damage.
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P) and the oil
pressure switch 1P connector.
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short)
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page 11-3), 10. Check for continuity between oil pressure switch 1P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 1P CONNECTOR
and the ECM/PCM. If it does not communicate,
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -383).
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present,
diagnose, and repairthe cause before continuing with
this test.
5. Start the engine and check the OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is OFF indicated?
Wire side of female terminal

22-354). H Is there continuity?
NO-Go to step 6. YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between

ECM/PCM connector terminal B7 and oil pressure
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). switch 1P connector terminal N o .I.B
7. Check the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8). NO-Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11 -207), or substitute a
Is the oil pressure switch OK?
YES-Go to step 8. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see
NO-Do the pressure test (see page 8-9). If the oil page 11-209).H
pressure is OK, replace the oil pressure switch (see
page 8-8).B
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and jump the SCS
line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0).
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P) and the oil
pressure switch 1P connector.
Oil Pressure Switch Test Oil Pressure Switch Replacement
1. Remove the engine undercover (see page 20-163). 1. Remove the engine undercover (see page 20-163).
2. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector (A) from 2. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector (A), then
the oil pressure switch (B). remove the oil pressure switch (B).
3. Check for continuity between the oil pressure switch 3. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil
terminal and the engine (ground). There should be pressure switch mounting hole.
continuity with the engine stopped. There should be
no continuity with the engine running. 4. Clean and dry the oil pressure switch mounting hole.
5. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0004) to the new oil
4. Connect the oil pressure switch connector to the oil
pressure switch threads. Install the component within
pressure switch.
5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
5. Install the engine undercover (see page 20-163).
NOTE:
Using too much liquid gasket may cause liquid
gasket to enter the oil passage or the end of the oil
pressure switch.
residue, then reapply the new liquid gasket.
6. Install the oil pressure switch.
7. Connect the oil pressure switch connector.
8. Install the engine undercover (see page 20-163).
te l
Oil Pressure Test Engine Oil Level Check
If the low oil pressure indicator stays on with the engine 1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and start the engine.
running, check the engine oil level (see page 8-9). If the Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (M/T in
oil level is correct: neutral, A/T in P or N) until the radiator fan comes on,
then turn off the engine, and wait a few minutes.
1. Remove the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8), then
install the oil pressure gauge (A). 2. Remove the dipstick, and wipe off the dipstick, then
reinstall the dipstick.
3. Remove the dipstick, and check the engine oil level. It
should be between the upper mark (A) and lower
mark (B).
2. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge

registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before
continuing.
3. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature (fan
comes on at least twice). The pressure should be:
Engine Oil Temperature: 176 F (80 C )
Engine Oil Pressure: 4. If the engine oil level is near or below the lower mark,
At Idle: 69 kPa (0.70 kgf/cm2, 10.0 psi) min. check for oil leakage, and add engine oil (see page
At 3,000 rpm: 343 kPa (3.50 kgf/cm2, 49.8 psi) min. 8- 10) to bring it to the upper mark.
4. If the oil pressure is not within specifications, inspect
these items:
Blocking of oil filter.
Blocking of oil screen.
Inspect the oil pressure relief valve (see page 8-13).
Inspect the oil pump (see page 8-15).
5. Remove the oil pressure gauge and the oil pressure
gauge attachment, then install the engine oil pressure
switch (see page 8-8).
Engine Oil Replacement
1. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature (fan 7. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check
comes on at least twice). the oil level (see page 8-9) and for any oil leakage.
2. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-163). 8. If the Maintenance Minder required replacing the
engine oil, reset the Maintenance Minder (see page
3. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.
3-4), when this procedure is complete. If the
A Maintenance Minder did not require engine oil
14 x 1.5 mm replacement, go to step 9.
40 N-m (4.1 kgf-m , 30 Ibf-ft)
Do n ot overtighten.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
and ECM/PCM. If it does not communicate,
13. Select GAUGE in the BODY ELECTRICAL with the
HDS.
14. Select ADJUSTMENT in GAUGES with the HDS.
15. Select MAINTENANCE MINDER in the ADJUSTMENT
with the HDS.
16. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the
HDS.
4. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B) and 17. Select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE with the
HDS.
torque to specification.
6. Refill the engine with the recommended engine oil
(see page 3-2).
Capacity
At Oil Change; 3.4 L (3.6 US qt)
At Oil Change Including Filter: 3.6 L (3.8 US qt)
After Engine Overhaul: 4.2 L (4.4 US qt)
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Special Tools Required 6. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter
Oil Filter Wrench 07AAA-PLCA100 clockwise with the oil filter wrench to the specified
torque.
Tighten: 3/4 Turn Clockwise
2. Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench. Tightening Torque: 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 9 Ibf-ft)
3. Inspect the filter to make sure the rubber seal is not
stuck to the oil filter seating surface of the engine.
4. Inspect the threads (A) and the rubber seal (B) on the
new filter. Clean the seat on the oil pan, then apply a
light coat of new engine oil to the filter rubber seal.
Use only filters with a built-in bypass system.
5. Install the oil filter by hand.

Engine Oil Filter Replacement Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement
(cont'd)
7. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or to ) are 1. Remove the oil filter (see page 8- 11).
printed around the outside of the filter, you can use
the following procedure to tighten the filter. 2. Remove the oil filter feed pipe.
Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against
the oil pan, and note which number pr mark is at the
bottom.
Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise three
numbers or marks from the one you noted. For
example, if mark is at the bottom when the seal is
lightly seated, tighten the filter until the mark
comes around the bottom.
3. Install two 20 x 1.5 mm nuts (A) onto the new oil filter
feed pipe, and hold one nut with a wrench, then
tighten the other nut
M ark when rubber seal M ark after tig h ten in g .

is seated.
Number or 1 2 3 4
Mark when or or or or
rubber seal
is seated
Number or 4 1 2 3
Mark after or or or or
tightening w
8. After installation, fill the engine with the engine oil up
to the specified level (see page 8-9), run the engine for
more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage.
4. Apply new engine oil to the oil filter feed pipe threads,
then torque the oil filter feed pipe to 40 N-m (4.1 kgf-m,
30 Ibf-ft), then remove the nuts from the oil filter feed
pipe.
5. Install the oil filter (see page 8-1 1).
Oil Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
5.9 Nm
(0.60 k g fm , 4.4 Ibf ft)
(4.0 kgfm, 29 Ib fft)

Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 7. Attach the support eyelet (A) to the cylinder block
Support Eyelet 07AAK-SNAA600
Engine Support Hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256* A
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program 888-424-6857
Removal
1. Open the hood, and secure it with the hood support
rod (A) in the wide-open position (B).
8. Install the engine hanger adapter (VSB02C000026) to

the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256), then install
attach the hook (A) to the support eyelet (B). Tighten
the wing nut (G) by hand, and lift and support the
engine/IMA motor/transmission.
3. Remove the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel (see VSB02C000026
page 20-153).
under the oil pan.
5. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-12).
6. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page
10- 20 ).
B A
07AAK-SNAAS0O
h s
9. Remove the jack and the wood block from under the Inspection
oil pan.
NOTE; Refer to the Exploded View if needed during this
10. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-10). procedure.
11. Remove the oil screen (A), then remove the oil pump 1. Remove the screws from the pump housing, then
(B). separate the housing and the cover.
2. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the inner rotor (A) and the outer rotor (B). If
the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance exceeds the
service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.
Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
3. Check the pump housing-to-rotor axial clearance

between the rotors (A) and the pump housing (B). If
the pump housing-to-rotor axial clearance exceeds
the service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.
Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance
Standard (New): 0.020.06 mm (0.001 0.002 in)
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
4. Check the pump housing-to-outer rotor radial Installation

clearance between the outer rotor (A) and the pump
housing (B).lf the pump housing-to-outer rotor radial 1. Clean the O-ring groove and the mating surface of the
clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the oil engine block.
pump assembly.
2. Install the oil pump (A) with a new O-ring (B).
Pump Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
5. Inspect both rotors and the pump housing for scoring

or other damage. Replace the oil pump assembly, if
necessary. 3. Install the oil screen (C) with a new gasket (D).
6. Check that the oil pump turns freely. 4. Install the oil pan (see page 7-27).
under the oil pan.
6. Remove the engine support hanger and the support
eyelet (A) from the cylinder block.
A
07AAK-SNAA600
7. Install the auto-tensioner (see page 10-20).

8. Install the cam chain (see page 6-14).
oil pan.
Oil/Air Separator
Removal/installation
10. Install the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel (see 1. Raise the vehicle on the lift.
page 20-153).
3. Remove the thermostat housing (see page 10-11).
8- 10).
4. Disconnect the PCV hose (A).
5. Remove the oil/air separator (B).

6. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil/air
separator mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt
holes.
7. Clean and dry the oil/air separator mating surfaces.
(cont'd)
Oil/Air Separator Removal/Installation (cont'd)
8. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0004) to the engine 9. Install the oil/air separator (A).
block mating surface of the oil/air separator and to the
NOTE:
inside edge of the bolt holes. Install the component
within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket. Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
with oil.
NOTE: Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
Apply a 2.5 mm (0.098 in) diameter bead of liquid installing the oil/air separator.
6 x 1.0 mm
If too much time has passed after applying the 12 N-m
liquid gasket remove the old liquid gasket and
10. Connect the PCV hose (B).

11. Install the thermostat housing (see page 10-12).
Intake Air System and Exhaust System
Air Cleaner Element Inspection/Replacement............. 9-3
Air Cleaner Removal/Installation................... ............. . 9-3
Intake Air Resonator Removal/Installation................... 9-4
Intake Manifold Chamber Removal and Installation. .9-5
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation...................9-9
Intake Manifold/Chamber Assembly Removal and
Installation.................................... ........ ........................ 9-12
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler R eplacem ent....................... 9-17
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Intake M an i fo ld Cham ber Removal and Installation, page 9-5
Removal and In sta lla t i on, page 9-9
Intake M anifold/C ham ber Assem bly Removal and Installat i on, page 9-12
ta g i
Air Cleaner Element Air Cleaner Removal/Installation

Inspection/Replacement
1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A),
and remove the harness clips.
A NOTE: Be careful not to damage the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor on the air cleaner cover.
2. Remove the air cleaner element (B) from the air

cleaner housing (C).
3. Check the air cleaner element for damaged, dirt, or
clogging. If it is damaged or clogged, replace it.
NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air
cleaner element. 2. Disconnect the breather hose (B).
4. Clean and remove any debris from inside the air 3. Loosen the hose bands (C) and remove the bolts, then
cleaner housing. remove the air cleaner (D) from the throttle body and
the intake air tube.
5. install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
If the idle speed fluctuates, do the idle speed
inspection (see page 11-273). NOTE: When tightening the screw (E) of the hose
band, align the edge of the hose band (F) with the
mark (G) painted on the hose band. If you tighten the
screw over the mark, replace the hose band.
Intake A ir Resonator Rem oval/Installation
1. Do the 12 volt battery removal procedure (see page 7. Install the resonator chamber joint (A) and the intake
22-87). air tube (B).
2. Remove the intake air tube (A) and the resonator NOTE: When tightening the screw (C) of the hose
chamber joint (B). band, align the edge of the hose band (D) with the
mark (E) painted on the hose band. If you tighten the
3. Remove the left side front inner fender (see page

20-162).
4. Remove the harness clamp (A) and the intake air 22-87).
resonator (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.3 N-m
(0.95 k g fm , 6.9 Ib fft)
5. Install the intake air resonator and the harness clamp.

6. Install the left side front inner fender (see page
20-162).
te a
Intake Manifold Chamber Removal and Installation
Exploded View
5 x 0.8 mm 6 x 1 .0 mm
3.5 N-m 12 N-m
INTAKE MANIFOLD (1.2 kgf-m, 9 Ibf-ft)
FLANGE PLATE (0.36 kgf-m, 2.6 Ibf-ft)
INTAKE MANIFOLD
BRACKET A
INTAKE MANIFOLD
CHAMBER
8 x 1.25 m m
24 N-m
(2.4 kgf-m , 18 Ibf-ft)
8 x 1.25 m m
24 N-m THROTTLE
(2.4 kgf-m, 18 Ibf ft)
FLANGE PLATE
THROTTLE BODY
GASKETS
Replace.
8 x 1.25 m m
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m , 16 Ibf ft)
6x 1.0 mm
12 N-m INTAKE MANIFOLD
(1.2 k g fm , 9 Ib fft) BRACKET B
PURGE JOINT
BRACKET
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
Intake Manifold Chamber Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Remowai 6. Remove the throttle body (A) without disconnecting

the water bypass hoses.
1. Remove the engine cover (A).
7. Remove the intake manifold mounting bolts.

2 tikiirn <arrl
4.
5. Remove the water bypass hose (B) from the clamp.

8. Remove the intake manifold chamber (A) and the Installation
intake manifold flange plate (B).
1. Reassemble the intake manifold chamber.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View if needed during
this procedure.
2. Install the intake manifold chamber (A) with new
gaskets (B), and the intake manifold flange plate (C)
NOTE: Tighten the bolts in a crisscross pattern in
three steps, beginning with the inner bolt.
9. Disassemble the intake manifold chamber.

this procedure.
22 N-m
Intake Manifold Chamber Removal and Installation (cont'd)
3. Loosen the intake manifold bracket mounting bolts 6. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose (A), and
(A, B), then loosely install the intake manifold install the water bypass hose (B) to the clamp.
mounting bolts (C, D).
(DC
6 x 1 .0 m m
12 N-m
11.2 kgf-m , 9 Ibf-ft)
A
8 x 1.25 mm
24 N-m
(2.4 kgf-m,
18 Ibf-ft) 7. Connect the engine wire harness connectors, and
8 x 1.25 mm 8 x 1.25 mm install the wire harness clamps to the intake manifold
24 N*m 24 N*m chamber:
(2.4 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft) (2.4 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft)
Throttle actuator connector
4. Tighten the bolts in the numbered sequence shown.
MAP sensor connector
5. Install the throttle body (A) with a new gasket (B).
9. Install the engine cover (A).
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
Exploded View
BRACKET
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Removal 4. Remove the intake manifold (A).

A
A,
5. Disassemble the intake manifold.

2. Disconnect the EGR valve connector (A) and the PCV
this procedure.
hose (B).
3. Remove the engine wire harness holder (C) and the

dipstick (D).
Installation 5. Install the engine cover (A).
1. Reassemble the intake manifold.

this procedure.
2. Install the intake manifold (A) with new gaskets (B).
NOTE: Tighten the bolts and nuts in a crisscross
pattern in three steps, beginning with the inner bolt.
8 x 1.25 mm
24 N-m
(2.4 kgf-m,
18 Ibf-ft) 8x1.25 mm
22 N-m
3. Install the engine wire harness holder (A) and the

dipstick (B).
10 N-m
4. Connect the PCV hose (C) and the EGR valve
connector (D).
Intake Manifold/Chamber Assembly Removal and Installation
Exploded View
5 x 0.8 mm
3.5 N*m
(0.36 kgfm, 2.6 Ibf-ft)
Removal 6. Remove the throttle body (A) without disconnecting
the water bypass hoses.
7. Remove the intake manifold mounting bolts.

3. Disconnect the engine wire harness connectors, and
remove the wire harness clamps from the intake
manifold chamber:
4. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A).
5. Remove the water bypass hose (B) from the clamp.
(cont'd)
Intake Manifold/Chamber Assembly Removal and Installation (cont'd)
8 . Disconnect the EGR valve connector (A) and the PCV Installation
hose (B).
1. Reassemble the intake manifold/chamber assembly.
this procedure.
2. Install the intake manifold/chamber assembly (A) with
a new gasket (B).
NOTE: Tighten the bolts and nuts in a crisscross
pattern in three steps, beginning with the inner bolt.
9. Remove the engine wire harness holder (C) and the

dipstick (D).
10. Remove the intake manifold/chamber assembly (A)
from the cylinder head.
11. Disassemble the intake manifold/chamber assembly.

this procedure.
te a
3. Loosen the intake manifold bracket mounting bolts 5. Install the engine wire harness holder (A) and the
(A, B), then loosely install the intake manifold dipstick (B).
mounting bolts (C, D).
(Do
6 x 1 .0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf m, 9 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
10 N-m
(1.0 k g fm , 7 Ib fft)
6. Connect the PCV hose (C) and the EGR valve

24 N-m 24 N-m
(2.4 k g fm , 18 Ib fft) (2.4 k g fm , 18 Ib fft) connector (D).
4. Tighten the bolts in the numbered sequence shown. 7. Install the throttle body (A) with a new gasket (B).
8 x 1.25 mm ^
22 N-m
(2.2 k g fm , 16 Ib fft)
(cont'd)
Intake Manifold/Chamber Assembly Removal and Installation (cont'd)
8. Connect the brake booster vacuum hose (A), and

install the water bypass hose (B) to the clamp.
9. Connect the engine wire harness connectors, and

install the wire harness clamps to the intake manifold
chamber:
10. install the air cleaner (see page 9-3).
11. Install the engine cover (A).
H s
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
MOUNTRUBBER
HEAT SHIELD
6 x 1.0 m m
9.3 N-m
(0.95 k g fm , 6.9 ib fft)
6 x 1.0 m m
9.3 N-m
(0.95 k g fm ,
8 x 1.25 m m 6.9 Ibf-ft)
22 N-m
(2.2 k g fm , 16 Ib fft)
T ighten the bolts in steps,
alternating side-to-side.
HEAT SHIELD
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10 x 1.25 m m
33 N-m
sGASKET (3.4 k g fm , 25 Ibf-ft)
Replace. Replace.
Cooling System
Component Location Index..............................................10-2
Radiator Cap Test.................................... ........................10-4
Radiator Test............. . ...................... ................................10-4
Fan Motor Test....................................................................10-5
Thermostat Te s t................................. ...............................10-5
Water Pump Inspection.................................................... 10-6
Water Pump Replacement.......... ..................................... 10-7
Coolant C h e ck ............................... ..................................... 10-8
Coolant Replacement...................... .......... ..................... 10-8
Thermostat Replacement........................ ........................ 10-10
Thermostat Housing Removal and Installation...........10-11
Water Outlet Removal and Installation . ........................10-13
Connecting Pipe Replacem ent............ .......................... 10-16
Drive Belt Inspection........................................................10-17
Drive Belt Replacement.................................................... 10-17
Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Inspection. . .............. ..10-18
Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Replacement.......................10-20
Tensioner Pulley Replacement....... ............................... 10-20
Fan, Fan Motor, and Shroud Removal and
Installation.......................................................................10-21
Radiator Replacement.................. ................................... 10-24
Fan Controls
Component Location Index............................................ .10-29
Circuit Diagram ................ ................................................. 10-31
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting. ...10-32
COOLANT SEPARATOR
ECT SENSOR 1
R eplacem ent page 11 -206
WATER OUTLET
WATER PUMP
Replacement, page 10-7 THERMOSTAT HOUSING
CONNECTING PIPE
R eplacem ent page 10-16
RADIATOR CAP
THERMOSTAT Test, page 10-4
Test, page 10-5
A /C CONDENSER FAN
ASSEMBLY
Fan M oto r Test, page 10-5
ECT SENSOR 2
Replacement, page 11-206 RADIATOR
Test, page 10-4
RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY Coolant Check, page 10-8
Fan M oto r Test, page 10-5 Coolant R eplacem ent page 10-8
Removal and Installation, page 10-21 Replacement, page 10-24
*
Radiator Cap Test Radiator Test
1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
the radiator cap (A). Wet the radiator cap seal with the radiator cap, and fill the radiator with engine
engine coolant, then install it on a commercially coolant to the base of the filler neck.
available pressure tester (B).
2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A) to
B the radiator, and apply a pressure of 93.3122.7 kPa
(0.951-1.251 kgf/cm2, 13.53-17.79 psi).
2. Apply a pressure of 93.3122.7 kPa (0,951 1.251

kgf/cm2, 13.53-17.79 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure. A
4. If the pressure drops, replace the radiator cap.
3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in

pressure.
4. Remove the tester, and reinstall the radiator cap.
*
Fan M otor Test Thermostat Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan Replace the thermostat if it is stuck in the open position
motor (A) and the A/C condenser fan motor (B). at room temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.
Do not let the thermostat and the thermometer (B)
touch the bottom of the hot container.
2. Test each motor by connecting battery power to

terminal No. 1 and ground to terminal No. 2.
3. If either motor fails to run, or does not run smoothly,
replace it (see page 10-21).
2. Heat the water, and check the temperature with a
thermometer. Check the temperature at which the
thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is
fully open.
Standard Thermostat
Lift Height: Above 8.0 mm (0.315 in)
Starts Opening: 169-176 F (7 6 -8 0 C)
Fully Open: 194F(90C)'
W ater Pump Inspection
1. Remove the right front wheel. 7. Install the water pump pulley (A), and loosely install
B
3. Loosen the water pump pulley mounting bolts (A). 6 x 1.0 m m
16 N-m

5. Remove the water pump pulley (B). 8. Install the drive belt (see page 10-17).
6. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise, and 9. Tighten the water pump pulley mounting bolts.
check that it turns freely. If it does not turn freely,
replace the water pump (see page 10-7). 10. Install the splash shield (see page 20-163).
NOTE: When you check the water pump, you may see 11. Install the right front wheel.
a small amount of "weeping" from the bleed holes
(A). This is normal.
A
k
W ater Pump Replacement
1. Remove the right front wheel. 10. Install the water pump pulley (A), and loosely install
B
3. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-8). 6 x 1 .0 mm
16 N-m
4. Loosen the water pump pulley mounting bolts (A).
5. Remove the drive belt (see page 10-17). 11. Install the drive belt (see page 10-17).
6. Remove the water pump pulley (B). 12. Tighten the water pump pulley mounting bolts.
7. Remove the five bolts securing the water pump (A), 13. Install the splash shield (see page 20-163).
then remove the water pump.
16. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
8. Inspect and clean the mating surface with the engine

block.
9. Install the water pump with a new O-ring (B) in the
reverse order of removal.
Coolant Check Coolant Replacement
1. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. Make 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and the MIN mark the radiator cap.
(B).
3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.
2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or

below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it between
the MIN and MAX marks, then.inspect the cooling 4. Remove the drain bolt (A) from the rear side of the
system for leaks. engine block.
3. Check the coolant level in the radiator, and add Honda
Long Life Antifreeze/Coo lant Type 2 into the radiator
up to the base of the filler neck, if needed.
NOTE
Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coo Ia nt
Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail.
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do not
add water.
5. After the coolant has drained, reinstall the drain bolt

with a new washer (B).
6. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.
7. Remove, drain, and reinstall the coolant reservoir.
*
8. Fill the coolant reservoir to the MAX mark (A) with 9. Pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.
NOTE:
Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail.
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Cool a nt Type 2 is a
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do not
add water.
Engine Coolant Refill Capacities (Including the
coolant reservoir capacity of 0.44 L (0.116 US gal));
M /T model:
At Coolant Change: 4.42 I.(1 .168 US gal)
After Engine Overhaul; 4.92 I-(1..300 US gal)
CVT model:
At Coolant Change: 4.351-(1 .149 US gal)
After Engine Overhaul: 4.841.(1,.279 US gal)
Coolant Replacement (cont'd) Thermostat Replacement
10. Loosely install the radiator cap. 1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-8).
11. Start the engine, and let it run until it warms up (the 2. Remove the thermostat cover (A), then remove the
radiator fan comes on at least twice). thermostat (B).
12. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator,
and add the recommended coolant, if needed. D
13. Put the radiator cap on securely, then start the engine
again, and check for leaks.
14. Clean up any spilled engine coolant
15. If the Maintenance Minder required replacing the
engine coolant, reset the Maintenance Minder (see
page 3-4), and this procedure is complete. If the
Maintenance Minder did not require engine coolant
replacement, go to step 16.
and ECM/PCM. If it does not communicate, 3. Install a new thermostat with a new rubber seal (C),
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-383). then install the thermostat cover.
20. Select GAUGES in the BODY ELECTRICAL with the NOTE: Install the thermostat with the pin (D) up.
HDS. 4. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the
21. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGE with the HDS. air from the cooling system (see step 8 on page 10-9).
22. Select MAINTENANCE MINDER in the ADJUSTMENT 5. Clean up any spilled engine coolant
with the HDS.
23. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with the
HDS.
24. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 5 RESET with the
HDS.
*
Thermostat Housing Removal and Installation
Removal 5. Disconnect the heater hose (A) and the water bypass
hoses (B).
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-8).
2. Remove the coolant reservoir (A).
6. Remove the thermostat housing (C).

3. Remove the harness holder (A).
A
4. Remove the thermostat (see page 10-10).
(cont'd)
Thermostat Housing Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation 5. Install the coolant reservoir (A).

6 x 1.0 mm
1. Install the thermostat housing (A) with a new 7.0 N-m
connecting pipe O-ring (B). (0.71 k g fm , 5.2 Ib fft)

10 N-m 7. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
2. Connect the heater hose (C) and the water bypass
hoses (D).
3. Install the thermostat (see page 10-10).
4. Install the harness holder (A).
A
10 N-m
(1.0 k g fm , 7 Ib fft)
W ater Outlet Removal and Installation
R em ow al 6. Remove the heater hose bracket (A) and the ground

cable (B), then disconnect the water bypass hose (C)
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-8). from the water outlet.
2. Remove the throttle body (see page 11 -248).
page 9-13).
4. Disconnect the following engine wire harness
connectors, and remove the wire harness clamps
from the cylinder head:
Oil pressure switch connector
5. Remove the harness clamps (A) with the harness 7. Remove the harness holder bolt (D), then remove the
holders (B). harness holder (E) from the bracket.
8. Disconnect the upper radiator hose (A), the water
bypass hose (B), and the heater hose (C).
W ater Outlet Removal and Installation (cont'd)
9. Remove ECT sensor 1 (A), then remove the water Installation

outlet (B).
1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the water
outlet mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes.
2. Clean and dry the water outlet mating surfaces.
3. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0004) to the cylinder
head mating surface of the water outlet and to the
inside edge of the bolt holes. Install the component
within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE;
A
*
4. Install the water outlet (A), 7. Install the harness holder (A).
NOTE:
C
After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before
filling the engine with coolant.
Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the water outlet.
8. Install the heater hose bracket (B) and the ground

cable (C), then connect the water bypass hose (D) to
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 9 Ib fft) the water outlet.
5. Install ECT sensor 1 (B) with a new O-ring (C) (see
page 11-206).
6. Connect the upper radiator hose (A), the water bypass
hose (B), and the heater hose (C).
W ater Outlet Removal and Connecting Pipe Replacement
Installation (cont'd)
9. Install the harness clamps (A) with the harness 1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-8).
holders (B).
2. Remove the thermostat (see page 10-10).
3. Remove the thermostat housing (see page 10-11).
4. Remove the connecting pipe (A).
B
10. Connect the following engine wire harness

connectors, and install the wire harness clamps to the
cylinder head:
5. Install the connecting pipe with a new O-ring (B).
Rocker arm oil pressure switch connector 6. Install the thermostat housing (see page 10-12).
ECT sensor 1 connector 7. Install the thermostat (see page 10-10).
Oil pressure switch connector 9. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
11. Install the intake manifold/chamber assembly (see
page 9-14).
*
Drive Belt Inspection Drive Belt Replacement
1. Inspect the belt for cracks or damage. Special T ools Required

NOTE: If the belt is cracked or damaged, replace it Belt Tension Release Tool Snap-on YA9317*,
(see page 10-17). commercially available
*: Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
2. Check the position of the drive belt auto-tensioner Program 888-424-6857.
indicator (A) is within the standard range (B) as
shown. If it is out of the standard range, replace the 1. Move the drive belt auto-tensioner (A) using the belt
drive belt (see page 10-17), then check the drive belt tension release tool (YA9317) in the direction shown
auto-tensioner indicator position.
to relieve tension from the drive belt, then remove the
drive belt.
2. Install a new belt in the reverse order of removal.
(cont'd)
Drive Belt Replacement (cont'd) Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner
Inspection
3. Check the position of the drive belt auto-tensioner Special Tools Required
indicator (A) is within the standard range (B) as Belt Tension Release Tool Snap-on YA9317*,
shown. If it is out of the standard range, check the commercially available
drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 10-18). *: Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program 888-424-6857.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and make sure to

turn the A/C switch off. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0).
2. Check the position of the drive belt auto-tensioner
indicator (A). Start the engine, then check the position
again with the engine idling. If the position of the
indicator moves or fluctuates very much, replace the
drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 10-20).
3. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley. If

you hear abnormal noise, replace the tensioner pulley
(see page 10-20).
*
5. Move the drive belt auto-tensioner within its limit with 7. Clamp the drive belt auto-tensioner (A) by using two 8
the belt tension release tool (YA9317) in the direction mm bolts (B) and a vise (C) as shown. Do not clamp
shown. Check that the drive belt auto-tensioner the drive belt auto-tensioner itself.
moves smoothly and without any abnormal noise. If
the drive belt auto-tensioner does not move smoothly
or you hear abnormal noise, replace the drive belt
auto-tensioner (see page 10-20).
YA9317
6. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page

10-20 ).
30 30
8. Set the torque wrench (D) on the pulley bolt, and align
it as shown.
9. Align the indicator (E) on the tensioner base with belt
position mark (F) on the tensioner arm by using the
torque wrench, and measure the torque. If the torque
value is out of specification, replace the drive belt
auto-tensioner (see page 10-20).
NOTE: If the indicator exceeds the belt position mark,
recheck the torque.
Auto-Tensioner Spring Torque
17.6-22.8 M*m
(1.79-2.32 kgf m, 13.0-16.8 Ibf-ft)
Cooling System
Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Tensioner Pulley Replacement

Replacement
1. Remove the drive belt (see page 10-17). 1. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page
10- 20 ).
2. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (A).
2. Remove the tensioner pulley. The tensioner pulley
bolt has left-hand threads.
3 |ns|ay the drive belt auto-tensioner in the reverse

order of removal.
3. Install the tensioner pulley in the reverse order of
removal.
4. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 10-20).
*
Fan, Fan Motor, and Shroud Removal and Installation
Removal 6. Disconnect the fan motor connectors (A), and remove

the harness clamps (B).
3. Remove the A/C compressor clutch connector (A)
from the clamp, then remove the harness clamps (B).

5. Remove the intake air tube (A) and the resonator
chamber joint (B).
8. Remove the A/C condenser fan shroud assembly (B),

then remove the radiator fan shroud assembly (C)
from the A/C condenser fan shroud side.
(cont'd)
Cooling System
Fan, Fan Motor, and Shroud Removal and Installation (cont'd)
9. Disassemble the fan shrouds. Installation

1. Assemble the fan shrouds.
2. Install the radiator fan shroud assembly (A) onto the

A/C condenser fan shroud side, then install the A/C
condenser fan shroud assembly (B).
6 x 1.0 m m
7.0 N m
(0.71 kgf-m , 5.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Install the coolant reservoir (C).

*
4. Connect the fan motor connectors (A), and install the 7. Install the A/C compressor clutch connector (A) to the
harness clamps (B). clamp, then install the harness clamps (B).
B
5. Install the resonator chamber joint (A) and the intake

air tube (B).
NOTE: When tightening the screw (C) of the hose
band, align the edge of the hose band (D) with the 8. Install the splash shield (see page 20-163).
screw over the mark, replace the hose band. 9. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
10-23
Cooling System
Radiator Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle on the lift. 9. Remove the intake air tube (A) and the resonator
chamber joint (B).
2. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-8).
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 connector (A), and
remove the A/C compressor clutch connector (B) from
the clamp.
10. Disconnect the fan motor connectors (A), and remove

the harness clamps (B).
5. Remove the harness clamps (C).

6. Disconnect the lower radiator hose (A).
7. CVT model: Disconnect the CVTF cooler hoses (B),

then plug the CVTF cooler hoses and lines.
8 . Lower the vehicle on the lift.
*
11. Disconnet the upper radiator hose (A), and remove 13. Remove the upper radiator brackets (A), then pull up
the air intake tube bracket (B). the radiator assembly (B) with the lower cushions {).
'' A
Cooling System
Radiator Replacement (cont'd)
14. Remove the radiator fan shroud assembly (A), the A/C 16. Install the radiator assembly (A). Make sure the lower
condenser fan shroud assembly (B), the radiator cap cushions (B) are set securely.
(C), the drain plug (D) and ECT sensor 2 (E) (see page
6 x 1.0 mm
11-206) from the radiator.
6 x 1.0 mm
7.0 N-m
(0.71 kgf-m, 5.2 Ibf-ft)
17. Install the upper radiator brackets (C).

18. Install the coolant reservoir.
E
12 N-m 6 x 1.0 mm
(1.2 k g fm , 9 Ibf-ft) 7.0 N-m
15. Reassemble the radiator with new O-rings (F).
*
19. Connect the upper radiator hose (A), and install the air 21. install the resonator chamber joint (A) and the intake
intake tube bracket (B). air tube (B).
NOTE: When tightening the screw (C) of the hose
band, align the edge of the hose band (D) with the
20. Connect the fan motor connectors (A), and install the
harness clamps (B).
B

23. Connect the lower radiator hose (A).
B
24. CVT model: Connect the CVTF cooler hoses (B).
(cont'd)
Cooling System
Radiator Replacement (cont'd)
25. Connect the ECT sensor 2 connector (A), and install

the A/C compressor clutch connector (B) to the clamp.

29. CVT model: Refill the transmission with CVTF (see
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD
RELAY BOX A
FAN CONTROL RELAY

Test, page 22-92
\\
ECT SENSOR 1
\ AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD
Replacement, page 11-206 RELAY BOX B
A /C CONDENSER FAN MOTOR

M oto r Test, page 10-5
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Low Speed
C ircuit Tro u b le sho o t i ng, page 21-60
A/C Condenser Fan High Speed
C ircuit T ro u b le sho o t i ng, page 21-64
A/C CONDENSER
ECT SENSOR 2 FAN RELAY
Replacement, page 11-206 Test, page 22-92
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR
M oto r Test, page 10-5
C ircuit Diagram , page 10-31 A/C RADIATOR FAN
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit
DIODE A RELAY
T roubleshooting, page 10-32 Test, page 22-92
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Low Speed
Circuit Troubleshooting, page 21-60
Symptom Diagnostic Procedure Also check for

Engine overheats 1. Check the coolant level (see page 10-8). Check the radiator
2. Check for any engine coolant leakage (from and A/C condenser
gaskets, hoses, O-rings, etc.). fan are operating
3. Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on radiator and properly.
A/C condenser.
4. Check for deteriorated coolant.
5. Check for a damaged or deformed fan shroud.
6. Check that the fan motors are operating properly
(air should be blowing toward the engine).
7. Inspect the fan motors (see page 10-5) or fan
relays (see page 22-92).
8. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-4).
9. Check the thermostat (see page 10-5).
10. Inspect the water pump (see page 10-6).
11. Check for plugged or deteriorated radiator hoses.
12. Check for plugged heater core or hoses.
13. Check for a damaged cylinder head gasket.
The radiator fan does not run at Radiator fan high speed circuit troubleshooting (see Check the connectors
high speed page 10-32). are properly
connected and the
terminals are making
good contact.
Both the radiator fan and the A/C Radiator and A/C condenser fans low speed circuit Check the connectors
condenser fan do not run at low troubleshooting (see page 21-60). are properly
speed connected and the
good contact.
The A/C condenser fan does not A/C condenser fan high speed circuit Check the connectors
run at high speed troubleshooting (see page 21-64). are properly
connected and the
good contact.
*
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TERMINAL
12V FUSE BOX IGNITION SWITCH
ECTSENSOR 1 ECTSENSOR 2
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No, B30 (30 A) fuse and the No. B10 (7.5 A) 6. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. socket terminal No. 7 and body ground.
Are the fuses OK?
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD RELAY BOX B
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse(s) and recheck. If thefuse(s)
blow again, repair the short to ground the No. B30 (30
A) fuse, and the No. B10 (7.5 A) fuse eircuit.il I" KM
2. Remove the radiator fan relay from auxiliary I16I15I14I13I
under-hood relay box B and the fan control relay from
auxiliary under-hood relay box A, and test the (see
PUR
page 22-92).
Are the relays OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
Term inal side o f fem ale term inals
NO-Replace the radiator fan relay and/or the fan
control relay.H Is t h e r e battery voltage?
3. Check the radiator fan motor (see page 10-5). YES-Go to step 7.
Is the fan motor OK? N O - R e p a i r a n o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n r a d i a t o r f a n

relay socket terminal No. 7 and under-dash fuse/relay
YES-Go to step 4. box connector B (36P) terminal No. 1. Check the A/C
diode B. If the wire and A/C diode B is OK, replace
NO-Replace the radiator fan motor (see page 10-21).
auxiliary under-hood relay box B.
4. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay
7. Measure the voltage between fan control relay socket
socket terminal No. 1 and body ground.
terminal No. 13 and body ground.
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD RELAY BOX A
ml><M
(16I15I14I13I
PNK
PUR
Is there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 5. Term inal side o f fem ale term inals
NO-Repair an open in the wire between radiator fan Is there battery voltage?
relay socket terminal No. 1 and under-dash fuse/relay
YES-Go to step 8.
box connector B (36P) terminal No. 34. If the wire is
OK, replace auxiliary under-hood relay box Q.M NO-Repair an open in the wire between auxiliary
under-hood relay box A fan control relay socket
terminal No. 13 and auxiliary under-hood relay box B
A/C diode B socket terminal No. 13. If the wire is OK,
replace auxiliary under-hood relay box A M
k
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Check for continuity between fan control relay socket
terminal No. 6 and radiator fan motor 2P connector
9. Disconnect the radiator fan motor 2P connector. terminal No. 2.
10. Check for continuity between radiator fan relay socket
terminal No. 2 and radiator fan motor 2P connector
terminal No. 1.
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD RELAY BOX B T erm inal side o f fem ale term inals
T e rm i nal side o f fem ale term inals
13
1
/
PUR 2 14 5 6
15
T
16
JL m m 4 7 8
17

T
I16I15I14I13I RED
10
K RED
jrUl.,-JJLrL
(2 1
JlJCIlXL PUR
3 RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
Term inal side of female term inals Is there continuity?
Is there continuity? YES-Go to the step 12.
YES-Go to the step 11. NO-Repair an open in the wire between fan control
relay socket terminal No. 6 and radiator fan motor 2P
NO-Repair an open in the wire between radiator fan connector terminal No. 2 M
relay socket terminal No. 2 and radiator fan motor 2P
connector terminal No. ! .
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Check for continuity between fan control relay socket 18. Check for continuity between radiator fan relay socket
terminal No. 5 and body ground G401. terminal No. 8 and ECM/PCM connector terminal A4.
Terminal side of female terminals
I I lll|Xll2|
7
to
6I15I14I13I
BLK
FANL (RED)
FANL (RED)
G401 M * 3 | 4 5 6 | 7 8 9 I]
LB 10 11 12 13[l4|15jl6 17 18 19
1
Terminal side of female terminals 20 21 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
Is there continuity? 136 37 38|39|40 41 |42 43 441
| i
YES-Go to the step 13.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
NO-Repair an open in the wire between fan control Terminal side of female terminals
relay socket terminal No. 5 and body ground G401 .
YES-Go to the step 19.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between radiator fan
relay socket terminal No. 8 and ECM/PCM connector
and the ECM/PCM. If it does not communicate,
terminal A 4 M
16. Jump the SCS li ne with the HDS, then turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0).
17. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P).
10-34
19. Check for continuity between fan control relay socket
terminal No. 15 and ECM/PCM connector terminal A5.

1 2
3 4
FANH (GRY)
FANH (GRY)
.............. ......H r ~ i i i ,
- n j i 3 T IT 1 I 6 | 7 8 8 I.
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
i
26 27 28
o
CO
33 34 35
CM
O)
CO
CO
CM
| 36 | 37 38 39140141142 431441

T erm inal side o f fem ale term inals
YES-Update the ECM/PCM (see page 11-207) if it does

not have the latest software, or substitute a
If the symptom goes away with a known-good
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see page
11-209).H
NO-Repair an open in the wire between fan control
relay socket terminal No. 15 and ECM/PCM connector
terminal A 5 .ll
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) SYSTEM (If fuel and emissions maintenance is
required)
Fuel and Emissions Systems Fuel Supply System
Specia l Tools............................................ 11-2 Component Location Index................... 11-275
Genera l Troubleshooting Information. 11-3 DTC Troubleshooting ............................. 11-278
DTC Troubleshooting Index................... 11-10 Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting. . . . 11-283
Symptom Troubleshooting Index........ 11-16 Fuel Pressure Relieving........................... 11-287
System Description......... . . . . ............. .. 11-18 Fuel Pressure T est.................................. 11-290
How to Set Readiness Codes.. ...............11-79 Fuel Tank Draining............................ 11-290
Fuel Line Inspection............................... 11-291
P G M -F I S y s te m Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
Component Location Index..................11-82 Precautions.................................... 11-293
DTC Troubleshooting............................. 11-85 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting................ 11-187 Rem oval............................................... 11-295
Shift Indicator Lamp Troubleshooting. 11-188 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
ECM/PCM Power and Ground Circuit Installation............... ......................... . 11-297
Troubleshooting ............................... .. 11-190 Fuel Tank Unit Removal and
Injector Replacement............................. . 11-200 Installation------------ -------- . . . . . ------ 11-301
A/F Sensor Replacement....................... 11-202 Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement. 11-304
Secondary H02S Replacement............. 11-202 Fuel Filter Replacement..........................11-304
CMP Sensor Replacement..................... 11-203 Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit
CKP Sensor Replacement....................... 11-203 R ep la ce m e n t...................................... 11-305
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Fuel Pulsation Damper Replacement.. 11-305
Sensor Replacement...........................11-204 Fuel Tank Replacement........................... 11-306
Knock Sensor Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 11-204 Fuel Fill Pipe Removal/Insta llation . . . . . 11-308
MAP Sensor Replacement------------ . . . 11-205 Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test............. 11-309
MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement. 11-205 Low Fuel Indicator T est...........................11-310
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement...... .............11-206
ECT Sensor 2 Replacement................... 11-206 Catalytic Converter System
ELD Replacement.................................. . 11-207 Component Location Index....................11-311
ECM/PCM. U pdate.....................................11-207 DTC Troubleshooting........................... . 11-312
ECM/PCM Replacement............... . 11-209 Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation. . . 11-313
Under-Floor TWC
E le c tro n ic T h r o ttle C o n tro l S y s te m Removal/Installation ......... ............... 11-314
Component Location Index. . . ..............11-212
DTC Troubleshooting ............................ 11-214 EGR System
Throttle Body T est................................... 11-246 Component Location Index................... 11-315
Throttle Body Cleaning----------- ------ . . . 11-247 DTC Troubleshooting ............................. 11-316
Throttle Body Removal/Installation-----11-248 EGR Valve Replacement......................... 11-327
Throttle Body EGR Pipe Removal and Installation-----11-327
Disassembly/Reassembly................... 11-250
APP Sensor Signal Inspection............... 11-251 PCV System
Accelerator Pedal Module Component Location Index............... 11-329
Rem ova I/I nst a 11at io n . . ...... ................. 11-251 PCV Valve Inspection...............................11-330
PCV Valve Replacement................... 11-330
VTEC
Component Location Index................... 11-252 EVAP System
DTC Troubleshooting..................... ....... 11-253 Component Location Index................... 11-331
Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve DTC Troubleshooting............................. 11-333
Removal/Installation ...................... 11-260 Fuel Cap Warning Message System
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Troubleshooting................................ 11-357
Removal/Installation........................... 11-261 EVAP Canister Replacement................. 11-359
FTP Sensor Replacement.................... . 11-360
Idle Control System EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Component Location Index................... 11-262 Replacement----------- ------- . . . . . . . . . 11-361
DTC Troubleshooting............................. 11-264 EVAP Canister Filter Replacement........11-362
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting-----11-271 EVAP Canister Purge Valve
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Replacement....................... ................ 11-362
Circuit Troubleshooting..................... 11-272
Idle Speed Inspection............... . . ......... 11-273
ECM/PCM I dle Learn Procedure.......... 11-274
Communication Systems (F-CAN,
IMA-CAN, K-LINE)
DTC Troubleshooting........................... . 11-363
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting.......... .... 11-376
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting............... . 11-383
Special Tools
R eiN o. Tool Number Description Qty

07406-004000B Fuel Pressure Gauge 9
07406-0070301 A/T Low Pressure Gauge w/Panel 1
07AAA-SNAA100 Fuel Pump Module Locknut Wrench 1
07AAJ-PY4A100 AT Pressure Test Hose 1
07AAJ-S6MA150 Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Set 1
07JAZ-001000B Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 04 In.Hg, 1
07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Adapter 1
07NAJ-P07010A Pressure Gauge Adapter 1
07ZAJ-S5A0200 Oil Pressure Hose 1
General Troubleshooting Information
interm ittent Failures : 2. If the MIL stays on, connect the HDS to the data link
connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of
The term intermittent failure means a system may have the dashboard.
had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) on the dash does not come on,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at all
connectors related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting. If the MIL was on but then went out, the
original problem may have been intermittent.
Service Information
Periodically, new engine control module/powertrain
control module (ECM/PCM) software or new service
procedures may become available. Always check online
for the latest software or service information related to
the DTCs or symptoms you are troubleshooting.
Opens and Shorts

Open and short are common electrical terms. An open is
a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an
accidental connection of a wire to ground or to another
wire. In simple terms, this usually means something
won't work at all. With complex electronics (such as 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
ECMs or PCMs) this can sometimes mean something 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM
works, but not the way it's supposed to. and all other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to the
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-383).
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic
System) 5. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
Also check the freeze data and/or on-board snapshot
If the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) has come on data, and download any data found. Then refer to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting, and begin the
1. Start the engine, and check the MIL (A).
appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), and
NOTE:
the engine is not started, the MIL stays on for 15-20
seconds (see page 11-79). Freeze data indicates the engine conditions when
the first system malfunction, misfire, or fuel trim
malfunction that activated the MIL was detected.
The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, on-board
snapshot, current data, and other engine control
module (ECM) or powertrain control module (PCM)
data.
For specific operations, refer to the user's manual
that came with the HDS.
6. If no DTCs are found, go to MIL troubleshooting (see
page 11-187).
Fuel and Emissi ons Systems
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
If the MIL did not stay on Scan Tool Clear Command

If the MIL did not stay on but there is a drivability If you are using a generic scan tool to clear commands,
problem, do the symptom troubleshooting. be aware that there is only one setting for clearing the
If you can't duplicate the DTC ECM/PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time
(CKP pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes, freeze
Some of the troubleshooting requires you to reset the data, on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you clear all
ECM/PCM and try to duplicate the DTC. If the problem is commands, you then need to do these procedures, in
intermittent and you can't duplicate the DTC, do not this order: ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
continue through the procedure. To do so will only result 11-274); CKP pattern learn procedure; test-drive to set
in confusion and possibly, a needlessly replaced readiness codes to complete (see page 11-79).
ECM/PCM.
DTC Clear
HDS Clear Command
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is
The ECM/PCM stores various specific data to correct the stopped.
system even if there is no electrical power, such as when
the 12 volt battery is disconnected. Stored data based on 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
failed parts should be cleared by using the CLEAR 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
COMMAND of the HDS, if parts are replaced. 30 seconds.
The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet this 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect
purpose. They are DTC clear, ECM/PCM reset, and CKP the HDS from the DLC.
pattern clear. The DTC clear command erases all stored
DTCs, freeze data, the on-board snapshot, and readiness ECM/PCM Reset
codes. This must be done with the HDS after
reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting. 1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS while the engine is
The ECM/PCM reset command erases all stored DTCs, stopped.
freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and ail 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
specific data to correct the system except CKP pattern. If
the CKP pattern data in the ECM/PCM was cleared, you 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
must do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP 30 seconds.
pattern clear command erases only CKP pattern data.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and disconnect
This command is for repair of a misfire or the CKP
the HDS from the DLC.
sensor.
5. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-274).
CKP Pattern Ciear/CKP Pattern Learn Learn Procedure (w ithout the HDS)
Clear/Learn Procedure (w ith the HDS)' 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) radiator fan comes on.
located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate (with
the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed of
2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm, with the CVT in D, or
the M/Tin 2nd.
3. Repeat step 2 several times.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
30 seconds.
How to End a Troubleshooting Session

(required after any troubleshooting)
1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
11-274).
4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM system. If you replace the ECM/PCM you must use the
and all other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to the HDS to instruct the new ECM/PCM and the
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-383). immobilizer-keyless control unit to recognize each
4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU other's unique serial code.
with the HDS.
5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS,
and follow the screen prompts.
(cont'd)
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the 4. Connect one side of the patch cord terminals (A) to a
commercially available digital multimeter (B), and
ECM/PCM Connectors
connect the other side of the patch cord terminals (C)
NOTE: The ECM/PCM overwrites data and monitors the to a commercially available banana jack (Pomona
EVAP system for up to an hour after the ignition switch is Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent) (D).
turned to ACCESSORY (I) or to LOCK (0). Jumping the
SCS line after turning the ignition switch to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0) cancels this function. Disconnecting the
ECM/PCM during this function, without jumping the SCS
line first, can damage the ECM/PCM.
2. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C.
symbols (A=D, B=^, C =0) embossed on them for
identification.
5. Gently contact the pin probe (male) into the terminal

test port from the terminal side. Do not force the tips
into the terminal test ports.
INOTICE I
For accurate results, always use the pin probe
(male).
To prevent damage to the connector terminals, do
not insert test equipment probes, paper clips, or
other substitutes, as they can damage the
terminals. Damaged terminals cause a poor
connection and an incorrect measurement.
Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures
can cause poor or intermittent electrical
connections.
3. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at an
ECM/PCM connector, use the terminal test port (A)
above the terminal you need to check.
Substituting the ECM/PCM 2.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Special Tools Required 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM
Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) tablet tester and all other vehicle systems. If it doesn't go to the
Honda Interface Module (HIM) and an iN workstation DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-383).
If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting,
with the latest HDS software version
skip steps 4 and 5, then the clean the throttle body
HDS pocket tester
after substituting the ECM/PCM.
GNA600 and an iN workstation with the latest HDS
software version 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
MVCI unit with the latest control module (CM) update
software installed 5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
CHECK, and follow the screen prompts.
Any one of the above updating tools can be used. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
NOTE: continue this procedure.
Use this procedure when you have to substitute a 6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
known-good ECM/PCM during troubleshooting
procedures. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Make sure the HDS/iN workstation or the MVCI has the 8. Remove auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box A.
latest HDS software version.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A)
9. Remove the battery hold-down plate (B), then move

the battery (C) forward.
10. Remove the ECM/PCM cover (D).
(cont'd)
11. Remove the bolts (D). 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE: DTC P0630 (VIN Not Programmed or
Mismatch) may be stored because the VIN has not
been programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it, and
continue this procedure.
15. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
16. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
17. Enter the immobilizer ECM/PCM code that you got
from the iN, and use the ECM/PCM replacement
procedure in the IMMOBI MENU of the HDS; it allows
you to start the engine.
18. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean the
throttle body (see page 11 -247).
20. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-207).
11-274).
NOTE: If the IMA battery level gauge displays no
12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C, then segments, start the engine, and hold it between 3,500
remove the ECM/PCM (E). 4,000 rpm without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in
neutral) until the level gauge displays at least half of
NOTE: ECM/PCM connectors Ar B, and C have its segments.
symbols (A=n, B=A, C =0) embossed on them for
identification. 22. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure.
13. Install a known-good ECM/PCM in the reverse order of 23. CVT: Do the start clutch control calibration procedure
removal. (see page 14-150).
OBD Status
The OBD status shows the current system status of each
DTC and all of the parameters. This function is used to
see if the repair was successfully completed. The results
of diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed as:
PASSED: The on board diagnosis is successfully

finished.
FAILED: The on board diagnosis has finished but
failed.
EXECUTING: The vehicle is in the enable criteria
conditions of the DTC, and the on board diagnosis is
running.
NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was
running but is out for the enable conditions for the
DTC.
OUT OF CONDITION: The vehicle has stayed out of the
enable conditions of the DTC.
DTC Troubleshooting Index
DTC Tw o Drive Detection Item MIL Note

(MIL Cycle Detection
indication*1}
P0101 (50) o Mass A ir Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance ON DTC Troubleshooting
Problem (see page 11-85)
P0102 (50) Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-86)
P0103 (50) Mass A ir Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-88)
P0107 (3) M anifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-90)
P0108 (3) M anifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-92)
P0111 (10) o Intake A ir Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit ON DTC Troubleshooting
Range/Performance Problem (see page 11-94)
P0112 (10) o Intake A ir Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-95)
P0113 (10) o Intake A ir Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-97)
P0116 (86) o Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 ON DTC Troubleshooting
P0117 (6) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Low ON DTC Troubleshooting
Voltage (see page 11-100)
P0118(6) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit High ON DTC Troubleshooting
P0122 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-214)
P0123 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-216)
P0125 (86) o Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 M alfunction/Slow ON DTC Troubleshooting
Response (see page 11-104)
P0128 (87) o Cooling System Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-105)
P0133 (61) o A ir Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) M alfunction/Slow ON DTC Troubleshooting
Response (see page 11-106)
P0134 (41) o A ir Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater System ON DTC Troubleshooting
Malfunction (see page 11-107)
P0135(41) o A ir Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater Circuit ON DTC Troubleshooting
P0137 (63) o Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Sensor ON DTC Troubleshooting
2)) Circuit Low Voltage (see page 11-112)
2)) Circuit High Voltage (see page 11-114)
2)) Slow Response (see page 11-116)
2)) Heater Circuit M alfunction (see page 11-117)
P0171 (45) o Fuel System Too Lean ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-120)
P0172 (45) o Fuel System Too Rich ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-120)
P0201 (71T4 No. 1 Cylinder Injector Circuit M alfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-121)
P0202 (72P No. 2 Cylinder Injector Circuit M alfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-121)
NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected with the HDS.
Some autom atic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the
CVT system, and check for automatic transm ission DTCs.
* 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jum ped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when
the SCS line is jum ped; these DTCs are shown in the gauge display.
*2: M/T
*3: CVT
*4: '12 model
*5911 model
DTC Two Drive Detection Item MIL Note
indication*1}
P0203 (73)*" No. 3 Cylinder Injector Circuit Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-121)
P0204 (74)*' No. 4 Cylinder Injector Circuit Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-121)
P0222 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-218)
P0223 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-220)
P0300 (75*5, o Random M isfire Detected ON DTC Troubleshooting
211*4) and any (see page 11-124)
combination o f
the follow ing:
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304 (74)
P0301 (71) o No. 1 Cylinder M isfire Detected ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-127)
(see page 11-127)
(see page 11-127)
(see page 11-127)
P0325 (23) o Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-136)
P0335(4) Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor No Signal ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-138)
P0339(4) Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Interm ittent Interruption ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-140)
P0351 (71) No. 1 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-141)
(see page 11-141)
(see page 11-141)
(see page 11-141)
P0365 (8) Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor No Signal ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-145)
P0369 (8) Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Circuit Interm ittent ON DTC Troubleshooting
Interruption___________________________________ _ (see page 11-147)
P0400 (80) O Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Leak Detected ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-316)
P0401 (80) O Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Insufficient Flow ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-317)
P0404 (12) O Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Circuit ON DTC Troubleshooting
Range/Performance Problem _________ (see page 11-318)
P0406 (12) o Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Position Sensor Circuit ON DTC Troubleshooting
High Voltage_____________________________________________ (see page 11-321)
P0420(67) O Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-312)
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the
CVT system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
* 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jum ped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when
*2: M/T
*3: CVT
*4912 model
*5911 model
(cont'd)
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)

(MIL Cycle Detection ,
indication*1)
P0443 (92) O Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve Circuit ON DTC Troubleshooting
P0451(91) o Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Range/Performance Problem ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-336)
P0452 (91) o Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-337)
P0453 (91) o Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11 -340)
P0455(90) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Large Leak Detected ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11 -343)
P0456(90) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Very Small Leak ON DTC Troubleshooting
Detected (see page 11 -343)
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) OFF DTC Troubleshooting
P0462 o Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Low OFF DTC Troubleshooting
P0463 o Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit High OFF DTC Troubleshooting
P0496(92) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System High Purge Flow ON DTC Troubleshooting
P0497 (90) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Low Purge Flow ON DTC Troubleshooting
P0498 (117) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit ON DTC Troubleshooting
Low Voltage (see page 11-349)
P0499 (117) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit ON DTC Troubleshooting
High Voltage (see page 11-352)
P0506 (14) o Idle Control System RPM Lower Than Expected ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-264)
P0507 (14) o Idle Control System RPM Higher Than Expected ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-265)
P050A (167) o Cold Start Idle A ir Control System Performance Problem ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-148)
P050B (167) o Cold Start Ignition Tim ing Control System Performance ON DTC Troubleshooting
P0532 o A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Voltage OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-266)
P0533 o A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit High Voltage OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-268)
P0563 o Engine Control M odule (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(PCM) Power Source Circuit Unexpected Voltage (see page 11-152)
P0602 (196) Engine Control M odule (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module ON DTC Troubleshooting
(PCM) Programming Error (see page 11-154)
P0606 ( ) Engine Control M odule (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module ON DTC Troubleshooting
(PCM) Processor Malfunction (see page 11-154)
P060A (131 )*3 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (CVT System) Internal ON DTC Troubleshooting
Control Module Malfunction (see page 11-15b)
P062F (131) Engine Control M odule (ECM)/Powertrain Control M odule ON DTC Troubleshooting
(PCM) Internal Control Module Keep Alive M em ory (KAM) (see page 11-155)
Error
P0630 (139) VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-156)
NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected w ith the HDS.
Some automatic transm ission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the
CVT system, and check for autom atic transm ission DTCs.
*1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jum ped w ith the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when
*2: M/T
*3: CVT
*4: '12 model
*5911 model
DTC Two Drive Detection Item M IL Note
indication*1)
P0685 (135) O Engine Control M odule (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module ON DTC Troubleshooting
(PCM) Power Control Circuit/Internal Circuit Malfunction (see page 11-157)
P0720 (122)*2 o Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-157)
P1109 (13) o Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Out of Range High ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-160)
P1116 (86) o Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 ON DTC Troubleshooting
P1128 (5) o M anifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Lower Than ON DTC Troubleshooting
Expected (see page 11-162)
P1129 (5) o M anifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Higher Than ON DTC Troubleshooting
Expected (see page 11-163)
P1157 (48) o A ir Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-164)
P1172 (61) o A ir Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit Out o f Range High ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-166)
P1297 o Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit Low Voltage OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-167)
P1298 o Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit High Voltage OFF DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-169)
PI 454 (91) o Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Range/ Performance Problem ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-352)
P1458 (91) o Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Range/ Performance ON DTC Troubleshooting
P145C (90) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Purge Flow Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-357)
P1658(40) Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Control Relay ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
P1659 (40) Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Control Relay OFF ON DTC Troubleshooting
Malfunction (see page 11 -224)
P1683 (40) Throttle Valve Default Position Spring Performance Problem ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-227)
P1684 (40) Throttle Valve Return Spring Performance Problem ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-228)
P16D5 (132)*3 F-CAN M alfunction (Internal M alfunction) ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-363)
P16D6 (132)*3 IMA-CAN Malfunction (Internal Malfunction) ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11 -363)
P2101 (40) Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11 -229)
P2118 (40) Throttle Actuator Current Range/Performance Problem ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-231)
P2122 (37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A (Throttle Position ON DTC Troubleshooting
(TP) Sensor D) Circuit Low Voltage (see page 11-233)
P2123(37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A (Throttle Position ON DTC Troubleshooting
(TP) Sensor D) Circuit High Voltage (see page 11-236)
P2127 (37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor B (Throttle Position ON DTC Troubleshooting
(TP) Sensor E) Circuit Low Voltage (see page 11-237)
P2128 (37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor B (Throttle Position ON DTC Troubleshooting
(TP) Sensor E) Circuit High Voltage (see page 11-240)
P2135 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A/B Incorrect Voltage Correlation ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-241)
CVT system, and check fo r automatic transm ission DTCs.
*1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jum ped w ith the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when
*2: M/T
*3; CVT
*4: '12 model
*5: '11 model
(cont'd)

indication*1)
P2138 (37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A/B (Throttle Position ON DTC Troubleshooting
(TP) Sensor D/E) Incorrect Voltage Correlation (see page 11-243)
P2176(40) Throttle Actuator Control System Idle Position Not Learned ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-244)
P2183 (192) o Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Range/ ON DTC Troubleshooting
Performance Problem (see page 11-170)
P2184 (192) o Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit Low ON DTC Troubleshooting
P2185 (192) o Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit High ON DTC Troubleshooting
P2195 (155) o A ir Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-176)
P219A (45)*4 o Air-Fuel Ratio Variation of Cylinders ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-177)
P2227 (13) o Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Range/Performance ON DTC Troubleshooting
P2228 (13) o Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-181)
P2229 (13) o Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-181)
P2238 (48) o A ir Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS + Line Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-182)
P2252 (48) o A ir Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS Line Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-183)
P2413 (12) o Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Malfunction ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-322)
P2422 (117) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Stuck ON DTC Troubleshooting
Closed M alfunction (see page 11-352)
P2610 (132) Engine Control M odule (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module ON DTC Troubleshooting
(PCM) Ignition Off Internal Timer Malfunction (see page 11-185)
P2646 (22) o Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-253)
P2647 (22) o Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-255)

P2648 (21) Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Circuit Low Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-257)
P2649 (21) Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Circuit High Voltage ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-258)
P2A00 (61) o A ir Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Range/Performance ON DTC Troubleshooting
U0029 (126) F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF (Engine Control Module ON DTC Troubleshooting
(ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)) (see page 11 -364)
U0038 (112) IMA-CAN M alfunction (BUS-OFF (Engine Control Module ON DTC Troubleshooting
(ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)) (see page 11-364)
U0110 (126) F-CAN Malfunction (Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain ON DTC Troubleshooting
Control Module (PCM)-Motor Control Module (MCM)) (see page 11-369)
U0122 F-CAN Malfunction (Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain OFF DTC Troubleshooting
Control M odule (PCM)-VSA M odulator-Control Unit) (see page 11-372)
U0155 (126) F-CAN Malfunction (Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain ON DTC Troubleshooting
Control Module (PCM)-Gauge Control Module) (see page 11 -374)
----------
U0301 (131 )*4 PGM-FI System Program Version Mismatch ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 11-186)
NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected w ith the HDS.
CVT system, and check for automatic transm ission DTCs.
*1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jum ped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the MIL to blink when
*2: M/T
*3: CVT
*4: '12 model
*5911 model
indication*1)
U1205 (112) IMA-CAN Malfunction (Engine Control Module ON DTC T roubleshooti ng
(ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-Motor Control (see page 11 -364)
Module (MCM))
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the M I L to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the
CVT system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
*1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS. Some DTCs do not cause the M I L to blink when
the SCS line is jumped; these DTCs are shown in the gauge display.
*2: M/T
*3: CVT
*4: '12 model
*5911 model
11-15
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the HDS. If there is no DTC,
do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.

Engine will not start 1. Test the 12 volt battery (see page 22-85). Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set, 2. Test the starter (see page 4-9). No ignition spark
IMA motor works OK) 3. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-290). Restricted exhaust
4. Troubleshoot the fuel pump circuit (see page 11-283). system
Intake vacuum
leaks
Locked up engine
Broken cam chain
Fuel contamination
Engine will not start, and HDS Troubleshoot the ECM/PCM power and ground circuits No power to
does not communicate with (see page 11-190). ECM/PCM
the ECM/PCM No ground to
(MIL comes on and stays on) ECM/PCM
Short in reference
voltage circuit
MIL comes on and stays on, or Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see page 11-187).
never comes on at all, no
DTCs set
Engine will not start Check the immobilizer system (see page 22-196).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays on
or flashes)
Engine starts but stalls Check the immobilizer system (see page 22-196). Low compression
immediately Intake vacuum leak
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set, Weak spark
immobilizer indicator stays on Low fuel pressure
or flashes)
Engine is hard to start 1. Test the 12 volt battery (see page 22-85). Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-290). Intake vacuum
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-247). leaks
Fuel contamination
Weak spark
Cold fast idle too low 1. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page Incorrect valve
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 11-274). adjustment
2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-273). Fuel contamination
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11 -247).
Cold fast idle too high 1. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page Intake vacuum leak
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 11-274). Incorrect valve
2. Check the idle speed (see page 11 -273). adjustment
3. Test the throttle body (see page 11-246).
Idle speed fluctuates 1. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page Incorrect valve
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 11-274). timing or clearance
2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-273). adjustment
3. Test the throttle body (see page 11-246). Intake vacuum
4. Troubleshoot the A/C signal circuit (see page 11-271). leaks
After warming up, idle speed Test the throttle body (see page 11-246).
is below specifications
without load
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
After warming up, idle speed Inspect the APP sensor (see page 11 -251).
is above specifications
without load
Low power Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-290). Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) Incorrect camshaft
timing
Incorrect engine oil
level
Exhaust restriction
Fuel contamination
Engine stalls 1. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page Intake vacuum
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 11-274). leaks
2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-290). Faulty harness and
3. Check the idle speed (see page 11 -273). sensor
4. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal connections
circuit (see page 11 -272). Fuel contamination
Difficult to refuel 1. Check the fuel tank vapor control valve hose between Malfunctioning gas
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) the EVAP canister and the fuel tank. station filling
2. Inspect the fuel filler neck for restrictions. nozzle
3. Replace the fuel tank unit (see page 11 -301). Faulty fuel tank
4. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-306). vapor control valve
Fuel cap warning message Troubleshoot the fuel cap warning message system (see EVAP vacuum leak
stays on page 11-357).
SIL never comes on (M/T) 1.Troubleshoot the shift indicator lamp (see page 11-188).
2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnosis function
(see page 22-325).
SIL stays on (M/T) 1. Troubleshoot the shift indicator lamp (see page 11-188).
2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnosis function
(see page 22-325).
When the clutch pedal is Troubleshoot the shift indicator lamp (see page 11-188).
pressed, the SIL is slow to go
off (M/T)
SIL does not work sometimes Troubleshoot the shift indicator lamp (see page 11-188).
(M/T)
HDS does not communicate Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-383).
with the ECM/PCM or the
vehicle
System Description
Fuel and Emissions System Diagram

System Diagram
FUEL FILL CAP @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER FILTER

(D FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
FUELTANK VENT SHUT VALVE
@ FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR
FUEL PUMP EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
FUEL FILTER K N O C K SENSOR
AIR CLEANER OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
M ASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR/ POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR @ CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
@ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) IGNITION COIL
CANISTER PURGE VALVE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT)
THROTTLE BODY SENSOR 1
CHECK VALVE CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR B AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR (SENSOR 1)
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A W ARM UP THREE W AY CATALYTIC
@ BRAKE BOOSTER CONVERTER (WU-TWC)
INJECTOR SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR (SECONDARY H 02S) (SENSOR 2)
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE and UNDER-FLOOR THREE W AY CATALYTIC
POSITION SENSOR CONVERTER (TWC)
Vacuum Hose Routing
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR
To BRAKE
BOOSTER
/ To
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER
1
J
THROTTLE BODY
FRONT OF
VEHICLE EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE
VALVE
(cont'd)
Fuel and Emissions Systems
System Description (cont'd)
Electronic Control Systems

The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the engine control module (ECM) on vehicles
with manual transmissions or the powertrain control module (PCM) on vehicles with automatic transmissions.
Self-diagnosis
The ECM/PCM detects the failure of a signal from a sensor or from another control unit and stores a Pending DTC or a
Confirmed DTC. Depending on the failure, a Confirmed DTC is stored in either the first orthe second drive cycle. When a
Confirmed DTC is stored, the ECM/PCM turns on the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) by a signal to the gauge control
module via F-CAN.
One Dri ve Cycle Detection Method

When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit, the ECM/PCM stores a
Confirmed DTC for the failure and turns on the MIL immediately.
Two Drive Cycle Detection Method
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit in the first drive cycle, the
ECM/PCM stores a Pending DTC. The MIL does not come on at this time. If the failure continues in the second drive
cycle, the ECM/PCM stores a Confirmed DTC and turns on the MIL.
Fail-Safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit, the ECM/PCM ignores that signal
and substitutes a pre-programmed value for it that allows the engine to continue running. This causes a Confirmed DTC
to be stored and the MIL to come on.
MIL Bulb Check and Readiness Code Condition
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the ECM/PCM turns on the MIL via the F-CAN circuit for about 15 to 20
seconds to check the bulb condition. If any readiness codes are not set to complete, the MIL flashes five times. If all
readiness codes are set to complete, the MIL goes off.
Self Shut Down (SSD) Mode
After the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (I) or to LOCK (0), the ECM/PCM stays on for up to an hour. If an
ECM/PCM connector is disconnected during this time, the ECM/PCM may be damaged. To cancel this mode, disconnect
the negative cable from the 12 volt battery, or jump the SCS line with the HDS after the ignition switch is turned to
ACCESSORY (I) or to LOCK (0).
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at ECM/PCM Connector A ( ) (44P)
Terminal W ire color Terminal name Description Signal

number
1*2 LT GRN VBSOL (POWER SOURCE Power source for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
FOR SOLENOID VALVES) valve
2 GRN MPMON1 (BRAKE Detects brake booster With ignition switch ON (II): about 3.0 V (with no
BOOSTER PRESSURE pressure sensor A signal vacuum in the brake booster)
MONITOR A) At idle : about 1.0 V (depending on engine speed)
3 Not used Not used
4 RED FANL (RADIATOR FAN Drives radiator fan relay With radiator fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) With radiator fan stopped: battery voltage
5 GRY FANH (RADIATOR FAN Drives A/C condenser fan With A/C condenser fan running at high speed:
CONTROL) relay about 0 V
With A/C condenser fan running at low speed or
stopped: battery voltage
6 PUR MRLY (PGM-FI MAIN Drives PGM-FI main relay 1 With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
RELAY 1) With ignition switch in LOCK (0): battery voltage
7 BLU STS (STARTER SWITCH Detects starter switch With ignition switch in START (III): battery
SIGNAL) signal voltage
With ignition switch in any position other than
START (III): about 0 V
8 YEL IGP1 (POWER SOURCE 1) Power source for With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
ECM/PCM circuit
9 PNK SG6 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
10 LT GRN VSV (EVAPORATIVE Drives EVAP canister vent With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
EMISSION (EVAP) shut valve
CANISTER VENT SHUT
VALVE)
11 Not used Not used
12 LT GRN STC (STARTER CUT Drives starter cut relay With ignition switch in START (III): battery
RELAY) voltage
With ignition switch in any position other than
START (III): about 0 V
13*1 BRN BKSWNC (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal released: battery voltage
With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
pressed: about 0 V
13*2 BRN BKSWNC (BRAKE PEDAL Detects idle stop switch With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
POSITION SWITCH (IDLE signal released: battery voltage
STOP SWITCH)) With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
pressed: about 0 V
14 GRY ACC (A/C COMPRESSOR Drives A/C compressor With compressor ON: about 0 V
CLUTCH RELAY) clutch relay With compressor OFF: battery voltage
*1: M/T
*2: CVT
(cont'd)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
u I ] tr
Terminal W ire color Term inal name Description Signal

number
15 GRN IMOFPR (IMMOBILIZER Drives PGM-FI main relay 2 About 0 V for 2 seconds after turning ignition
FUEL PUMP RELAY) switch ON (II), then battery voltage
With engine running: about 0 V
16 BLU ACPD (A/C PRESSURE Detects A/C pressure With A/C switch ON: about 1.4 4.8 V
SENSOR) sensor signal (depending on A/C pressure)
17 YEL APSA (ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor A With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
PEDAL POSITION (APP) signal pressed: about 4.7 V
SENSOR A) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
released: about 1.0 V
18 PUR APSB (ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor B With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
PEDAL POSITION (APP) signal pressed: about 2.4 V
SENSOR B) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
19 YEL VCC6 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
20 RED ETCSRLY (ELECTRONIC Drives electronic throttle With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
THROTTLE CONTROL control system (ETCS)
SYSTEM (ETCS) CONTROL control relay
RELAY)
21 ORN SUBRLY (PGM-FI Drives A/F sensor relay With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SUBRELAY)
23 PNK ELD (ELECTRICAL LOAD Detects ELD signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.8 V
DETECTOR (ELD)) (depending on electrical load)
24 LT GRN VCC5 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
25 BRN VCC4 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference W ith ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
26 PUR FTP (FUEL TANK Detects FTP sensor signal W ith ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill cap
PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR) removed: about 2.5 V
27*1 PNK RVSLCK (REVERSE Drives reverse lockout Vehicle speed is more than 12.4 mph (20 km/h):
LOCKOUT SOLENOID) solenoid about 0 V
Vehicle speed is less than 9.3 mph (15 km/h):
battery voltage
27*2 GRY SLS (SHIFT LOCK Drives shift lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II), in P, brake pedal
SOLENOID) pressed, and accelerator released: about 0 V
*1: M/T
*2; CVT
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal

number
28 LT BLU NEP (ENGINE SPEED Outputs engine speed W ith engine running: pulses
PULSE) pulse
29 BLU VSP (VEHICLE SPEED Sends vehicle speed signal Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
SIGNAL OUTPUT)
30*2 YEL SUPP (PADDLE SHIFTER Detects paddle shifter + W ith ignition switch ON (II) and paddle shifter-F
+ UPSHIFT SWITCH) (upshift switch) signal (upshift switch) pressed: about 0 V
W ith ignition switch ON (II) and paddle sh ifte r+
(upshift switch) released: battery voltage
31 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check W ith service check signal shorted using the HDS:
SIGNAL) signal about 0 V
W ith service check signal opened: about 5.0 V
32*1 LT GRN RVSSW (REVERSE Detects back-up light W ith ignition switch ON (II) and transmission in
SWITCH) switch (reverse position) R: battery voltage
signal
32*2 LT GRN SDNP (PADDLE SHIFTER Detects paddle shifter W ith ignition switch ON (II) and paddle shifter
- DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) (downshift switch) signal (downshift switch) pressed: about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and paddle shifter
(downshift switch) released: battery voltage
33 WHT ECT2 (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor 2 W ith ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.8 V
TEMPERATURE (ECT) signal (depending on engine coolant temperature)
SENSOR 2)
34 LT BLU SG5 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
35 GRN SG4 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
36 GRN F-CAN H (CAN Sends and receives With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
COMMUNICATION communication signal
SIGNAL HIGH)
37 PNK F-CAN L (CAN Sends and receives W ith ignition switch ON (II): pulses
SIGNAL LOW)
* 1: M/T
*2: CVT
ECM/PCM inputs and Outputs at ECM/PCM Connector A ( ) (44P)
n n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 }
20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
J
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
T erm ina l s i de o f fe m a l e term inals

number
38 WHT IMA-CAN H (CAN Detects and receives W ith ignition switch ON (II): pulses
COMMUNICATION communication signal to
SIGNAL HIGH) m otor control module
(MCM)
39 RED IMA-CAN L (CAN Detects and receives W ith ignition switch ON (II): pulses
COMMUNICATION communication signal to
SIGNAL LOW) m otor control module
(MCM)
40 WHT BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal Brake pedal released: about 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal Brake pedal pressed: battery voltage
41*1 LT GRN CRMTCLS (CRUISE Detects clutch pedal W ith ignition switch ON (II) and clutch pedal
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION position switch B signal released: about 0 V
SWITCH W ith ignition switch ON (II) and clutch pedal
pressed: battery voltage
42*3 ORN WEN (WRITE ENABLE Detects w rite enable signal W ith ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SIGNAL)
43 YEL 1GP2 (POWER SOURCE 2 ) Power source for W ith ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
ECM/PCM circuit
44 PNK S-NET5V (SERIAL Sends serial With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
COMMUNICATION FOR communication signal With key removed from ignition switch:
IMMOBILIZER) 0 -5 .0 V
*1: M/T
*3: '11 model
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at ECM/PCM Connector B (A ) (44P)
Terminal W ire color Terminal name Description Signal

number
1 BRN PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for Less than 0.2 V at all times
ECM/PCM
2 BLU/RED EGR (EXHAUST GAS Drives EGR valve W ith EGR operating: duty controlled
RECIRCULATION (EGR) W ith EGR not operating: about 0 V
VALVE)
3 YEL/BLU PCS (EVAPORATIVE Drives EVAP canister W ith engine running, engine coolant below
EMISSION (EVAP) purge valve 140 F (60 C): battery voltage
CANISTER PURGE VALVE) W ith engine running, engine coolant above
140 F (60 C): duty controlled
4 RED MPMON2 (BRAKE Detects brake booster W ith ignition switch ON (II): about 2.0 V
BOOSTER PRESSURE pressure sensor B signal At id le : about 1.0 V (depending on engine speed)
MONITOR B)
5 Not used Not used
6 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference W ith ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
7 YEL/RED OPSW (OIL PRESSURE Detects engine oil pressure W ith engine running: battery voltage
SWITCH) signal
8 Not used Not used
9 Not used Not used
10*2 GRN/BLK INHSOL (INHIBITOR Drives inhibitor solenoid Until radiator fan comes on twice during idling in
SOLENOID CONTROL) all positions : about OV
W ith reverse inhibitor control in R : battery
voltage
12*1 RED CLSW (CLUTCH SWITCH) Detects clutch pedal W ith ignition switch ON (II) and clutch pedal
position switch A signal released: about 5 V
W ith ignition switch ON (II) and clutch pedal
pressed: about 0 V
12*2 RED/BLK ATPN (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission W ith ignition switch ON (II) in N: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH IN N) range switch N position W ith ignition switch ON (II) in any position other
input signal than N: about 5.0 V
13*1 RED/BLK NSW (VCC) Detects neutral position W ith ignition switch ON (II) and transmission in
neutral: about 0 V
W ith ignition switch ON (II) and transmission in
gear: about 5.0 V
13*2 BLU/BLK ATPP (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission W ith ignition switch ON (II) in P: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH IN P) range switch P position W ith ignition switch ON (II) in any position other
input signal than P: battery voltage
14*2 WHT ATPR (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission W ith ignition switch ON (II) in R: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH IN R) range switch R position W ith ignition switch ON (II) in any position other
input signal than R: battery voltage
* 1: M/T
*2: CVT
System Descriptio n (cont'd)
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at ECM/PCM Connector B (-^) (44P)
n n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
LJ

number
1T2 WHT/RED NDR (CVT INPUT SHAFT Detects CVT input shaft With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V, or about
(DRIVE PULLEY) SPEED (drive pulley) speed sensor 5.0 V
SENSOR) signal W ith engine idling in N: pulses
19*2 WHT/GRN NDN (CVT OUTPUT SHAFT Detects CVT output shaft W ith ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V, or about
(DRIVEN PULLEY) SPEED (driven pulley) speed 5.0 V
SENSOR) sensor signal W ith engine idling in N: pulses
2 V 1 RED/BLK NSW(IGP) Neutral position switch W ith ignition switch ON (II) and transmission in
power supply neutral: about 0 V
W ith ignition switch ON (II) and transmission in
gear: battery voltage
21 2 PNK ATPD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission W ith ignition switch ON (II) in D: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH IN D) range switch D position W ith ignition switch ON (II) in any position other
input signal than D: battery voltage
23 RED/WHT ECT1 (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor 1 With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.8 V
TEMPERATURE (ECT) signal (depending on engine coolant temperature)
SENSOR 1)
28*2 BLU/YEL ATPFWD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission With ignition switch ON (II) in D: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH IN FWD) range switch FWD position W ith ignition switch ON (II) in any position other
input signal than D: battery voltage
29 WHT/BLK EGRP (EXHAUST GAS Detects EGR valve position With engine running: about 1.23.0 V
RECIRCULATION (EGR) sensor signal (depending on EGR valve lift)
VALVE POSITION
SENSOR)
30 RED/GRN V G + (MASS AIR FLOW Detects MAF sensor signal A t idle with warmed up engine and no electrical
(MAF) SENSOR +SIDE) load: about 1.2 V
31 RE D/YE L IAT (INTAKE AIR Detects IAT sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.0 V
TEMPERATURE (IAT) (about 2.6 V at normal operating temperature)
SENSOR)
32 BLK/RED V G - (MASS AIR FLOW Ground for MAF sensor Less than 0.2 V at all times
(MAF) SENSOR -S ID E ) signal
* 1: M/T
* 2 : CVT
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at ECM/PCM Connector B (A ) (44P)

number
34*1 BLK/WHT NC (COUNTERSHAFT Detects output shaft Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
SPEED SENSOR) (countershaft) speed W ith ignition switch ON (II) and vehicle stopped:
sensor signal about 0 V, or about 5 V
34*2 BLK/WHT VEL (VEHICLE SPEED Detects vehicle speed W ith ignition switch ON (II) and when vehicle is
SENSOR) sensor stopped: about 0 V or, about 5.0 V
Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
36 BLK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for Less than 0.2 V at all times
ECM/PCM circuit
39*1 GRN CLSW2 (CLUTCH SWITCH Detects clutch pedal With ignition switch ON (II) and clutch pedal
2) position switch C signal released: about 5 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and clutch pedal
pressed: about 0 V
41 GRN/YEL SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
42 *2 YEL SCLS (CVT CLUTCH Drives CVT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): duty controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve
SOLENOID VALVE)
43*2 GRN/WHT DNLS (CVT DRIVEN Drives CVT driven pulley W ith ignition switch ON (II): duty controlled
PULLEY PRESSURE pressure control solenoid
CONTROL SOLENOID valve
VALVE)
44*2 BLU/WHT DRLS (CVT DRIVE PULLEY Drives CVT drive pulley With ignition switch ON (II): duty controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL pressure control solenoid
SOLENOID VALVE) valve
*1: M/T
*2: CVT
(cont'd)
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at ECM/PCM Connector C (O) (44P)

number
1 WHT IG1ETCS (IGNITION Detects ignition signal W ith ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SIGNAL ETCS)
2 BLK PGMETCS (POWER Ground circuit for Less than 0.2 V at all times
GROUND ETCS) ECM/PCM
3 YEL E T C S M - (THROTTLE Ground for throttle With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
ACTUATOR -S ID E ) actuator released: about 0 V
4 YEL/RED ETCSM + (THROTTLE Drives throttle actuator About 1.5 V im mediately after turning ignition
ACTUATOR +SIDE) switch ON (II), then about 0 V
5 BRN INJ1 (No. 1 INJECTOR) Drives No. 1 injector At idle: duty controlled
6 RED INJ2 (No. 2 INJECTOR) Drives No. 2 injector With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
7 BLU INJ3 (No. 3 INJECTOR) Drives No. 3 injector
8 YEL INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR) Drives No. 4 injector
9 GRN AFSHTC (AIR FUEL RATIO Drives A/F sensor (sensor With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
(A/F) SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 1) heater With warmed up engine running: duty controlled
HEATER CONTROL)
11 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 3.0 V
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE At idle: about 1.0 V (depending on engine speed)
(MAP) SENSOR)
12 BLU VCC3 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference W ith ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
13 GRN SG3 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
14 GRN/YEL VTS (ROCKER ARM OIL Drives rocker arm oil At idle: about 0 V
CONTROL SOLENOID) control solenoid
15 WHT IGPLS1 (No. 1 IGNITION Drives No. 1 ignition coil W ith ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
COIL PULSE) W ith engine running: pulses
16 WHT/GRN IGPLS2 (No. 2 IGNITION Drives No. 2 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
17 WHT/BLK IGPLS3 (No. 3 IGNITION Drives No. 3 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
18 WHT/BLU IGPLS4 (No. 4 IGNITION Drives No. 4 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
20 RED/BLK TPS A (THROTTLE Detects TP sensor A signal W ith ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
POSITION (TP) SENSOR A) pressed: about 3.9 V
W ith ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
Terminal Wire color Term i nal name Description Signal

number
21 RED TPSB (THROTTLE Detects TP sensor B signal W ith ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
POSITION (TP) SENSOR B) pressed: about 4.1 V
W ith ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
27 WHT SH02S (SECONDARY Detects secondary H02S W ith throttle fu lly opened from idle and warmed
HEATED OXYGEN (sensor 2) signal up engine: about 0.8 V
SENSOR (SECONDARY With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V
H02S) (SENSOR 2))
28 BLK/WHT S02SHTC (SECONDARY Drives secondary H02S With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
HEATED OXYGEN (sensor 2) heater With warmed up engine running: duty controlled
SENSOR (SECONDARY
H02S) (SENSOR 2)
HEATER)
29 RED AFS+ (AIR FUEL RATIO Detects A/F sensor (sensor A t idle: about 2.2 V
(A/F) SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 1) signal
+SIDE)
30 RED/YEL A F S - (AIR FUEL RATIO Detects A/F sensor (sensor At idle: about 1.8 V
(A/F) SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 1) signal
-SID E)
31 GRN CMP (CAMSHAFT Detects CMP sensor signal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CMP) SENSOR)
32 BLU CKP (CRANKSHAFT Detects CKP sensor signal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CKP) SENSOR)
(cont'd)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

number
33 BLU/BLK VTPSW(ROCKER ARM OIL Detects rocker arm oil At idle: about 0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) pressure switch signal
36 BLK/RED IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
39 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
40 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for Less than 0.2 V at all times
ECM/PCM
42 RED/BLU KS (KNOCK SENSOR) Detects knock sensor With engine knocking: pulses
signal W ithout engine knocking: 0 V
43 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
44 BRN/YEL LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for Less than 0.2 V at all times
ECM/PCM
ECM/PCM Electrical Connections
IG N ITIO N COIL
RELA Y
FUSES:
BATTERY TERMINAL FUSE BOX:
N o . A3 (20 A)
N o . A1 (100 A)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX:
No. B39IGP (15 A)
;No.B60IGSW(50A)
N o . B1 BACK UP (15 A)
No. B24 STOP/HORN (10 A)
No. B33IG COIL
(IGNITION COIL) (15 A)
No. B22 METER (7.5 A)
No. B12IG IMA (10 A)
Q No. B20 FUEL PUMP(15 A)
1N O .B 10A /C (7.5 A)
I No. B7 TRANS. SOL (10 A)
I No. B44 STS (7.5 A)
I No. B5 BACK LIGHT (10 A)
DNo. B31IGPS (7.5 A)
DNo. B26 LAF (A/F SENSOR) {10 A)
DNo. B52 DBW (ETCS) (15 A)
*1: M/T
*2: CVT
(cont'd)
11-34
ECM/PCM A ( ) (44P) ECM/PCM B (A)(44P) ECM/PCM C (O) (44P)
1 2 3 I 4 I 5 | 6 I 7 8 9 L M2 3 |4 I5 |6 | 7 8 I 9 I I I
1 1 12 3 I 4 I 5 6 I 7 8 I 9 I I
IB LI 1
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19 j 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
1
20 21 22 23 24 25 1 20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25
1 1 1 i 1
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
|3 6137 3 8 | 3 9 140141142 4 3 | 4 4 I 136 37 38139140141142 4 3 1441 1
136137 3 8 13 9 14 0 41 (4 2 431441
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
11-36
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram
*2: CVT
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
FUSES:
BATTERY TERMINAL FUSE BOX:
N o . A1 (100 A)
(DNo. A3 (20 A)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX;
No. B1 BACK UP (15 A)
No. B60 IGSW (50 A)
No. B22 METER (7.5 A)
No. B12 IG IMA (10 A)
No. B10 A/C (7.5 A)
No. B7 TRANS. SOL (10 A)
No. B44 STS (7.5 A)
(cont'd)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX:

Q) No. B26 LAF (A/F SENSOR) (10 A)
0) No. B31 IGPS (7.5 A)
Cl No. B39 IGP (15 A)
<3>No. B33 IG COIL (IGNITION COIL) (15 A)
0 No. B24 STOP/HORN (10 A)
Cl No. B52 DBW (ETCS) (15 A)
Cl No. B20 FUEL PUMP(15 A)
<3 No. B5 BACK LIGHT (10 A)
(cont'd)

(cont'd)
(cont'd)
(cont'd)
(cont'd)
| ------ L i I *1: M/T

_ l F ' *2: CVT
(cont'd)
Communication Systems Circuit Diagram
ECM/PCM
(cont'd)
PGM-FI System Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The programmed fuel injection (PGM-FI) system is a The CMP sensor detects the position of the No. 1
sequential multiport fuel injection system. cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to
each cylinder.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay
When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling from
the A/C system, it delays the compressor from being
energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth
transition to the A/C mode.
Air Fuel Rati o (A/F) Sensor
The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The
A/F sensor is installed upstream of the warm up three
way catalytic converter (WU-TWC), and sends signals to
the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection
accordingly.
SENSOR Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor

TERMINALS
The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by
the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing, timing for
the fuel injection of each cylinder, and engine misfire
detection.
MAGNET
HEATER
TERMINALS
Barometri c Pressure (BARO) Sensor

The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that is used
by the ECM/PCM to modify the basic duration of the fuel TERMINAL O-RING
injection discharge.
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensors 1 and 2 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressures
resistors (thermistors). The resistance decreases as the into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM.
engine coolant temperature increases,
Ignition Tim ing Control

The ECM/PCM contains the memory for basic ignition
timing at various engine speeds and manifold absolute Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation
pressures. It also adjusts the timing according to engine to Readiness Codes)
coolant temperature and intake air temperature.
The vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of
Injector Timing and Duration the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If
The ECM/PCM contains the memory for basic discharge the vehicle's 12 volt battery has been disconnected or
duration at various engine speeds and manifold gone dead, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some
read out from the memory, is further modified by input states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure
from various sensors to obtain the final discharge these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set
duration. to complete, the vehicle may fail the test, or the test
By monitoring long term fuel trim, the ECM/PCM can cannot be finished.
detect long term malfunctions in the fuel system and set To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn
DTCs (diagnostic trouble codes) if needed. the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start the engine.
Knock Sensor The MIL will come on for 1520 seconds. If it then goes
off, the readiness codes are complete. If it flashes five
The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to times, one or more readiness codes are not complete.
minimize knock. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as
described in the procedures (see page 11-79).
Mass A ir Flow (MAF) Sensor/I ntake A ir Temperature Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S)
(IAT) Sensor
The secondary H02S detects the oxygen content in the
The mass airflow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature exhaust gas downstream of the three way catalytic
(IAT) sensor contains a hot wire, a cold film, and a converter (TWC), and sends signals to the ECM/PCM
thermistor. The sensor is in the intake air passage. The which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly.
resistance of the hot wire, the cold film, and the To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater.
thermistor changes due to intake air temperature and air The ECM/PCM compares the H02S output with the A/F
flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency. The
current to keep the hot wire at a set temperature. The secondary H02S is installed upstream of the under-floor
current is converted to voltage in the control circuit, then three way catalytic converter (TWC).
output to the ECM/PCM.
SENSOR
TERMINALS
ELEMENT
HEATER HEATER
TERMINALS
O utput Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T) Vehicle Speed Sensor (CVT)
This sensor detects output shaft (countershaft) speed. This sensor detects final drive shaft speed.
TERMINAL
Shift Indicator Lamp (SIL) (M/T)
The shift indicator lamp (SIL) guides gear shift timing for more fuel-efficient driving. Higher fuel economy is obtained
when gears are shifted as prompted by the SIL. When the SIL comes on, the Eco indicator goes off. If you shift gears
when prompted by the SIL, the ambient meter color is green. If you do not shift gears when prompted by the SIL, the
ambient meter color is blue.
When Sport Mode of the 3-mode drive system is selected, the SIL stays off.
HIGHER CURRENT FUEL ECONOMY

FUEL ECONOMY
Green Blue green Blue
The up shift indicator prompts you when to shift to a higher gear, keeping the engine rpms as low as possible for the
best fuel economy.
FUEL ECONOMY
IMPROVEMENT
With SIL
Without SIL
(cont'd)
The down shift indicator prompts you when to shift to a lower gear to prevent the engine rpm from being too low when
the vehicle is climbing a hill, or for faster accelerating on a flat road. To avoid sudden engine braking, the SIL does not
prompt downshifts to 1st gear.
VEHICLE
SPEED
t
High
ENGINE
SPEED
High .
GEAR * 4th_
POS IT I ON
DOWN 3rd
DOWN
SHIFT Y
ACCELERATION
PEDAL POSITION
Electronic Throttle Control System Throttle Body
The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. To
throttle control system (ETCS). Refer to the system prevent icing of the throttle plate, the lower portion of
diagram to see a functional layout of the system. the throttle valve is heated by engine coolant from the
cylinder head.
Idle control: When the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM
controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle THROTTLE VALVE
speed according to engine loads.
Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is
pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve
depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor signal.
Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle
actuator to maintain the set speed when cruise control is
operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the
cruise control actuator.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor
varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM which then
controls the throttle position.
THROTTLE POSITION
(TP) SENSOR and
THROTTLE ACTUATOR
(cont'd)
Electronic Throttle Control System Diagram

The electronic throttle control system consists of the throttle actuator, TP sensor A/B, the APP sensor A/B, the ETCS
control relay, and the ECM/PCM.
APP
VTEC
This system improves fuel efficiency and reduces exhaust emissions at all levels of engine speed, vehicle speed, and
engine load.
The VTEC system changes the cam profile to correspond to engine speed. It maximizes torque at low engine speed
and output at high engine speed.
The valve pause cam (low lift cam) is used at low engine speeds, and the high lift cam is used at high engine speeds.
The rocker arm oil control solenoid switches both intake rocker arms of the VTEC system on and off; the solenoid is
controlled by the ECM/PCM.
The rocker arm oil pressure switch detects VTEC system oil pressure and sends this information to the ECM/PCM.
ENGINE SPEED ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE INTAKE VALVE LIFT
SOLENOID SWITCH
LOW OFF ON PAUSE (LOW)
HIGH ON OFF HIGH
Operation
Low engine speed
At low engine speed, the rocker arm oil control solenoid is turned off by the ECM/PCM. Oil pressure from the rocker arm
oil control valve does not enter the intake rocker shaft. Each intake rocker arm is separated by a return spring and the
intake secondary rocker arm is lifted by the low lift cam lobe.
High engine speed
At high engine speed, the rocker arm oil control solenoid is turned on by the ECM/PCM. Oil pressure from the rocker arm
control solenoid enters into the intake primary rocker arm via the rocker shaft, and it moves the VTEC switching piston in
the rocker arm. This causes the VTEC switching piston to slide into the intake secondary rocker arm, locking the rocker
arms together. Both intake rocker arms are lifted by the high lift cam lobe.
INTAKE PRIMARY INTAKE SECONDARY

ROCKER ARM ROCKER ARM
Idle Control S y s te m Fuel Supply System

When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the Fuel Cutoff Control
transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, or the
During deceleration with the throttle valve closed,
12 volt battery is charging, the ECM/PCM sends signals
current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel
to the throttle actuator to maintain the correct idle speed.
economy at engine speeds over 850 rpm ('11 model
Brake Pedal Position Switch (M/T)) (11 model (CVT): 650 rpm, 12 model (M/T):
1,200 rpm, *12 model (CVT): 850 rpm). Fuel cutoff control
The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM
also occurs when the engine speed exceeds 6,500 rpm,
when the brake pedal is pressed.
regardless of the position of the throttle valve, to protect
the engine from over-revving. When the vehicle is
stopped, the ECM/PCM cuts the fuel at engine speeds
over 4,800 rpm (CVT: 4,500 rpm). On a cold engine, fuel
cut occurs at a lower engine speed.
Fuel Pump Control
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the
ECM/PCM grounds PGM-FI main relay 2 which feeds
current to the fuel pump for 2 seconds to pressurize the
fuel system. With the engine running, the ECM/PCM
grounds PGM-FI main relay 2 and feeds current to the
fuel pump. When the engine is not running and the
ignition is turned to ON (II), the ECM/PCM cuts ground to
PGM-FI main relay 2 which cuts current to the fuel pump.
PGM-FI Main Relays 1 and 2
PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition
switch is turned to ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the
ECM/PCM, to power the injectors, and to power PGM-FI
main relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply
power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition
switch is turned to ON (II) and when the engine is
cranking or running.
Catalytic Converter System
Warm Up Three Way Catalytic Converter (WU-TWC)
and Under-Floor Three Way Catalytic Converter
(Under-floor TWC)
The WU-TWC and the under-floor TWC convert
hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides
of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust gas to carbon dioxide
(C02), nitrogen (N2), and water vapor.
WU-TWC (ATTACHED TO THE CYLINDER HEAD)
WARM UP
THREE WAY
CATALYST
UNDER-FLOOR TWC
Exhaust Gas Recirculation {EGR) System

Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of the system.
EGR Va l ve
The EGR valve lowers peak combustion temperatures and reduces oxides of nitrogen emissions (NOx) by recirculating
exhaust gas through the intake manifold and into the combustion chambers.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram
The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR pipe and the
intake manifold, and into the combustion chambers. Routing the exhaust gas through the EGR pipe helps to prevent
carbon deposits from forming in the intake manifold and the throttle body. The ECM/PCM memory contains the ideal
EGR valve positions for various operating conditions.
The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift and sends it to the ECM/PCM. The ECM/PCM then
compares it with the ideal lift in its memory (based on signals sent from other sensors). If there is any difference
between the two, the ECM/PCM adjusts the current to the EGR valve.
(cont'd)
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System

The PCV valve prevents blow-by gases from escaping into t he atmosphere by venting them into the intake manifold.
BREATHER
< = 3 : FRESH AIR

E v a p o ra tiv e E m is s io n (E V A P ) S y s te m Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout of The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into
the system. an electrical input to the ECM/PCM.
EVAP Canister SENSOR UNIT

The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from
the fuel tank until it can be purged back into the engine
and burned.
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
When the engine coolant temperature is below 140 F
(60 C), the ECM/PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge
valve, which prevents the purging of the EVAP canister.
IN
EVAP Cani ster Vent Shut Valve

The EVAP canister vent shut valve is mounted in the
EVAP canister.
The EVAP canister vent shut valve controls venting of
the EVAP canister.
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram
The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fue l vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor from the fuel tank is
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged from the canister into the engine and burned.
The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold.
The purging vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which operates whenever the engine coolant
temperature is above 140 F (60 C).
(cont'd)
Fuel Cap Warning Message How to clear the message without the HDS
The ECM/PCM detects a loose or missing fuel fill cap as Procedure
an evaporative system leak and alerts the driver by
showing a warning message on the multi-information 1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
display. 2. Start the engine, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0 ).
First drive cycle
The first time a leak is detected, a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP 3. Repeat step 2 two more times.
message appears on the multi-information display (A).
To scroll to another message, press the select/reset
button. The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message appears each
time you restart the engine until the system turns the
message off.
Shows "TIGHTEN FUEL CAP" in the

multi-information display
How to clear the message with the HDS

Procedure
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
2. Clear the Pending DTC with the HDS.
3. Verify there is no leak by doing an EVAP FUNCTION
TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
3-Mode Drive System
The 3-mode drive system consists of Normal mode, ECON mode, and Sport mode. The mode is changed by pressing
one of the three mode buttons on the left side of the instrument panel.
Ambient Meter
The ambient meter is the ring of color around the speedometer. In Normal or ECON mode, it changes color based on
data the ECM/PCM receives from various control units and sensors. The ECM/PCM calculates this data, forms an Eco
drive profile, and then sends the profile to the gauge control module via F-CAN. When the gauge control module
receives the Eco drive profile data, it responds by changing the background color of the speedometer. During low fuel
economy, the ambient meter is blue; at medium fuel economy, the meter is blue-green; and at high fuel economy, it's
green.
In Sport mode, the ambient meter color is red at all times, and the shift indicator lamp (SIL) stays off (M/T).
Normal Mode, ECON Mode
This illustration shows the M /T model.

Sport Mode
AMBIENT METER
NORMAL
ECON
This illustration shows the M /T model.
(cont'd)
Normal Mode, ECON Mode, and Sport Mode

Normal mode: This mode is a balance between driving performance and fuel economy. When you start the engine, the
vehicle is in Normal mode. ECON mode: This mode provides the best fuel economy. If the accelerator is pressed quickly,
the ETCS (electronic throttle control system) keeps the throttle response steady and smooth. Sport mode: This mode
offers increased accelerator response.
Throttle
Valve
Openi ng
Accelerator Pedal Travel
Conditions In ECON Mode

Cruise control: To decrease fuel use when cruise control is on in ECON mode, the cruise acceleration and cruise speed
responses are milder than normal. When the vehicle speed is reduced by extra load conditions, cruise control
assumes its normal response to maintain vehicle speed.
IMA (Integrated Motor Assist): In ECON mode, the conditions for auto idle stop are expanded, regenerative braking
during deceleration is increased, and power to the IPU (intelligent power unit) fan is increased.
Air conditioning: To decrease fuel use in ECON mode, the A/C switches to recirculation mode and the compressor
operates less frequently.
Driver Feedback System
-ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM )/

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) MOTOR CONTROL MODULE
(M C M )
T h i s il l ustration shows the M/T model.
(cont'd)
The driver feedback system provides real-time driving information, and gives drivers an interactive way to practice
fuel-efficient driving. The driver feedback system includes two visual aids on the instrument panel: an ambient meter
and an Eco guide.
Ambient Meter (see page 11-73)
Eco Guide
The Eco guide is one of the screens in the multi-information display (MID). It rewards continuous improvement in fuel
economy by "growing" five plant icons, one leaf at a time, based on fuel-efficient driving. The Eco guide has three
progressively difficult Eco stages: The first stage can grow two leaves on each of the five plants; the second stage can
grow four leaves on each plant; the third stage can grow a blossom on each plant.
In addition, an Eco drive bar at the bottom of the Eco guide gives the driver real-time fuel economy information. A longer
bar indicates lower fuel economy, and a shorter bar indicates higher fuel economy.
The ECM/PCM adds data to the Eco guide by forming an Eco drive profile. The ECM/PCM sends the Eco drive profile to
the gauge control module via F-CAN. When the gauge control module receives the Eco drive profile data, it responds by
adding the data to the Eco guide.
ECM/PCM GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
INFORMATION FROM SENSORS/CONTROL UNITS

AMBIENT
METER
ECO DRIVE PROFILE DATA

ECO DRIVE
REAL TIME DRIVING INFORMATION - BAR
VARIOUS SENSORS
ECO STAGE INFORMATION
VARIOUS CONTROL
UNITS LIFETIME POINTS
ECO STAGES
T ACCUMULATION
(5 d rive cycles)
Eco Drive Profile

The Eco drive profile contains information the ECM/PCM receives from control units and sensors monitoring driving
habits. The profile consists of several rating components, including real-time driving information, the Eco score, the
lifetime points, the Eco stages, and the Eco driving record.
Real-Time Driving information
Real-time driving information includes the driver's acceleration and braking habits, viewed from a fuel economy
standpoint. Based on information received, the ambient meter changes color:
During low fuel economy, the ambient meter is blue; at medium fuel economy, the meter is blue-green; and at high fuel
economy, it's green. In addition, the Eco drive baron the MID changes from a long bar (during low fuel economy driving)
to a short bar (during high fuel economy driving).
Deceleration Estimation Acceleration Estimation
D eceleratio n ( m / s 2) 0 . T h ro ttle o p e n in g s ta te 90
Engine
speed
(rpm)
| G reen j _ S 'er-.i | ,l" 1
Eco Score
L ow er fuel e c o n o m y H igher fuel ec o n o m y Low er fuel e c o n o m y

Applying t h e b rak e s P re ssin g th e a c c ce le ra to r
ECO DRIVE BAR
Eco Score
The Eco score is a fuel economy average calculated from real-time driving information, idle time evaluation, and the
percentage of time the ECON button is on. The Eco score determines how many points (parts of the plant icon) are
awarded on the Eco guide. Calculation of the Eco score begins when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), and
continues while the ignition switch is in ON (II). The Eco score begins to display on the Eco guide after 3 minutes of
engine idling or 200 meters of driving. The calculation logic changes for each Eco stage, making it progressively harder
to score points.
Lifetime Points
This is the accumulated point total for the lifetime of the vehicle. Lifetime points are used to determine which Eco stage
has been achieved by the driver. Lifetime points are not deleted when the vehicle's 12 V battery is disconnected, after
resetting the ECM/PCM, or after an ECM/PCM update. The lifetime points can be reset (see page 22-357).
(cont'd)
Eco Stages
These are the three stages that can be reached on the Eco guide by accumulating lifetime points. The first stage can
grow two leaves on each of the five plant icons; the second stage can grow four leaves on each plant icon; the third stage
can grow a blossom on each plant icon. Each stage is progressively more difficult to reach.
ECO GUIDE ECO STAGES
Eco Driving Record

When the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0) after a drive, the driving record for the drive is stored in the ECM/PCM. Up
to five of the most recent driving records can be stored. An Eco driving record is not stored after a short time drive or if
the vehicle does not reach a certain speed. Eco driving records are deleted when the vehicle's 12 volt battery is
disconnected, after resetting the ECM/PCM, or after an ECM/PCM update.
How to Set Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness
(In relation to Readiness Codes) Code
The vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of NOTE:
the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If Do not turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I) or to
the vehicle's 12 volt battery has been disconnected or LOCK (0) during the procedure.
gone dead, if DTCs have been cleared, or if the m All readiness codes are cleared when the 12 volt
ECM/PCM has been reset, these readiness codes are battery is disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or
reset to incomplete. In some states, part of the if the ECM/PCM is reset with the HDS.
emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set to
9 Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go
complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the
traffic may increase the drive time needed to switch
vehicle may fail the emission test, or the test cannot be
the readiness code from incomplete to complete.
finished.
The readiness code will not switch to complete until all
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn the enable criteria are met.
the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start the engine. If a fault in the secondary H02S system caused the
The MIL will come on for 15 to 20 seconds. If it then goes MIL to come on, the readiness code cannot be set to
off, the readiness codes are set to complete. If it flashes complete until you correct the fault.
five times, one or more readiness codes are not set to
complete. To set readiness codes from incomplete to Enable Criteria
complete, do the procedure for the appropriate code.
ECT SENSOR 1 at 158 F (70 C) or more.
To check the status of a specific DTC system, check the IAT SENSOR at 20 F ( - 7 C) or more.
OBD status in the DTC MENU with the HDS (see page
VEHICLE SPEED above 25 mph (40 km/h).
11-9). This screen displays the code, the current data list
of the enable criteria, and the status of the readiness Procedure
testing.
1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector
(DLC), and bring up the READINESS CODEs screen for
Catalyst in the DTCs MENU.
2. Start the engine.
3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions
with short periods of steady cruise. After about 5
miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch to
complete.
4. If the readiness code is still not set to complete, check
for a Pending DTC with the HDS. If there is no DTC,
one or more of the enable criteria were probably not
met; repeat the procedure.
(cont'd)
How to Set Readiness Codes (cont'd)
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor and
Monitor and Readiness Code Readiness Code
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the 12 volt NOTE:
battery is disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or if Do not turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I) or to
the ECM/PCM is reset with the HDS. LOCK (0) during the procedure.
All readiness codes are cleared when the 12 volt
Enable Criteria battery is disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or
12 volt battery voltage is more than 10.5 V. if the ECM/PCM is reset with the HDS.
Engine at idle.
Enable Criteria
ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR 2 between 176 F
(80 C) and 212 F (100 C). ECT SENSOR 1 at 140 F (60 C) or more.
MAP sensor less than 46.6 kPa (14 in.Hg, 350 mmHg).
VEHICLE SPEED 0 mph (0 km/h).
Procedure
IAT SENSOR 1 between 32 F (0 C) and 212 F 1. Start the engine.
(100 C). 2. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions
with short periods of steady cruise. During the drive,
Procedure decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for 5
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the readiness
code should switch from incomplete to complete.
3. Check the readiness codes screen for the AIR FUEL
3. Select EVAP TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the
RATIO (A/F) SENSOR in the DTCs MENU with the
HDS, then select the FUNCTION TEST in the EVAP
HDS.
TEST MENU.
If the HDS indicates complete, readiness is
If the result is normal, readiness is complete.
complete.
If the result is not normal, go to the next step.
If the HDS indicates not complete, go to the next
4. Check for a Pending DTC. If there is no DTC, one or step.
more of the enable criteria were probably not met;
4. Check for a Pending DTC. If there is no DTC, the
repeat the procedure.
enable criteria was probably not met. Select the DATA
LIST MENU. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the ALL DATA
LIST with the HDS. If ECT SENSOR 1 is less than
140 F (60 C), run the engine until it is more than
140 F (60 C), then repeat the procedure.
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor EGR Monitor and Readiness Code
Readiness Code NOTE:
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the 12 volt Do not turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I) or to
battery is disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or if LOCK (0) during the procedure.
the ECM/PCM is reset with the HDS, All readiness codes are cleared when the 12 volt
battery is disconnected, if DTCs have been cleared, or
Procedure if the ECM/PCM is reset with the HDS.
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The Enable Criteria
readiness code should switch from incomplete to
complete. ECT SENSOR 1 at 176 F {80 C) or more.
2. If the readiness code is still not set to complete, check Procedure
for a Pending DTC. If there is no DTC, repeat the
procedure. 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code 3. Drive at a steady speed, with the CVT in D or the M/T
This readiness code is always set to available because in 4th, at 5062 mph (80100 km/h) or above for
misfiring is continuously monitored. more than 10 seconds.
Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if 4. With the CVT in Dor the M/T in 4th, decelerate from 62
the vehicle is driven over a rough road. mph (100 km/h) or above by completely releasing the
Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter holds throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the engine is stopped
at its current value, if the throttle position changes during this step, repeat step 3 and 4.
more than a predetermined value, or if driving
conditions fall outside the range of any related enable 5. Check the OBD status screen for DTC P0401 in the
criteria. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
If it is passed, readiness is complete.
If it is not passed, go to step 3 and retest.
Fuel System Monitor and Readiness Code
This readiness code is always set to available because
the fuel system is continuously monitored during
closed loop operation.
Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter, the
EVAP control system, and the A/F sensor monitors are
active.
Monitoring also pauses when any related enable
criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes when
the enable criteria is again being met.
Comprehensive Component Monitor and

Readiness Code
This readiness code is always set to available because
the comprehensive component monitor is continuously
running whenever the engine is cranking or running.
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR

MAINFOLD ABSOLUTE Replacement page 11 -203
PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)
Rep l a ce m e n t page 11-205 SENSOR/
INTAKE A IR
IGNITION TEMPERATURE
(IAT) SENSOR
Replacement page 11-205
INJECTORS ENGINE CONTROL

Rep l acem ent page 11-200 MODULE (ECM)/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
General Troubleshooti ng
Information, page 11-3
Substi tuting, page 11-7
Update, page 11 -207
Replacement page 11 -209
KNOCKSENSOR
VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR (CVT)
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 2
SENSOR (SENSOR 1)
Replacement page 11-202 (SECONDARY H02S) (SENSOR 2)
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
General Troubleshooting
In fo rm a tio n , page 11-3
Ci rcu i t Troubleshooting, page 11 -383
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0101: MAF Sensor Circuit 7. Start the engine.

Range/Performance Problem 8. Vary the engine speed between 2,000 rpm and 3,000
rpm.
NOTE;
Before you troubleshoot, record al l freeze data and 9. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
any on-board snapshot, and review the general HDS...
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Does the reading change?
If DTC P1128, P1129, P2228, and/or P2229 are stored at
the same time as DTC P0101, troubleshoot those DTCs YES-Go to step 10.
first, then recheck for DTC P0101.
NO-Go to step 13.
1. Check for poor connections or damage to these parts:
10. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (CVT
PCV hose in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes
Intake air duct on, then let it idle.
Air cleaner
11. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
Purge (PCS) line of these recorded freeze data parameters:
Brake booster ENGINE SPEED
Brake booster hose VEHICLE SPEED
Are the parts OK? MAP SENSOR
MAF SENSOR
YES-Go to step 2.
12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0101 in the DTCs
NO-Repair or replace the damaged part(s), then go to
MENU with the HDS.
step 15.
Does the HDS indicate FAILED?
2. Check for a damaged or incorrectly installed air duct
in the air cleaner. YES-Go to step 13.
IsitO K? NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,
the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
YES-Go to step 3.
connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT
NO-Reconnect or replace the air cleaner air duct, then sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
go to step 15. COMPLETED, go to step 11 and recheck.
3. Check for a dirty air cleaner element. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is it dirty? 14. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-205).
YES-Replace the air cleaner element (see page 9-3),
then go to step 15. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO-Go to step 4. 16. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 17. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-274).
6. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the of these recorded freeze data parameters:
HDS.
ENGINE SPEED
Is there about 0.2 gm/s or 0.5 V? VEHICLE SPEED
YES-Go to step 7. MAP SENSOR
MAF SENSOR
NO-Go to step 13.
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
19. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. DTC P01O2: MAF Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Is DTC P0101 indicated? NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM, then troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
go to step 1. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 2 seconds.
N O - G o to step 20. 2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0101 in the DTCs HDS.
MENU with the HDS. Is about 0 gm/s, or 0.1 V or less indicated?
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? YES-Go to step 3.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 19, Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. MAF sensor and the ECM/PCM.
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS 4. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector.
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 18.
6. Measure the voltage between MAF sensor/IAT sensor
5P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
W ire side of fem ale te rm in a l s
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. B12
IG IMA (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box
and the MAF sensor, then go to step 19.
8. Measure the resistance between MAF sensor/IAT 12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. terminal B30 and MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P
connector terminal No. 3.
M AF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
M AF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
QE ~ 1
H VG+ (RED/GRN)
VG+ (RED/GRN)
W ire side o f fem ale term inals
n lr = T n
W ire side o f fem a l e te rm in a ls
I1 I 2 3 4 [sT 6 7 8 9
IV 10 11 12 17 18 19 IJ
1 20 21 22 23 24 25
Is there 190210 kD at room temperature (65 - 70 F, 18 1
26 27 28 29|30|3 1|32 33 34 35
- 21 C) ?
. 37 38l39|40 41 42 43
I36 N
YES-Go to step 13.
VG+ (RED/GRN)
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P).
YES-Go to step 25.
11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
terminal B30 and body ground.
(B30) and the MAF sensor, then go to step 20.
13. Substitute a known-good MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) page 11-205).
14. Reconnect all connectors.
15.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
16. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral).
18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0102 indicated?
YES-Reinstall the original MAF sensor/IAT sensor

(see page 11-205), then go to step 26.
Term inal side of fem ale te rm in a ls
NO-Replace the original MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see
page 11 -205), then go to step 19.
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM

NO-Go to step 12.
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P0103: MAF Sensor Circuit High Voltage
20. Reconnect a ll connectors. NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
21 .Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 2 seconds.
11-274). 2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about 202 gmls, or 4.89 V or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM, then NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
go to step 1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
MAF sensor and the ECM/PCM.B
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. 4. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
25. Reconnect all connectors. 5. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector.
26. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest 6. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P).
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). 7. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B32 and MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P
27. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. connector terminal No. 2.
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good (5 4 3 2 1)
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the V G - (BLK/RED)
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
4 | 5 |6 8 9
10 11 12 1 3 jl4 [l5 |l6 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29|30|~31132 33 34 35
136 37 38 39 40 42 43
tr "tr
V G - (BLK/RED)
YES-Go to step 8,
8. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P).
9. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector 20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
terminals No. 2 and No. 3 with a jumper wire.
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
(5 4 3 2 1)
V G + (RED/GRN) V G - (BLK/RED)
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the
JUMPER WIRE ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
W ire side of female term ina l s
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
11. Clear the DTC with the HDS. indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Go to step 13.
14. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-205).
11-274).

the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.
DTC P0107: MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (44P).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general terminal C39 and MAP sensor 3P connector terminal
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). No. 3.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the /gs.
HDS. 3 2 1
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or less VCC1 (YEL/RED)
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM.
..... ...... n.......................... n.........
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). h 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 I J
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector. 20 21 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
136 37 38 39 40 41 42 43|44|
6. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. VCC1 (YEL/RED)
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or less
indicated? Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 12. YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 7. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM

(C39) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18.
7. Measure the voltage between MAP sensor 3P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3. 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (44P).
010
VCC1 (YEL/RED) SG1 (GRN/WHT)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 16.

NO-Go to step 8.
IS
15. Check for continuity between MAP sensor 3P 23. Reconnect all connectors.
M AP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
d 1 YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at

M AP (GRN/RED)
the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
U page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.
Is there continuity? indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
(Cl 1) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 23.
17. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-205).
11-274).

the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
(cont'd)
DTC P0108: MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 11. Measure the voltage between MAP sensor 3P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

HDS. 3 2 1
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or 4.49 V or VCC1 (YEL/RED) SG1 (GRN/WHT)
more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the Wire side of female terminals
MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is there about 5 V?
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector. YES-Go to step 16.
5. Connect MAP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 NO-Go to step 12.
and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR 13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
3 2 1)
MAP (GRN/RED) SGI (GRN/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female terminals

HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or 4.49 V or
more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.
9. Remove the jumper wire from the MAP sensor 3P
connector.
15. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
terminal C43 and MAP sensor 3P connector terminal
No. 1.
terminal C11 and MAP sensor 3P connector terminal
3[21 1 ) No. 2.
SG I (GRN/WHT)
[ 3 [2] 1
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) M AP (GRN/RED)
.. ,,n;............. - X L ... .. ^
W i re side of fem ale term inals
F T 2 3 4 |5 6 7
9 8
[ i 10 18 19 J
11 12 13|14|15lT6 17 ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
21 22 24 25 23
20 1
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33
34 35
38|39|40 41 142 43 44 | r~\ r
m ?z. u- r ei i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
b
i.u 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1
SG1 (GRN/WHT) 1------------- 1
Term inal side o f fem ale te rm in a l s 20 21 22 23 24 25

1
MAP 26 27 28 29130131 (32 33 34 35
Is there continuity? (GRN/RED) p 6 i3 7 38 39 |4 0 |41 42 43J44 I
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM Term inal side o f fem ale term inals
(C43) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 22.
YES-Go to step 27.

(Cl 1) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 22.
21. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11 -205).
11-274).
(cont'd)
27. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0111: IAT Sensor Circuit

28. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest Range/Performance Problem
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
29. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Is DTC P0108 indicated? 1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the MAF sensor/IAT
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at sensor.
the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM Are the connections and terminals OK?
(see page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then go to
step 15.
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other 2. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the 11-205).
3. Allow the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to cool to the
ambient temperature.
4. Note the ambient temperature.
5. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to its 5P
connector, but do not install it.
7. Quickly note the value of the IAT SENSOR (2) in the
DATA LIST with the HDS.
8. Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR (2) and the
ambient temperature.
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR (2) differ 5.4 F (3 C)
or more from the ambient temperature?
YES-Go to step 13.

NO-Go to step 9.
9. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor from its 5P
connector.
10. Using a heat gun, blow hot air on the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor for a few seconds. Do not apply the heat
longer than a few seconds or you will damage the
sensor.
11. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to its 5P
connector, but do not install it.
yin
12. Check the IAT SENSOR (2) in the DATA LIST with the DTC P0112: IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
HDS.
Does the IAT SENSOR ( 2 ) change 72 F (40 C) or more? and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM
2. Check the IAT SENSOR (2) in the DATA LIST with the
NO-Go to step 13. HDS.
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is about 356 F (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
14. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page indicated?
11-205). YES-Go to step 3.
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
16. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM.
11-274). 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 4. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector.
Is DTC P0111 indicated? 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 6. Check the IAT SENSOR (2) in the DATA LIST with the
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM, then HDS.
go to step 1. Is about 356 F (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other indicated?
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT sensor 18. Reconnect all connectors.
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
fj" 4 3 2 T j
IAT (RED/YEL) the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
:o ) was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
W ire side o f fe m a l e term inals complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
Is there continuity? indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the IAT
sensor and the ECM/PCM (B31), then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 18.
12. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-205).
11-274).

the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.
DTC P0113: IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage 11. Measure the voltage between MAF sensor/IAT sensor
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). M AF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR

(5 4 3 2 1)
HDS.
IAT (RED/YEL)
Is about 40 F ( 40 C) or less, or 4.90 V or more
Indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM. W i re side o f fem ale term inals
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is there about 5 V?

4. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector. YES-Go to step 12.
5. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector NO-Go to step 16.
M AF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR 13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
d 3
SG2 (GRN/YEL) IAT (RED/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE

HDS.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.
9. Remove the jumper wire from the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector.
d 1 connector terminal No. 4.
SG2 (GRN/YEL)
W i re side o f fem ale term inals
[5 14
IAT (RED/YEL)

3 |4 I5 6 j7 H
10 11 1 2 |^ 1 4 ^ 1 6 f l 7 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 j29130131132[33 34 35
136137 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
L TP h2 3 |4 |5 6 |7 l7HH
SG2 (GRN/YEL) I 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 qj
I 20 21 22 23 24 25
Term inal side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s 29|3o|si|32
L 26 27 28 33 34 35
Is there continuity? 136137 38 39 40 41 42 43 441
cm I o-----------
YES-Go to step 27. IAT (RED/YEL)
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM Term inal side o f fem ale te rm in a l s
(B41) and the IAT sensor, then go to step 22.
YES-Go to step 27.

(B31) and the IAT sensor, then go to step 22.
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P0116: ECT Sensor 1 Range/Performance
21. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page Problem
11-205).
22. Reconnect all connectors. and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
11-274). Is about 176 F (80 C) or more, or 0.78 V or less
indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3,
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM, then 3. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST
go to step 1. with the HDS.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
27. Reconnect all connectors. 5. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
28. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 F (10 C) or more?
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
29. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM.
Is DTC P0113 indicated? NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 6. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the with the HDS.
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. 8. Open the hood, and let the engine cool for 3 hours.
NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other 10. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the Did ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 F (10 C) or more from
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. the value in step 6 ?

sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P0117: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage
12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-206). NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
11-274). 2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
16. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is about 356 F (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM.
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector.
Is about 356 F (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 11.
10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P 18. Reconnect all connectors.
ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR

fz fn ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
ECTI (RED/WHT) updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see
i page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was

W ire s i de o f fem ale term inals the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
/s there continuity? indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
(B23) and ECT sensor 1 , then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 18.
11 .Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-206).
11-274).

ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
DTC P0118; ECT Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage 11. Measure the voltage between ECT sensor 1 2P
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR
indicated?
ECU (RED/WHT)
YES-Go to step 3.
sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM.ll
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). W i re side of female terminals
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector. Is there about 5 V?
5. Connect ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminals No. 1 YES-Go to step 12.

and No. 2 with a jumper wire. NO-Go to step 16.
ECT1 (RED/WHT) SG2 (GRN/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE

indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.
9. Remove the jumper wire from the ECT sensor 1 2P
connector.
terminal B41 and ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminal
No. 1.
terminal B23 and ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminal
0 3 No. 2.
SG2 (GRN/YEL) -
ECT SENSOR 12P CONNECTOR
W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR B (44P)
(33
EC U (RED/WHT)
W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s
(T R i 3 4 5 6 | 7 IffS T
10 11 12 13|14jl5]l6 17 18 19 1 ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
20 21 22 23 24 25
I
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
136137 38 39 40 41 42 4 3 |44] mmmml3
h 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 lf |
SG2 (GRN/YEL) [a 10 11 12 13|14|16pl6 17 18 19 J
20 21 22 23 24 25
Term inal side o f fem ale te rm i nals
26 27 28 29[30l31132
34 35
Is there continuity? 136 37 38 39 40 41 4 I 43 44
0 r r -y
YES-Go to step 27. ECT1 (RED/WHT)
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM T erm in a l side o f fem ale term inals
(B41) and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22.
YES-Go to step 27.

(B23) and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22.
21. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-206).
11-274).

(cont'd)
27. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0125: ECT Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow

28. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest Response
Is DTC P0118 indicated? 1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 5 minutes or more.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
Is about 0 F ( 18 C) or less indicated?
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see
page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
substituted, go to step 1. ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. If the
connections and the terminals are OK, replace ECT
sensor 1 (see page 11-206),then go to step 7.
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other NO-Go to step 3.
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Allow the engine to cool to 104 F (40 C) or less.
5. Start the engine, and let it idle until ECT SENSOR 1
goes up to about 158 F (70 C).
Does ECT sensor 2 also read about 158 F (70 C)?
YES-Go to step 6.
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM.
6. Check the thermostat (see page 10-5).
Is the thermostat OK?

ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. If the
connections and the terminals are OK, replace ECT
sensor 1 (see page 11 -206), then go to step 7.
NO-Replace the thermostat (see page 10-10), then go
to step 7.
10. Allow the engine to cool to 104 F (40 C) or less.
11. Start the engine, and let it idle until ECT SENSOR 1
goes up to about 158 F (70 C).
Does ECT sensor 2 also read about 158 F (70 C)?
YES-Go to step 1 and recheck.

NO-Troubleshooting is com plete.!
DTC P0128: Cooling System Malfunction 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data 13. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
and any on-board snapshot and review the general 14. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). between 19 F ( - 7 C) and 124 F (51 C).
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 15. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 11-274).
3. Make sure the blower switch is off. 16. Test-drive at a steady speed between 1575 mph
(24120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
4. Check the FAN HIGH CTRL and FAN LOW CTRL in the
DATA LIST with the HDS. 17. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is it OFF? Is DTC P0128 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5. YES-Check the cooling the system, then go to step 19.
NO-Wait until the FAN HIGH CTRL and FAN LOW NO-Go to step 18.
CTRL is off/then go to step 5. 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0128 in the DTCs
5. Check the radiator fan operation. MENU with the HDS.
Does the radiator fan keep running? Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
YES-Check the radiator fan circuit (see page 10-32) YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
and the radiator fan relay (see page 22-92). If the Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 17,
circuit and the relay are OK, go to step 19. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.!
NO-Go to step 6. NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check the cooling
system (see page 10-2). If the cooling system is OK, go
6. Let the engine cool until the cooIa nt tern pe rat ure is to step 19. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
104 F (40 C) or less. to step 14.
7. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR 2 19. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
in the DATA LIST with the HDS. software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
8. Start the engine, and let it idle.
20. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
9. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up 38 F
between 19 F ( - 7 C) and 124 F (51 C).
(21 C) or more from the recorded temperature.
11. Compare the recorded value of ECT SENSOR 2 and radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
the present value of ECT SENSOR 2.
22. Test-drive at a steady speed between 1575 mph
Did the temperature rise M/T: 18F(10 C), CVT: 22 F (24120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
(12C),ormore?
YES-Test the thermostat (see page 10-5), then go to
step 12.
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 20. If the
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0128 in the DTCs DTC P0133: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1)
MENU with the HDS.
Malfunction/Slow Response
Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
NOTE:
YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace any on-board snapshot, and review the general
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 23, If DTC P0139 is stored at the same time as DTC P0133,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. troubleshoot DTC P0139 first, then recheck for DTC
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor P0133.
connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
page 11-7), then go to step 20. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 20. radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
4. Test-drive under these conditions:
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158F(70C)
CVT in D, M/T in 3rd or 4th
Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed of 32 mph
(52 km/h) or more with the engine speed between
1,2503,000rpm
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If the HDS indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3
and recheck.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P0134: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater
7. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -202). System Malfunction
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
10. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
11-274). If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled
before this DTC was stored, refuel and clear the DTC
without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the with the HDS.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. If DTC P0135 is stored at the same time as DTC P0134,
troubleshoot DTC P0135 first, then recheck for DTC
12. Test-drive under these conditions: P0134.
158 F (70 C) 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
CVT in D, M/T in 3rd or 4th 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for 3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (CVT in P
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed of 32 mph or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
(52 km/h) or more with the engine speed between
1,2503,000rpm 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
13. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC P0134 indicated?
Is DTC P0133 indicated? YES-Go to step 5.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
to step 1. A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and the
ECM/PCM.
NO-Go to step 14.
MENU with the HDS. 6. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -202).
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 8. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 13,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.!
11-274).
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the Is DTC P0134 indicated?
HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
go to step 11. the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and
the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0134 in the DTCs DTC P0135: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater
MENU with the HDS. Circuit Malfunction
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 10, troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
(Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and the ECM/PCM, 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on. radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
YES-Go to step 5.
A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and the
ECM/PCM .
6. Check the No. B26 LAF (A/F SENSOR) (10A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 7. ' .

NO-Go to step 20.
7. Open the fuse lid panel (A), then remove the A/F
sensor relay (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
8. Test the A/F sensor relay (see page 22-92).

Is the A/F sensor relay OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the A/F sensor relay, then go to step 24.
9. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector. 14. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal C9 and A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector
10. At the sensor side, measure the resistance between
terminal No. 4.
A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No. 3
and No. 4. A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR

2 1
4 3
- 9 AFSHTC (GRN)
AFSHTC 2 1 +B
A
nr Q
O Wire side of female terminals
V J
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)

AFSHTC (GRN)
r1 i
h 2 3 T fT 16 7 8 I9 s
10 11 12 1 3|14ll5fl6 I
17 18 19
Terminal side of male terminals
20 21 22 23 24 25
1
CM
m
CO
o
CO
T-
CO
CM
26 27 28 33 34 35
13 6 137 38|39 40 41 142 43 44 J
Is there 1.92.7 Q at room temperature (65 70F, 1 8 -
21C)?
Termina l side of fem a l e terminals
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 23.
YES-Go to step 15.
11. At the sensor side, check for continuity between A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No. 1 and NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
No. 3, and between terminals No. 1 and No. 4 (C9) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step 24.
individually.
15. Connect A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminal
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
AFS
A /F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR
f-S
2 1I
4 3 2 1
4 3
+ B (WHT/BLK)
AFSHTC + B
JUMPER WIRE

YES-Go to step 23.

NO-Go to step 12.
16. Check for continuity between A/F sensor relay 4P 19. Check for continuity between A/F sensor relay 4P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
A /F SENSOR RELAY 4P CONNECTOR A /F SENSOR RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
SUBRLY
4M3
+ B
T erm inal side o f fem ale te rm in a l s

Term inal side o f fem ale term in a ls
Is there continuity? Is there continuity?

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the A/F NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
sensor (Sensor 1) and the A/F sensor relay, then go to (A21) and the A/F sensor relay, then go to step 24.
step 24.
20. Open the fuse access panel (A), then remove the A/F
17. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). sensor relay (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
18. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal A21 to body
ground with a jumper wire.
n r 2 3 4 5 6 7 8] 9 L
LI 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 I
1 1
26 57 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
36 :37 38 39 4 0 141 42 43 44 J
SUBRLY (ORN)
JUMPER WIRE
21. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector
and the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector.
22. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P 29. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0135 in the DTCs
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. MENU with the HDS.
A /F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. I f any other
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.H
+ B (W HT/BLK)
(Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 27.
W ire side o f fem ale term inals software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the A/F sensor
relay, the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), and the EVAP 33. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
canister vent shut valve. Also replace the No. B26 LAF Is DTC P0135 indicated?
(A/F SENSOR) (10 A) fuse, then go to step 24.
NO-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and
step 24. the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
23. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-202). substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go to step 32. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
24. Reconnect all connectors. go to step 1.
25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NO-Go to step 34.
26. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 34. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0135 in the DTCs
27. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page MENU with the HDS.
11-274). Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
28. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Is DTC P0135 indicated? complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 33,
the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO-Go to step 29. connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.
(cont'd)
DTC P0137: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 13. Check for continuity between secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body
Circuit Low Voltage
ground.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general SECONDARY H 02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). SH 02S (WHT)

3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (CVT in P
or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
4. Check H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the voltage stay at 0.05 V or less?
YES-Go to step 5.
Term inal side o f m a l e term inals
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM.
(C27) and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to step
6. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P 16.
connector.
NO-Go to step 24.
15. Replace secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
Does the voltage stay at 0.05 V or less? 11 - 202 ).
YES-Go to step 9. 16. Reconnect all connectors.

NO-Go to step 14. 17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 18. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
10. Remove the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel (see 19. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
page 20-153). 11-274).
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 20. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (CVT in P
158 F (70 C)
Engine speed between 1,5003,000 rpm
Drive 1 minute or more

secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.
23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTG P0137 in the DTCs 29. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0137 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS. MENU with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 22, complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
connections or loose terminals at secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result connections or loose terminals at secondary H02S
comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
go to step 20. updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates
25. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 26.
158 F (70 C)
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 29.
DTC P0138: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 12. Remove the jumper wire from the secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector.
Circuit High Voltage
13. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire.
troubleshooting information (see page 11 -3).
SECONDARY H 02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. SH 02S (WHT)
2 1
or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. I4 3. J
JUMPER WIRE
4. Check H02SS2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Term inal side o f m ale term inals
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM.H
page 20-153). Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?
7. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P YES-Go to step 16.
connector.
8. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector (C27) and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to step
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire. 22 .
SECONDARY H 02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
JUMPER WIRE
SG2 (GRN/YEL) SH 02S (WHT)
T erm inal side o f m ale term in a ls

Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?
YES-Go to step 11.

NO-Go to step 20.
m
terminal C27 and body ground.
11 - 202 ).
n TRJ
1011 12 13|i4|i5[l6 17 18 19 25. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
20 21 22 23 24 25 11-274).
26 27 28 [29130131 [32133 34 35
36 3 7 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 26. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (CVT in P
SH 02S (WHT)
158 F (70 C)
Term inal side o f fem ale term inals Engine speed between 1,5003,000 rpm
YES-Go to step 30.
(C27) and secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to step YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
22. secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 29.
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

(Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the
comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION,
go to step 26.
(cont'd)
30. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0139: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) Slow
31. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest Response
32. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (CVT in P troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
158 F (70 C) 3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (CVT in P
CVT in D, M/T in 3rd or 4th or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
Engine speed between 1,5003,000 rpm 4. Test-drive under these conditions:
Drive 1 minute or more Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
34. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 158 F (70 C)
CVT in D, M/T in 4th
Is DTC P0138 indicated? Drive at a steady speed between 5575 mph
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at (88120 km/h) for 1 minute, then decelerate (with
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the the throttle fully closed) for 10 seconds
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good 5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0139 in the DTCs
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 32. If the MENU with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 35.
YES-Go to step 6.
MENU with the HDS. NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? connections or loose terminals at secondary H02S
YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the HDS indicates
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 34, and recheck.
(Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 32.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
7. Replace secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page Heater Circuit Malfunction
11 - 2 0 2 ).
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
11-274). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
11. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (CVT in P 3. Start the engine.
158 F (70 C) YES-Go to step 5.
CVT in D, M/T in 4th NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Drive at a steady speed between 5575 mph Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
(88120 km/h) for 1 minute, then decelerate (with secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM.
the throttle fully closed) for 10 seconds
6. Check the No. B12 IG IMA (10 A) fuse in the
Is DTC P0139 indicated? under-dash fuse/relay box.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at Is the fuse OK?
go to step 1. YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 14. NO-Repair a short in the wire between secondary

H02S (Sensor 2), the idle stop switch, the EVAP
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0139 in the DTCs canister purge valve, the MAF sensor, and the No. B12
MENU with the HDS. IG IMA (10 A) fuse. Also replace the No. B12 IG IMA
(10 A) fuse, then go to step 23.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 7. Remove the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel (see
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 13, page 20-153).
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. 8. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor connector.
go to step 11.
(cont'd)
9. At the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) side, measure the 12. Measure the voltage between secondary H02S
resistance between secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4.
01 (BLK/YEL) 1 S02SHTC (BLK/WHT)

I2
CM
1
BG1 S02SHTC 4 3 '
4 3 ...... J
Term inal side o f male term inals
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls

Is there 5.47.3 O at room temperature (65 70F, 18-
YES-Go to step 13.
21C)?
NO-Go to step 17.
YES-Go to step 10. ^
NO-Go to step 22.
10. At the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) side, check for
continuity between body ground and secondary 15. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (44P).
H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 3 and
No. 4 individually. 16. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
SECONDARY H 02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
IG1 2 1 S02SHTC
4 3
1 2 3 j 41 5 6 7 8
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 I
4
20 21 22 23 24 25 |
I
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
136 37 q 39 4 0 1 41 42 43I441
tr TT^L
S02SHTC (BLK/WHT)
W ire side o f fem ale term in a ls
YES-Go to step 22. Term inal side o f fem ale te rm i nals
NO-Go to step 11. Is there continuity?

11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM
23.
17. Measure the voltage between secondary H02S 21. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body terminal C28 and secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
ground. connector terminal No. 3.
SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
1
(2
4 3
V__
S02SHTC (BLK/W HT)
Term inal side o f male te rm in a ls

101 (BLK/YEL)
rn _ r
I 1| 2 3 4 5 j6 " 7 8 Til
Term inal side o f male term in a ls
[I.. 1011 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 I
20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
1
|3 6 |3 7 8139 4 0 |4 1 |42 43
YES-Go to step 18.
S02SHTC (BLK/W HT)
NO-Repair an open in the wire between secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the No. B12 IMA (10 A) fuse, then Term inal side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
go to step 23. Is there continuity?
18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES-Go to step 29.
19. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
23.
11- 202 ).
11-274).

go to step 1.
(cont'd)
28. Monitor t he OBD STATUS for DTC P0141 in the DTCs DTC P0171: Fuel System Too Lean
MENU with t he HDS.
DTC P0172: Fuel System Too Rich
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other NOTE:
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 27, Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. any on-board snapshot, and review the general
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor Poor fuel quality can cause DTC P0171.
If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the
same time as DTC P0171 and/or P0172, troubleshoot
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
those DTCs first, then recheck for P0171 and/or P0172.
result comes on.
P0101, P0102, P0103: MAF sensor
29. Reconnect all connectors. P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP sensor
30. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest P0133, P1157, P1172, P2195, P2238, P2252, P2A00: A/F
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a sensor (Sensor 1)
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). P0134, P0135: A/F sensor (Sensor 1) heater
31. Start the engine, and let it idle. P0137, P0138, P0139: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system
is DTC P0141 indicated? P0400, P0401, P0404, P0406, P2413: EGR system
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at P0443, P0496: EVAP canister purge valve
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the 1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11 -290).
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 31. If the Is the fuel pressure OK?
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. YES-
NO-Go to step 33. DTC P0171 indicated: Go to step 2.
33. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0141 in the DTCs DTC P0172 indicated: Go to step 3.
MENU with the HDS.
NO-Check these items:
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel pressure
regulator (see page 11 -304), then go to step 6.
YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace If the pressure is too low, check for restrictions in
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other the fuel pump, the fuel pressure regulator, the fuel
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 32, filter, and the fuel line, then go to step 6.
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. 2. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts:
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor PCV valve
connections or loose terminals at secondary H02S PCV hose
(Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was EVAP canister purge valve
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see Throttle body
page 11 -7), then go to step 31. If the ECM/PCM was
Intake manifold
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on. Brake booster
Brake booster hose
Intake air duct
Are the parts OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Repair or replace the leaking part(s), then go to
step 6.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm DTC P0201: No. 1 Cylinder Injector Circuit
Malfunction
4. Check under these conditions: DTC P0202: No. 2 Cylinder Injector Circuit
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above Malfunction
158 F (70 C)
CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral
DTC P0203: No. 3 Cylinder Injector Circuit
All electrical loads off Malfunction
5. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST with the DTC P0204: No. 4 Cylinder Injector Circuit
HDS. Raise and hold the engine speed steady at 2,500 Malfunction
100 rpm. While holding the rpm steady, check the
MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST. NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
Is there about 4.75.7 gm/s ( C V T ) or 4.55.5 gm/s troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
(M/T)?
YES-For DTC P0172, check the engine valve
clearances, and adjust them if needed (see page 6-8). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
For DTC P0171, replace the injectors (see page
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 20 seconds.
11 -200), then go to step 6.
NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11 -205), then go to step 6. Is DTC P0201, P0202, P0203, or P0204 indicated?
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES-Go to step 5.
7. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
injectors and the ECM/PCM.
11-274).
without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the 6. Disconnect the injector 2P connector from problem
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. cylinder.
10. Test-drive under these conditions: 7. At the injector side, measure the resistance between
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above injector 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
158 F (70 C)
CVT in D, M/T in 3rd or 4th INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
Drive at a steady speed between 1575 mph (24
120 km/h) for 15 minutes
NOTE: DTC P0171 and/or P0172 may take up to
80 minutes of test driving to set. Using the HDS,
monitor the shortterm fuel trim (ST FUELTRIM). If the
ST FUEL TRIM average stays within 0.8 1.25, there
is no problem at this time.
Is DTC P0171 or P0172 indicated?
Term inal side o f m ale term inals
YES-Go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Is there 1 0 -1 3 Q?
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 11. Check for continuity between problem cylinder
injector 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground
9. Measure the voltage between injector 2P connector
(see table).
PROBLEM DTC WIRE COIOIR
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR CYLINDER
No. 1 P0201 BRN
IGP No. 2 P0202 RED
(YEL/BLK) y. No. 3 P0203 BLU
2 No. 4 P0204 YEL
1
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
2
INJ
1
W ire side o f fe m a l e term inals
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the injector
and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 19. W ire side o f fem ale term in a ls
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 12.

NO-G o to step 15.
14. Check for continuity between problem cylinder 17. Check for continuity between appropriate injector 2P
injector 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground connector terminal No. 1 and the appropriate
(see table). ECM/PCM connector terminal of the problem cylinder
(see table).
PROBLEM DTC WIRE COLOR
CYLINDER PROBLEM DTC ECM/PCM WIRE
No. 1 P0201 BRN CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 2 P0202 RED No. 1 P0201 C5 BRN
No. 3 P0203 BLU No. 2 P0202 C6 RED
No. 4 P0204 YEL No. 3 P0203 C7 BLU
No. 4 P0204 C8 YEL
I NJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
2 INJ
2
INJ
1 W ire side of fem ale term inals

INJ2 (RED) IBMJ3 (BLU)
IN J1 (BRN) 9NJ4 (YEL)

I 1 I2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I9 I
1"
Is there continuity? 10 11 12 13| 14| 15|16 17 18 19 I
23 24 25
20 21 22
1
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM 26 27 28 29|30|31 32 33 34 35
and the injector, then go to step 19. 13 6 137 3 8 j 39]40 j 4 1 142 4 3 j 4 4 |
NO-Go to step 24. Term inal side o f fem ale term in a ls

15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Is there continuity?
16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P). YES-Go to step 25.
and the injector, then go to step 19.
18. Replace the problem injector (see page 11-200). DTC P0300: Random Misfire and Any
19. Reconnect all connectors. Combination of the Following;
20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTC P03O2: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected
11-274). DTC P0303; No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected
23. Start the engine, and let it idle for 20 seconds. DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected
24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. NOTE:
is DTC P0201, PQ202, P0203, or P0204 indicated? Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
the injector and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
If the misfire is frequent enough to trigger detection of
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other increased emissions during two consecutive driving
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the cycles, the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300 (and
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. some combination of P0301 through P0304) will be
stored.
If the misfire is frequent enough to damage the
26. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest catalyst, the MIL will flash whenever the misfire
software (see page 11 -207), or substitute a occurs, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of
knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). P0301 through P0304) will be stored. When the misfire
stops, the MIL will remain on.
Troubleshoot the following DTCs first, if any of them
28. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. were stored along with the random misfire DTC(s)
(because parts can sometimes fail without setting
Is DTC P0201, P0202, P0203, or P0204 indicated?
DTC's you should also do a physical inspection of the
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at systems listed below):
the injector and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was P0101, P0102, P0103: MAF sensor
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP sensor
page 11-7), then go to step 27. If the ECM/PCM was P0171, P0172: Fuel system
P0335, P0339: CKP sensor
NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is P0365, P0369: CMP sensor
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354: No. 1 - No. 4 cylinder
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other ignition coil(s)
P0506, P0507: Idle control system
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system
P0400, P0401, P0404, P0406, P2413: EGR system
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 10. Check the fuel quality.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (CVT in P Is the quality good?
or N, M/T in neutral).
YES-Go to step 11.
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
NO-Drain the tank, and fill it with a known-good fuel,
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
then go to step 19.
11. Inspect the spark plugs (see page 4-21). If the spark
YES-Go to step 9. plugs are fouled or worn, replace them.
NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If the 12. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result of these recorded freeze data parameters:
comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, ENGINE SPEED
wait for several minutes, then recheck. VEHICLE SPEED
5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 REL TP SENSOR
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for CLV (calculated load value)
10 minutes with the HDS. APPSENSOR
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 ECTSENSOR 1
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire counts? 13. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
YES-Go to step 9. MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for
10 minutes with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 6.
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, C Y L 3
6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire counts?
of these recorded freeze data parameters:
ENGINE SPEED YES-Go to step 14.
VEHICLE SPEED NO-Go to step 19.
RELTP SENSOR
14. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-290),
CLV (calculated load value)
APP SENSOR Is the fuel pressure OK?
ECT SENSOR 1 YES-Go to step 15.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, NO-
If the fuel pressure is too high, replace the fuel
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? pressure regulator (see page 11-304), then go to
step 19.
YES-Go to step 9.
If the pressure is too low, check for restrictions in
NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If the the fuel pump, the fuel filter, and the fuel line for
HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result restrictions. If they are OK, replace the fuel pressure
comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, regulator (see page 11-304), then go to step 19.
go to step 6 and recheck.
8. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
16. Check under these conditions:
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire counts? 176 F (80 C)
YES-Go to step 9. CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral
All electrical loads off
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B
(cont'd)
17. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST with the 25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
HDS. Raise and hold the engine speed steady at 2,500 P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
100 rpm. While holding the rpm steady, check the
MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST.
Is there about 4.75.7 gm/s (CVT) or 4 .5 5.5 gm/s
(M/T)?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 1 and
ISIO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page recheck. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep
11-205), then go to step 19. driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates
OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 23.
18. Do the VTEC rocker arm test (see page 6-7).
Did the engine pass the test?
YES-Go to step 19.

NO-Repair the VTEC rocker arm (see page 6-34), then
goto step 19.
11-274).
(see page 11-5).
ENGINE SPEED
VEHICLE SPEED
REL TP SENSOR
APP SENSOR
ECTSENSOR 1
Is DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304
indicated?

the ignition coils, the injectors, and the ECM/PCM,
then go to the troubleshooting for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304; '11 model (see page 11-127), 12
model (see page 11-132).
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected 6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
('11 model)
ENGINE SPEED
DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected VEHICLE SPEED
('11 model) REL TP SENSOR
DTC P0303: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected APP SENSOR
('11 model) ECT SENSOR 1
DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
('11 model) P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general YES-Go to step 9.
NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If the
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
8. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, 10 minutes with the HDS.
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire counts?

NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If the NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result Check for poor connections or loose terminals in the
comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, fuel system circuit
wait for several minutes, and recheck.
Does the C Y L 1 M I S F I R E , C Y L 2 M I S F I R E , C Y L 3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire counts?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 6.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
10. Exchange the ignition coil from the problem cylinder 15. Exchange the spark plug from the problem cylinder
with one from another cylinder. with one from another cylinder.
11. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range 16. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
of these recorded freeze data parameters: of these recorded freeze data parameters:
ENGINE SPEED ENGINE SPEED
. VEHICLE SPEED VEHICLE SPEED
RELTP SENSOR REL TP SENSOR
CLV (calculated load value) CLV (calculated load value)
APP SENSOR APP SENSOR
ECTSENSOR 1 ECTSENSOR 1
12. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 17. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for
10 minutes with the HDS. 10 minutes with the HDS.
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE , CYL3 Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire counts? MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire counts?

NO-lntermittent misfire due to poor contact at the NO-lntermittent misfire due to spark plug fouling (no
ignition coil connector (no misfire at this time). Check misfire at this time).B
for poor connections or loose terminals at the ignition
18. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
coil.B
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the spark
13. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
plug was exchanged?
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the ignition
YES-Replace the faulty spark plug, then go to step 37.
coil was exchanged?
NO-Go to step 19.
YES-Replace the faulty ignition coil (see page 4-21),
then go to step 37.
NO-Go to step 14.
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 30. Measure the voltage between injector 2P connector
20. Exchange the injector from the problem cylinder with
one from the another cylinder.
21. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes.
22. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range IGP
(YEL/BLK)
ENGINE SPEED
VEHICLE SPEED
RELTP SENSOR
APP SENSOR
ECTSENSOR 1
23. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 W ire side o f fem ale term in a ls
10 minutes with the HDS. Is there battery voltage?
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 YES-Go to step 31.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the injector and
YES-Go to step 24. PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 37.
NO-lntermittent misfire due to bad contact at the 31. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
injector connector (no misfire at this time). Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the injector. 32. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
24. Determine which cylinder had the misfire. 33. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (44P).
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the injector
was exchanged?
YES-Replace the faulty injector (see page 11-200),

then go to step 37,
NO-Go to step 25.
25. Do an engine compression and a cylinder leakdown
test (see page 6-6).
Did the engine pass both tests?
YES-Go to step 26.

NO-Repair the engine, then go to step 37.
26. Do the VTEC rocker arm test (see page 6-7).
YES-Go to step 27.

go to step 37.
28. Disconnect the injector 2P connector from the
problem cylinder (see page 11-200).
34. Check for continuity between body ground and the 35. Check for continuity between appropriate injector 2P
ECM/PCM connector terminal of the problem cylinder connector terminal No. 1 and the ECM/PCM connector
(see table). terminal of the problem cylinder (see table).
PROBLEM DTC ECM/PCM WIRE PROBLEM DTC ECM/PCM WIRE

CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 1 P0301 C5 BRN No. 1 P0301 C5 BRN
No. 2 P0302 C6 RED No. 2 P0302 C6 RED
No. 3 P0303 C7 BLU No. 3 P0303 C7 BLU
No. 4 P0304 C8 YEL No. 4 P0304 C8 YEL
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
2 INJ

INJ2 (RED) INJ3 (BLU)
INJ1 (BRN) INJ4 (YEL)
h h 3 I4 |5 |6 | 7 8.J 9 |
l 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 I
20 21 22 23 24 25
l 1
26 27 28 29|30|31 132 33 34 35
136[37 38 j 39140141 42 4 3 144 |
Term inal side of fem ale term inals
YES-Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM
and the injector, then go to step 38. Is there continuity?
NO-Go to step 35. YES-Go to step 36.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
and the injector, then go to step 38.
36. At the injector side, measure the resistance between 45. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
injector 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
connections or loose terminals at the ignition coils,
the injectors, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If
the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 43.
Is there 10130? known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
YES-Go to step 46. 48. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
NO-Replace the injector (see page 11-200), then go to of these recorded freeze data parameters:
step 38. ENGINE SPEED
VEHICLE SPEED
REL TP SENSOR
38. Reconnect all connectors, then install the parts in the CLV (calculated load value)
reverse order of removal. APPSENSOR
39. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ECTSENSOR 1
40. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 49. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
41. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304 indicated?
11-274). YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
42. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure the ignition coils, the injectors, and the ECM/PCM. If
(see page 11-5). the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
43. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
ENGINE SPEED NO-Go to step 50.
VEHICLE SPEED
REL TP SENSOR
APP SENSOR
ECTSENSOR 1
P0302, P0303, or P0304 (see page 11-124).
(cont'd)
50. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected
('12 model)
DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected
('12 model)
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other DTC P0303; No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ('12 model)
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor DTC P0304; No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected
connections or loose terminals at the ignition coils, ('12 model)
the injectors, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
page 11 -7), then go to step 48. If the ECM/PCM was and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
YES-Go to step 9.
HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result
wait for several minutes, and recheck.
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE ; CYL2 MISFIRE , CYL3
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range 9.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
10. Exchange the ignition coil from the problem cylinder
ENGINE SPEED with one from another cylinder.
VEHICLE SPEED
RELTP SENSOR 11. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
ENGINE SPEED
APPSENSOR
VEHICLE SPEED
ECTSENSOR 1
RELTP SENSOR
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, CLV (calculated load value)
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. APP SENSOR
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? ECT SENSOR 1
YES-Go to step 9, 12. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
go to step 6 and recheck. MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire counts?
8. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 YES-Go to step 13.
NO-lntermittent misfire due to poor contact at the
ignition coil connector (no misfire at this time). Check
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE , CYL3 for poor connections or loose terminals at the ignition
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire counts? . coil.l..;'
YES-Go to step 9. 13. Determine which Cylinder had the misfire.
NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Does the mis fire occur in the cylinder w h t i o n
Check for poor connections or loose terminals in the coil was exchanged?
fuel system circuitH
then go to step 279
NO-Goto step 14.
15. Exchange the spark plug from the problem cylinder 20. Exchange the injector from the problem cylinder with
with one from another cylinder. one from the another cylinder.
16. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range 21. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes.
ENGINE SPEED
VEHICLE SPEED
ENGINE SPEED
RELTP SENSOR VEHICLE SPEED
REL TP SENSOR
APP SENSOR CLV (calculated load value)
ECTSENSOR 1
APP SENSOR
17. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 ECTSENSOR 1
10 minutes with the HDS. 23. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 10 minutes with the HDS.
D o e s th e C Y L 1 M IS F IR E , C Y L 2 M IS F IR E , C Y L 3
YES-Go to step 18. MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire counts?
NO-lntermittent misfire due to spark plug fouling (no YES-Go to step 24.
misfire at this time).
NO-lntermittent misfire due to bad contact at the
18. Determine which cylinder had the misfire. injector connector (no misfire at this time). Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the injeetor.11
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the spark
plug was exchanged? 24. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
YES-Replace the faulty spark plug, then go to step 27. Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the injector
was exchanged?
NO-Go to step 19.
YES-Replace the faulty injector (see page 11-200),
then go to step 27.
NO-Go to step 25.
25. Do an engine compression and a cylinder leakdown
test (see page 6-6).
Did the engine pass both tests?
YES-Go to step 26.

NO-Repair the engine, then go to step 27.
26. Do the VTEC rocker arm test (see page 6-7). 35. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
YES-Check for wear or damage to these parts. If
needed, repair or replace part(s), then go to step 27. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Cylinder head Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 34,
Carbon in the intake manifold go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
Valve seal NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
Piston ring connections or loose terminals at the ignition coils,
Intake and exhaust valve the injectors, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If
Cam chain the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF
Valve guide
CONDITION, go to step 33.
Piston
go to step 27.
11-274).
(see page 11-5).
ENGINE SPEED
VEHICLE SPEED
REL TP SENSOR
APP SENSOR
ECTSENSOR 1
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, orP0304 indicated?

P0302, P0303, or P0304 (see page 11 -124).
DTC P0325: Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction 10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. _____ 13... ....................... n.... ...... ^
31415 6 7 8
. 1 2
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed 3,000 rpm [I
10 11 12 13(t4|t5]Rl6 17 18 19 aJ
without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the 20 21 22 23 24 25
1 1
radiator fan comes on. 26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
136 37 38 39 4 0 14 1 142 4 3 |4 4 ]
4. Hold the engine speed between 3,0004,000 rpm for
at least 10 seconds.
KS (RED/BLU)
Is D T C P0325 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
T erm ina l side of fe m a l e term inals
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the Is there continuity?
knock sensor and the ECM/PCM. YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). (C42) and the knock sensor, then go to step 14.
7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. NO-Go to step 11.
8. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector (see page 11. Connect the knock sensor 1P connector terminal to
11-204). body ground with a jumper wire.

KNOCK SENSOR 1P CONNECTOR
KS (RED/BLU)
JUMPER WIRE

12. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector 20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0325 in the DTCs
terminal C42 and body ground. MENU with the HDS.
E C M /P C M CONNECTOR C (44P)
f n rt 'i
1 2 3 4 5 7 6 8 9 NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
[1 10 11 12 13|14ll5|16 17 18 19 J connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
I 20 21 22 23 24 25 and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
B
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35 indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 18 and
136 37 38 I39 40 41 42 43 recheck.
KS (RED/BLU) 21. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
Terminal side of fem a l e termina l s radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
Is there continuity? 23. Hold the engine speed at 3,0004,000 rpm for at least
10 seconds.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM 24. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
(C42) and the knock sensor, then go to step 14. Is DTC P0325 indicated?
13. Replace the knock sensor (see page 11 -204). YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the knock sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (see page 11-7), then go to step 22. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 25.
11-274). 25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0325 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
18. Hold the engine speed between 3,0004,000 rpm for
at least 10 seconds. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
19. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. YES-If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
YES-Go to step 21. Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 24,
NO-Go to step 20.
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
then go to step 22. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
goto step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 22.
(contd)
DTC P0335: CKP Sensor No Signal 9. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

3. Start the engine. GE
CKP (BLU)
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s
CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM.
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 10.
6. Disconnect the CKP sensor 3P connector.
NO-Go to step 11.
10. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P
8. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
con necto r te rm ina I No. 3 and body ground.
CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
3 2 1
1GP (YEL)


YES-Go to step 17.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the CKP
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the CKP sensor and G101; CVT (see page 22-26), M/T (see page
sensor and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 19. 22-22), then go to step 19.
14. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector 16. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal C32 and body ground. terminal C32 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
f r-]
1 2 3 I 4 5 6 7 8 9 h 3 4 5 |6 7 v m
2
[ I 10 11 12 1 3 T l4 T l5 lT 6 17 18 19 I J [ 12 13| 14| 15 j 16i 17 18 19 1
10 11
20 21 22 23 24 25 | 22
20 21 23 24 25
i l 1
o
O)
CO
CO
CO
CS|
: 33 34 35
CM
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35 26 27
28
13 6 137 38 39 140 n 42 43 44 (36 37 38 39 40 4 ' 42 s h l
I u
CKP(BLU) CKP (BLU)
Term inal side o f fe m a l e term inals Term inal side of fem ale term inals
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM YES-Go to step 25.
(C32) and the CKP sensor, then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 15. (C32) and the CKP sensor, then go to step 19.
15. Connect CKP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
body ground with a jumper wire.
18. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11 -203).
[3 [2 | 1) 22. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page

11-274).
CKP (BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
(see page 11-5).
the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
(cont'd)
25. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0339: CKP Sensor Intermittent

26. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest Interruption
. NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
Is DTC P0335 indicated? 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was 4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0339 in the DTCs
substituted, go to step 1. MENU with the HDS.
NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is Does the HDS indicate FAILED?
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other YES-Go to step 7.
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.
ENGINE SPEED
VEHICLE SPEED
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 7.
connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor and
the ECM/PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
7. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
these locations:
CKP sensor
ECM/PCM
Engine ground
Body ground
Are the connections and terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
step 11.
8. Check for damage on the CKP sensor pulse plate (see DTC P0351: No. 1 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit
page 7-27).
Malfunction
Is the pulse plate damaged?
DTC P0352: No. 2 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit
YES-Replace the CKP sensor pulse plate (see page
Malfunction
7-27), then go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 9. DTC P0353; No. 3 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit
Malfunction
10. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-203). DTC P0354: No. 4 Cylinder Ignition Coil Circuit
Malfunction
13. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page troubleshooting information (see page 11-3),
11-274).
(see page 11-5).
Is DTC P0351, P0352, P0353, and/or P0354 indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
ignition coil, and the ECM/PCM.
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Exchange the ignition coil from the problem cylinder
with one from another cylinder.
Is an ignition coil DTC indicated at the cylinder where the
ignition coil was exchanged?

then go to step 26.
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Check the No. B33 IG COIL (IGNITION COIL) (15 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
11. Open the fuse lid panel (A), then remove the ignition 15. Check for continuity between No. 1 ignition coil 3P
coil relay (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
No. 1 1GNITION CO I L 3P CONNECTOR
D
+B (BLK/YEL)
12. Test the ignition coil relay (see page 22-92). Is there continuity?
Is the ignition coil relay OK? YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ignition
coil relay and the ignition coils. Also replace the
YES-Go to step 16. No. B33 IG COIL (IGNITION COIL) (15 A) fuse, then go
NO-Replace the ignition coil relay, then go to step 27. to step 27.
13. Open the fuse lid panel (A), then remove the ignition NO-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box; USA
coil relay (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. models (see page 22-82), Canada models (see page
16. Reinstall the ignition coil relay.
17. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector from the
problem cylinder.
19. Measure voltage between ignition coil 3P connector 24. Check for continuity between body ground and the
terminal No. 1 and body ground. ECM/PCM connector terminal of the problem ignition
coil (see table).
IGNITION COIL3P CONNECTOR PROBLEM DTC ECM/PCM WIRE
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 1 P0351 C15 WHT
No. 2 P0352 C16 WHT/GRN
No. 3 P0353 C17 WHT/BLK
(T 2 No. 4 P0354 C18 WHT/BLU
+B (BLK/YEL)
IGPLS2 (W HT/GRN) IGPLS3 (WHT/BLK)
YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ignition
coil and the No. B33 IG COIL (IGNITION COIL) (15 A)
fuse, then go to step 26.

21. Checkfor continuity between ignition coil 3P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. Is there continuity?

IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR and the ignition coil, then go to step 27.
NO-Go to step 25.
(3 I 2 | 1 j
GND (BLK)
YES-Go to step 22.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ignition
coil and G101; CVT (see page 22-26), M/T (see page
25. Check for continuity between appropriate ignition coil 32. Reconnect all connectors.
3P connector terminal No. 3 and the ECM/PCM
connector terminal of the problem ignition coil (see
tab le). software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
PROBLEM DTC ECM/PCM WIRE 34. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 1 P0351 C15 WHT Is DTC P0351, P0352, P0353, and/or P0354 indicated?
No. 2 P0352 C16 WHT/GRN
C17 YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
No. 3 P0353 WHT/BLK
No 4 P0354 C18 the ignition coil and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
WHT/BLU
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM/PCM
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM was
d 1JW ire side o f complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
1GPLS fem ale te rm in a l s
(W Q d ) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
IGPLS2 (WHT/GRN) IGPLS3 (WHT/BLK) 1
I GPLS1 IGPLS4
(WHT) Ittf
(W HT/BLU)
h 2 3 4 5 6 9 I
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 IJ
20 21 22 23 24 25
2g(3o|3i|s2 1
26 27 28 33 34 35
5
CM
136 37 38 39 40 43 4 4 |
YES-Go to step 32.

and the ignition coil, then go to step 27.
11-274).
the ignition coil, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
DTC P0365: CMP Sensor No Signal 9. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor 3P
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). CMP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

3. Start the engine. S 1
CMP (GRN)
YES-Go to step 5.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
CMP sensor and the ECM/PCM.
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 10.
6. Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector.
NO-Go to step 11.
10. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor 3P
8. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
CMP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

CMP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
(3 fSl 1 )
IGP (YEL/BLK)

YES-Go to step 16.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the CMP
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the CMP sensor and G101; CVT (see page 22-26), M/T (see page
sensor and PGM-FI main relay 1, then goto step 18. 22-22), then go to step 18.
(cont'd)
14. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
17. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11-203),

I
h h 3 4 5 6I7 8 I9 I 21. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
[ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 IJ 11-274).
i
20 21 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 29130131132 33 34 35 22. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
13 6 | 37 38 39 J40 [4TT42 43 4 4 1 Is DTC P0365 indicated?
j
CMP (GRN) YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the CMP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
Term inal side o f fe m a l e term inals
(C31) and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18. known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
NO-Go to step 15. 25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
terminal C31 and CMP sensor 3P connector terminal
No. 3. YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the CMP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
CMP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
CMP (GRN)
W ire side o f fem ale term inals the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
qu-, ri
h I2 3 4 5 6 78
1 10 11 12 13|14p5|T6
17 18 199 I IJ
20 21 22 23 24 25
1 1
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
36 37 38 39 4 f[4 2 43 44 B
U i 1 U
CMP (GRN)
YES-Go to step 23.

(C31) and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18.
m
DTC P0369: CMP Sensor Circuit Intermittent 8. Check for damage on the CMP sensor pulse plate (see
page 6-26).
Interruption
Is the pulse plate damaged?
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general YES-Replace the CMP sensor pulse plate (see page
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 6-26), then go to step 11.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds. 10. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11 -203).
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0369 in the DTCs 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 7. 11-274).
NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If the 14. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.
15. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
result comes on.
of these recorded freeze data parameters: YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ENGINE SPEED the CMP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
VEHICLESPEED NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0369 in the DTCs Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
MENU with the HDS. indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
. YES-Go to step 7.
connections or loose terminals at the CMP sensor and
7. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
these locations:
CMP sensor
ECM/PCM
Engine ground
Body ground
A r e the connections and terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
step 11.
DTC P050A: Cold Start Idle Air Control System 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Performance Problem
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body,
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the ECM/PCM. If the
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs other than P050A HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result
indicated? comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION,
go to step 6.
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
10. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the
3. Check for a blocked or an incorrectly installed intake Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL VALVE
air duct. normal?
Is it OK? YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 4. NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11 -248), then
NO-Reconnect or repair the intake air duct, then go to goto step 19.
step 19. 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing. without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
Is it OK?
12. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for 30
YES-Go to step 5. seconds, check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST
NO-Replace the air cleaner housing (see page 9-3), with the HDS.
then go to step 19. Is there about 4.75.7 gm/s (CVT) or 4.55.5 gm/s
5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element. (M/T)?
Is it dirty? YES-Go to step 13.
YES-Replace the air cleaner element or remove the NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
debris (see page 9-3), then go to step 19. 11-205), then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 6. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is 14. Allow the engine to cool to the ambient temperature.
122 F (50 C) or less. 15. Note the ambient temperature.
7. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
8. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or more. 17. Quickly note the value of the IAT SENSOR (2) in the
18. Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR (2) to the DTC P050B: Gold Start Ignition Timing Control
ambient temperature,
System Performance Problem
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR (2) differ 5.4 F (3 C)
or more from the ambient temperature?
YES-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
NO-Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
bore. If there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle body
(see page 11 -247), then go to step 19. If there is Are any Pending or Con firmed DTCs other than P050B
damage in the throttle bore, replace the throttle body indicated?
(see page 11 -248), then go to step 19.
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.H
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check for a blocked or an incorrectly installed intake
21. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page air duct.
11-274).
Is it OK?
22. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is
122 F (50 C) or less. YES-Go to step 4.
23. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or more. NO-Reconnect or repair the intake air duct, then go to
step 21.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing.
Is DTC P050A indicated?
Is it OK?
the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the YES-Go to step 5.
ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. NO-Replace the air cleaner housing (see page 9-3),
NO-Go to step 25. then go to step 21.
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the DTCs 5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element.
MENU with the HDS. Is it dirty?
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? YES-Replace the air cleaner element or remove the
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other debris (see page 9-3), then go to step 21.
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 24, NO-Go to step 6.
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor 122 F (50 C) or less.
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body,
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the ECM/PCM, then 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
go to step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep 8. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or more.
idling until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates
(cont'd)
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the DTCs 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
MENU with the HDS.
16. Allow the ECT sensors to cool to the ambient
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? temperature.
YES-Go to step 10. 17. Note the ambient temperature.
NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, 18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor, the 19. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT
throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. If the HDS 20. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the ambient
indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result temperature, and the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the
comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, ' ambient temperature individually.
go to step 6.
Does either sensor differ more than 5.4 F (3 C) from the
10. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-20). ambient temperature?
Is the ignition timing OK? YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than 5.4 F
YES-Go to step 12. (3 C) from the ambient temperature, then go to step
21 .
NO-Go to step 11.
NO-Check and repair any problems with the
11. Check for damage at the CKP sensor (see page following items. Repair or replace them if needed,
11-203) and the CKP sensor pulse plate (see page then go to step 21.
7-27). Engine compression and cylinder leakdown
Is the CKP sensor or the CKP sensor pulse plate VTEC system
damaged? Engine oil
A/C system
YES-Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11 -203) and/or
the CKP sensor pulse plate (see page 7-27), then go to Power steering
step 21. 21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO-Go to step 28. 22. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
12. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the 23. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
HDS. 11-274).
Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL VALVE 24. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is
normal? 122 F (50 C) or less.
YES-Go to step 13. 9 25. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or more.
NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-248), then 26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
goto step 21.
Is DTC P050B indicated?
without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
14. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for 30 ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
seconds, check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST
with the HDS.
Is there about 4.75.7 gm/s (CVT) or 4 .5 5.5 gm/s
(MIT)?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
27. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the DTCs 33. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the DTCs
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 26, complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor, the
throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor NO- lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor, the
If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor
result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
CONDITION, go to step 24. was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7), then go to step 30. If the ECM/PCM
28. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes on. If the
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11 -7).
HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 30.
11-274).
122 F (50 C) or less.
31. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or more.
Is DTC P050B indicated?

the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to
step 30. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 33.
DTC P0563: ECM/PCM Power Source Circuit 11. Open the fuse access panel (A), then remove PGM-FI
main relay 1 (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Unexpected Voltage
and any on-board snapshot and review the general
4. Wait 10 seconds.
YES-Go to step 7. 12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. terminal A6 and body ground.
PGM-FI main relay 1 and the ECM/PCM.B
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). M RLY(PUR) -----------------------------
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. f ' ' Tf= = i ........... 1
h 2 3 4 5 6 | 7 8 L
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). I 10 11 12 13|14|15ll6 17 18 19
10. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector 20 21 22 23 24 25 I
29|3o|si|32 I
terminal A6 and body ground. 26 27 28 33 34 35
CO
CO
CO
01
136137 41 [ 42 43 441

(A6) and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 16.
Term inal side o f fem ale term in a ls NO-Go to step 15.
YES-Go to step 13.

NO-Go to step 11.
g 53
13. Open the fuse access panel (A), then remove PGM-FI 16. Reconnect all connectors.
main relay 1 (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
11-274).
21. Wait 10 seconds.

PGM-FI main relay 1 and the ECM/PCM, then go to
step 1.
14. Measure the voltage between body ground and Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
ECM/PCM connector terminals A8 and A43 indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
individually.
ECM/PCM CONIMECTOR A (44P)
IGP1 (YEL) software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
I 1 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 l .L
I
10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19
H
20 21 22 23 24 25 Is DTC P0563 indicated?
1 1
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
1
13 6 37 3 8 ] 3 9 j 4 0 j 4 1 | 42 4 3 [ 4 4 1 YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
PGM-FI main relay 1 and the ECM/PCM. If the
I GP2 (YEL)
Term i nal s i de of fem ale term inals
Is there battery voltage? the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the
ECM/PCM (A8, A43) and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go
to step 16.
NO-Go to step 15.
15. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-92).
Is PGM-FI main relay 1 OK?
YES-Go to step 23.
(cont'd)
DTC P0602: ECM/PCM Programming Error DTC P0S0S; ECM/PCM Processor Malfunction
NOTE: NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
This DTC is stored when an ECM/PCM update is not
completed. 2. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
Do not turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I) or to 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
LOCK (0) while updating the ECM/PCM. If you do, the
ECM/PCM can be damaged. 4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 40 seconds.
1. Do the ECM/PCM update procedure (see page 5. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
11-207). Is DTC P0606 indicated?
2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. YES-Go to step 6.
Is DTC P0602 indicated? NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
YES-Replace the original ECM/PCM (see page tim e.ll
11-209J.B 6. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
NO-The update is complete. If any other Pending or software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
DTC's troubleshooting. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a

known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11 -7), then go to
DTC P060A; ECM/PCM I nternal Control DTC P062F: ECM/PCM Internal Control
Module Malfunction Module Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Error
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P060A indicated? Is DTC P062F indicated?

NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
tim e.ll time.H
4. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest 4. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a software (see page 11 -207), or substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
5. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P060A indicated? Is DTC P062F indicated?
YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck.
If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
(cont'd)
DTC P0630: VIN Not Programmed or 9. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
Mismatch
NOTE:
any on-board snapshot, and review the general Is DTC P0630 indicated?
This DTC is stored only when the ECM/PCM does not known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck.
have the VIN information of the vehicle. Use the HDS If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
to input the missing VIN information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
2. Check the VIN with the HDS. the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
Does the HDS show the vehicle's VIN? indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate COMPLETE?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P062F indicated?
YES-Go to the DTC P062F troubleshooting (see page

11-155).
NO-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Intermittent faiIure, the system is OK at this
tim e.ll
DTC P0685: ECM/PCM Power Control DTC P0720: Output Shaft (Countershaft)
Circuit/Internal Circuit Malfunction Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction (M/T
NOTE:
model)
Before you troubleshoot, record a ll freeze data and NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
any on-board snapshot, and r e v i e w t h e g e n e r a l and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
If the problem doesn't return after you clear the DTC,
or if this DTC is stored intermittently, check for loose
without load (in neutral) until the radiator fan comes
terminals at the IGF line connectors before replacing
on, then let it idle.
the ECM/PCM.
2. Test-drive for several minutes.
3. Check the C SHAFT SPD in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is any vehicle speed indicated?
5. Start the engine, and let it idle for 30 seconds. Checkfor poor connections or loose terminals at the
output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ECM.
8. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is DTC P0685 indicated? 5. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
YES-Go to step 9. sensor 3P connector.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
time.B 7. Measure the voltage between output shaft
9. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector terminal
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a No. 3 and body ground.
10. Start the engine, and let it idle for 30 seconds. OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). [~3~[ 2 1 1
14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). VCC1 (YEL/RED)


known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to W ire side o f fem a l e term inals
step 10. If the ECM/PCM was su bstituted, go to step 1,
Is there about 5 V?
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace YES-Go to step 8.
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other NO-Repair open in the wire between the ECM (C39)
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the and the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor,
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. then go to step 18.
(cont'd)
8. Measure the voltage between output shaft 13. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal
(countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector terminal B34 and body ground.
No. 2 and body ground.
ECM CONNECTOR B (44P)

OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
f n r-J j
I 1
CO
1^.
1 2 3 4 5 8 9
[3 12 1 1 1 [1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 IJ
1 20 21 22 23 24 25
NC (BLK/WHT) 1 1
26 27 28 29(30(31 (32 33 34 35
@ | |
136137 38 39 4 0 41 42 1 3 44 J
NC (BLK/W HT)
Is there about 5 V? Term inal side o f fem ale term inals
YES-Go to step 9. Is there continuity?
NO-Go to step 10. YES-Repair short in the wire between the ECM (B34)
and the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor,
9. Measure the voltage between output shaft
then go to step 18.
(countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 3. NO-Go to step 14.
14. Connect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P
connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a
jumper wire.

3 [2 T) SPEED SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
VCC1 (YEL/RED) SG1 (GRN/W HT)
(3 2 1)
MSH NC (BLK/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ECM (C43)
and the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor,
then go to step 18.
12. Disconnect ECM connector B (44P).
.< r >
15. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal 24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0720 in the DTCs
B34 and body ground. MENU with the HDS.
ECM CONNECTOR B (44P) YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor

1 2
[1 10 11 12 13|l 4|15|16 17 18 19 IJ connections or loose terminals at the output shaft
1 20 21 22 23 24 25 (countershaft) speed sensor and the ECM, then go to

26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35 step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
136 37 38 39 4 0 141 42 1 3 441 step 22.
NC (BLK/W HT)
26. Update the ECM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-207), or substitute a known-good ECM
(see page 11-7).
Term inal side o f fem ale term inals 27. Test-drive under these conditions:
Is there continuity? 176 F (80 C)
YES-Go to step 25. Transmission in 3rd gear
Engine speed 4,000 rpm or more
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ECM (B34)
and the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, Drive for several minutes, then decelerate (with the
then go to step 18. throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds
16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 28. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
17. Replace the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor Is DTC P0720 indicated?
(see page 11-204). YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
18. Reconnect all connectors. the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the
ECM. If the ECM was updated, substitute a
19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). known-good ECM (see page 11-7), then go to step 27.
If the ECM was substituted, go to step 1.
20. Reset the ECM with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 29.
21. Do the ECM idle learn procedure (see page 11 -274).
MENU with the HDS.
176 F (80 C) Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
Transmission in 3rd gear YES-lf the ECM was updated, troubleshooting is
Engine speed 4,000 rpm or more complete. If the ECM was substituted, replace the
Drive for several minutes, then decelerate (with the original ECM (see page 11-209). If any other Pending
throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 28, go to
the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
connections or loose terminals at the output shaft
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at (countershaft) speed sensor and the ECM. If the ECM
the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the was updated, substitute a known-good ECM (see
ECM, then go to step 1. page 11 -7), then go to step 27. If the ECM was
(cont'd)
DTC P1109: BARO Sensor Circuit Out of Range ECT Sensor 1 Range/
D T C P1116:
High Performance Problem
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data NOTE:
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). any on-board snapshot, and review the general
1. Reset the EGM/PCM with the HDS. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P1116,
2. Start the engine. troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC
3. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. P1116.
Is DTC P1109 indicated? 1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
YES-Go to step 4.
Are the connections and terminals OK?
tim e .ll
YES-Go to step 2.
4. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then go to
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a step 21.
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is DTC P1109 indicated? Are DTC P1116 and P2183 indicated at the same time?
YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a YES-Go to step 12.
If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-Go to step 4.
NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is 4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace 5. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the Is about 104 F (40 C) or less indicated?
YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11 -206), then go
to step 21.
NO-Go to step 6.
temperature.
10. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA
LIST with the HDS.
11. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the ambient 24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
temperature.
Does the value of ECT SENSOR 1 differ 5.4 F (3 C) or
more from the ambient temperature?
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM, then
YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-206), then go go to step 1.
to step 21.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
Is about 104 F (40 C) or less indicated?
YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-206), then go

to step 21.
NO-Go to step 14.

to step 21.
NO-Go to step 15.
16. Allow the sensors to cool to the ambient temperature.
19. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT
SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
20. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the ambient
temperature, and the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the
ambient temperature individually.
ambient temperature?
YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than 5.4 F

(3 C) from the ambient temperature, then go to step
21 .
21 .Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
11-274).
DTC P1128: MAP Sensor Signal Lower Than 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Expected 8. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-205).
NOTE: : 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 11. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
Before you troubleshoot, check for poor connections 11-274).
or a blockage at the intake air duct.
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
HDS. 13. Test-drive under these conditions:
Is less than 54.1 kPa (16.0 in H g , 406 m m H g ) , or 1.61 V
158 F (70 C)
held for more than 5 seconds?
YES-Go to step 7. CVT in D, M/T in 3rd
NO-Go to step 3. Vehicle speed accelerated from 1631 mph
(25 50 km/h) under half throttle
without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the Is DTC P1128 indicated?
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
5. Test-drive under these conditions: the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above NO-Go to step 15.
158 F (70 C)
Engine speed between 1,4005,400 rpm 15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1128 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
CVT in D, M/T in 3rd
Vehicle speed accelerated from 1631 mph Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
(25 50 km/h) under half throttle
6 . Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1128 in the DTCs Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 14,
MENU with the HDS. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor and
YES-Go to step 7. the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates
NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, NOT COMPLETED, go to step 12.
DTC P1129: MAP Sensor Signal Higher Than 4. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Expected 5. Test-drive under these conditions:
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 158 F (70 C)
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). CVT in D, M/T in 5th
Drive at a steady speed between 5575 mph
1. Check for vacuum leaks in these parts: (90120 km/h) for 10 seconds
PCV valve During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully
PCV hose closed) for at least 2 seconds
EVAP canister purge valve
Throttle body
MENU with the HDS.
Intake manifold
Brake booster Does the HDS indicate FAILED?
Brake booster hose YES-Go to step 7.
Are there any vacuum leaks? NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,
YES-Repair or replace the part(s) with vacuum leaks,
then go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 2. go to step 5 and recheck.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11 -205).
HDS. 10. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
Is more than 36.9 kPa (11.0 in.Hg, 277 mmHg), or 7.14 V 11. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
held for more than for 5 seconds? 11-274).
YES-Go to step 7. 12. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
NO-Go to step 4.
158 F (70 C)
(90120 km/h) for 10 seconds
During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully
closed) for at least 2 seconds

NO-Go to step 15.
15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1129 in the DTCs DTC P1157: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit High
MENU with the HDS.
Voltage
the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates 3. Start the engine, and wait about 20 seconds.
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 12.
YES-Go to step 5.
A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM.
7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector.
terminal C29 and A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminal C30 and A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector
terminal No. 2. terminal No. 1.
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR
AFS+ (RED) A F S - (RED/YEL)

? 1 2 1
4 3 4 3
W ire side of fem ale term in a ls W ire side o f fem ale term in a ls
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
n n ri
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 T ]
1
[ I 10 11 12 13|14|15(16 17 18 19 1
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1
1 20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25
1 I 1
m
26 27 28 29|30|31132 34 35 26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
1 36 37 38 :*9 40 41 42 43 441 136 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
LJ I 1 u
AFS+ (RED) S - (RED/YEL)
T erm inal side o f fem ale term inals T erm i nal side o f fem ale term inals

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
(C29) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step (C30) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
12 . 12 .
11. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -202).
11-274).

the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go
to step 1. If the connections and the terminals are OK,
goto step 18.
NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1157 in the DTCs DTC P1172: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit Out
MENU with the HDS. of Range High
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
result comes on. radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
18. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest 4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1172 in the DTCs
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
is DTC P1157 indicated? the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes on. If the
HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3 and
NO-Go to step 21. recheck.
21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1157 in the DTCs 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
MENU with the HDS.
6. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -202).
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other 9. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 20, 11-274).
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If the without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
ECM/PCM (see page 11 -7), then go to step 19. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS 11. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result Is DTC P1172 indicated?
comes on.
the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go
to step 1.
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1172 in the DTCs DTC P1297: ELD Circuit Low Voltage
MENU with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 11, 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor Is 72 A or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result
comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
go to step 10. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
ELD and the ECM/PCM.B
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.
Is 72 A or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
10. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector 20. Reconnect all connectors.
terminal A23 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
F=nr
23. Turn on the headlights.
| 1 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9 |_
1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 24. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
1
1
20 21 22 -23 24 25 1 Is DTC P1297 indicated?
26 27 28 29|30|31|32:33 34 35
136 37 38 3 9 140 41 ^11 4 3 14 4 1 YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the ELD and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
ELD (PNK) updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see
page 11 -7), then go to step 22. If the ECM/PCM was
Term inal side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
Is there continuity? Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
(A23) and the ELD, then go to step 13.
IMO-Go to step 20.
12. Replace the ELD (see page 11 -207).
11-274).
18. Turn on the headlights.
the ELD and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
indicated DTC's troubleshooting.!
DTC P I298: ELD Circuit High Voltage 10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A23 and ELD 3P connector terminal No. 1.
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
3 2 1
ELD (PNK)
Is 0.2 A or less indicated?
YES-Go to step 3. ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

fr r r *
ELD and the ECM/PCM.B 1 2 3 4 5 |6 7 8
LI 10 11 12 13|t4|15ll6 17 18 19
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 20 21 22 23 24 25 1
1
-J
O
CO
CM
G>
CO
CO
CM
26 27 28 33 34 35
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.
136 37 38 39 40 4 1 |4 ? 43 441
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Li 1 i u
ELD (PNK)
6. Measure the voltage between ELD 3P connector
terminal No. 3 and body ground. Term inal side o f fem ale term in a ls
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 11.
3 2 1 (A23) and the ELD, then go to step 13.
IG1 (LT BLU) 11. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
GND (BLK)
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check the No. B22 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair an
open in the wire between the No. B22 METER (7.5 A)
fuse and the ELD, then go to step 13. W ire side o f fem ale term inals

YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ELD and
G501 (see page 22-40), then go to step 13.
(contd)
12. Replace the ELD (see page 11 -207), DTC P2183: ECT Sensor 2 Range/
13. Reconnect all connectors. Performance Problem
11-274). If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P2183,
troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC
P2183.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
YES-Go to step 18. sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Are the connections and terminals OK ?
YES-Go to step 2.
step 21.
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is DTC P1298 indicated? Are DTC P1116 and P2183 indicated at the same time?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at YES-Go to step 12.
the ELD and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see NO-Go to step 4.
page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was 4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace Is about 126 F (52 C) or less indicated?
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the to step 21.
NO-Go to step 6.
temperature.
10. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA 22. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
LIST with the HDS.
11. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the ambient 11-274).
temperature.
Does ECT SENSOR 2 differ 5.4 F (3 C) or more from the
ambient temperature? Is DTC P2183 indicated?
YES-Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-206), then go YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
to step 21. ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.
Reinstall ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-206). Check for NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1, Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. indicated DTC's troubleshooting.


to step 21.
NO-Go to step 14.

to step 21.
NO-Go to step 15.
16. Allow the sensors to cool to the ambient temperature.
19. Quickly note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT
SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
20. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the ambient
temperature, and the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the
ambient temperature individually.
ambient temperature?
YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than 5.4 F

(3 C) from the ambient temperature, then go to step
21.
(cont'd)
DTC P2184: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR
Is about 356 F (180 C ) or more, or 0.08 V or less 2 | 1]
indicated? ECT2 (WHT)
YES-Go to step 3.
Checkfor poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM.
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector. Is there continuity?
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM
(A33) and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 18.
Is about 356 F (180 C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
indicated? 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES-Go to step 7. 12. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-206).
NO-Go to step 11. 13. Reconnect all connectors.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 15. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 16. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-274).

18. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P2T85: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage
19. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11 -7). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
20. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is DTC P2184 indicated? 2. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LI ST with the HDS.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at Is about 40 F ( 40 C) or less, or 4.90 V or more
ECT sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was indicated?
page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM.
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector.
5. Connect ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminals No. 1
[2 1)
SG6 (PNK) ECT2 (WHT)
JUMPER WIRE

indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.
9. Remove the jumper wire from the ECT sensor 2 2P
connector.
11. Measure the voltage between ECT sensor 2 2P 15. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. terminal A9 and ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminal
No. 2.
ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR
u rn
SG6 (PNK)

ECT2 (WHT)

SG6 (PNK)
r ............ ........... ................ .........

W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 .
LI 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
I
Is there about 5 V? 20 21 22 ^ > < c 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
YES-Go to step 12. 136 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 441
NO-Go to step 16.

T erm i nal side o f fem ale term inals
14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). YES-Go to step 27.

16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 27. Reconnect all connectors.
17. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 28. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
terminal A33 and ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminal
No. 1. Is DTC P2185 indicated?
ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at

ECT sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
GES page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was
ECT2 (WHT)
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
r1
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 j_
LI 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
I I
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
136 37 38 39 40 41 < 43 441
U I i u
ECT2 (WHT)
YES-Go to step 27.

21. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11 -206).
11-274).

(cont'd)
D T C P2195: A / F S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) S i g n a l 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

Stuck L e a n 8. Reinstall the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11-202).
NOTE: 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 10. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled 11-274).
before this DTC was stored, refuel and clear the DTC
with the HDS.
If DTC P2101, P2118, P2135, P2138, P2176, or a Is DTC P2195 indicated?
combination of P2122 and P2127, P2122, and P2138, or YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
P2127 and P2138 is stored at the same time, the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go
troubleshoot them first, then recheck for DTC P2195. to step 13.
1. Check for dirt or debris in the MAF sensor/IAT sensor. NO-Go to step 13.
Is it dirty? 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2195 in the DTCs
YES-Remove the debris. If needed, replace the MAF MENU with the HDS.
sensor/IAT sensor (see page 11-205), then go to step Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
9.
NO-Go to step 2. Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 12,
2. Check the installation of the A/F sensor (Sensor 1). go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
Is the A/F sensor loose or disconnected from the exhaust NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
pipe? connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
YES-Go to step 7. HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
NO-Go to step 3. result comes on.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
5. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (CVT in P 15. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (CVT in P
or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
Is DTC P2195 indicated? Is DTC P2195 indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If the
to step 14. ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM, then go to step 15. If the ECM/PCM was
A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If any other NO-Go to step 17.
17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2195 in the DTCs DTC P219A: Air-Fuel Ratio Variation of
MENU with the HDS.
Cylinders
NOTE:
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 16, If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. same time as DTC P219A, troubleshoot those DTCs
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor first, then recheck for P219A.
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor P0133, P1157, P1172, P2195, P2238, P2252, P2A00; A/F
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was sensor (Sensor 1)
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see P0134, P0135:A/F sensor (Sensor 1) heater
page 11-7), then go to step 15. If the ECM/PCM was P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204: No. 1 - No. 4 cylinder
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT injector(s)
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on. P0300: Random misfire
P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304: No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, or No.
4 cylinder misfire detected
P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354: No. 1 - No. 4 cylinder
ignition coil(s)
P0400, P0401, P0404, P0406, P2413: EGR system
If the engine speed fluctuates at highway speeds, the
EGR line may be blocked by carbon or sludge.
2. Record following HDS parameters (On-board
snapshot):
VEHICLE SPEED
ENGINE SPEED
MAP SENSOR
ECT SENSOR 1
APPSENSOR
AFFB (ST FUEL TRIM)
EGR COMMAND
EGR LIFT
3. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (CVT
in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.
A/C off
5. Do the Cylinder AF Test three times in the
INSPECTI ON MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
7. Test-drive the vehicle in the range of these recorded 15. Exchange the injector from the problem cylinder with
on-board snapshot parameters: one from the another cylinder.
VEHICLE SPEED 16. Recconect all connectors.
ENGINE SPEED
MAP SENSOR 17. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.
ECT SENSOR 1 18. Check under these conditions:
APP SENSOR A/C off
AFFB (ST FUEL TRIM) All electrical loads off
EGR COMMAND
19. Do the Cylinder AF Test three times in the
EGR LIFT INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P219A in the DTCs Is an injector failure indicated at the cylinder where the
MENU with the HDS. injector was exchanged?
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? YES-Replace the faulty injector (see page 11-200),
YES-Go to step 20. then go to step 23.
N O -lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, NO-Go to step 22.
the system is OK at this time. If the HDS indicates 20. Inspect the valve clearances (see page 6-8).
the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 7 Are the valve clearances OK?
and recheck. YES-Go to step 21.
9. Do a cylinder compression test (see page 6-6).
NO-Adjust the valve clearances (see page 6-8), then
Is the engine compression of the problem cylinder lower go to step 23 and recheck. If DTC P219A is indicated
than the other cylinders? go to step 21. If DTC P219A is not indicated,
troubleshooting is complete.
YES-Adjust the engine compression (see page 6-6),
then go to step 23. 21. Check for carbon or sludge in the EGR line.
NO-Go to step 10. Is there carbon or sludge?
10. Inspect the valve clearances (see page 6-8). YES-Clean the intake manifold EGR port (see page
11-327) and the EGR pipe with throttle plate cleaner
Are the valve clearances OK? (see page 11-327). Also, clean the passage inside the
YES-Go to step 11. EGR valve with throttle plate cleaner, then go to step
23.
NO-Adjust the valve clearances (see page 6-8), then
go to step 11. NO-Go to step 22.
11. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (CVT 22. Check for carbon build-up in the intake manifold (see
in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes page 9-9), and the exhaust line (see page 9-17).
on, then let it idle. Is there carbon build-up in the intake manifold and/or the
12. Check under these conditions: cylinder head?
A/C off YES-Remove the carbon, then go to step 23.
NO-Check the engine oil leak. If needed, repair the
13. Do the Cylinder AF Test three times in the engine, then go to step 23.
I NSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: If engine oil burning occurs, this code can be
Is the result OK? stored.
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 14.
23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC P2227: BARO Sensor Range/
24. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. Performance Problem
25. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page NOTE:
11-274). Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
26. Test-drive the vehicle in the range of these recorded
on-board snapshot parameters:
# If DTC P0107, P0108, P1128, and/or P1129 are stored at
VEHICLE SPEED
the same time as DTC P2227, troubleshoot those DTCs
ENGINE SPEED first, then recheck for DTC P2227.
MAP SENSOR
ECT SENSOR 1 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 2 seconds.
APP SENSOR 2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
AFFB (ST FUEL TRIM) HDS.
. EGR COMMAND Is about 101 kPa (29.9 in.Hg, 760 mmHg), or about 2.9 V
EGR LIFT at sea level indicated?
Is DTC P219A indicated? NO-Go to step 15.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
the injectors and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 28. without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P219A in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS. 5. Test-drive under these conditions:
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
158 F (70 C)
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other CVT in D, M/T in 4th
REL TP SENSOR between 14 deg and 28 deg for at
least 3 seconds
recheck. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep
MENU with the HDS.
driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates
OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 26. Does the HDS indicate FAILED?
YES-Go to step 7.
the system is OK at this time. Check for something
that may have clogged the intake air system. If the
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 4 and
recheck.
7. Check the intake air system for clogging or
restrictions (foreign material, dirty air cleaner
element, etc.).
Is the intake air system clogged or restricted?
YES-Remove the clog or restriction, then go to step 8.

NO-Go to step 15.
(cont'd)
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 15. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
9. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
10. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page 16. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
11-274). without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the 17. Test-drive under these conditions:
12. Test-drive under these conditions: 158 F (70 C)
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above CVT in D, M/T in 4th
158 F (70 C) REL TP SENSOR between 14 deg and 28 deg for at
in D, M/T in 4th least 3 seconds
REL TP SENSOR between 14 deg and 28 deg for at 18. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
least 3 seconds
is DTC P2227 indicated?
Is DTC P2227 indicated? the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was u p d ate d ,
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page
the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. 11-207), then go to step 16. If the ECM/PCM was
NO-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 19.
MENU with the HDS. 19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2227 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 13, YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 18,
connections or loose terminals at the ECM/PCM, then go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 11. NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the ECM/PCM. If the
DTC P2228: BARO Sensor Circuit Low Voltage' DTC P2229: BARO Sensor Circuit High Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. HDS.
Is about 43 kPa (12.7 in.Hg, 323 mmHg), or 1.3 Vor less Is about 160 kPa (47.2 in.Hg, 1,200 mmHg), or 4.5 Vor
indicated? more indicated?

tim e.ll . . tim e.ll
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1. step 1.
NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
(cont'd)
DTC P2238: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS+ Line 10. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -202).
Low Voltage 11. Reconnect all connectors.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 13. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
11-274).
without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until
radiator fan comes on. YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go
to step 1. If the connections and the terminals are OK,
Is DTC P2238 indicated? go to step 17.
YES-Go to step 5. NO-Go to step 16.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. 16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2238 in the DTCs
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MENU with the HDS.
6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 15,
9. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the
terminal C29 and body ground. HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) 17. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
r
n vir îi .... ..n . . 18. Start the engine, and let it idle.
3 4 5 16 7 8
[ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 IJ 19. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
20 21 22 23 24 25
1 Is DTC P2238 indicated?
26 27 28:29|30|31132 33 34 35
136 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 441 YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
A F S + (RED) step 18. If the ECM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 20.
T erm inal side o f fem ale term in a ls

(C29) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
11 .
NO-Go to step 10.
20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2238 in the DTCs DTC P2252: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS
MENU with the HDS. Circuit Low Voltage
YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If the 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
ECM/PCM (see page 11 -7), then go to step 18. If the radiator fan comes on.
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result 4. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
comes on. Is DTC P2252 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR C.(44P)
_ 2
3 4 1 8 9I
CO
L* 10 11 12 13|T4|15|T^ 17 18 19 l i
i 20 21 22 23 24 25
1>
26 27 28 29|30|3i|32 33 34 35
136137 431441
A F S - (RED/YEL)
(C30) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
11 .
(cont'd)
10. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -202). 20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2252 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
13. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
14. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
1 1 -2 7 4 ). Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 19,
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If the
Is DTC P2252 indicated? ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 18. If the
the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
to step 1. If the connector and the terminals are OK, go result comes on.
to step 17.
NO-Go to step 16.
MENU with the HDS.

result comes on.
NO-Go to step 20.
11184
DTC P2610: ECM/PCM Ignition Off Internal DTC P2A00: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1)
Timer Malfunction Range/Performance Problem
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
tim e.ll 158 F (70 C)
4. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest CVT in D, M/T in 3rd or 4th
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a Vehicle speed between 25 55 mph (4088 km/h)
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). for 5 minutes
5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. (88120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate
Is DTC P2610 indicated? (with the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds
YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a 5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00 in the DTCs
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. MENU with the HDS.
If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. Does the HDS indicate FAILED?
NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is YES-Go to step 6.
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the the system is OK at this time. Checkfor poor
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3
and recheck.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC U0301: PGM-FI System Program Version
7. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -202). Mismatch
11-274). This DTC is indicated when a ECM/PCM update is not
completed.
11 .Test-drive under these conditions:
Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or LOCK (0)
while updating the ECM/PCM. If you do, the ECM/PCM
158 F (70 C)
can be damaged.
Vehicle speed between 2555 mph (4088 km/h) 1. Do the ECM/PCM update procedure (see page
for 5 minutes 11-207).
Drive at a steady speed between 5575 mph 2. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
(88120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate
(with the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds Is DTC U0301 indicated?
12. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. YES-Replace the original ECM/PCM (see page
11-209).B
Is DTC P2A00 indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
to step 1.
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.

go to step 11.
I
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
22-325).
Does the MIL flash?
YES-Go to step 3.
t n n ^
NO~Substitute a known-good gauge control module 3 |4 5
1 2 6
7' 8 9 .
(see page 22-354), then recheck. If the L f 10 11 12 13|14n|t6 17 18 19
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good 20 21 22 23 24 25 1
1
gauge control module, replace the original gauge 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
control module (see page 22-354).B 136 37 38 39140 41 142 43 441
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11 -3). SCS (BRN)
4. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is a short indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a known- Is there continuity?
good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see page (A31) and the DLC.H
11-209).I NO-Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). software (see page 11-207), or substitute a known-
good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
6. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P), then symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
disconnect the HDS. ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see page
11-209).B
Shift Indicator Lamp Troubleshooting
NOTE: Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
HDS before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are stored,
11. Check the CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH A (C) in
troubleshoot them first, then do this procedure.
the DATA LIST with the HDS.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3).
Is OPEN indicated?
YES-Go to step 12.
3. Test-drive several minutes.
NO-Go to step 28.
4. Check the C SHAFT SPD in the DATA LIST with the
12. Press the clutch pedal.
HDS.
Is any vehicle speed indicated?
the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
Is CLOSE indicated?
NO-Go to the troubleshooting for P0720 (see page
YES-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
11-157).
5. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page gauge control module, clutch pedal position switch C,
2 2-325). and the ECM
Is the result OK? NO-Go to step 14.
YES-Go to step 6. 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO-Substitute a known-good gauge control module, 15. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch C 2P
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away connector.
with a known-good gauge control module, replace the
16. Connect clutch pedal position switch C 2P connector
original gauge control module (see page 22-354).
6. Do the APP sensor signal inspection (see page
11-25D.H
Is the result OK? CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH C 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Depending on the result, repair or replace the
appropriate part.fl
7. Do the brake pedal position switch signal circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-272).B
Is the result OK?
JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Depending on the result, repair or replace the
appropriate part.B
18. Check CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH A (C) in the
9. Check the position of clutch pedal position switch C DATA LIST with the HDS.
(see page 1 3 -6 ).
Is OPEN indicated?
Is the position correct?
YES-Go to step 19.
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace clutch pedal position switch C (see page
NO-Do the clutch pedal and clutch pedal position 13-9).B
switch C adjustment (see page 13-6).B
m
20. Remove the jumper wire from the clutch pedal 27. Checkfor continuity between ECM connector terminal
position switch C 2P connector. B39 and body ground.
terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. ECM CONNECTOR B (44P)
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH C 2P CONNECTOR

- 2
oor
3| 4 5 | 6| 7
[ 171819 j
10 11 12 13|14|15|16
1 202122 232425
2627 2829|30|3l|32 33 3435
CLSW2 (LT BLU)
03 I3 6 |3 7 3 8 | 39|40 41 42 43|44j
JUMPER WIRE CLSW2 (GRN)

22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is there continuity?
23. Check CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH A (C) in the YES-Update the ECM if it does not have the latest
DATA LIST with the HDS. software (see page 11-207), or substitute a known-
good ECM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
Is CLOSE indicated?
Symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
YES-Go to step 24. ECM, replace the original ECM (see page 11-209).
NO-Repair an open in the wire between clutch pedal NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM
position switch C and body ground (G403 (see page (B39) and the clutch pedal position switch C M
22-36)).B 28. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
29. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch C 2P
25. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. connector.
26. Disconnect ECM connector B (44P). 30. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is OPEN indicated?
YES-Replace clutch pedal position switch C (see page

13-9).B
NO-Go to step 32.
Shift Indicator Lamp ECM/PCM Power and Ground
Troubleshooting (cont'd) Circuit Troubleshooting
35. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal 1. Check the No. B60IGSW (50 A) fuse in the under-dash
B39 and body ground. fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Repair an open in the wire between the No. B60
IGSW (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. If the wire is
OK, go to step 2.
F ====Tr
r n n ^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NO-Repair a short in the wire between the No. B60
[ 10 11 12 13)l 4|15|16 17 18 19 j IGSW (50 A) fuse and the under-dash fuse/relay box.
I 20 21 22 23 24 25 Also replace the No. B60 IGSW (50 A) fuse.H
1
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
2. Inspect the No. B39 IGF (15 A) fuse in the under-dash
136 37 38 139 40 41 42 43 441
fuse/relay box.
CLSW2 (GRN) Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 3.
T erm in a l side o f fem ale term inals 3. Remove the blown No. B39IGP (15 A) fuse from the
4. Open the fuse lid panel (A), then remove PGM-FI main
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM (B39) relay 1 (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
and clutch pedal position switch C M
NO-Update the ECM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a known-
good ECM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
ECM, replace the original ECM (see page 11-209).B
5. Checkfor continuity between body ground and 6. While disconnecting each of the parts or connectors
PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminals No. 2 and below, one at a time, checkfor continuity between
No. 4 individually. PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No. 1 and
body ground.
PGM-FI M A M RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR PGM-FI main relay 2
ECM/PCM connector A (44P)
+B Each injector 2P connector
4 M 3 + B CMP sensor 3P connector
CKP sensor 3P connector
Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control
relay
PGfVt-Fi M AIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR

E E S
2
Is there continuity? _ 1
IGF
YES-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box; USA
models (see page 22-82), Canada models (see page
22-83).
NO-Go to step 6.
T erm inal side of fem ale term inals
Does continuity go away when one of the above parts or

components is disconnected?
YES-Replace the part that made the short to body

ground go away when disconnected. If the part is the
ECM/PCM, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have
the latest software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see
page 11-209). Also replace the No. 39 IGP (15 A)
fuse.ll
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the connectors from these parts:
PGM-FI main relay 2
ECM/PCM connector A (44P)
Injectors
CMP sensor
CKP sensor
Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control
relay
ECM/PCM Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P 12. Test PGM-FI main relay 2 (see page 22-92).
Is PGM-FI main relay 2 OK?
PGM-H MAIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR YES-Go to step 13.

NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace the
No. B20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse.B
13. Checkfor continuity between auxiliary under-hood
relay box A 17P connector terminal No. 1 (PGM-FI
main relay 2) and body ground.

17P CONNECTOR
IG1 (BRN)
YES-Repair a short in the wire between PGM-FI main
relay 1 and each part. Also replace the No. B39 IGP 5 6
(15 A) fuse.B
NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 1. Also replace the
7 8
No. B39 IGP (15 A) fuse.B
9. Inspect the No. B20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the
Is the fuse OK? Term inal side o f fem ale term inals
YES-Go to step 19.

10. Remove the blown No. B20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse YES-Go to step 14.
from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
NO-Go to step 17.
11. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (A) from auxiliary
under-hood relay box A. 14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
16. Checkfor continuity between auxiliary under-hood 18. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 4P
relay box A 17P connector terminal No. 1 (PGM-FI connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR

17P CONNECTOR
FUEL PUMP
(ORN)
I G1 (BRN)
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the fuel pump
and PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace the No. B20
FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse.B
NO-Check the fuel pump, and replace it if needed (see
is there continuity? page 11-305). Also replace the No. B20 FUEL PUMP
(15 A) fuse.B
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the No. B20
FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (C36), or 19. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
PGM-FI main relay 2. Also replace the No. B20 FUEL
20. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A (44P) and C (44P).
PUMP (15 A) fuse.B
NO-Replace the No. B20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse, and
update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
If the symptom/indication goes away with a
known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original
ECM/PCM (see page 11-209).B
17. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (see page
11-301).
ECM/PCM Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
22. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector 25. Open the fuse lid panel (A), then remove PGM-FI main
terminal C36 and body ground. relay 1 (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
( .....
b
n_~ ______ : n......... ..Ji
1 23 4 6 6 7 8 9 I
[I 10 11 12 T3[i 4|15(i 6 17 18 19 J
20 21 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
13 6 137 38 39 40 41 42 43 . I
IG1 (BLK/RED)
26. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P

Term inal side o f fem ale term inals connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
PGM-FI M A I N RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 23.
+ B
FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (C36).B SEE
23. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector
MRLY (PUR)
I 1 I2 i f 4 I 5 6 7 8H H G
1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 Is there battery voltage?
1
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35 \
37 38 39(40 41 42 43
YES-Go to step 27.
I 36 ill I
NO-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box; USA
22-83).B
YES-Go to step 29.

NO-Go to step 24.
27, Connect PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal 30. Open the fuse lid panel (A), then remove PGM-FI main
No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire. relay 1 (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
PGM-FI M AIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR
MRLY
f IXI 3
2
JUMPER WIRE
1
28. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 31. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P
terminal A6 and body ground. connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.

PGM-FI M AIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR
j I X I.3 +B
YES-Go to step 32.

YES-Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-92). If the models (see page 22-82), Canada models (see page
relay is OK, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have 22-83). B
(A6) and PGM-FI main relay 1.B
(cont'd)
ECM/PCM Pow er and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
32. Connect PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal 35. Check for continuity between body ground and
No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. ECM/PCM connector terminals B1, B36, C2, C40, and
C44 individually.
PGM-FI M A I N RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR
SEE PG2 (BRN)
___ 0.. ........... .... . . n
IGP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I 9
1 10 11 12 13)14115116 17 18 19 .1 J
JUMPER WIRE 1 20 21 22 23 24 25 m
m
jCO_
CM
05
CO
CO
0
26 27 28 33 34 35
I 36
37 38 j 39 40 41142 43
441
T erm inal side o f fem ale term inals PGMBLK)
33. Check for continuity between body ground and

ECM/PCM connector terminals A8 and A43 Term inal side o f fem ale term inals
individually.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
-IGPKYEL) PGM ETCS (BLK)
1 2 3 j4 5 6 I7 8 9 1 I2 3 4 5 |6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 . 10 11
12 i3 |i4 li5 |i6 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21
22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29|30|31 |S2 33 34 35 1
26 27
28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
36 37 38|39 40|41 42 43 44 J36 37 38 I 39 4 0 141 42 43 144
IGP2 (YEL) LG1 LG2

(BRN/YEL) / q \ (BRN/YEL)
T erm inal side o f fem ale te rm in a ls

YES-Remove the jumper wire, then go to step 34. YES-Go to step 36.
(A8, A43) and PGM-FI main relay 1 .1 (B1, B36, C2, C40, C44) and G101; CVT (see page
22-26), M/T (see page 22-22).*
terminal C39 and body ground. terminal B6 and body ground.

VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
( a _0_
I1 I2
_ r
3 T T ]if ]ir [ 7 8 9 1 1 12 V fT T T ' 6 | 7 8| 9 j
10 11 12 1 3 |l4 |l5 |l6 17 18 19 h J [1 10 11 12 13114115116^ 17 18 19 B
1 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 20 21 22 23 24 25
m
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
136 j 37 38 139140 (41 f42 43 4 4 1 | 36137 38 f 39 40|41|42 43 44 |
VCC1 (YEL/RED)

NO-Go to step 38. NO-Go to step 40.
37. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM 39. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM
connector terminal C39 and body ground, while connector terminal C39 and body ground, while
disconnecting these connectors, one at a time: disconnecting these connectors, one at a time:
MAP sensor 3P connector EGR valve 5P connector
Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor 3P
connector (M/T) connector (CVT)
CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor 3P Vehicle speed sensor 3P connector (CVT)
connector (CVT)
Does continuity go away when one of the above
Does continuity go away when one of the above connectors is disconnected?
connectors is disconnected?
YES-Replace the part that made the short to body ground go away when disconnected.
ground go away when disconnected.
NO-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM
NO-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B6) and the EGR valve, the CVT input shaft (drive
(C39) and the MAP sensor, the output shaft pulley) speed sensor (CVT), or the vehicle speed
(countershaft) speed sensor (M/T), or the CVT output sensor (CVT)
shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor (CVT).H
(cont'd)
ECM/PCM Pow er and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
terminal C12 and body ground. terminal A25 and body ground.

VCC3 (BLU)
1 2 J 4 5 6 7 8 | 1 |2 3 4 TFT 7 sTTL
VCC4
1.. 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
17 18 19 I (BRN)
23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 1
1 20 21 22 I
26 27 28 29|30|3t|32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 4 4 1 136137 38 j 39 4 0 |41 42 43 441
I.36
T erm in a l side o f fem ale te rm in a l s

Term inal side o f fem ale term in a ls *==*

41. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM 43. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM
connector terminal C12 and body ground, while connector terminal A25 and body ground, while
disconnecting the throttle body 6P connector. disconnecting the APP sensor 6P connector.
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM
(C12) and the throttle body.B (A25) and APP sensor A .B
NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-248).B NO-Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page
11-251).B
&
44. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 46. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A24 and body ground. terminal A19 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) E C M / P C M CONNECTOR A (44P)
1 _ ---- ----- ----- - J 1 ---- r-TI

I 1 I 2 3 I 4 | 5 I 6 I 7 8 1 9 |_
VCC5
[ 10 11 12 13|14pl5ll6 17 18 19 (LT GRN)
20 21 22 23 24 1
1 I
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
136j 37 38 j 39 4 0 14 1 142 4 3 14 4 1
fr
T erm in a l side o f fem ale term inals

NO-Go to step 46. NO-Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a known-
45. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
connector terminal A24 and body ground, while symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
disconnecting the APP sensor 6P connector. ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see page
Is there continuity? 11-209). B
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM 47. Continue to check for continuity between ECM/PCM
(A24) and APP sensor B.B connector terminal A19 and body ground, while
disconnecting these connectors, one at a time:
NO-Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page
FTP sensor 3P connector
11-251).B
A/C pressure 3P connector
Brake booster pressure sensor A 3P connector
Brake booster pressure sensor B 3P connector
connectors is disconnected?

ground go away when disconnected.B
NO-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM
(A19) and the FTP sensor, the A/C pressure sensor,
brake booster pressure sensor A, or brake booster
pressure sensor B.B
Injector Replacement
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11 -287).

2. Remove the intake manifold/chamber assembly (see page 9-12).
3. Remove the nut (A).
4. Disconnect the injector connectors (B), the rocker arm oil control solenoid connector (C), and the EGR valve connector
(D).
5. Remove the fuel rail mounting nuts (E) and the bolt (F) from the fuel rail (G), then remove the injectors and the fuel rail
together.
6. Remove the injector clips (H) from the injectors (I).
7. Remove the injectors from the fuel rail.
8. Coat the new O-rings (black) (A) with clean engine oil, then insert the injectors (B) into the fuel rail (C).
9. Install the Injector clips (D).

10. Coat the injector O-rings (brown) (E) with clean engine oil.
11. Install the fuel rail and the injectors in the cylinder head (F).
12. Install the fuel rail mounting nuts (G) and the bolt (H).
13. Install the nut (I) with a new O-ring (J).
14. Connect the injector connectors (K), the rocker arm oil control solenoid connector (L), and the EGR valve connector
(M).
15. Install the intake manifold/chamber assembly (see page 9-14).
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about 2 seconds, the fuel
rail is pressurized. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel leaks.
A /F Sensor Replacement Secondary H02S Replacement
Special Tools Required Special Tool s Required

02 Sensor Wrench, Snap-on S6176 or equivalent, 02 Sensor Wrench, Snap-on S6176 or equivalent,
commercially available commercially available
1. Remove the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel (see 1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3).
page 20-153).
2. Disconnect the secondary H02S connector (A).
2. Disconnect the A/F sensor connector (A).
3. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-10).

4. Remove the wire clips (A), then remove the secondary
H02S (B).
44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m,

32 Ibfft)
CMP Sensor Replacement CKP Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3). 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-10).
2. Remove the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel (see NOTE: Make sure the vehicle is level, because engine
page 20-153). oil will drip out when you remove the sensor.
3. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-163).
3. Loosen the bolt (A). Remove the bolt (B) and the CKP
sensor cover (C).
4. Remove the CMP sensor (B).

5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with
a new O-ring (C).
4. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector (D).

5. Remove the CKP sensor (E).
6. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a
new O-ring (F).
(see page 11-5).
8. Check the engine oil level, and add more oil if needed.
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Knock Sensor Replacement
Sensor Replacement
M/T 1. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A).

3. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector (A).
2. Remove the knock sensor (B).

3, Install the parts i n the reverse order of remova l .
(B).
new O-ring (C).
MAP Sensor Replacement MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor
Replacement
1. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector (A). 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A).
2. Remove the MAP sensor (B).

6
3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a 1.5 N-m
new O-ring (C). (0.15 kgf-m,
1.1 Ibfft)
2. Remove the screws (B).

3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C).
new gasket (D).
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ECT Sensor 2 Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3). 1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-8).
2. Remove the bolt (A). 2. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-10).
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 connector (A), then
remove ECT sensor 2 (B).
(1.1 kgf-m, (1.2 kgf-m,

8 Ibf-ft) 9 Ibf-ft)
3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 connector (B).
4. Remove ECT sensor 1 (C).
new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with engine
new O-ring (D), then refill the radiator with engine
coolant (see page 10-8).
ELD Replacement ECM/PCM Update
1. Remove the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page Special Tools Required
22-82). Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) tablet tester
Honda Interface Module (HIM) and an iN workstation
2. Remove the fuse (A).
3.2 N-m HDS pocket tester
software version
software installed
Any one of the above updating tools can be used.

NOTE:
Make sure the HDS/iN workstation or the MVCI has the
Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the 12
volt battery in the vehicle is fully charged, and connect
a jumper battery (not a battery charger) to maintain
system voltage.
3. Remove the joint bar (B). Never turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I) or to
LOCK (0) during the update. If there is a problem with
4. Turn over the under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the update, leave the ignition switch turned to ON (II).
the ELD (A). To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate
anything electrical (headlights, navigation, brakes,
A/C, power windows, door locks, etc.) during the
update.
To ensure the latest program is installed, do a
ECM/PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is
substituted or replaced.
You cannot update an ECM/PCM with a program it
already has. It will only accept a new program.
High temperature in the engine compartment might
cause the ECM/PCM to become too hot to run the
update. If the engine was running before the update,
open the hood and cool the engine compartment.
If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or was
flashing during the update, leave the ignition switch in
ON (II) when you disconnect the HIM from the data link
connector (DLC). This will prevent damage to the
ECM/PCM.

ECM/PCM Update (cont'd)
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start the 7. If the software in the ECM/PCM is the latest,
engine. disconnect the updating tool from the DLC, then go
back to the procedure that you were doing. If the
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) software in the ECM/PCM is not the latest, follow the
located underthe driver's side of the dashboard.
instructions on the screen. If prompted to choose the
PGM-FI system or the CVT system, make sure you
update both.
NOTE: If the ECM/PCM update system requires you to
cool the ECM/PCM, follow the instructions on screen.
If you have a problem during the update procedure
(programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes
over 100 %, D or immobilizer indicator flashes, HDS
tablet freezes, etc.), follow these steps to minimize the
chance of damaging the ECM/PCM.
Leave the ignition switch in ON (II).
Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery
charger).
Shut down the updating tool.
tS H M i Disconnect the updating tool from the DLC.
b h m m ik Reboot the updating tool.
Reconnect the updating tool to the DLC, and try the
update procedure again.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM 8. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean the
and all other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to the throttle body (see page 11 -247).
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11 -383). If you
are returning from the DLC circuit troubleshooting,
11-274).
skip step 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after
updating the ECM/PCM. 10. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn procedure
(see page 11-5).
4. Select the INSPECTION/MENU with the HDS.
11. Select the CVT SYSTEM, then reset the PCM with the
5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
HDS.
CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the
update mode, and fo llow the screen prompts to
update the ECM/PCM.
ECM/PCM Replacement
Special Tools Required , 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) tablet tester
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM
and all other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to the
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-383). If you
HDS pocket tester
are returning from the DLC circuit troubleshooting,
skip steps 4 through 7,18 through 20, and 23 through
software version
24, and do these procedures after replacing the
MVCI unit with the latest control module (CM) update ECM/PCM:
software installed
Replace the engine oil and the engine oil filter (see
Any one of the above updating tools can be used. page 8-11).
Clean the throttle body (see page 11 -247).
NOTE:
Make sure the HDS/iN workstation or the MVCI has the 4. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
latest HDS software version. 5. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
The lifetime points of the Eco guide cannot be carried
over to the replacement ECM/PCM. 6. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
CHECK, and follow the screen prompts.
located under the driver's side of the dashboard. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
continue with this procedure.
7. Select the REPLACE ECM/PCM MENU, then select
READ DATA, and follow the screen prompts.
NOTE:
Doing this step copies (READS) the engine oil life
data from the original ECM/PCM so you can later
download (WRITES) it into the new ECM/PCM.
If the READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue with
this procedure.
A
ECM/PCM Replacement (cont'd)
10. Remove auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box A. 13. Remove the bolts (D).
11. Remove the battery hold-down plate (B), then move

the battery (C) forward.
12. Remove the ECM/PCM cover (D).
14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C, then
remove the ECM/PCM (E).
symbols (A=D, B=A, C =0) embossed on them for
identification.
15. Install all parts in the reverse order o f removal.
17. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
NOTE: DTC P0630 VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch
may be stored because the VIN has not been
programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it and
18. If the READ DATA (engine oil life) failed in step 7, go to
step 21. Otherwise, go to step 19.
19. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
20. Select the REPLACE ECM/PCM MENU, then select
WRITE DATA, and follow the screen prompts.
NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue
with this procedure.
21. Select the IMMOBI system with the HDS.
22. Enter the immobilizer ECM/PCM code that you got
from the iN, and use the ECM/PCM replacement
procedure in the IMMOBI MENU of the HDS; it allows
you to start the engine.
23. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the
throttle body (see page 11-247), then go to step 24.
24. If the READ DATA failed in step 7 or the WRITE DATA
failed in step 20, replace the engine oil (see page
8-10), and the engine oil filter (see page 8-11), then go
to step 25.
25. Select the PGM-FI system, and reset the ECM/PCM
with the HDS.
software (see page 11 -207).
11-274). ' '
NOTE: If the IMA battery level gauge displays no
segments, start the engine, and hold it between 3,500
4,000 rpm without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in
neutral) until the level gauge displays at least half of
its segments.
(see page 11-5).
29. CVT: Do the start clutch control calibration procedure
(see page 14-150).
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR and
THROTTLE
POSITI ON (TP) ENGINE CONTROL
SENSOR MODULE (ECM )/
Test, page 11-246 POWERTRAI N
C l eaning, page 11-247 CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
R em oval/Insta l lation, page 11 -248
General T roubleshooting
Disassembly/Reassem bly, page 11-250
Inform ation, page 11-3
S ubstituting, page 11-7
Update, page 11-207
H I
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
A U U fc L fc n A 1 U K r fc O A L IV IU U U L t
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
POSITION (APP) SENSOR
Signal Inspection, page 11-251
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0122: TP Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage 11. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
and any on-board snapshot and review the general 13. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P
troubleshooting information (see page 11 -3). connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
CD
00
Is there about 0,3 V or less ? 5 4 2 1
YES-Go to step 4. VCC3 (BLU)

Check for poor connections or loose terminals at TP
sensor A and the ECM/PCM.
Are DTC P0122 and P0222 indicated at the same time? W ire side o f fem ale term inals
YES-Go to step 10.

Is there a b o u t 5 V?
NO-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 14.
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P
4
CD
00
5 2 1
TPSA (RED/BLK)
W ire side of fem ale term inals

(C20) and TP sensor A, then go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 25.
17. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 25. Reconnect all connectors.
terminal C12 and throttle body 6P connector terminal
26. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have tne latest
No. 5.
THROTTLE BODY 6P. CONNECTOR known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
( 6 5 4 3 2 1 Is DTC P0122 indicated?
VCC3 (BLU)
W ire side o f fem ale term in a ls TP sensor A and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
page 11 -7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was
-----: VCC3 (BLU)
xI rj
-I ..n complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
h 2 5 4 5 6 7 8 9 I
I the origi nal ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
10 11 12 TajTSTisTie 17 18 19 1 Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated* go to the
20 21 22 23 24 25
I 1 indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
CO
CM
CM
CO
o
33 34 35
CD
eft
26 27 28
1.2?
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44J
YES-Go to step 25.

19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11 -248).
11-274).

TP sensor A and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
DTC P0123: TP Sensor A Circuit High Voltage 12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data No. 6.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

6 5 4
00
CM
1
TPSA (RED/BLK)
3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there about 4.8 V or more?
YES-Go to step 4.
TPSA (RED/BLK)
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time,
00
b 2 5 6 7 8 |9 I
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1
20 21 22 23 24 25
1
Are DTC P0123 and P0223 indicated at the same time? 26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
O3
O3
03
CO
136137 40 41 42 4 3 144 j
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 5. T erm inal side o f fem ale term in a ls
YES-Go to step 25.
8. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P (C20) and TP sensor A, then go to step 20.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR 14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.

( 6 5 4
00
CM
1 )
TPSA (RED/BLK)
;v)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 18.

NO-Go to step 9.
*'33
No. 3.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
u
4 3 ID Is DTC P0123 indicated?
SG3 (GRN) I-------------------
W ire side of fem ale term inals TP sensor A and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) page 11 -7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was
SG3 (GRN)
n__________n ...., complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
1 10 11 12 13|14|T5|T6 17 18 19 1
20 21 22 23 24 25
1 G indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
26 27 28;29|30|3f|32 33 34 35
N . 37 38 39 40 141 I42 43 M
YES-Go to step 25.

19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-248).
11-274).

TP sensor A and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
DTC P0222: TP Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage 10. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
O -
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. (| 6 I 5 [ 4 I 3 I 2 I 1 I]
3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the HDS. VCC3 (BLU)
Is there about 0.3 V or less?
YES-Go to step 4.
sensor B and the ECM/PCM. W ire side o f fem ale term inals

Is there about 5 V?
Are DTC P0122 and P0222 indicated at the same time?
YES-Go to step 16.
YES-Go to step 10. . #-
NO-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 5.
9. Checkfor continuity between throttle body 6P

CM
CD
5 4 3 1 )
TPSB (RED)

(C21) and TP sensor B, then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 23.,
No. 5.
CO
CO
5 4 CM
1 ) Is DTC P0222 indicated?
VCC3 (BLU)
W i re side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls TP sensor B and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was
VCC3 (BLU)
b 2 3 4 |5 6 7 8
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
i 20 21 22 23 2 4 25
:
26 27 28 29|30|31 (32 33 34:
136 37 38 39 |40 41 42 43
YES-Go to step 23.

(C l2) and TP sensor B, then go to step 18.
11-274).

TP sensor B and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
(cont'd)
DTC P0223: TP Sensor B Circuit High Voltage 12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data No. 4.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

( 6 5 4 3 2 1
TPSB (RED)
3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s
Is there about 4.8 V or more?
YES-Go to step 4. ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)

TPSB (RED)
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at TP _ n ............................................ c l .... ...........
sensor B and the ECM/PCM. 1 3 4 9 5 6 7 8
I 10 1 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
I
Are DTC P0123 and P0223 indicated at the same time? 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
H
37 38 39 40 41 j 42 43 441
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 5. T erm i nal side o f fem ale te rm in a l s

YES-Go to step 25.
8. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P (C21) and TP sensor B, then go to step 20.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR 14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.

H
( 6 5 4
CM
1
TPSB (RED)
W ire s i de o f fem ale term inals
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 18.

NO-Go to step 9.
I
17. Check for continuity b e t w e e n E C M / P C M connector 25. Reconnect all connectors.

No. 3.
CM
5 4 3 1 ) is DTC P0223 indicated?
SG3 (GRN)
W ire side of fem ale te rm in a l s TP sensor B and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was
SG3 (GRN)
ISIO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
r complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
h 23 4 5 |~6 7 8 r the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
10 11
12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 J
20 21
22 23 24 25
i indicated DTC's troubleshooting.

CO
CM
CM
CD
CO
o
26 27
28 33 34 35
36 37 38 39 40 41 42
_0 tr
YES-Go to step 25.

(C13) and TP sensor B, then go to step 20.
20. Reconnect a ll connectors.
11-274).

TP sensor B and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
(cont'd)
DTC P1658: ETCS Control Relay ON 8. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
Malfunction
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). r... ....ja .................... *_..... .....
h 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 J
2. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the LI 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
J
HDS.
I
20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35 T
i
Is the RELAY circuit OK?

P 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 il I l
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ETCSRLY (RED)
ETCS control relay and the ECM/PCM.
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Open the fuse access panel (A), then remove the ETCS
control relay (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. Is there continuity?

(A20) and the ETCS control relay, then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 9.
5. Test the ETCS control relay (see page 22-92).

Is the ETCS control relay OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the ETCS control relay, then go to step
13.
8 3
11. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector 19. Reconnect all connectors.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C.(44P) known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
IG1 ETCS (WHT) 21. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
n n Is DTC P1658 indicated?

M 2 3 |4T5|6 7 8 I 9I YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
1.. 10 11 12 T i l l i l l l l l i 17 18 19 IJ
the ETCS control relay and the ECM/PCM. If the
1 20 21 22 23 24 25
.1 ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
M 37 38 |i9T40l4Tf 42 43 144 1 ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
Term inal side o f fem ale term inals the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other

ECM/PCM (C1) and the ETCS control relay, then go to
step 12.
NO-Go to step 18.
11-274).
the ETCS control relay and the ECM/PCM, then go to
step 1.
(cont'd)
DTC P1659: ETCS Control Relay OFF 9. Measure the voltage between ETCS control relay 4P
Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
troubleshooting information (see page 11 -3). IGP

YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Term inal s i de of fe m a l e term inals
ETCS control relay and the ECM/PCM.
YES-Go to step 10.
5. Check the No. B52 DBW (ETCS) (15 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box. NO-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to
step 24.
Is the fuse OK?
10. Measure the voltage between ETCS control relay 4P
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 19.
6. Open the fuse access panel (A), then remove the ETCS ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
control relay (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
4 X 3 + B
2
1
YES-Go to step 11.

NO-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to
7. Test the ETCS control relay (see page 22-92).
step 24.
Is the ETCS control relay OK?
YES-Go to step 8. 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
NO-Replace the ETCS control relay, then go to step
25.
14. Connect ETCS control relay 4P connector terminal 17. Connect ETCS control relay 4P connector terminal
No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. No. 3 to body ground with the jumper wire.
ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR '
ETCSRLY
HXH SEE
' 2
1 JUMPER WIRE
IG1ETCS
JUMPER WIRE

terminal C1 and body ground. terminal A20 and body ground.

IG1 ETCS (WHT)
n n r n...........................o............. ^
2 3 4 5161 7 8 9 L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1
LI 10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19
I '. 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1
23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 1
9 20 21 22 1 I
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
1
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 l44l * 137 38 j 39 j40141 42 43 441
ETCSRLY (RED)
Term ina l side o f fem ale term inals

(C1) and the ETCS control relay, then go to step 25. (A20) and the ETCS control relay, then go to step 25.
19. Open the fuse access panel (A), then remove the ETCS 23. Check for continuity between ETCS control relay 4P
control relay (B) from the under-dash fuse/relay box. connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
4 X 3 +B
2
1
21. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (44P). YES-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go
to step 25.
22. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal C1 and body ground. NO-Go to step 30.
--------------- 1G1 ETCS (WHT)
26. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ).
|r "N .
1 2 3 I4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 I 28. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
20 21 22 23 24 25 | 11-274).
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 4 4 1
Term inal side o f fem ale term inals the ETCS control relay and the ECM/PCM, then go to
step 1.
Is there continuity? indicated DTC's troubleshooting.

(C1) and the ETCS control relay. Also replace the No.
B52 DBW (ETCS) (15 A) fuse, then go to step 25.
NO-Go to step 23.
30. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P1683: Throttle Valve Default Position
31. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest Spring Performance Problem
32. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle
body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or
Is DTC P1659 indicated? while the ignition switch is in ON (II). If you do, you
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is
activated.
the ETCS control relay and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait
10 seconds.
YES-Go to step 7.
throttle body and the ECM/PCM.
8. Remove the air cleaner from the throttle body (see
page 9-3).
DTC Tr o ubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Push the throttle valve closed as shown. DTC P1684: Throttle Valve Return Spring
Performance Problem
ik CAUTION
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle
while the ignition switch is in ON (II). If you do, you
activated.

10. Release the throttle valve.
Does the throttle valve return? without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
YES-Clean the throttle body (see page 11-247), then
goto step 12. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait
10 seconds.
NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 7.
11-274). NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait throttle body and the ECM/PCM.
10 seconds.
8. Remove the air cleaner from the throttle body (see
17. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. page 9-3).
YES-lf the throttle body was cleaned, go to step 11. If

the throttle body was replaced, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
k M
9. Push the throttle valve open as shown. DTCP2101: ETCS Malfunction
CAUTION
activated.

arid any on-board snapshot, and review the general
2. Reset the ECM with the HDS.
10. Release the throttle valve.
3. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the
Does the throttle valve return? HDS.
YES-Clean the throttle body (see page 11-247), then 4. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
go to step 12.
IMO-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 5.
13. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. of these recorded freeze data parameters:
14. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page ENGINE SPEED
11-274). VEHICLE SPEED
APPSENSOR A
10 seconds. 6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is DTC P2101 indicated?
17. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. YES-Go to step 7.
Is DTC P1684 indicated? NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
YES-lf the throttle body was cleaned, go to step 11. If
throttle body and the ECM/PCM, then clean the
the throttle body was replaced, check for poor
throttle body (see page 11-247).
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
(cont'd)
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 18. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminals C3 and C4.
I @ |
E T C S M - (YEL) ETCSM 4- (YEL/RED)
11. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the I 1\ n
HDS.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
12. Visually check the throttle valve operation. [ .. 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17
18 19 1
Does the throttle valve operate smoothly? 20 21 22 23 24 25 1

26 27 28 29|30|31 (32 33 34 35
YES-Clean the throttle body (see page 11-247), then 13 6 137 38 39 40 4 1 142 43 441
go to step 22 and recheck. If DTC P2101 is indicated,
go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 13. Term inal side o f fe m a l e te rm i nals

16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (44P). YES-Go to step 27.

17. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 1 NO-Repair an open in the wires between the
and No. 2 with a jumper wire. ECM/PCM (C3, C4) and the throttle body, then go to
step 21.
THROTTLE BODY-6P CONNECTOR
1 21. Reconnect all connectors.
CM
00
( 6 5 4 1
ETCSM - ETCSM + 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

(YEL) (YEL/RED)
JUMPER WIRE 24. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-274).
W ire side o f fe m a l e term in a ls 25. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range
ENGINE SPEED
VEHICLE SPEED
APP SENSOR A
the throttle body and the ECM/PCM, then clean the
throttle body (see page 11-247), and go to step 1.
B 5 1
27. Reconnect all connectors, DTC P2118: Throttle Actuator Current

28. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest Range/Performance Problem
software {see page 11-207), or substitute a
29. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
ENGINE SPEED
VEHICLE SPEED 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
APP SENSOR A 3. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at YES-Go to step 5.
the throttle body and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
(see page 11-7), then go to step 28. If the ECM/PCM Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
was substituted, go to step 1. throttle body and the ECM/PCM.
NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace 6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the 7. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
No. 3.
THROTTLE BODY BP CONNECTOR
/^ \
6 5 4 3 2 1 )
SG3 (GRN)
W ire side of female terminals
E C M /P C M CONNECTOR C (44P)
SG3 (GRN)
ri rT
h 2 3 14 5 6 7 8 T |
10 11 12 l l l 4 | i 5 | l 6 17 18 19 c
20 21 22 23 24 25
I 1
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
| 3 6 | 37 3 8 | 39|4 0 |41 42 4 3 |4 4 L
YES-Go to step 10.

(C13) and the throttle body, then go to step 14.
(cont'd)
10. Checkfor continuity between throttle body 6P 12. At the throttle body side, measure the resistance
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. between throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2 with the throttle fully closed.
(I 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 I 2 j 1 I)
ETCSM - ETCSM + 6 5 4 3 2 1
(YEL) (YEL/RED) 3
ETCSM- ETCSM+
W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls
T erm ina l s i de o f male term inals
Is there about 1.00 or less?
YES-Repair a short in the wires between throttle body
6P connector terminals No, 2 (ETCSM line) and No. YES-Go to step 13.
1 (ETCSM + line), then go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 22.
NO-Go to step 11.
14. Reconnect ail connectors.
throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2
individually. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
11-274).
ETCSM+
(YEL/RED) 19. Turn the igni tion switch to ON (II).
20. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor.

W ire side of fem ale term inals the throttle body and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the throttle indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
body 6P connector and body ground, then go to step
14.
22. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P2122: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D)
23. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest Circuit Low Voltage
24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
26. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor. 2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
27. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is there about 0.2 V or less?
Is DTC P2118 indicated? YES-Go to step 3.

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
the throttle body and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM Check for poor connections or loose terminals at APP
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM sensor A and the ECM/PCM.
(see page 11 -7), then go to step 24. If the ECM/PCM
4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the 6. Measure the voltage between APP sensor 6P
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6.
APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
(6 5 4 3 2 1)
VCC4(BRN) SG4 (GRN)
---- 1 I---
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 17.
10. Checkfor continuity between APP sensor 6P 12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
connector terminal No. 4 and body ground. terminal A17 and body ground.
APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
APSA (YEL) ---------------
(6 | 5 [ 4 I 3 | 2 I 1) _n ....... ............ JEI_....... ...

2 3 143 [i45|l5 6 ^^ 8 L
h
APSA (YEL) I 10 11 12 17 18 19
i 20 21 22 23 24 25 E
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
J36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
r
441
T e rm i nal s i de o f fem ale term inals


(A17) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24. is there continuity?

11. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 4 to NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
body ground with a jumper wire. (A17) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24.
13. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P).
14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No. 4 and
No. 6 with a jumper wire.
(6 5 4 3 2 1)
APSA (YEL)
JUMPER WIRE
3
VCC4 (BRN) APSA (YEL)
W ire side o f fem ale te rm i nals
JUMPER WIRE

16. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 29.

NO-Go to step 22.
18. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
19. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 23. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page
11-251).
20. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 6 to
body ground with a jumper wire. 24. Reconnect all connectors.
( 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 I 2 I 1) 11-274).
VCC4 (BRN) 28. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
JUMPER WIRE

APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
terminal A25 and body ground. 30. Reconnect all connectors.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
ru r1 32. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

h 2 3 |4 I5 6 I7 8 9 1. VCC4
LI Is DTC P2122 indicated?
10 11 12 13jl4|15 16 17 18 19 (BRN)
20 21 22 23 24 25 YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
26 27 28 29130] 31 [32 33 34 35 APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
H IE 38 39 40 41 42 43 441 updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see
Term inal side o f fem ale term inals NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11 -209). If any other
YES-Go to step 29.

(A25) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24.
DTC P2123: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) 10. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 5 to
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ). (6 5 4 3 2 1)
2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the HDS. SG4 (GRN)
Is there about 4.9 V or more? JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 3.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at APP W ire side o f fem ale te rm i nals
4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector. 11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
6. Measure the voltage between APP sensor 6P ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
f n n
h 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Li 10 11 12 13J14j15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
B
5 4 3 2
o
CO
CM
05
00
CO
CM
(6 1) 26 27 28 33 34 35
{36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
O
m
VCC4 (BRN) (GRN)
SG4 (GRN)
rtf'
W ire side o f fem ale term inals Term inal side of fem ale term inals
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 19.
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 7. (A35) and APP sensor A, then go to step 14.
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P2127: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E)
13. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page Circuit Low Voltage
11-251).
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
11-274). Is there about 0.2 V or less?
Is DTC P2123 indicated? NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at APP
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at sensor B and the ECM/PCM.
APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the 4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.
6. Measure the voltage between APP sensor 6P
20. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
(6 5 4 3 2 0
VCC5 (LT CiRN) SG5 (LT BLU)
APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was l-----
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace W ire side o f fem ale term inals
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 17.
DTC Troublesho oting (cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P 12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
APSB (PUR)
0 5 4 3 2 1)
h 2 3 4 5 6 7 3
APSB (PUR) [I 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 '
20 21 22 23 24^

26 27 28 29|30|3i|32 33 34:
136 137 38 39 40 41 42 43
ij
W ire side o f fem ale term inals Term inal side o f fem ale term inals
(A18) and APP sensor B, then go to step 24. Is there continuity?

11. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 1 to NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
body ground with a jumper wire. (A18) and APP sensor B, then go to step 24.
14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No. 1 and
(6 I 5 | 4 l 3 l 2 | 1)
APSB (PUR)
JUMPER WIRE
(6 ( 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 I 1)
VCC5 (LT GRN) APSB (PUR)
JUMPER WIRE

16. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 29.

NO-Go to step 22.
19. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 23. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page
11-251).
20. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 3 to
body ground with a jumper wire. 24. Reconnect all connectors.
5 4 3 2 i) 11-274).
VCC5 {LT GRN)

JUMPER WIRE Is DTC P2127 indicated?

APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
terminal A24 and body ground. 30. Reconnect all connectors.
h 2 3 I 4 5 6 17 8
LI 10 11 12 13|14|l5|l6 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
1 I YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 3 4- 35 APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
136]37 38 39140 41142 i 3 44 updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see
VCC5 {LT GRN)
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11 -209). If any other
Term inal side o f fem ale term inals Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
YES-Go to step 30.

(A24) and APP sensor B, then go to step 24.
DTC P2128: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E) 10. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 2 to
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
(6 5 4 3 2 1]
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the HDS. SG5 (LT BLU)
Is there about 4.0 Vor more? JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 3.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at APP
sensor B and the ECM/PCM.H W ire side o f fem ale term inals

4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector. 11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
6. Measure the voltage between APP sensor 6P ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

1 = 1
r_______ ,n______..................n ........ ^
h 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LI 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
9L
1
20 21 22
B
23 24 25

5 4 3 2 1)
CM
O5
CO
o
26 27 28
CO
CO
CM
[6 33 34 35
VCC5 (LT Cm n ) SG5 (LT BLU) (36 37 38 39 40 41 42 i 3 4 4 1
SG5 (LT BLU)

\-------
U
W ire side o f fem ale te rm i na l s Term inal side o f fem ale term inals
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 19.
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 7. (A34) and APP sensor B, then go to step 14.
8 . Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(O). DTC P2135: TP Sensor A/B Incorrect Voltage
13. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page Correlation
11-251).
ik CAUTION
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or
16. Reset the ECM/PCM w ith the HDS.
17. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page activated.
11-274).
18. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
Is DTC P2128 Indicated?
APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 3. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the HDS.
software (see page 11 -207), or substitute a YES-Go to step 5.
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
21. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
throttle body and the ECM/PCM.
APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was 6. Remove the air cleaner from the throttle body (see
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 9-3).
page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace 9. Visually check the throttle valve operation.
Does the valve temporarily move to its fully closed
position?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR G (44P)
TPSB (RED)
3 4 5 6 7 21. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
00
m
bb
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 IJ 11-274).
20 21 22 23 24 25
1 22. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
TPSA 26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
(RED/BLK)
:
36 37 41 42 43 441
CO
CO
CO
G)
lo

p

the ECM/PCM and the throttle body, then go to step 1.
T erm inal side o f fe m a l e term inals NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 23. known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. 25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
15. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector Is DTC P2135 indicated?
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) the ECM/PCM and the throttle body. If the ECM/PCM
TPSB (RED) substituted, go to step 1.
n n NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
b 3 4 5 6 7 8 (9 J complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 J the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
20 21 22 23 24 25 Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
1
TPSA 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35 indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
(RED/BLK) 136 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 441
connector terminals C20 (TPSA line) and C21 (TPSB
line), then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 16.
DTC P2138: APP Sensor A/B (TP Sensor D/E) 9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminals A17 and A18.
Incorrect Voltage Correlation
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record al l freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
APSA (YEL)
2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
3. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor. I 1I2 / I 4 |5|6 h 8I9I
1 10
/ 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 4

4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 20 21 / 23 24 25 APSB (PUR)
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
Is D T C P2138 indicated? 136137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 L /l4 2 4 3 14 4 1
YES-Go to step 5.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the T erm inal side o f fem ale term in a ls
APP sensor and the ECM/PCM.
5. Check APP SENSOR A and APP SENSOR B in the
Are they the same voltage?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 12. 10. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.
8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
APSA (YEL)
1 1 1 2 / | 4 .1..5.i r n J 8 I 9 L
1 10
/ 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 4$

20 21 / 23 24 25 APSB (PUR)
26 27 28 29|30|31 (32 33 34 35
13 6 137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |X l4 2 4 3 1441
YES-Repair a short in the wires between ECM/PCM

connector terminals A17 (APSA line) and A18 (APSB
line), then go to step 14.
(cont'd)
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P2176: Throttle Actuator Control System
13. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page Idle Position Not Learned
11-251).
ikCAUTIO
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or
17. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page activated.
11-274).
NOTE:
18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). any on-board snapshot, and review the general
20. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor. If DTC P2135 is stored at the same time as DTC P2176,
21. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. troubleshoot DTC P2135 first, then recheck for DTC
P2176.
the ECM/PCM and APP sensor A/B, then go to step 1. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
indicated DTC's troubleshooting.!! 10seconds.
22. Reconnect all connectors. 5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
23. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest Is DTC P2176 indicated?
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). YES-Go to step 6.
24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). throttle body and the ECM/PCM, then clean the
26. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor. throttle body (see page 11-247).
27. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is DTC P2138 indicated? 7. Remove the air cleaner from the throttle body (see
page 9-3).
the ECM/PCM and APP sensor A/B. If the ECM/PCM 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM 9. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
was substituted, go to step 1. 10. Visually check the throttle valve operation while doing
the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the
NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is HDS.
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Does the throttle valve move to its fully closed position?
YES-Go to step 11.
k 5 I
11. Check for sludge or carbon on the throttle valve. 17. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector
Is there sludge or carbon on the throttle valve?
YES-Clean the throttle body (see page 11-247), then
goto step 21.
NO-Go to step 18.
E T C S M - (YEL) ETCSM + (YEL/RED)
r
oo
1 |2 3 |4 | 5 |6 | 7
CD
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
15. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (44P). 37
16. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 1
Term inal side o f fem ale term inal
( 6 5 4 3 2 1 )
ETCSM - ETCSM+ YES-Go to step 27.
(YEL) (YEL/RED)
NO-Repair an open in the wires between the
ECM/PCM (C3, C4) and the throttle body, then go to
step 20.
JUMPER WIRE
W ire side o f fem ale term in a ls 19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-248).
11-274).
10 seconds.

the throttle body and the ECM/PCM, then clean the
throttle body (see page 11-247), and go to step 1.
(cont'd)
DTC Troublesh o oting (cont'd) Throttle Body Test
27. Reconnect all connectors. NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been
reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A)
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
10 seconds.
the throttle body and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the A'

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the
ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-383).
5. Check the REL TP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. The reading should be below 2.46 deg. If it is
not, clean the throttle body (see page 11-247).
Throttle Body Cleaning
ikCAUTIO 6. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A)
body when you turn the Ignition switch to ON (II) or
will serioOsly injure your fingers if the throttle valve is
activated.
1. Make sure the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).

2. Checkfor damage to the air cleaner. If the air cleaner
is damaged, replace it (see page 9-3).
3. Remove the throttle body (see page 11 -248).
4. Clean off the carbon from the throttle valve and inside
the throttle body with a paper towel soaked in throttle
plate cleaner.
NOTE;
Always remove the throttle body to clean it.
Be careful not to pinch your fingers.
To avoid removing the molybdenum coating, do
not clean the bearing area of the throttle shaft (A).
Do not spray throttle plate cleaner directly on the
throttle body. 8. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
Use Honda genuine throttle plate cleaner. 9. Select the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
10. Select TP POSITION CHECK, then clear the throttle
position (TP) learned value.
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 2 seconds
without pressing the accelerator pedal.
11-274).

Throttle Body Removal/Installation
- ' m n ii n ni% ^C A U TIO N

Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or while th e ,
ignition switch is in ON (II). If you do, you will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is activated.
NOTE: If you are replacing or cleaning the throttle body, start at step 1. If you are removing the throttle body temporarily,
begin at step 4.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC while the engine is stopped.
2. Select the INSPECTION MENU on the HDS.
3. Do the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST.
6. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector (A).
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf m,
12 N*m 16Bbf^
(1.2 k g fm , 9 Ib fft)
TOP O TOP
SIDE r^T O P V SIDE <* " 120- . ISTE
RESIDE
LXo t
M ""AIR CLEANER AIR CLEANER AIR CLEANER
SIDE FRONTSIDE SIDE SIDE_________
7. Disconnect the throttle body connector (B), then 13. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A)
disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve hose (C). located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
8. Disconnect and plug the water bypass hoses (D, E).
9. Disconnect the purge hoses (F, G).
10. Remove the throttle body (H).
11. Remove the purge pipe (I).
new gasket (J), then refill the radiator with engine
NOTE;
If you replace or clean the throttle body, go to step
13.
If you did not replace or clean the throttle body, this
procedure is complete.
Be careful not to drop or damage the plates (K).
A
Align the marks (L) on the hoses and the throttle
body, then insert the hoses. Make sure the clamp
(M) is positioned as shown.
Align the mark (N) on the hoses as shown, then
insert the hoses. Make sure the clamps (O) are 15. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
positioned as shown. 16. Select the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
17. Select the TP POSITION CHECK, then clear the throttle
position (TP) learned value.
19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 2 seconds
without pressing the accelerator pedal.
11-274).
Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly
THROTTLE BODY
PURGE VALVE GUARD

.< r *
APP Sensor Signal Inspection Accelerator Pedal Module

NOTE: 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page
This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully 20-85).
closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor 2. Disconnect the APP sensor connector (A).
stores DTCs which are covered in other
troubleshooting procedures.
Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS
before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are stored,
troubleshoot them first, then do this procedure.
Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its
operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the
pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator
pedal module (see page 11-251).
3. Remove the accelerator pedal module (B).

NOTE:
The APP sensor is not available separately. Do not
disassemble the accelerator pedal module.
If the accelerator pedal module is dropped, replace
it.

4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then
check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.
If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal module
(see page 11 -251), then go to step 5.
5. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then
check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.
If it is not 0 %, update the ECM/PCM if it does not
have the latest software (see page 11 -207), or
then go to step 1.
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL VALVE

Rem oval/Installation, page 11 -260
ROCKER ARM OIL

PRESSURE SWITCH
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)/

POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
General Troubleshooting Inform ation, page 11-3
S ubstituting, page 11-7
Update, page 11-207
k 5 0
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P2646: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch 10. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (A), and
attach the special tools as shown, then attach the
Circuit Low Voltage
rocker arm oil pressure switch to the oil pressure
Special Tools Required gauge adapter (B).
AT Pressure Test Hose 07AAJ-PY4A100
07406-0070301
A/T Pressure Adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
Pressure Gauge Adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
Oil Pressure Hose 07ZAJ-S5A0200
A/T Low Pressure Gauge w/Panel 07406-0070301

1. Check the engine oil level.
Is the level OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then go
to step 20.
4. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the
HDS. 11. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
Is the result OK?
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the 13. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the
rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker arm oil HDS.
control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM. 14. Check the oil pressure.
NO-Go to step 5. Is the oil pressure at least 392 kPa (4.0 kgf/cm2, 56.9
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). psi)?
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P YES-Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch (see
connector. page 11-261), then go to step 19.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NO-Check the engine oil pressure (see page 8-9). If
the pressure is OK, inspect the VTEC system. If it is
8. Check the VTEC PRES SW in the DATA LIST with the OK, replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
HDS. 11 -260), then go to step 19.
Is SWITCH ON indicated? 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES-Go to step 15. 16. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 9. 17. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (44P).
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
HDS.
1 I2 3 4 5 6 7 8 28. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.

10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19 IJ
20 21 22 23 24 25

26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35 YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
136 37 38 39 40 41 4 ? 43 4 4 1 the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker arm oil
control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
VTPSW (BLU/BLK) was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
T erm i nal side o f fem ale term inals complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
Is there continuity? Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
(C33) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch, then go
to step 19.
NO-Go to step 25.
11-274).
HDS.

the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker arm oil
control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM, then go step 1.
DTC P2647: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch 8. Connect rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P connector
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
1. Check the engine oil level.
Is the level OK?
YES-Go to step 2,
NO-Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then go
to step 19.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). W ire side of female terminals
HDS.
10. Check the rocker arm oil pressure switch in the DATA
NOTE: If a DTC was stored during the VTEC TEST,
LISTwiththeHDS.
check the DTCs MENU. If DTC P2647 is indicated, go
to step 6. If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are Does the HDS indicate ON?
indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
YES-Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch (see
Is the result OK? page 11 -261), then go to step 17.
YES-lntermittentfailure, the system is OK at this time. NO-Go to step 11.
rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker arm oil 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM. 12. Remove the jumper wire from the rocker arm oil
NO-Go to step 5. pressure switch 2P connector.
5. Check the result of step 4. 13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
VTEC Switch Failure 14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (49P).
VTEC Switch Open
VTEC Switch SIG Line Open
VTEC Switch GND Line Open
Is the test result any of those above?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the rocker arm oil pressure switch. If it is OK, replace
the rocker arm oil control valve (see page 11-260),
then, go to step 17.
7. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
(cont'd)
terminal C33 and rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
VTPSW (BLU/BLK)
11-274).
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at

control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
11 2 3 4 5 n r 8 9 I NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

1.. 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 I Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
1 20 21 22
23 24 25
1
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
[36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 4 4 1
VTPSW (BLU/BLK)
Term inal side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
YES-Go to step 16. 26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
(C33) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch, then go
to step 18. YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
16. Check for continuity between the rocker arm oil
control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
pressure switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
ground. (see page 11-7), then go to step 25. If the ECM/PCM
ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
. x GND
I \ (BRN/YEL) Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
YES-Go to step 23.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the rocker
arm oil pressure switch and G101; CVT (see page
22-26), M/T (see page 22-22), then go to step 18.
DTC P2648: Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid 9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). VTS (GRN/YEL)
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). T
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. h h 3 4 j 7 8 I
[ i 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1
3. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the 22
20 21 23 24 25
1
HDS. 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
136 37 38[39 40141 42 43 44|
Is the result OK?
YES-lntermittent failure;the system is OK at this time.

Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the -= Term inal side o f fe m a l e term inals
rocker arm oil control solenoid and the ECM/PCM.
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P
connector. YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM
(C14) and the rocker arm oil control solenoid, then go
6. At the solenoid side, measure the resistance between
to step 11.
rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2. NO-Go to step 18.
10. Replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR 11-260).
11-274).
HDS.
T erm inal side o f m ale term inals
Is there 143 0 0 at room temperature (65 70F, 18
21 C)?
the rocker arm oil control solenoid and the ECM/PCM,
YES-Go to step 7. then goto step 1,
(cont'd)
17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2648 in the DTCs DTC P2649: Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid
MENU with the HDS.
recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 15. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). Is DTC P2649 indicated?
20. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the YES-Go to step 5.
HDS.
21. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
rocker arm oil control solenoid and the ECM/PCM.
the rocker arm oil control solenoid and the ECM/PCM. 6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P
If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a connector.
step 20. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. 7. At the solenoid side, measure the resistance between
rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P connector
NO-Go to step 22. terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
MENU with the HDS. ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR

complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace (2 1)
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other VTS GND
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ____ i
connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
control solenoid and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM Term inal side o f male te rm in a l s
was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
Is there 143 0 0 at room temperature (65 70F, 18
21C)?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 12.
g 3
8. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil control 11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
solenoid 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body terminal C14 and rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P
ground, connector terminal No. 2.
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID A 2P CONNECTOR
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR
GOT)
VTS .(GRN/YEL)
d B
GND (BLK) f
o
VTS (GRN/YEL)
-... . ...13.. n
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
10 11 12 13J14p5|l6 17 18 19 1
1 20 21 22 23 24 25 I
.
Is there continuity? 26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
136 37 38 39 j40 41 42 43 J441
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the rocker Terminal side of female terminals
arm oil control solenoid and G101; CVT (see page
22-26), M/T (see page 22-22), then go to step 13. Is there continuity?
9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. YES-Go to step 19.
10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (44P). NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
(C14) and the rocker arm oil control solenoid, then go
to step 13.
12. Replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
11-260).
11-274).
the rocker arm oil control solenoid and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2649 in the DTCs 1. Remove the harness holder (A).
MENU with the HDS.
recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
idling until a result comes on.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 2. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid
the rocker arm oil control solenoid and the ECM/PCM. connector (A) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch
connector (B).
If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
NO-Go to step 23.
MENU with the HDS.

connections or loose terminals at rocker arm oil
control solenoid and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
3. Remove the rocker arm oil control valve assembly (C)

and the rocker arm oil control valve filter (D).
new rocker arm oil control valve filter.
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Removal/Installatio n
1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch

connector (A).
2. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (B).

new O-ring (C).
AUXILIARY
A /C COMPRESSOR Genera l T roubleshooting

Information, page 11-3
Substituting, page 11 -7
Update, page 11-207
Rep l acement, page 11-209
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION
SWITCH
Signal C ircuit
T roubleshooting, page 11-272
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0506: Idle Control System RPM Lower 8. Replace the throttle body (see page 11 -248).
Than Expected 9. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 10. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 11-274).
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
12. Check under these DATA LIST parameters with the
HDS:
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. ECT SENSOR 1 above 156 F (70 C)
. IAT SENSOR-(2) above 32 F(0C)
4. Check under these DATA LIST parameters with the VEHICLE SPEED is 0 mph (0 km/h)
HDS:
ST FUEL TRIM between 0.69-1.47
ECT SENSOR 1 above 156 F (70 C)
. FSS is CLOSED
IAT SENSOR (2) above 32 F (0 C) . .
VEHICLE SPEED is 0 mph (0 km/h) 13. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs or DTCs with
ST FUEL TRIM between 0.69-1.47 the HDS.
FSS is CLOSED Is DTC P0506 indicated?
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the DTCs YES-Check the A/C system and/or the power steering
MENU with the HDS. system, then go to step 1.
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? NO-Go to step 14.
YES-Go to step 6. 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
go to step 4 and recheck. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
6. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3). go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
7. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle bore. NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check the A/C
system and/or the power steering system, then go to
Is there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle bore?
step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep idling
YES-lf there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle body until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF
(see page 11-247). Also check for damage to the air CONDITION, go to step 11.
cleaner element (see page 9-3), then go to step 9. If
there is damage in the throttle bore, go to step 8.
16. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle bore.
NO-Check the A/C system and the power steering
system, then go to step 17. Is there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle bore?
YES-lf there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle body

(see page 11 -247). Also check for damage to the air
cleaner element (see page 9-3), then go to step 9. If
there is damage in the throttle bore, go to step 8.
.< 5 " <
17. Recheck with different load conditions (turn on the DTC P0507: Idle Control System RPM Higher
headlights, the blower motor, the rear window
Than Expected
defogger, the A/C, and/or the power steering system,
change the gear position, etc.). NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
MENU with the HDS.
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check the A/C
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for at least 20
system and/or the power steering system, then go to
seconds.
step 1 and recheck. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING,
keep idling until a result comes on. If the HDS 4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0507 in the DTCs
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 11. MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
the system is OK at this time. If the HDS indicates
EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes on. If the
HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, recheck with
different load conditions (electrical, A/C, gear
position, etc.), then go to step 3.
5. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts:
PCV valve
PCV hose
EVAP canister purge valve
Throttle body
Intake manifold
Brake booster hose
Brake booster
Are there any leaks?
YES-Repair or replace the leaking part(s), then go to

step 6.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC P0532: A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit Low
7. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. Voltage
8. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
11-274). and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the 1. Start the engine, and let it idle.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for at least 20
2. Turn the blower switch on.
seconds.
3. Turn the A/C switch on.
4. Check the A/C PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA LIST
with the HDS.
the throttle body and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 11.
MENU with the HDS.
A/C pressure sensor and the ECM/PCM.
6. Disconnect the A/C pressure sensor 3P connector.
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor 8. Check the A/C PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA LIST
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body with the HDS.
and the ECM/PCM, then goto step 1. If the HDS
indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result Is there about 0.3 V or less?
comes on. If the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, YES-Go to step 10.
recheck with different load conditions (turn on the
headlights, the blower motor, or the A/C; change the NO-Go to step 9.
gear position, etc.), then go to step 9.
9. Measure the voltage between A/C pressure sensor 3P
A /C PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
( 3 I 2 | 1)
VCC6 (YEL) SG6 (PNK)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 18.

NO-Go to step 14.
J ? '
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 17. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A19 and A/C pressure sensor 3P connector
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. terminal No. 3.
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
13. Check for continuity between A/C pressure sensor 3P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. 1
VCC6 (YEL)

E C M / P C M CONNECTOR A (44P)
3 2 1 VCC6 (Y E L )-------
ACPD (BLU)
n n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 *L
I 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
m
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
136 37 38 39 40 41 142 43 441
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM Is there continuity?
(A16) and the A/C pressure sensor, then go to step 20.
YES-Go to step 28.
NO-Go to step 28.
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). (A19) and the A/C pressure sensor, then go to step 20.
16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). 19. Replace the A/C pressure sensor (see page 21-98).
11-274).

the A/C pressure sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to
step 3.
(cont'd)
28. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0533: A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit High
29. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest Voltage
30. Start the engine, and let it idle. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
31. Turn the blower switch on. 1. Start the engine, and let it idle.
32. Turn the A/C switch on. 2. Turn the blower switch on.
33. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 3. Turn the A/C switch on.
Is DTC P0532 indicated? 4. Check the A/C PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA LIST
with the HDS.
the A/C pressure sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the Is there about 4.75 V or more ?
YES-Go to step 5.
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 3. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
A/C pressure sensor and the ECM/PCM.
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 6. Disconnect the A/C pressure sensor 3P connector.
7. Connect A/C pressure sensor 3P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
(3 2 1)
ACPD (BLU) SG6 (PNK)
JUMPER WIRE

9. Check the A/C PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA LIST
with the HDS.
Is there about 4.75 V or more ?
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Go to step 22.
11. Remove the jumper wire from the A/C pressure
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 17. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
13. Measure the voltage between A/C pressure sensor 3P
terminal No. 2.
connector term i nals No. 1 and No. 3.
A /C PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR __ v

d
ACPD (BLU)

ACPD(BLU)
I
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
W ire side o f fem ale term in a ls I 10 11 12 13|14|15|1 i 17 18 19

20 21 22 23 24 25
I I
26 27 28 29|30|31132133 34 35
Is there about 5 V? 4 3 14 4 1
S36 37 38 3 9 ]4a 41142
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 18.
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is there continuity?
15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. YES-Go to step 32.
16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
terminal No. 1.
A /C PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11 -7).
SG6 (PNK)
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR'A (44P) Is DTC P0533 indicated?

SG6 (PNK) YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the A/C pressure sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the
r ri ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
h 2 3 | 4 5 6 7 8 | 9
I. ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 34. If the
l 10 11 12 17 18 19
I ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
20 21 22 23 24 25
I
2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 |3 0 |3 1 132 3 3 3 4 3 5 NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
|36 3 7 3 8 3 9 4 0 41 4 2 4 3 14 4 j complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
Terminal side of female terminals Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
YES-Go to step 32.

23. Replace the A/C pressure sensor (see page 21-98).
11-274).

the A/C pressure sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to
step 1.
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 13. Momentarily connect ECM/PCM connector terminal
A14 to body ground with a jumper wire several times.
JUMPER W I RE
4. Check the A/C CLUTCH in the DATA LIST with the -------------------------- ACC (GRY)
HDS.
E 3 r
Does it indicate ON? 2 3 4 5 J 6 | 7 *7] sf|_
h
LI 10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19
YES-Go to step 5.
20 2122 23 24 25 I
1 I
NO-Do the A/C system test (see page 21-86).B 26 2728 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
5. Check the A/C system. I 36 37 38|39 |40 4 1 142 43 441
Does the A/C system operate?
YES-The A/C signal circuit is OK.B T erm inal side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is there a clicking noise from the A/C compressor clutch?
8. Activate the A/C CLUTCH in the INSPECTION MENU YES-Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
with the HDS. latest software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
Is there a clicking noise from the A/C compressor clutch? known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck.
YES-Do the A/C system test (see page 21-86).H good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see
NO-Go to step 9. page 11-209).B
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the A/C compressor clutch relay and the ECM/PCM. If
10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. the connections and the terminals are OK, check the
A/C compressor clutch relay (see page 22-92). If
needed, repair an open in the wire between the
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ECM/PCM (A14) and the A/C compressor clutch relay,
or in other A/C parts.
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Connect brake pedal position switch 4P connector
terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire.
2. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does it indicate OFF? BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lnspect the brake pedal position switch (see page BKSW (WHT)
2 1
3. Press the brake pedal, and check the BRAKE SWITCH

in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
4
X......
/ 3
/
JUMPER
WIRE
Does it change to ON?

YES-The brake pedal position switch signal circuit
(BKSW line) is OK.B W ire side o f fem ale term inals
NO-Go to step 4.
6. Disconnect the brake peda! position switch 4P ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
connector.
8. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 L
terminal A40 and body ground. LI 10 11 12 13|l 4(15(16 17 18 19
a 20 21 22 X T 23 24 25 I

26 27 28 29(30(31 (32 33 34 35
I 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 j
BKSW (WHT)
f n n "i
I 1 | 2 3 I 4 5 6 7 8 I 9 iC
LI 10 11 12 13|i4|15|l6 17 18 19
m 20 21 22 ^ > < r 23 24 25 m
m
26 27 28 29(30(31 (32 33 34 35 Term inal side o f fem ale term inals
(36 37 38 3 9 140 41 42 43
. .I
BKSW (WHT)
YES-Repair an open or short in the wire between the
brake pedal position switch and the No. B24
STOP/HORN (10 A) fuse. Also, inspect the brake pedal
position switch (see page 19-6).H
T e rm i nal s i de o f fem ale te rm in a l s
(A40) and the brake pedal position switch.

(A40) and the brake pedal position switch. Also,
replace the No. B24 STOP/HORN (10 A) fuse.B
Idle Speed Inspection
NOTE: 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the

Before checking the idle speed, check these items: ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit
-T h e malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been troubleshooting (see page 11-383).
reported on, and there are no DTCs. 4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
- Ignition timing without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
- Spark plugs radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
-A ir cleaner 5. Check the idle speed under no load conditions:
- PCV system headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, audio system,
Apply the parking brake, and make sure the headlights and A/C off.
are off.
Idle speed should be:
1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister CVT 750 50 rpm (in P or N)
purge valve connector (see step 1 on page 11-362). M/T 750 50 rpm
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) NOTE: Check the state-of-charge (SOC) in the IMA
located under the driver's side of the dashboard. system DATA LIST with the HDS. If the IMA battery
charge level is less than 40%, start the engine, and
hold it between 3,5004,000 rpm without load (CVT
in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the SOC indicator
displays at least half of its segments.
6. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with high electric load
(A/C switch on, temperature set to max cool, blower
I fan on high, and headlights on high beam).
Idle speed should be:
i CVT 750 50 rpm (in P or N)
M/T 750 50 rpm
NOTE:
Check the state-of-charge (SOC) in the IMA system
DATA LIST with the HDS. If the IMA battery charge
level is less than 40%, start the engine, and hold it
between 3,5004,000 rpm without load (CVT in P
or N, M/T in neutral) until the SOC indicator displays
at least half of its segments.
If the idle speed is not within specification, do the
ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-274). If
the idle speed is still not within specification, go to
the Symptom Troubleshooting Index (see page
11-16).
7. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector.
ECM/PCM Idle Learn Procedure
The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM

can learn the engine idle characteristics.
Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of
these actions:
Replace the ECM/PCM.
Reset the ECM/PCM.
Update the ECM/PCM.
Replace or clean the throttle body.
Disassemble the engine or the transmission.
NOTE: Clearing DTCs with the HDS does not require you
to do the idle learn procedure.
Procedure
1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, navigation, lights,
etc.) are off.
radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant
temperature reaches 194 F (90 C).
5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the
throttle fully closed.
NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its
running time in the 5 minutes.
FUEL TANK UNIT

FUEL PUMP
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
Test, page 11-309
Replacement, page 11 -305
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
FUEL FILTER
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2

POWERTRAIN
CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
Inform ation, page 11-3
Substituting, page 11-7
Update, page 11-207
11-277
DTC T r o ubleshooting
DTC P0461: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge DTC P0462: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
Sending Unit) Range/Performance Problem Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Because it requires 124 miles (200 km) of driving
without refueling to complete this diagnosis, DTC 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
P0461 cannot be duplicated during this 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
troubleshooting.
1. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11 -309).
YES-Go to step 4.
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
the fue l gauge sending unit and the gauge control gauge control module and the fuel gauge sending
module.H unit.IH
NO-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5. Remove the access panel from the floor (see page
2 . T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h to O N (II). 11-301).
3. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
11-274).
8. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
the fue l gauge sending unit and the gauge control YES-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page
module, then go to step 1. 11 -305), then go to step 22.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other NO-Go to step 10.
10. Measure the voltage between fuel tank unit 4P 17. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR 19. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
20. Set the float (A) to the E position.
FUEL UNIT
(BRN)
W ire side of fem ale term in a ls
YES-Go to step 15.

NO-Go to step 11.
21. Check the fuel gauge.
Does the gauge move to the empty position?
12. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-354).
YES-Go to step 29.
13. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P connector.
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page
14. Check for continuity between fueI tank unit 4P 22-354), then go to step 22.
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR 23. Reinstall all removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
FUEL UNIT 24. Reconnect all connectors.
(BRN)
I r?
11 25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
L V 26. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
11-274),

the gauge control module and the fuel gauge sending
unit, then go to step 1.
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the gauge
control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go to step 24.
16. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-301).
(cont'd)
29. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P0463: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
30. Reinstall all removed parts in the reverse order of Sending Unit) Circuit High Voltage
removal.
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
YES-Go to step 4.
unit. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. gauge control module and the fuel gauge sending
unit.H
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the 5. Remove the access panel from the floor (see page
indicated DTC's troubleshooting.B 11-301).
6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
8. Measure the voltage between fuel tank unit 4P

______ FUEL UNIT
(BRN)
f 2 11
I4 V
FUEL GND
(BLK)
YES-Go to step 16.

NO-Go to step 9.
10. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No. 4 to 14. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No. 2 to
body ground with a jumper wire. body ground with a jumper wire.
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
FUEL UNIT
2
11
f? 11
u V
FUEL GND JUMPER
V
(BLK) WIRE
JUMPER WIRE
W ire side o f fem ale term inals W ire side o f fem ale term inals
11. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-354). 15. Checkfor continuity between gauge control module
13. Checkfor continuity between gauge control module
32P connector terminal No. 21 and body ground. GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR

16fl5|l4fl3|l2|l1 10j 9 I 8 I 7 6 | 5 | 4J3 | 2 | 1|
|32|3l|30|29|28|27|26|25j24l23|22|2l|20|l9|l8|l7
FUEL UNIT
(BRN)
16J15I14|13]12|11 10| 9| 8 | 7 6 I 5 I 4j 3| 2T1I
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
FUEL GND I
(BLK) J l

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the gauge
YES-Go to step 14. control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the gauge sending unit, then go to step 26.
control module (GND line) and the fuel gauge sending 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
17. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-301).
18. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-309).
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?
YES-Go to step 19.

NO-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page
19. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
(cont'd)
20. Reconnect the gauge control module 32P connector. 33. Reinstall all removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
23. Set the float (A) to the F position. software (see page 11-207), or substitute a

unit. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
24. Check the fue l gauge.
Does the gauge move to the full position?
YES-Go to step 32.

26. Reinstall all removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
11-274).

Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting
If you suspect a problem with the fuel pump, check that 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the fuel pump actually runs; when it is on, you will hear
some noise if you listen to the fuel fill port with the fuel 9. Measure the voltage between under-dash fuse/relay
fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for box connector B (36P) terminal No. 22 and body
ground.
2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II). If
the fuel pump does not make noise, check as follows:
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR B (36P)
1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (A) from auxiliary
under-hood relay box A. IGP (YEL)
YES-Repair an open in the wire between PGM-FI

main relay 2 and the under-dash fuse/relay box U
2 2-83 ).
10. Measure the voltage between auxiliary under-hood
4. Measure the voltage between auxiliary under-hood relay box A 17P connector terminal No. 1 (PGM-FI
relay box A 17P connector terminal No. 9 (PGM-FI main relay 2) and body ground.
AUXIL IARY UNDER-HOOD
AUXIL IARY UNDER-HOOD RELAY BOX A 17P CONNECTOR
RELAY BOX A 17P CONNECTOR
IG1 (BRN)

YES-Go to step 12
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Remove the fuse lid panel (see page 20-85).
7. Remove the cover from under-dash fuse/relay box
connector B (36P).
(cont'd)
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Measure the voltage between under-dash fuse/relay 16. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
box connector B (36P) terminal No. 19 and body terminal A15 and body ground.
ground.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/BELAY BOX CONNECTOR 6 (36P)
IMOFPR (GRN)
101 (BRN)
I M 2 J | 4 j 5 | 6 | 7 8 J 9 |.
1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
1
20 21 22 23 24 25
I
26 27 28 29|30f31132 33 34 35
136137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |42 43144]
YES-Go to step 17.
YES-Repair an open in the wire between PGM-FI
main relay 2 and the under-dash fuse/relay box . NO-Repair an open in the wire between PGM-FI main
relay 2 and the ECM/PCM (A15J.B
NO-
17. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2.
. Check the No. B20 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse i n the
18. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal A6 to body
under dash fuse/relay box.B
ground with a jumper wire.
If the fuse is OK, replace the under-dash fuse/relay
box; USA models (see page 22-82), Canada models
(see page 2 2-83 ). ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

MRLY (PUR)
13. Connect auxiliary under-hood relay box A 17P
connector terminal No. 10 to body ground with a 3.F4 I 5 1 6 j 7 B h l JUMPER
jumper wire. 1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 WIRE
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
1 a
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD 26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
RELAY BOX A 17P CONNECTOR | 36137 38^3914014^142 431441

IPOFPR
(GRN) 5 6
7 8
JUMPER V _
d r WIRE

20. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector 25. Remove the rear tray (see step 1 on page 20-62).
26. Remove the access panel from the floor (see step 3 on
page 11-301).
1MOFPR (GRN) 28. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the
voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal
No. 1 and body ground within 2 seconds.
f1
CO
o>
3 (T l 5 I 6 I 7
10 11 12 13[14|15|16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35 FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
1
13 6 37 3 8 13 9 14 0 14 1 142 431441

% FUEL PUMP (ORN)
YES-Go to step 21.

NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 .6
22. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). Is there battery voltage?
23. Remove the cover from the bottom of auxiliary YES-Go to step 29.
under-hood relay box A. Turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), and measure the voltage between auxiliary NO-Go to step 31.
under-hood relay box A 17P connector terminal No.
10 (PGM-FI main relay 2) and body ground within 2
seconds. 30. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 4P
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground .
A U X I LIARY UNDER-HOOD
RELAY BOX A.17P CONNECTOR
3 IMOFPR
(GRN)
2
1] GND (BLK)
I4

latest software (see page 11-207), or substitute a YES-Replace the fuel pump (see page 11-305).B
If the symptom/indication goes away with a NO-Repair an open in the wire between the fuel tank
known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original unit and G602 (see page 2 2-48 ).
ECM/PCM (see page 11 -209).B 31. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO-Go to step 24.
(cont'd)
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
32. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (A) from auxiliary 34. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the
under-hood relay box A. voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal
FUEL PUMP (ORN)

2 T
u 3j

33. Connect auxiliary under-hood relay box A 17P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 (PGM-FI main YES-Replace PGM-FI main relay 2,11
relay 2) with a jumper wire.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between PGM-FI main
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD relay 2 and the fuel tank unit 4P connector. If the wire
RELAY BOX A 17P CONNECTOR
is OK, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box; USA
JUMPER WIRE
FUEL PUMP (ORN) models (see page 22-82), Canada models (see page
IG1 (BRN)
22-83 ).

Fuel Pressure Relieving
Before disconnecting fue l lines or hoses, relieve 10. Remove the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel (see
pressure from the system by disabling the fuel pump page 20-153).
and disconnecting the fuel line/quick connect fitting in
11. Remove the bracket (A) and the quick-connect fitting
the engine compartment.
cover (B).
With the HDS
12. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean
it if needed.
13. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). fitting (A).

5. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in the
fuel tank.
7. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel
Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle until it
stalls.
NOTE;
Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or
the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel
pump.
A Confirmed or Pending DTC may be set during this
procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them as
needed.
9. Do the 12V battery battery terminal disconnection
procedure (see page 22-86).
(cont'd)
Fuel Pressure Relieving (cont'd)
14. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A); Hold the Without HDS
connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer
tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the 1. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (A) from auxiliary
locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off. under-hood relay box A.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts.
Do not use tools.
If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.
Do not remove the retainer from the line; once
removed, the retainer (F) must be replaced with a
new one.
2. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls.

NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them.
4. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in the
fuel tank.
5. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection
15. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it
for dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-296). 6. Remove the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel (see
page 20-153).
16. Do the 12V battery battery terminal reconnection
7. Remove the bracket (A) and the quick-connect fitting 10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the
cover (B). connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the retainer
tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the
locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts.
Do not use tools.
removed, the retainer (F) must be replaced with a
new one.
8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean

it if needed.
9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect
fitting (A).
11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it

for dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-296).
12. Do the 12 volt battery terminal reconnection
Fuel Pressure Test Fuel Tank Draining
Special Tools Required 1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-301).
. Fuel Pressure Gauge 07406-004000B
2. Using a hand pump, a hose, and a container suitable
. Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Set 07AAJ-S6MA150
for fuel, draw the fuel from the fuel tank.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11 -287). 3. Reinstall the fuel tank unit (see page 11-302).
page 20-153).
3. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A). Attach the
fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel gauge.

If the engine starts, go to step 6.
If the engine does not start, go to step 5.
5. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: Listen to the
fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel
pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned to ON (II).
If the pump runs, go to step 6.
If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit
6. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should be
3 20 -3 70 kPa (3.3 -3.8 kgf/cm2, 4 7 -5 4 psi).
If the pressure is OK, the test is complete.
If the pressure is out of specification, replace the
fuel pressure regulator (see page 11 -304) and the
fuel filter (see page 11 -304), then recheck the fuel
pressure.
Fuel Line Inspection
Check the fuel system lines and hoses for damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts.
Make sure the connection is secure and the quick-connect

fitting covers are firmly locked in place.
Fuel Line Inspection (cont'd)
Check all quick -connect fittings, and make sure they are properly positioned and tightened.
LOCKNUT PLATE
Replace.
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions
The fuel line/quick-connect fittings (A, B, C, D, E, F, G and

H) connect the fuel feed hose (I) to fuel feed line (J), the
fuel line (K) to the fuel tank unit (L), the fuel vent tube (M)
to the fuel tank unit, the fuel purge line (N) to the EVAP
canister (0), the fuel vent tube to the EVAP canister, the
fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (P) to the vapor control
valve tube (Q), the fuel fill neck tube (R) to the fuel fill
pipe (S), the vapor control valve tube to the fuel fill neck
tube, and when removing or installing the fuel feed
hose, the fuel tank unit, or the fuel tank, or when
disconnecting/connecting the quick-connect fittings, pay
attention to the following:
The fuel feed hose, the fuel line and the quick-connect
fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful not to
damage them during welding or other
heat-generating procedures.
The fuel feed hose, the fuel line and the quick-connect
fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch them with a
shop towel which was used for wiping battery
electrolyte. Replace them if they came into contact
with electrolyte or something similar.
When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed hose,
the fuel line and the quick-connect fittings, be careful
not to bend or twist them excessively. Replace them if
they are damaged.
(cont'd)
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions (cont'd)
A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be

reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot
be reused once it has been removed from the line.
Replace the retainer when:
replacing the fuel rail.
replacing the fuel feed line.
replacing the fuel pump.
replacing the fuel filter.
replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
replacing the EVAP purge line.
replacing the EVAP canister.
replacing the fuel fill pipe.
replacing the fuel tank.
it has been removed from the fuel line.
it is damaged.
N O TE :
When you replace a retainer, use the same size and
manufacturer as the original retainer.
The fuel line/quick-connect fittings retainer (C, D) can
be reused once.
Location Manufacturer Retainer Line

color diameter
A Tokai DTR Green 0.248 in
(6.3 mm)
B Sanoh White 0.374 in
(9.5 mm)
C Tokai DTR Green 0.75 in
(19 mm)
D Tokai DTR Green 0.75 in
(19 mm)
E Sanoh White 0.47 in
(12 mm)
F Sanoh White 0.47 in
(12 mm)
G Tokai DTR Green 1.126 in
(28.6 mm)
H Tokai Natural 0.47 in
(12 mm)
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal
NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings,

read the Fuel Line/Guick-Connect Fitting Precautions
(see page 11-293).
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-287), but keep
the 12 volt battery connected.
2. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings (A) for dirt, and
clean them if needed.
(cont'd)
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal (cont'd)
3. Place a rag or shop towe l over the quick-connect 4. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
fitting. Hold the connector (A) with one hand, and damage.
squeeze the retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to If it is dirty, clean the connector, and dry it with
release them from the locking tabs (C). Pull the compressed air.
connector off. If it is damaged, replace the fuel filter, or the fuel
NOTE: feed line.
Be careful not to damage the line (D) or other parts.
Do not use tools.
removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new
one.
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
Installation
5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out, NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings,
cover the disconnected connector and line ends with read the Fuel Li ne/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions
plastic bags (A). (see page 11-293).
NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has been 1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
removed from the line. damage, and clean it if needed.
Replace the retainer when:
replacing the fuel gauge sending unit
it has been removed from the fuel line.
it is damaged.
2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the
retainer is damaged, or after:
replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
removing the retainer from the fuel line.
NOTE: When you replace a retainer, use the same size
and manufacturer as the original retainer (see page
11-293).
(cont'd)
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation (cont'd)
3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect

fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer (B) from
the mating line.
NOTE: When replacing the fuel tube/quick-con nect
fitting assembly in the engine compartment, remove
the cowl cover and under-cowl panel (see page
20-153), and the bracket (C).
4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the line (A), and Connection to new fuel line
align the retainer locking tabs (B) with the connector
grooves (C). Then press the quick-connect fittings Sanoh-made
onto the line until both retainer tabs lock with a
clicking sound.
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of
new engine oil on the line end.
Connection with new retainer
Connection to new fuel line: Fuel fill neck tube
Connection to new fuel line: Fuel vent tube
A
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation (cont'd)
Reconnection to existing retainer 5. When you are reconnecting the connector with the
old retainer, make sure the connection is secure and
the tabs (A) are firmly locked into place; check visually
and also by pulling the connector (B). When you
replacing the fuel line with a new one, make sure you
remove the ring pull (C) upwards after you confirm
the connection is secure.
NOTE: Before you remove the ring pull, make sure the
fuel line connection is secure. If the connection is not
secure, the ring pull could break when you try to
remove it.
Reconnection to existing retainer
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The fuel pump will

run for about 2 seconds, and the fuel pressure will
rise. Repeat this two or three times, then make sure
there are no fuel leaks.
Fuel Tank Unit Removal and Installation
Special Tools Required 7. Remove the locknut (A), the locknut plate (B), and the
Fuel Pump Module Locknut Wrench 07AAA-SNAA100 fuel tank unit (C).
Removal
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-287).
2. Remove the rear tray (see step 1 on page 20-62).
3. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B).

5. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (C) from the fuel
tank unit (see page 11-295).
6. Using the special tool, loosen the locknut (A).
07AAA-SNAA100
Fuel Tank Unit Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation 2. Transfer the base gasket (A) from the fuel tank unit to
the fuel tank.
1. Temporarily attach a new base gasket (A) to the fuel
tank unit (B), then insert the fuel tank unit partially into
the fuel tank.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the new base gasket.
Be careful not to bend the fuel gauge sending unit.
Do not coat the base gasket with oil.
3. Align the marks (B) on the fuel tank and fuel tank unit,
then insert the fuel tank unit into the fuel tank until the
fuel tank unit rests on top of the base gasket.
NOTE: To avoid a fuel leak, check the base gasket,
visually or by hand, to make sure it is not pinched.
4, Tighten a new locknut (A) by hand with a new locknut 5. Using the special tool, tighten the locknut (A) to the
plate (B). specified torque.
NOTE: Before tightening, align the mark (C) on the NOTE:
locknut plate to the start of the thread (D). After tightening, make sure the marks (B) are still
aligned.
A
After installation, check the base gasket, visually or
by hand, to make sure it is not pinched.
A
125 N-m
6. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector, then connect

the quick-connect fitting (see page 11-297).
7. Reconnect the negative cable to the 12 volt battery,
and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The fuel pump
will run for about 2 seconds, and fuel pressure will
rise. Repeat this two or three times, then make sure
there are no fuel leaks.
8. Install the access panel.
9. Install the rear tray (see step 1 on page 20-62).
10. Install the fuel fill cap.
Fuel Pressure Regulator Fuel Filter Replacement
Replacement
1, Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-301). The fuel filter should be replaced whenever the fuel
pressure drops below the specified value (see page
2. Remove the reservoir (A). 11-290), after making sure that the fuel pump and the
fuel pressure regulator are OK.
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11 -301).
2. Remove the fuel filter set (A).
3. Remove the bracket (B).

4. Remove the ground ring (C).
5. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (D).
6. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with 3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit:
new O-rings (E) and a new bracket. When installing When connecting the wire harness (B), make sure
the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the the connection is secure and the connectors are
fuel tank (see page 11-302). firmly locked into place.
When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (C),
NOTE:
make sure the connection is secure and the
Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil; do not use
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not
any other oils or fluids. to bend or twist it excessively.
Do not pinch the O-rings during installation.
Use all the new parts supplied in the pressure 4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with
regulator replacement kit. new O-rings (D) and a new bracket (E). When
installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit
and the fuel tank (see page 11-302).
NOTE:
Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil; do not use
any other oils or fluids.
Do not pinch the O-rings during installation.
Use all the new parts supplied in the fuel filter
replacement kit.
Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Fuel Pulsation Damper
Unit Replacement Replacement
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11 -301). 1. Remove the fuel rail (see page 11 -200).
2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel gauge sending 2. Place a wrench (A) on the fuel rail (B).
unit) (A) from the fuel tank unit (B).
--------7=9999
B
3. Place a second wrench (C) on the fuel pulsation

damper (D).
4. Remove the pulsation damper by holding the first
wrench while turning the second wrench.
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit; 5. Install the fuel pulsation damper in the reverse order
When connecting the wire harness, make sure the of removal with new washers.
connection is secure and the connector (C) is firmly
locked into place. NOTE:
When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make Replace all washers whenever the fuel pulsation
sure the connection is secure. Be careful not to damper is loosened or removed.
bend or twist it excessively. * If the drain hole (A) of the fuel pulsation damper
cover does not face down, reinstall it as shown.
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. When
installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit
and the fuel tank (see page 11 -302).
Fuel Tank Replacement
1. Drain the fuel tank until it is less than half full (see
page 11-290).
2. Reinstall the fuel tank unit without connecting the fuel
tank unit 4P connector, and the quick-connect fittings
(see page 11-301).
4. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (A) (see page
11 -295), and open the clamp (B).
5. Remove the middle floor undercover (see page

20-166).
6. Remove the trailing arm braces (A).
7. Place a jack or other support under the fuel tank (B).

8. Remove the strap bolts (C) and the straps (D).
9. Remove the fuel tank.
10. Remove the fuel tank protectors (E).
NOTE: When installing the fuel tank protectors, make sure to insert the clips in the direction shown (F).
(cont'd)
Fuel Tank Replacement (cont'd) Fuel Fill Pipe Removal/Installation
11. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. 1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11 -287).
2. Drain the fuel tank until it is less than half full (see
page 11-290).
3. Remove the fuel fill cap.
5. Remove the fuel fill pipe cover (see page 20-167).
6. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (A) (see page
11-295).
NOTE:
New fuel tank have a ring pull (A) at the fuel tank
vapor recirculation tube (B) and the fuel fill neck
tube (C). When you connect the hose and confirm
that the connection is secure, remove the ring pull
by pulling it down.
Before connecting the fuel fill pipe and the
quick-connect fittings, check for dirt, and clean
them if needed, taking care not to damage the fuel
fill pipe and other parts.
7. Remove the fuel fill pipe (B).

8. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (C) (see page
11 -295), then remove the vapor control valve tube (D).
NOTE: Before connecting the fuel fill pipe and the
quick-connect fitting, check for dirt, and clean it if
needed, taking care not to damage the fuel fill pipe
and other parts.
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test
NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer 7. Measure the voltage between fuel tank unit 4P
to the Gauges Circuit Diagram (see page 22-328). connector terminals No. 2 and No. 4 with the ignition
switch turned to ON (II). There should be 12V battery
1. Check the B22 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under- dash
voltage.
fuse/relay box, and replace it if needed.
If the voltage is OK, go to step 8.
2. Checkfor body electrical system DTCs. If the voltage is not as specified, check for:
If no DTCs are found, go to step 3. - a short in the BRN wire to ground.
If DTC B1175 or B1176 is indicated, go to the - an open in the BRN or BLK wire.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
4. Remove the rear tray (see step 1 on page 20-62).

5. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. FUEL UNIT
(BRN)
U 311j
FUEL GND
(BLK)
W i re side of female terminals

9. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank (see page
11-301).
6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B).

Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test Low Fuel Indicator Test
(cont'd)
10. Measure the resistance between fuel tank unit 4P 1. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
connector terminals No. 2 and No. 4 with the float at E 22-325).
(EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 (HALF If the low fuel indicator flashes, go to step 2.
FULL), and F (FULL) positions. If the low fuel indicator does not flash, replace the
If you do not get the following readings, replace the gauge control module (see page 22-354).
fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-305). 2. Check for body electrical system DTCs.
Float F 1/2 LOW E If any DTCs are indicated, do the indicated DTC's
Position 5.366 in 3.094 in 1.185 in 0.646 in troubleshooting.
(136.3 (78.6 mm) (30.1 mm) (16.4 mm) If no DTCs are indicated, go to step 3.
mm)
Resistance 19 to 197.3 to 489.6 to 772 to 3. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page 11-309).
(O) 21 207.3 639.6 788
T
E LOW
11. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.

12. Remove the No. B1 BACK UP (15 A) fuse from the
under-dash fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds,
then reinstall it.
14. Check that the fuel gauge indicates F with the float at
F.
If the fuel gauge does not indicate F, replace the
gauge control module.
If the gauge is OK, the test is complete.
NOTE: Remove the No. B1 BACK UP (15 A) fuse from
the under-dash fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds
after completing the test, otherwise it may take up to
20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct
fuel level.
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)

General Troub l eshooting Information, page 11-3
Update, page 11 -207
Rep l acement, page 11 -209
DTC T roubleshooting
DTC P0420: Catalyst System Efficiency Below 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Threshold 7. Replace the WU-TWC (see page 11-313).
NOTE: 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot and review the general
If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the 11-274).
same time as DTC P0420, troubleshoot them first, then 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
recheck for DTC P0420.
without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
P0137, P0138: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater
12. Test-drive for about 10 minutes, varying the vehicle
P0300: Random misfire
speed.
P0301 P0304: No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, or No. 4 cylinder
misfire detected 13. Check the CATALYST MONITOR CONDITION in the
Poor quality fuel may cause this DTC. DATA LIST with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Does the HDS indicate OK?
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES-Go to step 14.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm NO-Go to step 11, and recheck.
without load (A/T in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the 14. Test-drive under these conditions:
4. Test-drive under these conditions: 158 F (70 C)
Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above Vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) for 5 minutes or
158 F (70 C) more with cruise control set
A/T in D, M/T in 4th or 5th 15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 in the DTCs
Vehicle speed between 4575 mph (70120 km/h) MENU with the HDS.
for 5 minutes or more with cruise control set
D o e s t h e H D S in d i c a t e O U T O F C O N D I T I O N ?
Vehicle speed between 5575 mph (90120 km/h)
for 10 seconds, then decelerate (with the throttle YES-Go to step 12 and recheck.
fully closed). Repeat this at least three times.
NO-Go to step 16.
Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) for 5
minutes or more with cruise control set 16. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 in the DTCs Is DTC P0420 indicated?
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Check the fuel quality, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 17.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, MENU with the HDS.
the system is OK at this time. If the HDS indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
the HDS indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 4 YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
and recheck. Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 16,
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check the fuel
quality, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on.
Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation
NOTE: If the warm up TWC is damaged internally, 7. Remove the bolts (A) and the nuts (B).
inspect the under-floor TWC for debris.
2. Remove the bolts (A, B).
(4.5 k g fm , 32 Ibf-ft) (2.2 k g fm , 16 Ibf ft) 8. Remove the WU-TWC (C).
3. Remove the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel (see 9. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with
page 20-153). new gaskets (D).
4. Remove the EGR pipe (see page 11-327).

5. Remove the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 11 -202).
6. Remove the cover (A).
Under-Floor TWC Removal/Installation

2. Remove the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11- 202 ).
3. Remove the nuts (A) and the bolts (B).
B A
22 N-m 33 H m
5. Remove the cover (D).

6. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with
new gaskets (E).
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) PI PE

Removal/Installation, page 11 -327
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0400: EGR System Leak Detected 10. Test-drive under these conditions:
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data 158 F (70 C)
and any on-board snapshot and review the general CVT in D, M/T in 4th
Vehicle speed at 25 mph (40 km/h) for 5 minutes or
1. Check for a loose or damaged EGR pipe. more
Is the EGR pipe OK? Maintain the vehicle speed at 25 mph (40 km/h) and
the engine speed between 1,3503,000 rpm for 9
YES-Go to step 2. seconds or more with cruise control set
NO-Reconneet or replace the EGR pipe (see page 11. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the YES-Check for a leak between the EGR pipe and the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. EGR valve, then go to step 1.
3. Test-drive under these conditions: NO-Go to step 12.

Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above 12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0400 in the DTCs
158 F (70 C) MENU with the HDS.
Vehicle speed at 25 mph (40 km/h) for 5 minutes or
more YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Maintain the vehicle speed at 25 mph (40 km/h) and Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 11,
the engine speed between 1,3503,000 rpm for 9 go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
seconds or more with cruise control set NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for a leak
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0400 in the DTCs between the EGR pipe and the EGR valve, then go to
MENU with the HDS. step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 10.
YES-Go to step 5.
the system is OK at this time. Check for an exhaust
gas leak between the EGR pipe and the EGR valve. If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 3 and
recheck.
6. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11 -327).
11-274).
DTC P0401: EGR Insufficient Flow 12. Test-drive under these conditions:
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 158 F (70 C)
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 120 km/h) for at least 10 seconds
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully
closed) for at least 4 seconds
without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the 13. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. Is DTC P0401 indicated?
4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
HDS. the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. If the connections
Is the result OK? and the terminals are OK, go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 7. 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0401 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
158 F (70 C) YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
CVT in D, M/T in 4th Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 13,
Drive at a steady speed between 5575 mph (88 go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
120 km/h) for at least 10 seconds NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and
closed) for at least 4 seconds the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Clean the intake manifold EGR port and the EGR known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
pipe with throttle plate cleaner (see page 11-327).
Also, clean the passage inside the EGR valve with
throttle plate cleaner (see page 11-327), then go to Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) above
step 9. 158 F (70 C)
120 km/h) for at least 10 seconds
connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and
the ECM/PCM. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully
driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates closed) for at least 4 seconds
OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 5 and recheck. 17. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is DTC P0401 indicated?
8. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11 -327). YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
10. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. page 11 -7), then go to step 16. If the ECM/PCM was
11-274).
(cont'd)
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0401 in the DTCs DTC P 0 4 0 4 : EGR Control Circuit Range/
MENU with the HDS.
Performance Problem
YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
then go to step 16. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, 4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the
go to step 1. If the HDS indicates EXECUTING, keep HDS.
driving until a result comes on. If the HDS indicates is the result OK?
Clean any carbon build-up on the EGR valve with
throttle plate cleaner.ll
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the EGR valve 5P connector.
7. At the EGR valve side, measure the resistance
between EGR valve 5P connector terminals No. 3 and
No. 4.
EGR VALVE 5P CONNECTOR
is there 100 kD or more?
YES-Go to step 23.

NO-Go to step 8.
8. At the EGR valve side, measure the resistance 12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
between EGR valve 5P connector terminals No. 2 and terminal B2 and body ground.
No. 4.
EGR VALVE 5P CONNECTOR EGR (BLU/RED)
3 4 5 6 7 8 I9
1 I2
C
lL 4 3
M
_U 10 11 12 13[14|15|16 17 18 19
EGRP VCC2 1 20 21 22 23 24 25 S

26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
136 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
44

Is there 100 kD or more?
NO-Go to step 9. YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM

(B2) and the EGR valve, then go to step 24.
9. Checkfor continuity between EGR valve 5P connector
terminal No. 1 and body ground. NO-Go to step 13.
EGR VALVE 5P CONNECTOR terminal B2 and EGR valve 5P connector terminal
No. 5.

5 | 4 | 3 l 2 | 1]
GND (BLK) 5 4 3 2 1)
EGR (BLU/RED)
Wire side of femal e terminals EGR (BLU/RED)
n
II II n
Is there continuity? 1 2 3 5 6
4 7 8 9
I 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1
YES-Go to step 10.
1 20 21 22 23 24 25

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the EGR valve 26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
and G101; CVT (see page 22-26), M/T (see page 22-22), 136 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
then go to step 24.
10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Terminal side of female termina l s

YES-Go to step 14.

(cont'd)
14. Remove the EGR valve (see page 11-327). 32. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
15. Clean any carbon build-up on the EGR valve with
throttle plate cleaner.
33. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the
16. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-327).
HDS.
11-274).
the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
20. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see
without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the page 11-7), then go to step 33. If the ECM/PCM was
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. substituted, go to step 1.
21. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
HDS. complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
Is the result OK? Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
YES-Go to step 30. indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
NO-Go to step 22.

11-274).
HDS.

the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If
the connections and terminals are OK, go to step 31.
DTC P0406: EGR Valve Position Sensor Circuit 10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B41 and EGR valve 5P connector terminal
High Voltage
No. 3.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot and review the general EGR VALVE 5P CONNECTOR
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 4 3 2 1)
______________ SG2 (GRN/YEL)
2. Check the EGR V IS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 4.88 V or more indicated? Wire side of fem a l e terminals
YES-Go to step 3. E C M /P C M CONNECTOR B ( 4 4 P )

EGR valve and the ECM/PCM.H 7
1 '2 3 4 5 6 8 9
[I 10 11
12 13|T^T5ll6 17 18 19
I 20 21
22 23 24 25
4. Disconnect the EGR valve 5P connector. 26 27
28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
136 37 38 39 140 41 42 43 14 4
____________________________ | S G 2 (G R N /Y E L )
6. Measure the voltage between EGR valve 5P connector
terminals No. 2 and No. 3. Terminal side of female termina l s
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the EGR valve
and the ECM/PCM (B41), then go to step 13.
(5 4 3 2 1)
SG2 (GRN/YEL) VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
Wire side of female terminals 15. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
11-274).
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 7.
the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P). Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
(cont'd)
20. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. DTCP2413; EGR System Malfunction
Is DTC P0406 indicated? NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM, If the ECM/PCM was troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
substituted, go to step 1. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
HDS.
Is the result OK?

EGR valve and the ECM/PCM.
NO-Go to step 5.
7. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 21.
9. Disconnect the EGR valve 5P connector.
11 . Measure the voltage between EGR valve 5P connector 15. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal No. 2 and body ground. terminal B6 and EGR valve 5P connector terminal
No. 2.
EGR VALVE 5P CONNECTOR EGR VALVE 5P CONNECTOR
A - 5 4
(5 14 1312111 VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
VCC2 (YEL/BLU) I
Wire side of female term inals
6b
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
.. . ... n...... ................ "FT...... . ..

h 2 3 .% I f I f I 7 8 9
L> 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1
20 21 22 23 24 25
Is there about 5 V?
26 27 28 2913013.1132 33 34 35
YES-Go to step 16. 36 37 38 | 39 4 0 |41 42 43 44
NO-Go to step 12.

14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P). YES-Go to step 51.

19. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector 21. If not already done, turn the ignition switch to LOCK
terminal B29 and body ground. ( 0).
22. If not already done, disconnect the EGR valve 5P

ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) connector.
No. 4.
h 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9I
[ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 IJ
20 21 22 23 24 25 EGR VALVE 5P CONNECTOR
1
26 27 28:29|30|31 (32 33 34 35
136 37 38 I 39 40 41 142 43 4 4 1
"""(l ;"T;,'rt j
EGRP (W HT/BLK)
Term i nal side of male terminals
Is there 100 kO or more?
NO-Go to step 20.
YES-Go to step 43.
terminal B29 and EGR valve 5P connector terminal NO-Go to step 24.
No. 4.
No. 4.
/S .
5 4 1
EGRP (W HT/BLK) EGR VALVE 5P CONNECTOR
Wire side of fem a l e term i nals

3 2 1)
IL 4
EGRP VCC2
'r
00
Oi
|1|2 3I 4 I 5 (6 f7
I10 11 12 1 3 |l4 fl5 fl6 17 18 19 IJ
1 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28;2913013lj32 33 34 35
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 14 4 1
O n 1 p
- EGRP (W HT/BLK)
YES-Go to step 43.
NO-Go to step 25.
YES-Go to step 23.
25. If not already done, jump the SCS line with the HDS.
m
26. If not already done, disconnect ECM connector B 28. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
C44P). terminal B2 and EGR valve 5P connector terminal
No. 5.
terminal B2 and body ground. EGR VALVE 5P CONNECTOR

(5 4 3 2 1)
EGR (BLU/RED) EGR (BLU/RED)

.n ..
1 2 3 4 5 6 |7 8 9
[I 10 11 12 13|l4|T5ll6 17 18 19 ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
B 20 21 22 23 24 25 EGR (BLU/RED)
26 27 28 29|30[31|32 33 34 35
II........ ll
136 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 n n
r r 2 3 4 5 6 7
[ 10 11 12 17 18 19 IJ
20 21 22 23 24 25

26 27 28 29)30(31 (32 33 34 35
Terminal s i de of female terminals
136 :37 3 8 | 39 40 4 1 |42 43T44]
Termina l side of female term i nals

is there continuity?
(B2) and the EGR valve, then go to step 44. YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Go to step 28. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
29. Checkfor continuity between EGR valve 5P connector
2 |1I
GND (BLK)
YES-Go to step 30.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the EGR valve
and G101; CVT (see page 22-26), M/T (see page 22-22),
then go to step 44.
30. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P).
(cont'd)
31. At the EGR valve side, connect the 12 volt battery 43. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-327).
positive terminal to EGR valve 5P connector terminal
No. 5 with a jumper wire. 4 4 Reconnect all connectors.
EGR VALVE 5P CONNECTOR 46. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
11-274).
Term inal side o f 48. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the
5 4 3 2 1 m ale te rm in a ls
HDS.
EGR GND
JUMPER JUMPER
WIRE WIRE Is DTC P2413 indicated?
BATTERY the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM then go to step 1.
32. Start the engine, and let it idle. Then connect the 12
volt battery negative terminal to EGR valve 5P 51. Reconnect all connectors.
connector terminal No. 1 with a jumper wire.
Does the engine stall or run roughly? software (see page 11 -207), or substitute a
YES-Go to step 50.
33. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 54. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
34. Remove the EGR valve (see page 11-327). Is DTC P2413 indicated?
35. Clean the intake manifold EGR port and the EGR pipe YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
(see page 11-327) with throttle plate cleaner. Also, the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
clean the passage inside the EGR valve with throttle updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see
plate cleaner. page 11-7), then go to step 53. If the ECM/PCM was
36. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-327). substituted, go to step 1.
37. Reconnect all connectors. NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
38. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
39. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
11-274).
HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Go to step 49.

NO-Go to step 42.
EGR Valve Replacement EGR Pipe Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the EGR valve 5P connector (A). Removal

page 20-153).
2. Remove the bolts (A) and the nuts (B).
2. Remove the EGR valve (B).

3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a 3. Remove the EGR pipe (C).
new gasket (C).
(cont'd)
EGR Pipe Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation
1. Install the EGR pipe to the water passage side, then
tighten the nuts (A) by hand with a new gasket (B).
D
Replace.
2. Install the EGR pipe to the TWC side, tighten the bolts
(C) by hand with a new gasket (D), then torque the
bolts.
3. Torque the nuts on the water passage side.
4. Install the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel (see
page 20-153).
PCV System .< r <

PCV Valve Inspection PCV Valve Replacement
1. Check the PCV valve (A), the hoses (B), the pipe (C), 1. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-163).
and the connections for leaks or restrictions.
2. Remove the bolt (A).
2. At idle, listen to the PCV valve (A) with a stethoscope

3. Remove the PCV valve (B).
(B) or a flat-tip screwdriver (at the breather cover
notch (C)) as you lightly pinch the PCV hose (D) with 4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
your fingers or pliers several times. Each time the
NOTE:
hose is pinched, the valve should click.
When i nstalling a new PCV valve, make sure the
If there is no clicking sound, replace the PCV valve O-rings (C) are in place.
(see page 11 -330) and recheck. When installing a used PCV valve, use new O-rings.
EVAP System
EVAPORATI VE EM ISSI ON (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE VALVE


POWERTRAIN
CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
General Troubleshoot i ng I nformat i on, page 11-3
Update, page 11-207
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)

CANISTER

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0443: EVAP Canister Purge Valve Circuit 6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP
canister purge valve (B), and connect a vacuum
Malfunction
pump/gauge, 030 in.Hg, to the hose.
Special Tools Required
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 030 In.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
or equivalent, commercially available

YES-Go to step 5.
EVAP canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM. 7. Start the engine, and let it idle.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and allow the Is there vacuum?
engine to cool to below 140 F (60 C). YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 14.
9. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
10. Checkfor continuity between EVAP canister purge 17. Measure the voltage between EVAP canister purge
valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE 2P CONNECTOR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
Gluj 2 lL
PCS (YEL/BLU) I G1 (BLK/YEL)
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
Is there continuity? Is there battery voltage?

NO-Go to step 23. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the EVAP
canister purge valve and the No. B12 IG IMA (10 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step
12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P). 24.
13. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
ID
PCS (YEL/BLU)
ca

(B3) and the EVAP canister purge valve, then go to
step 24.
NO-Go to step 30.
15. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
21. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector 23. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
terminal B3 and EVAP canister purge valve 2P 11-362).
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE 2P CONNECTOR 25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
n rm
PCS (YEL/BLU) 27. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-274).
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) Is DTC P0443 indicated?
PCS (YEL/BLU) YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the EVAP canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM,
r. . n ....... .... ......... .... _______
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 then go to step 1.
h
Li 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 NO-Go to step 29.
i 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29J3of31|32 33 34 35 29. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0443 in the DTCs
136137 38 39 40 41 42 43 \ 4A MENU with the HDS.
r
Term inal side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 22.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
(B3) and the EVAP canister purge valve, then go to purge valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the
step 24. HDS indicates EXECUTING, or OUT OF CONDITION,
keep idling until a result comes on.
22. At the valve side, measure the resistance between
EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector terminals No. 30. Reconnect all connectors.
1 and No. 2. 31. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE 2P CONNECTOR known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
2 1
PCS Is DTC P0443 indicated?
1G1
the EVAP canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
NO-Go to step 34.
Is there about 2 3 26(1 at room temperature (1821C,

6 5 -7 0 F)?
YES-Go to step 30.
(cont'd)
DTC Troubleshooting (contfd)
34. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0443 in the DTCs DTC P0451: FTP Sensor Range/Performance
MENU with the HDS.
Problem
NOTE;
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 33, If DTC P2422 is stored at the same time as DTC P0451,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. troubleshoot DTC P2422 first, then recheck for DTC
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor P0451.
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
purge valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute.
EXECUTING, or OUT OF CONDITION, keep idling until 4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0451 in the DTCs
a result comes on. MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor and
6. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11 -360).
11-274).
10. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute.

the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM. Also check the FTP
vent for restrictions, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0451 in the DTCs DTC P0452: FTP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
MENU with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 11, 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor and 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates
4. Remove the fuel fill cap.
NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about 7.3 kPa ( 2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 0.3 V
or less indicated?
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Go to step 7.
7. Reinstall the fuel fill cap.
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 10.

11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
HDS.
Is about 7.3 kPa ( 2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or
0.3 V or less indicated?
YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
14. Measure the voltage between FTP sensor 3P 19. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector

FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
VCC6 (YEL)
n n
( 3 1 2 1 1 )- I 1 I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I.
I 10 11 12 13|i4|15ll6 17 18 19
VCC6 (YEL) 20 21 22 23 24 25 - 1

26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
136 37 38 39 40 41142 43 M

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 24.

NO-Go to step 15.
YES-Go to step 32.
(A19) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 26.
18. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3 to
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR 23. Check for continuity between FTP sensor 3P
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

2 1
VCC6 (YEL)
JUMPER WIRE
[ 31211]
T FTP (PUR)

(A26) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 26.
NO-Go to step 32.
24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 36. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0452 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
25. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11 -360).
27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
28. Reset the ECM/PCM w ith the HDS. the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
29. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
11-274).
30. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor and
Is DTC P0452 indicated? the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at then go to step 34. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
NO-Go to step 31.
MENU with the HDS.

NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comeson.

the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
NO-Go to step 36.
DTC P04S3: FTP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 12. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). [3 2 1)
FTP SOS
4. Remove the fuel fill cap. (PUR) (PNK)

6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the JUMPER WIRE
HDS.
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V or more
indicated?
YES-Go to step 10.
7. Reinstall the fuel fill cap. Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V or more
8. Start the engine, and let it idle. indicated?
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0453 in the DTCs YES-Remove the jumper wire, then go to step 15.
MENU with the HDS. NO-Go to step 26.
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? 15. Measure the voltage between FTP sensor 3P
YES-Go to step 10. connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.

the system is OK at this time. Check for poor FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). [ 3 I 2 | 1)

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 21.

NO-Go to step 16.
19. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to 24. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 to
body ground with a jumper wire. body ground with a jumper wire.
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
|3 |2 |1 3 2 1)
SG6 (PNK) FTP (PUR)
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
terminal A9 and body ground. terminal A26 and body ground*
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
SG6 (PNK)
. ... .e l ...... ... - n

h 2 3 4 |5 6 7 8 > L
1 10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
1 1
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
p 6 |3 7 38 39 4 0 |4 lj4 2 4 3 ) 4 4 |
FTP (PUR)
T erm inal side o f fem ale te rm inals

(A9) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 28. (A26) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 28.
26. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 38. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0453 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
27. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-360).
30. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
31. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
11-274).
32. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor and
is DTC P0453 indicated? the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at then go to step 36. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. goto step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
NO-Go to step 33.
MENU with the HDS.

NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
NO-Go to step 38.
DTC P0455: EVAP System Large Leak 2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe
mating surface (B). Make sure the fuel fill cap tether
Detected
cord (C) is not caught under the cap.
DTC P0456: EVAP System Very Small Leak
Detected
INOTICE I
The fuel system is designed to allow specified maximum
vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not deviate from
the vacuum and pressure tests in these procedures.
Excessive pressure/vacuum will damage the EVAP
components or eventually cause fuel tank failure.

Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0 4 In.Hg, 07JAZ-001000B
NOTE: Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is the fuel fill
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught under the
any on-board snapshot, and review the general cap?
YES-Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe, then
Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that creates greater
go to step 24.
pressure/vacuum. The best condition for testing is less
than a full tank of fresh fuel. If possible, to assist in leak NO-Go to step 3.
detection, add 1 gallon of fresh fuel to the tank (as long
as it will not fill the tank), just before starting these
procedures. 4. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say TIGHTEN TO 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
CLICK). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight, then it
clicks. 6. Check for a poor connection or damage at the fuel
tank vapor recirculation tube.
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly
tightened? Is the tube OK?
NO-Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 24. NO-

Reconnect or replace the fuel tank vapor
recirculation tube, then go to step 26.
If needed, replace the fuel tank (see page 11-306),
then go to step 26.
7. Disconnect the vacuum hose (purge line) (A) from the 12. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (A)
EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the engine from the EVAP canister (B), and plug the EVAP
compartment, then connect a T-fitting (C), a vacuum canister port (C).
gauge, and a vacuum pump/gauge, 030 in.Hg, to
the EVAP canister purge valve as shown.
13. Remove the vacuum gauge, then connect the vacuum

pump/gauge to the vacuum hose (A) as shown.
8. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of

vacuum to the hose.
Does it hold vacuum for 1 minute?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister purge valve, then go 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
to step 25. 15. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the HDS.
10. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION 16. Apply vacuum to the hose until the FTP reads 1.90 V
MENU with the HDS. (-0 .5 9 in.Hg, -15 .1 mmHg).
Is the result OK? NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If you do,
the FTP sensor can be damaged.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the 17. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for 1
FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, the EVAP minute with the HDS.
canister vent shut valve, and the ECM/PCM. Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V (0.1 in.Hg, 0.5
NO-Go to step 11. mmHg)?
11 .Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES-Go to step 18.

18. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU with 23. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS. the HDS.
19. Disconnect the fresh air hose (A) from the EVAP 24. Check these parts for looseness or damage:
canister (B), and plug the EVAP canister vent shut Fuel fill pipe
valve port (C). Fuel vapor return pipe
Are the parts OK?
YES-Check the fuel tank unit base gasket (see page

11 -301), and check the fuel tank, then go to step 25.
NO-Repair or replace the damaged parts, then go to
step 25.
25. Reconnect all hoses and connectors.
11-274).
29. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
20. Apply vacuum to the EVAP system until the FTP reads MENU with the HDS.
1.90 V (-0 .5 9 in.Hg, -15 .1 mmHg).
Is the result OK ?
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If you do,
the FTP sensor can be damaged. YES-Troubleshooting is complete.
21. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for 1 NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
minute with the HDS. the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, the
EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the ECM/PCM,
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V (0.1 in.Hg, 2.5 then goto step 1.
mmHg)?
YES-Go to step 22.

NO-Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve, then
go to step 25.
22. Checkfor a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge
line between the EVAP canister and the EVAP canister
purge valve.
Is the line OK?
YES-Replace these parts, then go to step 25:
FTP sensor O-ring
EVAP canister vent shut valve O-ring
EVAP canister
NO-Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge
hose, then go to step 25.
(cont'd)
DTC P0496: EVAP System High Purge Flow DTC P0497: EVAP System Low Purge Flow
Detected Detected
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data Special Tools Required
and any on-board snapshot and review the general Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 04 In.Hg, 07JAZ-001000B
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 30 In.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Set 07AAJ-S6MA150
3. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
MENU with the HDS. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Is the result OK? 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, the EVAP 3. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
canister vent shut valve, and the ECM/PCM. MENU with the HDS.
NO-lf the EVAP FUNCTION TEST did not finish Is the result OK?
because of a DTC, do the indicated DTC's YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
troubleshooting. Go to step 4. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(O). FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, the EVAP
canister vent shut valve, and the ECM/PCM.
5. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
11-362). NO-Go to step 4.
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. 5. Check for a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge
line between the intake manifold and the EVAP
8. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page canister purge valve.
11-274).
Is the line OK?
MENU with the HDS. YES-Go to step 6 .
Is the result OK? NO-Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge line,
then go to step 24.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete.^
NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, the
then go to step 1.
6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP 11. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the purge line
canister purge valve (B) in the engine compartment, (at the EVAP canister side), then connect a T-fitting
then connect a T-fitting (C), a vacuum gauge, and a (B), the vacuum gauge, and the vacuum pump/gauge
vacuum pump/gauge to the vacuum hose as shown. to the hose as shown.

8. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
the HDS.
9. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of
vacuum to the hose. 13. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of
vacuum to the hose.
Does it hold vacuum?
Does it hold vacuum?
YES-Replace the EVAP canister purge valve, then go
to step 23. YES-Check for a restricted EVAP canister purge line
between the EVAP canister purge valve and the EVAP
NO-Go to step 10.
canister, then go to step 23.
10. Reconnect the vacuum hose to the EVAP canister
NO-Go to step 14.
purge valve.
14. Remove the FTP sensor with its connector connected
(see page 11-360).
(cont'd)
15. Connect a T-fitting (A), the vacuum pump/gauge, and 20. Disconnect the vacuum hose (purge line) (A) from the
the vacuum pump to the FTP sensor ( ) as shown. EVAP canister purge valve (B), then connect a
T-fitting (C), the vacuum gauge, and the vacuum
pump/gauge to the hose as shown.
16. Check and record the FTP SENSOR reading in the

17. Slowly apply about 1.3 kPa (0.4 in.Hg, 10 mmHg) of
vacuum to the hose.
HDS.
Does the reading change more than 1.1 kPa (0.31 in.Hg,
8 mmHg) before and after applying vacuum?
YES-Go to step 19. 21. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with
NO-Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-360), then the HDS.
go to step 23. 22. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of
19. Reconnect the vacuum hoses to the EVAP canister vacuum to the hose.
purge line (EVAP canister side), and reinstall the FTP Does the hose hold vacuum?
sensor.
YES-Check for a blockage at the EVAP canister port,
then go to step 23.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve (see
page 11 -361), then go to step 23.
23. Reconnect all hoses, DTC P0498: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
24. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Circuit Low Voltage
25. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
11-274).
MENU with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Is the result OK? 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete Is DTC P0498 indicated?
NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at YES-Go to step 6.

the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, the
NO-Go to step 4.
then go to step 1. 4. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM.
7. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector.
9. Measure the voltage between EVAP canister vent shut 14. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector
valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. terminal A10 and body ground.

EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
2P CONNECTOR
( 2J 1
+ B (PNK)
Wire s i de of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the EVAP
canister vent shut valve and the A/F sensor relay, then YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM
go to step 18. (A10) and the EVAP canister vent shut valve, then go
to step 18.
NO-Go to step 15.
11. At the valve side, measure the resistance between
EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector terminals 15. Connect EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector
No. 1 and No. 2. terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
2P CONNECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
vsv (2 1') + B
rfm
V S V (LT G R N )
i
_ JUMPER WIRE

Is there about 25 3 0 0 at room temperature (1821C,

6 5 - 70 F)?
YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Go to step 17.
16. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector 24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0498 in the DTCs
terminal A10 and body ground. MENU with the HDS.
r
VSV
(LT GRN) I 1 2 3|4 5I6 7 8 M . N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
20 21 22 23 24 25 1 vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If
I B
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35 the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 22.
<> 136137 38 39 40|41 42 43|44|
Terminal side of female terminals known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7).
27. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
Is there continuity? 28. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 25. Is DTC P0498 indicated?
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
(A10) and the EVAP canister vent shut valve, then go the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM.
to step 18. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM, then go to step 27. If the
17. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve (see page ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
11-361).
NO-Go to step 29.
29. M onitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0498 in the DTCs
19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). MENU with the HDS.
20. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
21. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
11-274). complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
22. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
Is DTC P0498 indicated? connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1. was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
NO-Go to step 24. COMPLETED, go to step 27.
DTC P0499: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve DTC P 1 4 5 4 : FTP Sensor Range/ Performance
Circuit High Voltage Problem
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data DTC P2422: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Stuck Cl osed Ma l function
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
3. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the HDS.
4. Remove the fuel fill cap, and wait 1 minute.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
HDS.
EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM.
Is it between 0.67 and 0.67 kPa (0,2 and 0.2 in.Hg,
5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). YES-Go to step 7.
6. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with NO-Go to step 18.
the HDS.
7. Install the fuel fill cap.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at w ithout load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM. radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to 10. M onitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1454 in the DTCs
step 6. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. MENU with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 8. Does the HDS indicate FAILED?
8. M onitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0499 in the DTCs YES-Go to step 11.
MENU with the HDS. N O -lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor, the
YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the ECM/PCM.
complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace Also check for a blockage in the vent hoses and the
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other drain joint. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 7, keep idling until a result comes on.
N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM 13. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve from the
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM EVAP canister (see page 11-361).
(see page 11 -7), then go to step 6. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT 14. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
COMPLETED, go to step 6. shut valve.
16. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with 21. Remove the FTP sensor from the EVAP canister with
the HDS. its connector connected (see page 11-360).
17. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A) 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
operation.
HDS.
Is it between 0.67 kPa and 0.67 kPa ( 0.2 and 0.2 in.
Hg, 5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YES-Check for debris or clogging at the EVAP canister
and the FTP sensor port, then go to step 24.
NO-Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11 -360), then
go to step 24.
11-274).
Does the valve operate?
YES-Check for a blockage in the EVAP canister, the
w ithout load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until the
vent hoses, and the EVAP canister filter, then install
the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and go to step 24.
28. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs w ith the HDS.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve (see
page 11 -361), then go to step 24. Is DTC P1454 andlor P2422 indicated?
18. Disconnect the vent hose (A) from the FTP sensor (B). YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and
NO-Go to step 29.
29. M onitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1454 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check fo r poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor, the
19. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
HDS.
Is it between 0.67 and 0.67 kPa (0.2 and 0.2 in.Hg,
5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YES-Check for a blockage in the FTP sensor vent hose
or the vent, then go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 20.
DTC P1458: FTP Sensor Circuit 5. Check the recorded snapshot parameters with the
HDS:
Range/Performance Problem
Max Value of FTP SENSOR (FINE)
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 030 inHg Snap-on YA4000A or Min Value of FTP SENSOR (FINE)
equivalent commercially available
HDS snapshot screen
NOTE: M AX Value
Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and
If any of DTCs listed below are indicated at the same
time as DTC P1458, troubleshoot those DTCs first,
then recheck for P1458.
P0451, P0452, P0453, P1454: FTP sensor
P2422: EVAP canister vent shut valve
Do not start the engine during this troubleshooting.
2. Note the recorded on-board snapshot parameters
w ith the HDS: Is the difference between the MAX and MIN values of the
FTP SENSOR (FINE) about 0.67 kPa (0.2 inHg, 5 mmHg)
Max Value of FTP SENSOR or less?
Min Value of FTP SENSOR YES-Go to step 6.
FUEL LEVEL NO-Go to step 12.
6. Check the FTP SENSOR (FINE) in the recorded
HDS on-board snapshot screen
snapshot with the HDS.
MAX V a l ue
Does it vary 0.067 kPa (0.02 inHg, 0.5 mmHg) or more for
3 seconds?
YES-Go to step 7.
FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the
ECM/PCM. Also check for a blockage in the EVAP vent
hose.HI
3. Check the FUEL LEVEL in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is the FUEL LEVEL less than it is on the on- board
snapshot?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Drain the fuel until the FUEL LEVEL is less than it
is on the on-board snapshot, then go to step 4.
4. Take a snapshot with the HDS for 3 minutes w ithout
starting the engine.
.< r <
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 21. Check for a blockage or damage at the FTP sensor
ports (EVAP canister side and vent side).
8. Remove the FTP sensor (see page 11-360).
9. Reconnect the FTP sensor 2P connecter.
11. Check the FTP SENSOR (FINE) in the DATA LIST w ith
the HDS.
Does it vary 0.067 kPa (0.02 inHg, 0.5 mmHg) or more for
3 seconds?
YES-Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-360), then
go to step 28.
NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this tim e.
FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the
ECM/PCM. Also checkfor a blockage in the EVAP vent
hose.B Is there any blockage or damage?
12. Remove the fuel fill cap. YES-Remove the blockage, and replace the FTP
sensor (see page 11-360) if needed, then go to step 28.
13. Check the FTP SENSOR (FINE) in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. NO-Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-360), then
go to step 28.
is the value about 0.67 kPa (0.2 inHg, 5 mmHg) or more,
or about 0.67 kPa (0.2 inHg, 5 mmHg) or less? 22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES-Reinstall the fuel fill cap, then go to step 22. 23. Disconnect the fresh air hose (A) from the EVAP
canister (B), then connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0
NO-Go to step 14. 30 inHg, to the EVAP vent shut valve as shown.
16. Reconnect the FTP sensor 2P connecter.
18. Check the FTP SENSOR (FINE) in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Is the value about 0.67 kPa (0.2 inHg, 5 mmHg) or more,
or about 0.67 kPa (0.2 inHg, 5 mmHg) or less?
YES-Remove the blockage in the EVAP vent hose.
Replace the hose if n e e d e d .!
NO-Go to step 19.
24. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 32. Check the recorded snapshot parameters with the
HDS:
25. Try to apply vacuum to the hose valve (not more than
5.3 kPa (1.6 inHg, 40 mmHg)) w hile checking the FTP Max Value of FTP SENSOR (FINE)
SENSOR (FINE) in the DATA LIST w ith the HDS.
Min Value of FTP SENSOR (FINE)
NOTE: To avoid damaging the FTP sensor, do not
apply more than 5.3 kPa (1.6 inHg, 40 mmHg) of HDS snapshot screen
vacuum. MAX Value
Does the valve hold more than 1.3 kPa (0.4 inHg, 10
mmHg) of vacuum?
YES-Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve, then
go to step 26.
NO-Remove the blockage in the fresh air hose.
Replace hose if needed, then go to step 26.
27. Reconnect all connecters and the fresh air hose.
29. Reset the ECM/PCM w ith the HDS. Is the difference between the MAX and MIN values of the
FTP SENSOR (FINE) about 0.67 kPa (0.2 inHg, 5 mmHg)
30. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page or less?
11-274).
YES-Troubleshooting is co m p le te .!
31. Take a snapshot w ith the HDS fo r 3 minutes w ithout
starting the engine. NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and
m
Fuel Cap Warning Message System

Troubleshooting
DTC P145C: EVAP System Purge Flow Special Tools Required
Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0 4 In.Hg, 07JAZ-001000B
Malfunction
NOTE: or equivalent, commercially available
Do this procedure if the fuel cap warning message
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). comes on frequently, or if the message does not go off
after the fuel fill cap is tightened and the vehicle is driven
If DTC P145C is indicated alone, do the
several days.
troubleshooting for DTC P0496 and P0497 using the
freeze data for P145C. 1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say TIGHTEN TO
If DTC P0497 and P145C are stored at the same time, CLICK). It should turn 1/4 after it's tight, then it clicks.
check for a poor connection, a blockage, or damage at Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly
the EVAP canister purge line between the EVAP tightened?
canister purge valve and the EVAP canister. Also
check fo r a stuck closed EVAP canister purge valve. YES-Go to step 2.
If any of DTCs listed below are indicated at the same NO-Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 13.
time as DTC P145C, troubleshoot those DTCs first,
then recheck fo r P145C. 2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe
mating surface (B). Make sure the fuel fill cap tether
P0496, P0497: EVAP system purge flow cord (C) is not caught under the cap.
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is the fuel fill
pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught under the
cap?
YES-Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe, then
go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Reinstall and tighten the fuel fill cap.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for 1 minute.
(cont'd)
Fuel Cap Warning Message System Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Test drive at 45 mph (72 km/h) for 1 minute or more. 12. Reconnect all hoses.
Does the fuel fill cap warning message come on? 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
YES-Go to step 7. 14. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
NO -lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this 15. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3 , 0 0 0 rpm
tim e .ll w ithout load (CVT in P or N, M/T in neutral) until a
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for 1 minute.
16. Test-drive at 45 mph (72 km/h) for 1 minute or more.
8. Disconnect the vacuum hose (purge line) (A) from the
EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the engine Does the fuel cap warning message come on?
compartment, then connect a T-fitting (C), a vacuum
YES-Go to step 1, and recheck.
gauge, and a vacuum pump/gauge, 030 in.Hg, to
the EVAP canister purge valve as shown. NO-Troubleshooting is complete.

10. Apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of vacuum to
the hose.
11. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
Does the vacuum release immediately?
YES-Check for a blockage at the EVAP canister purge
line between the EVAP canister purge valve and the
EVAP canister, then go to step 14.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
EVAP Canister Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-10). 4. Disconnect the hoses (A).
2. Remove the bolts (A), then remove the EVAP canister
guard (B).
3. Remove the EVAP canister cover (A).
5. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (B) from the

EVAP canister (see page 11-295).
6. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector (C) and the
EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector (D), then
remove the harness clip (E).
7. Remove the bolts, then remove the EVAP canister
assembly (F).
(0.97 kgfm,
7 Ibf ft)
(cont'd)
EVAP Canister Replacement FTP Sensor Replacement
(cont'd)
8. Disconnect the drain tube (A), then remove the EVAP 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-10).
canister (B) from the EVAP canister bracket.
2. Remove the bolts (A), then remove the EVAP canister
guard (B).

10. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve (see page 3. Disconnect the hose (A) and the FTP sensor connector
11-361). (B).
D
4. Remove the retainer (C), then remove the FTP sensor

(D ).

new O-ring (E) and a new retainer.
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-10). 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve
connector (A), then remove the harness clip (B).
2. Remove the bolts (A), then remove the canister guard
(B).
A
22 N-m
(2.2 kgfm,
16 Ibfft)
4. Remove the cap (C).

5. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve (D).
6. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with
new O-rings (E) and a new cap.
NOTE: Do not coat the O-rings with engine oil.
EVAP Canister Filter Replacement EVAP Canister Purge Valve
Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-10). 1. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector
(A).
2. Remove the left side rear fender cover (see page
20-168).
3. Disconnect the hoses (A).
(0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 Ibfft)
2. Disconnect the hose (B), then remove the EVAP

canister purge guard (C), and the EVAP canister purge
valve (D).
4. Remove the bolts (B), then remove the EVAP canister
filter (C).
new O-ring (E).
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P16D5: F-CAN Malfunction (Internal DTC P16D6: IMA-CAN Malfunction (Internal
Malfunction) Malfunction)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
Is DTC P16D5 indicated? Is DTC P16D6 indicated?
N O -lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time. NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.B
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with HDS. 5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with HDS.
Is DTC P16D5 indicated? Is DTC P16D6 indicated?
YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
N O -lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is N O -lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
DTC U0029: F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF DTC U0038: I MA-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF)
(ECM/PCM))
DTC U1205; IMA-CAN Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data (ECM/PCM-Motor Control Module (MCM))
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). NOTE:
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
If DTC U0110 is stored at the same time as DTC
U0038/U1205, troubleshoot that DTC first, then
Is DTC U0029 indicated? recheck for DTC U0038/U1205.
YES-Go to step 4. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO -lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
ttm e .ll
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7). 5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC U0038 or U1205 indicated?
Is DTC U0029 indicated? YES-Go to step 6.
YES-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. motor control module (MCM) and the ECM/PCM.
N O -lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is 6. Check for DTCs in the IMA system with the HDS.
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Is DTC U0038 or U1205 indicated?
NO-Go to step 38.
10. Measure the resistance between ECM/PCM connector 15. Measure the resistance between ECM/PCM connector
terminals A38 and A39. terminals A38 and motor control module (MCM)
connector terminal A2.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) MOTOR CONTROL MODULE (MCM)
CONNECTOR A (31P)
-JEi ,_ -j:
11 2 3 | 4 5 | 6 | 7 8 T L
1 10 11 12 13|14ll5^ 17 18 19
I
20 21 22 23 24 25
1 1
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
136137 38 39 j40 j41 142 43144!
IMA-CAN H (WHT) IMA-CAN L (RED)
----------------------------- ,--------------- -----------------

n1
r il n
Terminal side of female terminals I1 I2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I il_
I 10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
Is there about 108132 0? I
26 27 28 29|30|31[32 33 34 35
I36 37 38 39140J41 42 43 44 j
YES-Go to step 22.
IMA-CAN H (WHT) ___________________________
UO-
rn More than 132 0: Go to step 11.
Less than 108 0: G oto step 17. Is there about 1.0 O or less ?
11. Turn the battery module switch OFF. YES-Go to step 16.
12. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210). NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
13. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU (A38) and the m otor control module (MCM) (A2), then
cover (see page 12-212). go to step 33.
14. Disconnect m otor control module (MCM) connector A

(31P).
terminals A39 and motor control module (MCM) terminals A38 and A39.
connector terminal A1.
MOTOR CONTROL MODULE (MCM) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

CONNECTOR A (31P)
IMA-CAN L (RED) [
9 8 | 7 l 6 [ 5 | 4 3 ILJPm 1 2 3 4 5 |6 7 8 I 9
2120 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 121110 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
31 30 29
n 28 27
n
22
26 25 24 23 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
Wire side of female terminals 136 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 441
"TT
IMA-CAN H (WHT) IMA-CAN L (RED)
T r ^ iT
I 1 |2 3 [ 4 | 5 6 7 8 | 9 |J Terminal side of female terminals
I 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
J
20 21 22 23 24 25
1 Is there about 1.0 D or more ?
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
38 39 40 41 42 43 441
YES-Replace the motor control module (see page
IMA-CAN L (RED) I___________ ____________I 12-212), then go to step 33.
Terminal side of female terminals NO-Repair a short in the wires between the ECM/PCM
(A38) (IMA-CAN H line) and the ECM/PCM (A39)
Is there about 1.0 D o r less ? (IMA-CAN L line), then go to step 33.
YES-Replace the motor control module (MCM) (see 22. Turn the battery module switch OFF.
page 12-212), then go to step 33.
23. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210).
24. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU
(A39) and the motor control module (MCM) (A1), then
cover (see page 12-212).
go to step 33.
25. Disconnect motor control module (MCM) connector A
17. Turn the battery module switch OFF.
(31P).
(31P).
26. Measure the resistance between body ground and 28. Measure the voltage between body ground and
ECM/PCM connector terminals A38 and A39 ECM/PCM connector terminals A38 and A39
individually. individually.
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR A (44P) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
r n n "r1 OL___
2 3 4 5 I6 7 8
1 i 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 L
La 10 11 12 13|14li5li6 17 18 '19 LI 10 11 12 13 [14 [15(16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24:25 m 20 21 22 23 24 25 1
i u
26 27 28 29130131132 33 34:35 26 27 28 29 )30)31 (32 33 34 35
M
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
IMA-CAN H (WHT) IMA-CAN L (RED) IMA-CAN H (WHT) IMA-CAN I (RED)
Terminal side of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
Is there about 1.0 Q or more ?. Is there voltage?

YES-Go to step 27. YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the
ECM/PCM (A38) and the motor control module (MCM)
NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the (A2) or between the ECM/PCM (A39) and the motor
ECM/PCM (A38) and the motor control module (MCM) control module (MCM) (A1), then go to step 32.
(A2) or between the ECM/PCM (A39) the and the
motor control module (MCM) (A1), then go to step 33. NO-Go to step 29.
(cont'd)
31. Measure the resistance between motor control 39. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
module (MCM) connector terminals A1 and A2.
Is DTC U0038 or DTC U1205 indicated?
the motor control module (MCM), and ECM/PCM. If
MOTOR CONTROL MODULE (MCM) the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
CONNECTOR A (31P) ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
N O -lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
IMA-CAN H complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace
(WHT) the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If any other
IL
9 8 1 7 I e5 I 5 I 4 3 J 2] indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 IMA-C,AN!
31 30 29 n 28 27 n 26 25 24 23 22 (RED)
Is there about 108132 Q ?

YES-Go to step 36.
NO-Replace the ECM/PCM (see page 11-209), then go
to step 33.
Is DTC U0038 or DTC U1205 indicated?
the motor control module (MCM) and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.
DTC U0110: F-CAN Malfunction 11. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
m otor control module (MCM) connector A (31P).
(ECM/PCM-MCM)
Are the connections and the terminals OK?
NO-Repair the connections or the terminals, then go
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). to step 24.
3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 13. Measure the voltage between m otor control module
(MCM) connector terminal A9 and body ground
Are DTC U0029 and U0110 indicated at the same time?
w ithin 1 second.
YES-Go to the troubleshooting for DTC U0029 (see
page 11-364).B
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS. MOTOR CONTROL MODULE (MCM)
CONNECTOR A (3IP )
Is DTC U0110 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO -lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check fo r poor connections or loose terminals at the
m otor control module (MCM) and the ECM/PCM.
6. Check fo r Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS
again.
YES-Go to step 7. Is there 12Vbattery voltage?
NO-Update the m otor control module (MCM) if it YES-Go to step 14.
does not have the latest software (see page 12-211),
NO-Go to step 16.
or substitute a known-good motor control module
(MCM) (see page 12-8), then go to step 27 and 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
recheck. If DTC U0110 is not indicated with a
known-good m otor control module (MCM), replace
the original motor control module (MCM) (see page
(cont'd)
15. Check for continuity between m otor control module 19. Check the No. B42IMA1 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
(MCM) connector terminal A6 and body ground. fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 20.
MOTOR CONTROL MODULE (MCM) NO-

CONNECTOR A (31P)
Repair a short in the wire between the No. B42IMA1
(7.5 A) fuse and m otor control module (MCM) relay
1. Also replace the No. B42 IMA1 (7.5 A) fuse, then
go to step 24.
PG1 (BLK)
Repair a short in the w ire between the motor
9 8 I 7 I (3 I 5 | 4 "ML j| 2 | 1| control module (MCM) relay 1 and the motor
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 control module (MCM). Also replace the No. B42
31 30 29
n
28 27 FI 26 25 24 23 22| IMA1 (7.5 A) fuse, then go to step 24.
20. Measure the voltage between rear relay block 8P
connector (motor control module (MCM) relay 1)
REAR RELAY BLOCK 8P CONNECTOR
YES-Update the m otor control module (MCM) if it
or substitute a known-good m otor control module
(MCM) (see page 12-8), then go to step 24 and IE _____51
recheck. If DTC U0110 is not indicated with a
known-good m otor control module (MCM), replace 1
the original m otor control module (MCM) (see page + B (LTBLU) I 7 |X1 8 | 2
12-212), then go to step 24. 6 1 X\ 3
14 \l/M Î
5
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the motor
control module (MCM) (A6) and G901 (see page
22-54), then go to step 24. 6 2)

17. Remove the m otor control module (MCM) relay 1.
18. Test m otor control module (MCM) relay 1 (see page
22-92).
Is the relay OK? Is there battery voltage?
NO-Replace m otor control module (MCM) relay 1, NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. B42
then go to step 24. IMA1 (7.5 A) fuse and m otor control module (MCM)
relay 1, then go to step 23.
21. Check for continuity between rear relay block 8P 22. Check fo r continuity between rear relay block 8P
connector (motor control module (MCM) relay 1) connector (motor control module (MCM) relay 1)
terminal No. 5 and motor control module (MCM) terminal No. 8 and m otor control module (MCM)
connector terminal A9. connector terminal A3.
REAR RELAY BLOCK 8P CONNECTOR REAR RELAY BLOCK 8P CONNECTOR

______ re......,si______ IGHLD (PUR)
_____ra____si______
IGA (PNK/BLK) s in

MOTOR CONTROL MODULE (MCM) MOTOR CONTROL MODULE (MCM)

CONNECTOR A (31P)
CONNECTOR A (31P)
IGA (PNK/BLK) IGHLD (PUR)
i i 1
sj 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 3 IL J O T T 9 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 |4
IM T T f
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29 n 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 31 3012911 | j 2812T|P^j 26125124123122
H

YES-Go to step 22. YES-Update the motor control module (MCM) if it
or substitute a known-good m otor control module
control module (MCM) (A9) and m otor control
(MCM) (see page 12-8), then go to step 24 and
module (MCM) relay 1, then go to step 24. recheck. If DTC U0110 is not indicated with a
known-good motor control module (MCM), replace
the original m otor control module (MCM) (see page
control module (MCM) (A3) and m otor control
module (MCM) relay 1, then go to step 24.
25. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the
PCU lid (see page 12-212).
26. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210).
11-274).
(cont'd)
31. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. DTC U0122: F-CAN Malfunction
Is DTC U0110 indicated? (ECM/PCM-VSA Modulator-Control Unit)
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
the m otor control module (MCM), and the ECM/PCM, and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
then go to step 1. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
YES-Go to the troubleshooting for DTC U0029 (see
page 11-364).H
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 5.
gauge control module, the VSA modulator-control
unit, and the ECM/PCM.
5. Check for communication to the VSA system with the
HDS.
Does the HDS communicate with the VSA
modulator-control unit?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to the symptom troubleshooting for ABS
indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA indicator
do not go off (see page 19-118 )M
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 32P
connector.
terminal A36 and VSA modulator-control unit 32P terminal A37 and VSA m od u Iato r-co nt ro I unit 32P
connector terminal No. 6. connector terminal No. 5.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNST 32P CONNECTOR
F-CAN H (GRN)
|
1X1X114 13112|11|10|9 I 8 | 7 I 6 [ s M ^ T ,
Xli?| is|><|><i17|><t><lx1><l><D<i 16)15 [X
[32131 l30|29l28[27l26|25|24l23|22lXl21120 |
r .... o............ n 'i i

lr IT r
1 2 3 4 5 6 I7 8 9 . h I2 3 | 4 J 5 16 j 7 8 I^ i
LI 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 i 10 11 12 13|14] 1S| 16 17 18 19
23 24 25 24 25
20 21 22
20 21 22 23

26 27 28 29|30|31 (32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
136137 38 39 40 41 42 43 14 4 1 136 J37 38 3 9 |40 41 42 43 44]
I F-CAN H (GRN) F-CAN L (PNK)


YES-Go to step 11. YES-Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does
not have the latest software (see page 19-124), or
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit
(A36) and the VSA modulator-control u n it then go to
(see page 19-125), then go to step 12 and recheck. If
step 12.
DTC U0122 is not indicated after substitution, replace
the original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
(A37) and the VSA modulator-control unit, then go to
step 12.
11-274).
16. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. DTC U0155: F-CAN Malfunction (ECM/PCM-
Is DTC U0122 indicated? Gauge Control Module)
YES-Check fo r poor connections or loose terminals at NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
the gauge control module, the VSA modulator-control and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
unit, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Intermittent faiIure, the system is OK at this time.
gauge control module and the ECM/PCM.
4. Check for body electrical DTCs in the DTCs MENU
with the HDS.
Is DTC B1168, B1169, and/or B1178 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Do the gauge control module input test (see page
22-347).
7. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-354).
E H
10. Check fo r continuity between ECM/PCM connector 11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A36 and gauge control module 32P terminal A37 and gauge control module 32P
connector term inal No. 19. connector terminal No. 20.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
I------------- !
16fl5|l4 13|l2|l1 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 I 5 1 4 T3 I 2 T 1 1 16|15|14|13|12|11 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 | 4! 3 | 2| 1 |
|32|31|30|29|28| 27|26| 25| 24| 23|22|21|20| 19|18|17 |32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
F-CAN H (GRN) F-CAN L (PNK)
Tr=iT . . n________ .. n..

fT 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 1 9 1. 1 2 3 4 5 I6 7 8 L
La 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1 10 11 12 i^ J T ilT s ^ 17 18 19
23 24 25 1 m 20 21 22 23 24 25 1
1 20 21 22
26 27 28 29|30|3ll3Z 33 34 35
1
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
L-
1
4 0 141 142 4 3 |4 4 | 37 38 139 40 41142 43 441
1=16 J37TF3 8 139
-------------- F-CAN H (GRN) F-CAN L (PNK)

YES-Go to step 11. YES-Substitute a known-good gauge control module
(see page 22-354), then go to step 12 and recheck. If
DTC U0155 is not indicated after substitution, replace
(A36) and the gauge control module, then go to step
the original gauge control module, then go to step 12.
12.
(A37) and the gauge control module, then go to step
12.
11-274).
16. Check fo r Pending or Confirmed DTCs w ith the HDS.
the gauge control module and the ECM/PCM, then go
to step 1.
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting
3. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P), then ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
disconnect the HDS.
4. Measure the resistance between ECM/PCM connector
terminals A36 and A37. L .
5 f '6 7 8 9 1.
00
't
h 2
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) 20 21 22 23 24 25 1

26 27 28 29 )30)31132 33 34 35
n n
|:56137 38 39 40 41142 43 41.1
1 2 3 I4 5 6 7 8
1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
56 37 38 139 40 41142 43 M
1= Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Repair a short in the wire between ECM/PCM
Terminal si de of female terminals terminals A36 and A37.H
NO-Go to step 7.
Is there about 4859 Q?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Disconnect these connectors:
Gauge control module 32P (see page 22-354)
VSA modulator-control unit 32P (see page 19-125)
Yaw rate-acceleration sensor 4P (see page 19-122)
EPS control unit A (11P) (see page 17-80)
SRS unit A (39P) (see page 24-185)
TPMS control unit 20P (see page 18-68)
Motor control module (MCM) A (31P) (see page
12 - 212 )
7. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PGM connector 8. Check fo r continuity between ECM/PCM connector
term inal A36 and gauge control module 32P terminal A36 and VSA modulator-control unit 32P
connector terminal No. 19. connector terminal No. 6.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL U N I T 32P CONNECTOR

F-CAN H (GRN)
l-------------- f
16^15114^13112111 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 | 4 l 3 | 2 l l | _J1_ _0_ _n_
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17 M x j" l4 f l3 fl2 |ll |l0 | 9 18 I 7 | 6 | 5 fXTXl I,
F-CAIM H (GRN)
X llW fc ^ 1 7 ^
|32|3lT30l29|28|27l26l25|24|23|22|yi2l|26l

=ri g .r
I 1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 sTaHL a_
1 10 11 12 T3|14ll5fT6 17 18 19 F 23 |4 5 6 7
LB 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
1
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
I 20 21 22 23 24 25 I
1 I
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
56137 38 39|40 41142 431441
h 136137 41 42
CO
00
CO
CO
CD
0
F-CAN H (GRN) I F-CAN H (GRN)

(A36) and the gauge control m odule. (A36) and the VSA modulator-control unit.B
F-CAN C ircuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
terminal A36 and motor control module (MCM) terminal A37 and gauge control module 32P
connector terminal A23. connector terminal No. 20.
MOTOR CONTROL MODULE (MCM) GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR A (31P)
1----- :------- r
16fl5|l4fl3|l2|l1 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 11 |
9 i h t t 6 15 n r 3 l u o n r
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29 n
28 27 26 25 24 23 22 F-CAN L (PNK)
F-CAN H (WHT)
B F = rr
f
b 2 3 4 5 6 7 8I 9IJ 1
h 2 3pTl 5 6 7 8 9 S
[l 10 11 12 13|14|15jl6 17 18 19 10 11 12 13fl4|15fl6 17 18 19
1 fl
20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25
B fl
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
I
h56137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |42 4 3 |4 4 | (36 37 38139 40 41 42 43 44 (
U 1 1 LJ
Term i nal side of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals

NO-Repairan open in the wire between the ECM/PCM NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
(A36) and the m otor control module (MCM).H (A37) and the gauge control m o d u le .
11 . Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector 12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A37 and VSA m odulator-control unit 32P terminal A37 and m otor control module (MCM)
connector terminal No. 5. connector term inal A22.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL-UNIT 32P CONNECTOR MOTOR CONTROL MODULE (MCM)

CONNECTOR A (31P)
F-CAN L (PNK)
_ Q_ _IL 9.F b I 7 .is f TR.
(XIX114|13|12|11|10| 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 I 5 (XIXI
21_ 20 19_18_17_1Q_15_'
|32|3l|30 |29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22[Xl21120|
31" 30 29 f l 28 27 f l 2 6 125 [ 2 4 12 3 122 [
F-CAN L (RED)
W ire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals

( .. ...n ...........:__ Q___ _

1 2 3 I4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 7 8 9 . LB
I 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
I CO
Uo"
37 38 139 40 41142 43 44
136 37 38 39|4al4? 42 43 44
U 1 1 u
F-CAN L (PNK) F-CAN L (PNK)

(A37) and the VSA modulator-control umt.H (A37) and the motor control module (MCM).B
13. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 32P
connector.
(cont'd)
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
terminals A36 and A37. terminals A36 and A37.
r
f l 12 h i 2 3 4 )5 6 7 b T 1
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 1
I
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 33 34 35
CM
o>
CO
O
00
CM
136 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 441 56137 38 39 40 41 42 43 44|
I5
F-CAN H (GRN) F-CAN L (PNK) F-CAN H (GRN) F-CAN L (PNK)
Terminal side of female terminal s Terminal side of female terminals
Is there about 108132 D? Is there about 108132 D?

YES-Go to step 15. YES-Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
NO-Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
unit (see page 19-125), then reconnect ECM/PCM
If the HDS identifies the vehicle and the ECM/PCM
connector A (44P). If the HDS identifies the vehicle,
was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the HDS
replace the original VSA modulator-control unit (see
identifies the vehicle and the ECM/PCM was
page 19-125).
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM (see page
15. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 32P 11-209).ll
connector.
NO-Substitute a known-good motor control module
16. Reconnect motor control module (MCM) connector A (MCM) (see page 12-8), then reconnect ECM/PCM
(31P). connector A (44P). If the HDS identifies the vehicle,
replace the original motor control module (MCM) (see
page 12-212).B
18. Disconnect these connectors:
Gauge control module 32P (see page 22-354)
VSA modulator-control unit 32P (see page 19-125)
Yaw rate-acceleration sensor 4P (see page 19-122)
EPS control unit A (11P) (see page 17-80)
SRS unit A (39P) (see page 24-185)
TPMS control unit 20P (see page 18-68)
Motor control module (MCM) (31P) (see page
12- 212 )
19. Check fo r continuity between ECM/PCM connector 20. Check fo r continuity between ECM/PCM connector
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) ECM/PCM COSMNECTOR A (44P)
a.
3 4 5 6 8 _9j h |2 3 I4 8 9 I
10 11 I2I13I14I15I16I17 18 19 Lb 10 11 12 13| 14|T5|T6 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 B
B fl
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
| 36 | 37^38 39|40 41|42 43 441 |36|37 38|39]40[4T 42 43]44|

YES-Repair a short in the wire between ECM/PCM YES-Repair a short in the w ire between ECM/PCM
terminal A36 and the gauge control module, the VSA terminal A37 and the gauge control module, the VSA
modulator-control unit, the yaw rate-acceleration modulator-control unit, the yaw rate-acceleration
sensor, the EPS control unit, the SRS unit, the TPMS sensor, the EPS control unit, the SRS unit, the TPMS
control unit, the motor control module (MCM), or the control unit, the m otor control module (MCM), or the
DLC.B DLC.B
24. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the HDS.
Does the HDS identify the vehicle?
22-354).
NO-Go to step 25.
26. Reconnect the gauge control module 32P connector.
connector.
YES-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see
page 19-12 5 ).
(cont'd)
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
29. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 48. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the HDS.
30. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 32P Does the HDS identify the vehicle?
connector.
YES-Replace the m otor control module (MCM) (see
31. Disconnect the yaw rate-acceleration sensor 4P page 12-212).i f
connector.
32. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the HDS. software (see page 11 -207), or substitute a
YES-Replace the yaw rate-acceleration sensor (see known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original
page 19-122). ECM/PCM (see page 11-209).B
NO-Go to step 33.

34. Reconnect the yaw rate-acceleration sensor 4P
connector.
35. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (11P).
YES-Replace the EPS control unit (see page 17-80).H
NO-Go to step 37.
38. Reconnect EPS control unit connector A (11P).
39. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P).
YES-Replace the SRS unit (see page 24-185).
NO-Go to step 41.
42. Reconnect SRS unit connector A (39P).
43. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
YES-Replace the TPMS control unit (see page
18-68).H
NO-Go to step 45.
46. Reconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
(31P).
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: If you suspect the HDS or the HDS DLC cable may 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the VSA
be the source of the communication problem, verify that indicator.
they are working properly by connecting them to a
Does the VSA indicator come on and go off?
known-good, like vehicle and system, and checking for
communication problems. YES-Go to step 18.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO-Go to the VSA symptom troubleshooting for ABS
indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA indicator
do not go o ff (see page 19-118).
11. Start the engine, and watch the EPS indicator.
YES-Go to step 5.
Does the EPS indicator come on and go off?
NO-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 18.
4. Try to start the engine.
NO-Go to the EPS symptom troubleshooting for EPS
Does the engine start and idle smoothly? indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored (see
page 17-60)
YES-Go to step 24.
NO-Go to the ECM/PCM power and ground circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-190).B 13. Start the engine, and watch the TPMS indicator.
5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the PGM-FI Does the TPMS indicator come on and go off?
system with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 18.
Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs indicated?
NO-Go to the TPMS symptom troubleshooting for
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting B TPMS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are
stored (see page 18-64).B
NO-
If the HDS does not communicate with the SRS, go
to step 6. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the
If the HDS does not communicate with the VSA immobilizer indicator.
system, go to step 8. Does the immobilizer indicator stay on or flash?
If the HDS does not communicate with the EPS
system, go to step 10. YES-Go to the immobilizer system's troubleshooting
If the HDS does not communicate with the TPMS, (see page 22-191).
g o to step 12. NO-Go to step 18.
If the HDS does not communicate with the IMMOBI
(immobilizer) system, go to step 14. 16. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
22-325).
If the HDS does not communicate with the BODY
ELECTRICAL system, go to step 16. 17. Check the gauge display.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is Error 2 indicated?
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the SRS YES-Check for B-CAN system DTCs.B
indicator.
NO-Go to step 18.
Does the SRS indicator come on and go off?
18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then do the 12
YES-Go to step 18. volt battery terminal disconnection procedure (see
page 22-86), and wait at least 3 minutes before
NO-Go to the SRS general troubleshooting
continuing.
information (see page 2 4-23 ).
(cont'd)
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
20. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No. 7 and 22. Connect DLC terminal No. 7 to body ground with a
body ground. jum per wire.
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
K-LINE (BLU) K-LINE (BLU)
2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8]
\\91 10 8/
11 12 13 14 15 16/
\\91 10 11 12 13 14 15 16j
JUMPER
WIRE
Is there continuity? 23. Check for continuity between body ground and these
YES-Go to step 21. connector terminals:
NO-Go to step 22. Connector Terminal

SRS unit A (39P) No. 5 (BLU)
21. Continue to checkfor continuity between DLC VSA modulator-control unit No. 8 (BLU)
terminal No. 7 and body ground, while disconnecting 32P
these connectors, one at a time: EPS control unit A (11P) No. 5 (BLU)
SRS unit connector A (39P) TPMS control unit 20P No. 4 (BLU)
VSA modulator-control unit 32P connector Immobilizer-keyless control No. 3 (BLU)
unit 7P
EPS control unit connector A (11P)
Audio-navigation unit A No. 13 (BLU)
TPMS control unit 20P connector (24P) (with navigation)
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector Audio unit A (24P) (without No. 13 (BLU)
Audio-navigation unit connector A (24P) (with navigation)
navigation) Under-dash fuse/relay box No. 7 (BLU)
Y (16P)
Audio unit connector A (24P) (without navigation)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector Y (16P) Is there continuity between body ground and each of the
terminals in the chart?
connectors is disconnected? YES-Replace the part that does not communicate
with the HDS.B
YES-Replace the part that caused continuity go away
when it was disconnected.!! NO-Repair an open in the wire between the DLC
(K-line) and the appropriate connector
NO-Repair a short in the wire between the DLC
(K-line) and the VSA modulator-control unit, the SRS 24. Check for B-CAN system DTCs w ithout the HDS (see
unit, the EPS control unit, the TPMS control unit, the page 22-102).
immobilizer-keyless control unit, the Is DTC U0029 and/or U0100 indicated?
audio-navigation unit (with navigation), the audio unit
(without navigation), or the under-dash fuse/relay YES-Go to the F-CAN circuit troubleshooting (see
box.B page 11-376).B
NO-Go to step 25.
m
27. Measure the voltage between DLC terminal No. 16 33. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector
and body ground. terminal A36 and DLC terminal No. 6.

F-CAN H (GRN)
! 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J
\ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 6 /
V1
\
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ] + B (PNK)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16f Terminal side of female terminals
I1 I2 3 TTj 5 6 7 8 I9
Is there battery voltage? LB 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
YES-Go to step 28. m
B 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
NO-Repair an open in the wire between DLC terminal 36 37 38 3 9 140 41 42 43 44
No. 16 and the No. B1 BACK UP (15 A) fuse in the --- c------ 1---O-----
F-CAN H (GRN)
under-dash fuse/relay box.B
Terminal side of female term inal s
28. Measure the voltage between DLC terminals No. 4
and No. 16. Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 34.

DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
(A36) and DLC terminal No. 6 M
GND (BLK)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 )
\1
\9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16/
+ B (PNK)
YES-Go to step 29.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between DLC terminal
No. 4 and body ground (G502 (see page 22-44)).
(cont'd)
34, Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector

terminal A37 and DLC terminal No. 14.
2 3 4 5 6 7
\1 8/
\9 1 0 11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 /
i
F-CAN L (PNK)
Term i nal si de of female terminals
f .......... _n_... ..................... o______ 1

1 1 I 2 3 I 4 5 | 6 7 8 I 9 I.
LI 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
.20 21 22 23 24 25 I

26 27 28 29130|31^32 33 34 35
136137 38 139 40 [ 41 42 43 44 j
F-CAN L (PNK)
Terminal side of female term ina l s
If the symptom/indication goes away and the
ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete.
If the symptom/indication goes away and the
ECM/PCM was substituted, replace the original
(A37) and DLC terminal No. 14.11
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) SYSTEM (If engine maintenance is required)
IM A S y s te m
Special Tools....... ..............................................................12-2
Service Precautions................................. ........................ 12-3
General Troubleshooting Inform ation..........................12-5
DTC Troubleshooting Index............................................ 12-9
Symptom Troubleshooting Index................ .................12-14
System Description...........................................................12-15
Circuit D iagram .............................. ................................... 12-59
Component Location In d e x .............................................12-68
DTC Troubleshooting . .. ............................................ 12-72
IMA System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting. . . . . . . 12-199
Charging System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting. 12-200
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting . . ................... ........ ...........12-202
Auto Idle Stop System Inspection . ............................... 12-206
Auto Idle Stop System Troubleshooting......................12-207
IPU Cover Removal/Installation........................... .......... 12210
Motor Control Module (MCM) Update. ........................12-211
Motor Control Module (MCM) Removal/Installation . .12-212
DC-DC Converter Removal/Installation....................... 12-213
Motor Power Inverter (MPI) Module
Removal/Installation . ................................................... 12-214
IPU Case Removal/Installation............. ......................... 12-215
Battery Module Removal/Installation........................ 12-217
IPU Module Fan Replacement........ ................................12-220
IPU Module Air Duct Removal/Installation....................12-220
IMA Motor Power Cable Removal/Installation. . . . . . . . 12-221
IMA Motor Rotor Removal/Installation. ........................ 12-224
Drain Cover Removal/Installation..................... ............. 12-227
IMA Motor Housing Removal/Installation................... 12-227
IMA Motor Rotor Position Sensor
Removal/Installation......................................................12-228
IMA Motor Power Cable Terminal
Removal/Installation......................................................12-228
Idle Stop Switch Replacement. ......................................12-229
Special Tools

07SAZ-001000A Backprobe Set 2
(D 07YAC-PHM010C Rotor Puller 1
Service Precautions
IMA System When the system is energized and you are servicing
parts w ithout an insulated sheath, be sure to use
The IMA (integrated motor assisted) system uses high insulated tools to prevent short circuiting.
voltage (100 V) circuits. Be sure to shut off the The rotor assembly contains very strong magnets and
electrical circuits and isolate the IMA system and should be handled with special care. People with
related parts before servicing the IMA system. pacemakers or other magnetically sensitive medical
The high voltage cables and their covers are identified devices should not handle the rotor assembly.
by orange coloring. The caution labels are attached to Use the special tool (rotor puller) to remove or install
high voltage and other related parts (see page 1-7). the rotor assembly.
When the system is energized, be careful not to touch
these cables and parts w ithout adequate protective
gear.
m k WARNING
If the rotor is installed by hand, it may suddenly be
The front floor under-cover protecting the high pulled toward the stator w ith great force, causing
voltage cables is marked serious hand or finger injury. Always use the special
If the 12 V battery is discharged, its cables have been tool (rotor puller) to remove or install the rotor
disconnected, or the MCM (Motor Control Module) assembly.
has been reset, the IMA battery level indicator does
not display the state-of-charge (SOC) when the engine Keep the rotor assembly away from magnetically
is first started. To display the level in the indicator, sensitive devices.
start the engine, and hold the engine speed between After disconnecting the high voltage terminals,
3,500 and 4,000 rpm w ithout load (in Por N (CVT busbars, etc., insulate the parts with insulated tape.
model)) or (in neutral (M/T model) until the level in the As a safety warning, attach a sign saying, WORKING
indicator is half full. ON HIGH VOLTAGE PARTS. DO NOT TOUCH! to the
Observe the follow ing instructions when inspecting or steering wheel.
servicing the IMA system:
- When the system is energized, servicing,
disassembling, or replacing items marked with
in each procedure requires insulated tools.
- When the IMA system indicator is on, do the IMA
system troubleshooting first (see page 12-5).
- Wear insulated gloves whenever you inspect or
service the IMA system. Be sure to check the gloves
for pin holes, tears, or other damage.
- To make sure the system is not energized, turn the
battery module switch OFF, and secure the switch in
the OFF position with the locking cover before
servicing the IMA system (see Turning off and on
power to the high voltage circuit).
- Wait at least 5 minutes after turning off the battery
module switch, then disconnect the negative cable
from the 12 V battery (it takes about 5 minutes for
the PDU capacitor to discharge).
- Before disconnecting the high voltage cable
terminals, use a voltmeter to make sure that the
voltage between the terminals is below 30 V.
Service Precautions (cont'd)
Disconnecting the IMA M otor Power Cable Turning Off and On Power to the High Voltage
Connector From the M otor Stator Circuit
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Turn the battery The follow ing procedure should be done before you
module switch OFF. work on or near any energized high voltage
components. Follow the procedure exactly. Otherwise,
Slide the protector (A) in the direction of the arrow. Push
you may be injured or may damage equipment.
the tab (B), then raise the lever (C). Remove the IMA
m otor power cable (D) from the motor stator. 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then remove the
key from the ignition switch.
NOTE:
Turn the battery module switch OFF before 2. Remove the cargo floor lid, the cargo floor box, and
disconnecting the motor power cable. the spare tire (see page 20-64).
If the outside of the IMA m otor power cable connector 3. Loosen the bolt (A), and remove the bolt (B).
is dirty, clean it before you disconnect it.
B
Cover the disconnected connector (E) with a plastic
bag (F), and wrap the IMA motor power cable
terminals with insulating tape (G).
If the IMA motor power cable is wet, dry it with a clean
shop towel. Do not use compressed air.
4. Remove the battery module switch lid (C) from the

IPU cover.
5. Turn the battery module switch (A) OFF, then check
that the bolt (B) is showing.
6. Wait at least 5 minutes to allow the PDU capacitors to

discharge.
H 3
Information
8. Measure the voltage at the IMA battery module Intermittent Failures
terminals (A). There should be less than 30 V. If the
voltage is more than 30 V, there is a problem in the The term intermittent failure means a system may have
system; check for IMA DTCs before continuing, and had a failure, but it is OK now. If the IMA system
replace the DC-DC converter (see page 12-213). indicator on the instrument panel does not come on,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at all
connectors related to the circuit you are
troubleshooting. If the IMA system indicator was on but
then went off, the original problem may have been
intermittent.
Opens and Shorts

Open and short are common electrical terms. An open is
a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an
accidental connection of a wire to ground or to another
wire. In simple electronics, this usually means
something w on't work at all. With complex electronics
such as the MCM, this can mean something works, but
not the way it's supposed to.
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic

9. After service or repairs are completed:
System) to Check for DTCs
Make sure all high voltage circuits are connected
properly. If the IMA system Indicator stays on
Install the IPU cover (see page 12-210).
1. Start the engine, and check the IMA system indicator
10. Push the button (A), and turn the battery module (A).
switch ON.
11. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
(cont'd)
2. If the IMA system indicator stays on, turn the ignition DTC Clear
switch to LOCK (0), then connect the HDS to the data
link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Do not start the
side of the dashboard. engine.
2. Use the HDS to clear the DTC.
NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the user's
manual that came with the HDS.
How to End a Troubleshooting Session


4. Make sure the HDS communicates w ith the vehicle
and the MCM (IMA system). If it doesn't, troubleshoot
the DLC circuit (see page 12-202).
5. Select IMA SYSTEM on the HDS.
6. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
Also check the freeze data and the on-board snapshot.
Refer to the DTC troubleshooting, and do the
NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the user's
manual that came with the HDS.
If you can't duplicate the DTC
Some of the troubleshooting requires you to reset the
MCM, and try to duplicate the DTC. If the problem is
intermittent and you can't duplicate the DTC, do not
continue the procedure. To do so w ill only result in
confusion and, possibly, needlessly replaced parts.
IMA M otor Rotor Position Calibration .. Troubleshooting Circuits at the MCM
Do the IMA m otor rotor position calibration whenever
Connectors
any of these actions are done: Special Tools Required
The MCM is replaced. Digital M ultimeter KS-AHM-32-003*
The IMA m otor rotor position sensor is replaced or - Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2)
removed during service. * Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
The IMA m otor is replaced or removed during service. Program 888-424-68S7
The engine assembly is replaced or removed during
service. 1. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210).
The transmission is replaced or removed during
service.
3. Connect the backprope adapters (A) to the stacking
located underthe driver's side of the dashboard.
patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital
multimeter.

and the MCM (IMA system). If it doesn't, troubleshoot
the DLC circuit (see page 12-202).
4. Select IMA SYSTEM on the HDS.
5. Select the MOTOR ROTOR POSITION CALIBRATION
in the ADJUSTMENT MENU of the HDS.
(cont'd)
Substituting the MCM OBD Status

Special Tools Required The OBD status shows the current system status o f each
Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) tablet tester DTC and all of the parameters. This function is used to
Honda Interface Module (HIM) and an iN workstation see if the repair was successfully finished. The results of
with the latest HDS software version diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed as:
HDS pocket tester PASSED: The on-board diagnosis is successfully
GNA600 and an iN workstation with the latest HDS finished.
software version FAILED: The on-board diagnosis has finished but
MVCI unit with the latest control module (CM) update failed.
software installed NOT COMPLETED: The on-board diagnosis was
Any one of the above updating tools can be used. running, but it is out of the enable conditions of the
DTC.
Use this procedure when you have to substitute a
known-good MCM during a troubleshooting procedure.
1. Remove the MCM (see page 12-212).
2. Install a known-good MCM.
3. Do the MOTOR ROTOR POSITION CALIBRATION in
the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS.
El
DTC (IMA Tw o Drive Detection Item Page

System Cycle IMA Q
Indicator*1) Detection
P0562 (15) o o Motor Control Module (MCM) DTC Troubleshooting

Power Source Circuit Unexpected (see page 12-72)
Voltage
P0562 (94) O o Motor Control Module (MCM) DTC Troubleshooting

System Low Voltage (see page 12-72)
P0602 (91) o o o Motor Control Module (MCM) DTC Troubleshooting

Programming Error (see page 12-74)
P0602 (92) o o o Motor Control Module (MCM) DTC Troubleshooting

Program Not Installed (Battery (see page 12-74)
Condition Monitor Program)
P062F (60) o o o Motor Control Module (MCM) DTC Troubleshooting

Internal Circuit EEPROM Error (see page 12-74)
P062F (61) o o Battery Control Module (BCM) DTC Troubleshooting

Internal Circuit EEPROM Error (see page 12-74)
P06B1 (79) O o o IMA Battery Current Sensor Circuit DTC Troubleshooting

P0A1B (84) O o o Motor Control Module (MCM) DTC Troubleshooting

Internal Circuit Malfunction (see page 12-79)
P0A27 (46) o High Voltage Contactor/Bypass DTC Troubleshooting

Contactor Stays Activated (see page 12-79)
P0A3C (39) O o o Motor Power Inverter (MPI) DTC Troubleshooting

Module Overheating (see page 12-81)
P0A3F (89) o o o Motor Rotor Position Sensor DTC Troubleshooting

Circuit Malfunction (see page 12-82)
P0A5E (24) O o o U Phase M otor Current Sensor DTC Troubleshooting

Circuit Low Voltage (see page 12-85)
P0A5F (25) O o o U Phase M otor Current Sensor DTC Troubleshooting

Circuit High Voltage (see page 12-89)
P0A61 (26) O O o V Phase M otor Current Sensor DTC Troubleshooting

P0A62 (27) O o o V Phase M otor Current Sensor DTC Troubleshooting

*1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking IMA system indicator when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS.
*2: M/T model
*3: CVT model
*4; '12 model
(cont'd)
DTC (IMA Two Drive Detection Item Page

System Cycle
IMA
P0A64 (28) o o o W Phase Motor Current Sensor DTC Troubleshooting

P0A65 (29) O o o W Phase M otor Current Sensor DTC Troubleshooting

P0A78 (32) o o o M otor Power Inverter (MPI) DTC Troubleshooting

Module Internal Circuit (see page 12-108)
Malfunction
P0A7E (72) O O o Battery Module Overheating DTC Troubleshooting

(see page 12-108)
P0A7F (78) O o o Battery Module Deterioration DTC Troubleshooting

(see page 12-109)
P0A94 (48) O DC-DC Converter Output Low DTC Troubleshooting

P0A9D (49) O o o Battery Module Temperature DTC Troubleshooting

Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage (see page 12-112)
P0A9E (50) O o o Battery Module Temperature DTC Troubleshooting

Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage (see page 12-113)
P0AA6 (59) O High Voltage Circuit Isolation DTC Troubleshooting

P0AA7 (76) O Motor Control Module (MCM) DTC Troubleshooting

Internal Circuit Malfunction (see page 12-120)
P0AC0 (65) O o o Battery Current Sensor 1 Circuit DTC Troubleshooting

P0AC1 O o o Battery Current Sensor 1 Circuit DTC Troubleshooting

(115) Low Voltage (see page 12-121)
P0AC2 O o o Battery Current Sensor 1 Circuit DTC Troubleshooting

(114) High Voltage (see page 12-124)
P0AC7 (51) O o o Battery Module Temperature DTC Troubleshooting

P0AC8 (52) O o o Battery Module Temperature DTC Troubleshooting

P0ACC (53) O o o Battery Module Temperature DTC Troubleshooting

*2; M/T model
*3: CVT model
*4; '12 model
E H !

System Cycle IMA E3
POACD (54) o o o Battery Module Temperature DTC Troubleshooting

P0AE1 (62) O o o Bypass Contactor Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting

(see page 12-135)
POAEE O o o Motor Control Module (MCM) DTC Troubleshooting

(109P Internal Circuit Malfunction (see page 12-139)
POBOF (113) O o o Battery Current Sensor 2 Circuit DTC Troubleshooting

P0B10 (117) O o o Battery Current Sensor 2 Circuit DTC Troubleshooting

Low Voltage (see page 12-140)
P0B11 (116) O o o Battery Current Sensor 2 Circuit DTC Troubleshooting

High Voltage (see page 12-143)
P0BE6 (86) o o o U Phase M otor Current Sensor DTC Troubleshooting

POBEA (87) O' o o V Phase M otor Current Sensor DTC Troubleshooting

POBEE (88) O o o W Phase Motor Current Sensor DTC Troubleshooting

POBFD (30) O o o Motor Current Sensor Circuit DTC Troubleshooting

P1437(41) O o o Motor Power Inverter (MPI) DTC Troubleshooting

Module Short Circuit (see page 12-147)
P1440 (57) O o o Motor Power Inverter (MPI) DTC Troubleshooting

Module Output Circuit Malfunction (see page 12-148)
P1446 (74) O o o Battery Module Individual Voltage DTC Troubleshooting

Input Deviation (see page 12-152)
P1448 (63) O o o Intelligent Power Unit (IPU) DTC Troubleshooting

Module Fan Problem (see page 12-154)
P1570 (66) O o o Battery Module Individual Voltage DTC Troubleshooting

P1574 (68) O o o Battery Module Temperature DTC Troubleshooting

Signal Circuit Malfunction (see page 12-160)
*2: M/T model
*3: CVT model
*4: '12 model
(cont'd)
DTC (IMA Two Drive Detection Item

System Cycle IMA O E3
P1575 (12) o o o Motor Power Inverter (MPI) DTC Troubleshooting

Module Voltage Malfunction (see page 12-161)
P1586 (23) O o o Battery Current Sensor Signal DTC Troubleshooting

P.1-5A5 (85) o o o Motor Current Sensor Circuit DTC Troubleshooting

P15AA (93) O o Motor Rotor Position Not Learned DTC Troubleshooting

(see page 12-169)
P15C4 o o Auto Idle Stop System Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting

(118)*2 (M/T model) (see page 12-170)
P15C4 O o Auto Idle Stop System Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting

( 1. 18)*3 (CVT model) (see page 12-177)
PT634 (47) o o o Motor Power Inverter (MPI) DTC Troubleshooting

Module Signal Circuit Malfunction (see page 12-178)
P1673 (22) O Motor Control Module (MCM) DTC Troubleshooting

Relay Stays Activated (see page 12-183)
P16C3 (31) O DC-DC Converter Temperature DTC Troubleshooting

Sensor Circuit Malfunction (see page 12-185)
U0029 (107) O o o F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF DTC Troubleshooting

(Motor Control Module (MCM))) (see page 12-185)
U0029 (108) O o o F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF DTC Troubleshooting

U0038 (99) O o o IMA-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF DTC Troubleshooting

U0100 (102) O o o F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain DTC Troubleshooting

Control Module (PCM) - Motor (see page 12-190)
Control Module (MCM))
U0100 (103) O o o F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain DTC Troubleshooting

U0155 (106) O O- F-CAN Malfunction (Gauge Control DTC Troubleshooting

Module - Motor Control Module (see page 12-190)
(MCM))
*2: M/T model
*3; CVT model
#4: '12 model
System Cycle IMA O E3
U0311 o o o MCM and BCM Program Version DTC Troubleshooting

(123)*4 Mismatch (see page 12-192)
U0312 o o o BCM, MCM and PGM-FI System DTC Troubleshooting

(124)*4 Program Version Mismatch (see page 12-193)
U1204(55) o o o IMA-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain DTC Troubleshooting

U 1220 (34) O o o DC-DC Converter Lost DTC Troubleshooting

Communication With Motor (see page 12-193)
Control Module (MCM)
U1221 (35) O o o o Motor Control Module (MCM) Lost DTC Troubleshooting

Communication with DC-DC (see page 12-196)
Converter
*2: M/T model
*3: CVT model
*4: '12 model
If the vehicle has one of the symptoms below, check fo r a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the HDS. If there is no DTC,
do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom.
Symptom Diagnostic procedure

IMA system indicator stays on, no DTCs set Troubleshoot the IMA system indicator circuit (see page 12-199).
IMA system indicator never comes on, no Troubleshoot the IMA system indicator circuit (see page 12-199).
DTCs set
Charging system indicator stays on, no Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit (see page 12-200).
DTCs set
Charging system indicator flickers, no DTCs Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit (see page 12-201).
set
Charging system indicator never comes on, Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit (see page 12-201).
no DTCs set
HDS does not communicate with the MCM Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 12-202).
or other vehicle systems
Auto idle stop system does not operate Troubleshoot the auto idle stop system
r a n
System Description
MCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (31P)
9 8 7 6 5 4 a iu m r
21 |20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
CO
CO
o
CM
29
CO
28 27 25 24 23 22
n n

number
1 RED IMA-CAN L (IMA Sends and receives With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
CAN communication signal
COMMUNICATION
SIGNAL LOW)
2 WHT IMA-CAN H (IMA Sends and receives With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
CAN communication signal
COMMUNICATION
SIGNAL HIGH)
3 PUR IGHLD (IGNITION Drives MCM relay 1 With ignition switch turned from ON (II)
HOLD) to LOCK (0): about 0 V for several
seconds, then battery voltage
4 LT GRN IGHLD2 (IGNITION Drives MCM relay 2 With ignition switch turned from ON (II)
HOLD 2) to LOCK (0): about 1 V fo r several seconds
5 Not used Not used
6 BLK PG (POWER Ground for MCM Less than 0.2 V at all times
GROUND)
7 PNK IG1 Detects ignition switch W ith ignition switch ON (II): battery
signal voltage
With ignition switch turned from ON (II)
to LOCK (0): about 0 V
8 BRN + BBACK UP Power source for MCM Battery voltage at all times
(VOLTAGE BACK circuit
UP) Power source for DTC
memory
9 PNK/BLK IGA (IGNITION FOR Power source for MCM W ith ignition switch ON (II): battery
ASSIST SYSTEM) control circuit voltage
W ith ignition switch turned from ON (II)
to LOCK (0): battery voltage for about 15
seconds, then about 0 V
MCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (31P)
j 00 j
I T"*
r-
1 CM
9 8 7 6 5 4
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29
n 28 27 n 26 25 24 23 22

number
22 RED F-CAN L (F-CAN Sends and receives With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
SIGNAL LOW
23 WHT F-CAN H (F-CAN Sends and receives With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
SIGNAL HIGH
25 LT BLU FANCTL (FAN IPU module fan speed IPU module fan OFF: battery voltage
CONTROL) control signal output IPU module fan ON: duty controlled
27 GRN SCIMD (SERIAL Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
OUTPUT FOR DC-DC signal
CONVERTER
28 GRY SCIDM (SERIAL Detects With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
INPUT FOR DC-DC communication signal
CONVERTER
MCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (24P)
I
7 6 5 u 2 1
CO
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
24 23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17
Wire side of fem al e terminals

number
1 BLU/BLK NFAN (FAN IPU module fan signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
CONTROL) input IPU module fan ON: duty controlled
2 RED/YEL PRE (PRE CHARGE Drives bypass With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
CONTACTOR) contactor
3 PUR/WHT ISOC (I.STATE OF Battery current sensor With engine running: about 0.5 - 4.5 V
CHARGE NORMAL signal input
RANGE)
4 Not used Not used
5 Not used Not used
6 RED R2 (MOTOR ROTOR M otor rotor position With engine running: pulses
POSITION SENSOR sensor R2 signal input
R2 SIGNAL)
7 BRN R1 (MOTOR ROTOR M otor rotor position With engine running: pulses
POSITION SENSOR sensor R1 signal input
R1 SIGNAL)
8 Not used Not used
9 GRY CNTPG (CONTCTOR Ground for high Less than 0.2 V at all times
POWER GROUND) voltage contactor
10 BLK CNT (CONTACTOR) Drives high voltage With ignition switch ON (II): battery
contactor voltage
11 BLU/YEL TBATT2 (BATTERY 2 Battery module With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.5 -
TEMPERATURE) TBATT2 temperature 4.5 V (depending on battery module
signal 2 input temperature)
12 BLK/WHT ISOCF (I. STATE OF Battery current sensor With engine running: about 0.5 - 4.5 V
CHARGE FINE signal input
RANGE)
14 GRN/YEL SGISOC (I. STATE OF Battery current sensor Less than 0.2 V at all times
CHARGE SENSOR ground
GROUND)
15 WHT S3 (MOTOR ROTOR M otor rotor position With engine running: pulses
POSITION SENSOR sensor S3 signal input
S3 SIGNAL)
MCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (24P)
n I
7 6 5 4 3I u 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
24 23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17

number
16 GRN S1 (MOTOR ROTOR Motor rotor position With engine running: pulses
S1 SIGNAL)
17 YEL/RED VCCISOC (I. STATE Battery current sensor With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
OF CHARGE power W ith ignition switch turned from ON (II)
SENSOR VOLTAGE) to LOCK (0): about 5.0 V for about 10
20 WHT/GRN TBATT3 (BATTERY 3 Battery module With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.5 -
21 YEL/GRN TBATT1 (BATTERY 1 Battery module With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.5 -
22 GRN/BLK SGTB (BATTERY Battery module Less than 0.2 V at all times
TEMPERATURE (temperature sensor)
SENSOR GROUND) ground
23 YEL S4 (MOTOR ROTOR Motor rotor position With engine running: pulses
S4 SIGNAL)
24 BLU S2 (MOTOR ROTOR Motor rotor position With engine running: pulses
S2 SIGNAL)
MCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (22P)
____ _ ..:... I ..:.i

7 6 U 5 4 3 2 1
1 5 1 4 1 3 12 11 10 9 8
19 18 n 17 1 6
O-
CM
2 2 21

number
1 WHT VH (V PHASE HIGH V phase high side With engine running: pulses
SIDE) inverter gate drive
signal output
2 YEL/BLU WH (V PHASE HIGH W phase high side With engine running: pulses
signal output
3 Not used Not used
4 Not used Not used
5 BLU SGIU (U PHASE U phase m otor current Less than 0.2 V at all times
MOTOR CURRENT sensor ground
SENSOR GROUND)
6 WHT/BLK IUPH (I. U. PHASE) U phase motor current With ignition switch ON (II) and engine
sensor signal input stopped: about 2.5 V
7 GRN/YEL VCCIU (U PHASE U phase motor current With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
MOTOR CURRENT sensor power With ignition switch turned from ON (II)
8 RED/YEL UL (U PHASE LOW U phase low side With engine running: pulses
signal output
9 RED/ BLU WL (W PHASE LOW W phase low side With engine running: pulses
signal output
(cont'd)
MCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (22P)
........ I !
7 6 U 5 4 3 2 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
m
21 CM
19 18 f l 17 16
o

number
12 GRN SGIV (V PHASE V phase m otor current Less than 0.2 V at all times
SENSOR GROUND)
14 RED IVPH (I. V. PHASE) V phase m otor current W ith ignition switch ON (II) and engine
15 BLU/YEL VCCIV (V PHASE V phase m otor current With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
SENSOR VOLTAGE) to LOCK (0): about 5.0 V fo r about 10
16 BLU/BLK UH (U PHASE HIGH U phase high side With engine running: pulses
signal output
17 YEL/RED VL {V PHASE LOW V phase low side With engine running: pulses
signal output
18 BLU/RED IPUA (INTELLIGENT IPU serial signal input With engine running: pulses
POWER UNIT A)
19 BRN SGIW (W PHASE W phase m otor current Less than 0.2 V at all times
SENSOR GROUND)
21 GRN/RED IWPH (I. W. PHASE) W phase m otor current With ignition switch ON (II) and engine
22 YEL VCCIW (W PHASE W phase m otor current With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
MCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector E (31P)
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 iL J IT T i
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
n

number
1 WHT VHB8 (HIGH Battery module No. 8 With battery module switch ON: about
VOLTAGE BATTERY terminal voltage input 16.5 V (between VHB7 and VHB8)
8 VOLTAGE
2 BLU VHB7 (HIGH Battery module No. 7 With battery module switch ON: about
7 VOLTAGE
3 Not used Not used
4 Not used Not used
5 Not used Not used
6 Not used Not used
7 Not used Not used
8 GRN/RED VHB4 (HIGH Battery module No. 4 With battery module switch ON: about
4 VOLTAGE
9 GRN VHB3 (HIGH Battery module No. 3 With battery module switch ON: about
3 VOLTAGE
12 YEL VHB6 (HIGH Battery module No. 6 With battery module switch ON: about
6 VOLTAGE
13 GRN/BLK VHB5 (HIGH Battery module No. 5 With battery module switch ON: about
5 VOLTAGE
(cont'd)
MCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector E (31P)
9 8 7 6 5 4 T U L J fT 1
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29 28 27 n 26 25 24 23 22
n

number
20 BLK VHB2 (HIGH Battery module No. 2 With battery module switch ON: about
2 VOLTAGE
21 GRN/YEL VHB1 (HIGH Battery module No. 1 With battery module switch ON: about
1 VOLTAGE
31 RED VHB0 (HIGH Battery module No. 0 With battery module switch ON: about
0 VOLTAGE
IMA System
The IMA (integrated motor assisted) system is a highly-efficient parallel hybrid drive system with a main power unit
(gasoline engine) and an assist unit (electric motor).
The engine is an in-line 4-cylinder 16-valve power plant with a displacement of 91 cu. in (1.5 liters). To reduce fuel use,
the engine is equipped with an auto idle stop system and i-VTEC.
The IMA motor, directly connected to the engine crankshaft, functions as a generator during deceleration, an engine
starter, and a motor to assist the engine.
The IMA system contains a 100 V DC battery, an IMA motor, an intelligent power unit (IPU), an IMA m otor power cable, a
control system, and related parts. The IPU contains a battery module, a motor control module (MCM), a DC-DC
converter, and a m otor power inverter.
The IMA system improves fuel economy by capturing energy with the electric motor during deceleration, and using that
energy to charge the IMA battery.
IMA I VIOTOR
IMA MOTOR
POWER CABLE
Operating Conditions
1. Engine start:
The IMA system drives the IMA m otor and starts the engine during normal starts and when re-starting from an idle
stop. The IMA motor is mounted directly to the engine crankshaft.
2. Start running (Engine operation and m otor assist):
The IMA m otor assists the engine.
3. Slow acceleration (Engine-only operation):
Runs only with the engine.
4. Acceleration (Engine operation and motor assist):
The IMA m otor assists the engine.
5. High speed cruise (Engine-only operation):
Runs only w ith the engine. When the state of charge (SOC) drops, the IMA m otor begins to charge the battery
module.
6. Deceleration (Battery module charging):
The IMA m otor converts the deceleration energy and charges the battery module.
7. Stop (Auto idle stop):
When conditions are satisfied, the ECM/PCM stops the engine automatically.
Drive pattern Engine start Start running Low speed cruise Acceleration High speed cruise Deceleration Idle stop
IMA motor DRIVE ASSIST STOP ASSIST STOP or CHARGE CHARGE STOP
]B
A F | ( __ Jp _] nI / m u a
I
1
1
1
I
CHRG/ASST
indicator mBODfflDDiDommmDO \i DDmODODOOHIIIIDDDOO \ nmnmfTTTiinfTiniffTim \ DDDDDUnnilllllllllD \ (TTTiimnirTTTirTnim \ nilllllllDDODOQDOtn \ 1 nmnmnrmiirrinnmnrin \
l^CHRG ASST j ^CHRG ASST) [CHRG ASST )I^CHRG ASST) (CHRG " ASST )[chrg " ASST ) (cHRG ASST)
^Charging condition
is shown
_+ 1K3E5
+ H - +E
MID a 9 9 a
-
E li ^Charging condition
B s9 f a
is shown
System Diagram
* : CVT model
When the battery module state-of-charge (SOC) is at or above the specified value
When the SOC o f the battery module is at or above the specified value, the generation amount is restricted to prevent
overcharging. Since regenerative braking force is insufficient at this time, the ECM/PCM increases engine braking
power.
When the battery module state-of-charge (SOC) is at or below the specified value
When the SOC of the battery module drops, idle speed is increased to charge the battery module.
CVT model: When the battery module SOC value is low, selecting the L range mode gives priority to battery module
charging by lowering the IMA motor assist level, increasing the idle speed, and increasing the regeneration amount (see
page 14-37). Charge priority control is canceled when the battery module SOC reaches about 40%.
When the engine cannot be started with the IMA motor
Based on signals from the MCM, when the SOC value drops, when temperature is low, or when there is trouble with the
IMA system, the ECM/PCM judges that the engine cannot be started by the IMA motor, so it is started by the 12V starter
motor.
3-Mode drive system
M/T model: When the SPORT mode is selected, the MCM increases the IMA motor assist amount more than in NORMAL
and/or ECON mode to improve acceleration.
Auto Idle Stop System

To reduce fuel use and to minimize tailpipe emissions, the auto idle stop system shuts off the engine by cutting the fuel
injection.
Based on inputs from various sensors and control units, the ECM/PCM may or may not allow auto idle stop under
sim ilar operating conditions.
When auto idle stop is operating, the auto stop indicator blinks. If the driver's door is opened during auto idle stop, the
auto stop indicator blinks and a warning buzzer sounds to remind the driver that auto idle stop is in operation.
ECM/PCM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM (CVT model)
MCM
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
VSA MODULATOR CONTROL
UNIT
ECM/PCM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM (CVT model )
M C M
! - MCM
] CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT

Systems and functions affecting auto idle stop
MCM
IM A m o to r roto r p o sition sensor
learning state
MPI tem perature
Battery m odule o u tp u t < J M A-C AN ^>
(Battery m odule tem perature/SO C)
Idle stop enable/disable
Idle stop enable tim e
Request to restart
PGM-FI SYSTEM SIGNALS
Vehicle speed
- Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
Engine speed
VSA MODULATOR CONTROL UNIT - CMP sensor
CAS control enab l e (CVT m odel) - CKP sensor
Throttle angle
- APP sensor
Brake
- Brake pedal position switch
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT JUDGM ENT ITEM - I dle stop switch (CVT model)
Idle stop enab l e/disable Clutch (M /T model)
I dle stop enable tim e - Clutch pedal position switch A
Request to restart - Clutch pedal position switch C
Gear position (M /T model)
- Neutral position switch
n
B-CAN
ECM/
PCM
- Back up light switch
Engine coo l ant temperature/
intake air temperature
- ECT sensor 1
9 - IAT sensor
- Outside air temperature sensor
Brake booster pressure
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE <w > - Brake booster pressure sensor A
- Brake booster pressure sensor B
------------
MODE BUTTONS ON/OFF
3-MODE SW I TCH
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM SIGNALS

(CVT m odel)
Vehicle speed
- Vehicle speed sensor
< S h ift position
-T ra nsm issio n range sw itch
S tart clutch l earning state
CVT flu id tem perature
Pulley ratio
S ligh t creep enable
G radient Judgment
(cont'd)
Auto Idle Stop Conditions

1-Vehicle is stopping or is stopped (M/T model)
When the vehicle is stopped after driving at or above the specified speed, the engine stops when you fully press the
clutch pedal and shift to neutral.
Shifting to any gear with the clutch pedal fully pressed restarts the engine.
Engine
Engine stop restart
Vehicle
speed
T hrottle
position
Brake
pedal
Clutch
pedal
N eutra l
position
sw itch
2-Vehicle is stopping or is stopped (M/T model)
When the vehicle is stopped after driving at or above the specified speed in 2nd gear or higher, the engine stops when
you fully press the clutch pedal and shift to neutral.
Sh ifting to any gear with the clutch pedal fully pressed restarts the engine.
Engine
Engine stop restart
Vehicle
speed
T hrottle
position
Brake
pedal
Clutch
pedal
Neutral
position
sw itch
1-Vehicle is decelerating (M/T model)

During deceleration, shifting to neutral from 2nd gear or higher enables auto idle stop. Releasing the brake pedal (1) or
shifting into any gear (2) disables auto idle stop and restarts the engine.
Vehicle speed and engine Engine

speed co n d ition s m atch restart
Vehicle
speed
T hrottle
position
Brake
pedal
C l utch
pedal
Neutral
p o s it i on
sw itch
2-Vehicle is decelerating (M/T model)
During deceleration, pressing the clutch pedal fully in 2nd gear or higher enables auto idle stop. Releasing the brake
pedal (1) or releasing the clutch pedal (2) disables auto idle stop and restarts the engine.
Vehicle speed and engine Engine

speed co n d ition match restart
speed
T hro ttle
Brake
pedal
Clutch
pedal
Vehicle is stopping or is stopped (CVT model)

When the vehicle is stopped after driving at or above the specified speed, and the transmission is in D or N, the engine
stops when you press the brake pedal.
Releasing the brake pedal disables auto idle stop and restarts the engine.
Vehicle speed Engine Engine

co n ditions m atched stop restart
Vehicle
speed
T hrottle
position
Brake
pedal
Restart by Climate Control Unit
M/T model
The ECM restarts the engine from auto idle stop if it is requested by the climate control unit. The restart happens after
you press the clutch pedal and shift out of neutral.
When a request to restart is received, the auto stop indicator blinks more quickly than normal.
Engine stop Request to Engine
restart restart
CVT model
The PCM restarts the engine from auto idle stop if it is requested by the climate control unit.
System Indicators
If there is an operation error or a system failure during auto idle stop, the error information is shown on the
multi-information display (MID), the indicator in the gauge control module blinks, and the system buzzer sounds.
Opening the driver's door

If the driver's door is opened during auto idle stop, the auto stop indicator blinks and the system buzzer sounds to
remind you that auto stop is in operation.
Clutch pedal is not fully pressed (M/T model)

If the clutch pedal is not fully pressed during auto idle stop, the engine does not restart because the system knows the
transmission is in gear. If this happens, a message to fully press the clutch pedal appears on the MID.
Eng i ne stop Engine restart
Idle stop J
MID ON
m ph 4^ Operation w ith
[km /h] the gear
V ehic l e Stop engaged
speed
Clutch pedal pressed CLOSE
Cl utch pedal position sw itch A

Clutch pedal position sw itch C
Clutch pedal released
ON
Neutral
position In gear
switch
OFF
Vehicle stopped for 5 minutes while in gear (M/T model)
During auto idle stop, if the transmission is in gear with the vehicle stopped for 5 minutes, a message to shift into neutral
appears on the MID.
Shifting into neutral and then back into a gear resets the timer another 5 minutes. To restart the engine when this
message appears, press the clutch pedal while the transmission is in gear.
5 m inutes
Engine stop passed
Engine restart (M/T model)

If the system cannot restart the engine because of a battery module problem (low SOC, battery failure), a message on
the M ID tells you to restart with the ignition switch.
Even if the RESTART ENGINE message appears, you may still be able to start the engine with the IMA system by
pressing the clutch pedal.
Engine stop Engine start

I dle stop
RESTART ENGI NE
MID I ON
Request to
cancel idle No request ON
stop
SOC 3 seg m en ts ' snejmonts
indicator soc * Turn the
m ph indica t ion [0] igniton
Vehicle lkm /hl sw itch to
Stop
speed START
Pressed
Clutch
pedal J
Released
Disable Conditions for Auto Idle Stop (M /T model)
When any of the follow i ng conditions are met, auto idle stop is disabled.
Idle Stop Disable Conditions Parameter (HDS)

Vehicle Speed VEHICLE SPEED
19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
More than 0 mph (0 km/h) with brake pedal fully released (brake pedal position switch OFF).
Does not exceed 7 mph (12 km/h) in forward gears.
Does not exceed 19 mph (30 km/h) in reverse.
Transmission o BACK UP LIG HT
Clutch pedal is pressed during a momentary stop, and 1st gear is the probable gear SW ITCH
selection. NP SW ITCH
Shifter is in reverse. GEAR PO SITIO N
Neutral position switch signal does not turn ON/OFF after exceeding 3 mph (5 km/h). A U T O IDLE STOP DOES
NOTE: NO T OCCUR (N P
Estimation of gear selection is calculated from a engine speed and output shaft SW ITCH)
(countershaft) speed within the ECM.
Reverse position is detected by back up light switch input signal (O N in reverse).
Neutral position is detected by neutral position switch input signal (ON in neutral).
Brake Pedal BRAKE SW ITCH
Brake pedal position switch signal does not turn ON/OFF after exceeding 3 mph (5 km/h).
NOTE: Brake pedal pressing is detected by brake pedal position switch input signal (ON with
pedal pressed).
Accelerator Pedal APP SENSOR
Accelerator pedal is pressed (APP sensor is at least 20%).
Clutch Pedal CLUTCH PEDAL
Clutch pedal position switches A and C do not switch to OPEN/CLOSED after exceeding 3 mph POSITION SW ITCH A
(5 km/h). CLUTCH PEDAL
NOTE: Clutch pedal position switches A and C are two input signals that detect clutch pedal POSITION SW ITCH A (C)
pressing. (Switches are CLOSED when clutch pedal is pressed.) A U T O IDLE STOP DOES
N O T OCCUR (CLUTCH
PEDAL POSITIO N
SW ITCH)
Engine Coolant Temperature and Outside Air Temperature ENGINE C O O LA N T
Engine coolant temperature does not exceed specified value, depending on outside air TEM PERATURE
temperature, A/C system use, and if ECON mode is on or off. IA T SENSOR

ECM
A related DTC is stored.
Communication problem with any control unit related to auto idle stop.
50 seconds after starting engine.
IMA System SOC
Battery module state-of-charge (SOC) is 38.5% ('12 model: 41.5%) or less (battery module MPI TEMPERATURE
SOC indicator shows one segment or less). MOTOR ASSIST LIMIT
Motor power inverter (MPI) temperature is 203 F [95 C] or more. CMD
Battery module power is regulated to 7.0 kW or less. ASSIST POWER LIMIT
IMA motor rotor calibration is not completed. OF IMA BATTERY BY
A related DTC is stored TEMPERATURE
ASSIST POWER LIMIT
OF IMA BATTERY BY
VOLTAGE
MOTOR ROTOR
POSITION
CALIBRATION STATE
Brake Booster Pressure BRAKE BOOSTER
Brake booster pressure is not within 310-350 mmHg at 0 mph (0 km/h) (threshold depends PRESSURE SENSOR (S)
on vehicle speed and atmospheric pressure). A+B
A related DTC is stored. AUTO IDLE STOP DOES
NOT OCCUR (BRAKE)
Climate Control System IDLE STOP PERMIT
Defogger switch is ON. TIME (A/C)
Temperature setting is MAX COOL or MAX HOT, and ECON mode is off. IDLE STOP RELEASE
Blower motor voltage is 8 V or more (fan speed indicator shows five segments or more), and COUNTER
ECON mode is off. AUTO IDLE STOP DOES
Outside air temperature is 4 F [20 C] or less. NOT OCCUR (A/C)
Windshield fogging is detected (based on outside air temperature, humidity, and other
conditions), and ECON mode is off.
Selected system temperature is colder or warmer than the outside air temperature, and
ECON mode is off.
System calculation for auto idle stop is 10 seconds or less.
Disable Conditions for Auto Idle Stop (CVT model)
When any of the following conditions are met, auto idle stop is disabled.

6 mph (10 km/h) or more.
More than 0 mph (0 km/h) with brake pedal fully released (brake pedal position switch OFF).
Does not exceed 7 mph (12 km/h) in forward gears.
Does not exceed 7 mph (12 km/h) in reverse.
Transmission A/T D SWITCH
Shift position is not D or N. A/TN SWITCH
Start clutch calibration is not complete. LEARN CONDITION
CVT fluid temperature is not over definite value. PULLEY RATIO
Pulley ratio is less than 2.1.
Uphill judgment.
Slight creep disable.
Shift position is not judged.
VSA
CAS control disabled.
Brake Pedal IDLE STOP SW
Brake pedal not pressed (idle stop switch CLOSE, brake pedal position switch OFF). BRAKE SWITCH
Sudden braking. AUTO IDLE STOP DOES
Idle stop switch signal does not indicate OPEN/CLOSE after exceeding 11 mph (18 km/h). NOT OCCUR(IDLE STOP
Brake pedal position switch signal does not indicate ON/OFF after exceeding 11 mph (18 SW)
km/h).
NOTE:
Brake pedal pressing is detected by brake pedal position switch input signal (ON with pedal
pressed).
Brake pedal pressing is detected by idle stop switch input signal (OPEN with pedal pressed).
Engine Coolant Temperature and Outside Air Temperature ENGINE COOLANT
Engine coolant temperature does not exceed specified value, depending on outside air TEMPERATURE
temperature, A/C system use, and if ECON mode is on or off. IAT SENSOR

PCM
Communication problem with any control unit related to auto idle stop.
50 seconds after starting engine.
IMA System SOC
Battery module state-of-charge (SOC) is 38.5% ('12 model: 41.5%) or less (battery module MPI TEMPERATURE
SOC indicator shows one segment or less). MOTOR ASSIST LIMIT
Motor power inverter (MPI) temperature is 203 F [95 C] or more. CMD
Battery module power is regulated to 7.0 kW or less. ASSIST POWER LIMIT
IMA motor rotor calibration is not completed. OF IMA BATTERY BY
A related DTC is stored TEMPERATURE
ASSIST POWER LIMIT
OF IMA BATTERY BY
VOLTAGE
MOTOR ROTOR
POSITION
CALIBRATION STATE
Brake Booster Pressure # BRAKE BOOSTER
on vehicle speed and atmospheric pressure). A+B
A related DTC is stored. AUTO IDLE STOP DOES
NOT OCCUR (BRAKE)
Temperature setting is MAX COOL or MAX HOT, and ECON mode is off. IDLE STOP RELEASE
Blower motor voltage is 8 V or more (fan speed indicator shows five segments or more), and COUNTER
ECON mode is off. AUTO IDLE STOP DOES
Outside air temperature is 4 F [20 C] or less. NOT OCCUR (A/C)
Windshield fogging is detected (based on outside air temperature, humidity, and other
conditions), and ECON mode is off.
Selected system temperature is colder or warmer than the outside air temperature, and
ECON mode is off.
System calculation for auto idle stop is 10 seconds or less.
Engine Restart Conditions After Auto Idle Stop (M /T model)
When any of the following conditions are met, the engine restarts after idle stop.
Engine Restart Conditions Parameter (HDS)

Engine Start Switch STARTER SWITCH
Clutch pedal pressed, and the ignition switch to START (III).
Clutch pedal is released at 3 mph (5 km/h) or more. CLUTCH PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH A
CLUTCH PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH A
(C)
Transmission NP SWITCH
Clutch pedal is pressed, and shifter is moved into a gear.
Brake System BRAKE SWITCH
Pedal is released while decelerating during idle stop.
NOTE: To restart, press clutch pedal with shifter in neutral.
Clutch Pedal CLUTCH PEDAL
Clutch pedal is released, and shifter is moved into a gear while decelerating during idle POSITION SWITCH A
stop. CLUTCH PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH A
(C)
IMA System SOC
SOC is 37% ('12 model: 40%) or less (battery module SOC indicator shows one segment
or less).
on vehicle speed and atmospheric pressure). A +B
NOTE: To restart, press clutch pedal with shifter in neutral. IDLE STOP RELEASE
Idle stop cancellation counter reaches zero. COUNTER
Engine Restart Conditions After Auto Idle Stop (CVT model)

When any of the following conditions are met, the engine restarts after idle stop.
Engine Restart Conditions Parameter (HDS)

Engine Start Switch STARTER SWITCH
Shift position is in N, and ignition switch is turned to START (III).
Acceleration exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
Vehicle speed pulse generated during idle stop.
Transmission @A/TP SWITCH
Shift position is P or R. A/TR SWITCH
Brake System BRAKE SWITCH
Pedal is released.
Accelerator pedal is pressed (APP sensor is 0.2%).
IMA System SOC
SOC is 37% ('12 model: 40%) or less (battery module SOC indicator shows one segment
or less).
Brake booster pressure is not within 310-350 mmHg at 0 mph (0 km/h). (Threshold PRESSURE SENSOR (S)
depends on vehicle speed and atmospheric pressure.) A +B
# Defogger switch is ON. TIME (A/C)
Idle stop cancellation counter reaches zero. IDLE STOP RELEASE
COUNTER
Auto Idle Stop Conditions
Battery module SOC
When the MCM determines that the remaining battery module state-of-charge (SOC) is within the idle stop enable area,
it allows auto idle stop. When the battery module SOC goes below the idle stop enable area during idle stop, the MCM
requests an engine restart from the ECM/PCM. To confirm the battery module SOC, use the HDS data list. An
approximate SOC can also be determined by counting the segments in the battery module SOC indicator.
*11 model:
12 model:
BATTERY MODULE
Battery module output
The MCM monitors the temperature of the battery module with the battery module temperature sensors. If the output of
the battery module is within the idle stop enable area, the MCM allows auto idle stop. If the battery module enters the
idle stop disable area, the MCM disables auto idle stop.
Battery m odule
l evel (%)
80
75
70
65
60 id le stop enable- aroa
55
50
45
40
35
30 Idle stop disable area
25
23 Battery m odule
20 tem perature
-4 5 14 23 32 41 50 59 68 77 86 95 104 113 122 131 140 F
[-20] [-151 [-10] [-5] [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] [40] [45] [50] [55] [60] [C]
O u ts id e a ir t e m p e r a t u r e a n d e n g in e c o o la n t t e m p e r a t u r e
The outside air and engine coolant temperatures affecting auto idle stop vary, depending on the A/C system mode and if
ECON mode is on or off. When both the outside air and the engine coolant temperatures are within the idle stop enable
area, the ECM/PCM allows auto idle stop. When the temperatures are within the idle stop disable area, the ECM/PCM
prevents auto idle stop.
Engine coolant
temperature
op pcj ECON m ode (Effective control)
284 [140] -
266 [130] -
248 [120] -
230 [110] 9
212 [100] -
194 [90] - Idle? stop enable area
176 [80] -
158 [70] -
140 [60] -
122 [50] - I
104 [40]
86 [30] -
68 [20]
Idle stop disable area
50 [10]
32 [0] -
14 [-10]
-4 [-20]
Outside air
temperature
-4 5 14 23 32 41 50 59 68 77 86 95 104 113 . . . 122 Fr
[-20] [-15] [-10] [-5] [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] [40] [45] [50] [C]
Engine coolant
temperature
NORMAL/SPORT m ode (Non-Effective control)
F [C]
284 [140]
266 [130] -
248 [120] 9
230 [110] j
Idle stop enable area
212 [100] ~
194 [90] ~
176 [80] -
158 [70] -
Disabled during D isable d when
140 [60] cooling system th e passenger
monitoring c o m p a rtm en t
hea-.rrr is o r
122 [50] - \
104 [40]
86 [30]
68 [20] k i ln stop disable area
50 [10]
32 [0] -
14 [-10]
-4 [-20] Outside air
temperature
-4 14 5 23 41 50 77 86 95 104 113 122
[-20] [-15] [-10] [-5] [5] [10] [151 [20] [25] [30] [35] [40] [45] [50] PC]
Auto Idle Stop Control by the Climate Control System
When you operate the climate control unit (except the OFF and RECIRCULATION functions), auto idle stop is managed
by the climate control system. The climate control unit calculates the enabling/disabling and the allowable time for auto
idle stop. This is based on the ECON mode, the battery module temperature, and signals transmitted from several
sensors.
ECON MODE
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE ECON Engine coolant
SWITCH
SENSOR Engine coolant temperature
temperature Request to turn on
Request to cool auto stop indicator
SUNLIGHT down battery (Normal blinking or
SENSOR module quick blinking)
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR B-CAN F-CAN
CLIMATE
CONTROL
HUMIDITY UNIT
SENSOR
ECM/PCM
GAUGE
EVAPORATOR B-CAN CONTROL F-CAN IDLE STOP
SENSOR MODULE CANCELLATION
Idle stop COUNTER
Idle stop enabled
enabled Idle stop
I dle stop disabled
disabled Idle stop
Idle stop allowable
all owable tim e
time AUTO STOP
INDICATOR
F-CAN
Request to
cool down
battery m odule
When idle stop is enabled, the ECM/PCM sets the allowable time in the idle stop cancellation counter. When the counter
reaches zero, the engine restarts.
Turning on the defogger switch or selecting DEF on the mode switch causes the climate control unit to request an
engine restart from the ECM/PCM.
(cont'd)
Climate control unit decision criteria for auto idle stop

The decision criteria is based on which driving mode is selected, NORMAL, SPORT, or ECON. In ECON mode, the
enabling of auto idle stop has a higher priority than in NORMAL or SPORT mode.
If the climate control unit calculates any time less than 10 seconds, auto idle stop is not enabled (see page 21-25).
Request by the MCM to increase air volume of blower motor

When the temperature of battery module is high, the MCM signals the climate control unit for an increase in air volume
from the blower motor. The climate control unit then increases the blower motor speed.
intelligent Power Unit (IPU)
The IPU consists of the power control unit (PCU), the battery module, and the junction board. The IPU is located under
the cargo area compartment to lower the center of gravity of the vehicle and to increase space in the vehicle interior.
(cont'd)
Power Control Unit (PCU)

The PCU consists of the motor control module (MCM), the DC-DC converter, the motor power inverter (MPI) module,
and the phase motor current sensor.
The MCM controls the IMA motor and monitors the condition of the battery module.
Motor C o n t r o l Module (MCM)

The MCM calculates the battery module SOC and controls the IPU module fan. The SOC is calculated using voltage,
temperature, input current, and output current readings from the battery module.
The MCM controls the DC/AC conversion between the battery module 100 V to the 3-phase AC IMA motor.
The MCM also controls the IMA motor assist and regeneration.
INPUTS MCM OUTPUTS

i
ASSIST/REGENERATIVE ASSIST/REGENERAT I VE
PERFORMANCE BATTERY MODULE PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR MP I MODULE
HIGH VOLTAGE CONTACTOR
BATTERY MODULE VOLTAGE
BYPASS CONTACTOR
BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE MOTOR CONTROL
IM A SYSTEM INDICATOR
IPU MODULE FAN -- K -- K
(OPERATION SENSOR) SIGNAL 1
------- 1 / 19 IPU MODULE FAN
INPUT DTC FUNCTION OUTPUT BATTERY MODULE
DC-DC CONVERTER
(STATE-OF-CHARGE)
(TEMPERATURE SENSOR) SIGNAL
MCM RELAY 1 AND 2
MPI MODULE
(TEMPERATURE SENSOR) SIGNAL DLC COMMUNICATION DC-DC CONVERTER
FUNCTION
DLC SIGNAL SYSTEM TROUBLE SIGNAL
DLC SIGNAL
U/V/W PHASE MOTOR
CURRENT SENSOR
Motor Power Inverter (MPI) Module
The MPI module converts 100 V DC into 3-phase AC to run the electric motor during assist.
During regeneration, the MPI module converts AC voltage to DC.
The MPI module is air cooled. The heat from the heat sink is exhausted to the cargo area by the IPU module fan.
DC-DC Converter
Instead of using an alternator to maintain the 12 volt battery, the electrical system uses a DC-DC converter. The
converter converts high voltage direct current into low voltage direct current with little energy loss.
If a problem is detected in the 12 volt charging system, the DC-DC converter turns on the charging system indicator by
sending a signal to the gauge control module via the MCM.
The DC-DC converter has a built-in temperature sensor and temperature information is sent to the MCM. When DC-DC
converter temperature rises, the MCM drives the IPU module fan. If the DC-DC converter temperature rises abnormally,
DC-DC converter output is limited. If the temperature continues to rise, the DC-DC converter output is stopped.
Heat generated by the DC-DC converter is exhausted to the cargo area by the IPU module fan.
(cont'd)
IMA M otor
The IMA motor assists the engine during acceleration, runs the vehicle during low speed cruise, starts the engine, and
charges the battery module.
The IMA motor is located between the engine and the transmission. It consists of a 3-phase coil stator and a permanent
magnet rotor that is directly connected to the engine crankshaft. An IMA motor rotor position sensor is mounted on the
back of the engine block to detect the position of the rotor.
Model MF6
Type Brushless DC Electrical Motor
Standard Voltage (V) 100
Power (kW [PS]/rpm) 10 [14]/1500
Torque (N-m [kg-m]/rpm) 78 [8.0]/1000
MOTOR STATOR CYLINDER BLOCK
IMA MOTOR ROTOR

IMA MOTOR ROTOR
Transmission
Transmission side after transmission,
side after transmission IMA m o to r housing, and
removal IMA motor ro to r removal
Battery Module
A light-weight and compact Ni-MH (nickel-metal hydride) battery supplies energy to the IMA system.
The battery module has seven blocks that are connected in series. Each block generates 14.4 V. The total battery voltage
is a nominal 100 V.
The battery module has three built-in thermistor temperature sensors to monitor battery temperature.
BATTERY MODULE
(cont'd)
Battery module output control

The battery module output control maintains the battery module SOC and temperature. It also prolongs battery life by
setting the correct limits for battery output to the IMA motor and battery input from charging. Without this control, the
battery module would quickly deteriorate.
IMA-CAN IM A m o to r control
IM A c o n tro l system * MPI
(ECM/PCM) IM A m oto r torq u e
request
(M CM )
C o n tro l assist and

Drive signal>
Voltage convert
DC-DC converter
regeneration perm ission signal

a m o u n t to w a rd the IM A m oto r
O utput
IM A battery m o d u l e o u tpu t
control (MCM)
IMA-CAN
requested torque
O
SOC m anagem ent DC-DC co n ve rte r c o n tro l
C urrent sequence tim e (MCM ) Battery m odule
m anagem ent Assist and regeneration
perm ission am ount Accepts or rejects DC-DC
Tem perature
m anagem ent converter o p e ra t i on based Battery m odule condition
on battery m odule condition. Battery m odule current sensor
Battery m odule tem perature
sensor
Battery m odule voltage
Battery m odule tem perature, SOC, V o l tage
Relation to o u tpu t
lim it and SOC Assist l i m it
[kWJ
A ssist
Regeneration
HDS Parameter Normal Control Area

SOC 25 - 75 %
SOC POWER SAVE
ON/OFF
(PSSOC)
^ ^ 2
Temperature control
O utput lim it related

SOC A ssist am o u n t
HDS Parameter Normal Control Area

BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE Depend on outside air
SENSOR 1 (TBATT1) temperature
BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
ON/OFF
POWER SAVE (PSTBATT)
Consecutive output control
To prevent battery module overheating and deterioration, the battery module output control manages the consecutive
outputs of battery assist and sets an allowable amount.
Junction board
The junction board consists of a high-voltage contactor, a bypass contactor, a bypass resistor, a battery current sensor,
a fuse, and a battery module switch. The junction board is mounted on the battery module, and distributes high voltage.
Battery Module Switch

The battery module switch is connected in series with the battery module fuse. Always turn the battery module switch to
the OFF position whenever service or checks are required on or around the high voltage circuits. Follow the service
precautions (see page 12-3).
Contactors
The high voltage contactor and bypass contactor are connected at the positive (+ ) output side of the battery module.
These contactors are controlled by the MCM, connecting the battery module to the high voltage circuits. The current
flows through the bypass contactor and the bypass resistor at start-up.
The bypass contactor and the bypass resistor are used during start up to charge the capacitors in the PDU, limiting the
initial current.
Battery Current Sensor
The battery current sensor detects the input and output current of the battery module. The current detected by the
sensor is used to compute the battery module SOC.
IPU Module Fan
The battery module, the MPI module, and the DC-DC converter generate heat during charge/discharge. The IPU is
equipped with a fan to cool these parts, to assure proper battery performance, and to protect the system. The fan has a
control circuit and a rotation sensor that are controlled by the MCM. When the temperature of the battery module, the
MPI module, or the DC-DC converter exceeds a specified value, the MCM operates the IPU module fan. The cooling air is
drawn into the battery module from the left side of the rear seat, then it is exhausted into the cargo area through the MP I
module heat sink and the DC-DC converter heat sink.
(cont'd)
Power Cables
The IMA motor power cable connects the IMA motor and the MPI module. The cable feeds through an aluminum tube
for damage protection and to prevent electrical noise. The 12 volt power cable from the DC-DC converter goes through
the same aluminum tube. This tube is attached to the underside of the vehicle by orange-colored tube clamps.
Iffil
Circuit Diagram
--------------: S h ie ld in g
-------------- : C A N lin e
U N D E R -D A S H
F U S E /R E L A Y B O X
-B L U -
- G R N ----------
DATA
- P N K ---------- ^ LIN K
CO NNECTOR
FUSES:
B R N -----------
BATTERY TERMINAL FUSE BOX
N o . A3 (20 A)
N o . A1 (100 A)

N o . B42IMA1 (7.5 A) BRN
r B L K ------------
N o . B53 IMA2 (15 A)

N o . B1 BACK UP (15 A)
N o . B60 IGSW (50 A)
N o . B22 METER (7.5 A)
^7
N o . B12IG I MA (10 A)
N o . B5 BACK LIGHT (10 A )*1
N o . B24 STOP/HORN (10 A)
*1: M/T m o d e l
*2 : C V T m o d el
(cont'd)
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
C A N lin e
C403 cm C110
17 20
- - W H T ----------------- - 3- - l
IM A - C A N H
- - R E D ----------------- - 3-
IM A - C A N L
- - W HT - --------- G R N -------------
- RED - ---------P N K -------------
12P J U N C T IO N
CONNECTOR
r--1
12P
J U N C T IO N
V Y
CONNECTOR
,---- - G R N -----------------

i i " - - P N K ------------------
f-l- - G R N -----------------
- P N K -----------------
! f-
i___i_ . - G R N ------------------ ---- +--------GRN _A36
i I F-C A N H
i - P N K -------------. I A 37
I ---------------- P N K
F-C A N L
G AUG E CONTROL
M O DULE
i m
ECM/PCM
*1 : M/T model
*2: CVT model
: Shielding
------------- : Shielding
i n
BATTERY
F -A A A r-
JAMr-
H -A /W
f AAA/
f Wv
f WV
HW H
H-VW
f"AAA/
(cont'd)
- Shielding
9 ~ t
*1 ; M /T m o d e l
*2: CVT model
*3:'11 model
*4:'12 m odel
MCM A (31P) MCM B (24P) MCM C (22P)
_ r i 1
o>
00
9 5 4 3 i i __ i n r 1 7 6 I 5. H I ] J 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 U 2 1
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
24 23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17 22 21 n 20 19 18 17 16
CM
31 30 29
n 28 27 n 26
m
24 23 22
Wire side of female Wire side of female Wire side of female

terminals terminals terminals
MCM E (31P)
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 IT__ II 2 | 1
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
n n
Wire side of female
terminals
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
Rem ova l /Installation, page 12-221
IM A MOTOR ROTOR POSITION TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

SENSOR (CVT model)
R em oval/Insta l lation, page 12-228 Replacement, page 14-200
MOTOR CONTROL MODULE (MCM) DC-DC CONVERTER
R em oval/Installation, page 12-212 R em oval/Install ation, page 12-213
Update, page 12-211
MOTOR POWER INVERTER (MPI) MODULE

R em oval/ I nstallation, page 12-214
INTELLIGENT POWER UNIT (IPU)

FRAME SEAL
M CM RELAY 2
Test, page 22-92
BATTERY MODULE SWITCH

M CM RELAY 1 Service Precautions, page 12-4
Test, page 22-92
BATTERY MODULE JUNCTION BOARD

Rem oval/Insta l lation, page 12-217
BATTERY MODULE SWITCH
(cont'd)
M/T model
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION

SWITCH C SWITCH A
A d justm ent, page 13-6 Adjustm ent, page 13-6
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

Test, page 22-246
Adjustm ent, page 19-6 DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
R em oval/ I nsta l lation, page 19-6 General T ro u b l eshooting Inform ation, page 12-5
CVT model
IDLE STOP SWITCH

General T ro u b le sho o t i ng I nform ation, page 12-5
IM A SYSTEM INDICATOR
System Description, page 12-26
A uto Idle Stop C onditions, page 12-37
Circuit Tro u b l eshooting, page 12-199
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0562: Motor Control Module (MCM) 12. Measure the voltage between MCM connector
Power Source Circuit Unexpected Voltage
DTC P0562: Motor Control Module (MCM) MCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
System Low Voltage

+ B B A C K UP
NOTE: (BRN)
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general J __ nr:::..:.:.. ::i.. ____ n _
0

CM
9 8 7 6 5 4
If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
27 fl 26 25 24 23 22
f\)
00
for DTC U1204. 31 30 29
f) n
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
4. Check the No. B1 BACK UP (15 A) fuse in the Is there 12 Vbattery voltage?
under-dash fuse/relay box. YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
Is the fuse OK? the MCM, then go to step 25.
YES-Go to step 5. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. B1

BACK UP (15 A) fuse and the MCM (A8), then go to
NO-Go to step 13. step 18.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 13. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
6. Check the MCM BACKUP SOURCE VOLTAGE in the 14. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210).
Is there 12 V battery voltage? cover (see page 12-212).
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. 16. Disconnect MCM connector A (31P).
No. B1 + B BACK UP (15 A) fuse and the MCM.B
NO-Go to step 7.
8. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
11. Disconnect MCM connector A (31P).
17. Check for continuity between MCM connector 28. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software
terminal A8 and body ground. (see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM
(see page 12-8).
M CM CONNECTOR A (31P)
29. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 15
seconds, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
+ B B AC K UP 30. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
(BRN)
n i I Is DTC P0562 indicated?
9 8 T T T 5 4 s j u r n r YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 the No. B1 BACK UP (15 A) fuse and the MCM. if the
31 30 29 28 27 fl 26 25 24 23 22 MCM was updated, substitute a known-good MCM
n (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was
W ire side of fe m a l e term inals
NO-lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the
original MCM (see page 12-212). If any other Pending
Is there continuity? or Confirmed DTCs were indicated, go to the indicated
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the No. B1 DTC's troubleshooting.
BACK UP (15 A) fuse and the MCM (A8), then replace
the No. B1 BACK UP (15 A)fuse, and goto step 18.
NO-Go to step 25.
20. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn
the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 15
seconds, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

the No. B1 BACK UP (15 A) fuse and the MCM, then go
to step 1.
DTC P0602: Motor Control Module (MCM) DTC P062F: Motor Control Modul e (MCM)
Programming Error Internal Circuit EEPROM Error
DTC P0602: Motor Control Module (MCM) DTC P062F; Battery Control Modul e (BCM)
Program Not Installed (Battery Condition Internal Circuit EEPROM Error
Monitor Program) NOTE:
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 12-5). If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
This DTC is indicated when an MCM update is not for DTC U1204.
completed. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Do not turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I) or to
LOCK (0) while updating the MCM. If you do, the MCM 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
can be damaged. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 10
If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting seconds, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
for DTC U1204.
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P062F in the DTCs
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). MENU with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). Does the HDS indicate FAILED?
3. Do the MCM update procedure (see page 12-211). YES-Go to step 5.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, checkfor poor
Is DTC P0602 indicated? connections or loose terminals at the MCM, then go to
step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
YES-Replace the original MCM (see page 12-212), the ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on.H
then go to step 1.
5. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other (see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the (see page 12-8).
Is DTC P062F indicated?

the MCM. If the MCM was updated, substitute a
known-good MCM (see page 12-8), then recheck. If
the MCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P062F in the DTCs DTC P06B1: I MA Battery Current Sensor
MENU with the HDS. Circuit Malfunction
NOTE:
YES-lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the any on-board snapshot, and review the general
original MCM (see page 12-212). If any other Pending troubleshooting information (see page 12-5).
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 7, go to the 9 If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. for DTC U 1204.
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
connections or loose terminals at the MCM. If the
MCM was updated, substitute a known-good MCM 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
(see page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a Is DTC P06B1 indicated?
result comes o n M
YES-Go to step 4.
time.H
9. Remove the bolts (A), and disconnect the MCM
connector E (B), then move the MCM aside.
A
3.4 N-m
(0.35 kgf m, 2.5 Ibf ft)
10. Disconnect the four IMA motor power cables (A) from 12. Disconnect the phase motor current sensor 9P
the phase motor current sensor, then wrap the end of connector (A).
the 12 volt power cable (B) with insulating tape.
NOTE: Check the position of the U phase, the V phase,
and the W phase cables before disconnecting them.
A
9.4 N-m
(0.96 kgf-m, 6.9 ibf-ft)

A Is DTC P06B1 indicated?

3.4 N-m
(0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 Ibf-ft) YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Replace the phase motor current sensor (see
17. Disconnect MCM connector C (22P).
Is DTC P06B1 indicated?
YES-Go to step 22.

NO-Go to step 20.
20. Check for continuity between MCM connector 22. Disconnect MCM connector B (24P).
MCM CONNECTOR C {22P) 24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
VCCIU (GRN/YEL) Is DTC P06B1 indicated?
YES-Go to step 37.

M 9 ___ i
7 6 U 5 4 3 2 1 NO-Go to step 25.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 25. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector (A).
22 21 20 19 18 n 17 16
W ire side o f fem a l e term inals
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the phase

motor current sensor 9P connector and the MCM (C7),
then go to step 27.
NO-Go to step 21.
21. Checkfor continuity between MCM connector
26. Check for continuity between MCM connector
MCM CONNECTOR C (22P) terminal B17 and body ground.
MCM CONNECTOR B (24P)

vectv 7 6 U 5 4 3 2 1
(BLU/YEL)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 n,....... i ....
22 21 20 19 18 n 17 16 7 6 5 _ 4 T T ]u 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
24 23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17
VCC1SOC
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s (YEL/RED)

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the phase Is there continuity?

motor current sensor 9P connector and the MCM
(C15), then go to step 27. YES-Repair a short in the wire between the junction
board 12P connector and the MCM (B17), then goto
NO-Repair a short in the wire between the phase step 27.
(C22), then go to step 27. NO-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217),
then go to step 27.
28. Reinstall the terminal cover.
(cont'd)
29. Reconnect the four IMA motor power cables to the 37. Reconnect all connectors.
phase motor current sensor.
NOTE: Make sure the cables are correctly positioned
39. Reconnect the four IMA motor power cables to the
before you reconnect them.
30. Reinstall the MCM (see page 12-212).
31. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the before you reconnect them.
35. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). procedure (see page 22-86).
36. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 44. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM
Is DTC P06B1 indicated? (see page 12-8).
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 45. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the MCM, the phase motor current sensor, and the
battery current sensor, then go to step 1. 46. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Is DTC P06B1 indicated?
the MCM, the phase motor current sensor, and the
battery current sensor. If the MCM was updated,
substitute a known-good MCM (see page 12-8), then
recheck. If the MCM was substituted, go to step 1.
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated, go to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting.
DTC P0A1B: Motor Control Module (MCM) DTC P0A27; High Voltage Contactor/Bypass
Internal Circuit Malfunction Contactor Stays Activated
NOTE: NOTE;
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general any on-board snapshot, and review the general
If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
for DTC U1204. for DTC U 1204.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 1 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 30
minute. seconds.
5. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 5. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for P0A27 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Is DTC POA1B indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
YES-Go to step 6.
time.B NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,
6. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software connections or loose terminals at the junction board
(see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM and the MCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
(see page 12-8). keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 1 o n .l
minute. 6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is DTC P1634 indicated?
9. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P1634 (see page
Is DTC P0A1B indicated? 12-178).
YES-lf the MCM was updated, substitute a NO-Go to step 7.

known-good MCM (see page 12-8), then recheck. If 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the 9. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210).
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and then turn it to 22. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0A27 in the DTCs
LOCK (0). Wait 1 minute, then measure the voltage MENU with the HDS.
between these MCM connector terminals
individually:
82 and B9 YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
B10 and B9 Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 21,
M C M CO NNECTOR B (24P) NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the junction board
P R E ( R E D /Y E L )
and the MCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates
NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (II)
until a result comes o n M
7 6 5 4 n u 2 1 <$ CNTPG 23. Reconnect all connectors.
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 I (G R Y )
CM
CM
24 23 n 21 20 19 18 17 & PCU lid (see page 12-212).

C N T (B L K )
Is there b a t t e r y voltage between either of the terminals? (see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM
YES-Go to step 23. (see page 12-8).
NO-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217), 27. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 30
then go to step 13. seconds.
13. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). 28. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
15. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the Is DTC P0A27 indicated?
PCU lid (see page 12-212). YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
16. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn the high voltage contactor, the bypass contactor, and
the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). the MCM. If the MCM was updated, substitute a
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the MCM was substituted, go to step 1.
18. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). NO-Go to step 30.
30 seconds.
the junction board and the MCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 22.
30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0A27 in the DTCs DTC P0A3Ci Motor Power Inverter (MPI)
MENU with the HDS. Module Overheating
NOTE;
YES-lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the any on-board snapshot, and review the general
original MCM (see page 12-212). If any other Pending troubleshooting information (see page 12-5).
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 29, go to If the IPU module fan duct is blocked, DTC P0A3C may
the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. be detected.
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
connections or loose terminals at the high voltage for DTC U1204.
contactor, the bypass contactor, and the MCM. If the 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
MCM was updated, substitute a known-good MCM
(see page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a
result comes on.11 Is DTC P1448 or P1634 indicated?
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P1448 (see page

12-154) or P1634 (see page 12-178).
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check the MPI TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
is it higher than 237 F (114 C)?
YES-Go to step 5.
Check for a blocked at the IPU module fan inlet duct
5. Check the IPU module air duct and the IPU module fan
for disconnections, damage, or obstructions. Also
check the IPU cover installation.
Are the IPU module air duct, the IPU module fan, and the
iPU cover OK?
YES-Replace the MPI module (see page 12-214), then
go to step 6.
NO-Repair or replace the IPU module air duct, the IPU
module fan, or the IPU cover as needed, then go to
step 6.
(cont'd)
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC P0A3F: Motor Rotor Position Sensor
7. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). Circuit Malfunction
8. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. NOTE:
Is DTC P0A3C indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at troubleshooting information (see page 12-5).
the MCM, the MPI module, and the IPU module fan, If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
then go to step 1. for DTC U1204.
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0A3F in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
connections or loose terminals at the IMA motor rotor
position sensor and the MCM. If the HDS indicates
NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (II)
until a result comes o n M
9. Disconnect MCM connector B (24P).
I W 1
10. Check for continuity between these MCM connector B 12. Check for continuity between these MCM connector B
(24P) terminals individually; (24P) terminals individually:
B6 and body ground B6 and body ground
B15 and body ground 9 B15 and body ground
MCM CONNECTOR B (24P) M CM CONNECTOR B (24P)
R1 (BRN) R2 (RED) R1 (BRN) R2 (RED)
Is there continuity between all the connectors and body Is there continuity between all the connectors and body
ground? ground?
YES-Go to step 11. YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the
IMA motor rotor position sensor and the MCM (B6,
NO-Go to step 13. B7, B15, B16, 6123/624), then go to step 16.
11. Disconnect the IMA motor rotor position sensor 6P NO-Replace the IMA motor rotor position sensor (see
connector (A). page 12-228), then go to step 16.
(cont'd)
13. Measure the resistance between these MCM 15. Check for continuity between these terminals:
connector B (24P) terminals individually: MCM connector terminal B6 and IMA motor rotor
B6 and B7 position sensor 6P terminal No. 4
B15 and B16 MCM connector terminal B7 and IMA motor rotor
B23 and B24 position sensor 6P terminal No. 1
MCM connector terminal B15 and IMA motor rotor
M CM CONNECTOR B (24P)
position sensor 6P terminal No. 6
R1 (BRN) MCM connector terminal B16 and IMA motor rotor
R2 (RED) MCM connector terminal B23 and IMA motor rotor
7 6 5 4 3 u 2 1 MCM connector terminal B24 and IMA motor rotor
S1 (GRN) S3 (WHT)
.O
16 15 AI#A AitTTTT 11 1 n n _
11 Lr~
-C position sensor 6P terminal No. 2
24 23 22 n 21 19 18 17
CM
o
IM A MOTOR ROTOR POSITION SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR

S4 (YEL) W ire side of fem ale te rm i nals
*: !12 model
S2 (BLU) R1 (GRN)
S2 (BLU/YEL)
S1 (WHT)
Is there 11.017.4 Q between B6 and B 7 ,21.6 34.4 Q 3 2 1
between B15 and B16, and 19.931.7 D between B23 6 5 4
and B24?
S4 (ORN, BRN*)
the MCM, then go to step 23.
(W HT/
NO-Go to step 14. R1 R2 (RED) BLU)
(BRN)
14. Disconnect the IMA motor rotor position sensor 6P
connector (A).
R2 (RED)
S1
7 6 5 4
A O,
3l I 2 1
16 15 TA #A T5 A12Oi A A
(GRN) 11 10 9 o
94 23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17 H ht )
S2 (BLU)
S4 (YEL)
Is there continuity between all of the terminals?
YES-Replace the IMA motor rotor position sensor

(see page 12-228), then go to step 16.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the IMA
motor rotor position sensor and the MCM (B6, B7,
B15, B16, B23, B24), then go to step 16.
16. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0A5E: U Phase Motor Current Sensor 1
17. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
18. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). any on-board snapshot, and review the general
If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
20. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). for DTC U1204.
21. Start the engine. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
22. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
Is DTC P0A3F indicated? 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at Is DTC P0A5E indicated?
the IMA motor rotor position sensor and the MCM,
then go to step 1. YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. MCM and the phase motor current sensor.B
24. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the Is DTC P06B1 indicated?
PCU lid (see page 12-212). YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P06B1 (see page
25. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn 12-75).
the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). NO-Go to step 5.
26. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(see page 12-8). 6. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
27. Start the engine. 7. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection

Is DTC P0A3F indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at cover (see page 12-212).
the IMA motor rotor position sensor and the MCM. If
the MCM was updated, substitute a known-good
MCM (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was
10. Remove the bolts (A), and disconnect the MCM 12. Remove the bolts (A) and the terminal cover (B).
A
A 3.4 N-m
3.4 N-m (0.35 kgf-m , 2.5 Ibf-ft)
(0.35 kgf-m , 2.5 Ib f-ft)
13. Disconnect the phase motor current sensor 9P

11. Disconnect the four IMA motor power cables (A) from connector (A).
the phase motor current sensor, then wrap the end of
A
9.4 N-m
(0.98 kgf-m , 6.9 Ibf-ft)
14. Connect phase motor current sensor 9P connector

PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR 9P CONNECTOR
h ,n . n 9i
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
IUPH vcciu
(W HT/BLK) (GRN/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE

15. Reconnect MCM connector E (31P). 25. Checkfor continuity between MCM connector
M CM CONNECTOR C (22P)
IUPH (W HT/BLK)
18. Check the U PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR and
the U PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR VOLTAGE
in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 7 6 U 5 4 3 2 1
Is there 4.5 V and 370 A or more indicated? 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
22 21 20 19 18 n 17 16
YES-Replace the phase motor current sensor (see
NO-Go to step 19.
20. Disconnect the jumper wire from the phase motor
current sensor 9P connector. Is there continuity?
21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES-Repair a short in the wire between the phase
22. Measure the voltage between phase motor current
then go to step 30.
sensor 9P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 7.
NO-Go to step 26.
PHASE IVIOTOR CURRENT SENSOR 9P CONNECTOR
26. Check for continuity between phase motor current
sensor 9P connector terminal No. 6 and MCM
connector terminal C6.
n n n n M CM CONNECTOR C (22P)
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SGIU I VCCIU IUPH (W HT/BLK)
(BLU) I (GRN/YEL)
r n i
7 6 U 4 3 2 1
5
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
22 21 20 19 18 n 17 16
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 23. Pa'Islrle ^ Ia P a Til

NO-Go to step 27. IUPH (WHT/BLK)
23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR 9P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 41.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the phase
then go to step 30.
(cont'd)
29. Check for continuity between phase motor current 30. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection
sensor 9P connector terminal No. 3 and MCM procedure (see page 22-86).
VCCIU (GRN/YEL) 33. Reconnect the four IMA motor power cables to the
........ .....'...... .... 1 .': ....... 1
7 6 U 5 4 3 2 1 NOTE: Make sure the cables are correctly positioned

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 before you reconnect them.
CM
o
21 19 18 n 17 16 34. Reinstall the MCM (see page 12-212).

PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR P CONNECTOR procedure (see page 22-86).
W ire side o f fem ale term inals 38. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
YES-Go to step 41.
Is DTC P0A5E indicated?
then go to step 30. YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the MCM and the phase motor current sensor, then go
to step 1.
indicated DTC's troubleshooting.!!
41. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection DTC P0A5F: U Phase Motor Current Sensor
NOTE:
43. Reinstall the terminal cover. Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
NOTE: Make sure the cables are correctly positioned for DTC U1204.
PCU lid (see page 12-212). 3. Start the engine.
47. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). Is DTC P0A5F indicated?
48. Do the 12 volt battery terminal reconnection YES-Go to step 5.
49. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
(see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM MCM and the phase motor current sensor.B
(see page 12-8).
Is DTC P0A5E indicated? procedure (see page 22-86).
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 8. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210).
the MCM and the phase motor current sensor. If the
MCM was updated, substitute a known-good MCM 9. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU
(see page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was cover (see page 12-212).
substituted, go to step 1. 10. Remove the bolts (A), and disconnect the MCM
NO-lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is connector E (B), then move the MCM aside.
complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the A
original MCM (see page 12-212). If any other Pending 3.4 N-m
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated, go to the indicated (0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
NOTE: Check the position of the U phase,theV phase,
A
9.4 N-m
(0.96 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)

17. Check the U PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR
VOLTAGE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
A
3.4 N-m Is 4.75 V or more indicated?
(0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 Ibf-ft)
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 22.
19. Disconnect MCM connector C ( 2 2 P ) .
m
21. Measure the voltage between phase m otor current 25. Check for continuity between phase motor current
sensor 9P connector terminal No. 6 and body ground. sensor 9P connector terminal No. 7 and MCM
MCM CONNECTOR C (22P)
SGIU(BLU)
n ..n ........F F f ) . r L n
9 8 7 6 5 1 7 6 U 5 4 3 2 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
IUPH (WHT/BLK)
22 21 19 18 n 17 16
CM
o
Is there 4.75 V or more?

SGIU-(BLU)
YES-Repair a short to power in the w ire between the
phase motor current sensor 9P connector and the
MCM (C6), then go to step 26. Wire side of female terminals
23. Checkfor continuity between phase motor current NO-Repair an open in the wire between the phase
sensor 9P connector terminal No. 7 and body ground. motor current sensor 9P connector and the MCM (C5),
then goto step 26.
n n p n

NO-Go to step 24.
(cont'd)
26. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection 37. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection
procedure (see page 22-86). procedure (see page 22-86).
27. Reconnect all connectors. 38. Reconnect all connectors.
28. Reinstall the terminal cover. 39. Reinstall the terminal cover.
29. Reconnect the four IMA motor power cables to the 40. Reconnect the four IMA motor power cables to the
phase motor current sensor. phase motor current sensor.
NOTE: Make sure the cables are correctly positioned NOTE: Make sure the cables are correctly positioned
before you reconnect them. before you reconnect them.
30. Reinstall the MCM (see page 12-212). 41. Reinstall the MCM (see page 12-212).
31. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the 42. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the
PCU lid (see page 12-212). PCU lid (see page 12-212).
32. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn 43. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn
the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
33. Do the 12 volt battery terminal reconnection 44. Do the 12 volt battery terminal reconnection
34. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 45. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software
35. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). (see page 12-8).
Is DTC P0A5F indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at Is DTC P0A5F indicated?
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other MCM was updated, substitute a known-good MCM
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. substituted, go to step 1.
DTC P0A61: V Phase Motor Current Sensor 10. Remove the bolts (A), and disconnect the MCM
Circuit Low Voltage
A
NOTE: 3.4 N-m
(0.35 kgf m , 2.5 Ibf-ft)
fo r DTC U1204.
YES-Go to step 4.
MCM and the phase motor current sensor.B
11. Disconnect the four IMA motor power cables (A) from
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. the phase motor current sensor, then wrap the end of
NOTE: Check the position of the U phase,theV phase,
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P06B1 (see page and the W phase cables before disconnecting them.
12-75).
A
NO-Go to step 5. 9.4 N m
(0.96 kg fm , 6.9 Ibf-ft)
8. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210),
12. Remove the bolts (A) and the terminal cover (B). 15. Reconnect MCM connector E (31P).
A 16. Do the 12 volt battery terminal reconnection
3.4 N-m procedure (see page 22-86).
(0.35 k g fm , 2.5 Ib fft)
18. Check the V PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR and
the V PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR VOLTAGE
in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there 4.5 V and 370 A or more indicated?

NO-Go to step 19.
current sensor 9P connector.
13. Disconnect the phase motor current sensor 9P 21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
connector (A). 22. Measure the voltage between phase motor current
n n n n
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SGIV f G s VCCIV
(GRN) W (BLU/YEL)
14. Connect phase motor current sensor 9P connector

terminals No. 2 and No. 5 with a jumper wire. Is there about 5 V?
PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR 9P CONNECTOR YES-Go to step 23.

NO-Go to step 27.
n & ru n 24. Disconnect MCM connector C (22P).
9 8 4 3 2 1
IVPH (RED) VCCIV

(BLU/YEL)
JUMPER W IRE
Wire side of female terminal s

25. Check for continuity between MCM connector 29. Check for continuity between phase motor current
terminal C14 and body ground. sensor 9P connector terminal No. 2 and MCM
1VPH (RED) Wire side of female terminals
7 ( U 5 4 3 2 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
22 21 20 19 18 n 17 16
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the phase
(C14), then go to step 30. Is there continuity?

26. Checkfor continuity between phase motor current NO-Repair an open in the wire between the phase
sensor 9P connector terminal No. 5 and MCM motor current sensor 9P connector and the
connector terminal C14. MCM (Cl 5), then go to step 30.
IVPH (RED)
7 f U 5 4 3 2 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
CM
o
22 21 19 18 n 17 16
[gT'sl'V j
IVPH (RED)
YES-Go to step 41.

(C14), then go to step 30.
36. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn 47. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn
(see page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was
DTC P0A62: V Phase Motor Current Sensor 11. Disconnect the four IMA motor power cables (A) from
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and and the W phase cables before disconnecting them.
troubleshooting information (see page 12-5). A
9.4 N-m
If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting (0.96 k g fm , 6.9 Ibfft)
for DTC U1204.
YES-Go to step 5.
Checkfor poor connections or loose terminals at the
MCM and the phase motor current sensor.H
12. Remove the bolts (A) and the terminal cover (B).
A
7. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection 3.4 N-m
procedure (see page 22-86). (0.35 kg fm , 2.5 Ib fft)

10. Remove the bolts (A), and disconnect the MCM
A
3.4 N-m
(0.35 k g fm , 2.5 Ibf-ft)
B
13. Disconnect the phase motor current sensor 9P 21. Measure the voltage between phase motor current
connector (A). sensor 9P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
ru n .r u n
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
IVPH (RED)
15. Do the 12 volt battery terminal reconnection YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the
^ procedure (see page 22-86). phase motor current sensor 9P connector and the
MCM (C14), then go to step 26.
NO-Go to step 37.
17. Check the V PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR
VOLTAGE in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is 4.75 V or more indicated? 23. Check for continuity between phase motor current
sensor 9P connector terminal No. 8 and body ground.
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 22.
p . n ,6 5 4 3 2 1
n 9i
SGIV (GRN)

NO-Go to step 24.
25. Check for continuity between phase motor current 26. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection
Wire side of fem al e terminals 28. Reinstall the terminal cover.
SGIV(GRN) 29. Reconnect the four IMA motor power cables to the
7 6 u i 4 3 2 1 NOTE: Make sure the cables are correctly positioned
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 before you reconnect them.
22 21 20 19 18 n 17 16 30. Reinstall the MCM (see page 12-212).
n r ii t 16 ^ 1 13 n i [ i the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
SGIV (GRN)
PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR 9P CONNECTOR procedure (see page 22-86).
YES-Go to step 37. 36. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
motor current sensor 9P connector and the
MCM (Cl 2), then go to step 26. YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
to step 1.
NO-TroubSeshooting is complete. If any other
37. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection DTC P0A64: W Phase Motor Current Sensor
procedure (see page 22-86). Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
NOTE: Make sure the cables are correctly positioned for DTC U1204,
PCU lid (see page 12-212). . 3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
43. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn Is DTC P0A64 indicated?
the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). YES-Go to step 4.
44. Do the 12 volt battery terminal reconnection NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
procedure (see page 22-86). Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
45. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software MCM and the phase motor current sensor.B
(see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
(see page 12-8).
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P06B1 (see page
47. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 12-75).
Is DTC P0A62 indicated? NO-Go to step 5.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
MCM was updated, substitute a known-good MCM 6. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
substituted, go to step 1. procedure (see page 22-86).
original MCM (see page 12-212). If any other Pending 9. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated, go to the indicated cover (see page 12-212).
10. Remove the bolts (A), and disconnect the MCM 12. Remove the bolts (A) and the terminal cover (B).
A
A 3.4 N-m
3.4 N-m (0.35 k g fm , 2.5 ib fft)
(0.35 k g fm , 2.5 Ibfft)
13. Disconnect the phase motor current sensor 9P

11. Disconnect the four IMA motor power cables (A) from connector (A).
A
9.4 N-m
(0.96 kg fm , 6.9 Ibfft)
14. Connect phase motor current sensor 9 P connector

cun
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C LD
IWPH VCQW
(GRN/RED) (YEL)
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
15. Reconnect MCM connector E (31P). 25. Check for continuity between MCM connector
M C M CONNECTOR C (22P)
18. Check the W PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR and
the W PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR VOLTAGE 1
in the DATA LIST w ith the HDS. 7 6 U 5 4 3 2 1
Is there 4.5 V and 370 A or more indicated? 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
22 21 20 19 18 n 17 16
page 12-214), then go to step 30. IWPH / \
(GRN/RED) v y y
NO-Go to step 19.
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Wire side of female terminals

current sensor 9P connector. Is there continuity?
21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES-Repair a short in the wire between the phase
22. Measure the voltage between phase motor current
NO-Go to step 26.
26. Check for continuity between phase motor current
sensor 9P connector terminal No. 4 and MCM
n , n n n MCM CONNECTOR C (22P)

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SGiW f x A VCCIW ....... ........... i........i
(BRN) ( X ) (YEL)
7 6 U 5 4 3 2 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
22 21 20 19 18 n 17 16
J IWPH (GRN/RED)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 27.
23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). PHASE M OTOR CURRENT SENSOR 9P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 41.

29. Checkfor continuity between phase m otor current 30. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection
M C M CONNECTOR C (22P) 32. Reinstall the terminal cover.
Wire side of female terminals 33. Reconnect the four IMA motor power cables to the
PHASE IVI OTOR CURRENT SENSOR 9P CONNECTOR procedure (see page 22-86).
YES-Go to step 41.
(C22), then go to step 30. YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
to step 1.
41. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection DTC P0A65; W Phase Motor Current Sensor
NOTE;
NOTE: Make sure the cables are correctly positioned for DTC U1204.
PCU lid (see page 12-212). 3. Start the engine.
47. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). Is DTC P0A65 indicated?
48. Do the 12 volt battery terminal reconnection YES-Go to step 5.
49. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
(see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM MCM and the phase motor current sensor.B
(see page 12-8).
Is DTC P0A64 indicated? procedure (see page 22-86).
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 8. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210).
MCM was updated, substitute a known-good MCM 9. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU
(see page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was cover (see page 12-212).
substituted, go to step 1. 10. Remove the bolts (A), and disconnect the MCM
NO-lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is connector E (B), then move the MCM aside.
complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the A
original MCM (see page 12-212). If any other Pending 3.4 N-m
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated, go to the indicated (0.35 kgf m, 2.5 Ibfft)
mmmm
A
9.4 N-m
(0.96 k g fm , 6.9 Ibf-ft)

17. Check the W PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR
A
3.4 N-m Is 4.75 V or more indicated?
(0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 Ibf-ft)
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 22.
21. Measure the voltage between body ground and phase 25. Check for continuity between phase motor current
motor current sensor 9P connector terminal No. 4. sensor 9P connector terminal No. 9 and MCM
PHASE IVI OTOR CURRENT SENSOR 9P CONNECTOR

run
9 8 7
f ^ l
6 5 4 3 2 1
n n
7 6 U 5 4 3 2 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
I WPH
(GRN/RED) a a
22 21 20 19 18 n 17 16
SGIW (BRN)

i s f li f l
j SGIW (BRN)
phase motor current sensor 9P connector and the Wire side of female terminal s
MCM (C21), then go to step 26. Is there continuity?
22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO-Repair an open in the wire between the phase
23. Check for continuity between body ground and phase
(Cl 9), then go to step 26.
motor current sensor 9P connector terminal No. 9.

NO-Go to step 24.
fiS
26. Do the 12 vo lt battery terminal disconnection 37. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection
32. Rei nstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn 43. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn
Is DTC P0A65 indicated? 47. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at Is DTC P0A65 indicated?
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other MCM was updated, substitute a known-good MCM
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. substituted/go to step 1.
DTC P0A78: Motor Power Inverter (MPI) DTC P0A7E:- Battery Module Overheating
Module Internal Circuit Malfunction NOTE;
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data, and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 12-5). If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting for DTC U1204.
for DTC U1204. 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). 3. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Are any DTCs except DTC P0A7E indicated?
Is DTC P1437 indicated? YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P1437 (see page NO-Go to step 4.
12-147).
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Check the IPU module air duct and the IPU module fan
4. Start the engine. for disconnections, damage, or obstructions.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0A78 in the DTCs Are the IPU module air duct and the IPU module fan OK?
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217),
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? then go to step 6.
YES-Replace the MPI module (see page 12-214), then NO-Repair or replace the IPU module air duct or the
go to step 6. IPU module fan as needed, then go to step 6.
NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the system is OK at this time. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
result comes on.H
YES-Go to step 1.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the
the MPI module, then go to step 1. original MCM (see page 12-212). If any other Pending
NO-Go to step 8. DTC's troubleshooting.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A78 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.

HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition
switch ON (II) until a result comes on.H
DTC P0A7F: Battery Module Deterioration DTC P0A94: DC-DC Converter Output Low
NOTE:
Voltage
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and NOTE:
any on-board snapshot, and review the general Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting troubleshooting information (see page 12-5).
for DTC U1204. If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). for DTC U1204.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Start the engine. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
4. Check the SOC in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes under
these conditions:
5. Hold the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and Headlights on high beam
4,000 rpm without load (in P or N (CVT model)) Blower fan at maximum speed
(in neutral (M/T model)) until the SOC increases to
Rear window defogger on
25%.
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0A94 in the DTCs
6. Test drive at 25 mph (40 km/h).
MENU with the HDS.
7. Press the brake pedal, and stop the vehicle slowly.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1586 in the DTCs
YES-Go to step 5.
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217), connections, loose terminals, or damaged insulation
then go to step 10. at the DC-DC converter ( + B BACK UP line), the + B
terminal (on the battery terminal fuse box), the MCM
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 9. If the ( + B BACK UP line), the No. B1 BACK UP (15A) fuse in
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition the under-dash fuse/relay box, and DC-DC converter
switch ON (II) until a result comes on.H ground cable (G4) (see page 22-54). If the HDS
9. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 3.
battery current sensor and the MCM. 5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Are the connections and the terminals OK? Is DTC U1221 or P0562 indicated?
YES-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217), YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC U1221 (see page
then go to step 10. 12-196), or DTC P0562 (see page 12-72).
NO-Repair the connections or the terminals, then go NO-Go to step 6.
to step 10.
Are any DTCs indicated?

NO-Troubleshooting is complete.^
(cont'd)
6. Check the DC-DC CONVERTER INFORMATION in the 12. Check the 12 volt power cable connection (A) on the
DATA LIST with the HDS. phase motor current sensor.
Does the HDS indicate NORMAL?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check for poor connections, loose terminals, or
damaged insulation at the DC-DC converter (+ B
BACK UP line), the + B terminal (on the battery
terminal fuse box), the MCM ( + B BACK UP line), the
No. B1 BACK UP (15A) in the under-dash fuse/relay
box, and DC-DC converter ground cable (G4) (see
page 22-54). If the connections, the terminals, and the
insulation are OKr replace the DC-DC converter (see
8. Check the battery terminal fuse box + B terminal (A)
(BLK wire) connection.
Is the connection OK ?
YES-Go to step 13.

NO-Repair the connection, then go to step 18.
13. Remove the left cargo area side trim panel (see page
20-64).
14. Check the body side DC-DC converter ground cable
(G4) terminal connection (A).
Is the connection OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair the + B terminal connection, then go to
step 18.
(0.96 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
11. Remove the PCU lid (see page 12-212).
Is the connection OK?
YES-Go to step 15.

NO-Repair the connection, then go to step 18.
15. Remove the IPU case (see page 12-215).
16. Remove the front side IPU frame (see page 12-217).
17. Check the PCU case side DC-DC converter ground 18. Reconnect all connectors.
cable terminal connection (A).
19. If removed, reinstall the front side IPU frame (see
A page 12-217).
9.4 N-m
20. If removed, reinstall the IPU case (see page 12-215).
21. If removed, reinstall the PCU lid (see page 12-212).
22. If removed, reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210),
then turn the battery module switch ON (see page
12-4).
23. If removed, reinstall the left cargo area side trim panel
(see page 20-64).
26. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes under
these conditions:
Headlights on high beam
Is the connection OK? Blower fan at maximum speed
YES-Replace the DC-DC converter (see page 12-213),
then go to step 18. 27. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Repair the connection, then go to step 18. Is DTC P0A94 indicated?

the DC-DC converter (+B BACK UP line), the +B
terminal (on the battery terminal fuse box), the MCM
(+ B BACK UP line), and the No. B1 BACK UP (15A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step
1.
NO-Go to step 28.
28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0A94 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.

connections or loose terminals at the DC-DC
converter (+B BACK UP line), the + B terminal (on the
battery terminal fuse box), the MCM (+ B BACK UP
line), the No. B1 BACK UP (15A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box, and the DC-DC converter
ground cable (G4) (see page 22-54), then go to step 1.
If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 25.
DTC P0A9D: Battery Module Temperature 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage 9. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 1 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE
NOTE:
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1) in the DATA LIST with the
Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data, and HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 12-5). Is 0.05 V or less (194 F (90 C) or more) indicated?
If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting YES-Go to step 10.
for DTC U 1204.
NO-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217),
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). then go to step 14.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE 11. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU
SENSOR 1 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE cover (see page 12-212).
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1) in th e D A T A LIST with the
HDS. 12. Disconnect MCM connector B (24P).
Is 0.05 V or less (194 F (90 C) or more) indicated? 13. Check for continuity between MCM connector
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. IVICM CONNECTOR B (24PJ
battery module and the MCM.H
n i _1
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7 6 5 . 4.t. 3.1u
2 1
5. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
6 . Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210).

24 23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17
7. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector (A). TBATT1 (YEL/GRN)
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the

junction board 12P connector and the MCM (B21),
then go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 21.
H J
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P0A9E: Battery Module Temperature
15. Reconnect all connectors. Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage
16. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the NOTE:
PCU lid (see page 12-212). Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
19. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
20. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
Is the DTC P0A9D indicated? 3. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
YES-Check for poor connections, loose terminals, or
damaged insulation at the battery module and the
HDS.
MCM, then go to step 1.
Is 4.95 V or more ( 40 F ( 40 C) or less) indicated?
21. Reconnect all connectors. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
battery module and the MCM.11
PCU lid (see page 12-212). 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
23. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn Are DTC P0A9E, P0AC8, and POACD indicated at the
the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). same time?
24. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software YES-Go to step 20.
(see page 12-8). NO-Go to step 5.
26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 6. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
Is DTC P0A9D indicated? 7. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210).
YES-Check for poor connections, loose terminals, or 8. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector (A).
MCM. If the MCM was updated, substitute a
9. Connect junction board 12P connector terminal No. 7 14. Check for continuity between junction board 12P
to body ground with a jumper wire. connector terminals No. 7 and No. 9.
JUNCTION BOARD 12P CONNECTOR JUNCTION BOARD 12P CONNECTOR
6 5 4 3 2 1
, TBATT1
12 11 10 9 8 7 (YEL/GRN)
12 11 10
TBATT1 (YEL/GRN)
JUMPER WIRE SGTB
(GRN/BLK)
Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of male terminals
10.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is there continuity?
11. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
SENSOR 1 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1) in the DATA LIST with the battery module and the MCM, then go to step 32.
HDS. NO-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217),
Is 4.95 V or more ( 40 F ( 40 C) or less) indicated? then go to step 32.
NO-Go to step 12. 16. Disconnect the jumper wire from the junction board
12P connector.
13. Disconnect the jumper wire from the junction board cover (see page 12-212).
12P connector.
19. Checkfor continuity between MCM connector 24. Connect junction board 12P connector terminal No. 9
terminal B21 and junction board 12P connector to body ground with a jumper wire.
terminal No. 7.
JUNCTI ON BOARD 12P CONNECTOR
M C M C O N N E C T O R B (2 4 P )
__L__.
7 6 I5 4 2 nU 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 12 11 10 9 8 7
CM
CM
CM
24 23 n 21 19 18 17 SGTB (GRN/BLK)
JUMPER W IR E
T B A T T 1 ( Y E L /G R N )

6 5 4 3 2 1 (YEL/GRN)
12 11 10 9 8 /
25. Reconnect the junction board 12P connector.
JUNCTION BOARD 12P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals 26. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is there continuity? 27. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE

YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1)#the IMA BATTERY
the battery module and the MCM, then go to step 32. MODULE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 VOLTAGE (IMA
BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2), and
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the junction
the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
board 12P connector and the MCM (B21), then go to
step 32.
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). HDS.
21. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). Do all sensors indicate 4.95 V or more ( 40 F ( 40 C)
or less)?
22. Remove the IPU cover (seepage 12-210).
23. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector (A). then go to step 32.
NO-Go to step 28.
31. Check for continuity between MCM connector DTC P0AA6: High Voltage Circuit Isolation
terminal B22 and junction board 12P connector
Problem
terminal No. 9.
NOTE:
Wire side of fem al e terminals any on-board snapshot, and review the general
7 6 5 4T3I
u 2 1 Use the 250 V range of your insulated resistance
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 tester.
Wear insulated gloves and use insulated tools to
CM
00
CM
o
24 22 n 21 19 18 17
protect yourself from electrical shock.
SGTB (GRN/BLK) If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
for DTC U1204.
6 5 4 3 2 1 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).

12 11 10 9 8 7 3. Start the engine, and wait 1 minute.
--------------- I SGTB (GRN/BLK)
JUNCTION BOARD 12P CONNECTOR 4. Check the INSULATION RESISTANCE OF HIGH
Wire side of female terminal s VOLTAGE CIRCUIT in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there continuity? Is 194 kO or more indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
the junction board 12P connector and the MCM, then Check the drain cover for damage or obstructions.!
go to step 32.
NO-Go to step 5.
board 12P connector and the MCM (B22), then go to 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
step 32.
34. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the cover (see page 12-212).

the battery module and the MCM, then go to step 1.
!ii3
9. Measure the resistance between body ground and the 12. Measure the resistance between the PCU case (A) and
MPI module terminals (A, B) individually. the junction board + terminal (B), the terminal (C),
and the high voltage contactor terminal (D)
individually.
NOTE: Use the 250 V range of your insulated
resistance tester, and wear insulated gloves.
YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Go to step 13.
10. Remove the IPU case (see page 12-215). Is there 389 kD or more?
11. Check the battery module, the junction board, the YES-Go to step 15.
wire harness on the battery module, and the junction
board for damaged insulation.
then go to step 24.
Is the insulation OK?
13. Remove the DC-DC converter (see page 12-213).
YES-Go to step 12.
14. Measure the resistance between body ground and the
NO-Repair or replace parts as needed, then go to step MPI module terminals (A, B) individually.
25.

then go to step 24.
NO-Replace the MPI module (see page 12-214), then
go to step 24.
(cont'd)
16. Check the drain cover (A) for damage or an 19. Measure t h e r e s i s t a n c e between b o d y ground and the
obstruction. phase motor current sensor terminals (A, B, and C)
individually.
Is the drain cover OK?
YES-Go to step 17.

NO-Replace the drain cover (see page 12-227), then
go to step 24.
YES-Go to step 20.
procedure (see page 22-86). . NO-Go to step 22.
18. Disconnect the four IMA motor power cables (A) from 20. Disconnect the IMA motor power cable.
NOTE:
Refer to Disconnecting the IMA Motor Power Cable
NOTE: Check the position of the U phase, the V phase, Connector From the Motor Stator (see page 12-4).
and the W phase cables before disconnecting them. If the IMA motor power cable terminals are wet, dry
A them with a clean shop towel. Do not use
9.4 N-m compressed air.
(0.96 k g fm , 6.9 Ibf-ft)
21. Measure the resistance between body ground and the 23. Measure the resistance between body ground and the
IMA motor power cable terminals (A, B, and C) MPI module terminals (A, B, and C) individually.
individually.
NOTE: Use the 250 V range of your insulated resistance tester, and wear insulated gloves.
Is there 389 kO or more? Is there 389 kO or more?

YES-Replace the IMA motor housing (see page YES-Replace the phase motor current sensor (see
12-221), then go to step 24. page 12-214), then go to step 24.
NO-Replace the IMA motor power cable (see page NO-Replace the MPI module (see page 12-214), then
12-221), then go to step 24. go to step 24.
22. Remove the phase current motor sensor (see page 24. Reconnect all connectors.
12-214).
25. Reinstall the IPU case (see page 12-215).
31. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). DTC P0AA7: Motor Control Module (MCM)
32. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Internal Circuit Malfunction
33. Start the engine, and w ait 1 minute. NOTE:
Is DTC P0AA6 indicated? troubleshooting information (see page 12-5).
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
for DTC U1204.
the MCM, the IMA motor power cable, and the MPI
module, then go to step 1. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 3. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0AA7 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.
result comes on.H
(see page 12-8).
Is DTC P0AA7 indicated?
YES-lf the MCM was updated, substitute a
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0AA7 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
YES-lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 6, go to the
connections or loose terminals at the MCM. If the
result comes on.H
DTC P0AC0: Battery Current Sensor 1 Circuit DTC P0AC1: Battery Current Sensor 1 Circuit
Malfunction Low Voltage
NOTE; NOTE;
for DTC U1204. for DTC U1204.
Is DTC P0AC1, P0AC2, P0B10, orP0B11 indicated? Is DTC P0AC1 indicated?
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P0AC1 (see page YES-Go to step 4.
12-121), P0AC2 (see page 12-124), P0B10 (see page
12-140), or P0B11 (see page 12-143).B
NO-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217), MCM and the battery current sensor.H
then go to step 4.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 1 12-75).
minute.
NO-Go to step 5.
Is DTC P0AC0 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
the battery current sensor and the MCM, then go to NO-Go to step 13.
step 1. 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 7. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 8. Remove the IPU case (see page 12-215).
9. Remove the PCU busplate and the PCU cover (see
page 12-212).
11. Disconnect the battery current sensor 4P connector 18. Check for continuity between MCM connector
(A). terminal B3 and body ground.
ISOC (PUR/WHT)
7 6 5 I 4 3 Iu 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
CM
CM
00
22 n 21 20 19 18 17
12. Check for continuity between battery current sensor Is there continuity?
4P connector termina l No. 1 and MCM connector
YES-Go to step 19.
terminal B17.
NO-Go to step 22.
MCM CONNECTOR B (24P) 19. Remove the IPU case (see page 12-215).
Wire si de of female terminal s
20. Disconnect the battery current sensor 4P connector
i i _i i
(A).
7 6 5 4 H u 2 1
VCCiSOC
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 (YEL/RED)
22 n 21 20 19 18 1/
CO
CM
CM
VCGISOC
(YEL/RED)
f4 j 3 j 2~|~1~|
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR

then go to step 32.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the battery
current sensor and the MCM (B17), then go to step 32.
21. Checkfor continuity between battery current sensor 30. Disconnect the battery current sensor 4P connector
4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground. (A).
t 3 2 1
ISOC (PUR)
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the battery

current sensor and the MCM (B3), then go to step 32. 31. Check for continuity between battery current sensor
NO-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217), 4P connector terminal No. 4 and MCM connector
then go to step 32. terminal B3.
22. Reconnect MCM connector B (24P). Wire side of female terminals
23. Connect MCM connector terminals B3 and B17 with a ISOC (PUR/WHT)
jumper wire. - T ,---- r __ a
P C M CONNECTOR B (24P)
7 6 I5 I4 nU 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
24 19 18 17
CM
CO
CM
o
22 n 21
ISOC (PUR/WHT)
i ------ :------
7 6 5 4 : 3 Iu 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ISOC (PUR)
24 23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17
VCCISOC (YEL/RED) BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female terminals is there continuity?

then go to step 32.
26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. current sensor and the MCM (B3), then go to step 32.
YES-Go to step 27.

NO-Go to step 39.
32. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0AC2: Battery Current Sensor 1 Circuit
33. Reinstall the IPU case (see page 12-215). High Voltage
34. Reinstall the PCU busplate (see page 12-212). NOTE:
36. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
for DTC U1204.
is DTC P0AC1 indicated?
the MCM and the battery current sensor, then go to 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
step 1.
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
MCM and the battery current sensor.!!
PCU lid (see page 12-212). 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
41. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn 6. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). 7. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210).
42. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software 8. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU
(see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM cover (see page 12-212).
(see page 12-8).
lO.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the MCM and the battery current sensor. If the MCM
was updated, substitute a known-good MCM (see
page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
in
11. Measure the voltage between MCM connector 16. Check for continuity between MCM connector
terminal B3 and body ground. terminal B14 and body ground.
MCM CONNECTOR B (24P) M CM CONNECTOR B (24P)
I SOC (PUR/WHT) SGISOC (GRN/YEL)
7 6 5 4 ft I2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 15 14 13 12 11 10
23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17
CM
CM
CM
23 n 21 20 19 18 17
Is there 4.5 V or more? Is there continuity?

YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the YES-Go to step 17.
battery current sensor and the MCM (B3), then go to
NO-Go to step 26.
step 20.
NO-Go to step 12. 17. Disconnect MCM connector B (24P).
12. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). 18. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector (A).

YES-Go to step 26.

NO-Go to step 14.
15. Reconnect MCM connector B (24P).
19. Check for continuity between junction board 12P 26. Reconnect all connectors.
connector terminal No. 2 and MCM connector
terminal B14.
Wire side of female terminals 28. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn
the battery module switch ON.
n..........r
7 6 5 4 3 u 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 (see page 12-8).
o
CM
xf
CM
CM
CM
23; n 21 19 18 17
SGISOC
(GRN/YEL) 31. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
SGISOC Is DTC P0AC2 indicated?
(GRN/YEL)
YES-Checkfor poor connections or loose terminals at
6 5 4 3 2 1 the MCM and the battery current sensor. If the MCM
12 11 10 9 8 7 was updated, substitute a known-good MCM (see
JUNCTION BOARD 12P CONNECTOR goto step 1.
Is there continuity? complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the
YES-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217), original MCM (see page 12-212). If any other Pending
then go to step 20. or Confirmed DTCs were indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting.!!
step 20.

the MCM and the battery current sensor, then go to
step 1.
DTC P0AC7: Battery Module Temperature 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 12-5). Is 0.05 V or less (194 F (90 C) or more) indicated?
for DTC U1204.
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). then go to step 14.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (O).
3. Check the IM A BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE 11. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU
YES-Go to step 4.
T............... ...... L .....*..I
7 6 5 4 31 I 2 1
battery module and the MCM.B
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
24 23 n 21 20 19
CM
CM
18 17
5. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). TBATT2 (BLU/YEL)
7. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector (A).

then go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 21.
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P0AC8: Battery Module Temperature
15. Reconnect all connectors. Sensor 2 Circuit H i g h Voltage
Is DTC P0AC7 indicated? 3. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
HDS.
battery module and the MCM .B
23. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn Are DTC P0A9E, P0AC8, and P0ACD indicated at the
26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 6. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
Is DTC P0AC7 indicated? 7. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210).
damaged insulation at the battery module and the A
9. Connect junction board 12P connector term inal No. 8 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
to body ground with a jumper wire.
16. Disconnect the jumper wire from the junction board
12P connector.
6 5 4 3 2 1 18. Disconnect MCM connector B (24P).
12 11 10 9 8 7 19. Checkfor continuity between MCM connector
TBATT2 (BLU/YEL) terminal B11 and junction board 12P connector
terminal No. 8.
JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female terminals n . I _1
7 6 3 Iu 2 1
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
11. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE 24 23 22 n 2 1 :20 19 18 i l
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2) in the DATA LIST with the TBATT2 (BLU/YEL)
HDS.
YES-Go to step 15. 6 5 4 3 2 1
TBATT2
12 11 10 9 8 7 (BLU/YEL)
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). JUNCTION BOARD 12P CONNECTOR
12P connector.
14. Checkfor continuity between junction board 12P
board 12P connector and the MCM (B11), then goto
step 32.
n I I n
6 5 4 3 2 1 21. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
12 11 10 9 8 7 TBATT2 22. Remove the I PU cover (see page 12-210).
(BLU/YEL)
SGTB
(GRN/BLK)

then go to step 32.
23. Disconnect the junction board 1 2 P connector (A). 29. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU
A
terminal No. 9.
7 6 |5 4 l i u 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
24 23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17
SGTB (GRN/BLK)
24. Connect junction board 12P connector terminal No. 9
to body ground with a jum per wire.
JUNCTION BOARD 12P CONNECTOR 6 5 4 3 2 1 SGTB

12 11 10 9 8 7 (GRN/BLK)
6 5 4 3 2 1 ' JUNCTION BOARD 12P CONNECTOR

12 11 10 9 8 7
SGTB (GRN/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE the junction board 12P connector and the MCM, then
go to step 32.
Wire side of female terminals board 12P connector and the MCM (B22), then go to
step 32.
2 5 . Reconnect the junction board 1 2 P connector.
2 6 . Turn the ignition switch t o O N (II).
2 7 . Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 1 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE 34. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1), the IMA BATTERY PCU lid (see page 12-212).
MODULE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 VOLTAGE (IMA 35. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn
BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 ) , and the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 3 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE 36. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 3) in the DATA LIST with the 37. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
HDS.
Do all sensors indicate 4,95 V or more ( 40 F ( 40 C)
or less)? Is DTC P0AC8 indicated?
YES-Replace the battery module (see page 1 2 - 2 1 7 ) , YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
then go to step 32. the battery module and the MCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 28. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
28. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
DTC POACC: Battery Module Temperature 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 12-5). Is 0.05 V or less (194 F (90 QC) or more) indicated?
for DTC U1204.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). then go to step 14.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6), 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE 11. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. MCM CONNECTOR B (24P)
battery module and the MCM. __ I ....._L ......
7 16 5 4 I I 2 1
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
'Sf
CM
CM
CO
CM
CM
n 21 20 19 18 17
6 . Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210). TBATT3 (WHT/GRN)

A

then go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 21.
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC POACD: Battery Module Temperature
15. Reconnect all connectors. Sensor 3 Circuit High Voltage
Is DTC POACC indicated? 3. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
HDS.
battery module and the M CM .B
23. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn Are DTC P0A9E, P0AC8, and POACD indicated at the
26. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 6. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
Is DTC POACC indicated? 7. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210).
damaged insulation at the battery module and the A
9. Connect junction board 12P connector terminal 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
No. 10 to body ground with a jum per wire.
12P connector.
6 5 4 3 2 1 18. Disconnect MCM connector B (24P).
12 11 10 9 8 7 19. Check for continuity between MCM connector
TBATT3 (WHT/GRN) terminal B20 and junction board 12P connector
terminal No. 10.
JUMPER WIRE

W i re side of female terminals n Ii i
7 615141 3| u 2 1
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
11. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE 24 23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 3) in the DATA LIST with the TBATT3 (W HT/GRN)
HDS.
YES-Go to step 15.

12 10 TBATT3
NO-Go to step 12. (W HT/GRN)
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). JUNCTION BOARD 12P CONNECTOR
13. Disconnect the jum per wire from the junction board
12P connector.
14. Check for continuity between junction board 12P
step 32.
n r 1 n_
c 6 5 4 3 2 1 21. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
P
12 11 10 9 8 7 SGTB 22. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210).
(GRN/BLK)
TBATT3
(WHT/GRN)
battery module and the MCM, then go to step 32.
then go to step 32.
23. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector (A). 29. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU
A
terminal No. 9.
J
7 6 T IT 4 T 3 Bu 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
24 23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17
SGTB (GRN/BLK)
24. Connect junction board 12P connector terminal No. 9
to body ground with a jum per wire.
JUNCTION BOARD 12P CONNECTOR 6 5 4 3 2 1

12 11 10 9 8 7
SGTB
(GRN/BLK)
6 5 4 3 2 1 JUNCTION BOARD 12P CONNECTOR

12 11 10 9 8 7
SGTB (GRN/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
junction board 12P connector and the MCM, then go
to step 32.
Wire side of female terminals NO-Repair an open in the wire between the junction
25. Reconnect the junction board 12P connector. step 32.
27. Check the IMA-BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE 33. Reconnect all connectors.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1), the IMA BATTERY 34. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the
MODULE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 VOLTAGE (IMA PCU lid (see page 12-212).
BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2), and 35. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn
the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
TEMPERATURE SENSOR'3) in the DATA LIST with the 36. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
HDS. 37. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
Do all sensors indicate 4.95 V or more ( 4 0 F ( 40 C)
or less)?
Is DTC POACD indicated?
then go to step 32. YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
NO-Go to step 28.
28. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
M B
DTC P0AE1: Bypass Contactor Malfunction 10. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210).
A WARN I NG cover (see page 12-212).
This procedure includes high voltage measurements
12. Reinstall the PCU busplate (see page 12-212).
with the IMA system turned oh. To avoid serious
injury from electrical shocks while testing the high 13. Check for poor connections, loose terminals, or
voltage cable, use insulated gloves, select a DC range damage at the busbars (A) and the MCM connectors
of 150 V or more on your digital multimeter, and do (B)..
not touch metal surface.
NOTE:
review the general troubleshooting information (see
page 12-5). *
If the ignition switch is turned to ON (II) when the
battery module switch is OFF, DTC P0AE1 is stored.
for DTC U1204.
4. Check the SOC in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
5. Hold the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 Are the connections and the terminals OK?
rpm w ithout load (in R or N (CVT model)) (in neutral
YES-Go to step 14.
(M/T model)) until the SOC increases to 70%. If the
SOC does not increase at all, go to step 8. NO-Repair the connections or the terminals, then go
to step 42.
6. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0A78, P1570, P1634,
and U1220 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. 14. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and listen for a
clicking sound from the contactor in the junction
YES-Go to step 7.
board.
NO-
Is there a clicking sound?
If the HDS indicates FAILED: Go to the indicated
YES-Go to step 16.
If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED: Keep the NO-lf you never hear the sound, go to step 26. If you
ignition switch ON (II) until a result is indicated. hearthe sound only once, after clearing the DTC, go to
step 16.
Is DTC P0AE1 indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO -lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the NOTE: Wear insulated gloves to protect yourseIf from
junction board, the DC-DC converter, the MPI module, electrical shock.
and the MCM.B
9 . Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
(cont'd)
19. Quickly measure the voltage between the high; 29. Measure the resistance between MCM connector
voltage terminals (A, B) when the ignition switch is terminals B2 and B9.
turned to ON (II).
NOTE:
Use a DC range of 150 V or more on your digital
multimeter. PRE (RED/YEL)
Always measure the voltage on the indicated

position; measuring on the adjacent terminals may 7 6 5 4 3 |u 2 1
cause a short. 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
It's normal to read 0 V as soon as 0.21 seconds after
measuring the voltage.
24 23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17
CNTPG (GRY)
Is there 92.7 -1 13 .3 0?
YES-Go to step 30.
NO-
If the resistance is too high, go to step 33.
If the resistance is too low, go to step 35.

Is there a momentary voltage reading?
YES-Go to step 20. PRE (RED/YEL)

then go to step 42. 7 6 5 4 Iu 2 1
23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17
CM
YES-Go to step 31.
YES-Go to step 37. then go to step 42.
NO-Replace the DC-DC converter (see page 12-213),

then go to step 42.
9 1 9
31. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector (A). 33. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector (A).
32. Check for continuity between MCM connector 34. Check for continuity between these terminals:
terminal B2 and body ground. MCM connector terminal B2 and junction board 12P
MCM connector terminal B9 and junction board 12P
PRE (RED/YEL) M C M CONNECTOR B (24P)
Wire side of female term i nals
---
ni I.......................... .
7 6 5 4 3I 2 U Tj PRE (RED/YEL)
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
5 4 % M
22 n 21 19 18 ill
CM
CM
CM
CO
2 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
24 23 22 n 21 20 19 17
Wire side of female terminals CNTPG (GRY)
Is there continuity? .
CNTPG (GRY)
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the junction n I.n
board 12P connector and the MCM (B2), then go to 6 5 4 .3. 2 1
step 42. PRE (RED/YEL)
12 11 10 9 8 7
NO-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217), JUNCTION BOARD 12P CONNECTOR
then go to step 42.
then go to step 42.
board 12P connector and the MCM (B2, B9),then go to
step 42.
35. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector (A). 41. Compare the voltages you recorded in step 38 with
the voltages you record between the MCM connector
terminals listed below.
E21 and E31, compared to IMA BATTERY MODULE
1 VOLTAGE
2 VOLTAGE
E9 and E20, compared to IMA BATTERY MODULE 3
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
5 VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
36. Check for continuity between MCM connector VOLTAGE
terminals B2 and B9.
M C M CONNECTOR E (31P)
iVJCIVI CONNECTOR B (24P)
VHB3 VHB4 VHB7 VHB8
(GRN) (GRN/RED) (BLU) (WHT)
PRE (RED/YEL)
^0 j
9 8 7
CM
7 6 5 4 u 2 1 6 5 4
i3 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
VHB1
31 i b 29
n 28 27 PI 26 .* 24
H
22
o
CM
CM
CM
CM
23 n 21 19 18 17 (GRN/
YEL)
VHBO VHB5 VHB6

CNTPG (GRY) VHB2
(RED) (GRN/BLK) (YEL)
(BLK)
Is there more than 1 V difference between the MCM
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the junction readings and the readings from step 38?
board 12P connector and the MCM (B2, B9), then go to
step 42. YES-Go to step 49.
NO-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217), NO-Go to step 42.
then go to step 42.
38. Record the value of the IMA BATTERY MODULE 1
VOLTAGE through IMA BATTERY MODULE 7
40. Disconnect MCM connector E (31P).
42. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC POAEE: Motor Control Module (MCM)
43. Reconnect all connectors. Internal Circuit Malfunction
44. Reinstall the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU NOTE:
cover (see page 12-212). Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
If the IPU module fan duct is blocked, DTC POAEE may
46. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). be detected.
47. Clearthe DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
for DTC U1204.
2. Clearthe DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
the junction board, the DC-DC converter, the MPI 3. Check and record the MPI TEMPERATURE in the
module, and the MCM, then go to step 1. DATA LIST with the HDS.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Is less than 221 F (105 C) indicated?

Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. time.B
49. Reconnect all connectors. NO-Go to step 4.
50. Reinstall the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU 4. Start the engine, and wait 10 minutes.
5. Check the MPI TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST with
51. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn the HDS, and compare that temperature with the
the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). temperature recorded in step 3.
52. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software Is there more than 39 F (4 C) indicated?
(see page 12-8). YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
tim e.ll
54. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. go to step 6.
Is DTC P0AE1 indicated? 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 7. Clearthe DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
the junction board, the DC-DC converter, the MPI
module, and the MCM. If the MCM was updated, 8. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
substitute a known-good MCM (see page 12-8), then
Is DTC POAEE indicated?
YES-Go to step 1.
complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
original MCM (see page 12-212). If any other Pending Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated, go to the indicated indicated DTC's troubleshooting.!!
DTC POBOF: Battery Current Sensor 2 Circuit DTC P0B10: Battery Current Sensor 2 Circuit
Malfunction Low Voltage
NOTE: NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data, and Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
Is DTC P0AC1, P0AC2, P0B10, or P0B11 indicated? Is DTC P0B10 indicated?
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P0AC1 (see page YES-Go to step 4.
12-121), P0AC2 (see page 12-124), P0B10 (see page
12-140), or P0B11 (see page 12-143).B
NO-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217), MCM and the battery current sensor.H
then go to step 4.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 1 12-75).
minute.
NO-Go to step 5.
8 . Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC POBOF indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
the battery current sensor and the MCM, then go to NO-Go to step 13.
step 1. 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO-Go to step 9. 7. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
9. M onitor the OBD STATUS for DTC POBOF in the DTCs 8. Remove the IPU case (see page 12-215).
MENU with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? cover (see page 12-212).
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 10. Disconnect MCM connector B (24P).
connections or loose terminals at the battery current
sensor and the MCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch
ON (II) until a result comes on.H
11. Disconnect the battery current sensor 4P connector 18. Check for continuity between body ground and MCM
(A). connector terminal B12.
ISOCF (BLK/WHT)
7 6 5 4 3 !u 2 1
16 15 14 13 12! 11 10 9 8
24 23 22 n 21I 20 19 18 17
12. Check for continuity between battery current sensor YES-Go to step 19.
4P connector terminal No. 1 and MCM connector
terminal B17. NO-Go to step 22.
MCM CONNECTOR B (24P) '
20. Disconnect the battery current sensor 4P connector
(A).
p _|
7 6 5 4 3 u 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
22 n 21 20 19 18 17
CM
CM
CO
VCCISOC
(YEL/RED)
J L^lL VCCISOC
(YEL/RED)
j4 3 2 1 I

then go to step 32.
current sensor and the MCM (B17), then go to step 32.
21. Check for continuity between battery current sensor 30. Disconnect the battery current sensor 4P connector
4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. (A).
[4 | 3T 2 11~|
ISOCF (BLK/WHT)
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the battery 31. Check for continuity between battery current sensor
current sensor and the MCM (B12), then go to step 32. 4P connector terminal No. 3 and MCM connector
terminal B12.
then go to step 32. M C M CONNECTOR B (24P)
22. Reconnect MCM connector B (24P).
ISOCF (BLK/WHT)
23. Connect MCM connector terminals B12 and B17 with T 1.....
a jumper wire. 7 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 u 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
24 n 21 20 19 18 17
CM
00
CM
CM
I
ISOCF (BLK/WHT)
n .......I
7 6 5 4 3 u 2 1 ISOCF (BLK/WHT)
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 - 1 n_
I 4 3 2 11
CM
CM
n 21 20 19 18 17
CM
23
VCCISOC (YEL/RED)
JUMPER WIRE Wire side of female terminals
Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity?

then go to step 32.
26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. current sensor and the MCM (B12), then go to step 32,
Is DTC P0B11 indicated? 32. Reconnect all connectors.
YES-Go to step 27. 33. Reinstall the IPU case (see page 12-215).
NO-Go to step 39. 34. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the
28. Remove the IPU case (see page 12-215). the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
29. Disconnect MCM connector B (24P). 36. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
37. Clearthe DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). DTC P0B11: Battery Current Sensor 2 Circuit
38. Checkfor Pending or Confi rmed DTCs with the HDS. High Voltage
Is DTC P0B10 indicated? NOTE:
the MCM and the battery current sensor, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other for DTC U1204.
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
39. Reconnect all connectors. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
40. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the 3. Start the engine.
PCU lid (see page 12-212). 4. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
41. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn Is DTC P0B11 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
(see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
(see page 12-8). Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
MCM and the battery current sensor.H
the MCM and the battery current sensor. If the MCM 8. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU
was updated, substitute a known-good MCM (see cover (see page 12-212).
page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was substituted, 9. Disconnect MCM connector B (24P).
go to step 1.
11. Measure the voltage between MCM connector 20. Reconnect all connectors.
ISOCF (BLK/WHT)
i 23. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software
n
7 6 5 4 3 I 2 1
(see page 12-8).
(2 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
24 23 19 18 17 24. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
n 21
CM
o
CM
CM

Wire side of female terminals YES-lf the MCM was updated, substitute a
Is there 4.95 V or more? known-good MCM (see page 12-8), then recheck. If
battery current sensor and the MCM (B12), then go to NO-lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
step 14. complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the
NO-Go to step 12. or Confirmed DTCs were indicated, go to the indicated
YES-Go to step 20.

then go to step 14.

the MCM and the battery current sensor then, go to
step 1.
DTC P0BE6: U Phase Motor Current Sensor . DTC POBEA: V Phase Motor Current Sensor
Circuit Malfunction Circuit Malfunction
NOTE; NOTE:
for DTC U1204, for DTC U1204.
2. Clearthe DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). 2. Clearthe DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
3. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0BE6 in the DTCs 3. Monitor the OBD STATUS for POBEA in the DTCs
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? Does the HDS indicate FAILED?

NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,
the system is OK at this time. If the HDS indicates NOT the system is OK at this time. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 1. COMPLETED, go to step 1.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 4. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0A5E and/or P0A5F indicated? Is DTC P0A61 and/or P0A62 indicated?
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P0A5E (see page YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P0A61 (see page
12-85) and/or DTC P0A5F (see page 12-89). 12-93) and/or DTC P0A62 (see page 12-97).
NO-Replace the phase motor current sensor (see NO-Replace the phase motor current sensor (see
page 12-214), then go to step 5. page 12-214),then goto step 5.
Is DTC P0BE6 indicated? Is DTC POBEA indicated?

7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0BE6 in the DTCs 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for POBEA in the DTCs
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 6, Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 6,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If the NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If the
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition
switch ON (II) until a result comes on.H switch ON (II) until a result comes on.H
DTC POBEE: W Phase Motor Current Sensor DTC POBFD: Motor Current Sensor Circuit
Circuit Malfunction Ma l function
NOTE; NOTE;
Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data, and Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
3. Monitor the OBD STATUS for POBEE in the DTCs 3. Start the engine.
MENU with the HDS.
Is DTC POBFD indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 5.
ISIO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,
time.H
Is DTC P0A5E, P0A5F, P0A61, P0A62, P0A64, orP0A65
Is DTC P0A64 andfor P0A65 indicated?
indicated?
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P0A64 (see page
12-100) and/or DTC P0A65 (see page 12-104). YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
page 12-214), then go to step 5. page 12-214), then go to step 8.
Is DTC POBEE indicated?
YES-Go to step 1.
Is DTC POBFD indicated?
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for POBEE in the DTCs YES-Go to step 1.
MENU with the HDS. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition
switch ON (II) until a result comes on.H
i m
DTC P1437: Motor Power Inverter (MPI) 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Module Short Circuit 8. Clearthe DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
NOTE: 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 1
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and minute.
10. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute under
these conditions:
for DTC U1204.
Blower fan at maximum speed
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Rear window defogger on
2. Clearthe DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). 11. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 1 Is DTC P1437 indicated?
minute.
4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute under the MPI module, then go to step 1.
these conditions:
Headlights on high beam NO-Go to step 12.
Blower fan at maximum speed 12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1437 in the DTCs
Rear window defogger on MENU with the HDS.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1437 in the DTCs Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
MENU with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 11,
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, connections or loose terminals at the DC-DC
the system is OK at this time. If the HDS indicates NOT converter and the MPI module, then go to step 1. If the
COMPLETED, go to step 1. HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition
6. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. switch ON (II) until a result comes on.H
Is DTC P06B1, P0AA6, P1440, P15A5, orP1634

indicated?

go to step 7.
DTC P1440: Motor Power Inverter (MPI) 10. Check the connections at the IMA motor power cables
(A).
Module Output Circuit Malfunction
NOTE:
for DTC U1204.
these conditions:
Headlights on high beam Are the connections OK?
Blower fan at maximum speed YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Repair the connections, then go to step 23.
11. Remove the IMA motor power cables (A) from the
Is DTC P0A3F, P0A5E, P0A5F, P0A61f P0A62f P0A64, phase motor current sensor. ' '
P0A65, P0BE6, POBEA, POBEE, or POBFD Indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting-^ and the W phase cables before disconnecting them.
NO-Go to step 5.
MENU w ith the HDS.

time.B
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 3.
(0.96 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
12. Check for continuity between IMA motor power 16. Remove the PCU busplate and the PCU cover (see
cables A and B, and then between cables A and C. page 12-212).
17. Disconnect the MPI module 12P connector (A).
YES-Go to step 15. 18. Disconnect MCM connector C (22P).

NO-Go to step 13.
13. Disconnect the IMA motor power cable connector.
NOTE;
Refer to Disconnecting the IMA Motor Power Cable
Connector From the Motor Stator (see page 12-4).
If the IMA motor power cable terminals are wet, dry
them with a clean shop towel. Do not use
compressed air.
14. Check for continuity between IMA motor power cable
terminals A and B, and then between terminals A and
C.
YES-Replace the IMA motor power cables (see page

NO-Replace the IMA motor housing (see page
DTC Ttroubleshooting (cont'd)
19. Check for continuity between these terminals: 20. Check for continuity between these MCM connector C
MCM connector terminal C8 and MPI module 12P (22P) terminals and body ground individually:
connector terminal No. 11. C1 and body ground
MCM connector terminal C16 and MPI module 12P C2 and body ground
MCM connector terminal C9 and MPI module 12P MCM CONNECTOR C (22P)
connector terminal No. 9. WH (YEL/BLU) VH (WHT)
MCM connector terminal C2 and MPI module 12P
VH (WHT)
WH (YEL/BLU)
7 6 u 5 4 3 2 1 UL (RED/YEL)
15 14 13 12 11 10 g 8 UH
22 21 20 19 18 n 17 16 (BLU/BLK)
WL (RED/BLU) VL
(YEL/RED) Is there continuity between each terminal and body
WH (YEL/BLU)
ground?
VH (WHT)
a
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the MPI
UH (BLU/BLK)
module 12P connector and the MCM (C l, C2, C8, C9,
C16, C17), then go to step 23.
6 5 4 3 2 1
NO-Go to step 21.
12 11 10 9 8 7
WL 21. Reconnect MCM connector C (22P).
(RED/BLU)
VL (YEL/RED)
UL (RED/YEL)
M PI MODULE 12P CONNECTOR

Is there continuity between all of the terminals?
YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the MPI
module 12P connector and the MCM (C1, C2, C8, C9,
22. Measure the resistance between these MCM 23. Reconnect all connectors.
connector C (22P) terminals and body ground
individually:
C1 and body ground
C2 and body ground 25. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn
C8 and body ground the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
C9 and body ground 26. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
C16 and body ground
27. Clearthe DTC w ith the HDS (see page 12-6).
C17 and body ground
these conditions:
WH (YEL/BLU) VH (WHT) Headlights on high beam
Rear w indow defogger on
the MPI module, the IMA motor power cable, and the
NO-Go to step 30.
30. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P1440 in the DTCs
MENU w ith the HDS.
Is there about 10 kD between each terminal and body
ground? Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
YES-Replace the MPI module (see page 12-214), then YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
go to step 23. Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 29,
NO-Go to step 31.
connections or loose terminals at the MPI module, the
IMA m otor power cable, and the MCM, then go to step
1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
28.
32. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the DTC P1446: Battery Module Individual Voltage
Input Deviation
NOTE:
34. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software any on-board snapshot, and review the general
(see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM troubleshooting information (see page 12-5).
(see page 12-8). If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
35. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute under for DTC U1204.
these conditions: 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Rear w indow defogger on 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
36. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 4. Remove the No. B1 BACK UP (15A) fuse from the
Is DTC P1440 indicated? then reinstall it.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the MPI module, the IMA motor power cable, and the
MCM. If the MCM was updated, substitute a 6. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, lights, etc.)
known-good MCM (see page 12-8), then recheck. If are off.
NO-Go to step 37.
9. Hold the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000
MENU w ith the HDS.
rpm w ithout load (in P or N (CVT model)) (in neutral
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? (M/T model)) until the SOC increases to 75%.
YES-lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is 10. Let the engine idle for 3 minutes.
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 36, go to Is DTC P1446 indicated?
YES-Go to step 12.
connections or loose terminals at the MPI module, the NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this
IMA m otor power cable, and the MCM. If the MCM t im e.B
was updated, substitute a known-good MCM (see 12. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, Is DTC P1570 indicated?
go to step 35. YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P1570 (see page
12-158).
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Record the value of the IMA BATTERY MODULE 1
17. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU 20. Reconnect all connectors.
18. Disconnect MCM connector E (31P). PCU lid (see page 1 2 - 2 1 2 ) .
19. Compare the voltages you recorded in step 13 with 22. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn
the voltages you record between the MCM connector the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
1 VOLTAGE 24. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS (see page 12-6).
E20 and E21, compared to IMA BATTERY MODULE 25. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2 VOLTAGE
E9 and E20, compared to I MA BATTERY MODULE 3 26. Remove the B1 BACK UP (15A) fuse from the
VOLTAGE under-dash fuse/relay box for at least 30 seconds,
E8 and E9, compared to IMA BATTERY MODULE 4 then reinstall it.
VOLTAGE 27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
5 VOLTAGE 28. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, lights, etc.)
are off.
VOLTAGE 29. Start the engine.
VOLTAGE
M C M C O N N E C T O R E ( 3 1 P)
(M/T model)) until the SOC increases to 75%.
VHB3 VHB4 VHB7 VHB8
(GRN) (GRN/RED) (BLU) (WHT) 32. Let the engine idle for 3 minutes.
9 8 7 6 5 4 T IL J IT 1
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
YES-Go to step 1.
31 d& 29 n 28 27 26 2 s 24 22
YEL) ft NO-Go to step 34.
\
VHB0 VHB2 34. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P1446 in the DTCs
(RED) (BLK) (GRN/BLK) (YEL)
MENU with the HDS.
W ire side o f fem ale term in a ls Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
Is there more than a 1.2 V difference between the MCM YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
readings, and the readings from step 13? Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 33,
YES-Go to step 35.
N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 4. If the
NO-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217), HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 25.
then go to step 20.
(cont'd)
35. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P1448: Intelligent Power Unit (IPU)
36. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the Module Fan Problem
NOTE:
37. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). any on-board snapshot, and review the general
(see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
(see page 12-8). for DTC U1204.
39. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
40. Remove the B1 BACK UP (15A) fuse from the 2. Clearthe DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
under-dash fuse/relay box for at least 30 seconds, 3 . Do the IPU MODULE FAN DRI VE in the I NSPECTI ON
then reinstall it. MENU with the HDS.
41. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is the IPU module fan OK?
42. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, lights, etc.) YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
are off. tim e.H
43. Start the engine. NO-Go to step 4.
44. Check the SOC in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w ith the HDS.
45. Hold the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 Is DTC P1634 indicated?
(M/T model)) until the SOC increases to 75%. YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P1634 (see page
12-178).
46. Let the engine idle for 3 minutes.
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Remove the right cargo area side trim panel (see page
YES-lf the MCM was updated, substitute a 20-64).
known-good MCM (see page 12-8)f then recheck. If
the MCM was substituted, go to step 1. 7. Disconnect the IPU module fan 4P connector.
NO-Go to step 48. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

MENU with the HDS.
YES-lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 47, go to
connections or loose terminals at the MPI module, the
IMA motor power cable, and the MCM. If the MCM
was updated, substitute a known-good MCM (see
go to step 39.
9. Measure the voltage between IPU module fan 4P 12. Measure the voltage between IPU m odulefan 4P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 4. connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
IPU M ODULE FAN 4P CONNECTOR IPU MODULE FAN 4P CONNECTOR
il
1GA2 GND fanctlI GND
(WHT) (BLK) (BLU] 0 (BLK)
W ire side of fem ale term inals W ire side o f fem ale term inals
Is there battery voltage? Is there battery voltage?

NO-Go to step 21. NO-Replace the IPU m odulefan (see page 12-220),
then go to step 29.
10. Measure the voltage between IPU module fan 4P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
14. Disconnect the IPU module fan 4P connector.
IPU MODULE FAN 4P CONNECTOR
NFAN GND
(YEL) (BLK) 18. Disconnect MCM connector A (31P).
W ire side o f fem ale term inals M CM CONNECTOR A (31P)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 22.
11. Reconnect the IPU module fan 4P connector.
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the IPU
module fan and the MCM (A25), then go to step 29.
(cont'd)
20. Check for continuity between IPU module fan 4P 25. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU
connector terminal No. 2 and MCM connector cover (see page 12-212).
terminal A25.
MCM CONNECTOR A (31P) 27. Check for continuity between MCM connector
W ire side o f fem ale term inals terminal B1 and body ground.
NFAN
( B L U /B L K )
__l fM
7 6 5. 4 Til u 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
CM
0
24 23 22 n 21 19 18 17
IP U M O D U L E F A N 4 P C O N N E C T O R W ire side o f fem ale term inals

YES-Repair a short in the wire between the IPU
YES-Go to step 38. module fan and the MCM (B1), then go to step 29.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the IPU NO-Go to step 28.
module fan and the MCM (A25), then go to step 29.
21. Measure the voltage between IPU module fan 4P terminal B1 and IPU module fan 4P connector
connector terminal No. 4 and body ground. terminal No. 3.
IP U M O D U L E F A N 4 P C O N N E C T O R W ire side o f fem ale term inals
N F A N ( B L U /B L K )
I _L*
4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 I3 Iu 2 1
IGA2 (WHT)
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
24 23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls N F A N (Y E L )
Is there battery voltage? [~4 I 3^ 2 I 1~1
YES-Repair an open in the wire between the IPU IP U M O D U L E F A N 4 P C O N N E C T O R

module fan and G701 (see page 22-50), then g oto step W ire side o f fem ale term inals
29.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the IPU
YES-Go to step 38.
module fan and MCM relay 2, then go to step 29.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the IPU
module fan and the MCM (B1), then go to step 29.
32. If removed, reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), 41. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn
then turn the battery module switch ON (see page the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
12-4).
42. Reinstall the right cargo area side trim panel (see
33. If removed, reinstall the right cargo area side trim page 20-64).
panel (see page 20-64).
34. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM
(see page 12-8).
36. Do the IPU MODULE FAN DRIVE in the INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS. 45. Do the IPU MODULE FAN DRIVE in the INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS.
the IPU module fan and the MCM, then go to step 1. YES-Check fo r poor connections or loose terminals at
the IPU module fan and the MCM. If the MCM was
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other updated, substitute a known-good MCM (see page
Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
N O -lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
(cont'd)
DTC P1570: Battery Module Individual Voltage 16. Measure the voltage between these MCM connector
terminals:
Problem
E21 and E31
NOTE: E20 and E21
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and E9 and E20
any on-board snapshot, and review the general E8 and E9
E12 and E13
E2 and E12
for DTC U1204.
E1 and E2
M C M CONNECTOR E (31P)
VHB3 VHB4 VHB7 VHB8
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). (GRN) (GRN/RED) (BLU) (WHT)
4. Remove the No. B1 BACK UP (15 A) fuse from the 9 8 7 6 5

4 T T L J fT 1
then reinstall it. 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
A
CM
31
CO
CM
CD
CM
29 n 27 fl 2f n23 22
VHB1 4
(GRN/
6. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, lights, etc.) YEL) /
are off.
7. Check the SOC in the DATA LIST with the HDS. VHB0 VHB2 VHB5 VHBS
(RED) (BLK) (GRN/BLK) (YEL)
8. Hold the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s
rpm without load (in P or N (CVT model)) (in neutral
(M/T model)) until the SOC increases to 75%. Is the difference between the maximum and the
minimum values 3 V o r more?
9. Let the engine idle for 3 minutes.
10. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. then go to step 17.
Is DTC P1570 indicated? NO-Go to step 30.
YES-Go to step 11.
MCM.H
r r i
m B rn m
17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), 30. Reconnect all connectors.
18. Reconnect all connectors. 31. Reinstall the PCU lid (see page 12-212).
19. Reinstall the PCU lid (see page 12-212). 32. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn
the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). 33. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 12-8).
35. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0)9
then reinstall i t
then reinstall it.
(M/T model)) until the SOC increases to 75%. (M/T model)) until the SOC increases to 75%.
the battery module and the MCM. If the MCM was
NO-Go to step 29. updated, substitute a known-good MCM (see page
12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was substituted, go to
29. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P1570 in the DTCs step 1.
MENU with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 41.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other MENU with the HDS.
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor YES-lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
connections or loose terminals at the battery module complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the
and the MCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates original MCM (see page 12-212). If any other Pending
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 23. or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 40, go to
connections or loose terminals at the battery module
and the MCM. If the MCM was updated, substitute a
the MCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
(cont'd)
DTC P I 574: Battery Module Temperature 6. Check the IPU module air duct and the IPU module fan
for disconnections, damage, or obstructions.
Signal Circuit Malfunction
Are the IPU module air duct and the IPU module fan OK?
NOTE;
Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data, and YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
any on-board snapshot, and review the general time.
NO-Repair or replace the IPU module air duct or the
If the IPU module fan duct is blocked, DTC P1574 may IPU module fan as needed, then go to step 7.
be detected.
If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
for DTC U1204. 8. Clearthe DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
2. Clearthe DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). Is DTC P1574 indicated?
3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w ith the HDS. YES-Go to step 1.
Is D T C P 0 A 9 D , P 0 A 9 E , P 0 A C 7 , P 0 A C 8 , P O A C C , o r NO-Go to step 10.
POACD indicated?
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Do the IPU MODULE FAN DRIVE in the INSPECTION rpm w ithout load (in P or N (CVT model)) (in neutral
MENU with the HDS. (M/T model)) until the SOC increases to the
Is the IPU module fan OK? maximum.
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P1448 (see page 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r P1574 in the DTCs
12-154). MENU with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 5. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
5. Check IMA BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1, IMA YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2, and IMA Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 9,
BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR 3 in the DATA go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
LIST with the HDS. N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If the
NOTE: If the vehicle is left outside for an extended HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,, go to step 12.11
tim e with the temperature at 5 F (15 C) or less
bring it indoors overnight, where the temperature is
32 F (0 C) or more. Then continue with your
troubleshooting.
Are any of the values more than 131 F (55 C), or less
th a n 3 .6 F ( - 1 5 . 8 C ) in d ic a te d ?

then go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 6.
q j
DTC P1575: Motor Power Inverter (MPI) 10. Measure the resistance between MCM connector
term inals B9 and B10.
Module Voltage Malfunction
NOTE: MCM CONNECTOR B (24P)

CNTPG (GRY)
If the battery module switch is turned OFF while the
7 6 5 4 3 I 2 1
ignition switch is ON (II), DTC P1575 may be stored.
If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
CM
^r
for DTC U1204. 23 22 n 21 20 19 18 17
CNT (BLK)
Is there 2 3.4-28.6 D?
YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P0AE1 (see page
12-135). NO-
NO-Go to step 4. If the resistance is too high, go to step 17.
4. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. If the resistance is too low, go to step 19.
Is DTC P1575 indicated? 11. Check for continuity between MCM connector
YES-Go to step 5.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the n i
junction board, the MCM, and the MPI m o d u le .!
7 6 5 . 4 TT1J 2 1
CM
CM
CM
o
6. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). 24 23 n 21 19 18 17

CNT (BLK)
9. Disconnect MCM connector B (24P). W ire side o f fem ale term inals
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 14.
12. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector (A). 16. Check for continuity between the high voltage
contactor terminals (A, B).

terminal B10 and body ground. Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 21.
n _ . . :: z: i: :: i
____i then go to step 28.
7 6 5 4 3| LI 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
CM
CM
o
CM
24 23 n 21 19 18 17
CNT (BLK)
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the junction
step 28.
then go to step 28.
14. Make sure the battery module switch is turned OFF.
15. Connect MCM connector terminal B10 to 12 V battery
power, and connect MCM connector terminal B9 to
body ground.
18. Check for continuity between MCM connector 20. Check for continuity between MCM connector
terminal B10 and junction board 12P connector terminals B9 and B10.
terminal No. 6.
M CM C O N N E C T O R B (2 4 P )
M C M CO NNECTO R B (2 4 P )
C N T P G (G R Y )
7 6 I 1 I |LJ
5 .4 3 2 1
7 6 5 4 U I 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
n
CM
CM
24 23 21 20 19 18 17
CM
CM
24 23 n 21 20 19 18 17
C N T (B L K )
C N T (B L K )

CNT (BLK)
6 5 4 3 2 1 Is there continuity?
12 11 10 9 8 7
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the junction
J U N C T IO N B O A R D 12P C O N N E C T O R board 12P connector and the MCM (B9, B10), then go
W ire side o f fe m a l e term inals to step 28.
Is there continuity? NO-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217),
YES-Replace the battery module (see page 12-217), then go to step 28.
then go to step 28. 21. Reconnect MCM connector B (24P).
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the junction 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
board 12P connector and the MCM (BIO), then go to
step 28. 23. Record the value of the IMA BATTERY MODULE 1
19. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector (A). VOLTAGE in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
26. Compare the voltages you recorded in step 23 with 27. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
the voltages you record between the MCM connector
E21 and E31, compared to IMA BATTERY MODULE 29. Reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate, and the
1 VOLTAGE PCU lid (see page 12-212).
E20 and E21, compared to IMA BATTERY MODULE 30. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn
2 VOLTAGE the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
VOLTAGE 31 .Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
E8 and E9, compared to IMA BATTERY MODULE 4 32. Clearthe DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
VOLTAGE
E12 and E13, compared to IMA BATTERY MODULE 33. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
5 VOLTAGE Is DTC P1575 indicated?
E2 and E l2, compared to IMA BATTERY MODULE 6
VOLTAGE YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the junction board, the MCM, and the MPI module,
then go to step 1.
VOLTAGE
M CM CONNECTOR E (31P)
VHB3 VHB4 VHB7 VHB8
(GRN) (GRN/RED) (BLU) (WHT) 34. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
9 8 7 6 5 4 T IL J fT 1
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 PCU lid (see page 1 2 - 2 1 2 ) .
YEL)
31 0b 29
n 28 27 26 i s 24n 22
/ the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
VHBO VHB5 VHB6
VHB2 (YEL)
(RED) (BLK) (GRN/BLK) 38. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 12-8).
Is there more than a1 V difference between the MCM 39. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
readings, and the readings from step 23? 40. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 34. Is DTC P1575 indicated?
NO-Replace the MPI module (see page 12-214), then YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
go to step 27. the junction board, the MCM, and the MPI module. If
the MCM was updated, substitute a known-good
MCM (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was
DTC P1586: Battery Current Sensor Signal 9. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P1586 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Malfunction
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and YES-Check fo r poor connections or loose term inals at
any on-board snapshot, and review the general the battery current sensor and the MCM. If the
troubleshooting information (see page 12-5). connections and the terminals are OK, replace the
If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting battery module (see page 12-217), then go to step 10.
for DTC U 1204. N O -lf the HDS indicates PASSED, interm ittent failure,
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). sensor and the MCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
Is the SOC 25% or more ?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 5.
Is the SOC 25% or more?
rpm w ithout load (in P or N (CVT model)) (in neutral YES-Go to step 15.
(M/T model)) until the SOC increases to 25%.
NO-Go to step 14.
6. Test drive at 25 mph (40 km/h) in D (CVT model) or in
3rd gear or higher (M/T model). 14. Hold the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000
7. Press the brake pedal, and stop the vehicle slowly. (M/T model)) until the SOC increases to 25%.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0A3F, P0A5E, P0A5F, 15. Test drive at 25 mph (40 km/h) in D (CVT model) or in
P0A61, P0A62, P0A64, P0A65, P0A78, P0AC0, P0AC1, 3rd gear or higher (M/T model).
P0AC2, POBOF, P0B10, P0B11, P0BE6, POBEA, POBEE,
POBFD, P1440, P15A5, and P15AA in the DTCs MENU 16. Press the brake pedal, and stop the vehicle slowly.
with the HDS. 17. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? Is DTC P1586 indicated?
YES-Go to step 9. YES-Checkfor poor connections or loose terminals at
NO- the battery current sensor and the MCM, then go to
step 1.
If the HDS indicates FAILED: Go to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting. NO-Go to step 18.
# If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED: Keep the 18. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P1586 in the DTCs
ignition switch ON (II) until a result is indicated.! MENU with the HDS.
sensor and the MCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
DTC P15A5: Motor Current Sensor Circuit 11. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU
Malfunction
NOTE;
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and 13. Disconnect the MPI module 12P connector (A).
for DTC U1204.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle 1 minute under these
conditions:
Is DTC P0A3F, P0A5E, P0A5F, P0A61, P0A62, P0A64,
P0A65, P 0 B E 6 , POBEA, POBEE, P O B F D , P 1 4 3 7 , and/or
P1440 indicated?
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Test-drive the vehicle using wide open throttle for at
least 2 seconds, then decelerate while lightly braking.
YES-Go to step 7.
N O -lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Checkfor poor connections or loose terminals at the
phase motor current sensor and the IMA m otor power
cable.ll
7. At idle, individually check the amperage of the U
PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR, the V PHASE
MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR, and the W PHASE
MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Do the values vary from 0 A?
YES-Replace the phase m otor current sensor (see
NO-Go to step 8.
14. Checkfor continuity between these terminals: 15. Checkfor continuity between these MCM connector C
MCM connector terminal C8 and MPI module 12P (22P) terminals and body ground individually:
connector terminal No, 11. C1 and body ground
MCM connector terminal C9 and MPI module 12P MCM CONNECTOR C (22P)
connector term inal No. 9. WH (YEL/BLU) VH (WHT)
MCM connector terminal C2 and MPI module 12P
connector terminal No, 3.
VH (WHT)
Is there continuity between each terminal and body

ground?
NO-Go to step 16.
16. Remove the IMA motor power cables (A) from the
MPI MODULE 12P CONNECTOR

Wire side of femal e terminals
Is there continuity betw een all o f the terminals?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the MPI
9.4 N-m
(0.96'kgf-m, 6.9 Ib fft)
(cont'd)
17. Disconnect the IMA motor power cable connector 27. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
from the motor stator (see page 12-4).
NOTE: If the IMA motor power cable terminals are
wet, dry them with a clean shop towel. Do not use YES-Go to step 37.
compressed air. NO-Replace the MPI module (see page 12-214), then
go to step 28.
18. Check for continuity between IMA motor power cable
terminals A and B, B and C, and C and A individually. 28. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
30. If removed, reconnect the IMA m otor power cables to
the phase motor current sensor.
31. If removed, reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate
and the PCU lid (see page 12-212).
12-4).
YES-Replace the IMA motor power cable (see page
NO-Go to step 19.
19. Substitute a known-good MPI module (see page 12-8).
the phase motor current sensor and the IMA motor
21. Reconnect the IMA motor power cables to the phase power cable, then go to step 1.
m otor current sensor.
NOTE: Make sure the cables are correctly positioned Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
before you reconnect them. indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
26. Test-drive the vehicle using wide open throttle fo r at
37. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software DTC P15AA: Motor Rotor Position Not
Learned
(see page 12-8).
NOTE;
least 2 seconds, then decelerate while lightly braking. Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
Is DTC P15A5 indicated? If the IMA motor rotor position sensor and the IMA
motor rotor are installed incorrectly, DTC P15AA may
YES-lf the MCM was updated, substitute a be detected.
known-good MCM (see page 12-8), then recheck. If If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
the MCM was substituted, replace the IMA motor for DTC U1204.
housing (see page 12-227),then g o to step 28.
complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the 2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS (see page 12-6).
3. Start the engine, and let it idle 1 minute.
or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON
(H).

Are any DTC(s) except P15AA indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting M
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Start the engine, and hold the engine speed between
3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm w ithout load (in P or N (CVT
model)) (in neutral (M/T model)) until the SOC
increases to above 70%.
8. Do the MOTOR ROTOR POSITION CALIBRATION in
the IMA ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate COMPLETE?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete.
NO-Check the installation of the IMA motor rotor
position sensor and the MCM. If needed, reinstall the
parts, then go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC P1BC4: Auto I dle Stop System
10. Clearthe DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). Malfunction (M/T model )
11. Start the engine, and let it idle 1 minute. NOTE:
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
ON (II).
13. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
for DTC U1204.
Is DTC P15AA indicated?
This DTC is stored when the auto idle stop is
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at prohibited due to failure.
the IMA motor rotor position sensor and the MCM,
then go to step 1. 1. Check the AUTO IDLE STOP DOES NOT OCCUR
(BRAKE) in the PGM-FI SYSTEM DATA LIST with the
14. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P15AA in the DTCs Does the HDS indicate EXIST?
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to the brake booster pressure monitoring
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? system's general troubleshooting information (see
page 19-46). When the brake booster pressure
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 13, monitoring system troubleshooting is completed,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. reset the ECM (see page 11 -4) then clear the DTC in
the IMA system (see page 12-6).I I
NO-Go to step 2.
connections or loose terminals at the motor rotor
position sensor and the MCM, then go to step 1. If the 2. Check the AUTO IDLE STOP DOES NOT OCCUR (A/C)
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 11. in the PGM-FI SYSTEM DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate EXIST?
YES-Go to the climate control system's general
troubleshooting information (see page 21-8). When
the climate control system troubleshooting is
completed, reset the ECM (see page 11-4) then clear
the DTC in the IMA system (see page 12-6).11
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the AUTO IDLE STOP DOES NOT OCCUR (NP
SWITCH) in the PGM-FI SYSTEM DATA LIST with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check the AUTO IDLE STOP DOES NOT OCCUR
(CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH) in the PGM-FI
SYSTEM DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 26.
Reset the ECM (see page 11 -4), then clear the DTC in
the IMA system (see page 12-6).11
iE H
5. Check the NP SWITCH in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with 12. Check for continuity between neutral position switch
the HDS. 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
Does the HDS indicate ON when you move the shift lever NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
to neutral, and does it indicate OFF when you move the
shift lever to 1st or 2nd gear?
YES-lnterm ittent failure, the neutral position switch is G l ~j j
OK at this time. Reset the ECM (see page 11-4), and NSW (RED/BLK)
clearthe DTC in the IMA system (see page 12-6).
NO-
If the neutral position switch stays ON, go to step 6.
If the neutral position switch stays OFF, go to step
13.
If the indication is unstable, check the neutral
position switch and the shift arm condition (see
page 13-63), then go to step 67. YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM (B13
and B21) and the neutral position switch, then go to
step 67.
7. Disconnect the neutral position switch 2P connector.
NO-Update the ECM if it does not have the latest
8. Check the NP SWITCH in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with software (see page 11-207), then recheck. If the ECM
the HDS with the shift lever in neutral. was updated, replace the original ECM (see page
11 -209), then recheck.B
Does the NP SWITCH indicate OFF?
YES-Replace the neutral position switch (see page
13-43), then go to step 67. 14. Disconnect the neutral position switch 2P connector.
NO-Go to step 9. 15. Connect neutral position switch 2P connector

terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jum per wire.
NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
G TD
NSW (RED/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
16. Check the NP SWITCH in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with

the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate ON?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 21.
17. Disconnect the jum per wire from the neutral position
switch 2P connector.
(cont'd)
19. Connect neutral position switch 2P connector 25. Check for continuity between these terminals:
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jum per wire. ECM connector terminal B13 and neutral position
switch 2P connector terminal No. 2.
ECM connector terminal B21 and neutral position
NSW
(ED GND

(RED/BLK) (BLK)
Q l
if 2 | p
JUMPER WIRE
NSW (RED/BLK) H nsw (RED/BLK)
W ire side o f fem ale term in a ls (5 T ca

NSW (IGP) NSW (VCC) (RED/BLK)
20. Check the NP SWITCH in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with (RED/BLK)
the HDS with the shift lever in neutral.
11 1 3 41516)7 8 | 9
1 10 1 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
Does the HDS indicate OFF? 1 20 21 22 23 24 25
05
CO
o
CM
CO
CO
CM
26 27 28 33 34 35
YES-Repair an open in the wire between the neutral I 3 6 I37 3 8 13 9 14 0 14 1 142 4 3 |4 4
position switch and G101 (see page 22-26), then go to
step 67.
NO-Replace the neutral position switch (see page
21. Disconnect the jum per wire from the neutral position
switch 2P connector. YES-Update the ECM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-207), then recheck. If the ECM
22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). was updated, replace the original ECM (see page
23. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 11 -209), then recheck.il
24. Disconnect ECM connector B (44P). NO-Repair an open in the wire between the neutral
position switch and the ECM (B13 or B21), then go to
step 67.
26. Check CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH A and 33. Check for continuity between clutch pedal position
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH A (C) in the switch A 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body
PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS. ground.
Do the HDS indicate CLOSE when the clutch pedal is CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH A 2P CONNECTOR
pressed and OPEN when the clutch pedal is released?
Reset the ECM (see page 11-4), and clear the DTC in
the IMA system (see page 12-6).I I
2 1
NO-
If clutch pedal position switch A CLOSE stays on, go
to step 27.
If clutch pedal position switch A OPEN stays on, go
to step 34. W ire side o f fem ale term inals
If clutch pedal position switch C CLOSE stays on, go

to step 47.
If clutch pedal position switch C OPEN stays on, go YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM (B12)
to step 54. and clutch pedal position switch A, then go to step 67.
If clutch pedal position switch A and clutch pedal NO-Update the ECM if it does not have the latest
position switch C OPEN stays on, repair an open in software (see page 11-207), then recheck. If the ECM
the wire between clutch pedal position switch A and was updated, replace the original ECM (see page
C and G403 (see page 22-36), then go to step 67. 11-209), then recheck.H
28. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch A 2P 35. Disconnect clutch pedal position switch A 2P
connector. connector.
29. Check CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH A in the 36. Connect clutch pedal position switch A 2P connector
PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS. terminal No. 1 to body ground with jum per wire.
Does the HDS indicate OPEN?
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH A 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Replace clutch pedal position switch A (see page
NO-Go to step 30. 2 1
30. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). CLSW (BLU)
31. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. JUMPER WIRE
37. Check CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH A in the

PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate CLOSE?
YES-Go to step 38.
NO-Go to step 42.
38. Disconnect the jum per wire from the clutch pedal
position switch A 2P connector.
(cont'd)
40. Connect clutch pedal position switch A 2P connector 46. Check for continuity between clutch pedal position
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jum per wire. switch A 2P connector terminal No. 1 and ECM
connector terminal B12.
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH-A 2P CONNECTOR
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH A 2P CONNECTOR
GND (BLK) CLSW (BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
41. Check CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH A in the

PGM-FI DATA LI ST with the HDS.
YES-Repair an open in the wire between clutch pedal
position switch A and G403 (see page 22-36), then go
T erm i nal side o f fem ale term inals
to step 67.
NO-Replace clutch pedal position switch A (see page Is there continuity?
13-9)f then go to step 67. YES-Update the ECM if it does not have the latest
42. Disconnect the jum per wire from the clutch pedal software (see page 11-207), then recheck. If the ECM
position switch A 2P connector. was updated, replace the original ECM (see page
11-209), then recheck.H
NO-Repair an open in the wire between clutch pedal
44. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. position switch A and the ECM (B12), then go to step
67.
48. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch C 2P
connector.
YES-Replace clutch pedal position switch C (see page
NO-Go to step 50.
53. Check for continuity between clutch pedal position 60. Connect clutch pedal position switch C 2P connector
switch C 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jum per wire.
ground.
CLUTCH PEDAL POSIT I ON SWITCH C 2P CONNECTOR
CLUTCH PEDAL POSIT I ON SW I TCH C 2P CONNECTOR
1
2 1 CLSW2 (LT BLU)
GND (BLK)
" [C LS W 2 (LT BLU)
(H)
JUMPER WIRE
Is there continuity? PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM (B39) Does the HDS indicate OPEN?
and clutch pedal position switch C, then go to step 67.
YES-Repair an open in the wire between clutch pedal
NO-Update the ECM if it does not have the latest position switch C and G403 (see page 22-36), then go
software (see page 11-207), then recheck. If the ECM to step 67.
was updated, replace the original ECM (see page
11-209), then recheck.B NO-Replace clutch pedal position switch C (see page
55. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch C 2P position switch C 2P connector.
connector.
terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jum per wire. 64. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
CLUTCH PEDAL POSIT I ON SWITCH C 2P CONNECTOR
2 1
CLSW2 (LT BLU)
JUMPER WIRE

YES-Go to step 58.
NO-Go to step 62.
position switch C 2P connector.
(cont'd)
66. Check for continuity between clutch pedal position 67. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
switch C 2P connector terminal No. 1 and ECM
connector terminal B39.
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH C 2P CONNECTOR
W ire side o f fem ale term inals 70. Reset the ECM with the HDS (see page 11-4).
NOTE: If the ECM is not reset, DTC P15C4 is stored
again.
CLSW2 (LT BLU)
72. Do the auto idle stop system inspection (see page
12-207).
r________ ____...______ ___.................... 73. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[ I 10 11 12 13pl4|15[l6 17 18 19 J Is DTC P15C4 indicated?
20 21 22 23 24 25 a
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
the ECM and clutch pedal position switches A and C.
00
CD
37 38 I 39 j 4 141 42 43 14 4 1 Also check for brake system and climate control

CLSW2 (GRN) system DTCs, then go to step 1.
ECM CONNECTOR B (44P) NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Term inal side o f fem ale term inals Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
Is there continuity? indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
YES-Update the ECM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-207), then recheck. If the ECM
was updated, replace the original ECM (see page
11-209), then recheck.H
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the clutch
pedal position switch C and the ECM (B39), then go to
step 67.
DTC P1SC4; Auto Idle Stop System 6. Check the IDLE STOP SW in the PGM-FI DATA LIST
with the HDS.
M alfunction (CVT model)
Does it indicate OPEN when the brake pedal is pressed
NOTE:
and CLOSE when the brake pedal is released?
any on-board snapshot, and review the general YES-The system is OK at this time. Go to step 20.
NO-
for DTC U 1204. If CLOSE stays on, go to step 7.
This DTC is stored when the auto idle stop is If OPEN stays on, go to step 10.
prohibited due to failure.
8. Disconnect the idle stop switch 2P connector.
9. Check the IDLE STOP SW in the PGM-FI DATA LIST
3. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w ith the HDS. with the HDS.
Is DTC P0102 indicated? Does the HDS indicate OPEN?
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC P0102 (see page YES-Replace the idle stop switch (see page 12-229),
11-86), then reset the PCM with the HDS (see page then go to step 19.
11-4).B
NO-Repair a short to power in the wire between the
NO-Go to step 4. idle stop switch 2P connector and the PCM (A13), then
go to step 19.
4. Check the AUTO IDLE STOP DOES NOT OCCUR
(BRAKE) in the PGM-FI SYSTEM with the HDS. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Does the HDS indicate EXIST? 11. Disconnect the idle stop switch 2P connector.
YES-Go to the brake booster pressure monitoring 12. Connect idle stop switch 2P connector terminals No. 1
system's general troubleshooting information (see and No. 2 with a jum per wire.
page 19-46). When the brake booster pressure
monitoring system troubleshooting is completed,
IDLE STOP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
clearthe DTC (see page 12-6).H
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Check the AUTO IDLE STOP DOES NOT OCCUR (A/C)
in the PGM-FI SYSTEM with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate EXIST? BKSWNC IG1
(B R N ) (YEL)
YES-Go to the climate control system's general
troubleshooting information (see page 21-8). When JUMPER WIRE
the climate control system troubleshooting is W ire side o f fem ale term inals
completed, clearthe DTC (see page 12-6).H
NO-Go to step 6.
14. Check the IDLE STOP SW in the PGM-FI DATA LIST
with the HDS.
YES-Replace the idle stop switch (see page 12-229),
then g o to step 19.
NO-Go to step 15.
16. Disconnect the jum per wire from the idle stop switch DTC P1634: Motor Power Inverter (MPI)
2P connector. Module Signal Circuit Malfunction
NOTE;
18. Measure the voltage between body ground and idle Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
stop switch 2P connector terminal No. 1. any on-board snapshot, and review the general
IDLE STOP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
for DTC U1204.
YES-Go to step 4.
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
MCM and the MPI m odule,!!
YES-Repair an open in the wire between the idle stop
4. Do the IPU MODULE FAN DRIVE in the INSPECTION
switch 2P connector and the PCM (A13), then go to
MENU with the HDS.
step 19.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. B12 Does the HDS indicate OUT OF RANGE?
IG IMA (10 A) fuse and the idle stop switch 2P YES-Go to step 5.
connector, then go to step 19.
NO -lf the HDS indicates CONDITION IS NORMAL, go
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). to step 15.
20. Reconnect all connectors. 5. Check the No. B53 + B IMA 2 (15 A) fuse in the
21 .Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). under-dash fuse/relay box.
22. Reset the PCM with the HDS (see page 11-4). Is the fuse OK?
NOTE: If the PCM is not reset, DTC P15C4 can return. YES-Go to step 6.
23. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the
IPU module fan or the MPI module and the No. B53
24. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. IMA 2 (15 A) fuse. Also replace the No. B53 IMA 2 (15
A) fuse, then go to step 39.
Is DTC P15C4 indicated?
the PCM and the idle stop switch. Also checkfor brake 7. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
system and climate control system DTCs, then go to
step 1.
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated, go to the
H 3
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and listen for a 14. Measure the voltage between IPU relay holder (MCM
clicking sound from MCM relay 2 (A). relay 2) 8P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
IPU RELAY HOLDER 8P CONNECTOR
r?___m ____ ;
_k
1 +B
(BLU)
7IX18

Is there a clicking sound? YES-Repair an open in the wire between MCM relay 2
YES-Go to step 10. and MPI module 12P connector terminal No. 7, then
go to step 39.
NO-Go to step 27.
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). + B IMA 2 (15 A) fuse and MCM relay 2, then go to
step 39.
11. Remove MCM relay 2 (A).
20. Measure the resistance between MCM connector
................I ...1
7 6 U 5 4 3 2 1
12. Test MCM relay 2 (see page 22-92).
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Is the relay OK?
o
CM
22 21 19 18 n 17 16
YES-Go to step 13. IPUA (BLU/RED)
NO-Replace MCM relay 2, then go to step 39.
W i re side of fem ale term inals
Is there 1 MO or more?
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 36.
(cont'd)
21. Disconnect the MPI module 12P connector (A). 25. Measure the voltage between MPI module 12P

IPUA (BLU/RED)
1----
f n
6 5 4 3 2 1 (\
12 11 10 9 8 7
Is there about 5.0 V?

22. Reconnect MCM connector C (22P).
YES-Replace the MPI module (see page 12-214), then
go to step 39.
24. Measure the voltage between MPI module 12P
N O - G o to step 26.
26. Measure the vo ltage between MCM connector
MPI MODULE 12P CONNECTOR terminal C18 and body ground.
M CM CONNECTOR C (22PJ
n i i r
6 5 4 3 2 1 i.......
12 11 10 9 8 7 7 6u 5 4 3 2 1
GND IGA2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
(BLK) (RED)
22 21 20 19 18 n 17 16
I IPUA (BLU/RED)
W ire side of fem ale term in a ls

(x)
Is there about 12 V?
YES-Go to step 25.
Is there about 5.0 V?
NO-Go to step 38.
YES-Repair an open in the wire between the MPI
module 12P connector and the MCM (C18), then go to
step 39.
NO-Go to step 45.
28. Remove MCM relay 2 (A). 33. Reinstall MCM relay 2 (A).
29. Test MCM relay 2 (see page 22-92). 34. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is the relay OK? 35. Measure the voltage between MCM connector
YES-Go to step 30.
NO-Replace MCM relay 2, then go to step 39. M CM CONNECTOR A (31P)
IGHLD2 (LT GRN)
31. Measure the voltage between IPU relay holder (MCM ................. 1 .......... .......I... .. IL
0
3
CM
relay 2) 8P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. 9 8 7 6 5 4
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
IPU RELAY HOLDER 8P CONNECTOR
31 30
CM
05
CM
00
27 24 23 22
______re____ ei_______ _ n n 26 25
1 IGA
ZM
CD
CO
^r

5
YES-Go to step 45.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between MCM relay 2
W ire side o f fem ale term inals and the MCM (A4), then go to step 39.
YES-Go to step 32.
and MCM relay 2, then go to step 39.
(cont'd)
36. Disconnect the MPI module 12P connector (A). 38. Measure the voltage between MPI module 12P
n .. r
6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7

terminal C18 and body ground. YES-Repair an open in the wire between MPI module
12P connector terminal No. 12 and G901 (see page
M CM CONNECTOR C (22P) 22-54), then go to step 39.
i ....i and MPI module 12P connector terminal No. 7, then
7 6 U 5 4 3 2 1 go to step 39.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
22 21 20 19 18 n 17 16
IPUA (BLU/RED)
40. If removed, reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate,
and the PCU lid (see page 12-212).
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s 12-4).
module 12P connector and the MCM (C l8), then go to 44. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
step 39.
go to step 39. YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the MCM and the MPI module, then go to step 1.
(see page 12-8).
49. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC P1673: Motor Control Module (MCM)
50. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Rel ay Stays Activated
Is DTC P1634 indicated? NOTE:
the MCM and the MPI module. If the MCM was
updated, substitute a known-good MCM (see page
12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was substituted, go to If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
step 1. for DTC U1204.
If DTC P1673 is stored, 12 V battery may be
N O -lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is discharged.
original MCM (see page 12-212). If any other Pending 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait at least
40 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) again.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this
tim e.H
9. Measure the voltage between IPU relay holder (MCM 14. Reconnect all connectors.
relay 1) 8P connector terminals No. 7 and No. 8.
15. If removed, reinstall the PCU cover, the PCU busplate,
iPU RELAY HOLDER 8P CONNECTOR and the PCU lid (see page 12-212).
________ rp _ 16. If removed, reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210),
+B 1 12-4).
(LT BLU)
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait at least
40 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) again.
IGHLD (PUR) 20. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
W ire side o f fem ale term inals Is DTC P1673 indicated?
When turning the ignition switch from ON (II) to LOCK (0), YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
does the voltage change from 1 0V to0 V? MCM relay 1 and the MCM, then go to step 1.
YES-Go to step 10. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
NO-Go t o s t e p 1 1 . Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
Is the relay OK?
YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between PCU lid (see page 12-212).
MCM relay 1 and the MCM (A9), then go to step 14.
NO-Replace MCM relay 1, then go to step 14. the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
11. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU 24. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software
cover (see page 12-212). (see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM
(see page 12-8).
25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and then to LOCK
(0). Wait at least 40 seconds, then turn the ignition
switch to ON (II) again.
MCM ECU CONNECTOR A (31 P)
IGHLD (PUR)
immmm
9 8 7 6 5
3 (L 4
2j
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
J YES-lf the MCM was updated, substitute a
31 30 29
n 28 27 fl 26 25 24 23 22
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between
MCM relay 1 and the MCM (A3), then go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 21.
DTC P16C3; DC-DC Converter Temperature DTC U0029: F-CAN M alfunction (BUS-OFF
Sensor Circuit M alfunction (M otor Control M odule (MCM)))
NOTE: NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data, and To verify this is the appropriate troubleshooting
any on-board snapshot, and review the general procedure, jum p the SCS with the HDS and read the
troubleshooting information (see page 12-5). flash code, or change the HDS setup to show Honda
If the IPU module fan duct is blocked, DTC P16C3 may codes, and read the Honda code.
be stored. If DTC U0029 is indicated on the HDS, intermittent
If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting failure, the system is OK at this time.
for DTC U1204. If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
fo r DTC U1204.
Do the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 12-202).
2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS (see page 12-6).
Is DTC U1448, U1220, or U1221 indicated?
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check the DC-DC CONVERTER TEMPERATURE in the
Is more than 259 F (126 C), or less than 42 F
( -4 1 C) indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
Check the IPU module air duct and the IPU module fan
6. Check the IPU module air duct and the IPU modulefan
Are the IPU module air duct and the IPU module fan OK?
then go to step 7.
NO-Repair or replace the IPU module air duct or the
IPU module fan as needed, then go to step 7.
the DC-DC converter and the MCM, then go to step 1.
DTC U0038: IMA-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF 7. Measure the resistance between ECM/PCM connector
(Motor Control Module (MCM)))
DTC U1204: IMA-CAN Malfunction ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
(Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Motor

Control Module (MCM)) I 1 I2 / I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I9 I
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data, / s
20 21 / 23 24 25
and any on-board snapshot and review the general 1 26 27 28 29130131132 33 34 35 8
troubleshooting information (see page 12-5). 136137 38| 39 140 I / I 42 43|44|
IMA-CAN H IMA-CAN L
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (WHT) (RED)
2. Check for ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE in the
IMA DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 4 1 9 F ( 2 1 5 C ) in d ic a te d ? Term inal side o f fem ale term inals
YES-Go to step 3.
Is there about 0 Q?
Check for poor connections or loose term inals at the YES-Go to step 8.
ECM/PCM and the MCM.B
NO-Go to step 13.
6. Measure the resistance between ECM/PCM connector cover (see page 12-212).
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) 12. Checkfor continuity between MCM connector

MCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
I 1I2 9 l 4 I5 I6 | 7 8 | 9 I
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 IMA-CAN L (RED)
/
20 21 / 23 24 25
IMA-CAN H
26 27 28 29130131132 33 34 35 (WHT)
136137 38139 140 L9142 43|44|
B
IMA-CAN H IMA-CAN L 9 6 5 4
CO
- .i
(WHT) (RED)
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29
n 28 27 n 26 25 24 23 22

Is there about 120 Q?
NO-Go to step 7. YES-Repair a short in the wire between MCM
connector terminals A1 and A2, then go to step 32.
NO-Go to step 38.
15. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU 18. Check for continuity between MCM connector
cover (see page 12-212). terminal A1 and ECM/PCM connector term inal A39.
16. Disconnect MCM connector A (31P). MCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
17. Check fo r continuity between MCM connector
terminal A2 and ECM/PCM connector term inal A38. IM A-CAN L (RED)
M CM CONNECTOR A (31P) 9 J .I 7 1.6.1 5j 4 3 H I II 2 I 1

W ire side o f fem ale term inals 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
IMA-CAN H (WHT) 31 30 29 n 28 27 n 26 25 24 23 22
9 8 | 7 |6 | 5 |4 3 ILJmi
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29 n
28 27 26 25 24 23 22
I 1 I 2 3 (4 | 5 | 6 ] T 8 fi1 _
1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23 24 25
1 1
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
136137 38139140141142 4 3 |4 4 |

1 I
2 3IT ly r e \ 7 8 I 9I . J IM A-CAN L (RED)
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 1 ECM /PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35 Term inal side o f fem ale te rm i nals
37 3813 9 140 f4 1 142
I 36 I I fS lU l Is there continuity?
IMA-CAN H (WHT)
YES-Go to step 38.
Term inal side o f fem ale te rm i nals NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM
Is there continuity? (A39) and the MCM (A1), then go to step 32.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/PCM 20. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
(A38) and the MCM (A2), then go to step 32.
(cont'd)
24. Checkfor continuity between MCM connector 27. Measure the voltage between MCM connector
M CM CONNECTOR A (31P) MCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
IMA-CAN H (WHT) IMA-CAN H (WHT)
mmm
5 I 4 3 IL JT 2 | T T T 3 IL P T i
oo
CD
9 8 7 6 9
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 31 26 25 24 23 22
CO
o
29 28 27
n n n n
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s
Is there continuity? Is there about 5 12 V?

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the
ECM/PCM (A38) and the MCM (A2), then go to step 32. ECM/PCM (A38) and the MCM (A2), then go to step 32.
25. Checkfor continuity between MCM connector 28. Measure the voltage between MCM connector
MCM CONNECTOR A (31P) MCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
IMA-CAN L (REP) IMA-CAN L (REP)

.n ................ i......... ..... ... L,. j l
9 8 7 6 5 4 jy u o r 1 9 8 7 3 |L JTT \
6 5 4
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 <8 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
K>
CD
31 26 25 24 23 22
CM
00
26 25 24 23 22
00
o
n 28 27 31 30 29
n
27
n
W i re s i de o f fe m a l e term inals W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s
Is there continuity? Is there about 5 12 V?

YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the
ECM/PCM (A39) and the MCM (A1), then go to step 32. ECM/PCM (A39) and the MCM (A1), then go to step 32.
31. Measure the resistance between MCM connector 38. Reconnect all connectors.
terminals A1 andA2.
MCM CONNECTOR A (31P) PCU lid (see page 12-212).
IMA-CAN L (RED) 40. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-210), then turn
fQ N IMA-CAN H the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
^ P (W H T )
XI_ i9 ..............=i...... ....L _ p 41. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest software
9 8 7 6 5 4 1 (see page 12-211), or substitute a known-good MCM
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 (see page 12-8).
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 23 22
CM
^r
n n 42. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

43. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS in
the IMA SYSTEM.
W ire side o f fem ale term inals Is DTC U0038 or U1204 indicated?
Is there about 120 Q? YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at

the ECM/PCM and the MCM. If the MCM was updated,
YES-Go to step 38. substitute a known-good MCM (see page 12-8), then
software (see page 11 -207), or substitute a N O -lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the
If the symptom/indication goes away with a original MCM (see page 12-212). If any other Pending
known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original or Confirmed DTCs were indicated, go to the indicated
ECM/PCM (see page 11 -209), then go to step 32. DTC's troubleshooting.
37. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the IMA
SYSTEM with the HDS.
Is DTC U0038 or U1204 indicated?
the ECM/PCM and the MCM, then go to step 1.
(cont'd)
DTC U0100: F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain DTC U0155: F-CAN Malfunction (Gauge
Control Module (PCM)-Motor Control Module Control Module-Motor Control Module
(MCM)) (MCM))
NOTE: NOTE:
To verify this is the appropriate troubleshooting If DTC U0155 is indicated on the HDS, the sends and
procedure, jum p the SCS with the HDS and read the receives communication function of the MCM is OK.
flash code, or change the HDS setup to show Honda Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
codes, and read the Honda code. any on-board snapshot, and review the general
If DTC U0100 is indicated on the HDS, intermittent troubleshooting information (see page 12-5).
failure, this system is OK at this time. If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting for DTC U1204.
for DTC U1204.
ECM/PCM and the MCM. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the
i g n i t i o n switch-to ON (II) a g a i n , a n d w a i t 4 seconds.
6. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the IMA
YES-Go to step 7.
tim e.ll
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the
instrument panel indicators.
Do any indicators come on?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 17.
15. Checkfor continuity between gauge control module 16. Check for continuity between gauge control module
32P connector terminal No. 19 and MCM connector 32P connector terminal No. 20 and MCM connector
terminal A23. terminal A22.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
p.. i. .r ... n... ... i .ri n Ii iI . j i n

00
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
00
hO
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
00
o
CM
CM
CD
CM
32 31 29 27 25 24 23 21 20 19 18 17
F-CAN H (GRN) F-CAN L (PNK) I

T
_n ......... .............1
L ....... ............I
i - ,
.........
____-JL. ... m . m I I
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 lL J f2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3O fT n
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29 n 28 27 m 26 25 24 23 22 31 30 29 n 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
F-CAN H (WHT) F-CAN L (RED)i
W ire side o f fem ale term in a ls MCM CONNECTOR A (31P)

YES-Go to step 16. YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-354).
control module 32P connector and the MCM (A23), NO-Repair an open in the wire between the gauge
then go to step 22. control module 32P connector and the MCM (A22),
then go to step 22.
18. Check the No. B22 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Repair a short in the wire between the No. B22
METER (7.5 A) fuse and gauge control module 32P
connector terminal No. 17. Also replace the No. B22
METER (7.5 A) fuse, then go to step 22.
(cont'd)
21. Measure the voltage between gauge control module DTC U0311: MCM and BCM Program Version
Mismatch
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR NOTE:
nil--- .... ..... __I!__ __ii__ r~n troubleshooting information (see page 12-5).
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
This DTC is indicated when a MCM update is not
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
completed.
1G1 (LT BLU)
Do not turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) while
updating the MCM. If you do, the MCM can be
damaged.
1. Do the MCM (IMA Motor) update procedure (see page
W ire side o f fe m a l e term inals 12 - 2 1 1 ).

YES-Repair an open in the ground wire (G501) (see
page 22-40), then go to step 22. YES-Replace the original MCM (see page 12-212).
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. B22 NO-Update is complete, if any other Pending or
METER (7.5 A) fuse and the gauge control module 32P Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
connector, then go to step 22. DTC's troubleshooting.
the MCM and the gauge control module, then go to
step 1.
DTC U0312: BCM, MCM and PGM-FI System DTC U1220: DC-DC Converter Lost
Program Version Mismatch Communication with Motor Control Module
NOTE:
(MCM)
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and NOTE:
any on-board snapshot, and review the general Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
This DTC is indicated when a MCM update is not troubleshooting information (see page 12-5).
completed. If the DTC cannot be cleared, do the troubleshooting
Do not turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) w hile fo r DTC U1204.
updating the MCM. If you do, the MCM can be
damaged. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
1. Do the MCM (IMA Battery) update procedure (see 2. Clearthe DTC w ith the HDS (see page 12-6).
page 12-211). 3. Start the engine.
2. Check fo r Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 4. M onitor the OBD STATUS for U1220 in the DTCs
Is DTC U0312 indicated? MENU with the HDS.
YES-Replace the original MCM (see page 12-212).H Does the HDS indicate FAILED?
NO-Update is complete. If any other Pending or YES-Go to step 5.

Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated N O -lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,
DTC's troubleshooting. the system is OK at this time. Check for poor
converter and the MCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
result comes on.H
9. Disconnect the DC-DC converter 4P connector (A).
10. Checkfor continuity between MCM connector 14. Measure the voltage between DC-DC converter 4P
terminal A27 and body ground. connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
MCM CONNECTOR A (31P) DC-DC CONVERTER 4P CONNECTOR
SCIMD (GRN)

Is there continuity? Is there 8 -1 2 V?
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the MCM YES-Repair an open in the wire between the MCM
(A27) and the DC-DC converter, then go to step 22. (A27) and the DC-DC converter, then go to step 22.
11. Reconnect the DC-DC converter 4P connector. 15. Substitute a known-good DC-DC converter (see page
12-213).
13. Measure the voltage between MCM connector
terminal A27 and body ground. 17. Reinstall the MCM (see page 12-212).
18. Reinstall the IPU cover (see page 12-21 OK then turn
M CM CONNECTOR A (31P) the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
9 8 7 6 5 4 T J L J [T 1
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29 Is DTC U1220 indicated?
n 28 27 n 26 25 24 23 22
X SCIMD (GRN) YES-Go to step 32.
x )
NO-Replace the original DC-DC converter (see page
YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Go to step 14.
22. Reconnect al l connectors. 35. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U1220 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). YES-lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). original MCM (see page 12-212). If any other Pending
26. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 34, go to
Is DTC U1220 indicated? connections or loose terminals at the DC-DC
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at converter and the MCM. If the MCM was updated,
the DC-DC converter and the MCM, then go to step 1. substitute a known-good MCM (see page 12-8), then
recheck. If the MCM was substituted, go to step 1. If
NO-Go to step 28. the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the
ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on.H
28. M onitor the OBD STATUS for U1220 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
converter and the MCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch
ON (II) until a result comes on.H
(see page 12-8).
is DTC U1220 indicated?
the DC-DC converter and the MCM. If the MCM was
updated, substitute a known-good MCM (see page
12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO-Go to step 35.
(cont'd)
DTC U1221: Motor Control Module (MCM) 10. Check for poor connections, loose bolts, and damage
at the busbars (A).
Lost Communication with DC-DC Converter
NOTE;
Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data, and
for DTC U1204.
YES-Go to step 4.
N O -lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
DC-DC converter and the MCMM
Are the busbar connections OK?
4. Check the No. B12 IG IMA (10 A) fuse in the YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Repair the busbar connections, then go to step
Is the fuse OK? 23.
YES-Go to step 5. 11. Disconnect MCM connector A (31P).
NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the
12. Measure the resistance between MCM connector
DC-DC converter 4P connector and the No. B12 IG
IMA (10 A) fuse. Also replace the No. B12 IG IMA (10
A) fuse, then go to step 23. MCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
6. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). 9 8 7 6 574 IU l i 1
7. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210). 21 20 19 18 17 16 16 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29 28 27 n 26 25 24 23 22
8. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU n
cover (see page 12-212). JSCIDtVI (GRY)
9. Reinstall the PCU busplate (see page 12-212).
Is there 1 MO or more?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 21.
13. Disconnect the DC-DC converter 4P connector (A). 19. Measure the voltage between DC-DC converter 4P
DC-DC CONVERTER 4P CONNECTOR
E 3 .
rSTsTaTil
SCIDM (GRY)
15. Measure the voltage between DC-DC converter 4P
then go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 20.
DC-DC CONVERTER 4P CONNECTOR 20. Measure the voltage between MCM connector
[4|3|2|ll
I G1 (LT GRN)

YES-Go to step 16. W ire side o f fem ale term inals
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the DC-DC
converter 4P connector and the No. B12 IG IMA (10 A)
fuse, then go to step 23. YES-Repair an open in the wire between the DC-DC
converter 4P connector and the MCM (A28), then go
to step 23.
17. Reconnect MCM connector A (31P).
NO-Go to step 29.
(cont'd)
21. Disconnect the DC-DC converter 4P connector (A). 23. Reconnect all connectors.
the MCM and the DC-DC converter, then go to step 1.
22. Measure the resistance between MCM connector Pending or Confirmed DTCs are indicated, go to the
terminal A28 and body ground. indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
(see page 12-8).
is DTC U1221 indicated?
Is there 1MQ or more?
YES-Replace the DC-DC converter (see page 12-213), the MCM and the DC-DC converter. If the MCM was
then go to step 23. updated, substitute a known-good MCM (see page
NO-Repair a short in the wire between the DC-DC 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was substituted, go to
converter 4P connector and the MCM (A28), then go step 1.
to step 23. N O -lf the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
IMA System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
IMA system indicator stays onr no DTCs set IMA system indicator never comes on, no
DTCs set
2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 12-5). 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and select the IMA 2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
SYSTEM. 22-325).
Does the HDS communicate with the IMA system? Does the IMA system indicator flash?
YES-Go to step 4. YES-The system is OK at this tim e.H
NO-Do the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page
12-202). 2 2-354).

22-325).
Does the IMA system indicator flash?
YES-The system is OK at this tim e .ll
22-354).B
Charging System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
Charging system indicator stays on, no DTCs 8. Check the connections at the high voltage terminals
set (A, B) on the DC-DC converter (C).
NOTE: If the 12V battery voltage is too low to operate the

starter motor, the charging system indicator may come
on.
2. Check the DC-DC CONVERTER TEMPERATURE in the
Is 201 -2 5 7 F (94 -1 2 5 C) indicated?
YES-The system is OK at this time. The charging
system indicatorw ill go off when the DC-DC converter
temperature decreases. If the temperature does not
decrease even though time has passed, replace the
DC-DC converter (see page 12-213).
NO-Go to step 3. Are the connections OK?
3. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page YES-Replace the DC-DC converter (see page
22-325). 12-213).
Does the charging system indicator flash? NO-Repair the connections.
YES-Go to step 4.
22-354).
7. Remove the PCU Hd, the PCU busplate, and the PCU
Charging system indicator flickers, no-DTCs Charging system indicator newer comes on,
set no DTCs set
This indicator may blink after you start the engine in 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
extremely cold weather (22 F (30 C) or below). It
2. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
stops blinking when the battery module warms up.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and select the IMA
SYSTEM.
Does the HDS communicate with the IMA system?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Do the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page
12-202).B

22-325).
Does the charging system indicator flash?
YES-The system is OK at this tim e .ll
22-354).H
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Make sure the HDS and its DLC cable are working 11. Remove MCM relay 1 (A).
properly.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Do the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page
11-383).
4. Check the No. B42 IMA 1 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 5. 12. Test MCM relay 1 (see page 22-92).
NO-Repair a short in the wire between the No. B42 Is the relay OK?
IMA 1 (7.5 A) fuse and the MCM (A9). Also replace the YES-Go to step 13.
No. B42 IMA 1 (7.5 A) f u s e *
NO-Replace MCM relay 1M
14. Measure the voltage between IPU relay holder (MCM
7. Remove the IPU cover (see page 12-210). relay 1) 8P connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
8. Turn the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). IPU RELAY HOLDER 8P CONNECTOR
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and listen for a .------------ rs------ si------------
clicking sound from MCM relay 1 (A).
1
+B
(LT BLU)
4|>Q3

YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair an open in the w ire between the No.B42
IMA 1 (7.5 A) fuse and MCM relay 1.
Is there a clicking sound?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 25.
16. Reinstall MCM relay 1 (A). 22. Check for continuity between MCM connector
terminal A23 and DLC terminal No. 6.
F-CAN H (GRN)
[ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8/
\ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16/
MCM CONNECTORA (31P)
9 8 TT6 5 4 T fL J f 2 1 1
cover (see page 12-212). 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29
18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). n 28 27 F l 26 25 24 23 22
F-CAN H (WHT)
19. Measure the voltage between MCM connector
terminals A6 and A9. W ire side of fem ale term inals

YES-Go to step 23.
No. 6 and the MCM (A23).B

YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 24.
23. Check for continuity between MCM connector 24. Measure the voltage between MCM connector
terminal A22 and DLC terminal No. 14. terminal No. 9 and body ground.
D A T A L I N K C O N N E C T O R (D L C ) IGA (PNK/BLK)
fl I..........
2 3 4 5 6 7 9 8 7 6 5
\ 1
\9
8 /
10 11 12 13 14 15 16/ I) 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
F-CAIM L (PNK) n
M C M C O N N E C T O R A ( 3 1 P) W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s
JL
8 1 nun Is there battery voltage?
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 YES-Repair an open in the wire between the MCM
3113012911 [j281271 fl1 26125j24123122 (A6) and G901 (see page 22-54).H
F-CAN L (RED)
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the MCM (A9)
and MCM relay 1.
YES-Update the MCM if it does not have the latest
the symptom goes away with a known-good MCM,
replace the original MCM (see page 12-212).
No. 14 and the MCM (A22).B

Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 28.
NO-Replace MCM relay 1M
29. Measure the voltage between IPU relay holder (MCM 34. Measure the voltage between MCM connector
relay 1) 8P connector terminal No. 7 and body ground. terminal A3 and body ground.
IPU RELAY HOLDER 8P CONNECTOR MCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
_______r? eh______
IGHLD (PUR)
+B
(LT BLU)
_Jt___ , .............
TW ?
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 T L JT 1
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
CM
CO
31 29 28 26 25 24 23 22
n n A
W ire side o f fem ale term inals W ire side o f fem ale term inals

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. B42 NO-Repair an open in the wire between MCM relay 1
IMA 1 (7.5 A) fuse and MCM relay 1. and the MCM (A3).B
31. Reinstall MCM relay 1 (A). 36. Disconnect MCM connector A (31P).
PG (BLK)
9 8 7 <3 5 T
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
TUizzn
1
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
n n
32. Remove the PCU lid, the PCU busplate, and the PCU W ire side o f fem ale term inals
33. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 38.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the MCM (A6)
and G901 (see page 2 2-54 ).!
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting Auto Idle Stop System Inspection
(cont'd)
39. Measure the voltage between MCM connector M /T model
MCM CONNECTOR A (31P) Altitude 2,500 m (8,200 ft) or lower (At higher
altitudes, auto idle stop is often prevented because
of the lack of vacuum in the brake booster).
1G1 (PNK)
The low temperature indicator does not come on.
JL.......___________ I__ ____ JL The IMA battery level gauge displays at least half of
p 9 8 7 6 5 4 j j I Il E 1
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
n
its scale.
All electrical items (headlights, blower fan, radiator
fan, rear w indow defogger, A/C, etc.) are off.
Any indicator does not come on.
No heavy load in the vehicle (A heavy load prevents
auto idle stop because the system "thinks" the
vehicle is going uphill).
Drive the vehicle on a flat road or downhill.
Is there battery voltage? 2. Start the engine.
YES-Go to step 40. 3. Test-drive under these conditions:
Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h), then press
the clutch pedal fully, and stop the vehicle within 5
METER (7.5 A) fuse and the MCM (A7).B
15 seconds.
40. Measure the voltage between MCM connector Press and hold the brake pedal until the vehicle
terminal A8 and body ground. stops (do not pump the brake pedal).
Keep the brake pedal pressed after the vehicle
M CM CONNECTOR A (31P) stops.
+BBAC K UP NOTE: The clutch pedal must be fully pressed when

(BRN) the vehicle is stopped for auto idle stop to work.
4. Repeat step 3 several times, then check the auto idle
9 8 7 6 5 4
3 fL J F T 1 stop system.
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
NOTE: During auto idle stop, the engine restarts when
31 30 29 n 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 the clutch pedal is fully pressed and the shift lever is
moved to 1st gear.
W ire s i de o f fem ale te rm i nals Is auto idle stop working?
YES-The system is OK at this time. If needed, refer to
idle stop conditions (see page 12-37).H
Is there battery voltage? NO-Go to the auto idle stop system troubleshooting
(see page 12-207).
YES-Replace the original MCM (see page 12-212).H
+ B BACK UP (15 A) fuse and the MCM (AS).B
Auto Idle Stop System
T roubleshooting
M /T model
1. Check under these conditions: 1. Do the auto idle stop system inspection (see page
At 2,500 m (8,200 ft) or lower (At higher altitudes, 12-206).
auto idle stop is often prevented because of the lack Is auto idle stop working?
of vacuum in the brake booster).
The low temperature indicator does not come on. YES-The system is OK at this time. If needed, refer to
The IMA battery level gauge displays at least half of Auto Idle Stop Conditions (see page 12-37).
its scale. NO-Go to step 2.
All electrical items (headlights, blower fan, radiator
fan, rear w indow defogger, A/C, etc.) are off. 2. Start the engine, and watch the gauge control
module.
The transmission is in D.
The D indicator is not flashing. Do any indicators come on or blink?
Any indicator does not come on. YES-Do the troubleshooting fo r the system indicator
No heavy load in the vehicle (A heavy load prevents that comes on or blinks.
auto idle stop because the system "thinks" the
vehicle is going uphill). NO-Go to step 3.
Drive the vehicle on a flat road or downhill. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Test-drive under these conditions: 5. Do the All Systems DTC check with the HDS.
Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) in D, then stop
it w ithin 515 seconds.
Press and hold the brake pedal until the vehicle YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
stops (do not pump the brake pedal).
NO-Go to step 6.
Keep the brake pedal pressed after the vehicle
stops. 6. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the PGM-FI SYSTEM
4. Repeat step 3 several times, then check the auto idle
stop system. Does it indicate ON when the brake pedal is pressed and
OFF when the brake pedal is released?
Is auto idle stop working?
YES-Go to step 7.
YES-The system is OK at this time. If needed, refer to
Auto Idle Stop Conditions (see page 12-39).B NO-Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page
22-246).
NO-Go to the auto idle stop system troubleshooting
(see page 12-209). 7. Do the brake booster vacuum leak test (see page
19-24).
Is the brake booster vacuum OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace any leaking part(s) as needed.
9. Press the brake pedal several times.
(cont'd)
Auto idle Stop System Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR (A) and 19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), select the ECO
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR (B) in the screen on the MID.
EVPS DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the brake booster pressure change from air
pressure to vacuum pressure?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Check for an obstruction in the brake booster
pressure sensor vacuum line.
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is the outside air temperature reading (A) accurate?
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES-The system is OK at this tim e.ll
14. Checkfor DTCs in the WIPER SYSTEM with the HDS. NO-
Are any DTCs indicated? If the outside air temperature is not indicated,
substitute a known-good climate control unit (see
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. page 21-112), then recheck. If the auto idle stop
system is OK, replace the original climate control
NO-Go to step 15.
unit (see page 21-112).
15. Check that HDS communicates w ith the GAUGES If the outside air temperature reading is not
SYSTEM and the CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM. accurate, check the outside air temperature sensor
(see page 2 1-7 3 ).
Does the HDS communicate with the GAUGES SYSTEM
and the CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page
12 - 202).11
16. Checkfor DTCs in the GAUGE SYSTEM with the HDS.

NO-Go to step 17.
17. Check for DTCs in the CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 18.
CVT model 11. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A and
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR B in the EVPS
1. Do the auto idle stop system inspection (see page DATA LIST with the HDS.
12-207).
Does the brake booster pressure change from air
Is auto idle stop working? pressure to vacuum pressure?
YES-The system is OK at this time. If needed, refer to YES-Go to step 12.
the auto idle stop conditions (see page 12-39).H
NO-Check for an obstruction in the brake booster
NO-Go to step 2, pressure sensor vacuum line.H
2. Start the engine, and watch the gauge control 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
module.
Do any indicators come on or blink?
14. Move the shift lever to D from N.
YES-Do the troubleshooting for the system indicator
that comes on or blinks. When the shift lever is in D, does the D indicator come
on?
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-
Check the A/T gear position indicator drive circuit
5. Do the All Systems DTC check with the HDS. (see page 2 2-32 6).
Are any DTCs indicated? Adjust the shift cable (see page 14-193).
Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. 14-199).B
NO-Go to step 6. 15. Check for DTCs in the WIPER SYSTEM with the HDS.
6. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the PGM-FI SYSTEM Are any DTCs indicated?
Does it indicate ON when the brake pedal is pressed and
OFF when the brake pedal is released? NO-Go to step 16.
YES-Go to step 7. 16. Check that the HDS communicates with the GAUGES
SYSTEM and the CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM.
NO-Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page
22-246). Does the HDS communicate with the GAUGES SYSTEM
and the CLIMA TE CONTROL SYSTEM?
7. Do the brake booster vacuum leak test (see page
19-25). YES-Go to step 17.
Is the brake booster vacuum OK? NO-Go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page
12-202).
YES-Go to step 8.
17. Checkfor DTCs in the GAUGE SYSTEM with the HDS.
NO-Replace any leaking part(s) as needed.
9. Press the brake pedal several times.
NO-Go to step 18.
18. Check for DTCs in the CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 19.
(cont'd)
Auto Idle Stop System IPU Cover Removal/Installation
Troubleshooting (cont'd)
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a
high-voltage system. You must be fam iliar w ith the IMA
20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and select the ECO system before working on or around it. Make sure you
screen on the MID. have read the IMA service precautions before doing
repairs or service (see page 12-3).
12:541 1. Remove the cargo floor lid, the IPU duct cover, and
A' 73f the spare tire beam (see page 20-64).
0 2 3 4 5 6 miles ,
3. Remove the bolts (A, B), the clips (C), and the IPU
cover (D).
Is the outside temperature reading (A) accurate? A B A

9.4 N-m 9.4 N-m 9.4 N-m
YES-The system is OK at this tim e .ll (0.96 kgf-m, (0.96 kgf-m , (0.96 kgf-r
6.9 I b fft) 6.9 Ibf-ft) 6.9 Ibf-ft)
NO-
If the outside air temperature is not indicated,
substitute a known-good climate control unit (see
page 21-112), then recheck. If the auto idle stop
system is OK, replace the original climate control
unit (see page 21 -112).H
If the outside temperature reading is not accurate,
check the outside air temperature sensor (see page
21-73).B
4. Install the IPU cover, the clips, and the bolts.

6. Install the spare tire beam, the IPU duct cover, and the
cargo floor lid (see page 20-64).
G D I
Motor Control Module (MCM) Update
Special Tools Required 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Do not start the
Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) tablet tester engine.
2. Connect the updating tool to the data link connector
(DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the
HDS pocket tester
dashboard.
software version
software installed
Any one of the above updating tools can be used.
IMA Motor/IMA Battery Update

The MCM contains the software programs for the IMA
m otor control and the battery module condition
monitor.
NOTE:
Make sure the HDS/iN workstation or the MVCI has the
To ensure the latest programs are installed, do an
MCM update whenever the MCM is substituted or
replaced.
If you are using the HIM, select the IMA m otor and/or
the battery module in the HIM MCM update menu.
You can not update an MCM with the program it 3. Make sure the updating tool communicates with the
already has. It w ill only accept a new program. vehicle and the MCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the
Before you update the MCM, make sure the vehicle's DLC circuit (see page 12-202).
12V battery is fully charged. 4. If the software is the MCM is not the latest, do the
Never turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I) or MCM update procedure as described on the HIM label
LOCK (0) during the update. If there is a problem with and in the MCM update system.
the update, leave the ignition switch turned ON (II).
To prevent MCM damage, do not operate anything
electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power windows,
door locks, etc.) during the update.
connector (DLC). This prevents damage to the MCM.
Motor Control Module (MCM) Removal/Installation
NOTE: 8. Remove the bolts (A) and the PCU lid (B).
protect you from electrical shock.
When removing or installing items marked with
never fail to use insulated tools.
high-voltage system. You must be fam iliar with the IMA
system before working on or around it. Make sure you
have read the IMA service precautions before doing

10. Remove the bolts (A) and the PCU cover (B).
and the MCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC
circuit (see page 12-202).
4. Select the IMA SYSTEM with the HDS.
5. Select the REPLACEMENT MCM MENU, then select
READ DATA, and follow the HDS prompts.
NOTE: If the READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue
this procedure.
6. Make sure the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
DC-DC Converter
11. Disconnect the MCM connectors (A).
B The IMA motor power cables carry high voltage when

3.4 N-m the engine is running or the IMA system is energized.
(0.35 kgfm,
2.5 Ibfft) To avoid serious injury from electrical shock, do not
start the engine with the IMA motor power cables
disconnected.

high-voltage system. You must be familiar with the IMA
1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).
12. Remove the bolts (B) and the MCM (C). the phase motor current sensor, then wrap the end of
(see page 12-7).
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). A
9.4 N-m
16. Select the IMA SYSTEM with the HDS. (0.96 k q f m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
17. Select the REPLACEMENT MCM MENU, then select

WRITE DATA, and follow the HDS prompts.
NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue
this procedure.
(cont'd)
DC-DC Converter Motor Power Inverter (MPI) Module
Removal/Installation (cont'd) Removal/Installation
5. Remove the bolts (A) and the terminal cover (B). iiW A R N IN
A The IMA motor power cables carry high voltage when
3.4 N-m the engine is running or the IMA system is energized.
(0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 Ibf-ft)
To avoid serious injury from electrical shock, do not
start the engine with the IMA motor power cables
disconnected.

2. Disconnect the phase motor current sensor connector
(A).
6. Disconnect the DC-DC converter connector (A).
3. Remove the bolts (B, C) and the phase motor current

sensor (D).
8. Remove the bolts (D, E) and the DC-DC converter (F).

NOTE: Make sure the IMA motor power cables are
correctly positioned before you reconnect them.
IPU Case Removal/Installation
4. Remove the bolts (A, B). IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a
CO 00

1. Make sure the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Remove the IPU module air duct (see page 12-220).
5. Remove the PCU lid (see step 8 on page 12-212).
NOTE: Cheek the position of the U phase, the V phase,
A
9.4N-m
5. Disconnect the connectors (C), then remove the PCU (0.96kgfm, 6.9 I bf-ft)
wire harness (D).
6. Remove the bolts (A) and the MPI module (B).
A
3.4 N-m
7. Open the clamp (C).

(see page 12-7).
IPU Case Removal/Installation (cont'd)
8. Disconnect the connector (A). 11. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Make sure the IMA motor power cables are
9. Remove the bolts (B, C), then remove the IPU

assembly (D).
10. Remove the harness clamp (A), the clips (B), and the
IPU case (C).
NOTE: The IPU frame seals (D) must be replaced with
new ones when the IPU case is removed.
Battery Module Removal/Installation
NOTE: 6. Remove the bolts ( A , B) and the PCU busplate (C).

protect you from electrical shock.
When removing or installing items marked with A \,
never fail to use insulated tools.
4. Remove the IPU module front air duct (A). 7. Disconnect the MCM connector (A) and the harness
clamp (B).
A
5. Remove the bolts (A), the IPU frames (B), and the
ground cable (C).
(cont'd)
Battery Module Removal/Installation (cont'd)
8. Disconnect the connectors (A, B) and the IPU relay 11. Disconnect the MCM connectors (A).
holder (C).
B
3.4 N-m
(0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 Ibf-ft)
9. Remove the IPU wire harness (D).

13. Remove the bolts (A) and the term i nal cover (B).
10. Remove the bolts (A) and the PCU cover (B).
A
3.4 N-m
(0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 Ibf-ft)
HI
14. Disconnect the DC-DC converter connector (A). 19. Remove the bolts (A, B).
15. Remove the bolt (B) and the busbar (C). 20. Disconnect the connector (C), then remove the PCU
wire harness (D).
16. Remove the bolts (D, E) and the DC-DC converter (F).
21. Remove the bolts (A) and the MPI module (B).
17. Disconnect the phase motor current sensor connector
(A). A
3.4 N-m

24. If a replacement battery module was installed, select
18. Remove the bolts (B, C) and the phase motor current the IMA SYSTEM on HDS, then select the
sensor (D). REPLACEMENT BATTERY MODULE, and follow the
HDS prompts.
IPU Module Fan Replacement IPU Module Air Duct
1. Remove the right cargo area side trim panel (see page 1. Remove the cargo floor lid, the IPU duct cover, and
20-64). the cargo area side trim panel (see page 20-64).
2. Remove the IPU module air duct (see page 12-220). 2. Remove the IPU module air ducts (A).
3. Disconnect the IPU module fan connector (A).
4. Remove the bolts (B) and the IPU module fan (C).
5. Remove the screws (A) and the IPU module fan (B).

n
IMA Motor Power Cable Removal/Installation
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the surface of IMA motor 5. Disconnect the four IMA motor power cables (A) from
power cable. the phase motor current sensor, then wrap the end of
high-voltage system. You must be familiar with the IMA NOTE: Check the position of the U phase, the V phase,
system before working on or around it. Make sure you and the W phase cables before disconnecting them.
A
repairs or service (see page 12-3). 9.4 N-m
(0.96 kgfm, 6.9 Ibfft)
4. Remove the bolts (A) and the PCU lid (B).
6. Open the clamp (C).

IMA Motor Power Cable Removal/Installation (cont'd)
10. Slide the protector (A) in the direction of the arrow. 13. Remove the IMA motor power cable (A) from the
Push the tab.(B)., then raise the lever (C). Remove the brackets (B).
IMA motor power cable (D) from the motor stator.
NOTE:
If the outside of the IMA motor power cable
connector is dirty, clean it before you disconnect it.
Cover the disconnected connector (E) with a plastic
bag (F), and wrap the IMA motor power cable
terminals with tape (G).
If the IMA motor power cable terminals are wet, dry
them with a clean shop towel. Do not use
compressed air.
14. Remove the clamp (C).

15. Remove the fuel tank (see page 11 -306).
16. Remove the front subframe (see page 20-173).
17. Remove the clip (A).
11. Remove the nut (A), the clamp (B), and the 12 V power
cable (C) from the battery terminal fuse box.
(0.95 kgfm,
6.9 Ibfft)
18. Remove the heat shield (B).
page 20-153).
19, Remove the parking brake cable brackets (A). 22. Remove the bolt (A) and the clamp (B).
NOTE; The clamp cannot be reused; replace it with a
new one.
20. Wrap the IMA power cable with protective tape to /

avoid damaging the cable tube. /
21. Remove the bolts (A) and the cover (B).
A
9,3 N-m
(0.95 kgf m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
(0.95 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
IMA Motor Power Cable IMA Motor Rotor
23. Remove the bolt (A) and the nut (B). Special Tools Required
Rotor Puller 07YAC-PHM010C
The motor rotor contains very strong magnets and

should be handled with special care. People with
pacemakers or other sensitive medical devices should
not handle the IMA motor rotor.
^W ARNING
If the rotor is installed by hand, it may suddenly be
pulled toward the stator with great force, causing
serious hand or finger injury. Always use the special
C9 1 tool (rotor puller) to remove or install the rotor
assembly.
Keep the .motor rotor away from magnetically
sensitive devices.
Do not blow air near the rotor, as metal particles
/ may get on the magnets.
A Store the rotor in the designated storage box, and
S.3 N-m
(0.95 kgf-m , i . i ibf-ft) keep it away from sensitive devices during storage.
1. Kemove the transmission.

2. M/T model: Remove the clutch (see page 13-17);
3. M/T model; Remove the flywheel (see page 13-17).
4. CVT model; Remove the drive plate (see page 14-165).
- - -C3 5. Install a plastic film (A) between the IMA motor rotor
(B) and the motor stator (C),
B .
B'
9.3 N-m ' '
(0.95 kgfm, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
24. Pull out the I MA motor power cable from the body.
25. I nstall the parts in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE; Make sure the IMA motor power cables are
26. Do the 12 vo l t battery terminal reconnection
6. Remove three of the six bolts (A) as shown. 8. Attach the rotor puller with its supplied bolts.
NOTE: When installing the rotor puller, position the
puller to fit over the guide pins (A).
07YAC-PHM010C
7. Install the three rotor puller guide pins, then remove

the remaining three bolts (A).
9. Turn the handle of rotor puller, and remove the IMA
motor rotor (A).
(cont'd)
IMA Motor Rotor Removal/Installation (cont'd)
10. To prevent damage to the rotor magnets while 11. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
working on the stator, place the rotor, with puller
NOTE:
attached, into the puller case.
When installing the rotor, make sure the special tool
is attached with its handle turned out several
threads.
Turn the handle of the special tool slowly when
inserting the rotor into the stator. The rotor is drawn
into the stator by magnetic force.
12. Remove the plastic film.

13. CVT model: Install the drive plate (see page 14-165).
14. M/T model: Install the flywheel (see page 13-17).
15. M/T model: Install the clutch (see page 13-17).
16. Install the transmission.
(see page 12-7).
Drain Cover Removal/Installation IMA Motor Housing
1. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-163). 1. Remove the IM A motor rotor (see page 12-224).
2. Remove the drain cover (A). 2. Remove the connector (A) and the harness clamps (B)
from the bracket (C).
A
D
12 N *m
12 N-m
(1.2 k g fm , 9 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove the bolt (D) and the IMA motor housing (E).
NOTE: Set the dowel pins (F) in the IMA motor
housing before installing the motor stator on the
engine.
4. Remove the bracket (A) from the IMA motor housing
(B).
11 N-m
11 N-m (1.1 k g f m, 8 Ib fft)

6. Install the IMA motor rotor (see page 12-224).
(see page 12-7).
IMA Motor Rotor Position Sensor IMA Motor Power Cable Terminal
Removal/Installation Removal/Installation
1. Remove the IMA motor housing (see page 12-227). 1. Remove the IMA motor housing (see page 12-227).
2. Remove the bolts (A, B) and the IMA motor rotor 2. Remove the terminal cover (A) and the IMA motor
position sensor (), power cable terminal (B).
B
16 N-m
(1.6kgfm, 12 Ibfft)
A '
16 N-m

NOTE: Tighten the side bolts (A) first, then tighten the
upper bolts (B).
4. Do the IMA motor rotor position calibration procedure 9.8 N-m
(see page 12-7). (1.00 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibfft)

(see page 12-7).
Idle Stop Switch Replacement
CVT model
20- 86 ).
2. Disconnect the idle stop switch connector (A).
9.4 N-m
(0.96 kgfm, 6.9 Ibfft)
3. Loosen the locknut (B), and remove the idle stop

switch (C).
5. Adjust the idle stop switch (see page 19-6).
Transaxle
Clutch.......................................... ......................... 13-1

Manual Transmission..................... ............. ...... 13-25
C VT....................................... .......... ...... ............. 14~1
Driveline/Axle........ ............. ............................... 16-1
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If clutch maintenance is required)
tensioners.
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) SYSTEM (If clutch maintenance is required)

Transaxle
Clutch
Special Tools....................................... ............................. .13-2
Component Location In dex..............................................13-3
System Description.......................................................... 13-4
Clutch Hydraulic System Bleeding............ ........... . 13-5
Clutch Pedal and Clutch Pedal Position Switch
Adjustm ent..................................................................... 13-6
Clutch Pedal Assembly Replacement........................... 13-8
Clutch Pedal Position Switch Replacement..................13-9
Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement........................... 13-10
Slave Cylinder Replacement...........................................13-14
Clutch Hose Replacement....... ...................................... 13-15
Clutch Pedal Pad Cover Replacement........................... 13-16
Clutch Replacement.......................................................... 13-17
Special Tools

070AB-SZT0100 Ring Gear Bolt Set 150 mm 1
07746-001A800 Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 1
07936-3710100 Remover Handle 1
07936-371020A Slide Hammer 1
07936-KC10500 Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 15 mm 1
07AAG-SN AA100 Clutch Alignment Shaft 1
07JAF-PM7011A Clutch Alignment Disc 1
07LAB-PV00100 Ring Gear Holder 1
o
CLUTCH ASSIST CLUTCH PEDAL

BUSHING B POSITION SWITCH A
Test, page 4-8
Adjustment, page 13-6
CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL
ASS IST SPRING POSITION SWITCH C
Test, page 11-188
CLUTCH PEDAL CLUTCH PEDAL

ASSEMBLY POSITION SWITCH B
Replacement, page 13-8 Test, page 4-29
CLUTCH PEDAL
PAD COVER
CLUTCH ASSIST Replacement, page 13-16
BUSHING A
RETAI NING CUP
CLUTCH MASTER
CYLINDER SEAL CLUTCH
RESERVOIR
CRANKSHAFT
PILOT BUSHING
FLYWHEEL
Inspection, page 13-19 CLUTCH HOSE
CLUTCH DISC
Inspection and Removal , page 13-19 RELEASE BEARING
Install ation, page 13-21 Removal, page 13-22
PRESSURE PLATE
Inspection and Removal, page 13-17
CLUTCH LINE B
SLAVE CYLINDER
ROLL PINS
System Description
Clutch Pedal Position Switch

The clutch pedal has clutch pedal position switch A, clutch pedal position switch B, and clutch pedal position switch C
installed.
Clutch Pedal Position Switch A (clutch interlock operation): Turned ON (CLOSE) when the pedal position is within the
area where clutch is disengaged.
Clutch Pedal Position Switch B (cruise control): Turned OFF (OPEN) when the clutch pedal is pushed down.
Clutch Pedal Position Switch C (shift indicator operation): Turned ON (CLOSE) when the clutch pedal is about to be
halfway through its stroke.
CLUTCH PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH A
End point Initialpoint
OPEN Clutch Pedal Posi tion Switch B
OPEN Clutch Pedal Position Switch C
Clutch Pedal Position Switch A
Clutch Operation Area
NOTE: The illustration shows the HDS screen indi cation.

Clutch Hydraulic System Bleeding
NOTE: 3. Attach one end of a clear tube to the bleeder screw

Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use Honda DOT 3 (A), and put the other end into a container. Loosen the
Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a bleeder screw to allow air to escape from the system.
non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and
shorten the life of the system.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to
contaminate the brake fluid.
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
the paint or plastic. If brake fluid does contact the paint
or plastic, wash it off immediately with water.
It may be necessary to limit the movement of the
release fork with a block of wood to remove all the air
from the system.
surfaces.
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the clutch reservoir
(A) is at the MAX (upper) level line (B). 4. Make sure there is an adequate supply of fluid in the
reservoir, then slowly push the clutch pedal all the
way down. Before releasing the pedal, have an
assistant temporarily tighten the bleeder screw.
Loosen the bleeder screw, and push the clutch pedal
down again. Repeat this step until no more bubbles
appear at the clear tube.
NOTE: Make sure the fluid level on the reservoir does
not go below MIN.
5. Tighten the bleeder screw securely.
6. Refill the brake fluid in the reservoir to the MAX
(upper) level line.
7. Install the coolant reservoir (A).
8. Check the clutch operation, and check for leaks.

Clutch Pedal and Clutch Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
NOTE: 8. Measure the clutch pedal stroke (A).

For a shift indicator operation problem, check clutch If the clutch pedal stroke is within the standard, go
pedal position switch C (see page 11-188). to step 10.
For a cruise control problem, check clutch pedal If the clutch pedal stroke is not within the standard,
position switch B (see page 4-29). go to step 9.
For a clutch interlock operation problem, check clutch
pedal position switch A (see page 4-8).
If there is no clearance between the master cylinder
piston and the push rod, the release bearing will be
held against the diaphragm spring, which can result in
clutch slippage or other clutch problems.
Before adjusting the clutch pedal and the clutch pedal
position switch, check the clutch pedal and the clutch
master cylinder are installed correctly and not
damaged.
20- 86 ).
2. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch B

connector.
3. Loosen the locknut (A) of clutch pedal position switch
B, and back off clutch pedal position switch B until it
no longer touches the clutch pedal (C).
(A) Clutch Pedal Stroke:

120-130 mm (4.72-5.12 i n)
(B) Clutch Pedal Free Play (Reference):
4.5-18.5 mm (0.177-0.728 in)
(C) Clutch Pedal Height (Reference)*:
With clutch pedal
203.3 mm (8.004 in)
pad cover
Without clutch
201.5 mm (7.933 in)
pedal pad cover
(D) Clutch Pedal Disengagement Height
(Minimum to the floor) (Reference)*:
With clutch pedal
117.5mm (4.626 in)
pad cover
Without clutch
115.7mm (4.555 in)
pedal pad cover
*: Measure the clutch pedal height from right side
4. Pull the clutch pedal by hand, then turn clutch pedal middle of the clutch pedal cover or the clutch pedal
position switch B until it contacts the clutch pedal. pad cover (E) to the floor without the insulation.
5. Turn in clutch pedal position switch B an additional 9. Inspect the length of the clutch master cylinder push
3/4 to 1 turn. Make sure the clutch pedal height did not rod (see page 13-10).
change.
If the clutch master cylinder push rod was adjusted,
6. While holding clutch pedal position switch B, tighten go to step 2.
the locknut.
7. Connect the clutch pedal position switch B connector.
10. Loosen the locknut (B) of clutch pedal position switch 18. Loosen the locknut (A) of clutch pedal position switch
A. C.
11. Connect the Honda diagnostic system (HDS) to the 19. Fully press the clutch pedal to the floor, then release
data link connector (DLC) (see step 10 on page 13-41). the clutch pedal 4853 mm (1.892.09 in) and hold it
there.
NOTE: Measure the clutch pedal height from middle
13. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle. If
of the clutch pedal cover or the clutch pedal pad cover
it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see
(B).
page 11-383).
14. Fully press the clutch pedal to the floor, then release
the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS.
the clutch pedal 1520 mm (0.590.79 in) and hold it
there. 21. Adjust clutch pedal position switch C when the HDS
screen indicates CLOSE to OPEN.
NOTE: Measure the clutch pedal height from middle
of the clutch pedal cover or the clutch pedal pad cover NOTE: Be careful not to twist the wire.
(C).
22. While holding clutch pedal position switch C, tighten
15. Check the CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH A in the locknut.
the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS.
23. Check the clutch pedal does not contact to clutch
16. Adjust clutch pedal position switch A when the HDS pedal position switch A body and the clutch pedal
screen indicates CLOSE to OPEN. position switch C body when fully pressing the clutch
pedal to the floor.
NOTE: Be careful not to twist the wire.
24. Check the clutch operation.
17. While holding clutch pedal position switch A, tighten
the locknut 25. Check the shift indicator operation and the clutch
interlock operation.
26. Check the auto idle stop system (see page 12-206).
20 - 86 ).
Clutch Pedal Assembly Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 6. Remove clutch pedal position switch A, clutch pedal
position switch B, and clutch pedal position switch C
1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover (see page from the clutch pedal assembly (D).
20- 86 ).
2. Disconnect the clutch pedal position switch

connectors (A).
7. Loosely install clutch pedal position switch A, clutch

pedal position switch B, and clutch pedal position
switch C to the clutch pedal assembly (D).
NOTE:
Do not let the clutch pedal position switch contact
3. Pry out the lock pin (B), and pull the clevis pin (C) out the clutch pedal.
of the clevis. Make sure the installation position of each clutch
4. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (D) and pedal position switch is correct.
clutch pedal mounting nut (E).
5. Remove the clutch pedal assembly (F).
Clutch Pedal Position Switch
Replacement
8. Install the clutch pedal assembly (A). 1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover (see page
20 - 86 ).
NOTE;
Connect the clevis (B) to the clutch pedal, then 2. Disconnect clutch pedal position switch A, clutch
apply multipurpose grease between the clutch pedal position switch B, and clutch pedal position
pedal and the clevis. switch C connectors (D).
Wipe off any excess grease.
3. Loosen the locknuts (D), then remove clutch pedal

position switch A, clutch pedal position switch B, and
clutch pedal position switch C from the clutch pedal
9. Install the clutch pedal mounting nut (C) and master assembly (E).
cylinder mounting nuts (D).
10. Apply multipurpose grease to the clevis pin (E). Slide
the clevis pin into the clevis, then install a lock pin (F).
11. Connect the clutch pedal position switch connectors
(G).
12. Adjust the clutch pedal, clutch pedal position switch
A, clutch pedal position switch B, and clutch pedal
position switch C (see page 13-6).
13. Check the clutch operation.
20- 86 ).
Clutch Pedal Position Switch Clutch Master Cylinder
4. Loosely install clutch pedal position switch A, clutch NOTE:
pedal position switch B, and clutch pedal position Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
switch C to the clutch pedal assembly in the reverse surfaces.
order of removal. Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
NOTE:
or plastic, wash it off immediately with water.
Do not let the clutch pedal position switch contact
Plug the ends of the hoses and joints to prevent
the clutch pedal.
spilling brake fluid.
Make sure the installation position of each clutch
Put on gloves to protect your hands.
position switch is correct.
5. Connect clutch pedal position switch A, clutch pedal 1. Secure the hood in the wide open position (support
position switch B, and clutch pedal position switch C rod in the lower hole).
connectors. 2. Remove and discard the brake fluid from the clutch
6. Adjust the clutch pedal, clutch pedal position switch reservoir with a syringe or other suitable device.
A, clutch pedal position switch B, and clutch pedal 3. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3).
position switch C (see page 13-6).
4. Remove the harness clamp (A), then remove the
7. Check the clutch operation. harness holder (B) from the bracket (C).
20 - 86 ).
5. Remove the reservoir hose (D) from the reservoir

hose clip (E).
6. Disconnect clutch line A from the clutch master 9. Remove the clutch master cylinder (A) and the clutch
cylinder (B). master cylinder seal (B) from the body.
NOTE;
To prevent spills, cover the line joint with rags or
shop towels.
Loosen the flare nut (C) while holding the clutch line
connector (D) using a wrench.
10. Disconnect the reservoir hose (C).

NOTE: Inspect the hose. If the hose has damage,
leaks, interference, or twisting, replace it.
11. Remove the retaining clip (A), then remove the clutch
line connector (B) and the O-ring (C) from the master
cylinder (D).
20- 86 ).
8. Pry out the lock pin (A), and pull the clevis pin (B) out
of the clevis. Remove the master cylinder mounting
nuts (C).
(cont'd)
Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement (cont'd)
12. Inspect the length (A) of the clutch master cylinder 14. To prevent the retaining clip (A) from coming off, pry
push rod to the figure as shown. apart the tip (B) of the clip with a flat-tipped
screwdriver.
NOTE: When installing the used clutch master
cylinder only.
111.4-112.4 mm (4.386-4.42S In)

(Reference)
13. Install the clutch line connector (A) with a new O-ring 15. Install the reservoir hose (A) and adjust the hose
(B), then set in a new retaining clip (C) to the master clamp (B) positions and its direction.
cylinder (D).
NOTE: When attaching the reservoir hose, align the
NOTE; blue mark (C) on the hose to the rib (D).
Apply the silicone grease (P/N 08C30-B0234M) on
the O-ring and the joint part (E) of the clutch line
connector.
Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the
or gloves.
16. Install a new master cylinder seal (E) and the clutch
master cylinder (F) to the body.
17. Install the master cylinder mounting nuts (A). 20. Install the harness holder (A) to the bracket (B), then
install the harness clamp (C).
NOTE:
Connect the clevis (B) to the clutch pedal, then
apply multipurpose grease between the clutch
pedal and the clevis.
Wipe off any excess grease.
(Multipurpose Grease)
8 x 1.25 m m
13 N -m
(1.3 kgf-m , 10 Ibf-ft)
(Multipurpose Grease)
(E).
23. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system (see page 13-5).
A 24. Adjust the clutch pedal, clutch pedal position switch

8 x 1.25 m m A, clutch pedal position switch B, and clutch pedal
13 N-m
(1.3 kgf-m, position switch C (see page 13-6).
10 Ibf-ft)
25. Check the clutch operation, and checkfor leaks.
18. Apply multipurpose grease to the clevis pin (C). Slide
the clevis pin into the clevis, then install a lock pin (D). 26. Install the driver's dashboard undercover (see page
20 - 86 ).
19. Connect clutch line A to the clutch master cylinder (B).
27. Test-drive the vehicle.
NOTE: Tighten the flare nut (C) while holding the
clutch line connector (D) using a wrench.
10 x 1.0m m
Slave Cylinder Replacement
NOTE: 3. Pull back the boot (A), and apply silicone grease
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted (P/N 08C30-B0234M) to the boot and the slave
surfaces. cylinder (C). Reinstall the boot.
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage 8 x 1.25 mm
the paint or plastic. If brake fluid does contact the paint 22 N-m
or plastic, wash it off immediately with water. (2.2 kgfm,
16 Ibfft) grI aseVI
Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the (P/N 08798-9002)
terminal part of the connectors and switches, 0.4-1.0 g
9.014-0.035 oz)
especially if you have silicone grease on your hands or
gloves.
1. Disconnect clutch line B. Plug the end of clutch line B
with a shop towel to prevent brake fluid from coming
out. 10x1.0 mm
15 N-m
NOTE: Loosen the flare nut (A) while holding the (1.5 kgfm,
11 Ibfft)
clutch line connector (C) with a wrench.
(P/N 08C30-B0234M)
4. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease
(P/N 08798-9002) to the push rod (D) of the slave
cylinder.
5. Connect clutch line B to the slave cylinder, and loosely
tighten the flare nut (E).
6. Install the slave cylinder to the transmission housing,
then tighten the clutch line flare nut to the specified
torque.
NOTE: Tighten the flare nut while holding the clutch
line connector (F) with a wrench.
2. Remove the mounting bolts (D), then remove the
slave cylinder (E). 8. Check the clutch operation, and check for leaks.
Clutch Hose Replacement
O-ring Replacement NOTE:

Replace the clutch hose if it is twisted or cracked, or if
1. Remove the slave cylinder. it leaks.
2. Remove the roll pins (A), then remove the clutch line Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
connector (B) and the O-ring (C) from the slave surfaces.
cylinder (D). Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
or plastic, wash it off immediately water.
2. Disconnect the clutch hose (C) from clutch line A and
clutch line B.
3. Install the clutch line connector (A) with a new O-ring

(B), then set in new roll pins (C) to the slave cylinder
(D).
3. Remove and discard the clutch hose clips (A) from the
clutch hose (B).
4. Install the slave cylinder.
4. Remove the clutch hose from clutch hose brackets.
(cont'd)
Clutch Hose Replacement (cont'd) Clutch Pedal Pad Cover
Replacement
5. Install the clutch hose (A) with the new clutch hose NOTE: This procedure is for models equipped with a
clips (B). clutch pedal pad cover.
1. Cover the carpet under the clutch pedal to prevent
metal shavings from getting on the carpet.
2. Center-punch each of the rivets (A), and drill their
heads off with a 3 mm (0.12 in) drill bit (B).
NOTE: Do not drill the clutch pedal pad (C).
Replace.
6. Connect clutch line A and clutch line B to the clutch

hose (C).
A
3. Remove the clutch pedal pad cover (A) and the clutch
pedal cover (B) from the clutch pedal pad (C).
(1.5 k g fm , 11 Ibf-ft)

8. Do the following checks:
Check the clutch hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary. 4. Set the clutch pedal cover to the clutch pedal pad
Check the clutch hose for interference and twisting cover.
Check the clutch operation.
<s
Clutch Replacement
5. Install the clutch pedal pad cover (A) with the rivets (B) Special Tools Required
firmly. Clutch Alignment Shaft 07AAG-SNAA100
Clutch Alignment Disc 07JAF-PM7011A
Ring Gear Holder 07LAB-PV00100
Ring Gear Bolt Set 150 mm 070AB-SZT0100
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-001A800
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 15 mm 07936-KC10500
Remover Handle 07936-3710100
Slide Hammer 07936-371020A
Engine Side
Pressure Plate Inspection and Removal
1. Remove the transmission (see page 13-43).
2. Check the evenness of the height of the diaphragm
spring fingers using the clutch alignment disc (A)r the
clutch alignment shaft (B), the remover handle (C),
6. Using your hand, make sure the clutch pedal cover is and a feeler gauge (D). If the height difference is more
firmly fastened to the pedal. than the service limit, replace the pressure plate.
7. Check the clutch pedal height (see page 13-6). Standard (New): 0.6 mm (0.024 in) max.
(cont'd)
Clutch Replacement (cont'd)
3. Install the ring gear holder (A), the 150 mm ring gear 6. Inspect the pressure plate (A) surface for wear, cracks,
bolt set (B), the clutch alignment shaft (C), and the and burning.
remover handle (D).
D
7. Inspect for warpage using a precision straight edge

(A) and feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure
plate (C). If the most measurement difference is more
than the service limit, replace the pressure plate.
Standard (New); 0.03 mm (0.001 in) max.
4. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate

mounting bolts (E) in a crisscross pattern in several
steps, then remove the pressure plate (F).
5. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for
wear at the release bearing contact area.
Clutch Disc Inspection and Removal 11. Measure the depth of the rivet from the clutch disc
lining surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the
8. Remove the clutch disc (A), the clutch alignment shaft
measurement is less than the service limit, replace
(B), and the remover handle (C).
the clutch disc.
B
Standard (New): 1 .2 -1 .7 mm (0.047-0.067 In)
9. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of

slippage or oil. If the clutch disc looks burnt or is oil
soaked, replace the clutch disc. If the clutch disc is oil * B
soaked, find and repair the source of the oil leak.
10. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the : / ; /
measurement is less than the service limit, replace ffczfr
the clutch disc.
Standard (New): 8.39.0 mm (0.3270.354 in) Flywheel Inspection
12. Remove the ring gear holder.
13. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage.
14. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel
for wear, cracks, and burning.
15. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial indicator 18. Apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating
(B). Through at least two full turns with pushing surface of the flywheel mounting bolts (A).
against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up
A
the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. If the
measurement is not within the standard, replace the
flywheel, and recheck the runout. Go to step 16.
19. Install the flywheel (B) on the crankshaft (C), and

install the mounting bolts finger-tight.
20. Install the ring gear holder (D) and the 150 mm ring
gear bolt set (E), then torque the flywheel mounting
bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps.
Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Inspection
Flywheel Replacement
21. Inspect the crankshaft pilot bushing for wear and
16. Install the ring gear holder (A) and the 150 mm ring
damage.
gear bolt set (B).
22. Inspect the inside surface of the crankshaft pilot
bushing with your finger. If the crankshaft pilot
bushing is not smooth, replace it; go to step 23.
17. Loosen the flywheel mounting bolts (C) in a crisscross

pattern in several steps. Remove the bolts, then
remove the flywheel (D) and the ring gear holder.
Crankshaft Pilot Bushing Replacement Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation
23. Remove the crankshaft pilot bushing (A) using the 25. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splines of
15 mm bearing remover shaft set (B) and the slide the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch disc
hammer (C). slides freely on the mainshaft.
26. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease
c (P/N 08798-9002) to the crankshaft pilot bushing (A).
07936-371020A
27. Apply super high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002)

24. Install a new crankshaft pilot bushing (A) into the to the splines (B) of the clutch disc (C), then install the
crankshaft using the 15 x 135L driver handle (B) and clutch disc using the clutch alignment shaft (D) and
the 22 x 24 mm attachment (C). the remover handle (E).
28. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting bolts
c
07746-001A800 (B) finger-tight.
(cont'd)
29. Torque the mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross pattern. Transmission Side
Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent warping
the diaphragm spring. Make sure that there is not Release Bearing Removal
clearance between the pressure plate and the
1. Remove the transmission (see page 13-43).
flywheel.
2. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch
Specified Torque:
housing (B).
25 N-m (2.5 kgf-m, 18 Ib fft)

3. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch housing

by squeezing the release fork set spring (D). Remove
the release bearing (E).
Release Bearing Inspection
4. Check the play of the release bearing by hand. If there
30. Remove the ring gear holder (B), the 150 mm ring is excessive play or noise, replace the release bearing.
gear bolt set (C), the clutch alignment shaft (D), and
the remover handle (E). NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease. Do
not wash it in solvent.
31. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the
same height.
32. Do the release bearing inspection, and replace it if
necessary.
33. Install the transmission (see page 13-49).
R e le a s e B e a r i n g I n s t a l l a t i o n 6. With the release fork (A) slid between the release
bearing pawls (B), install the release bearing on the
5. Apply high temp urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the mainshaft while inserting the release fork through the
release fork (A), the release fork bolt (B), the release hole (C) in the clutch housing.
bearing (C), and the release bearing guide (D) in the
shaded areas, then set the release fork set spring (E).
NOTE: Replace the release fork bolt if necessary.
7. Align the detent (D) of the release fork with the release
fork bolt (E), then press the detent of the release fork
over the release fork bolt squarely.
8. Install the release fork boot (F). Make sure the boot
seals around the release fork and clutch housing.
9. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make sure
that it fits properly against the release bearing (B), and
that the release bearing slides smoothly. Wipe off any
excess grease.
10. Install the transmission (see page 13-49).

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If manual transmission maintenance is
required)
tensioners.
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) SYSTEM (If manual transmission maintenance is

re q u ire d )
(see page 1-7). You must be familiar with the I MA system before working around it. Make sure you have read the
Transaxle
Manual Transmission Shift Fork

Special To ols............................. 13-26
Disassembly/Reassembly... 13-65
Reverse Lockout System Mainshaft Assembly
Component Location Index 13-27 Clearance Inspection........... 13-66
System Description...................13-28 Mainshaft Disassem bly......... 13-69
Circuit D iagram .........................13-29 Mainshaft Inspection............ . 13-70
Symptom Troubleshooting 13-30 Mainshaft Reassembly............ 13-72
Reverse Lockout Solenoid Countershaft Assembly
T e s t..................................... . 13-32 Clearance Inspection........... 13-76
Reverse Lockout Solenoid Countershaft Disassembly...... 13-78
Disassembly/Reassembly... 13-33 Countershaft Inspection......... 13-79
Countershaft Reassembly...... 13-80
Manual Transmission Synchro Sleeve and Hub
Component Location In dex.... 13-37 Inspection and Reassembly. 13-85
System Description...................13-38 Synchro Ring and Gear
Symptom Troubleshooting Inspection............................... 13-86
Index........................................ 13-40 Mainshaft Bearing and Oil
Transmission Fluid Inspection Seal Replacement................. 13-88
and Replacement...... . 13-41 Countershaft Bearing
Back-Up Light Switch Replacement.......................... 13-89
Test/Replacement............ 13-42 Mainshaft Thrust Clearance
Neutral Position Switch Adjustment............................ 13-89
Replacement...................... 13-43 Transmission Reassembly...... 13-91
Transmission Removal........... 13-43 * Gearshift Mechanism
Transmission Installation........13-49 Replacement.......................... 13-96
Transmission Disassembly.... 13-56 Shift Lever Housing
Reverse Shift Fork Clearance Replacement.......................... 13-97
Inspection............................... 13-61
Select Arm Clearance M /T Differential
Inspection............................... 13-61 Component Location Index 13-100
Shift Piece Clearance Backlash Inspection............... . 13-101
Inspection............................... 13-62 Differential Carrier/Final
Change Lever Assembly Driven Gear Replacement... 13-101
Disassembly/Reassembly... 13-63 Carrier Bearing Replacement.. 13-102
Shift Fork Clearance Oil Seal Replacement.............. 13-103
Inspection............................... 13-64 Differential Thrust Clearance
Adjustment............................ 13-104
Special Tools

07736-A01000B Adjustable Bearing Puller, 2540 mm 1
(D 07746-0010300 Bearing Driver Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
07746-0010400 Bearing Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
07746-0030100 Driver Handle, 40 mm I.D. 1
07746-0030200 Attachment, 25 mm I.D. 1
07746-0030300 Bearing Driver Attachment, 30 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 1
07AAK-SNAA120 Universal Lifting Eyelet 1
* 07GAJ-PG20110 Mainshaft Holder 1
07GAJ-PG20120 Collar 1
* 07GAJ-PG20130 Mainshaft Base 1
@ 07JAD-PN00100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 64 x 72 mm 1
07KAF-PS30200 Bearing Separator 1
*: Part of Mainshaft Inspection Tool Set, 07GAJ-PG201Q2.
**: Must be used with commercially available 3/8"-16 UNF Slide Hammer.
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)

General Troubl eshooting Information, page 11-3
REVERSE LOCKOUT SOLENOID

Test, page 13-32
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 13-33
System Description
At vehicle speeds of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more, the ECM, which monitors the signals from the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor, activates the reverse lockout solenoid, which pushes the select lock cam into the locked
position. As a result, the select lever cannot rotate to the reverse select position, making it impossible to engage reverse
gear. As the vehicle speed drops to 9 mph (15 km/h) or less, the ECM turns off the reverse lockout solenoid. The select
lock return spring pulls back the select lock cam, enabling the select lever to move freely so reverse gear can be selected.
Vehicle speed Inhibitor Reverse selection
Above 12 mph (20 km/h) ON Not allowed
Below 9 mph (15 km/h) OFF Allowed
Ignition switch LOCK (0) OFF Allowed

Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
TERMINAL
FUSE BOX
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
Symptom Troubleshooting
Driver can select reverse gear when vehicle 8. Measure the voltage between reverse lockout
solenoid 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body
speed is 12 mph (20 km/h) or more
ground.
NOTE:
When checking if the transmission will shift to reverse REVERSE LOCKOUT SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR
while the wheels are being driven forward, raise the
vehicle on a lift, make sure it is securely supported,
and allow the front wheels to rotate freely.
Do not release the clutch pedal if you can select
reverse gear while the wheels are driven forward. IG1 (iLK/YEL)
When the vehicle is on a lift, and you make the wheels
rotate, turn off the VSA system by the VSA OFF switch.
Refer to How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM
connectors in the Fuel and Emissions Systems section
before troubleshooting this circuit (see page 11-6). Wire side of female term i nal s
2. Check the No. B12 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box. YES-Go to step 9.
Is the fuse O/C? NO-Repair an open in the wire between
No. B12 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box
YES-Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 3.
and the reverse lockout solenoid.
NO-lnstall a new No. B12 (10 A) fuse, and recheck. If
the fuse continues to blow, check for short to body
ground on the No. B12 (10 A) fuse circuit.!! 10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
3. Test-drive the vehicle. 11. Disconnect ECM connector A (44P).
4. Check for fuel and emissions system's DTCs with the
HDS.
Are there any DTCs stored in the ECM?
YES-Go to the indicated ECM DTC's

troubleshooting.B
NO-Go to step 5.
6 . Disconnect the reverse lockout solenoid 2P
connector.
12. Checkfor continuity between reverse lockout Driver cannot select reverse gear when
solenoid 2P connector terminal No. 2 and ECM
vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or less
connector A (44P) terminal No. 27.
NOTE;
ECM CONNECTOR A (44P)
When checking if the transmission will shift to reverse
while the wheels are being driven forward, raise the
vehicle on a lift, make sure it is securely supported,
and allow the front wheels to rotate freely.
3 4 5 6 7 8
Do not release the clutch pedal if you can select
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 '19 reverse gear while the wheels are driven forward.
20 21 22 x 23 24;25 When the vehicle is on a lift, and you make the wheels
26 27?28 29 30 31 32 33 34:35 rotate, turn off the VSA system by the VSA OFF switch.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 Refer to How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM
RVSLCK (PNK) connectors in the Fuel and Emissions Systems section
before troubleshooting this circuit (see page 11 -6).
RVSLCK (BLU/WHT)
2. Try to shift the transmission into reverse.
JL
Can you shift the transmission into the reverse?
REVERSE LOCKOUT SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR YES-Go to step 4.

NO-Go to step 3.
Is the continuity? 3. Do the reverse lockout solenoid test (see page 13-32).
YES-Go to step 13. Is the reverse lockout solenoid OK?
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the reverse YES-Check the change lever assembly (see page
lockout solenoid and the ECM. 13-63), if necessary inspect the internal
13. Do the reverse lockout solenoid test (see page 13-32). transmission.
Is the reverse lockout solenoid OK? NO-Repair or replace the reverse lockout solenoid
(see page 13-33).H
YES-Check for loose terminals or poor connections at
the ECM. If necessary, update the ECM if it does not 4. Start the engine, and try to shift the transmission into
have the latest software (see page 11-207), or reverse.
substitute a known-good ECM (see page 11-7), then Can you shift the transmission into the reverse?
recheck. If the symptom goes away with a
known-good ECM, replace the original ECM (see page YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
11-209).11 time.B
NO-Repair or replace the reverse lockout solenoid NO-Go to step 5.
(see page 13-33).
7. Disconnect ECM connector A (44P).
8. Disconnect the reverse lockout solenoid 2P
connector.
(cont'd)
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Reverse Lockout Solenoid Test
9. Check for continuity between reverse lockout 1. Remove the reverse lockout solenoid (see page
solenoid 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body 13-33).
ground.
2. Connect jumper wires from the 12 volt battery
positive terminal to reverse lockout solenoid 2P
REVERSE LOCKOUT SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR connector terminal No. 1, and from the 12 volt battery
negative terminal to reverse lockout solenoid 2P
{JIT}
RVSLCK (BLU/WHT) REVERSE LOCKOUT SOLENOID
2P CONNECTOR
< fi>
Is there continuity? 0
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
between the reverse lockout solenoid and the ECM.B Termi nal side of male terminals
NO-Check for loose terminals or poor connections at

3. Make sure the reverse lockout solenoid works. If the
the ECM. If necessary, update the ECM if it does not reverse lockout solenoid does not work, replace it
have the latest software (see page 11-207), or (see page 13-33).
substitute a known-good ECM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the symptom goes away with a NOTE: The inhibitor should be pushed out when
known-good ECM, replace the original ECM (see page applying battery voltage to the solenoid, and the
11-209).B inhibitor should be released when there is no battery
voltage at the solenoid.
<5
Reverse Lockout Solenoid Disassembly/Reassembly
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the 5. Remove the harness bracket (A).
battery module switch OFF, and measure the voltage
at the IMA battery module terminals (see page 12-4).
3. Remove the harness clamp (A), then disconnect the
IMA motor power cable connector (B).
NOTE;
Make sure you have read the IMA system service
If the IMA motor power cable connector is dirty,
clean it before removal.
Cover the disconnected connector with plastic bag,
and wrap the IMA motor power cable terminal with
tape.
If the IMA motor power cable is wet, wait until it is
dry.
6. Remove the lock pins (B) and the shift cable bracket
bolts (C), then carefully remove both cables (D) and
the shift cable bracket (E) together out of the way to
avoid bending the cables.
7. Disconnect the reverse lockout solenoid 2P connector
(F).
8. Disconnect the neutral position switch 2P connector
(A), then remove the change lever assembly (B).
4. Remove the cable guard bracket (A) and the clutch

line bracket (B).
(cont'd)
Rewerse Lockout Solenoid Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
9. Remove the three bolts (A) and the reverse lockout 12. Clean any dirt and oil from the reverse lockout
solenoid (B). solenoid sealing surface.
---------- Liquid gasket

13. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0001, 08718-0003, or
08718-0004) evenly to the change lever assembly
mating surface of the reverse lockout solenoid. Install
the component within 5 minutes of applying the liquid
10. Remove the roller (A), the select lock return spring (B), gasket.
and the select lock cam (C).
NOTE: If too much time has passed after applying the
residue/then reapply new liquid gasket.
14. Install the reverse lockout solenoid (A).
11. Install the components of the reverse lockout

solenoid in the reverse order of removal.
15. Clean any dirt or oil from the change lever assembly 18. Connect the reverse lockout solenoid 2P connector
sealing surface. (A).
---------- Liquid gasket
16. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001,

08718-0003,08718-0004, or 08718-0009) evenly to the
mating surface of the charge lever assembly and the
transmission housing. Install the component within 5
NOTE:
If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
component must be installed within 4 minutes.
17. Install the change lever assembly (A), and connect the B0234M) to the cable ends (B), and connect the cable
neutral position switch 2P connector (B). ends to the change lever assembly (C), then install the
shift cable bracket (D) and the lock pins (E). Do not
bend or damage the shift cables.
or gloves.
20. Install the harness bracket (F).
(cont'd)
Reverse Lockout Solenoid Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
21. Install the cable guard bracket (A) and the clutch line
bracket (B).
22. Connect the IMA motor power cable connector (A),

then install the harness clamp (B).
NOTE: Make sure you have read the IMA system
service precautions (see page 12-3).

Manual Transmission <3
CHANGE LEVER
ASSEMBLY
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 13-63
Select Arm Clearance Inspection, page 13-61
Shift Piece Clearance Inspection, page 13-62
REVERSE SHI FT FORK

Clearance Inspection, page 13-61
SHIFT FORK
Disassembly/Reassembl y, page 13-65
DIFFERENTI AL
COUNTERSHAFT
Disassembly, page 13-78
Bearing Replacement, page 13-89
- COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBLY
MAINSHAFT " MAINSHAFT ASSEMBLY

Disassembly, page 13-69 Clearance Inspection, page 13-66
SYNCHRO RING and GEAR
Thrust Clearance Adjustment, page 13-89 Inspection, page 13-86
Bearing and Oil Seal REVERSE SYNCHRO SLEEVE and HUB
Replacement, page 13-88 IDLER GEAR Inspection and Reassembly, page 13-85
System Description
Neutral Position Switch

The change lever assembly has a neutral position switch. When the transmission is shifted to neutral, the shift arm
pushes the steel ball of the neutral position switch and turns the switch ON. The vehicle has an Auto Idle Stop system,
and the signal from the neutral position switch is one of the conditions for auto idle stop.
NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH; ON NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH; OFF

(Inneutral) (Ingear)
'<3
Back-Up Light Switch
When the transmission is in reverse, the reverse shift piece pushes the steel ball of the back-up light switch and turns the
switch ON. The vehicle has an Auto Idle Stop system, and the signal from the back-up light switch is one of the
conditions for auto idle stop.
BACK-UP LI GHT SWITCH: ON BACK-UP LI GHT SWITCH: OFF
BACK-UP
Symptom Diagnostic procedure

Hard to shift into 1st gear 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-41).
2. Check the clutch (see page 13-17).
3. Check the change lever assembly (see page 13-63).
4. Check the 1st synchro ring and 1st gear (see page 13-86).
5. Check the 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub (see page 13-85).
Hard to shift into 2nd gear 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-41).
3. Check the 2nd synchro ring and 2nd gear (see page 13-86).
4. Check the 1st/2nd synchro sleeve and hub (see page 13-85).
Hard to shift into 3rd gear 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-41).
3. Check the 3rd synchro ring and 3rd gear (see page 13-86).
4. Check the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub (see page 13-85).
Hard to shift into 4th gear 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-41).
3. Check the 4th synchro ring and 4th gear (see page 13-86).
4. Check the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub (see page 13-85).
4. Check the 5th/6th synchro sleeve and hub (see page 13-85).
4. Check the 5th/6th synchro sleeve and hub (see page 13-85).
Hard to shift into reverse 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-41).
2. Check the clutch (see page 13-17).
4. Check the reverse shift fork and the reverse idler gear (see page 13-61).
5. Check reverse gear.
HDS does not communicate with Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -383).
the ECM or the vehicle
Driver can select reverse gear Do the symptom troubleshooting (see page 13-30).
when vehicle speed is 12 mph
(20 km/h) or more
Driver cannot select reverse gear Do the symptom troubleshooting (see page 13-31).
when vehicle speed is 9 mph
(15 km/h) or less
Noise from the transmission 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-41).
2. Check the MTF level (underfilled or overfilled) (see page 13-41).
3. Check the transmission gears.
4. Check the transmission bearings.
5. Check the differential carrier, the final driven gear, and the carrier bearings.
Shift lever does not operate 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-41).
smoothly 2. Check the shift cables and their joints (see page 13-96).
3. Check the shift lever housing and the shift lever shaft.
Transmission jumps out of gear 1. Check and/or replace the MTF (see page 13-41).
2. Check the detent ball and spring for proper size and or damage (see page
13-57).
3. Check the teeth of the synchro rings and the gears (see page 13-86).
4. Check for bent, deformed, or damaged shift forks.
p*-------r-wrr I
BS
Transmission Fluid Inspection and -Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and make sure it is securely 7. Install the splash shield (see page 20-163).
supported.
3. Remove the filler plug (A) and the sealing washer (B), MTF, reset the Maintenance Minder (see page 3-4).
check the condition of the MTF, and make sure it is at Even if the Maintenance Minder did not require you to
the proper level (C). replace the MTF, go to step 10.
10. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the
Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link
connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of
the dashboard.
4. If the fluid is dirty, remove the drain plug (A) and the
sealing washer (B), and drain the MTF.
11. Go to the Individual Maintenance Items Reset (see

page 3-6), and do the MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 3
RESETwiththeHDS.
5. Install the drain plug with a new sealing washer, and

refill the transmission with MTF to the proper level.
Always use Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF).
Fluid Capacity:
1.4 L (1.5 US qt) at fluid change
1.6 L (1.7 US qt) at overhaul
6. Install the filler plug (C) with a new sealing washer (D).
Back-Up Light Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3). 4. Remove the back-up light switch (A). Check for
continuity between back-up light switch 2P connector
2. Disconnect the back-up light switch 2P connector (A).
terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be continuity
when the switch end (B) is pressed, and no continuity
when the switch end is released.
If the test result is OK, check the reverse shift
mechanism in the transmission.
If the test result is faulty, replace the back-up light
switch.
3. Check for continuity between back-up light switch 2P

connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be
continuity when the shift lever is in reverse.
If the test result is OK, go to step 6.
If the test result is faulty, go to step 4.
BACK-UP LIGHT SW I TCH 2P CONNECTOR
BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
5. Install the removed or the new back-up light switch

with a new washer (C).
6. Connect the back-up light switch 2P connector.
<
Neutral Position Switch Transmission Removal

Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3). Special Tools Required
Universal Lifting Eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120
(A).
Program 888-424-6857.
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted

surfaces.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the
battery module switch OFF, and measure the voltage
at the IMA battery module terminals (see page 12-4).
2. Secure the hood in the wide open position with the
support strut.
page 20-149).
3. Remove the neutral position switch (A).
22-87).
6. Remove the harness clamp (A), then disconnect the
IMA motor power cable connector (B).
NOTE:
Make sure you have read the IMA system service
If the IMA motor power cable connector is dirty,
clean it before removal.
Cover the disconnected connector with plastic bag,
and wrap IMA motor power cable terminal with
tape.
@If the IMA motor power cable is wet, wait until it is
dry.
4. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0001,08718-0003, or
08718-0004) evenly to the threads of the neutral
position switch, and install it on the change lever
assembly. Install the component within 5 minutes of
applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE: If too much time has passed after applying the
5. Connect the neutral position switch 2P connector.
(cont'd)
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
7. Remove the cable guard bracket (A) and the clutch 9. Remove the harness bracket (A).
line bracket (B).
10. Remove the lock pins (B) and the shift cable bracket
8. Remove the slave cylinder (A), then carefully move bolts (C), then carefully remove both cables (D) and
the slave cylinder out of the way to avoid bending the the shift cable bracket (E) together out of the way to
clutch line. avoid bending the cables.
NOTE: 11. Disconnect the reverse lockout solenoid 2P connector

Do not disconnect the clutch line joints. (F).
Do not press the clutch pedal after the slave 12. Remove the starter (see page 4-10).
cylinder has been removed.
(A) and the harness bracket (B).
<t0
15. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed 19. Remove auxiliary under-hood relay box A and the
sensor 3P connector (A). harness clips (B) from the ECM bracket (C).
16. Remove the ECM cover (D).

20. Remove the ECM bracket with the ECM from the
body.
21. Attach the universal lifting eyelet (A) to the cylinder
head with a spacer (B) and an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt (C).
NOTE: Select a spacer that is long enough that the
feed tube (D).
17. Disconnect ECM connectors A, B, and C.

18. Remove the ECM bracket mount bolts (E).
(cont'd)
22. Install the engine hanger adapter (VSB02G000026) to 24. Remove the ground cable (A).
the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256), then install
attach the hook (A) to the universal lifting eyelet (B).
Tighten the wing nut (C) by hand, and lift and support
the engine/IMA motor/transmission.
VSB02C000026
25. Remove the transmission mount bolt (B) and the

transmission mount bracket base bolts (C), then
remove the transmission mount bracket (D) with the
transmission mount bracket base (E).
26. Remove the upper transmission housing mounting
bolts (A).
23. Hold the steering wheel. Remove the steering joint

cover, then disconnect the steering joint from the
steering gearbox pinion shaft (see page 17-64).
NOTE: Hold the splined shaft on the column with a
piece of wire between the joint yoke of the splined
shaft and joint yoke of the splined tube to prevent the
splined shaft from pulling out.
27. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and make sure it is securely

supported.
29. Drain the transmission fluid. Reinstall the drain plug
using a new sealing washer (see page 13-41).
30. Disconnect the stabilizer links from the stabilizer bar
(see page 18-20).
31. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joints from the
knuckles (see step 11 on page 17-65).
32. Disconnect the lower arm ball joints from the knuckles
33. Disconnect the EPS motor 3P connector (A) by 35. Remove the torque rod (A).
pushing the lock (B) and pulling up the lever (C), then
disconnect the torque sensor 6P connector (D) and
EPS motor angle sensor 8P connector (E) from the
steering gearbox.
36. Secure the transmission jack (A) to center of the front

subframe (B), and support the front subframe
securely by raising the transmission jack.
34. Remove the secondary H02S wire (A) from the clamp
(B).
NOTE: Do not disconnect the secondary H02S 4P
connector and secondary H02S.
37. Remove the front subframe mounting bolts (C).

38. Lower the front subframe and steering gearbox as an
assembly by lowering the transmission jack slowly.
(cont'd)
39. Separate the left driveshaft inboard joint from the 44. Remove the lower transmission housing mounting
differential (see step 8 on page 16-5). bolts.
40. Separate the right driveshaft inboard joint from the Front side
intermediate shaft (see step 9 on page 16-6).
41. Remove the intermediate shaft (see page 16-22).
42. Remove the torque rod bracket (A).
43. Securely support the transmission with a

transmission jack.
45. Pull the transmission away from the IMA motor

housing until the transmission mainshaft clears the
clutch pressure plate.
46. Slowly lower the transmission. Check once again that
all hoses and harnesses are disconnected and free
from the transmission, then lower it completely.
Remove the two dowel pins.
47. Remove the release fork and the release bearing from
the clutch housing (see page 13-22).
Transmission Installation
Special Tools Required 5. Install the lower transmission housing mounting

Universal Lifting Eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120 bolts.
Front side
Program 888-424-6857.
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted

surfaces.
1. Make sure the two dowel pins (A) are undamaged and
installed in prescribed holes on the engine block as
shown. Replace the dowel pins if they are damaged.
Rear side
2. Check the release bearing (see page 13-22), and

reinstall the release bearing and the release fork with
specified grease (see page 13-23).
3. Place the transmission on the transmission jack, and
raise it to the engine level.
4. Align the transmission mainshaft and the clutch
pressure plate, then move the transmission inward
until there is no gap between the transmission
housing and the IMA motor housing.
(cont'd)
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
6. Install the torque rod bracket (A) with a new bolt (B) 9. Set the front subframe (A) with the steering gearbox
and bolts (C). on the transmission jack and support it.
/ \
83 N-m (8.5 k g fm , 61 Ib f -f t )
7. Install the intermediate shaft (see page 16-26).
c
8. Install both driveshafts (see page 16-19). 14 x 1.5 mm
Replace.
Replace.
10. Carefully raise the front subframe with the
transmission jack, and pass the pinion shaft into the
passenger's compartment.
NOTE:
Be sure that the pinion shaft grommet (B) is in place
securely. Make sure the pinion shaft grommet is not
turned up. Incorrect installation can cause leakage
of water or mud, and noise.
Take care not to damage the lower arm ball joint
11. Loosely tighten new front subframe mounting bolts
(C). Align the front subframe (see page 20-173), then
tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
12. Install the torque rod (A). Install the bolt with the tab 14. Pull down the lever (A) of the EPS motor 3P connector
(B) on the bolt head aligned with the guide (C) on the (B), then confirm the connector is fully seated.
front subframe, then loosely tighten a new torque rod Connect the EPS motor angle sensor 8P connector (C)
mounting bolt (D) and a new nut (E). and torque sensor 6P connector (D) to the steering
gearbox.
NOTE: Make sure to set "UP" mark of the torque rod to
upper side when you install it.
A
13. I nstall the secondary H02S wire (A) to the clamp (B). C
15. Connect the lower arm ball joints to the knuckles (see
16. Connect the tie-rod end ball joints to the knuckles (see
17. Connect the stabilizer links to the stabilizer bar (see
page 18-20).
18. Lower the vehicle.
19. Install the upper transmission housing mounting 23. Loosen and retighten the side engine mount/bracket
bolts (A). assembly mounting nuts (A).
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N-m (6.5 kgf-m, 47 Ibf-ft)
20. Install the transmission mount bracket (A) with the
transmission mount bracket base (B). 24. Tighten the transmission mount bracket bolt and the
transmission mount bracket base bolts in the

10 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
12 x 1.25 mm (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibf-ft)
74 N-m
(7.5 kgf-m, 55
21. Loosely tighten new transmission mount bolt (C) and 25. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and make sure it is securely
the transmission mount bracket base bolts (D), then supported.
install the ground cable (E).
22. Remove the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256) and
the universal lifting eyelet from the engine.
26. Tighten the torque rod mounting bolt and nut in the 31. Install the ECM bracket mount bolts (D).
(I) 14 x 1.5 mm
83 N-m
32. Connect ECM connectors A, B, and C.

(D 14x1.5 mm
93 H m NOTE: ECM connectors A, B, and C have symbols
(9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf ft) (A = Q B=A, C =0) embossed on them for
27. Lower the vehicle. identification.
28. Connect the steering joint onto the steering gearbox 33. Install the ECM cover (E).
pinion shaft, then install the steering joint cover (see
34. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
page 17-64).
3P connector (A).
29. Install the ECM bracket (B) with the ECM to the body.
30. Install the harness clips (C) to the ECM bracket, then
install auxiliary under-hood relay box A.
35. Connect the back-up light switch 2P connector (A). 38. Connect the reverse lockout solenoid 2P connector
(A).
36. Connect the neutral position switch 2P connector (B)

and the harness bracket (C).
37. Install the starter (see page 4-10).
39. Apply a light coat of silicone grease (P/N 08C30-

B0234M) to the cable ends (B), and connect the cable
end to the change lever assembly (C), then install the
shift cable bracket (D), the harness bracket (E), and the
lock pins (F). Do not bend or damage the shift cables.
or gloves.
40. Apply a light coat of super high temp urea grease (P/N 42. Connect the IMA motor power cable connector (A),
08798-9002) to the end of the slave cylinder push rod then install the harness clamp (B).
(A). Install the slave cylinder (B). Be careful not to
NOTE: Make sure you have the IMA system service
bend the clutch line.

41. Install the cable guard bracket (A) and the clutch line 44. Do the 12 volt battery installation procedure (see page
bracket (B). 22-87).
20-149).
46. Refill the transmission fluid to the proper level (see
page 13-41).
49. Do the ECM reset procedure (see page 11-4).
50. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary
(see page 18-5).
51. Check the shift lever and the clutch operation.
Transmission Disassembly
Exploded View - Clutch Housing
DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY 26 x 40 x 7 mm OIL SEAL v TRANSMISSION HANGER

SHIFT FORK ASSEMBLY Replace. |8 x 1 .2 5 m m FLANGE BOLT
COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBLY 14 x 20 mm DOWEL PIN 27 N-m (2.8 kgf-m, 20 Ibf-ft)
MAINSHAFT ASSEMBLY @ REVERSE GEAR SHAFT DOUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
(D NEEDLE BEARING @ REVERSE IDLER GEAR SPEED SENSOR
OIL G U I DE PLATE C 6 x 1.0 mm SPECIAL BOLT DO-R I NG
MAGNET 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft) Replace.
26 mm WASHER @ REVERSE SHIFT FORK !) 6 x 1.0 mm FLANGE BOLT
36 mm SPRING WASHER @ 35 x 58 x 8 mm OIL SEAL 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 9 Ibf-ft)
BALL BEARING Replace. D69 mm SNAP RING
@ CLUTCH HOUSING
Exploded View - Transmission Housing
SET SCREW ) OIL GUIDE PLATE M D20 mm SEALING WASHER

22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) !) 52 x 62 mm SHIM Replace.
12 mm SEALING WASHER D20 mm BOLT
Replace.
DOIL GUTTER PLATE 44 N-m (4.5 kg fm , 32 Ib fft)
DETENT BALL SPRING !>80 mm SHIM DFILLER PLUG
(Free Length Size: 26.0 mm (1.024 in)) DBACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH 44 N-m (4.5 kg fm , 32 Ib fft)
STEEL BALL 29 N-m (3.0 k g fm , 21 Ib fft) ) 4 0 x 5 6 x 8 mm OIL SEAL
(Ball Size: 7.94 mm (0.3126 in)) D18 mm SEALING WASHER Replace.
32 mm SEALING CAP Replace. D14 mm SEALING WASHER
34 N-m (3.5 kg fm , 25 Ibf-ft) i>CHANGE LEVER ASSEMBLY Replace.
TRANSMISSION HOUSING n x 30 x 1.0 mm FLANGE BOLT ) DRAIN PLUG
8 x 1 0 mm DOWEL PIN 12 N-m (1.2 k g fm , 9 Ib fft) 39 N-m (4.0 kg fm , 29 Ib fft)
8 x 1.25 mm FLANGE BOLT ?)6 x 45 x 1.0 mm FLANGE BOLT
27 N-m (2.8 k g fm , 20 Ibf-ft) 12 IM-m (1.2 kg fm , 9 Ib fft)
(cont'd)
Transmission Disassembly (cont'd)
NOTE: Pl ace the clutch housing on two pieces of wood 5. Remove the back-up light switch (A), the 18 mm
that are thick enough to keep the mainshaft from hitting sealing washer (B), and the transmission hanger (C).
the workbench.
1. Remove the release bearing and the release fork (see
page 13-22).
2. Remove the set screws (A), the 12 mm sealing
washers (B), the detent ball springs (C), and the steel
balls (D).
6. Remove the drain plug (A), the filler plug (B), the
14 mm sealing washer (C), the 20 mm searing washer
(D), the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (E),
and the O-ring (F).
3. Remove the 20 mm bolt (E) and the 20 mm sealing

washer (F).
4. Remove the change lever assembly (A) and the
8 x 1 0 mm dowel pins (B).
7. Remove the 8 x 1.25 mm flange bolts (A) in a 11. Remove the reverse shift fork (A).
crisscross pattern in several steps.
12. Remove the reverse idler gear (A) and the reverse
gear shaft (B).
8. Remove the 32 mm sealing cap (A).
9. Expand the 69 mm snap ring (B) on the countershaft

ball bearing, and remove it from the groove using a
pair of snap ring pliers.
10. Remove the transmission housing (C) and the
14x 20 mm dowel pins (D).
(cont'd)
13. Apply tape to the mainshaft splines to protect the seal, 15. Remove the differential assembly (A) and the magnet
then remove the mainshaft assembly (A) and the (B).
countershaft assembly (B) with the shift fork
assembly (C) from the clutch housing (D).
NOTE: Do not apply tape so thick that it damages the
oil seal.
16. Remove the oil gutter plate (A), the oil guide plate M,
and the 52 x 62 mm shim (B) from the transmission
housing (C).
14. Remove the 36 mm spring washer (E) and the 26 mm

washer (F).
Reverse Shift Fork Clearance Select Arm Clearance Inspection
Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between the reverse idler gear 1. Measure the clearance between the select arm (A)
(A) and the reverse shift fork (B) with a feeler gauge and the interlock (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the
(C). If the clearance exceeds the service limit, go to clearance exceeds the service limit, go to step 2.
step 2.
Standard: 0.01 0.21 mm (0.001 0.008 in)
Standard: 0.20.6 mm (0.0080.024 in) Service Limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
C
2. Measure the width of the select arm.

2. Measure the width of the reverse shift fork. If the width is not within the standard, replace the
If the width is not within the standard, replace the select arm.
reverse shift fork. If the width is within the standard, replace the
If the width is within the standard, replace the interlock.
reverse idle gear. Standard: 12.9-13.0 mm (0.508-0.512 in)
Standard: 14.7-14.9 mm (0.579-0.587 in)
Shift Piece Clearance Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between the shift arm (A) and

the shift piece (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the
clearance exceeds the service limit, go to step 2.
Standard: 0.2060.616 mm (0.009
-0 .0 2 4 in)
2. Measure the width of the shift piece.

* If the width is not within the standard, replace the
shift piece.
If the width is within the standard, replace the shift
arm.
Standard: 16.00-16.20 mm (0.6299-0.6378 in)
Change Lever Assembly Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE:
Prior to reassembl ing, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply grease to the contact surfaces as shown. Do
not clean the rubber parts with solvent.
If too much time has passed after applying liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and residue, then reapply new
liquid gasket.
SEALING BOLT
44 N-m (4.5 kg fm , 32 Ib fft}
Apply liquid gasket
(P/N 08718-0001,
BREATHER CAP 08718-0003, or
SHIFT LEVER 08718-0004) to the
Turn toward the Be careful not to
front of the vehicle, threads of the sealing
damage the dust seal b o lt
and install it. when installing it.
INTERLOCK
SELECT LEVER
Be careful not to
damage the dust seal
when installing it.
SELECT LOCK CAM

NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH
29 N-m
(3.0 k g fm , 21 Ib fft)
Apply liquid gasket
(P/N 08718-0001,
08718-0003, or
08718-0004) to the
threads of the
neutral position
switch.
SELECT ARM
REVERSE LOCKOUT SHIFT ARM
SOLENOID
Apply liquid gasket
(P/N 08718-0001,
08718-0003, or 8 mm
08718-0004) to the SPRING
sealing surface. WASHER
8 mm SPECIAL BOLT
12 N-m 31 N-m
31 N-m
(1.2 kgfm, 9 Ibfft) (3.2 k g fm , 23 Ib fft)
(3.2 kg fm , 23 Ib fft)
DETENT BOLT
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ib fft)
Apply liquid gasket SET SCREW
(P/N 08718-0001,08718-0003, 22 N-m
or 08718-0004) to the threads (2.2 kgfm,
of the detent b o lt 16 Ibf-ft)
Shift Fork Clearance Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between each shift fork (A) 3. Measure the clearance between the shift forks (A) and
and its matching synchro sleeve (B). If the clearance the shift piece (B). If the clearance exceeds the service
exceeds the service l imit, go to step 2. limit, go to step 4.
Standard: 0.350.65 mm (0.0140.025 in) Standard: 0.200.50 mm (0.0080.019 in)
Service Limit: 1.0 mm (0.039 in) Service Limit: 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
2. Measure the thickness of the shift fork (A) fingers.

If the thickness is not within the standard, replace 4. Measure the width of the shift piece (A).
the shift fork.
If the width is not within the standard, replace the
If the thickness is within the standard, replace the shift piece.
synchro sleeve and the synchro hub as a set.
If the width is within the standard, replace the shift
If one arm of the shift fork shows more wear than fork or the reverse shift piece.
others, the fork may be bent and needs to be
replaced. Standard: 15.916.0 mm (0.6260.630 in)
Standard:
1st/2nd sh ift fork: 6.76.9 mm
(0.264-0.272 in)
3rd/4th, 5th/6th shift forks: 7.47.6 mm
(0.291-0.299 in)
Shift Fork Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE: Prior to reassembl ing, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply MTF to all contact surfaces.
5TH/6TH SHIFT FORK
REVERSE SHIFT
Mainshaft Assembly Clearance Inspection
1. Support the bearing inner race with an appropriate 4. Measure the clearance between 4th gear (A) and the
sized socket (A), and push down on the mainshaft (B). 4th/5th gear distance collar (B) with a dial indicator
(C).
If the clearance exceeds the service limit, go to step
5.
If the clearance is within the service limit, go to step
7.
Standard: 0.060.19 mm (0.00240.0075 in)
2. Measure the clearance between 2nd gear (C) and 3rd

gear (D) with a feeler gauge (E).
3.
4.
Standard: 0.060.21 mm (0.0030.008 in)
Service Limit: 0.30 mm (0.011 in) 5. Measure distance of the 4th/5th gear distance
3. Measure the thickness of 3rd gear. collar as shown.
If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace If the length is not within the standard, replace
3rd gear. the 4th/5th gear distance collar.
If the thickness is within the service limit, replace If the length is within the standard, go to step 6.
the 3rd/4th synchro hub and the 3rd/4th synchro Standard: 22.53-22.56 mm (0.8870-0.8882 in)
sleeve as a set.
Standard: 27.02-27.07 mm (1.0638-1.0657 in)
6. Measure the thickness of 4th gear. 8. Measure the length of the 4th/5th gear distance
If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace collar as shown.
4th gear. If the length is not within the standard, replace
If the thickness is within the service limit, replace the 4th/5th gear distance collar.
the 3rd/4th synchro hub and the 3rd/4th synchro If the length is within the standard, go to step 9.
sleeve as a set. Standard: 22.53-22.56 mm (0.8870-0.8882 in)
Standard: 25.52 - 25.57 mm (1.0047 -1.0067 In)
9. Measure the thickness of 5th gear.

If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace
7. Measure the clearance between the 4th/5th gear 5th gear.
distance collar (A) and 5th gear (B) with a dial If the thickness is within the service limit, replace
indicator (C). the 5th/6th synchro hub and the 5th/6th synchro
If the clearance exceeds the service limit, go to step sleeve as a set.
8.
Standard: 22.42-22.47 mm (0.8827-0.8846 in)
If the clearance is within the service limit, go to step Service Limit: 22.35 mm (0.8799 in)
10.
Standard: 0.060.14 mm (0.00240.0055 in)
Mainshaft Assembly Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
10. Measure the clearance between 6th gear (A) and the 12. Measure the thickness of 6th gear.
angular ball bearing inner race (B) with a feeler gauge If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace
(C). If the clearance exceeds the service limit, go to 6th gear.
step 11. If the thickness is within the service limit, replace
Standard: 0.060.16 mm (0.0030.006 in) the 5th/6th synchro hub and the 5th/6th synchro
Service Limit: 0.25 mm (0.009 in) sleeve as a set.
Standard: 23.92-23.97 mm (0.9417-0.9437 in)
11. Measure the length of the 6th gear distance collar.

If the length is not within the standard, replace the
6th gear distance collar.
If the length is not within the standard, go to step 12.
Standard: 24.03-24.08 mm (0.9461 -0.9480 in)
Mainshaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Support 5th gear (A) on bearing separator (B), and
Bearing Separator 07KAF-PS30200 press the mainshaft out of the 5th/6th synchro hub,
synchro spring, the synchro ring, and 5th gear.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View in the Mainshaft
Reassembly, as needed, when removing components
pressed onto the mainshaft (see page 13-72).
1. Support 6th gear (A) on bearing separator (B), and
press the mainshaft out of the angular ball bearing (C)
and 6th gear.
4. Remove the needle bearings (A), the 4th/5th gear

distance collar (B), the 4th gear (C), the synchro ring
(D), the synchro spring (E), and the 3rd/4th synchro
sleeve (F).
2. Remove the needle bearing (A), the 6th gear distance
collar (B), the synchro ring (C), the synchro spring (D),
and the 5th/6th synchro sleeve (E).
E
Mainshaft Disassembly (cont'd) Mainshaft Inspection
5. Support 3rd gear (A) on bearing separator (B), and 1. Inspect the oil passage, gear, and bearing contact
press the mainshaft out of the 3rd/4th synchro hub, areas for wear and damage, then measure the
mainshaft at points A, B, C, D, and E. If any part of the
the synchro spring, the synchro ring, 3rd gear, and the mainshaft is l ess than the service limit, replace it.
needle bearing.
Standard:
A Ball Bearing Contact Area
(Transmission Housing Side):
24.98725.000 mm (0.98374-0.98425 In)
B 4th/5th Gear Distance Collar Contact Area:
28.992-29.005 mm (1.14142-1.14193 in)
C Needle Bearing Contact Area:
34.984-35.000 mm (1.37732-1.37795 in)
D Ball Bearing Contact Area
(Clutch Housing Side):
25.977-25.990 mm (1.02271-1.02323 in)
E Pilot Bushing Contact Area:
18.800-18.850 mm (0.74016-0.74212 in)
Service Limit:
A: 24.930 mm (0.98149 in)
B: 28.930 mm (1.13897 in)
C: 34.930 mm (1.37519 in)
D: 25.920 mm (1.02047 In)"
E: 18.750 mm (0.73819 In)
E
s
2. Inspect the runout by supporting both ends of the
mainshaft. Then rotate the mainshaft two complete
turns while measuring with a dial gauge. If the runout
exceeds the service limit, replace the mainshaft.
Standard: 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) max.
Mainshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
ANGULAR BALL BEARING

Check for wear and operation.
3RD/4TH Note the direction of installation.
SYNCHRO SLEEVE
Note the direction
of installation.
6TH GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
3RD/4TH Checkfor wear
SYNCHRO HUB and operation.
Note the direction
of installation.
6TH GEAR
DISTANCE COLLAR
SYNCHRO SPRING SYNCHRO RING
SYNCHRO RING SYNCHRO SPRING
5TH/6TH SYNCHRO
SLEEVE
Note the direction
3RD GEAR of installation.
5TH/6TH SYNCHRO
HUB
Note the direction
NEEDLE BEARING of installation.
Check for wear
and operation. SYNCHRO SPRING
SYNCHRO RING
STH GEAR
MAINSHAFT
NEEDLE BEARING
Checkfor wear
and operation.
4TH/5TH GEAR
DISTANCE COLLAR
4TH GEAR
SYNCHRO RING
SYNCHRO SPRING
Special Tools Required 4. Install the 3rd/4th synchro hub (A) by aligning the
. Driver Handle, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 synchro ring fingers (B) with the grooves (C) in the
Attachment, 25 mm I.D. 07746-0030200 3rd/4th synchro hub.
Bearing Driver Attachment, 30 mm 07746-0030300
NOTE: Make sure to install the 3rd/4th synchro hub in
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed, during the direction shown.
this procedure.
1. Clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and appl y MTF
to all contact surfaces.
2. Install the needle bearing (A) and 3rd gear (B) onto the
mainshaft (C).
5. Press on the 3rd/4th synchro hub (A) using the 40 mm

driver handle (B).
B
07746-0030100
3. Install the synchro ring (A) with the synchro spring (B)
onto 3rd gear (C).
Mainshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Install the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve (A) by aligning the 8. Install 4th gear (A) onto the synchro ring (B).
stops (B) of the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and the 3rd/4th
synchro hub. After instal lation, check the operation of
the 3rd/4th synchro hub set (see page 13-85). A
9. Install the 4th/5th gear distance collar (A) with the

needle bearings (B) and 5th gear (C).
by aligning the synchro ring fingers (C) with the
grooves (D) in the 3rd/4th synchro hub.
10. Install the synchro ring (D) with the synchro spring (E)
onto 5th gear.
11. Install the 5th/6th synchro hub (A) by aligning the 13. Install the 5th/6th synchro sleeve (A) by aligning the
synchro ring fingers (B) with the grooves (C) in the slots of the 5th/6th synchro sleeve and the 5th/6th
5th/6th synchro hub. synchro hub (B). After installation, check the
operation of the 5th/6th synchro hub set (see page
13-85).
NOTE: Make sure to align the slots in the 5th/6th
synchro hub as shown.
12. Press on the 5th/6th synchro hub (A) using the 40 mm

driver handle (B) and the 30 mm bearing driver
attachment (C).
by aligning the synchro ring fingers (C) with the
grooves (D) in the 5th/6th synchro hub.
15. Install the 6th gear distance collar (E) with the needle
bearing (F) and 6th gear (G).
(cont'd)
Mainshaft Reassembly (cont'd) Countershaft Assembly Clearance
Inspection
16. Press on a new angular ball bearing (A) using the NOTE: Before inspection, make sure the special bolt is
40 mm driver handle (B), the 25 mm attachment (C), tightened to the specified torque (see step 20 on page
and a press (D). 13-85).
NOTE: Make sure the angular ball bearing is installed 1. Measure the clearance between 1st gear (A) and the
in the correct direction. 1st gear distance collar (B) with a feeler gauge (C).
2.
4.
Standard: 0.060.21 mm (0.0030.008 in)
2. Measure the length of the 1st gear distance collar as

shown.
If the length is not within the standard, replace the
1st gear distance collar.
If the length is within the standard, go to step 3.
Standard: 26.53-26.58 mm (1.0445-1.0465 in)
< s
3. Measure the thickness of 1st gear. 5. Measure the length of the 2nd gear distance collar.
If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace If the length is not within the standard, replace the
1st gear. 2nd gear distance collar.
If the thickness is within the service limit, replace If the length is within the standard, go to step 6.
the 1st/2nd synchro hub and reverse gear as a set. Standard: 26.53-26.56 mm (1.0445-1.0457 in)
Standard: 27.42-27.47 mm (1.0795-1.0815 In)
4. Measure the clearance between 2nd gear (A) and 3rd

gear (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If the clearance is 6. Measure the thickness of 2nd gear.
more than the service limit, go to step 5. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace
2nd gear.
Standard: 0.060.14 mm (0.0030.005 in)
If the thickness is within the service limit, replace
the 1st/2nd synchro hub and reverse gear as a set.
Standard: 26.42-26.47 mm (1.0402-1.0421 in)
Countershaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required 4. Support 4th gear (A) on bearing separator (B), and
Bearing Separator 07KAF-PS30200 press the countershaft (C) out of 4th gear and 5th gear
using an attachment (D) and a press (E).
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View in the countershaft
reassembly, as needed, when removing components
pressed onto the countershaft (see page 13-80).
1. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a bench
vise with wood blocks.
5. Support 2nd gear (A) on bearing separator (B), and

press the countershaft (C) out of 2nd gear and 3rd
2. Remove the special bolt (left-hand threads). gear using an attachment (D) and a press (E).
3. Support 6th gear (A) on bearing separator (B), and

press the countershaft out of the ball bearing (C), the
32 mm shim, and 6th gear using an attachment (D)
and a press (E).
Countershaft Inspection
6. Remove the needle bearing (A), the 2nd gear distance 1. Inspect the oil passage, gear and bearing contact
collar (B), the friction damper (C), the double cone areas for wear and damage, then measure the
synchro assembly (D), and the synchro spring (E) countershaft at points A, B, and C. If any part of the
from the countershaft (F). countershaft is less than the service limit, replace it.
Standard:
A Ball Bearing Contact Area
(Transmission Housing Side):
26.020-26.033 mm (1.02441 -1.02492 in)
B 1st Gear Distance Collar Contact Area:
38.987-39.000 mm (1.53492-1.53543 in)
C Needle Bearing Contact Area
(Clutch Housing Side):
34.000-34.015 mm (1.33858-1.33917 in)
Service Limit:
A: 25.970 mm (1.02244 in)
B: 38.940 mm (1.53307 in)
C: 33.950 mm (1.33661 in)
7. Remove the reverse gear (A), the 1st/2nd synchro hub

(B), the synchro spring (C), the synchro ring (D), and
the friction damper (E) from the countershaft (F).
2. Inspect the runout by supporting both ends of the

countershaft. Then rotate the countershaft two
complete turns while measuring with a dial gauge. If
the runout exceeds the service limit, replace the
countershaft.
Standard: 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) max.
8. Remove 1st gear (G), the needle bearing (H), and the
1st gear distance collar (I) from the countershaft.
Countershaft Reassembly
Exploded View
SPECIAL BOLT
NOTE; Left hand threads
Replace.
101 N-m
(10.3 kgf-m, 74 Ibf-ft)
REVERSE GEAR
BALL BEARING
Checkfor wear
1ST/2ND and operation.
SYNCHRO HUB Note the direction
Note the direction of installation.
of installation.
SYNCHRO
SPRING 32 mm SHIM
SYNCHRO
RING 6TH GEAR
FRICTION
DAMPER 5TH GEAR
Checkfor wear
and operation.
Note the direction 4TH GEAR
of installation.
NEEDLE BEARING
1ST GEAR Check for wear 3RD GEAR
and operation.
NEEDLE 2ND GEAR 2ND GEAR

BEARING DISTANCE COLLAR
Checkfor wear
and operation. FRICTION DAMPER
Check for wear
and operation.
1ST GEAR Note the direction
DISTANCE COLLAR of installation.
COUNTERSHAFT SYNCHRO CONE*
INNER RING*
SYNCHRO RING*
SYNCHRO SPRING
*: The components of the double cone synchro assembly.

<90
Special Tools Required 4. Align the fingers (A) on the friction damper with the
Driver Handle, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 grooves (B) on the 1st/2nd synchro hub (C), then
Bearing Driver Attachment, 30 mm 07746-0030300 install the 1st/2nd synchro hub onto the countershaft.
NOTE: Refer to the Expl oded View, as needed, during

this procedure.
1. Clean all parts in solvent, dry them, and apply MTF to
all contact surfaces.
2. Install the 1st gear distance col lar (A) with the needle
bearing (B) and 1st gear (C) on the countershaft (D).
5. I nstall the reverse gear (A) by aligning the slots of the

reverse gear and the 1st/2nd synchro hub (B). After
installing, check the operation of the 1st/2nd synchro
hub set (see page 13-85).
NOTE: Make sure to align the sl ots in the 1st/2nd
synchro hub as shown.
3. Install the friction damper (A), the synchro ring (B),

and the synchro spring (C) on 1st gear (D).
(cont'd)
Countershaft Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Install the double cone synchro assembly (A) with the 8. Install the needle bearing (A), then install 2nd gear (B)
synchro spring (B) by aligning the synchro ring by aligning the synchro cone fingers (C) with the
fingers (C) with the 1st/2nd synchro hub grooves (D). grooves (D) in 2nd gear.
7. Install the 2nd gear distance collar (A) with the friction 9. Support the countershaft (A) on steel blocks, then
damper ( B ) , then align the fingers (C) on the friction press on 3rd gear (B) using the 40 mm driver handle
damper and the grooves (D) in the 1st/2nd synchro (C) and a press (D).
hub.
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum pressure.
10. Press on 4th gear (A) using the 40 mm dri ver handle 12. Press on 6th gear (A) using the 40 mm driver handle
(B) and a press (C). (B) and a press (C).
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum pressure. NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum pressure.
11. Press on 5th gear (A) usi ng the 40 mm driver handle 13. Install the 32 mm shim (A), and temporarily press on
(B) and a press (C). the used ball bearing (B) using the 40 mm driver
handle (C), the 30 mm bearing driver attachment (D),
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum pressure.
and a press (E).
Use any size of the 32 mm shim, and note size you
used. Measurements taken in the following steps
will determine the correct shim to use for final
assembly.
Make sure the ball bearing is installed in the correct
direction.
(cont'd)
Countershaft Reassembly (cont'd)
14. Measure the clearance between the bearing (A) and 15. If the measured clearance in step 14 is not within the
the 32 mm shim (B) with a feeler gauge (C). standard, select another suitabl e 32 mm shim from
the table, then go to next step to replace the 32 mm
Standard: 0.04-0.10 mm (0.002-0.003 in)
shim and the ball bearing with new ones. If the
measured clearance in step 14 is within the standard,
go to the next step to replace only the ball bearing
with a new one.
32 mm Shim
Type Thickness
A 1.56 mm (0.0614 n)
B 1.60 mm (0.0630 n)
C 1.64 mm (0.0646 n)
D 1.68 mm (0.0661 n>
E 1.72 mm (0.0677 n)
F 1.76 mm (0.0693 n)
G 1.80 mm (0.0709 n)
H 1.84 mm (0.0724 n)
J 1.88 mm (0.0740 n)
K 1.92 mm (0.0756 n)
L 1.96 mm (0.0772 n)
M 2.00 mm (0.0787 n)
IM , 2.04 mm (0.0803 n>
P 2.08 mm (0,0819 n)
Q 2.12 mm (0.0835 n)
R 2.16 mm (0.0850 n)
S 2.20 mm (0.0866 n)
T 2.24 mm (0.0882 n)
U 2.28 mm (0.0898 n)
V 2.32 mm (0.0913 n)
16. Remove 6th gear with the ball bearing and the 32 mm
shim using a press (see step 3 on page 13-78).
17. Repeat step 12 to install 6th gear.
< s
Synchro Sleeve and Hub Inspection

and Reassembly
18. Install the correct 32 mm shim (A) and a new ball 1. Inspect gear teeth on all synchro hubs and synchro
bearing (B) using the 40 mm driver handl e (C), the sleeves for wear (rounded off corners).
30 mm bearing driver attachment (D), and a press (E).
2. Install each synchro hub (A) in its mating synchro
NOTE: sleeve (B), and check for free movement Make sure to
If necessary, replace the 32 mm shim with the match the three sets of longer teeth (C) (120 degrees
correct one selected in step 15. apart) on the synchro sleeve with the three sets of
Make sure the ball bearing is installed in the correct deeper grooves (D) in the synchro hub.
direction. NOTE:
@ Do not install the synchro sleeve with its longer
teeth in the 1st/2nd and 5th/6th synchro hub slots
(E) because it will damage the spring ring.
If replacement is required, always replace the
synchro sleeve and the synchro hub as a set.
B
19. Recheck the clearance between the bearing and the

32 mm shim with a feeler gauge.
20. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a bench
vise with wood blocks (A).
21. Tighten a new special bolt (B) (left-hand threads).

NOTE: Apply MTF to the bolt threads and flange.
Synchro Ring and Gear Inspection
1. Inspect the synchro rings for scoring, cracks, and 4. Inspect the synchro teeth on gear for scoring, cracks,
damage (A). and damage (A).
5. Inspect the thrust surface (B) on each gear hub for

Example of synchro ring teeth
wear.
6. Inspect the cone surface (C) on each gear hub for wear
and roughness.
7. Inspect the teeth on all gears (D) for uneven wear,
GOOD WORN
scoring, and cracks.
2. Inspect the inside of each synchro ring (B) fo r wear.
8. Coat the cone surface of each gear with MTF, and
Inspect the teeth (C) on each synchro ring for wear
place its synchro ring on it. Rotate the synchro ring
(rounded off).
and make sure that it does not slip.
3. Inspect the teeth (A) on each synchro sleeve and the
matching teeth on each gear for wear (rounded off).
Example of synchro sleeve teeth and gear teeth
GOOD WORN
9. Measure the clearance between each gear (A) and its Synchro ring-to-gear
synchro ring (B) all around the gear. Hold the synchro
ring against the gear evenly while measuring the
clearance. If the clearance is less than the service
limit, replace the synchro ring and gear.
Synchro Ring-to-Gear Clearance
Standard: 0.6551.334 mm (0.0250.052 in)
Double Cone Synchro-to-Gear Clearance
Standard:
: Outer Synchro Ring (B) to Synchro Cone (C)
0.70-1.19 mm (0.028-0.046 in)
: Synchro Cone (C) to Gear (A)
0 .50-1.04 mm (0.002-0.040 in)
: Outer Synchro Ring (B) to Gear (A)
0.95-1.68 mm (0.038-0.066 in) Double cone synchro-to-gear
Service Limit:
: 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
: 0.3 mm (0.,012 in)
: 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Drive in a new oil seal (A) about 0.50.9 mm
Adjustabl e Bearing Puller, 2540 mm 07736-A01000B (0.0200.035 in) below the surface of the clutch
Bearing Driver Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 housing (B) using the 15 x 135L driver handle (C) and
Bearing Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400 the 42 x 47 mm bearing driver attachment (D).
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Slide Hammer 3/8"-16 UNF, commercially available
1. Remove the differential assembly.

2. Remove the ball bearing (A) from the clutch housing
(B) using the 2540 mm adjustable bearing puller (C)
and a commercially available 3/8"-16 UNF slide
hammer (D).
5. Drive in a new ball bearing (A) from the transmission

side using the 15 x 135L driver handle (B) and the
52 x 55 mm bearing driver attachment (C).
3. Remove the oil seal (A) from the clutch housing.

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the clutch housing
when removing the oil seal.
Countershaft Bearing Replacement Mainshaft Thrust Clearance
Adjustment
Special Tools Required Special Tools Required
Adjustable Bearing Puller, 2540 mm 07736-A01000B Mainshaft Holder 07GAJ-PG20110
Bearing Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400 Collar 07GAJ-PG20120
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000 Mainshaft Base 07GAJ-PG20130
1. Remove the 52 x 62 mm shim (A) and oil guide plate
1. Remove the needle bearing (A) from the clutch M from the transmission housing (B).
housing (B) using the 2540 mm adjustable bearing
puller (D) and a commercially available 3/8"-16 UNF
slide hammer (E), then remove oil guide plate C.
07736-A01000B
2. Thoroughly clean the 36 mm spring washer (A) and

the 26 mm washer (B) before installing them on the
clutch housing side ball bearing (C).
NOTE: Be sure to install the spring washer in the
direction shown.
2. Position the oil guide plate C and new needle bearing
(A) in the bore of the clutch housing (B).
3. Assemble all of the mainshaft components.

NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed, during
the assembly.
3, Press in the needle bearing using the 15 x 135L driver

handle (D) and the 52 x 55 mm bearing driver
attachment (E).
Mainshaft Thrust Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
4. Install the mainshaft assembly into the clutch 11. Zero a dial gauge (A) on the end of the mainshaft.
housing.
5. Place the transmission housing over the mainshaft
and onto the clutch housing.
6. Tighten the clutch and transmission housings with
several 8 mm bolts.
NOTE: It is not necessary to use seal ing agent
between the housings for this procedure.
7. Lightly tap on the mainshaft with a plastic hammer.
8. Attach the mainshaft holder (A), the collar (B), and the
mainshaft base (C) to the mainshaft as follows:
Backout the mainshaft holder bolt (D), and loosen
the two hex bolts (E).
Fit the mainshaft holder over the mainshaft so its lip
is toward the transmission.
Align the mainshaft holder lip around the groove at
the inside of the mainshaft splines, then tighten the 12. Turn the mainshaft holder bolt (B) clockwise; stop
hex bolts. turning when the dial gauge has reached its
maximum movement. The reading on the dial gauge
is the amount of mainshaft thrust clearance.
NOTE: Do not turn the mainshaft holder bolt more
than 60 degrees after the needle of the dial gauge
stops moving. Applying more pressure with the
mainshaft holder bolt could damage the
transmission.
13. If the reading is within the standard, the clearance is
correct. If the reading is not within the standard, select
the appropriate shim needed from the table, and
recheck the thrust clearance.
Standard: 0.110.18 mm (0.00430.0071 in)
(Example)
Measure reading: 1.93 mm (0.0760 in)
9. Fully seat the mainshaft by tapping its end with the Subtract the total clearance measurement from the
plastic hammer. middle of the clearance standard 0.14 mm (0.0055 in).
10. Thread the mainshaft holder bolt in until it just 1.93 - 0.14 (0.0760 -0.0055 in) = 1.79 mm (0.0705 in)
contacts the wide surface of the mainshaft base.
Select the shim closest to the amount calculated. For
this example, the 1.78 mm (0.0701 in) shim is best.
14. With oil guide plate M and the appropriate size shim
installed in the transmission housing, check the thrust
clearance again to verify the clearance is within the
standard.
Transmission Reassembly
52 x6 2 mm Shim NOTE; Prior to reassembly, clean all the parts in solvent,

dry them, and apply MTF to any contact surfaces.
Type Thickness
A 0.85 mm (0.0335 n) 1. Install the magnet (A) and differential assembly (B).
B 0.88 mm (0.0346 n)
NOTE: Clean the magnet any time the transmission is
C 0.91 mm (0.0358 n)
disassembled.
D 0.94 mm (0.0370 n)
E 0.97 mm (0.0382 n)
F 1.00 mm (0.0394 n)
G 1.03 mm (0.0406 n)
H 1.06 mm (0.0417 n)
I 1.09 mm (0.0429 n)
J 1.12 mm (0.0441 n)
K 1.15 mm (0.0453 n)
L 1.18 mm (0.0465 n)
M 1.21 mm (0.0476 n)
N 1.24 mm (0.0488 n)
0 1.27 mm (0.0500 n)
P 1.30 mm (0.0512 n)
Q 1.33 mm (0.0524 n)
R 1.36 mm (0.0535 n)
S 1.39 mm (0.0547 n)
T 1.42 mm (0.0559 n)
U 1.45 mm (0.0571 n)
2. Install the 36 mm spring washer (A) and the 26 mm
V 1.48 mm (0.0583 n)
washer (B) over the bal l bearing (C). Note the
W 1.51 mm (0.0594 n)
installation direction of the spring washer.
X 1.54 mm (0.0606 n)
Y 1.57 mm (0.0618 n)
Z 1.60 mm (0.0630 n)
AA 1.63 mm (0.0642 n)
AB 1.66 mm (0.0654 n)
AC 1.69 mm (0.0665 n)
AD 1.72 mm (0.0677 n)
AE 1.75 mm (0.0689 n)
AF 1.78 mm (0.0701 n)
AG 1.81 mm (0.0713 n)
AH 1.84 mm (0.0724 n)
Al 1.87 mm (0.0736 n)
AJ 1.90 mm (0.0748 n)
AK 1.93 mm (0.0760 n)
AL 1.96 mm (0.0772 n)
AM 1.99 mm (0.0783 n)
AN 2.02 mm (0.0795 n)
AO 2.05 mm (0.0807 n)
AP 2.08 mm (0.0819 n)
AQ 2.11 mm (0.0831 n)
3. Apply vinyl tape to the mainshaft splines (D) to protect

the seal. Install the mainshaft and the countershaft (E)
with the shift forks (F), as an assembly.
NOTE: Do not apply tape thick to damage the oil seal.
Transmission Reassembly (cont'd)
4. Install the reverse idler gear (A) and the reverse gear 6. Select the proper size 52 x 62 mm shim (A) according
shaft (B). to the measurements made during the Mainshaft
Thrust Clearance Adjustment (see page 13-89). Install
the oil gutter plate (B), oil guide plate M, and the
52 x 62 mm shim into the transmission housing (C).
5. Install the reverse shift fork (A).
7. Clean any dirt or oil from the transmission housing

sealing surface.
8. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
08718-0003, 08718-0004, or 08718-0009) evenly to the
clutch housing mating surface of the transmission
housing. Install the component within 5 minutes of
applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
9. Install the two 14 x 20 mm dowel pins (A). 12. Make sure that the 69 mm snap ring (A) is securely
seated in the groove of the countershaft bearing.
Dimension as installed: 3.36.5 mm
(0.130-0.256 in)

13. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,

08718-0003, 08718-0004, 08718-0009, or 08718-0012)
to the threads of the 32 mm sealing cap, and install it
on the transmission housing. Install the component
within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
10. Place the transmission housing on the clutch housing,
making sure to line up the shafts. NOTE:
11. While expanding the 69 mm snap ring (B) on the If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
countershaft ball bearing using snap ring pliers, push component must be installed within 4 minutes.
the transmission housing down to start the If too much time has passed after applying the
countershaft ball bearing through the snap ring. liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
Release the pliers, and push down the housing until it residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.
bottoms out and the snap ring snaps in place in
14. Install the 8 x 1.25 mm flange bolts finger-tight.
countershaft ball bearing snap ring groove.
NOTE: Install the 32 mm sealing cap (C) after setting in
the 69 mm snap ring.
15. Torque the 8 x 1.25 mm flange bolts in a crisscross 17. Install the back-up light switch (A) with a new 18 mm
pattern in several steps. sealing washer (B) and the transmission hanger (C).
Specified Torque: 8 x 1.25 mm
27 N-m (2.8 kgf-m, 20
18. Clean any dirt or oil from the change lever assembly
sealing surface.
16. Install new washers (A), the drain plug (B), the filler 19. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001,
plug (C), a new O-ring (D), and the output shaft 08718-0003,08718-0004, or 08718-0009) evenly to the
(countershaft) speed sensor (E). transmission housing mating surface of the change
lever assembly. Install the component within
5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
Allow it to cure at least 30 minutes after assembly
before filling the transmission with MTF.
---------------------- Liquid gasket

20. Install the 8 x 1 0 mm dowel pins (A) and the change
lever assembly (B).
21. Install the steel balls (A), the detent ball springs (B),
and the set screws (C) with new 12 mm sealing
washers (D).
22. Install the 20 mm bolt (E) with a new 20 mm sealing

washer (F).
Gearshift Mechanism Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the precautions
and procedures (see page 24-13) before doing repairs or service.
NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the terminal part of the connectors and switches, especially if you
have silicone grease on your hands or gloves.
Shift Lever Housing Replacement
NOTE; Take care not to scratch the center console, 6. Normal type: Insert the appropriate trim tool into the
dashboard, and related parts. slit (A) of the shift lever trim (B) to detach the clips (C).
1. Sports type: Insert the appropriate trim tool into the
slit (A) of the shift lever trim (B) to detach the clips (C).
lever trim to detach the hooks (D) and the clips (E).
2. Sports type: Gently pry up along the edge of the shift 8. Normal type: Lower the shift lever boot (F) to release
lever trim to detach the hooks (D) and the clips (E), the hooks (G) from the boot, then remove the shift
then reverse the shift lever boot (F). lever knob (H).
3. Sports type: Release the hooks (G) from the shift lever 9. Normal type: Remove the shift lever trim.
boot ring (H), then lower the shift lever boot.
10. Remove the center console (see page 20-79).
4. Sports type: Loosen the shift l ever boot ring (A), then
remove the shift lever knob (B) and the shift lever boot 11. Remove the lock pin (A) and the washer (B).
ring from the shift lever (C).
12. Rotate the shift cable (C) counterclockwise, then

5. Sports type: Remove the shift lever trim (D). disconnect the shift cable from the shift lever housing.
Shift Lever Housing Replacement (cont'd)
13. Remove the shift cable clip (A). 16. Install the shift lever housing (A).
14. Expand the clamp (B), then disconnect the shift cable
(C) from the shift lever (D).
15. Remove the shift lever housing (A).
18. Install a new shift cable clip (C).

19. Rotate the shift cable (A) clockwise, then connect the 26. Sports type: Connect the shift lever boot (A) to the
shift cable to the shift lever housing. shift lever boot ring (B)
20. Install the washer (B) and the lock pin (C). 27. Sports type: Install the shift lever trim (C) to the center
console.
21. Install the center console (see page 20-79).
28. Normal type: Install the shift lever trim (A) to the
22. Sports type: Install the shift lever trim (A) over the
center console.
shift lever (B).
29. Normal type: Install the shift lever knob (B) on the shift
23. Sports type: Install and turn the shift lever boot ring lever (C), then connect the shift lever boot (D) to the
(C) until it reaches the bottom of the threads on the
shift lever knob.
shift lever.
NOTE: Tighten the shift lever knob until the shift
24. Sports type: Turn the shift lever knob (D) until the shift
pattern is properly aligned.
lever knob contacts the shift lever boot ring.
30. Check the shift lever operation.
25. Sports type: Tighten the shift lever boot ring and the
shift lever knob together with the shift pattern
properly aligned.
3 5 x 5 8 x 8 mm OIL SEAL
CARRIER BEARING
80 mm SHIM
Differential Thrust Clearance
Backlash Inspection Differential Carrier/Final Driven
Gear Replacement
1. Place the differential assembly on V-blocks (A), and 1. Loosen the bolts in a crisscross pattern in several
install both axles. steps, then remove the final driven gear (A) from the
differential carrier (B).
2. Measure the backlash of both pinion gears (B) with a

dial indicator (C). If the backlash is not within the 2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfer on the
standard, replace the differential carrier. inside diameter facing the carrier. Tighten the bolts in
a crisscross pattern in several steps.
Carrier Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install new bearings (A) using the 40 mm driver
Driver Handle, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 handle and a press. Press each bearing on until it
bottoms. There should be no clearance between the
1. Check the carrier bearings for wear and rough bearings and the carrier.
rotation. If they rotate smoothly and the rollers show
no signs of wear, the bearings are OK. NOTE: Place the seal part (B) of the bearing towards
the outside of the differential, then install it.
2. Remove the carrier bearings (A) using a commercially
available bearing puller (B). Transmission housing side
Transmission housing side
Clutch housing side
Clutch housing side

< 3
Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install a new oil seal (A) flush with the transmission
Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 64 x 72 mm housing using the 15 x 135L driver handle (B) and the
07JAD-PN00100 64 x 72 mm oil seal driver attachment (C).
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
1. Remove the oil seal (A) from the transmissi on

housing (B).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the transmission
housing while removing the oil seals. B
07749-0010000
07JAD-PN00100
4. I nstall a new oil seal (A) flush with the clutch housing
using the 15 x 135L driver handle (B) and the
64x72 mm oil seal driver attachment (C).
2. Remove the oil seal (A) from the clutch housing (B).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the clutch housing
while removing the oil seal.
Differential Thrust Clearance Adjustment
Special Tools Required 5. Use the 40 mm driver handle to bottom the

Driver Handle, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 differential assembly in the clutch housing.
1. Remove the transmission housing side oil seal (see

page 13-103).
2. If you removed the 80 mm shim (A) from the
transmission housing, reinstall the same sized shim.
6. Measure the clearance between the 80 mm shim and

the bearing outer race in transmission housing.
Standard: 0.01 0.10 mm (0.0010.003 in)
3. Install the differential assembly (A) into the clutch
housing.
4. Install the transmission housing onto the clutch

housing, then tighten the 8 x 1.25 mm flange bolts in a
crisscross pattern in several steps (see step 15 on
page 13-94).
Specified Torque: 8x1.25 mm
27 N-m (2.8 kgfm, 20 Ibfft)
7. If the clearance exceeds the standard, select a new
80 mm shim from the follow ing table. If the clearance
measured in step 6 is w ithin the standard, go to step
10.
80 m m Shim:
...... Typ Thickness
A 1.00 mm (0.0394 n)
B 1.10 mm (0.0433 n)
C 1.20 mm (0.0472 n)
D 1.30 mm (0.0512 n)
E 1.40 mm (0.0551 n)
F 1.50 mm (0.0591 n)
G 1.60 mm (0.0630 n)
H 1.70 mm (0.0669 n)
J 1.80 mm (0.0709 n)
K 1.05 mm (0.0413 n)
L 1.15 mm (0.0453 n)
M 1.25 mm (0.0492 n)
N 1.35 mm (0.0531 n)
P 1.45 mm (0.0571 n)
Q 1.55 mm (0.0610 n)
R 1.65 mm (0.0650 n)
S 1.75 mm (0.0689 n)
8. Remove the bolts and the transmission housing.
9. Replace the thrust shim selected in step 7, then
recheck the clearance.
10. Install a new transmission housing side oil seal (see
page 13-103).
11 . Reinstall the transmission housing.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If CVT maintenance is required)
Service Manual. Items marked w ith an asterisk (*) on the contents page include or are located near SRS
tensioners.
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) SYSTEM (If CVT maintenance is required)

(see page 1-7). You must be fam iliar with the IMA system before working around it. Make sure you have read the
Transaxle
CVT A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel

Special T o o ls ............................... ............ 14-2 R eplacem ent. . . . . . . . . . ...... ............ . 14-202
General Troubleshooting In fo rm a tio n . 14-4 A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Light
DTC Troubleshooting In d e x ................... 14-9 Harness R e p la c e m e n t... . . . . . . . . . . . 14-204
Sym ptom T roubleshooting In d e x ........ 14-12 A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Light
Com ponent Location In d e x ................... 14-34 R eplacem ent..................... ............. . 14-206
System D e scrip tio n .................................14-37 * Paddle Shifter + (U pshift Switch) C ircuit
DTC T ro u b le s h o o tin g ,.......................... 14-81 T roubleshooting ....................... ......... . 14-207
Road T e s t. . .................... . . . . . . ........... . 14-132 * Paddle S hifter - (D ow nshift Switch)
Stall Speed T e s t..................................... 14-134 C ircuit T ro u b le s h o o tin g ..................... 14-208
Pressure T e s t........................................... 14-135 * Paddle Shifter + (U pshift Switch)
CVT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Illum ination C ircuit T roubleshooting .14-210
Valve T e s t............... ............................. 14-140 * Paddle S hifter - (D ow nshift Switch)
CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control Illum ination Ci rcu it T ro u bl eshooti n g . 14-211
Solenoid Valve T e s t.............................14-141 * Paddle Shifter + (U pshift Switch) o r
CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control Paddle S hifter - (D ow nshift Switch) ,
Solenoid Valve T e s t........................ .. 14-141 R eplacem ent............. ......... .............. . 14-213
Inhibitor S olenoid T e s t............. ........... 14-142
Lower Valve Body A /T Interlock System
R em oval/Installation. . . . . . . . . . . -----14-142 Com ponent Location In d e x .............. 14-214
CVT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid C ircuit D ia g ra m .............................. ..... . 14-216
Valve R eplacem ent............... . . ........... 14-145 S hift Lock System Circuit
CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control T ro u b le s h o o tin g -----. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-217
Solenoid Valve R eplacem ent. . . . . . . . 14-145 Shift Lock Solenoid T e s t................... 14-221
CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control S hift Lock Solenoid R eplacem ent..........14-221
Solenoid Valve R eplacem ent..............14-146 S hift Lock S top/Shift Lock Stop Cushion
In hib itor Solenoid R eplacem ent.......... 14-146 R eplacem ent. . . . ----------- . . . . . . . . . . 14-224
CVT Input Shaft (Drive Pulley) Speed Shift Lock Release/Release Spring
Sensor R eplacem ent..................... . 14-147 R eplacem ent............. ........ .......... ..... 14-225
CVT O utput Shaft (Driven Pulley) Speed Park Pin Switch R eplacem ent............... 14-225
Sensor R eplacem ent........................... 14-147
Vehicle Speed Sensor R eplacem ent. . . 14-148 CVT
Start Clutch Pressure Control Transm ission D isassem bly................... 14-226
Calibration P rocedures....................... 14-150
Start Clutch C heck... .............................. 14-152 Lower Valve Body
CVT Fluid Level C h e c k ... . ................... . 14-153 CVT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
CVT Fluid R eplacem ent........................... 14-154 Valve R em oval/Installation................. 14-231
Transm ission R em ova l. . . ............. 14-156 CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control
Drive Plate R em oval/Installation.......... 14-165 Solenoid Valve R em oval/Installation. 14-231
Transm ission In s ta lla tio n ....................... 14-165 CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control
CVTF Cooler C le a n in g ............................. 14-175 Solenoid Valve R em oval/InstaNation. 14-232
CVTF Cooler Hose R eplacem ent........... 14-178 Inhibitor Solenoid
CVTF Filter R eplacem ent....................... 14-179 R em oval/Installation.......................... 14-232
S hift Lever R em ova l....................... ......... 14-180
S hift Lever In s ta lla tio n .......................... . 14-181 F ly w h e e l H o u s in g
S hift Lever D isassem bly/Reassem bly.. 14-184 Final Drive Shaft Bearing R eplacem ent. 14-233
S hift Lever Bracket Base R eplacem ent. 14-185 Input Shaft Oil Seal R eplacem ent..........14-234
S hift Lever Knob R eplacem ent..............14-185 CVTF Feed Pipe/Feed Pipe Guide
* S hift Cable R eplacem ent. . . . . ----------- 14-186 R e p la c e m e n t........................ ............ 14-234
S hift Cable A d ju s tm e n t........................... 14-193
End C over
A / T G e a r P o s itio n In d ic a to r CVTF Feed Pipe R eplacem ent............... 14-236
C om ponent Location In d e x ................... 14-196
Circuit Diagram .........................................14-198 Transmission Housing
Transm ission Range Switch T e s t..........14-199 CVTF Pump Sprocket/Chain
Transm ission Range Switch R em oval/Installation................. .. 14-237
R eplacem ent....................................... 14-200 CVTF Pump R eplacem ent....................... 14-238
A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Trim Driven Pulley Shaft Bearing
R eplacem ent......................................... 14-202 R em oval/Installation........................... 14-238
Final Drive Shaft Bearing
Removal/Instal l a tio n........................... 14-239
Selector Control Shaft
Removal/I nstal l atio n........................... 14-240
Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal
Replacement........................................ 14-241
Forward Clutch
Clutch Clearance Inspection........... 14-242
Input Shaft
Input Shaft
Disassembly/Inspection/
Reassembly ......................................... 14-243
Pl anetary Carrier Clearance Inspection. 14-244
Final Drive Shaft

Thrust Clearance Inspection................. 14-246
CVT
Transmission Reassembly..................... 14-248
CVT Differential
Component Location Index................... 14-261
Backlash Inspection................... ............ 14-262
Differential Carrier/Final Driven Gear
Replacement........................................ 14-262
Carrier Bearing Replacement................ 14-263
Oil Seal Replacement............................. 14-263
Carrier Bearing Side Clearance
Inspection.............................................. 14-264
Special Tools

' 07406-0020401 or 07406-0020400 A/T Oil Pressure Gauge Set
07406-0070301 A/T Low Pressure Gauge w/Panel 1
07736-A01000B Adjustable Bearing Puller, 2540 mm 1
* 07746-0030100 Driver Handle, 40 mm I.D. 1
07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 1 5 x 1 35L 1
07AAJ-PLYA100 A/T High Pressure Gauge 1
07AAK-SNAA120 Universal Lifting Eyelet 1
07JAD-PH80101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 58 mm 1
07JAD-PN00100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 64 x 72 mm 1
07LGC-0010100 Snap Ring Pliers 1
07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 1
07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Adapter 1
07NAD-PX40100 Bearing Driver Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 1
07TAE P4V0110 Reverse Brake Spring Compressor 1
07 T A E -P 4 V 0 1 2 0 Start Clutch Remover 1
07TAE-P4VA131 Start Clutch Installer 1
07ZAE-PRP0100 Clutch Compressor Attachment 1
: Must be used with a commercially available 3/8" 16 UNF slide hammer.
How t o C h e c k f o r D T C s w i t h t h e H o n d a If the D indicator and/or the malfunction indicator lamp

(MIL) come on, or if a driveability problem is suspected,
D ia g n o s tic S y s te m (H D S )
follow this procedure:
When the powertrain control module (PCM) senses an
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's
abnormality in the input or output system, the D
manual for specific instructions.)
indicator (A) in the gauge control module (B) w ill usually
blink. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
B 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it
does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see
page 11-383).
5. Record the freeze data and on-board snapshot for all
- fuel and emissions DTCs and A/T DTCs.
6. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel
and emissions system as indicated by the DTC.
7. Clear the DTC(s) and the data with the HDS.
8. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the same
conditions as those indicated by the freeze data or
on-board snapshot, and then recheck for a DTC. If the
A/T DTC returns, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. If the DTC does not return, there was
an intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure
all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
When the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) is connected
to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the Symptom Troubleshooting Versus DTC
driver's side of the dashboard and the SCS mode is Troubleshooting
selected, it w ill indicate the diagnostic trouble code
Some symptoms will not set DTCs or cause the D
(DTC) when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II) and
indicator to blink. If the MIL has been reported ON or the
the appropriate menu is selected.
D indicator has been blinking, check for DTCs. If the
vehicle has an abnormal symptom, and there are no
DTCs stored, do the symptom troubleshooting. Check
the list of probable cause(s) for the symptom, until you
find the problem.
How to Check for DTCs with the SCS Mode If the D indicator and/or the MIL come on, or if a
driveability problem is suspected, follow this procedure:
(retrieving the flash codes)
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's
NOTE: The preferred method is to use the HDS to
manual for specific instructions.)
retrieve the DTCs.
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or
output system, the D indicator (A) in the gauge control 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it
module (B) w ill usually blink. does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see
page 11-383).
B
4 . Select the SCS mode, then observe the D indicator in
the gauge control module. Codes 1 through 9 are
indicated by individual short blinks. Code 10 and
above are indicated by a series of long and short
blinks. One long blink equals ten short blinks. Add the
long and short blinks together to determine the code.
Example: DTC P0705 (5)
Short blinks (five)
ON
OFF
n m iiil
Example: DTC P0717 (34)
Long blinks (three) Short blinks (four)
r
ON j
When the D indicator has been reported on, connect the
O F F ------ 1
HDS to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of the
dashboard. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), select the
30 + 4 = 34
SCS mode, then the D indicator w ill indicate (blink) the
DTC.
5. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs and A/T DTCs.
6. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel
and emissions system as indicated by the DTC.
7. Clear the DTC(s) and the data with the HDS.
8. If the freeze data is available, drive the vehicle for
several minutes with periods of wide open throttle,
steady cruise, and stop and go, and then recheck for
DTCs. If the A/T DTC returns, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting. If the DTC does not return, there was
an intermittent problem within the circuit Make sure
all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
(cont'd)
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM 4. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminals to a
Connectors
NOTE: The PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP to a commercially available banana jack (Pomona
system for about an hour after the ignition switch is Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent) (D).
turned to ACCESSORY (I) or to LOCK (0). Jumping the
SCS line after turning the ignition switch to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0) cancels this function. Disconnecting the
PCM during this function, without jum ping the SCS line
first, can damage the PCM.
2. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C.
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols
( A = a B=A, 0 = 0 ) embossed on them for
identification.
5. Gently contact the pin probe (male) into the terminal

test port from the terminal side. Do not force the tips
into the terminal test ports.
INOTICE I
(male).
other substitutes as they can damage the terminals.
Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and
an incorrect measurement.
connections.
3. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the PCM
connector, use the terminal test port (A) above the
terminal you need to check.
Clear A/T DTCs Procedure How to End a Troubleshooting Session
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the
driver's side of the dashboard. NOTE: Reset the PCM/TCM with the HDS while the
engine is stopped.
1. T u r n the ignition switch to LOCK (0 ).
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait for
30 seconds.
4. Start the engine with the shift lever in P or N, and
warm it up to normal operating temperature (the
radiator fan comes on twice).
5. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the
vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 31 mph (50
km/h) or under the same conditions as those indicated
by the freeze data.
A Updating the A/T Software in the PCM
Refer to the PCM Update (see page 11-207) when the A/T
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). software updating is needed in the DTC troubleshooting.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it Replacing the PCM
page 11-383). Refer to the PCM Replacement (see page 11-209) when
replacing the PCM is needed in the DTC troubleshooting.
4. Clearthe DTC(s) on the HDS screen.
S ubstituting the PCM
OBD Status
Refer to the PCM substituting (see page 11-7) when
The OBD status shows the current system status of each substituting a known-good PCM is needed in the DTC
DTC and all of the parameters. This function is used to troubleshooting.
see if a repair was successfully completed. The results of
diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed as: P C M /T C M Reset .
PASSED: The on-board diagnosis is successfully
completed. NOTE: To reset the PCM/TCM, initialize only the
automatic transmission memory stored in the PCM or
FAILED: The on-board diagnosis has completed but
theTCM.
failed.
NOT COMPLETED: The on-board diagnosis was 1 . Select the A / T S Y S T E M with the HDS.
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
2. Reset the PCM/TCM with the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 30
seconds.
(cont'd)
F a ilu re R e p r o d u c tio n T e c h n iq u e .
Be careful of the following points while the vehicle is
raising on a lift for the test-drive.
Disable the VSA by pressing the VSA OFF button.
VSA DTC(s) may come on when test-driving on a lift. If
the VSA DTC(s) come on, clear the DTC(s) with the
HDS.
S e lf-D ia g n o s is
If the PCM detects the failure of a signal from a sensor, a
switch, a solenoid valve, or another control unit, it stores
Pending or Confirmed DTCs. Depending on the failure, a
Confirmed DTC is stored in either the first or the second
drive cycle. When a Confirmed DTC is stored, the PCM
blinks the D indicator and/or turns on the MIL by a signal
sent to the gauge control module via F-CAN.
One Drive Cycle Detection Method:
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a
sensor, a switch, a solenoid valve, or another control
unit, the PCM stores a Pending or Confirmed DTC for
the failure and blinks the D indicator and/or turns on
the MIL immediately.
Two Drive Cycle Detection Method:
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a
sensor, a switch, a solenoid valve, or another control
unit in the first drive cycle, the PCM stores a Pending
DTC. The D indicator and the MIL do not turn on at this
time. If the failure continues in the second drive cycle,
the PCM stores a Confirmed DTC and blinks the D
indicator and/or turns on the MIL.
Fail-Safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor,
a switch, a solenoid valve, or another control unit, the
PCM ignores that signal and substitutes a
pre-programmed value for that signal to allow the
automatic transmission to continue operating. This
causes a DTC to be stored and the D indicator to blink
and/or the MIL to come on. The transmission may not
shift normally during fail-safe operation. Do not run the
test-driving diagnosis when the MIL is ON, or the D
indicator is blinking.
<2
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record allfreeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
DTC*1 Two D MIL Detection Item Page
Drive Indicator
Cycle O o
Detection
P0107 (12) Blinks ON Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) DTC
Sensor Circuit Low Troubleshooting
(see page 14-81)
P0108 (12) Blinks ON Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) DTC
Sensor Circuit High Troubleshooting
(see page 14-81)
P0335 (88) Blinks ON Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor No DTC
Signal Troubleshooting
(see page 14-82)
P0336 (88) Blinks ON Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor DTC
Circuit Range/Performance Troubleshooting
(see page 14-83)
P0501 (36)* Blinks ON CVT Speed Sensor Circuit DTC
Range/Performance Troubleshooting
(see page 14-84)
Blinks ON CVT Speed Sensor Circuit Open/Short DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 14-85)
P062F () Blinks ON Powertrain Control Module (PCM) DTC
Internal Control Module Error Troubleshooting
(see page 14-88)
P0705 (5) * m Blinks ON Transmission Range Switch Multiple DTC
Shift Position Input Troubleshooting
(see page 14-89)
P0706 (6)* O OFF ON Transmission Range Switch Open DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 14-90)
P0716 (34)*' Blinks ON CVT Input Shaft (Drive Pulley) Speed DTC
Sensor "A" Circuit Range/Performance Troubleshooting
(see page 14-92)
P0717 (34)"' Blinks ON CVT Input Shaft (Drive Pulley) Speed DTC
Sensor "A" Circuit No Signal Troubleshooting
(see page 14-93)
P0721 (35)"' Blinks ON CVT Output Shaft (Driven Pulley) Speed DTC
Sensor Range/Performance Troubleshooting
(see page 14-96)
P0722 (35)*(5 Blinks ON CVT Output Shaft (Driven Pulley) Speed DTC
Sensor No Signal input Troubleshooting
(see page 14-97)
NOTE:
*(1): The DTC in parentheses is the flash code the D indicator indicates when the DLC is connected to the HDS, and in
the SCS mode.
*(2): This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
This code is detected simultaneously with DTC P1898.
*(4): This code is detected simultaneously with DTC P1899.
*(5): The MIL comes on when the PGM-FI system detects the same failure.
*(6): '12 model
(cont'd)
DTG*(1) Two D M IL Detection Item Page

Drive Indicator
Cycle O
Detection
P0746 (104) O Blinks ON CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control DTC
Solenoid Valve Stuck OFF Troubleshooting
(see page 14-100)
P0777 (105) o Blinks ON CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control DTC
Solenoid Valve Stuck ON Troubleshooting
(see page 14-101)
P0780 (100)* o Blinks ON Shift Error DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 14-125)
P0780 (100)*{4> o Blinks ON Shift Error DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 14-127)
P0796 (103) o Blinks ON CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control DTC
Solenoid Valve Stuck OFF Troubleshooting
(see page 14-103)
P0962 (3Bf{2) Blinks ON CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control DTC
Valve Circuit Low Troubleshooting
(see page 14-104)
PO903 (38)*<2) Blinks ON CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control DTC
Valve Circuit High Troubleshooting
(see page 14-106)
P0966 (3B)*m Blinks ON CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control DTC
Valve Circuit Low Troubleshooting
(see page 14-108)
P0967 (39)*(2) Blinks ON CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control DTC
Valve Circuit High Troubleshooting
(see page 14-110)
P0970 (32)H2) Blinks ON Pressure Control Solenoid "C" Control DTC
Circuit Low Troubleshooting
(see page 14-113)
P097i (32)#(2) Blinks ON Pressure Control Solenoid "C" Control DTC
Circuit High Troubleshooting
(see page 14-115)
P16C0 ( - ) OFF ON PCM CVT Control System Incomplete DTC
Update Troubleshooting
(see page 14-118)
P16D7 (107) Blinks OFF ' PCM Internal F-CAN Communication DTC
Circuit Malfunction Troubleshooting
(see page 14-118)
P16D8 (120) Blinks ON PCM Internal IMA-CAN Communication DTC
Circuit Malfunction Troubleshooting
(see page 14-118)
NOTE:
*<1): The DTC in parentheses is the flash code the D indicator indicates when the DLC is connected to the HDS, and in
the SCS mode.
transmission.
*(3): This code is detected simultaneously with DTC P1898.
*(4); This code is detected simultaneously with DTC P1899.
*{5). jh e MIL comes on when the PGM-FI system detects the same failure.
#(6); '12 model
DTC#(1) Two D MIL Detection Item Page
Drive Indicator
Cycle G d
Detection
P1860 (33)*(2) Blinks OFF Inhibitor Solenoid Circuit Low DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 14-119)
P1861 (33)#{2) Blinks OFF Inhibitor Solenoid Circuit High DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 14-121)
P1890 (42) Blinks OFF CVT Speed Control System DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 14-123)
P1891 (43) Blinks OFF Start Clutch Control System DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 14-124)
Valve Stuck ON or CVT Driven Pulley Troubleshooting
Pressure Control Valve Stuck OFF (see page 14-125)
Valve Stuck OFF or CVT Driven Pulley Troubleshooting
Pressure Control Valve Stuck ON (see page 14-127)
P2122 (20) Blinks ON Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) DTC
Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Troubleshooting
D) Circuit Low (see page 14-128)
P2123 (20) Blinks ON Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) DTC
Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Troubleshooting
D) Circuit High (see page 14-128)
U0029 (107) OFF OFF F-CAN Malfunction (F-CAN Bus OFF) DTC
or Troubleshooting
ON#(5) (see page 14-129)
U0038 (120) Blinks ON IMA-CAN Malfunction (IMA-CAN Bus DTC
OFF) Troubleshooting
(see page 14-130)
U0122 (107) Blinks OFF Lost Communication With Vehicle DTC .
Dynamics Control Module Troubleshooting
(see page 14-129)
U0155 (107) Blinks OFF Lost Communication With Gauge DTC
or Control Module Troubleshooting
(see page 14-129)
U0302 (129)*{6) Blinks ON PGM-FI System and A/T System DTC
Program Mismatch Troubleshooting
(see page 14-131)
U1205 (120) Blinks ON IMA-CAN Malfunction (PCM-to-Motor DTC
Control Module) Troubleshooting
(see page 14-129)
NOTE:
*<1): The DTC in parentheses is the flash code the D indicator indicates when the DLC is connected to the HDS, and in
the SCS mode.
transmission.
*{3!: This code is detected simultaneously with DTC P1898. *
*{4): This code is detected simultaneously with DTC P1899.
*<5): The MIL comes on when the PGM-FI system detects the same failure.
*<6): '12. model
E l e c t r i c a l S y s t e m S y m p t o m Troubleshooting
Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
When you turn the F-CAN communication line Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC (see
ignition switch to error page 11-376).
ON (II), the D Gauge control module Check the A/T gear position indicator drive circuit i n the
indicator comes on defective gauge control module by using the gauge control
and stays on in all PCM defective module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325).
shift lever positions,
or it never comes on
at all
A/T gear position F-CAN communication line Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC (see
indicator does not error page 11-376).
come on while the Gauge control module Check the A/T gear position indicator drive circuit in the
shift lever is in that defective gauge control module by using the gauge control
position PCM defective module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325).
Transmission range switch ; Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
defective 14-199).
Shift cable broken or out of Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
adjustment selector control lever.
Shift lever cannot be PCM defective Troubleshoot the shift lock system circuit (see page
moved from P while Shift lock solenoid defective 14-217).
pressing on the Shift lock solenoid control Test the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-221).
brake pedal circuit Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
Shift lock mechanism defective 14-199).
Brake switch circuit
Brake switch defective
@Accelerator pedal position
sensor circuit
Accelerator pedal position
sensor defective
Throttle body defective
Transmission range switch
defective
circuit
Ignition switch PCM defective Troubleshoot the key interlock system circuit (see page
cannot be moved Interlock control system circuit 22-96).
from ACCESSORY Key interlock solenoid defective Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
(I) to LOCK (0) (key is Park pin switch defective 14-199).
pushed in, the shift Transmission range switch
lever in P) defective
HDS does not DLC circuit Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-383).
communicate with PCM defective
the PCM
Shift indicator does F-CAN communication line Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC (see
not work on even error page 11-376).
though the paddle Gauge control module Check the F-CAN communication line by using the
shifter + (upshift defective gauge control module self-diagnostic function (see
switch) or paddle PCM defective page 22-325).
shifter (downshift Transmission range switch Check the indicator drive circuit in the gauge control
switch) is operated defective module by gauge control module self-diagnostic
in D function (see page 22-325).
Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-199).
< & >
Electrical System Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd)

When you press the PCM defective Troubleshoot the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) circuit
paddle shifter + Paddle shifter + (upshift (see page 14-207).
(upshift switch) in D, switch) circuit
the transmission
does not upshift
When you press the PCM defective Troubleshoot the paddle shifter (downshift switch)
paddle shifter Paddle shifter (downshift circuit (see page 14-208).
(downshift switch) switch) circuit
in D, the
transmission does
not downshift
M indicator does not F-CAN communication line Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC.
come on even error Check the F-CAN communication line by using the
though the paddle Gauge control module gauge control module self-diagnostic function (see
shifter + (upshift defective page 22-325).
switch) or paddle PCM defective Check the indicator drive circuit in the gauge control
shifter (downshift Transmission range switch module by using the gauge control module
switch) is operated defective self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325).
in D with the Sport 3-Mode switch defective Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
Mode 14-199).
Inspect the 3-Mode switch (see page 22-351).
(cont'd)
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
H y d ra u lic /M e c h a n ic a l S y s te m S y m p to m T r o u b le s h o o tin g
Engine does not Shift cable broken or out of Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
start in P or N adjustment transmission control lever.
PCM defective' Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
Transmission range switch connectors.
defective Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
< Flywheel assembly defective 14-199).
Inspect the flywheel assembly for wear and damage. If
the flywheel assembly is worn or damaged, replace it
as an assembly.
Engine runs, but Intermediate housing assembly Check the CVTF level (see page 14-153), and check the
vehicle does not worn or damaged CVTF cooler lines for leakage and loose connections.
move in any Pulley pressure feed pipe Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
position damaged or out of round connectors.
Start clutch assembly defective Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
Start clutch feed pipe damaged 14-199).
or out of round Check the stall speed (see page 14-134).
Input shaft worn or damaged Check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
Secondary drive gear or Check the drive and driven pulley pressure, and the
secondary driven gear worn or lubrication pressure (see page 14-135). If the pressure
damaged is low or there is no pressure, check the CVTF pump
Final driven gear worn or assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the CVTF pump
damaged drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
Sun gear worn or damaged Check the CVTF strainer and the CVTF filter for debris.
Selector control shaft assembly If the CVTF strainer or the CVTF filter is clogged, find
worn or damaged the damaged components that caused debris, and
Control lever worn or damaged clean the CVTF cooler lines (see page 14-175) if
Park pawl and pawl shaft worn necessary.
or damaged Check the lower valve body assembly for scoring and
CVTF pump worn, binding, or damage.
foreign material in CVTF pump Check the flywheel drive plate for wear and damage.
CVTF pump drive chain or CVTF Inspect the flywheel assembly for wear and damage. If
pump drive/driven sprocket the flywheel assembly is worn or damaged, replace it
worn or damaged as an assembly.
Low CVTF level Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
CVTF strainer or CVTF filter If the input shaft is worn or damaged, replace it and
clogged also check the related part of the input shaft assembly
Lower valve body assembly for wear and damage.
defective Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
CVT driven pulley pressure damage. If the manual valve body assembly is worn or
control solenoid valve defective damaged, replace it as an assembly.
CVT drive pulley pressure Check the selector control shaft assembly for wear and
control solenoid valve defective damage. If the selector control shaft assembly is worn
CVT clutch pressure control or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
solenoid valve defective Check the control lever for wear and damage.
Manual valve body assembly Check the park pawl and the pawl shaft for wear and
defective damage. If the park pawl or the pawl shaft are worn or
Manual valve lines worn or damaged, replace them and also check the park gear
damaged for wear and damage.
Transmission range switch Check the secondary drive gear, the secondary driven
defective gear, and the final driven gear for wear and damage.
Flywheel drive plate worn or Check the intermediate housing assembly for wear and
damaged damage. If the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the
Flywheel assembly defective pulley shafts, the steel belt, or related part are worn or
Engine output low damaged, replace the intermediate housing assembly.
Driveshaft disengaged Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If the
differential pinion gears are worn, replace the
differential assembly.
<sG>
Hydraulic/Mechanical System Symptom Troubleshooting <cont'd) . ;
Vehicle does not Forward clutch assembly Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
move in D defective connectors.
Sun gear worn or damaged Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
Shift cable broken or out of 14- 199).
adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Manual valve lever and pin transmission control lever.
worn or damaged Check the forward clutch pressure (see page 14-135). If
Manual valve body assembly the pressure is low or there is no pressure, check the
defective CVTF pump assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the
Transmission range switch CVTF pump drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed
defective pipes.
Engine output low Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch
end-plate and the top disc (see page 14-242). If the
clearance is out of tolerance, replace the forward
clutch assembly.
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
If the sun gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also
check the related part of the input shaft assembly for
wear and damage.
Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
damage. If the manual valve body assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Vehicle does not Reverse brake defective Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
move in R Reverse brake piston stuck, connectors.
worn, or damaged Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
Planetary carrier assembly 14- 199).
worn or damaged Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Sun gear worn or damaged transmission control lever.
Ring gear worn or damaged Check the reverse brake pressure (see page 14-135). If
Thrust needle bearing on the pressure is low or there is no pressure, check the
planetary carrier seized, worn CVTF pump assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the
or damaged CVTF pump drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed
Thrust washer on planetary pipes.
carrier seized, worn or inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
damaged the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
Shift cable broken or out of clearance between the brake end-plate and the top
adjustment disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
Manual valve lever and pin brake discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
worn or damaged discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as
Manual valve body assembly a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the brake
defective end-plate.
Solenoid valves defective Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
PCM defective If the planetary carrier assembly, the sun gear, or the
Transmission range switch ring gear are worn or damaged, replace them and also
defective check the related part of the input shaft assembly for
Engine output low wear and damage.
Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washers
on the planetary carrier for wear and damage. If the
thrust needle bearing or the thrust washer are worn or
damaged, replace them and adjust the clearance with
the thrust shim.
(cont'd)
H y d r a u l i c / M e c h a n i c a l S y s t e m Symptom T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g cont'd)
S y m p to m Probable cause(s) Notes
Engine stops when Intermediate housing assembly Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
shifted to D from N worn or damaged connectors.
Reverse brake defective Calibrate the start clutch control system (see page
Reverse brake piston stuck, 14-150), and check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
worn or damaged Check the reverse brake pressure and the lubrication
Start clutch assembly defective pressure (see page 14-135). If the pressure is low or
Start clutch end-plate clearance there is no pressure, check the CVTF pump assembly,
incorrect the CVTF pump drive chain, the CVTF pump
Lower valve body assembly drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
defective Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
CVT driven pulley pressure the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
control solenoid valve defective clearance between the brake end-plate and the top
CVT drive pulley pressure disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
control solenoid valve defective brake discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
CVT clutch pressure control discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as
solenoid valve defective a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the brake
Manual valve body assembly end-plate.
defective Check the lower valve body assembly for scoring and
PCM defective damage.
Start clutch control system not Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
calibrated in PCM damage. If the manual valve body assembly is worn or
Engine output low damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Check the intermediate housing assembly for wear and
damage. If the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the
pulley shafts, the steel belt, or related part are worn or
damaged, replace the intermediate housing assembly.
Engine stops when Intermediate housing assembly Checkfor a stored DTC, and check for loose
shifted to R from N worn or damaged connectors.
Forward clutch assembly Calibrate the start clutch control system (see page
defective 14-150), and check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
Start clutch assembly defective Check the forward clutch pressure, the reverse brake
Start clutch end-plate clearance pressure, and the lubrication pressure (see page
incorrect 14-135). If the pressure is low or there is no pressure,
Planetary carrier assembly check the CVTF pump assembly, the CVTF pump drive
worn or damaged chain, the CVTF pump drive/driven sprocket, and the
Thrust needle bearing on CVTF feed pipes.
planetary carrier seized, worn Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch
or damaged end-plate and the top disc (see page 14-242). If the
Thrust washer on planetary clearance is out o f tolerance, replace the forward
carrier seized, worn or clutch assembly.
damaged Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Lower valve body assembly the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
defective clearance between the brake end-plate and the top
CVT driven pulley pressure disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
CVT drive pulley pressure discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as
control solenoid valve defective a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the brake
CVT clutch pressure control end-plate.
solenoid valve defective Check the lower valve body assembly forscoring and
Manual valve body assembly damage.
defective Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
PCM defective damage. If the manual valve body assembly is worn or
Start clutch control system not damaged, replace it as an assembly.
calibrated in PCM Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Engine output low If the planetary carrier assembly is worn or damaged,
replace it and also check the related part of the input
shaft assembly fo r wear and damage.
Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washers
the thrust shim.
(cont'd)
H y d r a u l i c / M e c h a n i c a l S y s t e m S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g <cont'd) : .
S y m p to m . P r o b a b l e cause(s) Notes
No shift to higher Intermediate housing assembly Check the CVTF level (see page 14-153), and check the
ratio or lower ratio worn or damaged CVTF cooler lines for leakage and loose connections.
Pulley pressure feed pipe Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
damaged or out of round connectors.
CVTF pump worn, binding or Check the speed sensors installation, for wear and
foreign material in CVTF pump damage, and measure their resistance, and also check
Low CVTF level the O-rings for wear and damage.
CVTF strainer or CVTF filter Check the stall speed (see page 14-134)
clogged Check the drive and driven pulley pressure, and the
Lower valve body assem bly. lubrication pressure (see page 14-135). If the pressure
defective is low or there is no pressure, check the CVTF pump
CVT driven pulley pressure assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the CVTF pump
control solenoid valve defective drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
CVT drive pulley pressure Check the CVTF strainer and the CVTF filter for debris.
control solenoid valve defective If the CVTF strainer or the CVTF filter is clogged, find
Solenoid wire harness worn or the damaged components that caused debris, and
damaged clean the CVTF cooler lines (see page 14-175) if
CVT input shaft (drive pulley) necessary.
and CVT output shaft (driven Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
pulley) speed sensors defective Check the lower valve body assembly for scoring and
Vehicle speed sensor defective damage.
PCM d e f e c t i v e Check the intermediate housing assembly for wear and
Poor acceleration Intermediate housing assembly Checkfor a stored DTC, and check for loose
worn or damaged connectors.
Pulley pressure feed pipe Check the speed sensors installation, for wear and
damaged or out of round damage, and measure their resistance, and also check
CVTF pump worn, binding or the O-rings for wear and damage.
foreign material in CVTF pump Check the stall speed (see page 14-134).
CVTF strainer or CVTF filter Check the drive and driven pulley pressure, and
clogged - lubrication pressure (see page 14-135). If the pressure
Lower valve body assembly is low or there is no pressure, check the CVTF pump
defective assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the CVTF pump
CVT driven pulley pressure drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
control solenoid valve defective Check the CVTF strainer and the CVTF filter for debris.
CVT drive pulley pressure If the CVTF strainer or the CVTF filter is clogged, find
control solenoid valve defective the damaged components that caused debris, and
Manual valve lines worn or clean the CVTF cooler lines (see page 14-175) if
damaged necessary.
Solenoid valves defective Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Solenoid wire harness worn or Check the lower valve body assembly for scoring and
damaged damage.
CVT input shaft (drive pulley) Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
and CVT output shaft (driven damage. If the manual valve body assembly is worn or
pulley) speed sensors defective damaged/replace it as an assembly.
Vehicle speed sensor defective Check the intermediate housing assembly for wear and
PCM defective damage. If the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the
Engine output low pulley shafts, the steel belt, or related part are worn or
IMA motor defective damaged, replace the intermediate housing assembly.
Check for low fuel pressure (see page 11-290).
Check for a restricted exhaust system
Engine revs up Intermediate housing assembly Check the CVTF level (see page 14-153) and condition,
abnormally high worn or damaged and check the CVTF cooler lines for leakage and loose
while driving Pulley pressure feed pipe connections. If necessary, replace the CVTF (see page
damaged or out of round 14-154), use genuine Honda CVTF.
Forward clutch assembly Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
defective connectors.
Reverse brake defective Check the speed sensors installation, for wear and
Reverse brake piston stuck, damage, and measure their resistance, and also check
worn or damaged the O-rings for wear and damage.
Start clutch assembly defective Check the stall speed (see page 14-134).
Start clutch end-plate clearance Check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
incorrect Check the drive and driven pulley pressure, the
Start clutch feed pipe damaged lubrication pressure, the forward clutch pressure, and
or out of round the reverse brake pressure (see page 14-135). If the
CVTF pump worn, binding or pressure is low or there is no pressure, check the CVTF
foreign material in CVTF pump pump assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the CVTF
Low CVTF level pump drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
CVTF strainer or CVTF filter Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch
clogged end-plate and the top disc (see page 14-242). If the
CVTF deteriorated clearance is out of tolerance, replace the forward
Lower valve body assembly clutch assembly.
defective Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
CVT driven pulley pressure the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
CVT drive pulley pressure disc. If the clearance is o ut of to Iera nce, i n spect the
CVT clutch pressure control discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as
solenoid valve defective a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the brake
Manual valve body assembly end-plate.
defective Check the CVTF strainer and the CVTF filter for debris.
Manual valve lines worn or If the CVTF strainer or the CVTF filter is clogged, find
damaged the damaged components that caused debris, and
Solenoid valves defective clean the CVTF cooler lines (see page 14-175) if
Solenoid wire harness worn or necessary.
damaged Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
CVT input shaft (drive pulley) Check the lower valve body assembly for scoring and
and CVT output shaft (driven damage.
pulley) speed sensors defective Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
Vehicle speed sensor defective damage. If the manual valve body assembly is worn or
PCM defective damaged, replace it as an assembly.
(cont'd)
Symptom
No engine braking Intermediate housing assembly Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
Start clutch assembly defective the O-rings for wear and damage.
Start clutch feed pipe damaged Check the stall speed (see page 14-134).
or out of round Check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
Lower valve body assembly Check the drive and driven pulley pressure, and the
defective lubrication pressure (see page 14-135). If the pressure
CVT driven pulley pressure is low or there is no pressure, check the CVTF pump
control solenoid valve defective assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the CVTF pump
CVT drive pulley pressure drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
control solenoid valve defective Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
CVT clutch pressure control Check the lower valve body assembly for scoring and
solenoid valve defective damage.
Manual valve body assembly Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
defective damage. If the manual valve body assembly is worn or
Manual valve lines worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
damaged Check the intermediate housing assembly for wear and
Solenoid valves defective damage. If the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the
Solenoid wire harness worn or pulley shafts, the steel belt, or related part are worn or
damaged damaged, replace the intermediate housing assembly.
CVT input shaft (drive pulley)
and CVT output shaft (driven
pulley) speed sensors defective
Vehicle speed sensor defective
PCM defective
IMA motor defective
Vehicle does not a Intermediate housing assembly Check the CVTF level (see page 14-153) and condition,
creep on a flat road worn or damaged and check the CVTF cooler lines for leakage and loose
in D Pulley pressure feed pipe connections. If necessary, replace the CVTF (see page
Forward clutch assembly Checkfor a stored DTC, and checkfor loose
m Reverse brake piston stuck, damage, and measure their resistance, and also check
worn, or damaged the O-rings for wear and damage.
Start clutch end-plate clearance Calibrate the start clutch control system (see page
incorrect 14-150), and check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
Start clutch feed pipe damaged Check the drive and driven pulley pressure, the
or out o f round lubrication pressure, the forward clutch pressure, and
& Low CVTF level the reverse brake pressure (see page 14-135). If the
CVTF deteriorated pressure is low or there is no pressure, check the CVTF
Lower valve body assembly pump assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the CVTF
defective pump drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
9 CVT driven pulley pressure inspect the clearance between the forward clutch
control solenoid valve defective end-plate and the top disc (see page 14-242). If the
CVT drive pulley pressure clearance is out of tolerance, replace the forward
control solenoid valve defective clutch assembly.
CVT clutch pressure control Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
solenoid valve defective the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
Manual valve body assembly clearance between the brake end-plate and the top
defective disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
Manual valve lines worn or brake discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
damaged discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as
Solenoid valves defective a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the brake
Solenoid wire harness worn or end-plate.
damaged Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
CVT input shaft (drive pulley) Check the lower valve body assembly for scoring and
pulley) speed sensors defective Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
Vehicle speed sensor defective damage. If the manual valve body assembly is worn or
Start clutch control system not Cheek the intermediate housing assembly for wear and
calibrated in PCM damage. If the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the
Engine output low pulley shafts, the steel belt, or related part are worn or
Hydraulic/Mechanical System Symptom Troubleshooting cont'd)

Vehicle moves in N, Forward clutch assembly Check the forward clutch pressure and the reverse
shift cable is defective brake clutch pressure (see page 14-135). If the pressure
properly adjusted Reverse brake defective is low or there is no pressure, check the CVTF pump
Reverse brake piston stuck, assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the CVTF pump
worn or damaged drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
Input shaft worn or damaged Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch
Input shaft needle bearing end-plate and the top disc (see page 14-242). If the
seized, worn or damaged clearance is out of tolerance, replace the forward
Manual valve lever and pin clutch assembly.
worn or damaged Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Manual valve body assembly the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
defective clearance between the brake end-plate and the top
disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
brake discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as
a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the brake
end-plate.
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
If the input shaft or the input shaft needle bearings are
worn or damaged, replace them and also check the
related part of the input shaft assembly for wear and
damage.
Late shift after Pulley pressure feed pipe Check the CVTF level (see page 14-153) and condition,
shifting from N to D, damaged or out of round and check the CVTF cooler lines for leakage and loose
and return to N Forward clutch assembly connections. If necessary, replace the CVTF (see page
defective 14-154), use genuine Honda CVTF.
Start clutch assembly defective Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
Start clutch end-plate clearance connectors.
incorrect Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
Start clutch feed pipe damaged 14-199).
or out of round Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Shift cable broken or out of transmission control lever.
adjustment Check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
Manual valve lever and pin Check the drive and driven pulley pressure, the
worn or damaged lubrication pressure, and the forward clutch pressure
CVTF pump worn, binding or (see page 14-135). If the pressure is low or there is no
foreign material in CVTF pump pressure, check the CVTF pump assembly, the CVTF
Low CVTF level pump drive chain, the CVTF pump drive/driven
CVTF strainer or CVTF filter sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
clogged Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch
CVTF deteriorated end-plate and the top disc (see page 14-242). If the
Lower valve body assembly clearance is out of tolerance, replace the forward
defective clutch assembly.
CVT clutch pressure control Check the CVTF strainer and the CVTF filter for debris.
solenoid valve defective If the CVTF strainer or the CVTF filter is clogged, find
Manual valve body assembly the damaged components that caused debris, and
defective clean the CVTF cooler lines (see page 14-175) if
Manual valve lines worn or necessary.
damaged Check the lower valve body assembly for scoring and
Transmission range switch Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
defective damage. If the manual valve body assembly is worn or
Late shift after Pulley pressure feed pipe Check the CVTF level (see page 14-153) and condition,
shifting from N to R, damaged or out of round and check the CVTF cooler lines fo r leakage and loose
and return to N Reverse brake defective connections. If necessary, replace the CVTF (see page
Reverse brake piston stuck, 14-154), use genuine Honda CVTF.
worn or damaged Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
Reverse brake return connectors.
springs/retainer worn or Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
damaged 14-199).
Start clutch assembly defective Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Start clutch end-plate clearance transmission control lever.
incorrect Check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
o ro u t of round lubrication pressure, and the reverse brake pressure
Shift cable broken or out of (see page 14-135). If the pressure is low or there is no
adjustment pressure, check the CVTF pump assembly, the CVTF
Manual valve lever and pin pump drive chain, the CVTF pump drive/driven
worn or damaged sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
CVTF pump worn, binding or Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
foreign material in CVTF pump the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
Low CVTF level clearance between the brake end-plate and the top
CVTF strainer or CVTF filter disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
clogged brake discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
CVTF deteriorated discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as
Lower valve body assembly a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the brake
CVT clutch pressure control Check the CVTF strainer and the CVTF filter for debris.
solenoid valve defective If the CVTF strainer or the CVTF filter is clogged, find
Manual valve body assembly the damaged components that caused debris, and
defective clean the CVTF cooler lines (see page 14-175) if
Manual valve lines worn or necessary.
Solenoid valves defective damage.
PCM defective Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
Transmission range switch damage. If the manual valve body assembly is worn or
defective damaged, replace it as an assembly. _____________
(cont'd)
Unstable engine Intermediate housing assembly Check the CVTF level (see page 14-153) and condition,
speed worn or damaged and check the CVTF cooler lines for leakage and loose
Pulley pressure feed pipe connections. If necessary, replace the CVTF (see page
incorrect 14-150), and check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
or out of round lubrication pressure, the forward clutch pressure, and
CVTF pump worn, binding, or the reverse brake pressure (see page 14-135). If the
foreign material in CVTF pump pressure is low or there is no pressure, check the CVTF
Low CVTF level pump assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the CVTF
CVTF strainer or CVTF filter pump drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
clogged Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch
CVTF deteriorated end-plate and the top disc (see page 14-242). If the
Lower valve body assembly clearance is out of tolerance, replace the forward
defective clutch assembly.
CVT driven pulley pressure Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
control solenoid valve defective the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
CVT drive pulley pressure clearance between the brake end-plate and the top
control solenoid valve defective disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
CVT clutch pressure control brake discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
solenoid valve defective discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as
Manual valve body assembly a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the brake
Manual valve lines worn or Check the CVTF strainer and the CVTF filter for debris.
damaged If the CVTF strainer or the CVTF filter is clogged, find
Solenoid valves defective the damaged components that caused debris, and
Solenoid wire harness worn or clean the CVTF cooler lines (see page 14-175) if
damaged necessary.
CVT input shaft (drive pulley) Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
and CVT output shaft (driven Check the lower valve body assembly for scoring and
pulley) speed sensors defective damage.
Vehicle speed sensor defective Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
PCM defective damage. If the manual valve body assembly is worn or
Start clutch control system not damaged, replace it as an assembly.
calibrated in PCM Check the intermediate housing assembly for wear and
Engine output low damage. If the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the
IMA motor defective pulley shafts, the steel belt, or related part are worn or
<3
Symptom
Excessive shock Forward clutch assembly Check the CVTF level (see page 14-153) and condition,
when starting off defective and check the CVTF cooler lines for leakage and loose
Reverse brake defective connections. If necessary, replace the CVTF (see page
worn or damaged Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
Start clutch assembly defective connectors.
Start clutch end-plate clearance Check the stall speed (see page 14-134).
incorrect Calibrate the start clutch control system (see page
Start clutch feed pipe damaged 14-150), and check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
or out of round Check the lubrication pressure, the forward clutch
CVTF pump worn, binding or pressure, and the reverse brake pressure (see page
foreign material in CVTF pump 14-135). If the pressure is low or there is no pressure,
Low CVTF level check the CVTF pump assembly, the CVTF pump drive
CVTF deteriorated chain, the CVTF pump drive/driven sprocket, and the
Lower valve body assembly CVTF feed pipes.
defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch
CVT driven pulley pressure end-plate and the top disc (see page 14-242). If the
control solenoid valve defective clearance is out of tolerance/replace the forward
CVT drive pulley pressure clutch assembly.
control solenoid valve defective Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
CVT clutch pressure control the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
solenoid valve defective clearance between the brake end-plate and the top
Solenoid wire harness worn or disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
damaged brake discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
PCM defective - discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as
Start clutch control system not a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the brake
calibrated in PCM end-plate.
Engine output low Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
IMA motor defective Check the lower valve body assembly for scoring and
damage. ____________ _ _ ________
(cont'd)
Excessive shock Intermediate housing assembly Check the CVTF level (see page 14-153) and condition,
when accelerating worn or damaged and check the CVTF cooler lines for leakage and loose
and decelerating Pulley pressure feed pipe connections. If necessary, replace the CVTF (see page
Reverse brake defective Check the stall speed (see page 14-134)
Reverse brake piston stuck, Calibrate the start clutch control system (see page
worn or damaged 14-150), and check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
Start clutch assembly defective Check the drive and driven pulley pressure, the
Start clutch end-plate clearance lubrication pressure, the forward clutch pressure, and
incorrect the reverse brake pressure (see page 14-135). If the
Start clutch feed pipe damaged pressure is low or there is no pressure, check the CVTF
or out of round pump assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the CVTF
Low CVTF level pump drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
CVTF deteriorated Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch
Lower valve body assembly end-plate and the top disc (see page 14-242). If the
defective clearance is out of tolerance, replace the forward
CVT driven pulley pressure clutch assembly.
control solenoid valve defective Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
CVT drive pulley pressure the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
CVT clutch pressure control disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
solenoid valve defective brake discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
Manual valve body assembly discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as
defective a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the brake
Manual valve lines worn or end-plate.
Start clutch control system not Inspect the flywheel assembly for wear and damage. If
calibrated in PCM the flywheel assembly is worn or damaged, replace it
Flywheel assembly defective as an assembly.
IMA motor defective Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
e
Hydraulic/Mechanical S y s t e m S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g i'c o n t 'd )

Excessive idle Intermediate housing assembly Check the CVTF level (see page 14-153) and condition,
vibration in D and R worn or damaged and check the CVTF cooler lines for leakage and loose
Forward clutch assembly connections. If necessary, replace the CVTF (see page
defective 14-154), use genuine Honda CVTF.
Reverse brake defective Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
Reverse brake piston stuck, connectors.
worn or damaged Check the stall speed (see page 14-134).
Start clutch assembly defective Calibrate the start clutch control system (see page
Start clutch end-plate clearance 14-150), and check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
incorrect Check the lubrication pressure, the forward clutch
Start clutch feed pipe damaged pressure, and the reverse brake pressure (see page
or out of round 14-135). If the pressure is low or there is no pressure,
Input shaft worn or damaged check the CVTF pump assembly, the CVTF pump drive
Low CVTF level chain, the CVTF pump drive/driven sprocket, and the
CVTF deteriorated CVTF feed pipes.
Lower valve body assembly Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch
defective end-plate and the top disc (see page 14-242). If the
CVT driven pulley pressure clearance is out of tolerance, replace the forward
CVT drive pulley pressure Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
CVT clutch pressure control clearance between the brake end-plate and the top
solenoid valve defective disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
Solenoid valves defective brake discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
Solenoid wire harness worn or discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as
damaged a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the brake
PCM defective end-plate.
Start clutch control system not Check the flywheel drive plate for wear and damage.
calibrated in PCM Inspect the flywheel assembly for wear and damage. If
Flywheel drive plate worn or the flywheel assembly is worn or damaged, replace it
damaged as an assembly.
Flywheel assembly defective Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Engine output low If the input shaft is worn or damaged, replace it and
IMA motor defective also check the related part of the input shaft assembly
for wear and damage.
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Check the lower valve body assembly for scoring and
damage.
Excessive idle Intermediate housing assembly Check the stall speed (see page 14-134).
vibration in N and P worn or damaged Check the flywheel drive plate for wear and damage.
Input shaft worn or damaged Inspect the flywheel assembly for wear and damage. If
Flywheel drive plate worn or the flywheel assembly is worn or damaged, replace it
damaged as an assembly.
Flywheel assembly defective Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Engine output low If the input shaft is worn or damaged, replace it and
IMA motor defective also check the related part of the input shaft assembly
for wear and damage.
(cont'd)
Hydraulic/Mechanical System S y m p t o m Troubleshooting i cont'd)

Vibration in all Flywheel drive plate worn or Check the stall speed (see page 14-134).
positions damaged Check the flywheel drive plate for wear and damage.
Flywheel assembly defective Inspect the flywheel assembly for wear and damage. If
IMA motor defective the flywheel assembly is worn or damaged, replace it
Engine or transmission mount as an assembly.
defective
Engine output low
Noise from Input shaft worn or damaged Check the CVTF level (see page 14-153), and check the
transmission in N Planetary carrier worn or CVTF cooler lines for leakage and loose connections.
and P damaged Check the stall speed (see page 14-134).
Input shaft needle bearing Inspect the flywheel assembly for wear and damage. If
seized, worn or damaged the flywheel assembly is worn or damaged, replace it
Thrust needle bearing on as an assembly.
planetary carrier seized, worn Check the CVTF pump assembly, the CVTF pump drive
or damaged chain, the CVTF pump drive/driven sprocket for wear
Thrust washer on planetary and damage. If the CVTF pump assembly is worn or
carrier seized, worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly, if the CVTF pump
damaged drive chain or the CVTF pump drive/driven sprocket are
CVTF pump worn, binding, or worn or damaged, replace them.
foreign material in CVTF pump Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
CVTF pump drive chain or CVTF If the input shaft, the planetary carrier assembly, or the
pump drive/driven sprocket input needle bearing are worn or damaged, replace
worn or damaged them and also check the related part of the input shaft
Low CVTF level assembly for wear and damage.
Flywheel assembly defective Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washers
the thrust shim.
Hydraulic/Mechanical System Symptom Troubleshooting Icont'd)
Noise from Intermediate housing assembly Check the CVTF level (see page 14-153) and condition,
transmission in D worn or damaged and check the CVTF cooler lines for leakage and loose
Start clutch assembly defective connections. If necessary, replace the CVTF (see page
Input shaft worn or damaged 14-154), use genuine Honda CVTF.
Secondary drive gear or Check the stall speed (see page 14-134).
secondary driver gear worn or Check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
damaged Check the lubrication pressure (see page 14-135). If the
Final driven gear worn or pressure is low or there is no pressure, check the CVTF
damaged pump assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the CVTF
Planetary carrier assembly pump drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
worn or damaged inspect the flywheel assembly for wear and damage. If
Input shaft needle bearing the flywheel assembly is worn or damaged, replace it
seized, worn or damaged as an assembly.
Thrust needle bearing on Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
planetary carrier seized, worn If the input shaft, the planetary carrier assembly, or the
or damaged input shaft needle bearing are worn or damaged,
Thrust washer on planetary replace them and also check the related part of the
carrier seized, worn or input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
damaged Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washers
Selector control shaft assembly on the planetary carrier for wear and damage. If the
worn or damaged thrust needle bearing or the thrust washer are worn or
m Park pawl and pawl shaft worn damaged, replace them and adjust the clearance with
or damaged the thrust shim.
Park pawl spring worn or Check the selector control shaft assembly for wear and
damaged damage. If the selector control shaft assembly is worn
CVTF pump worn, binding, or or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
foreign material in CVTF pump Check the park pawl, the pawl shaft, and the park pawl
CVTF pump drive chain or CVTF spring for wear and damage. If the park pawl, the pawl
pump drive/driven sprocket shaft, or the park pawl spring are worn or damaged,
worn or damaged replace them and also check the park gear for wear and
Low CVTF level damage.
CVTF deteriorated Check the secondary drive gear, the secondary driven
Flywheel assembly defective gear, and the final driven gear for wear and damage.
(cont'd)
Symptom
Noise from Intermediate housing assembly Check the CVTF level (see page 14-153) and condition,
transmission in R worn or damaged and check the CVTF cooler lines for leakage and loose
Reverse brake defective connections. If necessary, replace the CVTF (see page
worn or damaged . Check the stall speed (see page 14-134).
Reverse brake return Check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
springs/retainer worn or Check the lubrication pressure, the forward clutch
damaged pressure, and the reverse brake pressure (see page
Start clutch assembly defective 14-135). If the pressure is low or there is no pressure,
Input shaft worn or damaged check the CVTF pump assembly, the CVTF pump drive
Secondary drive gear or chain, the CVTF pump drive/driven sprocket, and the
secondary driven gear worn or CVTF feed pipes.
damaged Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Final driver gear worn or the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
damaged clearance between the brake end-plate and the top
Planetary carrier assembly disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
worn or damaged brake discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
Sun gear worn or damaged discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as
Ring gear worn or damaged a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the brake
Input shaft needle bearing end-plate.
seized, worn or damaged Inspect the flywheel assembly for wear and damage. If
Thrust needle bearing on the flywheel assembly is worn or damaged, replace it
planetary carrier seized, worn as an assembly.
or damaged Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Thrust washer on planetary If the input shaft, the planetary carrier assembly, the
carrier seized, worn or sun gear, the ring geao or the input shaft needle
damaged bearing are worn or damaged, replace them and also
Selector control shaft assembly check the related part of the input shaft assembly for
worn or damaged wear and damage.
Park pawl and pawl shaft worn Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washers
or damaged on the planetary carrier for wear and damage. If the
Park pawl spring worn or thrust needle bearing or the thrust washer are worn or
damaged damaged, replace them and adjust the clearance with
CVTF pump worn, binding, or the thrust shim.
foreign material in CVTF pump Check the selector control shaft assembly for wear and
CVTF pump drive chain or CVTF damage. If the selector control shaft assembly is worn
pump drive/driven sprocket or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
worn or damaged Check the park pawl, the pawl shaft, and the park pawl
Low CVTF level spring for wear and damage. If the park pawl, the pawl
CVTF deteriorated shaft, or the park pawl spring are worn or damaged,
Flywheel assembly defective replace them and also check the park gear for wear and
damage.
Check the secondary drive gear, the secondary driven
gear, and the final driven gear for wear and damage.
Si
Stall speed high Intermediate housing assembly Check the CVTF level (see page 14-153) and condition,
worn or damaged and check the CVTF cooler lines for leakage and loose
Pulley pressure feed pipe connections. If necessary, replace the CVTF (see page
Start clutch assembly defective Check the stall speed (see page 14-134),
incorrect 14-150), and check the start clutch.
or out of round lubrication pressure, the forward clutch pressure, and
CVTF pump worn, binding, or the reverse brake pressure (see page 14-135). If the
foreign material in CVTF pump pressure is low or there is no pressure, check the CVTF
Low CVTF level pump assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the CVTF
CVTF deteriorated pump drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
Lower valve body assembly Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch
defective end-plate and the top disc (see page 14-242). If the
CVT driven pulley pressure clearance is out of tolerance, replace the forward
CVT drive pulley pressure Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
CVT clutch pressure control clearance between the brake end-plate and the top
solenoid valve defective disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
Manual valve body assembly brake discs and plates for wear and damage. If the
defective discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as
Manual valve lines worn or a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the brake
damaged end-plate.
Solenoid wire harness worn or Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
CVT input shaft (drive pulley) damage.
and CVT output shaft (driven Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
pulley) speed sensors defective damage. If the manual valve body assembly is worn or
Start clutch control system not Check the intermediate housing assembly for wear and
calibrated in PCM damage. If the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the
(cont'd)
H y d r a u l i c / M e c h a n i c a l S y s t e m S y m p t o m Troubleshooting cont'd)
S y m p to m Probable cause(s) N o te s
Stall speed low Intermediate housing assembly Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
Start clutch assembly defective the O-rings for wear and damage.
Lower valve body assembly Check the stall speed (see page 14-134).
defective Calibrate the start clutch control system (see page
CVT driven pulley pressure 14-150), and check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
control solenoid valve defective Check the drive and driven pulley pressure, and the
CVT drive pulley pressure lubrication pressure (see page 14-135). If the pressure
control solenoid valve defective is low or there is no pressure, check the CVTF pump
CVT clutch pressure control assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the CVTF pump
solenoid valve defective drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
CVT input shaft (drive pulley) Check t h e lower valve body assembly for scoring and
pulley) speed sensors defective Check the intermediate housing assembly for wear and
PCM defective damage. If the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the
Start clutch control system not pulley shafts, the steel belt, or related part are worn or
calibrated in PCM damaged, replace the intermediate housing assembly.
Engine output low
IMA motor defective
Judder when Start clutch assembly defective Check the CVTF condition. If necessary, replace the
starting off CVTF deteriorated CVTF (see page 14-154), use genuine Honda CVTF.
Lower valve body assembly Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
CVT clutch pressure control Check the speed sensors installation, for wear and
solenoid valve defective damage, and measure their resistance, and also check
CVT input shaft (drive pulley) the O-rings for wear and damage.
and CVT output shaft (driven Check the stall speed (see page 14-134).
pulley) speed sensors defective Check the start clutch (see page 14-152).
Vehicle speed sensor defective Check the lubrication pressure (see page 14-135). If the
PCM defective pressure is low or there is no pressure, check the CVTF
pump assembly, the CVTF pump drive chain, the CVTF
pump drive/driven sprocket, and the CVTF feed pipes.
Check the lower valve body assembly for scoring and
damage.
Shift lever does not Selector control shaft assembly Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
operate smoothly worn or damaged connectors.
Control lever worn or damaged Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
Park pawl and pawl shaft worn 14-1 9 9 ).
or damaged Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Park gear worn or damaged transmission control lever.
Park pawl spring worn or Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
damaged damage. If the manual valve body assembly is worn or
Shift cable broken or out of damaged, replace it as an assembly.
adjustment Check the selector control shaft assembly for wear and
Manual valve lever and pin damage. If the selector control shaft assembly is worn
worn or damaged or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Manual valve body assembly Check the control lever for wear and damage.
defective Check the park pawl, the pawl shaft, the park pawl
Transmission range switch spring, and the park gear for wear and damage.
defective
Hydraulic/Mechanical System Symptom Troubleshooting icont'd}
Transmission w ill Selector control shaft assembly Checkfor a stored DTC, and checkfor loose
not shift into P, or worn or damaged connectors.
transmission cannot Control lever worn or damaged Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
shift out of P Park pawl and pawl shaft worn 14-199).
or damaged Checkfor a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Park gear worn or damaged transmission control lever.
Park pawl spring worn or Check the manual valve body assembly for scoring and
damaged damage. If the manual valve body assembly is worn or
Shift cable broken or out of damaged, replace it as an assembly.
adjustment Check the selector control shaft assembly for wear and
Manual valve lever and pin damage. If the selector control shaft assembly is worn
worn or damaged or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Manual valve body assembly Check the control lever fo r wear and damage.
defective Check the park pawl, the pawl shaft, the park pawl
PCM defective spring, and the park gear for wear and damage.
defective
A/T gear position Selector control shaft assembly @Checkfor a stored DTC, and checkfor loose
indicator does not worn or damaged connectors.
indicate shift lever Shift cable broken or out of Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
positions adjustment 14-199).
PCM defective Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Transmission range switch transmission control lever.
defective
//
PARK PIN SWITCH
S H IF T L O C K SOLENOID
<3

Component Location index (cont'd)
SHIFT LEVER KNOB

SHIFT LEVER
Removal, page 14-180
Insta l la t i on, page 14-181
Disassembl y/Reassembly, page 14-184
SHIFT LEVER BRACKET BASE
SHIFT CABLE
System Description
General Operation
The continuously variable transmission (CVT) is an electronically controlled automatic transmission with drive and
driven pulleys, and a steel belt. The CVT provides stepless forward speeds and one in reverse.
T ra n s m is s io n
Around the outside of the flywheel is a ring gear which meshes with the starter drive gear when the engine is being
started with the starter motor. The transmission has four parallel shafts: the input shaft, the drive pulley shaft, the driven
pulley shaft, and the final drive shaft. The input shaft is connected to the flywheel, which is connected to the IMA m otor
rotor through the drive plate. This is connected to the end of the engine crankshaft. The drive pulley shaft and the driven
pulley shaft consists of movable and fixed face pulleys. Both pulleys are linked by the steel belt. The input shaft includes
the sun gear and the planetary gears w ith the carrier. The drive pulley shaft includes the drive pulley and the forward
clutch. The driven pulley shaft includes the driven pulley, the start clutch, and the secondary drive gear which is integral
with the park gear. The final drive shaft is positioned between the secondary drive gear and the final driven gear. The
final drive shaft includes the secondary driven gear and the final drive gear which serves to change the rotation
direction, because the drive pulley shaft and the driven pulley shaft rotate the same direction. Under certain conditions
the planetary gears in the transmission are engaged by the forward clutch and the reverse brake, and power is
transmitted from the drive pulley shaft to the driven pulley shaft to provide movement in D and R.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the PCM, sensors, and solenoid valves. Shifting is electronically controlled for
comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located in the engine compartment.
Hydraulic Control
The lower valve body assembly includes the main valve body, the secondary valve body, the CVT driven pulley pressure
control solenoid valve, the CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid valve, the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve, and the inhibitor solenoid. These valve bodies are positioned on the lower portion of the transmission housing.
The manual valve body is bolted on the intermediate housing. The main valve body contains the start clutch shift valve,
the shift inhibitor valve, the lubrication regulator valve, and cooler relief valve. The secondary valve body contains the
pressure high (PH) regulator valve, the pressure high control (PHC) shift valve, the start clutch back-up valve, the clutch
reducing valve, and the start clutch accumulator valve. The CVT driven pulley pressure control valve contains pulley
control valve A and the driven pulley control valve with the solenoid. The CVT drive pulley pressure control valve
contains pulley control valve B and the drive pulley control valve with the solenoid. The CVT start clutch pressure
control valve consists ofthe start clutch pressure control valve and the solenoid. These solenoid valves are controlled by
the PCM. The manual valve body contains the manual valve and the reverse inhibitor valve. The CVTF pump is located
on the transmission housing, and it is linked w ith the input shaft by the drive/driven sprockets and the drive chain. The
drive/driven pulleys, the forward clutch, and the start clutch receive fluid from their respective feed pipes, and the
reverse brake receives fluid from an internal hydraulic circuit.
S h i f t Control
The PCM controls the shift pulley ratio through the solenoid valves, while receiving input signals from the various
sensors and switches located throughout the vehicle. The PCM actuates the CVT driven and drive pulley pressure
control solenoid valves to control pulley control valves A and B. Drive pulley pressure is regulated at pulley control valve
B and applied to the drive pulley, driven pulley pressure is regulated at pulley control valve A and applied to the driven
pulley, and the pulley ratio is changed to their directed ratio.
(contd)
G e a r S e le c tio n
The shift lever has four positions, P: PARK, R; R E V E R S E , N: N E U T R A L , and D: D R IV E .
In D, the driver can select the Normal Mode, the ECON Mode, the Sport Mode with either non-stage speeds or 1st
through 7th speed stage ranges with the manual-paddle shift mode, and the L mode.________________________
Position Description
P: PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engages with the park gear on the driven
pulley shaft. The start clutch and the forward clutch disengage.
R; REVERSE Reverse; reverse brake engages, and it locks with the planetary carrier to
the intermediate housing.
N: NEUTRAL Neutral; the start clutch and forward clutch disengage.
D: DRIVE Normal Mode/ Transmission automatically adjusts to keep the engine at the best rpm for
ECON Mode driving under all conditions. It is also equipped with the smart-paddle shift
mode that allows the transmission to be shifted manually to lower or
higher ratios with the steering wheel-mounted paddles under certain
conditions. To activate, press the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) or the
paddle shifter (downshift switch). The number of the selected ratio is
displayed in the shift indicator. The system returns to the automatic shift
mode and the shift indicator display turns off when the paddle shifter +
(upshift switch) is held for about 2 seconds, when the optional Mode switch
is pressed, or when the PCM detects a steady cruise.
Sport Sport driving Transmission automatically adjusts to keep the engine at a higher rpm than
Mode mode the Normal Mode or the ECON Mode driving conditions.
(non-stage
speeds)
Manual-paddle The transmission can be manually shifted from 1st through 7th using the
shift mode (1st steering wheel-mounted paddle shifters. The selected ratio position is
through 7th) displayed in the shift indicator. To activate, press the paddle shifter +
(upshift switch) or the paddle shifter (downshift switch). In this mode,
the vehicle can also start o ff in 1st gear, upshift automatically through the
ratios during acceleration, and then downshift automatically when
decelerating to a stop. The system returns to the automatic shift mode and
the shift indicator display turns off when the paddle shifter + (upshift
switch) is held for about 2 seconds or when the optional Mode switch is
pressed.
Normal L mode For engine braking and power for climbing; the transmission shifts into the
Mode/ lowest pulley ratio. To activate the L mode, press the paddle shifter +
ECON (upshift switch) and the paddle shifter (downshift switch) at the same
Mode/ time and hold them for about 5 seconds. The shift indicator displays an L
Sport while the system is in L mode. The system returns to the automatic shift
Mode mode and the shift indicator display turns off when the paddle shifter +
(upshift switch) and the paddle shifter (downshift switch) are held at the
same time for about 2 seconds or when the optional Mode switch is
pressed.
Starting the engine is possible only in P and N through the use of a neutral-safety switch.
Autom atic Transmission (A/T) Gear P o s i t i o n Indicator
The A/T gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows which shift lever position has been selected.
Clutches/Reverse Brake/Planetary Gear/Pulleys
The CVT uses the hydraulic-aetuated clutches and reverse brake to engage and disengage the transmission pulleys. When
hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum and the reverse brake piston cavity, the clutch piston and the reverse brake
piston are moved. This presses the friction discs and the steel plates together, locking them so they do not slip. Power is then
transmitted through the engaged clutch pack to its hub-mounted gear, and through the engaged ring gear to the planetary pinion
gears. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack and reverse brake piston cavity, the piston releases the
friction discs and the stee l plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gearto spin independently on its shaft,
transmitting no power.
(cont'd)
Start Clutch
The start clutch engages/disengages the secondary drive gear, and is located at the end of the driven pulley shaft. The
start clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its CVTF feed pipe w ithin the driven pulley shaft.
Forward Clutch
The forward clutch engages/disengages the sun gear, and is located at the end of the drive pulley shaft. The forward
clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its CVTF feed pipe w ithin the drive pulley shaft.
Reverse Brake
The reverse brake locks the planetary carrier in R, and is located inside the intermediate housing around the planetary
carrier. The reverse brake discs engage/disengage the planetary carrier, and the reverse brake plates are fixed to the
intermediate housing. The reverse brake is supplied hydraulic pressure by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic
circuit.
Planetary Gear Train
The planetary gear train is only used to switch the rotational direction of the drive pulley shafts in R. The planetary gear
train consists of the sun gear, the planetary pinion gears, the planetary carrier, and the ring gear. The sun gear is
connected to the input shaft with splines. The planetary pinion gears are mounted on the planetary carrier. The
planetary carrier is located on the end of the input shaft, over the sun gear. The ring gear is located in the planetary
carrier, and connected to the forward clutch drum. The sun gear inputs the engine power via the input shaft to the
planetary pinion gears, and the ring gear outputs the engine power. In D (forward range), the planetary pinion gears do
not rotate and revolve around the sun gear, so the planetary carrier rotates. In R (reverse range), the reverse brake locks
the planetary carrier, and the sun gear drives the planetary pinion gears to rotate. The planetary pinion gears rotate, but
do not revolve around the sun gear. The planetary pinion gears drive the ring gear in the opposite direction from the
rotational direction of the sun gear.
Pulleys
Both pulleys consist o f a movable face and a fixed face, and the effective pulley ratio changes with engine speed. The
drive pulley and the driven pulley are linked by the steel belt. To achieve a low pulley ratio, high hydraulic pressure
works on the movable face of the driven pulley and reduces the effective diameter of the drive pulley, and a lower
hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the driven pulley to eliminate the steel belt slippage. To achieve a high
pulley ratio, high hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the drive pulley and reduces the effective diameter of
the drive pulley, and low hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the driven pulley to eliminate the steel belt
slippage.
P o w e r F lo w
P Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the start clutch, the forward clutch, and the reverse brake. Power is not transmitted
to the secondary drive gear. The secondary drive gear is locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear.
N Position
Engine power transmitted from the flywheel drives the input shaft, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the forward
clutch and the reverse brake. Power is not transmitted to the drive pulley shaft. Also hydraulic pressure is not applied to
the start clutch.
STEEL BELT DRIVE PULLEY SHAFT
(cont'd)
Forward Range; D Position

Forward clutch: engage
Reverse brake: disengage
Start clutch: engage
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the forward clutch and the start clutch, and the sun gear drives the forward clutch.
The forward clutch drives the drive pulley shaft, which drives the driven pulley shaft linked by the steel belt.
The driven pulley shaft drives the secondary drive gear via the start clutch.
Power is transmitted to the secondary driven gear and the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
Reverse Range; R Position
Forward clutch: disengage
Reverse brake: engage
Start clutch: engage
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the reverse brake and the start clutch, and the planetary carrier locks with the reverse
brake.
The sun gear drives the planetary pinion gears to rotate, and the planetary pinion gears drive the ring gear in the
opposite direction from the rotational direction of the sun gear.
The ring gear drives the drive pulley shaft via the forward clutch drum, and the drive pulley shaft drives the driven
pulley shaft linked by the steel belt.
The driven pulley shaft drives the secondary drive gear via the start clutch.
Power is transmitted to the secondary driven gear and the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
REVERSE BRAKE FLYWHEEL
INPUT SHAFT
DRIVE PULLEY SHAFT
DRIVEN PULLEY SHAFT
START CLUTCH
FINAL DRIVE SHAFT

DRIVEN PULLEY
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
ScU U IM U M n T U n iV U M ULHn FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

Electronic Control System

Elect ronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the PCM, sensors, switches, and solenoid valves.
The PCM receives input signals from sensors, switches, other control units, processes data, and outputs signals for the
engine control system and the CVT control system. The CVT control system includes shift control, pulley pressure
control, start clutch pressure control, and reverse inhibitor control. The PCM actuates the pulley control solenoid valves
to control pulley control valves A and B shifting transmission pulley ratios.
P u lle y P r e s s u r e C o n tro l/S h ift C o n tro l
To reduce steel belt slippage and increase steel belt life, the PCM calculates signals from sensors and switches, and
actuates the pulley pressure control solenoid valves to maintain optimum pulley pressure. When the pulley ratio is low
(low vehicle speed), high hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the driven pulley and reduces the effective
diameter of the drive pulley, and a lower hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the drive pulley to eliminate
the steel belt slippage. When the pulley ratio is high (high vehicle speed), high hydraulic pressure works on the movable
face of the drive pulley and reduces the effective diameter of the drive pulley, and a lower hydraulic pressure works on
the movable face of the driven pulley to eliminate the steel belt slippage.
The PCM compares actual driving conditions with programmed driving conditions to control shifting, and it instantly
determines a drive pulley ratio from various signals sent from sensors and switches. The PCM activates the CVT drive
pulley pressure control solenoid valve to control pulley pressure to the pulleys. The drive pulley drives the driven pulley
via a steel belt at varying ratios ranging from 2.526 to 0.421 in D and 4.510 to 1.725 in R.
Grade Logie Control: Ascending Control

When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in D, the system selects the most suitable shift schedule
based on the steepness of the grade so the vehicle can run smoothly and have more power when needed.
Engine speed
Grade Logic Control: Descending Control

When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in D, the system selects the most suitable shift schedule
based on the steepness of the grade so the vehicle can run smoothly in combination w ith engine braking.
Engine speed
Shift-Hold Control
When driving on winding roads, and the throttle is suddenly released and the brakes are applied, as is the case when
decelerating at the entrance of a curve, the Shift-Hold Control keeps the transmission in its current (lower) ratio as it
negotiates the corner and accelerates out. When the vehicle is driven aggressively on a winding road, the PCM w ill keep
the engine speed on a higher-than-normal setting, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more power. The
transmission w ill resume the normal setting after the PCM determines that normal driving has resumed.
3-Mode Drive System
This vehicle is equipped with the 3-Mode Drive System. The transmission control system controls the drive system by
switching between the Normal Mode (standard drive mode), the ECON Mode, and the Sport Mode using a gear map,
imparting the characteristics of each mode to the running of the vehicle.
Normal Mode
This mode controls the drive system so that, when the accelerator pedal is depressed only slightly during acceleration,
the engine revolutions are kept mainly constant with respect to the speed of the vehicle, and when the accelerator pedal
is depressed by a large amount, acceleration is maintained within a practical running lim it w ithout imparting stress on
the vehicle and passengers.
ECON Mode
the engine revolutions are kept lower than the Normal Mode with respect to the speed of the vehicle, improving fuel
economy. By lowering the response in engine revolutions with respect to the amount by which the accelerator pedal is
depressed during acceleration, gear change responsiveness is softened and economy improved. However, when the
accelerator pedal is depressed by a large amount, the same control is used as in the Normal Mode to maintain
acceleration performance.
Sport Mode
torque is improved over the Normal Mode w ith assistance from the IMA motor, maintaining powerful running of the
engine. By increasing the response in engine revolutions with respect to the amount by which the accelerator pedal is
depressed during acceleration, gear change responsiveness and torque during acceleration are improved.
Change the shift map
Reduce or increase the engine speed increasing ratio
(cont'd)
Change the driving characteristic

Each driving mode has a specialized shift map. Using information collected from the sensors, each shift map has
specific shift points designed to keep the engine in its optimum rpm range fo r power and economy. The target engine
rpm and the vehicle speed in each mode on a smooth, level road at light, normal, and wide open throttle position is
shown in the graphs below.
Normal Mode
ECON Mode
Sport Mode
Smart-Paddle Shift Mode
When in the Normal Mode or the ECON Mode, engage the smart-paddle shift mode by pressing either of the steering
wheel mounted paddle shifters while driving in D. In this mode, the transmission can downshift by pressing the paddle
shifter (downshift switch), or upshift by pressing the paddle shifter + (upshift switch). Each tim e the transmission is
shifted to any of the seven speeds using the paddles, the shift indicator in the gauge control module displays the current
position. The system returns to the automatic shift mode and the shift indicator display turns off when the paddle shifter
+ (upshift switch) is held for about 2 seconds, when the optional Mode switch is pressed, or when the PCM detects a
steady cruise.
System Description fcont'd)
Manual-Paddle Shift Mode .

In D, the Sport Mode has two m od es; th e a u to m a tic s h i f t m o d e and th e manual-paddle shift mode. In the sport driving
mode, the transmission keeps th e e n gine at a h ig h e r rp m th a n th e N o rm a l Mode or the ECON Mode setting, and the
steering wheel-mounted p a dd le sh ifte rs are rea dy to be a ctiva te d to switch to the manual-paddle shift mode. In the sport
driving mode, the shift in d ic a to r and the M in d ic a to r in th e ga ug e c o n tro l module do not come on.
When th e paddle shifter + (u p sh ift switch) or paddle s h ifte r (d o w n s h ift s w itch ) is pressed, th e sport driving mode is
canceled and the manual-paddle s h ift m o d e com e s in to o p e ra tio n . The s h ift indicator displays the number of the
selected position, and the M in d ic a to r com e s on. I n the m a n u a l-p a d d le s h ift mode, the driver can shift up and down
manually from 1st through 7th p o s itio n s by using the p a d d l e shifters, much like a manual transmission. The paddle
shifters are installed on the back of the s te e rin g w h e e l, and the driver can shift positions by pressing the paddle shifters
w ithout taking either hand off the steering wheel.
In the manual-paddle shift mode, the transmission must be shifted up and down by pressing the paddle shifters.
However, if the vehicle is coasting at a speed that would cause the engine to over-rev by downshifting, the transmission
w ill not downshift when the paddle shifter (downshift switch) is pressed. The shift indicator blinks the number of the
selected position several times, then returns to the current position. If the vehicle speed reaches an appropriate speed
while the shift indicator is blinking, the transmission downshifts and the shift indicator displays the selected position.
Likewise, if the vehicle speed is below an appropriate speed to upshift when the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) is
pressed, the transmission w ill not upshift. The shift indicator blinks the number of the selected position several times,
and then returns to the number of the current position. If the vehicle speed reaches an appropriate upshift speed while
the shift indicator is blinking, the transmission upshifts and the shift indicator displays the selected position.
This mode has automatic upshifting areas to prevent engine over-revving, and downshifting areas so the vehicle can
run smoothly with more power to cope with upcoming acceleration. When coasting, the transmission downshifts to the
next lower position if the vehicle slows down to the programmed speed, or by pressing the brake pedal.
When the transmission decelerates to a stop, the transmission shifts to 1st position automatically. The transmission can
be shifted to 2nd position by pressing the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) while the vehicle is stopped, and the vehicle
can start off in 2nd position.
The number of the selected position goes off from the shift indicator, the M indicator goes off, and the system changes
from the manual-paddle shift mode when the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) is held for about 2 seconds or when the
optional Mode switch is pressed.
@ 0
L mode
For maximum engine braking and power for climbing, activate the L mode by pressing the paddle shifter + (upshift
switch) and the paddle shifter (downshift switch) at the same time and hold them for about 5 seconds. The shift
indicator displays an L while in this mode. The system w ill return to the automatic shift mode and the shift indicator
display turns off when the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) and the paddle shifter (downshift switch) are held at the
same tim e for about 2 seconds or when the optional Mode switch is pressed.
(cont'd)
S ta r t C lu tc h P r e s s u r e C o n tro l
The hydraulic-controlled start clutch, like a torque converter, controls smooth starting-off and creeping in D and R. The
PCM inputs signals from the sensors and the switches, and actuates the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve to
regulate the clutch reducing pressure, and the clutch reducing pressure controls the start clutch.
<0
PCM CVT Control System Electrical Connections
PCM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
P H 2 3I 4| 5| 6| 7 8I 9IJ h |2 3I 4| 5| 6| 7 8
1 10 11 12 13|l4|l5|l6 17 18 19 I
I T 12 3 14 1 5 | 6 I 1 8 f~9
10 11 12 13|l 4|l 5 |l 6 17 18 19 3M 15I16
20 21 22 * 9 > - < c r 23 24 25 1 1 20 21 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 29|30 |31132 33 34 35 26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
I36137 38 139 140 141 142 43 l |
l l-
37 38 139 140141 |42 43 |44 36|37 38|39|40141|42 43| 44 |
3 A (44P)
(cont'd)
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (44P)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 L
B 1 0 11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9
I
2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25
i i
2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 3 0 31 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
I36 441
Terminal si de of female terminals
Terminal Wire Color Terminal Name Description Signal

Number
A1 LT GRN VBSOL (POWER Power source for With ignition switch ON (II):
SOURCE FOR solenoid valves battery voltage
SOLENOID VALVES)
A6 PUR MRLY (PGM-FI MAIN Drives PGM-FI main With ignition switch ON (II):
RELAY 1) relay 1 about 0 V
With ignition switch OFF:
battery voltage
A8 YEL IGP1 (POWER SOURCE Power source for PCM With ignition switch ON (II):
1) circuit battery voltage
A27 GRY SLS (SHIFT LOCK Drives shift lock With ignition switch ON (II), in
SOLENOID) solenoid the P, brake pedal pressed, and
accelerator released: about 0 V
A30 YEL SUPP (PADDLE Detects paddle shifter 4- With ignition switch ON (II) and
SHIFTER + UPSHIFT (upshift switch) signal paddle shifter + (upshift switch)
SWITCH) pressed: about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and
paddle shifter + (upshift switch)
released: battery voltage
A31 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check With service check signal
SIGNAL) signal shorted using the HDS: about
OV
With service check signal
opened: about 5.0 V
A32 LT GRN SDNP (PADDLE Detects paddle shifter With ignition switch ON (II) and
SHIFTER_ (downshift switch) paddle shifter (downshift
DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) signal switch) pressed: about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and
paddle shifter (downshift
switch) released: battery voltage
A36 GRN F-CAN H (CAN Sends and receives With ignition switch ON (II):
COMMUNICATION communication signal pulses
SIGNAL HIGH)
A37 PNK F-CAN L (CAN Sends and receives With ignition switch ON (II):
SIGNAL LOW)
A38 WHT IMA-CAN H (CAN Detects and receives With ignition switch ON (II):
SIGNAL HIGH) to motor control module
(MCM)
a>

Number
A39 RED IMA-CAN L (CAN Detects and receives With ignition switch ON (II):
SIGNAL LOW) to motor control module
(MCM)
A40 WHT BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal Brake pedal released: about 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal Brake pedal pressed: battery
voltage
A43 YEL IGP2 (POWER SOURCE Power source for PCM With ignition switch ON (II):
2) circuit battery voltage
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B A (44P)
Terminal side of femal e terminals

Number
B1 BRN PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 0.2 V at all times
circuit
B6 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR Provides sensor With ignition switch ON (II):
VOLTAGE) reference voltage about 5.0 V
B10 GRN/BLK INHSOL (INHIBITOR Drives inhibitor Until radiator fan comes on
SOLENOID CONTROL) solenoid twice during idling in all
positions: about 0 V
With reverse inhibitor control in
R: battery voltage
B12 RED/BLK ATPN (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission With ignition switch ON (II) in N:
RANGE SWITCH IN N) range switch N position about 0 V
signal input With ignition switch ON (II) in
any position other than N: about
5.0 V
B13 BLU/BLK ATPP (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission With ignition switch ON (II) in P:
RANGE SWITCH IN P) range switch P position about 0 V
any position other than P:
battery voltage
B14 WHT ATPR (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission With ignition switch ON (II) in R:
RANGE SWITCH IN R) range switch R position about 0 V
any position other than R:
battery voltage
B17 WHT/RED NDR (CVT INPUT Detects CVT input shaft With ignition switch ON (II):
SHAFT (DRIVE PULLEY) (drive pulley) speed about 0 V, or about 5.0 V
SPEED SENSOR) sensor signal With engine idling in N: pulses
B19 WHT/GRN NDN (CVT OUTPUT Detects CVT output With ignition switch ON (II):
SHAFT (DRIVEN shaft (driven pulley) about 0 V, or about 5.0 V
PULLEY) SPEED speed sensor signal With engine idling in N: pulses
SENSOR)
B21 PNK ATPD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission With ignition switch ON (II) in D:
RANGE SWITCH IN D) range switch D position about 0 V
any position other than D:
battery voltage
Number
B28 BLU/YEL ATPFWD Detects transmission With ignition switch ON (II) in D:
(TRANSMISSION range switch FWD about OV
RANGE SWITCH IN position signal With ignition switch ON (II) in
FWD) any position other than D:
battery voltage
B34 BLK/WHT VEL (VEHICLE SPEED Detects vehicle speed With ignition switch ON (II) and
SENSOR) sensor when vehicle is stopped: about
0 V, or about 5.0 V
Depending on vehicle speed:
pulses
B36 BLK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 0.2 V at all times
circuit
B41 GRN/YEL SG2 (SENSOR Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
GROUND)
B42 YEL SCLS (CVT CLUTCH Drives CVT clutch With ignition switch ON (II): duty
PRESSURE CONTROL pressure control controlled
SOLENOID VALVE) solenoid valve
B43 GRN/WHT DNLS (CVT DRIVEN Drives CVT driven With ignition switch ON (II): duty
PULLEY PRESSURE pulley pressure control controlled
CONTROL SOLENOID solenoid valve
VALVE)
B44 BLU/WHT DRLS (CVT DRIVE Drives CVT drive pulley With ignition switch ON (II): duty
PULLEY PRESSURE pressure control controlled
CONTROL SOLENOID solenoid valve
VALVE)
(cont'd)
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C O (44P)

Number
C36 BLK/RED IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II):
battery voltage
C39 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR Provides sensor With ignition switch ON (II):
VOLTAGE) reference voltage about 5.0 V
C40 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 0.2 V at all times
circuit
C43 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
GROUND)
C44 BRN/YEL LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 0.2 V at all times
circuit
Hydraulic Control
The hydraulic control system is controlled by the CVTF pump, the valves, and the solenoid valves. The CVTF pump is
driven by the input shaft. The CVTF pump and the input shaft are linked by the CVTF pump drive chain and the sprockets.
Fluid from the CVTF pump flows through the pressure high (PH) regulator valve to maintain specified pressure to the
drive pulley, the driven pulley, and the manual valve.
The lower valve body assembly includes the main valve body, the secondary valve body, the CVT driven pulley pressure
control solenoid valve, the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve, the CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid
valve, and the inhibitor solenoid.
The manual valve body is bolted on the intermediate housing, and houses the manual valve which switches hydraulic
pressure to meet with the shift lever position.
Main Valve Body
The main valve body contains the start clutch shift valve, the shift inhibitor valve, the lubrication regulator valve, and the
cooler relief valve.
Start Clutch Shift Valve
When a control system malfunction occurs, the start clutch shift valve receives shift inhibitor pressure (SI) and covers
the lubrication pressure (LUB) bypass circuit port.
Shift Inhibitor Valve
The shift inhibitor valve switches the fluid passage to switch the start clutch control from electronic control to
hydraulic control when the electronic control system is faulty.
Lubrication Regulator Valve
The lubrication regulator valve stabilizes the lubrication pressure (LUB) to the internal circuit.
Cooler Relief Valve
The cooler relief valve stabilizes the CVTF cooler pressure (COL) and recirculation pressure (RCC) to the CVTF cooler
and to the internal circuit.
START CLUTCH SHIFT VALVE

Secondary Valve Body

The secondary valve body contains the pressure high (PH) regulator valve, the pressure high control (PHC) shift valve,
the start clutch back-up valve, the clutch reducing valve, and the start clutch accumulator valve.
PH Regulator Valve
The PH regulator valve maintains hydraulic pressure supplied from the CVTF pump, and supplies PH pressure to the
hydraulic control circuit and the lubrication circuit. PH pressure is regulated at the PH regulator valve by the PH control
pressure (PHC) from PHC shift valve.
PHC Shift Valve
The PHC shift valve supplies PH control pressure (PHC) to the PH regulator valve to regulate PH pressure in
accordance w ith the drive pulley control pressure (DRC) or driven pulley pressure (DNC).
Start Clutch Back-Up Valve
When a control system malfunction occurs, the start clutch back-up valve supplies start clutch control B pressure
(CCB) based on shift inhibitor pressure (SI) to the start clutch.
Clutch Reducing Valve
The clutch reducing valve receives PH pressure from the PH regulator valve and regulates clutch reducing pressure
(CR).
Start Clutch Accumulator Valve
The start clutch accumulator valve stabilizes the hydraulic pressure that is supplied to the start clutch.
START CLUTCH ACCUMULATOR VALVE

CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control Solenoid Valve
The CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid valve contains the driven pulley control valve w ith the solenoid and
pulley control valve A. The driven pulley control solenoid valve controls pulley control valve A's position, which applies
driven pulley pressure (DN) to the driven pulley.
CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control Solenoid Valve
The CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid valve contains the drive pulley control valve with the solenoid and pulley
control valve B. The drive pulley control solenoid valve controls the position of pulley control valve B which applies
drive pulley pressure (DR) to the drive pulley. The combination of the CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid valve
and the CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid valve, applies pulley control pressures to the respective pulleys
creating complete power transfer, eliminating steel belt slippage and increasing steel belt life.
CVT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve
The CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve consists of the start clutch pressure control valve and the solenoid. The
CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve controls start clutch engagement according to the throttle opening.
Inhibitor Solenoid
The inhibitor solenoid controls reverse inhibitor valve's position, which applies reverse inhibitor pressure (SA) to the
reverse brake.
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Manual Valve Body

The manual valve body contains the manual valve and the reverse inhibitor valve. The manual valve body is bolted on
Manual Valve
The manual valve mechanically uncovers/covers the fluid passage according to the shift lever position.
Reverse Inhibitor Valve
The reverse inhibitor valve is controlled by reverse inhibitor pressure (SA) from the inhibitor solenoid. The reverse
inhibitor valve intercepts the hydraulic pressure flowing to the reverse brake while the vehicle is moving forward at
speeds over about 6 mph (10 km/h).
0
Hydraulic Flow
As the engine turns, the CVTF pump starts to operate. Transmission fluid (CVTF) is drawn through the CVTF strainer
(filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, CVTF flowing from the CVTF pump flows to the pressure high (PH)
regulator valve and becomes the pressure high (PH) pressure. PH pressure flows to the pulley control valves and then to
the pulleys.
The PCM actuates the solenoid valves to control hydraulic pressure shifting pulley ratio and engaging the start clutch.
Hydraulic Pressure at the Port for use in the Hydraulic Circuit:
Port No. Hydraulic Pressure Port No. Hydraulic Pressure
CC Start Clutch Control LUB Lubrication
CCB Start Clutch Control B PH Pressure High
COL CVTF Cooler PHC Pressure High Control
CR Clutch Reducing RCC Recirculation
DN Driven Pulley SA Reverse Inhibitor
DNC Driven Pulley Control RVS Reverse Brake
DR Drive Pulley SC Start Clutch
DRC Drive Pulley Control Si Shift Inhibitor
FWD Forward Clutch X Drain
(cont'd)
N Position
Fluid from the CVTF pump is regulated to high pressure at the pressure high (PH) regulator valve, and flows to the pulley
control valves. The CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid valve and the CVT drive pulley pressure control
solenoid valve control pulley control valves A and B, which apply pressure to the pulleys. The driven pulley receives
pressure higher than the pressure the drive pulley receives. Hydraulic pressure to the forward clutch is blocked by the
manual valve, and hydraulic pressure to the start clutch is blocked by the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve.
Under this condition, hydraulic pressure is not applied to the start clutch and the forward clutch.
< s&
D Position, at lo w speed range

The manual valve is shifted into the D position, and uncovers the forward clutch pressure (FWD) port leading to the
forward clutch. The forward clutch pressure (FWD) flows to the forward clutch, the forward clutch is engaged, and drives
the input shaft and the drive pulley shaft. The drive pulley receives low pressure, and the driven pulley receives high
pressure. The PCM actuates the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve to control the start clutch pressure (SC). The
start clutch control pressure (CC) from the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve becomes the start clutch pressure
(SC) at the shift inhibitor valve, and flows to the start clutch. The start clutch is engaged, and the vehicle moves.
(cont'd)
D Position, at high speed range

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM controls the CVT driven pulley pressure control
solenoid valve and the CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid valve to provide about the same hydraulic pressure to
the pulleys. The diameter in contact with the steel belt on the drive pulley and the driven pulley becomes nearly equal,
and the pulley ratio is in high. Hydraulic pressure remains applied to the start clutch and the forward clutch.
DRIVEN PUL LEY DRIVE PULLEY
DRIVEN PULLEY rg g x j
CANCELLER
DRIVE PULLEY
DRIVEN PULLEY
CVTF COO LER CVTF

^ FILTER
D Position, at to p speed range
The vehicle speed is further increased, the PCM controls the CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid valve and the
CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid valve to apply hydraulic pressure to the drive pulley and to the driven pulley.
The drive pulley receives high pressure and the driven pulley receives low pressure. The drive pulley provides the steel
belt a large-diameter contact and the driven pulley provides a small-diameter contact, and the result is a high pulley
ratio. Hydraulic pressure remains applied to the start clutch and the forward clutch.
(cont'd)
GVT
1 Position
The manual valve is shifted into the R position, and uncovers the reverse brake pressure (RVS) port leading to the
reverse inhibitor valve. The inhibitor solenoid is turned OFF by the PCM, and the reverse inhibitor pressure (SA) is
applied to the right end of the reverse inhibitor valve. The reverse inhibitor valve is moved to the left side, and uncovers
the reverse brake pressure (RVS1) port leading to the reverse brake. The clutch reducing pressure (GR) becomes the
reverse brake pressure (RVS), and flows to the reverse brake via the reverse inhibitor valve. The reverse brake is
engaged, and it locks the planetary carrier.
NOTE; When used, "le ft" or "rig h t" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
< 3
R Position: Reverse Inhibitor Control

If R is selected while the vehicle is moving forward at speeds over 6 mph (10 km/h), the PCM outputs a signal to turn ON
the inhibitor solenoid, and the reverse inhibitor pressure (SA) in the right end of the reverse inhibitor valve is released.
The reverse inhibitor valve is moved to the right side, and uncovers the stop reverse brake pressure (RVS) port leading
to the reverse brake from the manual valve. The reverse brake pressure (RVS) is not applied to the reverse brake, and
power is not transmitted to the reverse direction.
NOTE: When used, "le ft" or "rig h t" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
(cont'd)
P Position
The manual valve is shifted into the P position, and the manual valve blocks hydraulic pressure to the forward clutch.
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the start and forward clutches, and power is not transmitted to the drive pulley shaft.
( S &
D Position, when an electronic control system malfunction occurs.

When an electronic control system malfunction occurs in D, and the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve cannot
control the start clutch pressure circuit, the transmission creates a temporary circuit for the start clutch pressure control
to allow the vehicle to be driven.
The CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve covers the start clutch control pressure (CC) port leading to the shift
inhibitor valve, and the shift inhibitor valve is moved to the left side by the drive pulley control pressure (DRC). The
clutch reducing pressure (CR) becomes the shift inhibitor pressure (SI) at the shift inhibitor valve. The shift inhibitor
pressure (SI) then flows to the left side o f the start clutch back-up valve, and the becomes start clutch control B pressure
(CCB). The start clutch control B pressure (CCB) becomes the start clutch pressure (SC) at the shift inhibitor valve, and
flows to the start clutch. The clutch reducing pressure (CR) also flows to the manual valve and becomes the forward
clutch pressure (FWD). The start clutch and the forward clutch are engaged, and the vehicle can move.
NOTE: When used, "le ft" or "rig h t" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
(cont'd)
R Position, when an electronic control system malfunction occurs.

When an electronic control system malfunction occurs in R, and the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve cannot
control the start clutch pressure circuit, the transmission creates a temporary circuit for the start clutch pressure control
to allow the vehicle to be driven.
The CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve covers the start clutch control pressure (CC) port leading to the shift
inhibitor valve, and the shift inhibitor valve is moved to the left side by the drive pulley control pressure (DRC). The
clutch reducing pressure (CR) becomes the shift inhibitor pressure (SI) at the shift inhibitor valve. The shift inhibitor
pressure (SI) then flows to the left side of the start clutch back-up valve, and becomes the start clutch control B pressure
(CCB). The start clutch control B pressure (CCB) becomes the start clutch pressure (SC) at the shift inhibitor valve, and
flows to the start clutch. The clutch reducing pressure (CR) also flows to the manual valve and becomes the reverse
brake pressure (RVS). The start clutch and the reverse brake are engaged, and the vehicle can reverse.
NOTE; When used, "le ft" or "rig h t" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
Operation of the Start Clutch Pressure
The start clutch control pressure (CC) from the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve becomes start clutch pressure
(SC) at the shift inhibitor valve, and flows to the start clutch. The PCM actuates the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve to control start clutch pressure when starting the vehicle. The start clutch is engaged like a torque converter to
control smooth starting-off and creeping in D and R.
Operation of the Pulleys Pressure

The pressure high pressure (PH) from the PH regulator valve becomes the driven pulley pressure (DN) and the drive
pulley pressure (DR) at pulley control valve A and pulley control valve B, and flows to the driven pulley and the drive
pulley. The PCM actuates the CVT pulley pressure control solenoid valve to control the pulley pressure control valve.
The pulley control valve controls the hydraulic pressure to the drive pulley and the driven pulley to control the pulley
ratio.
DRIVEN PULLEY DRIVE PULLEY

When the pulley ratio is low (low vehicle speed), high hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the driven pulley
and increases the effective diameter of the driven pulley, and a lower hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of
the drive pulley to decrease the effective diameter of the drive pulley. When the pulley ratio is high (high vehicle speed),
high hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the drive pulley and increases the effective diameter of the drive
pulley, and a lower hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the driven pulley to reduce the effective diameter of
the driven pulley.
(cont'd)
Park Mechanism
The park mechanism locks the transmission by engaging the park pawl with the park gear which is integral with the
secondary drive gear. The secondary drive gear engages with the secondary driven gear which is splined to the final
drive shaft, and the final drive gear integrated with the final drive shaft engages the final driven gear.
Shifting to P causes the park cone (installed at the end of the park rod) to press the park pawl onto the park gear. Even if
the end of the park pawl rides on the top of the park gear teeth, slight movement of the vehicle w ill cause the park pawl
and the park gear to mesh with each other completely because the park rod spring puts tension on the park cone. The
park pawl receives the tension (which acts to separate the park pawl from the park gear) from the park pawl spring.
PARK ROD
< 3
S hift Lock System

The shift lock system prevents the shift lever from mis-shifting. The shift lock solenoid is normally OFF. After starting the
engine in P, the shift lever cannot move to any other position from P because the shift lock stop stops the lock pin unless
certain conditions are m e t When the brake pedal is pressed and the accelerator pedal is not pressed, the PCM
commands are shift lock solenoid is ON; the shift lock solenoid plunger in the shift lock solenoid pulls the shift lock stop
to release the lock pin. Pressing the shift lever button allows the shift lever to move to any other position. When the
brake pedal and the accelerator pedal are pressed at the same tim e, the PCM commands the solenoid OFF and the shift
lock system is locked.
(cont'd)
When the shift lock system does not operate due to mechanical or electrical trouble, you can unlock the shift lock
temporarily by inserting the ignition key into the shift lock release hole and pressing the shift lock release. When the shift
lock release is pressed, the shift lock stop releases the lock pin, and the shift lever can move to any other position.
Circuit Diagram - PCM CVT Control System
BATTERY TERM INAL -------- : CAN line

FU SE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BO X
[ H 7 ^ 3 | 4 | 5 f 6 ( 7 s fe l. I 1| 2 3 I 4 | 5I eJT b M 3 [ 4 | 5 T e l 7 ^ T i .I I
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 l 1
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 1 l 20 21 22 23 24 25

20 21 22 23 24 25
1 1 1
26 27 28 29|30131132 33 34 35 26 27 28 29|30131132 33 34 35 26 27 28 29|3o |31)32 33 34 35
(36|37 38|3 9|40|41|42 43144| |36|37 38|39 |4 0 J41|42 136 J37 38 j 39140141142 43|44|
3 A (44P)
(cont'd)
.ICIZlI.1
P 1 j 2 1 3 | 41 5 1 6 1 /
|
13|l4 isll6
|30|3l|32
8j 9 , 2 3I 4 | 5| 6I 7 T J T f
1 10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19 1
1 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29|30 J31(32 33 34 35
l
h I
1 10
20
26
2
11
21
27
3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7
22
S I )|
12 13 |l4 jl 5)16 17 18 19
23 24 25
28 29)30|31 (32 33 34 35
1
l 3 6 j 37 3 8 139 |4Q |41 |42143 l36|37 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 | 42 4 3 14 4 1 13 6 137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | 4 1 | 42 4 3 144(
B A (44P)
Terminal side of female termina l s
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0107: Manifol d Absolute Pressure 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0107 or P0108 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS.
(MAP) Sensor Circuit Low
DTC P0108: Manifold Absolute Pressure
YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
(MAP) Sensor Circuit High
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data original PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Pending
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 8, go to the
the General Troubleshooting Information (see page indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
14-4).
N O-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor and
the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 7. If
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
(II) again. indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 7.
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the PGM-FI

Is DTC P0107 or P0108 indicated in the PGM-FI
SYSTEM?
YES-Go to the DTC P0107 troubleshooting (see page
11 -90) or DTC P0108 troubleshooting (see page 11 -92)
in PGM-FI Systems.
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the A/T
Is DTC P0107 or P0108 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM?
YES-Go to step 6.
If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were
indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
6. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-207), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
7. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 2 minutes.
8. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs the A/T
Is DTC P0107 or P0108 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM?
the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11 -7), then go to step 7. If the PCM was substituted, go
to step 1.
(cont'd)
DTC P0335: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0335 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
No Signal
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
the General Troubleshooting Information (see page complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
144)9 original PCM (see page 11 -209). If any other Pending
indicated DTC's troubleshooting.H
NO -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
3. Start the engine, shift the shift lever to D while connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor and
pressing the brake pedal, and let the engine idle for at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
least 30 seconds. known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 7. If
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
4. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the PGM-FI indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 7.
Is DTC P0335 indicated in the PGM-FI SYSTEM?
YES-Go to the DTC P0335 troubleshooting in PGM-FI
Systems (see page 11-138).
NO-Go to step 5.
Is DTC P0335 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM?
YES-Go to step 6.
indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
(see page 11-7).
the CKP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
go to step 7. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 9.
DTC P0336: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 9. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0336 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Circuit Range/Performance
14-4). original PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Pending
3. Start the engine, shift the shift lever to D while connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor and
pressing the brake pedal, and let the engine idle fo r at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
least 30 seconds. known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 7. If
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the PGM-FI indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 7.
Is DTC P0335 or P0339 indicated in the PGM-FI
SYSTEM?
11-138) or DTC P0339 troubleshooting (see page
11-140) in PGM-FI S ystem s.*
NO-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 6.
troubleshooting.
(see page 11-7).
7. Start the engine, shift the shift lever to D while
pressing the brake pedal, and let the engine idle for at
least 30 seconds.
the CKP sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
DTC P0501: CVT Speed Sensor Circuit 10. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0501 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Range/Performance
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 9,
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem NO -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the connections or loose terminals between the vehicle
transmission. speed sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 8.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 11. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
3. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking brake, (see page 11-7).
block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the
vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported, and allow 12. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the VSA
the front wheels to rotate freely. OFF button, run the vehicle with the shift lever in D,
and keep the vehicle at speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h)
4. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the VSA while monitoring the Output shaft (Driven pulley)
OFF button, run the vehicle with the shift lever in D, Speed rpm in the Data List with the HDS, then release
and the engine speed at 4,500 rpm or higher, then the accelerator without pressing it again, for at least 7
release the accelerator w ithout pressing it again, for seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
at least 6 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
MENU with the HDS. Is DTC P0501 indicated?
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals
between the vehicle speed sensor and the PCM. If the
YES-Replace the vehicle speed sensor (see page PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
14-148), then go to step 6. page 11 -7), then go to step 12. If the PCM was
NO -lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,
the system is OK at this time. Check for poor NO-Go to step 14.
connections or loose terminals between the PCM and
the vehicle speed sensor. If the HDS indicates NOT 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0501 in the DTCs
COMPLETED, go to step 4. MENU with the HDS.
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
7. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
8. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the VSA original PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Pending
OFF button, run the vehicle with the shift lever in D, or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 13, go to
and keep the vehicle at speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h) the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
while monitoring the Output shaft (Driven pulley)
Speed rpm in the Data List with the HDS, then release N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
the accelerator without pressing it again, for at least 7 connections or loose terminals between the vehicle
seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels. speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
9. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. go to step 12. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
YES-Go to step 11.
DTC P0502: CVT Speed Sensor Circuit 10. Measure the voltage between vehicle speed sensor
Open/Short
NOTE: V E H IC L E S P E E D S E N S O R 3 P C O N N E C T O R
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission. VCC2 ( Y E L /B L U )
1. Check fo r proper vehicle speed sensor installation

(see page 14-148). If the sensor is installed incorrectly,
reinstall the sensor correctly, then go to step 22.
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. W ire side o f fem ale term inals
4. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking brake, Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 15.
vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported, and allow
the front wheels to rotate freely. NO-Go to step 11.
5. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the VSA 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
OFF button, run the vehicle with the shift lever in D,
and the engine speed at 4,500 rpm or higher, then 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
release the accelerator without pressing it again, for 13. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
at least 6 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
14. Checkfor continuity between PCM connector terminal
6. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0502 in the DTCs B6 and vehicle speed sensor 3P connector terminal
MENU with the HDS. No. 3.
V E H IC L E S P E E D P C M C O N N E C T O R B (4 4 P )
YES-Go to step 7. SE N S O R 3P
CO NNECTOR
N O -lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure,
the system is OK at this time. Check for poor VCC2
( Y E L /B L U )
the vehicle speed sensor. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 5. V C C 2 ( Y E L /B L U ) 1 1 12 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 If | 9 j
1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19


26 27 28 29(30|31 (32 33 34 35
8. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor 3P connector. 13 6 137 3 8 13 9 j 4 0 141 142 4 3 | 4 4 |

W ire side o f Term inal side o f
fem ale term inals fem ale term inals
YES-Go to step 28.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal B6 and vehicle speed sensor 3P
connector, then go to step 22.
(cont'd)
15. Measure the voltage between vehicle speed sensor 20. Checkfor continuity between PCM connector terminal
3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. B41 and vehicle speed sensor 3P connector terminal
No. 1.
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
VEHICLE SPEED PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
SENSOR 3P
CONNECTOR
.Il----- Il.
VEL (BLK/W HT) I |SG2 (GRN/YEL) 1 I 2 3 I 4 I 5T6 | 7 8 I 9
a 10 11 12 13(14^1 s f l 6 17 18 19
B 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
SG2
(GRN/YEL) 13 6 137 38^ 3 9 f 4 0 ] 4 1 | 42 43 14 4 1
SG2 (GRN/YEL)
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls W ire side o f Term inal side of

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the vehicle speed sensor (see page
14-148), then go to step 22. YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 16. NO-Repair an open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal B41 and the vehicle speed sensor
3P connector, then go to step 22.
21. Checkfor continuity between PCM connector terminal
18. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). B34 and vehicle speed sensor 3P connector terminal
No. 2.
19. Check fo r continuity between vehicle speed sensor 3P
VEHICLE SPEED PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
SENSOR 3P
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8
M
I
10 11 12 H j l 4 Jl5|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
CM
O)
CO
0
00
00
CM
26 27 28 33 34 35
VEL (BLK/WHT) VEL
(BLK/W HT) 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 ^ 3 44
VEL (BLK/WHT)
W ire side o f Term inal side of

W ire side o f fem ale term inals Is there continuity?
Is there continuity? YES-Go to step 28.

connector terminal B34 and the vehicle speed sensor
< 3 0
22. Reconnect all connectors. 32. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0502 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
25. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the VSA complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
OFF button, run the vehicle with the shift lever in D, original PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Pending
and keep the vehicle at speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h) or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 31, go to
while monitoring the Output shaft (Driven pulley) the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
Speed rpm in the Data List with the HDS, then release
the accelerator w ithout pressing it again, for at least 7 N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels. connections or loose terminals between the vehicle
speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
Is DTC P0502 indicated? go to step 30. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1,
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals
between the vehicle speed sensor and the PCM, then
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 27.
MENU with the HDS.
NO -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals between the vehicle
speed sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 25.
(see page 11-7).
30. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the VSA
OFF button, run the vehicle w ith the shift lever in D,
and keep the vehicle at speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h)
while monitoring the Output shaft (Driven pulley)
Speed rpm in the Data List with the HDS, then release
the accelerator w ithout pressing it again, for at least 7
seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
YES-Check fo r poor connections or loose terminals
between the vehicle speed sensor and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11-7), then go to step 30. If the PCM was
(cont'd)
DTC P062F: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) 7. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P062F in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Internal Control Module Error
14-4). original PCM (see page 11-209). If any other DTCs
were indicated on step 6, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
connections and loose terminals at the PCM. If the
Is DTC P062F indicated in the PGM-FI SYSTEM? PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11 -7), then go to step 5. If the PCM was
YES-Go to the DTC P062F troubleshooting in the substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
PGM-FI Systems (see page 11-155). COMPLETED go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the A/T
Is DTC P062F indicated in the A/T SYSTEM?
YES-Go to step 4.
tim e.H
4. Update the A/T software in the PCM if it does not have
known-good PCM (see page 11-7).
6. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the A/T
Is DTC P062F indicated in the A/T SYSTEM?
YES-Check for poor connections and loose terminals
at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 5. If
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 7.
DTC P0705: Transmission Range Switch 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Multiple Shift Position Input 5. Disconnect the transmission range switch 8P
connector.
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 6. Connect the transmission range switch 8P connector
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the terminal that incorrectly indicated ON in step 3 to
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). body ground with a jum per wire; refer to the following
This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem table.
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the Transmission Wire color
transmission. range switch 8P
connector
ATPP No. 7 BLU/BLK
2. Compare the ATPP, ATPR, ATPN, ATPD, and ATPFWD ATPR No. 4 WHT
inputs with the HDS to the following table in each shift ATPN No. 8 RED/BLK
lever position. ATPD No. 2 ^K
ATPFWD No. 5 BLU/YEL
ATPP ATPR ATPN ATPD ATPFWD
p ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
R OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 8. Compare the ATPP, ATPR, ATPN, ATPD, and ATPFWD
N OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
inputs with the HDS to the table in step 2.
D OFF OFF OFF ON ON
Do the transmission range switch signals match? Do multiple transmission range switch signals indicate
ON?
tim e.H YES-Repair a short in the wires between the
transmission range switch and the PCM; refer to the
NO-Go to step 3.
PCM Transmission Wire color
3. Compare the ATPP, ATPR, ATPN, ATPD, and ATPFWD connector range switch
inputs with the HDS to the table in step 2 in each shift 8P connector
lever position. ATPP B13 No. 7 BLU/BLK
ATPR B14 No. 4 WHT
Are any transmission range switch signals ON in all shift
ATPN J12 No. 8 RED/BLK
lever position?
ATPD B21 No. 2 PNK
YES-Go to step 9. ATP B28 No. 5 BLU/YEL
FWD
NO-Go to step 4. NO-Replace the transmission range switch (see page
14-200).
10. Disconnect the transmission range switch 8P
connector.
12. Check the abnormal transmission range switch signal
that remained ON with the HDS.
Do any transmission range switch signals remain ON?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Replace the transmission range switch (see page
14-200).*
13. Check for continuity to body ground in the circuit DTC P0706: Transmission Range Switch Open
which remained ON; refer to the following table.
NOTE:
Transmission Wire color
range switch 8P Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
connector any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the
ATPP No. 7 BLU/BLK General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
ATPR No. 4 WHT 9 This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
ATPN No. 8 RED/BLK and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the

ATPD No. 2 PNK transmission.
ATPFWD No. 5 BLU/YEL
1. Make sure the shift cable is adjusted properly (see
Does the circuit that indicated ON have continuity to page 14-193).
body ground?
YES-Repair a short in the wires between the
transmission range switch and the PCM; refer to the 3. Compare the ATPP, ATPR, ATPN, ATPD, and ATPFWD
following table. _____________ ____________ inputs with the HDS to the following table in each shift
PCM Transmission W ire color lever position.
connector range switch
8P connector ATPP ATPR ATPN ATPD ATPFWD
ATPP B13 No. 7 BLU/BLK P ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
ATPR B14 No. 4 WHT R OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
ATPN B12 Mo. 8 RED/BLK N OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
ATPD B21 No. 2 PNK D OFF OFF OFF ON ON
ATP B28 No. 5 BLU/YEL Do the transmission range switch signals match?
FWD
NO-Replace the PCM (see page 11-209) J I
tim e .ll
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Compare the ATPP, ATPR, ATPN, ATPD, and ATPFWD
inputs with the HDS to the table in step 3 in each shift
lever position.
Do all shift positions remain OFF?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 5.
e &
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 16. Checkfor continuity between transmission range
switch 8P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
connector.
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH 8P CONNECTOR
7. Connect the transmission range switch 8P connector
terminal which did not indicate ON in step 4 to body
ground with a jum per wire; refer to the following GND (BRN)
table.
4 3 2 1
Transmission Wire color
range switch 8P 8 7 6 5
connector
ATPP No. 7 BLU/BLK
ATPR No. 4 WHT
ATPN No. 8 RED/BLK
ATPD No. 2 PNK
ATPFWD No. 5 BLU/YEL W ire side of fe m a l e te rm in a ls
9. Check the transmission range switch signals that did
not indicate ON with the HDS. YES-Replace the transmission range switch (see
page 14-200).*
Does the transmission range switch indicate ON?
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the
YES-Replace the transmission range switch (see transmission range switch and body ground (G101),
page 14-200). or repair poor body ground (G101).B
NO-Go to step 10.
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
13. Checkfor continuity between the transmission range
switch 8P connector terminal and the PCM connector
terminal of the input which indicated OFF; refer to the
following table.
PCM Transmission Wire color
connector range switch
8P connector
ATPP B13 No. 7 BLU/BLK
ATPR B14 No. 4 WHT
ATPN B12 No. 8 RED/BLK
ATPD B21 No. 2 PNK
ATP B28 No. 5 BLU/YEL
FWD
YES-Replace the PCM (see page 11 -209).H1
transmission range switch and the PCM.H
connector.
(cont'd)
DTC P0716: CVT Input Shaft (Drive Pulley) 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Speed Sensor "A" Circuit Range/Performance 10. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NOTE: 11. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the VSA
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and OFF button, run the vehicle with the shift lever in D, at
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the speeds over 19 mph (30 km/h) for at least 30 seconds.
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). Slow down and stop the wheels.
This code is sometimes caused by an electrical circuit 12. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
problem and sometimes caused by a worn or
defective flywheel drive plate in the transmission. Is DTC P0716 indicated?
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals
between the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
3. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking brake, NO-Go to step 13.
vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported, and allow 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0716 in the DTCs
the front wheels to rotate freely. MENU with the HDS.
4. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the VSA Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
OFF button, run the vehicle with the shift lever in D, at
YES-Troubleshooting is complete* If any other
speeds over 19 mph (30 km/h) for at least 30 seconds.
Slow down and stop the wheels.
Is DTC P0717 indicated? connections or loose terminals between the CVT
input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor and the PCM,
YES-Go to the DTC P0717 troubleshooting (see page then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
14-93J.B COMPLETED, go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Go to step 7.
time.Hl
8. Check the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor
for poor connection and proper installation.
Is the connection and installation OK?
YES-Replace the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed
sensor (see page 14-147), then go to step 9.
NO-Reconnect the CVT input shaft (drive pulley)
speed sensor 3P connector and reinstall the CVT input
shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor, then go to step 9.
DTC P0717; CVT Input Shaft (Drive Pull ey) 10. Measure the voltage between CVT input shaft (drive
pulley) speed sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3 and
Speed Sensor "A" Circuit No Signal
body ground.
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and CVT INPUT SHAFT (DRIVE PULLEY)
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the SPEED SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
This code is sometimes caused by an electrical circuit
problem and sometimes caused by a worn or
defective flywheel drive plate in the transmission.
1. Check for proper CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed
sensor installation (see page 14-147). If the sensor is
installed incorrectly, reinstall the sensor correctly,
then go to step 22.
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s
YES-Go to step 15.
5. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the VSA 11 .Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
speeds over 19 mph (30 km/h) for at least 30 seconds. 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Slow down and stop the wheels. 13. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0717 in the DTCs 14. Checkfor continuity between PCM connector terminal
MENU with the HDS. B6 and CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor 3P
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? connector terminal No. 3.
YES-Go to step 7.
CVT INPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
N O -lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, (DRIVE PULLEY)
SPEED SENSOR
the system is OK at this time. Check for poor 3P CONNECTOR
connections or loose terminals between the CVT
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor and the PCM. If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 5.
VCC2 (YEL/BLU) f j j y 8 |9 j
[a j
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
I
8. Disconnect the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed 26 27 28 2 9 |3 0 |3 l|3 2 33 34 35
sensor 3P connector. | 3 6 | 37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | 4 1 | 42 4 3 |4 4 |

W ire s i de of Term inal side of
YES-Go to step 28.
connector terminal B6 and the CVT input shaft (drive
pulley) speed sensor 3P connector, then go to step 22.
(cont'd)
15. Measure the voltage between CVT input shaft (drive 20. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal
pulley) speed sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 B41 and CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor
and No. 2. 3P connector terminal No. 1.
CVT INPUT SHAFT (DRIVE PULLEY) CVT INPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
SPEED SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR (DRIVE PULLEY)
SPEED SENSOR
3P CONNECTOR
in
CO
2 3 7 8
1 l b I

1 0 11 1 2 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
NDR (WHT/RED) SG2 (GRN/YEL) 2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25
26 27 28 29(30j31132 33 34 35
SG2
(GRN/YEL) 36137 3 8 | 3 9 |4 0 | 4 1 |42 43
h i
SG2 (GRN/YEL)
W ire side of T erm in a l s i de of

W ire side o f fem ale term inals fem ale term inals fem ale term inals
Is there about 5 V? Is there continuity?

YES-Replace the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed YES-Go to step 21.
sensor (see page 14-147), then go to step 22.
NO-Go to step 16. connector terminal B41 and the CVT input shaft (drive
21. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal
17. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. B17 and CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor
18. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 3P connector terminal No. 2.
19. Checkfor continuity between CVT input shaft (drive

pulley) speed sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and CVT INPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
(DRIVE PULLEY)
body ground. SPEED SENSOR
3P CONNECTOR
------------1
CVT INPUT SHAFT (DRIVE PULLEY) NDR (WHT/RED)
NDR
(WHT/RED) i | 4 | 5 | aTl 8 I 9 |
1h 10i 11
2
12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
IJ
13 2 9 1 20 21 2 2 23 24 25
l
26 27 28 29|30!31132 33 34 35
| 3 6 | 37 3 8 | 3 9 [ 4 0 | 4 l| 4 2 4 3 14 4 1
NDR (WHT/RED)

W ire side o f fem ale term inals YES-Go to step 28.

connector terminal B17 and the CVT input shaft (drive
22. Reconnect all connectors. 32. Monitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0717 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
original PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Pending
speeds over 19 mph (30 km/h) fo r at least 30 seconds.
the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor and the PCM. If
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
between the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed (see page 11 -7), then go to step 30. If the PCM was
sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
NO-Go to step 27. COMPLETED, go to step 30.

MENU with the HDS.
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor and the PCM,
(see page 11-7).
speeds over 19 mph (30 km/h) for at least 30 seconds.
between the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed
sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
NO-Go to step 32.
(cont'd)
DTC P0721: CVT Output Shaft (Driven Pul ley) 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Speed Sensor Range/Performance 10. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NOTE: 11. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the VSA
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and OFF button, run the vehicle with the shift lever in D,
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the and the engine speed at 3,500 rpm or higher, for at
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). least 30 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
This code is sometimes caused by an electrical circuit 12. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
problem and sometimes caused by a broken steel belt
in the transmission. Is DTC P0721 indicated?
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals
between the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
3. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking brake, NO-Go to step 13.
vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported, and allow 13. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0721 in the DTCs
the front wheels to rotate freely. MENU with the HDS.
4. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the VSA Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
and the en gine speed at 3,500 rpm or higher, for at
least 30 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor and the
YES-Go to the DTC P0722 troubleshooting (see page PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
14-97).11 COMPLETED, go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Go to step 7.
tim e.H
8. Check the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed
sensor for poor connection and proper installation.
Is the connection and installation OK?
YES-Replace the CVT output shaft (driven pulley)
speed sensor (see page 14-147), then go to step 9.
NO-Reconnect the CVT output shaft (driven pulley)
speed sensor 3P connector and reinstall the CVT
output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor, then go to
step 9.
DTC P0722: CVT Output Shaft (Driven Pulley) 10. Measure the voltage between CVT output shaft
(driven pulley) speed sensor 3P connector terminal
Speed Sensor No Signal Input
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and CVT OUTPUT SHAFT (DRIVEN PULLEY)
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the SPEED SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
This code is sometimes caused by an electrical circuit
problem and sometimes caused by a broken steel belt
in the transmission.
1. Check for proper CVT output shaft (driven pulley)
speed sensor installation (see page 14-147). If the
sensor is installed incorrectly, reinstall the sensor
correctly, then go to step 22.
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s
YES-Go to step 15.
5. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the VSA 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
and the engine speed at 3,500 rpm or higher, for at 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
least 30 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels. 13. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
6. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0722 in the DTCs 14. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal
MENU with the HDS. C39 and CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3.
YES-Go to step 7.
CVT OUTPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
N O -lf the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, (DRIVEN PULLEY)
SPEED SENSOR
the system is OK at this time. Check for poor 3P CONNECTOR
PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 5.
8. Disconnect the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). W ire s i de o f T erm inal side o f
fem ale term inals fem ale te rm in a ls
YES-Go to step 28.
connector terminal C39 and the CVT output shaft
(driven pulley) speed sensor 3P connector, then go to
step 22.
(cont'd)
15. Measure the voltage between CVT output shaft 20. Checkfor continuity between PCM connector term inal
(driven pulley) speed sensor 3P connector terminals C43 and CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed
No. 1 and No. 2. sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1.
CVT OUTPUT SHAFT (DRIVEN PULLEY) CVT OUTPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
SPEED SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR (DRIVEN PULLEY)
SPEED SENSOR
3P CONNECTOR
M n}
NON (W HT/GRN) SGI (GRN/W HT)

W ire side o f fem ale term inals fem ale term inals fem ale term inals

YES-Replace the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) YES-Go to step 21.
speed sensor (see page 14-147), then go to step 22.
NO-Go to step 16. connector terminal C43 and the CVT output shaft
(driven pulley) speed sensor 3P connector, then go to
step 22.
21. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal
18. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). B19 and CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed
sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2.
19. Checkfor continuity between CVT output shaft (driven
pulley) speed sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground. CVT OUTPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
(DRIVEN PULLEY)
SPEED SENSOR
CVT OUTPUT SHAFT (DRIVEN PULLEY)
NDN (W HT/GRN)

YES-Go to step 28.
YES-Repair a short in the wire between PCM connector terminal B19 and the CVT output shaft
connector terminal B19 and the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor 3P connector, then go to
(driven pulley) speed sensor 3P connector, then go to step 22.
step 22.
f
MENU w ith the HDS.
and the engine speed at 3,500 rpm or higher, for at
the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
between the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 30.
sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
NO-Go to step 27. indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 30.

MENU with the HDS.
PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
(see page 11-7).
and the engine speed at 3,500 rpm or higher, for at
between the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed
sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
NO-Go to step 32.
(cont'd)
DTC P0746: CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control 6. Shift the shift lever to D while pressing the brake
Solenoid Valve Stuck OFF pedal, and let the engine idle for at least 5 seconds.
7. Accelerate from a stop at full throttle on a flat road for
about 15 seconds. Do not release the accelerator
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review
during the test-drive.
the General Troubleshooting Information (see page
14-4). 8. Slow down to a stop, keep the shift lever in D while
least 5 seconds.
2 . Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then restart the
Are any other Pending or Con firmed DTCs indicated engine and repeat test-driving step 6.
simultaneously with DTC P0746?
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and
Is DTC P0746, P0777, or P1899 indicated?
recheck.
YES-The CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid
NO-Go to step 3.
valve may be stuck OFF or the CVT driven pulley
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. pressure control valve may be stuck ON:
DTC P0746 is indicated, replace the CVT drive pulley
4. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal operating
pressure control solenoid valve (see page 14-145).
temperature (the radiator fan comes on twice).
DTC P0777 is indicated, replace the CVT driven
5. Check the SOC in the DATA LIST with the HDS. pulley pressure control solenoid valve (see page
14-146).
Does the SOC indicate more than 50%?
YES-Go to step 6. pressure control solenoid valve (see page 14-145)
and CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid
NO-Start the engine with the shift lever in P or N, hold
valve (see page 14-146) as a set
it at 3,500 rpm until the SOC indicates at least 50%,
then go to step 6. If any part was replaced, go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 6, and repeat the test-drive. If the HDS
does not indicate a DTC after the test-drive has been
done four times, the problem was an intermittent
failure; the system is OK at this time.
11 .Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC P0777: CVT Driven Pulley Pressure
12. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Control Solenoid Valve Stuck ON
13. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal operating NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
temperature (the radiator fan comes on twice). and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review
14. Shift the shift lever to D while pressing the brake 14-4).
pedal, and let the engine idle fo r at least 5 seconds.
about 15 seconds. Do not release the accelerator 2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w ith the HDS.
Are any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs indicated
16. Slow down to a stop, keep the shift lever in D while simultaneously with DTC P0777?
least 5 seconds.
recheck.
NO-Go to step 3.
engine and repeat test-driving step 14.
18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w ith the HDS.
YES-Replace the tran sm issio n.*
5. Check the SOC in the DATA LIST w ith the HDS.
NO-Go to step 19.
Does the SOC indicate more than 50% ?
YES-Go to step 6.
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other then go to step 6.
N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check fo r poor
connections or loose terminals between the CVT drive
pulley pressure control solenoid valve and the PCM,
6. Shift the shift lever to D while pressing the brake 11 .Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
pedal, and let the engine idle for at least 5 seconds.
14. Shift the shift lever to D while pressing the brake
8. Slow down to a stop, keep the shift lever in D while
pressing the brake pedal, and let the engine idle fo r at
least 5 seconds. 15. Accelerate from a stop at full throttle on a flat road for
engine and repeat test-driving step 6.
Is DTC P0746, P0777, or P1899 indicated? least 5 seconds.
YES-The CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then restart the
valve may be stuck ON or the CVT drive pulley engine and repeat test-driving step 14.
pressure control valve may be stuck OFF:
pressure control solenoid valve (see page 14-145). Is DTC P0777 indicated?
DTC P0777 is indicated, replace the CVT driven YES-Replace the transm ission.*
pulley pressure control solenoid valve (see page
14-146). NO-Go to step 19.
DTC P1899 is indicated, replace the CVT drive pulley 19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0777 in the DTCs
pressure control solenoid valve (see page 14-145) MENU with the HDS.
and CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid
valve (see page 14-146) as a set. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
If any part was replaced, go to step 11. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
NO-Go to step 6, and repeat the test-drive. If the HDS go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
done four times, the problem was an intermittent N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
failure; the system is OK at this time. connections or loose terminals between the CVT
driven pulley pressure control solenoid valve and the
PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
DTC P0796: CVT Start Cl utch Pressure Control 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON(II).
Solenoid Valve Stuck OFF 10. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 11. Start the engine, shift the shift lever to D while
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review pressing the brake pedal, and run the engine at idle
the General Troubleshooting Information (see page fo r at least 10 seconds. Then test-drive the vehicle at
14-4). an engine speed of 4,000 rpm
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON(II). 12. Check fo r Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC P0796 indicated?
Is DTC P0501 or P0502 indicated along with DTC YES-Replace the transm ission.*
P0796?
NO-Go to step 13.
14-84) or DTC P0502 troubleshooting (see page 13. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0796 in the DTCs
14-85), and recheck. MENU with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 3. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
3. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Is DTC P1891 indicated along with DTC P0796? go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
YES-Replace the start clutch, then go to step 11. N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
NO-Go to step 4.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve and the PCM,
4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
5. Set the parking brake, and block the front wheels
securely.
7. Firmly press the brake pedal, and shift the shift lever
to D.
8. While pressing the brake pedal firm ly, press the
accelerator for 6 8 seconds at full throttle, and
measure the stall speed rpm in D.
Does the engine speed exceed 3,500 rpm?
YES-Replace the CVT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve (see page 14-145), then go to step 9.
t im e .*
GVT
DTC P0962: CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control 10. Measure the resistance between CVT drive pulley
pressure control solenoid valve 2P connector
Valve Circuit Low
terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
NOTE;
Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and CVT DRIVE PULLEY PRESSURE CONTROL
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
transmission.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 1 second.
YES-Go to step 5. Is there 3 . 8 - 6 . 8 Q?
NO-lnterm ittent fa ilure, the system is OK at this time. YES-Replace the solenoid wire harness (see page
Check for poor connections or loose terminals 14-145), then go to step 14.
between the PCM and the CVT drive pulley pressure NO-Replace the CVT drive pulley pressure control
control solenoid v a lv e .I solenoid valve (see page 14-145), then go to step 14.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
6. Disconnect the solenoid wire harness 8P connector. 12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
7. Measure the resistance between solenoid wire 13. Checkfor continuity between PCM connector terminal
harness 7P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 5. B44 and body ground.
SOLENOID WIRE HARNESS 7P CONNECTOR
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
DRLS B
n i^ n v W 3 JT| s i 6 I 7 8 I9
3 2 1 [1
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
7 6 5 4 26 27 28 2 9 |3 0 |3 i|3 2 33 34 35
| 3 6 | 37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | 4 1 | 42 43
GND J
M
DRLS (BLU/WHT) I
U
Term inal side of male term inals

Is there 3.86 . 8 D? Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 11. YES-Repair a short in the wire between PCM
NO-Go to step 8. connector terminal B44 and the solenoid wire harness
8. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-142).
9. Disconnect the CVT drive pulley pressure control
solenoid valve 2P connector.
MENU with the HDS.
17. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 1 second. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
18. Check fo r Pending or Confirmed DTCs w ith the HDS. original PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Pending
Is DTC P0962 indicated? the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
YES-Check fo r poor connections or loose terminals N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
between the PCM and the CVT drive pulley pressure connections or loose terminals between the PCM and
control solenoid valve, then go to step 1. the CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid valve.
NO-Go to step 19. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 22. If the PCM
19. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0962 in the DTCs was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
MENU with the HDS. COMPLETED, go to step 22.
the CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid valve,
(see page 11-7).
between the PCM and the CVT drive pulley pressure
control solenoid valve. If the PCM was updated,
NO-Go to step 24.
DTC P0963: CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control 10. Measure the resistance between CVT drive pulley
Valve Circuit High
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and CVT DRIVE PULLEY PRESSURE CONTROL
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
transmission.
YES-Go to step 5. Is there 3.86 . 8 Cl?
NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time. YES-Replace the solenoid wire harness (see page
Checkfor poor connections or loose terminals 14-145), then go to step 17.
between the PCM and the CVT drive pulley pressure NO-Replace the CVT drive pulley pressure control
control solenoid valve. solenoid valve (see page 14-145), then go to step 17.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
6. Disconnect the solenoid wire harness 8P connector. 12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
7. Measure the resistance between solenoid wire
13. Checkfor continuity between PCM connectorterminal
harness 7P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 5.
B1 and body ground, and between PCM connector
DRLS |PG 2(B R N )

ncghn T r^
3 2 1 1I 2 3 MUWT 7 8 I9
IVi 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
7 6 5 4 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 j30|31132 33 34 35 -
GND
I36l37 38l^ 9 T 4 0 l4 T f 42 43 14 4 1
JPG1 (BLK)
fh
Term inal side of male term inals
T erm inal side of fem ale term inals

Is there 3 .8 -6 .8 Q ?
YES-Go to step 11. is there continuity?

14. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal 17. Reconnect all connectors.
B44 and solenoid wire harness 8P connector terminal
No. 2.
SOLENOID WIRE PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) 20. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 1 second.
HARNESS B P
CONNECTOR
21. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs w ith the HDS.
DRLS Is DTC P0963 indicated?
(BLU/W HT)
I 1 I 2 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 | YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals
4 3 2 1 [i
10 11 12 13|14| 15j16 17 18 19
1
between the PCM and the CVT drive pulley pressure
.i 20 21 22 23 24 25
8 7 6 5 1 control solenoid valve, then go to step 1.
O
CO
<J>
00
CO
CM
CM
26 27 28 33 34 35
136137 3 8 j 3 9 14 0 14 1 142 43 J4^
1 NO-Go to step 22.
DRLS (BLU/W HT)
MENU with the HDS.
fem ale te rm i na l s fem ale term inals
Is there continuity? YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
YES-Go to step 15.
connector terminal B44 and the solenoid wire harness
the CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid valve,
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
16. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminal B44 and body ground. 23. Reconnect all connectors.
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) (see page 11-207), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
1 1 12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 sj 26. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
10 11 12 13 | 1411s] 16 17 18 19
I 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 2 9 |3 0 |3 l|3 2 33 34 35
1361 37 38 l3 9 ) 4 0 r 4 l l 42 43 j 4 4 1
DRLS (BLU/WHT) between the PCM and the CVT drive pulley pressure
A control solenoid valve. If the PCM was updated,
NO-Go to step 27.
Is there voltage?
YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between PCM
(cont'd)
27. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0963 in the DTCs DTC.P0966: CVT Driven Pulley Pressure
MENU with the HDS. Control Valve Circuit Low
NOTE:
YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the
original PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Pending General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 26, go to This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor transmission.
connections or loose terminals between the PCM and 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid valve.
If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 25. If the PCM 3. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 1 second.
COMPLETED, go to step 25. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals
between the PCM and the CVT driven pulley pressure
control solenoid valve.
6. Disconnect the solenoid wire harness BP connector.
DNLS
3 2 1
7 6 5 4
GND
Term i nal side of male terminals
Is there 3 . 8 - 6 . 8 D?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 8.
9. Disconnect the CVT driven pulley pressure control
10. Measure the resistance between CVT driven pulley 14. Reconnect all connectors.
CVT DRIVEN PULLEY PRESSURE CONTROL 17. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 1 second.
SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
control solenoid valve, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 19.
MENU with the HDS.
Term inal side of m a l e term inals Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
is there 3 .8 -6 .8 0 ? YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
YES-Replace the solenoid wire harness (see page
NO-Replace the CVT driven pulley pressure control
solenoid valve (see page 14-146), then go to step 14.
the CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid valve,
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
13. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal
B43 and body ground. 21. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see page 11-7).
B 23. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
1 I2 3 I 4 I 5 [ 6J7 8 I9
[I
10 11 12 13114115pl6 17 18 19
I 20 21 22 23 24 25
CM
CD
00
CM
o
CO
CO
26 27 28 33 34 35
N 37 38 13 9 140 J41 I 42 43
^ r TT M control solenoid valve. If the PCM was updated,
DNLS (GRN/WHT) substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
n go to step 22. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 24.
YES-Repair a short in the wire between PCM
connectorterminal B43 and the solenoid wire harness
(cont'd)
24. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0966 in the DTCs DTCP0967: CVT Driven Pulley Pressure
MENU with the HDS.
Control Valve Circuit High
NOTE:
original PCM (see page 11 -209). If any other Pending General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor transmission.
the CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid valve.
If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
PCM (see page 11 -7), then go to step 22. If the PCM
COMPLETED, go to step 22. 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
control solenoid valve.
6. Disconnect the solenoid wire harness 8P connector.
DNLS
3 2 1
7 6 5 4
GND
T erm inal side o f male te rm i nals
Is there 3 .8 -6 .8 0?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 8.
9. Disconnect the CVT driven pulley pressure control
10. Measure the resistance between CVT driven pulley 14. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal
pressure control solenoid valve 2P connector B43 and solenoid wire harness 8P connector terminal
terminals No. 1 and No. 2. No. 3.
CVT DRIVEN PULLEY PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID WIRE P C M C O N N E C T O R B (4 4 P )

SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR HARNESS 8P
CONNECTOR
DNLS
(GRN/WHT)
I 1 I 2 3 i 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I I
4 [I
CO
2 1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18i 19 J
I 20 21 22 23 24 25
8 7 6 5
CM
0>
o
CO
<N
CO
CO
26 27 28 33 34 35
| 3 6 | 37 3 8 |3 9 | 4 0 | 4 1 | 42 4 3 | 4 4 ]
U 1 1 u
D N L S (G R N /W H T )
W ire side of T erm ina l side of

T erm inal side of m ale term inals fem ale te rm in a ls fem ale term inals
Is there 3.86 . 8 D? Is there continuity?

YES-Replace the solenoid wire harness (see page YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Replace the CVT driven pulley pressure control connectorterminal B43 and the solenoid wire harness
solenoid valve (see page 14-146), then go to step 17. 8P connector, then go to step 17.
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 16. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
13. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal
B1 and body ground, and between PCM connector
terminal B36 and body ground. P C M C O N N E C T O R B (4 4 P )

1 I
2 3 MTfRT 7 8 I 9
PG2 (BRN) [ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
lr = if 20 21 22 23 24 25
111 2 3 M 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 IJ
26 27 28 29|30|31 (32 33 34 35
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 13 6 137 38T i ^ S p T T 42 43 14 4 1
1 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35 V D N L S (G R N /W H T )
A
M
37 38 13 9 14 0 14 1 142 43 144 j
JPG 1 (BLK)
U Term inal side o f fem ale term inals
Is there voltage?
YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between PCM
Is there continuity? connectorterminal B43 and the solenoid wire harness
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 23.
(cont'd)
17. Reconnect all connectors. 27. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0967 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
20. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 1 second. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
21. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. original PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Pending
Is DTC P0967 indicated? the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
between the PCM and the CVT driven pulley pressure connections or loose terminals between the PCM and
control solenoid valve, then go to step 1. the CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid valve.
NO-Go to step 22. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 25. If the PCM
22. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0967 in the DTCs was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
MENU with the HDS. COMPLETED, go to step 25.
the CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid valve,
(see page 11 -207), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
control solenoid valve. If the PCM was updated,
NO-Go to step 27.
s
DTC P0970: Pressure Control Solenoid "C" 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Control Circuit Low 11. Check for blown No. B7 (10A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and Is the fuse OK?
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the YES-Repair an open in the wire between PCM
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). connectorterminal A1 and the under-dash fuse/relay
This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem box, then go to step 21.
transmission. NO-Repair a short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal A1 and the under-dash fuse/relay
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). box, then go to step 21.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Start the engine, shift the shift lever to D while 13. Disconnect the solenoid wire harness 8P connector.
least 1 second. 14. Measure the resistance between solenoid wire
Is DTC P0970 indicated? SOLENOID WIRE HARNESS 7P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 12.

NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time. SCLS
Checkfor poor connections or loose terminals fi^ n
between the PCM and the CVT clutch pressure control 3 2 1
solenoid valve.B 7 6 5 4
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). GND

7. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Term inal side o f m ale term inals
9. Measure the voltage between PCM connector Is there 3.86 . 8 O?

YES-Go to step 18.
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) NO-Go to step 15.
VBSOL (LT GRN) 15. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-142).
r~ ii ii ... ,'1
16. Disconnect the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid
I1I2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 I valve 2P connector.
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
I

26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
| 3 6 | 37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | 4 1 | 42 4 3 | 4 4 |
T e rm i nal s i de o f fem ale term inals

YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
17. Measure the resistance between CVT clutch pressure 21. Reconnect all connectors.
control solenoid valve 2P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
CVT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL 24. Start the engine, shift the shift lever to D while
SOLENOI D VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
least 1 second.
M
GND U U SCLS
between the PCM and the CVT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 26.
Terminal side of male terminals 26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0970 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Is there 3.86.8 D?
NO-Replace the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
valve (see page 14-145), then go to step 21.
18. Jump the SCS line w ith the HDS. connections or loose terminals between the PCM and
the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve, then
19. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
20. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal go to step 24.
B42 and body ground. 27. Reconnect all connectors.
(see page 11 -207), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
|1 |2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
[1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 J
1 20 21 22 23 24 25 least 1 second.

26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
| 36|37 38 | 39 |40|41|42 43|44|
[SCLS (YEL) Is DTC P0970 indicated?

YES-Check fo r poor connections or loose terminals
valve. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 29.
If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 31.
!?
0
31. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0970 in the DTCs DTC P0971: Pressure Control Solenoid "C"
MENU with the HDS.
Control Circuit High
NOTE:
original PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Pending General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor transmission.
the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
least 1 second.
YES-Go to step 5.
solenoid valve.
SCLS
... Hi^xTL
3 2 1
7 6 5 i%
1 i
GND
Term inal s i de o f male term inals
Is there 3 .8 -6 .8 0 ?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
GVT
9. Disconnect the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid 13. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal
valve 2P connector. B1 and body ground, and between PCM connector
10. Measure the resistance between CVT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve 2P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2. PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
PG2 (BRN)
CVT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENO I D VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
11 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 [ 7 8 I 9
a 10 11 12 T J f l4 l l5 l l6 17 18 19 v
20 21 22 23 24 25
C = fjs 26 27 28 29|30|31 (32 33 34 35
136 j 37 38 f3 9 |4 0 |4 7 J 42 43 14 4 1
GND U U SCLS ]PG1 (BLK)

(Q )
T erm inal side o f male term inals
YES-Go to step 14.
Is there 3 . 8 - 6 . 8 D?
YES-Replace the solenoid wire harness (see page connector terminal B1, B36, and body ground (G101),
14-145), then go to step 16. or repair poor body ground (G101), then goto step 16.
NO-Replace the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid 14. Checkfor continuity between solenoid wire harness
valve (see page 14-145), then go to step 16. 8P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
n /^ n
4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5
Hj
GND (BRN)
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between solenoid wire
harness 8P connector terminal No. 5 and body
ground, then go to step 16.
15. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterm inal 22. Reconnect all connectors.
B42 and solenoid wire harness 8P connectorterminal
No. 1.
(see page 11-7).
SOLENOID WIRE PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
HARNESS 8P 24. Start the engine, shift the shift lever to D while
CONNECTOR pressing the brake pedal, and let the engine idle for at
least 1 second.
SCLS (YEL) 25. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
Mb11321 |4| 5| 6| 7 8| 9I
4 3 2 1 [I
101 3|14|15|16171819 j Is DTC P0971 indicated?
8 7 6 5
B 202122 232425
26272829|30|31|32333435 l
l36l3738|39|40|41|42 between the PCM and the CVT clutch pressure control
11
i
solenoid valve. If the PCM was updated, substitute a

SCLS (YEL)
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 24.
Wire side of Terminal side of If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
fem ale terminals female terminals
NO-Go to step 26.
Is there continuity? 26. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0971 in the DTCs
YES-Go to step 22. MENU with the HDS.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between PCM Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
connectorterminal B42andthe solenoid wire harness YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
8P connector, then go to step 16. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
16. Reconnect all connectors. original PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Pending
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
18. Clear the DTC with the HDS. N O -lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
19. Start the engine, shift the shift lever to D while connections or loose terminals between the PCM and
the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve. If the
least 1 second.
20. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
solenoid valve, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 21.
MENU with the HDS.
N O-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve, then
g oto step 19.
(cont'd)
DTC P16C0: PCM CVT Control System DTC P16D7: PCM Internal F-CAN
Incomplete Update Communication Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: DTC P16D8: PCM Internal IMA-CAN
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and Communication Circuit Malfunction
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4), NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
This code is indicated when PCM updating is and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review
incomplete. the General Troubleshooting Information (see page
Do not turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or 14-4).
ACCESSORY (I) while updating the PCM. If you turn 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
before completion, the PCM can be damaged. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
1. Update the PCM (see page 11 -207). 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait for at least
5 seconds.
YES-Replace the original PCM (see page 1 1 -2 0 9 ).S I
Is DTC U0029 or U0038 indicated?
NO-Troubleshooting is complete.
YES-Go to the DTC U0029 troubleshooting (see page
14-129) or the DTC U0038 troubleshooting (see page
14-130).
NO-Go to step 6.
Is DTC P16D7 or P16D8 indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK this tim e.B
(see page 11-7).
9. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P16D7 or P16D8 in the
. original PCM (see page 11-209),IH
connections or loose terminals between PCM and
F-CAN circuit. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
DTC P1860: Inhibitor Solenoid Circuit Low 10. Measure the resistance between inhibitor solenoid 2P
connectorterminal No. 1 and body ground.
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and INHIBITOR SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR
transmission.
3. Select the Inhibitor Solenoid Test in the
Miscellaneous Test Menu w ith the HDS.
4. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Term inal side of male term inals
Is there 11.7-21.0 Q?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this time. 14-145), then go to step 14.
between the PCM and the inhibitor solenoid. NO-Replace the inhibitor solenoid (see page 14-146),
then go to step 14.
harness 7P connector terminal No. 7 and body 13. Checkfor continuity between PCM connectorterm inal
ground. B10 and body ground.

INHSOL (GRN/BLK)
f ir-îi..i
I 1 12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6| 7 i ] 9 j
3 2 1 10 11 12 1 3 |1 4 ll5 |1 6 17 18 19
J
[
7 6 5 4 20 21 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 2 9 |30|31|32 33 34 35
INHSOL
1
13 6 37 3 8 13 9 14 0 14 1 142 43 j 4 4 1
T erm inal side o f male term inals

Term inal side of fe m a l e term inals
Is there 11.7-21.0 Q? is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 8. 8P connector, then go to step 14.
8. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-142). NO-Go to step 20.
9. Disconnect the inhibitor solenoid 2P connector.
(cont'd)
MENU with the HDS.
Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS.
18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 23, go to
YES-Check for an intermittent short between the connections or loose terminals between the inhibitor
inhibitor solenoid and the PCM, then go to step 1. solenoid and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
NO-Go to step 19. substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
19. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P1860 in the DTCs If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 22.
MENU w ith the HDS.
connections or loose terminals between the inhibitor
solenoid and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
(see page 11-7).
between the inhibitor solenoid and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 24.
< s
DTC P i861: Inhibitor Solenoid Circuit High 10. Measure the resistance between inhibitor solenoid 2P
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and INHIBITOR SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the <C=D>
transmission. 2 1
UU
INHSOL
4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Terminal si de of male termi nals
Is there 1 1 .7 -2 1 .0 Q?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. 14-145), then go to step 14.
between the PCM and the inhibitor solenoid. NO-Replace the inhibitor solenoid (see page 14-146),
then go to step 14.
harness 7P connector terminal No. 7 and body 13. Checkfor continuity between PCM connectorterminal
ground. B10 and solenoid wire harness 8P connector terminal
No. 8.
SOLENOID W IRE HARNESS 7P CONNECTOR

SOLENOID WIRE PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
HARNESS 8P
CONNECTOR
ng<3d
3 2 1 INHSOL (GRN/BLK)
c
7 6 5 4
h I2 3 | 4 | 5j 6 |7 l5T5T
INHSOL [i l
4 3 2 1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
8 7 6 5 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35

INHSOL
CO
(0
CO
3 8 13 9 14014 1 [4 2 43 j4 4 |
(GRN/BLK)
Terminal side of male terminal s Wire side of Terminal side of

fem al e terminals female terminals
Is there 1 1 .7 -2 1 .0 O?
YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-142). connectorterminal B10 and the solenoid wire harness
9. Disconnect the inhibitor solenoid 2P connector.
(cont'd)
14. Reconnect all connectors. 24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1861 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
17. Select the Inhibitor Solenoid Test in the complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS. original PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Pending
18. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 23, go to
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals connections or loose terminals between the inhibitor
between the inhibitor solenoid and the PCM, then go solenoid and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
to step 1. substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
NO-Go to step 19. go to step 22. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
MENU with the HDS.

connections or loose terminals between the inhibitor
solenoid and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
(see page 11-7).

between the inhibitor solenoid and the PCM. If the
page 11 -7), then go to step 22. If the PCM was
NO-Go to step 24.
0 0
DTC P1890: CVT Speed Control System 12. Test-drive the vehicle at about 37 mph (60 km/h)
under the condition that APP Sensor A 2.31 V for at
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data least 1 minute.
the General Troubleshooting Information (see page 13. Check the engine speed when vehicle speed is
14-4). 37 mph (60 km/h).
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is the engine speed 2,2002,800 rpm?
2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
If necessary, replace the CVTF (see page 14-154), and
Are any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs indicated recheck.
aiong with DTC P1890?
NO-Replace the transmission.
recheck.
NO-Go to step 3.
Does the SOC indicate more than 50%?
YES-Go to step 6.
then go to step 6.
6. Test-drive the vehicle at about 37 mph (60 km/h) for at
least 1 minute.
done four times, go to step 8.
8. Park the vehicle on level ground, apply the parking
brake, and block all four wheels securely.
10. Firmly press the brake pedal, and shift the shift lever
to D.
11. While pressing the brake pedal firmly, also press the
accelerator for 6 8 seconds at full throttle, and
measure the stall speed rpm.
Does the stall speed exceed 3,500 rpm?
YES-Replace the transmission.

DTC P1891: Start Clutch Control System 11. Park the vehicle on level ground, apply the parking
brake, and block all four wheels securely.
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review 12. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal operating
the General Troubleshooting Information (see page temperature (the radiator fan comes on twice).
14-4). 13. Firmly press the brake pedal, and shift the shift lever
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). to D.
2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. 14. While pressing the brake pedal firmly, press the
accelerator for 68 seconds at full throttle, and
Are any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs indicated measure the stall speed rpm in D.
along with DTC P1891?
Does the engine speed exceed 3,500 rpm?
YES-Go to step 3.
YES-Replace the start clutch, then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 15.
Is the DTC P0796 indicated along with DTC P1891?
YES-Replace the start clutch, then go to step 19.
17. Start the engine. Shift the shift lever to D, and release
NO-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and the parking brake and brake pedal, then check if the
recheck. vehicle moves.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Did the vehicle move?
6. Disconnect the solenoid wire harness 8P connector. NO-Replace the start clutch, then go to step 19.
7. Start the engine. Shift the shift lever to D, and release 18. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
the parking brake and brake pedal, then check if the
vehicle moves. 19. Start the engine. Test-drive the vehicle at about 37
mph (60 km/h) for at least 1 minute.
Did the vehicle move?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the start clutch, then go to step 19.
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). between the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve and the PCM, then go to step 1.
9. Reconnect the solenoid wire harness 8P connector.
NO-Go to step 21.
10. Start the engine. Shift the shift lever to D, and check
the creeping speed on level ground. 21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1891 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Is the creeping speed about 3 mph (5 km/h)?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Replace CVT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve (see page 14-145), then go to step 18.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve and the PCM,
22. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P1838: CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control
23. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software Valve Stuck ON or CVT Driven Pulley Pressure
(see page 11-207), or substitute a known-good PCM Control Valve Stuck OFF
(see page 11-7).
DTC P0780: Shift Error
24. Start the engine. Test-drive the vehicle at about 37
mph (60 km/h) for at least 1 minute. NOTE:
25. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
Is DTC P1891 indicated? General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
YES-Check for poor connections or loose terminals Keep replacement solenoid valves on hand: the CVT
between the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid drive pulley pressure control solenoid valve and the
valve and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid valve set.
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO-Go to step 26.
Are any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs indicated
26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1891 in the DTCs along with DTC P1898 and P0780?
MENU with the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? recheck.
YES-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO-Go to step 3.
original PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Pending 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor 5. Check the SOC in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve and the PCM. If Does the SOC indicate more than 50%?
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
YES-Go to step 6.
(see page 11-7), then go to step 24. If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT NO-Start the engine with the shift lever in P or N, hold
COMPLETED, go to step 24. it at 3,500 rpm until the SOC indicates at least 50%,
then go to step 6.
(cont'd)
6. Shift the shift lever to D while pressing the brake 17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1898 and P0780 in the
pedal, and let the engine idle for at least 5 seconds. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
7. Accelerate from a stop until the vehicle speed reaches Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
4050 mph {6580 km/h) on a flat road for at least 15
seconds. Do not release the accelerator during the YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
test-drive. Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 16,
pressing the brake pedal, and let the engine idle for at NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
least 5 seconds. Then return to the test-drive of step 7. connections or loose terminals between the CVT drive
pulley pressure control solenoid valve, the CVT driven
9. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. pulley pressure control solenoid valve, and the PCM,
Are DTC P1898 and P0780 indicated?
YES-Replace the CVT drive pulley pressure control
solenoid valve (see page 14-145) and the CVT driven
pulley pressure control solenoid valve (see page
14-146)as a set, then go to step 10.
failure; the system is OK at this time.
13. Shift the shift lever to D while pressing the brake
14. Accelerate from a stop until the vehicle speed reaches
4050 mph (6580 km/h) on a flat road for at least 15
seconds. Do not release the accelerator during the
test-drive.
least 5 seconds. Then return to the test-drive of step
14.
Are DTC P1898 and P0780 indicated?

NO-Go to step 17.
( &
DTC P1899: CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control 6. Shift the shift lever to D while pressing the brake
Valve Stuck OFF or CVT Driven Pulley
Pressure Control Valve Stuck ON 7. Accelerate from a stop until the vehicle speed reaches
4050 mph (6580 km/h) on a flat road for at least 15
DTC P0780: Shift Error seconds. Do not release the accelerator during the
test-drive.
NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 8. Slow down to a stop, keep the shift lever in D while
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review the pressing the brake pedal, and let the engine idle for at
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). least 5 seconds. Then return to the test-drive of step 7.
Keep replacement solenoid valves on hand: the CVT 9. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS.
drive pulley pressure control solenoid valve and the
CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid valve set. Are DTC P0746, P0777, or P1899 and P0780 indicated?
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES-The CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid
valve may be stuck OFF or the CVT driven pulley
2. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. pressure control solenoid valve may be stuck ON:
Are any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs indicated DTC P0746 is indicated, replace the CVT drive pulley
along with DTC P1899 and P0780? pressure control solenoid valve (see page 14-145).
DTC P0777 is indicated, replace the CVT driven
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and pulley pressure control solenoid valve (see page
recheck. 14-146).
NO-Go to step 3. DTC P1899 and P0780 are indicated, replace the
CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid valve
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. (see page 14-145) and CVT driven pulley pressure
4. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal operating control solenoid valve (see page 14-146) as a set.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on twice). If any part was replaced, go to step 10.
5. Check the SOC in the DATA LIST with the HDS. NO-Go to step 6, and repeat the test-drive. If the HDS
Does the SOC indicate more than 50%? does not indicate a DTC after the test-drive has been
YES-Go to step 6. failure; the system is OK at this time.
then go to step 6.
(cont'd)
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC P2122: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
11. Clear the DTC with the HDS . Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP) Sensor D)
Circuit Low
DTC P2123: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
13. Shift the shift lever to D while pressing the brake Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP) Sensor D)
pedal, and let the engine idle for at least 5 seconds. Circuit High
14. Accelerate from a stop until the vehicle speed reaches NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
4050 mph (6580 km/h) on a flat road for at least 15 and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review
seconds. Do not release the accelerator during the
test-drive. 14-4).
15. Slow down to a stop, keep the shift lever in D while 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). -
least 5 seconds. Then return to the test-drive of step 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
14.
16. Checkfor Pending or Confirmed DTCs with the HDS. SYSTEM with the HDS.
Are DTC P1899 and P0780 indicated? is D T C P 2 1 2 2 o r P 2 1 2 3 in d ic a t e d in th e P G M - F i
SYSTEM ?
NO-Go to step 17. 11-233) or DTC P2123 troubleshooting (see page
17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1899 and P0780 in the 11-236) in Electronic Throttle Control Systems
DTCs MENU with the HDS. (ETCS).H
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? NO-Go to step 4.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the A/T
Pending or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 16, SYSTEM with the HDS.
Is D T C P 2 1 2 2 o r P 2 1 2 3 in d ic a t e d in th e A / T S Y S T E M ?
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor YES-Go to step 5.
connections or loose terminals between the CVT drive
pulley pressure control solenoid valve, the CVT driven NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
pulley pressure control solenoid valve, and the PCM, If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were
then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
COMPLETED, go to step 12. troubleshooting.
(see page 11-7).
I s D T C P2122 o r P2123 i n d i c a t e d i n t h e A / T S Y S T E M ?

8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P2122 or P2123 in the DTC U0029; F-CAN M alfunction (F-CAN Bus
OFF)
DTC U0122: Lost Com m unication W ith
Vehicle Dynamics Control Module
original PCM (see page 11-209). If any other Pending DTC U0155: Lost Com m unication W ith Gauge
indicated DTCs troubleshooting-^ Control Module
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, checkfor poor DTC U1205: IMA-CAN M alfunction
connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the PCM (PCM-to-Motor Control Module)
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see
page 11-7), then go to step 6. If the PCM was NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review
COMPLETED, go to step 6. the General Troubleshooting Information (see page
14-4).
Is DTC U0029, U0122, U0155, or U1205 indicated in the
PGM-FI SYSTEM?
YES-Go to the DTC U0029 troubleshooting (see page

11-364), DTC U0122 troubleshooting (see page
11-372), DTC U0155 troubleshooting (see page
11-374), or DTC U1205 troubleshooting (see page
11 -364) in Communication Systems.
NO-Go to step 4.
Is DTC U0029, U0122, U0155, or U1205 indicated in the
A/T SYSTEM?
YES-Go to step 5.
troubleshooting.
5. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software DTC UO038: IMA-CAN Malfunction (IMA-CAN
Bus OFF)
(see page 11-7).
7. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs the A/T the General Troubleshooting Information (see page
SYSTEM with the HDS. 14-4).
Is DTC U0029, U0122, U0155, or U1205 Indicated in the 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
A/T SYSTEM?
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. I s D T C U0038 indicated in the P G M - F I S Y S T E M ?
NO-Go to step 8. YES-Go to the DTC U0038 troubleshooting in
Communication Systems (see page 11-364).
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0029, U0122, U0155,
or U1205 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. NO-Go to step 4.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? 4. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the A/T
complete, if the PCM was substituted, replace the I s D T C U0038 indicated in the A / T SYSTEM?
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 7, go to the YES-Go to step 5.
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor If any other Pending or Confirmed DTCs were
connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the PCM indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see troubleshooting.
page 11-7), then goto step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT 5. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
COMPLETED, go to step 6. (see page 11-207), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7).
Is DTC U0038 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM?

NO-Go to step 8.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0038 in the DTCs DTC U0302: PGM-FI System and A/T System
MENU with the HDS. Program Mismatch
NOTE;
original PCM (see page 11 -209). If any other Pending General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
or Confirmed DTCs were indicated in step 7, go to the This code is indicated when PCM updating is
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. incomplete.
NO-lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor Do not turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or
connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the PCM ACCESSORY (I) while updating the PCM. If you turn
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
page 11 -7), then go to step 6. If the PCM was before completion, the PCM can be damaged.
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT 1. Update the PCM (A/T system) (see page 11-207).
YES-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-209).

NO-Troubleshooting is complete.il
Road Test
1. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal operating 9. Prepare the HDS to take a HIGH SPEED SNAPSHOT
temperature (the radiator fan comes on twice). (refer to the HDS user's guide for more details if
needed):
2. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels.
Select the High Speed icon.
3. Shift the shift lever to D while pressing the brake Select these parameters: -
pedal firmly. Press the accelerator pedal, and release - Vehicle Speed
it suddenly. The engine should not stall.
- Output Shaft (Driven Pulley) Speed (rpm)
4. Repeat step 3 in all shift lever positions. - Input Shaft (Drive Pulley) Speed (rpm)
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) - Engine Speed
- APP Sensor A (V)
6. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located underthe
- Battery Voltage
driver's side of the dashboard.
- Brake Switch ; .
Set the Trigger Type to Parameter.
Adjust the Parameter setting to APP Sensor A
r above 1.21 V.
Set the recording time to 60 seconds.
Set the Trigger point to -30 seconds.
10. Find a suitable level road. When you are ready to do
the test, press OK on the HDS.
11. Shift the shift lever to D with the Normal Mode.
12. Monitor the HDS, and accelerate quickly until APP
Sensor A reads 1.22 V. Maintain a steady throttle at
1.22 V until the vehicle reaches a reasonable speed,
then slow the vehicle, and come to a stop.
13. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded, or
increase the recording time setting as necessary and
repeat step 12.
14. Adjust the Parameter setting to 2.30 V. Test-drive the
vehicle again. While monitoring the HDS, accelerate
8. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM, and quickly until APP Sensor A reads 2.31 V. Maintain a
go to the A/T Data List. If it does not, go to the DLC steady throttle at 2.31 V until the vehicle reaches a
circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-383). reasonable speed, then slow the vehicle, and come to
a stop.
15. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded, or
increase the recording time setting as necessary and
repeat step 14.
16. Accelerate quickly until the accelerator pedal is to the
floor. Maintain a steady pedal until the vehicle
reaches to reasonable speed, then slow to a stop, and
save the snapshot. Repeat steps 12 thru 16 in D with
the Sport Mode and the L mode.
17. R e v ie w e a c h s n a p s h o t in d iv id u a lly , a n d c o m p a r e A P P In D w ith L mode:
S e n s o r A V o lt a g e , V e h ic le S p e e d ,' a n d E n g in e S p e e d
APP Sensor A Vehicle Engine Speed
to the following table:
Voltage Speed
In D with Normal Mode: 1.22 V 25 mph 3,0703,670 rpm
(40 km/h)
APP Sensor A Vehicle Engine Speed 37 m p h 3,6004,200 rpm
Voltage Speed (60 k m / h )
1.22 V 25 mph 900 1,300 rpm 62 mph 4,1504,750 rpm
(40 km/h) (100 k m / h )
2.31 V 25 mph 1,9502,550 rpm 2.31 V 25 mph 3,8004,400 rpm
(40 k m / h ) (40 km/h)'
37 mph 2,200-2,800 rp m 37 mph 4,2504,850 rpm
(60 km/h) (60 k m / h )
62 m p h 2,5803,180 rpm 62 mph 4,7005,300 rpm
(100 k m / h ) (100 k m / h )
4.50 V 25 mph 2,7504,500 rpm 4.50 V 25 mph 3,6005,300 rpm
(40 km/h) (40 km/h)
37 mph 4,0005,500 rp m 37 mph 4,3005,700 rpm
(60 k m / h ) (6 0 k m /h )
62 mph 5,4006,000 rpm 62 mph 5,4006,000 rpm
(100 k m / h ) (100 k m / h )
In D with Sport Mode: 18. Park the vehicle on a slope (about 16-degrees), apply
APP Sensor A Vehicle Engine Speed the brake, and shift into P. Release the brake; the
Voltage Speed vehicle should not move.
1.22V 25 mph 1,350-1,750 rp m NOTE: Always use the brake to hold the vehicle when
(40 k m / h ) stopped on an incline in gear. Depending on the grade
37 mph 1,4002,000 rpm of the incline, the vehicle could roll backwards if the
(60 k m / h )
brake is released.
62 mph 2,250-2,850 rp m
(100 k m / h )
2.31 V 25 mph 2,450-3,050 rp m
(40 km/h)
37 mph 2,800-3,400 rp m
(60 k m / h )
62 m p h 3,4004,000 rpm
(100 k m / h )
4.50 V 25 mph 4,1505,050 rpm
(40 k m / h )
37 mph 4,6005,700 rpm
(60 km/h)
62 mph 5,4006,000 rpm
(100 k m / h )
Stall Speed Test
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the proper 10. Allow 2 minutes for cooling, then repeat the test with
level (see page 14-153)9 the shift lever in D with the ECON Mode and the Sport
Mode.
2. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels.
11. Allow 2 minutes for cooling, then shift the shift lever
to D. Press the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) and
the paddle shifter (downshift switch) at the same
time, and hold them for about 5 seconds. Check that
the shift indicator displays L, then repeat the test in
the L mode.
12. Allow 2 minutes for cooling, then repeat the test with
the shift lever in R.
NOTE:
Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds at a
time.
Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic
purposes only.
Do not test stall speed with the A/T pressure gauges
installed, there is danger that exceeds the resisting
pressure limit of the A/T pressure gauge.
Do not move the shift lever while raising the engine
speed.
Stall Speed rpm
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Position Specification Service Limit

D 2,050 rpm 1,900-2,200 rpm
5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM, and (Normal
go to the A/T Data List, if it does not, go to the DLC Mode/
circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-383). ECON
Mode/
6. Check the SOC in the DATA LIST with the HDS. If the Sport
SOC indicates less than 50%, hold the engine speed at Mode/
3,500 rpm without load (in P or N) until the SOC L mode)
indicates at least 50%. R 2,500 rpm 2,4002,600 rpm
7. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
9. Shift the shift lever to D with the Normal Mode while
pressing the brake pedal firmly, then press the
accelerator pedal to the floor for 6 to 8 seconds, and
note the engine speed. Do not move the shift lever
while raising the engine speed.
Pressure Test
13. If the stall speeds are out of the service limit, the Special Tools Required ^ _
problems and probable causes are listed in the table. A/T High Pressure Gauge 07AAJ-PLYA100
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
Problem Probable Causes A/T Pressure Adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
Stall speed rpm high in D CVTF pump output A/T Oil Pressure Gauge Set 07406-0020401 or
with the Normal Mode, low
07406-0020400
the ECON Mode, the CVTF pump defective
Sport Mode, and the L Clogged CVTF A/T Low Pressure Gauge w/Panel 07406-0070301
mode, and R strainer
Pressure high (PH) NOTE:
regulator valve stuck Do not test pressure for more than 10 seconds at a
closed time.
Slipping forward Do not move the shift lever while raising the engine
clutch
speed.
Start clutch defective
Stall speed rpm high in R Slipping reverse Disable the VSA by pressing the VSA OFF button.
brake VSA DTC(s) may come on during the test-drive. If the
Start clutch defective VSA DTC(s) come on, clear the DTC(s) with the HDS.
Stall speed rpm low in D 9 Engine output low
with the Normal Mode, Start clutch defective 1. Make sure the transmission fluid is fil led to the proper
the ECON Mode, the Pulley control valves level (see page 14-153).
Sport Mode, and the L A and B stuck
mode, and R 2. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking brake,
the front wheels to rotate freely.
3. Remove the splash shield (A) (see page 20-163).
C=> <o3)
o O
(cont'd)
Pressure Test (cont'd)
4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the Forward Clutch Pressure
8. Connect the A/T oil pressure gauge set to the forward
clutch pressure inspection port (A).

9. Start the engine, and warm up the engine to normal
6. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM, and operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on
go to the A/T Data List. If it does not, go to the DLC twice).
circuit troubleshooting (see page 11 -383).
10. Shift the shift lever to D, and measure the forward
7. Use the recommended pressure gauge, pressure clutch pressure at the forward clutch pressure
hose, and pressure hose adapter. Do not allow dust or inspection port while firmly pressing the brake pedal,
other foreign particles to enter the holes while and holding the engine speed at 1,700 rpm.
connecting the gauges.
Pressure Standard
NOTE: Forward clutch 1,570-1,840 kPa (16.01-18.76
Drive pulley pressure and driven pulley pressure kgf/cm2, 227.7-266.9 psi)
may be above 3,430 kPa (34.98 kgf/cm2, 497.5 psi) 11 .Turn the engine off, then disconnect the pressure
when there is a transmission problem that causes gauges from the pressure inspection ports.
the PCM to go into fail-safe mode.
12. Install the sealing bolts and new sealing washers to
When troubleshooting, you must use the A/T high
the pressure inspection ports, and tighten the bolts to
pressure gauge to measure drive pulley pressure
17 N-m (1.7 kgfm, 13 Ibf-ft). Do not reuse the old
and driven pulley pressure.
sealing washer.
13. If the pressure is out of standard, the problem and
probable causes are listed in the table.
Problem Probable causes
No or low forward Forward clutch defective
clutch pressure CVTF pump defective
PH regulator valve
defective
CR valve defective
Manual valve defective
0 0
Drive Pulley Pressure 19. If the pressure is out of standard, the problems and
14. Connect the A/T high pressure gauge to the drive
pulley pressure inspection port (A). Problem Probable causes
No or low drive CVTF pump defective
pulley pressure PH regulator valve
defective
CVT drive pulley pressure
control solenoid valve
defective
Drive pulley PH regulator valve
pressure too high defective
CVT drive pulley pressure
defective

operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on
twice).
16. Shift the shift lever to N, and measure the drive pulley
pressure at the drive pulley pressure inspection port
while firmly pressing the brake pedal, and holding the
engine speed at 1,700 rpm.
Pressure Standard
Drive Pulley 2 40-540 kPa (2.45-5.51
kgf/cm2, 34.878.3 psi)
17. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the pressure
gauges from the pressure inspection ports.
17 N-m (1.7 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft). Do not reuse the old
sealing washer.
Pressure Test (cont'd)
Driven Pulley Pressure 25. If the pressure is out of standard, the problems and
20. Connect the A/T high pressure gauge to the drive
pulley pressure inspection port (A). Problem Probable causes
No or low driven CVTF pump defective
pulley pressure PH regulator valve
defective
CVT driven pulley
pressure control solenoid
valve defective
Driven pulley PH regulator valve
pressure too high defective
CVT driven pulley
pressure control solenoid
valve defective

twice).
22. Shift the shift lever to N, and measure the driven
pulley pressure at the driven pulley pressure
inspection port while firmly pressing the brake pedal,
and holding the engine speed at 1,700 rpm.
Pressure Standard
Driven Pulley 830-1,130 kPa (8.46-11.52
kqf/ctn2, 120.4-163.9 psi)
23. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the pressure
gauges from the pressure inspection ports.
17 N-m (1.7 kgfm, 13 Ibfft). Do not reuse the old
sealing washer.
Lubrication Pressure Reverse Brake Pressure
26. Connect the A/T low pressure gauge to the lubrication 32. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3).
pressure inspection port (A).
33. Remove the harness clamp (A) from the clamp
bracket (B).

twice).
28. Shift the shift lever to N, and measure the lubrication 34. Connect the A/T oil pressure gauge set to the reverse
pressure at the lubrication pressure inspection port brake pressure inspection port (C).
while firmly pressing the brake pedal, and holding the
engine speed at 3,000 rpm. 35. Install the air cleaner (see page 9-3), then start the
engine, and warm up the engine to normal operating
Pressure Standard
Lubrication 250-400 kPa (2.55-4.08
kgf/cm2, 36.358.0 psi) 36. Shift the shift lever to R, and measure the reverse
29. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the pressure brake pressure at the reverse brake pressure
gauges from the pressure inspection ports. inspection port while firmly pressing the brake pedal,
and holding the engine speed at 1,700 rpm.
the pressure inspection ports, and tighten the bolts to Pressure Standard
Reverse brake 1,570-1,840 kPa (16.01 -1 8 .7 6
17 N-m (1.7 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft). Do not reuse the old
kgf/cm2, 227.7-266.9 psi)
sealing washer.
37. Turn the engine off, then remove the air cleaner (see
31. If the pressure is out of standard, the problem and page 9-3) and disconnect the pressure gauges from
probable causes are listed in the table. the pressure inspection ports.
Problem Probable causes
No or low lubrication CVTF pump defective
pressure Lubrication valve
defective 17 N-m (1.7 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft). Do not reuse the old
Inhibitor solenoid sealing washer.
defective
Pressure Test (cont'd) CVT Clutch Pressure Control
Solenoid Valve Test
39. If the pressure is out of standard, the problem and 1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3).
2. Disconnect the solenoid wire harness 8P connector
Problem Probable causes (A).
No or low reverse " mrse brake defective
brake pressure Reverse inhibitor valve
Manual valve defective
Inhibitor solenoid
defective
CVTF pump defective
PH regulator valve
defective
9 CR valve defective
41. Check the CVT fluid level (see'page 14-153). Refill the
transmission with CVTF if necessary.
42. Install the splash shield (A) (see page 20-163).
3. Measure the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid

valve resistance between solenoid wire harness 7P
connector (B) terminals No. 1 and No. 4.
Standard: 3.86.8 H
t3> <=D> 4. If the resistance is out of standard, check for open or
O <=3>
short in the solenoid wire harness. If the wires are OK,
replace the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve (see page 14-145).
5. Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive
terminal to solenoid wire harness 7P connector
4 / terminal No. 1, and connect another jumper wire from
A the battery negative terminal to terminal No. 4. A
clicking sound should be heard.
6. If no clicking sound is heard, remove the CVT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve, and clean it, then
* recheck. Replace the CVT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve if a problem recurs (see page 14-145).
CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control
Solenoid Valve Test Solenoid Valve Test
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3). 1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3).
2. Disconnect the solenoid wire harness 8P connector 2. Disconnect the solenoid wire harness 8P connector
(A). (A).
B
3. Measure the CVT drive pulley pressure control 3. Measure the CVT driven pulley pressure control
solenoid valve resistance between solenoid wire solenoid valve resistance between solenoid wire
harness IP connector (B) terminals No. 2 and No. 5. harness 7P connector (B) terminals No. 3 and No. 6.
Standard; 3.86.8 Q Standard: 3.86.8 D
4. If the resistance is out of standard, check for open or 4. If the resistance is out of standard, check for open or
short in the solenoid wire harness. If the wires are OK, short in the solenoid wire harness. If the wires are OK,
replace the CVT drive pulley pressure control replace the CVT driven pulley pressure control
solenoid valve (see page 14-145). solenoid valve (see page 14-146).
5. Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive 5. Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive
terminal to solenoid wire harness 7P connector terminal to solenoid wire harness 7P connector
terminal No. 2, and connect another jumper wire from terminal No. 3, and connect another jumper wire from
the battery negative terminal to terminal No. 5. A the battery negative terminal to terminal No. 6. A
clicking sound should be heard. clicking sound should be heard.
6. If no clicking sound is heard, remove the CVT drive 6. If no clicking sound is heard, remove the CVT driven
pulley pressure control solenoid valve, and clean it, pulley pressure control solenoid valve, and clean it,
then recheck. Replace the CVT drive pulley pressure then recheck. Replace the CVT driven pulley pressure
control solenoid valve if a problem recurs (see page control solenoid valve if a problem recurs (see page
14-145). 14-146).
Inhibitor Solenoid Test Lower Valve Body
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3). 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and make sure it is securely
supported.
2. Disconnect the solenoid wire harness 8P connector
(A). 2. Disconnect the solenoid wire harness 8P connector
(A).
3. Measure the inhibitor solenoid resistance between 3. Remove the splash shield (A) (see page 20-163).
solenoid wire harness 7P connector (B) terminal No. 7
and body ground.
Standard: 1 1 .7 -2 1 .0 Q
4. If the resistance is out of standard, check for open or
short in the solenoid wire harness. If the wire is OK,
replace the inhibitor solenoid (see page 14-146).
5. Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive
terminal to solenoid wire harness 7P connector
terminal No. 7, and connect another jumper wire from
the battery negative terminal to body ground. A <G=> <=3
<=3)
clicking sound should be heard.
6. If no clicking sound is heard, replace the inhibitor
solenoid (see page 14-146).
*
4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the CVTF. 6. Remove the CVTF pan (A), the two dowel pins (B), and
the gasket (C).
NOTE;
Remove metal particles from the magnetic surface
of the drain plug.
If a coolercleaning is necessary, refer to the CVTF
cooler cleaning (see page 14-175).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
( 1.2kgf-m,
9 Ibf-ft)
5. Reinstall the drain plug and a new sealing washer (B).
6x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m,
9 Ibf-ft)
7. Remove the CVTF strainer (D).
(cont'd)
Lower Valve Body Removal/Installation (cont'd)
8. Remove the eight bolts securing the lower valve body 20. Connect the solenoid wire harness 8P connector (A).
(E), and ho l d the lower valve body,
NOTE: Do not damage the solenoid wire harness
enough when you holding the lower valve body
removing it.
9, Remove the bolt securing the solenoid wire harness
7P connector (F), then remove the lower valve body,
the two CVTF pipes (G), and the solenoid wire harness
7P connector from the transmission housing.
10. Remove the CVTF magnets (H), and clean and
reinstall them in the CVTF pan.
11. Remove the O-ring (I) from the CVTF strainer, and
remove the O-ring (J) from the solenoid wire harness
7P connector.
12. Clean the inlet opening (K) of the CVTF strainer
thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it is
in good condition and that the inlet opening is not
clogged. 21. Refill the transmission with CVTF (see step 9 on page
14-155).
13. Test the CVTF strainer by pouring clean CVTF through
22. Install the splash shield (A) (see page 20-163).
the inlet opening, and replace it if it is clogged or
damaged.
14. Install a new O-ring on the solenoid wire harness 7P
connector.
15. Install the two CVTF pipes on the lower valve body,
then install the solenoid wire harness 7P connector
and the lower valve body in the transmission housing.
16. Install a new O-ring on the CVTF strainer, then install
the CVTF strainer on the lower valve body.
17. Install the two dowel pins and a new gasket on the
transmission housing.
18. Place the CVTF pan on the transmission housing.
19. Install the CVTF pan bolts, and tighten them to the
specified torque in a crisscross pattern in at least two
or three steps.
23. Do the start clutch pressure control calibration

procedures (see page 14-150) if any control solenoid
valves in the lower valve body were replaced.
CVT Clutch Pressure Control CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control
Solenoid Valve Replacement Solenoid Valve Replacement
1. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-142). 1. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-142).
2. Disconnect the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid 2. Remove the solenoid wire harness clamp (A).
valve 2P connector (A).

3. Remove the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid solenoid valve 2P connector (B).
valve (B), the dowel pins (C), and the separator plate
4. Remove the seven bolts, and remove the CVT drive
(D).
pulley pressure control solenoid valve (C), the dowel
4. Check that the filter (E) is in good condition, replace it pins (D), and the separator plate (E). The CVT clutch
if it is clogged or damaged. pressure control solenoid valve (F), the dowel pins
(G), and the separator plate (H) can also be removed.
5. Install a new CVT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve with the dowel pins and the separator plate on 5. Check that the filters (I) are in good condition, replace
the lower valve body (F). them if these are clogged or damaged.
6. Connect the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid 6. Install a new CVT drive pulley pressure control
valve 2P connector. solenoid valve with the dowel pins, the separator
plate, the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
7. Install the lower valve body (see page 14-142). with the dowel pins, and the separator plate on the
lower valve body (J).
7. Connect the CVT drive pulley pressure control
8. Install the solenoid wire harness clamp.
9. Install the lower valve body (see page 14-142).
CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control Inhibitor Solenoid Replacement
Solenoid Valve Replacement
1. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-142). 1. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-142).
2. Disconnect the CVT driven pulley pressure control 2. Disconnect the inhibitor solenoid 2P connector (A).
solenoid valve 2P connector (A) and the inhibitor
solenoid 2P connector (B).
3. Remove the inhibitor solenoid (B), then remove the

O-rings (C) from the inhibitor solenoid.
4. Install new O-rings on a new inhibitor solenoid, then
install the inhibitor solenoid on the CVT driven pulley
pressure control valve (D).
5. Connect the inhibitor solenoid 2P connector.
3. Remove the CVT driven pulley pressure control

solenoid valve (C), the dowel pins (D), and the
separator plate (E), and remove the inhibitor solenoid
(F) from the CVT driven pulley pressure control
solenoid valve.
4. Check that the filter (G) is in good condition, replace it
if it is clogged or damaged.
5. Remove the O-rings (H) from the inhibitor solenoid.
6. Install new O-rings on the inhibitor solenoid, then
install the inhibitor solenoid on a new CVT driven
pulley pressure control solenoid valve.
7. Install a new CVT driven pulley pressure control
solenoid valve with the dowel pins and the separator
plate on the lower valve body (I).
8. Connect the CVT driven pulley pressure control
solenoid valve 2P connector and the inhibitor
solenoid 2P connector.
CVT Input Shaft (Drive Pulley) CVT Output Shaft (Driven Pulley)
Speed Sensor Replacement Speed Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3). 1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3).
2. Disconnect the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed 2. Disconnect the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed
sensor 3P connector (A), then remove the CVT input sensor 3P connector (A), then remove the CVT output
shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor (B). shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor (B).
3. Install a new O-ring (C) on a new CVT input shaft 3. Install a new O-ring (C) on a new CVT output shaft
(drive pulley) speed sensor, then install the CVT input (driven pulley) speed sensor, then install the CVT
shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor in the transmission output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor in the
housing. transmission housing.
4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, and clean or 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, and clean or
repair if necessary, then connect the connector repair if necessary, then connect the connector
securely. securely.
5. Install the air cleaner (see page 9-3). 5. Install the air cleaner (see page 9-3).
Vehicle Speed Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3). 5. Remove the clamp bracket (A).
2. Remove the IMA motor power cable clamp (A) from
the clamp bracket (B). 7 /
3. Disconnect the transmission range switch 8P 6. Remove the lock pin (B) and the control pin (C) from
connector (A), the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) the selector control lever (D).
speed sensor 3P connector (B), and the vehicle speed
7. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (E),
sensor 3P connector (C).
then separate the shift cable end (F) from the selector
control lever. Check the shift cable end collar (G) for
wear or damage, and replace the shift cable (H) (see
page 14-186) if necessary.
8. Remove the vehicle speed sensor (A) and the O-ring
(B).
Replace.
4. Remove the harness holder (D) from the clamp

bracket (E), and remove the harness cover (F) from the 9. Install a new O-ring on a new vehicle speed sensor,
clamp bracket (G). then install the vehicle speed sensor in the
10. Secure the shift cable holder (A) on the transmission 14. Install the harness cover (A) to the clamp bracket (B),
with the bolts. and install the harness holder (C) to the clamp bracket
(D).
8 x 1.25 mm 8 x 1.25 mm
24 N-m (2.4 k g fm , 18 Ib fft) 22 N-m (2.2 k g fm , 16 Ibf-ft)
A E B G
11. Install the clamp bracket (B).

12. Apply molybdenum grease to the hole in the shift (E), the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor
cable end collar (A). Attach the shift cable end (B) to 3P connector (F), and the vehicle speed sensor 3P
the selector control lever (C). Insert the control pin (D) connector (G).
through the selector control lever hole (E), through
the shift cable end collar hole (F), and into the selector NOTE: Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, and
control lever slotted hole (G) in the direction shown. clean or repair if necessary, then connect the
Push the control pin until its flange (H) contacts the connector securely.
selector control lever surface.
16. Install the IMA motor power cable clamp (A) to the
clamp bracket (B).
13. Insert the lock pin (I) in the direction shown through
the control pin hole and out the opening (J) of the
selector control lever so that the hooked end (K) of the
lock pin locks into the countersunk hole (L) of the
control pin.
Start Clutch Pressure Co ntrol Calibration Procedures
Do the start clutch pressure control calibration Start Clutch Pressure Control Calibration
procedures whenever you do any of these actions:
Procedure with SCS mode
Replace the PCM
Reset the PCM/TCM 1. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels
Update the PCM securely.
Replace the transmission 2. Start the engine, and warm up the engine to normal
Overhaul the transmission operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on
Replace the engine assembly twice).
Overhaul the engine assembly 3. Make sure that the MIL does not come on and the D
Replace the lower valve body indicator does not blink. If the MIL comes on or the D
Replace the start clutch indicator blinks, check the fuel and emissions system
or the CVT control system.
Start Clutch Pressure Control Calibration
Procedure with the HDS
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.

7. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM, and
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM, and go to the A/T Data List. If it does not, go to the DLC
go to the A/T Data List. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-383).
circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-383).
8. Follow the HDS screen prompts to short-circuit the
4. Follow the HDS screen prompts in the Start Clutch SCS signal terminal using the tester menu.
Feedback Learn (see the HDS Operator's manual).
9. Press the brake pedal, and continue pressing the
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes, make sure pedal until the calibration is completed.
the engine does not stall or flare when starting off,
and verify that a problem does not occur on the start 10. Start the engine without a load (headlights, audio
clutch pressure control system. system, blower fan, rear window defogger, A/C, etc.),
and let it idle.
11. Shift the shift lever to N then D, then return to N.
Repeat this shifting pattern two times within 20
seconds after the engine is started.
< >
12. Follow the HDS screen prompts to open-circuit the Start Clutch Pressure Control Calibration
SCS signal terminal using the tester menu, then
Procedure by Driving the Vehicle
disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
13. Check that the D indicator comes on when the shift
lever is in N, then goes off.
twice).
14. If the D indicator blinks or does not come on, or if the
2. Make sure that the MIL does not come on and the D
indicator comes on and stays on, turn the ignition
indicator does not blink. If the MIL comes on or the D
switch to LOCK (0), and restart the procedure with
indicator blinks, check the fuel and emissions system
step 5.
or the CVT control system.
15. Shift to D, and check that the D indicator comes on,
3. Start the engine without a load (headlights, audio
then goes off.
system, blower fan, rear window defogger, A/C, etc.),
16. If the D indicator blinks or does not come on, or if the and let it idle.
indicator comes on and stays on, turn the ignition
4. Check the IMA battery charge level. If the IMA battery
switch to LOCK (0), and restart the procedure with
level indicator displays no level, hold the engine
step 5.
speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm without load (in P
17. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes, make sure or N) until the level in the indicator is half fu ll.
5. Drive the vehicle with the shift lever in D until the
and verify that a problem does not occur on the start
vehicle speed reaches 37 mph (60 km/h), then release
clutch pressure control system.
the accelerator and decelerate without pressing the
brake pedal for at least 5 seconds to reach
completion.
6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes, make sure
Start Clutch Check
NOTE: If the transmission acts abnormally when the 7. Start the engine, and shift the shift lever to D while
vehicle starts off, check the start clutch with the HDS. pressing the brake pedal.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the 8. Accelerate from a stop at over 50% throttle (with
drivers side of the dashboard. 2.75 V of the APP sensor voltage by monitoring APP
Sensor A (V) with the HDS), then slow down to a stop.
9. Repeat step 8 two times.
10. Select Data List in the A/T SYSTEM Menu, and make
sure that the Start Clutch Status is Normal with the
HDS.
11. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes, make sure

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM, and
go to the A/T Data List. If it does not, go to the DLC
4. Select Data List in the A/T SYSTEM Menu, and
monitor the Start Clutch Status with the HDS.
If the HDS indicates Normal, the start clutch is OK,
then disconnect the HDS.
If the HDS indicates Unchecked, go to step 7.
If the HDS indicates Judderl or Judder2, replace
the CVTF (see page 14-154), then go to step 5.
5. Select Start Clutch Status Data Clear in the
Miscellaneous Test Menu, and clear the start clutch
status with the HDS.
6. Select Data List in the A/T SYSTEM Menu, and
monitor the Start Clutch Status Diagnosis condition
with the HDS.
If the HDS indicates Not ready, warm up the engine
to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan
comes on twice), then go to step 7.
If the HDS indicates Ready, go to step 7.
CVT Fluid Level Check
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 6. If the CVT fluid level is below the lower mark, check
for fluid leaks at the transmission, the CVTF filter, the
1. Park the vehicle on the level ground. CVTF cooler hoses, the CVTF cooler lines, and the
2. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal operating CVTF cooler line joints. If a problem is found, fix it
temperature (the radiator fan comes on twice), and before filling the transmission with CVTF.
turn the engine off. NOTE: If the vehicle is driven when the CVT fluid level
NOTE: Check the CVT fluid level within 6090 is below the lower mark, one or more of these
seconds after turning the engine off. Higher fluid level symptoms may occur:
may be indicated if the radiator fan comes on twice or Noise from transmission in D and R.
more. Engine runs, but vehicle does not move in any
position.
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A), and wipe it with
a clean cloth. No shift to a higher ratio or lower ratio.
Flares while driving.
Excessive shock when accelerating and
decelerating.
Vehicle does not creep on a flat road in D.
Late shift after shifting from N to D or N to R.
Unstable rpm while driving.
Stall speed high.
7. If the level is above the upper mark, drain the CVTF to
proper level (see step 5 on page 14-154).
8. If necessary, fill the transmission with CVTF through
the dipstick tube opening (A) to bring the fluid level
between the upper mark and the lower mark of the
dipstick. Do not fill the fluid above the upper mark.
Always use Honda CVTF. Using a non-Honda CVTF
can affect shift quality.
4. Insert the dipstick back into the tube.

5. Remove the dipstick, and check the CVT fluid level. It
should be between the upper mark (A) and the lower
mark (B) on the HOT level in tip of the dipstick (C).
GVT
CVT Fluid Level Check (contd) CVT Fluid Replacement
9. Insert the dipstick (A). NOTE: Keep a ll foreign particles out of the transmission.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine
o ff.

supported.
4. Remove the lid (A) for maintenance.
5. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the CVTF.

NOTE:
of the drain plug.
If a cooler cleaning is necessary, refer to the CVTF
B A
Repl ace. 1 8 x 1 .5 m m

7. Install the lid (A) for maintenance. 9. Refill the transmission with the recommended fluid
through the dipstick tube opening (A) to bring it to the
upper mark on the dipstick. Always use Honda CVTF.
Using a non-Honda CVTF can affect shift quality.
CVT Fluid Capacity:
2.8 L (3.0 US qt) at change
5.2 L (5.5 US qt) at overhaul
8. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A), and wipe it with

a clean cloth.
10. Check that the CVT fluid level (see page 14-153).
11. Insert the dipstick (A).

CVTF, reset the Maintenance Minder (see page 3-4).
Even if the Maintenance Minder did not require you to
replace the CVTF, go to step 13.
(cont'd)
CVT Fluid Replacement (cont'd) Transmission Removal
13. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the Special Tools Required
driver's side of the dashboard. Universal Lifting Eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120
Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program 888-424-6857
NOTE;
surfaces.
The engine support hanger (AAR-T1256) must be used
with the side engine mount installed.
high-voltage system. You must be familiar with the
1. Turn the battery module switch OFF, and measure the
voltage at the IMA battery module terminals (see
page 12-4).
14. Go to the Individual Maintenance Items Reset (see 2. Secure the hood in the vertical position.
RESET with the HDS. 3. Do the 12 volt battery removal procedure (see page
22-87).
page 20-149).
supported.
<=> . <~3>
<3
% *
8. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the CVTF. 12. Remove the PCM cover (D).
NOTE:
of the drain plug.
If a cooler cleaning is necessary, refer to the CVTF
9. Reinstall the drain plug and a new sealing washer (B),

10. Remove the starter cable (A), and disconnect the S
terminal connector (B).
13. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C.
11. Remove the harness clamps (C) from the clamp

brackets (D), and remove the starter harness (E) from
the harness clamp (F) on the battery tray.
(cont'd)
14. Remove the harness clamp (A) from the clamp 18. Disconnect the IMA motor power cable connector (A).
bracket (B), and remove the harness clamps (C) from
NOTE: Before disconnecting the IMA motor power
the clamp brackets (D) on the PCM bracket.
cable connector, make sure you have read the IMA
service precaution (see page 12-3).
15. Remove auxiliary under-hood relay box A (E) from the

clamp bracket (F).
16. Remove the bolts (G), then remove the PCM (H) with
PCM bracket.
17. Remove the harness clamp (A) from the clamp 19. Remove the IMA motor power cable clamp (B) from
bracket (B) on the battery base. the clamp bracket (C).
20. Disconnect the solenoid wire harness 8P connector 24. Remove the clamp bracket (A).
(A) and the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed
sensor 3P connector (B).
C D
25. Remove the lock pin (B) and the control pin (C) from
the selector control lever (D).
21. Remove the harness holder (C) from the clamp
bracket (D), then remove the clamp bracket.
22. Disconnect the transmission range switch 8P control lever. Check the shift cable end collar (G) for
connector (A), the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) wear or damage, and replace the shift cable (H) (see
speed sensor 3P connector (B), and the vehicle speed page 14-186) if necessary.
27. Remove the hose clamp (A) from the clamp bracket
F A G C (B).
23. Remove the harness holder (D) from the clamp C

bracket (E), and remove the harness cover (F) from the
28. Remove the starter (C).
clamp bracket (G).
(cont'd)
29. Remove the drive plate bolts (A) (six) at the opening of 31. Install the engine hanger adapter (VSB02C000026) to
the starter while rotating the engine crankshaft pulley. the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256), then install
attach the hook (A) to the universal lifting eyelet.
Tighten the wing nut (B) by hand, and lift and support
the engine/IMA motor/transmission.
VSB02C000026
30. Attach the universal lifting eyelet to the cylinder head

(A) with a spacer (B) and an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt (C).
NOTE: Select a spacer that is long enough that the
feed tube (D).
07AAK-S NA A 120
32. Remove the steering joint cover, and the steering joint
from the steering gearbox pinion shaft, then install
the steering wheel holder tool (see step 5 on page
17-64).
33. Remove the ground cable terminal bracket (A). 36. Place a jack under the transmission.
37. Insert a 5 mm hex wrench (A) in the top of the ball
joint pins (B), and remove the nuts (C), then separate
the stabilizer links (D) from both stabilizer ends (E).
34. Remove the bolts/nuts (B) and the transmission

mount bracket (C).
35. Remove the upper and front transmission housing 38. Remove the lock pins (F) and the castle nuts (G)r and
mounting bolts (A). separate the lower arms (H) from both knuckles (I)
using the ball joint remover (see page 18-11).
39. Remove the cotter pins (A) and the nuts (B), and 41. Disconnect the CVTF cooler hoses (A) from the CVTF
separate the tie-rod end ball joints (C) from both cooler pipes (B), then plug the CVTF cooler hoses and
knuckles (D) (see page 18-11). the pipes.
c
A B D
Replace. 42. Remove the bolt (C) and the CVTF filter (D) with the
CVTF filter holder, then hang the CVTF filter on body.
40. Remove the harness clamp (A) from the clamp
. bracket (B), then disconnect the EPS m otor 3P 43. Remove the secondary H02S harness clamp (A) from
connector (C), the torque sensor 6P connector (D), and the clamp bracket (B) on the steering gearbox.
the EPS m otor angle sensor 8P connector (E).
G &
44. Remove the torque rod bolt (A) from the 48. Remove the driveshaft cover (A).
transmission.
A
49. Remove the torque rod bracket (A).
45.- Remove the torque rod nut (B) and bolt (C) from the
front subframe, and remove-the lower torque rod (D).
NOTE: Make sure the tab (E) on the bolt head aligned
w ith the guide (F) on the front subframe.
46. Support the front subframe w ith a piece of wood and
a jack.
47. Remove the si x bolts (A) securing the front subframe
(B), then remove the subframe with the steering
gearbox (C).
,i\
U U /j '
A
Replace.
(cont'd)
50. Remove the left and right driveshafts (A) from the 53. Remove the flywheel assembly (A) with the rubber
differential (see step 8 on page 16-5). Coat all sealing ring (B) and the two dowel pins (C).
precision machined surfaces with clean engine oil,
then put plastic bags over driveshaft ends and hang
the driveshafts on the body.
54. Check the drive plate and the flywheel support for
wear or damage, and replace the drive plate and the
flywheel support (see page 14-165) if necessary.
NOTE;
The motor rotor contains very strong magnets and
should be handled with special care.
51. Remove the rear and lower transmission housing Keep pieces of metal and all foreign particles out of
mounting bolts (A). the motor rotor during the transmission removal.
Keep the motor rotor away from magnetically
A
sensitive devices.
Do not blow air near the rotor, as metal particles
may get on the magnets.
52. S lide the transmission away from the engine/IMA

motor to remove the transmission from the vehicle.
Drive Plate Removal/Installation Transmission Installation
NOTE: Special Tools Required

The motor rotor contains very strong magnets and Engine Support Hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256*
should be handled with special care. Engine Hanger Adapter VSB02C000026*
Extra special care must be taken on the installation of Universal Lifting Eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120
the drive plate, it may suddenly be pulled toward the *Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
motor with great force causing serious hand or finger Program 888-424-6857
injury, or damaged components.
Keep pieces of metal and all foreign particles out of NOTE:
the motor rotor during the transmission removal. Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
Keep the motor rotor away from magnetically surfaces.
sensitive devices. IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a
Do not blow air near the rotor, as metal particles may high-voltage system. You must be familiar with the
get on the magnets. IMA system before working on or around it. Make sure
IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a you have read the IMA service precaution before
high-voltage system. You must be familiar with the doing repairs or service (see page 12-3).
1. Clean the CVTF cooler (see page 14-175).
doing repairs or service (see page 12-3). 2. Remove the used grease in the flywheel hub cap (A)
and the flywheel splines (B).
1. Remove the transmission assembly (see page
14-156).
2. Remove the flywheel support (A) and the drive plate
(B).
3. Fill the inside of the flywheel hub cap with about

1.02.0 g (0.0350.071 oz.) of Super High Temp Urea
Grease (P/N 08798-9002), and coat the flywheel hub
splines. Do not overfill the flywheel hub cap with
grease.
3. Inspect the drive plate and the flywheel support, and

replace it if it is damaged.
4. Install the drive plate and the flywheel support on the
motor rotor (C), and install the bolts, tighten them to
the specified torque in a crisscross pattern in at least
two or three steps.
5. Install the transmission assembly (see page 14-165).
(cont'd)
4. Install a new rubber sealing ring (A) on the input shaft 8. Install a new set ring (A) on the left and right
(B). driveshafts (B).
9. Clean the areas where the left and right driveshafts

contacts the transmission (differential) with solvent,
and dry with compressed air. Then install the left and
right driveshafts (see step 2 on page 16-19); be sure
Replace.
not to allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the
5. Install the flywheel (C) on the input shaft, and install transmission. Turn the steering knuckle fully outward,
the two dowel pins (D) in the flywheel housing (E). and slide the driveshafts into the differential until you
feel their set rings fully engage the side gear.
6. Place the transmission on a jack, and raise the
transmission to the engine level, then fit the 10. Install the torque rod bracket (A).
transmission to the engine/IMA motor.
7. Install the rear and lower transmission housing
mounting bolts (A).
12 x 1.25 mm 12 x 1.25 mm
4 N-m (6.5 kgf-m, 47 I bf-ft) 64 N-m
(6.5 kgf-m,
47 Ibf ft)
11. Install the driveshaft cover (A). 14. Place a jack under the transmission, raise it, and
attach the torque rod (A) to ther mounting bracket (B)
8x1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf m, 16 ibfft) and the front subframe (C).
NOTE: Make sure the "UP" mark (D) of the torque rod
faces up when you install it.
12. Support the front subframe (A) with a piece of wood

(B) and a jack, then lift the front subframe up to body.
A 15. Install the mounting bolt (E), and set the tab (F) on the
bolt head into the stop (G) through the guide (H), then
loosely install the new nut (I).
16. Loosely install the new mounting bolt (J).
NOTE: Tighten the bolt/nut in the numbered sequence
shown to the specified torque in step 32.
17. Remove the jack.
* \
13. Check and adjust the front subframe alignment (see

page 20-173).
18. Install the secondary H02S harness clamp (A) to the 21. Connect the EPS motor 3P connector (A), the torque
clamp bracket (B) on the steering gearbox. sensor 6P connector (B), and the EPS motor angle
sensor 8P connector (C), then install the harness
clamp (D) to the clamp bracket (E).
20. Connect the CVTF cooler hoses (B) to the CVTF cooler
pipes (C), and secure the hoses with the clips (D) (see
page 14-178).
22. Connect the ball joints (A) to both knuckles (B), and 24. Install the tie-rod end ball joints (A) to both knuckles
loosely install the new ball joint nuts (C). (B), then install a new cotter pins (C) in the direction
shown.
Replace. 54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 I bf-ft)
25. Install the upper and front transmission housing

23. Connect the stabilizer links (D) to both stabilizer ends mounting bolts (A).
(E), and install the new nuts (F). Insert a 5 mm hex
wrench (G) in the top of the ball joint pins (H), and
tighten the nuts. Raise the suspension to load it with
the vehicle weight before fully tightening ball joint
nuts to the specified torque values, then secure the
nuts with the lock pins (I).
(cont'd)
26. Install the transmission mount bracket (A), then 29. Remove the universal lifting eyelet and the spacer (A).
loosely install the new bolts/nuts (B).
07AAK-SNAA120
NOTE: Tighten the bolts/nuts to the specified torque
in step 31.
30. Loosen the side engine mount/bracket nuts (A), then

retighten it to the specified torque.
27. Install the ground cable terminal bracket (C).

28. Remove the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256) and
the engine hanger adapter (VSB02C000026).
93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)
31. Tighten the bolts/nuts of the transmission mount

bracket to the specified torque.
32. Tighten the bolt/nut of the torque rod to the specified
torque.
33. Install the drive plate bolts (A) (six) at the opening of 36. Secure the shift cable holder (A) on the transmission
the starter while rotating the engine crankshaft pulley. with the bolts.
8 x 1.25 mm 8 x 1.25 mm
6 x 1 .0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 9 Ibf-ft)
34. Install the starter (A).
37. Install the clamp bracket (B).

38. Apply molybdenum grease to the hole in the shift
cable end collar (A). Attach the shift cable end (B) to
the selector control lever (C). Insert the control pin (D)
through the selector control lever hole (E)r through
the shift cable end collar hole (F), and into the selector
control lever slotted hole (G) in the direction shown.
Push the control pin until its flange (H) contacts the
35. Install the hose clamp (B) to the clamp bracket (C).
39. Insert the lock pin (I) in the direction shown through
control pin.
(cont'd)
40. Install the harness cover (A) to the clamp bracket (B), 44. Connect the IMA motor power cable connector (A).
and install the harness holder (C) on the clamp
NOTE: Before connecting the IMA motor power cable
bracket ( D ) .
connector, make sure you have read the IMA service
A E B G precaution (see page 12-3).

(E), the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor
3P connector (F), and the vehicle speed sensor 3P
connector (G).
42. Install the clamp bracket (A), then install the harness
holder (B) on the clamp bracket. 45. Install the IMA motor power cable clamp (B) on the
clamp bracket (C).
46. Install the harness clamp (A) on the clamp bracket (B)
of the battery base.
47. Install the PCM bracket with the PCM (A), secure the 50. Connect PCM connectors A, B, and C.
bolts (B).
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols
(A=Q, B =^, C =0) embossed on them for
identification.
48. Install auxiliary under-hood relay box A (C) to the

clamp bracket (D) of the PCM bracket.
49. Install the harness clamp (E) to the clamp bracket (F),
and install the harness clamps (G) to the clamp
bracket (H) of the PCM bracket.
51. Install the PCM cover (D).

52. Install the starter cable (A), and connect the S terminal 60. Install the splash shield (A) (see page 20-163).
connector (B).
-> ..
C>
53. Install the harness clamps (C) on the clamp brackets

V A
(D), and install the starter harness (E) in the harness

clamp (F) of the battery tray. 61. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift the
transmission through all positions three times.
20-149). 62. Check the shift lever operation, the A/T gear position
indicator operation, and the shift cable adjustment
55. Install the air cleaner (see page 9-3). (see page 14-193).
56. Remove the steering wheel holder tool, then install 63. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment (see page
the steering joint to the steering gearbox pinion shaft, 18-5).
and the steering joint cover (see step 23 on page
17-71). 64. Start the engine with the shift lever in P or N, and
warm it up to normal operating temperature (the
57. Do the 12 volt battery installation procedure (see page radiator fan comes on twice). Turn the engine off, and
22-87). check the CVT fluid level (see page 14-153).
58. Turn the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). 65. After the transmission is disassembled or replaced,
59. Refill the transmission with CVTF (see step 9 on page reset the PCM/TCM with the HDS (see page 14-7), then
14-155). do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-274).
66. Do the start clutch pressure control calibration
procedures (see page 14-150).
67. If the IMA battery level indicator displays no level,
apply the parking brake, then start the engine with the
shift lever in P or N, and hold it between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm without load until the level in the indicator
is half full.
68. Road test the vehicle (see page 14-132).
CVTF 9oier Cleaning
Special Tools Required 2. Plug the cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded
. ATF Cooler Cleaner GHTTTCF6H* electrical outlet.
Magnetic Nonbypass Spin-On Filter GTHGNBP2*
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment iim q tic e I
Program 888-424-6857 Make sure the outlet has no other appliances (light
fixtures, drop lights, extension cords) plugged into it.
NOTE; Also, never plug the cooler cleaner into an extension
cord or drop light; you could damage the unit.
Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured
CVT, you must thoroughly clean the CVTF cooler to
prevent system contamination. Failure to do so could
cause a repeat CVT failure.
The cleaning procedure involves heated CVTF
delivered under high pressure (100 psi). Check the
security of all hoses and connections. Always wear
safety glasses or a face shield, along with gloves and
protective clothing, if you get CVTF in your eyes or on
your skin, rinse with water immediately.
H H m r a H
Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result in
burns and other serious injuries.
Always wear eye protection and protective
clothing, and follow this procedure. 3. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to ON; the green indicator
above the toggle switch comes on. Wait 1 hour for the
1. Check the fluid in the cooler cleaner tank. (The fluid cooler cleaner to reach its operating temperature.
level should be 4.5 inches from the top of the filler (The cooler cleaner is ready to use when the
neck.) Adjust the level if needed; do not overfill. Use temperature gauge reads 140 F to 150 F.)
only Honda CVTF; do not use any additives.
NOTE: If the red indicator above the HEAT toggle
switch comes on, the fluid level in the tank is too low
for the tank heater to work (see step 1 of this
procedure).
(cont'd)
CVTF Cooler Cleaning (cont'd)
4. Select the appropriate pair of fittings, and attach them 8. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON; the green
to the radiator, to the hoses, or to the banjo bolts for indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Let the
flow through the ATF cooler cleaner. pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running,
open and close the air purge valve periodically to
TO HOSE TO BANJO BOLT cause agitation and improve the cleaning process.
Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the
TO RADIATOR 5-minute cleaning period, leave the air purge valve
open.
NOTE: While the pump is running with the air purge
valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming from the
filler/breather tube vents.
COOLER CLEANER
5. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the line
that normally goes to the external filter on the
transmission).
6. Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line.
9. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR toggle
7. Connect a shop air hose (regulated to 100 to 125 psi) switch to OFF; the green indicator goes off. Leave the
to the air purge valve. air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge
the lines and hoses of residual CVTF, then close the
INOTICE I valve.
The quick-connect fitting has a one-way check valve
10. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the CVTF
to keep CVTF from entering your shop's air system.
cooler. Now connect the red hose to the cooler inlet
Do not remove or replace the fitting. Attach the
line.
coupler provided with the cooler cleaner to your shop
air line if your coupler is not compatible. 11. Now connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line.
12. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the pump
run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open
and close the air purge valve periodically. Always
open the valve slowly. At the end of the 5-minute
cleaning period, leave the air purge valve open.
NOTE: While the pump is running with the air purge
valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming from the
filler/breather tube vents.
13. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR toggle
switch to OFF. Leave the air purge valve open for at
least 15 seconds to purge the lines and hoses of
residual CVTF, then close the valve.
14. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the CVTF
cooler lines.
15. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other.
16. Disconnect the shop air from the air purge valve.
Disconnect and stow the coupler if used.
17. Disconnect and stow the fittings from the CVTF cooler
inlet and outlet lines.
18. Unplug the cooler cleaner from the 110 V outlet.
Tool Maintenance
Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner
working properly:
Replace the two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters
after every 20 hours of use, based on the hour-meter,
or when you notice a restriction in the flow.
Check the level and condition of the fluid in the tank
before each use.
Replace the CVTF in the tank when it looks dark or
dirty.
FILLER CAP
HEATER
MAGNETIC NONBYPASS
SPIN-ON FILTER
CVTF Cooler Hose Replacement
Exploded View
NOTE: When installing the hose clamps, make sure they do not interfere with the surrounding parts.
1. Install the CVTF cooler hoses over the CVTF cooler lines with the clips at appropriate points in reference to the
following list.
Point Distance from Hose End to Clip (G) Hose End Contact Point
A
2 4 mm (0.08 0.16 in) CVTF Filter Housing from 57 mm (0.200.28 in)
B
C Pipe Bracket
6 - 8 mm (0.24-0.31 in)
D
E Bulge
2 4 mm (0.08 0.16 in)
F
2. Check the CVT fluid level (see page 14-153). Refill the transmission with CVTF if necessary.
CVTF Filter Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking brake, 5. Disconnect the CVTF cooler hoses (A) from the CVTF
block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the filter (B).
vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported.
C
3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the CVTF.

6. Remove the bolt (C) and the CVTF filter bracket (D),
NOTE:
then remove the CVTF filter.
of the drain plug. 7. Secure the new CVTF filter on holder bracket (E) with
If a cooler cleaning is necessary, refer to the CVTF the CVTF filter holder and the bolt.
cooler cleaning (see page 14-175). 8. Slide the CVTF cooler hoses with the hose clips on the
CVTF filter (see page 14-178).
B
9. Refill the transmission with CVTF to the proper level
(cont'd)
CVTF Filter Replacement (cont'd) Shift Lever Removal
10. Install the splash shield (A) (see page 20-163). 1. Remove the center console (see page 20-79).
2. Apply the parking brake, and move the shift lever to N
(A ).
, &
a
3. Remove the nut (B) securing the shift cable end (C).
Shift Lever Installation
4, Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) - 1. Install the shift lever assembly (A).
counterclockwise (C) a quarter turn; the corner (D) on
the socket holde: 9/9 9 9$the openi ng (E) of the shift
8 x 1.25 m m 8x1.25 mm
lever bracket raze ' 9 . Yr.=n slide the socket holder to 22 N-m 22 N-m (2.2 kgfm, 16 I bf-ft)
remove the shift os'i-ta vrc-rn the shift lever bracket (2.2 kgf-m,
base. Do not remove the shift cable by pul l ing the shift 18 Ibf-ft)
cable guide (G). . . : . .
2. Install the harness clamp (B) to the shift lever bracket

base (C), and connect the park pin switch/shift lock
5. Remove the hsniass clamp (A) from the shift lever solenoid/A/T gear position indicator panel light 6P
bracket base (S), and disconnect the park pin connector (D).
switch/shift lock solenoid/A/T gear position indicator 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
panel light-6P connector (C). . N indicator comes on (A).
99
8. Remove the bolts (D) and the shift l ever assembly (E).
(cont'd)
Shift Lever Installatio n (cont'd)
4. If necessary, push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then 8. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) to
release it. Pull the shift cable back two steps so that place the corner (C) on the holder opposite the
the shift position is in N. Do not hold the shift cable opening (D) in the shift lever bracket base (E). Align
guide (B) to adjust the shift cable. the socket holder with the opening in the bracket, then
slide the socket holder into the shift lever bracket
base. Rotate the socket holder clockwise (F) a quarter
turn until the socket holder stops to secure the shift
cable. Install the shift cable end (G) overthe mounting
stud (H) by aligning its square hole with the square
fitting (I) at the bottom of the stud.
c ,
\ I

6. Place the shift lever in N (A), then insert a 6 mm (0.24 On .
in) pin (B) into the positioning holes (C) on the shift
> lever bracket base and into the positioning hole on the
shift lever. Use only the 6 mm (0.24 in) pin that is free
of burrs.
C B
7. Check that the shift lever is secured in N.

9. Make sure the shift cable end (A) is properly installed 10. Secure the shift cable end with the nut (A).
on the mounting stud (B).
If the shift cable end is out of position with the A
mounting stud, remove the shift cable from the shift 8 x 1.25 nun
cable bracket then reinstall the cable end over the
mounting stud before reinstalling the shift cable to
the shift cable bracket. Do not install the shift cable
end on the mounting stud with the shift cable install
on the shift cable bracket.
If the cable end does not ride at the bottom of the
mounting stud, rotate the stud to align the square
fitting with the hole.
Properly installed:
Shift cable end rides on the bottom
of the mounting stud.
11. Remove the 6 mm (0.24 in) pin (B) that was installed to
hold the shift lever.
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Move the shift lever
to each position, and check that the A/T gear position
Improperly installed: indicator follows the transmission range switch.
Shift cable end out of position 13. Shift the shift lever to P, and check that the shift lock
with mounting stud.
works properly. Push the shift lock release, and check
that the shift lever releases, and also check that the
(
L shift lever locks when it is shifted back into P.
Shift cabl e end out of alignment

with the mounti ng stud.
14183
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE:
Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the terminal part of the connectors and switches, especially if you have
silicone grease on your hands or gloves.
Do not wipe off the grease that is applied to the portion of the shift lever marked with an asterisk ( * ) when you
disassemble or assemble it because a special grease is used.
SHIFT LEVER KNOB
SHIFT LEVER
KNOB COVER
A /T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
SCREW
2.5 N-m
(0.25 kgf-m, 1.8 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
LOCK PIN ROD
GREASfKl
SILICONE GREASE
LEVER COVER
A /T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT BULB
A /T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT SOCKET
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SPRING PLUNGER SPRING
GREASE^
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID PLUNGER
SILICONE GREASE
SHIFT LOCK STOP/ greaseM
SHIFT LOCK STOP
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE CUSHION SILICONE GREASE
<2
Shift Lever Bracket Base Shift Lever Knob Replacement
Replacement
1. Remove the shift lever assembly (see page 14-180). NOTE: Do not wipe off the grease that is applied to the
portion of the shi ft lever marked with an asterisk (*)
2. Remove the shift lever knob, the A/T gear position
when you disassemble or assemble it because a special
indicator panel, the park pin switch harness/shift lock
grease is used.
solenoid/A/T gear position indicator panel light
assembly, the shift lock release, the shift lock release 1. Wrap the end of a thin blade screwdriver with tape,
spring, and the shift lock stop/ shift lock stop cushion pry the shift lever knob cover (A), and remove it.
from the shift lever assembly (see page 14-184).
3. Replace the shift lever bracket base (A). B
2.5 N-m
NOTE; The park pin switch (B) is built into the shift (0.25 kgfm, 1.8 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
lever bracket base.
' m
2. Remove the screws (B) and the shift lever knob (C),
then replace the shift lever knob.
4. Install the shift lock stop/shift lock stop cushion, the 3. Install new screws to secure the shift lever knob to the
shift lock release spring, the shift lock release, the shift lever (D).
park pin switch harness/shift lock solenoid/A/T gear
4. Install the shift lever knob cover by pushing the shift
position indicator panel light assembly, the A/T gear
lever knob cover onto the shift lever knob securely.
position indicator panel, and the shift lever knob to
the shift lever bracket base (see page 14-184).
5. I nstall the shift lever assembly (see page 14-181).
Shift Cable Replacement
SRS components are located in this area..Review the 5. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the counterclockwise (C) a quarter turn; the corner (D) on
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before the socket holder will be in the opening (E) of the shift
doing repair or service. lever bracket base (F). Then slide the socket holder to
remove the shift cable from the shift lever bracket
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking brake,
base. Do not remove the shift cable by pulling the shift
-block rear wheels, and raise the front of the vehicle.
cable guide (G).
' Make sure it is secure l y supported.

(A).
( 'J p

7. Remove the IMA motor power cable clamp (A) from
the bracket (B).
4. Remove the nut (B) securing the shift cable end (C).
8. Disconnect the transmission range switch 8P 10. Remove the clamp bracket (A).
connector (A), the CVT output shaft (driven pulley)
speed sensor 3P connector (B), and the vehicle speed
F A G C
11. Remove the lock pin (B) and the control pin (C) from
the selector control lever (D).
9. Remove the harness holder (D) from the clamp
bracket (E), and remove the harness cover (F) from the
control lever. Check the shift cable end collar (G) for
clamp bracket (G).
wear or damage, and replace the shift cable (H) if
necessary.
GVT
Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)
13. Remove the heat shield (A), and the secondary H02S 14. Remove the nut securing the shift cable bracket (A).
harness clamp (B) from the clamp bracket (C) of the
heat shield, then remove the heat shield (D).
15. Remove the shift cable grommet (B), and pull out the
shift cable (C).
16. Insert a new shift cable through the grommet hole (D),
and install the grommet in its hole. Do not bend the
shift cable excessively. Then secure the shift cable
bracket with the nut.
17. Install the heat shield (A), then install the secondary 20. Apply molybdenum grease to the hole in the shift
H02S harness clamp (B) to the clamp bracket (C) of cable end collar (A). Attach the shift cable end (B) to
the heat shield (D) and the heat shield. the selector control lever (C). Insert the control pin (D)
through the selector control lever hole (E), through
the shift cable end collar hole (F), and into the selector
control lever slotted hole (G) in the direction shown.
Push the control pin until its flange (H) contacts the
21. I nsert the lock pin (I) in the direction shown through
control pin.
18. Secure the shift cable holder (A) on the transmission
with the bolts.
8 x 1.25 mm 8 x 1.25 mm
22. Install the harness cover (A) to the clamp bracket (B), 26. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
and install the harness holder (C) to the clamp bracket N indicator comes on (A).
(D).
27. I f necessary, push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then
release it. Pull the shift cable back two steps so that
23. Connect the transmission range switch 8P connector the shift position is in N. Do not hold the shift cable
(E), the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor guide (B) to adjust the shift cable.
3P connector (F), and the vehicle speed sensor 3P
connector (G).
24. Install the IMA motor power cable clamp (A) to the
clamp bracket (B).
N * R *P

29. Place the shift lever in N (A), then insert a 6 mm (0.24 31. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) to
in) pin (B) into the positioning holes (C) on the shift place the corner (C) on the holder opposite the
lever bracket base and into the positioning hole on the opening (D) in the shift lever bracket base (E). Align
shift lever. Use only the 6 mm (0.24 in) pin that is free the socket holder with the opening in the bracket, then
of burrs. slide the socket holder into the shift lever bracket
cable. Install the shift cable end (G) over the mounting
C B
(cont'd)
I f the shift cable end is out of position with the A
mounting stud, remove the shift cable from the shift 8 k 1.25 mm
cable bracket, then reinstall the cable end over the 22 N-m
the shift cable bracket. Do not install the shift cable
/
mounting stud, rotate the stud to align the square %
Properly installed:
Shift cable end rides on the bottom
/fR \
Improperly installed: indicator follows the transmission range switch.
Shi ft cable end out of position 36. Shift the shift lever to P, and check that the shift lock
with mounting stud.
/O i
L shift lever locks when it is shifted back into P.
Shift cable end out of alignment

with the mounting stud.
Shift Cable Adjustment
1. Remove the center console (see page 20-79). 4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)
counterclockwise (C) a quarter turn; the corner (D) on
the socket holder will be in the opening (E) of the shift
(A).
lever bracket base (F). Then slide the socket holder to
remove the shift cable from the shift lever bracket
base. Do not remove the shift cable by pulling the shift
cable guide (G).
5. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it.
Pull the shift cable back two steps so that the shift
3. Remove the nut (B) securing the shift cable end ().
position is in N. Do not hold the shift cable gui de (B) to
adjust the shift cable.
Shift Cable Adjustment (cont'd)
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the 10. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) to
N indicator comes on (A). place the corner (C) on the holder opposite the
opening (D) in the shift lever bracket base (E). Align
the socket holder with the opening in the bracket, then
slide the socket holder into the shift lever bracket
cable. Install the shift cable end (G) over the mounting
';
8. Place the shift lever in N (A), then insert a 6 mm (0.24
in) pin (B) into the positioning holes (C) on the shift
lever bracket base and into the positioning hole on the
shift lever. Use only the 6 mm (0.24 in) pin that is free
of burrs.

m
If the shift cable end is out of position with the A
mounting stud, remove the shift cable from the shift 8 x 1.25 mm
cable bracket, then reinstall the cable end over the 22 N-m
(2.2 kgfm , 16 Ibf-ft)
the shift cable bracket Do not install the shift cable
mounting stud, rotate the stud to align the square ^ 9 ...
Q>
P ro p e rly in stalled :
Shift cabl e end rides on the bottom
I k 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Move the shift lever
I m p ro p e rly in s ta ll ed: indicator follows the transmission range switch.
Shift cable end out of position 15. Shift the shift lever to P, and check that the shift lock
with mounting stud.
shift lever locks when it is shifted back into P.
f t p
Shift cable end out of alignment

with the mounting stud.
A /T GEAR POSITION I NDICATOR

F-CAN Circuit Troubleshoot i ng, page 11-376
Gauge Control Module Self-Diagnostic Function
Indicator Drive Circuit Check, page 22-325
PADDLE SHIFTER +
(UPSHIFT SWITCH)
Illumination Circuit
Troubleshooting, page 14-210

fJ
now
DATA LINK CONNECTOR iu R PANEL TRIM
iim u iu a
(DLC) Replacement, page 14-202
; / V 9 - : -9. 9 9 ^ 9
INDICATOR PANEL
PADDLE SHIFTER - Replacement, page 14-202
(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) A /T GEAR POSITION
Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-208 INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT
Illumination Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-211 Replacement, page 14-206
Replacement, page 14-213 A /T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PAP9 i ! i 9
HARNESS
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
Test, page 14-199
Circuit Diagram
U N D E R -D A S H FU SE/RELAY BOX
T erm in al side of fe m a le term ina ls

Transmission Range Switch Test
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 9-3). 5. Remove the transmission range switch (see page
14-200), and check the end of the selector control
shaft (A).
connector (A).
Selector Control Shaft Specifications
Width (B): 6.1 - 6 .2 mm {0.240-0.244 in)
End Gap (C): 1 .8-2.0 mm (0.071 -0.0 79 in)
A
3. Check for continuity between terminals at the

transmission range switch 8P connector (B). There
should be continuity between the terminals in each
switch position as shown in the following table. 6. If the measurement of the selector control shaft end is
within the standard, replace the transmission range
Transmission Range Switch 8P Connector switch (see page 14-200). If the measurement is out of
the standard, repair the selector control shaft end,
then install the transmission range switch (see page
Position/Connector Terminal/Signal Connection 14-200), and recheck the transmission range switch
1 2 3 45 6 7 8 continuity.
-- ATP _ATPP ATPN
ATPD GND ATPR FWD
P o -o
R o -o
|i|
IM O
vJ
D o - o - - o
4, The transmission range switch test is completed if the

test results are OK. If there is no continuity between
any terminals, go to step 5.
Transmission Range Switch Replacement
1. Apply the parking brake, and move the shift lever to N. 5. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N
position. If necessary, move the shift lever from P to
N.
NOTE: Do not use the selector control shaft to adjust
connector (A), and remove the control shaft cover (B).
the shift position. If the selector control shaft tips are
squeezed together it will cause a faulty signal or
position due to play between the selector control
shaft and the transmission range switch.
4. Remove the transmission range switch (C). 6. Set a new transmission range switch (A) to the N
position, align the cutouts (B) on the rotary-frame with
the neutral positioning cutouts (C) on the
transmission range switch. Then put a 2.0 mm
(0.079 in) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold
the transmission range switch in the N position.
NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.079 in) feeler gauge
blade or equivalent to hold the transmission range
switch in the N position.
7. I nstall the transmission range switch (A) gently on the 9. Install the selector control shaft cover (A) on the
selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N transmission range switch (B).
position with the 2.0 mm (0.079 in) feeler gauge blade
(C).
10. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or

repair if necessary, then connect the transmission
range switch 8P connector (C) securely.
through all positions, and check the transmission
range switch synchronization with the A/T gear
position indicator.
8. Tighten the bolts (A) on the transmission range switch
while you continue to hold the N position with the 2.0 12. Check that the engine will start with the shift lever in P
mm (0.079 in) feeler gauge blade (B). Do not move the and N, and will not start in any other shift lever
transmission range switch when tightening the bolts. position.
Then remove the 2.0 mm (0.079 in) feeler gauge 13. Check that the back-up lights come on when the shift
blade. lever is in R.
14. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking brake,
the front wheels to rotate freely.
15. Start the engine, and check the shift lever operation.
( 1.2 kgf-m,
9 Ib fft)
A /T Gear Position Indicator Panel A /T Gear Position Indicator Panel
Trim Replacement Replacement
1. Apply the parking brake, and move the shift lever to N. 1. Remove the center console (see page 20-79).
2. Wrap the end of a thin blade screwdriver with tape, 2. Apply the parking brake, and move the shift Iever to N.
and pry up the A/T gear position indicator panel trim
3. Remove the shift lever knob (see page 14-185).
(A) by releasing the six lock clips (B) from the center
console. 4. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light
socket (A).
3. Replace the A/T gear position indicator panel trim,

check the lock clips for wear and damage, and replace
them if necessary. .
4. Install the new A/T gear position indicator panel trim,
and push the lock clips into the hooks (C) securely.'
5. Wrap the end of a thin blade screwdriver with tape,
5. Shift the shift lever to P. and pry up the A/T gear position indicator panel (B) by
releasing the four locks (C) from the shift lever bracket
base (D).
6. Remove the lever cover (A) from the A/T gear position 12. Install the center console (see page 20-79).
indicator panel (B),
13. Shift the shift lever to P.
A
B
7. Check the lever cover for wear and damage, and

replace it if necessary.
8. Install the lever cover to the new A/T gear position
indicator panel.
9. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel (A) to the
shift lever bracket base (B), and push the locks (C) to
the hooks (D) securely.
\
D
' H
10. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light

socket (E).
11. Install the shift lever knob (see page 14-185).
A /T Gear Position Indicator Panel Light Harness Replacement
NOTE: 5. Release the lock tabs (A) retaining the shift lock
The A/T gear position indicator panel light harness is solenoid (B) using a thin blade screwdriver, then
contained in the park pin switch harness/shift lock remove the shift lock solenoid.
assembly.
gloves.
2. Apply the parking brake, and move the shift lever to N.
3. Remove the shift knob (see page 14-185).
4. Disconnect the park pin switch/shift lock solenoid/A/T
gear position indicator panel light 6P connector (A),
and remove the park pin switch/shift lock
solenoid/A/T gear position indicator panel light 6P
connector clamp (B) from the shift lever bracket base.
6. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel (A) from 8. Install the shift lock solenoid (A) by aligning the joint
the shift lever bracket base (B) (see page 14-202), then of the shift lock solenoid plunger (B) with the tip of the
disconnect the park pin switch 2P connector (C), and shift lock stop (C), then push the shift lock solenoid
remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light into the shift lever bracket base securely.
socket (D).
9. Connect the park pin switch 2P connector (D), install

7. Remove the harness (E) from harness guides (F), then the A/T gear position indicator panel light socket (E),
replace the park pin switch harness/shift lock and install the harness (F) to the harness guides (G).
solenoid/A/T gear position indicator panel light Then install the A/T gear position indicator panel (H)
assembly. Check the A/T gear position indicator panel to the shift lever bracket base (I ) (see page 14-202).
light bulb (G), and replace it if necessary.
(cont'd)
A /T Gear Position Indicator Panel A /T Gear Position Indicator Panel
Light Harness Replacement (cont'd) Light Replacement
10. Connect the park pin switch/shift lock solenoid/A/T 1. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel trim
gear position indicator panel light 6P connector (A), (see page 14-202).
and install the park pin switch/shift lock solenoid/A/T
2. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light
gear position indicator panel light 6P connector clamp
socket (A), and replace the A/T gear position indicator
(B) to the shift lever bracket base.
panel light bulb (B).
3. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light

11. Install the shift knob (see page 14-185). socket (A).
12. Test the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-221).
4. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel trim (see

page 14-202).
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) Circuit Troubleshooting
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Check for continuity between paddle shifter +
SRS component (see page 24-11) locations and the (upshift switch) 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No.
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before 2 when pressing and releasing the paddle shifter +
doing repair or service. (upshift switch).
1. Remove the steeri ng wheel (see page 17-6).
PADDLE SHIFTER + (UPSHIFT SWITCH) 4P CONNECTOR
2. Check for continuity between cable reel connector C
(20P) terminals No. 4 and No. 19 when pressing and
releasing the paddle shifter + (upshift switch).
CABLE REEL CONNECTOR C (20P) SUPP (BLK) GND (BLK)
4 3 2 1
SUPP (YEL)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
GND (BLK) Terminal side of male terminals
I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y w h e n p r e s s i n g t h e p a d d l e s h i f t e r +
( u p s h if t s w i t c h ) a n d n o c o n t i n u it y w h e n t h e p a d d l e s h i f t e r
+ ( u p s h if t s w i t c h ) is r e l e a s e d ?
Wire side of female terminals YES-Replace the cable reel subharness.B
I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y w h e n p r e s s i n g t h e p a d d l e s h i f t e r + NO-Replace the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) (see
( u p s h if t s w i t c h ) a n d n o c o n t i n u it y w h e n t h e p a d d l e s h i f t e r page 14-213).
+ ( u p s h if t s w itc h ) is r e le a s e d ?
5. Remove the cable reel (see page 24-183).
YES-Go to step 5.
6. Check for continuity between cable reel connector A
NO-Go to step 3. (20P) terminal No. 9 and body ground.
3. Disconnect the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) 4P
connector. CABLE REEL CONNECTOR A (20P)
GND (BLK)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between cable reel
connector A (20P) terminal No. 9 and body ground
(G502), or repair poor body ground (G502).B
(cont'd)
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch)
Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) Circuit Troubleshooting
8. Measure the voltage between cable reel connector A SRS components are located in this area. Review the
(20P) terminals No. 5 and No. 9. SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before
doing repair or service.
CABLE REEL CONNECTOR A (20P)
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-6).
2. Check for continuity between cable reel connector C
(20P) terminals No. 3 and No. 19 when pressing and
SUPP (YEL)
GND (BLK) releasing the paddle shifter (downshift switch).
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CABLE REEL CONNECTOR C (20P)
CM
O
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1 2 11
SDNP (LT BLU)
Wire side of female terminals 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 1 3 1 2 11
I s there b a t t e r y v o l t a g e ?
GND (BLK)
YES-Replace the cable reel (see page 24-183).
NO-Go to step 9,
Wire si de of female term i nals
I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y w h e n p r e s s in g t h e p a d d l e s h i f t e r
11. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). ( d o w n s h if t s w i t c h ) a n d n o c o n t i n u it y w h e n t h e p a d d l e
12. Check for continuity between PCM connectorterminal s h i f t e r ( d o w n s h if t s w i t c h ) is r e l e a s e d ?
A30 and body ground. YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 3.
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
3. Disconnect the paddle shifter (downshift switch) 4P
connector.
s T ^ l
r r T ii I M I I .6 I 7
LI 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
I
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
13 6 137 3 8 | 3 9 | 40 j 4 1 142 4 3 | 4 4 |
SUPP (YEL)

connector terminal A30 and the cable reel connector
A (20P).B
NO-Check for loose or poor connections at PCM
connector terminal A30. If the connection is OK,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7) and
recheck.B
4. Checkfor continuity between paddle shifter 8. Measure the voltage between cable reel connector A
(downshift switch) 4P connector terminals No. 1 and (20P) terminals No. 6 and No. 9.
No. 2 when pressing and releasing the paddle shifter
(downshift switch). CABLE REEL CONNECTOR A (2.0P)
PADDLE SHI FTER - (DOWNSHIFT SW ITCH) 4P CONNECTOR
r- ~ i SDNP (LT GRN)

GND (BLK)
10 9 8 7 0 5 4 3 2 1
SDNP (BLK) GND (BLK)
20 19 18 17 10 15 14 13 12 11
2 1
Terminal side of male terminals Is th e r e b a tt e r y v o lta g e ?
YES-Replace the cable reel (see page 24-183).

I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y w h e n p r e s s i n g t h e p a d d l e s h i f t e r
( d o w n s h if t s w i t c h ) a n d n o c o n t i n u it y w h e n t h e p a d d l e NO-Go to step 9.
s h i f t e r ( d o w n s h if t s w i t c h ) is r e l e a s e d ?
YES-Replace the cable reel subharness.
NO-Replace the paddle shifter (downshift switch)
(see page 14-213). 11. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
5. Remove the cable reel (see page 24-183). 12. Checkfor continuity between PCM connectorterminal
A32 and body ground.
6. Check for continuity between cable reel connector A
(20P) terminal No. 9 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
CABLE REEL CONNECTOR A (20P)
f P T 2 ~ 3 r 4 I 5 fe I 7 a l s L
10 11 12 13 j 14 f 15 j16 17 18 19
GND (BLK) i
20 21 22 23 24 25
a E
26 27 28 29 )30(31 (32 33 34 35
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 836137 38 ] 39 [40 [ 4 142 43(44
...
CM
o
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 SDNP (LT GRN)
Wire side of female terminals I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ?
I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ? YES-Repair a short in the wire between PCM

connectorterminal A32 and the cable reel connector
YES-Go to step 7. A (20P).B
NO-Repair an open in the wire between cable reel NO-Check for loose or poor connections at PCM
connector A (20P) terminal No. 9 and body ground connector terminal A32. If the connection is OK,
(G502), or repair poor body ground (G502).H substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7) and
recheck.il
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) Illumination Circuit Troubleshooting
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 7. Check for continuity between paddle shifter +
SRS component (see page 24-11) locations and the (upshift switch) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before ground.
1. Remove the drivers airbag (see page 24-166). PADDLE SHIFTER + (UPSHIFT SWITCH) 4P CONNECTOR
2. Disconnect the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) 4P

connector.
3. Turn the lighting switch ON.
4. Measure the voltage between paddle shifter +
(upshift switch) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body
ground.
W ire side of fem a l e terminals
YES-Repair a short in the wire between paddle shifter

+ (upshift switch) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and
the under-dash fuse/relay box.H
NO-Go to step 9.
8. Turn the lighting switch OFF.
Wire side of female terminals 9. Check for continuity between paddle shifter +
(upshift switch) 4Pconnectorterminal No. 3 and body
Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ? ground.
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Checkfor blown No. B29 (10A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is th e fu s e O K ?
YES-Repair an open in the wire between paddle

shifter + (upshiftswitch) 4Pconnectorterminal No. 4
and the under-dash fuse/relay box.H
NO-Go to step 7.

+ (upshift switch) 4Pconnectorterminal No. 3 and
the gauge control m odule,!
NO-Go to step 10.
Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch)
Illumination Circuit Troubleshooting
11. Check for continuity between paddle shifter + SRS components are located in this area. Review the
(upshift switch) 4P connector terminal No. 3 and SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the
gauge control module 32P connector terminal No. 16. precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR 1. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-166).
IL L - (WHT)
i-------------- r 2. Disconnect the paddle shifter (downshift switch) 4P
16| 15|14|13|12|11 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 | 4 3 I 2 1| connector.
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
3. Turn the lighting switch ON.
4. Measure the voltage between paddle shifter
| PADDLE SHIFTER + (UPSHIFT (downshift switch) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and
SWITCH) 4P CONNECTOR
body ground.
[~4 | 3T2 f l l PADDLE SHIFTER - (DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) 4P CONNECTOR

- ...........1.ILL.(ILU )
Wire si de of fem al e terminals
YES-Check the illumination control circuit in the
rtrWii
ILL+ (RED)
gauge control module self-diagnostic function (see
page 22-325). If the test results are OK, replace the
paddle shifter + (upshift switch) (see page 14-213).
NO-Repair an open in the wire between paddle shifter
+ (upshift switch) 4P connector terminal No. 3 and
the gauge control module.H Wire side of female terminals
Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Check for blown No. B29 (10A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
YES-Repair an open in the wire between paddle

shifter (downshift switch) 4P connector terminal
No. 4 and the under-dash fuse/relay box.H
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch) Illumination Circuit Troubleshooting
(cont'd)
7. Check for continuity between paddle shifter 11. Check for continuity between paddle shifter
(downshift switch) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and (downshift switch) 4P connector terminal No. 3 and
body ground. gauge control module 32P connector terminal No. 16.
PADDLE SHIFTER - (DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) 4P CONNECTOR GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
16|15|14|13[12|11 10| 9 | 8 | 76 | 5 | 4 "3 | 2 1 |

|32|31|30|29|28|2:7|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
W i re side of female term i nals

ILL+ (RED)
PADDLE SHIFTER - (DOWNSHIFT
SWITCH) 4P CONNECTOR
IL L - (BLU)
W i re side of female terminal s Wire side of female terminals
Is t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ? is t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ?
YES-Repair a short in the wire between paddle shifter YES-Check the illumination control circuit in the
(downshift switch) 4P connector termina! No. 4 and gauge contro l module self-diagnostic function (see
the under-dash fuse/relay box.H page 22-325). If the test results are OK, replace the
paddle shifter (downshift switch) (see page
NO-Go to step 9.
14-213).M
NO-Repair an open in the wire between paddle shifter
9. Checkfor continuity between paddle shifter (downshift switch) 4P connector terminal No. 3 and
(downshift switch) 4P connectorterminal No. 3 and the gauge control module.
body ground.
PADDLE SHIFTER - (DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) 4P CONNECTOR

(downshift switch) 4P connector terminal No. 3 and
the gauge control module.
NO-Go to step 10.
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) or Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch)
Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Remove the screws (A) securing the paddle shifter +
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the (upshift switch) (B) or paddle shifter (downshift
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before switch) (C), then remove the paddle shifter + (upshift
doing repairs or service. switch) or paddle shifter (downshift switch), and
replace it with a new one.
1. Remove the steering wheel (seepage 17-6).
2. Remove the two screws (A) securing the steering
wheel rear cover (B), then remove the steering wheel
rear cover.
\
\
5. Install the new paddle shifter + (upshift switch) or

paddle shifter (downshift switch) on the steering
3. Remove the four screws (C) securing the steering
wheel, and secure it with the screws.
wheel trim assembly (D), and the ground cable (E).
And remove the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) 4P 6. Install the steering wheel trim assembly, and secure it
connector (F) and the paddle shifter (downshift with the four screws. Install the ground cable, connect
switch) 4P connector (G) from its holder. Disconnect the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) 4P connector and
the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) 4P connector and the paddle shifter (downshift switch) 4P connector,
the paddle shifter (downshift switch) 4P connector, then install the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) 4P
and then remove the steering wheel trim assembly. connector and the paddle shifter (downshift switch)
4P connector into its holder.
7. Install the steering wheel rear cover with the two
screws.
8 . Install the steering wheel (see page 17-8).
* ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR

Sensor S igna l Inspection, page 11-251
DATA LINK CONNECTOR

(DLC)
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID

Key Interlock System Circuit Troub l eshooting, page 22-96
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY TE R M IN A L
FUSE BOX U N D E R -D A S H F U SE/RE LAY BO X
3 A (44P)
T erm in al side of fem a le t erm inals

Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
1, Connect the HDS to the DLC-(A)- located under the 7. Select the Shift Lock Solenoid Test in the
driver's side ,of the dashboard,.- ; Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift
lock solenoid operates with the HDS.
Does the shift lock solenoid work properly?
YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), and recheck. If the
symptom goes away with a known-good PCM,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-209).B
NO-Go to step 8.
gear position indicator panel l ight 6P connector.
12. Measure the voltage between park pin switch/shift
lock solenoid/A/T gear position indicator panel light
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II ). 6P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it

does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see PARK PIN SWITCH/SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID/
A /T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL
page 11-383). LIGHT 6P CONNECTOR
4. Check the Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor in IG1 (LT BLU)
the Data List with the HDS, Do not press the
accelerator.
2 _E==L 1
6 5 4 3
I s t h e A P P Sensor opening 5 % o r a b o v e , o r i s t h e A P P U---
S e n s o r A v o lta g e 1 .1 6 V o r a b o v e ?
YES-Check the APP sensor..(see page 11 -251 ) .

NO-Go to step 5.
5. Check the Brake Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T Wire side of female terminals
Data List while pressing the brake pedal, and when
the brake pedal is released. Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o l t a g e ?
D o e s t h e brake pedal p o s it io n s w i t c h w o r k p r o p e r l y ? YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch 13. Check for blown No. B22 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash
signal circuit (see page 11 -2 7 2 ). - fuse/relay box.
6. Check the A/T P Switch signal with the HDS in the A/T Is the fuse O K ?
Data List. The shift lever must be in P.
YES-Repair an open in the wire between park pin
Is t h e A/T P Switch ON? switch/shift lock solenoid/A/T gear position indicator
panel light 6Pconnector terminal No. 2 and the
YES-Go to step 7.
under-dash fuse/relay box.ll
NO-Go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
15. Check for continuity between park pin switch/shift 17. Measure the voltage between park pin switch/shift
lock solenoid/A/T gear position indicator panel light lock solenoid/A/T gear position indicator panel light
6P connectorterminal No. 2 and body ground. 6P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 6 while pressing
the brake pedal.
PARK PIN SW ITCH/SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID/
A /T GEAR POSIT ION INDICATOR PANEL PARK PIN SW ITCH/SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID/
LIGHT 6P CONNECTOR A /T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL
IG1 {LT BLU) LIGHT 6P CONNECTOR
2 p=l T
IG1 (LT BLU)
6 5 4 3
u. L
.u
2 F = l. 1
6 5 4 3
y y
SLS (GRY)
W ire si de of female term i nals

YES-Repair a short in the wire between park pin
switch/shift lock solenoid/A/T gear position indicator YES-Go to step 18.
panel light 6P connector terminal No. 2 and the
under-dash fuse/relay box.ll NO-Go to step 19.
NO-Check for a short in the wire between park pin

switch/shift lock solenoid/A/T gear position indicator
panel light 6P connector terminal No. 2 and the shift
lock solenoid, and repair it if necessary. If the wire is
OK, replace the shift lock solenoid (see page
14-221 ) .
16. Shift the shift lever to P, and press the brake pedal. Do
not press the accelerator.
18. Release the brake pedal, and measure the voltage 22. Checkfor continuity between PCM connectorterm i nal
between park pin switch/shift lock solenoid/A/T gear A27 and park pin switch/shift lock solenoid/A/T gear
position indicator panel light 6P connector terminals position indicator panel light 6P connector terminal
No. 2 and No. 6. The shift lever must be in P. No. 6.
PARK PIN SWITCH/SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID/ PARK PIN SW ITCH/ PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
A /T GEAR POSITION INDI CATOR PANEL SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID/
LIGHT 6P CONNECTOR A /T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT 6P CONNECTOR
IG1 (LT BLU)
6 5 4 3
SLS (GRY)
Wire side of Terminal side of

Wire side of female terminals female terminals female terminals
Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ? I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ?
YES-Repair a short in the wire between park pin YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
switch/shift lock solenoid/A/T gear position indicator software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
panel light 6P connectorterminal No. 6 and the PCM known-good PCM (see page 11-7), and recheck. If the
connector.H symptom goes away with a known-good PCM,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-209J.B
NO-Check for a short or an open in the wire between
the park pin switch/shift lock solenoid/A/T gear NO-Repair an open in the wire between PCM
position indicator panel light 6P connector and the connector terminal A27 and the park pin switch/shift
shift lock solenoid, and check the shift lock lock solenoid/A/T gear position indicator panel light
mechanism, and repair them if necessary. If they are 6P connector.H
OK, replace the shift lock solenoid (see page
14-221 ) M
connector.
21. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
26. Measure the voltage between transmission range 31. Checkfor continuity between PCM connectorterminal
switch 8P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 7. B13 and transmission range switch 8P connector
terminal No. 7.
TRANSMISSION RANGE SW I TCH 8P CONNECTOR
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
8P CONNECTOR
GND (BRN) ATPP (BLU/BLK)
4 3 2 1
8 | 9 |
i 1 12 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
8 7 6 5 |
10 11 12 13 14|15|16 17 18 19
IJ
4 3 2 1
ATPP (BLU/BLK) 20 21 22 23 24 25
8 7 6 5
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
| 3 6 | 37 3 8 ] 3 9 j4 0 | 4 1 |42 4 3 | 4 4 | ATPP
(BLU/BLK)
Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of Wire side of

female terminals female terminals
Is th e r e b a tt e r y v o lta g e ?
YES-Go to step 27.
YES-Go to step 32.
NO-Go to step 28.
27. Test the transmission range switch (see page 14-199).
connector terminal B13 and the transmission range
I s t h e t r a n s m i s s io n r a n g e s w i t c h O K ? switch 8P connector.il
YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest 32. Check for continuity between transmission range
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a switch 8P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
symptom goes away with a known-good PCM, TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH 8P CONNECTOR
replace the original PCM (see page 11-209).
NO-Replace the transmission range switch (see page
14-200).11 GND (BRN)
28. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5
YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

symptom goes away with a known-good PCM,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-209).
Shift Lock Solenoid Test Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the NOTE:
driver's side of the dashboard. The shift lock solenoid is contained in the park pin
switch harness/shift lock solenoid/A/T gear position
indicator panel light assembly.
terminal part of the connectors and swi tches,
gloves.
2. Apply the parking brake, and move the shift lever to N.
3. Remove the shift knob (see page 14-185).
gear position indicator panel light 6P connector (A),
and remove the park pin switch/shift lock
solenoid/A/T gear position indicator panel light 6P
connector clamp (B) from the shift lever bracket base.
A

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If it
page 11-383).
4. Select the Shift Lock Solenoid Test in the
Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift
lock solenoid operates with the HDS.
5. Make sure that the shift lever can be moved out of P
when Shift Lock Solenoid : ON. Move the shift lever
back in P, and make sure it locks with Shift Lock
B
Solenoid : OFF.
6. Make sure that the shift lock releases when the shift
lock release is pushed, and make sure it locks when
the shift lock release is released.
7. I f shift lock solenoid does not work properly,
troubleshoot shift lock system (see page 14-217).
S hift Lock Solenoid Replacement (cont'd)
5. Release the lock tabs (A) retaining the shift lock 6. Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel (A) from
solenoid (B) using a thin blade screwdriver, then the shift lever bracket base (B) (see page 14-202), then
remove the shift lock solenoid. disconnect the park pin switch 2P connector (C), and
remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light
socket (D).
7. Remove the harness (E) from harness guides (F), then

replace the park pin switch harness/shift lock
assembly. Check the A/T gear position indicator panel
light bulb (G), and replace it if necessary.
8. Install the shift lock solenoid (A) by aligning the joint 10. Connect the park pin switch/shift lock solenoid/A/T
of the shift lock solenoid plunger (B) with the tip of the gear position indicator panel light 6P connector (A),
shift lock stop (C), then push the shift lock solenoid and install the park pin switch/shift lock solenoid/A/T
into the shift lever bracket base securely. gear position indicator panel light 6P connector clamp
(B) to the shift lever bracket base.
H
fGREASEKl .
SILICONE GREASE -
Wm
[GREASEK
SILICONE GREASE
11. Install the shift knob (see page 14-185).

12. Test the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-221).
' 9 - 13. Install the center console (see page 20-79).
9. Connect the park pin switch 2P connector (D), install
the A/T gear position indicator panel light socket (E),
and install the harness (F) to the harness guides (G).
Then install the A/T gear position indicator panel (H)
to the shift lever bracket base (I) (see page 14-202).
Shift Lock Stop/Shift Lock Stop Cushion Replacement
'NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on: the 4. Remove the shift lock stop/stop cushion (A), and
terminal part of the connectors and switches, especially replace them as an assembly.
if you have silicone grease on your hands or gloves.
\ g re a s e K I
2. Release the lock tabs (A) retaining the shift lock SILICONE GREASE .
solenoid (B) using thin blade screwdriver, then \
remove the shift lock solenoid.
5. Install the shift lock solenoid (A) by aligning the joint

of the shift lock solenoid plunger (B) with the tip of the
shift lock stop (C), then push the shift lock solenoid
into the shift lever bracket base securely.
GREASEnl
SILICONE GREASE
3. Disconnect the park pin switch 2P connector (A).
SILICONE
GREASE
9^9*
V
A
6 . Connect the park pin switch 2P connector (D).
V
U
Shift Lock Release/Release Spring Park Pin Switch Replacement
Replacement
NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the NOTE: The park pin switch is contained in the shift lever
terminal part of the connectors and switches, especially bracket base, and not available separately from the shift
if you have silicone grease on your hands or gloves. lever bracket base.
1. Remove the center console (see page 20-79). 1. Replace the shift lever bracket base (see page 14-185).
2. Wrap the end of a thin blade screwdriver with tape,
and pry up the A/T gear position indicator panel (A) by
releasing the four locks (B) from the shift lever bracket
base (C), and move the indicator panel up.
\ GREASEMI
SILICONE GREASE
3. Remove the shift lock release (D).

4. Remove the release spring (A) from the shift lock
release (B), and replace the shift lock release or the
release spring.
5. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel on the

shift lever bracket base.
Transmission Disassembly

Start Clutch Remover 07TAE-P4V0120
Reverse Brake Spring Compressor 07TAE-P4V0110
1. Remove the CVTF pan (A) (eighteen bolts), the two dowel pins (B), and the gasket (C).
2. Remove the CVTF strainer (D) (two bolts).

3. Remove the eight bolts securing the lower valve body (E), and hold the lower valve body.
4. Remove the bolt securing the solenoid wire harness 7P connector (F), then remove the lower valve body, the two
CVTF pipes (G), and the solenoid wire harness 7P connector from the transmission housing.
5. Remove the CVTF magnets (H), and clean and reinstall them in the CVTF pan.
6. Remove the O-ring (I) from the CVTF strainer, and remove the O-ring (J) from the solenoid wire harness 7P connector.
7. Clean the inlet opening (K) of the CVTF strainer thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it is in good condition
and that the inlet opening is not clogged.
8. Test the CVTF strainer by pouring clean CVTF through the inlet opening, and replace it if it is clogged or damaged.
< &
9. Turn the transmission end cover down.

10. Remove the flywheel housing (A) (nineteen bolts), the three dowel pins (B), and the gasket (C).
11. Remove the differential assembly (D).

12. Remove the CVTF passage pipe (E) (one bolt), the O-rings (F), and the lubrication pipe (G).
13. Remove the three bolts securing the CVTF pump drive sprocket (H), then remove the CVTF pump drive sprocket and
the CVTF pump drive chain (I).
14. Remove the snap ring (J) from the input shaft (K), then remove the thrust shim (L), the CVTF pump drive sprocket hub
(M), the thrust washer (N), the thrust needle bearing (O), and the thrust washer (P) from the input shaft.
15. Remove the snap ring (Q) securing the start clutch (R), then remove the cotter retainer (S) and the cotters (T).
16. Remove the transmission range switch (U) (two bolts) with the control shaft cover (V).
17. Remove the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor (W), the CVT output shaft (driven pull ey) speed sensor (X),
the vehicle speed sensor (Y), and the dipstick tube (Z) (each one bolt), and remove the O-rings (AA).
18. Remove the line bolts (AB) securing the CVTF cooler lines (AC), then remove the CVTF cooler lines and the sealing
washers (AD).
(cont'd)
19. Set the start clutch remover on the start clutch (A), 22. Remove the sealing ring (A) from the secondary
and attach the pawl (B) of the start clutch remover to drive/park gear (B), check it for rust, dirt, wear, or
the park gear (C) securely. Do not place the pawl of the damage, and clean or replace it if necessary; it will be
start clutch remover on the start clutch guide. If the reinstalled on a new secondary drive/park gear when
pawl contacts the start clutch guide, the clutch guide assembling the transmission.
may be damaged. Be sure not to allow dust and other
NOTE: The secondary drive/park gear must be
foreign particles to enter the driven pulley shaft.
replaced when disassembling the transmission.
20. Remove the start clutch (A) from the driven pulley
shaft.
23. Remove the park pawl shaft (A), and remove the park
pawl spring (B) and the park pawl (C).
24. Remove the thrust shim (D) and the final drive shaft
(E), then remove the secondary driven gear (F).
21. Remove the secondary drive/park gear from the start
25. Turn the transmission upside down, and set it on a
clutch.
workbench to prevent damaging to the input shaft
and the driven pulley shaft.
26. Remove the end cover (A) (sixteen bolts), the two 32. Remove the planetary carrier/input shaft assembly
dowel pins (B), and the gasket (C). (A), then remove the ring gear (B).
27. Remove the two CVTF feed pipes (D).

28. Remove the 10.9 x 18.6 mm CVTF feed pipe (E) from
the manual valve body (F).
29. Remove the manual valve body (five bolts), the detent
spring (G), the two dowel pins (H), and the separator
plate (I). 33. Remove the reverse brake snap ring (C), then remove
30. Remove the 8 mm CVTF pipe (J) and the 10.9 x 56 mm the reverse brake end-plate (D), the two brake discs
CVTF feed pipe (K). (E), the two brake plates (F), and the disc spring (G).
31. Remove the O-rings (L) of the CVTF feed pipes. 34. Remove the snap ring (H) securing the forward clutch
(I) to the drive pulley shaft (J), then remove the
forward clutch, the two O-rings (K), and the snap ring
retainer (L) from the drive pulley shaft.
(cont'd)
35. Install the reverse brake spring compressor to remove 37. Remove the snap ring (A) while compressing the
the snap ring securing the reverse brake return spring return spring.
retainer.
07TAE-P4V0110
38. Remove the reverse brake spring compressor, then

36. Compress the return spring using the reverse brake remove the spring retainer/return spring assembly
spring compressor. Be sure the reverse brake spring (B).
compressor is set over the reverse brake return
39. Apply air pressure to reverse brake pressure circuit
springs. hole (C) to remove the reverse brake piston (D), then
remove the O-rings (E) from the reverse brake piston.
40. Remove the roller (A).
41. Remove the intermediate housing (B), the two dowel

pins (C), and the gasket (D).
42. Remove the two 10.9 x 56 mm CVTF feed pipes (E)
and the O-rings (F).
Lower Valve Body
CVT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control
Valve Removal/Installation Solenoid Valve Removal/Installation
1. Disconnect the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid 1. Remove the solenoid wire harness clamp (A).
valve 2P connector (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m

2. Remove the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid solenoid valve 2P connector (B).
valve (B), the dowel pins (C), and the separator plate
3. Remove the seven bolts, and remove the CVT drive
(D).
pulley pressure control solenoid valve (C), the dowel
3. Check that the filter (E) is in good condition, replace it pins (D), and the separator plate (E). The CVT clutch
if it is clogged or damaged. pressure control solenoid valve (F), the dowel pins
(G), and the separator plate (H) can also be removed.
4. Install the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
with the two dowel pins and the separator plate on the 4. Check that the filters (I) are in good condition, replace
lower valve body (F). them if these are clogged or damaged.
5. Connect the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid 5. Install the CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid
valve 2P connector. valve with the two dowel pins, the separator plate, the
CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve with the
two dowel pins, and the separator plate on the lower
valve body (J).
6. Connect the CVT drive pulley pressure control
7. Install the solenoid wire harness clamp.
Lower Valve Body
CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control Inhibitor Solenoid

Solenoid Valve Removal/Installation Removal/Installation
1. Disconnect the CVT driven pulley pressure control 1. Disconnect the inhibitor solenoid 2P connector (A).
solenoid valve 2P connector (A) and the inhibitor
solenoid 2P connector (B).
2. Remove the inhibitor solenoid (B), then remove the

O-rings (C) from the inhibitor solenoid.
3. Install the two O-rings on the inhibitor solenoid, then
pressure control solenoid valve (D).
4. Connect the inhibitor solenoid 2P connector.
2. Remove the CVT driven pulley pressure control

solenoid valve (C), the dowel pins (D), and the
separator plate (E), and remove the inhibitor solenoid
(F) from the CVT driven pulley pressure control
solenoid valve.
3. Check that the filter (G) is in good condition, and
replace it if it is clogged or damaged.
4. Remove the two O-rings (H) from the inhibitor
solenoid.
5. Install the two O-rings on the inhibitor solenoid, then
pressure control solenoid valve.
6. Install the CVT driven pulley pressure control
solenoid valve with the two dowel pins and the
separator plate on the lower valve body (I).
7. Connect the CVT driven pulley pressure control
solenoid valve 2P connector and the inhibitor
solenoid 2P connector.
Flywheel Housing
Final Drive Shaft Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install the new bearing (A) into the flywheel housing
Adjustable Bearing Puller, 2540 mm 07736-A01000B using the 15 x 135L driver handle and the 62 x 68 mm
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000 bearing driver attachment
1. Remove the final drive shaft bearing (A) using the

2540 mm adjustable bearing puller and a
commercially available 3/8" 16 UNF slide hammer
(B).
2. Remove the oil guide plate (A), and checktheoil guide

plate for rust, dirt, wear, or damage, and clean or
replace it if necessary. Clean the hole (B) of the
flywheel housing, then install the oil guide plate.
Flywheel Housing
Input Shaft Oil Seal Replacement CVTF Feed Pipe/Feed Pipe Guide
Replacement
Special Tools Required 1. Remove the snap ring (A) from the flywheel housing
* Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000 on the CVTF feed pipe/feed pipe guide (B), then
Bearing Driver Attachment 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 remove the CVTF feed pipe/feed pipe guide.
1. Remove the input shaft oil seal from the flywheel

housing.
B
2. Install a new input shaft oil seal (A) to a depth of
2.53.5 mm (0.0380.138 in) (B) below the flywheel 2. Remove the feed pipe guide (A) from the CVTF feed
housing level (C) using the 15 x 135L driver handle pipe (B), and remove the O-rings (C) from the feed
and the 37 x 40 mm bearing driver attachment pipe guide.
3. Replace the CVTF feed pipe or the feed pipe guide,

then install new O-rings to the feed pipe guide.
4. Install the CVTF feed pipe through the feed pipe guide.
<3
5. Install the CVTF feed pipe/feed pipe guide (A) to the

flywheel housing by aligning the CVTF feed pipe tabs
(B) with the guides (C) on the flywheel housing.
c
6. After installing the CVTF feed pipe/feed pipe guide,
install and check that the snap ring is seated in the
feed pipe guide and the housing groove, and that the
ring end gap (A) is 5.4 mm (0.213 in) or more.
End Cover
CVTF Feed Pipe Replacement
1. Remove the two feed pipe flange plates (A), then 5. Install the CVTF feed pipe (A) through the feed pipe
remove the two CVTF feed pipes (B) and two feed pi pe flange (B) by aligning the CVTF feed pipe tabs (C) with
flanges (C) from the end cover (D). the guides (D) on the feed pipe flange.
NOTE: Replace the end cover if replacement of the
unremovable two CVTF feed pipes (E) is required.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m (1.2 kgf-m, 9 Ibf-ft)
6. Install the CVTF feed pipe over the unremovable CVTF

feed pipe (E), and align the mark (F) on the feed pipe
flange between the tabs (G) on the end cover.
7. Install the feed pipe flange plate.
2. Remove the O-rings (F) from the two CVTF feed pipes
and the two feed pipe flanges, then replace the two
CVTF feed pipes.
3. Check the two feed pipe flange plates and the two
feed pipe flanges for wear or damage, and replace
them if necessary.
4. Install new O-rings over two new CVTF feed pipes and
on the two feed pipe flanges.
CVTF Pump Sprocket/Chain Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the CVTF pump drive chain (A).
Snap Ring Pliers 07LGC-0010100
1. Expand the snap ring (A) under the CVTF pump

sprocket (B) using snap ring pliers, and remove the
CVTF pump sprocket from the CVTF pump.
3. Check the CVTF pump sprocket and the CVTF pump

drive chain for wear or damage, and replace them if
necessary.
4. Install the CVTF pump drive chain and the CVTF pump
sprocket.
5. After installing the CVTF pump sprocket, check that
the snap ring is seated in the CVTF pump sprocket and
the CVTF pump housing groove.
CVTF Pump Replacement Driven Pulley Shaft Bearing
NOTE: Replace the CVTF pump with assembly for Special Tools Required
nonresol ution parts. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 64 x 72 mm
1. Remove the CVTF pump drive chain and the CVTF
07JAD-PN00100
pump sprocket (see page 14-237).
Snap Ring Pliers 07LGC-0010100
2. Remove the three bolts securing the CVTF pump (A),
then remove the CVTF pump from the transmission 1. Expand the snap ring using snap ring pliers, then
housing. push the driven pulley shaft bearing (A) out using the
15 x 135L driver handle and the 64 x 72 mm oil seal
driver attachment. Do not remove the snap ring
unless it is necessary to clean the groove in the
3. Remove the 22x 10 mm CVTF pipe (B),the 18x 10 mm V11 I II ill \

CVTF pipe (C), the O-rings (D), the two dowel pins (E), 07JAD-PN00100 07LGC-0010100
and the snap ring (F).
2. Check the driven pulley shaft bearing for wear or
4. Replace the CVTF pump. damage, and replace it if necessary.
5. Install the 22 x 10 mm CVTF pipe and the 18 x 10 mm 3. Expand the snap ring using snap ring pliers, and
CVTF pipe in the transmission housing, then install install the driven pulley shaft bearing part-way into
new two O-rings over the CVTF pipes. the transmission housing.
6. Install a new CVTF pump (three bolts) with two dowel 4. Release the pliers, then push the driven pulley shaft
pins. Do not pinch the O-rings. bearing down into the transmission housing until the
snap ring snaps in place around it.
7. Install the snap ring in the snap ring groove.
8. Install the CVTF pump drive chain and the CVTF pump
sprocket (see page 14-237).
0
Final Drive Shaft Bearing
5. After installing the bearing, check that the snap ring is Special Tools Required
seated in the driven pulley shaft bearing and the Adjustable Bearing Puller, 2540 mm 07736-A01000B
housing groove, and that the ring end gap (A) is 9.0 Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
mm (0.354 in) or less. Bearing Driver Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
A 1. Remove the final drive shaft bearing (A) using the
2540 mm adjustable bearing puller and a
commercially available 3/8" 16 UNF slide hammer
(B).
2. Check the final drive shaft bearing for wear or

damage, and replace it if necessary.
(cont'd)
Final Drive Shaft Bearing Selector Control Shaft
3. Install the f i nal drive shaft bearing (A) into the 1. Remove the bolt (A) and the lock washer (B), then
transmission housing using the 15 x 135L driver remove the control lever (C) from the selector control
handle and the 72 x 75 mm bearing driver attachment. shaft (D).
07749-0010000
07746-0010600
9 ^ rrr
Rpn|arp 6 x 1.0 mm
riepiace. 14 N .m (1,4 kgf.m, 10 ib fft)
2. Remove the selector control shaft from the
transmission housing (E), then check the control lever
and the selector control shaft for wear or damage, and
replace them if necessary.
3. Check for fluid leaks between the transmission
housing and the selector control shaft oil seal (F). If
there is a fluid leak, replace the selector control shaft
oil seal (see page 14-241).
4. Install the selector control shaft in the transmission
housing, and install the control lever on the selector -
control shaft.
5. Install the bolt with a new lock washer.
< &
Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal Replacement
Special T ools Required

Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
1. Remove the selector control shaft (see page 14-240).

2. Remove the selector control shaft oil seal (A) from the
transmission housing (B).
3. Install a new selector control shaft oil seal (A) flush

with the transmission housing level (B) using the 15 x
135L driver handle and the 24 x 26 mm bearing driver
attachment.
Clutch Clearance Inspection
Special Tools Required 3. Release the clutch end-plate (A) to lower the clutch
Clutch Compressor Attachment 07ZAE-PRP0100 end-plate, then put the clutch compressor attachment
on the clutch end-plate.
1. Set a dial indicator (A) on the clutch end-plate (B).
4. Press the clutch compressor attachment down with

2. Zero the dial indicator with the clutch end-plate is 39 N (4.0 kgf, 8.8 Ibf) (B) using a force gauge, and read
lifted up to the snap ring (C). the dial indicator (C).
5. The dial indicator reads the clearance (D) between the
clutch end-plate and the top disc (E). Take
measurements in at least three places, and use the
average as the actual clearance.
Clearance Between the Clutch End-PIate and the Top
Disc
Service Limit: 0.60.8 mm (0.0240.031 in)
6. If the clearance is out of the service limit, replace the
forward clutch assembly.
Input Shaft
Input Shaft Disassembly/lnspection/Reassembly
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the 25 x 31 mm thrust shim (A), the 25 x 41.5
Snap Ring Pliers 07LGC-0010100 x 2.5 mm thrust shim (B), the thrust needle bearing
(C),the 25x41.5x1 mm thrust shim (D),the planetary
1. Expand the snap ring (A) on the input shaft (B) using Garrier (E), the sun gear (F), and the O-rings (G) from
snap ring pliers, and remove the snap ring from the the input shaft (H).
input shaft.
3. Check the 25 x 31 mm thrust shim, the 25 x 41.5 x 2.5

mm thrust shim, the thrust needle bearing, the 25 x
41.5x1 mm thrust shim, the planetary carrier, the sun
gear, the O-rings, the input shaft, and the needle
bearing (I) for wear or damage, and replace them if
necessary.
4. Install new O-rings, the sun gear, the planetary
carrier, the 25 x 41.5 x 1 mm thrust shim, the thrust
needle bearing, the 25 x 41.5 x 2.5 mm thrust shim,
the 25 x 31 mm thrust shim, and the snap ring (J) to
the input shaft.
(cont'd)
Input Shaft
Input Shaft Planetary Carrier Clearance
Disassemhly/Inspection/Reassembly (contd)
Inspection
5. After installing the snap ring, check that the snap ring 1. Measure the clearance between the 25 x 31 mm thrust
is seated in the snap ring groove of the input shaft, shim (A) and the snap ring (B) using a feeler gauge
and check that the ring outside diameter (A) is 30.7 (C), in at least three places. Use the average as the
mm (1.209 in) or l ess. actual clearance.
Standard: 0.050-0.115 mm (0.002-0.004 in)
6. Inspect the planetary carrier clearance (see page

14-244).
2. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the 25 x 31

mm thrust shim, and measure it thickness.
3. Select a new 25 x 31 mm thrust shim from the
following table and install it, then recheck that the
clearance is within the standard.
THRUST SHIM, 25 x 31 mm
No. Thickness
A 1.05 mm (0.0413 in)
B 1.12 mm (0.0441 in)
C 1.19 mm (0.0469 in)
D 1.26 mm (0.0496 in)
E 1.33 mm (0.0524 m)
F 1 40 mm (0.0551 in)
G 1.47 mm (0.0579 in)
H 1.54 mm (0.0606 in)
I 1.6- mm (0.0634 in)
J 1.68 mm (0.0661 in)
K 1.75 mm (0.0689 in)
L 1.82 mm (0.0717 in)
M 1.085 mm (0.04272 in)
N 1.155 mm (0.04547 in)
O 1.225 mm (0.04823 in)
P 1.295 mm (0.05098 in)
G 1.365 mm (0.05374 in)
R 1.435 mm (0.05650 in)
S 1.505 mm (0.05925 in)
T 1.575 mm (0.06201 in)
U 1.645 mm (0.06476 in)
V 1.715 mm (0.06752 in)
w 1.785 mm (0.07028 in)
0
4. After installing the all parts to the input shaft, check

that the snap ring is seated in the snap ring groove on
the input shaft, and that the ring outside diameter is
30.7 mm (1.209 in) or less (see step 5 on page 14-244).
Thrust Clearance Inspection
NOTE: If the transmission housing, the flywheel 3. Measure the distance (E) between the flywheel
housing, the final drive shaft, the secondary driven gear, housing surface and the bearing inner race surface,
or the final drive shaft bearing is replaced, the final drive then note the measurement (measurement E).
shaft thrust clearance must be adjusted with a 25 x 35
mm thrust shim.
1. Install the secondary driven gear (A) on the final drive
shaft (B), then install the final drive shaft in the
transmission housing. Install the existing 25 x 35 mm
thrust washer (C).
Final Drive Shaft Bearing Cutaway View
Final Drive Shaft Cutaway View
2. Measure the distance (D) between the transmission

housing surface and the thrust shim surface on the
final drive shaft, then note the measurement
(measurement D).
4. Calculate the final drive shaft thrust clearance using
the formula:
Clearance
= Measurement D Measurement E+Flywheel
housing gasket thickness
Standard: 0 0.15 mm (00.0059 in)
NOTE: The standard of the clearance includes
thickness of the flywheel housing gasket (0.5 mm,
0.020 in)
5. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the 25 x 35
mm thrust shim, and measure it thickness.
6. Select a new 25 x 35 mm thrust shim from the
No. Thickness
A 2.80 mm (0.1102 n)
B 2.90 mm (0.1142 n)
C 3.00 mm (0.1181 n)
D 3.10 mm (0.1220 n)
E 3.20 mm (0.1260 n)
F 3.30 mm (0.1299 n)
G 3.40 mm (0.1339 n)
H 3.50 mm (0.1378 n)
I 3.60 mm (0.1417 n)
J 3.70 mm (0.1457 n)
K 3.80 mm (0.1496 n)
L 3.90 mm (0.1535 n)
M 4.00 mm (0.1575 n)
Transmission Reassembly
Special Tools Required 5. Install two new O-rings (A) on the reverse brake
Reverse Brake Spring Compressor 07TAE-P4V0110 piston (B), then install the piston in the intermediate
Start Clutch Installer 07TAE-P4VA131 housing (C).
NOTE: When you reassemble the transmission, soak the

start clutch assembly, the forward clutch assembly, and
the reverse brake disks in Honda Genuine CVTF for at
least 30 minutes prior to installation.
1. Install new O-rings (A) on the CVTF feed pipes (10.9 x
56 mm) (B), then install them with the filter ends into
the transmission housing (C).
6. Install the spring retainer/return spring assembly (D);

install the return springs on the spring guides (E) of
the reverse brake piston.
2. Install the two dowel pins (D) and a new gasket (E) on 7. The snap ring (F) is installed by compressing the
the transmission housing. spring retainer/return spring assembly by the reverse
3. Push the selector control shaft (F) toward the outside brake spring compressor on and after the next step.
of the transmission housing, then install the
intermediate housing (G).
4. Pull the selector control shaft back, then install the
roller (H) in the intermediate housing by aligning the
groove on the selector control shaft.
8. Install the reverse brake spring compressor through 11. After installing the snap ring, check that the snap ring
the drive pulley shaft (A) to compress the spring is seated in the snap ring groove of the intermediate
retainer/return spring assembly (B). housing, and that the ring end gap (A) is 15 mm (0.59
in) or more.
12. I nstall the disc spring (A) on the spring retainer (B) in
the direction shown.
9. Compress the spring retainer/return spring assembly,

and make sure that the reverse brake spring
compressor is set over the return springs, and the
reverse brake spring compressor tabs (A) do not ride
on the reverse brake piston (B).
13. Starting with one of the reverse brake plate (C),

alternately install the two reverse brake plates and the
10. Install the snap ring in the intermediate housing reverse brake discs (D). Install the reverse brake
above the spring retainer, then remove the reverse end-plate (E), then install the snap ring (F).
brake spring compressor.
14. After installing the snap ring, check that the snap ring 17. Release the reverse brake end-plate (A) to lower the
is seated in the snap ring groove of the intermediate reverse brake end-plate, and place a steel plate (B)
housing, and that the snap ring inside diameter (A) is across width of the reverse brake end-plate.
143.5 mm (5.650 in) or more, and also check that the
Standard: 0.55-0.70 mm (0.0217-0.0276 in)
snap ring end gap (B) is 8.7 mm (0.343 in) or more.
15. Set up a dial indicator (A) on the reverse brake

end-plate (B).
18. Press the steel plate down with 49 N (5.0 kgf, 11.0 Ibf)
(C) using a force gauge, and read the dial indicator (D).
The dial indicator reads the clearance (E) between the
reverse brake end-plate and the top-disc (F). Take
19. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the reverse
brake end-plate, and measure it thickness.
20. Select a new reverse brake end-plate from the
REVERSE BRAKE END-PLATE

Mark Thickness
2 3.8 mm (0.150 in)
16. Zero the dial indicator by lifting the top disc (C) up B 3.9 mm (0.154 in)
against the reverse brake end-plate and the reverse 3 4.0 mm (0.157 in)
brake end-plate up against the snap ring (D). C 4 1 mm (0.161 in)
4 4.2 mm (0.165 in)
D 4.3 mm (0.169 in)
5 4.4 mm (0.173 in)
E 4.5 mm (0.177 in)
6 4.6 mm (0.181 in)
F 4.7 mm (0.185 in)
7 4.8 mm (0.189 in)
8 5.0 mm (0.197 in)
21. If the reverse brake end-plate is replaced, install the
snap ring, and check that the snap ring inside
diameter and end gap are within the tolerance.
22. Install the snap ring retainer (A) over the drive pulley 26. Install the ring gear (A) on the forward clutch (B).
shaft (B).
23. Wrap the drive pulley shaft splines with tape to

prevent O-ring damage. Install two new O-rings (C) in
27. Install the input shaft/planetary carrier assembly (C)
the drive pulley shaft O-ring grooves, then remove the
through the drive pulley shaft (D) by aligning the sun
tape.
gear (E) with the forward clutch discs (F) and aligning
24. Install the forward clutch (D) on the drive pulley shaft, the planetary carrier with the reverse brake discs (G).
then install the snap ring (E) to secure the forward
28. Install the manual valve body separator plate (A) and
clutch.
the two dowel pins (B) on the intermediate housing
25. After installing the snap ring, check that the snap ring (C), then install the manual valve body (D) and detent
is seated in the snap ring groove of the drive pulley spring (E).
shaft, and that the snap ring outside diameter (A) is
41.4 mm (1.630 in) or less.
(cont'd)
29. Install two new O-rings (A) on the 10.9 x 18.6 mm 35. Install the sealing ring (A) on a new secondary
CVTF feed pipe (B), then install it on the manual valve drive/park gear (B).
body (C).
NOTE: The secondary drive/park gear must be
8 x 1 .2 5 m m replaced when disassembling the transmission.
37 N-m (3.8 kgf-m , 27 Ib fft)
36. Insert the secondary drive/park gear (A) into the start
clutch (B). Wiggle the secondary drive/park gear back
and forth as it goes into the start clutch, and push in
the secondary drive/park gear until it bottoms out.
30. Install two new O-rings (D) on the 10.9 x 56 mm CVTF

feed pipe (E), then install it with the filter end and the 8
mm CVTF pipe (F) in the intermediate housing (G).
31. Install the two dowel pins (H) and a new gasket (I) on
32. Install four new O-rings (J) on the two CVTF feed
pipes (K), then install them on the manual valve body
and the intermediate housing.
33. Place the end cover (L) on the intermediate housing.
34. Install the end cover bolts (sixteen), and tighten them
to the specified torque in a crisscross pattern in at
least two or three steps, then turn the transmission
end cover down.
r ~ ... ~~....... ~~T

37. Install the park pawl (A), the pawl spring (B), and the 40. Seat the start clutch by aligning the tip of the start
pawl shaft (C) on the transmission housing (D), then clutch installer with the driven pulley shaft hole (A)
move the control lever to any position other than P. and then pushing down the handle (B).
38. Use the CVTF to lubricate the new O-rings (E) for the
driven pulley shaft (F), then install the O-rings on the
driven pulley shaft.
39. Place the start clutch and secondary drive/park gear
41. While holding the handle (A) down, push down the
(G) onto the driven pulley shaft.
bottom part (B) of the start clutch installer until it
NOTE: Make sure to hold the secondary drive/park contacts the seating surface of the start clutch (C).
gear engaged into the start clutch when you install the
start clutch and secondary drive/park gear onto the
driven pulley shaft.
(cont'd)
42. Hold the upper hex section (A) of the start clutch 45. Install the 25.5 mm cotters (A) to the cotter groove on
installer with a 19 mm wrench (B), then use an the driven pulley shaft (B), then measure the
adjustable wrench (C) to tighten the lower nut (D) of clearance between the cotters and the start clutch
the start clutch installer until the start clutch (E) seats. guide (C) using a feeler gauge (D). Take
NOTE: When using the start clutch installer, hold the
upper hex section and then turn the lower nut.
Turning the upper hex section could damage the start Standard: 00.13 mm (00.005 in)
clutch installer.
46. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the cotters,

and measure its thickness.
47. Select new 25.5 mm cotters from the following table
and install its, then recheck that the clearance is
within the standard.
COTTERS, 25.5 mm
43. Remove the start clutch installer. No. Thickness
44. Reach under the start clutch to confirm that the clutch A 2.90 mm (0.1142 in)
end-plate can move up and down slightly (less than B 3.00 mm (0.1181 in)
C 3.10 mm (0.1220 in)
1.0 mm (0.039 in)).
D 3.20 mm (0.1260 in)
0
48. Install the cotter retainer (A) and the snap ring (B) to 50. Install the thrust washer (A), the thrust needle bearing
the driven pulley shaft (C). (B), the thrust washer (C), the CVTF pump drive
sprocket hub (D), and the 22 x 28 mm thrust shim (E)
on the input shaft (F), and install the snap ring (G) to
secure them.
49. After installing the snap ring, check that the snap ring
is seated in the snap ring groove of the driven pulley
shaft, and that the snap ring outside diameter (A) is
33.9 mm (1.335 in) or less.
51. After installing the snap ring, check that the snap ring
is seated in the snap ring groove of the input shaft,
and that the snap ring outside diameter (A) is 26.3 mm
(1.035 in) or less.
(cont'd)
52 . Measure the clearance between the 22 x 28 mm thrust 56. Place the secondary driven gear (A) on the
shim (A) and the snap ring (B) using a feeler gauge transmission housing (B) by aligning it with the
(C). Take measurements in at least three places, and secondary drive gear (C), then install the final drive
use the average as the actual clearance. shaft (D) through the secondary driven gear into the
Standard: 0.370.65 mm (0.0150.025 in)
53. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the

22 x 28 mm thrust shim, and measure its thickness. 57. Install the 25 x 35 mm thrust shim (E) on the final drive
54. Select a new 22 x 28 thrust shim from the following shaft.
table and install it, then recheck that the clearance is 58. Position the CVTF pump drive sprocket (F) on the
within the standard. CVTF pump drive sprocket hub (G), and put the CVTF
pump drive chain (H) on the CVTF pump drive
sprocket and the CVTF pump sprocket (I), then secure
No. Thickness the CVTF pump drive sprocket with the three bolts.
C 1.15 mm (0.0453 in)
D 1.40 mm (0.0551 in) 59. Install the lubrication pipe (J).
E 1.65 mm (0.0650 in)
F 1 90 mm (0.0748 in)
G 2.15 mm (0.0846 in)
H 2.40 mm (0.0945 in)
55. If the 22 x 28 mm thrust shim is replaced, install the
snap ring, and check that the snap ring outside
diameter is within the tolerance.
60. Install the differential assembly (A) onto the 65. Install a new O-ring (A) on the solenoid wire harness
transmission housing (B). 7P connector (B).
8 x 1 .2 5 mm
29 N-m (3.0 k g fm , 21 Ib fft)
66. Install the two CVTF pipes (C) on the lower valve body
(D), then install the solenoid wire harness 7P
connector and the lower valve body in the
transmission housing (E).
61. Install two new O-rings (C) on both ends of the CVTF
passage pipe (D), then install the CVTF passage pipe 67. Install a new O-ring (F) on the CVTF strainer (G), then
in the pipe joint (E) of the transmission housing, and install the CVTF strainer (two bolts) on the lower valve
put the other end on the pipe guide (F). body.
62. Install the three dowel pins (G) and a new gasket (H)
on the transmission housing.
63. Place the flywheel housing (I) on the transmission
housing.
64. Install the housing bolts (nineteen), and tighten them
flywheel housing down.
(cont'd)
Transmission Reassembly (co nt'd)
68. Install the two dowel pins (A) and a new gasket (B) on 72. Align the cutouts (A) on the rotary-frame with the
the transmission housing (C). neutral positioning cutouts (B) on the transmission
range switch (C). Then put a 2.0 mm (0.079 in) feeler
gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to hold the
transmission range switch in the N position.
NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 mm (0.079 in) feeler gauge
blade or equivalent to hold the transmission range
switch in the N position.
69. Place the CVTF pan (D) on the transmission housing.

70. Install the CVTF pan bolts (eighteen), and tighten 73. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on the
them to the specified torque in a crisscross pattern in selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the N
at least two or three steps. position with the 2.0 mm (0.079 in) blade (C).
71. Move the shift position from the P position to the N
position by turning the selector control lever (A).
NOTE: Do not squeeze the end (B) of the selector
control shaft tips together when turning. If the tips are
squeezed together it will cause a faulty control signal
or position due to play between the selector control
shaft and the transmission range switch.
<s
74. Tighten the bolts (A) on the transmission range switch 76. Install the breather cap (A) on the breather pipe (B)
(B) while you continue to hold it in the N position. Do with its arrow (C) pointing to the flywheel housing.
not move the transmission range switch when
tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge (C).
77. Install the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed

sensor (A), and the vehicle speed sensor (B), with new
O-rings (C).
12 N-m
(1.2 k g fm , 9 Ibfft)
75. Install the control shaft cover (A) on the transmission
range switch (B).
y a i,u iiiiii
12 N-m
(1.2 k g fm , 9 Ib fft)
(cont'd)
78. Install the dipstick tube (A) with a new O-ring (B).
79. Install the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor
(C) with a new O-ring (D).
80. Install the two CVTF cooler lines (E) with the line bolts
(F) and new sealing washers (G).
81. Install the CVTF dipstick in the tube.
CVT Differential a

Backlash Inspection Differential Carrier/Final Driven
Gear Replacement
1. Install the driveshafts on the differential, then place 1. Remove the carrier bearings (see page 14-263).
the axles on V-blocks.
2. Remove the final driven gear (A) from the differential
carrier (B), and replace the differential carrier or the
final driven gear. The final driven gear bolts have
left-hand threads.
2. Check the backlash of the pinion gears (A) using a dial

indicator (B).
Standard: 0.050.15 mm (0.00200.0059 in)
3. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the
differential carrier (see page 14-262).
3. Install the final driven gear in the direction shown on

the differential carrier.
4. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a
crisscross pattern in at least two or three steps.
5. Install the carrier bearings (see page 14-263).
Carrier Bearing Replacement Oil Seal Replacement

Driver Handle, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 . Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
Bearing Driver Attachment, 78 x 80 mm
1. Remove the carrier bearings (transmission housing 07N AD-PX40100
side and flywheel housing side) (A) using a Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 58 mm 07JAD-PH80101
commercially available puller (B) and a spacer (C),
and replace the carrier bearings. 1. Remove the oil seal (A) from the transmission
housing (B).
2. Remove the oil seal (A) from the flywheel housing (B).
2. Install new bearings (A) in the direction shown on the

differential carrier (B) using the 40 mm driver handle
and a press. Press the bearing on until it bottoms.
(cont'd)
Oil Seal Replacement (cont'd) Carrier Bearing Side Clearance
Inspection
3. Install a new oil seal flush to the transmission housing Special Tools Required
(A) using the 15 x 135L driver handle and the 78 x 80 Driver Handle, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
mm bearing driver attachment.
1. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing
(see page 14-263).
2. Install the set ring (A) in the transmission housing (B).
4. Install a new oil seal flush with the flywheel housing

(A) using the 15 x 135L driver handle and the 58 mm
oil seal driver attachment.
3. Install the differential assembly (A) in the

transmission housing (B), then drive the differential to
seat in the transmission housing using the 40 mm
driver handle.
4. Install the three dowel pins (A) and a new gasket (B) 7. Measure the clearance between the set ring (A) and
on the transmission housing (C), and Install a new the carrier bearing (B) outer race using a feeler gauge
O-ring (D) on end of the CVTF passage p i pe (E), (C).
8 x 1.25 mm Standard: 0 0.15 mm (,5 in)
8. Ifthe clearance is out of standard, remove the set ring,

and measure its thickness.
9. Select a new set ring from the following table.
SET RING, 80 mm
No.
__!_
5. Place the flywheel housing (F) on the transmission ___ 2__
housing. __ 3_
__ 4_
6. Install the housing bolts (nineteen), and tighten them
___5__
__ 6_
flywheel housing down. 10. Install a new set ring, and recheck the clearance and
make sure it is within the standard.
11. Install the oil seal to the transmission housing (see
page 14-263).
Driveline/Axle
Special Tools........................... ........................................... 16-2
Component Location Index..............................................16-3
Driveshaft Inspection.........................................................16-4
Driveshaft Rem oval................ ........................................ 16-4
Driveshaft Disassembly.................................................... 16-7
Dynamic Damper Replacement...................................... 16-10
Driveshaft Reassembly.............................................. 1611
Driveshaft Installation........................ ...............................16-19
Intermediate Shaft Rem oval........................................... 16-22
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly.....................................16-23
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly..................... .................16-24
Intermediate Shaft Installation........................................16-26
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty

071AF-S3VA000 Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 1
07746-0030400 Driver, Inner 35 mm I.D. 1
07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 1
07947-SB0A100 Oil Seal Driver, 44.5 mm 1
07JAD-PL90100 Oil Seal Driver, 65 mm 1
07MAC-SL0A202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
07NAD-P20A100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
07NAF-SR3A101 Half Shaft Base 1
07XAC-001010A Threaded Adapter, 22 x 1.5 mm 1
<s
M /T model
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
Removal, page 16-22
lr*+nl lri+ i/M^ r\n n 1C OC
DRIVESHAFT
Removal, page 16-4
Installati on, page 16-19
DYNAMIC DAMPER
CVT model
DRIVESHAFT
Removal, page 16-4
DYNAMIC DAMPER Reassembly, page 16-11
Replacement, page 16-10 Installation, page 16-19
Driveshaft Inspection Driveshaft Removal
1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot (B) Special Tools Required
on the driveshaft (C) for cracks, damage, leaking Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
grease, and loose boot bands (D). If any damage is Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000
found, replace the boot and the boot bands.
1. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10).
2. Remove the front wheel.
3. Pry up the stake (A) on the spindle nut (B), then
remove the nut.
2. Check the driveshaft for cracks and damage. If any

damage is found, replace the driveshaft.
3. Check the inboard joint (E) and the outboard joint (F)
for cracks and damage. If any damage is found,
replace the inboard joint or the outboard joint as an
assembly.
4. Hold the inboard joint and turn the front wheel by
hand, then make sure the joint is not excessively
loose. If necessary, replace the inboard joint or the 4. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-163).
outboard joint as an assembly.
5. Drain the transmission fluid, then reinstall the drain
plug with a new sealing washer:
Manual transmission (see page 13-41)
CVT (see page 14-154)
m
6. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, 8. Left driveshaft: Pry the inboard joint (A) from the
then remove the castle nut (B). Separate the ball joint differential using a pry bar. Remove the driveshaft as
from the knuckle using the 14 mm ball joint thread an assembly.
protector and the 28 mm ball joint remover (see page
NOTE:
18-11).
Do not pull on the driveshaft (B), or the inboard joint
may come apart. Pull the inboard joint straight out
to avoid damaging the oil seal.
Be careful not to damage the oil seal or the end of
the inboard joint with the pry bar.
7. Pull the knuckle outward, and separate the outboard

joint from the front hub using a soft face hammer.
Driveshaft Removal (cont'd)
9. Right driveshaft: Drive the inboard joint (A) off of the 10. Remove the set ring (A) from the inboard joint (except
intermediate shaft using a drift punch and a hammer M/T model right driveshaft).
(M/T model). Pry the inboard joint (B) from the
differential using the pry bar (CVT model). Remove
the driveshaft as an assembly.
NOTE:
Do not pull on the driveshaft (C) or the inboard joint
may come apart. Pull the inboard joint straight out
to avoid damaging the oil seal.
Be careful not to damage the oil seal or the end of
the inboard joint with the drift punch or the pry bar.
M /T model
11. Remove the set ring (A) from the intermediate shaft
(M/T model).
A
0
Driveshaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required Low profile type

Threaded Adapter, 22 x 1.5 mm 07XAC-001010A
Boot Band Pliers, commercially available
Bearing Puller, commercially available
Inboard Joint Side
1. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage the
boot.
If the boot band is a welded type (A), cut the boot
band.
If the boot band is a double loop type (B), lift up the
band end (C), then push it into the clip (D).
If the boot band is a low profile type (E), pinch the
boot band using commercially available boot band
pliers (F). 2. Make marks (A) on each roller (B) and the inboard
Welded type joint (C) to identify the locations of the rollers to the
grooves in the inboard joint.
NOTE: Do not engrave or scribe any marks on the
rolling surface.
C
3. Remove the inboard joint on a clean shop towel (D).
Be careful not to drop the rollers when separating
them from the inboard joint.
Driveshaft Disassembly (cont'd)
4. Make marks (A) on the spider (B) that match the marks Outboard Joint Side
on the rollers, then remove the rollers.
1. Remove the boot bands (A). Lift up the three tabs (B)
NOTE: Do not engrave or scribe any marks on the using a flat-tipped screwdriver, then release the band.
rolling surface. Be careful not to damage the boot.
5. Remove the circlip (C).

2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially toward the
6. Make marks (D) on the spider and the driveshaft (E) to inboard joint side. Be careful not to damage the boot.
identify the position of the spider on the shaft.
7. Remove the spider.
NOTE: If necessary, use a commercially available
bearing puller.
8. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape (A)
to prevent damaging the boot.
3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and the

outboard joint inner race.
9. Remove the inboard boot. Be careful not to damage

the boot.
10. Remove the vinyl tape.
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same level 8. Remove the stop ring (A) from the driveshaft.
as the outboard joint end (C).
9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape (A)

5. Securely clamp the driveshaft in a bench vise with a to prevent damaging the boot.
shop towel wrapped around the driveshaft.
6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the 22 x 1.5 mm
threaded adapter (B) and a commercially available
5/8"-18 UNF slide hammer (C).
10. Remove the outboard boot. Be careful not to damage

the boot.
11. Remove the vinyl tape.
7. Remove the driveshaft from the bench vise.
Dynamic Damper Replacement
1. Remove the inboard joint (see page 16-7). 5. Adjust the specified distance (A) between the
outboard joint side and the dynamic damper edge.
2. Remove the dynamic damper band (see step 1 on
page 16-7). NOTE: Check the type of dynamic damper by its
shape.
3. Remove the dynamic damper (A),
Dynamic damper type 1
A
dl hn
J -----99 J-
Dynamic Damper Position

M odel Driveshaft Dynamic Specified
damper distance
type . m
M/T Left : 1 250.5 255.5 mm
(9 .8 6 2 -1 0 .0 5 9 i n)
Right i . 2 4 9 .2 - 2 5 4 .2 m m
(9 .8 1 1 -1 0 .0 0 8 i n)
CVT L e ft
Right 2 4 7 7 .5 -4 8 2 .5 mm
(18 .7 9 9 -1 8 .9 9 6 in)
6. Install a new dynamic damper band (see step 10 on
4. Install a new dynamic damper. page 16-14).
NOTE: Be careful not to swap the dynamic dampers 7. Install the inboard joint (see page 16-12).
Check the type of dynamic damper by its shape.
Dynamic Damper Type

Model Driveshaft Type
M/T Left 1
Ricjht 1
CVT Left
Right 2
d s >
Driveshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
SET RING INBOARD JO INT DOUBLE LOOP BANDS
ROLLERS
Replace. (Replacement parts only)
Replace.
INBOARD JOINT
M /T model .
Right driveshaft /
INBOARD BOOT
GREASEnl
Use the grease included
in the inboard boot set.

in the inboard boot set.
DYNAM IC DAMPER LOW PROFILE BANDS

in the outboard boot set.
Driveshaft Reassembly (co nt'd)
Special T o o ls R e q u ir e d 5. Fit the rollers (A) onto the spider (B) as shown, and
Boot Band Tool KD-3191 or equivalent, commercially note these items:
available Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on the
Boot Band Clamp Tool Kent-Moore J-35910 or spider by aligning the marks (C) you m a d e .
equivalent, commercially available Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the rollers
Boot Band Pliers, commercially available from falling off.
this procedure.
Inboard Joint Side

1.Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent
damaging the inboard boot.
6. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease included in

the new inboard boot set.
Grease quantity
Inboard joint: 90100 g {3.173.53 oz)
2. I nstall the inboard boot onto the driveshaft, then

remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to damage the
inboard boot.
3. I nstall the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning
the marks (B) you made on the spider and the end of
the driveshaft.
C
Replace.
4. Install a newcirclip (C) into the driveshaft groove.

Always rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure it is
fully seated.
7. Fit the inboard join t onto the driveshaft, and note 9. Adjust the length (A) of the driveshafts to the figure as
these items: shown, then adjust the boots to halfway between full
Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by compression and full extension. Bleed excess air from
aligning the marks (A) you made on the inboard the boots by inserting a flat-tipped screwdriver
joint and the rollers. between the boot and the joint.
Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint is pointing Driveshaft type 1
up to prevent it from falling off.
Driveshaft type 2
c m
8. Fit the boot ends (A) onto the driveshaft (B) and the
inboard joint (C). Driveshaft Length
Model Driveshaft Type Specified length
(A)
M/T Left 1 513518 mm
(20.20-20.39 in)
Right 2 472-477 mm
(18.58-18.78 in)
CVT Left 1 508513 mm
(20.00-20.20 in)
Right 1 823-828 mm
(32.40-32.60 in)
Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
10. Install new boot bands. 14. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
For the double loop type, go to step 11. section of the commercially available boot band tool
For the low profile type, go to step 20. (KD-3191 or equivalent) (A), and into the slot on the
winding mandrel (B).
11. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the inboard
joint, then install a new double loop band (A) onto the
boot (B).
NOTE: Pass the end of the new double loop band
through the clip (C) twice in the direction of the
forward rotation of the driveshaft.
15. Using a wrench on the winding mandrel of the boot

band tool, tighten the band until the marked line (C)
12. Pull up the slack in the band by hand. on the band meets the edge of the clip.
13. Mark a line (A) on the band 1014 mm (0.390.55 in) 16. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of the
from the clip (B). band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the clip,
then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
17. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess free 20. Install a new low profile band (A) onto the boot (B),
end of the band to leave a 510 mm (0.200.39 in) then hook the tab (C) of the band.
tail protruding from the clip.
18. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down using a 21. Close the hook portion of the band using a
hammer. commercially available boot band pliers (A), then
NOTE; hook the tabs (B) of the band.
Make sure the band and the clip do not interfere
with anything on the vehicle, and the band does not
move.
Clean any grease remaining on the surrounding
surfaces.
B
22. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot, and
repeat steps 20 and 21.
19. Repeat steps 11 through 18 for the band on the other

end of the boot.
Outboard Joint Side 4. Install the stop ring (A) into the driveshaft groove (B).
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent

damaging the outboard boot.
5. Pack about 35 g (1.23 oz) of grease included in the new

outboard boot set into the driveshaft hole in the
outboard joint.
2. Install new ear clamp bands (B) and the outboard boot NOTE: If you are installing a new outboard joint, the
onto the driveshaft, then remove the vinyl tape. Be grease is already installed.
careful not to damage the outboard boot.
3. Make sure to check the size of a new stop ring.
INOTICE I
To avoid driveshaft and vehicle damage, make sure
you install a new stop ring.
Stop ring specifications

Model Over diameter Wire diameter
(A) (B)
M/T 26.0 mm (1.024 in) 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
CVT 23.5 mm (0.925 in) 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
< >
6. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B) 8. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) you made
until the stop ring (C) is close to the joint. with the outboard joint end (B).
INOTICE I
To avoid driveshaft and vehicle damage, the shaft
must be all the way into the outboard joint to ensure
the stop ring is properly seated.
7. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the

driveshaft and the joint, and tap or hit the assembly
onto a hard surface from a height of about 10 cm (3.9
in).
NOTE: Do not use a hammer as excessive force may
damage the driveshaft. Be careful not to damage the
threaded section (A) of the outboard joint. 9. Pack the outboard joint (A) with the remaining joint
grease included in the new outboard boot set.
Total grease quantity

Outboard jo in t:
Model Quantity
M/T 8 5 -9 5 g (3.00-3.35 oz)
CVT 9 5 -1 0 5 g (3.35-3.70 oz)

in the outboard boot set.
10. Fit the boot ends (A) onto the driveshaft (B) and the 11. Inspect the length (A) of the driveshafts to the figure
outboard joint (C). Bleed any excess air from the boot as shown, then adjust the boots to halfway between
by inserting a flat-tipped screwdriver between the full compression and full extension.
boot and the joint
Driveshaft type 1
Driveshaft type 2
m i
Driveshaft Length
Model Driveshaft Type Specified length
(A)
M/T Left 1 513518 mm
(20.20-20.39 in)
Right 2 472477 mm
(18.58-18.78 in)
CVT Left 1 508513 mm
(20.00-20.20 in)
Right 1 8 2 3 -8 28 mm
(32.40-32.60 in)
Driveshaft Installatio n
12. Close the ear portion (A) of the band using a NOTE: Before starting installation, make sure the mating
commercially available boot band clamp tool surfaces of the joint and the splined section are clean.
(Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent) (B).
1. Apply about 5 g (0.18 oz) of moly 60 paste (P/N
08734-0001) to the contact area (A) of the outboard
joint and the front wheel bearing.
NOTE: The paste helps to prevent noise and vibration.
13. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion of

the band. If the clearance is not within the standard,
close the ear portion of the band tighter.
6 mm
2. I nstall a new set ring (A) into the set ring groove (B) of
the driveshaft inboard joint (except M/T model right
driveshaft).
14. Repeat steps 12 and 13 for the band on the other end
of the boot.
Driveshaft Installation (cont'd)
3. Install a new set ring (A) into the set ring groove (B) of 6. Insert the inboard end (A) of the driveshaft into the
the intermediate shaft (M/T model). differential (B) or the intermediate shaft (C) until the
set ring (D) locks in the groove (E).
A
NOTE: Insert the driveshaft horizontally to prevent
damaging the oil seal.
4. Apply 0.51.0 g (0.0180.035 oz) of super high temp

urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the whole splined
surface (A) of the right driveshaft (M/T model). After
applying grease, remove the grease from the splined
grooves at intervals of 23 splines and from the set
ring groove (B) so that air can bleed from the
intermediate shaft. 7. Install the outboard joint (A) into the front hub (B) on
the knuckle.
A
^ J sgbeaseI
(P/N 08798-9002)
5. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the

differential thoroughly with solvent, and dry them
with compressed air.
NOTE: Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent.
8. Wipe off any grease contamination from the ball joint 10. Apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating
tapered section and threads, then install the knuckle surface of a new spindle nut (A).
(A) onto the lower arm (B). Be careful not to damage
the ball joint boot. Wipe off the grease before
tightening the nut at the ball joint. Torque a new castle
nut (C) to the lower torque specification, then tighten
it only far enough to align the slot with the ball joint
pin hole.
NOTE:
Make sure the ball joint boot is not damaged or
cracked.
Do not align the nut by loosening it.
C
1 4 x 2 .0 mm
6 4 - 7 4 N-m
(6.57.5 kgfm ,
4 7 - 5 5 Ibf ft)
Replace.
11. Install the spindle nut, then tighten it. After tightening,
use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder (B) against
the driveshaft.
12. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
wheel, then install the front wheel.
13. Turn the front wheel by hand, and make sure there is
no interference between the driveshaft and the
surrounding parts.
14. Refill the transmission with the recommended
transmission fluid:
Manual transmission (see page 13-41)
16. Lower the vehicle.
(see page 18-5).
Intermediate Shaft Removal
1. Drain the transmission fluid, then reinstall the drain 5. Remove the intermediate shaft (A) from the
plug with a new sealing washer (see page 13-41). differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontally
until it is clear of the differential to prevent damaging
2. Remove the right driveshaft (see page 16-4). the oil seal (B).
3. Remove the heat shield (A).
4. Remove the flange bolt (A) and the two dowel bolts
(B).
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the internal snap ring (A) from the bearing
Half Shaft Base 07NAF-SR3A101 support (B).
Oil Seal Driver, 44.5 mm 07947-SB0A100
1. Remove the outer seal (A) and the external snap ring
(B) from the intermediate shaft (C).
4. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) out of the

bearing support (B) using the 44.5 mm oil seal driver
(C), the half shaft base (D), and a press.
2. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the

intermediate shaft bearing (B) using a press. Be
careful not to damage the bearing support ring (C) on
the intermediate shaft during disassembly.
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly
Exploded View
DOWEL BOLTS
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N-m
Pack the interior

of the outer seal.
Special Tools Required 4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the shaft bearing
Oil Seal Driver, 65 mm 07JAD-PL90100 (B) using the 35 mm inner driver (C) and a press.
Oil Seal Driver Attachment 07NAD-P20A100
PRESS
Driver, Inner 35 mm I.D, 07746-0030400
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000 *
this procedure.
1. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry
them with compressed air.
2. Press a new intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the
bearing support (B) using the 15 x 135L driver handle
(C), oil seal driver attachment (D), and a press.
PRESS
07749-0010000
5. Install the external snap ring (A) in the groove of the

intermediate shaft (B).
3. Install the internal snap ring (A) into the groove of the
bearing support (B).
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly Intermediate Shaft Installation
(cont'd)
6. Install a new outer seal (A) into the bearing support 1. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft (A)
(B) using the 65 mm oil seal driver (C) and a press. contact the differential thoroughly with solvent, and
Press in the seal flush with the surface of the bearing dry them with compressed air.
support.
PRESS 07JAD-PL90100
2. Insert the intermediate shaft into the differential

correctly.
NOTE: Insert the intermediate shaft carefully to
prevent damaging the oil seal (B).
3. Install the flange bolt (A) and the two dowel bolts (B).
A
39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft)

<s
4. Install the heat shield (A).
5. Install the right driveshaft (see page 16-19).

6 . Refill the transmission with the recommended
transmission fluid (see page 13-41),
(see page 18-5).
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
INTRODUCTION
How to Use This Manual---------------------------------
This manual is divided into multiple sections. The first page of
each section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its
corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover.
You can quickly find the first page of each section without
looking through a full table of contents. The symbols printed at
the top corner of each page can also be used as a quick reference
system.
Each section includes:
1. A table of contents, or an exploded view index showing:
@ Parts disassembly sequence.
Bolt torques and thread sizes. nqi
Page references to descriptions in text.
2. Disassembly/assembly procedures and to o l s.
3. Inspection.
4. Testing/troubl eshooting.
5. Repair.
6. Adjustments.
Safety Messages
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help
you make informed decisions, we have provided safety
messages, and other safety information throughout this manual.
O f course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. You must use
your own good judgment.
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms

including:
Safety Labels on the vehicle.
Safety Messages preceded by a safety alert symbol A and
one of three signal words, DANGER, W ARNING , or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
^Steer i ng
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
ADANGER you don't follow instructions.
AWARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if Suspension (Including

You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
TPMS)
A CAUTION
instructions.
Instructions how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.
*Brakes (Including VSA)
A ll information contained in this manual is based on the latest
product information available at the tim e of printing. W e reserve
the right to make changes at anytime without notice. No part of
this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a retrieval
*Body
system, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text, *Heating, Ventilation,
images, and tables.
and Air Conditioning
As you read this manual, you will find information that is
preceded by a | NOTICE 1symbol. The purpose ofthis message is to
help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the *Body Electrical
environment.
First Edi tion 10/2011

All Rights Reserved
Ho nda Mo tor Co., Ltd.
Service Publication Office
* Audio, Navigation, and
Specifications apply to USA and Canada Telematics
As sections with * include SRS and IMA
components; special precautions are required
when servicing. * Restraints
marked sections are not included in this
manual, see Volume 1.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) {if steering maintenance is required)
tensioners.
Steering
Special Tools....................................................................... 17-2
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Check..........................17-4
Power Assist Check..........................................................17-4
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection. ..................17-5
* Steering Wheel Rem oval................................................. 17-6
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly.................. 17-7
* Steering Wheel Installation.............................................. 17-8
* Steering Column Removal and Installation.................. 17-9
Steering Column Inspection............................................ 17-14
Steering Lock Replacement............................................ 17-17
Rack Guide Adjustm ent...................................................17-18
Tie-Rod End Ball Joint Boot Replacement................... 17-19
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement........................ 17-20
EPS Components
General Troubleshooting Information.......... ............... 17-22
DTC Troubleshooting Index............................................ 17-25
System Description.......................................................... 17-27
Circuit Diagram .................................................................. 17-34
DTC Troubleshooting....................................................... 17-37
Symptom Troubleshooting..............................................17-60
EPS Motor Removal and Installation.............................17-62
Steering Gearbox Removal and Installation................ 17-64
Steering Gearbox Disassembly/Reassembly......... 17-74
Rack End Removal and Installation................................17-75
Rack Guide Removal/Installation................................... 17-79
EPS Control Unit Removal/Installation..........................17-80
Special Tools
Ref.No. T o o l Number Description Qty

071AF-S3VA000 Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 1
(D 07965-SA50500 Bearing Driver Attachment, 36 mm 1
(D 07AAF-SDAA100 Ball Joint Thread Protector, 12 mm 1
07MAA-SL0010 0 ,07916-SA50001, or
Locknut Wrench, 40 mm 1
07AAA-TL2A100
(D 07 M AC-S L0A202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
STEERING WHEEL DRIVER'S AIRBAG

Rotational Play Check, page 17-4 Replacement, page 24-166
Power A ssist Check, page 17-4
Rem oval, page 17-6
Disassem bly/Reassem bly, page 17-7
STEERING COLUMN
Removal and installation, page 17-9
Steering Lock Replacement, page 17-17
STEERING GEARBOX
Steering Linkage and G earbox Inspection, page 17-5
Rack Guide A djustm ent, page 17-18 TIE-ROD END BALL JOINT BOOT
G earbox M ou n t Cushion Replacement, page 17-20 Replacement, page 17-19
EPS C om ponent Location Index, page 17-21
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Power Assist Check
Check
1. Set the front wheels in the straight ahead position. NOTE: This test should be done with original equipment
tires and wheels at the correct tire pressure.
2, Measure how far you can turn the steering wheel left
and right w ithout moving the front wheels. 1. Start the engine, and let it idle.
If the play is within the lim it, the steering gearbox 2. Make sure the 3-mode Drive System is in the Normal
and the steering linkage are OK. Mode.
If the play exceeds the limit, adjust the rack guide
(see page 17-18). If the play is still excessive after 3. Attach a commercially available spring scale (A) to the
rack guide adjustment, do the steering linkage and steering wheel. With the engine idling and the vehicle
gearbox inspection (see page 17-5). on a clean, dry floor, pull the scale as shown, and read
it as soon as the tires begin to turn.
Rotational play: 0 10 mm (00.39 in)
Initial turning load: 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf)
4. If the scale reads no more than the specification, the

power assist is OK. If it reads more, check these items:
Steering linkage (see page 17-5)
Rack guide adjustment (see page 17-18)
EPS system (see page 17-22)
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
Steering Wheel Removal
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Install a commercially available steering wheel puller
SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and the (A) on the steering wheel (B). Free the steering wheel
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before from the steering column shaft by turning the
doing repairs or service. pressure bolt (C) of the puller.
1. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection Note these items when removing the steering wheel:
procedure (see page 22-86). Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering
column shaft when removing the steering wheel.
2. Set the front wheels in the straight ahead position,
then remove the driver's airbag from the steering If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel hub
wheel (see page 24-166). more than five threads, the bolts w ill hit the cable
reel and damage it. To prevent this, install a pair of
3. Disconnect the cable reel subharness connector (A). jam nuts five threads up on each puller bolt.
B D
10 x 1.25 m m
6. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the

4. Loosen the steering wheel bolt (B) three turns. steering wheel bolt (A) and steering wheel from the
steering column.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly.
A . Screw, 8 B Screw, 2 C : Screw, 2 D : Screw, 6 E . Screw, 2
DAMPER
CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS
PADDLE SHIFTER -
(DOWNSHIFT S W ITCH)
CRUISE CONTROL (CVT m odel)
COMBINATION SWITCH
AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH

PADDLE SHI FTER +
(UPSHIFT SWITCH)
(CVT m odel)
STEERING WHEEL
REAR COVER
STEERING
WHEEL TRIM
STEERING WHEEL
HFL-NAVIGATION ACCESS PANEL
VO ICE CONTROL M ULTI -INFORMATION
SWITCH SWITCH
(With Navigation) LID
HFL SWITCH
(W ithout Navigation)
Steering Wheel Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal canceling
SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and the sleeve as shown. Install the steering wheel on to the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before steering column shaft, making sure the steering
doing repairs or service. wheel hub (B) engages the pins (C) of the cable reel
and tabs of the turn signal canceling sleeve. Do not
1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the
tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft
front wheels are pointing straight ahead, then center
when installing the steering wheel.
the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable
reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it
counterclockwise about three full turns. The arrow
mark (B) on the cable reel label should point straight
up.
B A
ft /
>
Steering Column Removal and
Installation
3. Install the steering wheel bolt (A), and tighten it to the SRS components are located in this area. Review the
specified torque. Connect the cable reel subharness SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and the
connector (B). Make sure the wire harness is routed precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before
and fastened properly. doing repairs or service.
A
1 0 x 1 .2 5 m m
Removal
39 N-m
(4.0 kgf-m, 1. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection
29 Ibf-ft) procedure (see page 22-86).
2. Tilt the steering column all the way up, and move it all
the way in.
3. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-166) and the
steering wheel (see page 17-6).
20 - 86 ).
5. Release the hooks (A), then remove the steering joint
cover (B).
4. Install the driver's airbag (see page 24-166).

procedure (see page 22-86), and check these items:
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that
the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds
and then goes off.
Make sure the horn and turn signal switches work
properly.
Make sure the steering wheel switches work B A
properly.
6. After installation, cheek the steering wheel spoke
angle. If the steering spoke angles to the right and left
are not equal (steering wheel is not centered), correct
the engagement of the wheel/column shaft splines.
Steering Column Removal and Installation (cont'd)
6. Hold the splined shaft (A) on the column with a piece 8. Disconnect the steering joint (A) by moving the
of wire (B) between the joint yoke (C) of the splined steering joint toward the column.
shaft and join t yoke (D) of the splined tube to prevent
NOTE:
the splined shaft from pulling out.
If the center guide (B) is in place and has not moved,
leave it in place.
If the center guide has moved or been removed,
discard it.
A
8 x 1.25 m m
9. Remove the column covers (see page 20-96).
10. Disconnect the connectors from the ignition switch, and release the wire harness clips (A) from the steering column.
11. Disconnect the connectors from the combination switch assembly/cable reel (B).
12. Remove the combination switch assembly/cable reel from the steering column shaft by removing the three screws
(C).
13. Remove the steering column (D) by removing the attaching nuts and bolts. If the splined shaft (E) is removed, slip it
into the splined tube (F) by aligning the paint or stamped marks (G).
NOTE: Do not release the lock lever until the steering column is installed. If the lock lever is released before
installation, adjust the steering column after installation (see step 6 on page 17-15).
Steering Column Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation 3. Cut the wire (A), and slip the lower end of the steering
joint (B) onto the pinion shaft (C).
1. Install the steering column in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items: NOTE:
Tighten the steering column mounting bolts to the Pinion shaft with center guide: Install the steering
specified torque first, then tighten the nuts. joint by aligning the center guide (D).
Make sure the wires are not caught or pinched by Pinion shaft without center guide: Position the
any parts. steering column by aligning the gap (E) with the
angle.
Take care not to let the coat plates (A) fall out of
position during column installation.
Tighten the three screws (B) in the sequence
shown.
2. Center the steering rack within its stroke.
i
4. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the 6. Install the steering joint cover (A).
groove (B) around the pinion shaft, then loosely
install the steering join t bolt (C). Be sure that the joint NOTE: Check the steering joint cover fo r damage and
cracks. If the steering join t cover is cracked, replace
bolt is securely in the groove in the pinion shaft.
the steering joint cover.
8 x 1.25 m m 7. Install the steering column covers (see page 20-96).

28 N-m
(2.9 k g fm , 8. Install the driver's dashboard undercover (see page
21 Ibf-ft) 20 - 8 6 ).
5. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the
steering joint is fully seated, then tighten the steering 9. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-8) and the
joint bolt to the specified torque. driver's airbag (see page 24-166).
procedure (see page 22-87), and check these items:
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that
the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds
and then goes off.
Make sure the horn and turn signal switches work
properly.
Make sure the steering wheel switches work
properly.
11. After installation, check these items:
Check the steering wheel spoke angle. If the
steering spoke angles to the right and left are not
equal (steering wheel and rack are not centered),
correct the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft
splines.
Set the steering column to the center tilt position,
and to the center telescopic position, then do the
front toe inspection (see page 18-7).
Steering Column Inspection
Inspection
1. Remove the steering column (see page 17-9).
2. Check these items:
Check the upper ball bearing (A) and the lower ball bearing (B) fo r play and proper movement. If any bearing is
noisy or has excessive play, replace the steering column as an assembly.
Check the absorbing plates (C) and the coat plates (D) for distortion or breakage. If there is distortion or breakage,
replace the steering column as an assembly.
Check the tilt mechanism and telescopic mechanism for movement and damage.
Check the splined shaft (E) for smooth movement in and out. If the splined shaft is removed, slip it into the splined
tube by aligning the paint or stamped marks (F). If it sticks or binds, replace the steering column as an assembly.
Apply the multipurpose grease to the steering column.
NOTE: Do not use silicone grease.
(Between the
t il t bracket
and the pivot)
A"
3. Install the steering column (see page 17-12).

Check of Tilting Force 6. If the measurement is higher than specified, or if the
tilt function feels rough, do this.
1. Set the steering wheel in the straight ahead driving
position, and loosen the lock lever fully. -1. Loosen the steering column mounting nuts and
bolts (see step 13 on page 17-11) so they are
2. Attach a commercially available spring scale (A) to the finger-tight.
highest point of the steering wheel, and tilt the -2. Release the lock lever, and tilt and telescope the
steering column to the lowest position. steering column several times.
-3. Tilt the column down, then tighten the lock lever.
-4. Torque the bolts, then torque the nuts.
Upward 7. Test the tilting force again. If the force is still higher
than the specification, replace the steering column as
an assembly (see page 17-9).
3. Pull the spring scale straight up, and read the force
required to move the steering column.
4. Attach the spring scale to the lowest point of the
steering wheel.
5. Pull the spring scale straight down, and read the force
required to move the steering column.
Tilting force (upward/downward):
Standard: 69 N (7.0 kgf, 15.5 Ibf) max.
Steering Column Inspection (cont'd)
Check of Telescoping Force Check of Lock Lever Force.

1. Set the steering wheel in the straight ahead driving 1. Move the lock lever (A) from the loosened position to
position, and loosen the lock lever fully. the locked position three to five times, then release
the lock lever. Adjust the steering column to the
2. Attach a commercially available spring scale (A) to the
center tilt position and also to the full telescopic out
center point of the steering wheel, and push the
position, and hold the steering wheel.
steering column all the way in.
3. Pull the spring scale, and read the force required to

move the steering column during telescoping.
Telescoping force:
Standard: 90 N (9.2 kgf, 20.2 Ibf) max.
4. If the measurement is higher than specified, replace 2. Using a commercially available push-pull gauge,
the steering column as an assembly (see page 17-9). push the lock lever at 10 mm (0.39 in) in from its end,
and measure the force required to move lock lever.
Lock lever force:
82 N (8.4 kgf# 18.4 Ibf) max.
3. If the measurement is higher than specified, replace

the steering column as an assembly (see page 17-9).
Steering Lock Replacement
1. Remove the steering column (see page 17-9). 6. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts.
2. Center-punch each of the tw o shear bolts (A), and drill 7. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper operation
their heads o ff with a 5.0 mm (0.197 in) drill bit. of the steering wheel lock and that the ignition key
Be careful not to damage the steering lock (B) when turnsfreely.
removing the shear bolts.
8. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B)
tw ist off.
9. Install the steering column (see page 17-12).

10. Rewrite all new keys to the immobilizer-keyless
control unit (see page 22-202), and make sure the
3. Remove the shear bolts from the steering lock, then imm obilizer system works properly.
remove the steering lock.
4. Remove the immobilizer-keyless control unit from the
steering lock, then install it to the new steering lock
(see page 22-203).
5. Install the steering lock w ithout the key inserted.
Rack Guide Adjustment
Special Tools Required 4. Tighten the rack guide screw (A) to 25 N^m (2.5 kgf-m,
Locknut Wrench, 40 mm 07MAA-SL00100, . 18 Ibf-ft), then loosen it. .
07916-SA50001, or 07AAA-TL2A100
131
1. Set the front wheels in the straight ahead position.
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the
locknut wrench, then remove the rack guide screw
(B).
A B
5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 N*m (0.40 kgf-m,

2.9 Ibf-ft), then back it off to the specified angle.
' Specified return angle: 13+1
6. Hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench,
and tighten the locknut (B) hy h?nci until it's fully
seated.
7. Install the locknut wrench on the locknut, and hold the
rack guide screw stationary with a wrench. Tighten
the locknut to the specified torque.
8. Check for unusual steering effort through the
or 07AAA-TL2A100
complete turning range.
3. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw (A),
9. Check the steering wheel rotational play (see page
and apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or Loctite
5699) to the middle of the threads (B). Loosely install 17-4) and the power assist (see page 17-4).
the rack guide screw on the steering gearbox.
NOTE: If more than 5 minutes has passed after
applying the sealant, remove the old sealant and
residue, and reapply new sealant.
B
E l
Tie-Rod End Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Special Tools Required 6. Install the new tie-rod end ball joint boot (A) using the
Bearing Driver Attachment, 36 mm 07965-SA50500 bearing driver attachment. The boot must not have a
gap at the boot installation sections (B). After
1. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball join t from the knuckle installing the boot, check the ball pin tapered section
(see step 11 on page 17-65). for grease contamination, and wipe it if necessary.
2. Remove the tie-rod end from the rack end (see page
17-74). 07965-SA50500
3. Remove the tie-rod end ball joint boot from the tie-rod
end, and wipe the old grease off the ball pin.
4. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) w ith fresh
multipurpose grease.
7. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end (see page 17-74).
8. Connect the tie-rod end ball joint to the knuckle (see
(see page 18-5).
5. Pack the interior of a new tie-rod end ball joint boot (B)
and lip (C) with fresh multipurpose grease.
Note these items when installing new grease:
Keep grease off the boot mounting area (D) and the
tapered section (E) of the ball pin.
Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to
enter the boot.
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-64). 4. Apply a mild soap and water solution to the new
gearbox mount cushion surface (A), then place the
2. Position a 34 mm socket (A) on the flange part of the
mount cushion on the gearbox mounting cushion
gearbox housing with a washer (B), a 10 x 105 mm
hole.
flange bolt (C), and a 10 mm nut (D) as shown.
5. Position a 34 mm socket (B) on the flange part of the

gearbox housing with a washer, a flange bolt, and a
nut as shown.
3. Hold the flange bolt with a wrench, and tighten the nut
6. Install the gearbox mount cushion by tightening the
with a wrench. Remove the gearbox mount cushion
nut until the mount cushion edge (A) properly fit on
(E). the gearbox flange surface (B).
m u
7. Install the steering gearbox (see page 17-68).

TORQUE SENSOR
(B uilt-in to th e
steering gearbox)
STEERING GEARBOX
Disassembly/Reassem bly, page 17-74
Rack End Removal and Installati on, page 17-75
Rack Guide Rem oval/Installation, page 17-79
EPS indicator Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

Under normal conditions, the EPS indicator (A) comes If the CPU cannot be activated, or it fails, the EPS
on when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), then indicator comes on, but the DTC is not stored.
goes off after the engine is started. This indicates that The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However,
the LED and its circuit are operating correctly. when the same DTC is detected more than once, the
If there is a failure in the system after the engine is most recent DTC is written over the prior DTC,
started, the EPS indicator w ill stay on, and the power therefore only one occurrence is stored.
assist is turned off or restricted. The lowest DTC is indicated first. The DTCs are
indicated in ascending order, not in the order that they
occurred.
The DTCs are stored in the EEPROM (non-volatile
memory) therefore the stored DTCs cannot be erased
by disconnecting the 12 volt battery. Do the specified
procedures to clearthe DTCs.
Self-Diagnosis
Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories:
Initial diagnosis: Done right after the engine starts and
until the EPS indicator goes off.
Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK (0).
When the EPS indicator comes on, the control unit

stores the DTC. In this case, the control unit w ill not
activate the EPS system after the engine starts again, but
it keeps the EPS indicator on.
When a problem is detected and the EPS indicator
comes on, there are cases when the indicator stays on
until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), and cases
when the indicator goes off automatically when the
system returns to normal.
Even though the system is operating normally, the EPS
indicator w ill come on under some conditions with the
vehicle stopped and the engine at high rpm with
constant input from the steering wheel.
To determine the actual cause of the problem, question
the customer about the conditions during which the
problem occurred, taking the above conditions into
consideration.
Restriction on Power Assist Operation How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic
Repeated extreme steering force, such as turning the
System)
steering wheel continuously back-and-forth w ith the 1. If the system indicators stay on, connect the HDS to
vehicle stopped, causes an increase in electrical current the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the
draw by the EPS motor. The increase of electric current driver's side of the dashboard.
causes the EPS motor to heat up. Because this heat
adversely affects the system, the control unit monitors
the electric current draw of the EPS motor.
When the control unit detects heat build-up in the EPS
motor, it reduces the electric current to the EPS motor
gradually to protect the system, and it restricts the
power assist operation. The EPS indicator comes on
during this function.
When steering torque is not applied to the steering
wheel, or when the ignition is turned to LOCK (0) and the
EPS motor cools, the control unit w ill restore the power
assist gradually until it's fully restored (after about
10 minutes).
How to Troubleshoot DTCs A
The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
of the problem is still present and the EPS indicator is
still on. Following the procedure when the EPS indicator 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
does not come on can result in incorrect diagnosis. and the EPS control unit. If it does not, go to the DLC
1. Question the customer about the conditions when the
problem occurred, and try to reproduce the same 4. Check the DTC for all systems, and note it. Then refer
conditions for troubleshooting. Find out when the to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and do the
EPS indicator came on, such as w hile turning, after appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
turning, when the vehicle was at a certain speed, etc. NOTE;
2. When the EPS indicator does not come on during the The HDS reads the DTC, the current data, and other
test-drive, but troubleshooting is done based on the system data.
DTC, check for loose connectors, poor terminal For specific operations, refer to the Help menu that
contact, etc., in the affected circuit before you start came with the HDS.
troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, clearthe DTC and test-drive the
vehicle. Be sure the EPS indicator does not come on.
How to Retrieve DTCs

1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS
to the data link connector (DLC) under the driver's
side of the dashboard.
and the EPS control unit. If it does not, go to the DLC
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the DTC(s)
on the screen. After determining the DTC, refer to the
DTC troubleshooting. Do the all systems DTC check,
and troubleshoot any powertrain DTCs first.
How to Clear DTCs

and the EPS control unit. If it does not, go to the DLC
4. Clearthe DTC(s) by following the screen prompts on
the HDS.
DTC Detection Item Note

11-02 Low/high IG1-terminal voltage DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-37)
12-01 Motor Power Supply Voltage DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-37)
21-03 CAN Vehicle Speed Stuck ON DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-37)
22-01 Engine Speed Signal DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-38)
23-01 CAN Data Stuck ON DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-39)
23-02 CAN Vehicle Speed Data DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-40)
23-03 CAN Engine Speed Data DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-41)
23-04 CAN Bus-off Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-42)
23-05 CAN 3 Mode Information Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-43)
32-09 Motor Current Correlation DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-44)
32-OB Over Current DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-45)
32-OC Battery Current Detect Circuit DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-39)
32-OE Over Current Continuation DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-45)
32-OF Battery Current/Motor Current Correlation DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-46)
34-01 Power Relay DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-39)
34-02 Fail-Safe Relay DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-45)
35-01 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (CPU) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-39)
35-02 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (EEPROM1) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-39)
35-04 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (CPU Communication) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-39)
35-05 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (A/D Conversion) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-39)
35-08 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (EEPROM2) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-39)
35-OA EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (CPU Operation) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-39)
36-02 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (INH Output Circuit) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-39)
37-01 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Step-up Circuit) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-39)
38-01 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Temperature Sensor) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-39)
39-01 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Precharge Circuit) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-46)
39-02 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Outside WDT) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-46)
39-03 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Power Self-holding Circuit) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-47)
52-01 Torque Sensor Allowable Tolerance (Initial diagnosis) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-47)
52-02 Torque Sensor Power Supply (Initial diagnosis) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-49)
52-03 Main Torque Sensor DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-47)
52-04 Sub Torque Sensor DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-47)
52-05 Torque Sensor Allowable Tolerance DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-47)
52-06 Torque Sensor Offset Out of Range DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-50)
52-07 Torque Sensor Amplifier Out of Range DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-46)
52-08 Torque Sensor Power Supply DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-51)
61-04 Motor Harness Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-52)
61-05 Motor Harness Short DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-53)
61-06 Motor Harness Open DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-54)
71-01 Motor Angle Sensor (SIN/COS signals) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-56)
71-03 Motor Angle Sensor (SIN/COS signals) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-56)
71-04 Motor Angle Sensor (Check Signals) DTC Troubleshooting (see page 17-58)

HDS does not communicate with the EPS control Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see
unit or the vehicle page 11 -383)
EPS indicator does not come on Symptom Troubleshooting (see
page 17-60)
EPS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are Symptom Troubleshooting (see
stored page 17-60)
System Description
EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (1 IP)
W ire s i de of female term ina l s
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description Signal

Number % (Terminal name)
1 WHT + B EPS MTR Power source for the Battery voltage (about 12V) at all times
(Plus battery) actuator EPS motor
2 BLK EPS GND Ground for the EPS Continuity to ground
(Power ground) control unit
3 LT BLU NEP Detects engine speed With engine running:
(Engine speed signal pulses
pulse)
4 ORN MG1 Ground for the motor
5 BLU K-LINE Communicates with HDS Pulse voltage (digital signal)
(Data link
connector)
6 YEL MG2 Ground for the motor
7 GRN F-CAN H F-CAN communication
(F-CAN HI) circuit
8 Not used Not used
9 PNK F-CAN L F-CAN communication
(F-CAN LO) circuit
11 ORN IG1 Power source for With ignition switch ON (II):
(Ignition 1) activating the system battery voltage (about 12V)
EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (16P)

Number (Terminal name)
1 GRN EPS MW Drive the EPS motor
2 RED EPS MU Drive the EPS motor
3 BLU EPSMV Drive the EPS motor
4 RED EPS S3 Detects EPS motor angle
(Signal 3) sensor signal
5 YEL EPS S1 Detects EPS motor angle
6 GRY EPS S4 Detects EPS motor angle
7 LT BLU EPS S2 Detects EPS motor angle
8 PNK EPS R2 Detects EPS motor angle
(Motor angle sensor signal
sensor 2)
9 GRY SH GND Ground for the sealed
(Sealed ground) line
10 GRN EPS R1 Detects EPS motor angle
(Motor angle sensor signal
sensor 1)
12 BRN VREF Reference voltage for With engine running:
(Reference voltage) torque sensor about 3.3 V
13 RED SUB Detects torque sensor Turn to the right:
(Sub voltage) signal about 2.51.7 V (decrease)
Turn to the left:
about 2.53.3 V (increase)
14 WHT SE Ground for the torque Continuity to ground
(Sensor earth) sensor
15 BLU MAIN Detects torque sensor Turn to the right:
(main voltage) signal about 2.53.3 V (increase)
Turn to the left:
about 2.51.7 V (decrease)
16 YEL VCC Power source for torque With engine running:
(Voltage common) sensor about 10 V
System Outline
This vehicle is equipped with electrical power steering (EPS). The driver's steering force is assisted by an electric m otor
at the steering gearbox, instead of an engine-driven oil pump to generate oil pressure, so the EPS system improves
engine efficiency.
The EPS control unit monitors and controls the EPS motor's assisting force to match driving conditions.
Low vehicle speeds: High power assist (for easy handling)
High speed driving: Low power assist (for stable driving)
Low speed to high speed driving: Change smoothly from high assist to low assist
Steering Gearbox
The steering force from the steering wheel is sent to the pinion shaft. The torque sensor measures the difference
between the force applied to the pinion shaft and the resistance to turning the wheels due to road friction, and converts
it to a voltage signal which is sent to the EPS control unit. Based on this signal, the EPS control unit controls the current
to the EPS motor. The EPS motor rotates the worm wheel gear through the worm gear. This becomes the assist force in
the steering system.
System Operation
The EPS control unit controls the EPS motor by these signals:
Vehicle speed signal (from ECM/PCM)
Engine speed signal (from ECM/PCM)
EPS m otor angle sensor signal
Torque sensor signal
3-mode Drive System information signal
At idle or low vehicle speeds, the EPS control unit sends a signal to the ECM/PCM to increase the engine idle speed to
prevent the engine from stalling.
When the EPS control unit detects a failure in the system, it stores a DTC and sends a signal to the gauge control module
to turn the EPS indicator on.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE ECM/PCM
Engine
speed
signal
EPS CONTROL UNIT
Motor angle signal
EPS MOTOR ANGLE SENSOR EPS MOTOR TORQUE SENSOR
Communication via F-CAN

EPS Motor Operation
The EPS uses an efficient brushless DC motor. The EPS motor control circuit is composed of a system control CPU, the
field-effect transistor (FET) drive circuit, the H type FET bridge, the power relay, the fail-safe relay, the electric current
sensor, and the EPS motor. From the input sensor signals, the CPU calculates and duty cycles outputs the appropriate
three-phase current for the FET drive circuit. This operation is duty controlled.
Power relay (built into the EPS control unit)

When the system is operating normally, the CPU turns the power relay on, and the power is provided to the FET bridge.
When the CPU detects a failure in the system which has the demand to shut down the system, the CPU turns the power
relay off.
Fail-safe relay (built into the EPS control unit)
When the system is operating normally, the CPU turns the fail-safe relay on, and the power is provided to the EPS motor.
When the CPU detects a failure in the system that requires it to shut down the system, the CPU turns the fail-safe relay
off at the same time it turns the power relay off. This relay is a fail-safe in the event the power relay is faulty and does not
turn off.
Electric current detection circuit
An electric current detection circuit monitors the current of each phase circuit to the motor, and sends a signal to the
CPU.
3-Mode Drive System

The EPS control unit has two power assist control maps which correspond to the 3-mode Drive System information sent
from the gauge control module.
When the 3-mode Drive System is in the Normal or ECON Mode, the EPS control map is set to the normal, and when it is
in the Sport Mode, the EPS control map is set to sport.
When the control map is set to normal, power assist is mapped to provide light and easy steering effort at low speeds.
When the control map is set to sport, on the other hand, the system is set up to require more steering effort at low speed
and it increases the self-alignment effort when turning compared with the normal control state.
When the control modes switches, the system changes gradually (normal to sport: about 0.5 second, sport to normal:
about 1.5 second) to avoid shocks caused by a sudden change in power assistance.
EPS control map image
Steering
effort (N)
Corner steering self-alignment
Lateral
acceleration (G)
Circuit Diagram
12 VOLT
BATTERY
G502
- : CAN line
- : Other com munication line
- ; Shielding
EPS CONTROL UNIT STEERING GEARBOX
(cont'd)
n... .... .... i i....

Ii ... i i __ii.... p jn
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (11P) EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
TORQUE SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR EPS MOTOR 3P CONNECTOR
3 2 1 i[3| 2 |1J
6 5 4
EPS MOTOR ANGLE

SENSOR 8P
CONNECTOR DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
___I__L1=5=5^
4 3 2 \ 1 102 113 124 135 146 157 16/

8/
8 7 6 5 \9
T erm i nal side o f m ale term inals Term inal side o f fem ale term inals
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11-02: Low/high I G1-terminal voltage DTC 21-03: CAN Vehicle Speed Stuck ON
DTC 12-01: Motor Power Supply Voltage NOTE:
Check for any powertrain DTCs and troubleshoot
1. Start the engine. those first.
2. Check the BATTERY and IG1 in the EPS DATA LIST Even though the system is operating normally, the
with the HDS. EPS indicator will come on caused and set DTC 21-03
when you raise the engine speed with the vehicle
Is there battery voltage? stopped. See General Troubleshooting (see page
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this 17-22).
time.B VSA DTCs may set during this troubleshooting. If so,
clear them.
NO-Check the battery (see page 22-85) and chargi ng
system indicator circuit troubleshooting (see page 1. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10), and
12-200). If they are OK, go to step 3. allow all wheels to rotate freely.
3. Check for a poor connection at all IG1 circuit 2. Start the engine.
connections between the EPS control unit connector
3. Turn off the VSA function by using the VSA OFF
A (11P) terminal No. 11 and the under dash fuse/relay switch.
box No. B11 (7.5 A) fuse.
4. Run the vehicle in 4th gear (MT) or D (CVT).
Are the connections OK?
5. Check the VEHICLE SPEED in the EPS DATA LIST with
YES-Go to step 4.
the HDS.
NO-Repair the IG1 circuit.
Is the vehicle speed indicated?
4. Check for a poor connection at all + B circuit YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
connections between the EPS control unit connector
time.H
A (11P) terminal No. 1 and the battery terminal fuse
box No. A2 (70 A) fuse. NO-Go to step 6.
Are the connections OK? 6. Start the engine, and check the tachometer and the
speedometer.
YES-Substitute a known-good EPS control unit (see
page 17-80), and recheck.H Does the tachometer and the speedometer work
correctly?
NO-Repair the +B circuit.
YES-Check for loose terminals in the EPS control unit
connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor
connections are found, Replace the EPS control unit
(see page 17-80).H
NO-Troubleshoot the gauge control module (see
page 22-325).B
DTC 22-01: Engine Speed Signal 8. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
connector A (11P) terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM
NOTE: Check for any powertrain DTCs and troubleshoot connector A (44P) terminal No. 28.
those first.
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (11P)
1. Start the engine. W ire side of fem ale term inals
2. Check the ENGINE SPEED in the EPS DATA LIST with NEP (LT BLU)
11110| 9 I 8 I I 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 j-
the HDS.
Is 0300 rpm indicated? Ll ... ....rd
YES-Go to step 3.
tim e .ll 3 4 5

4. Short the SCS line with the HDS. 38 39 40 41 42
NEP (LT BLU)

5. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P) (see step 14
on page 11-210).
6. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (11P) (see ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
7. Checkfor continuity between EPS control unit Is there continuity?
connector A (11P) terminal No. 3 and body ground.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the EPS
control unit and the ECM/PCM.
between the EPS control unit and the ECM/PCM.
NO-Go to step 8.
11. Measure the voltage between EPS control unit DTC 23-01; CAN Data Stuck ON
connector A (IIP ) terminal No. 3 and body ground.
DTC 32-OC: Battery Current Detect Circuit
EPS CONTROL UN I T CONNECTOR A (11P)
DTC 34-01: Power Relay
DTC 35-01: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit
(CPU)
(EEPROM1)
(CPU Communication)
Is there battery voltage? DTC 35-05: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit
YES-Check fo r loose terminals in the EPS control unit (A/D Conversion)
connections are found, replace the EPS control unit DTC 35-08: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit
(see page 17-80).H (EEPROM2)
DTC 35 - 0A: ECU Internal Circuit (CPU
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to Operation)
step 1 and recheck. If the ECM/PCM was updated and
DTCs are not indicated, troubleshooting is complete.
If the ECM/PCM was substituted and DTCs are not (INH Output Circuit)
indicated, replace the original ECM/PCM (see page
11-209). DTC 37-01: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit
(Step-up Circuit)
(Temperature Sensor)
Is DTC 23-01, 32-OC, 34-01, 35-01, 35-02, 35-04, 35-05,
35-08, 35-OA, 36-02, 37-01, or 38-01 indicated?
connections are found, replace the EPS control unit
(see page 17-80).
tim e.H
DTC 23-02: CAN Vehicle Speed Data 10. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
connector A (11P) terminals and ECM/PCM connector
NOTE: Clear the DTC related to the VSA. A (44P) terminals (see table).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Sign EPS Control Unit ECM/PCM
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Connector A Connector A
(11P) Terminal (44P) Terminal
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). F-CAN L No. 9 No. 37
F-CAN H No. 7 No. 36
EPS CONTROL UNIT GONNECTOR A ( IIP )
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. W ire side o f fem ale term inals
Is DTC 23-02 indicated? F-CAN L (PNK) F-CAN H (GRN)
YES-Go to step 6. I1 1 I 1 0 I 9 I 8 i I 7 l 6 | 5 | 4 I 3 |

LH_ _rd
tim e.B
7. Short the SCS line with the HDS. M 2 3 1415161 7
1 3 |t4 |l5 ]l6 17 18 19
1 0 11 1 2

8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P) (see step 14 1
2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 29|30|3t|32 33 34 35
on page 11-210).
6I37 3 8 | 3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |42 431441
9. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (11P) (see

YES-Go to step 11.
11. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P). DTC 23-03: CAN Engine Speed Data
12. Reconnect EPS control unit connector A (11P). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
13. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10), and 2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
allow all wheels to rotate freely.
15.Turn off the VSA function by using the VSA OFF
switch. 5. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.
16. Run the vehicle in 4th gear (MT) or D (CVT). Is DTC 23-03 indicated?
17. Check the VEHICLE SPEED in the EPS DATA LIST with YES-Go to step 6.
the HDS.
Is the vehicle speed indicated? tim e.B
YES-Check for loose terminals in the EPS control unit 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
(see page 17-80).B 8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P) (see step 14
on page 11-210).
software (see page 11 -207), or substitute a 9. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (11P) (see
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 3 on page 17-80).
If the ECM/PCM was substituted and DTCs are not
11-209).B
(cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between EPS control unit DTC 23-04: CAN Bus-Off Malfunction
A (44P) terminals (see table). NOTE: Check for any powertrain DTCs and troubleshoot
those first.
Sign EPS Control Unit ECM/PCM
Connector A Connector A 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
(1 IP) Terminal (44P) Terminal 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
F-CAN L No. 9 No. 37
F-CAN H No. 7 No. 36 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
E P S C O N T R O L U N IT C O N N E C T O R A ( IIP ) 4. Start the engine.
F -C A N L (P N K ) F-CAN H.(GRN)
Is DTC 23-04 indicated?
|j 111o| 9 | 8 | | 7 | 6 I 5 | 4 | 3 |
YES-Go to step 6.
H
tim e .ll
IEli[l4 |l5 |T 6
29|3Q|31132
|3 6 |3 7 38 39 40 41 42
on page 11-210).
F -C A N H (G R N ) F -C A N L (P N K )
9. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (1 IP) (see
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A (4 4 P )
T erm inal s i de o f fem ale te rm i nals
YES-Go to step 11.
12. Reconnect EPS control unit connector A (11P).
14. Check the ENGINE SPEED in the EPS DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Is engine speed indicated?
(see page 17-80).H
11-209).
10. Checkfor continuity between EPS control unit DTC 23-05: CAN 3 Mode Information
Malfunction
A (44P) terminals (see table).
Sign EPS Control U nit ECM/PCM
Connector A Connector A 2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
(IIP ) Terminal (4 4 P) Terminal
F-CAN H No. 7 No. 36 4. Start the engine.
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (1 IP) 5. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.
F-CAN L (PNK) F-CAN H (GRN) Is DTC 23-05 indicated?
11111p| 9 I 8 | I 7 I 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 |
YES-
If DTC 21 -03,23-01, 23-02,23-03, and 23-04 are
CX- indicated at the same time, go to step 6.
If DTC 21-03,23-01, 23-02,23-03, and 23-04 are not
indicated, troubleshoot the gauge control module
(see page 22-325).B
h i * 3 |4 | 5 | 6 I 7 I t 0
1 0 11 1 213|14|15|16 17 18 19
23 24 25 1 NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this
1 2 0 21 2 2
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
1 tim e.H
J
36 37 3 8 | 3 9 |4 0 |4 1 | 42 4 3 [ 4 4 )
1=
7. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P connector
ECM /PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) (see step 3 on page 22-354).
T erm inal side o f fem ale term inals 8. Disconnect the EPS control unit connector A (11P)
(see page 1 7 -80 ).
9. Checkfor continuity between EPS control unit DTC 32-09; Motor Current Correlation
connector A (11P) terminals and gauge control
module 32P connector terminals (see table). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Sign EPS Control Unit Gauge Control 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Connector A Module 32P 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
{1 IF ) Terminal Connector
Terminal 4. Start the engine.
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A ( IIP )
W ire side o f fe m a l e term inals YES-Check for loose terminals in the EPS control unit
F-CAN L (PNK) F-CAN H (GRN)
(see page 17-80).H
NO -lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this
tim e.H
b,
5 l i - -------------r
10J 9 7 8 I T 6 | 5 \ 4 ] i j 2 \ T \ r
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
F-CAN L (PNK)
F-CAN H (GRN)
YES-Check fo r loose terminals in the EPS control unit
(see page 1 7-80 ).
control unit and the gauge control m odule.
DTC 32-OB; Over Current 10. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS
control unit connector B (16P) terminals No. 1, No. 2,
DTC 32-OE: Over Current Continuation and No. 3 individually.
DTC 34-02; Fail-Safe Relay

EPS CONTROL UN I T CONNECTOR B (16P)
Is DTC 32-OB, 32-OE, or 34-02 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6. W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
tim e .ll YES-Repair a short to body ground in the w ire
between the EPS control unit and the EPS m otor.H
NO-Replace the EPS motor (see page 17-62).
7. Disconnect EPS control unit connector B (16P) (see
8. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS
and No. 3 individually.
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Check for loose terminals in the EPS control unit
(see page 17-80).
9. Disconnect the EPS motor 3P connector (see step 17
on page 17-66).
DTC 32-OF: Battery Current/Motor Current DTC-39.-01; EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit
Correlation (Precharge Circuit)
DTC 52-07; Torque Sensor Amplifier Out of DTC 39-02; EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit
Range (Outside WDT)
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
5. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several 5. Check fo r DTCs with the HDS.
times.
Is DTC 39-01 or DTC 39-02 indicated?
Is DTC 32-OF or 52-07 indicated? connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor
YES-Check for loose terminals in the EPS control unit (see page 17-80).H
connections are found. Replace the EPS control unit NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this
(see page 17-80). tim e.B
tim e .ll
DTC 39-03: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit DTC 52-01; Torque Sensor Allowable
(Power Self-Holding Circuit) Tolerance (Initial Diagnosis)
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC 52-03; Main Torque Sensor
DTC 52-04; Sub Torque Sensor
DTC 52-05: Torque Sensor Allowable
4. Wait 30 seconds or more.
Tolerance
6. Check fo r DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Check for loose term inals in the EPS control unit
connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor 4. Start the engine.
connections are found, Replace the EPS control unit 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
(see page 17-80).H
Is DTC 52-01, 52-03, 52-04, or 52-05 indicated?
tim e.H YES-Go to step 6.
tim e.H
9. Measure the voltage between body ground and EPS
control unit connector B (16P) terminals No. 12,
No. 13, No. 14, No. 15, and No. 16 individually.
SE (WHT)

YES-Repair a short to power in the wire harness
between the EPS control unit and the torque sensor.H
NO-Go to step 10.
11. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS 15. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
control unit connector B (16P) terminals No. 12, connector B (16P) terminals and torque sensor 6P
No. 13, No. 14, No. 15, and No. 16 individually. connector terminals (see table).
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) Sign EPS Control Unit Torque Sensor 6P
SE (WHT) Connector B (16P) Connector
Terminal Terminal
VREF No. 12 No 5
MAIN No. 15 No 5
SE No. 14 No. 1
SUB No. 13 No. 3
VCC No. 16 No. 4
SE (WHT)
VREF (BRN)
vcc
YES-Go to step 12. (YEL)
16115114113~j 1121111Vo| 9 | 8 | | 7 | 6 | 5 |
NO-Go to step 14.
12. Disconnect the torque sensor 6P connector (see step b. id
17 on page 17-66). SUB (RED)
M AIN
(BLU)
control unit connector B (16P) terminals No. 12,
No. 13, No. 14, No. 15, and No. 16 individually.
SUB VREF
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) (YEL) (WHT)
SE (WHT)
3 2 1 3 SE (BLK)
M AIN 6 5 4
(GRN) JVCC (RED)
TORQUE SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 16.
Is there continuity? control unit and the torque sensor.H
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire 16. Substitute a known-good EPS control unit (see page
between the EPS control unit and the torque se n so r.ll 17-80).
NO-Replace the steering gearbox (see page 17-64).H 17. Reconnect all the connectors.
14. Disconnect the torque sensor 6P connector (see step 18. Start the engine.
17 on page 17-66). 19. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
is DTC 52-01, 52-03, 52-04, or 52-05 indicated?
YES-Replace the steering gearbox (see page
17-64).B1
NO-Replace the original EPS control unit (see page
17-80). I
DTC 52-02: Torque Sensor Power Supply 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(Initial Diagnosis) 11. Substitute a known-good EPS control unit (see page
17-80).
17-64).B
YES-Go to step 6. 17-80).B

tim e .B
control unit connector B (16P) terminals No. 12 and
No. 16 individually.
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B(16P)
W ire side o f fem a l e term inals

YES-Repair a short to power in the wire harness
NO-Go to step 10.
DTC 52-06: Torque Sensor Offset Out of 12. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS
Range
No. 15 individually.
EPS CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR B (16P)
2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS. M AIN (BLU) SUB (RED)

5. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several
times.
YES-Go to step 7.
t im e . l YES-Go to step 13.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO-Go to step 15.
8. Disconnect EPS control unit connector B (16P) (see 13. Disconnect the torque sensor 6P connector (see step
step 3 on page 17-80). 17 on page 17-66).
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS
10. Measure the voltage between body ground and EPS No. 15 individually.
No. 15 individually. EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
M AIN (BLU) SUB (RED)
M AIN (BLU) SUB (RED)
W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls Is there continuity?

Is there battery voltage? YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
between the EPS control unit and the torque sensor.B
EPS control unit and the torque sensor.H NO-Replace the steering gearbox (see page 17-64).H
NO-Go to step 11. 15. Disconnect the torque sensor 6P connector (see step
17 on page 17-66).
16. Check for continuity between EPS control unit DTC 52-08: Torque Sensor Power Suppl y
connector B (16P) terminals and torque sensor 6P
connector terminals (see table). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Sign EPS Control Unit Torque Sensor 6P 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Connector B (16P) Connector 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Terminal Terminal
MAIN No. 15 No 6 4. Start the engine.
SUB No. 13 No 3
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls Is DTC 52-08 indicated?
MAIN (BLU) SUB (RED) YES-Go to step 6.
r
__ I ...............................:............ .......... r r
tim e .ll
|16 |15 |14 |13 | I[ 12111 j 101 9 | 8 I | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 |
3 2 1 7. Disconnect EPS control unit connector B (16P) (see
r .. r "
9. Measure the voltage between EPS control unit
connector B (16P) terminal No. 16 and body ground.
SUB (YEL) I
m...............m EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
M AIN (GRN) |
3 2 1 i
6 5 4
TORQUE SENSOR 6P CONN-XTOR

YES-Go to step 17.
control unit and the torque sensor.B Is there battery voltage?
17. Substitute a known-good EPS control unit (see page YES-Repair a short to power in the w ire between the
17-80). EPS control unit and the torque sensor.B
18. Reconnect all the connectors. NO-Go to step 10.
19. Start the engine. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
times.
17-64).H
.17-80).11
(cont'd)
11. Check for continuity between EPS control unit DTC 61-04: M otor Harness Malfunction
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
W ire side of fe m a l e term inals tim e .ll
Is there continuity? 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES-Go to step 12. 7. Disconnect EPS control unit connector B (16P) (see
NO-Go to step 14. step 3 on page 17-80).
12. Disconnect the torque sensor 6P connector (see step 8. Check for continuity between the follow ing terminals
17 on page 17-66). of EPS control unit connector B (16P).
13. Checkfor continuity between EPS controhunit EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
No. 1 ----------:------------------------------ No. 2
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) No. 1 -------------------------------------- No. 3

No. 2 ----------------------------------- ----------- No. 3
NO-Replace the steering gearbox (see page 17-64).H
14. Substitute a known-good EPS control unit (see page W ire side o f fem ale term inals
17-80).
16. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS. connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor
Is DTC 52-08 indicated? connections are found, replace the EPS control unit
(see page 17-80).
17-64).HI NO-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the original EPS control unit (see page 9. Disconnect the EPS m otor 3P connector (see step 17
17-80).B on page 17-66).
10. On the EPS motor side, check for continuity between DTC 61-05: Motor Harness Short
follow ing terminals of EPS motor 3P connector.
EPS MOTOR 3P CONNECTOR
No. 1 No. 2 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
No. 1 No. 3 4. Start the engine.
No. 2 No. 3 5. Check fo r DTCs with the HDS.
EPS IVIOTOR 3P CONNECTOR Is DTC 61-05 indicated?

YES-Go to step 6.
EPS M V (RED) (f$ ) NO-lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this

tim e.H
9 _ t
EPS M U (BLK) EPS M W (WHT)
ITBfl 7. Disconnect EPS control unit connector B (16P) (see
Term inal side o f m ale term inals
Is there continuity? and No. 3 individually.
YES-Repair an open in the wire between the EPS
control unit and the EPS m otor.H EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
NO-Replace the EPS motor (see page 17-62) J

EPS control unit and the EPS m otor.B
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
11. Checkfor continuity between body ground and EPS DTC 61-06: Motor Harness Open
and No. 3 individually. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
times.
YES-Go to step 7.
Is there continuity? tim e.H
NO-Check for loose terminals in the EPS control unit 8. Disconnect EPS control unit connectors B (16P) (see
connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor step 3 on page 17-80).
(see page iy-80).H 9. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS
12. Disconnect the EPS motor 3P connector (see step 17 and No. 3 individually.
on page 17-66).
EPS CONTROL UN I T CONNECTOR B (16P)

YES-Go to step 10.
W ire side o f fem ale term in a ls NO-Go to step 12.
10. Disconnect the EPS m otor 3P connector (see step 17
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire on page 17-66).
NO-Replace the EPS m otor (see page 17-62).HI
11. Checkfor continuity between body ground and EPS 13. Disconnect the EPS m otor 3P connector (see step 17
control unit connector B (16P) terminals No. 1, No. 2, on page 17-66).
14. On the EPS motor side, check fo r continuity between
follow ing terminals of EPS m otor 3P connector.
EPS CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR B (16P)
No. 1 N o. 2
No. 1 No. 3
No. 2 No. 3

EPS m y (RED) (Q )
EPS M U (BLK)
IH J EPS M W (WHT)
NO-Replace the EPS m otor (see page 1 7 -62 ).
12. Check for continuity between fo llowing terminals of
EPS control unit connector B (16P). Term inal side o f m ale te rm in a ls

No. 1 ------------- ------------- --------------- No. 2
YES-Repair an open in the wire between the EPS
No. 1 * + ----------------------------------------------- No. 3 control unit and the EPS m otor.H
No. 2 <3----------------------------------------------- No 3 NO-Replace the EPS motor (see page 17-62).
W i re side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
(see page 17-80).Hi
NO-Go to step 13.
DTC 71-01: Motor Angle Sensor (SIN/COS 9. Measure the resistance between following terminals
of EPS control unit connector B (16P).
Signals)
DTC 71-03: Motor Angle Sensor (SIN/COS EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
Signals)
No. 4 ---------- :------------------------------- No. 5
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). No. 6 --------------------------------------- No. 7
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. No. 8 ^ -------------------------------------------- No. 10
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)

5. Turn the steering wheel to the right or left, and wait at
least 10 seconds.
Is DTC 71-01 or 71 -03 indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
time.H
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). W ire side o f fem ale term inals

step 3 on page 17-80). Is the resistance between R1 R 2 :13.517.5 Q,
S 1 -S 3 :2 5 - 3 2 Q, and S 2 -S 4 :2 5 - 3 2 D?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 13.
10. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS 12. On the sensor side, checkfor continuity between body
control unit connector B (16P) term inals No. 4, No. 5, ground and EPS m otor angle sensor 8P connector
No. 6, No. 7, No. 8, and No. 10 individually. terminals No. 2, No. 3, No. 4, No. 6, No. 7, and No. 8
individually.
EPS MOTOR ANGLE SENSOR 8P CONNECTOR
EPS S1 (BLK) EPS S3 (RED)

EPS R2 (GRN
EPS R1 4 3 2 1
(WHT) c
8 7 6 5
EPS S4 EPS S2
(BLU) (YEL)
n>

Is there continuity? YES-Replace the EPS m otor (see page 17-62J.H
YES-Go to step 11. NO-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
between the EPS control unit and the EPS motor
NO-Check for loose terminals in the EPS control unit angle sensor.H
connections are found, replace the EPS control unit 13. Disconnect the EPS m otor angle sensor 8P connector
(see page 17-80).H (see step 17 on page 17-66).
11. Disconnect the EPS m otor angle sensor 8P connector
14. On the sensor side, measure the resistance between DTC 71-04:-Motor Angle Sensor (Check
follow ing terminals of EPS m otor angle sensor 8P
Signals)
connector.
No. 2 No. 3
No. 4 No. 8
No. 6 No. 7 4. Start the engine.
5. Turn the steering wheel to the right or left, and w ait at
EPS MOTOR ANGLE SENSOR 8P CONNECTOR least 10 seconds.
6. Check fo r DTCs with the HDS.
EPS S1 _ EPS S3
(BLK) p / O ) - , (RED)
EPS R 2 ,
(GRN) YES-Go to step 7.
4 3 2 1 NO -lnterm ittent failure, the system is OK at this
8 7 6 5 tim e.H
EPS R1
(WHT) 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
EPS 84 EPS S2
(BLU) (YEL) 8. Disconnect EPS control unit connector B (16P) (see
9. Measure the resistance between EPS control unit
W ire side of fem ale te rm in a ls
connector B (16P) terminals No. 8 and No. 10.
Is the resistance between R1 R 2 :13.517.5 Q,
S1S 3:2 5 -3 2 O, and S 2 -S 4 :2 5 -3 2 D?
^ k ir
EPS R1 (GRN) EPS R2 (PNK)
YES-Repair an open or short in the wire between the _i ---
HI...... ..... ........... ......
EPS control unit and the EPS motor angle sensor.H ]16|15|14|13| |l2 ] 1111o| 9 | 8 | | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 |
NO-Replace the EPS motor (see page 17-62). 3 2 1
V ....................... ....- .................. ,...........r '
Is the resistance between 13.517.5 D?

YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 13.
10. Check fo r continuity between body ground and EPS 14. On the sensor side, measure the resistance between
control unit connector B (16P) terminals No. 8 and EPS m otor angle sensor 8P connector terminals No. 4
No. 10 individually. and No. 8.
EPS R2 (GRN)
4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5
EPS R1 (WHT)
Wire side of female term ina l s

YES-Go to step 11.
Is the resistance between 13.517.5 Q?
NO-Check for loose terminals in the EPS control unit
connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor YES-Repair an open or short in the w ire between the
connections are found, replace the EPS control unit EPS control unit and the EPS motor angle sensor.B
(see page 17-80).
NO-Replace the EPS m otor (see page 17-62).H
12. On the sensor side, check for continuity between body
ground and EPS motor angle sensor 8P connector
terminals No. 4 and No. 8 individually.
EPS R2 (GRN)
n r----- 1 n
[4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5
EPS R1 (WHT)
YES-Replace the EPS m otor (see page 17-62).H
NO-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
between the EPS control unit and the EPS motor
angle sensor.H
EPS indicator does not come on EPS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs
are stored
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the EPS
indicator. 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Does the EPS indicator come on? 2. Check the No. B11 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this relay box.
tim e.H Is the fuse blown?
NO-Troubleshoot the gauge control module (see YES-Replace the fuse. Turn the ignition switch to ON
page 22-325).B (II), then turn it to LOCK (0) again. If the fuse blows
again, repair the short to ground on the No. B11 (7.5
A) fuse c irc u itH
NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 3.
3. Check the No. A2 (70 A) fuse in the battery terminal
fuse box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Replace the fuse. Turn the ignition switch to ON
(II), then turn it to LOCK (0) again. If the fuse blows
again, repair the short to ground on the No. A2 (70 A)
fuse circuit.H
4. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
Is the gauge control module OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
22-354).B
6. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (11P) (see
8. Measure the voltage between EPS control unit 11. Check fo r continuity between EPS control unit
connector A (11P) term inal No. 11 and body ground. connector A (11P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
W ire side of fem ale terminals

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the EPS YES-Go to step 12.
control unit and the No. B11 (7.5 A) fuse in the NO-Repair an open in the wire between the EPS
under-dash fuse/relay box.H control unit and the body ground (G402).H
10. Measure the voltage between EPS control unit
connector A (11P) terminal No. 1 and body ground.
W ire side of female term i nals

YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Repair an open in the w ire between the EPS
control unit and No. A2 (70 A) fuse in the battery
terminal fuse box.H
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) EPS M otor Removal and
Installation
12. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P connector NOTE: Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials
(see step Son page 22-354). to enter the steering gearbox.
13. Check for continuity between EPS control unit Removal
connector A (11P) terminals and gauge control
module 32P connector terminals (see table). 1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-64).
Sign EPS Control U nit Gauge Control 2. Remove the EPS motor 3P connector (A) and the EPS
Connector A Module 32P motor angle sensor 8P connector (B) from the
(IIP ) Terminal Connector connector bracket (C).
Terminal
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (IIP )
W ire side of fem a l e terminals
F-CAN L (PNK) F-CAN H (GRN)

Z3 CZ
|n |io $} | 8 | | j716 j 5 | 4 | 3 |
2 1
r'
I--------------- [
16|15|14|13|12|11 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 |5 |4 |3 |2 |1 |
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
F-CAN L (PNK)
F-CAN H (GRN) 3. Remove the wire harness clips (D).

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR 4. Remove the EPS motor (A) and the O-ring (B) from the
W ire side of female terminals steering gearbox.
YESr-Cheek for loose terminals in the EPS control unit
(see page 1 7-80 ).
NO-Repair an open in the w ire between the EPS
control unit and the gauge control m oduIe.B
Installation 7. Install the wire harness clips (A).
1. Clean the mating surfaces of the EPS motor (A) and

the steering gearbox.
8. Install the EPS motor 3P connector (B) and the EPS

m otor angle sensor 8P connector (C) to the connector
bracket (D).
2. Apply the steering grease (08C35-B0534L) to a new

O-ring (B), and carefully fit it on the EPS motor.
3. Apply the steering grease (08C35-B0534L) to the EPS
m otor shaft (C).
4. Install the EPS motor on the steering gearbox by
engaging the EPS motor shaft and the worm shaft (D).
5. Before tightening the bolts, turn the m otor two or
three times to the right and left about 45 degrees.
Make sure the EPS motor is evenly seated on the
steering gearbox, and that the O-ring is not pinched
between the mating surfaces.
6. Tighten the EPS motor mounting bolts (E) to the
specified torque.
Steering Gearbox Removal and Installation
Special Tools Required 6. Hold the splined shaft (A) on the column with a piece
Ball Joint Thread Protector, 12 m m 07AAF-SDAA100 of wire (B) between the joint yoke (C) of the splined
Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 shaft and joint yoke (D) of the splined tube to prevent
Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 m m 071AF-S3VA000 the splined shaft from pulling out.
Note these items during removal:

Using solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off
the end of the steering gearbox. Avoid any electrical
parts. Blow dry with compressed air.
Be sure to hold the steering wheel before
disconnecting the steering joint or damage to the
cable reel can occur.
Removal
7. Remove the steering joint bolt (A).
4. Tilt the steering column al! the way down and move it
all the way in.
5. Release the hooks (A), then remove the steering joint
cover (B).
A
8 x 1.25 mm
8. Center the steering wheel spokes, and install a 10. Remove the center guide (A) (if equipped) from the
commercially available steering wheel holder tool (A). top of the pinion shaft (B), and discard it.
NOTE: The center guide is for factory assembly use
only.
Q-....
11. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball
joint, then remove the nut (B) on both sides.
9. Disconnect the steering joint (A) by moving the
steering joint toward the column.
protector (see page 18-11) on both sides.
Steering Gearbox Removal and Installation (cont'd)
13. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, 19. Remove the secondary H02S wire (A) from the clamp
and remove the castle nut (B) from both sides. (B).
NOTE: Do not disconnect the secondary H02S 4P
connector and the secondary H02S.
20. Place a jack (A) under the middle of the IMA motor
housing.
14. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the knuckle
protector (see page 18-11) on both sides.
15. Remove the stabilizer links from the stabilizer bar (see
page 18-20) on both sides.
17. Disconnect the EPS motor angle sensor 8P connector
(A) and the torque sensor 6P connector (B).
I
B A
18. Disconnect the EPS motor 3P connector (C) by
pushing the lock (D) and pulling up the lever (E).
NOTE: W r a p the connectors with vinyl tape to avoid
contamination from grease or water.
25. Remove the steering gearbox (A) from the front
subframe (B).
with the gui de (C) on the front subframe. 10 x 1.25 mm
14 x 1.5 mm
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
14 x 1.5 mm
26. Remove the pinion shaft grommet (A).
Replace.
CVT
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace. 14 x 1.5 mm
Replace.
*: The ill ustration shows CVT model .
22. Attach a transmission jack (A) to the middle of the

front subframe (B), and support the front subframe
securely by raising the transmission jack.
23. Remove the front subframe mounting bolts (C).

24. Lower the front subframe and the steering gearbox as
an assembly by lowering the jack slowly.
Installation 4. Set the front subframe (A) mounting the steering

gearbox on the transmission jack and support it.
1. Install the pinion shaft grommet (A). Align the lug
portion (B) in the pinion shaft grommet with the
steering gearbox.
2. Place the steering gearbox (A) on the front subframe

(B).
1 0 x 1 .2 5 mm
60 N-m (6.1 kgf-m, 44 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
60 N-m,
' (6.1 kgf-m, 44 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
Replace.
5. Carefully raise the front subframe with the

transmission jack, and pass the pinion shaft into the
passenger's compartment.
NOTE:
Be sure that the pinion shaft grommet (B) is
10 x 1.25 mm securely in place. Make sure the lip of the pinion
59 N-m shaft grommet is not turned up. Incorrect
(6.0 kgf-m, 44 Ib fft) installation can cause leakage of water and mud, or
59-N-m noise.
Replace. Take care not to damage the lower arm ball joint
3. Loosely install the stiffener plates (C), and new 6. Install the front subframe, then loosely tighten the
gearbox mounting bolts, then tighten the bolts to the new front subframe mounting bolts.
specified torque in the sequence as shown. 7. Align the front subframe (see page 20-174).
11. Tighten the torque rod mounting bolt and nut in the
NOTE; Be sure to install the torque rod with the "UP"
mark facing up.
83 N-m
(8.5 kgf-m, 61 ibfft)
*: The ill ustration shows CVT model.
*: The ill ustration shows CVT model.
aligned with the guide (D) on the front subframe, then 12. Install the secondary H02S wire (A) in the clamp (B).
nut (F).
10. Remove the jack (A).
LT)
13. Remove the vinyl tape from the connectors. 18. Wipe off any grease contamination from the tapered
section and threads of the ball joint. Connect the
14. Connect the torque sensor 6P connector (A) and the
lower arm (A) to the knuckle. Install a new castle nut
EPS motor angle sensor 8P connector (B).
(B), and tighten it to the specified torque on both
sides.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the lower arm ball joint
boot (C). Check the ball joint boot for deformation
before connecting the knuckle.
Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
specification, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot with the joint pin clip hole. Do not
align the castle nut by loosening it.
15. Pull down the lever (C) of the EPS motor 3P connector
(D), then confirm the connector is fully seated.
16. Install the stabilizer links to the stabilizer bar (see page
18-20) on both sides.
6 4 -7 4 N-m
(6.57.5 kgf-r
4 7 - 5 5 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
19. Install the lock pin (D) on both sides.

section and threads of the tie-rod end ball joint.
Connect the tie-rod end (A) to the knuckles. Install the
nut (B), and tighten it to the specified torque on both
sides.
21. Install a new cotter pin (C), and bend it as shown on

both sides.
22. Install the front wheels, then set the wheels in the
straight ahead position.
NOTE: Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surfaces between the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
24. Cut the wire (A), and slip the lower end of the steering 25. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the
joint (B) onto the pinion shaft (C) taking care to align groove (B) around the pinion shaft, then loosely
the gap (D) within the angle. install the steering joint bolt (C). Be sure that the joint
bolt is securely in the groove in the pinion shaft.
-A
- B
.-C
FRONT 8 x 1.25 mm
28 N-m
(2.9 k g fm , 21 Ib fft)
26. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the

steering joint is fully seated, then tighten the steering
joint bolt to the specified torque.
NOTE: Check the steering joint cover for damage and
cracks. If the steering joint cover is cracked, replace
the steering joint cover.
MM

29. After installation, check these items:
Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the
steering wheel from lock to lock several times.
Check that the EPS indicator does not come on.
Check the steering wheel spoke angle. If steering
spoke angles to the right and left are not equal
(steering wheel and rack are not centered), correct
the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft serrations,
then adjust the front toe by turning the tie-rod ends,
if necessary.
(see page 18-5).
Steering Gearbox Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE: For these operations, refer to the complete procedure as needed.

EPS motor removal and installation (see page 17-62)
Rack guide removal/installation (see page 17-79)
Rack end removal and installation (see page 17-75)
Exploded v ie w
B 1.0 mm
j O kX
J 1.1
6 x 1 .0 mm
y fii N i
d f ( 1.1 kgf-m, 8 Ibf-ft^
11 N-m
(1.1 kgfm, 8 Ibfft)
CONNECTOR
m ww.
BRACKET HEAT SHIELD
TORQUE SENSOR
HARNESS
GEARBOX
HOUSING
GEARBOX CLAMP
MOUNT CUSHION
Inspect for damage
and deterioration.
6 x 1.0 mm
11 N-m
(1.1 kgfm,
8 Ibf-ft)
SPACER
Replace.
DAMPER
LOCK WASHER
Replace.
RACK END
74 N-m
(7.5 kgfm, 55 Ibfft)
Inspect for faulty
movement and damage.
8 x 1.25 mm LOCKNUT
19 N-m 14 x 1.5 mm
(1.9 kgf-m, 44 N-m (4.5 kgfm , 32 Ibfft)
14 Ibfft)
TIE-ROD END
^ ------- TIE-ROD END BALL JOINT BOOT
'/ Inspect for damage and deterioration.
xTIE-ROD CLIP Replace.
Rack End Removal and Installation
Removal 4. Remove the boot band (A) and the tie-rod clip (B). Pull
the boot (C) away from the end of the steering
NOTE: Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials gearbox.
to enter the steering gearbox.
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-64).
2. Remove the heat shield (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
3. Remove the tie-rod end and the locknut from the rack
end.
Rack End Removal and Installation (cont'd)
5. Hold the gearbox housing using a C-clamp (A) and 7. Unscrew the rack end (A) with a wrench. Be careful
wooden blocks (B) to a work bench as shown. Do not not to damage the rack shaft surface with the wrench.
clamp the cylinder part of the gearbox housing i n a Remove the rack end, the lock washer (B)* the spacer
vise. (C), and the damper (D).
Installation 3. Bend the lock washer tabs (A) back against the flat
spots (B) on the rack end ball joint housing.
1. Hold the gearbox housing using a C-clamp (A) and
wooden blocks (B) to a work bench as shown. Do not
clamp the cylinder part of the gearbox housing in a
vise.
4. Stake the lock washer at the stake point (A) on the

rack.
2. Install the damper (A), a new spacer (B), and a new

lock washer (C). Align the lock washer tabs (D) with
the flat spots (E) on the rack end ball joint housing.
Install the rack end (F) while holding the lock washer
in place.
NOTE: Make sure that the tapered side (G) of the
damper is facing toward the gearbox. 5. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the boot
installation groove (A) on the rack end.
(cont'd)
Rack End Removal and Installation (cont'd)
6. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the boot 9. Close the ear portion (A) of the boot band with
installation groove (A) around the gearbox housing. commercially available boot band pliers, Oetiker 1098
Install the boot (B) on the rack end with the tie-rod clip or equivalent (B).
(C), and fit the boot end in the installation groove in
the housing properly.
B
10. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the boots
7. After installing the boot, wipe the grease off the are not deformed or twisted.
threaded section (D) of the rack end.
11. Install the heat shield (A).
8. Install a new boot band (A) by aligning the tabs (B)
with the holes (C) of the band. 6 x 1.0 mm
11 N-m
(1.1 kgfm, 8 Ibfft)
g g iiifl
12. Install the tie-rod end and the locknut to the rack end.
Rack Guide Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the O-ring (G) from the rack guide. Wipe the
Locknut Wrench, 40 mm 07MAA-SL00100, grease off the sliding surface of the rack guide.
07916-SA50001, or 07AAA-TL2A100 4. Apply the steering grease (08C35-B0534L) to a new
O-ring, then install it to the rack guide.
NOTE; During, removal/install ation, do not al l o w dust,
dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the steering 5. Apply the steering grease (08C35-B0534L) to the
gearbox. sliding surface and the circumference of the rack
1. Loosen the locknut (A) using the locknut wrench. guide, and install it onto the gearbox housing. Wipe
the grease off the threaded section of the gearbox
housing.
6. Install the plain washer onto the gearbox housing.
7. Install the conical springs onto the gearbox housing.
NOTE: Conical springs are directional, install them as
shown.
8. Install the spring onto the gearbox housing.
9. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw,
and apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or Loctite
5699) to the middle of the threads. Loosely install the
rack guide screw on the steering gearbox.
NOTE: If more than 5 minutes has passed after
applying the sealant, remove the old sealant and
residue, and reapply new sealant.
10. Loosely install the locknut.
or 07AAA-TL2A100
11. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-18). After
2. Remove the locknut (A), the rack guide screw (B), the
adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by
spring (C), the conical springs (D), the plain washer
sliding the rack right and left.
(E), and the rack guide (F).
EPS Control Unit Removal/Installation
1. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection 5. Install the EPS control unit (C).
2. Remove the driver's kick panel (see page 20-52).
3. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (11P) and
connector B (16P) by pushing the lock (C) and pulling
down the lever (D) from the EPS control unit.
6. Pull up the lever (D) of the EPS control unit connector

A (11P) and connector B (16P), then confirm the
connector is fully seated to the EPS control unit.
7. Install the driver's kick panel (see page 20-52).
4. Remove the EPS control unit. procedure (see page 22-87).
9. After installation, start the engine, allow it to idle, and
turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several
times. Check that the EPS indicator does not come on.
Suspension...................... ....................................... 18-1
T P M S .......... .............................................................. 18-41
Front and Rear Suspension
Special Tools................... ............................. ..................... 18-2
Front Suspension.......................................................... 18-3
Rear Suspension............................ ...............................18-4
Wheel A lignm ent............................................................... 18-5
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection.............................. 18-8
Wheel Runout Inspection................................................. 18-9
Wheel Bolt Replacement................................................. 18-9
Ball Joint Rem oval............................................................ 18-11
Ball Joint Boot Inspection/Replacement.......................18-12
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement..................18-13
Lower Arm Removal/Installation....... .................. .........18-19
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation.............................. 18-20
Stabilizer Bar Replacement.............................................. 18-20
Damper/Spring Removal/Installation.............................18-22
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and
Reassem b ly ..................................................................... 18-24
Rear Suspension
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement...................................... 18-28
Axle Beam Replacement.................................................. 18-30
Damper Replacement....................................................... 18-31
Spring Replacement.........................................................18-36
Dynamic Damper Replacement...................................... 18-39
Stabilizer Bushing Replacement.................................... 18-39
Special Tools

071AF-S3VA000 Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm
(D 07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 1
07965-SA70100 Hub Dis/Assembly Pin, 34 mm 1
07965-SD90100 Support Base 1
07974-6790001 Tie-Rod Boots Driver, 37.8 mm 1
07AAF-SDAA100 Ball Joint Thread Protector, 12 mm 1
07 M AC-S L0A202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
Component Location Index - Front Suspension
- DAMPER/SPRING
Removal/I nstallation, page 18-22
Disassembl y, Inspection, and
KNUCKLE/HUB/WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection, page 18-8
Knuckle/Hub Replacement, page 18-14
Wheel Bearing Replacement, page 18-17
/WHEEL BOLT
<? Replacement, page 18-9
STABILIZER LINK
Removal/Installation, page 18-20 /V
J \
LOWER ARM
Removal/Installation, page 18-19
BALL JOINT WHEEL
Boot Inspection/Replacement, page 18-12 Runout Inspection, page 18-9
Component Location Index - Rear Suspension
DAMPER
Removal, page 18-32
SPRING
Removal, page 18-36
<2
(D
AXLE BEAM
Replacement, page 18-30 HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
DYNAMIC DAMPER WHEEL BOLT Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection, page 18-8
Replacement, page 18-39 Replacement, page 18-9 Replacement, page 18-28
STABILIZER BUSHING
WHEEL
Runout Inspection, page 18-9
Wheel Alignment
The suspension can be adjusted for front camber and 8. Lower the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the
front toe. However, each of these adjustments are vehicle up and down several times to stabilize the
related to each other. For example, when you adjust the suspension.
camber, the toe will change. Therefore, you must adjust
9. Check that the steering column is set at the center tilt
the front wheel alignment whenever you adjust camber
and telescopic position.
or toe.
Pre-Alignment Cheeks Caster I n s p e c t i o n

For proper inspection and adjustment of the wheel Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment, do these checks: alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
measurement.
1. Check the caster angle.
2. Make sure the suspension is not modified.
Caster angle: 3 2 2 ' 1
3. Make sure the fuel tank is full, and that the spare tire,
the jack, and the tools are in place on the vehicle. If the measurement is within the specifications, go
to camber inspection.
4. Check the tire size and tire pressure.
If the measurement is not within the specifications,
NOTE: See tire information label attached to the check for bent or damaged suspension
doorjamb. components.
5. Check the runout of the wheels and tires (see page
18-9). Camber I n s p e c t i o n
6. Check the suspension ball joints. (Raise and support Use commercially available computerized four wheel
the vehicle. Hold a tire with your hands, and move it alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
up and down and right and left to check for (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
movement.) equipment manufacturer's instructions.
1. Check the camber angle.
Camber angle:
Front: Oei 0 # 1
(Maximum difference between the right and
left side: 045')
Rear: - 1 e3 0 ' 1 e
If the measurement is within the specifications, go

to rear toe inspection.
If the measurement for the front camber is not
within the specifications, go to front camber
adjustment.
If the measurement for the rear camber is not within
the specifications, check for bent or damaged
suspension components.
7. Before doing alignment inspections, be sure to

remove all extra weight from the vehicle, and no one
should be inside the vehicle (driver or passengers).
(cont'd)
Wheel Alignment (cont'd)
F r o n t C a m b e r Adjustment 7. Measure the camber angle.

The front camber can be adjusted by exchanging one or to rear toe inspection.
both of the damper pinch bolts with the smaller
diameter adjusting bolt(s). The difference between the
go to step 8.
adjusting bolt diameter and the pinch bolt hole diameter
allows for a small range of adjustment. 8. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10).
NOTE: If you need to use an adjusting bolt, refer to the 9. Remove the front wheels.
Parts Catalog.
10. Replace the damper pinch bolts with the adjusting
bolts (A), and adjust the camber angle.
NOTE:
The camber angle can be adjusted up to 2 0 '
Damper pinch bol t: Adjusting bolt: (center of tolerance) by replacing one damper pinch
bolt with the adjusting bolt.
The camber angle can be adjusted up to 4 0 ' by
replacing both damper pinch bolts with the
adjusting bolts.
Replace.

C 92
3. Loosen the damper pinch bolts (A), and adjust the
camber angle by moving the bottom of the damper
within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play.
90 SM-m
(9.2 kgfm, 66 Ibf ft)
Replace.
11. Tighten the adjusting bolts while holding the

self-locking nuts to the specified torque.
12. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc and
the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
13. Lower the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the front
of the vehicle up and down several times to stabilize
the suspension.
4. Tighten the damper pinch bolts while holding the 14. Measure the camber angle.
self-locking nuts to the specified torque. If the camber measurement is correct, measure the
5. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc and toe-in, and adjust it if necessary.
the inside of the wheel/then install the front wheels. If the camber angle is not within the specifications,
repeat steps 8 through 13 to readjust the camber
6. Lower the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the front angle.
of the vehicle up and down several times to stabilize
the suspension.
Rear Toe Inspection 3. Loosen the tie-rod end locknuts (A) while holding the
flat surface sections (B) of the tie-rod end with a
Use commercially available computerized four wheel wrench, and turn both tie-rods (C) until the front toe is
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment within specifications.
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect
measurement.
2. Check the toe.
Rear toe-in: 3+2_3 mm (O.12+008- 0.12 in)
to front toe inspection.
check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment 14x1.5 mm B

44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m,
Use commercially available computerized four wheel 32 Ibfft)
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the 4. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts to the
equipment manufacturer's instructions. specified torque. Reposition the rack-end boot if it is
twisted or damaged.
1. Set the steering column to the middle tilt and
telescopic positions. Center the steering wheel 5. Go to turning angle inspection.
spokes, and install a steering wheel holder tool.
2. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight ahead.
Front t o e - i n : 0 3 mm (00.12 in)
If adjustment is required, go to step 3.
If no adjustment is required, go to turning angle
inspection.
(cont'd)
Wheel Alignment (cont'd) Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection
Turning Angle Inspection 1. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10).
2. Remove the wheels.
Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment 3. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts.
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the Tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the
equipment manufacturer's instructions. brake disc securely against the hub.
1. Turn the steering wheel right and left while applying Front
the brake, and measure the turning angle of the both
wheels.
Turning angle:
Inward: 38* 0 8 ' 2
Outward (reference): 31 4 6 ' 1
Rear
12 x 1.5 mm
2. If the measurement is not within the specifications, 108 N*m
even up both sides of the tie-rod threaded section ( 11.0 kgf-m,
80 Ib f- f t)
length while adjusting the front toe. If it is correct, but
the turning angle is not within the specifications,
check for bent or damaged suspension components.
4. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against the
hub flange.
5. Measure the bearing end play while moving the brake
disc inward and outward.
Wheel bearing end play:
Front/Rear: 00.05 mm (00.0020 in)
6. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the

standard, replace the wheel bearing or the hub
bearing unit.
Wheel Runout Inspection Wheel Bolt Replacement
1. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10). Special Tools Required
Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
2. Check for bent or deformed wheel.
3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure the INOTICE l
axial runout by turning the wheel. Do not use a hammer or impact tools (pneumatic or
Front and rear wheel axial runout: electric) to remove and install the wheel bolts.
Standard: 0 0.7 mm (00.028 in) Be careful not to damage the threads of the wheel
Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.079 in) bolts.
Front
2. Remove the front brake disc (see page 19-18).
3. Separate the wheel bolt (A) from the hub (B) using the
ball joint remover (C), and keep the jaw (D) of the ball
joint remover vertical against the wheel bolt (see page
18-11).
NOTE: If the angle of the remover against the wheel
bolt is not square, readjust the ball joint remover by
turning the head (E) of the adjusting bolt (F).
4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown, and

measure the radial runout.
Front and rear wheel radial runout:
Standard: 00.7 mm (00.028 in)
Service limit: 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
07MAC-SLOA2O2
5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification,

check the wheel bearing end play (see page 18-8), and
make sure the mating surfaces between the brake
disc and the inside of the wheel are clean.
6. If the bearing end play is within the specification (see
page 18-8), but the wheel runout is more than the
service limit, replace the wheel.
Wheel Bolt Replacement (cont'd)
4. Insert a new wheel bolt (A) into the hub (B) while Rear
aligning the splined surfaces (C) on the hub hole with
the wheel bolt. Adjust the measurement (D) with the 1. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10).
washers (P/N 94101-12800 or equivalent) (E), then
2. Remove the hub bearing unit (see page 18-28).
install a nut (P/N 90304-SC2-000 or equivalent) (F)
hand-tight. 3. Separate the wheel bolt (A) from the hub (B) using a
hydraulic press. Support the hub with hydraulic press
NOTE:
attachments (C) or equivalent tools.
Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean the
mating surfaces on the bolt and the hub. Press
Degrease the area around the wheel bolt and the
threaded section of the nut.
Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in
relation to the hub disc surface.
Do not install the nut and washers that have been
used as tools on a vehicle.
D
11 14 mm
4. Insert a new wheel bolt into the hub while aligning the
splined surfaces on the hub hole with the wheel bolt.
NOTE:
E Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean the
mating surfaces on the bolt and the hub.
5. Tighten the nut until the wheel bolt is drawn fully into Degrease all around the wheel bolt.
the hub. Do not exceed the maximum torque limit. Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in
Make sure there is no gap (G) between the bolt and relation to the hub disc surface.
the hub.
5. Install the wheel bolt using a hydraulic press until the
Limited torque: wheel bolt shoulder is fully seated.
108 N-m (11.0 kgfm , 80 Ibfft) max.
6. Install the hub bearing unit (see page 18-28).
6. Install the front brake disc (see page 19-18).
NOTE: If you cannot tighten the wheel nut to the
NOTE: specified torque when installing the wheel, replace
If you cannot tighten the wheel nut to the specified the hub bearing unit as an assembly (see page 18-28).
torque when installing the wheel, replace the front
hub as an assembly (see page 18-13).
Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surfaces between the brake disc and the inside of
the wheel.
Ball Joint Removal
S p e c ia l T o o ls R e q u ire d 3. Loosen the pressure bolt (A), and install the ball joint
Ball Joint Thread Protector, 12 mm 07AAF-SDAA100 remover as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making
Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000 sure not to damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the jaw
Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 spacing by turning the adjusting bolt (B).
NOTE: Fasten the safety chain (C) securely to a
INOTICE I suspension arm or the subframe (D). Do not fasten it
Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball joint. to a brake line or wire harness.
Do not strike the housing or any other part of the ball
joint connection to disconnect it.
1. Install a hex nut (A) or the ball joint thread protector

onto the threads of the ball joint (B).
NOTE: When using a hex nut, make sure the nut is
flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to
the threaded end of the ball joint pin.
07AAF-SDAA100 or
071AF-S3VA000
07MAC-SL0A202
4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the head

of the adjusting bolt is in the position shown to allow
the jaw (E) to pivot.
5. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball
joint pin pops loose from the ball joint connecting
2. Apply grease to the ball joint remover on the areas hole. If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to
shown (A). This will ease installation of the tool and loosen the ball joint pin.
prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads. NOTE: Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on the
pressure bolt.
fLjiSimm 6. Remove the ball joint remover, then remove the nut
(Multipurpose)
from the end of the ball joint pin, and pull the ball joint
out of the ball joint connecting hole. Inspect the ball
joint boot, and replace it if damaged.
BallJoint Boot Inspection/Replacement
Special Tools Required 6. Install the ball joint boot (A) using the tie-rod boots
Tie-Rod Boots Driver, 37.8 mm 07974-6790001 driver by hand. The ball joint boot must not have a
gap at the ball joint boot installation sections (B).
Lower Arm Press the ball joint boot on a clean shop towel (C).
1. Check the ball joint boot for weakness, damage, After installing the ball joint boot on the ball joint,
cracks, and grease leaks. squeeze it gently to force out any air, then wipe the
grease off the tapered portion of the ball joint pin
NOTE; (D).
If the ball joint boot is damaged and leaks grease, After installing the ball joint boot, check the ball pin
replace the lower arm (see page 18-19). tapered section for grease contamination, and wipe
If the ball joint boot is weak and cracked but does it if necessary.
not leak grease, go to step 2. Replace the ball joint
boot.
2. Remove the lower arm (see page 18-19).
07S74-6790001
3. Remove the ball joint boot (A).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the mating surface
with ball joint boot of ball joint housing (B).
7. Install the lower arm (see page 18-19).
4. Pack the interior and lip (C) of a new ball joint boot
with grease. Keep the grease off of the ball joint
boot-to-lower arm mating surfaces (D).
NOTE: Use the grease that comes with the ball joint
kit.
5. Pack fresh grease into the base (E). Do not let dirt or
other foreign materials get into the ball joint boot.
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement
Exploded View
SELF-LOCKING NUT
Replace.
KNUCKLE
Check for deformation and
damage.
WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Replace.
SNAP RING SPLASH GUARD

Check for corrosi on,
deformation, and damage.
Replace if rusted.
5 x 0.8 mm
6.0 N-m
(0.61 kgf-m, 4.4 Ibf-ft)
DAMPER PINCH BOLT
14 x 1,5 mm
90 N*rr
(9.2 kgf-m, 66 Ibfft)
Replace.
FRONTHUB
Check for damage and
cracks.
FRONT BRAKE DISC

Checkfor wear,
damage, and rust. FLAT SCREW
6 x 1.0 mm SPINDLE NUT
9.3 N-m 22 x 1.5 mm
(0.95 kgf-m, 181 N-m
6.9 Ibf-ft) (18.5 kg fm , 133 Ib fft)
Replace.
Apply a small amount

of engine oil to the seating
surface of the nut
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Special T ools Required 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A) from the
Ball Joint Thread Protector, 12 mm 07AAF-SDAA100 damper bracket.
Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
*A
Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000 8 x 1.25 mm
Hub Dis/Assembly Pin, 34 mm 07965-SA70100 22 N-m
Bearing Driver Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 (2.2 kgf m,
16 ibf-ft)
Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000 mm
Support Base 07965-SD90100
Knuckle/Hub Replacement "9^

A
2. Remove the wheel nuts and the front wheel.
12 x 1.25 mmn
B 108 N-m
(11.0 kg fm ,
80 Ibf-ft)
f
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B),
then remove the caliper assembly (C) from the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly
or the brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang
the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not
twist the brake hose excessively.
-5. Remove the wheel speed sensor (A) from the knuckle
(B). Do not disconnect the wheel speed sensor 2P
connector.
108 N-m
(11.0 kgf-m, 80 Ib fft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.5 N-m
(0.97 kgf m,
7.0 I b fft)
B
6. Pry up the stake (A) on the spindle nut (B), then 11. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint,
remove the nut. then remove the castle nut (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin as
shown after tightening a new castle nut.
7. Remove the front brake disc (see page 19-18).

8. Check the front hub for damage and cracks.
12. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the knuckle using
9. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball the ball joint remover (see page 18-11).
joint, then remove the nut (B).
NOTE: During installation, install a new cotter pin
after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown.
07AAF-SDAA100 07MAC-SL0A202
using the ball joint remover (see page 18-11).
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
13. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and the 15. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of
self-locking nuts (B) from the damper. removal, and note these items:
NOTE: Use new damper pinch bolts and new Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
self-locking nuts during reassembly* connecting the knuckle.
Before connecting the ball joint, degrease the
threaded section and the tapered portion of the ball
joint pin, the ball joint connecting hole, and the
threaded section and the mating surfaces of the
castle nut.
align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
align the castle nut by looseni ng it.
Use a new spindle nut on reassembly.
Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the
nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle
nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
surfaces between the front hub and the inside of the
brake disc.
Replace. surfaces between the brake disc and the inside of
the wheel.
14. Pull the knuckle (C) outward, and separate the
outboard joint (D) from the front hub using a soft face 16. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary
hammer. (see page 18-5).
NOTE:
Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The
driveshaft inboard joint may come apart.
During installation, apply grease to the mating
surfaces of the wheel bearing and the driveshaft
outboard joint (see step 1 on page 16-19).
Wheal Bearing Replacement 3. Remove the splash guard (A) and the snap ring (B)
from the knuckle (C).
1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the
hub dis/assembly pin and a hydraulic press. Hold the
knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press
or equivalent tool. Be careful not to damage or
deform the splash guard (D). Hold onto the hub to
keep it from falling when pressed clear.
4. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B)

using the bearing driver attachment, the driver
handle, and a press.
Press
2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub
(B) using the hub dis/assembly pin, a commercially
available bearing separator (.C), and a press.
Press
5. Wash the knuckle and the hub thoroughly in high

flash point solvent before reassembly.
Knuckle/Huh/Wheel Bearing Replacement (contd)
6. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) 9. Install the hub (A) onto the knuckle (B) using the
using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the support bearing driver attachment, the driver handle, the
base, and a press. support base, and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to
damage the splash guard (C).
NOTE:
Install the wheel bearing with the wheel speed Press
sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color) toward
the inside of the knuckle.
Remove any oil, grease, dust, metal debris, and
other foreign material from the magnetic encoder
surface.
Keep any magnetic tools away from the encoder
surface.
Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when
you insert the wheel bearing.
7. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B).
8. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D)
to the specified torque.
Lower Arm Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 6. Remove the lower arm mounting bolts, then remove
Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 the lower arm (A) from the front subframe.
Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA00G
NOTE: Use new lower arm mounting bolts during
reassembly.
INOTICE I
Do not remove the lower arm from both sides at the
same time. The lower arm mounting bolts also secure
the subframe to the vehicle.

O
4. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint,
then remove the castle nut (B). vi St'
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin as
shown after tightening a new castle nut.
14 x 1.5 mm
93 N-m
(9.5 kgf m, 69 Ibf-ft)
93 N-m
Replace.
7. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of removal,

and note these items:
First install all the components, and lightly tighten
the bolts and the nuts, then raise the suspension to
load it with the vehicle's weight before fully
tightening to the specified torque. Do not place the
jack against tHe ball joint of the lower arm.
5. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the knuckle using Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
the ball joint remover (see page 18-11). connecting to the knuckle.
Before connecting the ball joint, degrease the
threaded section and the tapered portion of the ball
joint pin, the ball joint connecting hole, and the
threaded section and the mating surfaces of the
castle nut.
align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
align the castle nut by loosening it.
the wheel.
(see page 18-5).
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation Stabilizer Bar Replacement
1. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10). Removal

2. Remove the front wheel. 1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-64).
3. Remove the self-l ocking nut (A) and the nut (B) while 2. Remove the bolts (A) and the bushing holders (B),
holding the respective joint pin (C) with a hex wrench then remove the bushings (C).
(D), then remove the stabilizer link (E).
A
8 x 1.25 mm
10 X 1.25 mm
30 N-m
(3.1 kgfm ,
22 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N-m 3. Remove the stabilizer bar (D) from the front subframe.
(3.9 kgfm, 28 Ibfft)
Replace.
4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (F) and

the damper (G) with the joint pins set at the center of
their range of movement.
5. Install a new self-locking nut and a new nut, and
tighten them to the specified torque while holding the
respective joint pin with a hex wrench.
the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
8. After 5 minutes of driving, tighten the self-locking nut
again to the specified torque.
In s ta lla tio n 2. Install the stabilizer bar (A) with the bushings on the
front subframe.
1. Install the bushings (A) on the stabilizer bar.
NOTE:
NOTE: Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer bar.
Note the direction of installation for the bushings. Note the direction of installation for the bushing
Align the stabilizer band clamp (B) with the side of holders (B).
the bushings.

Damper/Spring Removal/Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10). 6. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and the
self-locking nuts (B) from the damper.
NOTE:
3. Remove the wheel speed sensor (A) from the knuckle.
Do not disconnect the wheel speed sensor 2P Do not allow the knuckle to rotate too far outward.
This may allow the driveshaft inboard joint come
connector.
apart.
During instal lation, install new damper pinch bolts
and new self-locking nuts, then tighten the damper
pinch bolts to the specified torque.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.5 N-m
(0.97 kgf-m,
7.0 Ibf-ft)
B
Replace.
90 N-m
4. Disconnect the stabilizer link from the damper (see (9.2 kgf-m,
66 Ibf-ft)
page 18-20). Replace.
5. Remove the wheel speed sensor clip (A), the wire

guide grommet (B), and the brake hose bracket (C) 7. Remove the damper cap (A) from the top of the
from the damper. Do not disconnect the wheel speed damper.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibf-ft)
O:
12 x 1.25 mm
44 N-m
(4.5 kgf-m,
32 I bf ft)
8. Hold the damper shaft (B) using a hex wrench (C), and
loosen the damper mounting nut (D).
9. Remove the damper m o u n t i n g n u t (A ) a n d t h e wave
washer (B), then remove the d a m p e r m o u n t i n g base.
(C) from the top of the damper.
1.25 mm
10. Remove the damper/spring (A) and the damper

rubber mount (B).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body.
JW
11. Install all of the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
NOTE: Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surfaces between the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
(see page 18-5).
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
Exploded View
Check for weakness and

damage.
DAMPER UNIT
Check for oil l eaks, gas l eaks,
and smooth operation.
NOTE; Inspection
When compressing the damper spring, use a
commercially available strut spring compressor 1. Install the nut on the damper shaft end, and set the
(Branick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent) socket wrench and T-handle on the nut
according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Compress the damper unit by hand, and check for
Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the smooth operation through a full stroke, both
following procedure. compression and extension. The damper should
extend smoothly and constantly when compression is
Disassembly released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the
1. Compress the damper spring, then remove the nut (A) damper should be replaced.
while holding the damper shaft with a hex wrench (B).
Do not compress the damper spring more than
necessary to remove the nut.
3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding

during these tests.
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring
compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown
in the Exploded View.
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
R e a sse m b ly 5. Install all the parts except the nut and the damper
bearing onto the damper unit (A) by referring to the
1. Install the upper spring seat (A) to the upper spring Exploded View.
seat clip (B).
NOTE: Make sure to securely set the upper spring seat
to the hook (C) on the spring seat clip.
2. Install the bump stop (D) and the dust cover (E) to the
upper spring seat.
NOTE: Push the bump stop and the dust cover into the 6. Compress the damper spring.
indentation (F) in the upper spring seat securely. 7. Align the raised portion (A) of the spring seat cushion
3. Install the damper spring (A) on the upper spring seat and the hole (B) of the lower spring seat on the
clip (B) by aligning the upper end (C) of the damper damper unit (C).
spring with the ledge portion (D) of the upper spring NOTE: After reassembling the damper/spring, install
seat clip. the dust cover (D) into the damper unit as shown.
4. Install the spring seat cushion on the damper spring. 8. Install the damper bearing onto the damper shaft.
9. Compress the damper spring until the position (A) of
the damper shaft (B) comes in contact with the
damper bearing. Do not excessively compress the
damper spring.
NOTE: Make sure the distance of the rod is 37.1 mm
(1.461 in) from the upper surface of the bearing.
10. Install the nut (C).

11. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench (D), and
tighten the nut to the specified torque.
12. Remove the damper/spring from the strut spring
compressor.
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement
Exploded View
AXLE BEAM
Check for deformation and damage.
f SPLASH GUARD
Check for corrosion,
deformation, and damage.
Replace if rusted.
HUB BEARING UNIT

(MAGNETIC ENCODER) .
Check for faulty movement and wear.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.5 N-m
(0.97 kg fm , 7.
SPINDLE NUT
22 x 1.5 mm
181 N-m
(18.5 k g fm , 133 Ib fft)
Replace.
Apply a small amount

of engine oil to the seating
surface of the nut. FLAT SCREW
REAR BRAKE DISC 6 x 1.0 mm
Checkfor wear, 9.3 N-m
damage, and rust. (0.95 kgfm,
6.9 Ib fft)
Replacement 6. Remove the hub cap (A). Pry up the stake (B) on the
spindle nut (C), then remove the nut.
NOTE; Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
following procedure.
2 . Remove the wheel nuts and the rear wheel.
7. Remove the rear brake disc (see page 19-32).

8. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) from the spindle.
12x 1.5 mm
108 N-m
(11.0 kgf-m, 80 Ibf ft)
3. Release the parking brake lever fully.
4. Remove the caliper body and the brake pads from the
caliper bracket (see step 4 on page 19-28).
5. Remove the caliper bracket (A) from the axle beam.
10 x 1.25 mm
55 U r n
(5.6 kgf-m,
41 Ibfft)
k w h 9. Check the hub bearing unit for damage and cracks.

Al
A
/
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement Axle Beam Replacement
(cont'd)
10. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of 1. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10).
removal, and note these items:
2. Remove the rear wheels.
Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque. 3. Remove the rear hub bearing unit (see page 18-29).
Use a new spindle nut and hub cap on reassembly. 4. Remove the rear spring seat lower cover (see page
Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small 20-167).
amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the
nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle 5. Remove the splash guard (A) from the axle beam (B).
nut shoulder against the spindle.
surfaces between the hub bearing unit and the
inside of the brake disc.
Before installing the wheel, clean the mating 6 x 1.0 mm
9.5 N-m
surfaces between the brake disc and the inside of (0.97 kgf-m,
the wheel. 7.0 Ib f- f t)
/
1
6. Remove the wheel speed sensor (A), the wheel speed

sensor clip (B), and the wire guide grommet (C) from
the axle beam (D). Do not disconnect the wheel speed
7. Remove the rear spring (see page 18-36).

Damper Replacement
8. Place a floor jack under the lower spring seat (A) on Exploded View
both sides of the axle beam (B), and support it by
raising the floor jack. Do not place the floor jack under
the center of the axle beam. SELF-LOCKING NUT
10 x 1.25 mm
30 N-m
(3.1 kgf-m, 22 I bf-ft)
Replace.
^DAM PER
M OUNTING WASHER
Check for deformation.
> DAMPER
RUBBER MOUNT
Check for weakness
and damage.
14 x 1.5 mm
93 N-m
Replace.
9. Remove the axle beam mounting bolt (C) on both

sides.
NOTE: Use new axle beam mounting bolts during DUST COVER
SLEEVE
reassembly. Check for
deterioration
10. Lower the jack slowly, then remove the axle beam. and damage.
DAMPER UNIT
11. Install the axle beam in the reverse order of removal, Check for oil leaks,
and note these items: gas leaks,
and smooth
First install all the components, and lightly tighten operation.
the bolts, and place a jack under the lower spring
seat of the axle beam on both sides, then raise the
suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight DAMPER BUSHING
before fully tightening to the specified torque. Check for weakness
and damage.
After installing the brake hose and the parking
brake cable, check for interference and twisting of
other parts.
Check the brake hose joint for leaks, and tighten if
necessary.
the wheel.
(see page 18-5).
Damper Replacement (cont'd)
R em oval 6. Remove the damper maintenance lid (A) on the cargo

area side trim.
Driver's side
3. Remove the wire guide grommet (A) and the brake
hose mounting bolt (B) from the axle beam.
x ... -a A M
/ 8 x 1.25 mm
Passenger's side
4. Position a floor jack under lower spring seat (A) on the

axle beam (B). Raise the floor jack until the
suspension begins to compress.
ii&
5. Remove the damper mounting bolt (C) that connects

the axle beam and the damper (D).
1
7. Remove the self-locking nut (A) while holding the Inspection

damper shaft (B) with a hex wrench (C).
1. Install the flange nut on the damper shaft end, and set
the socket wrench and T-handle on the nut.
2. Compress the damper unit by hand, and check for
smooth operation through a full stroke, both
compression and extension. The damper should
extend smoothly and constantly when compression is
released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the
damper should be replaced.
8. Remove the damper mounting washer (D) and the

damper rubber mount (E) from the top of the damper. t
9. Compress the damper assembly (A) by hand, and
remove it from the vehicle.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body.
3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding

during these tests.
10. Remove the damper rubber mount (B).

Damper Replacement (cont'd)
installation 5. Install the damper rubber mount (A), the damper

mounting washer (B), and the self-locking nut (C) on
1. Install the damper rubber mount (A) onto the damper the damper shaft (D).
unit. Position the damper assembly (B) between the
body and the axle beam. NOTE: During installation, note the direction of the
damper rubber mount and the damper mounting
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body. washer.
10 x 1.25 mm
Repl ace.
B
/ ^ A
2. Position the floor jack under lower spring seat (A) on 6. Tighten the self-locking nut (A) to the specified torque
the axle beam (B). while holding the damper shaft (B) with a hex wrench
(C).
ea
"A
10 x 1.25 mm
30 N-m
(3.1 kgfm,
22 ibfft)
Replace.
3. Slowly raise the jack until you can align the bolt hole
with the holes in the axle beam and the damper (C),
then loosely tighten a new damper mounting bolt (D).
4. Raise the rear suspension with the jack until the
vehicle just lifts off of the lift, then tighten the damper
mounting bolts to the specified torque.
n
7. Install the damper maintenance lid (A) on the cargo 8. Install the wire guide grommet (A) and the brake hose
area side trim. mounting bolt (B) on the axle beam.
Driver's side
,B
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgfm ,
16 Ibf-ft)
Passenger's side
the inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel.
Spring Replacement
E x p lo d e d V ie w Removal
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
, UPPER RUBBER following procedure.
M O UNT
Check for weakness 1. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10).
and damage.
3. Remove the wire guide grommet (A) and the brake
hose mounting bolt (B) from both sides of the axle
beam.
8 x 1 .25 mm
9.
SPRING 4. Position the floor jack under spring seat (A) on both
Check for damage, sides of the axle beam (B). Raise the floor jack until the
suspension begins to compress.
LOWER RUBBER M OUNT

Check for weakness and damage.
5. Remove the damper mounting bolt (C) that connects

the axle beam and the damper (D) from both sides.
6. Lower the floor jack gradually.
7. Remove the spring (A), the upper rubber mount (B), Installation
and the lower rubber mount (C), Do not lower the jack
more than necessary. 1- Install the upper rubber mount (A) on the spring (B) by
aligning the upper end (C) of the spring with the ledge
portion (D) of the upper rubber mount.
2. Install the lower rubber mount (A) on the spring (B) by

aligning the lower end (C) of the spring with the ledge
portion (D) of the lower rubber mount.
Spring Replacement (cont'd)
3. Install the tab (A) of the lower rubber mount into the 7. Install the wire guide grommet (A) and the brake hose
groove (B) of the lower spring seat. bracket mounting bolt (B) on both sides of the axle
beam.
NOTE;
Make sure that the tab of the lower rubber mount is tB
properly installed into the axle beam (C). 8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
@Make sure that the spring is installed correctly. (2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibf-ft)

the inside ofthe wheel, then install the rear wheel.
4. Position a floor jack under the lower spring seat (A) on

both sides of the axle beam (B).
5. Slowly raise the jacks until you can align the bolt hole
with the holes in the axle beam and the damper (C),
then loosely tighten a new damper mounting bolt (D)
on both sides.
6. Raise the rear suspension with the jacks until the
vehicle just lifts off of the lift, then tighten the damper
mounting bolts to the specified torque.
Dynamic Damper Replacement Stabilizer Bushing Replacement
1. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10). 1. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10).
2. Remove the dynamic damper (A) from the axle beam. 2. Remove the dynamic damper from the axle beam
(see page 18-39).
NOTE: Use new self-locking nuts (B) during
reassembly. 3. Remove the stabilizer bushing (A) from the axle
beam.
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 9 Ibf-ft)

Repl ace.
3. Install the new dynamic damper in the reverse order 4. Apply silicone spray (P/N 08209-0001) to the new
of removal. stabilizer bushing. This will ease installation of the
bushing into the stabilizer and the axle beam.
NOTE: When spraying any agents that contain
silicone, cover all the connectors, terminals, and
switches in area with a protective cloth or plastic
sheet
Stabilizer Bushing Replacement (cont'd)
5. Make a mark (A) near the hole (B) of the axle beam as
shown. Install the stabilizer bushing (C) into the axle
beam by aligning the end face of the stabilizer
bushing to the plant mark.
NOTE: Make sure the stabilizer bushing is installed
into the stabilizer (D).
UP SIDE
6. Install the dynamic damper on the axle beam (see

page 18-39).
TPMS
General Troubleshooting Inform ation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-43
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID .......................18-46
Tire Pressure Sensor Location. . . . . . . . .......................... 18-47
DTC Troubleshooting Index. . ........... ....... ............. . .18-49
Symptom Troubleshooting Index............ ........ .. 18-50
System Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-51
Circuit Diagram ................................................................ . 18-55
DTC Troubleshooting ............... ......................... 18-57
Symptom Troubleshooting....... ............. ................. .18-64
TPMS Control Unit Replacement. ........... ................... . 18-68
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement......... ................ . 18-69
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR

TPMS CONTROL UNIT Replacement page 18-69

TIRE PRESSURE SE5MSOR

UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) Replacement, page 18-69
System Indicator Tire Pressure Changing by Temperature

The TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) has the low Tire pressures increase slightly as the temperature in the
tire pressure/TPMS indicator. tires rises during driving. Pressures can also increase or
decrease slightly with changes in outside air
temperature. A temperature change of about 18 F
(10 C) changes tire pressure by about 10 kPa (0.1
kgf/cm2, 1.5 psi). If the temperature drops, tire pressure
could decrease enough to turn on the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator, but later, the tire temperature
could increase enough to turn the indicator off. To
resolve a complaint of such intermittent indications,
confirm and clearthe stored DTC(s) and check the cold
tire pressures. Then explain to the customer how
temperature changes can affect the system.
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS

indicator
When the system is OK, the low tire pressure/TPMS

indicator should come on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II), and then go off 2 seconds later. If they
don't, there is a problem with the system.
The Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

If the system detects low pressure in any of the four
-2 0 0 20 40 60 c
tires, the low pressure/TPMS indicator comes on. -4 32 68 104 140 F
When the indicator comes on because of a low tire
pressure, inflate the tires and test-drive the vehicle at
28 mph (45 km/h) or more for at least 1 minute, and the
low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will go off.
If a problem in the system is detected, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator comes on after blinking for
75 seconds.
DTC 11,13,15,17
If the system detects low pressure in any of the four tires,
the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on, and the
TPMS control unit sets one or more of these codes: DTC
11,13,15,17. When the tire pressure returns to normal,
and the TPMS control unit receives the normal pressure
signal from the tire pressure sensor, the TPMS control
unit turns off the indicator. However, the TPMS control
unit still retains the DTC(s).
NOTE: It is necessary to test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph
(45 km/h) or more for at least 1 minute so that the tire
pressure sensor transmits the signal.
General Troubleshoot ing Informat ion (cont'd)
Problems That are Not System Faults How to Troubleshoot DTCs

Tire Sealant DTC troubleshooting procedures assume the cause of
Fluid sealant used to repair a punctured tire can the problem is still present and the low tire
damage the tire pressure sensor mounted on each pressure/TPMS indicator (starts blinking) is still on. Do
wheel. It can prevent the system from detecting the not use a troubleshooting procedure unless the system
correct tire pressure, which sets a DTC 11,13,15, or 17 has set the DTC listed for it.
even though the system is normal. 1. Ask the customer to describe the conditions when the
Cold Weather indicator came on, and try to reproduce the same
When the weather is extremely cold, about 4 F conditions for troubleshooting. Find out if the
(20 C) or colder, the output of the lithium battery in customer checked and/or adjusted tire pressures
each tire pressure sensor may drop far enough that since the indicator came on.
the control unit sets a DTC for low battery voltage 2. If an indicator does not come on during the test-drive,
(DTC 31,33,35, or 37) even though the system is check for loose terminals, poor contact due to
normal. damaged terminals, etc. before you start
Non-TPMS Wheels (including the spare tire) troubleshooting.
Vehicles equipped with TPMS must use wheels made 3. After troubleshooting, repair and clear the DTCs, and
for the system. Every TPMS type wheel has an test-drive the vehicle. Make sure no indicators come
exclusive mark; do not use any other type of wheel on.
(see page 18-53).
W h e n a f l a t t i r e is replaced w i t h t h e s p a r e t i r e , the low
tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on (DTC 32,34,
36, or 38) even though the system is normal. Because
the system is no longer receiving the signal from the
flat tire's transmitter.
How a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is Set

When the system detects a problem, the TPMS control
unit sets a code, but shifts to fail-safe mode, and does
not alert the driver to low tire pressures.
If the TPMS control unit loses power or fails, the low
tire pressure/TPMS indicator (starts blinking) comes
on, but no DTCs are set.
The memory can hold all the DTCs that could possibly
be set. However, when the same DTCs are detected
more than once, the most recent one overwrites the
previous one, so only the latest DTC of each type is
stored.
DTCs are indicated in ascending order, not in the order
they occurred.
Set DTCs are stored in the EEPROM (nonvolatile
memory), they cannot be cleared by disconnecting the
battery. To clear a DTC, connect the HDS (Honda
Diagnostic System) to the data link connector (DLC),
and follow the screen prompts.
1
How to Retrieve DTCs How to Clear DTCs

1. With the ignition switch in LOGK (0), connect the HDS 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS
(Honda Diagnostic System) to the data link connector to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the
(DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the driver's side of the dashboard.
dashboard.
A
A
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the TPMS control unit If it does not, go to the DLC
and the TPMS control unit. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-383).
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the DTC(s) the HDS.
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
DTC troubleshooting.
instructions.
instructions.

Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID
Special Tools Required 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS
TPMS Trigger Tool ATEQ VT55# to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment driver's side of the dashboard.
Program 888-424-6857
All four tire pressure sensor IDs must be memorized to

the TPMS control unit whenever you do any of these
actions:
Replace the TPMS control unit.
Replace the tire pressure sensor.
Substitute a known-good wheel with tire pressure
sensor.
NOTE:
Make sure the TPMS tool has the latest software.
Check the official Honda service website for more
service information about the TPMS tool.
The TPMS tool is necessary to do this procedure.
Let the vehicle sit for at least 5 minutes to allowthetire
pressure sensors to switch to sleep mode.
To ensure the TPMS control unit memorizes the A
correct sensor ID, the vehicle with the new tire 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
pressure sensor must be at least 10 ft (3 m) away from
other vehicles that have tire pressure sensors. 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
When doing a tire rotation, memorizing the tire and the TPMS control unit. If it does not, go to the DLC
pressure sensors is not needed. circuit troubleshooting (see page 11 -383).
4. Select Sensor ID Learning from the mode menu on

the HDS.
5. Follow HDS screen prompts to turn on the TPMS tool.

Tire Pressure Sensor Location
n
6, Hold the TPMS tool (A) near the valve stem of one Special Tools Required
wheel, and memorize the pressure sensor ID by TPMS Trigger Tool ATEQ VT55*
following the screen prompts on the HDS. Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
NOTE; Program 888-424-6857
See the HDS Help menu for specific instructions.
NOTE:
If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) before
memorizing all four sensor IDs, the memorizing Make sure the TPMS tool has the latest software.
sensor ID is canceled. Check the official Honda service website for more
If more than one sensor ID is displayed on the HDS, service information about the TPMS tool.
verify that the vehicle has not been driven for 5 The TPMS tool is necessary to do this procedure.
minutes, and there are no other vehicles or tire Let the vehicle sit for at least 5 minutes to allow the
pressure sensors within 10 ft (3 m). pressure sensors to switch to sleep mode.
This procedure locates where the tire pressure
sensors 1 ,2 ,3 ,4 are mounted, when activated by the
TPMS tool.
Position the vehicle at least 10 ft (3 m) away from other
vehicles that have tire pressure sensors.

to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the
7. Repeat step 6 for each wheel until all four tire pressure
sensor IDs are memorized. When all four sensor IDs
are memorized, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
blinks.
10. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for

at least 1 minute.
11. Make sure the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does

not blink. A
12. Make sure the tires are inflated to the specified tire 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
pressure listed on the doorjamb label.
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). and the TPMS control unit. If it does not, go to DLC
(cont'd)
Tire Pressure Sensor Location (cont'd)
4. Using the HDS, bring up the TPMS DATA LIST, scroll

down to the bottom, and locate the four tire pressure
sensor ID numbers. These are the sensor ID numbers
assigned to each tire location.
5. Follow the HDS screen prompts under tire pressure

sensor ID learn to turn on the TPMS tool.
6. Hold the TPMS tool (A) near the valve stem of one
wheel, and activate the tire pressure sensor.
7. The TPMS tool will display the sensor data including

the tire pressure sensor ID number.
8. Locate the tire pressure sensor ID number on the
TPMS DATA LIST with the HDS, and match it to the
sensor ID on the TPMS tool. Note the sensor location.

DTC Detection Item Troubleshooting

11 Tire 1 Low Air Pressure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-57)
(see page 18-57)
(see page 18-57)
(see page 18-57)
21 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Abnormally High Temperature DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-58)
(see page 18-58)
(see page 18-58)
(see page 18-58)
31 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-59)
32 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Signal Failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-59)
(see page 18-59)
(see page 18-59)
(see page 18-59)
(see page 18-59)
(see page 18-59)
(see page 18-59)
41 Abnormal Signal Reception Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-60)
51 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Registration Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-61)
(see page 18-61)
(see page 18-61)
(see page 18-61)
81 TPMS Control Unit Failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-62)
83 No VSP Signal DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-62)
85 F-CAN Communication Failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-63)
91 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Internal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-64)
(see page 18-64)
(see page 18-64)
(see page 18-64)
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also checkfor

HDS does not communicate with the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
TPMS control unit or the vehicle 11-383).
Low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does 1. Do the gauge control module
not come on, and no DTCs are stored self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325).
2. Symptom Troubleshooting, (see page
18-64)
Low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does 1. Do the gauge control module
not go off, and no DTCs are stored self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325).
2. Symptom Troubleshooting, (see page
18-65)
I
System Description
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs at the 20P Connector
fl
oo
h*.
10 9 6 5 4 I3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

number
1 PNK + B (Battery Power source for the Battery voltage (about 12 V) at all times
positive) TPMS control unit
2 Not used Not used
3 LT BLU IG1 (Ignition Power source for With ignition switch ON (II):
switch 1) activating the system battery voltage (about 12 V)
With ignition switch in LOCK (0):
less than 0.1 V
4 BLU K-LINE (Data link Communications with
connector) the HDS
5 Not used Not used
6 Not used Not used
7 Not used Not used
8 BLK GND (Ground) Ground for the TPMS Less than 0.1 V at all times
control unit
9 GRN F-CAN H (F-CAN F-CAN communication With ignition switch ON (II):
communication circuit pulses
signal high)
20 PNK F-CAN L (F-CAN F-CAN communication With ignition switch ON (II):
communication circuit pulses
signal low)
(cont'd)
System Structure
Once the vehicle speed exceeds 28 mph (45 km/h), the TPMS control unit monitors all four tire pressure sensors and the
system function. If it detects low pressure in a tire, it alerts the driver by turning on the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator.
If it detects a problem in the system, it turns on the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator (starts blinking).
Control unit
Mounted over the accelerator pedal module, the TPMS control unit receives wireless pressure sensor ID signals every
time the vehicle speeds exceeds 28 mph (45 km/h). It also receives wireless signals from the transmitters for tire
pressure and the sensor condition, and it continuously monitors and controls the system. The TPMS control unit cannot
directly determine the position (location) of a tire pressure sensor(s) on the vehicle since it is a wireless system. Tire
pressure sensor locations will change during scheduled vehicle maintenance (tire rotation).
NOTE: To determine the actual location of each tire pressure sensor on the vehicle, do the tire pressure sensor location
procedure (see page 18-47). Once the tire pressure sensor locations are identified, write the sensor ID on the side wall of
the tire with a tire crayon to eliminate confusion.
Indicators
The indicator is in the gauge control module:
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on when any tire pressure is low.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks when the system is malfunctioning.
Vehicle
Tire pressure sensor
Each sensor is an integrated unit made up of the tire valve stem, a pressure sensor, and a transmitter. The unit is
attached to the inside of the wheel, around the valve stem. The sensor transmits the internal tire information to the
TPMS control unit once every 60 seconds when the vehicle speed exceeds 28 mph (45 km/h). When the TPMS control
unit receives a tire pressure signal that is less than 175 kPa (1.8 kgf/cm2, 25 psi), the TPMS control unit then turns on the
low tire pressure/TPMS indicator. When that tire's pressure is increased to more than 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 29 psi), and
the vehicle is driven above 28 mph (45 km/h) the transmitter sends the tire pressure signal to the TPMS control unit, and
then the TPMS control unit turns the indicator off.
NOTE: Do not mix the TPMS tire pressure sensors or TPMS type wheels with other TPMS types. Be sure to use the
correct type sensors and wheels for this system.
Sensors are active:

When the wheel rotates over 28 mph (45 km/h) the sensor detects the momentum, and switches the sensor to the
normal function mode.
The LF (low frequency) signal of the TPMS tool makes the sensor active even though the vehicle is stopped. The tire
pressure sensor goes into sleep mode when the acceleration sensor detects the wheel is stationary for 5 minutes or
more.
Wheels
The TPMS w ill not work unless TPMS type wheels are installed on the vehicle. The original equipment wheels have a
"TPMS mark (A) on them. The wheels also have counterweights (B) incorporated on the opposite side of the tire
pressure sensor (C) to counterbalance the weight of the sensor.
,c
(cont'd)
System Com m unication

When the vehicle is traveling more than 28 mph (45 km/h), an RF (radio frequency) band wave signal is transmitted
from each tire pressure sensor to the TPMS control unit.
When the wheels rotate, the tire pressure sensors momentum is detected, switching them from sleep mode to normal
function (awake) mode. After the vehicle is stationary for 5 minutes, the sensors switch from normal function mode
back to sleep mode to extend their battery life.
Each tire pressure sensor has its own tire pressure sensor ID to prevent jamming by similar systems on other vehicles.
After memorizing all the sensor IDs, the TPMS control unit recognizes only those specific signals.
A tire pressure sensor ID cannot be memorized automatically. The TPMS control unit knows which sensor ID belongs
to each tire pressure sensor. This recurring ID confirmation prevents any confusion in the system as a result of normal
tire rotation.
NOTE: Be careful not to bend the brackets on the TPMS control unit. Misalignment of the TPMS control unit could
interfere with sending and receiving signals.
TPMS Control Unit Tire Pressure Sensor

(with an internal radio frequency antenna) (sensor-transmitter w ith acceleration sensor)
Circuit Diagram
----------------- --- ; CAN line

12 VOLT Other communication line
BATTERY
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

CONNECTOR Q (34P) CONNECTOR Y(16P)
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
n n n i--------------- r n n n
CO
16 15 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N5
CO
o
CM
o
00
32 31 29 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 19 18 17
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
$===t
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
I1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8/
\ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16J

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 1 1 , 13,15,17: Tire Low Air Pressure 8. Clearthe DTC with the HDS.
NOTE: If low tire pressure is detected, the TPMS control 9. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for
unit sets one or more of these DTCs, and turns on the at least 1 minute.
low tire pressure/TPMS indicator. If the low tire 10. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
pressure/TPMS indicator comes on because of a low tire
pressure, and the customer corrects it before bringing Is DTC 11, 13,15, or 17 indicated?
the vehicle in, the DTCs will be stored, but the indicator
turns off.
18-68).H
N O -lf any other DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot the
2. Make sure the tires are inflated to the specified tire appropriate DTC. If no DTCs are indicated, the system
pressure listed on the doorjamb label. is OK at this tim e.H

at least 1 minute.
Does the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator go off?

time.B
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Note the tire pressure sensor(s) number by the

indicated DTC.
DTC Tire Pressure Sensor Number

11 No. 1
13 No. 2
15 No. 3
17 No. 4
6. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to
determine the affected tire location and relate it to the
tire pressure sensor number (see page 18-47).
7. Check the TIRE 1, TIRE 2, TIRE 3, or TIRE 4 AIR

PRESSURE in the TPMS DATA LIST with the HDS, and
compare it with the actual measured tire pressure.
Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within 40 kPa

(0.4 kgf/cm2, 6 psi) of the actual tire pressure?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor (see
page 18-69).H
DTC 21,22,23,24: Tire Pressure Sensor 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Abnormally High Temperature 9. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for
at least 1 minute.
2. Make sure the tires have cooled down.
Is DTC 21, 22, 23, or 24 indicated?
NOTE: An abnormal rise in the internal temperature of
the tires can be caused by: YES-Check for loose terminals and poor connections
Excessive braking at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, substitute a
Failure to release the parking brake (rear tires only) known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-68), and
recheek.H
Leaving the vehicle running while parked (front
tires only) N O -lf any other DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot the
Improper assembly of a wheel and tire appropriate DTC. If no DTCs are indicated, the system
is OK at this tim e.H
at least 1 minute.
Does the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator go off?

tim e.H
NO-Go to step 4.

indicated DTC.

21 No. 1
22 No. 2
23 No. 3
24 No. 4

TEMPERATURE in the TPMS DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is 176 F (80 C) or more indicated?
YES-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
(see page 18-69).
NO-Go to step 8.
1
DTC 31,33,35,37: Tire Pressure Sensor Low DTC 32,34,36,38: Tire Pressure Sensor
Battery Voltage Signal Failure
NOTE: This problem occurs when the temperature NOTE:
around the sensor is 4 F (20 C) or less. Note that Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device(s) (such as
the diagnosis must be made in a place where ambient an inverter, battery charger, CB radio, etc.) interfering
temperature is 4 F (20 C) or more. with the RFsignal from the tire pressure sensors when
driving the vehicle.
If DTC 41 is also set, troubleshoot the DTC first (see
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. page 18-60).
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
at least 1 minute.
2. Make sure all four wheels are TPMS type wheels with
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. mounted tire pressure sensors.
Is DTC 31, 33, 35, or 37 indicated? Are TPMS type wheels with a tire pressure sensor
mounted on the vehicle?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 3.
tim e.H NO-lnstall the TPMS type wheel, and memorize the
pressure sensor ID with the HDS (see page 18-46).H
indicated DTC. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
DTC Tire Pressure Sensor Number 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
31 No. 1
33 No. 2
indicated DTC.
35 No. 3
37 No. 4 DTC Tire Pressure Sensor Number
6. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to 32 No. 1
determine the affected tire location and relate it to the 34 No. 2
tire pressure sensor number (see page 18-47). 36 No. 3
38 No. 4
Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the TPMS tool?
YES-Go to step 7. determine the affected tire location and relate it to the
NO-Check that the tire pressure sensor is properly
mounted. If necessary, replace the appropriate tire Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the TPMS tool?
pressure sensor (see page 18-69).H
YES-Go to step 7.
7. Check the TIRE 1, TIRE 2, TIRE 3, or TIRE 4 PRESSURE
SENSOR BATTERY STATUS in the TPMS DATA LIST NO-Check for an aftermarket electrical device
with the HDS. interfering with the RF signals from the sensors. If
there are no electrical devices causing interference,
Is LOW indicated? replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor (see page
18-69).B
YES-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
(see page 18-69).H
NO-Check for loose terminals and poor connections

at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, substitute a
known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-68), and
recheck.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 5 DTC 41: Abnorma l Signal Reception Error
minutes or more.
NOTE: Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device(s)
8. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for (such as an inverter, battery charger, CB radio, etc.)
at least 1 minute. interfering with the RF signal from the tire pressure
9. Check if the value of the AIR PRESSURE and AIR sensors when driving the vehicle.
TEMPERATURE of the affected sensor changes from 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
DEFAULT to the correct tire pressure on the TPMS
DATA LIST with the HDS. 2. Make sure all four wheels are TPMS type wheels with
mounted tire pressure sensors.
Does the value of the AIR PRESSURE and AIR
TEMPERATURE change from DEFAULT to the correct Are TPMS type wheels with tire pressure sensors
tire pressure? mounted on the vehicle?
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Go to step 3.

tim e .ll
NO-lnstall the TPMS type wheel, and memorize the
NO-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor (see tire pressure sensor ID with the HDS (see page
page 18-69).H 18-46). I
3. Memorize the tire pressure sensor IDs with the HDS
(see page 18-46).

tim e.
NO-Substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see

4. Memorize the tire pressure sensor IDs with the HDS

(see page 18-46).
YES-Replace the original TPMS control unit (see page

18-68). Hi
NO-Do the troubleshooting for DTC 32,34,36,38 (see
page 18-59).H
H
DTC 51,53,55,57: Tire Pressure Sensor 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 5
minutes or more.
Registration Error
NOTE:
The DTCs will only set during memorizing the tire 9. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
pressure sensor ID.
Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device(s) (such as at least 1 minute.
an inverter, battery charger, CB radio, etc.) interfering
with the RF signal from the tire pressure sensors when 11. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
driving the vehicle.
YES-Check for loose terminals and poor connections
2 . Make sure all four wheels are TPMS type wheels with at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, substitute a
mounted tire pressure sensors. known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-68), and
recheck.B
Are TPMS type wheels with a tire pressure sensor
mounted on the vehicle? NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
tim e.B
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-lnstall the TPMS type wheel, and memorize the
tire pressure sensor ID with the HDS (see page
18-46). I i

indicated DTC.
DTC Tire Pressure Sensor Number .

51 No. 1
53 No. 2
55 No. 3
57 No. 4
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check for an aftermarket electrical device

interfering with the RF signals from the sensors. If
there are no electrical devices causing interference,
replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor (see page
18-69).H
DTC 81: TPMS Control Unit Failure DTC 83: No VSP Signa l
NOTE: Low 12 volt battery voltage can cause this DTC. NOTE: If DTC 85 stored at the same time as DTC 83,
Make sure the 12 volt battery is fully charged and in troubleshoot DTC 85 first, then recheck for DTC 83.
good condition (see page 22-85).
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON
4. Check the speedometer.
(II) again.
Does the speedometer register speed?
YES-Go to step 5.
Is DTC 81 indicated?
18-68).11
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this step 1 and recheck. If the ECM/PCM was updated and
tim e .ll DTCs are not indicated, troubleshooting is complete.
11-209).B
5. Check the VEHICLE SPEED in the TPMS DATA LIST

with the HDS.
Is the vehicle speed indicated?

tim e.B
NO-Substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see

page 18-68), and recheck.H
DTC 85: F-CAN Com m unication Failure 14. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit 20P
connector terminals and ECM/PCM connector A (44P)
NOTE: Check the fuel and emissions systems DTCs with terminals individually (see table).
the HDS, and troubleshoot the ECM/PCM and F-CAN
communication errors first (see page 11-3). Terminal TPMS Control ECM/PCM
Name Unit 20P Connector A
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Connector (4 4 P) Terminal
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Terminal
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON F-CAN H No. 9 No. 36
(II) again.
TPMS CONTROL UN IT 20P CONNECTOR
4. Wait about 5 seconds. Wire side of female terminals
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. F-CAN H (GRN)
Is DTC 85 indicated? 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
o
CM
YES-Go to step 6. 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
F-CAN L (PNK)
tim e.H

I 1 I2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 L
Does the speedometer work? LI 10 11 12 13114115116171819
1 20 2172829|30|3i|32
22 232425 1
YES-Go to step 10. 262 333435 1
136137 38T39|40141 142 43144i
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). F-CAN H (GRN) F-CAN L (PNK)
8. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector (see

step 3 on page 18-68). ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
Does the speedometer work? Is there continuity?
YES-Check for loose terminals and poor connections YES-Check for loose terminals and poor connections
at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, substitute a at the TPMS control unit and G502. If necessary,
known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-68), and substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see page
recheck.ll 18-68), and recheck.ll
NO-Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and NO-Repair an open in the wire between the TPMS
reconnect all connectors, then check and control unit and the ECM/PCM.
troubleshoot the fuel and emissions systems (see
page 11-3).ll

on page 11-210).

(cont'd)
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) Symptom Troubleshooting
DTC 9 1 /9 3 ,95,97: Tire Pressure Sensor Low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does not
I nternal Error come on, and no DTCs are stored
1, Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2. Check the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator for
several seconds when the ignition switch is turned to
ON (II).
indicated DTC.
Did the indicator come on, and then go off?
91 No. 1 YES-Go to step 3.
93 No. 2 NO-Go to step 7.
95 No. 3
97 No. 4 3. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for
at least 1 minute.
determine the affected tire location and relate it to the 4. Stop the vehicle, and lower the pressure in each tire
tire pressure sensor number (see page 18-47). until the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on.
Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the TPMS tool? NOTE:
YES-Go to step 5. Reinflate the tire before continuing to the next tire.
A fte r n o tin g w h e th e r th e lo w tire pressure/T P M S
NO-Check that the tire pressure sensor is properly indicator came on, make sure it goes off when you
mounted. If necessary, replace the appropriate tire reinflate the tire before proceeding to the next tire.
pressure sensor (see page 1 8 -6 9 ). If 5 minutes has passed since finishing the last
5. Clear the DTC with the HDS. test-drive, reactivate the appropriate tire pressure
sensor using the TPMS tool (see page 18-47).
at least 1 minute. Does the indicator come on when the pressure drops
below 175 kPa (1.8 kgf/cm2, 25 psi) or less?
Is DTC 91, 93, 95, or 97 indicated? time.il
YES-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor NO-Go to step 5.
(see page 18-69), and recheck. If DTCs are still present,
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see page 5. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to
18-68), and recheck.B determine the affected tire location and relate it to the
N O -lf any other DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot the
appropriate DTC. If no DTCs are indicated, the system Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the TPMS tool?
is OK at this tim e.B YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Check that the tire pressure sensor is properly

mounted. If necessary, replace the appropriate tire
pressure sensor (see page 18-69).B

PRESSURE in the TPM S DATA LIST with the HDS, and
compare with the actual measured tire pressure.
Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within 40 kPa

(0.4 kgf/cm2, 6 psi) of the a c t u a l tire pressure?
YES-Substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see

page 18-68), and recheck.B
NO-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor (see

page 18-69).B
7. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function Low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does not
(see page 22-325).
go off, and no DTCs are stored
Is the gauge control module OK?
NOTE;
YES-Go to step 8. Check for gauge DTCs with the HDS (see page 22-6). If
multiple DTCs are present, including U0029,
troubleshoot those DTCs first. If only DTC U0029 is
22-354).
present, continue with the following troubleshooting.
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). If the TPMS control unit was replaced, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator will be on until all four tire
pressure sensor ID codes are learned.
10. Measure the voltage between TPMS control unit 20P
connector terminals No. 3 and No. 8. 2. Check the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator for
several seconds when the ignition switch is turned
ON (II).
Did the indicator come on, and then go off?

tim e.B
GND (BLK) IG1 (LT BLU)
NO-Go to step 3.
0
10 9 6 5 4 3 2 1
o
CM
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
4. Check the No. B2 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Wire side of female terminals Is the fuse blown?
YES-Go to step 5.
Is there battery voltage? NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 7.
YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the 5. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector (see
TPMS control unit and the No. B22 (7.5 A) fuse in the step 3 on page 18-68).
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.B
NO-Check for loose terminals and poor connections
recheck.B
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. With the No. B2 (7.5 A) fuse removed, check for 9. With the No. B22 (7.5 A) fuse removed, check for
continuity between body ground and TPMS control continuity between body ground and TPMS control
unit 20P connector terminal No. 1. unit 20P connector terminal No. 3.
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
+ B (PNK) IG1 (LT BLU)

ftTTTTTTft
00
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 |3 2 1 10 9 6 5 4 |3 2 1
CM
o
CM
o
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
between the No. B2 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash between the No. B22 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the TPMS control unit.H fuse/relay box and the TPMS control unit.H
N O -lnstall a new No. B2 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash NO-lnstall a new No. B22 (7.5 A) fuse in the
fuse/relay box, then go to step 10. under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 10.
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Go to step 8.

i
10. Reconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 16. Measure the voltage between body g rou nd a nd TPMS
control unit 20P connector terminal No. 3.
12. Check the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator for
several seconds when the ignition switch is turned TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
ON (II).
Did the indicator come on, and then go off? IG1 (LT BLU)
YES-Troubleshooting is complete.
CM
10 9 8 j 7 6 5 4 | 3
CO
NO-Check for loose terminals and poor connections 18 17 16
CM
o
cn
14 13 12 11
recheck.
13. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector (see W ire side of female terminals
14. Measure the voltage between body ground and TPMS
control unit 20P connector terminal No. 1. YES-Go to step 17.
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR NO-Repair an open in the wire between the TPMS
control unit and the No. B22 (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.H
+ B (PNK)
JL,____,...
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 I 3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
I
is there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the TPMS

control unit and the No. B2 (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.B
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) TPMS Control Unit Replacement
17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit mounting
bracket is not bent or twisted as this may affect its
18. Reconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
communication with the tire pressure sensors.
20. Measure the voltage between body ground and TPMS
control unit 20P connector terminal No. 8.
20- 86).
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR 3. Disconnect the TPMS control unit connector (A).
GND (BLK)
r
10 9 6 5 4 3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire

between the TPMS control unit and body ground
(G502).B
NO-Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control

module (see page 22-325). If the gauge control
module is OK, check for loose terminals and poor
connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see page
4. Remove the TPMS control unit (B) from the bracket
18-68), and recheck.B
(C).
NOTE: While separating the TPMS control unit from

the bracket, use a flat-tipped screwdriver (D) to push
and release it from the bracket.
5. Install the TPMS control unit in the reverse order of

removal.
NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit is properly

installed. You will hear a click when the TPMS control
unit is securely mounted on the bracket.
6. Connect the HDS, and memorize the tire pressure

sensor IDs using the TPMS tool (see page 18-46).
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement
Removal 5. Position the wheel so the tire machine (A) and the tire
iron (B) are next to the valve stem (C) and will move
I NOTICE I away from it when the machine starts. Then remove
the tire from the wheel.
Each tire pressure sensor contains a lithium anode
battery that is not removable. The complete tire pressure
sensor should be disposed of according to local battery
disposal guidelines or requirements. An improperly
disposed battery can be harmful to the environment.
2. Remove the wheel with the faulty sensor.
3. Remove the tire valve stem cap and the valve stem
core to deflate the tire.
4. Remove any balance weights, and then break the

bead loose from the wheel with a commercially
available tire changer (A).
INOTICE I
Note these items to avoid damaging the tire pressure
sensor:
Do the outside of the wheel first. 6. Remove the valve stem nut (A) and the washer (B),
Position the wheel as shown so the valve stem (B) is then remove the tire pressure sensor with the valve
90 degrees from the bead breaker (C) as shown. stem (C) from the wheel.
Do not position the bead breaker of the tire changer NOTE: Check the nut and the washer; if they have
too close to the rim. deterioration or damage, replace with new ones
during reassembly.
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
7. Remove and discard the valve stem grommet (A) Installation

from the tire pressure sensor (B).
NOTE: Use only wheels that have a 'T P M S " stamp (A)
NOTE: on the inside of the wheels.
The valve stem grommet might stay in the wheel;
make sure you remove it.
Always use a new valve stem grommet whenever
the tire pressure sensor has been removed from the
wheel, or when replacing the tire.
1. Before installing the tire pressure sensor, clean the

mating surfaces on the sensor and the wheel.
I
2. Install the tire pressure sensor (A) and the washer (B) 4. Lube the tire bead sparingly with a paste-type tire
to the wheel (C), and tighten the valve stem nut (D) mounting lubricant, and position the wheel so the tire
finger tight. Make sure the pressure sensor is resting machine (A) is next to the valve stem (B) and will
on the wheel. move away from it when the machine starts. Then
install the tire onto the wheel.
NOTE: Install the tire pressure sensor so that the
sensor housing surface (E) does not extend beyond
the protrusion (F) on the wheel to prevent the sensor
housing from being caught on the bead of the tire
when assembling the tire.
5. With a dry air source, inflate the tire to 300 kPa (3.1
kgf/cm2, 44 psi) to seat the tire bead to the rim, then
adjust the tire pressure (see page 18-6), and install the
valve stem cap.
NOTE: Make sure the tire bead is seated on both sides
of the rim uniformly.
6. Check and adjust the wheel balance, then install the

wheels on the vehicle.
7. Lower the vehicle. Torque the wheel nuts to
specifications (see page 18-14).
8. Connect the HDS, and memorize the pressure sensor
3. Tighten the valve stem nut to the specified torque IDs using the TPMS tool (see page 18-46).
while holding the tire pressure sensor.
NOTE:
Do not use air or electric impact tools to tighten a
valve stem nut.
Do not twist the tire pressure sensor to adjust its
position with the wheel, as this will damage or
deform the valve stem grommet.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If brake maintenance is required)
tensioners.
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) SYSTEM (If brake maintenance is required)

Brakes
Conventional Brake Components....................... 19-1

Brake Booster Pressure Monitoring System ... 19-43
VSA System Components.................................... 19-65
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components

Special T o o ls .......................................................................... 19-2
Component Location In d e x .................................................19-3
Brake System Inspection and T e s t................................... 19-4
Sym ptom Troubleshooting.................................................19-5
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch/Idle
Stop Switch A d ju s tm en t........................................... . 19-6
Parking Brake Inspection and A djustm ent. .................. 19-8
Brake System B leed ing....................................................... 19-10
Brake System Indicator Circuit D ia g ra m ........................ 19-11
Parking Brake Switch T e s t................................................. 19-12
Brake Fluid Level Switch T e s t............ ...............................19-12
Front Brake Pad Inspection and R eplacem ent.............. 19-13
Front Brake Disc Inspection...............................................19-17
Front Brake Disc R eplacem ent................................ .........19-18
Front Brake Caliper O verh au l............................................19-20
M aster Cylinder R eplacem ent........................................... 19-22
M aster Cylinder Inspection................................................ 19-24
Brake Booster T e s t............................................................... 19-24
Brake Booster R eplacem ent...............................................19-26
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacem ent......... .. 19-28
Rear Brake Disc Inspection................................................ 19-31
Rear Brake Disc R eplacem ent............................................19-32
Rear Brake Caliper O verh au l............................................. 19-33
Brake Pedal R eplacem ent.................................................. 19-35
Brake Hose and Line Inspection....................................... 19-36
Brake Hose Replacem ent....................................................19-37
Parking Brake Lever Replacem ent.............. .....................19-39
Parking Brake Cable Replacem ent................................... 19-40
Brake Pedal Pad Cover R e p la c e m e n t.............................19-42
Special Tools

07AAE-SEPA101 Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 1
Brake System Bl eeding, page 19-10

Brake Fluid Level Switch Test, page 19-12
Brake System Inspection and Test
Inspect the brake system components listed. Repair or replace any parts that are leaking or damaged.
Component Inspections;
Component Procedure Also check for
Master Cylinder Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging seal at reservoir tank cap. This is
Reservoir tank, reservoir union or master a sign of fluid contamination.
cylinder body.
Lines, reservoir tank hose and grommets,
and their joints.
Between master cylinder and brake booster.
Brake Hoses Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging, twisted, or bent lines.
Line joints and banjo bolt connections.
Hoses and lines, also inspect for twisting or
damage.
Caliper Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Seized or sticking caliper pins.
Piston seal.
Banjo bolt connections.
Bleed screw.
VSA Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at:
Modulator-Control Line joints.
Unit Modulator-control unit.
Brake System Test

Brake pedal sinks/fades when braking
1. Set the parking brake, and start the engine, then turn off the A/C. Allow the engine to warm up to normal operating
temperature (radiator fan comes on twice).
2. Attach a 50 mm (1.97 in) piece of masking tape along the bottom of the steering wheel, and draw a horizontal
reference mark across it.
3. With the transmission in Neutral (M/T) or P or N (CVT), press and hold the brake pedal lightly (about the same
pressure needed to keep a CVT-equipped vehicle from creeping), then release the parking brake.
4. While still holding the brake pedal, hook the end of the tape measure behind the brake pedal, then pull the tape up to
the steering wheel. Note the measurement between the brake pedal and the reference mark on the steering wheel.
5. Apply steady pressure to the brake pedal for 3 minutes.
6. Watch the tape measure.
If the measurement increases 10 mm (0.39 in) or less, the master cylinder is OK.
If the measurement increases more than 10 mm (0.39 in), replace the master cylinder.
Rapid brake pad wear, vehicle vibration (after 5. Loosen the hydraulic lines at the master cylinder, then
spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
a long drive), or high, hard brake pedal
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed
correctly. YES-Go to step 6.
The upper caliper pin and the lower caliper pin are NO-Check the master cylinder reservoir for
different. If the pins are installed in the wrong location, it contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
will cause vibration, uneven or rapid brake pad wear, contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
and possibly uneven tire wear. For proper caliper pin contaminated fluid, then replace all rubber parts in
locations: Front caliper (see page 19-20), rear caliper the brake system that were exposed to contaminated
(see page 19-33). fluid. If the brake fluid is OK, replace the master
cylinder (see page 1 9 -2 2 ).
1. Drive the vehicle until the brakes drag or until the
pedal is high and hard. This can take 20 or more brake 6. Loosen the bleed screws at each caliper, then spin the
pedal applications during an extended test-drive. wheels to check for brake drag.
2. With the engine running, raise and support the Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
vehicle (see page 1-10), and spin all four wheels by
YES-Check the master cylinder reservoir for
hand.
contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels? contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
contaminated fluid, then replace all rubber parts in
YES-Go to step 3.
the brake system that were exposed to contaminated
NO-Look for other causes of pad wear, high pedal, or fluid. If the brake fluid is OK, disassemble and repair
vehicle vibration. the caliper on the wheel(s) with brake drag.H
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), press the brake NO-Look for and replace any damaged brake lines. If
pedal several times to deplete the vacuum in the all brake lines are OK, replace the VSA
brake booster, and then spin the wheels again to modulator-control unit (see page 19-125).
check for brake drag.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the brake booster (see page 19-26).B
4. Without removing the brake lines, unbolt and

separate the master cylinder from the booster, then
spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment

and the brake pedal free play (see page 19-6).1H
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch/Idle Stop Switch Adjustment
Pedal Height 7. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the
pushrod (B) in or out with pliers until the standard
1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover (see page pedal height from the floor is reached. After
20 - 86 ). adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust
the pedal height with the pushrod pressed.
2. Turn the brake pedal position switch 45
counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no longer
touching the brake pedal.
3. CVT model: Disconnect idle stop switch connector.

Turn the idle stop switch counterclockwise, and pull it
back until it is no longer touching the brake pedal.
4. Remove the steering joint cover (see step 5 on page

17-9).
5. Remove the driver's side kick panel (see page 20-52).
6. Pull back the carpet, and find the cutout in the

insulation (A). Measure the pedal height (B) at the left
side middle of the pedal pad (C) to the floor without
the insulation.
Standard pedal height:
M /T model
With pedal pad cover: 170 mm (6.69 in)
Without pedal pad cover: 168 mm (6.61 in)
CVT model
With pedal pad cover: 196 mm (7.72 in)
Without pedal pad cover: 194 mm (7.64 in)
*: The illustration shows M /T model.

8. Brake pedal position switch adjustment: Lift up on the 10- Install all the removed parts in the reverse order of
brake pedal by hand. Push in the brake pedal position removal.
switch 45 clockwise to lock it. The gap between the

brake pedal position switch and the pad is
automatically adjusted to 0.7 mm (0.028 in) by locking
the switch. Make sure the brake lights go off when the
pedal is released.
D,
( A B
*: The i l lustrati on shows CVT model.
9. Idle stop switch adjustment (CVT model): Adjust the

idle stop switch (C). Screw in the idle stop switch until
its plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (D) is
touching the pad on the pedal arm). Then back off the
switch 1/23/4 turn to make 0.60.9 mm (0.024
0.035 in) of clearance between the threaded end and
the pad. Tighten the locknut firmly. Connect the idle
stop switch connector. When finished, start the
engine, and warm it up to normal operating
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), then make
sure the engine stops when the brake pedal is
pressed.
NOTE:
When either the brake pedal position switch or the
idle stop switch needs adjusting, both switches
must be adjusted together to keep their functions
synchronized. Always adjust the brake pedal
position switch first, then adjust the idle stop
switch; never adjust the switches independently.
When the brake pedal is released, the brake pedal
position switch is normally open and the idle stop
switch is normally closed.
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Parking Brake Inspection and
Switch/Idle Stop Switch Adjustment (cont'd)
Adjustment
Pedal Free Play Inspection
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), inspect the free 1. Pull the parking brake lever (A) with 196 N (20.0 kgf,
play (A) at the brake pedal pad (B) by pushing the 44.1 Ibf) of force to fully apply the parking brake. The
brake pedal by hand. If the brake pedal free play is out parking brake lever should be locked within the
of specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch specified number of clicks.
(C). If the brake pedal free play is insufficient it may
Lever locked clicks: 5 to 7
result in brake drag.
A
Free play: 1.07.2 mm (0.0390.283 in)
2. If the number of lever clicks is not as specified, adjust

the parking brake.
5. Make sure the lever (A) on the rear brake caliper
Adjustment
contacts the stop pin (B).
NOTE: After servicing the rear brake caliper, loosen the
NOTE: When the parking brake lever does not contact
parking brake adjusting nut, start the engine, and press
the stop pin, loosen the adjusting nut in the center
the brake pedal several times to set the self-adjusting
console until the parking brake lever contacts the stop
brake before adjusting the parking brake.
pin, then start the engine, and press the brake pedal
1. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10). several times.
3. Pull out the rear console (A) (see page 20-81).
M B s
fflH H
6. Pull the parking brake lever 1 click.

7. Tighten the parking brake adjusting nut until the
parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels are
turned.
4. Loosen the parking brake adjusting nut (B).
8. Release the parking brake lever fully, and check that
the parking brakes do not drag when the rear wheels
are turned. Readjust if necessary.
9. Make sure the parking brake lever within the specified
number of clicks (5 to 7 clicks).
10. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones.
Push the clips into place securely.
Brake System Bleeding
INOTICE I 4. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed

Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the screw (B), then loosen the bleed screw to allow air to
paint If brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw
securely.
immediately with water.
Front
NOTE;
Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only new Honda B
8.5 N-m
DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using (0.87 kgf m, 6.3 Ibf ft)
a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and
shorten the life of the system.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the
brake fluid.
The reservoir tank connected to the master cylinder
. must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of
the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding
each wheel location. Add fluid as required.
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank

(A) is at the MAX (upper) level line (B).
Rear
2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several

times, then apply steady pressure.
3, Start the bleeding at the driver's side of the front

brake system.
NOTE: Bleed the calipers in the sequence shown.
BLEEDING SEQUENCE;
Fr o nt Right . Rear Right 5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir tank to the MAX
(upper) level line.
6 . Repeat the procedure for each brake circuit until there

are no air bubbles in the fluid.
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram
BRAKE FLUID
ILEVEL SWITCH
CLOSED: Float down
OPEN: Float up
Parking Brake Switch Test Brake Fluid Level Switch Test
NOTE: If both the VSA indicator and the brake system NOTE: If both the VSA indicator and the brake system
indicator come on at the same time, check the VSA indicator come on at the same time, check the VSA
system first (see page 19-68). system first (see page 19-68).
1. Remove the center console (see page 20-79). 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector.
2. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) 2. Check for continuity between the terminals (1) and (2)
from the parking brake switch (B). with the float in the down position and in the up
position.
Remove the brake fluid completely from the
reservoir tank. With the float down, there should be
continuity.
Fill the reservoir tank with brake fluid to the MAX
(upper) level (A). With the float up, there should be
no continuity.
NOTE: If the parking brake switch and brake fluid level

switch are OK, but the brake system indicator does
not function, do the gauge control module
self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325).
3. Check for continuity between the switch terminal (C)

and body ground.
With the parking brake lever pulled, there should be
continuity.
With the parking brake lever released, there should
be no continuity.
NOTE: If the parking brake switch and the brake fluid
level switch are OK, but the brake system indicator
does not function, do the gauge control module
self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325).
4. Reconnect the parking brake switch connector. 3. Reconnect the brake fluid level switch connector.
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and the
Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 07AAE-SEPA101 outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
A CAUTION Brake pad thickness:

Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health. Inner pad:
Avoid breathing dust particles.
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
Inspection
4. If any part of the brake pad thickness is less than the

service limit, replace the front brake pads as a set.
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
Replacement 6. Remove the pad springs (A) while holding the brake
pads.
1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
NOTE: The pad springs are installed on the pads to
2. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10). prevent brake drag. Be careful when pivoting the
caliper body up or the spring could pop out of
position.
4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A).
A
8 x 1.25 mm
7. Remove the pad shims (A) and the brake pads (B).
5. Remove the flange bolt (B) while holding the caliper

pin (C) with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the
pin boot, and pivot the caliper (D) up out of the way.
Check the hose and the pin boots for damage and
deterioration.
8. Remove the pad retainers (A). 13. Install the brake caliper piston compressor (A) on the
caliper body (B).
O7AAE-SEPA101
9. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any 14. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston
rust, and check for grooves and cracks. Verify that the compressor so the caliper will fit over the brake pads.
caliper pins (C) move in and out smoothly. Clean and Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent
lube if needed. damaging it when pivoting the caliper down.
10. Inspect the brake disc for runout, thickness, NOTE: Be careful when pressing in the piston; brake
parallelism (see page 19-17), and check for damage fluid might overflow from the master cylinder
and cracks. reservoir tank. If brake fluid gets on any painted
surface, wash it off immediately with water.
11. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N
08798-9010) to the retainer mating surface of the 15. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor.
caliper bracket (indicated by the arrows).
12. Install the pad retainers. Wipe off the excess
assembly paste from the retainers. Keep the
assembly paste away from the brake disc and the
brake pads.
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
16. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 18. Install the pad springs (A) while holding the brake
08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the back pads.
of the brake pads (B), and the other areas indicated by
NOTE: Insert the pad spring ends into the pad
the arrows. Wipe off the excess assembly paste from
installation holes securely.
the pad shims and brake pads friction material. Keep
grease and assembly paste away from the brake disc
and brake pads. Contaminated brake disc or brake
pads reduce stopping ability.
19. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the flange
bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque while
holding the caliper pin (B) with a wrench being careful
not to damage the pin boot.
8 x 1.25 mm
17. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install 22 N-m
the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the upper (2,2 kgf-m , 16 Ibf-ft)
inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, always
reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to
prevent a temporary loss of braking efficiency.
A
8 x 1.0 mm
23 N-m (2.3 k g fm , 17 Ib fft)
20. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (C).
Front Brake Disc Inspection
22. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the Thickness and Parallelism
brakes work.
NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal
stroke immediately after the brake pads have been 2. Remove the front wheels.
replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-14).
pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
4. Using a micrometer (A), measure the brake disc
23. Add brake fluid as needed.
thickness at eight points, about 45 apart and 10 mm
24. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line (0.39 in) in from the outer edge of the brake disc.
joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is
Test-drive the vehicle, then checkfor leaks (see page less than the max. refinishing limit.
19-36). Brake disc thickness:
Max. refinishing limit: 19.0 mm (0.748 in)
Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.00059 in)
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference
between the thickness measurements.
5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for

parallelism, refinish the brake disc with a
Honda-approved commercially available on-car brake
lathe.
NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for

refinishing, replace it (see page 19-18).
6. Inspect the brake disc runout
(cont'd)
Front Brake Disc Inspection (cont'd) Front Brake Disc Replacement
Runout NOTE: Keep grease away from the brake disc and brake
pads.
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-14).
3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts (A).
4. Inspect the brake disc to wheel surface for damage
and cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and
remove all rust. A
/ 8 x 1.25 mm
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts (B), / 22 N-m
^ (2.2 kgfm, 16 Ibfft)
and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque to
hold the brake disc securely against the hub.
B
12 x 1,25 mm
108 N-m (11.0 kgfm, 80 Ibfft)
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B),

then remove the caliper assembly (C) from the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly
or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the
caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist
1 2 x 1 .5 m m the brake hose excessively.
108 N-m (11.0 k g fm , 80 Ib fft)
6. Set up the dial gauge (C) against the brake disc as
shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (0.39 in)
from the outer edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout:
7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish

the brake disc with a Honda-approved commercially
available on-car brake lathe.
NOTE:
If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
If the brake disc is replaced with a new one, check
the new disc for runout. If the new disc is out of
specification, refinish the disc.
8. Install the brake pads (see page 19-14).
B
8 x 1.25 mm
A
6 x 1 .0 mm
9.3 N-m
(0.95 k g fm ,6.9 Ib fft)
6. Remove the brake disc (B) from the front hub.
NOTE: If the brake disc is stuck to the front hub, thread

two 8 x 1 .2 5 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it
away from the front hub. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at
a time to prevent the brake disc from binding.
7. Install the brake disc in the reverse order o f removal.
NOTE: Before installing the brake disc, clean the

mating surfaces between the front hub and the inside
of the brake disc.
8. Inspect the brake disc runout (see page 19-17).

Front Brake Caliper Overhaul
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
INOTICE I
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately
with water.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin A and lower caliper pin B are different. If these
caliper pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid brake pad wear, and possibly
uneven tire wear.
To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with clean rags or shop towels.
Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air.
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or the brake pads.
When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
Do not reuse drained brake fluid. U se only new Honda D O T 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a
non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
Coat the piston, the piston seal groove, and the caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
Use recommended greases in the front caliper set.
After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure.
PIN BOOT
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
108 N m
(11.0 kgfm ,
80 Ibf ft)
PAD RETAINERS
Master Cylinder Replacement
INOTICE I 4. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector (A).

Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the i
paint If brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off 6 x 1.0 mm
9.3 N-m (0.95 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
NOTE;
Be careful not to damage or bend the brake lines
during removal and installation.
After removal, plug the ends of the hoses and joints to
prevent spilling brake fluid.
2. Remove the IMA motor power cable clamps (A) from

the IMA motor power cable bracket.
5. Remove the reservoir tank mounting bolt (B).
3. Remove the reservoir tank cap, then remove the brake

fluid from the reservoir tank with a syringe.
6, Disconnect the brake lines (A) from the master 10. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of
cylinder (B). To prevent spills, cover the hose joints removal, and note these items;
with clean rags or shop towels. Coat the inner bore lip and the outer circumference
A of the new rod seal with the shin-etsu silicone
12 x 1.0 mm grease (P/N 08798-9013).
22 N-m
(2.2 kgfm, 16 Ibfft) Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the
or gloves.
Check the brake pedal height and free play after
installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if
necessary (see page 19-6).
11. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-10).
12. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
12 x 1.0 mm 15 N*m
22 N-m (1.5 k g fm ,
(2.2 k g fm , 11 Ibfft)
16 Ibfft)
7. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (C) and

the washers (D).
8. Remove the master cylinder from the brake booster

(E). Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines
when removing the master cylinder.
9. Remove the rod seal (F) from the master cylinder.
NOTE: During installation, set the new rod seal onto

the master cylinder with its grooved side (G) toward
the master cylinder.
Master Cylinder Inspection Brake Booster Test
1. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-22). Functional Test

2. Inspect and note these items: 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), press the brake
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of pedal several times to deplete the vacuum reservoir,
dirt and other foreign particles. then press the brake pedal hard and hold it for 15
Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder seconds. If the brake pedal sinks, either the master
assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly cylinder is bypassing internally or the brake system is
with a new part, if necessary. leaking. Inspect the brake hoses and lines (see page
Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to contaminate 19-36).
the brake fluid. 2. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. If the
brake pedal sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is
operating normally. If the brake pedal height does not
RESERVOIR TANK CAP
Check the vent holes vary, do the brake system test (see page 19-4).
for blockage.
RESERVOIR SEAL
Checkfor damage
and deter i oration.
STRAINER
Remove accumu l ated
sediment.
MASTER CYLINDER
Check for leaks,
RESERVOIR TANK rust, and damage.
Check for damage.
3. Install the master cylinder (see page 19-22).

Leak Test 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 30
seconds. Press the brake pedal several times using
1. Press the brake pedal with the engine running, then normal pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). The brake pedal should be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal
height should not vary while pressed for 30 seconds. height should gradually rise.
If the pedal height rises, go to step 6. If the pedal position does not vary, inspect the rod
If it does not rise, go to step 2. seal between the master cylinder and the brake
booster. If the rod seal is OK, replace the brake
2. Start the engine, and let it idle for 30 seconds. Turn
booster (see page 19-26).
the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 30 seconds.
If the pedal position varies, replace the brake
Press the brake pedal several times using normal
booster vacuum hose/check valve as an assembly.
pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should be
low. On consecutive applications, the pedal height
should gradually rise.
If it rises, the brake booster is OK.
If it does not rise, go to step 3.
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) at the
booster. The check valve (B) is built into the hose.
NOTE: If the check valve is faulty, replace the brake

booster vacuum hose/check valve as an assembly.
tsmm
A
4. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be

vacuum available.
If no vacuum is available, the check valve is not
working properly. Replace the brake booster
vacuum hose and the check valve, and retest.
If vacuum is found, go to step 5.
5. With the ignition switch at LOCK (0), reconnect the
vacuum hose to the brake booster.
6. Start the engine, and then pinch the brake booster

vacuum hose between the check valve and the
booster.
Brake Booster Replacement
1. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-22). 5. Remove the engine wire harness clamps (A) from the
engine wire harness bracket (B).
2. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) from
the brake booster.
6 x 1 . 0 mm
9.5 N-m
(0.97 kgf-m, 7.0 Ibf-ft)
6. Remove the engine wire harness clamps (A) from the

engine wire harness bracket (B), then remove the
engine wire harness bracket.
6 x 1.0 mm
3. Remove the IMA motor power cable bracket (B). 9.5 N-m
(0.97 kgf m, 7.0 Ibf-ft)
4. Remove the brake lines (A) from the clamp (B).

20 - 86 ).
8. Remove the lock pin (A) and the clevis pin (B), then 10. Remove the brake booster (A) from the engine
disconnect the clevis from the brake pedal. compartment
NOTE: During installation, apply multipurpose grease INOTICE I

to the clevis pin in the brake pedal.
Be careful not to damage the booster surfaces and
threads of the booster stud bolts.
Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines or
other components hoses and lines.
NOTE: Use a new booster gasket (B) during

reassembly.
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 9 Ibf-ft) B .
Replace.
9. Remove the brake booster/brake pedal mounting nuts
(C). 11. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of
Install the master cylinder after installing the brake
booster (see page 19-22).
Check the brake pedal height and free play after
installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if
necessary (see page 19-6).
Bleed the brake system (see page 19-10).
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
r , , : Replacement
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of
1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health. 2. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10).
Avoid breathing dust particles. 3. Remove the rear wheels.
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum 4. Remove the parking brake cable mounting nut (A).
cleaner.
Inspection
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and the
outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:
Service lim it; 1.6 mm (0.083 i n)
6. Remove the flange bolts (C) while holding the

respective caliper pins (D) with a wrench. Be careful
not to damage the pin boot, and remove the caliper
(E). Check the hose, the pin boots, and the parking
brake cable boots for damage and deterioration.
NOTE: Do not twist the brake hose and the parking
brake cable to prevent damage.
4. If any part of the brake pad thickness is less than the

service limit, replace the rear brake pads as a set.

the inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheels.
13. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-
9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the back of the
brake pads (B), and the other areas indicated by the
arrows. Wipe off the excess assembly paste from the
pad shims and the brake pads friction material. Keep
grease and assembly paste away from the brake disc
and the brake pads. Contaminated brake disc or brake
pads reduce stopping ability.
NOTE;
The grease between the mating surfaces of the
shim and the pad must be applied lightly on one
place on the inner pad and two places on the outer
pad as shown in the illustration.
After the shim is attached, remove the shim from
the pad and make sure that grease is not spread on
the whole surface.
When the shim is attached, make sure that the shim
and the pad are tightly attached.
8. Remove the pad retainers (A).
9. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any 14. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install
rust, and check for grooves and cracks. the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the
Verify that the caliper pins (C) move in and out bottom inside. If you are reusing the brake pads,
smoothly. Clean and lube if needed. always reinstall the brake pads in their original
positions to prevent a temporary loss of braking
10. Inspect the brake disc for runout, thickness, efficiency.
parallelism (see page 19-31), and checkfor damage
and cracks.
11. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N

08798-9010) to the retainer mating surfaces of the
caliper bracket (indicated by the arrows).
12. Install the pad retainers. Wipe off the excess

assembly paste from the retainers. Keep the
assembly paste away from the brake disc and the
brake pads.
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
15. Rotate the caliper piston (A) clockwise into the 16. Install the caliper. Install the flange bolts (D), and
cylinder, then align the cutout (B) in the piston with tighten it to the specified torque while holding the
the tab (C) on the inner pad by turning the piston back. respective caliper pins (E) with a wrench being careful
Lubricate the boot with silicone grease to avoid not to damage the pin boots and parking brake cable
twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, boots.
back it out so it is positioned properly.
17. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (F).
NOTE: Be careful when moving the piston back in the
18. Install the parking brake cable mounting nut (G).
caliper; brake fluid might overflow from the master
cylinder reservoir tank. If brake fluid gets on any 19. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc and
painted surface, wash it off immediately with water. the inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheels.
20. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the
brakes work.
NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal

stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake
pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
21. Add brake fluid as needed.
22. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line

joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then recheck for leaks (see
page 19-36).
23. Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-9).
A
Rear Brake Disc Inspection
Thickness and Parallelism Rynout

1. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10). 1. Raise and support the vehicle (see page 1-10).
2. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the rear wheels.
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-28). 3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-28).
4. Using a micrometer (A), measure the brake disc 4. Inspect the brake disc to wheel surface for damage
thickness at eight points, about 45 apart and 10 mm and cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and
(0.39 in) in from the outer edge of the brake disc. remove all rust.
Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is 5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts (B),
less than the max. refinishing lim it and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque to
hold the brake disc securely against the hub.
Brake disc thickness:
Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.00059 in)
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference
between the thickness measurements.
6. Set up the dial gauge (C) against the brake disc as

shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (0.39 in)
from the outer edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout:
5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for Service limit: 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
parallelism, refinish the brake disc with a
7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish
Honda-approved commercially available on-car brake
the brake disc with a Honda-approved commercially
lathe.
available on-car brake lathe.
NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for Max. refinishing limit: 8.0 mm (0.315 in)
NOTE:
6. Inspect the brake disc runout If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
If the brake disc is replaced with a new one, check
the new disc for runout If the new disc is out of
specification, refinish the disc.
8. Install the brake pads (see page 19-28).
the inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheels.
Rear Brake Disc Replacement
NOTE: Keep grease away from the brake disc and brake 6. Remove the brake disc flathead screws (A).
pads.
2. Remove the rear wheel.

4. Remove the caliper body and the brake pads from the
caliper bracket (see page 19-28).
5. Remove the caliper bracket (A) from the knuckle.
^ , >
6 x 1.0 mm
. 9.3 N-m .
(0.95 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
7. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub bearing unit.
NOTE: If the brake disc is stuck to the hub bearing

unit/thread two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake
disc to push it away from the hub bearing unit. Turn
each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent the brake
disc from binding.
1 0 x 1.2 5 mm
55 fiM-m (5.6 kgf-m, 41 I bf-ft)
8. Install the brake disc in the reverse order of removal,
Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-9).
9. Inspect the brake disc runout (see page 19-31).
R e a r B ra k e C a lip e r O v e r h a u l
Hr M i
i i C A U T IO N
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
INOTICE I
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately
with water.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different. If these
caliper pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid brake pad wear, and possibly
uneven tire wear.
To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with clean rags or shop towels.
Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air.
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or the brake pads.
When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only new Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a
non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
Coat the piston, the piston seal groove, and the caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
Use recommended greases in the rear caliper set.
After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure.
R e a r B r a k e C a lip e r O v e r h a u l ( c o n t 'd )
Exploded View
{grease^ ; Honda silicone grease (P/N 08C30-B0234M)
8 m 1.0 m m BRAKE HOSE

23 N-m
(2.3 kgf-m , 17 Ibf-ft)
SEALING WASHERS
Replace. BANJO BOLT
10 x 1.0 m m
SHAFT 35 N*rr (3.6 kgf-m , 26 Ibf-ft)
SLEEVE PISTON
BLEED SCREW
8.5 N-m (0.87 kgf-m
8.3 Ib fft) ADJUSTING BOLT
BEARING A
SPACER
ADJUSTING SPRING B
RETAINING RING
SHAFT COVER
Replace.
SPRING PISTON
WASHER ASSEMBLY
CALIPER BODY O-RING ,
Replace. Q yp
RETURN SPRING Rep l ace,
PARKING NUT PAD SPRING
28 N-m
(2.9 k g fm , 21 Ib fft) SPRING
A p p ly new sealant BRAKE PADS 8 x 1.0 mm GUIDE
(Loctite 569) w hen 23 N-m PISTON SEAL
in sta llin g it. (2.3 k g fm , CALIPER PIN B Rep l ace.
17 Ib fft) PISTON BOOT
R eplace^
GfilASpd
INNER PAD SHIM

CALIPER PIN A
WEAR INDICATOR
Insta l l in n e r pad PAD RETAINERS
w ith its w ear
in d ica tor dow nw ard
CALIPER PIN PIN BOOT

Replace, 10 x 1.25 mm
55 N-m
(5.6 k g fm , 41 Ib fft) CALIPER BRACKET
B ra k e P e d a l R e p la c e m e n t

20-86).
2. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch connector
(A).
*: The illustration shows CVT model.
3. CVT model: Disconnect the idle stop switch connector

(B).
4. Remove the lock pin (C) and clevis pin (D).
NOTE: During installation, apply multipurpose grease
to the clevis pin in the brake pedal.
5. Remove the brake pedal mounting bolt (E) and the
brake booster/brake pedal mounting nuts (F).
6. Remove the brake pedal with bracket (G).
7. Remove the clip (H) from the brake pedal bracket.
8. Remove the brake pedal position switch (I) by turning
it 45 counterclockwise.
9. CVT model: Remove the idle stop switch (J) by
turning it counterclockwise.
10. Install the brake pedal in the reverse order of removal.
11. Do the brake pedal and brake pedal position
switch/idle stop switch adjustment (see page 19-6).
B r a k e H o s e a n d L in e In s p e c t io n
1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting.
2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leaks. Also check for bent brake lines.
3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
4. Check the master cylinder and the VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leaks.
Connection Component Connected to Specified Torque Note

Point
A Front brake caliper Brake hose 35 N-m (3.6 kgfm , 26 Ibf-ft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 8.5 N-m (0.87 kgfm , 6.3 ib fft)
B Rear brake caliper Brake hose 35 N-m (3.6 kgfm , 26 Ibf-ft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 8.5 N-m (0.87 kgf-m, 6.3 Ibf-ft)
C Brake hose Brake line 15 N-m (1.5 kgfm , 11 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
D Master cylinder Brake line 22 N-m (2.2 kgfm , 16 Ibfft) Flare nut
E VSA modulator-control Brake line 15 N-m (1.5 kgfm , 11 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
unit (10 mm nut)
Brake line 22 N-m (2.2 kgfm , 16 Ibf-ft)
(12 mm nut)
C
B r a k e H o s e R e p la c e m e n t
INOTICE I
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the
paint. If brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
NOTE;
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of
dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do
D
so. 8 x 1.25 mm
After removal, plug the end of a hose and joints to
prevent spilling brake fluid.
Front
5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (D), then
3. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the brake hose (B), remove the brake hose.
then remove the brake hose bracket (C).
6. Install the brake hose (A) with the mounting bolt (B).
B
8 x 1.25 m m
22 N-m
(2.2 k g fm , 16 Ib fft)
KaMMMW
C
10 X 1.0 mm
35 N-m
(3.6 k g fm ,26 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
7. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with the banjo
bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D).
B ra k H o s e [ R e p la c e m e n t ( c o n t 'd )
8. Install the brake hose bracket (A) to the body, then Rear
connect the brake line (B). D o not twist the brake hose.
B
' ' 15 N-m 2. Remove the rear wheel.
(1.5 kgf-m , 11 Ibf-ft)
3. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the brake hose (B),
then remove the brake hose clip (C).
/J
S x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 I bf-ft)
9, After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake system
(see page 19-10).
Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary. C
Replace.
Check the brake hoses for interference and twisting.
4. Remove the banjo bolt (A), and disconnect the brake
11. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc and hose (B) from the caliper (C).
5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (D), then

remove the brake hose.
P a r k in g B r a k e L e v e r R e p la c e m e n t
6. Install the brake hose (A) with the mounting bolt (B). 1. Release the parking brake lever fully.
8 x 1 .2 5 m m
22 N-m 3. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A)
(2.2 kgf-m , 16 I b f-ft)
from the parking brake switch (B).
C 8 x 1.25 mm
10 x 1.0 m m 22 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m , 16 Ibf-ft)
7. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with the banjo

bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D).
8. Install a new brake hose clip (A) to the brake hose (B)
on the bracket, then connect the brake line (C). Do not
twist the brake hose.
B C
15 N-m 4. Remove the parking brake lever mount bolts (C).
5. Disconnect the parking brake cables (D) from the
equalizer (E).
6. Remove the parking brake switch.
7. Install the parking brake lever in the reverse order of
removal.
8. Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-9).
9. After installing the brake hoses, bleed the brake

system (see page 19-10).
Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary.
Check the brake hose for interference and twisting.
P a r k in g B r a k e C a b le R e p la c e m e n t
Exploded View
Check for smooth operation.

NOTE: 6. Remove the parking brake cable grommets (A), and
The parking brake cables must not be bent or pull out the parking brake cable from the body floor.
distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and
premature cable failure.
Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this
procedure.
3. Loosen the parking brake adjusting nut.
4. Disconnect the parking brake cables (A) from the
equalizer (B).

B
8x 1.0 mm
9.5 N-m(0.97 kgfm, 7.0 Ibfft)
7. Remove the parking brake cable clip (A) from the
parking brake cable (B).

20-166).
8. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the lever (C).

9. Remove the parking brake cable mounting hardware,
then remove the cable.
10. Install the parking brake cable in the reverse order of
Be careful not to bend or distort the cable, and boot
(D).
Make sure the parking brake cable clip is fully
seated on the cable housing.
Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-9).
B ra k e P e d a l P a d C o v e r R e p la c e m e n t
NOTE: 5. Install the brake pedal pad cover (A) with the rivets (B)
This procedure shows a model equipped with a brake firmly attached.
pedal pad cover.
The illustration shows an M/T model; the CVT model is
similar.
1. Cover the carpet under the brake pedal to prevent
metal shavings from getting on the carpet.
2. Center-punch each of the rivets (A), and drill their
heads off with a 3 mm (0.12 in) drill bit (B).
NOTE: Do not drill the brake pedal pad (C).
6. Make sure the brake pedal cover and plate are

securely fastened on the brake pedal.
7. Check the brake pedal height (see page 19-6).
3. Remove the brake pedal plate pad cover (A) and the
brake pedal cover (B) from the brake pedal pad (C).
4. Set the brake pedal cover on the brake pedal plate.

B ra k e s
B ra k e B o o s te r P re s s u re M o n ito r in g S y s te m
Special T o o ls ...........................................................................19-44
Com ponent Location In d e x ................................................ 19-45
General Troubleshooting In fo rm atio n...................... . 19-46
DTC Troubleshooting In d e x .............................................. 19-48
System D escription............................................................. 19-49
Circuit Diagram .............................................................. 19-51
DTC Troubleshooting.......................................................... 19-52
Brake Booster Pressure Sensor A Replacem ent......... 19-63
Brake Booster Pressure Sensor B R eplacem ent......... 19-64
S p e c ia l T o o ls

07JAZ-001000B Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0 4 In.Hg, 1
BRAKE BOOSTER
PRESSURE SENSOR B P O W E R T R A IN C O N T R O L M O D U L E
Replacement, page 19-64 (P C M )
E N G IN E C O N T R O L M O D U L E
(E C M )
G e n e r a l T r o u b le s h o o tin g In f o r m a t io n
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic How to Retrieve DTCs

System) 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS
NOTE: Make sure the battery is in good condition and to the data link connector (DLC) under the driver's
fully charged. side of the dashboard.
1. If the system indicators stay on, connect the HDS to 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
driver's side of the dashboard. and the ECM/PCM. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit
How to Clear DTCs

and the ECM/PCM. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit
A
the HDS.
and the ECM/PCM. If it does not, go to the DLC circuit
4. In the BRAKE SYSTEM MENU of the HDS, select
EVPS, then check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC)
and the freeze data, and note them. Then refer to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and begin the
NOTE:
Freeze data indicates the ECM/PCM conditions
when the first system malfunction that activated the
indicator was detected.
The HDS can read the DTC, the freeze data, the
current data, and other system data.
For specific operations, refer to the Help menu that
came with the HDS.
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the 4. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminals to a
ECM/PCM Connectors
NOTE: The ECM/PCM overwrites data and monitors the to a commercially available banana jack (Pomona
EVAP system for about 60 minutes after the ignition Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent) (D).
switch is turned to ACCESSORY (I) or to LOCK (0).
Jumping the SCS line after turning the ignition switch to
ACCESSORY (I) or to LOCK (0) cancels this function.
Disconnecting the ECM/PCM during this function,
without jumping the SCS line first, can damage the
ECM/PCM.
2. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A, B, and C.
symbols (A=D, B = ^ f C=0) embossed on them for
identification.
5. Gently insert the pin probe (male) at the test port from
the terminal side. Do not force the tips into the
terminals.
NOTICE I
(male).
other substitutes as they can damage the terminals.
Damaged terminals cause a poor connection and
an incorrect measurement.
connections.
3. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the

ECM/PCM connector, use the terminal test port (A)
above the terminal you need to check.
D T C T r o u b le s h o o tin g In d e x

PG555 Brake Booster Pressure Sensor A Circuit High Voltage DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-52)
P0557 Brake Booster Pressure Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-55)
P15C1 Brake Booster Pressure Sensor B Circuit High Voltage DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-56)
P15C2 Brake Booster Pressure Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-59)
P15C3 Brake Booster Pressure Sensor A/B Voltage Incorrect Correlation DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-61)
NOTE: When the DTCs are stored, the IMA system indicator comes on.
S y s te m D e s c r ip tio n
System Outline
During an auto idle stop, the vacuum inside the intake manifold decreases.
The power brake booster vacuum assist is constantly monitored by the ECM/PCM to make sure there is the appropriate
amount of vacuum available for applying the brakes.
When the brake booster vacuum is less than the reference value, an auto idle stop is not allowed.
Auto idle stop is monitored constantly and prohibited by the ECM/PCM when detecting a sensor failure. (Two sensors
monitor for the same abnormalities.)
The IMA system indicator comes on when either or both of the brake booster pressure sensors fail.
S y s te m D e s c r ip tio n ( c o n t'd )
The brake booster vacuum must reach the established point to ensure enough braking force to allow for auto idle stop
activation. If the established value is decreased to the extent that braking force cannot be ensured, the engine will
transition from auto idle stop to the engine idling.
Vehicle Speed
Vacuum Pressure of Brake Booster and Auto Idle Stop Conditions

C ir c u it D ia g r a m
BRAKE
BOOSTER
PRESSURE
ECM/PCM SENSOR fi
D T C T r o u b le s h o o tin g
DTC P0555: Brake Booster Pressure Sensor A 11. Measure the voltage between brake booster pressure
sensor A 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
troubleshooting information (see page 19-46). BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE
SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR
2. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A in the
EVPS DATA LIST with the HDS. |T1...........

MP M ON (GRN)
YES-Go to step 3.
&)
brake booster pressure sensor A and the ECM/PCM. W ire side of female terminals

4. Disconnect brake booster pressure sensor A 3P
connector (see step 2 on page 19-63). YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the
ECM/PCM and brake booster pressure sensor A.B
NO-Go to step 12.
6. Measure the voltage between brake booster pressure
sensor A 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
13. Substitute a known-good brake booster pressure
sensor A (see page 19-63).
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE
SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR 14. Reconnect all connectors.
MP MON (GRN)
Wire si de of female terminals
Is there 4.8 V or more? latest software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
YES-Go to step 7. If the symptom/indication goes away with a
NO-Go to step 20.
NO-Replace the original brake booster pressure
8. Short the SCS line with the HDS. sensor A (see page 19-63).H
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P) (see step 14 20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
on page 11-210).
21. Connect brake booster pressure sensor A 3P 25. Connect brake booster pressure sensor A 3P
connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper
jumper wire. wire.
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE

SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR
{ I_____ Hi
JL 2 JJ 3 2 1
SG6 (PNK)
MP M O N (GRN) MP M ON (GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female term inal s
23. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A in the 27. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A in the
EVPS DATA LIST with the HDS. EVPS DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there 0.1 V or less? Is there 0.1 V or less ?
YES-Go to step 24. YES-Replace brake booster pressure sensor A (see
page19-63).B
NO-Go to step 32.
NO-Go to step 28.
on page 11-210).
D T C T r o u b le s h o o t in g ( c o n t'd )
31. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector A 35. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector A
(44P) terminal No. 9 and brake booster pressure (44P) terminal No. 2 and brake booster pressure
sensor A 3P connector terminal No. 1. sensor A 3P connector terminal No. 2.
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE

SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR
W i re side of female terminals W i re si de of female terminals
SG6 (PNK) MP MON (GRN)
MPMON1 (GRN)
S G 6 (P N K )
Il--------- il
I 1 |2 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 i 7 8 ! c
111 2 3 P fT 5 | 6 7 8 I 9 I.
i 10 11 12 1 3 |1 4 jl5 |l6 17 18 19 1 10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19
I
20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 fl
1 1 1 1
26 27 28 29|3o|31132 33 34 35 26 27 28 29|30|31 (32 33 34 35
136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 |4 1 | 42 4 3 |4 4 | 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | 4 1 (42 4 3 (4 4 J
I.3 0 ' 37

YES-Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the YES-Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software (see page 11-207), or substitute a latest software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
If the sy m pto m/i nd icatio n goes away with a If the symptom/indication goes away with a
known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original
ECM/PCM (see page 11 -209).B ECM/PCM (see page 11-209).
and brake booster pressure sensor A M and brake booster pressure sensor A M
on page 11-210).
DTC P0557: Brake Booster Pressure Sensor A
Circuit Low Voltage 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P) (see step 14
on page 11-210).
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector A
troubleshooting information (see page 19-46). (44P) terminal No.19 and brake booster pressure
sensor A 3P connector terminal No. 3.
2. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A in the SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR
EVPS DATA LIST with the HDS. W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
Is there 0.23 V or less?
YES-Go to step 3. {M l }
V C C 6 (Y E L )T
brake booster pressure sensor A and the ECM/PCM. T
f Il--------il '
h h 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 1 I S8 lj
4. Disconnect brake booster pressure sensor A 3P I 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 18I
|.
connector (see step 2 on page 19-63). l
20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29|30|31 (32 33 34 35
: J
| 3 6 | 37 3 8 T 3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |42 4 3 14 4 1
6. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A in the ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
EVPS DATA LIST with the HDS. T erm inal side o f fem ale te rm in a l s

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 12. known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck.
sensor A 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
ECM/PCM (see page 11 -209).B
and brake booster pressure sensor A .B
SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR 13. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
{ im on page 11-210).
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace brake booster pressure sensor A (see
page19-63).B
NO-Go to step 8.
15. Check for continuity between brake booster pressure DTC P15C1: Brake Booster Pressure Sensor B
sensor ASP connectorterminal No. 2 and body
ground.
SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR
2. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR B in the
{3@ 3 Is there 4.5 V or more?
MP M ON (GRN)
YES-Go to step 3.

Wire side of female terminals brake booster pressure sensor B and the ECM/PCM.
Is there continuity? 4. Disconnect brake booster pressure sensor B 3P
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the ECM/PCM connector (see step 2 on page 19-64).
and brake booster pressure sensor A M 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
software (see page 11-207), or substitute a sensor B 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
ECM/PCM (see page 11 -209).B BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE
SENSOR B 3P CONNECTOR
SG6 (PNK)
MP MON (GRN)

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 20.
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (44P) (see step 14
on page 11-210).
11 . Measure the voltage between brake booster pressure 21. Connect brake booster pressure sensor B 3P
sensor B 3P connector terminals No. 2 and body connector terminals No. 2 to body ground with a
ground. jumper wire.

BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR B 3P CONNECTOR
Q T [5
MP M O N (GRN)
MP M O N (GRN)
J J U M P E R W IR E

Is there 0.5 V or more? 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the 23. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR B in the
ECM/PCM and brake booster pressure sensor B M EVPS DATA LIST with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 12. Is there 0.1 V or less?
13. Substitute a known-good brake booster pressure NO-Go to step 32.
sensor B (see page 19-64).
16. Clearthe DTC with the HDS.
19. Checkfor DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Replace the original brake booster pressure
sensor B (see page 19-64).B
25. Connect brake booster pressure sensor B 3P 31. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector A
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper (44P) terminal No. 9 and brake booster pressure
wire. sensor B 3P connector terminal No. 1.

SENSOR B 3P CONNECTOR .
I SG6 (PNK)
MP M O N (GRN) SG6 (PNK)

SG6 (PNK)
JUMPER WIRE
| 1 | 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9
Wire side of female terminals I
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
I I
26 27 28 29|30 | 31|32 33 34 35
136 37 3 8 13 9 14 0 14 1 142 4 3 1 4 4 ]
26. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

27. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR B in the Terminal side of fem al e terminals
EVPS DATA LIST with the HDS. Is there continuity?
Is there 0.1 V or less? YES-Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software (see page 11 -207), or substitute a
YES-Replace brake booster pressure sensor B (see
page 19-64). 11
NO-Go to step 28. known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original
29. Short the SCS line with the HDS. and brake booster pressure sensor BM
30. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P) (see step 14 32. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
on page 11-210).
on page 11-210).
35. Checkfor continuity between ECM/PCM connector B DTC P15C2: Brake Booster Pressure Sensor B
(44P) terminal No.4 and brake booster pressure
Circuit Low Voltage
sensor B 3P connector terminal No. 2.
Wire side of female terminals troubleshooting information (see page 19-46).
is there 0.23 V or less?

YES-Go to step 3.
I I2 3 I 4 I 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 |_ NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.

1011 12 13|l4|15|16 17 18 19 Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
23 24 25 1
1 202 1 22
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
brake booster pressure sensor B and the ECM/PCM.
37 38 | 3 9 | 4 0 |4 1 |42 4 3 14 4 1
M 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) 4. Disconnect brake booster pressure sensor B 3P
Terminal side of female terminals connector (see step 2 on page 19-64).
Is there continuity? 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
If the symptom/indication goes away with a Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 12.
and brake booster pressure sensor B M 7. Measure the voltage between brake booster pressure
sensor B 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.

VCC6 (YEL) SG6'(PNK)
Is there about 5 V?
page 1 9 -6 4 ).
NO-Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
9. Short the SCS line with the HDS. 15. Check for continuity between brake booster pressure
sensor B 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
on page 11-210).
A (44P) terminal No. 19 and brake booster pressure
sensor B 3P connector terminal No. 3. SENSOR B 3P CONNECTOR
MP MON (GRN)
VCC6 (YEL)
VCC6 (YEL)
If ll
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | <
ii
h i 2 J *c
10 11 12 T3 | 14I15116 17 18 1 C! and brake booster pressure sensor B.
20 21 22 23 24 2E> ;
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 3E>
| 36137 3 8 1 39|4 0 1 4 1 142 4 3 14 4 1 software (see page 11-207), or substitute a
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) If the symptom/indication goes away with a
Term inal side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original
Is there continuity? ECM/PCM (see page 11 -209).B

ECM/PCM (see page 11-209).H
and brake booster pressure sensor B.
on page 11-210).
DTC P15C3: Brake Booster Pressure Sensor 11. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A and
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR B in the EVPS
A/B Voltage Incorrect Correlation
Is the difference between BRAKE BOOSTER
Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0 4 In.Hg, 07JAZ-001000B PRESSURE SENSOR A and BRAKE BOOSTER
PRESSURE SENSOR B 6 kPa (50 mmHg, 1.8 inHg) or
less?
troubleshooting information (see page 19-46). YES-Go to step 14.
2. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the PGM-FI 12. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A and
system with the HDS. MAP SENSOR in the EVPS DATA LIST with the HDS.
Are there DTC(s) indicated in the PGM-FI system? Is the difference between BRAKE BOOSTER
PRESSURE SENSOR A and MAP SENSOR 6 kPa
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooti n g .!
(50 mmHg, 1.8 inHg) or less?
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 20.
13. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR B and
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). MAP SENSOR in the EVPS DATA LIST with the HDS.
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is the difference between BRAKE BOOSTER
PRESSURE SENSOR B and MAP SENSOR 6 kPa
Is DTC P15C3 indicated? (50 mmHg, 1.8 inHg) or less?
YES-Go to step 7. YES-Compare value of MAP SENSOR with the value
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. of BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A and
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR B, then check
brake booster pressure sensors and the ECM/PCM. the sensor which has a larger difference in the value.
Brake booster pressure sensor A: Go to step 20.
Brake booster pressure sensor B: Go to step 23.
without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in Neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. NO-Go to step 23.
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Press the brake pedal several times to deplete the
vacuum.
10. Press the brake pedal several times to deplete the
without load (CVT in P or N, M/T in Neutral) until the
vacuum with monitoring BRAKE BOOSTER
PRESSURE SENSOR A and BRAKE BOOSTER
PRESSURE SENSOR B in the EVPS DATA LIST w ith 16. With light pedal force, press the brake pedal several
the HDS. times slowly.
Is the difference between BRAKE BOOSTER 17. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A and
PRESSURE SENSOR A and BRAKE BOOSTER BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE B in the EVPS DATA
PRESSURE SENSOR B 0.1 V or less? LIST with the HDS.
YES-Repair a short in the wire between brake booster Is the difference between BRAKE BOOSTER
pressure sensor A and brake booster pressure sensor PRESSURE SENSOR A and BRAKE BOOSTER
BM PRESSURE SENSOR B 6 kPa (50 mmHg, 1.8 inHg) or
less?
(cont'd)
D T C T r o u b le s h o o t in g ( c o n t 'd )
18. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A and 26. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
MAP SENSOR in the EVPS DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is t h e d if f e r e n c e b e t w e e n B R A K E B O O S T E R
P R E S S U R E SE N S O R A and M A P SE N S O R 6 kPa
(50 mmHg, 1.8 inHg) or less? 29. Press the brake pedal several times to deplete the
vacuum.
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 20.
19. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR B and
MAP SENSOR in the EVPS DATA LIST with the HDS. YES-Go to step 31.
Is the difference between BRAKE BOOSTER NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
P R E S S U R E S E N S O R B and M A P SE N S O R 6 kPa brake booster pressure sensor A, brake booster
(50 m m H g , 1.8 inHg) or less? pressure sensor B, and the ECM/PCM.
YES-Compare value of MAP SENSOR with the value 31. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A and
of BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A and - BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE B in the EVPS DATA
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR B, then check LISTwiththeHDS.
the sensor which has a larger difference in the value.
32. Install the vacuum/pressure gauge (A) and a suitable
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A; Go to
hose (B) between the brake booster and the vacuum
step 20/
hose (C).
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR B: G oto
step 23.
NO-Go to step 23.
21. Disconnect the vacuum hose from brake booster
pressure sensor A (see step 3 on page 19-63).
22. Start the engine, then check for vacuum at the
vacuum hose.
Is there vacuum?
YES-Replace brake booster pressure sensor A (see
page 19-63).
NO-Repair the clogged hose which connects brake
booster pressure sensor A to the brake vacuum
hose.H
24. Disconnect the vacuum hose from brake booster
pressure sensor B (see step 3 on page 19-64).
25. Start the engine, then check for vacuum at the
vacuum hose.
Is there vacuum?
page 19-64).
NO-Repair the clogged hose which connects brake
booster pressure sensor B to the brake vacuum
h o se .ll
B ra k e B o o s te r P re s s u re S e n s o r A
R e p la c e m e n t
33. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm 1. Remove the vacuum hos? (C) from the vacuum hose
w ithout load (CVT in P or N, M/T in Neutral) until the bracket (D).
A D
b 9 9 :^ 3 3 E :::: 9 :
36. Set the value of BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE
SENSOR A and BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE
SENSOR B to the values in the freeze data with
pressing the brake pedal several times with low
treading strength.
37. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR A in the
\ ar-
Is the difference between BRAKE BOOSTER
PRESSURE S E N S O R A a n d t h e v a lu e o f
vacuum/pressure gauge 6 k P a (50 mmHg, 1.8 inHg) or V 9.5 N-m
E (0.97 kgf-m, 7.0 Ibf-ft)
less?
YES-Go to step 38.
2. Disconnect the brake booster pressure sensor A 3P
NO-Replace brake booster pressure sensor A (see connector and the brake booster pressure sensor B 3P
page 19-63) connector.
38. Check BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR B in the 3. Disconnect the vacuum hoses (E).
4. Remove the vacuum hose bracket with brake booster
Is the difference between BRAKE BOOSTER - pressure sensors A and B from the body.
P R E S S U R E S E N S O R B a n d th e v a lu e o f
v a c u u m / p r e s s u r e g a u g e 6 k P a ( 5 0 m m H g , 1.8 i n H g ) o r 5. Remove brake booster pressure sensor A from the
le s s ? vacuum hose bracket (B).
YES-Compare the value of the vacuum/pressure

gauge with the value of BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE
SENSOR A and BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE
SENSOR B in the recorded data in the freeze data. Do
this process a few times, then replace brake booster
pressure sensor A (see page 19-63) or brake booster
pressure sensor B (see page 19-64), which ever has
the larger difference in the value.B
NO-Replace brake booster pressure sensor B (see
page 19-64).H
6. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.

B ra k e B o o s te r P re s s u re S e n s o r B R e p la c e m e n t
1. Remove the vacuum hose (C) from the vacuum hose

bracket (D).
A
E (0.97 kgf m, 7.0 Ibf-ft)

C
2. Disconnect the brake booster pressure sensor A 3P -

connector and the brake booster pressure sensor B 3P
connector.
3. Disconnect the vacuum hoses (E).
4. Remove the vacuum hose bracket with brake booster
pressure sensors A and B from the body.
5. Remove brake booster pressure sensor B from the
vacuum hose bracket (A).

B ra k e s
V S A S y s te m C o m p o n e n ts
Com ponent Location In d e x ................................................ 19-66
General Troubleshooting In fo rm atio n ............ .............. 19-68
DTC Troubleshooting In d e x ...................................... ........19-71
Sym ptom Troubleshooting In d e x ...................................19-72
System Description................................................ . 19-73
Circuit D ia g ra m ................... ................................................. 19-84
DTC Troubleshooting.......................................................... 19-87
Sym ptom Troubleshooting....... ........................................19-118
* Steering Angle Sensor Replacem ent.............................. 19-121
Y aw Rate-Acceleration Sensor R eplacem ent................19-122
VSA Sensor Neutral Position M em o rizatio n ................. 19-123
VSA Off Switch Test/R eplacem ent.......... ............19-123
VSA Modulator-Control Unit U p d a te .................... ......1 9 -1 2 4
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and
Installation............................................................. ............ 19-125
W heel Speed Sensor R eplacem ent..................................19-129
C o m p o n e n t L o c a tio n In d e x
' //
MAGNETIC ENCODER
(Wheel bearing unit)
Replacem ent, page 18-13
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
(C om bination s w itc h body assem bly)
YAW RATE-ACCELERATION SENSOR

Replacem ent, page 19-122
G e n e r a l T r o u b le s h o o tin g In f o r m a t io n
System Indicator ABS Indicator
This system has four indicators: The ABS indicator comes on when the ABS function is
lost. The brakes still work like a conventional system.
ABS indicator (A)
Brake system indicator (B) Brake System Indicator
VSA indicator (C) The brake system indicator comes on when the EBD
VSA OFF indicator (D) function is lost, the parking brake is applied, and/or the
brake fluid level is low.
NOTE: If two or more wheel speed sensors fail, the brake
system indicator will come on.
VSA Indicator
The VSA indicator comes on when the VSA function is
lost. The VSA indicator blinks when the VSA function is
activating.
VSA OFF Indicator
The VSA OFF indicator comes on, when the VSA is
turned OFF by using the VSA OFF switch.
When the system is OK, each indicator comes on for

about 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch to
ON (II), then goes off.
When the system detects a problem, a DTC will set and,
depending upon the failure, the VSA modulator-control
unit determines which indicator(s) will turn on. If the
problem goes away (system returns to normal), the
indicator(s) will be controlled in the following way
depending upon the DTC that was set:
The indicator(s) will come on and stay on when the
ignition switch is ON (II).
The indicator(s) will automatically go off.
The indicator(s) will go off after the vehicle is driven.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) How to Troubleshoot DTCs
The memory can hold all DTCs. However, when the The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause
same DTC is detected more than once, the more of the problem is still present and the ABS and/or VSA
recent DTC is written over the earlier one. Therefore, indicator is still on. Following a troubleshooting
when the same problem is detected repeatedly, it is procedure for a DTC that has been cleared but does not
memorized as a single DTC. reset can result in incorrect diagnosis.
The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order,
NOTE: Always troubleshoot fuel and emissions DTCs
not in the order they occur.
first.
The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM in the VSA
moduIator-controI unit. Therefore, the memorized 1. Question the customer about the conditions when the
DTCs cannot be erased by disconnecting the battery. problem occurred, and try to reproduce the same
Do the specified procedures to clearthe DTCs. conditions for troubleshooting. Find out when the
ABS and/or VSA indicator came on, such as during
Self-Diagnosis activation, after activation, when the vehicle was
traveling at a certain speed, etc. If necessary, have the
Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories: customer demonstrate the concern.
- Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch
is turned to ON (II) and until the ABS and VSA 2. When the ABS and/or VSA indicators do not come on
indicator go off. during the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial based on the DTC, check for loose connectors, poor
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to contact of the terminals, etc. in the circuit indicated by
LOCK (0). the DTC.
When the system detects a problem, the VSA 3. After troubleshooting, or the repairs are done, clear
modulator-control unit shifts to fail-safe mode. the DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same
conditions that originally set the DTCs. Make sure the
Kickback ABS and/or VSA indicator do not come on.
The pump motor operates when the VSA Intermittent Failures
modulator-control unit is functioning, and the fluid in the
reservoir is forced out to the master cylinder, causing The term "Intermittent failure" means a system may
kickback at the brake pedal. have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If you cannot
reproduce the condition, check for loose connections
Pump Motor and terminals. Also check ground and power
connections related to the circuit that you are
The pump motor operates when the VSA
troubleshooting.
mod uIato r-co nt ro I unit is functioning.
The VSA modulator-control unit checks the pump
motor operation during the first acceleration after the
vehicle starts driving.
Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding

Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures are
identical to the procedures used on vehicles without the
VSA system (see page 19-10).
G e n e r a l T r o u b le s h o o t in g In f o r m a t io n ( c o n t 'd )
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic How to Retrieve DTCs

System) 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS
NOTE: Make sure the 12 volt battery is in good condition to the data link connector (DLC) under the driver's
and fully charged. side of the dashboard.
1. If the system indicators stay on, connect the HDS to 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
driver's side of the dashboard. and the VSA modulator-control unit If it does not, go
to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-383).
H o w to Clear DTCs
K
and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it does not, go
A " 4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts on
the HDS.
and the VSA modulator-control unit If it does not, go
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and the
freeze data, and note them. Then refer to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting, and do the appropriate
troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
Freeze data indicates the VSA conditions when the
first system malfunction that activated the indicator
was detected.
The HDS can read the DTC, the freeze data, the
current data, and other system data.
For specific operations, refer to the Help menu that
came with the HDS.
D T C T r o u b le s h o o tin g In d e x

11 Right-Front Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-87)
12 Right-Front Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-92)
13 Left-Front Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-87)
14 Left-Front Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-92)
15 Right-Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-87)
16 Right-Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-92)
17 Left-Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-87)
18 Left-Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-92)
21 Right-Front Magnetic Encoder Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-94)
22 Left-Front Magnetic Encoder Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-94)
23 Right-Rear Magnetic Encoder Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-94)
24 Left-Rear Magnetic Encoder Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-94)
25 Yaw Rate Sensor Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-95)
26 Lateral Acceleration Sensor Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-95)
27 Steering Angle Sensor Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-97)
28* Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Malfunction DTC Troubleshoot ng (see page 19-95)
31 ABS Solenoid Valve Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-100)
36 ABS Solenoid Va lve Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-100)
51 Motor Lock DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-101)
52 Motor Stuck DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-101)
54 Fail-Safe Relay Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-103)
61 Battery Voltage Low DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-104)
62 Battery Voltage High DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-104)
64 Sensor Power Source Voltage Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-105)
65 Brake Fluid Low Level DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-106)
66 Pressure Sensor Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-107)
68 Brake Pedal Position Switch Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-107)
81 VSA Modulator-Control Unit Internal Circuit Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-108)
83 PGM-FI Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-109)
84 VSA Sensor Neutral Position Not Written DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-110)
86 F-CAN Communication Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-110)
91 VSA Activation Time Too Long DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-113)
104 Yaw Rate-Acceleration Sensor Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-95)
105 Hydraulic Unit Temperature Sensor Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-113)
111* Back-Up Light Switch Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-114)
112* Neutral Switch Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-114)
121 VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-117)
122 VSA Solenoid Valve Ma lfunction DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-117)
158 ECU Software Update Failure DTC Troubleshooting (see page 19-117)
*: M/T model.
S y m p to m T r o u b le s h o o tin g In d e x
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for VSA diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) with the HDS. If there are
no DTCs, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.

HDS does not communicate with the VSA Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
modulator-control unit or the vehicle 11-383).
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, VSA 1. Do the gauge control module
indicator, or VSA OFF indicator does not come self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325).
on at start-up (bulb check) 2. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it
does not have the latest software (see page
19-124), if the VSA modulator-control unit
was updated and the symptom is still
present, replace the VSA modulator-control
VSA cannot be turned OFF 1. Symptom troubleshooting (see page
19-118).
2. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it
does not have the latest software (see page
19-124), if the VSA modulator-control unit
was updated and the symptom is still
present, replace the VSA modulator-control
VSA OFF indicator does not go off Do the VSA sensor neutral position
memorization (see page 19-123).
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and 1. Check for F-CAN DTCs, and troubleshoot
VSA indicator do not go off and repair those first (see page 11-3).
2. Symptom troubleshooting (see page
19-119).
S y s te m D e s c r ip tio n
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 32P Connector (Connector Disconnected)
9 n n n \
9 tX X ;i4 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5X
7- 1
00
X >0 <161I5><
V
X1 91
4 3
31 28 27 25;24 23122: X 21
CO
CM
CO
o
CM
05
CM
CD
CM
o
V u u u J
Terminal Wire Terminal Description

Signal
number color sign
1 BLK FSR GND Ground for the VSA Continuity to ground
modulator-control unit
2 GRN MTR +B Power source for the motor relay Battery voltage (about 12V) at all
times
3 BLK MTR GND Ground for the pump motor Continuity to ground
4 WHT FSR +B Power source for the fail-safe relay Battery voltage (about 12V) at all
times
5 PNK F-CAN L F-CAN communication circuit
6 GRN F-CAN H F-CAN communication circuit
7 Not used Not used
8 BLU K-LINE Communication with HDS Pulse voltage (digital signal)
9 Not used Not used
10 ORN IG1 ABS Power source for activating the With ignition switch ON (II): battery
(7.5A) system voltage (about 12V)
13 PUR SVCC Power source for the steering angle
sensor
15 LT BLU STRZ Detects steering angle sensor
signal
(cont'd)
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 32P Connector (Connector Disconnected)
9 -...... n ...................n n 9
CD
------------------------------------------------------- K----- 7T-------------------

14 13112: 11 10 7 5X X
CD
00
2 <9 ; x s
T-
191
X i 18/>C I7>>0>C < ) *0 <1161 5 X
<1
4 32!31 3C129128127'26 12423122
CO
:X ,21 20
y u u .... u J
Terminal Wire Terminal Description

Signal
number color sign
Detects left-front wheel speed
20 BRN FLS
sensor signal
21 LT GRN FLS + Detects left-front wheel speed
sensor signal
22 GRN RRS+ Detects right-rear wheel speed
sensor signal
23 W HT RRS Detects right-rear wheel speed
sensor signal
24 GRY STRA Detects steering angle sensor
signal
25 BLU STRG Ground for the steering angle
sensor
26 ORN WEN Detects write enable signal
27 GRN STRB Detects steering angle sensor
signal
28 GRY RLS Detects left-rear wheel speed
sensor signal
29 PNK RLS+ Detects left-rear wheel speed
sensor signal
31 YEL FRS+ Detects right-front wheel speed
sensor signal
32 BLU FRS Detects right-front wheel speed
sensor signal
This system is composed of the VSA modulator-control unit, the wheel speed sensors, the steering angle sensor, the
yaw rate-acceleration sensor, and the system indicators in the gauge control module. The VSA modulator-control unit
controls the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), the Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD), the Traction Control System (TCS),
the Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), the Creep Aid System (CAS) on CVT models, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) on M/T
models, and brake assist with the brake pressure of each wheel and reduces engine torque.
Communication via F-CAN

S y s te m D e s c r ip t io n ( c o n t'd )
ABS fAnti-Lock Brake System)Features

Anti-Lock Control . _
Without ABS, when the brake pedal is pressed while driving, the wheels sometimes lock before the vehicle comes to a
stop. In such an event, the maneuverability of the vehicle is reduced if the front wheels are locked, and the stability of the
vehicle is reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. With ABS, the system
precisely controls the slip rate of the wheels to ensure maximum grip force from the tires, and it thereby ensures
maneuverability and stability of the vehicle. The ABS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the four wheel
speeds, and then it controls the brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip force of tire and road surface
Wain Control
The control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel speed sensor signals it receives, then it calculates the
vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based
on the wheel speeds.
The control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid
valve when the slip rate is high.
The hydraulic control has three modes: Pressure retaining, pressure reducing, and pressure intensifying.
CONTROL UNIT
EBD (Electronic Brake Distribution) Features
The EBD feature helps control vehicle braking by adjusting the rear brake force in accordance with the rear wheel load
before the ABS operates. Based on the wheel speed sensor signals, the control unit uses the modulator to control the
rear brakes individually. When the rear wheel speed is less than the front wheel speed, the VSA modulator-control unit
retains the current rear brake fluid pressure by closing the inlet valve in the modulator. As the rear wheel speed
increases and approaches the front wheel speed, the VSA modulator-control unit increases the rear brake fluid pressure
by momentarily opening the inlet valve. This whole process is repeated very rapidly. While this is happening, kickback
may be felt at the brake pedal, you may also hear a muted buzzing sound from the VSA modulator-control unit. This is
normal.
REAR WHEEL With EBD under HEAVY LOAD

BRAKE PRESSURE at REAR WHEELS
With EBD under LIGHT LOAD

at REAR WHEELS
FRONT WHEEL BRAKE PRESSURE
(cont'd)
TCS (Traction Control System) Features

When a drive wheel loses traction on a slippery road surface and starts to spin, the VSA modulator-control unit applies
brake pressure to the spinning wheel and sends an engine torque control request to the ECM/PCM to slow the spinning
wheel and keep traction.
ANTI-POWER o f BRAKE FORCE

VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) System Features
Oversteer control
Applies the brake to the front and rear outside wheels
The brake makes the yaw rate opposite

the turning direction
Understeer control
Applies the brake to the front and rear inside wheels
9 Controls the engine torque when accelerating
The braking increases the yaw rate toward

the turning direction
The throttle control effect;

Reduces vehicl e speed
* Increases cornering force
S y s te m D e s c r ip t io n ( c o n t 'd )
Brake Assist Features

Brake assist helps ensure that any driver can achieve the full braking potential of the vehicle by increasing brake system
pressure in a panic situation, bringing the vehicle into a full ABS stop.
If during a panic stop the VSA modulator-control unit determines that the brake system pressure increases above a
threshold in less than a certain amount of time, the VSA modulator-control unit engages brake assist.
Because the brake system pressure crossed the pressure threshold before the time threshold had expired, the VSA
modulator-control unit goes into brake assist mode.
Brake Pedal
Effort Reduced
Panic Stop with Brake Assist
Pressure
Brake Assist
Begins Danift Ctnn MiSfknnt DroUn Aeeief
Pressure
Threshold
Time
Threshold Time
CAS (Creep Aid System) Features (CVT model)
This system prevents the vehicle from rolling forward or backward on a hill during which the driver releases the brake
pedal by controlling the brake pressure.
When the VSA modulator control unit receives a CAS activation request signal from the PCM, the system assists the
driver to get the vehicle started by holding the brake pressure. This control is done not only on hills, but also on level
roads. When the driver lifts their foot off the brake pedal to get the vehicle started, the brake switch is turned off, and
then the brake pressure is held by operating the TCS valve and the ESV valve.
S y s te m D e s c r ip t io n ( c o n t'd )
HSA (Hill Start Assist) Features (M /T model)

Prevents the vehicle from rolling backwards when moving your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal while
stopped on a hill. The control unit reads the angle of inclination from the yaw rate-acceleration sensor, and that all four
wheels are stopped, then it calculates the amount of fluid pressure required to keep the vehicle from rolling backward
when the control unit sees the brake pressure decrease as the driver lifts their foot off of the brake pedal, and moves
their foot to the accelerator pedal. The HSA also works when the vehicle is stopped on a downhill slope.
HSA activation
(Hol ding of brake pressure)
Modulator Unit
The modulator unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, the outlet solenoid valve, the TCS NO (normally open) solenoid
valve, the ESV NC (normally closed) solenoid valve, the reservoir, the pump, and the pump motor.
The hydraulic control has three modes of ABS action; pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing.
Pressure intensifying (VSA) mode is combination of the TCS, VSA, CAS, HSA, and brake assist action.
The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type; one channel for each wheel.
MASTER CYLINDER
IN: INLET SOLENOID VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN)

OUT: OUTLET SOLENOID VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED)
Mode TCS NO ESV NC Inlet Outlet Brake Fluid

Valve Valve Solenoid Solenoid
Valve Valve
Pressure open closed open closed Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to
intensifying the caliper.
mode
Pressure open closed closed closed Caliperfluid is retained by the inlet and
retaining outlet valves.
mode
Pressure open closed closed open Caliper fluid flows through the outlet
reducing valve to the reservoir.
mode The motor pumps the reservoir fluid
through the damping chamber to the
master cylinder*.
Pressure closed open open closed Master cylinder fluid is pumped out
intensifying by the pump through the ESV NC
mode (VSA) valve to the caliper.
Caliper fluid pressure exceeds
master cylinder pressure.
*: The motor will continue running until the operation of the one anti-lock brake control is finished with the first
pressure reducing mode.
12 VOLT
BATTERY
*: M/T model
; CAN line
: Other com munication line
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
(cont'd)
C ir c u it D ia g r a m ( c o n t'd )
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTORA (36P) UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY

BOX CONNECTORY (16P)
1 n i i .n n
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
21 3 2 1 20 19 31 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
33 32 24 4 23 22
12 11 10 9 8 7 YAW RATE-
25 34
36 35 30 18 17 16 29 28 ACCELERATION SENSOR
27 15 14 13
CM
CD
4PCONNECTOR
n fl fl 1----------- fl n n
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BRAKE PEDAL POSITION

SWITCH 4PCONNECTOR
31 30 29 27 25 24 23 21 20 19 18 17
CM
CM
CM
00
CM
CD
CO
CM
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR 2 1

4
><' 3
CO
<IX : i 4 1 2 1 1 2 ! 1 1 1C 7 6 5N X
00
2 7 1 VSA OFFSWITCH
CO
X 1 8 / >0 <1 I7 > * 0 >Co > C <1161 5 9 5P CONNECTOR

4 21231 3CI2 S 1 2 8 12 7 26\ 2 l >2 4 2 2 12 2 3
CM
O
9
5 4 3 2 1
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR BRAKE FLUID NEUTRAL POSITION PARKING BRAKE STEERINGANGLE SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR LEVELSWITCH SWITCH SWITCH 5PCONNECTOR
2PCONNECTOR 2PCONNECTOR 1PCONNECTOR
jO - S Z 2.
m 5 4 3 2 1
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B(44P)
Tt = h T ( n
_____ ___ ________ __ _____________ ____________ 1 _ o __
h
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
La 10 11 12 13 14 15; 16 17 18 19 [I 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 j
20 21 22 23 24 25 I I 20 21 22 23 24 25

I
26 27 28 29 30 31 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
CO
CM
136 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
I36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 441
DATA LINKCONNECTOR (DLC)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8/
\ 1
\9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16j

DTC 11: Right-Front Wheel Speed Sensor 8. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate wheel speed sensor + B and GND
Circuit Malfunction terminals of the VSA modulator-control unit 32P
DTC 13: Left-Front Wheel Speed Sensor connector individually (see table).
Circuit Malfunction DTC Appropriate Terminal
+B GND
DTC 15: Right-Rear Wheel Speed Sensor 11 FRS + : FR S-:
Circuit Malfunction Right-front No. 31 No. 32
13 FLS+; FLS-:
DTC 17: Left-Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Left-front No. 21 No. 20
Malfunction 15 RRS + : RRS:
Right-rear No. 22 No. 23
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 17 RLS+: RLS:
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general Left-rear No. 29 No. 28
troubleshooting information (see page 19-68). VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR
|X M 1 4 |1 3 |1 2 |1 1 |1 0 | 9 18 17 16 j 5 ( X W
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2
X h 9h 8 | x k l l 7 |X IX I> < I X b ^ 1 6 | 1 5 ( X
1
4 3
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). FRS- |32|31 |30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|Xl21 M
FLS
(BLU) (BRN)
R RS+ (LT GRN]
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
R R S + (GRN)
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. RRS
(WHT)
YES-Go to step 6.
( ) ( )
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see is there continuity?
page 19-69).
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 11.
connector (see step 3 on page 19-126). 9. Disconnect the appropriate wheel speed sensor 2P
connector (see page 19-129).
(cont'd)
10. On the sensor side, check for continuity between body 12. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
ground and wheel speed sensor 2P connector appropriate wheel speed sensor +B and GND
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 individually. terminals of the VSA modulator-control unit 32P
connector individually (see table).
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR DTC Appropriate Terminal

+B GND
11 FRS+: FRS:
Right-front No. 31 No. 32
13 FLS+: FLS:
Left-front No. 21 No. 20
15 RRS + : RRS:
17 RLS+: RLS:
Left-rear No. 29 No. 28
VS A MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR
Is there continuity? n n _Q_
YES-Replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor 2 I (XIX|14|13|12|11|10| 9 18 17 16 15 IX IX I I 1

(see page 19-129)M | | | | | l
4 j |32 3l|30|29 28|27 26|25|24 23 22|X 2il20| | 3
FRS TT "TT FLS
NO-Repair a short to body ground in the wire (BLU) (BRN}
between the VSA modulator-control unit and the
FRS+ (YEL) FLS+CLTGRN)
appropriate wheel speed sensor.B
R LS+ (PNK) R R S+ (GRN)
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). RLS RRS
(GRY) (WHT)
(g )(2 ) (2

YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 17.
14. Disconnect the appropriate wheel speed sensor 2P
16. On the sensor side, measure the voltage between 19. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA
body ground and wheel speed sensor 2P connector modulator-control unit 32P connector wheel speed
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 individually. sensor+B and GND terminals (see table).
DTC Appropriate Terminal

WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR +B GND
11 FRS + : FRS;
Right-front No. 31 No. 32
+B 13 FLS + : FLS :
H IS * - Left-front No. 21 No. 20
15 RRS + : RRS :
17 RLS + : RLS :
Left-rear No. 29 No. 28
Terminal side of male term inal s VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR
Is there 0.1 V or more? 2 |XC><|14|13|12|11|10| 9 | 8 17 16 | 5 ( X I X I 1

Xh 9|18|X|X|17 I X I X I X I X I X I X H 6|15 I X
YES-Replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor 4 |32|31 |30|29|28|27 | 26|25|24|23l22|Xl21120|
3
(see page 19-129).H FRS FLS
(BLU) (BRN)
NO-Repair a short to power in the wire between the
VSA modulator-control unit and the appropriate
wheel speed sensor.H R LS+ (PNK) R R S + (GRN)
17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). FRS+ FLS +

(YEL) VMJ (LT GRN)
18. Disconnect the appropriate wheel speed sensor 2P
connector (see page 19-129). R L S - (GRY) R R S - (WHT)
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the
appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA
modulator-control unit.il
NO-Go to step 20.
20. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA 21. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA
modulator-control unit 32P connector terminal and modulator-control unit 32P connector terminal and
the wheel speed sensor 2P connector terminal (see the wheel speed sensor 2P connectorterminal (see
table). table).
DTC VSA Modulator- Appropriate DTC VSA Modulator- Appropriate

control Unit 32P Wheel control Unit 32P Wheel
Connector Speed Connector Speed
Terminal Sensor2P Terminal Sensor2P
Connector Connector
Terminal Terminal
No. 1 No. 2
11 No. 31 Right-front 11 No. 32 Right-front
13 No. 21 Left-front 13 No. 20 Left-front
15 No. 22 Right-rear 15 No. 23 Right-rear
17 No. 29 Left-rear 17 No. 28 Left-rear
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
m m nr m m m nrrzm ncrim mzpn m m ry m

C L jD 3 X vLJy <2 l) < 2 j1 > < 2 I 1> < 2 I 1>
RLS+ I FRS+I RRS+I FLS + I RLS- I FRS- I RRS- I i-l9
(PNK) X (YEL) 1 (GRN) i (LT GRN)
m m m <n> ' GRVI @ (BLU t f "
FRS+ (YEL) R RS+ (GRN) F R S - (BLU) R R S - (WHT)
2 I X t 014|13(12|11 | 10 | 9 | 8 | 7 | J l ? 1
^ M14|13|12|11 |i o| 9 | 8 17 16 15 |X | X |
X |1 ^ 1 8 |X IX |1 7 |X IX IX E X ^ K l l 6 H 5 t X X 19|ISfXlX117|X(XfXl> ^1X|16|15|X
4 3 |32|31|30|29| 28|27|26|25l24|23l22lXl 2l|20|
|32|31 | 30|29|28|27|26|25 | 24|23|:Z2(X|21|201
nr
R L S + (PNK) F LS + (LT GRN) R L S - (GRY) F L S - (BRN)

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 21. YES-
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the If the DTCs indicate one wheel speed sensor (either
appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA the right or left) on the same axle (front or rear), go
modulator-control unit.H to step 22.
If the DTCs indicate both wheel speed sensors (right
and left) on the same axle (front or rear), go to step
29.
appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA
modulator-control unit.H
22. Swap the applicable left and right wheel speed
sensors.
26. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 39. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
27. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. Is DTC 11, 13, 15, or 17 indicated?
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
modulator-control unit 32P connector. If the VSA
modulator-control unit was updated and the
DTCs Before Swapping DTCs After Swapping symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA
11 (Right-front) 13 (Left-front) modulator-control unit (see page 19-125).B
13 (Left-front) 11 (Right-front) NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated,
15 (Right-rear) 17 (Left-rear) troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are
17 (Left-rear) 15 (Right-rear) indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
Is the DTC indicated for the opposite wheel? troubleshooting.B
YES-Replace the original wheel speed sensor (see
page 19-129).B
NO-Go to step 29.
29. Substitute a known-good wheel speed sensor (see
page 19-129).
YES-Go to step 36.
NO-Replace the original wheel speed sensor (see
page 19-129).B
36. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not
have the latest software (see page 19-124).
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on a straight section of road,
not on a lift.
(cont'd)
DTC 12: Right-Front Wheel Speed Sensor 3. Inspect the appropriate magnetic encoder for
damage, debris, and correct installation.
Signal Malfunction
DTC Appropriate Note
DTC 14: Left-Front Wheel Speed Sensor Magnetic
Signal Malfunction Encoder
12 Right-front Remove the
DTC 16: Right-Rear Wheel Speed Sensor 14 Left-front driveshaft outboard
Signal Malfunction joint from the
appropriate wheel
DTC 18: Left-Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Signal hub (see page
18-13).
Malfunction 16 Right-rear Remove the hub
NOTE: 18 Left-rear bearing unit (see
page 18-28).
any on-board snapshot, and review the general Is the magnetic encoder surface OK?
troubleshooting information (see page 19-68). YES-Go to step 4.
If the ABS and the VSA indicators come on because of
electrical noise, the indicator goes off when you NO-Remove the debris from the magnetic encoder,
test-drive the vehicle at 9 mph (15 km/h) after the or replace the wheel bearing (front) or the hub bearing
system returns to normal. unit (rear):
An incorrectly installed wheel bearing can cause one Front: Replace the front wheel bearing (see page
of these DTCs. 18-13).H
Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit (see page
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 18-28).B
2. Check that the appropriate wheel speed sensor is
properly mounted (see page 19-129).
DTC Appropriate Wheel Speed

Sensor
12 Right-front
14 Left-front
16 Right-rear
18 Left-rear
Is the wheel speed sensor installation OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Reinstall the wheel speed sensor, and check the
mounting position (see page 19-129).
connector (see step 3 on page 19-126). VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR
5. Check for continuity between the appropriate wheel

speed sensor GND terminal and the other wheel
speed sensor GND terminals of the VSA DTC 12:
modulator-control unit 32P connector (see table). / n n n \
IXIX|14|13|12|11|10| 918171615IXIXI 1
2 ^19|18
DTC Appropriate Other Terminals |>^17|XIX]XIXMX|16|15^
Terminal 4 |32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|X|21120| 3
12 FRS: No. 20 No. 23 No. 28
X . U.............. 0...............II" J
No. 32 FRS FLS
(BLU) (BRN)
14 FLS: No. 32 No. 23 No. 28
No. 20
16 RRS: No. 32 No. 20 No. 28
No. 23 DTC 14:
18 RLS: No. 32 No. 20 No. 23 r n n n \
No. 28 2 î9ii8bî7iyM xb^^ 1
<
4 |32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|X|21|20 3
V ...0......... ... ."D...........0' J
FRS RLS RRS FLS
(BLU) (GRY) (WHT) (BRN)
DTC 16:
b^14|lJl2|ll|lo| 9I8171615|XM
^19|l8p>0^17|Xlx lX|)CIXIXIl6h5lX
32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25l24|23l22|Xl21120]
FRS- RLS FLS
(BLU) (GRY) (BRN)
RRS
(WHT)
DTC 18:
14|l3|l2|1.111Ol 9I8171615MXI
|32l31l30|29l28|27|26|25|24|23|22|Xl21|2p|
FRS RRS FLS

(BLU) (WHT) (BRN)
RLS
(GRY) ^
YES-Repair a short in the wires between the
appropriate wheel speed sensor and the other wheel
speed sensor.H
6. Substitute a known-good wheel speed sensor {see DTC 21: Right-Front Magnetic Encoder
page 19-129).
Malfunction
DTC 22: Left-Front Magnetic Encoder
Malfunction
DTC 23: Right-Rear Magnetic Encoder
Malfunction
DTC 24: Left-Rear Magnetic Encoder
Malfunction
Is DTC 12, 14, 16, or 18 indicated? and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Replace the original wheel speed sensor (see
page 19-129),B 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
13. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is DTC 21,22, 23, o r 24 in d i c a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 6.
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see
modulator-control unit 32P connector. If the VSA page 19-69).H
symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA
modulator-control unit (see page 19-125).
NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are
troubleshooting.
VSA
6. Inspect the appropriate magnetic encoder for DTC 25: Yaw Rate Sensor Ma l function
damage, debris, and correct installation.
DTC 26: Lateral Acce l eration Sensor
DTC Appropriate Note
Magnetic Malfunction
Encoder
21 Right-front Remove the
DTC 28: Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor
22 Left-front driveshaft outboard Malfunction
joint from the
appropriate wheel DTC 104: Yaw Rate-Acceleration Sensor
hub (see page Mal function
18-13).
23 Right-rear Remove the hub NOTE:
24 Left-rear bearing unit (see Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
page 18-28).
Is th e m a g n e t ic e n c o d e r s u r fa c e O K ? troubleshooting information (see page 19-68).
YES-Go to step 7. These code(s) will set after test-drive if the sensor is
installed incorrectly.
NO-Remove the debris from the magnetic encoder,
or replace the wheel bearing (front) orthe hub bearing 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
unit (rear): 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Front: Replace the front wheel bearing (see page
18-13).B 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit (see page 4. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
18~28).H
have the latest software (see page 19-124). 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). I s D T C 2 5 , 2 6 , 2 8 , o r 1 0 4 in d i c a t e d ?
9. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. YES-Go to step 6.
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on a straight section of road, NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
not on a lift. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see
page 19-69).
6. Check the size, air pressure, and the amount of wear
Is D T C 2 1 , 2 2 , 2 3 , o r 2 4 in d ic a te d ? of all four tires.
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA I s t h e t ir e c o n d i t i o n O K ?
modulator-control unit was updated and the YES-Go to step 7.
symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA NO-Replace the tires and/or adjust the air pressure,
modulator-control unit (see page 19-125).H then recheck by test-driving.il
NO- l f the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, 7. Check the YAW/G COMBINE SENSOR DIAGNOSIS in
troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are the VSA FREEZE DATA with the HDS.
troubleshooting. I s YAW/G COMBINE SENSOR DIAGNOSIS NORMAL?
YES-Go to step 13.

NO-Go to step 8.
9. Disconnect the yaw rate-acceleration sensor 4P
connector (see step 3 on page 19-122).
(cont'd)
11. Measure the voltage between yaw rate-acceleration 16. Measure the voltage between yaw rate-acceleration
sensor 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 4. sensor 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 4.
YAW RATE-ACCELERATI ON YAW RATE-ACCELERATION

SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ? Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ?
YES-Replace the yaw rate-acceleration sensor (see YES-Go to step 18.

page 19-122).ll
NO-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 12.
17. Measure the voltage between yaw rate-acceleration
12. Measure the voltage between yaw rate-acceleration sensor 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
YAW RATE-ACCELERATION
YAW RATE-ACCELERATION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR

YES-Repair an open in the wire between the yaw
YES-Repair an open in the wire between the yaw rate-acceleration sensor and body ground (G502).H
rate-acceleration sensor and body ground (G502).IH
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the yaw
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the yaw rate-acceleration sensor and the under-dash
rate-acceleration sensor and the under-dash fuse/relay box.H
fuse/relay box.H
18. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
Is th e w h e e l a lig n m e n t O K ?
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Make sure the suspension is not modified, and
adjust the wheel alignment correctly, and recheck by
test-dri ving.B
19. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-acceleration DTC 27: Steering Angl e Sensor Malfunction
sensor (see page 19-122).
21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). troubleshooting information (see page 19-68).
23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
24. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 4. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
25. Check for DTCs with the HDS. NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
Is D T C 2 5 , 2 6 , 2 8 , o r 1 0 4 in d ic a te d ? 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 26. Is D T C 2 7 in d ic a te d ?
NO-Replace the original yaw rate-acceleration sensor YES-Go to step 6.

(see page 19-122).B NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
26. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see
have the latest software (see page 19-124). page 19-69).B
27. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Check the size, air pressure, and the amount of wear
of all four tires.
28. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
I s t h e t ir e c o n d i t i o n O K ?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the tires and/or adjust the air pressure,
Is D T C 2 5 , 2 6 , 2 8 , o r 1 0 4 in d ic a te d ? then recheck by test-driving.B
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
modulator-control unit was updated and the 8. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector
sy m pto m/i nd icati on is still present, replace the VSA (see page 19-121).
modulator-control unit (see page 19-125). 9. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 32P
NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, connector (see step 3 on page 19-126).
troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
troubleshooting.
(cont'd)
11. Measure the voltage between body ground and VSA 14. Check for continuity between body ground and VSA
modulator-control unit 32P connector terminals modulator-control unit 32P connector terminals
No. 13 and No. 25 individually. No. 13 and No. 25 individually.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR
SVCC (PUR) SVCC (PUR)
I ^ 14|13|l2|1l|ip| 9 18 17j 6 | 5 M M
2 1
><di 9h s h m i 7 M M X 3 X I> < I> < Ii eh 5 |X X)l9|18|XlXHVlXIXlXIXIXIXM6|15|X.
4 |32|31 |30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|X321120I 3 l32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25| 24[23|22|><l21|20j
LSTR G (BLU) STR G (BLU)
W ire side of female terminals W ire side of female term inals
Is th e r e 0 .1 V o r m o r e ? I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ?
YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
VSA modulator-control unit and the steering angle between the VSA modulator-control unit and the
sensor.H steering a n g l e sensor.!
12. Measure the voltage between body ground and VSA 15. Check for continuity between body ground and VSA
modulator-control unit 32P connector terminals modulator-control unit 32P connector terminals
No. 15, No. 24, and No. 27 individually. No. 15, No. 24, and No. 27 individually.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL U N I T 32P CONNECTOR VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR
|32|3l|30|29|28|27|26|25|24l23|22|><|21 20| |32|31 |30|29| 28l27|26| 25| 24l23|22fX|21 20|
STR B (GRN) STR A k I STR Z STR B (GRN) STR A I STR Z

(GRY) A (L T B L U ) -O T A A jltb lu ,
W ire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
Is th e r e 0 .1 V o r m o r e ? I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ?
YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
VSA mod uIato r-co nt ro I unit and the steering angle between the VSA modulator-control unit and the
sensor.! steering angle sensor.!
VSA
16. Checkfor continuity between VSA modulator-control 17. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control
unit 32P connector terminal and steering angle sensor unit 32P connectorterminal and steering angle sensor
5P connector terminal individually (see table). 5P connector terminal individually (see table).
Sign VSA M odulator- Steering Angle Sign VSA M odulator- Steering Angle
co ntrol Unit 32P Sensor5P co n tro l Unit 32P Sensor5P
Connector Connector Connector Connector
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
SVCC No. 13 No. 1 STR-A No. 24 No, ^
STR G No. 25 No. 5 STR-B No. 27 No. 2
STR-Z No. 15 No. 3
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR
SVCC (PUR)
STR Z (LT BLU)
|XM 14|13|12|11|10| 9 I 8 I 7 I 6 I 5 IXIXl
|XIX|14|13|12|11 |1G| 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 |X IX!
2 1
|32[31 [30|29|28|27|26|25|24l23|22|Xl21 |20l
xh9h 8ixixii7ixixixixixixii 6ii5ix
4 3
|32|31 |30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|X|21 M
STR G (BLU)
STR B (GRN) STR A (GRY)
STR G
(BLU)
_5Z- STR Z (LT BLU) ( STR B (GRN)
5 4 3 2 1
]~SVCC (PUR)
STR A (GRY)
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ? Wire side of female terminals
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
YES-Go to step 17.
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the VSA
modulator-control unit and the steering angle NO-Repair an open in the wire between the VSA
sensor.H mod uIato r-co nt ro I unit and the steering angle
sensor.B
18. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5).

Is th e w h e e l a lig n m e n t O K ?
YES-Go to step 19.

NO-Make sure the suspension is not modified, and
adjust the wheel alignment correctly, and recheck by
test-d riving.
19. Substitute a known-good steering angle sensor (see DTC31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38: ABS Solenoid
page 19-121). Valve Malfunction
NOTE: Make sure the steering angle sensor and
combination switch is mounted properly.
20. Reconnect all connectors. troubleshooting information (see page 19-68).
23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
ON (II) again.
24. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
i s D T C 3 1 , 3 2 , 3 3 , 3 4 , 3 5 , 3 6 , 3 7 , o r 3 8 in d i c a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 5.
Is D T C 2 7 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 26. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see
NO-Check for loose terminals in the steering angle page 19-69).ll
sensor 5P connector. If the connections are OK, 5. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not
replace the steering angle sensor (see page 19-121 ) . have the latest software (see page 19-124).
26. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
have the latest software (see page 19-124). ON (II) again.
27. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
28. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners. is D T C 3 1 , 3 2 , 3 3 , 3 4 , 3 5 , 3 6 , 3 7 , o r 3 8 i n d i c a t e d ?
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
29. Check for DTCs with the HDS. modulator-control unit 32P connector. If the VSA
Is D T C 2 7 in d ic a te d ? symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-125).
moduIator-controI unit 32P connector. If the VSA NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated,
modulator-control unit was updated and the troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are
symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
modulator-control unit (see page 19-125). troubleshooting.
troubleshooting.
DTC 51: Motor Lock 9. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control
unit 32P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
DTC 52: Motor Stuck
troubleshooting information (see page 19-68). M T R + B (GRN)
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). |XIX|14|13|12|11|10| 9 | 8 | 7 16 I 5 M X ]

2 1
X119H s M X H 7 |X lX IX lX IX lX li 6hsix
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 4 3
|32|31 |30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|X|21120|
v y u u J
Is D T C 5 1 o r 5 2 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 6..
between the No. B58 (MTR) (30 A) fuse in the
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. under-dash fuse/relay box and the VSA
Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see modulator-control unit.H
page 19-69).
NO-lnstall a new No. B58 (MTR) (30 A) fuse in the
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 10.
7. Check the No. B58 (MTR) (30 A) fuse in the under-dash 10. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 32P
fuse/relay box. connector.
Is th e fu s e b lo w n ? 11 .Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
YES-Go to step 8. 12. Clearthe DTC with the HDS.
NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 16. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 32P 14. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
I s D T C 5 1 o r 5 2 in d i c a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 20.

NO-Troubleshooting is complete.
(cont'd)
17. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-control 19. Reconnect the VSA mod ulator-control unit 32P
unit 32P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. connector.
20. Update the VSA modulator-control ynit if it does not
21. Turn the i gnition switch to LOCK (0).
M T R + B (GRN)
!X |:><|14| 13h 211,1Ho! 9 I f 17 16 I 5 IX D ^ IJ 7
)^19|l8D<^17MX|X|XIXMl6|r5M NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
[32(31130l29|28|27l26|25l24l23l22lxl21120| 23. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is D T C 5 1 o r 5 2 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA

Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ? symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA
modulator-control unit (see page 19-125).H
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. B58 troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are
(MTR) (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
and the VSA mod uIato r-co nt ro I u n i t . i l troubleshooting.
18. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control
1XIX114113112[11110| 91817| 6|5tXS>4

X119|i 8lX[X(l7lXlXlX[><lXIXl16l1six
l32|3l|30l29[28|27l26|25|24|23|22[Xl21 |20l
M TRG ND
(BLK) (Q )
YES-Go to step 19.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the VSA
modulator-control unit and body ground (G202).l
DTC 54: Fail-Safe Relay Malfunction 9. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control
troubleshooting information (see page 19-68). VS A MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). X 119 |18|XP<317lXIXD <XKD *C IXl 1si 1s ix
|32|31 |30l29|28l27[26|25| 24|23l22(X|21120|

FSR + B (WHT)
Is D T C 5 4 in d ic a te d ? Wire side of female term i nal s
YES-Go to step 6. I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ?
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see between the No. B37 (FSR) (30 A) fuse in the
page 19-69).H under dash fuse/relay box and the VSA
modulator-control unit.B
NO-lnstall a new No. B37 (FSR) (30 A) fuse in the
7. Check the No. B37 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 10.
fuse/relay box.
Is th e fu s e b lo w n ? connector.
NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 16. 12. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 32P 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES-Go to step 19.

NO-Troubleshooting is com plete.!
17. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-control DTC 61: Battery Vo l tage Low
DTC 62: Battery Vo l tage High
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR NOTE:
Before you troubleshoot, record ail freeze data and
If the vehicle has high electric load or a weak 12 volt
battery, DTC 61 may be stored when starting the
engine.
W ire si de of female terminals 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
ON (II) again.
D o e s th e A B S in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?
YES-Go to step 18.
YES-Go to step 4.
(FSR) (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
the VSA modulator-control unit.H Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see
page 19-69).H
connector. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
19. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not Is D T C 6 1 o r 6 2 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Check the 12 volt battery (see page 22-85) and
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). charging system indicator circuit troubleshooting
(see page 12-200).H
NO-Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the DTC
indicated.
I s D T C 5 4 in d i c a t e d ?
troubleshooting.
VSA
DTC 64: Sensor Power Source Voltage 10. Reconnect all connectors.
Malfunction 11. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. modulator-control unit 32P connector. If the VSA
Is D T C 6 4 In d ic a te d ? modulator-control unit (see page 19-125).
YES-Go to step 6. NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated,
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see troubleshooting.!
page 19-69).H
7. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector
(see page 19-121).
9. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control
unit 32P connectorterminal No. 13 and body ground.
SVCC (PUR)
9 n n ....9 n
[X3X]14|13|12|11|10| 9 18 17 16 | 5 IX tX l
X |19)18MX117|XIXIXlXlXIX|16(15|X 1
4 |32|31 |30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|Xl21120| 3
V .....D"........ U U J

between the VSA modulator-control unit and the
steering angle sensor.B
(cont'd)
DTC 65: Brake Fluid Low Level 10. Check for continuity between brake fluid level switch
troubleshooting information (see page 19-68). BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
1. Check the brake f l uid level in the master cylinder

reservoir tank (see page 19-10).
I s t h e b r a k e f lu i d l e v e l O K ?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-lnspect the brake pads: Front (see page 19-13),
rear (see page 19-28), and replace worn out brake
pads, then recheck.B
W i re side of fem al e terminals
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ?
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
between the gauge control module and the brake fluid
5. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch 2P connector
level switch.
NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 8. ON (II) again.
NO-Replace the master cylinder (see page 19-22).ll 13. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is D T C 6 5 in d ic a te d ?
9. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P connector YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
(see page 22-354). modulator-control unit 32P connector. If the VSA
troubleshooting.
DTC 66: Pressure Sensor Malfunction DTC 68: Brake Pedal Position Switch
Malfunction
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
troubleshooting information (see page 19-68). and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Check for other system DTCs.
4. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. I s a n o t h e r D T C in d i c a t e d ?
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. YES-Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the
D TC M
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 6.
4. Check the brake pedal position switch (see page
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time, 22-246), and adjustment (see page 19-6).
Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see
page 19-69).1H Is th e s w itc h a n d a d ju s t m e n t O K ?
6. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not YES-Go to step 5.

have the latest software (see page 19-124). NO-Adjust the brake pedal position switch. If
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). necessary, replace the brake pedal position switch
(see page 1 9 -6 ).
m od uIato r-co nt ro I unit 32P connector. If the VSA NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
modulator-control unit was updated and the 9. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
modulator-control unit (see page 19-125).B I s D T C 6 8 in d i c a t e d ?
NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, YES-Go to step 10.
troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
indicated, go to the indicated DTCs Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see
troubleshooting. page 19-69).B
10. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal
Is th e b r a k e p e d a l p o s it io n s w itc h c ir c u it O K ?
YES-Go to step 11.

NO-Repair the brake pedal position switch circuit
11. Reconnect all connectors. DTC 81: VSA Modulator-Control Unit Interna l
12. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest Circuit Malfunction
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). troubl eshooting information (see page 19-68).
15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Check for other system DTCs.
16. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. Is a n o th e r D T C in d ic a te d ?
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. YES-Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the
DTC.B
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Check for loose terminals in the ECM/PCM
connector A (44P). If the ECM/PCM was updated, 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
then retest. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 18. NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
NO-lf the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is 6. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209).1I Is D T C 8 1 in d ic a te d ?
18. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not YES-Go to step 7.
have the latest software (see page 19-124). NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see
page 19-69).H
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. have the latest software (see page 19-124).
21. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is D T C 6 8 in d ic a te d ? 9. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
modulator-control unit was updated and the 10. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA Is D T C 8 1 in d ic a te d ?
NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, modulator-control unit 32P connector. If the VSA
troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are modulator-control unit was updated and the
indicated, go to the indicated DTCs symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA
troubleshooting. modulator-control unit (see page 19-125).H
troubleshooting.
DTC 83: PGM-F! Malfunction 8. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
troubleshooting information (see page 19-68). 10. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
2. Check for DTC with the HDS. 11. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is D T C 8 6 in d ic a te d ? Is D T C 8 3 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC 86.H YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
NO-Go to step 3. modulator-control unit 32P connector. If the VSA
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
YES-Go to step 7.
page 19-69).H
7. Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs with the
HDS (see page 11-3).
A r e a n y E C M / P C M D T C s in d i c a t e d ?
YES-Do the applicable troubleshooting for the
ECM/PCM.
NO-Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
DTC 84: VSA Sensor Neutral Position Not DTC 86: F-CAN Communication Ma l function
Written NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 19-68).
troubleshooting information (see page 19-68). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
1. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
(see page 19-123).
4. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds.
ON (II) again. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is D T C 8 6 in d ic a te d ?
Is D T C 8 4 in d ic a te d ? YES-Go to step 6.
YES-Go to step 5. NO-Check the COMMU PCM, COMMU GAUGE, and
COMMU YAW RATE/G, in the VSA FREEZE DATA with
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. the HDS. Then check for F-CAN communication lines
Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see continuity to the appropriate system or sensor and
page 19-69).H loose terminals in the appropriate system or sensor
5. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not connectors,
have the latest software (see page 19-124). 6. Check the COMMU PCM, COMMU GAUGE, and
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to COMMU YAW RATE/G, in the VSA FREEZE DATA with
ON (II) again. the HDS.
7. Check for DTCs with the HDS. I s t h e r e a c o m m u n i c a t i o n e r r o r in t h e s y s t e m o r s e n s o r ?
I s D T C 8 4 in d i c a t e d ? YES-Go to step 7.
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA NO-Go to step 22.

modulator-control unit 32P connector. If the VSA 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA 8. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P) (see page
NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, 11-209).
troubleshooting.
(see page 22-354).
V ^V S A
13. Check the F-CAN communication lines for continuity VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR
between the VSA modulator-control unit and the Wire side of fem ale terminals
appropriate system or sensor (see table).
Component F-CAN 1 F-CAN H

Terminal Terminal
VSA Modulator- No. 5 No. 6
Control Unit
ECM/PCM A37 A36
Gauge Control No. 20 No. 19
Module
Yaw Rate- No. 2 No. 3
Acceleration
Sensor
YAW RATE-ACCELERATION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
F-CAN H (GRN) F-CAN L (PNK) Wire side of female terminals
I s t h e r e c o n t i n u i t y o n t h e F - C A N c o m m u n i c a t i o n li n e s ?
YES-
|32|3l|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22[><l2l|20l
If the appropriate system or sensor is the yaw
rate-acceleration sensor: go to step 14.
If the appropriate system or sensor is not the yaw
rate-acceleration sensor: go to step 18.
NO-Repair an open in the appropriate line.H
14. Check for loose terminals in the yaw rate-acceleration
I 1 I2 r fT fT lT T T I 8 f n _
1 10 11
12 13114115116 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
I 1 I s t h e y a w r a t e - a c c e le r a t io n s e n s o r 4 P c o n n e c t o r O K ?
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
| 3 6 | 37 3 8 | 3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |42 4 3 |4 4 |
YES-Go to step 15.
F-CAN H (GRN) F-CAN L (PNK) NO-Repair or reconnect the connector seeurely.il

f __ 0..... ....... fl........... ....... JL . . \
|X|><|14|13|12|11110| 9 18 | 7 16 15 |X lX l
2 1
XI19|18|>^17|XIX1XIX1XIX|16|15|X
4 |32|31 |30|29|28|27l26|25|24|23|22|X|21120| 3
v ...........i r .. ....................u .. ....... ....... T T J
F-CAN H (GRN)
16115114 13ll2|l1 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 | 4 13 I 2 T1 1

|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
F-CAN L (PNK)
16. Measure the voltage between yaw rate-acceleration 19. Reconnect all the connectors.
20. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds.
YAW RATE-ACCELERATION 21. Checkfor other system DTCs with the HDS.
SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
I s a n o t h e r D T C in d i c a t e d ?
YES-Do the appropriate DTC troubleshooting.

NO-Go to step 22.
22. Update the VSA m od uIato r-co ntro I unit if it does not
24. Start and run the engine for at l east 5 seconds.
Wire side of fem ale terminals
Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ? I s D T C 8 6 in d i c a t e d ?
YES-Replace the yaw rate-acceleration sensor (see YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
page 19-12 2 ) M modulator-control unit 32P connector. If the VSA
NO-Go to step 17. modulator-control unit was updated and the
17. Measure the voltage between yaw rate-acceleration modulator-control unit (see page 19-125).
YAW RATE-ACCELERATION indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR troubleshooting.
Is th e r e b a tt e r y v o lta g e ?
YES-Repair an open in the wire between the yaw
rate-acceleration sensor and body ground (G502).B
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the yaw
rate-acceleration sensor and the under-dash
fuse/relay box.B
18. Check for loose terminals in the appropriate system
connectors.
A r e th e a p p r o p r ia te s y s te m c o n n e c to r s O K ?
YES-Go to step 19.

DTC 91: VSA Activation Time Too Long DTC 105: Hydraulic Unit Temperature Sensor
Malfunction
and any on-board snapshot and review the general NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data
troubleshooting information (see page 19-68). and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
4. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 4. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
Is D T C 9 1 in d ic a te d ? 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6. Is D T C 1 0 5 in d ic a te d ?
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. YES-Go to step 6.

Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
page 19-69). Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see
6. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not page 19-69).H
have the latest software (see page 19-124). 6. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). have the latest software (see page 19-124).
8. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 8. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
Is D T C 9 1 in d ic a te d ? 9. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA Is D T C 1 0 5 in d ic a t e d ?

modulator-control unit 32P connector. If the VSA YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
modulator-control unit was updated and the modulator-control unit 32P connector. If the VSA
symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-control unit was updated and the
modulator-control unit (see page 19-125). symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA
NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated, modulator-control unit (see page 19-125).
troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are NO-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated,
indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are
troubleshooting. indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
DTC 111: Back-Up Light Switch Malfunction DTC 112: Neutral Switch Malfunction
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) for at least 5 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
seconds.
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC 86 (see page
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC 86 (see page 19-110).B
19-110).
NO-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the BACK-UP LIGHT SW I TCH in the PGM-FI the HDS.
D o e s i t i n d i c a t e O N w h e n t h e s h i f t l e v e r is in n e u t r a l, a n d
D o e s i t i n d i c a t e O N w h e n t h e s h i f t l e v e r is in r e v e r s e , a n d O F F w h e n t h e s h i f t l e v e r is n o t in n e u t r a l?
O F F w h e n t h e s h i f t l e v e r is i n n e u t r a l?
YES-Go to step 25.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-
NO-Check the back-up light switch (see page
If the indicator remains on: Go to step 4.
13-42).HI
If the indicator remains off: Go to step 12.
4. Check the BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH in the VSA DATA If the indicator is flashing: Check the installation of
LIST with the HDS. the neutral position switch (see page 13-43).B
D o e s i t i n d i c a t e O N w h e n t h e s h i f t l e v e r is in r e v e r s e , a n d 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
O F F w h e n t h e s h i f t l e v e r is i n n e u t r a l?
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. (see step 2 on page 13-43).
page 19-69). 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO-Go to step 5. 7. Check the NP SWITCH in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with
the HDS.
have the latest software (see page 19-124). D o e s i t in d i c a t e O F F ?
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES-Replace the neutral position switch (see page
13-43).B
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Check the BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH in the VSA DATA
LIST with the HDS. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
D o e s i t i n d i c a t e O N w h e n t h e s h i f t l e v e r is in r e v e r s e , a n d 9. Short the SCS line with the HDS.

O F F w h e n t h e s h i f t l e v e r is in n e u t r a l?
10. Disconnect ECM connector B (44P) (see step 14 on
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA page 11-210).
troubleshooting.B
VSA
11. Check for continuity between neutral position switch 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
18. Connect neutraI position switch 2P connector
NEUTRAL POSITI ON SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR

jQ l
[(211 )l
JQ l
NSW (RED/BLK)
02; p
NSW (RED/BLK) | | GND (BLK)
JUMPER WIRE

YES-Repair a short to body ground between the ECM 19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
and the neutral position switch.
NO-Update the ECM if it does not have the latest the HDS.
known-good ECM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the D o e s it in d ic a te O F F ?
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good YES-Repair an open in the wire between the neutral
ECM, replace the original ECM (see page 11-2 09 ).l position switch and body ground (GT01 ) .
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO-Replace the neutral position switch (see page
13. Disconnect the neutral position switch 2P connector 13-43). HI
(see step 2 on page 13-43). 21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
14. Connect neutral position switch 2P connector 22. Disconnect the jumper wire from the neutral position
terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire. switch 2P connector.

D
NSW (RED/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE

the HDS.
D o e s it in d ic a te O N ?
YES-Go to step 17.

NO-Go to step 21.
(cont'd)
24. Check for continuity between ECM connector B (44P) 26. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not
terminals No. 13 and No. 21, and neutral position have the latest software (see page 19-124).
switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 individually.
29. Check the NEUTRAL SWITCH STATUS in the VSA
D o e s i t i n d i c a t e O N w h e n t h e s h i f t l e v e r is in n e u t r a l, a n d
O F F w h e n t h e s h i f t l e v e r is in e x c e p t n e u t r a l?

modulator-control unit (see page 19-125).H
Terminal side of female terminals troubleshooting.
YES-Update the ECM if it does not have the latest

known-good ECM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
symptom/indicator goes away with a known-good
ECM, replace the original ECM (see page 11 -209).H
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the neutral
position switch and ECM.
25. Check the NEUTRAL SWITCH STATUS in the VSA
D o e s i t in d i c a t e O N w h e n t h e s h i f t l e v e r is in n e u t r a l, a n d
O F F w h e n t h e s h i f t l e v e r i s n o t in n e u t r a l?

page 19-69).
NO-Go to step 26.
DTC 121: VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction DTC 158: ECU Software Update Failure
DTC 122: VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction NOTE* Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
DTC 123: VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction troubleshooting information (see page 19-68).
1. Update the VSA modulator-control unit (see page
DTC 124: VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction 19-124).
NOTE; Before you troubl eshoot, record all freeze data 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
and any on-board snapshot and review the general ON (II) again.
Is D T C 1 5 8 in d ic a te d ?
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). modulator-control unit 32P connector. If the VSA
4. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. modulator-control unit was updated ahd the
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. modulator-control unit (see page 19-125).B
5. Check for DTCs w i th the HDS. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
I s D T C 1 2 1 , 1 2 2 , 1 2 3 , o r 1 2 4 in d i c a t e d ? Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see
page 19-69)JI
YES-Go to step 6.
page 19-69).B
I s D T C 1 2 1 , 1 2 2 , 1 2 3 , o r 1 2 4 in d i c a t e d ?

modulator-control unit (see page 19-125)Ji
troubleshooting.
VSA cannot be turned OFF 6. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P
NOTE: If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator turns ON,
the VSA cannot be turned OFF. Check the tire pressure
first. VSA OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
2. Check the VSA OFF switch (see page 19-123). 1 p|
5 4 3 2 1
Is th e V S A O F F s w itc h O K ?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Replace the VSA OFF switch (see page 19-123).
3. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 5P connector (see
page 19-123). W ire side of fem al e term i nals

(see page 22-354).
5. Checkfor continuity between gauge control module
32P connector terminal No. 11 and VSA OFF switch 5P YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
connectorterminal No. 4.' between the gauge control module and the VSA OFF
switch.
VSA OFF SWITCH BP CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P
1 -j p connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
5 4 3 2 i1
Li
U
I YEL
VSA OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR

1 pm 1r
YEL
16|l5|l4|l3|l2|l1I 10| 9 | 8 t 7 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 I 2 I 1 I
5 4 3 2 1
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19| 18|17


YES-Go to step 6.
control module and the VSA OFF switch . YES-Substitute a known-good gauge control module
(see page 22-354), and recheck. If it is OK, replace the
original gauge control module (see page 22-354).
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the VSA OFF
switch and body ground (G501).H
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and 9. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control
VSA indicator do not go off
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR

fuse/relay box. FSR GND (BLK)
Is th e fu s e b lo w n ?
|><M14|13|12|11|10| 9 | 8 | 7j 6 | 5 |X |X |
2 1
X H 9 ll8 |X lX ll 7 D < lX D < a > d X ^ 1 6 |1 5 |X
YES-Replace the fuse. Turn the ignition switch to ON
4 3
(II), then turn it to LOCK (0) again. If the fuse blows |32|31 |30|29|28|27|26|25l24|23|22Kl 21120|
again, repair the short to ground on the No. B11 (7.5A)

fuse circuit.
3. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function
(see page 22-325).
Is th e g a u g e c o n tr o l m o d u le O K ? I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ?
i
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page NO-Repair an open in the wire between the VSA
22-354).M modulator-control unit and body ground (G202).H
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-control
7. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-control
|X M i4|13|12|11|10| 9 | 8 17 J8 | 5 jX M
unit 32P connector terminal No. 10 and body ground. 2 1
i
X li 9(18I X M 17 ( X lX I> d X M X i 6|i s ix
4 |32|31 |30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22fXl21 M 3

FSR + B (WHT)
YES-Go to step 11.

(30A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
VSA modulator-control unit.il
YES-Go to step 8.
(7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
VSA modulator-control unit.B
(cont'd)
12. Check for continuity between the VSA 13. Reconnect all connectors.
modulator-control unit32P connectorterminal and
the gauge control module 32P connector terminal 14. Update the VSA modulator-control unit if it does not
(see table).
Sign VSA Modulator- Gauge Control ON (II) again.
Control Unit 32P Module 32P
Connector Connector 16. Check the ABS indicator, the brake system indicator,
Terminal Terminal and the VSA indicator for several seconds when the
F-CAN L No. 5 No. 20 ignition switch is turned to ON (II).
D o th e in d ic a to r s c o m e o n th e n g o o ff?
Wire side of female terminals YES-lf the VSA modulator-control unit was updated,
F-CAN H (GRN) F-CAN L (PNK) troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs are
9 n rt n 9 indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
2
|XIX|14|13|12|11110| 9 | 8 | 7 16 | 5 f c R ]
1 troubleshooting.
X H 9h 8(XE x 3i 7 |X IX IX IX IX IX |1 6 |1 5 |X
4 |32|31 |30|29 |2S|27|26|25|24|23|22|><|21120| 3 NO-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
V u .............. a..................... u...... J modulator-control unit 32P connector. If the VSA
modulator-control unit (see page 19-125).!
F-CAN H (GRN)
lo liJ s ll. 6 | 5 | 4 13
CSI
1efi s| 14I 13| 12111
F-CAN L (PNK) L
Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?
YES-Go to step 13.

control module and the VSA modulator-control
unit.
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6. Disconnect the cable reel connector A (20P), the cabl e
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the reel connector B(4P), and the wiper/washer switch 8P
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before connector (C) from the combination switch
doing repairs or service. assembly/cable reel (D).
NOTE: Do not damage or drop the combination switch
as the steering angle sensor is sensitive to shock and
vibration.
2. With the front wheels in the straight-ahead position
and the steering wheel centered, then remove the
steering wheel (see page 17-6).
3. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-96).
4. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P
connector (A) and the steering angle sensor 5P
connector (B) from the combination switch
assembly/cable reel (C).
D E
7. Remove the wire harness (E) from the harness holder

(F).
8. Remove the combination switch assembly/cable reel
mounting screws (A), then remove the combination
switch assembly/cable reel (B) from the steering lock.
5. Remove the wire harness (D) from the harness holder

(E).
(cont'd)
Steering Angle Sensor Yaw Rate-Acceleration Sensor
10. Remove the combination light switch (A) and the NOTE:
wiper/washer switch (B) from the combination switch Do not damage or drop the sensor as it is sensitive.
body assembly (C). Do not use power tool s when replacing the sensor.
NOTE: When installing the cable reel, set the turn Check the yaw rate-acceleration sensor bracket for a
signal canceling sleeve position so that the arrow deformation.
points (D) straight up.
2. Remove the yaw rate-acceleration sensor (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.4 N-m
(0.96 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
11. Install the combination switch body assembly in the

reverse order of removal, and note these items: B
NOTE:
connector (B).
Do not remove the steering angle sensor from the
combination switch body assembly. 4. Install the yaw rate-acceleration sensor in the reverse
Tighten the combination switch assembly/cable order of removal.
reel mounting screws in the proper sequence (see 5. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization
step 1 on page 17-12). (see page 19-123).
VSA Sensor Neutral Position VSA Off Switch Test/Replacement
Memorization
NOTE: Do not press the brake pedal during this 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
procedure.
2. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-83).
1. Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface, with the
3. Push out the VSA OFF switch (A) from the back of the
steering wheel in the straight ahead position.
instrument panel (B).
to the data link connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's
side of the dashboard,
4. On the switch side, check for continuity between the

A VSA OFF switch 5P connector terminal in each switch
position according to the table.
VSA OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
n .n
5. Select VSA ADJUSTMENT with the HDS, and follow -5 4 3 2 1
the screen prompts. u u

instructions.

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Terminal side of male terminals
T erm i nal
4 5
P o sitio n
PRESSED o -------- -------- 0
RELEASED
If the switch does not work as described in the table,

replace the switch.
If the switch tests OK, go to step 5.
VSA Off Switch Test/Replacement VSAModulator-Contro! Unit
(cont'd) Update
5. On the switch side, check for continuity between VSA Special Tools Required
OFF switch 5P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) tablet tester
There should be continuity at all times. Honda Interface Module (HIM) and an iN workstation
VSA OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR HDS pocket tester
software version
fl p software installed
5 4 3 2 1
U ...... " I u Any one of the above updating tools can be used.
NOTE;
u Use this procedure when you need to update the
VSA modulator-control unit at anytime.
Make sure the HDS/iN workstation has the latest
Terminal side of male terminals software version.
@ Before you update the VSA modul ator-control unit,
make sure the 12 volt battery in the vehicle is fully
6. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the cover charged, and connect a jumper to the 12 volt battery
(A), and replace the bulb (B). (not a battery charger) to maintain system voltage.
Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) during the update. If there is a
problem with the update, leave the ignition switch to
ON (II).
To prevent VSA modulator-control unit damage, do
not operate anything electrical (headlights, audio
system, brakes, A/C, power windows, door locks, etc.)
during the update.
To ensure the latest program is installed, do a VSA
modulator-control unit update whenever the VSA
modulator-control unit is substituted or replaced.
You cannot update a VSA modulator-control unit with
a program it already has. It will only accept a new
program.
High temperature in the engine compartment might
7. Install the VSA OFF switch in the reverse order of cause the VSA modulator-control unit to become too
removal. hot to run the update. If the engine has been running
before this procedure, open the hood and cool the
engine compartment.
connector (DLC). This will prevent VSA modulator-
control unit damage.
DTCs stored in memory are cleared when the VSA
modulator-control unit is updated.
VSA Modulator-Control Unit
Removal and Installation
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (I I), but do not start the INOTICE I
engine, Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) paint. If brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
located under the driver's side of the dashboard. immediately with water.
NOTE;
Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines
during removal and installation.
To prevent the brake fluid from dripping, plug and
cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel.
Removal
- ' 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Disconnect the 10 mm brake lines (A) and the 12 mm
brake lines (B) from the VSA modulator-control unit
(C).
A'

4. Select the update mode, and follow the screen
prompts to update the VSA modulator-control unit.
5. If the software in the VSA modulator-control unit is
the latest, disconnect the HDS/HIM/GNA600 from the
DLC. If the software in the VSA modulator-control unit
is not the latest, follow the instructions on the screen.
6. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation (cont'd)
3. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 32P 6. Remove the VSA modulator-control unit (A) from the
connector (A) by pushing the lock (B) and pulling bracket (B).
down the lever (C); the connector disconnects itself.
4. Remove the VSA modulator-control unit (A) with the

bracket (B) from the body.
5. Remove the wire harness clip (C) from the bracket.

Installation 2. Install the VSA modulator-control unit (A) with the
bracket (B) to the body.
1. Install the VSA modulator-control unit (A) onto the
bracket (B).
3. Install the wire harness clip (C) to the bracket.

4. Align the connecting surface of the VSA
modulator-control unit 32P connector (A) to the VSA
modulator-control unit.
5. Pull up the lever (B) of the VSA modulator-control unit

32P connector, then confirm the connector is fully
seated.
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation (cont'd)
6. Connect the 10 mm brake lines and the 12 mm brake

lines to the VSA modulator-control unit (A).
NOTE; The brake lines are connected to the master
cylinder (B), the left-rear (C), the right-front (D), the
left-front (E), and the right-rear (F) brake systems.
D B
10 x 1 .0 mm 1 2 x 1 .0 mm
15 N-m 22 N-m
7. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-10).

8. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization
9. Start the engine, and check that the VSA indicators go
off.
10. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure that the VSA
indicators do not come on.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air
trapped in the modulator which could then be
induced into the normal brake system during
modulation. Bleed the brake system again (see page
19-10).
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Front
1 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Remove the grommet (A ), then disconnect the wheel speed sensor 2P connector (B).
3. Remove the bol t and the bracket (C), the clip (D), and the wire guide grommet (E).
4. Remove the bolt and the wheel speed sensor (F).
5. Install the wheel speed sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Do not twist the sensor wires.
If the wheel speed sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing, it is faulty.
Make sure there is no debris in the sensor mounting hole.
6. Start the engine, and make sure the VSA indicators go off.
7. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the VSA indicators do not come on.
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
Rear
2. Release the connector holding clamps (A), then disconnect the wheel speed sensor 2P connector (B).
6x 1.0 mm
9.5 N-m
(0.97 kgf-m,
7,0 ibf-ft)
3. Remove the wire guide grommets (C) and the clip (D).
4. Remove the bolt and the wheel speed sensor (E).
5. Install the wheel speed sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Do not twist the sensor wires.
If the wheel speed sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing unit, it is faulty.
Make sure there is no debris in the sensor mounting hole.
6. Start the engine, and make sure the VSA indicators go off.
7. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the VSA indicators do not come on.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) {If body maintenance is. required)
tensioners.
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST {IMA) SYSTEM {If body maintenance is required)

Body
Doors Dashboard Center Lower Cover

Component Location Index................... 20-2 Removal/Installation .......................... 20-89
Door Panel Removal/Installation-----.. 20-4 Dashboard Side Lid
Door Outer Handle Replacement..........20-8 Removal/Installation ........................ 20-91
Door Latch Replacement....................... 20-11 Side Defogger Vent Trim
Door Glass and Regulator Removal/Installation................... ....... 20-91
Replacement........................................ 20-13 Dashboard Vent Removal/Installation .. 20-92
Door Sash Inner Trim Replacement-----20-15 Passenger's Dashboard Panel
Door Sash Outer Trim Replacement. . . 20-15 Removal/Installation........................... 20-93
Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Passenger's Middle Panel
R e p la c e m e n t.....................................20-16 Removal/Installation...........................20-93
Door Weatherstrip Replacement-----. 20-16 Passenger's Dashboard Undercover
Door Channel Tape Replacement..........20-17 Removal/Installation........................... 20-94
Door Glass Adjustm ent...........................20-19 * Glove Box Removal/Installation............20-94
Door Position Adjustment-------. . . . . . . 20-20 Column Cover Removal/Installation. . . 20-96
Door Striker Adjustm ent................. ....... 20-21 Column Blind Removal/Installation-----20-97
* Dashboard Upper Panel
M irrors Removal/Installation............... . 20-97
* Dashboard Rem ova I/I nsta 11at io n .......... 20-99
Power Mirror Replacement................... 20-23 * Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam
Mirror Holder Replacement............... .. 20-24
Removal/Installation....................... . 20-100
Rearview Mirror Replacement.............. 20-26
Seats
Glass Component Location Index-----. . . . . . . 20-107
Component Location Index......... 20-27 Active Head Restraint Inspection..........20-108
Windshield Replacement......... 20-28
Head Restraint Trim Replacement........20-109
Windshield Molding Replacement........20-32 * Seat Removal/Installation..................... . 20-109
Quarter Glass Replacement....................20-36 Slide Lever Replacement....................... 20-112
Upper Rear Window Replacement........20-40
* Seat Frame Replacement....................... 20-113
Lower Rear Window Replacement........20-46
* Recline Cover Removal/Installation------20-115
* Seat-Back Cover Replacement. . . ........ 20-117
Interior Trim
* Seat Cushion Cover Replacement........20-123
Trim Remova I/Insta 11ation
Bumpers
Door Areas............................................ 20-52
* Pillar Areas................... .......................20-54
Front Bumper Removal/Installation-----20-128
Rear Tray A rea................. .....................20-62 Front Air Spoiler Replacement..............20-130
Cargo A rea ............................................ 20-64
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation . . . . 20-130
Hatch A re a ........................... ................ 20-66
Rear Bumper Lower Trim
Suhvisor Removal/Installation............. 20-68
Replacement...................................... . 20-132
* Headliner Removal/Installation. . ..........20-73
* Carpet Replacement.................................20-76 Hood
Consoles Hood Opener Cable Replacement------ 20-134
Component Location Index............. 20-78
Hood Latch Replacement....................... 20-135
* Center Console Removal/Installation .. 20-79
Hood Release Handle Replacement. . . . 20-136
Rear Console Removal/Installation-----20-81
Hood Adjustment.................... ........ . . . 20-137
Hood Insulator Replacement................. 20-138
Dashboard
Component Location Index................... 20-82 Hatch
Instrument Panel Removal/Installation. 20-83
Component Location Index.................. 20-139
Fuse Lid Panel Removal/Installation. . . 20-85
Hatch Latch Replacement..................... . 20-140
Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover
Hatch Adjustment.................................... 20-141
Removal/Installation........................... 20-85
Hatch Support Strut Replacement........20-142
Driver's Dashboard Undercover
Hatch Weatherstrip Replacement..........20-142
Rem ova I/I nsta 11ati o n ........................... 20-86 Hatch Lower Stop Replacement............20-143
Upper Pocket Removal/Installation-----20-87
Dashboard Center Trim Fuel Fill Door
Removal/Installation........................... 20-88 Component Location Index......... 20-144
Exterior Trim
Component Location Index.......... . 20-147
Front Bumper Center Upper Beam
Replacement....................................... 20-149
Front Bumper Side Cover
R eplacem ent........................ . . ........... 20-150
Front Grille Replacement....................... 20-151
Front Bumper Fog Light Cover
Replacement....................................... 20-151
Front Pillar Corner Trim Replacement.. 20-152
Cowl Cover Replacement ............ ... 20-153
Windshield Side Trim R eplacem ent... 20-155
Roof Molding Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 20-156
Hatch Spoiler R eplacem ent................. 20-157
Side Sill Panel Removal/Installation..... 20-158
Emblem/Sticker Replacement. . . . . . . . . 20-159
Fenderwell
Component Location Index....................20-160
Front Inner Fender Replacement..........20-162
Splash Shield Replacement.................. 20-163
Front Bulkhead Lower Cover
Replacement...................................... 20-164
Front Bumper Air Guide Replacement. 20-164
Front Fender Fairing Replacement........20-165
Middle Floor Undercover
Replacement. . ..................................... 20-166
Rear Air Outlet Replacement................. 20-166
Rear Spring Seat Lower Cover
Replacement......................... .............. 20-167
Fuel Fill Pipe Cover Replacement..........20-167
Rear Fender Cover Replacement..........20-168
Front Floor Undercover Replacement . . 20-169
Frame
Middle Crossmember Gusset
Replacement..................... .................. 20-171
Rear Wheelhouse Gusset
Replacement........................................ 20-171
Trailing Arm Brace Replacement..........20-172
Subframe Replacement......................... 20-173
Frame Repair C hart................................. 20-176
DOOR PANEL \
Removal/ I nstal l ati on, page 20-4 DOOR GRI P
j
Replacement, page 20-12 REGULATOR
Door Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the screws securing the inner handle (A).
. KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
Trim Pad Remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, Fastener Locations
commercially available : Screw, 2
Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the door or the related parts.
Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
avoid damage when removing components.
If there are small scratches on the film trim, remove
them with an extra fine plastic polishing compound.
1. Lower the glass fully.
2. Remove the door mirror cover (see page 20-23).
3. Remove the door sash inner trim (see page 20-15).
4. Push on the upper hook (A) with the appropriate trim 6 Remove the pull pocket cap (A), and remove the
tool, then pull back the inner handle cap (B) to remove screw.
it.
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
7. Remove the power window switch panel (A) from the 9. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as
door panel (B). possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
-1. Pry up the power window switch panel to release -1. Start at the bottom edge of the door panel, insert a
the clip. commercially available trim pad remover into the
-2. Pull out along the edge of the panel to release all of notch (B) in the lower edge of the door panel to
the hooks (C). detach the clip (C).
-3. Disconnect the power window switch connector -2. Detach the clips (D), then pull out the bottom edge
(D). of the door panel.
-3. Detach the upper clips (E).
Fastener Location -4. Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward.
O : Clip, 1
NOTE: The inner handle cable (F) and the latch
cable (G) are connected to the inner handle (H).
Do not pull up the door panel too far, or these
cables will be damaged.
Fastener Locations
C, D, E > : Clip, 8
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1
Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
10. While holding the door panel (A) away from the door, Inner handle replacement
remove the inner handle (B) from the opening of the
12. Disconnect the inner handle cable (A) and the latch
door panel.
cable (B) from the inner handle (C), then remove the
handle.
-1. Release the inner handle cable fastener (D), then
disconnect the inner handle cable from the inner
handle.
-2. Release the latch cable fastener (E), then disconnect
the latch cable from the inner handle.
NOTE: If the cable fasteners are damaged or
stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
11. While holding the door panel (A) away from the door,
detach the door harness clip (B), and disconnect the
courtesy light bulb socket (C).
NOTE: If you are only removing the door panel, go to
step 15. If you are doing further disassembly, proceed
to step 12.
Door grip replacement Inner weatherstrip replacement
13. Remove the screws and detach the hook (A), then 14. Release the hooks (A), then remove the inner
remove the door grip (B) from the door panel (C). weatherstrip (B) from the door panel (C).
Fastener Locations
; Screw, 5
15. Install the door panel in the reverse order of removal,

them with new ones.
If the inner door handle cable end is damaged or
stress-whitened, replace it with a new one.
Replace any damaged cable fasteners with new
ones.
Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly,
and the cables are connected securely.
Make sure the power window and power door lock
operates properly.
When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
Push the clips, the hooks, and the fasteners into
place securely.
Door Outer Handle Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2G14* (A), and detach the door harness clips (B).
*Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the door or the related parts.
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-4).
2. Raise the glass fully.
3. Remove the screws, then remove the pull pocket
brackets (A).
Fastener Locations
5. Remove the plastic cover (C) as needed.

-1. Remove the plug cap (D).
-2. Pass the door harness (E) through the slit (F) in the
plastic cover.
NOTE: If the plastic cover is damaged or torn, replace
it with a new one.
6. Remove the door latch (see page 20-11).
7. Remove the maintenance cap (A) and the door outer
handle hole seal (B).
8. Loosen the bolt (A) of the rear side of the door outer 10. Remove the lock cylinder cable (A) (driver's door) and
handle (B). slide the outer handle protector (B) forward, then
remove it.
Fastener Locations
A, C : Bo lt, 2
6 x 1 .0 mm
9.4 N-m (0.96 kgf m, 6.9 Ibf ft)
9. Remove the bolt ( C ) of the front side of the door outer
handle.
11. Driver's door: If the retainer (C) of the cylinder

cable/key cylinder is damaged, release the hooks (D),
then replace it with a new one.
(cont'd)
Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont'd)
12. Remove the outer handle (A) from the door (B). 13. Remove the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle
base (B), then replace the rod fastener with a new one.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.
14. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of

Make sure that the actuator connector is plugged in
properly, and that the outer handle rod is connected
securely.
Make sure the door handle operates properly.
Make sure the door key cylinder/door lock operates
properly.
Push the clips and hooks into place securel y.
Door Latch Replacement
NOTE: 7. Driver's door: Pull both side flanges (A) of the retainer
Put on gloves to protect your hands. (B) outward, and pull out the middle flange portion (C)
Take care not to scratch the door and related parts, of the outer casing cover (D), then disconnect the
cylinder cable (E) from the latch (F).
1. Raise the glass fully.
3. Remove the inner handle (see page 20-6).
4. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector
and detach the harness clips (see step 4 on page 20-8).
5. Remove the plastic cover, as needed (see step 5 on
page 20-8).
6. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed, and
remove the bolt, then remove the center lower sash
(B) by pulling it downward.
Fastener Location
^ : Bolt, 1
8. Pull out the bottom of the outer handle rod (G) from
the latch.
Door Latch Replacement (cont'd)
9. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the latch (C), then 11. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector
remove the latch through the hole in the door, (A) by releasing the hook (B).
NOTE: Fastener Location
Take care not to bend the latch cable (D), and the : Screw, 1
inner handle cable (E).
If you are only removing the door latch, go to step
13. If you are doing further disassembly, proceed to
step 10.
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 1 B : Screw, 3
B
12. Disconnect the latch cabl e (A) and inner handle cable
(B) from the latch (C).
(0.55 kgf-m, 4.0 Ibf-ft) E
Latch cable and inner handle cable replacement

10. Remove the foam seals (A, B, C) from the latch (D).
Door Glass and Regulator
Replacement
13. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and NOTE;
note these items; Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Before reinstalling the latch protector, clean the Take care not to scratch the door or the related parts.
latch and latch protector surfaces with isopropyl
alcohol where the new foam seals will be attached. 1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-4).
After reinstalling the latch protector to the latch, 2. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector,
attach the new foam seals to the protector and the and detach the harness clips (see step 4 on page 20-8).
latch.
3. Remove the plastic cover (see step 5 on page 20-8).
Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in
properly, and each rod is connected securely. 4. Carefully raise the glass (A) until you can see the
Make sure the latch cable and the inner handle bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out
cable are connected securely. through the window slot.
Make sure the door lock operates properly. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door.
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed Fastener Locations
around its outside perimeter to seal out water. : Bolt, 2
9.4 N-m
(0.96 k g fm , 6.9 Ib fft)
Door Glass and Regulator Replacement (cont'd)
5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (B), 9. Install the glass and the regulator in the reverse order
and loosen the bolts (C). of removal, and note these items:
Fastener Locations
them with new ones.
C, D ; Bolt, 4 # : nut, 2
Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
Roll the glass up and down to verify that if it moves
6 x 1.0 mm freely without binding.
9.4 N-m
(0.96 kgf-m, 6.9 I bf-ft) Make sure that there is no clearance between the
glass and the glass run channel when the glass is
closed.
Adjust the position of the glass as necessary (see
page 20-19).
Do the power window control unit reset procedure
(see page 22-279).
Check for water leaks (see step 8 on page 20-19).
Test-drive and checkfor w i nd noise and rattles.
Make sure the power door locks, the power
windows, and the power mirrors operate properly.
6. Remove the bolts (D) and nuts, then remove the

regulator through the hole in the door.
7. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding surfaces
of the regulator (A) where shown.
\ A
"
8. If necessary, remove the power window motor (see

Door Sash Inner Trim Replacement Door Sash Outer Trim Replacement

KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014* KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857 Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE: NOTE:
Put on gloves to protect your hands. Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Take care not to scratch the door or the related parts. Take care not to scratch the door or the related parts.
Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to 1. Remove the door sash inner trim (see page 20-15).
2. Remove the door sash outer trim (A).
1. Lower the door glass fully.
A . Remove the screws from inside the door.
2. Detach the clip and hooks (A), then remove the door -2. Pull up the trim to release the hooks (B) from the
sash inner trim (B). door.
Fastener Location -3. Release the lower edge of the trim from the door
t> ; Clip, T glass outer weatherstrip (C), then remove the trim.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2

push the clip and the hooks into place securely.

push the hooks into place securely.
Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Door Weatherstrip Replacement
Replacement
NOTE: NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the door or the related parts. Take care not to scratch the door or the related parts.
1. Remove the door sash outer trim (see page 20-15). Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
1. Remove the door checker mounting bolt at the front
2. Lower the glass fully.
pillar.
3. Pull up the rear edge of the door glass outer
Fastener Lo cations
weatherstrip (A), and detach the hooks (B). Slide the : Bolt, 1 A t > : Clip, 1 B t> : Cl ip, 2 C t> : Cl ip, 13
weatherstrip rearward, then remove it.
4. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of

Push the weatherstrip into place securely.
Make sure that there is no clearance between the
rear edge of the weatherstrip and the door sash
outer trim.
29 N-m
2. Detach the clips (A, B, C), then remove the door
weatherstrip (D).
3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of
them with new ones.
Make sure the weatherstrip is instal led in the holder
(E) securely.
Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the
door checker mounting bolt before installation.
Checkfor water leaks (see step 8 on page 20-19).
Door Channel Tape Replacement
NOTE:
Keep dust away from the working area.
When working at lower temperatures, heat the door channel and the door channel tape with a hair dryer.
Door channel: about 59 F (15 C).
Door channel tape: about 86 F (30 C).
When heating the door channel tape, heat it evenly and gradually to prevent deformation.
When pressing the door channel tape, slowly press it from the corner to prevent air bubbles and wrinkles.
If there are air bubbles in the door channel tape, release the air with your finger ora plastic squeegee.
If the air bubble is more than 10 mm (0.39 in) in diameter, peel up the door channel tape, then reapply it.
1. The following tools are required to replace the door channel tape:
Plastic squeegee
Isopropyl alcohol
Sponge or shop towel
Hair dryer
2. Remove these items:
Power mirror (see page 20-23)
Door glass outer weatherstrip (see page 20-16)
Door weatherstrip, as needed (see page 20-16)
Glass run channel, as needed (see step 6 on page 20-11)
Door sash outer trim (see page 20-15)
3. Slowly peel up the old door channel tape while heating it with a hair dryer.
4. Clean the door channel bonding surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil,
grease, and water from getting on the surface.
5. Attach the door channel tape.
-1. Peel the edge of the adhesive backing from the channel tape.
-2. Fit the door channel tape to the door channel.
-3. Apply the door channel tape to the door channel while peeling the adhesive backing from it a little at a time. Check
that the channel tape is parallel with the door channel.
-4. Push firmly on the door channel tape with a plastic squeegee (felt side).
NOTE: To prevent air bubbles, slowly press the door channel tape around the door frame corner.
6. As necessary, repeat the preceding steps.
8. Check that the body color on the door channel is covered by the door channel tape.
9. Check for water leaks (see step 8 on page 20-19).
Door Channel Tape Replacement (cont'd)
Attachment Point (Reference)

Door Glass Adjustment
NOTE: Check the door weatherstrip and the glass run 8. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and on
channel for damage or deterioration, and replace them if the sealing area as shown, and note these items:
necessary. Use a 12 mm (0.47 in) diameter hose (A).
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Adjust the rate of water flow as shown (B).
Do not use a nozzle.
Hold the hose about 300 mm (11.81 in) away from
Door panel (see page 20-4) the door (C).
Plastic cover (see step 5 on page 20-8)
3. Carefully lower the glass (A) until you can see the 12 m m (0.47 in)
glass mounting bolts (B), then loosen them.
0.5 m (19.69 in)
A
300 mm (11.81 in)
9.4 N-m
{0.96 kgf*m, 6.9 Ibf-ft) 9. Reinstall the door panel (see page 20-4).
10. Do the power window control unit reset procedure
4. Push the glass against the glass run channel (C), then (see page 22-279).
tighten the glass mounting bolts.
5. Check that the glass moves smoothly.
6. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Also make
sure that the glass (A) contacts the glass run channel
(B) evenly.

Door Position Adjustment
NOTE: Check for a flush fit with the body, then check for 4. Cheek that the door and body edges are parallel. If
equal gaps between the front, rear, and bottom door necessary, adjust the door cushions (A) to make the
edges and the body. Check that the door and body edges rear of the doors flush with the body.
are parallel.
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when
adjusting the doors.
2. Adjust at the hinges (A):
Pad a floor jack (B) with shop towels (C), then use
the jack to support the door to prevent damage to
the door while adjusting it.
Loosen the hinge mounting bolts (D) slightly, and
move the door backward or forward, up or down as
necessary to equalize the gaps.
5. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts and

around the hinges.
3. If necessary, replace the door mounting bolts with the

adjusting bolts made specifically for door adjustment,
then adjust at the door: Loosen the door mounting
bolts (E) slightly, and move the door up or down as
necessary to equalize the gaps, and move it in or out
until it is flush with the body.
NOTE: Refer to the Parts Catalog if you need to use an
adjusting bolt.
h im *
Door Striker Adjustment
Make sure the door latches securely without slamming

it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker nuts are
fixed, but the striker can be adjusted slightly up or down,
and in or out.
1. Loosen the screws (B) slightly.

2. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the
striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (C). Do not
tap the striker too hard.
3. Lightly tighten the screws.
4. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door against
the body to make sure the striker allows a flush fit. If
the door latches properly, tighten the screws to the
specified torque and recheck.
MIRROR HOUSING
Power Mirror Replacement
NOTE: 5. While holding the power mirror (A), remove the nuts
Put on gloves to protect your hands. securing the mirror.
Take care not to scratch the door or the related parts. Fastener Locations
: Nut. 3 '
1. Lower the door glass fully.
2. Carefully pull out the door mirror cover (A) to release
the hooks (B) and detach the clip, then remove it.
Fastener Location
O : C li p, 1
6 x 1.0 mm
9.4 N-m (0.96 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
6. While holding the mirror, pull out the harness through
the hole in the door. Take care not to scratch the door.
7. Install the power mirror in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items;
If the clip is damaged or stress-whitened, replace it
4. Disconnect the connector (A). with a new one.
@ Push the clip and hooks into place securely.
Mirror Holder Replacement
NOTE: 3. Separate the mirror holder (A) from the actuator (B)
Put on gloves to protect your hands. by releasing the hooks (C). Disconnect the mirror
Take care not to scratch the power mirror or the defogger connectors (D).
related parts. NOTE: If you are only removing the mirror holder, go
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with to step 5. If you are doing further disassembly of the
protective tape to prevent damage. mirror, proceed to step 4.
1. Carefully push on the top edge of the mirror holder (A)
by hand.
2. Put a shop towel in the opening between the bottom

edge of the mirror holder and the mirror housing to
prevent scratches, and detach the bottom hooks (B)
with a flat-tip screwdriver.
Mirror housing replacement 5. Before reinstalling the mirror holder to the inner
holder (A) of the actuator, check the actuator rods (B)
4. Remove the mirror housing (A).
and the actuator boots (C):
-1. Remove the screws (B, C).
NOTE: Make sure each actuator rod is inserted into
-2. Release the hooks (D) and disconnect the side turn
the actuator securely, and each actuator boot is fully
signal light connector (E), then remove the visor (F)
seated on the actuator.
and the mirror housing.
Fastener Locations
B : S c re w ,4 C ^ : Screw, 1
6. Reconnect the mirror defogger connectors (D).

7. Reattach the hooks of the mirror holder to the
actuator, then position the mirror holder on the
actuator. Carefully push on the hook portions of the
mirror holder until the mirror holder locks into place.
8. Check the actuator operation.
Rearview Mirror Replacement
I.Turn the rearview mirror base (A) 90.
/ /
2. Slide the rearview mirror (A) down toward the bottom

of the windshield to detach it from the spring (B) in the
mount (C).
3. If necessary, remove the spring from the mount.

4. Install the rearview mirror in the reverse order of
removal.
W INDSHIELD
WINDSHIELD MOLDING
' UPPER REAR WINDOW

vLOWER REAR WINDOW


Windshield Replacement
NOTE: 6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
Put on gloves to protect your hands. back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive wire as close to the windshield (B) as possible to
with a piano wire. prevent damage to the body and the dashboard.
Use seat covers to avoid damaging the seats. Carefully cut through the rubber dam and the
Glass adhesive can be efficiently cut with a adhesive (C) around the entire windshield.
commercially available auto glass tool. See the tool
manufacturer's instructions for details.
Windshield side trims, both sides (see page 20-155)
Hood hinge cover (see page 20-154)
Rearview mirror (see page 20-26)
Front pillar trims, both sides (see page 20-54)
Roof moldings, both sides (see page 20-156)
2. Remove the windshield molding (see page 20-32).
3. If the old windshield will be reinstalled, make
alignment marks across the windshield and the body
with a grease pencil.
4. Pull down the front area of the headliner (see page
Cutting positions
20-73). Take care not to bend the headliner
excessively, or you may crease or break it.
5. Apply protective tape along the edge of the
dashboard and the body. Make a hole with an awl
through the rubber dam and the adhesive from inside
the vehicle at a corner of the windshield. Push a piece
of piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end
around a piece of wood.
7. Carefully remove the windshield. 11. Apply glass primer to the upper clips mounting areas
on the windshield (C), and let it dry. Remove the
8. Scrape smooth the old adhesive with a knife until
adhesive backing, and attach the rubber dams A and
there is a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in) on the B and the upper clips (D) to the inside of the
bonding surface around the entire windshield windshield as shown:
opening flange:
Make sure the rubber dams and the upper clips line
Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the up with the alignment marks (E).
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
Be careful not to touch the windshield where
bonding.
adhesive will be applied.
Remove the rubber dams and the upper clips from
the body.
9. Clean the body bonding surface with a shop towel
dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep
oil, grease, and water from getting on the clean
surface.
10. If the old windshield will be installed, scrape off all of
the old adhesive, the upper clips and the rubber dams
from the windshield with a putty knife. Clean the
inside face and the edge of the windshield with
isopropyl alcohol where new adhesive is to be
applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of
water, oil, and grease.
(cont'd)
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
12. Attach the windshield molding (A) with adhesive tape 16. Apply a light coat of glass primer to the windshield (A)
(B) to the edge of the windshield (C): along the edge of the molding (B) and the rubber
Make sure each corner of the molding lines up with dams (C) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze
the ones of the windshield. or cheesecloth:
Be careful not to touch the windshield where With the printed dots (D) on the windshield as a
adhesive will be applied. guide, apply glass primer to the windshield.
Apply glass primer to the molding.
Do not apply body primer to the windshield, and do
not mix up the body primer applicators and the
glass primer applicators.
Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If
you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
windshield properly, causing a leak after the
windshield is installed.
Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from
the primed surface.
:Apply glass primer here.
/, V
13. Attach the windshield side molding (D) with adhesive

tape to the edge of the windshield:
upper edge of the windshield side molding and the
windshield molding.
14. Set the windshield (A) in the opening, and center it.
Make alignment marks (B) across the windshield and
the body with a grease pencil at the four points
shown:
Make sure the upper clips (C) contact with the edge
of the body holes. Be careful not to touch the
windshield where adhesive will be applied.
Inside
11 mm
(0.43 in)
i
17. Carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any 19. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to
exposed paint or metal around the flange where the ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
new adhesive will be applied. Let the body primer dry caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around
for at least 10 minutes: Jf, the windshield (B) along the edge of the windshield
Do not apply body primer to any remaining original molding (C) and the rubber dams (D) as shown:
adhesive on the flange.
NOTE: Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after
Be careful not to mix up the body primer applicators applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker
and the glass primer applicators. bead at each corner.
Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
12 mm
Cover the dashboard before applying the primer. (0.47 in)
18. Cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) on the adhesive
cartridge as shown.
Windshield Replacement (cont'd) Windshield Molding Replacement
20. Hold the windshield with suction cups over the Special Tools Required
opening, align it with the alignment marks made in KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014*
step 14, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push *Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
on the windshield until its edges are fully seated on Program, 888-424-6857
the adhesive all the way around.
NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for about, NOTE:
an hour until the adhesive is dry. Take care not to damage the body or the glass.
21. Remove the excess adhesive with a putty knife or a Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
shop towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol. avoid damage when removing components.
22. Wait at least an hour for the adhesive to dry, then 1. Remove these items:
spray water over the windshield and check for leaks. Windshield side trims, both sides (see page 20-155)
Mark leaking areas, and let the windshield dry, then Hood hinge cover (see page 20-154)
seal with sealant Let the vehicle stand for at least 4
hours after windshield installation. If the vehicle has 2. Remove the windshield molding (A) from the upper
to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven edge of the windshield (B). If necessary, cut the
slowly. windshield molding with a utility knife.

NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following & A
things for 2 to 3 days:
Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up.
Twist the body excessively (such as when going in
and out of driveways at an angle or driving over /
rough, uneven roads).
/
3. Remove the windshield side molding (C) from the

upper edge of the windshield. If necessary, cut the
windshield side molding with a utility knife.
4. Scrape off the excess old adhesive (A) or remaining 6. Apply a light coat of glass primer to the attaching
double-sided adhesive tape (B) from the windshield surface (A) of the windshield using a 2 mm (0.08 in)
(C) with a putty knife: Do not scrape down to the nozzle, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or
painted surface of the body; damaged paint will cheesecloth:
interfere with proper bonding. Do not apply body primer.
Attach the molding within 30 minutes after applying
the glass primer.
' //////// : Appl y glass primer here.
5. Clean the windshield attaching surface and the body

with a shop towel dampened in isopropyl alcohol. Be
careful not to touch the windshield where the new 7. Apply the adhesive to the applied area of the glass
adhesive will be applied. primer. Attach the molding within 5 minutes after
applying the adhesive.
Windshield Molding Replacement (cont'd)
8. Fold back the edges of the adhesive backing (A) on the 10. With a plastic spatula, push the back of the molding
new windshield moldings (B) on each side. (A) against the edge of the windshield (B) from end to
end.
\
\
9. Pull out the edge of the adhesive backing to the

outside, and set both the right and left ends of the
w i ndshield molding in position according to its angle.
Then set the upper edge of the windshield side
molding in position and align it with the lower edge of
the windshield molding.
molding adhesive tape will be applied.
upper edge of the windshield side molding and the
windshield molding.
11. Carefully pull the entire adhesive backing (A) away 12. Press the entire windshield molding (A) against the
while pulling up the edge of the moldings (B). Take edge of the windshield with a plastic spatula to attach
care not to tear off the adhesive backing. the adhesive tape. To prevent twisting, push the
molding into place evenly and securely from end to
NOTE; Pull while opening the lip part of the molding at
end.
the same time. Pull off the adhesive backing
completely, and make sure not to tear and leave any
adhesive backing.
A
13. After installing, check the molding for kinks or

twisting.
14. Reinstall all removed parts.
Quarter Glass Replacement
NOTE: 4. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
Put on gloves to protect your hands. back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive wire as close to the quarter glass (B) as possible to
with a piano wire. prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut
through the adhesive (C) around the entire quarter
Use seat covers to avoid damaging the seats.
glass.
1. Remove the center pillar trim (see page 20-57).
2. Remove the quarter glass molding (A) from the edge
of the quarter glass (B). If necessary, cut the molding
with a utility knife.
Cutting positions
3. Apply protective tape to along the inside and outside

edges of the body. Make a hole with an awl through
the adhesive from inside the vehicle. Push a piece of
piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end
around a piece of wood.
A
5. With a helper on the out side, hold the quarter glass 10. Apply glass primer to the edge of the quarter glass
with suction cups, then detach the clips (A, B). (A), and let it dry. Remove the adhesive backing and
attach the quarter glass molding (B) to the inside of
Fastener Locations
the quarter glass.
A 0 : Clip, 1 B t> ; Clip, 1
Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where the
A H ^ ; Apply glass primer here.
6. Carefully remove the quarter glass (C).

7. Scrape smooth the old adhesive with a putty knife
until there is a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in) on the
bonding surface around the entire quarter glass
opening flange:
Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
bonding.
Remove the clips, the fasteners, and the rubber
dams from the body.
oil, grease, and water from getting on the clean
surface.
9. If the old quarter glass will be installed, scrape off the
old adhesive and the rubber dam from the quarter 11. Apply glass primer to the clips mounting areas on the
glass with a putty knife. Clean the bonding surface on quarter glass, and let it dry. Remove the adhesive
the inside face and the edge of the quarter glass with backing, and attach the rubber dam (C), the clips (D),
isopropyl alcohol. Make sure the bonding surface is the fasteners (E) and the seal (F) to the inside of the
kept free of water, oil, and grease. quarter glass as shown.
Make sure the rubber dams, the fasteners, and the
clips line up with the alignment marks (G).
Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where the
(cont'd)
Quarter Glass Replacement (cont'd)
12. Attach the fastener with adhesive tape to the body as 13. Appl y a light coat of glass primer along the edge of
shown. Make sure the fastener aligns with the the quarter glass (A), the molding (B), and the rubber
alignment mark (A). dam (C) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze
or cheesecloth:
Fastener Location
t>: Fastener, 1 With the printed dots (D) on the quarter glass as a
guide, apply the glass primer to the upper, lower,
and rear corner portions of the quarter glass.
Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass, and
do not mix up the body primer applicators and
glass primer applicators.
you do, the adhesive may not bond to the quarter
glass properl y, causing a leak after the quarter glass
is installed.
the primed surfaces.
'/// /// // : Apply glass primer here.

14. Careful ly apply a light coat of body primer to any 16. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to
exposed paint or metal around the flange where new ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
adhesive will be applied. Let the body primer dry for caulking gun, and run a continuous bead of adhesive
at least 10 minutes: (A) around the edge of the quarter glass (B) and along
@Do not apply body primer to any remaining original the molding (C) and the rubber dam (D) as shown.
adhesive on the flange. NOTE: Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after
Be careful not to mix up the body primer applicators applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker
and glass primer applicators. bead at each corner.
Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
10 mm
m Cover the interior parts before applying the primer.
W /M /: Apply body prim er to any exposed paint as shown.
cartridge as shown.
(cont'd)
Quarter Glass Replacement (cont'd) Upper Rear Window Replacement
17. Hold the quarter glass (A) over the opening with NOTE:
suction cups, align it with the clips (B, C) and the Put on gloves to protect your hands.
fastener (D), and set it down on the adhesi ve. Li ghtly Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive
push on the quarter glass until its edges are fully with a piano wire.
seated on the adhesive all the way around.
Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for about Glass adhesive can be efficiently cut with a
an hour until the adhesive is dry. commercially available auto glass tool. See the tool
Fastener Locations
manufacturer's instructions for details.
B > : Clip, 1 C > : Clip, 1 D > : Fastener, 1 Do not damage the upper rear window defogger grid
lines and terminals.
1. Remove these-items: .
Hatch upper trim (see page 20-66)
Hatch spoiler (see page 20-157)
Rear window wiper motor (see page 22-310)
2. Remove the lower seal (A) from the edge of the upper
rear window. If necessary, cut the lower seal with a
utility knife.
ft
18. Remove the excess adhesive with a putty knife or a

shop towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol. -
A
19. Wait at least one hour for the adhesive to dry, then Replace.
spray water over the quarter glass and check for
3. Disconnect the window antenna connector (A), the
leaks. Mark leaking areas, and let the quarter glass
hatch ground connector (B), and the upper rear
dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at
window defogger connectors (C).
least 4 hours after quarter glass installation. If the
vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must
be driven slowly.
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following
S l am the doors with all the windows rolled up.
and out of driveways at an angle or driving over
4. If the old upper rear window will be reinstalled, make 6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
alignment marks (A) across the glass and the body back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
with a grease pencil. wire as close to the upper rear window (B) as possible
to prevent damage to the hatch, and carefully cut
through the adhesive (C) around the entire upper rear
window.
5. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside

edges of the hatch. Make a hole with an awl through
the adhesive from inside the vehicle at a corner
portion of the upper rear window. Push the piano wire
through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece
of wood.
Upper Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
7. Carefully remove the upper rear window. 12. Apply glass primer to the edge of the upper rear
window (A) where the new lower seal (B) will be
attached as shown. Attach the lower seal with
adhesive tape to the lower edge of the upper rear
bonding surface around the entire upper rear window
window:
opening flange:
Be careful not to touch the window where the
Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the
body; damaged paint will interface with proper
bonding. Make sure the lower seal line up with the alignment
marks (C).
Remove the fasteners and rubber dam from the
hatch. After installing the lower seal, cut the ends (D) of the
lower seal as shown.
dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep : Apply glass primer here.
oil, grease and water from getting on the surface.
10. If you are installing the new upper rea r wi ndow, install
the rear wiper seal (A) on the upper rear window with
its alignment mark (B) aligned with the mark (C) on
the upper rear window.
11. If the old upper rear window will be installed, scrape

off all of the old adhesive, the fasteners, and the
rubber dams from the upper rear window with a putty
knife. Clean the bonding surfaces on the inside face
and the edge of the upper rear window with isopropyl
alcohol. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of
water, oil, and grease.
13. Apply glass primer to the fasteners (A, B) mounting 14. Attach the fasteners (A, B) to the hatch as shown.
areas on the upper rear window (C), and let it dry.
Fastener Locations
Attach the rubber dam (D) and the fasteners with the
A t>: Fastener, 2 B O : Fastener, 2
adhesive tape to the inside face of the upper rear
window as shown.
Make sure the rubber dam and the fasteners align
with the alignment marks (E).
Be careful not to touch the upper rear window B
where adhesive will be applied.
Make sure the rubber dam contacts with the lower
seal (F). If necessary, cut the excess rubber dam. ? A
N ik 3 1 .
15. Set the upper rear window (A) in the opening, and
center it. Make alignment marks (B) across the upper
rear window and the body with a grease pencil at the
four points shown. Be careful not to touch the upper
rear window where the adhesive will be applied.
Match both fasteners (C) with the body holes on the
upper rear window glass.
Replace.
16. Remove the upper rear window.

Upper Rear W indow Replacement (cont'd)
17. Apply a light coat of glass primer to the upper rear 18. Carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any
window (A) along the edge of the rubber dams (B) and exposed paint or metal around the flange where new
lower seal (C) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with adhesive will be applied. Let the body primer dry for
gauze or cheesecloth: at least 10 minutes:
Apply the glass primer to the corner areas of the Do not apply body primer to any remaining original
upper rear window using the printed dots (D) on the adhesive on the flange.
upper rear window as a guide. Be careful not to mix up the body primer applicators
Do not apply body primer to the upper rear window, and the glass primer applicators.
and do not mix up the body primer applicators and Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
the glass primer applicators.
: Apply body primer here.
you do, the adhesive may not bond to the upper
rear window properly, causing a leak after the
upper rear window is installed.
cartridge as shown.
1 in)
7 mm
(0.28 in)
20. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to 21. Hold the upper rear window with suction cups over
ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a the opening, align it with the alignment marks you
caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) to the made in step 15, and set it down on the adhesive.
upper rear window (B) along the edge of the rubber Lightly push on the upper rear window until its edges
dams (C) and the lower seal (D) as shown: are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around.
With the printed dots (E) on the upper rear window NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for about
as a guide, apply the adhesive to both side portions an hour until the adhesive is dry.
of the upper rear window.
Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after 22. Remove the excess adhesive with a putty knife or a
applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker shop towel dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
bead at each corner. 23. Wait at least an hour for the adhesive to dry, then
spray water over the upper rear window and checkfor
leaks. Mark the leaking areas, let the upper rear
window dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle
stand for at least 4 hours after upper rear window
installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the
first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly.
Replace.
Lower Rear W indow Replacement
NOTE: 4. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside

Put on gloves to protect your hands. edges of the hatch. Make holes with an awl through
Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive the adhesive from inside the vehicle at a corner of the
with piano wire. lower rear window. Push a piece of piano wire
through the hole and wrap each end around a piece
Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surface.
wood.
Glass adhesive can be efficiently cut with a
commercially available auto glass tool. See the tool 5. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
manufacturer's instructions for details. back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
Do not damage the lower rear window defogger grid wire as close to the lower rear window (B) as possible
lines and terminals. to prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut
through the adhesive (C).
1. Remove the hatch spoiler (see page 20-157).
2. Disconnect the lower rear window defogger A
connectors (A).
M M
3. Remove the rubber dam (A, B) from the edge of the

lower rear window (C). If necessary, cut off the rubber
dam with a utility knife. Cutting positions
/ Repl ace.
6. Detach the clips that hold the lower rear window (A), 10. Remove the adhesive backing, and attach the rubber
then carefully remove the lower rear window. dam (A, B) to the inside of the lower rear window (C)
as shown:
Fastener Locations
D>: Clips, 2 Make sure the rubber dams line up with the
alignment marks (D).
Be careful not to touch the lower rear window
where the adhesive will be applied.
4 After installing the rubber dams, cut the ends of the
rubber dam along the edge of the lower rear
window.
<} W//M ' App ly g l ass primer here.
< 1 mm
V

bonding surface around the entire lower rear window
opening flange.
NOTE: Do not scrape down to the painted surface of
the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
bonding.
oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface.
9. If the old window will be installed, scrape off all of old
adhesive, the clips, and the rubber dam from the
lower rear window with a putty knife. Clean the
bonding surfaces on the inside face and the edge of
the lower rear window with isopropyl alcohol. Make
sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil, and
grease.
Lower Rear W indow Replacement (cont'd)
11. Apply glass primer to the clip mounting areas on the 13. Apply a light coat of glass primer to the lower rear
lower rear window (C), and let it dry. Attach the window (C) along the edge of the rubber dam (A, B) as
fasteners (A, B) and the clips (D) with the adhesive shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or
tape to the inside face of the lower rear window as cheesecloth:
shown: Apply the glass primer to the corner areas of the
Be careful not to touch the lower rear window lower rear window using the printed dots (D) on the
where the adhesive will be applied. lower rear window as a guide.
Make sure the fasteners and the clips line up with Do not apply body primer to the lower rear window,
the alignment marks (E). and do not mix up the body primer applicators and
the glass primer applicators.
you do, the adhesive may not bond to the lower
rear window properly, causing a leak after the lower
rear window is installed.
W/M : Apply glass primer here.
Fastener Locations
A D>: Fastener, 2 B t>: Fastener, 1
XT
*7A
^B
Â'
14. Carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any 16. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to
exposed paint or metal around the flange where the ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
new adhesive will be applied. Let the body primer dry caulking gun, and run a continuous bead of adhesive
for at least 10 minutes: (C) around the lower rear window (D) along the edge
Do not apply body primer to any remaining old of the rubber dam (A, B) as shown:
adhesive on the flange. Use the printed dots (E) as a guide when you apply
Be careful not to mix up the body primer applicators the adhesive to the corners of the lower rear
and the glass primer applicators. window.
Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after
Cover the interior parts before applying the primer. applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker
bead at each corner.
cartridge as shown.
(0.28 in)
Lower Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
17. Hold the lower rear window (A) with suction cups
over the opening, align the clips and fastener (B), and
set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the lower
rear window until its edges are fully seated on the
adhesive all the way around.
* NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for about
an hour until the adhesive is dry.
Fastener Locations
O: Clip, 2
'B
18. Remove the excess adhesive with a putty knife or a

shop towel dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
19. Wait at least an hour for the adhesive to dry, then
spray water over the lower rear window and check for
leaks. Mark the leaking areas, let the lower rear
window dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle
stand for at least 4 hours after lower rear window
installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the
first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly.
FRONT PILLAR TRIM /S U N V IS 0 R

Removal/Installation, page 20-54 Removal/Installation, page 20-68
'DOOR OPENING SEAL
Removal/Installati on, page 20-52
HATCH UPPER TRIM
Removal/Install ation, page 20-66
KICK PANEL
Removal/Installation, page 20-52 /HATCH MIDDLE TRIM
/ Removal/Instal lation, page 20-66
DOOR S I LL TRIM
CARPET REAR TRIM PANEL

Replacement, page 20-76 Removal/Installation, page 20-64
HATCH LOWER TRIM
HEADLINER HATCH SIDE TRIM
Removal/Install ation, page 20-73 Removal/Installation, page 20-66
CARGO FLOOR LID
BULKHEAD COVER
CENTER PILLAR TRIM
REAR PILLAR TRIM

REAR SIDE TRIM PANEL

CARGO FLOOR SIDE BOX


Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the driver's kick panel (A) or the passenger's
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJ ATP2014# kick panel (B).
Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment -1. Pull out the door opening seal (C) as needed from
Program, 888-424-6857 the kick panel hooks and the door opening flange.
-2. Detach the hooks (D) from the door sill trim (E).
NOTE: .... -3. Pull back the kick panel by hand to detach the clips
Put on gloves to protect your hands. (F, G).
Take care not to bend or scratch the trim or the panels. -4. Driver's side: Disconnect the footwell light
connector (H).
-5. Driver's side: Pass the hood release handle (I)
through the hole in the panel, then remove it.
1. Remove these items: Driver's side
Driver's dashboard undercover (see page 20-86)
Fastener Lo cat i ons
Passenger's dashboard undercover (see page F D> : Clip, 1 G O ; Clip, 1
20-94) (Light (Green)
green)
9 < 9 f
E D
Passenger's side 6. Remove the door sill trim (A).
Fastener Locati ons -1. Pull out the door openi ng seal (B) as needed from
F D> : Clip, 1 G D> : Clip, 1 the door sill trim.
(Light (Green) -2. Pull up the door sill trim by hand to detach the clips
green)
(C, D), then remove the trim. The clips (D) will stay
in the body holes.
-3. Remove the clips from the body holes, then install
the clips to the door sill trim.
Fastener Locations
C, D D> ; Clip, 6
F ( > >
/
B "D E
3. Slide the seat forward fu l ly,
7. Pull out the door opening seal (A) from the trim hooks
4. Remove the driver's seat belt lower anchor bolt (see (B) and around the door opening flange, then remove
step 3 on page 24-4). the seal.
5. Remove the rear side trim panel (see page 20-64).

note these items:
them with new ones.
Push the clips and the hooks into place securely.
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas
Special Tools Required 1. Pull the door opening seal away from the front pillar
KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014* as needed (see step 7 on page 20-53).
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment 2. Hit the upper clip (A) in the front pillar trim (B) with a
Program, 888-424-6857 rubber mallet. The clip is located under point (C)
where the triangle mark (D) on the edge of the trim
F ro n t P illar T rim indicates. Hitting the clip breaks the projections (E) on
SRS components are located in this area. Review the the pin (F) and pushes it into the grommet (G) on the
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the body (H).
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before NOTE: The upper clip must be replaced with a new
doing repairs or service. one when the front pillar trim is reinstalled.
NOTE;
If side airbags and/or side curtain airbags have
deployed, the affected pillar area trim and attachment
clips must be replaced. Refer to Component
Replacement/Inspection After Deployment (see page
24-163).
Take care not to scratch the trim or the panels.
The upper clip (A) in the front pillar trim (B) consists of
a plastic grommet (C) and a metal pin (D). The groove
in the grommet secures it to the body panel (E). The
projection (F) on the grommet is broken during
removal, so the clip must be replaced with a new one
when the trim is reinstalled.
3. Pull back the top of the front pillar trim (A) by hand to 5. If the side curtain airbag has been deployed, replace
remove the upper clip (B) from the body (C). the front pillar trim, along with the other parts listed
for side curtain airbag deployment (see page 24-163).
6. If the side curtain airbag has not been deployed, check
the front pillar trim (A) and note the following items:
To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the
front pillar trim and replace it with a new one if it
has any of the following damage:
0 - Any cracks, deformations, or stress-whitened
areas in the front pillar trim
- Any cracks or stress-whitening in the clip seating
surfaces (B, C)
Replace the upper clip (D) with a new one after
checking the overlap.
If the clips (E) are damaged or stress-whitened,
replace them with new ones.
4. Pull out the front pillar trim (A) by hand to detach the
clips. Pull up the trim from the dashboard (B), then
remove the trim.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 2
T rim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas (cont'd)
7. Before installing the front pillar trim (A), carefully 10. Reinstall the front pillar trim (A).
remove the new upper clip (B).
-1. Insert the bottom of the trim into the dashboard (B).
-2. Place the trim over the front pillar (C), and fit its
upper clip (D) and lower clips (E) into the holes (F) in
the front pillar, then lightly push the trim into place.
NOTE:
Make sure the side curtain airbag is not tucked
under the clips and the trim ribs.
Do not push too hard on the front pillar trim. If
you push too hard, the clip will be damaged, and
it will not hold the trim properly.
Gently tug on the front pillar trim to verify that all
clips are securely fastened.
Fastener Locations
E-t> : Clip, 2
8. Temporarily install the front pillar trim (without the

upper clip) to check the overlap between the headliner
and the front pillar trim. Remove the front pillar trim
and if necessary, adjust the overlap (see page 24-165).
9. Carefully install the new upper clip (A) to the front
pillar trim (B). Make sure that the grommet (C) is
nearest to the top of the pin (D) as shown.
Replace.
D
Replace.
11. Reinstall the door opening seal (G).

C e n te r P illar T rim 4. Remove the center pillar trim (A).
SRS components are located in this area. Review the -1. Pull back the trim by hand to detach the clips (B, C)
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the and clip (D) ('12 model).
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before -2. Pull down the trim to release the upper hook (E)
doing repairs or service. from the hole in the body, and remove it from the
headliner (F).
NOTE; -3. Pass the seat belt (G) out through the hole in the
If side airbags and/or side curtain airbags have trim, then remove the center pillar trim.
deployed, the affected pillar area trim and attachment
Fastener Locations
clips must be replaced. Refer to Component B D>: Clip, 1 C D> ; Clip Dt>: Clip
Replacement/Inspection After Deployment (see page (White) '11 model, 3 '12 model, 1
24-163). '12 model, 2 (Light yellow)
(Green)
Put on gloves to protect your hands. kJL
Take care not to bend or scratch the trim or the panels.
Door opening seal, as needed (see step 7 on page
20-53)
Rear pillar trim
2. Slide the seat forward fully.
3. Remove the driver's seat belt lower anchor bolt (see
step 3 on page 24-4). %
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas (cont'd)
5. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and R ea r P illar T rim
note these items;
If the clips (A, B) are damaged or stress-whitened SRS components are located in this area. Review the
replace them with new ones. SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the
If the si de curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
doing repairs or service.
center pillartrim and all clips on the trim, along with
the other parts l ifted for side curtain airbag NOTE:
deployment (see page 24-163). If side airbags and/or side curtain airbags have
To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying deployed, the affected pillar area trim and attachment
improperly and possibl y causing injury, inspect the clips must be replaced. Refer to Component
trim and replace it with a new one if it has any of the Replacement/Inspection After Deployment (see page
following damage: 24-163).
- Any cracks or deformations in the center pillar Put on gloves to protect your hands.
trim (C) or the upper hook (D) Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
- Any cracks or stress-whitened areas in the clip avoid damage when removing components.
seating surfaces (E) Take care not to bend or scratch the trim or the panels.
Replace any damaged parts with new ones. The upper clip (A) in the rear pillar trim (B) consists of
Make sure the top of the trim overlaps with the a grommet (C) and a pin (D). The groove in the
headliner correctly (see page 24-165). grommet secures it to the body panel (E). The
Make sure the upper hook is installed into the hole projection (F) on the grommet is broken during
in the body securely. removal, so the clip must be replaced with a new one
Push the clips and hook into place securely. when the trim is reinstalled.
Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there
are no tw i sts or kinks in the seat belt.

Hatch weatherstrip, as needed (see page 20-142).
Rear side trim panel (see page 20-64).
2. Hit the upper clip (A) in the rear pillar trim (B) with a 3. Pull back the top of the rear pillar trim (A) by hand to
rubber mallet. The clip is located under the point (C) remove the upper clip (B) from the body (Cl
where the triangle mark (D) on the edge of the trim
indicates. Hitting the clip breaks the projections (E) on
the pin (F) and pushes it into the grommet (G) on the
body (H).
NOTE: The upper clip must be replaced with a new

one when the rear pillar trim is reinstalled.
B
Replace.
iW : Replace.
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas (cont'd)
4. Remove the rear pillar trim (A). 6. If the side curtain airbag has not been deployed, check
the rear pillar trim (A) and note the following items:
-1. Pull out the trim by hand to detach the clips (B, C)
from the holes in the body, and remove it from the To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying
headliner (D). improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the
-2. Detach the hooks (E) from the center pillar trim (F). rear pillar trim and replace it with a new one if it has
any of the following damage:
Fastener Locations - Any cracks, deformations, or stress-whitened
B t>: Clip, 1 C t> : Clip, 1 areas in the rear pillar trim
(Yellow) (Pink)
- Any cracks or stress-whitening in the clip seating
surfaces (B, C, D)
Replace the upper clip (E) with a new one after
checking the overlap.
If the clips (F, G) are damaged or stress-whitened,
replace them with new ones.
/ M
5. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the

rear pillar trim, along with the other parts listed for
side curtain airbag deployment (see page 24-163).
7. Before installing the rear pillar trim (A), carefully 10. Place the rear pillar trim (A) over the rear pillar (B),
remove the new upper clip (B). and fit its upper clip (C) and the clips (D, E) into the
holes (F) in the rear pillar, then lightly push the trim
into place.
NOTE;
Make sure the side curtain airbag is not tucked
under the clips and the trim ribs.
Do not push too hard on the rear pillar trim. If you
push too hard, the clip will be damaged, and it will
not hold the trim properly.
Gently tug on the rear pillar trim to verify that all
clips are securely fastened.
Fastener Locations
D O : Clip, 1 E P> : Clip, 1
(Yellow) (Pink)
8. Temporaril y install the rear pillar trim (without the

upper clip) to checkthe overlap between the headliner
and the rear pillar trim. Remove the rear pillar trim
and if necessary, adjust the overlap.
9. Carefully install the new upper clip (A) to the rear
pillar trim (B). Make sure that the grommet (C) is
nearest to the top of the pin (D) as shown.
V i
11. Reinstall the removed parts.

Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Tray Are
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the bulkhead cover lids (A), t hen remove the
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* bolts. '-
Fastener Locations / 8 x 1.25 mm .
Program, 888-424-6857 22 N-m .
f-9 :9 9 ;. :: (2.2 kgfm , 16 Ibf-ft)
NOTE:
Have an assistant help you when removing and
installing the bulkhead cover and the rear beam.
Take care not to scratch the trim or the panels.
1. Pull up the rear tray (A) to detach the clips (B, C), then
remove it.
Fastener Locations
B l> ; Clip, 6 C D> ; C lip, 2
(Green) (W hite)
4. Pull out the alignment pins (A) of the rear beam (B)
ill from the bulkhead cover frame both sides, then
n remove the bulkhead cover (C).
a
2. Fold down the bulkhead cover.

5. Remove these items: 8. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and
IPU module air duct (see page 12-220) note these items:
Rear side trims, both sides (see page 20-64). If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones.
6. Remove the bolts, then remove the rear beam (A).
Push the clips, hooks, and pins into place securely.
. Fastener Locations Make sure the alignment pin fits into the bulkhead
: Bolt, 4 cover frame correctly.
Move the striker (A) up or down until it is centered
in the bulkhead cover latch (B).
' f
H r r
H r
.
7. If necessary, remove the bolts, then remove the

bulkhead cover striker (A).
Fastener Locations
Trim Removal/Installation - Cargo Area
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the cargo floor side boxes (A).
KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014*
Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE;
v
Take care not to bend or scratch the trim or the panels.
1. Remove the tonneau cover (A).
6. Pull up the IPU duct cover (A) by hand to detach the

clips and the hooks (B), then remove the IPU duct
cover.
t> : Clip, 3
2. Remove the rear tray (see page 20-62).

3. Remove the cargo floor lid (A).
A
4. Remove the spare tire.

7. If necessary, remove the bol ts, then remove the spare 10. Remove these items:
tire beam (A). Rear tray light (see page 22-269)
Fastener Locations Door openi ng seal as needed (see step 7 on page
20-53)
Hatch weatherstrip as needed (see page 20-142)
11. Remove the rear side trim panel (A).
-1. Pull out the top of the trim by hand to detach hooks
(B) from the center pillar trim (C) and the rear pillar
trim (D).
-2. Release the pin (E) of the rear edge of the trim panel
from the hole in the body.
-3. Pull back the trim panel by hand to detach the clips
(F, G, H) and clips (I) (12 model).
-4. Disconnect the cargo area light connector (J) on the
left side.
Fastener Locations
F t>: Clip G O: Clip, 1 H i> :C !ip , 1 I O: Clip
mo model, 7 (Brown) (Pink) 12 model, 2
((Jranget (Lightye.low ,
8. Remove the hatch weatherstrip as needed.

9. Remove the rear trim panel (A).
-1. Detach the hooks (B, C) on both sides from both
rear side trim panels (D).
-2. Pull up the rear trim panel by hand to detach the
clips.
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip, 4
V
-
(cont'd)
Trim Removal/Installation - Cargo Trim Removal/Installation - Hatch
Area (cont'd) Area
12. If necessary, remove the quarter hole seal (A). Special Tools Required
-1. Remove the rear speaker (see page 23-122). KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2Q14*
-2. Detach the harness clip (B). *Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE;
Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels.
1. Insert the appropriate trim tool (A) into the notch (B).
Pry up the pull pocket (C) to detach the hooks (D),then
remove it.

note these items:
them with new ones.
Push the clips, the hooks, and the pin into place
securely.
Left side: Make sure the cargo area light connector
is plugged in properly.
2. Remove the hatch lower trim (A). 4. Remove the hatch side trims (A).
-1. Detach the hooks (B) from both hatch side trims (C). -1. Detach the hooks (B) from the hatch upper trim (C).
-2. Pull the hatch lower trim back by hand to detach the -2. Pull out the hatch side trims by hand to detach the
clips, then remove it. clips (D, E, F), then remove them.
Fastener Locati ons Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 6 D > : Clip, 5 E > : Clip, 2 F > : Clip, 1
(Green) (Orange) (Purple)
m u m u m u
n o
J r J r J r
B
3. Remove the hatch middle trim (A). 5. Pull out the hatch upper trim (A) by hand to detach the
clips and the pin (B), then remove it.
-1. Detach the hooks (B) from both hatch side trims (C).
-2. Pull out the hatch middle trim by hand to detach the Fastener Locations
clips, then remove it. > ; Clip, 4
Fastener Locations
D> : Clip, 3 A
note these items:

them with new ones.
Push the clips, the pin, and the hooks into place
securely.
Sunvisor Removal/Installation
'11 model 2. While pushing in the hook (A) with the flat-tip
screwdriver, release the sunvisor (B) from the holder
NOTE: (C), and rotate the sunvisor backward about 45 .
Put on gloves to protect your hands. Make sure the hook slides into the bracket cover (D) as
Take care not to damage the sunvisor or the headliner. you rotate the sunvisor.
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver through the hole in the
front side of the bracket cover (A), and push the hook
(B). Make sure the hook is unlocked.
3. Pull down the sunvisor (A) to release the pin (B) and
the bracket (C) from the holes in the body. Then pull
out the vanity mirror light connector (D) and
disconnect it, if equipped.
NOTE: If the sunvisor cannot be pulled down, the
hook has not rotated into the bracket cover. Repeat
step 2 to rotate the hook.
* im H
4. Insert the flat-tip screwdriver into one of the notches 7. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, inspect the
on the holder (A), and push the hooks (B) of the sunvisor for damage. A damaged sunvisor may cause
holder, then pull down the one side of the holder. the side curtain airbags to deploy improperly,
possibly causing injury. Replace the sunvisor if it has
NOTE: Push all of the hooks with the flat-tip
screwdriver.
Any cracks in the sunvisor bracket (A)
Any cracks in the sunvisor bracket cover (B)
Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor shaft (C)
Any cracks in the sunvisor base (D)
Any cracks in the vanity mirror base (E)
5. While inserting a finger in the gap of the holder (A)

and the headliner (B), insert the flat-tip screwdriver
into the other notch to detach the hooks (C). Then 8. Install the holder (A) to the body by pushing it until the
remove the holder from the body. hooks (B) snap into place securely.
NOTE: If the holder is damaged or stress-whitened,
replace it with new one.

sunvisor with a new one.
(contd)
Sunvisor Removal/Installation (cont'd)
9. Connect the vanity mirror light connector (A), if '12 model

equipped.
NOTE:
Take care not to damage the sunvisor orthe headliner.
1. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver through the hole in the
front side of the bracket cover (A), and push the hook
(B). Make sure the hook is unlocked.
10. Install the sunvisor (B) by inserting the bracket (C) and
the pin (D) of the bracket cover (E) into the holes in the
body.
11. While holding the bracket cover (A), rotate the
sunvisor (B) forward until the hook (C) snaps into
place. Gently pull down on the sunvisor to make sure
it is properly secured in the body. Rotate the sunvisor
into the holder (D).
2. While pushing in the hook (A) with the flat-tip 4. Turn the holder (A) 45 counterclockwise, and pull it
screwdriver, release the sunvisor (B) from the holder down to remove it from the holder grommet (B).
(C), and rotate the sunvisor backward about 45 .
Make sure the hook slides into the bracket cover (D) as
you rotate the sunvisor.
5. Pry out the holder grommet (A) from the body by

pinching its hooks (B).
3. Pull down the sunvisor (A) to release the pin (B) and
the bracket (C) from the holes in the body. Then pull
out the vanity mirror light connector (D) and
disconnect it, if equipped.
NOTE: If the sunvisor cannot be pulled down, the
hook has not rotated into the bracket cover. Repeat
step 2 to rotate the hook.

sunvisor with a new one.
(cont'd)
Sunvisor Removal/Installation (cont'd)
7. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, inspect the 9. Connect the vanity mirror light connector (A), if
sunvisor for damage. A damaged sunvisor may cause equipped.
the side curtain airbags to deploy improperly,
possibly causing injury. Replace the sunvisor if it has
Any cracks in the sunvisor bracket (A)
Any cracks in the sunvisor bracket cover (B)
Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor shaft (C)
Any cracks in the sunvisor base (D)
Any cracks in the vanity mirror base (E)
10. Install the sunvisor (B) by inserting the bracket (C) and
the pin (D) of the bracket cover (E) into the holes in the
body.
11. While holding the bracket cover (A), rotate the
sunvisor (B) forward until the hook (C) snaps into
place. Gently pull down on the sunvisor to make sure
D it is properly secured in the body. Rotate the sunvisor
into the holder (D).
8. Install the holder (A) i nto the holder grommet (B) by
turning it 45 clockwise, and install them into the
body as an assembly by pushing it until the hooks (C)
snap securely into place.
Headliner Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Lower the headliner (A).

KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* -1. Remove the door opening seals (B) and the hatch
Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment weatherstrip (C) from each roof portion.
Program, 888-424-6857 -2. Detach the clips from the body.
-3. With the help of an assistant, lower the headliner.
SRS components are located in this area. Review the
Fastener Locations
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the
t> : Clip, 2
NOTE:
Take care not to bend or scratch the headliner.
Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other
interior trim.
Center pillar trims, both sides (see page 20-57)
Individual map light (see page 22-263)
Sunvisors and holders, both sides (see page 20-68)
2. Slide the both seats all the way forward, then recline
the seat-back fully.
3. Remove the bolt from the end of the headliner on
each side.
NOTE: Left side is shown, right side is similar.
(0.96 k g fm ,
6.9 Ibfft)
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
5. With the help of an assistant/pull out the headliner (A) Roof side bracket replacement
through the passenger's door opening.
6. If necessary, remove the bolt, then remove the roof
NOTE; Do not bend the headliner. Bending the side bracket (A) from each side by releasing the hook
headliner will crease and damage it. (B).
-1. M/T model: Position the shift lever in reverse. Fastener Location
-2. CVT model: Move the shift lever to D. . B o lt 1
-3. Match the center pillar part of the headliner with the
passenger's door opening.
-4. Turn the headliner inside and face the front edge of
the headliner to the passenger's seat side.
-5. Pull out the headliner by avoiding the driver side
front edge to be in contact with front side of the
passenger's side door panel.
-6. Close the right and left width of the headliner a little
and pull out the headliner from the passenger's
door opening.
6 x 1,0 mm
9.4 N-m *
(0.96 kgf-m , 6.9 Ib fft)
7. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal, Headliner
and note these items;
If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
headliner, along with the other parts listed for side
curtain airbag deployment (see page 24-163).
To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the
headliner and all removed trim. Replace any pieces
with the following damage:
- Any creases or tears in the headliner (A)
- Any damage around the sunvisor holes (B) in the
headliner
- Any cracks in the sunvisor bracket (C)
- Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor shaft (D)
-A n y cracks in the sunvisor base (E)
- Any cracks in the sunvisor bracket cover (F)
- Any cracks or breaks in the vanity mirror base (G)
Sunvisor
them with new ones.
Check that both sides of the headliner are securely
attached to the trim.
Make sure the headliner overlaps the trim pieces
correctly (see page 24-165).
When reinstalling the headliner through the
passenger's door opening, be careful not to fold or
bend it. Also, be careful not to scratch the body.
Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
Carpet Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the carpet (A).

KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* -1. Cut the carpet in the area (B) as shown.
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment -2. Pull out the floor wire harnesses (C) through the
Program, 888-424-6857 holes in the carpet.
-3. Fold the carpet lightly, and pull out it through the
SRS components are located in this area. Review the door opening.
NOTE:
Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet.
Be careful not to damage the dashboard or the interior
trim.
Seats, both sides (see page 20-109)
Door sill trims, both sides (see page 20-52)
Rear tray (see page 20-62)
Steering joint cover (see step 6 on page 17-13)
Parking brake lever (see page 19-39)
Heel stopper replacement
2. Remove the bolts (A, B) and detach the harness clips
(C), then remove the base bracket (D). 4. If necessary, detach the clip, then remove the heel
stopper (A).
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 2 B : Bolt, 4 Fastener Location
> : Clip, 1
A
5. Install the carpet in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
Take care not to damage, wrinkle, or twist the
carpet.
Make sure the floor wire harnesses are routed
correctly.
them with new ones.
REAR CONSOLE .
CENTER CONSOLE
Removal/I nstal lation, page 20-79
Center Console Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the center console panel (A).

-1. Pry up on the rear edge of the center console panel
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment with the appropriate trim tool to detach the clips (B).
Program, 888-424-6857 -2. Insert the appropriate trim tool in the groove at
front of the center console panel to detach the clips
SRS components are located in this area. Review the (C).
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and -3. With seat heater: Disconnect the driver's seat
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before heater switch connector (D) and the passenger's
doing repair or service. seat heater switch connector (E).
NOTE; Fastener Locations
B, C > ; Clip, 5
Take care not to scratch the seat, the dashboard, or the
related parts.
1. M/T model: Remove the shift lever trim (see page
13-97).
2. CVT model: Insert the appropriate trim tool to the
groove (A) at front of the A/T gear position indicator
panel trim (B) to detach the clips (C), then remove the
A/T gear position indicator panel trim.
Fastener Locations
C D> : Clip, 6
$
%
mm
4. Remove the dashboard center lower trim (see page
o 20-88).
Center Console Removal/Installation (cont'd)
5. Remove the center console lid (A). 7. Pry up on the rear edge of the parking brake cover lid
(A) to detach the hooks (B), then remove it.
-1. Remove the front console mat (B).
-2. insert the appropriate trim tool into the notch (C) of
the center console lid to detach the hooks (D).
8. Remove the center console (A).

-1. Slide both seats forward fully.
-2. Remove the screws (B, C), and detach the clips (D).
6. With seat heater: Disconnect the seat heater switch -3. Pry up the rear portion of the center console to
subharness connector (A). detach the clip (E).
-4. Pull out the front portion of the center console from
the dashboard.
. Fastener Locations
B . S crew ,2 C ^ : Screw,2 D l> : Clip , 4 E t> : Clip, 1
E
, ;
V'*-. V v
> V D VD
r
Rear Console Removal/Installation
9. If necessary, detach the harness clips (A) and remove Special Tools Required
the bolts, then remove the center console bracket (B). KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2G14*
Fastener Locations Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
: Bolt, 2 Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
___ __ _____ i A
Take care not to scratch the center console or the
related parts.
1. Insert the appropriate trim tool into the notch (A) of
the rear console (B) to detach the clips, then remove it.
Fastener Locatio ns
D> : Clip, 7
Ml
g a
22 N-m 9
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 ibf-ft)
10. Instal l the console i n the reverse order of removal,

them with new once.
Make sure the w i re harness is not pinched.
2. Install the console in the reverse order of removal,
them with new ones.
DASHBOARD/STEERING HANGER BEAM

DASHBOARD SIDE LID Removal/Installation, page 20-100
UPPER POCKET
Removal/I nstallation, page 20-87
DASHBOARD
DASHBOARD UPPER PANEL

Removal/I nstal l ation, page 20-97
PASSENGER'S DASHBOARD
PANEL
PASSENGER'S MIDDLE PANEL

Removal/Instal lation, page 20-93
COLUMN COVER
Removal/ GLOVE BOX LID
I nstallation, page 20-96 Replacement, page 20-95
GLOVE BOX
PASSENGERS DASHBOARD
UNDERCOVER
Removal/Instal l ation, page 20-94
DASHBOARD CENTER UPPER TRIM

FUSE LID PANEL Removal/Installation, page 20-88
DASHBOARD CENTER
LOWER COVER
DRIVER'S DASHBOARD
LOWER COVER DASHBOARD CENTER LOWER TRIM
Removal/Installation, page 20-85 Removal/Install ation, page 20-88
DRIVER'S DASHBOARD
UNDERCOVER
Removal/Instal lation, page 20-86
Instrument Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Disconnect the switch connectors from the

KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* instrument panel (A).
Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment -1. Remove the fuse lid panel (see page 20-85).
Program, 888-424-6857 -2. Disconnect the connectors (B, C) at the driver's
dashboard lower cover opening.
NOTE: -3. Gently pull out the left side edge of the panel to
Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the related detach the clips.
parts. -4. Disconnect the connectors (D, E) at the gap of the
Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to instrument panel and the dashboard.
avoid damage when removing components. Fastener Locations
1. Release the tilt/telescopic lever, tilt the steering > ; Clip, 2 ,

column all the way down, and pull it all the way out.
Instrument Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. Disconnect the climate control unit connector (A). 4. Gently pull out along the edge of the instrument panel
(A) to detach the clips, then remove it.
-1. Gently pull out the right side edge of the panel to
detach the clips. Fastener Locati ons
-2. Disconnect the connector at the gap of the > : Clip, 14
instrument panel and the dashboard.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 2
5. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
them with new ones.
Fuse Lid Panel Removal/Installation Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014# KTC Trim Tool Set SC3JATP2014*
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment *Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program/888-424-6857 Program, 888-424-6857
Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the related NOTE:

parts. Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the related
Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to parts.
avoid damage when removing components. Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
1. Pull out the bottom edge of the fuse lid panel (A), then avoid damage when removing components.
remove it from the bottom to the top to detach the 1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-83).
hooks (B).
3. Pull out along edge of the driver's dashboard lower
cover (A) to detach the clips, then remove the cover.
Fastener Locati ons
t> : Clip, 7
B '- O
< 9 '<]
2. Install the lid panel in the reverse order of removal,
and push the hooks into place securely.
m g l
EM
Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover Driver's Dashboard Undercover
Switch tr i m replacement NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the
related parts.
4. Remove the switch trim (A) from the driver's
dashboard lower cover (B). 1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover (A).
-1. Detach the hooks (C), then remove the switch lid -1. Turn the lock knob (B) 90 .
(D). -2. Gently pull down the front edge to detach the clips
-2. Remove the screws and detach the hooks (E), then (C,D).
remove the trim. -3. Pull away the undercover to release the pin (E) from
the hole in the kick panel (F).
Fastener Locations
Screw, 2 Fastener Locations
C E> : Clip, 1 D l> ; Clip, 1
il
u
>
.B
5. Install the l ower cover in the reverse order of removal,

them with new ones.
2. Install the undercover in the reverse order of removal,
them with new ones.
Push the clips and pin into place securely.
Upper Pocket Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required' 3. If necessary, detach the hooks (A), then remove the
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* mat (B) from the upper pocket (C).
Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE;
Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the related
parts.
Audio unit (without navigation) (see page 23-119)
Audio-navigation unit (with navigation) (see page
23-232)
2. Remove the upper pocket (A).
-1. Remove the screw.
-2. Pul l out the upper pocket slightly toward you, and
detach the clips and the pins (B). 4. Install the upper pocket in the reverse order of
Fastener Locations
them with new ones.
Push the clips, hooks, and pins into place securely.
Dashboard Center Trim Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the dashboard center lower trims (A).
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2Q14* -1. Remove the screws.
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment -2. Pull the dashboard center lower trim diagonally up
Program, 888-424-6857 toward you to detach the clips (B, C).
Fastener Locations
NOTE: : Screw, 6 B t> : Clip, 4 C t> : Clip, 4
parts.
If there are small scratches on the film trim, remove
them with an extra fine plastic polishing compound.
1. Gently pul l out the bottom edge of the dashboard
center upper trim (A) by hand toward you to detach
the clips, then remove it.
Fastener Locations
O : Clip, 3
A
Dashboard Center Lower Cover
Mesh panel/support replacement Special Tools Required
3. Remove the screws, then separate the mesh panel (A) KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
and the support (B) from the dashboard center lower Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
trim (C). Program, 888-424-6857
Fastener Locations
Screw, 4
NOTE:
parts.
1. Remove the center lower lid (A).
-1. Pull down the front edge of the lid by hand to detach
the hooks (B).
-2. Disconnect the console box light connector (C).
-3. Pull out the lid to detach the tabs (D).

note these items:
them with new ones.
(cont'd)
Dashboard Center Lower Cover Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. Remove the dashboard center lower cover (A). Center pocket repl acement
-1. Remove the screws. 4. Remove the screws and detach the hooks (A), then
-2. Grab the bottom of the lower cover and pull it out remove the center pocket (B) from the dashboard
then detach the clips. center lower cover (C).
-3. Remove the grommet (B), then pass the USB
Fastener Locations
adaptor harness (C) through the hole i n the cover.
. Screw, 4
-4. Disconnect the accessory power socket connector
(D) and the auxiliary jack assembly connector (E), if
equipped.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2 D> : Clip, 4
\ 9
<7
< } 5. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
them with new ones.
Push the clips, the hooks, and the tabs into place
securely.
Make sure the wire harnesses are not pinched.
Dashboard Side Lid Side Defogger Vent Trim
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857 Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE: NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the related Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the related
parts. parts.
Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
avoid damage when removing components. avoid damage when removing components.
Driver's dashboard side lid is shown; Passenger's
dashboard side lid is similar. Driver's side
1. Gently pry the edge of the lid with the appropriate 1. Remove the driver's side defogger vent trim (A).
trim tool to detach the hooks (A), then remove the -1. Pry out the rear edge of the trim to detach the hooks
dashboard side lid (B). (B) with the appropriate trim tool.
-2. Pull out the upper edge of the trim, then puli it out.
2. Install the lid in the reverse order of removal, and 2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and
push the hooks into place securely. push the hooks into place securely.
Side Defogger Vent Trim Dashboard Vent
Passenger's side NOTE:
1, Remove the passenger's dashboard panel (see page parts.
20-93). Driver's outside vent is shown; driver's inside vent is
2. Remove the passenger's side defogger vent trim (A). similar.
-1, Pry the rear edge of the trim to detach the hooks (B) 1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-83).
with the appropriate trim tool.
2. Remove the screws, then pull out on the dashboard
-2. Pull the panel rearward. vent (A).
B
Fastener Locations
& Screw, 2

push the hooks into place securely. 3. Install the dashboard vent in the reverse order of
removal.
Passenger's Dashboard Panel Passenger's Middle Panel
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2(314#
* Available through the Honda'Tool and Equipment Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857 Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE: NOTE;
# Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the related Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the related
parts, parts.
Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
avoid damage when removing components. avoid damage when removing components.
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard panel (A), 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard panel (see page
20-93).
-1. Insert the appropriate trim tool into the notch (B) in
the panel, and pull out the panel partially to detach 2. Pull out the passenger's middle panel (A) by hand to
the clips (C). detach the clips and the tabs (B), then remove it.
-2. Gently pull out along the upper edge of the panel to
Fastener Locations
detach the clips (D) and the hook (E). t> : Clip, 8 ,
-3. Gently pull out along the lower edge of the panel to
detach the clip (F) and the hook (G).
Fastener Locations
C, D, F > : Clip, 4
\
9 ^ 7 V
9 / 9 '
a n
iF 1) v < /
H i

note these items:
them with new ones.
Push the clips and the tabs into place securely.

note these items:
them with new ones.
Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
Passenger's Dashboard Undercover Glove Box Removal/Installation
NOTE; Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the SRS components are located in this area. Review the
related parts. SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the
1 Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover (A).
-1. Gently pull down the front edge of the cover to
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the
detach the clips. related parts.
-2. Disconnect the footwell light connector (B) and
detach the harness clip (G), if equipped. 1. Remove these items:
-3. Pull the cover away to release the pins (D), from the Passenger's middle panel (see page 20-93)
holders (E). Passenger's dashboard undercover (see page
* Fastener Locations 20-94)
> ; Clip, 4
2. Open the glove box.
3. Remove the screws (A) and the bolts (B).
Fastener Locations
A ;Screw, 2 B ;Bolt,4;
/I
A7
2. Install the undercover in the reverse order of removal,

them with new ones.
Push the clips and the pins into place securely.
'5 x 0.8 m m
Make sure the foot light connector is plugged in 4.4 N-m (0.45 kgfm, 3.2 Ibfft)
properly, if equipped.
4. Close the glove box.
5. Pull out the glove box (A) by hand to detach the clips. Glove box lid replacement
Fastener Locations 7. If necessary, open the glove box.
> : Clip, 4
8. Remove the glove box lid (A).
-1. Detach the upper hooks (B) of the lid.
-2. Detach the lower hooks (C) of the lid.
B
c -p
W m m m .;
9
9
6, Disconnect the glove box light connector (B), then

remove the glove box.
9. Install the box in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
Column Cover Removal/Installation
NOTE: 6. Remove the screws, then remove the lower column

Put on gloves to protect your hands. cover (A).
Take care not to scratch the column cover. Fastener Locatio ns
Do not pry the cover surface with any tools. : Screw, 3
1. Release the tilt/telescopic lever (A), tilt the steering
column all the way down, and pull it all the way out.
7. Install the upper and the lower column covers in the

reverse order of removal, and push the hooks into
place securely.
2. Release the tabs (B) of the upper column cover (C) by
pushing in on the lower column cover (D) from the
front side.
INOTICE i
Carefully release the tabs, and note the hooks (E) may
break when the upper column cover is pulled up too
hard.
3. Insert a suitable sized screwdriver or equivalent tool

(F) into the lever hole (G) in the lower column cover
along the guide rib (H).
4. Release the hook (I) located on the left side of the
upper column cover. The right side hook (J) of the
upper column cover cannot be released from the
inside.
5. Remove the upper column cover by lightly pulling it
up by releasing the right side hook of the cover.
Column Blind Removal/Installation Dashboard Upper Panel
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the Special Tools Required
related parts. KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2(314*
1. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-354). Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857
2. Detach the hooks (A) and the pins (B), then remove
the column blind (C). SRS components are located in this area. Review the
NOTE:
Take care not to bend or scratch the dashboard or the
related parts.
installing the dashboard upper panel.
procedure (see page 22-86), then wait at least 3
minutes before beginning work.
C Side defogger vent trims, both sides (see page
3. Install the blind in the reverse order of removal, and 20-91)
push the hooks and the pins into place securely. Gauge control module (see page 22-354)
Upper pocket (see page 20-87)
23-232)
Dashboard center lower trim (see page 20-88)
Passenger's dashboard panel (see page 20-93)
Glove box (see page 20-94)
(cont'd)
Dashboard Upper Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. With navigation; Remove the screws securing the 6. Remove the bolts (A) and the screws (B, C).
GPS antenna bracket (A).
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations 1 A : Bolt, 3 B & : Screw, 5 C : Screw, 3
Screw, 2
C C
A *
> C
5 x 0.8 mm
4.4 N-m (0.45 kgf-m, 3.2 I bf-ft)
7. Pull out the dashboard upper panel (A) to detach the
clips, then remove it.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 10 ,
,9\
4. If the front passenger's airbag has deployed, K
disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector,
and remove the bolts securing the front passenger's
airbag (see page 24-167).
5. If the front passenger's airbag has not deployed,
remove the front passenger's airbag (see page
24-167).
note these items:
them with new ones.
Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly.
Do the 12 volt battery terminal reconnection
Dashboard Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 3. With navigation: Detach the harness clip (A) of the
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* GPS antenna lead (B).
*AvailabIe through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857

NOTE;
Take care not to bend or scratch the dashboard or the
related parts.
installing the dashboard.
4. Remove the bolts (A) and the screws (B, C) securing
the dashboard (D).
Side defogger vent trims, both sides (see page
20-91) Fastener Locations *
A : Bolt, 11 B : Screw, 3 C : Screw, 1
Gauge control module (see page 22-354)
Driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-85)
Humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-109)
Upper pocket (see page 20-87)
23-232) v , * /
Dashboard center lower trim (see page 20-88)
f-A
Dashboard center lower cover (see page 20-89) B A
Sunlight sensor (see page 21 -110) /
5 x 0.8 mm
Passenger's dashboard panel (see page 20-93) 4.4 N-m (0.45 kgf-m, 3.2 Ibf-ft)
Glove box (see page 20-94)
Steering column (see page 17-9)
Dashboard Removal/Installation Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam
(cont'd) Removal/Installation
5. Lift up on the dashboard (A) to release it from the SRS components are located in this area. Review the
guide pins (B). SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the
NOTE:
installing the dashboard/steering hanger beam.
Take care not to scratch the dashboard, the body, or
the related parts.
Kick panels, both sides (see page 20-52)
Center console (see page 20-79)
Steering column (see page 17-9)
6. While holding the dashboard, detach the harness Front pillar corner trims, both sides (see page
clips (C) of the sunlight sensor harness from the 20-152).
dashboard duct (D).
7. Carefully remove the dashboard through the door
opening.
8. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of removal,
Push the harness clips into place securely.
3. From under the dash, disconnect the right engine Fastener Locations
compartment wire harness connector (A), the left : Bolt, 1
engine compartment wire harness connectors (B), the
driver's side wire harness connectors (C), the driver's
door wire harness connectors (D), the roof wire
harness connectors (E), and remove the bolt with a
TORX T30 bit, then release the left engine
compartment wire harness (F) from the under-dash
fuse/relay box (G).
Fastener Locations
; Bolt, 1
9.4 N-m
(0.96 kgf-m, 6.9 Ib fft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.4 N-m
(0.96 k g fm , 6.9 Ibfft)
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Center - ' ' 7. Remove the bolts (A).

5, From under the dash, disconnect the air hose (A), then Fastener Locations
remove it. A ^ : Bolt, 4 B : Bolt, 1 .
6. From under the dash, disconnect the SRS unit

connector (A), the yaw rate-acce!sret;cr. sar.sor (3),
the floor wire harness connector (C), and the A/C wire
harness connectors (D). Detach the harness clip (E).
8. Remove the ground bolt (B) with a TORX T30 bit.

9. Remove the bolts, then lay the shift (ever assembly
(A) down on its side.
Fastener Locations
; Bolt, 4
Passenger's side 13. Remove the special bolts (A, B) from outside the
passenger's door.
10. Disconnect the antenna lead connector (A).
-1. Remove the caps (C, D).
-2. Loosen the special bolts until they disengage from
the threads on the hanger beam side bracket (E),
and engage the inside threads ofthe collar bolts (F).
The thread lock on the special bolts makes the
special bolts and the collar bolts turn together.
-3. Continue loosening the special bolts to turn the
collar bolts into the space adjusters (G) until the
nuts bottom out. This creates a gap (H) between the
collar bolts and the body.
-4. Loosen the special bolts to disengage them from
the collar bolts, then remove them.
A
8 x 1.25 mn
11. From under the dash, disconnect the passenger's

door wire harness connector (A) and the the right
engine compartment wire harness connectors (B). C
14. Check that the collar bolts (A) are seated in the fixed 15. From outside the driver's door, remove the
space adjuster (B). caps (A, B), then remove the dashboard mounting
bolts (C/D).
-1. Insert a 21 mm open-end wrench to the collar bolt.
-2. Gently turn the wrench counterclockwise. Fastener Locations
If the wrench turns easily, continue turning the Bolt, 2 D : Bolt, 1
collar bolt.
-3. If the wrench does not turn easily, the collar bolt is
seated.
8 x 1.25 mm
NOTE: If either collar bolt was not seated, replace 22 N-m
the special bolts. (2.2 kgf m, 16 Ibf-ft) mmm
8 x "i.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
16. Lift up on the dashboard (A) to release it from the 17. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of removal,
guide pins (B). Carefully remove the dashboard and note these items:
through the door opening. Take care not to scratch Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins
the body with the collar bolts on the passenger's side. correctly.
NOTE: Do not rest the dashboard on its lower center Before tightening the bolts, make sure the wire
cover opening, or it may be damaged. Lay it on its harnesses are not pinched.
front or back. Make sure the connectors and the air hose are
plugged in properly.
B Before reinstalling the dashboard, be sure the collar
bolts (A) on the passenger's side can be
screwed/unscrewed lightly by hand, and then screw
them into the space adjuster (B) fully by hand. Do
not tighten them with any tools.
Before reinstalling the dashboard, screw the special
bolts (C) into the collar bolts, and check that they
turn together. If they do not turn together, replace
the special bolts.
After setting the dashboard in the body, reinstall all
of the mounting bolts but do not tighten them. First
tighten the driver's side mounting bolts to the
B specified torque. Next, tighten the special bolts. As
you tighten the bolts, the collar bolts screw out of
the space adjuster until they contact the body.
Continue tightening the special bolts to the
specified torque.
Tighten all remaining mounting bolts to the
specified torque.
After tightening both side bracket mounting bolts,
tighten the center frame mounting bolts.
(cont'd)
Special bolt tightening on passenger's side
B A
A O
3 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m

Active Head Restraint Inspection
NOTE: If the vehicle has been in a collision, always 4. Push the head restraint (A) forward, and measure the
inspect the active head restraint, even if they appear horizontal head restraint movement. The head
reusable, by doing the following procedure. restraint should move more than 52 mm (2.05 in)
without resistance. If it is less than 52 mm (2.05 in), or
1. Fold the seat-back forward, then recline the seat-back
the head restraint does not move smoothly, replace
to the first lock position.
the seat frame assembly (see page 20-113).
2. Apply masking tape (A) on the top of the head
restraint (B).
Above 52 mm (2.05 in)

3. Make a mark (C) at the center point of the head

restraint. Use the mark for the measurements in step
4.
Head Restraint Trim Replacement Seat Removal/Installation

Put on gloves to protect your hands. KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
Take care not to scratch the head restraint or the *Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
related parts. Program, 888-424-6857
m When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
protective tape to prevent damage. SRS components are located in this area. Review the
1. Remove the head restraint (see step 7 on page
20-111).
2. Detach the hooks (A) of the head restraint trim (B) with
Do the ODS unit initialization (see page 24-26) after
a flat-tip screwdriver, then remove the trim from the
passenger's seat replacement.
head restraint (C).
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat
covers.
minutes before removing the seat.
2. Adjust the steering column to the full tilt up position,
and to the full telescopic in position.
3. Passenger's seat: Remove the passenger's seat belt
lower anchor (see page 24-8).
3. Detach the hooks (A), then separate the head restraint 4. Slide the seat about half way to the rear so you can
trim (B) and the rear head restraint trim (C). access the seat mounting bolts. If you remove the
manual height adjustable seat, fully raise the seat.

push the hooks into place securely.
Seat Removal/Installation (cont'd)
5. Detach the fastener (A), then remove the bolts. . Lift up the seat, then detach the harness clips (A) of
the floor wire harness (B), and disconnect the seat belt
Fastener Locations
Bolt, 4
buckle switch connector (C), the side airbag connector
(D), the seat heater wire harness connector (with seat
heater) (E), and driver's seat position sensor (F). On
the passenger's seat, disconnect the ODS unit
harness connector (G).
10 x 1.2? m m Driver's seat
Passenger's seat
7. Remove the head restraint (A). 9. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
-1. Spread apart the gap between the head restraint
trim (B) and the seat-back (C), and pull up the head
restraint a little by pressing the release tab (D) of the them with new ones.
head restraint guide (E). When reinstalling the head restraint, connect the
-2. Detach the magnet (F) from the seat-back side strap seat-back side strap through the head restraint side
(G), and pull it out from the head restraint side strap strap, then attach the magnet.
(H). Tighten the seat mounting bolts to the specified
-3. Pull out the head restraint from the head restraint torque in the sequence shown. Slide the seat all the
guide. way back and tighten and , then slide it forward
and tighten (D and .
Tighten the bol ts by hand first, then tighten them to
specification with a torque wrench.
Driver's seat
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 4 '
8. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the

seat through the door opening.
V?;V
V
Seat Removal/Installation (cont'd) Slide Lever Replacement
Passenger's seat NOTE:

Fastener Locations Put on gloves to protect your hanas.
: Bolt, 4 Take care not to scratch the seat covers or the related
parts.
1. Remove the seat (see page 20-109).
2. Detach the spring (A) from the lever holder (B), then
remove the slide lever (C).

t
A p(i) f
T 10 x 1.25 mm
34 N-m
3. Install the lever in the reverse order of removal, and

push the spring into place securely.
Seat Frame Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Remove these items:

KTC Trim Too l Set SQJATP2014* Recline covers (see page 20-115)
Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment Seat belt buckle (see page 24-6)
Program, 888-424-6857 Seat-back cover/pad (see page 20-117)
Seat cushion cover/pad (see page 20-123)
SRS components are located in this area. Review the Side airbag module (see page 24-171)
SRS component locations and the precautions and
Driver's seat position sensor (see page 24-192)
procedures before doing repairs or service.
Driver's Seat
rx
Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor
after any of these actions (see page 24-30):
Driver's seat position sensor replacement iBL,.. lljit.
Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail)
replacement
NOTE
Put on gl oves to protect your hands.
Apply oil to the pivot portions of the slide locks.
Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding portions of
the seat tracks.
If the side airbag has deployed, replace the seat frame
and related parts with new ones (see page 24-163).
Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers.
Seat Frame Replacement (cont'd)
3. Detach the clip, then remove the upper rail inner Passenger's Seat
cover (A) and the upper rail outer cover (B).
Do the front passenger's weight sensor initialization (see
Upper rail inner cover page 24-27) after passenger's seat frame replacement.
Fastener Location
NOTE
> : Clip, 1
Apply oil to the pivot portions of the slide locks.
I - Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding portions of
the seat tracks.
If the side airbag has deployed, replace the seat frame
and related parts with new ones (see page 24-163).
Recline covers (see page .20-115)
Seat belt buckle (see page 24-6)
Seat-back cover/pad (see page 20-117)
Side airbag module (see page 24-171)
e ODS unit (see page 24-190)
Upper rail outer cover

Fastener Location
> : Clip, 1
HI
4. Install the new seat frame in the reverse order of

them with new ones.
Push the clip into place securely.
Recline Cover Removal/Installation
3. Detach the clips, then remove the upper rail inner Special Tools Required
cover (A) and the upper rail outer cover (B). KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2G14*
Upper rail inner cover Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857
Fastener Location

NOTE:
Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat
covers.
Outer recline cover
2. Driver's seat: Pull back the cap (A) to release the
Upper rail outer cover hooks (B), and remove the screws, then remove the
Fastener Location height adjustment handle (C).
[> : Clip, 3 Fastener Locations
4. Install the new seat frame in the reverse order of

them with new ones.
Push the clip into place securely.
Recline Cover Removal/Installation (contvd)
3. Remove the outer recline cover (A). Passenger's outer recline cover
-1. Recline the seat-back fully. Fastener Locations
-2. Remove the recline knob (B), and remove the : Screw, 1 > : Cl ip, 1
screw.
-3. Using the appropriate trim tool, release the hooks
(C) of the outer recline cover from the inner recline
cover (D). D
-4. Detach the clip and hook (E) by pulling the outer
recline cover back by hand.
-5. Gently pull out the outer recline cover and remove
it
Drivers outer recline cover
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 1 [> : Clip, 1
TO J^>
4. Remove the center recline cover (A).

-1. Using the appropriate trim tool, release the hooks
(B) of the center recline cover from the inner recline
cover (C).
-2. Detach the clip, then remove the center recline
cover.
Fastener Location
l> : Clip, 1
Seat-Back C o ver Replacement
Inner recl ine cover Speci al Tools Required

KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
5. Remove the inner recline cover (A).
-1. Remove these items: Program, 888-424-6857
Seat-back cover/pad (see page 20-117) SRS components are located in this area. Review the
-2. Detach the hooks (B), then remove the inner recl ine SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the
covers from the seat cushion frame pipe (C). precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before
Do the OPDS sensor initialization (see page 24-26) after
passenger's seat-back cover replacement.
NOTE:
Do not repair any tears or frayed spots of the seat-back
cover. If necessary, replace the seat-back cover.
covers.
Passenger's seat: Do not touch the OPDS sensor in the
seat-back cover/pad, and keep it away from oil.
Oil can corrode the sensor causing it to fail.
6. Install the recline cover in the reverse order of

removal , and note these items:
them with new ones.
(cont'd)
Seat-Back Cover Replacement (cont'd)
2. From under the seat cushion, release the hook strap 3. From under the seat cushion, disconnect the side
(s) (A) of the seat-back cover (B) and the hooks (C) of airbag connector (A), the ODS harness connectors (B)
the seat cushion cover (D) from the seat cushion , and the seat heater connector (with seat heater) (C),
frame spring. remove the wire ties (D), and detach the wire harness
clips (E), then pull it outside of the seat.
Driver's seat
Driver's seat
Passenger's seat
Passenger's seat
A
4. Pull back the seat cushion cover (A) and the seat-back 6. Pull back the seat-back cover (A), then release the
cover (B). hook strips (B) from the seat-back frame.
5. From behind the seat-back, release the hook (A), and

unzip the seat-back cover (B).
7. Detach the clips and the hooks (A), then pull down the
protect board (B).
Fastener Locations
D> .* Cli p, 2
Jh
(cont'd)
8. Release airbag attachment wire A and airbag 10. Passenger's seat: Remove the ODS unit cover (A).
attachment wire B from the seat-back frame (C). -1. Turn over the seat-back cover (B) as needed.
A -2. Release the cover from the lower hooks (C).
-3. Pull the cover upward to release it from the upper
hook (D).
9. Driver's seat: Pull the side airbag harness (A) and the
seat heater harness (with seat heater) (B) out through
the seat-back cover (C).
11. Passenger's seat: Disconnect the OPDS sensor

connectors (E).
NOTE: Do not disconnect the ODS unit 18P connector
(F).
12. Passenger's seat: Detach the harness clips (A)
fastening the OPDS sensor harness (B).
13. Passenger's seat: Pull out the side airbag harnesses 15. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (A) from the
(A) and the OPDS sensor harness (B) through the seat-back frame (B).
seat-back cover (C).
16. Remove airbag attachment wire A from the inside

14. Pull out the head restraint guides (A) while pinching reinforcing cloth (C) and airbag attachment wire B
the tabs (B) on the middle of the guides, and remove from the outside reinforcing cloth (D).
them.
17. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the way 18. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of
around, and release the upholstery rings (A), then removal, and note these items:
remove the seat-back cover (B). If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones.
To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the clips, the hooks,
and the hook strips.
Before installing the seat-back cover, make sure the
airbag attachment wires (A, B) are installed in the
reinforcing cloths (C) correctly.
Reinstall the airbag attachment wires (A, B)
securely to the seat-back frame as shown.
Replace any upholstery rings (D) you removed with
new ones. Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers (E).
Make sure the side airbag harness and the OPDS
sensor harness (passenger's seat) are routed
properly.
Use only original Honda replacement seat-back
covers.
Make sure the the seat heater harness (if equipped)
are routed properly.
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement
Special Tools Requi red

KTC Trim Tool Set 80JATP2014*
Program, 888-424-6857

SRS component locations (see page 24-11 )and the
NOTE;
covers.
Do not repair any tear or frayed spots of the seat
cushion cover. If necessary, replace the seat cushion
cover.
On the passenger's seat, do not touch the OPDS
sensor in the seat-back pad, and keep it away from oil.
Oil can corrode the sensor causing it to fail.
2. Remove the recline cover (see page 20-115).
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement (cont'd)
3. From under the seat cushion, release the hook strap 4. From under driver's seat cushion, detach the wire
(s) (A) of the seat-back cover (B) and the hooks (C) of harness clips (A ), the seat heater connectors (with
the seat cushion cover (D) from the seat cushion seat heater) (B), and wire ties (C), then pull it to out
frame spring. side of the seat.
Driver' seat Driver' seat
Passenger's seat 5. From under the seat cushion, disconnect the side
airbag connector (A) the ODS harness connectors (B)
and the Seat heater connector (w i th Seat heater) (C),
remove the wire ties (D), and detach the wire harness
clips (E), then pull it outside of the seat.
Passenger's seat
6. Pull back the seat cushion cover (A) and the seat-back Passenger's seat
cover (B).
Fastener Location
D> ; Clip, 1
41
7. Remove the clip, then release the hook strips (A, B)

from the seat cushion frame.
Driver's seat
Fastener Location
D> : Clip, 1
8. From under the seat cushion, release the hook strips
(A) from the seat cushion frame.
9. Release the hole (B) of the seat cushion cover (C) from
the seat frame.
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement (cont'd)
10. Remove the seat cushion cover/pad (A) and the 12. Release the upholstery rings (A) from under the seat
silencer (B) from the seat frame (C). cushion (B).
11. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the
way around, and release the upholstery rings (A),
then remove the seat cushion cover (B).
13. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the clips, the hooks,
and the hook strips.
Replace any upholstery rings (A) you removed with
new ones. Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers (B).
them with new ones.
Make sure the the seat heater harness (if equipped)
are routed properly.
Front
FRONT BUMPER
FRONT AIR SPOILER

Rear
Front Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE: 4. Pull out the front bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas
Put on gloves to protect your hands. to release it from the hooks (B) on the side spacers (C).
installing the front bumper.
Take care not to scratch the front bumper or the body.
1. Remove the front bumper center seal (see page
20-149).
2. Remove the upper clip (A) from the front bumper (B).
3. Remove the screws (C, D) and the clips (E) securing
the front bumper.
NOTE: To release the clips, pry up on the center pin at
the notch (F).
Fastener Locations
A O :C lip , 1 C Screw,4 D Screw,2 E > : Clip, 10
r
5. With the help of an assistant, pull both sides of the
IU front bumper (A) away from the side spacer (B). Then
pull out the front bumper to release the hooks (C) on
the upper beam (D).
A
Y
> c
6. Disconnect the fog light connectors (A), then remove Cooling guide replacement
the front bumper (B).
8. If necessary, remove the clips, then remove the
NOTE; If you are only removing the front bumper, go cool ing guide (A) from the body.
to step 9. If you are doing further disassembly,
Fastener Locations
proceed to step 7. > : Clip, 4
*
9. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal,
7. If necessary, remove the bolts, then remove the front and note these items:
bumper absorber (A) from the front bumper beam (B).
Make sure the fog l ight connectors are plugged in
Fastener Locations properly.
: Bolt, 2 Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks (of
both upper beams and side spacers) on each side
securely.
@ If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones.
Front Air Spoiler Replacement Rear Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE: NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front bumper. Have an assistant help you when removing and
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with installing the rear bumper.
protective tape to prevent damage. Take care not to scratch the rear bumper or the body.
1. Remove the screw and the clips securing the front air When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
spoiler (A) from under the front bumper (B). protective tape to prevent damage.
NOTE: To release the clips, pry up on the center pin at 1. Remove the screws (A), the bolts (B), and the clips
securing the rear bumper (C).
the notch (C).
NOTE: To release the clips, pry up on the center pin at
Fastener Locations the notch (D).
: Screw, 1 > : Cl ip, 3
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 6 B : Bolt, 2 D> : Clip, 3
i t
2. Pull out one side of the rear bumper (A) to release the
hooks (B) on the side spacer (C) as shown. Repeat this
step on the opposite side.
2. Pull back the front air spoiler to detach the hooks (D)
and remove the spoiler.
3. Install the front air spoiler in the reverse order of
removal:
them with new ones.
3. Pull out one side of the rear bumper (A) to release the 5. If necessary, remove the rear bumper absorber (A)
hooks (B) on the body as shown. Repeat this step on from the rear bumper beam (B) by pulling the
the opposite side. absorber to release the projections (C) on both sides.
'X :
6. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal,

4. Disconnect the license subharness connector (A) from Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks (of
both the side spacers) on each side securely.
under the rear bumper (B), With the help of an
assistant, while pulling the wheel arch portion away If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
from the side spacer (C), pull out the rear bumper to them with new ones.
release the hooks (D) on the body. Push the clips, the hooks, and the projections into
place securely.
9^
/*= D
Rear Bumper Lower Trim Replacement
NOTE: 3. If necessary, remove the screw and detach the hook

Put on gloves to protect your hands. (A), then remove the rear bumper diffuser (B) from the
Take care not to scratch the rear bumper or the related rear bumper lower trim (C).
parts. Fastener Locations
: Screw, 1
1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-130). 0D33>
2. Remove the clips and detach the hooks (A), then
remove the rear bumper lower trim (B) from the rear
bumper (C).
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 2
4. Install the rear bumper lower trim in the reverse order

of removal, and note these items:
them with new ones.
HOOD INSULATOR
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

Replacement, page 20-135 HOOD OPENER CABLE

Hood Opener Cable Replacement
NOTE:
Put on gloves to protect your hands,
Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts.
Take care not to kink the hood opener cable.
1. Remove these items;
Left front inner fender (see page 20-162)
Kick panel, driver's side (see page 20-52)
2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the hood latch (B), and disconnect the hood opener cable from the hood
release handle (C).
Fastener Locations
D O ; Cli p, 1 E O :Clip,3 F O : O i p,3
3. Detach the clips (D, E, F) with a clip remover, and remove the grommet (G) from the body.
4 lnstall the cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
Make sure the cable is connected properly.
Make sure the hood opens properly and locks securely.
Hood Latch Replacement
NOTE: 4. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and

Put on gloves to protect your hands. note these items:
Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts. Apply multipurpose grease to each location of the
Take care not to kink the cable. hood latch indicated by the arrows.
Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
1. Detach the connector clip (A), then disconnect the properly and the hood latch switch connector is
security hood switch connector (B). plugged in properly.
Adjust the hood latch alignment (see page 20-137).
Make sure the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
Route the security hood switch harness (A) through
the hook (B) correctly as shown.
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (A)

from the body.
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 3
3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (B) from the hood

latch.
Hood Release Handle Replacement
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body.
Take care not to kink the cable.
1. Remove the kick panel, driver's side (see page 20-52).
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood release
handle (A).
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (B) from the hood

release handle.
4. Install the hood release handle in the reverse order of
Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly.
Make sure the hood opens properly.
Hood Adjustment
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the hood, the body, or the related parts.
1. Remove the hood hinge cover (see page 20-153).
2. Slightly loosen the hood hinge mounting bolts (A) and the hood latch mounting bolts (B).
3. Adjust the hood (C) alignment in the following sequence:

Adjust the hood right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes in the hood hinges (D).
Turn the hood edge cushions (E), as necessary, to make sure the hood fits flush with the body at the front and side
edges.
4. Adjust the hood latch (F) to obtain the proper height at the forward edge, and move the hood latch right or left until the
striker (G) is centered in the hood latch.
(cont'd)
Hood Adjustment (cont d) Hood Insulator Replacement
5. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. NOTE: Take care not to scratch the hood.
6. Check that the hood opens properly and closes 1. Detach the clips with a clip remover, then remove the
securely. hood insulator (A).
7. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts and
Fastener Locations
around the hinges, and let the paint dry.
O : Clip, 5
8. Apply multipurpose grease to the hood latch and the
hood hinges as indicated by the arrows.
2. Install the hood insulator in the reverse order of

them with new ones.

HATCH SUPPORT STRUT

Repl acement, page 20-142

Hatch Latch Replacement
NOTE: 1. Remove the hatch lower trim (see page 20-66).

Put on gloves to protect your hands. 2. Disconnect the hatch latch switch connector (A) and
Take care not to scratch the hatch or the related parts. the hatch release actuator connector (B) and detach
If the hatch latch cannot be unlocked by using the the connector clip (C), then remove the bolts securing
hatch outer handle switch, remove the maintenance the hatch latch (D) from the hatch.
lid (A) from the hatch lower trim, then unlock the hatch
Fastener Locations
latch by turning the lock lever (B) as shown.
: Bolt, 3
9.4 N-m (0.96 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
3. Install the hatch latch in the reverse order of removal,

Make sure the hatch opens properly and locks
securely.
Hatch Adjustment
NOTE: 4. Tighten each bolt to the specified torque.

Have an assistant help you when adjusting the hatch.
5. Make sure the hatch opens properly and locks
Take care not to scratch the hatch, the body, or the securely.
related parts.
Put on gloves to protect your hands. 6. Reinstall the support strut on both sides securely.
1. Remove the hatch support struts on both sides (see 7. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts and
page 20-142). around the hinges and let the paint dry.
2. Slightly loosen the hatch hinge mounting bolts (A) 8. Apply multipurpose grease to the pivot area of the
and the striker mounting bolts (B). hatch hinges (A) as indicated by the arrows.
Rearward
8 x 1.25 mm
18 N-m (1.8 kg fm , 13 Ibfft)
3. Adjust the hatch (C) alignment in the following

sequence:
Adjust the hatch hinges (D) right and left by using
the elongated hole in the hatch hinges.
Turn the hatch edge cushions (E), in or out as
necessary, to make sure the hatch fits flush with the
body at the side edges.
Adjust the fit between the hatch and hatch opening
by moving the striker (F), and adjust the striker right
or left until it is centered in the hatch latch (G).
Hatch Support Strut Replacement Hatch Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE: 1. Remove the hatch weatherstrip (A) by pulling it out.

installing the hatch support strut.
Take care not to scratch the body or the hatch.
1. Remove the pivot bolt (A) from the body.
B
2. Locate the painted alignment mark (B) on the hatch

weatherstrip. Align the painted mark with the
alignment tab in the center of the hatch opening, then
2. Remove the pivot bolt (B), then remove the support
install the hatch weatherstrip all the way around.
strut (C) from the hatch.
NOTE:
3. Install the upper pivot bolt into the hatch first, then
install the lower pivot bolt into the body, and position Make sure it's seated completely and facing in the
the support strut properly. direction shown.
Make sure there are no wrinkles in the weatherstrip.
Hatch Lower Stop Replacement

KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE;
Take care not to scratch the hatch or the related parts.
1. Detach the hooks (A) with a clip remover, then
remove the hatch lower stop (B).
2. Install the hatch lower stop in the reverse order of

removal, and push the hooks into place securely.
Fuel Fill Door
FUEL FILL DOOR/ADAPTER

Fuel Fill Door/Adapter Replacement
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the fuel fill door/adapter (A).

-1. Pull out the portion (B) of the hinge from inside the
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment body.
Program, 888-424-6857 -2. If necessary, release the hooks (C), then remove the
fuel fill door push lifter (D) from the fuel fill
NOTE: door/adapter.
Take care not to scratch the body. NOTE: If you are only removing the fuel fill
Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to door/adapter, go to step 7. If you are doing further
avoid damage when removing components. disassembly, proceed to step 6.
1. Remove the fuel cap (A) by turning it

counterclockwise, and remove the screw.
Fastener Location
A
: Screw, 1
2. Remove the left rear wheel, remove the fuel fill pipe
cover (see page 20-167), then lower the fuel fill pipe as
needed (see page 11 -308).
3. Carefully pull the fuel fill door/adapter lip (A) off of the
fuel fill pipe (B).
4. Detach the hooks (C, D), then pul l out the fuel fill
door/adapter (E) toward you.
Fuel Fill Door
Fuel Fill Door/Adapter Replacement (cont'd)
Fuel fill adapter bracket replacement

6. If necessary, pull out the fuel fill adapter bracket (A)
and the fuel fill adapter lock grommet (B).
NOTE: When reinstalling the packing, be sure the
arrow mark (C) on the packing is the upper side of the
packing.
7. Install the fuel fill door/adapter in the reverse order of

Make sure the adapter lip (A) is fully seated on the
fuel fill pipe (B).
Push the hooks (C) into place securely.
C
Front
ROOF MOLDI NG

Rear
HATCH SPOILER
/
CR-Z EMBLEM REAR "H" EMBLEM

Replacement page 20-159 Replacement page 20-159
Front Bumper Center Upper Beam Replacement
NOTE; 2. Remove the clips, then remove the front bumper

Put on gloves to protect your hands. center seal (A).
Take care not to scratch the front bumper or the NOTE; To release the clips, pry up on the center pin at
related parts. the notch (B).
Fastener Locations
O : Cli p, 4
1. Remove the clip, detach the hook (A) and the pin (B),
then remove the front bumper side cover (G). Repeat
this step on the opposite side.
NOTE: To release the clip, pry up on the center pin at
the notch (D).
Fastener Location
> : Clip, 1
(cont'd)
Front Bumper Center Upper Beam Front Bumper Side Cover
3. Remove the front bumper center upper beam (A). Special Tools Required
-1. Remove the bolts and the clips (B, C). KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
-2. Move the beam upward, and take the tab (D) of the Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
bottom of the beam off the insertion parts (E). Program, 888-424-6857
-3. Bend the beam slightly and pull it upward.
NOTE: To release the clips, pry up on the center pin For some models
at the notch (F). NOTE:
Fastener Locations Put on gloves to protect your hands.
:B o lt ,2 B 0 : Clip, 2 C > : Clip, 1 Take care not to scratch the front bumper or the
related parts.
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-128).
2. Remove the screws and detach the hooks (A), then
remove the front bumper side cover (B) from the front
bumper (C).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2
4. Install the beam in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
them with new ones.
Push the clips and the tab into place securely.
3. Install the front bumper side cover in the reverse

order of removal, and push the hooks into place
securely.
Front Grille Replacement Front Bumper Fog Light Cover
Replacement
*Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment *Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857 Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE; For some models

Put on gloves to protect your hands. NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front bumper or the Put on gloves to protect your hands.
related parts.
Take care not to scratch the front bumper or the
Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to related parts.
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with avoid damage when removing components.
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-128). protective tape to prevent damage.
2. Remove the front grille (A). 1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-128).
-1. Remove the clips. 2. Remove the fog light (see page 22-244).
-2. Detach the hooks (B), then pull out the front grille
3. Remove the screws and detach the hooks (A), then
from the front bumper (C).
remove the front bumper fog light cover (B) from the
front bumper (C).
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations
t> : d ip , 3
: Screw, 2
V V
4, Install the front bumper fog light cover in the reverse

order of removal, and push the hooks into place
securely.
3. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
them with new ones.
Front Pillar Corner Trim Replacement
Spec ial Tools Required 3. While sliding the front pillar corner trim rearward in
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* the direction shown, detach the tab (A) from the body,
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment then remove the trim (B).
Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the corner trim or the body.
Put a shop towel into the gap between the trim and the
body to prevent scratches.
1. Open the door.
2. Carefully insert the appropriate trim tool (A) next to
the body, and detach the clips by prying on the
front pillar corner trim (B).
Fastener Locations
D> : Clip, 2
4. Install the front pillar corner trim in the reverse order

of removal, and note these items:
A them with new ones.
Push the clips and the tab into place securely.
Cowl Cover Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Detach the clips with a clip remover from the cowl
KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014* cover (A), then disconnect the windshield washer
Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment tube (B).
Program, 888-424-6857 Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 2
NOTE;
1. Pull out the hood rear seal (A) as needed. Detach the
hooks (B), then remove the wiper pivot cover (C).
4. Detach the clips and the hooks (A) by carefully pulling

the windshield side edge of the cowl cover (B)
upward, and release the forward hooks (C) by pulling
the cowl cover forward, then remove the cover.
NOTE: If you are only removing the cowl cover, go to
step 8. If you are doing further disassembly, proceed
to step 5.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 9
2. Remove the windshield wiper arms (see page 22-311).

Cowl Cover Replacement (cont'd)
Hood hinge cover replacement Under-cowl panel replacement

5. If necessary, detach the clips and the hooks (A), then 6. If necessary, remove the windshield wiper motor (see
remove the hood hinge cover (B). page 22-309).
Left side 7. Remove the bolts, then remove the under-cowl panel
(A).
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 2
: Bolt, 7
l o r 8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgfm, 16 I bfft)
Right side 8. Install the cowl cover in the reverse order of removal,
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 2
them with new ones.
Make sure the washer tube is connected securely.
^7
V
O
Windshield Side Trim Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the clips (A) from the body by turning them
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* 90.
Program, 888-424-6857 Fastener Locations
A D>: Clip, 4 C > ; Clip, 1
NOTE;
Take care not to damage the windshield.
Do not use any metallic tools to remove the
windshield area of the windshield side trim, or you
may chip or crack the windshield.
1. Apply protective tape (A) to the body.
4. Detach the hooks (B), then remove the clip (C) from
the body.
5. Install the clips on the windshield side trim, and fit the
clips into the hole in the body. Then push on the trim
B until the clips snap into place securely, and note these
items:
2. Pull up the upper portion of the windshield side trim
them with new ones.
(B) and slide it upward along the front pillarto remove
the clips (C). The clips will stay in the body holes. Push the clips into place securely.
Roof Molding Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Pull up and release the rear bracket (A) from the pin
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP20T4* (B), then remove the roof molding (C).
Program, 888-424-6857
C A
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body.
Take care not to bend the roof molding.
1. Apply protective tape (A) to the body. Insert the
appropriate trim tool (B) into the body and the roof
molding (C).
5. Install the molding in the reverse order of removal,

Take care not to damage the windshield molding.
Make sure the roof molding is installed securely.
2. Pull up and slide the roof molding to release the front

bracket (D) from the pin (E).
3. Pull up the front portion of the roof molding (A).
Hatch Spoiler Replacement
Special Tools Required 5. Install the hatch spoiler in the reverse order of
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* removal, and note these items:
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
Program, 888-424-6857 them with new ones.
NOTE: If the grommets and pins are damaged or
Put on gloves to protect your hands. stress-whitened, replace grommets and pins as an
Take care not to scratch the hatch or the related parts. assembly with new ones.
Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
1. Remove the hatch middle trim (see page 20-66).
2. Remove the hatch spoiler (A).
-1. Disconnect the high mount brake light harness
connector (B), then remove the nuts and detach the
harness clip (C) from inside the hatch.
-2. Close the hatch. Put a shop towel (D) in the opening
between the hatch spoiler and the upper rear
window to prevent scratches. Detach the pins (E, F)
of the clips (G, H) from the grommets (I, J) with the
appropriate trim tool (K).
Fastener Locations
: Nut, 4 G D> : Clip, 2 H O : Clip, 1
q IH r
E IF " J
6 x 1.0 mm
9.4 N-m (0.96 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
3. If necessary, remove the grommets from the hatch

with snap ring pliers.
4. Install the grommets on the pins by pushing them into
place.
Side Sill Panel Removal/Installation
NOTE:
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage.
Side sill panel replacement
1. Remove the side sill panel (A).
-1. Remove the clips (B) from under the panel.
-2. On the rear wheel arch, remove the pin (C) of the clip (D) from the panel.
-3. Slide the side sill panel rearward and remove it. The side clips (E) will stay in the body.
-4. Remove the side clips (E) from the body by turning them 90 .
-5. If necessary, remove the grommet (F) from the body.
Fastener Locations
B > : Cl ip, 5 D t> : Cl ip, 1 E D> ; Clip, 9
C F' G
Rearward
Side sill panel installation

1. Install the side sill panel (A).
-1. Install the side clips (E) on the side sill panel.
-2. If necessary, install the grommet (F) to the body.
-3. Hold the panel up, and fit all the side clips into the holes in the body, then push on the panel until the clips snap into
place.
-4. Install the clips (B) and the pin (C) of the clip (D) to the panel.
NOTE:
When reinstalling the side clips, the tab (G) on the clip is facing to the upper side.
If the grommet and pin are damaged or stress-whitened, replace the grommet and pin as an assembly with new
one.
Push the clips and the pin into place securely.
Emblem/Sticker Replacement
NOTE: When removing the emblems/sticker, take care not to scratch the body.
1. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from
getting on the surface.
2. When install ing the AT-PZEP sticker on the inside surface of the left quarter glass, align the sticker with the edge of the
black ceramic.as shown, then press the sticker into place and remove the application tape.
3. Appl y the emblems/sticker where shown.
FRONT "H" EMBLEM
Unit: mm (in)
Adhesive tape: :
Thickness 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
FRONT "H " ' REAR "H " ADHESIVE
EMBLEM ADHESIVE TAPE EMBLEM TAPE
Front
Rear
FRONT FLOOR UNDERCOVER


"REAR FENDER COVER

Front Inner Fender Replacement
NOTE:
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrapped it with protective tape to prevent damage.
2. Remove the front inner fender (A).
-1. Canada models: On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B) and the clip (C), then remove the front splash guard
(D).
-2. From under the front bumper (E), remove the screws (F) that secure the front bumper, the splash shield (G), the front
bulkhead lower cover (H), and the front inner fender to the body.
-3. -Remove the clips (I), that secure the front bumper and the front inner fender.
-4. From the wheel arch, remove the clip (J) that secure the splash shield and the front inner fender.
-5. From the wheel arch, remove the clips (K, L, M) and the screws (N).
-6. Release the hook (0) of the splash shield, then pull out the front inner fender.
NOTE: To release the clips (C, I, J), pry up on the center pin at the notch (P).
Fastener Locations
B : Screw, 3 C, I, J D> : Clip, 6 F : Screw, 2 K D> ; Clip, 8 L > : Cl ip, 1 M D> : Clip, 3 N : Screw, 2
P P
A
K
^7j
O
E
AI AI A
nr
A
I
A
C
3. Instal l the front inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
I f the cl ips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
Push the clips and the hook into place securely.
Splash Shield Replacement
NOTE:
When prying with a f lat-tip screwdriver, wrapped it with protective tape to prevent damage.
1. From under the body, remove the clips (A, B) and the screws (C), then remove the engine undercover (D).
NOTE: To release the clips (A), pry up on the center pin at the notch (E).
2. Remove the splash shield (F).
-1. From the wheel arch on both sides, remove the clips (G) that secure the splash shield and the front inner fender (H) to the
body.
-2. From under the front bumper (I), remove the clips (J) and the screws (K).
-3. From under the body, remove the clips (L, M) that secure the splash shield to the body.
-4. Release the hooks (N) of the splash shield from the front inner fender, then pull out the splash shield.
-5. If necessary, remove the screws (O) from the splash shield, then remove the maintenance lid (P).
NOTE: To release the clips (G, J, L), pry up on the center pin at the notch (E).
Fastener Locations
A, G, J, L > : Clip, 9 B, M t> ; Clip, 3 C, K, O Screw, 12
3. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Front Bulkhead Lower Cover Front Bumper Air Guide
Replacement Replacement
NOTE: NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts. Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts.
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrapped it When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrapped it
with protective tape to prevent damage. with protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Remove the clips (A, B) and the screws, then remove 1 . Remove the front bumper (see page 20-128).
the front bulkhead lower cover (C) from the front
2. Remove the bolt and the clips (A, B), then remove the
bulkhead.
front bumper air guide (C).
NOTE:
NOTE:
To release the clips, pry up on the center pin at the
To release the clips, pry up on the center pin at the
notch (D).
notch (D).
If necessary, release the hooks (E), then remove the
If necessary, release the hooks (E), then remove the
clip.
clip.
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations
A D> : Clip, 1 B > : Clip, 8 : Screw, 4 : Bolt, 1 A > : Clip, 4 B t> : Clip, 4
D U D
x6 x 1.0 mm
9.4 N-m (0.96'kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
3. Install the front bumper air guide in the reverse order

of removal, and note these items.
2. Install the front bulkhead lower cover in the reverse If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
order of removal, and note these items. them with new ones.
If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace Push the clips into place securely.
them with new ones.
Front Fender Fairing Replacement
NOTE: 4. Install the front fender fairing in the reverse order of

Put on gloves to protect your hands. removal, and note these items:
Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts. If the clip is damaged or stress-whitened, replace it
with a new one.
1. Remove the front inner fender as needed (see page
Before installing the clip, make sure the hooks (A) of
20-162).
the front fender fairing (B) is installed into the holes
2. From the wheel arch, remove the clip and the (C) in the front fender securely.
maintenance plug (A). Push the clip into place securely.
Fastener Location
> : Clip, 1
(D
v . < ]
3. Release the hooks (B) of the front fender fairing (C)

from the holes in the front fender, and pull the fender
fairing out, then remove it.
Middle Floor Undercover Rear Air Outlet Replacement
Replacement
Put on gloves to protect your hands. KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014#
Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts. Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
When prying w ith a flat-tip screwdriver, wrapped it Program, 888-424-6857
with protective tape to prevent damage.
NOTE:
1. Remove the bolts and clips, then remove the middle
floor undercover (A). Put on gloves to protect your hands.
NOTE: To release the clips, pry up on the center pin at Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
the notch (B). avoid damage when removing components.
Fastener Locations
1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-130).
Bolt, 2 D> : Clip, 7
2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet
(B).
9 NOTE: Pull out the hook part with the appropriate trim
B B tool, being careful not to damage the seal or the body
area.
V * - r r "
6 x 1.0 mm *
18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibfft) B
2. Install the middle floor undercover in the reverse 3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook portions
order of removal. until the hooks snap into place.
them with new ones. 4. Reinstall the rear bumper (see page 20-130).
Rear Spring Seat Lower Cover Fuel Fill Pipe Cover Replacement
Replacement
NOTE: NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts. Put on gloves to protect your hands.
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts.
protective tape to prevent damage. When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
1. Remove the screw, the clip and detach the hook (A), protective tape to prevent damage.
then remove the rear spring seat lower cover (B). 1. Remove the left rear wheel.
NOTE: To release the clip, pry up on the center pin at 2. Remove the clips, then remove the fuel fill pipe cover
the notch (C). (A).
Fastener Location NOTE: To release the clip, pry up on the center pin at
S crew , 1 > : Clip, 1 the notch (B).
Fastener Locations
t> : Clip, 3
!9
9-
='9
S f l
M B
A
2. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
3. Install the fuel fill pipe cover in the reverse order of
If the clip is damaged or stress-whitened, replace it
with a new one.
Push the clip and the hook portions into place
them with new ones.
securely.
4. Reinstall the left rear wheel.
Rear Fender Cover Replacement
Leftside Right side

NOTE: NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the rear bumper or the related Take care not to scratch the rear bumper or the related
parts. parts.
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
protective tape to prevent damage. protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Remove the screws and the clips (A, B), then remove 1. Remove the screws and the clips (A, B), then remove
the rear fender cover (C). the rear fender cover (C).
NOTE: To release the clips, pry up on the center pin at NOTE: To release the clips, pry up on the center pin at
the notch (D). the notch (D).
Fastener Locations Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2 A t> : Clip, 2 B D>: Cl ip, 1 : Screw, 2 A !> : Clip, 2 B t> : Clip, 1
A
A
A
2. Install the rear fender cover in the reverse order of

If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace 2. Install the rear fender cover in the reverse order of
them with new ones. removal, and note these items:
Push the clips into place securely. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones.
Front Floor Undercover Replacement
Left side Right side

NOTE: NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts. Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts.
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
protective tape to prevent damage. protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Remove the middle floor undercover (see page 1. Remove the bolts and clips, then remove the right
20-166). front floor undercover (A).
2. Remove the bolt and the clips, then remove the left NOTE: To release the clips, pry up on the center pin at
front floor undercover (A). the notch (B).
NOTE: To release the clips, pry up on the center pin at Fastener Locations
the notch (B). : Bolt, 2 t> : Clip, 6
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 1 > : Clip, 6
J J
B B
6 x 1.0 mm
18 N-m (1.8 kgf m, 13 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
18 N*m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft)
2. Install the right front floor undercover in the reverse

order of removal, and note these items:
3. Install the left front floor undercover in the reverse If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
order of removal, and note these items: them with new ones.
* If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace Push the clips into place securely.
them with new ones.
SUBFRAME
TRAILING ARM BRACE

Middle Crossmember Gusset Rear Wheelhouse Gusset
NOTE: NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body or the related
Put on gloves to protect your hands. parts.
Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts. 1. Remove the rear side trim panel (see page 20-64).
1. Remove the rear side trim panel (see page 20-64). 2. Remove the bolt and the nut, then remove the rear
2. Remove the carpet as needed, remove the bolts (A, B) wheelhouse gusset (A).
and detach the harness clips (C), then remove the
Fastener Locations
middle crossmember gusset (D).
; Bolt, 1 : Nut, 1
Fastener Locations
(2.2 k g fm , 16 Ib fft)
3. Install the gusset in the reverse order of removal.
3. Install the gusset in the reverse order of removal and

push the clips into place securely.
Trailing Arm Brace Replacement
NOTE:
20-166).
2. Remove the bolts (A, B) and the nuts, then remove the
trailing arm brace (C) from the body.
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt,2 B : Bolt,2 :N u t,2
10 x 1.25 mm 2 2 N m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)

38 N-m (3.9 k g fm , 28 Ibf-ft)
3. Install the trailing arm brace in the reverse order of
removal.
Subframe Replacement
Front Subframe Torque

NOTE:
After loosing the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones.
After reinstalling the subframe, check and adjust the front wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
Replace.
Subframe Replacement (cont'd)
Front Subframe Alignment

NOTE: Align the front subframe using a screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide.
1. Align the front subframe (A) in the following sequence.
-1. Lift the front subframe up to the body, and loosely install the new subframe mounting bolts (B).
-2. Loosely install the new subframe mounting bolts (C).
-3. Insert a screwdriver (D) through the right side positioning hole (E) on the subframe, and into the positioning hole (F)
on the body, then loosely tighten the right subframe mounting bolt.
-4. Insert a screwdriver through the left side positioning hole on the subframe, and into the positioning hole on the
body, then loosely tighten the left subframe mounting bolt.
-5. Tighten the subframe mounting bolts to the specified torque values stating with the right subframe mounting bolt
Use the screwdriver when tightening the right subframe mounting bolts.
-6. Check all of the subframe mounting bolts, and retightening if necessary.
NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the sequence as shown.
2. After reinstalling all removed parts, check and adjust the front wheel alignment.
Frame Repair Chart
Top View
Unit: mm (in) -
0 : Inner diam eter
al For engine side m ount 015 (0.59) front g Front side crossmember locating hole 011 (0.43)
a2 For engine side m ount 015 (0.59) outer hi Front floor locating hole 050 (1.97) front
a3 For engine side m ount 015 (0.59) rear il Inside sill locating hole 025 (0.98) front
b1 For transmission m ount 015 (0.59) front j Front floor frame l ocating hole 025 (0.98)
b2 For transmission m ount 015 (0.59) wheelhouse side
b3 For transmission m ount 015 (0.59) rear
c Front side fram e locating hole 0 I 6 (0.63) 374 (14.72) al
d Front damper center hole 048 (1.89)
e1 For front subframe m ount
015 (0.59) front
e2 For front subframe mount
015 (0.59) middle
e3 For front subframe
mount 015 (0.59) rear
f Outrigger locating hole
25 (0.98)
CENTER LINE
BASE LINE
12 Inside sill locating hole 025 (0.98) rear n1 Rear floor rear locating hole 025 (0.98)
h2 Front floor locating hole 025 (0.98) rear n2 Rear floor rear locating hole 025 (0.98)
k Middle fl oor front locating hole 025 (0.98) n3 Rear floor rear locati ng hole 050 (1.97)
11 For trailing arm mount 015 (0.59) inner o Rear damper center hole 024 (0.94)
12 For trailing arm mount 017 (0.67) outer p Rear frame B locating hole 020 (0.79)
(cont'd)
Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)
Side View
Unit: mm (in)
0 : Inner diam eter
al For engine side mount 015 (0.59) front g Front side crossmember locating hole 011 (0.43)
a2 For engine side mount 015 (0.59) outer hi Front floor locating hole 050 (1.97) front
a3 For engine side mount 015 (0.59) rear i1 Inside sill locating hole 025 (0.98) front
bl For transmission m ount 015 (0.59) front j Front floor fram e locating hole 025 (0.98)
b2 For transmission m ount 015 (0.59) wheelhouse side
b3 For transmission m ount 015 (0.59) rear
c Front side frame locating hole 0 I 6 (0.63)
d Front damper center hole 048 (1.89)
e! For front subframe mount
015 (0.59) front
r tS iN
12 Inside sill locating hole 025 (0.98) rear n1 Rear floor rear locating hole 025 (0.98)
h2 Front floor locating hole 025 (0.98) rear n2 Rear floor rear locating hole 025 (0.98)
k Middle floor front locating hole 025 (0.98) n3 Rear floor rear locating hol e 050 (1.97)
11 For trailing arm m ount 015 (0.59) inner o Rear dam per center hole 024 (0.94)
12 For trailing arm m ount 017 (0.67) outer P Rear fram e B locating hole 020 (0.79)
m For spring base locating hole 15 (0.59) x 15 (0.59) square
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (if HVAC maintenance is required)
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative/which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe
tensioners.
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) SYSTEM (If HVAC maintenance is required)

Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
H V A C (H e a tin g , V e n tila t io n , A/C C om pressor Clutch C h e c k ........21-78

a n d A ir C o n d itio n in g ) R efrig eran t Leak C h e c k ..................... 21-79
Special T o o ls .........................................21-2 A/C S ystem Noise C h e c k ................. 21-84
A/C S ystem T e s t ...................................21-86
C lim a te C o n tro l A/C C onden ser R e p la c e m e n t..........21-92
C o m p o n e n t Location In d e x . . .......... 21-3 R eceiver/D ryer D esiccant
A /C Service T ips and P re c a u tio n s . 21-6 R e p la c e m e n t.....................................21-93
A /C S ystem In s p e c tio n ..................... 21-6 A /C C o m p resso r R e p la c e m e n t........21-94
G en eral T ro u blesh o o tin g A/C C o m p resso r Clutch O v e rh a u l. 21-95
In fo rm a tio n ........................................ 21-8
A/C C o m p resso r R elief V a lv e
DTC T ro u b les h o o tin g In d e x ............21-15 R e p la c e m e n t................... .................21-96
S y m p to m Tro u b lesh o o tin g In d e x . 21-16
A/C C o m p resso r T h e rm a l
S ystem D e s c rip tio n ............................. 21-19 Protector R e p la c e m e n t.................21-97
C ircuit D ia g r a m ................... ................ 21-32 A/C R efrigerant Oil R e p la c e m e n t.. 21-97
DTC T ro u b le s h o o tin g ......................... 21-34 A/C Line R e p la c e m e n t...... ................ 21-98
R ecirculation C ontrol M o to r Circuit
Dust and Pollen Filter
T ro u b le s h o o tin g ...............................21-58 R e p la c e m e n t.................................... 21-99
C lim ate Control P ow er and B low er U nit R em o val/Installation .. 21-99
G round Circuit B low er U nit C o m p on en t
T ro u b le s h o o tin g ...............................21-59 R e p la c e m e n t.....................................21-100
R adiator and A/C C ondenser Fan Expansion Valve R e p la c e m e n t 21-101
Low Speed Circuit E vaporator Core R e p la c e m e n t........21-103
T ro u b le s h o o tin g ...............................21-60 * H eater U nit/C ore R e p la c e m e n t 21-105
A /C C ondenser Fan High S peed A ir M ix Control M o to r
Circuit T ro u b le s h o o tin g ............... 21-64
R e p la c e m e n t.....................................21-107
A /C C o m p resso r Clutch Circuit M o d e Control M o to r
T ro u b le s h o o tin g ........................... . .2 1-66 R e p la c e m e n t.....................................21-108
A /C Signal Circuit R ecirculation Control M o to r
T ro u b le s h o o tin g .............................. 21-69 R e p la c e m e n t.....................................21-108
N avig atio n C o m m u n ica tio n Line H u m id ity/ln -C ar T e m p e ra tu re
Circuit T ro u b lesh o o tin g ................21-71 S en so r R e p la c e m e n t..................... 21-109
H u m id ity/ln -C ar T em p e ra tu re O utside A ir T e m p e ra tu re S ensor
Sensor T e s t ........................................ 21-72 R e p la c e m e n t.....................................21-109
O utside A ir T e m p e ra tu re S e n so r S u n lig h t Sensor R e p la c e m e n t........21-110
T e s t ........................................................21-73
C lim ate Control U n it K nob
S u n lig h t S en so r T e s t ......................... 21-74 R e p la c e m e n t.....................................21-110
P o w er T ransisto r T e s t ..................... . 21-74
C lim ate Control U n it
A ir M ix Control M o to r T e s t ............. 21-75 R e m o v a l/In s ta lla tio n ...................... 21-112
M o d e Control M o to r T e s t ................. 21-76 R efrig eran t R e c o v e ry ......................... 21-113
Recirculation C ontrol M o to r T e s t .. 21-77
System E v a c u a tio n .............................21-113
E vaporator T e m p e ra tu re S e n so r System C h a rg in g .................................21-114
T e s t ........................................................21-77
HVAC (Heating, Ventilati on, and Air Conditioning)
Special Tools

07AAF-000A150 A/C Compressor Kit 1
07SAZ-001000A Backprobe Set 2
I
RECEIVER/DRYER
Desiccant Replacement, page 21-93
A/C COMPRESSOR
Cl utch Check, page 21-78
Cl utch Overhaul , page 21-95 A/C CONDENSER
Thermal Protector Replacement, page 21-97 Replacement, page 21-92
Rel ief Valve Repl acement, page 21-96
A/F SENSOR RELAY

Test, page 22-92
SENSOR
Test, page 21-73
EVAPORATOR CORE SUNLIGHT SENSOR
Test, page 21-74 BLOWER UNIT
(Located in the heater unit) Removal/Installation, page 21-99
Component Replacement, page 21-100
HEATER UNIT/CORE
RECIRCULATION
CONTROL IVIOTOR
Test, page 21-77
ASPIRATOR Replacement, page 21-108
/D U S T AND POLLEN FILTER

EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
Test, page 21-77
"MODE CONTROL MOTOR

Test, page 21-76
w
i ft
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Test, page 21-72
Replacement, page 21-109 POWER
TRANSISTOR AIR M IX CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-74 CLIMATE CONTROL
Test, page 21-75 UNIT
Replacement, page 21-107 Removal/Installation, page 21-112
Knob Replacement, page 21-110
A/C Service Tips and Precautions A/C System Inspection
ikWARNIN NOTE: For A/C system noise, go to the A/C System Noise
Check (see page 21-84).
Compressed air mixed with the R-134a forms a
combustible vapor. Before troubleshooting any problem with the air
The vapor can burn or explode causing serious conditioning system, other than noise, do the following:
injury.
1. Check that the HVAC air intake plenum at the base of
Never use compressed air to pressure test R-134a the windshield is not blocked by leaves or debris.
service equipment or vehicle air conditioning Remove any blockage.
systems.
2. Check for kinks or sharp bends in the A/C lines and
hoses (which can greatly reduce system
ACAUTIO f t . performance). If any of the A/C lines and hoses are
Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can kinked or bent, replace them (see page 21-98).
irritate your eyes, nose, or throat.
Be careful when connecting service equipment 3. Inspect the A/C components, the pressure lines, and
the hoses for stains that may indicate a refrigerant or
Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
an A/C compressor oil leak. If there is any indication of
The air conditioning system uses HFC-134a (R-134a) leaks, do the Refrigerant Leak Check (see page 21-79)
refrigerant and polyalkyleneglyeol (PAG) refrigerant oil. to confirm the leak(s).
Use only service equipment that is U.L-listed and is

certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2788 to
Checkfor stains.
remove R-134a from the air conditioning system.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work
area before resuming service.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning
systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested
with compressed air.
Additional health and safety information may be
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
Always disconnect the negative cable from the 12 volt
battery (see page 22-86) whenever replacing air
conditioning parts. 4. Inspect the drive belt for physical damage or signs of
Keep moisture and dirt out of the system. When slippage (see page 10-17). If the drive belt is damaged
disconnecting any lines, plug or cap the fittings or shows signs of slippage, replace it and recheck.
immediately; do not remove the caps or plugs until
just before you reconnect each line.
Before connecting any hose or line, apply a few drops
of refrigerant oil to the O-ring.
When tightening or loosening a fitting, use a second
wrench to support the matching fitting.
When discharging the system, use an R-134a
refrigerant recovery/recycIing/charging station; do not
release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
5, Check the A/C condenser (A) for material clogging the 11. Check that the A/C compressor clutch at mature plate
fins (dirt, insects, etc.). If the A/C condenser is clogged (A) is rotating at the same speed a? the rotor pulley
or restricted, carefully clean any material from the A/C and is engaging. If the A/C compressor clutch does
condenser fins with water and detergent. If deeper not engage, go to A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit
cleaning is required, clean the fins with HondaBrite Troubleshooting'(see page,21 -66). 9 ' -
cleaner (P/N 08732-0020B). Do not perform pressure
test until the A/C condenser completely dry.
6. Check the A/C condenser for fin damage (bent fins). If

12. Check that the A/C condenser fan (B) and the radiator
any of the A/C condenser fins are bent, try to comb
fan (C) operate when the A/C compressor clutch is
them straight. Do the Refrigerant Leak Check (see
engaged and blow air toward the engine
page 21-79) to check for leaks if there is visible
compartment. If one or both of the fans is not working
damage to the A/C condenser. If the A/C condenser is
properly, refer to the symptom troubleshooting (see
leaking or the fins cannot be straightened, replace the
page 21-16).
A/C condenser.
13. Check that the engine idle speed is correctly
7. Check the dust and pollen filter. If the dust and pollen
maintained when the A/C is switched on and off, (A/C
filter is clogged or restricted, replace it (see page
compressor clutch is engaged and disengaged). If the
21-99).
idle speed increases more than 100 rpm when the A/C
8. Check for climate control DTCs using the compressor engages, confirm that the A/C
Self-Diagnostic Function (see page 21-9). If there are compressor is the cause of the idle speed increase.
any DTCs, go to the appropriate troubleshooting (see Replace the A/C compressor (see page 21-94), if
page 21-15). necessary.
9. Start the engine, turn the air conditioning system on,
and allow it to run for a few minutes and reach stable
operation.
10. Check that the A/C operates at each position of the fan
control switch (except OFF). If the A/C does not
operate at all fan control switch positions, refer to the
symptom troubleshooting (see page 21 -16).
How to Check for DTCs With th e HDS

NOTE:
There are three methods used to check for DTCs. The recommended method is to use the Honda Diagnostic System
(HDS) with the appropriate software, plugged into the data link connector (DLC).
The second method is to run the self-diagnostic function built into the climate control unit.
The third method is to use the B-CAN system diagnosis test mode A (see page 22-126).
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.

4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the climate control unit. If it does n o t troubleshoot the DLC
5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select DTCs in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL menu.
7. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are indicated, write down the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting. If no
DTCs are indicated, refer to symptom troubleshooting (see page 21-16).
NOTE:
After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs with the HDS.
For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the HDS.
How to Use the Self-Diagnostic Function With the HDS
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the climate control unit. If it does not, troubleshoot the DLC
5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select DTCs in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL menu.
7. Select CLIMATE CONTROL SELF TEST in the INSPECTION menu.
8. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are indicated, write down the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting.
NOTE;
After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs with the HDS.
For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the HDS.
How to Use the Self-Diagnostic Function Without the HDS

The climate control unit has a self-diagnostic function. To run the self-diagnostic function, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to ON (II).
2. Press and hold the ON/OFF button, then within 10 seconds press and release the REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/MIRROR HEATER button five times. Release the ON/OFF button, then the self-diagnostic begins.
NOTE:
The blower motor will run at various speeds regardless of what the panel is displaying.
If there is a problem with the system, it will flash 88, or 88 AUTO or 88 A/C, and one or more of the 14 indicator
segments (A through P). Refer to checking for DTCs.
If there is more than one DTC, they are displayed one at a time in sequence followed by a pause (all the display
indicator segments illuminate) between the DTCs.
If there are no problems detected, the segments will not illuminate, and the system will appear to be turned off.
Canceling the Self-Diagnostic Function

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing repair work, run the
self-diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other DTCs.
Trouble Code Memory Function
The trouble code that the climate control unit memorizes is displayed. To run the trouble code memory function, do the
following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to ON (II).
2. Press and hold the AUTO button, then press and hold the ON/OFF button.
3. The trouble code memorized in the climate control unit is displayed.
Checking for DTCs
The temperature display indicates single or multiple DTCs. If no DTCs are present, the indicator remains blank.
NOTE: If indicator segments A, C, D, E, G, J, and the AUTO indicator or the A/C indicator are on at the same time, there
may be an open in the climate control unit ground circuit. .
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR AUTO INDICATOR A/C INDICATOR
C E B D
AUTO A /C
L J HP
DTC (Temperature Detection Item

Indicator Segment,
AUTO and A/C
. Indicator)
A and AUTO An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-36)
B and AUTO A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-37)
C and AUTO An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-38)
D and AUTO A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-39)
E and AUTO An open in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-40)
F and AUTO A short in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-42)
G and AUTO An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-43)
H and AUTO A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-44)
J and AUTO An open in the humidity sensor circuit (see page 21-55)
K and AUTO A short in the humidity sensor circuit (see page 21-56)
A and A/C An open in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-45)
B and A/C A short in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-46)
C and A/C A problem in the air mix control motor circuit, linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-47)
D and A/C An open or short in the mode control motor circuit (see page 21-49)
E and A/C ' A problem in the mode control motor circuit, linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-51)
F and A/C A problem in the blower motor circuit (see page 21-52)
A Climate control unit internal error (see page 21 -34)
B Climate control unit lost communication with gauge control module (VSP/NE message)
(see page 21-34)
C Climate control unit lost communication with gauge control module (coolant temp
message) (see page 21-34)
D Climate control unit lost communication with gauge control module (illumination
message) (see page 21-34)
E Communication bus line error (BUS-OFF) (see page 22-139)
(cont'd)
Displaying Sensor Inputs at the Climate Control Unit

The climate control unit has a mode that displays sensor inputs it receives. This mode shows you what the climate
control unit is receiving from each of the sensors, one at a time, and it can help you determine if a sensor is faulty.
Checks Before Using the Sensor input Display Mode
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the recirculation door function; press the recirculation button to switch
from FRESH to RECIRC. The air volume and sound should change slightly.
2. Set the temperature control knob to the desired test temperature. When selecting the test temperature, note these
items:
"Lo" temperature setting will default to MAX COOL, VENT, and RECIRC (A/C ON) or FRESH (A/C OFF).
"Hi" temperature setting will default to MAX HOT, HEAT or HEAT/DEF (switches between HEAT, HEAT/DEF
according to the outside air temperature sensor reading), and FRESH.
57 through 87 F (or 18 through 32 C) settings will use the automatic climate control logic.
Run the Sensor Input Display Mode
2. Press and hold both the AUTO and RECIRCULATION buttons, then start the engine.
3. After the engine starts, release both buttons. The display panel control unit will flash the sensor number and then the
value for that sensor. Record the value displayed.
4. To advance to the next sensor, press the REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/MIRROR HEATER button.
NOTE:
The sensor values will be displayed in degrees Celsius (C) or an alphanumeric code. Use the chart to convert the
value to degrees Fahrenheit (F).
If the sensor value displays "Er", this indicates there is an open or short in the circuit or sensor. Check for DTCs
using the HDS, or use the climate control self-diagnostic function.
If necessary, compare the sensor input display to a known-good vehicle under the same test conditions.
If the sensor displayed value is out of the normal range, refer to the sensor test or substitute a known-good sensor,
and recheck.
Sensor Item Displayed Value

1 Mode positioning BIT
2 In-car temperature C
3 Outside air temperature C
4 Solar radiation sensor value: dark = 00, flashlight = 04, cloudy =10, sunny = 65 10 kcal/m2-h
5 Evaporator outlet air temperature c
6 Air mix opening (low value indicates cooler air distribution, higher value % of opening
indicates warmer air distribution)
7 Vehicle speed (vehicle must be driven to display speed) 10 km/h
8 Engine coolant temperature C
9 Vent temperature air out (TAO) C
A Humidity sensor value %
b Illumination duty Step
C Auto idle stop prohibit flag
d Software version
B B
Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion Table

c F C F C F C F C F
0 32 10 50 20 68 30 86 40 104
1 34 11 52 21 70 31 88 41 106
2 36 12 54 22 72 32 90 42 108
3 37 13 55 23 73 33 91 43 109
4 39 14 57 24 75 34 93 44 111
5 41 15 59 25 77 35 95 45 113
6 43 16 61 26 79 36 97 46 115
7 45 17 63 27 81 37 99 47 117
8 46 18 64 28 82 38 100 48 118
9 48 19 66 29 84 39 102 49 120
C F C F C F C F C F
50 122 60 140 70 158 80 176 90 194
51 124 61 142 71 160 81 178 91 196
52 126 62 144 72 162 82 180 92 198
53 127 63 145 73 163 83 181 93 199
54 128 64 147 74 165 84 183 94 201
55 131 65 149 75 167 85 185 95 203
56 133 66 151 76 169 86 187 96 205
57 135 67 152 77 170 87 188 97 207
58 136 68 154 78 172 88 190 98 208
59 139 69 158 79 174 89 192 99 210
Alphanumeric Conversion Table

Display Reading C F %
(Alphanumeric)
A1 thru A9 - 1 th ru - 9 30 thru 16 - 1 thru -9
B0 thru B9 10 thru 19 14 th ru - 2 -1 0 th ru -1 9
CO thru C9 - 2 0 thru - 2 9 - 4 th ru - 2 0 - 2 0 thru -2 9
DO thru D9 - 3 0 thru - 3 9 22 thru 38 30 thru 39
EO thru E9 - 4 0 thru - 4 9 40 thru 56 - 4 0 thru -4 9
FO thru F9 + 100 thru +109
(cont'd)
Mode Motor Code Information

Code information on the mode motor is displayed by combining regulated segments.
MODE 2 MODE 4
SHORT
(GND)
0
I
Lighting Li ghting
\ Lighting
Mode motor code signal Mode position

0: Open, 1: Short (GND)
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4
1 0 0 0 OVER VENT
1 0 0 1 VENT
0 0 0 1 VENT-HEAT/VENT
0 0 1 1 HEATA/ENT
0 0 1 0 HEAT/VENT-HEAT
0 1 1 0 HEAT
0 1 0 0 HEAT-H EAT/DE F
1 1 0 0 HEAT-DEF
1 1 1 0 HEAT/ DEF-DEF
1 0 1 0 DEF
1 0 1 1 OVER DEF
Display of Auto Idle Stop Prohibit Flag
Permission: 00
prohibit: 01
Permission and prohibit of the auto idle stop are displayed in the preset temperature indicator.
5. To cancel the sensor input display mode, press the AUTO button or turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Checking the DTCs with the HDS

DTC Detection Item or Symptom ECU DTCtype Page
B1200 Communication bus line error Climate control Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
(BUS-OFF) unit communication (see page 22-139)
B1205 Climate control unit lost Climate control Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
communication with gauge control unit communication (see page 21-34)
module (VSP/NE message)
module (coolant temp message)
module (illumination message)
B1225 An open in the in-car temperature Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
sensor circuit unit (see page 21-36)
B1226 A short in the in-car temperature Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
sensor circuit unit (see page 21-37)
B1227 An open in the outside air Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
temperature sensor circuit unit (see page 21-38)
B1228 A short in the outside air Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1229 An open in the sunlight sensor circuit Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
unit (see page 21-40)
B1230 A short in the sunlight sensor circuit Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1231 An open in the evaporator Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1232 A short in the evaporator Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1233 An open in the air mix control motor Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
circuit unit (see page 21-45)
B1234 A short in the air mix control motor Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1235 A problem in the air mix control Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
motor circuit, linkage, door, or motor unit (see page 21-47)
B1239 An open or short in the mode control Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
motor circuit unit (see page 21-49)
B1240 A problem in the mode control motor Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
circuit, linkage, door, or motor unit (see page 21-51)
B1241 A problem in the blower motor Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B2967 An open in the humidity sensor Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B2968 A short in the humidity sensor circuit Climate control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
communication with MICU (WIPSW unit communication (see page 21-57)
message)

The recirculation control doors Probable cause: Recirculation control motor Blown fuse No. B10 (7.5 A)
do not change between Fresh circuit malfunction in the under-dash
and Recirculate Do the recirculation control motor circuit fuse/relay box
troubleshooting (see page 21-58) Poor or loose connections
at the terminals
The blower and heater Probable cause: The climate control unit Climate control DTCs (see
controls and the A/C system malfunction page 21-8)
do not work Do the climate control power and ground circuit Powertrain DTCs (see page
troubleshooting (see page 21-59) 11-3)
Blown fuse No. B10 (7.5 A)
and No. B57 (30 A) in the
under-dash fuse/ relay box
Poor ground at
G501 (see page 22-40) and
G502 (see page 22-44)
Poor or loose connections
at the terminals
The A/C compressor clutch Probable cause: A/C pressure sensor circuit Climate control DTCs (see
and the A/C malfunction page 21-8)
condenser/radiator fans are Troubleshoot the A/C pressure sensor circuit: Blown fuse No. B30 (30 A)
inoperative, but the blower A/C pressure sensor circuit low voltage (see and No. B47 (30 A) in the
and heater controls work page 11-266) under-dash fuse/relay box
A/C pressure sensor circuit high voltage (see Poor or loose connections
page 11-268) at the terminals
NOTE: The A/C pressure sensor can
malfunction without setting a DTC.
The A/C compressor clutch Probable cause: Climate control DTCs (see
does not engage, but the A/C No power to the A/C compressor clutch. Do page 21-8)
condenser/radiator fans the A/C compressor clutch circuit Blown fuse No. B10 (7.5 A)
operate, and the blower and troubleshooting (see page 21-66) and No. B43 (7.5 A) in the
heater controls work Low speed idle under-dash fuse/relay box
High engine coolant temperature (ECT) A/C system pressure is
normal
at the terminals
The A/C condenser fan and/or Probable cause: A/C condenser/radiator fan low Climate control DTCs (see
the radiator fan do not run with speed circuit malfunction page 21-8)
the A/C on Do the radiator and A/C condenser fan low Powertrain DTCs (see page
speed circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-60) 11-3)
Blown fuse No. B30 (30 A)
and No. B10 (7.5 A) in the
under-dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G401 (see
page 22-36)
at the terminals
The A/C condenser/radiator Probable cause: Malfunction in the fan high Climate control DTCs (see
fans do not run at high speed, speed circuit(s). page 21-8)
but do run at low speed Do the following troubleshooting as needed: Powertrain DTCs (see page
A/C condenser fan high speed circuit 11-3)
troubleshooting (see page 21-64) Blown fuse No. B30 (30 A)
Radiator fan high speed circuit and No. B47 (30A) in the
troubleshooting (see page 10-32) under-dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G401 (see
page 22-36)
at the terminals
m

Voice commands do not work Probable cause: Communication problem Climate control DTCs (see
between the climate control unit and the page 21-8)
audio-navigation unit Navigation link
Do the navigation communication line circuit Poor or loose connections
troubleshooting (see page 21-71) at the terminals
Blower fan runs slower than Probable cause: Engine coolant temperature Climate control DTCs (see
expected in cold weather (ECT) circuit malfunction page 21-8)
(when in AUTO mode) Troubleshoot the ECT sensor circuit: Powertrain DTCs (see page
NOTE: It is normal for the ECT sensor 2 circuit low voltage (see page 11-3)
blower fan to run slowly until 11-172) Manual blower motor
the coolant temperature rises ECT sensor 2 circuit high voltage (see page operation
when in AUTO mode 11-173)
The A/C compressor clutch Probable cause: A/C system is very low on Climate control DTCs (see
cycles rapidly on and off refrigerant indicating a possible leak page 21-8)
Check low idle first, then check data list A/C If there is no leak and the
pressure sensor refrigerant level is normal,
Do the refrigerant leak check (see page 21-79) do the A/C compressor
and repair any leaks. Replace the clutch circuit
receiver/dryer (see page 21-93), then recharge troubleshooting (see page
the system to specifications (see page 21-114) 21-66), and look for an
intermittent problem
The A/C compressor clutch Probable cause: The A/C compressor clutch The A/C compressor relief
does not disengage when the circuit is on (energized) continuously, shorted to valve. If it has vented
A/C switch is off ground, stuck A/C compressor clutch relay, or refrigerant to the
the A/C compressor clutch is mechanically atmosphere, correct the
jammed problem with the A/C
Do the A/C compressor clutch circuit compressor clutch or clutch
troubleshooting (see page 21-66), and repair circuit, then replace the relief
any circuit problems valve (see page 21 -96).
If the A/C compressor clutch circuit is OK,
then do the A/C compressor clutch check (see
page 21-78), and repair any problems with the
A/C compressor clutch
The A/C compressor relief Probable cause: A high-side restriction, the A/C Powertrain DTCs (see page
valve has vented refrigerant condenser/radiator fans are inoperative, or the 11-3)
NOTE: This indicates the A/C A/C compressor clutch is not disengaging
system pressure was very If the fans and A/C compressor clutch operate
high normally, recover refrigerant (see page
21-113), and check for restrictions
If the A/C compressor clutch will not
disengage, troubleshoot the A/C compressor
clutch circuit (see page 21-66), and checkfor
mechanical problems (see page 21-78)
If the fans are inoperative, troubleshoot the
fan circuits (see page 21-60)
HDS does not communicate Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -383)
with the climate control unit or
the vehicle
(cont'd)

Insufficient heating 1. Check the coolant level (see page 10-8) Climate control DTCs (see
2. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-4) page 21-8)
3. Check the coolant temperature during Damaged cylinder head
normal operation gasket
4. Check the heater core inlet hose temperature:
If it is COLD, check for restrictions in the
hose, a damaged or leaking thermostat, or
a damaged or leaking water pump
If it is HOT, check for restrictions in the
heater core. Back flush or replace the
heater core
5. Do the air mix control motor test (see page
21-75)
6. Check the blower motor unit for obstructions
7. Check for air leaks around the ducts and
vents
System Description
The air conditioning (A/C) system removes heat from the passenger compartment by transferring heat from the ambient
air to the evaporator. The A/C system refrigerant expands in the evaporator, and the evaporator becomes very cold and
absorbs the heat from the ambient air. The blower fan pushes air across the evaporator where the heat is absorbed, and
then it blows the cool air into the passenger compartment.
EXPANSION VALVE
(Meters the required amount of
refrigerant into the evaporator)
BLOWER FAN
EVAPORATOR
(Absorption of heat)
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
RELI EF VALVE
(Rel ieves pressure at the A/C compressor
w hen the pressure is too high)
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR
When the refrigerant i s bel ow
196 kPa (2.00 kgf/cm2, 28.4 psi)
or above 3,138 kPa (32.00 kgf/cm2,
455.1 psi), the ECM/PCM turns
the A/C compressor clutch relay off
to protect the A/C compressor.
When the refrigerant is above A/C COMPRESSOR
1,230 kPa (12.54 kgf/cm2, 178.4 psi), (Suction and compression)
the A/C pressure sensor switches
the radiator and A/C condenser HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR
fans to high speed.
HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID
LOW PRESSURE LIQUID

A/C CONDENSER
(Radiation of heat)
LOW PRESSURE VAPOR
RECEIVER/DRYER
(Traps debris, and
removes moisture)
This vehicle uses MFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant, which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the
following service items:
Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglyeol (PAG) refrigerant oil (SP-10) designed for the R-134a A/C compressor.
Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil with any other refrigerant oil will result in A/C compressor failure.
Ail A/C system parts (A/C compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, A/C condenser, receiver/dryer,
expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are designed for refrigerant R-134a.
Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
Use only a recovery/recycling/charging station for refrigerant R-134a.
Always recover refrigerant R-134a with an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before disconnecting any
A/C fitting.
Oil Separator
Oil emission from the A/C compressor to the A/C line is reduced by placing the oil separator in the A/C compressor. This
results in a thinner oil film inside of the heat exchangers (A/C condenser and evaporator). Air conditioning efficiency is
increased without sacrificing engine performance.
Climate Control Door Positions
HOT COOL
t* 1 ft ! tJ J
(VENT)

y
(HEAT/VENT)
(HEAT)
HOT COOL
,9 }
(HEAT/DEF)
%
' i >,
)! TT-
'( ((
wT rr \ ii
9 !{4
(DEF)
P P iS
IU 9
Air Conditioning System Control in the ECON iVlode ~.
At an outside air temperature of 73 F (23 C) or higher in ECON mode, the air conditioning system controls the following,
functions to reduce power consumption.
Switching to recirculation mode

Compared to outside air intake, the recirculation of air inside the vehicle reduces compressor operation frequency and
air volume.
Reducing compressor operation frequency
Compared to the normal control, the climate control unit shortens the A/C compressor operation time, which reduces
power consumption.
Reducing air volume
Compared to the normal control, blower fan operation is suppressed and power consumption is reduced.
Except ECON MODE (Normal control )
ECON MODE
Conditions th at prevent ECON mode control

The air conditioning system does not switch to ECON mode control under the following conditions:
When the mode position is not in VENT or HEAT/VENT.
When the driver selects MAX HOT or MAX COOL.
Outside air temperature is less than 73 F (23 C).
When the driver selects A/C OFF mode.
Conditions that cancel the ECON mode control

The air conditioning system cancels the ECON mode control under the following conditions:
When the mode positions get are other than VENT and HEAT/VENT.
When the driver selects MAX HOT or MAX COOL.
Outside air temperature is less than 73 F (23 C)
When the driver selects A/C OFF mode.
When the driver selects FRESH mode manually.
When the driver selects DEF mode manually.
B B
Auto Idle Stop System Control During A/C Use

The climate control unit calculates the duration of the auto idle stop while the vehicle is stopped, based on sensor
inputs, considering the passenger's comfort and visibility.
Passenger comfort
The duration of the auto idle stop is the time when the passenger's do not feel a sudden change of the in-car
temperature and humidity.
Visibility
To avoid windows fogging, the climate control unit disables the auto idle stop when it determines that the windows are
likely to be fogged, based on the humidity sensor value and the drive signal input from the wiper. The calculation of the
duration of the auto idle stop varies between NORMAL and SPORT modes and ECON mode. In ECON mode, the climate
control unit considers only visibility (prevention of window fogging). In NORMAL and SPORT modes, the unit also
considers the comfortable environment inside the vehicle. ECON mode can extend the duration of the auto idle stop,
which can improve fuel economy.
When the windows get fogged during auto idle stop, the engine restarts when DEF mode is turned on.
If the climate control unit detects a sensor malfunction, or ifthe ECM/PCM detect a problem with the communication line
to the climate control unit during A/C use, auto idle stop is disabled, and the IMA indicator comes on to alert the driver of
the problem. The climate control unit may disable auto idle stop under other conditions as well. For more information,
refer to the IMA section.
How a comfortable in-car environment is determined
In NORMAL and SPORT modes, the climate control unit calculates the upper and lower limits for a comfortable in-car
temperature, keeping the A/C stable to avoid abrupt changes. Auto idle stop is disabled when the upper or lower limits
are exceeded. In ECON mode, the priority is not the in-car environment; it is in keeping auto idle stop enable as long as
possible.
How window fogging is determined
The climate control unit estimates the temperature on the window, based on the outside air temperature, the vehicle
speed, and the in-car temperature and humidity, then calculates a threshold for window fogging. According to this
threshold, the climate control unit determines that the window is likely to be fogged, or will not fog, then calculates the
duration of auto idle stop.
Shortening of the auto idle stop duration
The climate control unit determines that the humidity will rise, based on the humidity sensor value and the drive signal
input from the wipers, and shortens the duration of the auto idle stop.
Engine restart request signal to the gauge control module
When the duration of auto idle stop calculated by the climate control unit has expired or when selecting DEF mode
during auto idle stop, the climate control unit sends a signal to the gauge control module to blink the auto idle stop
indicator rapidly, reminding the driver to restart the engine.
Auto Idle Stop Disable Conditions

The air conditioning system disables auto idle stop under any one of the following conditions. But the climate control
unit enables auto idle stop when the blower motor is off.
Outside air temperature is less than 4 F (20 C)_______ ________ ______________________ _____________
When the driver selects DEF mode manually___________________________________________ .______________
Climate control unit lost communication with gauge control module (coolant temp message)________________
m Climate control unit lost communication with gauge control module (VSP/NE message)____________________
Outside air temperature sensor malfunction_________________________________________________________
Humidity sensor malfunction______________________________________________
Sunlight sensor malfunction________________________________________ ___________________ ________
Evaporator temperature sensor malfunction_____________________
The following conditions also disable auto idle stop when the A/C is ON, in NORMAL or SPORT mode, or when the A/C is
OFF, in NORMAL or SPORT mode and HEAT or HEAT/DEF is selected. ______________
When the driver selects MAX COOL or MAX HOT_____________________
When the fan operates at the specified voltage of the terminal of the blower fan (8 V or more) ____________
When HEAT or HEAT/DEF is selected
- Outside air temperature is less than 32 F (0 C)
-W hen the engine coolant temperature is less than 158 F (70 C)______________________________________
B B
Dual Construction A/C Line

The A/C line unit installed between the engine compartment and the evaporator is the dual construction type.
The discharge line (high pressure) is built inside the suction line (low pressure).
This design is effective for lowering refrigerant temperatures in the discharge line, which helps to improve cooling
performance.
Existing Design Dual Construction
From the receiver tank

(high pressure)
From the cooling unit

o (low pressure)
(cont'd)
A/C Pressure Sensor

The A/C pressure sensor converts A/C pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM.
A/C System Pressure* Sensor System Operation HDS
Output PGM-FI
Voltage Data List
(V out)
Abnormally low pressure: Below 196 kPa Below The ECM/PCM disengages the compressor FAN HIGH
(2.00 kgf/cm2, 28.4 psi) 0.685 V clutch. The radiator and A/C condenser fans CONTROL:
operate based on engine coolant temperature. ON, OFF
Normal operating pressure: 0.686 V to The ECM/PCM cycles the compressor clutch
Above 196 kPa (2.00 kgf/cm2, 28.4 psi) 1.944 V based on cooling demand. The radiator and FAN LOW
Below 1,230 kPa (12.54 kgf/cm2, 178.4 psi) A/C condenser fans operate at low speed CONTROL:
unless the engine coolant temperature ON, OFF
exceeds 206 F (97 C).
High operating pressure: 1.945 V to The ECM/PCM cycles the compressor clutch A/C
Above 1,230 kPa (12.54 kgf/cm2, 178.4 psi) 4.575 V based on cooling demand. The radiator and PRESSURE
Below 3,138 kPa (32.00 kgf/cm2, 455.1 psi) A/C condenser fans operate at high speed. SENSOR:
Abnormally high pressure: More than Above The ECM/PCM disengages the compressor V, kPa
3,138 kPa (32.00 kgf/cm2, 455.1 psi) 4.575 V clutch. The radiator and A/C condenser fans (kgf/cm2)
operate based on engine coolant temperature.
*: The A/C system pressure can be monitored in the HDS PGM-FI Data List
The response of the A/C pressure sensor is shown in the graph.
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR
HDS PGM FI Data List Information (as it relates to A/C)

The A/C system data that can be monitored to HDS PGM-FI Data List.
Item Displayed value
ECTSENSOR 2 F (C)
A/C SW (ACS) ON/OFF
A/C CLUTCH ON/OFF
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR 0-5 V, 300-2500 kPa (3.06-25.49 kgf/cm2)
FAN HIGH CTRL ON/OFF
FAN LOW CTRL ON/OFF
AUTO IDLE STOP DOES NOT OCCUR(A/C) EXIST/NONE
B B
Humidity/ln-Car Temperature Sensor

The humidity sensor consists of two sensors. One is for humidity detection, and the other is for in-car temperature
detection. When the climate control unit receives the signals about the in-car condition from the humidity sensor, and
judges that the humidity in the vehicle is very low, the climate control unit reduces the compressor runtime.
Engine power loss is kept to a minimum, and fuel economy is increased.
TEMPERATURE INSPECTION SECTION COVER
HUM IDI TY INSPECTION SECTION
CASE
Humidity/ln-Car Temperature Sensor Quality

The capacitance of the humidity sensor changes by the adsorption and the evaporation of moisture. The resistance
change of the humidity sensor changes the output voltage.
VOLTAGE
(V)
HUMIDITY LEVEL { % )
(cont'd)
Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
CLIMATE CONTROL UN IT 36P CONNECTOR
i..ri r1 r1 r1 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CO
ro
CM
00
CM
o
CM
N-
26 25 24 22 21 19
00
00
00
36 35 32 31 30 28
36P CONNECTOR
Cavity Wire co lor Terminal Description Signal
name
1 PNK MODE 1 Mode control motor position With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
feedback 1 signal (depending on motor position)
2 YEL MODE 2 Mode control motor position With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
3 WHT MODES Mode control motor position With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
4 GRY MODE 4 Mode control motor position With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
5 LT BLU BLW-V Feedback signal of power With ignition switch ON (II): about
transistor drain vo ltage 0 V battery voltage (depending on blower
motor speed)
6 ORN BLW-G Outputs power transistor With ignition switch ON (II) and fan control
gate voltage switch OFF: less than 0.5 V.
With ignition switch ON (II) and fan control
switch ON: about 4.0 V battery voltage
(depending on blower motor control)
7 GRN B-CAN B-CAN communication With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
signal
8* GRY AC-CLK Communication signal from With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
audio-navigation unit
9* WHT AC-SI Communication signal to With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
10* YEL AC-SO Communication signal from With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
11 BLK Not used
12 ORN SENS-COM Sensor ground Less than 0.2 V at all times
14 RED AMD-P Detects potentiometer signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.54.0 V
of air mix control motor (depending on air mix control motor
position)
15 YEL Tam Detects outside air With ignition switch ON (II): about 1.04.0 V
temperature sensor signal (depending on outside air temperature)
16 PNK Teva Detects evaporator With ignition switch ON (II): about 1.04.0 V
temperature sensor signal (depending on evaporator temperature)
*:With navigation
a n
36P CONNECTOR (cont'd)

Cavity Wire color Terminal Description Signal
name
17 BLU ILLUMI Detects illumination control With illumination switch ON: changed
NED) signal voltage (depending on dashlights brightness
controller)
18 RED ILLUMI+ Inputs voltage for With combination light switch ON: battery
illumination voltage
19 GRN S5V Outputs sensor 5 V With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
21 ORN EDGE -ILL Detects EDGE illumination With illumination switch ON: changed
control signal voltage (depending on dashlights brightness
controller)
23 BRN M-DEF Outputs to drive mode With ignition switch ON (II) and mode control
control m otor to DEF side motor moving to DEF: battery voltage
24 RED M-VENT Outputs to drive mode With ignition switch ON (II) and mode control
control m otor to VENT side motor moving to VENT: battery voltage
25 PUR M-HOT Output to drive air mix With ignition switch ON (II) and air mix
control m otor to HOT side control motor moving to HOT: battery
voltage
26 BLU M-COOL Output to drive air mix With ignition switch ON (II) and air mix
control m otor to COOL side control motor moving to COOL: battery
voltage
27 GRN M-FRS Output to drive recirculation With ignition switch ON (II) and recirculation
control motor to FRESH side control motor in position RECIRCU: battery
voltage
28 LT BLU M-REC Output to drive recirculation With ignition switch ON (II) and recirculation
control motor to control motor in position FRESH: battery
RECIRCULATE side voltage
29 PUR Rr DEF-RLY Input rear window defogger With defogger switch OFF: battery voltage
relay With defogger switch ON: 0 V
30 PNK ACS Outputs A/C on/off signal With ignition switch ON (II), normal A/C
pressure, and A/C switch ON: less than 0.5 V
With ignition switch ON (II), normal A/C
pressure, and A/C switch OFF: battery voltage
31 BLK GND Ground for climate control Less than 0.2 V at all times
unit (G502)
33 PUR Tsun Detects sunlight sensor With ignition switch ON (II) and no sunlight or
signal the sensor covered up: 3.56 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and sunlight on
the sensor: less than 3.56 V (depending on
sunlight intensity)
34 LT BLU Tr Detects in-car temperature With ignition switch ON (II): about 1.04.0 V
sensor signal (depending on in-car temperature)
35 WHT Hum Detects hum idity sensor With ignition switch ON (II): about 1.04.0 V
signal (depending on humidity)
36 RED IG2 IG2 power source With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
*:W ith navigation
Circuit Diagram
BATTERYTERMINAL UNDER-DASH
B B
*1: Withautomaticlighting
*2: Without automaticlighting
:CANline
:Othercommunicationline
CLIMATECONTROLUNIT
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC indicator A: Climate Control Unit Internal DTC B1205 or DTC indicator B: Climate
Error Control Unit Lost Communication with Gauge
NOTE; Check the 12 volt battery condition (see page
Control Modu l e (VSP/NE message)
22-85) and the charging system (see page 12-200).
DTC B1206 or DTC indicator C: Climate
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to Control Unit Lost Communication with Gauge
ON (II). Control Module (coolant temp message)
2. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the climate
control unit (see page 21-10). DTC B1207 or DTC indicator D: Climate
Control Unit Lost Communication with Gauge
3. Checkfor DTCs.
Control Module (illumination message)
Is DTC A indicated?
YES-The climate control unit is faulty, replace the
climate control unit (see page 21-112). 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
NO-lnterm ittent failure, the climate control unit is OK
at this tim e. 3. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS (see
page 21-9) or the climate control unit (see page 21-10).
4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1205 or B, and/or B1206 or C, and/or B1207 or
D indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
N O-lnterm ittent failure. Check for loose wires or poor
connections on the gauge control module and climate
control unit c irc u it.!
5. Select B-CAN Control Units Information in the BODY
ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select Check Connected Control Units in the B-CAN
Control Units Information menu.
Is the gauge control module detected?
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control unit (see page
21-112).
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Y
(16P).
B B
9. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay 11. Check fo r continuity between gauge control module
box connector Y (16P) terminal No. 6 and gauge 32P connector terminal No. 31 and climate control
control module 32P connector terminal No. 31. unit 36P connector terminal No. 7.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Y (16P)

W ire s i de o f fem ale te rm inals CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
GRN
GRN
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 * = r
i.
1s]"1711611sl*14113112 11110| 9 | 8 7 | 6 | 5 T4 | 3 | 2 J 1 |
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 |36|35|34|33|32|31|30|29|28(27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19
@
n---------- ------- j.
16 15114 f 13112111 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 |5 |4 3 |2 |1| 1ef 15 j 14^13112111 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 I 5 I 4 3 | 2 | 1 |
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17 |32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19[18|17
GRN
GRN
Is there continuity? GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the MICU and
the gauge control module. YES-Go to gauge control module input test (see page
22-347).
10. Disconnect the climate control unit 36P connector.
control module and the climate control unit.H
DTC B1225 or DTC indicator A and AUTO: An 9. Check for continuity between climate control unit 36P
connectorterminal No. 12 and humidity/in-car
Open in the In-Car Temperature Sensor Circuit
temperature sensor 4P connectorterminal No. 3.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to W ire side o f fem ale te rm inals
ON (II). ORN
I r
3. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS (see 1 8 h 7 | l 6 | l 5 j i 4 | l 3 | l 2 I I |lo | 9 | 8 7 I 6 I 5 ? 4 I 3 I 2 ? 1 I
page 21-9) orthe climate control unit (see page 21-10). |36|35|34|33|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1225 or A and AUTO indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lnterm ittent failure. Check fo r loose wires or poor [4 1 1~|
connections on the in-car temperature sensor ORN
c irc u it.!!
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4P CONNECTOR
W ire side o f fem ale te rm inals
6. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see Is there continuity?
page 21-109), and test it (see page 21-72).
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at the
Is the in-car temperature sensor OK? climate control unit 36P connector and at the
YES-With the humidity/in-car temperature sensor humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector. If
disconnected, go to step 7. the connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit, and recheck. If the
NO-Replace the humidity/in-car temperature sensor symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
(see page 21-109).1H climate control unit (see page 21-112).
7. Disconnect the climate control unit 36P connector. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.Hi
8. Checkfor continuity between climate control unit 36P
connectorterminal No. 34 and humidity/in-car
temperature sensor 4P connector terminal No. 4.
CLI MATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
1s717116115?1411 3 112 1l l | l o | 9 I 8 7|6|5|4|3|2|1|

|36|35|34|33|32|31130|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21120|19
LT BLU
LT BLU
J L n _
3 2 11
HUM IDITY/IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

4P CONNECTOR
W ire s i de o f fem ale te rm in a ls
YES-Go to step 9.
DTC B1226 or DTC indicator B and AUTO: A 9. Checkfor continuity between climate control unit 36P
Short in the In-Car Temperature Sensor
Circuit CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ORN

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
18j l 7 116 11s f 14 113 [12 f j l 0 | 9 [ 8 7 \ 6 | 5 J f | 3 [ 2 f l f
ON (II).
136135j34133132)31"[30'129)28[ 27j26125] 24[ 23]22! 12112o'[19
3. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS (see LTBLU
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1226 or B and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lnterm ittent failure. Check for loose wires or poor
connections on the in-car temperature sensor YES-Repair a short in the wires between the climate
circuit.B control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.HI
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
6. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see replace the original climate control unit (see page
page 21-109), and test it (see page 21 -72). 21-112).H
Is the in-car temperature sensor OK?
YES-With the humidity/in-car temperature sensor
disconnected, go to step 7.
NO-Replace the humidity/in-car temperature sensor
(see page 21-109).H
8. Check for continuity between climate control unit 36P
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
i -------------r
18*fi 7| 16|15*fl4| 13|12 11 ho| 9 I 8 7 | 6 | s T 4 | 3 | 2 h |
|36|35|34|33|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19

between the climate control unit and the in-car
temperature sensor.H
DTG Tr o ubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC B1227 or DTC indicator C and AUTO: An 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit 36P
connector terminal No. 15 and outside air
Open in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Circuit
CLI MATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. W ire side o f fem ale te rm inals

p - YEL n---------------- p
ON (II).
18|17|16|15|14|13|12 1111o| 9 I 8 7 | 6 | 5 | ,4 | 3 | 2 | l |
3. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS (see |36|35|34|33|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19
page 21-9) orthe climate control unit (see page 21-10).
4. Checkfor DTCs.
Is DTC B1227 or C and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5. YEL

connections on the outside air temperature sensor OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
circuit. . W ire side o f fem ale te rm inals
YES-G o to step 9.
6. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see page
21-109), and test it (see page 21 -73). NO-Repair an open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the outside air temperature sensor.H
Is the outside air temperature sensor OK?
YES-With the outside air temperature sensor connector terminal No. 12 and outside air
disconnected, go to step 7. temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No. 1.
NO-Replace the outside air temperature sensor (see CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
page 21-109). W ire s i de o f fem ale te rm i nals
7. Disconnect the climate control unit 36P connector. ORN
I - , .....,..... ,...I.
18 h 7| 16| 1s |l 4| 13| 12 11110| 9 | 8 7|6|5|4|3|2|1|
|36|35|34(33|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19
OUTS I DE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

climate control unit 36P connector and at the outside
air temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
climate control unit (see page 21-112).
B B
DTC B1228 or DTC indicator D and AUTO: A 9. Check for continuity between climate control unit 36P
Short in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Circuit CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to T---------- 7 1
1 8 h 7 |l6 |l5 h 4 |l3 |l2 11110| 9 | 8
ON (II).
|36|35|34|33|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21120| 19
3. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS (see
page 21-9) o rthe climate control unit (see page 21-10).
4. Checkfor DTCs.
Is DTC B1228 or D and AUTO indicated? W ire side o f fem ale te rm inals
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lnterm ittent failure. Check fo r loose wires or poor
connections on the outside air temperature sensor YES-Repair a short in the wires between the climate
circuit. control unit and the outside air temperature sensor.H
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
6. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see page replace the original climate control unit (see page
21-109), and test it (see page 21-73). 21-112).B
Is the outside air temperature sensor OK?
YES-With the outside air temperature sensor
NO-Replace the outside air temperature sensor (see
page 21-109).
YEL
P- L n * n
1 8 |l7 |l6 |l5 |l4 fl3 li2 11 |lo | 9 | 8 7 | 6 | s | 4 | 3 | 2 h |
|36|35|34|33|32|31130|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22 |21120|19
between the climate control unit and the outside air
(cont'd)
DTC B1229 or DTC indicator E and AUTO: An 8. Check fo r continuity between climate control unit 36P
connector terminal No. 33 and sunlight sensor 5P
Open in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
connector terminal No. 2 (with automatic lighting) or
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. sunlight sensor 2P connector terminal No. 2 (without
automatic lighting).
ON (II). With automatic lighting
3. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS (see CLIMATE CONTROL UN I T 36P CONNECTOR
page 21 -9) or the climate control unit (see page 21 -10). W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
4. Checkfor DTCs.
Is DTC B1229 or E and AUTO indicated?
1sT1T| 1611sTl4l 13( 12 11 |l0 | 9 [ 8 7 | 6 | 5 f 4 I 3 [ 2 T f f
YES-Go to step 5. 136135134>|33132131130129128127126125124123 (22[21120| 19
PUR
connections on the sunlight sensor circ u it.!!
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). PUR
........... S ?
6. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector (with 5 4 3 2 1
automatic lighting) or 2P connector (without
automatic lighting).
SUNLIGHT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
7. Disconnect the climate control unit 36P connector. W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
Without automatic lighting

r
18|17|16|15|14|13|12 11110| 9 | 8 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 |
|36|35|34|33|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19
PUR

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the sunlight sensor.H
B B
9, Checkfor continuity between climate control unit 36P 12. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-74).
connector terminal No. 12 and sunlight sensor 5P
connectorterminal No. 4 (with automatic lighting) or Is the sunlight sensor OK?
sunlight sensor 2P connector term inal No. 1 (without YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at the
automatic lighting). climate control unit 36P connector and at the sunlight
With automatic lighting sensor 5P connector (with automatic lighting) or the
sunlight sensor 2P connector (without automatic
lighting). If the connections are good, substitute a
known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the
ORN climate control unit (see page 21-112).
r . - I t------------ r - n
NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-110).B
CO
18|17|16|15|14|13|12 7|6|5|4|3]2|1|
00
o
|36|35|34|33|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23| 22|21|20|19
T
ORN
5 4 3 2 1
SU N L I GHT SENSOR BP CONNECTOR

Without automatic lighting
CLIMATE CONTROL UN I T 36P CONNECTOR

ORN
i---------- r
1 8 |l7 |l6 |l5 h 4 |l3 |l2 1111o| 9 | 8 r I e1 5T4 13 12T11
|36|35|34|33|32|31130|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21120|19
ORN
L l=
j
2 1
y. . 1

YES-Go to step 10.
control unit and the sunlight sensor.H
10. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector (with
automatic lighting) or the sunlight sensor 2P
connector (without automatic lighting).
11. Reconnect the climate control unit 36P connector.
(contd)
DTC B1230 or DTC indicator F and AUTO: 9. Check for continuity between climate control unit 36P
A Short in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to ORN
ON (I I). P r* I n n r,
18117116115114 113112 11 |io | 9 I 8 7 1e 15 T 4 13 r z T n "
3. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS (see |36|35|34|33|32 |3 1|30|29|28|27|26|25|24 |2 3|2 2|21|20|19
page 21-9) or the climate control unit (see page 21-10). PUR
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1230 or F and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5. W i re side o f fem ale te rm i nals
NO -lntermittent failure. Check for loose wires or poor

connections on the sunlight sensor e ircu it.ll
YES-Repair a short in the wires between the climate
control unit and the sunlight sensor.
6. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector (with
NO-Go to step 10.
automatic lighting) or 2P connector (without
automatic lighting). 10. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector (with
automatic lighting) or the sunlight sensor 2P
connector (without automatic lighting).
12. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-74).
Is the sunlight sensor OK?
T 1
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
1 ^ 7 | l 6 | l 5 h 4 | l 3 l l 2 11110| 9 J 8 7 I 6 ] 5 T473 | 27 1 f and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
|36|35|34|33|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24 |2 3|2 2|21|20|19 replace the original climate control unit (see page
21-112).M
NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-110).SB
between the climate control unit and the sunlight
se nso r.il
NO-Go to step 9.
m
DTC B1231 or DTC indicator G and AUTO: An 8. Check fo r continuity between climate control unit 36P
connectorterminal No. 16 and evaporator
Open in the Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Circuit
CL I MATE CONTROL UN IT 36P CONNECTOR
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0)f and then back to
ON (II). "1 m K n---------- n - r.
18|17|16|15|14|13|12 11|lo| 9 | 8 7 | 6| 5| 4| 3| 2| 1|
3. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS (see |36|35|34|33|32|31130|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22[21120|19
page 21 -9) orthe climate control unit (see page 21 -10).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1231 or G and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure. Checkfor loose wires or poor
connections on the evaporator temperature sensor EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
c ir c u iill
YES-Go to step 9.
6. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor (see
page 21-103), and test it (see page 21-77). NO-Repair an open in the w ire between the climate
control unit and the evaporator temperature
Is the evaporator temperature sensor OK? sensor.H
YES-With the evaporator temperature sensor
NO-Replace the evaporator temperature sensor (see
page 21-103).
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit 36P DTC B1232 or DTC indicator H and AUTO: A
connector terminal No. 12 and evaporator
Short in the Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Circuit
ORN | t------------r ON (II).
18|17|16|15|14|13|12 11|lo| 9 I 8 7 | 6 | 5^4 | 3 j 2*[ 1 |
|36|35|34|33|32|31|30|29|28|27| 26|'25| 24| 23|22'| 21120|19 3. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS (see
page 21-9) orthe climate control unit (see page 21-10).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1232 or H and AUTO indicated?
A
YES-Go to step 5.
ORN
NO-lntermittent failure. Check for loose wires or poor
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR connections on the evaporator temperature sensor
W i re side o f fem ale te rm in a ls c ircu it.!!
climate control unit 36P connector and at the 6. Disconnect the climate control unit 36P connector.
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the 7. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connections are good, substitute a known-good connector.
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit 36P
climate control unit (see page 21-112). connector terminal No. 16 and body ground.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the climate CLI MATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
sensor.B PNK
_ j
CO
1 8 jl7 |l6 |l5 h 4 |l3 |l2 7 | 6 | 5 J4 | 3 | 2 T1 I

o
| | | |
|36|35 34|33|32|31130|29|28|27 2 6 2 5 |2 4 |2 3 22|21120|19

between the climate control unit and the evaporator
NO-Go to step 9.
B B
9. Check fo r continuity between climate control unit 36P DTC B1233 or DTC indicator A and A/C:
An Open in the Air Mix Control Motor Circuit
ON (II).
PNK IDRN
n:--------- ri page 21 -9) or the climate control unit (see page 21-10).
18|17|16|15|14|13|12 1 l|lo [ 9 I 8 7 | 6 | 5 f 4 [ 3 | 2 T 1I
|36|35|34|33|32 |3 1|30|29|28|27|26|25|24 |2 3|2 2|21|20|19 4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1233 or A and A/C indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lnterm ittent failure. Check fo r loose wires or poor
connections on the air m ix control motor circuit.
YES-Repair a short in the wires between the climate
s e n s o r, 6. Test the air mix control motor (see page 21-75).
N O -G o to s te p 10. Is the air mix control motor OK?
10. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor (see YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the air mix control motor (see page
Is the evaporator temperature sensor OK? 21-107).
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit, 7. Disconnect the air mix control motor IP connector.
replace the original climate control unit (see page 8. Disconnect the climate control unit 36P connector.
21-112).
NO-Replace the evaporator temperature sensor (see
page 21-103).
9. Checkfor continuity between the follow ing terminals DTC B1234 or DTC indicator B and A/C: A
of the climate control unit 36P connector and the air
Short in the Air Mix Control Motor Circuit
m ix control motor 7P connector.
7P: 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
36P;
No. 12 No. 3 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
No. 14 No. 5 ON (II).
No. 19 No. 1
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR page 21-9) or the climate control unit (see page 21-10).
4. Check for DTCs.
RED ORN Is DTC B1234 or B and A/C indicated?
n - n YES-Go to step 5.
1
I 8 | i 7 j i 6 h 5 | i 4 | ^ f i 2 11 10| 9 I 8 7 ! 6 | 5 7 4 | 3 | 2 T l I
|
|36|35|34|33|32|31 |30|29|28|27|26 25|24|23|22|21|20|19 NO-lntermittent failure. Check for loose wires or poor
GRN connections on the air m ix control motor circuit.
6. Test the air mix control motor (see page 21 -75).
GRN
Is the air mix control motor OK?
512
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YES-Go to step 7.
RED ORN NO-Replace the air mix control motor (see page
AIR M IX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
21-107).
W ire side o f fem ale te rm inals 7. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector
Is there continuity? and the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P
connector.
climate control unit 36P connector and at the air mix 8. Disconnect the climate control unit 36P connector.
control motor 7P connector. If the connections are
good, substitute a known-good climate control unit 9. Check for continuity between body ground and
climate control unit 36P connector terminals No. 14
replace the original climate control unit (see page and No. 19 individually.
21-112).H
NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the climate
control unit and the air mix control m otor. RED
rh-------------- n
1 8 f l 7 | l 6 | l 5 f l 4 | l 3 | l 2 11 |i0 | 9 | 8 " ^ T s T s T 4 | 3 | 2 T 1 I
| |
|36|35|34 33|32|31130 29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21120|19
GRN
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the climate control unit and the air mix
control m otor.
B B
10. Check for continuity between climate control unit 36P DTC B1235 or DTC indicator C and A/C; A
Problem in the Air Mix Control Motor Circuit,
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR Linkage, Door, or Motor
RED
1. Clearthe DTC with the HDS.
; I
18 |l7 |l6 |l5 h4 |l3 |l2 11 |l0| 9 | 8 7 | 6 l 5 ? 4 | 3 | 2 | l 9
ON (II).
|36|35|34|33|32|31130| 29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21120[19
GRN 3. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS (see
4. Checkfor DTCs.
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls Is DTC B1235 or C and A/C indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Repair a short in the wires between the climate connections on the driver's air mix control motor
control unit and the air m ix control m otor. circuit.
NO-Go to step 11. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the same 6. Test the air mix control motor (see page 21-75).
terminals fo r voltage to body ground.
Is the air mix control motor OK?
CLI MATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR YES-Go to step 7.
RED NO-Replace the air mix control motor (see page
PI | i -------------r 21-107), or repair the air mix control linkage or door.
1 8 h 7|l6|l5h4|l3|l2 11 ho| 9 I 8 7 | 6 | 5 T4 | 3 | 2 T1 I
|36|35|34|33|32|31130|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21120|19 7. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector.
GRN

Is there any voltage?
YES-Repair a short to power in the wire(s) between
the climate control unit and the air mix control motor.
This short may also damage the climate control u n it
Repair the short to power before replacing the climate
control unit.
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
21-112).
9. Check for continuity between the following terminals 10. Check fo r continuity between body ground and
of the climate control unit 36P connector and the air climate control unit 36P connector terminals No. 25
m ix control motor 7P connector. and No. 26 individually.
36P: 7P:
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 3@P CONNECTOR
No. 25 No. 6
No. 26 No. 7
r r
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR 18|17|16|15|14|13|12 11110| 9 | 8 ZJ_ i 5 T 4 I 3 I 2 T 1 I
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s |36|35|34|33| 32| 31130|29|28|27|26|25|24| 23|22|21120| 19
BLU
18h 7| 1e| 15h 4| 13| 12 11 |lo| 9 | 8 7 | 6 | 5 ? 4 | 3 l 2?1I

|36|35| 34| 33|32|31| 30|29| 28| 27|26| 25| 24|23|22|21|20|19
BLU PUR

(D X 0
BLU PUR YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the climate control unit and the air mix
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 control m otor.
AIR M IX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls replace the original climate control unit (see page
21-112).
YES-Go to step 10.
control unit and the air m ix control m otor.
B B
DTC B1239 or DTC indicator D and A/C: An 9. Check for continuity between the following terminals
of the climate control unit 36P connector and the
Open or Short in the Mode Control Motor
mode control motor 7P connector.
Circuit
7P: 36P;
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. No. 1 No. 12
No. 2 No. 1
No. 3 No. 2
ON (II).
No. 4 No. 3
3. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS (see No. 5 No. 4
MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
4. Check fo r DTCs. Wire side of female terminals
Is DTC B1239 or D and A/C Indicated?

szz ORN
YES-Go to step 5.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NO-lnterm ittent failure. Check fo r loose wires or poor GRY YEL PNK
connections on the mode control motor circuit. WHT
6. Test the mode control motor (see page 21-76).
PNK
Is the mode control motor OK? YEL
WHT
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the mode control motor (see page
_
21-108).
CO
7 | 6 | 5 ? 4 | 3 |2Tl I
00
1 8 h 7 |l6 |l5 h 4 |l3 |l2
o
|36 |35|34|33|32|31130|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22 |21120| 19
7. Disconnect the mode control motor 7P connector.
8. Disconnect the climate control unit 36P connector. Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 10.
control unit and the mode control m otor.
(cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between body ground and 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the same
climate control unit 36P connector terminals No. 1,2, terminals fo r voltage to body ground.
3, and No. 4 individually.
WHT YEL
WHT YEL GRY PNK
GRY PNK
18h7| l6 |l5 |l4 |l3 |l2 11110| 9 | 8 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 |
18|,17|16|15|,14|13|12 11110| 9 | 8 7 | 6 | 5 J4 | 3 | 2 j 1 | |36| 35|34| 33|32|31130|29|28|27|26|25|24| 23|22|21120|19
|36|35|34|33|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s) the climate control unit and the mode control motor.
between the climate control unit and the mode This short may also damage the climate control unit.
control m otor. Repair the short to power before replacing the climate
control unit.
NO-Go to step 11.
NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at the
11. Check for continuity between the climate control unit
climate control unit 36P connector and at the mode
36P connector terminals as follows.
control motor IP connector. If the connections are
From terminal To terminals good, substitute a known-good climate control unit,
1 2,3,4 and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
2 3,4 replace the original climate control unit (see page
3 4 21-112).
Is there continuity between any of the terminals?
YES-Repair a short in the wires.
NO-Go to step 12.
DTC B1240 or DTC indicator E and A/C: A 9. Check for continuity between the following terminals
Problem in the Mode Control Motor Circuit,
mode control motor 7P connector.
Linkage, Door, or Motor
36P: 7P:
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. No. 23 No. 7
No. 24 No. 6
ON (II). CLIMATE CONTROL U N I T 36P CONNECTOR
i -------------r
page 21-9) orthe climate control unit (see page 21-10). 1 8 h 7|l6 |l5 |l4 |l3 |l2 11 |lo| 9 I 8 7 | 6 | 5 | ,4 | 3 | 2 | l |
|36|35|34|33|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19
4. Checkfor DTCs.
RED BRN
Is DTC B1240 or E and A/C indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure. Check for loose wires or poor RED
connections on the mode control motor circuit.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BRN
6. Test the mode control motor (see page 21-76). MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
Is the mode control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace the mode control motor (see page
21-108), or repair the mode control linkage or doors. NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the climate
control unit and the mode control m o to r.ll
7. Disconnect the mode control motor 7P connector.
8. Disconnect the climate control unit 36P connector. climate control unit 36P connector terminals No. 23
18 ]l7 |l6 |l5 |l4 |l3 |l2 11110| 9 I 8 7 | 6 | 5 J4 | 3 | 2 T1 I

|36|35]34|33|32|31130|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21120|19
BRN
W i re side o f fem ale te rm inals

between the climate control unit and the mode
control m o to r.ll
21-112).B
DTC B1241 or DTC indicator F and A/C: A 12. Connect blower motor 2P connectorterminal No. 1 to
body ground with a jum per wire.
Problem in the Blower Motor Circuit
BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
ON (II).
3. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS (see M i
page 21-9) or the climate control unit (see page 21-10). BLU
4. Checkfor DTCs. JUMPER WIRE

Is DTC B1241 or F and A/C indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
connections on the blower motor c irc u it.!
Do the blower motor run?
YES-Go to step 14.
6. Check the No. B10 (7.5 A) and No. B57 (30 A) fuses in
the under-dash fuse/relay box. NO-Replace the blower motor (see page 21-100).
Are the fuses OK? 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES-Go to step 7. 15. Disconnect the jum per wire.
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. If fuse(s) blow 16. Disconnect the power transistor 4P connector.
again, checkfor a short in the No. B10 (7.5 A) and
No.B57 (30 A) fuses c irc u it 17. Checkfor continuity between power transistor 4P
7. Disconnect the blower m otor 2P connector.
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
9. Measure the voltage between blower motor 2P

J2 1I
CO
BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR

4
2 1
WHT
YES-Go to step 18.
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls NO-Check for an open in the BLK wire between the
power transistor and body ground. If the wire is OK,
Is there battery voltage? checkfor poor body ground at G502 (see page
22-44).11
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 30.
11. Reconnect the blower motor 2P connector.
18. Connect power transistor 4P connector terminals 24. Check for continuity between the following terminals
No. 1 and No. 3 with a jum per wire. of the climate control unit 36P connector and the
power transistor 4P connector.
POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR 36P: 4P:
No. 5 No. 4
No. 6 No. 2
BLK
2 11 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
| JUMPER WIRE W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s
CO
4
BLU
ORN LT BLU
I r I I n
18| 17|16|15|14|13|12 II |lO| 9 | 8 7 1e 15T4T 3 12T1 r
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls |36|35|34|33|32|31130|29| 28|27|26|25|24| 23|22|21120|19

Do the blower motor run at high speed?
YES-Go to step 20. 1
P
NO-Repair an open in the BLU wire between the 4 3
power transistor and the blower m o to r .! LT BLU
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
21. Disconnect the jum per wire.
YES-Go to step 25.
climate control unit 36P connector terminals No. 5 NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the climate
and No. 6 individually. control unit and the power tra n s is to r.!
26. Measure the voltage between body ground and
ORN LTBLU climate control unit 36P connector terminals No. 5
i ------------ r and No. 6 individually.
18 h 7 |l6 |l5 |l4 |l3 |l2 1 l|lo | 9 I 8 7 | 6 | s l 4 | 3 | i T 1 I
|36| 35|34|33| 32|31130|29| 28| 27|26| 25|24|23| 22|21120|19 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
ORN LT BLU
n------------ n I I . . -
1 8 fl7 |l6 |l5 ll4 |l3 |l2 11 |l0| 9 [ 8 7 | 6 j 5 | 4 [3 |2 | 1 f
|36|35|34|33|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19
between the climate control unit and the power W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls
tra n s is to r.!
NO-Go to step 24. Is there voltage?
YES-Repair a short to power in the w ire (s ).!
NO-Go to step 27.
28. Reconnect the climate control unit 36P connector. 34. Measure the voltage between blower motor relay 4P
29. Test the power transistor (see page 21-74).
Is the power transistor OK? UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
climate control unit 36P connector and at the power
transistor 4P connector. If the connections are good,
substitute a known-good climate control unit, and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
21-112).!
NO-Replace the power transistor (see page 2 1-74 ).!
NOTE: If the power transistor is faulty, check the
blower motor for damage. If necessary, replace the Is there battery voltage?
blower motor (see page 21-100).
YES-Go to step 35.
30. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ,
NO-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.
31. Remove the blower motor relay from the under-dash USA models (see page 2 2 -8 2 )!
fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-92).
Canada models (see page 22-83)11
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 32.
36. Check for continuity between blower motor relay 4P
NO-Replace the blower motor r e la y .! socket terminal No. 4 and body ground.
32. Measure the voltage between blower motor relay 4P
socket terminal No. 1 and body ground. BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET

BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
YES-Repair an open in the WHT wire between the
Is there battery voltage? blower motor relay and the blower m o to r .!
YES-Go to step 33. NO-Check for an open in the wire between the blower
m otor relay and body ground. If the wire is OK, check
NO-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. fo r poor ground at G501 (see page 2 2-40 ).!
USA models (see page 2 2 -8 2 )!
Canada models (see page 2 2 -8 3 )!
D B
DTC B2967 or DTC indicator J and AUTO: An 9. Check for continuity between the following terminals
Open in the Humidity Sensor Circuit
humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 36P: 4P;
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to No. 12 No. 3
ON (ID- No. 19 No. 1
No. 35 No. 2
page 21-9) orthe climate control unit (see page 21-10). CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
4. Check for DTCs.
ORN n------------fi
Is DTC B2967 or J and AUTO indicated?
18|17|16|15|14|13|12! 11 |lo| 9 | 8 7 I 6 I 574 I 3 1 2 ? 1 1
YES-Go to step 5. |36|35|34|33| 32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24| 23| 22| 21|20|19
WHT GRN
connections on the humidity sensor c irc u it.!
WHT
ORN
6. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see
GRN
Is the humidity sensor OK?
YES-With the humidity/in-car temperature sensor HUM IDITY/IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
4P CONNECTOR
NO-Replace the humidity/in-car temperature sensor Is there continuity?
(see page 21 -1 0 9 ).
7. Disconnect the climate control unit 36P connector. climate control unit 36P connector and at the
8. Disconnect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector. If
connector and air mix control m otor IP connector. the connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit (see page 21 -112).H
control unit and the humidity s e n s o r.!
DTC B2968 or DTC indicator K and AUTO: A 9. Check for continuity between terminals of the climate
control unit 36P connector as follows.
Short in the Humidity Sensor Circuit
From terminal To terminals
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 12 19,35
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to 19 35
ON (II). Is there continuity between any of the terminals?
3. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS (see YES-Repair a short in the w ir e s .!
page 21 -9) o rthe climate control unit (see page 21-10).
NO-Go to step 10.
4. Checkfor DTCs.
10-Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the same
Is DTC B2968 or K and AUTO indicated? terminals for voltage to body ground.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure. Check for loose wires or poor
connections on the hum idity sensor c ir c u it ! ORN
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 18|17|16|15|14|13|12 11110| 9 | 8 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 |

|36|35|34|33|32|31130|29|28| 27| 26|25|24|23|22|21120|19
6. Disconnect the climate control unit 36P connector. GRN
7. Disconnect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P
connector and air mix control motor 7P connector.
climate control unit 36P connector terminals No. 12, W ire side o f fem ale term inals
19, and No. 35 individually.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR YES-Repair a short to power in the wire(s) between
ORN
the climate control unit and the humidity sensor. This
short may also damage the climate control u n it
t ...r 1'
18|17|16|15|14|13|12 11110| 9 I 8 7 |-6 | 5T4 | 3 | 2 T1 I Repair the short to power before replacing the climate
| 36|35|34|33|32|31130|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21120|19 control u n it.!
WHT ORN
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Reconnect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P
connector and air mix control motor 7P connector.
Is there continuity? 13. Test the humidity sensor (see page 21-72).
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s) Is the humidity temperature sensor OK?
between the climate control unit and the humidity YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
s e n s o r.! and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
NO-Go to step 9. replace the original climate control unit (see page
21-112).!
NO-Replace the humidity/in-car temperature sensor
(see page 21-109).!
IB
DTC B2969: Climate Control Unit Lost 9. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
box connector Y (16P) terminal No. 6 and gauge
Communication with MICU (WIPSW
control module 32P connectorterminal No. 31.
message)
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a ls

GRN
ON (II).
3. Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS (see 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
page 21-9) or the climate control unit (see page 21-10). 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
4. Checkfor DTCs.
Is DTC B2969 Indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lnterm ittent failure. Check for loose wires or poor 16ll5|l4|l3|l2|l1 10|9 | 8 | 7 6 I 5 I 413 I 2 T1j
connections at the gauge control module and in the |32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
climate control unit c irc u it.! GRN
5. Select B-CAN Control Units Information in the BODY GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
ELECTRICAL menu. W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
6. Select Check Connected Control Units in the B-CAN
Control Units Information menu. YES-Go to the gauge control module input test (see
page 22-347).!
Is the gauge control module detected?
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the MICU and
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit, the gauge control m o d u le .!
21-112).!
NO-Go to step 7.
(16P).
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. B10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ 8. Check for continuity between body ground and
relay box. climate control unit 36P connector terminals No. 27
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse blows

again, check for a short in the No. B10 (7.5 A) fuse t---------- r
c irc u it.! 1sT17116 j 1sf14113112 11 |io| 9 I 8 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 h I
|36|35|34| 33|32| 31| 30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19
2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P LTBLU
connector.
4. Measure the voltage between recirculation control
motor IP connector terminal No. 7 and body ground.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR Is there continuity?
between the climate control unit and the recirculation
4 3 2 1
control m o to r .!
RED
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the same
terminals for voltage to body ground.
W ire side o f fe m a l e te rm in a l s CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 5.
CO
18|17|16|15| 14|13|12 7 I 6 I 5?4I 3 | 2?1I

O
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. B10 |36|35|34|33|32|31130|29|28|27| 26|25|24|23|22|21120|19
recirculation control m o to r .!
6. Test the recirculation control motor (see page 21-77).
Is the recirculation control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the recirculation control motor (see page the climate control unit and the recirculation control
21-108), or repair the recirculation control linkage or motor. This short may also damage the climate
d o o r .! control unit. Repair the short to power before
7. Disconnect the climate control unit 36P connector. replacing the climate control u n it.!
NO-Go to step 10.
n n
Climate Control Power and Ground
Circuit Troubleshooting
11. Check for continuity between the following terminals 1. Check the No. B10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
of the climate control unit 36P connector and the relay box.
recirculation control m otor 7P connector.
Is the fuse OK?
36P: 7P:
No. 27 No. 1 YES-Go to step 2.
No. 28 No. 3 NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse blows
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR again, checkfor a short in the No. B10 (7.5 A) fuse
W i re side o f fem ale te rm in a ls e irc u it.il
I .. z ix 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
18h7|l6 |l5 h 4 |l3 |i2 1|
11 10 9 | 8 r I 6tsT4I 3 | 2T1I
| 1 | |
|36|35 34|33|32 |3 1 3 0 |2 9 2 8 27|26|25 |2 4|2 3|22|21 120| 19 4. Measure the voltage between climate control unit 36P
LT BLU Gl connector terminal No. 36 and body ground.

T
BLU
LT
GRN t---------------- r
q ? 1 8 h 7 | l 6 | l 5 h 4 | l 3 | l 2 1 l | lo | 9 I 8 7 I 6 | 5 ^ 4 j 3 | 2 " 1 |
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 | |
|36|35|34|33|32 |3 1|30 2 9 |28|27 |2 6|2 5|24 23|22|21 |2 0|1 9
RED
RECIRCULATION CONTROL IVIOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
W ire s i de o f fem ale te rm in a ls
(y )
climate control unit 36P connector and at the Is there battery voltage?
recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good YES-Go to step 5.
climate control unit (see page 21-112).
climate control u nit.B
control unit and the recirculation control m o to r.ll
(cont'd)
Climate Control Power and Ground Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan
Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
6. Check for continuity between climate control unit 36P NOTE:
connector terminal No. 31 and body ground. Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the A/C
compressor is inoperative. Refer to the symptom
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR troubleshooting index.
Before doing symptom troubleshooting, check for
t---------- r
powertrain DTCs (see page 11 -3).
18h7|l6|l5|l4|l3|l2 11|lo| 9 | 8 7 | .6| 5?4|3|2 h |
|36|35|34|33|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19 1. Check the No. B10 (7.5 A) and the No. B30 (30 A) fuse
in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
BLK
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse blow
again, check for a short in the No.BIO (7.5 A) fuse and
the No. B30 (30 A) fuse circuits.!!
Is there continuity? 2. Remove the radiator fan relay from auxiliary

under-hood relay box B, and test it (see page 22-92).
climate control unit 36P connector. If the connections Is the relay OK?
are good, substitute a known-good climate control YES-Go to step 3.
unit and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes,
away, replace the original climate control unit (see NO-Replace the radiator fan re la y .!
page21-112).B
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the climate
control unit and body ground. If the wire is OK, check
fo r poor ground at G502 (see page 22-44 ). 5. Turn on the A/C.
6. Check the FAN LOW CTRL in the PGM-FI Data List with
the HDS.
Is the FAN LOW CTRL on?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page
11-7), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the
original ECM/PCM (see page 11-209).B
7. Turn the A/C switch and the fan control switch OFF,
then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0)
8. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P 12. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P
socket terminal No. 1 and body ground. socket terminal No. 7 and body ground.
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD RELAY BOX B AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD RELAY BOX B
T 5
lu lX M 12 6
_8j h1IX M
I16I15I14I13] 3 T
3 4 |16|ls]l-4|l3^
10 2
PNK J
PUR
T erm inal side o f fem ale te rm in a ls T erm inal side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
NO-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.H NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. B10
USA models (see page 22-82) (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, A/C
Canada models (see page 22-83) diode B, and the radiator fan re Iay.
9. Connect radiator fan relay 4P socket terminals No. 1 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
and No. 2 with a jum per wire. 14. Reinstall the radiator fan relay.
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD RELAY BOX B 15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
JUMPER WIRE NOTE: This step must be done to protect the

PNK PUR 16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P).
17. Connect ECM/PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 4
to body ground with a jumper wire.
lnlXlizl
6I15I14I13] I RED
Ii-----il
. I
1112 3111!J 6.17
Term inal s i de o f fem ale te rm i nals
10111213|14|15|16171819
1202122: > c 232425
26272829|30|31|32333435 1
Do the radiator and A/C condenser fans run?
H e 38139140141142 43 441
YES-Go to step 10.
JUMPER WIRE
NO-Go to step 19.
10. Disconnect the jum per wire. Term inal side o f fem ale te rm in a ls

Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
(cont'd)
18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 26. Check for continuity between radiator fan 2P
connector terminal No. 2 and fan control relay 5P
Do the radiator and A/C condenser fans run on LO?
socket terminal No. 6.
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connection at
ECM/PCM connector A (44P). If the connection is AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD RELAY BOX A
good, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page Term inal side o f fem ale te rm i na l s
11-7)f and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original ECM/PCM (see page
11-209), then do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure
(see page 11 -274).H
RED
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the radiator
fan relay and the ECM/PCM.
20. Reinstall the radiator fan relay.
21. Disconnect the radiator fan 2P connector.
22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn the A/C RADIATOR FAN 2P CONNECTOR
switch and the fan control switch ON. W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
23. Measure the voltage between radiator fan 2P
connectorterminal No. 1 and body ground. Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 27.
RADIATOR FAN 2P CONNECTOR
fan and the fan control relay.H
27. Remove the radiator fan relay.
PUR 28. Connect radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 1
and No. 2 with a jum per wire.
JUMPER WIRE
m<m
YES-Go to step 24.
6|is]l4[13~|
fan relay and the radiator fan.H
24. Turn the A/C switch and the fan control switch OFF, T erm inal side o f fe m a l e te rm inals
then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
25. Remove the fan control relay from auxiliary
under-hood relay box A, and test it (see page 22-92).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Replace the fan control relay.H
m i
29. Connect fan control relay 5P socket terminal No. 6 to 33. Check for continuity between A/C condenser fan 2P
body ground w ith a jum per wire. connectorterminal No. 2 and body ground.

A /C CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
Term inal side o f fem ale te rm in a ls W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a l s
Do the radiator fan run on high? Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 30. YES-Replace the A/C condenser fan motor (see page
10-21).H
NO-Replace the radiator fan m otor (see page
10-21KB NO-Check for an open in the wire between the A/C
condenser fan and body ground. If the wire is OK,
30. Disconnect the jum per wires. check for poor ground at G401 (see page 2 2-36 ).
31. Disconnect the A/C condenser fan 2P connector.
32. Check for continuity between fan control relay 5P
socket terminal No. 14 and A/C condenser fan 2P
connector term inal No. 1.

A /C CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR

W ire side o f fem ale te rm i na l s
YES-Go to step 33.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the fan
control relay and the A/C condenser fan.H
A/C Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 6. Check for continuity between fan control relay 5P

# Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the socket terminal No. 5 and body ground.
radiator fan and/or the A/C compressor is inoperative.
Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index. AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD RELAY BOX A
Before doing symptom troubleshooting, check for
powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
------1 I------. BLK
1. Check the No. B31 (7.5 A) and the No. B47 (30 A) fuse
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse blow
again, check for a short in the No. B31 (7.5 A) or No.
B47 (30 A) fuse circuits.
2. Remove the fan control relay from auxiliary T erm inal side o f fem ale te rm inals
under-hood relay box A, and test it (see page 22-92).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the fan
NO-Replace the fan control relay J I control relay and body ground. If the wire is OK, check
for poor ground at G401 (see page 22-36).H
7. Remove the A/C condenser fan relay from auxiliary
4. Measure the voltage between fan control relay 5P under-hood relay box B.
c 3
C 3
PUR
Term inal s i de o f fem ale te rm in a ls

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 14.
5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
H B
8. Check for continuity between fan control relay 5P 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
socket terminal No. 15 and A/C condenser fan relay 4P
socket terminal No. 10.
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD RELAY BOX A 10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (44P).
11. Checkfor continuity between A/C condenser fan relay
4P socket terminal No. 10 and ECM/PCM connector A
(44P) terminal No. 5.
T erm inal s i de o f fem ale te rm i nals
GRY
GRY
Term inal side o f fem ale te rm in a ls 1110I112 123 I13|14|15|16
4 | 5 | 6 | T M
17 18 19
Jl
Is there continuity? 1
20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
136 37 38139140141142 431441
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the fan ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
control relay and the A/C condenser fan re Iay. Term inal side o f fem ale term inals
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the A/C
condenser fan relay and the ECM/PCM.
A/C Condenser Fan High Speed A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit
Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) Troubleshooting
13. Check the DTCs by selecting the DTC MENU (DTCs) NOTE:
from the HDS (see page 11-3). It is normal for the A/C compressor to turn off under
Is DTC P0532, P0533, P2184 andi or P2185 Indicated? certain conditions, such as low idle, high engine
coolant temperature, or hard acceleration.
YES- Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the fans
DTC P0532 indicated: Go to A/C pressure sensor are also inoperative with the A/C on. Refer to the
circuit low voltage troubleshooting (see page symptom troubleshooting index.
11-266). Before doing any symptom troubleshooting, check for
DTC P0533 indicated: Go to A/C pressure sensor powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
circuit high voltage troubleshooting (see page 1. Check the No. B10 (7.5 A) and the No. B43 (7.5 A) fuse
11-268). in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
DTC P2184 indicated: Go to ECT sensor 2 circuit low
voltage troubleshooting (see page 11-172). Are the fuses OK?
DTC P2185 indicated: Go to ECT sensor 2 circuit YES-Go to step 2.
high voltage troubleshooting (see page 11-173).H
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuses blow
NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at again, checkfor a short in the No. B10 (7.5 A) and
ECM/PCM connector A (44P). If the connections are No. B43 (7.5 A) fuse c irc u its .!
good, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page
away, replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 3. Start the engine.
11-209).HI
4. Turn on the A/C.
14. Remove the A/C condenser fan relay from auxiliary
under-hood relay box B. 5. Check the A/C switch in the PGM-FI Data List with the
HDS.
15. Measure the voltage between A/C condenser fan relay
4P socket terminal No. 10 and body ground. Is the A/C switch on?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Using the HDS, confirm the following values in the
PGM-FI Data List at idle.
TP sensor About 0.5 V at idle
RPM 700-800
ECTSENSOR 2 176-212 F (80-100 C)
A/C SWITCH ON
A/C CLUTCH ON
A/C PRESSURE 196-3,138 kPa
SENSOR (2.00-32.00 kgf/cm2)
[28.4-455.1 psi]
T erm in a l side o f fem ale te rm inals Are all the values within specifications?
Is there battery voltage? YES-Go to step 7.
YES-Repair an open in the wire between the A/C NO-Troubleshoot the value that is not within the
condenser fan relay and the fan control relay. specifications.
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, A/C diode A
and the A/C condenser fan relay.H
in
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Disconnect the jum per wire.
8. Remove the A/C compressor clutch relay from 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
auxiliary under-hood relay box A, and test it (see page
13. Measure the voltage between A/C compressor clutch
22-92).
relay 4P socket terminal No. 16 and body ground.
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the A/C compressor clutch relay.
relay 4P socket terminal No. 7 and body ground.
RED
LT GRN
YES-Go to step 14.
A/C compressor clutch relay.
15. Reinstall the A/C compressor clutch relay.
YES-Go to step 10.
16. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
(7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the 17. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
A/C compressor clutch relay.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the engine
10. Connect A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket control module (ECM)/powertrain control module
terminals No. 7 and No. 8 with a jum per wire. (PCM) from damage.
BLU
LT GRN
JUMPER WIRE
Term inal side o f fem ale te rm inals
Do the A/C compressor clutch click?

YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 22.
(cont'd)
A /C Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
19. Measure the voltage between ECM/PCM connector A 24. Check fo r continuity between A/C compressor clutch
(44P) terminal No. 14 and body ground. relay 4P socket terminal No. 8 and A/C compressor
clutch 3P connector terminal No. 2.
Term inal s i de o f fem ale te rm in a ls
GRY
I 1 I 2 * M i k i Z. e I L
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
1 1
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35
36 37 38|39|40|41|42 43144 i

Is there 0.5 V or less?
YES-Faulty A/C compressor clutch relay or short to
power on the BLU wire. Repair the faulty part or repair
the short, then replace the ECM/PCM (see page
11-209).
NO-Go to step 20.
20. Connect ECM/PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 14 A /C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH 3P CONNECTOR
to body ground with a jum per wire. T erm inal side o f m ale te rm in a ls
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) Is there continuity?

YES-Check the A/C compressor clutch clearance, the
GRY
thermal protector circuit, and the A/C compressor
I 1 12 3 h i 5 |6 |7 IoL clutch field coil (see page 21-78).H
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
1 JUMPER NO-Repair an open in the wire between the A/C
1
26 27 28 29|30|3l|32 33 34 35 WIRE compressor clutch relay and the A/C compressor
|36|37 38|39|40|4ll42 43]44|
clutch.H

Do the A/C compressor click?
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
ECM/PCM connector A (44P). If the connections are
good, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page
away, replace the original ECM/PCM (see page
11-209).M
compressor clutch relay and the ECM/PCM.
23. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch 3P connector.
B B
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 12. Measure the voltage between climate control unit

Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if any of the 36P connector terminal No. 30 and body ground.
following items are operative: A/C condenser fan,
radiator fan, A/C compressor. Refer to the symptom CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
troubleshooting index.
i . r
Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the A/C 1 8 h 7 |l6 |l5 h 4 |l3 |l2 11110| 9 | 8 7 | 6 | 5 j 4 | 3 | 2 h |
system pressure is abnormal (see page 21-28). |36|35|34|33|32|31130|29|28| 27|26|25| 24|23|22|21120|19
Before doing symptom troubleshooting, check for PNK
powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3) and B-CAN DTCs
(see page 22-126).
2. Connect the HDS to the DLC. W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
4. Check that the blower motor operates at all speeds.
YES-Go to step 19.
Do the blower motor operate at all speeds?
NO-Go to step 13.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair the problem in the blower m otor circuit.
14. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch 3P connector.
6. Turn on the A/C.
7. Check the A/C switch in the PGM-FI Data List w ith the 3P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
HDS.
A /C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH 3P CONNECTOR
Is the A/C switch on?
YES-The A/C signal is OK at this time.
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Check the A/C pressure sensor in the data list.
Is the A/C pressure sensor within specification? WHT
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Check for poor or loose connections at the A/C
pressure sensor. If the connections are OK, replace
the A/C pressure sensor.
Term inal side o f male te rm in a ls
10. Disconnect the climate control unit 36P connector. Is there battery voltage?
11 .Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) YES-Go to step 17.

compressor and the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the
wire is OK, substitute a known-good under-dash
fuse/relay box, and recheck. If the symptom goes
away, replace the original under-dash fuse/relay
box.
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
17. Test the A/C compressor thermal protector (see page 20. Measure the evaporator temperature sensor
21-78). resistance between climate control unit 36P
Is the A/C compressor thermal protector OK?
YES-Go to step 18. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 36P CONNECTOR
"H............... =3
NO-Replace the A/C compressor thermal protector
(see page21-97).H
PNK (-<s h ORN
"S'1
CO
connector terminal No. 30 and A/C compressor clutch 18h7| l6 |l5 h 4 |l3 |l2 7 | 6 | 5 T4 | 3 | 2 T1 I
0
3P connector terminal No. 3. |36|35|34|33|32|31130|29|28|27|26|25| 24|23|22|21120|19

W ire s i de o f fem ale te rm in a l s
n n n ] r
18|17|16|15|14|13|12 7 | 6 | 5]*4 | 3 | 2^1 |
CD
oo
o
0|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19 Is the resistance less than 24 k

CO
CO
00
CO
in
CO
CO
CO
CM
CO
O ?
PNK
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
climate control unit 36P connector. If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good climate control
unit and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original climate control unit (see
page 21-112).B
NO-Test the evaporator temperature sensor (see
A /C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH 3P CONNECTOR page 21-77).B
Term inal side o f m ale te rm in a ls
climate control unit 36P connector and at the A/C
compressor clutch 3P connector.
control unit and A/C com pressor.!!
Navigation Communication Line Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Operate the climate control system in several modes. 7. Check for continuity between body ground and
climate control unit 36P connector terminals No, 8,
Is the climate control system OK?
No. 9, and No. 10 individually.
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Do the Self-Diagnostic Function with the HDS WHT _________ ___
(see page 21-9) or the climate control unit (see page YEL
2i-io ).m klGRY
18117 11 6 11 5 11411311 2 j 11 |lp | 9 | 8 7 [6 [5 \ 4 [ 3 | 2 [7
2. Do the System Links in Navigation System Diagnostic 136135134133|32131130129128 12 7 126125124j23122 j21 |20| 19
Mode (see page 23-174).
Is the A/C icon red?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 9. W ire s i de o f fem ale te rm inals

4. Disconnect audio-navigation unit connector D (12P).
5. Disconnect climate control unit 36P connector. between the climate control unit and the
audio-navigation u n it.B
6. Check for continuity between the following terminals
o f climate control unit 36P connector and NO-Go to step 8.
audio-navigation unit connector D (12P).
8. Reconnect climate control unit 36P connector.
36P: 12P:
No. 8 No. 7 9. Connect audio-navigation unit connector D (12P)
No. 9 No. 2 terminals No. 1, No. 2/and No. 7 w ith jumper wires.
No. 10 No. 1
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D (12P)
WHT
P n
YEL fT 1-j GRY JUMPER
1B11711611 1 4 |l3 |l2 11 |lo | 9 I 8 7 | 6 |
6 5 4 3 I I WIRE
| 3 | 2 T1 1
|36|35|34|33|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19 12 11 10 9 8 7
i 2 ) @
WHT _ YEL
n__
n___ n = n -jn
n 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
6 5 4 3 2 1I
12 11 10 9 8 7
gryL
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D (12P)

YES-Go to step 7.
control unit and the audio-navigation u n i t l l
(cont'd)
Navigation Communication Line Humidity/ln-Car Temperature
Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) Sensor Test
11. Press and hold the AUTO button, then press and hold Humidity Sensor Test
the ON/OFF button.
NOTE: Before testing the sensor, check for climate
control DTCs (see page 21-8).
page 21-109).
2. Connect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P
connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Measure the
voltage between the terminals with the (-+) probe on
terminal No. 2 and the () probe on terminal No. 3
with the connector connected.
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Is the HEAT/VENT indicator solid with the remaining

icons blinking?
YES-Do the unit check with the navigation (see page
23-182).
and recheck. If the symptom goes away, replace the
original climate control unit (see page 21-112).H
VOLTAGE
(V)
HUMIDITY LEVEL (%)

4. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the
humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-109).
H B
Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Test
In-Car Temperature Sensor Test NOTE: Before testing the sensor, check fo r climate
NOTE: Before testing the sensor, checkfor climate
control DTCs (see page 21-8). 1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see page
21-109).
page 21-109). 2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the
resistance. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and
2. Test the humidity/in-car temperature sensor while check for a change in resistance.
holding it in front of the dashboard center vent.
3. Compare the resistance reading between outside air
Measure the resistance with the system set to Max
temperature sensor terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with the
Cool.
specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
Measure the resistance with the system set to Max should be w ithin the specifications.
H o t.
3. Compare the resistance reading between

humidity/in-car temperature sensor terminals No. 3
and No. 4 with the specifications shown in the graph;
the resistance should be within the specifications.
HUM IDITY/IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
4 3 2 1
14 32 50 68 86 104 F
11 (-1 0 ) (0) (10) (20) (30) (40) (C)
10
TEMPERATURE
9
RESISTANCE 8 4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the outside
(kfl) 7 air temperature sensor (see page 21-109).
6
5
4
3
2
1
14 32 50 68 86 104 F
(-1 0 ) (0) (10) (20) (30) (40) (C)
TEMPERATURE
4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the

humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-109).
5. Clear any DTCs set when you disconnected the
humidity/in-car temperature sensor.
Sunlight Sensor Test Power Transistor Test
NOTE: Before testing the sensor, check for climate 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover (see
control DTCs (see page 21-8). page 20-94).
1. Remove the sunlight sensor (see page 21-110). 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the power
transistor.
With automatic lighting
3. Measure the resistance between power transistor
terminals No. 3 and No. 4. It should be about 1.5 kD.
If the resistance is within the specifications, go to
step 4.
If the resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the power transistor.
NOTE: Also check the blower motor. Power
transistor failure can be caused by a defective
blower motor.
POWER TRANSISTOR
Without muiommtm lighting
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Measure the

voltage between the terminals w ith the (+ ) probe on
terminal No. 2 and the () probe on terminal No. 4
(with automatic lighting) or No.1 (without automatic
lighting) with the connector connected.
NOTE: The voltage readings w ill not change under the
light of a flashlight or a fluorescent lamp.
Voltage should be:
3.56 V with no sunlight or sensor covered up.
Less than 3.56 V with sunlight on sensor
(depending on sunlight intensity).
3. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the sunlight
sensor (see page 21-110).
Air Mix Control M otor Test
4. Carefully release the lock tab on terminal No. 2 (ORN) Special Tools Required
(A) in the 4P connector, then remove the terminal and Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2)
insulate it from body ground.
NOTE: Before testing the motor, check fo r climate
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the air m ix control
motor.
INOTICE I
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the air m ix
control m otor w ill damage it. Follow the instructions
carefully.
2. Connect battery power to air m ix control motor

terminal No. 7, and ground terminal No. 6; the air m ix
control motor should run, and stop at Max Cool. If it
does not, reverse the connections; the air m ix control
(To 12 V power source on vehicle) A m otor should run, and stop at Max Hot. When the air
5. Reconnect the 4P connector to the power transistor. m ix control m otor stops running, disconnect battery
power immediately.
6. Make sure the ORN wire is completely isolated, then
supply 12 V to the No. 2 cavity with a jumper wire.
AIR M IX CONTROL MOTOR
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the -------------------------------------------------- :
blower motor runs.
If the blower motor does not run, replace the power
transistor.
NOTE: A faulty blower motor can cause the power
transistor to fail. If the power transistor is replaced,
also check the blower m otor for binding, and
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
replace it if necessary.
If the blower motor runs, the power transistor is OK.
3. If the air mix control motor did not run in step 2,

remove It, then check the air m ix control linkage and
door for smooth movement.
If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the
air m ix control motor (see page 21-107).
If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them as
needed.
If the air mix control motor runs smoothly, go to
step 4.
Air Mix Control Motor Test (cont'd) Mode Control Motor Test
4. Measure the resistance between terminals No. 1 and NOTE: Before testing the motor, check for climate
No. 3. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kD. control DTCs (see page 21-8).
5. Reconnect the air m ix control motor 7P connector, 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the mode control
then turn the ignition switch to ON (II). motor.
6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage INOTICE I
between terminals No. 3 and No. 5.
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the mode
Max Cool: About 1.0 V control motor w ill damage it. Follow the instructions
Max Hot: About 4.0 V carefully.
7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not as
2. Connect battery power to mode control motor
specified, replace the air mix control motor (see page
terminal No. 6, and ground terminal No. 7; the mode
21-107).
control motor should run smoothly, and stop at Vent.
If it does not, reverse the connections; the mode
control motor should run smoothly, and stop at
Defrost. When the mode control motor stops running,
disconnect battery power immediately.
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3. If the mode control motor did not run in step 2,

remove it (see page 21-108), then check the mode
control linkage and doors for smooth movement.
If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the
mode control motor (see page 21-108).
If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them as
needed.
If the mode control motor runs smoothly, go to
step 4.
4. Use a digital multimeter with an output of 1 mA or
less at the 20 kO range. With the mode control motor
running as in step 2, check for continuity between
terminals No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4 and terminal
No. 5 individually. There should be continuity for a
moment at each terminal as the motor moves past the
switch's terminal.
5. If there is no continuity for a moment at each terminal,
replace the mode control motor (see page 21-108).
Recirculation Control Motor Test Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Test
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the recirculation 1. Remove the evaporator core and the evaporator
control motor. temperature sensor (see page 21 -103).
INOTICE I 2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the

resistance between its terminals.
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the
recirculation control m otor w ill damage it. Follow the
instructions carefully. EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
2. Connect battery power to recirculation control motor

terminal No. 7, and ground terminals No. 1 and No. 3;
the recirculation control motor should run smoothly.
To avoid damaging the recirculation control motor,
do not reverse power and ground. Disconnect
terminal No. 1 or No. 3 from ground; the recirculation
control m otor should stop at Fresh (when terminal
No. 3 is disconnected) or Recirculate (when terminal Terminal side of male terminals
No. 1 is disconnected). Do not cycle the recirculation
control m otor for a long time.
3. Pour warm water on the sensor, and measure the
resistance.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL IVIOTOR
4. Compare the resistance readings with the
f ' ' : \ specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
50
40
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
30
RESISTANCE
(kfi)
20
3. If the recirculation control motor did not run in step 2, 10

remove it (see page 21-108), then check the
recirculation control linkage and door for smooth 14 32 50 68 86 104 F
movement. ( - 1 0 ) (0) (10) (20) (30) (40) (C)
If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the TEMPERATURE
recirculation control motor (see page 21-108).
If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them as 5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the
needed. evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-103).
A/C Compressor Clutch Check
1. Check the armature plate for discoloration, peeling, or 4. Check the thermal protector for continuity between
other damage. If there is damage, replace the clutch A/C compressor clutch 3P connector terminals No. 1
set (see page 21-95). and No. 3. If there is no continuity, replace the thermal
protector (see page 21-97).
2. Check the rotor pulley bearing play and drag by
rotating the rotor pulley by hand. Replace the clutch NOTE: The thermal protector w ill have no continuity
set with a new one if it is noisy or has excessive above 252 to 262 F (122 to 128 C). When the
play/drag (see page 21-95). temperature drops b elow 241 to 219F (116to 104C),
the thermal protector w ill have continuity.
NOTE: The rotor pulley and the armature plate were
mated at the factory by a burnishing operation.
Always replace the rotor pulley and the armature
plate as a set. Replacing only one part of the clutch set
w ill cause clutch slippage.
3. Measure the clearance between the rotor pulley (A)

5. Release the field coil connector from the holder, then
and the armature plate (B) all the way around. If the
disconnect it. Check for continuity between A/C
clearance is not within specified limits, remove the
compressor clutch 3P connector terminal No. 2 and
armature plate (see page 21-95) and add or remove
the 1P connector. If there is no continuity, replace the
shims as needed to increase or decrease clearance.
thermal protector (see page 21-97).
Clearance: 0.350.65 mm (0.0140.025 in)
NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses: 0.1
mm, 0.2 mm, 0.4 mm, and 0.5 mm.
A
m
Refrigerant Leak Check
6. Disconnect the field coil connector (A). Check Special Tools Required
resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not within . Leak Detector YGK-H-10PM*
specifications, replace the field coil (see page 21-95). Leak Detector HLD-100*
Leak Detecto r Tl FZX-1*
Field Coil Resistance: 3.15-3.45 D at 68 F (20 C)
('11 model) . OPTIMAX Jr. A/C Leak Detection Kit TRP124893*
Field Coil Resistance: 3.353.45 D at 68 *F (20 C) *These tools are available through the Honda Tool and
('12 model) Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can

Be careful when connecting service equipment.
Do not operate the leak detector near flammable
vapors. Its sensor operates at high temperatures,
and could ignite the vapors, resulting in personal
injury and/or damage to the equipment.
IMA components are located near A/C system
components. Make sure you have read the IMA
service precautions before doing repairs or service.
NOTE:
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the
work area before resuming service.
manufacturers.
Check the system for leaks using an R-134a refrigerant
leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g (0.5 oz) per year
or better
(cont'd)
Refrigerant Leak Check (cont'd)
Leak Detector Usage Tips (Refer to the If any refrigerant dye contacts an exterior paint
surface, remove it by doing this:
Operator's Manual for complete operating
- Carefully wash the affected surfaces to remove any
instructions) dirt, and to prevent paint scratching.
Position the vehicle in a wind-free work area. This w ill - M ix water and isopropyl alcohol in a 50/50 mixture.
aid in detecting small leaks. Soak a soft 100 % cotton towel with the
When using the leak detector for the first time, allow it water/alcohol mixture, and place the cloth on the
to warm up for 2 minutes with the probe in a clean affected areas to remove the dye.
atmosphere. This lets the temperature sensor in the - After removing the dye with the
detector stabilize. water/alcohol-soaked cloth, carefully wash the
The calibration check should be done in the "Search affected areas, and check that there is no remaining
2" mode. Once that is done, the other check modes do dye.
not need calibrating. 1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant
When leak checking through the HVAC module drain recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the
hose, avoid drawing water into the probe. Water can high-pressure service port (B) the low-pressure
damage the internal pump and sensor. service port (C), as shown, following the equipment
Avoid creasing the flexible probe extension. Creases manufacturer's instructions.
can restrict air flow and give false readings.
Because the detector recalibrates itself for ambient
gases, it may be necessary to move the detector away
from the leak to clear the sensor. Once the sensor has
cleared, recheck the suspected leak.
When removing the clear probe tip, be careful not to
lose the flow ball.
R-134a is heavier than air; always check below and to
the sides of all potential leak sources.
Halogen leak detectors are sensitive to chemicals:
windshield washing solutions, solvents/cleaners, and
some vehicle adhesives. Keep these chemicals out of
the area when doing leak detection.
Fluorescent Dye Usage Tips

Use only Tracer-Stick signal dose fluorescent dye
capsules from Tracerline. Other dyes contain
solvents that may contaminate the refrigerant oil,
leading to component failure.
Adding excessive amounts of dye can damage the A/C
compressor.
PAG oil is water soluble, so condensation on the
evaporator core or the refrigerant lines may wash the
PAG oil and fluorescent dye away from the actual leak.
Condensation may also carry dye through the HVAC
module drain.
After checking and repairing leaks, thoroughly clean
any residual dye from the areas where leaks were
found. Use GLO-AWAY dye cleaner, from Tracerline,
and hot water to remove the dye (follow the
instructions on the bottle). Residual dye stains can
cause misdiagnosis of any future A/C system leaks.
2. Recover refrigerant from the A/C system (see page
21-113), and evacuate the system (see page 21-113). If
the system achieves a vacuum of approximately
93.3 kPa (700 mmHg, 27.55 inHg) in 15 minutes, and
holds the vacuum for 15 minutes, then the system
does not have a leak at this time. If the system cannot
achieve or hold a vacuum, continue the refrigerant
leak check.
3. Open the high pressure valve to charge the system to
the specified capacity. Select the appropriate units of
measure for your refrigerant charging station.
Refrigerant Capacity:
450 to 500 g
0.45 to 0.50 kg
0.99 to 1.10 lbs
15.8 to 17.6 oz
Refrigerant Leak Check (cont'd)
4. With the engine OFF, use a halogen leak detector first to detect the leak source. Follow a continuous path in order to
ensure that you w ill not miss any possible leaks. Test the following areas of system for leaks:
Possible Leak Diagnostic Procedure with the Leak Notes

Area Detector
Service ports Check the service ports with the When capping the service ports, ensure that the
detector. seals on the port caps are in place, and that the caps
If the detector "sn iffs" a leak, use are tight. The caps are used as the final seals in the
fluorescent dye to confirm it. system.
A/C condenser If the detector "sn iffs" a leak, use Check for joints or connections coated with oily
fluorescent dye to confirm it. dust.
Check for damaged and corroded areas.
Check all fittings, couplings, brazed/welded areas
and areas around attachment points.
Move the probe slowly (1 inch/second or less),
and keep it within 1/4 inch of the component being
checked. This maximizes the chance of detecting
a leak.
If you detected a leak, blow compressed air over
the area, then recheck for leaks. For large leaks,
clearing the area with compressed air may help
you pinpoint the leak source.
Evaporator Check at the evaporator drain hose.
Check at the passenger's side vent
and turn the blower on at low speed.
A/C lines (low Wiggle the hose when checking Check all fittings, couplings, pressure switches,
pressure side) crimped metal ends. brazed/welded areas, and areas around
If the detector "sn iffs" a leak, use attachment points on A/C lines and components.
fluorescent dye to confirm it. Check for damaged and corroded areas.
Move the probe slowly (1 inch/second or less),
and keep it within 1/4 inch of the component being
checked. This maximizes the chance of detecting
a leak.
5. Close the quick coupler valves, then disconnect the quick couplers from the vehicle service ports.
6. Attach the universal connect set, from the Optimax Jr. Leak Detection Kit, to the service valve fitting. Close the control
valve (the black knob on the connect set).
7. Attach the charging station low pressure hose quick coupler to the service valve fitting, and open the quick coupler
valve. Evacuate the connect set using the charging station vacuum pump, then close the quick coupler valve.
8. Detach the universal connect set, and install a Tracer-Stick dye capsule between the connect set and the service
valve fitting (see the manufacturer's instructions for more detail).
9. Attach the quick coupler on the universal connect set to the low pressure service port on the vehicle. Open the
charging station low pressure hose quick coupler valve, but do not open the control valve.
10. Start the engine, and set the A/C system to maximum cooling. Open the control valve to let refrigerant and the dye
enter the A/C system through the low pressure service port. Close the control valve when the Tracer-Stick dye
capsule is empty.
m
11. Run the engine and A/C system for 15 minutes to thoroughly circulate the dye. Then shut the engine off, and inspect
the follow ing areas of the system for leaks.
NOTE:
Check for leaks in a dark work area, and use the UV light and the special glasses from the leak check kit. Other UV
lights may not work well with the Tracer-Stick dye.
Small leaks may take up to 1 week of vehicle operation (with normal A/C use) to become visible.
Possible Leak Area Diagnostic Procedure with Fluorescent Dye
Service ports If a leak is found, replace the Schrader valve on the service port.
A/C lines Use a permanent marker pen to circle the leak area.
If a leak is found, remove and replace the A/C line (see page 21 -98).
A/C condenser Ifa leakisfound, remove the A/C condenser (see page 21-92).
Determine whether leak is in the A/C condenser or the receiver/dryer.
Use a permanent marker pen to circle the leak area.
Replace either the receiver/dryer (see page 21-93), or the A/C condenser (see page
21-92), depending upon which is leaking.
A/C compressor Checkfor leaks at all of the A/C compressor joints, the clutch center, the A/C
compressor front housing bolts, and the scroll bolts on the back of the A/C
compressor.
Ifa leak is found, use a permanent marker pen to circle the leak area.
If the A/C compressor relief valve appears to be leaking, determine whether the leak
is coming from the relief valve, or the joint between the A/C compressor casing and
the valve. If the leak is from the reliefvalve, check the A/C system pressures, and refer
to the pressure test in the A/C System Test (see page 21-86). If the leak is from the
casing/valve joint, replace the A/C compressor relief valve (see page 21-96).
If the leak is coming from the suction hose and/or discharge hose fittings on the A/C
compressor, clean the A/C fittings and replace the suction/discharge fitting O-rings.
For all other A/C compressor leaks, remove and replace the A/C compressor (see
page 21-94).
Evaporator Start checking for evaporator leaks by illuminating the evaporator drain tube area.
Ifa leak is found, remove the evaporator core (see page 21-103).
Determine whether leak is from evaporator or expansion valve.
Use a permanent marker pen to circle the leak area.
Replace the expansion valve (see page 21-101), or the evaporator core (see page
21-103), depending upon which is leaking.
A /C System Noise Check
A C A U TIO N 3. Operate the blower at each speed with the engine and
A/C off, and checkfor unusual noises and excessive
A ir conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can
vibration. If noise and/or vibration are present, do the
following checks:
Be careful when connecting service equipm ent
Do not breathe refrigerant vapor. -1. If the noise or vibration occurs only in a specific
IMA components are located near A/C system mode or setting, then check these items:
components. Make sure you have read the IMA Operation of the mode control motor, door, and
service precautions (see page 12-3) before doing linkage.
repairs or service. Operation of the air mix control motor, door, and
linkage.
The A/C system noise check w ill help you determine the Operation of the recirculation control motor,
source of abnormal A/C system noise. door, and linkage.
NOTE; -2. If there is a squeaking or chirping noise, but no
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the unusual vibration, replace the blower motor (see
work area before resuming service. page 21-100).
Additional health and safety information may be -3. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-99), and check
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant for foreign material (leaves or twigs, for example)
manufacturers. on the blower motor and fan. If foreign material is
Identify the conditions when the noise occurs. The present, remove it, and recheck for noise. If you do
weather, the vehicle speed, the vehicle being in gear not find any foreign material, remove the blower
or in neutral, the engine temperature, or other motor (see page 21-100), and check these items:
conditions may be factors in determining the noise Check if the fan blades are cracked or broken.
source. @Make sure the fan retainer is tight.
Do the A/C system inspection (see page 21-6), and Inspect the fan alignment on the blower motor
correct any problems found prior to diagnosing shaft.
abnormal noises.
Replace the blower motor if any problems are
Abnormal A/C noises can be misleading. For example, present.
a sound similar to a failed bearing may be caused by
loose fasteners, loose mounting brackets, or a faulty 4. Set up the vehicle for the running A/C checks:
A/C compressor clutch assembly. Select a quiet area for testing.
1. Inspect the air inlet grille in the cowl cover for debris. Apply the parking brake.
If debris is present, remove it. Shift the vehicle to PARK or Neutral.
Start the engine.
2. Sit inside the vehicle, close the doors and windows,
and turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool.
the engine. Cycle the HVAC system through all blower Set the mode control switch to Vent.
speeds and all air distribution modes to determine Set the fan switch to minimum (but not OFF).
where and when the noise occurs. Turn the A/C switch ON.
Switch the A/C compressor on and off several times to
clearly identify the sound during A/C compressor
operation. Listen to the noise while the A/C
compressor clutch is engaged and disengaged. Probe
the A/C system with a stethoscope to pinpoint the
noise.
NOTE: If the noise does not change when the A/C
compressor clutch engages or disengages, the noise
may be caused by an engine-related component.
Probe the engine area with a stethoscope to pinpoint
the noise.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and check the 8. Listen with a stethoscope for noises coming from the
drive belt fo r excessive wear, oil contamination, A/C compressor, and check these items:
improper routing (see page 10-17), or a faulty belt @The noise changes when the A/C compressor clutch
tensioner (see page 10-18). Correct any problems disengages. If the noise does not change when the
found. Start the engine, run the A/C system, and check A/C compressor disengages, the noise may be
if the noise is coming from the drive belt, the belt caused by an engine-related component. Probe the
tensioner, or any of the pulleys. Repair or replace any engine area with a stethoscope to pinpoint the
faulty components. noise.
6. Listen for noises coming from the A/C lines, the A/C The A/C system operating pressures are normal. If
hoses, the A/C condenser, the evaporator, the the system pressures are abnormal, troubleshoot
receiver-dryer, or the expansion valve, and check the problem using the pressure test table in the A/C
these items: system test (see page 21-90). Correct the
Noises caused by A/C components touching other pressure-related problem(s), and recheck for noise.
components or the body. Reroute or insulate the The A/C compressor hose connections, mounting
A/C component(s) as needed, and recheck for noise. brackets, and fasteners are in good condition. If any
Loose, damaged or excessively worn A/C of these components are loose, damaged, or
components or mounting hardware. Repair or excessively worn, repair or replace the faulty
replace the faulty component(s) or hardware, and component(s), and recheck for noise. If these
recheck for noise. components are in good condition, and the noise is
still present, replace the A/C compressor (see page
A moaning noise coming from the A/C suction line.
21-94).
If there is a moaning noise, check the system
refrigerant charge (see page 21-114). If the
refrigerant charge is OK, replace the receiver/dryer.
7. Check the operation of the A/C compressor clutch:
Make sure A/C compressor clutch engages w ithout
slipping. If the clutch does not engage, troubleshoot
the A/C compressor clutch circuit (see page 21-66).
If the A/C compressor clutch slips, replace the A/C
complete clutch assembly (see page 21-95).
Make sure the A/C compressor clutch disengages. If
the clutch does not disengage, do the A/C
compressor clutch check (see page 21-78). If the A/C
compressor clutch is OK, replace the A/C
compressor (see page 21-94).
Make sure the A/C compressor clutch cycles
normally. If the A/C compressor clutch is cycling
rapidly, the A/C system is probably low on
refrigerant due to a leak. Do the refrigerant leak
check (see page 21-79). If the refrigerant charge is
OK, and there are no leaks, troubleshoot the A/C
compressor clutch circuit (see page 21-66).
A/C System Test
Special Tools Required. . 5. Insert a thermometer (A) in the center vent.

Throttle Pedal Depressor Tool B240B, commercially
available
Big Digit Hygro-Thermometer PYR445703,
commercially available
Performance Test
A CA UTIO N
A ir conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can
The performance test will help determine if the A/C

system is operating within specifications.
NOTE:
work area before resuming service. 6. Place another thermometer (B) near the blower unit's
Additional health and safety information may be recirculation inlet duct.
manufacturers. 7. Test conditions:
Move the vehicle out of direct sunlight and let it cool
1. Do the A/C system inspection (see page 21-6), and
down to the surrounding (ambient) temperature. If
correct any problems found.
necessary, wash the vehicle to cool it down more
2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant quickly.
recovery/recycling/charging station to the The blower intake temperature must be at least
high-pressure service port and the low-pressure 68 F (20 C).
service port, following the equipment manufacturer's Open the hood.
instructions. Open the front doors.
3. Determine the relative humidity and air temperature. Start the engine. Set the temperature control dial to
Max Cool, the mode control button to Vent, and the
4. Open the glove box and the glove box lid (see step 1 recirculation control button to Recirculate.
on page 21-99).
Turn the A/C switch ON and the fan control switch
to Max.
Hold the engine speed at 1,500 rpm.
No driver or passengers in the vehicle.
8. Inspect the A/C components for the following
conditions:
A/C compressor clutch not engaged.

Abnormal frost areas.
Unusual noises.
If you observe any of these conditions, refer to the
Symptom Troubleshooting Index.
9. After running the air conditioning for 10 minutes
under the above test conditions, read the delivery
temperature from the thermometer in the center vent,
the intake temperature near the blower unit, and the
high and low system pressure from the A/C gauges.

10, To complete the vent (delivery)/blower intake temperature chart;

Mark the vent (delivery) temperature on the vertical line.
Mark the blower intake temperature on the bottom line. '
Draw a vertical line from the blower intake temperature mark.
Draw a horizontal line from the vent (delivery) temperature mark unti l it intersects the vertical line.
NOTE: The vent temperature and the blower intake temperature should intersect in the shaded area. Any
measurements outside the area may indicate the need for further inspection.
Blower intake Temperature vs. Vent (Delivery) T em perature

F
CO
1 0 4 -i
(40)
95 -
(35)
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
80%
VENT
(DELIVERY)
TEMPERATURE
68 -
(20)
30 %
50 -
(10)
41
(5)
32 68 77 88 95 104 F
(0) (20) (25) (30) (35) (40) CC)
(cont'd)
A /C System Test (cont'd)
11. To complete the high side (discharge) pressure/blower intake temperature chart:
Mark the high side (discharge) pressure on the vertical line.
Mark the blower intake temperature on the bottom line.
Draw a horizontal line from the high side (discharge) pressure mark until it intersects the vertical line.
NOTE: The high side pressure and the blower intake temperature should intersect in the shaded area. Any
Blower intake Temperature vs. High Side (Discharge) Pressure

kPa
(kgf/cm2)
[psi]
3000 n
(30.6) HUMIDITY
[435] LEVEL
80%
2500 H
(25.5)
[363]
2000 -
(20.4) 30%
[290]
HIGH SIDE
(DISCHARGE)
PRESSURE
1500
(15.3)
[218]
1000
(10.2)
[145]
500 H
(5.1)
[73]
68 77 36 95 104 F
(20) (25) (30) (35) (40) (C)
12. To complete the low side (suction) pressure/blower intake temperature chart:
Mark the low side (suction) pressure along the vertical line.
Mark the blower intake temperature along the bottom line.
Draw a horizontal line from the low side (suction) pressure mark until it intersects the vertical line.
NOTE: The low side pressure and the blower intake temperature should intersect in the shaded area. Any
Blower Intake Temperature vs. Low Side (Suction) Pressure

kPa
(kgf/cm2) HUMIDITY
LEVEL
400
(4.1)
[58]
350 ~
(3.6)
[51]
300
(3.1)
[44]
250
(2.5)
[36]
200
(2.0)
LOW SIDE E29l
(SUCTION)
PRESSURE
150
(1.5)
[22]
100
(1.0)
[15]
50 -
(0.5)
[7.3]
68 77 86 95 104 F
(20) (25) (30) (35) (40) (C)
A/C System Test (cont'd)
Pressure Test
Test results Related symptoms Probable cause
Driver and passenger's Suction pressure may be low. Low refrigerant charge.
side A/C vent Expansion valve not opening sufficiently.
temperatures may vary
by approx. 52 F (11 C) or
more.
Discharge pressure Discharge pressure reduced when Significant refrigerant overcharge.
abnormally high. A/C condenser cooled with water
spray.
With doors open, fresh air selected
and radiator and A/C condenser fan
run on high speed, temperature drop
across A/C condenser inlet to outlet
is less than about 41 F (5 C).
Restricted/weak airflow through A/C Dirty A/C condenser or damaged fins.
condenser. Debris between A/C condenser and
radiator.
One or more cooling fans malfunctioning.
Discharge pressure Suction and discharge pressures Faulty A/C compressor discharge valve or
abnormally low. equalize rapidly after stopping seal.
compressor.
Suction pressure higher than
normal.
Suction pressure Weak or insufficient airflow across Restricted blower intake or pollen filter.
abnormally low. evaporator.
Suction pressure varies from near Moisture in the system.
normal to a vacuum, as moisture Faulty expansion valve.
freezes in expansion valve orifice.
Reduced airflow from vents. Condensation freezing on evaporator.
Vent temperature is very low. Faulty evaporator temp sensor (check DTC).
Faulty expansion valve or compressor
relay.
Suction pressure Lack of slight suction pressure Expansion valve stuck open or open too long.
abnormally high. variation at 1,500 RPM
when Recirculated airflow is
switched to Fresh Air."
Discharge pressure near normal.
Suction and discharge Sheet of paper does not stick to front One (or both) cooling fan motor inoperative or
pressures abnormally of A/C condenser surface with wires reversed.
high. cooling fans on.
With doors open, fresh air selected
and radiator and A/C condenser fan
run on high speed, temperature drop
across A/C condenser inlet to outlet
is less than about 41 F (5 C)
A/C ompressor clutch remains Insufficient compressor clutch clearance.
engaged during off cycle. Compressor relay or circuit problem.
Pressure relief valve may open. Excessive air in system.
IH
Test results Related symptoms Probable cause

Suction and discharge Suction line from expansion valve to Excessively low refrigerant charge.
pressures abnormally compressor is not cold.
low. Lack of slight suction pressure Expansion valve clogged with
variation at 1,500 RPM debris/desiccant, stuck closed, or not opening
when Recirculated airflow is sufficiently.
switched to "Fresh Air."
More than 50 - 60 F (10 -16 C) Blocked or. restricted A/C condenser internal
temperature drop across A/C passages or lines/components restricting
condenser inlet to outlet pipes. refrigerant flow.
Significant temperature difference Restriction in A/C suction or discharge lines or
along high or low side A/C lines or components (check temperatures to isolate).
components.
NOTE: Some restrictions may not show

up until 3,000 RPM.
Suction pressure high Excessive A/C compressor noise. A/C compressor internal damage (Checkfor
and discharge pressure Pressures equalize quickly and noise A/C system debris contamination).
low. after compressor turns off.
Suction and discharge Vent temperature too high. Slightly low refrigerant charge.
pressures normal (or near Excessive refrigerant oil in system.
normal). Heater valve (if equipped) misadjusted.
Air mix door sticking, misadjusted or
inoperative.
Static pressures high with A/C system Air/non-condensable gasses in system.
equalized. (After engine is off 4 -12 Contaminated or incorrect refrigerant.
hours).
A/C Condenser Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a 8. Remove the bolts and the A/C condenser brackets (A).
recovery/recycling/charging station (see page
21-113).
page 20-149).
3. Remove the cooling guide.
4. Remove the hood latch (see page 20-135).
5. Remove the horn (see page 22-206).
6. Remove the nut, then disconnect the discharge hose
(A) from the A/C condenser. Remove the O-ring (B)
from the discharge hose.
A
9. Remove the A/C condenser (A) by lifting it up. Be

careful not to damage the radiator or A/C condenser
fins when removing the A/C condenser.
7. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the receiver pipe (A)

from the A/C condenser. Remove the O-ring (B) from
the receiver pipe.
9.8 N-m (1.00 kgf-m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)

B B
Receiver/Dryer Desiccant
Replacement
10. Install the A/C condenser in the reverse order of NOTE: Install the receiver/dryer as quickly as possible to
removal, and note these items: prevent the system from absorbing moisture from the
If you're installing a new A/C condenser, add air.
refrigerant oil (SP-10) (see page 21-97). 1. Remove the A/C condenser (see page 21-92).
Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before 2. Remove the cap (A) from the bottom of the A/C
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings condenser. Remove the O-ring (B) and the desiccant
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. (C).
Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on
the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may
damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts the
paint, wash it off immediately.
m Be careful not to damage the radiator or the A/C
condenser fins when installing the A/C condenser.
Charge the system (see page 21 -114).
2.9 N -m (0.30 kgf m , 2.1 Ibf ft)

3. Install the receiver/dryer in the reverse order of
Replace the O-rings with new ones, and apply a thin
coat of refrigerant oil (SP-10) before installing them.
Be sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a
(R-134a) to avoid leakage.
Install the cap to the specified torque. It is made of
resin and can be easily stripped.
A/C Compressor Replacement
NOTE; Do not install an A/C compressor into a system 7. Remove the mounting bolts, and remove the A/C
unless you are completely sufe that the system is free of compressor downward. Be careful not to damage the
contamination. Installing the A/C compressor into a radiator fins when removing the A/C compressor.
contaminated system can result in premature A/C Do not drop the A/C compressor.
compressor failure.
1. I f the A/C compressor is marginall y operable, run the
engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning work
for a few minutes, then shut the engine off,
2. Recover the refrigerant with a
recovery/recycling/charging station (see page
'21-113).
6. Remove the compressor clutch connector (A).
Remove the harness clip (B) from the A/C condenser
fan shroud, then disconnect the connector. Remove 8x1.25 mm
22 N-m
the bolts, then disconnect the suction line (C) and the (2.2 kgfm,
discharge line (D) from the A/C compressor, and 16 Ibfft)
remove the O-rings (E). Plug or cap the lines 8. Install the A/C compressor in the reverse order of
immediately after disconnecting them to avoid removal, and note these items;
moisture and dust contamination. Inspect the A/C lines for any signs of contamination.
6x1.0 mm Replace the O-rings with new ones at each/fitting,
9.8 N-m (1.00 kg fm , 7.2 Ib f f t } ' \
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
// Use refrigerant oil (SP-10) for HFC-134a KEIHIN
W JB nm spiral type A/C compressor only.
To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the
container once dispensed, and never mix it with
other refrigerant oils.
Replace. Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on
absorption.
Charge the system (see page 21-114).
A/C Compressor Clutch Overhaul
Special Tools Required 3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap ring
A/C Compressor Kit 07AAF-000A150 (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the rotor pulley
(B). Be careful not to damage the rotor pulley and A/C
1. Remove the center nut while holding the armature compressor.
plate (A) with the A/C clutch holder (B).
2. Remove the armature plate (A) and the shim(s) (B),

taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch needs
adjustment, increase or decrease the number and
thickness of shims as necessary, then reinstall the 4. Remove the bolt and holder (A), then disconnect the
armature plate, and recheck its clearance (see page field coil connector (B). Remove the snap ring (C) with
21-78), snap ring pliers, then remove the field coil (D). Be
careful not to damage the field coil and A/C
NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses: compressor.
0.1 mm, 0.2 mm, 0.4 mm, and 0.5 mm.
(cont'd)
A/C Compressor Clutch Overhaul A/C Compressor Relief Valve
(cont'd) Replacement
5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of NOTE: If the A/C compressor relief valve released
disassembly, and note these items: refrigerant to the atmosphere, determine and correct the
Install the field coil with the wire side facing down, cause of the excessive system pressure, then replace the
and align the boss on the field coil with the hole in relief valve.
the A/C compressor. 1. Recover the refrigerant with a
Clean the rotor pulley and A/C compressor friction recovery/recycling/charging station (see page
surfaces with contact cleaner or other 21-113).
non-petroleum solvent.
Install new snap rings, note the installation 2. Remove the relief valve cover (A), the relief valve (B),
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in the and the O-ring (C). Plug the opening to keep foreign
groove. matter from entering the system and the A/C
compressor oil from running out.
Make sure that the rotor pulley turns smoothly after
if s reassembled.
Route and clamp the wires properly or they can be
damaged by the rotor pulley.
4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief valve,

and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing
it.
5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief
valve.
6. Charge the system (see page 21-114).
H I
A /C Compressor Thermal Protector A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement

Replacement
1. Remove the bolt and the holder (A). Disconnect the Special Tools Required
field coil connector (B), then remove the thermal Oil Injector Tool Robinair ROB16256, commercially
protector (C). available
*This tool is available through the Honda Tool and
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
Recommended PAG oil: SP-10

P/N 38897-P13-A01AH: 120 mL (4 fl-oz)
It is important to have the correct amount of refrigerant
oil in the A/C system to ensure proper lubrication of the
A/C compressor.
Too little oil damages the A/C compressor; too much oil
reduces the cooling capacity of the system, and can
produce high vent temperatures.
To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the
container once dispensed, and never mix it with other
refrigerant oils.
Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the
container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately.
2. Replace the thermal protector (A) with a new one, and
apply silicone sealant (B) to the bottom of the thermal Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount
protector. listed if you replace any of the following parts.
A/C condenser
(including Dryer
Desiccant)................ 25 mL (5/6 fl-oz)
Evaporator...............35 mL (1 1/6 fl-oz)
Line or hose .............. 10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
Dryer Desiccant.......10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
Leakage repair.........25 mL (5/6 fl-oz)
A/C compressor.......Since the oil separator is equipped
inside the compressor for this
vehicle, oil drainage is
unnecessary at the time of
compressor replacement.
NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone sealant on

the terminal part of the connectors and switches,
especially if you have silicone sealant on your hands
or gloves.
3. Install the thermal protector in the reverse order of
removal.
A/C CONDENSER
Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement Blower Unit Removal/Installation
1. Open the glove box, then open the glove box lid (A). 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover (see
page 20-94) and the glove box (see page 20-94).
2. Cut the plastic cross brace (A) in the glove box
opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and
discard it.
2. Remove the lid (A) from the blower unit.
3. Disconnect these connectors (A) from the blower

motor and the recirculation control motor. Remove
the wire harness clips (B).
4. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal. Make

sure that there is no air leaking out of the blower unit.
5. If the Maintenance Minder required replacing the dust
and pollen filter, reset the Maintenance Minder (see
page 3-4), and this procedure is complete. If the
Maintenance Minder did not require the dust and
pollen filter replacement, go to step 6.
and ECM/PCM. If it does not communicate,
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-383).
10. Go to the Individual Maintenance Item Reset (see
RESET.
(cont'd)
Blower Unit Removal/Installation Blower Unit Component
(cont'd) Replacement
4. Remove the self-tapping screws and the duct (A). Note these items when overhauling the blower unit:
The recirculation control motor (A), the blower motor
(B), and the dust and pollen filter (C) can be replaced
without removing the blower unit.
Before reassembly, make sure that the recirculation
control linkage and door move smoothly without
binding.
After reassembly, make sure the recirculation control
motor runs smoothly.
5. Remove the self-tapping screws, the mounting nuts,

and the blower unit (A).
9.8 N-m
(1.00 kgf m, 7.2 Ibfft)
6. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal. Make
sure that there is no air leakage.
Expansion Valve Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a 5. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the evaporator
recovery/recycling/charging station (see page temperature sensor and the power transistor, then
21-113). remove the connector clip (B). Remove the
self-tapping screws, the expansion valve cover (C),
2. Remove the bolt from the A/C line clamp (A). and the seal (D).
3. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the A/C line (A)

from the evaporator core, and remove the O-rings (B). C
6 x1.0 mm
6. Remove the self-tapping screw (A), push the upper
cover (B) toward the front of the vehicle, then remove
the upper cover.
4. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-99).

Expansion Valve Replacement (cont'd)
7. Remove the bolts and the expansion valve (A) and the Install the expansion valve in the reverse order of
inlet/outlet lines from the evaporator core assembly removal, and note these items:
without bending the lines. Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
5 x 1.0 mm and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
3.3 N-m installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings
(0.34 k g fm , for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
2.4 I b f f t)
absorption.
Make sure that there is no air leakage.
Replace.
8. Remove the inlet/outlet lines (A) from the expansion

valve (B).
Evaporator Core Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a 5. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the evaporator
recovery/recycling/charging station (see page temperature sensor and the power transistor, then
21-113). remove the connector clip (B). Remove the
self-tapping screws, the expansion valve cover (C),
2. Remove the bolt from the A/C line clamp (A). and the seal (D).
3. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the A/C line (A)

from the evaporator core, and the O-rings (B).
6 m 1.0 m m
6. Remove the self-tapping screw (A), push the upper
cover (B) toward the front of the vehicle, then remove
the upper cover.
4. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-99).

Evaporator Core Replacement (cont'd)
7. Remove the bolts and the expansion valve (A) and the 9. Pull out the evaporator temperature sensor (A) from
inlet/outlet lines from the evaporator core assembly the evaporator core.
without bending the lines.
8. Carefully pull out the evaporator core assembly (A),

then remove the plate (B).
Heater Unit/Core Replacement
10. Install the evaporator temperature sensor in the SRS components are located in this area. Review the
evaporator core, and note these items: SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and the
When the evaporator temperature sensor (A) is precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before
installed into the new evaporator core, set the doing repairs or service.
sensor into the factory-preset position (B, C). 1. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection
When the evaporator temperature sensor is procedure (see page 22-86).
reinstalled into the original evaporator core, set the
sensor into the new position (D, E) because the fin 2. Recover the refrigerant with a
may be deforming by the previous installation. recovery/recycling/charging station (see page
21-113).
Installing into the factory-preset position
3. Disconnect the A/C line from the evaporator core (see
B page 21-103).
13th row of fins A
4. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator (see page
10-8).
5. From the inlet heater hose, remove the clip (A). Slide
the hose clamps (B) back, then disconnect the inlet
heater hose (C) and the outlet heater hose (D) from the
heater unit. Note the layout of the hoses. Engine
coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected;
drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant
spill on the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If
any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately.
Installing into the new position
NOTE: Discard the removed clip (A) because it is
unnecessary at the time of heater hose installation.
11. Install the core in the reverse order of removal and

note these items:
If you're installing a new evaporator core, add
refrigerant oil (SP-10) (see page 21-97).
Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
absorption.
(cont'd)
Heater Unit/Core Replacement (cont'd)
6. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take 9. Disconnect the connector (A) from the evaporator
care not to damage or bend the fuel lines or the brake temperature sensor. Disconnect these connectors (B)
lines, etc. from the mode control motor, the power transistor
and the air mix control motor, then remove the A/C
wire harness.
12 N*m (1.2 k g fm , 9 Ib fft)

7. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-99).
8. Disconnect these connectors (A) from the blower
10. Remove the drain hose (A). Remove the mounting
motor and the recirculation control motor. Remove
nuts and the blower-heater unit (B).
the wire harness clips (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.00 k g fm , 7.2 Ib fft)
Air Mix Control Motor Replacement
11. Remove the self-tapping screws and the heater core 1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-94).
cover (A), the cap (B), and the grommet (C), then
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the air mix
carefully pull out the heater core (D).
control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws
and the air mix control motor from the heater unit
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged
with the linkage. After installation, make sure the
12. Install the heater core and the evaporator core in the
13. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal,
, and note these items:
Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater
hoses, and install the hose clamps securely.
Refill the cooling system with engine coolant (see
page 10-8).
Make sure that there is no coolant leakage.
Refer to the evaporator core replacement (see page
21-103).
Mode Control Motor Replacement Recirculation Control Motor
Replacement
1. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-99). 1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-94).
2. Disconnect the IP connector (A) from the mode 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the
control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws recirculation control motor (B). Remove the
and the mode control motor from the heater unit self-tapping screws and the recirculation control
motor from the blower unit.
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.
with the linkage. After installation, make sure the Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged
motor runs smoothly. with the linkage. After installation, make sure the
Humidity/ln-Car Temperature Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Sensor Replacement Replacement
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-83). 1. Remove the front bumper center upper beam (see
page 20-149).
2. Remove the aspirator air hose (A) from the
humidity/in-car ternperature sensor (B), and 2. Remove the outside air temperature sensor clip (A)
disconnect the 4P connector (C). from front bumper beam.
3. Remove the self-tapping screw and humidity/in-car 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the outside air
temperature sensor from the humidity/in-car temperature sensor (B).
temperature sensor trim (D).
4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Be
sure to connect the aspirator air hose securely.
4. Lift the tab (C) to release the lock, then remove the
outside air temperature sensor from the clip (D).
Sunlight Sensor Replacement Climate Control Unit Knob
Replacement
1. Pull out the sunlight sensor (A) from the dashboard,, NOTE:
then disconnect the connector (B). Be careful not to Do not work in a dusty or dirty place.
damage the sensor and the dashboard. Do not work with dusty hands.
Discharge static electricity from your body before and
during the work.
Do not touch the circuit board(s) with your bare hands.
1. Remove the climate control unit (see page 21 -112).
2. Remove the dial (A).
I B
3. Remove the self-tapping screws, then remove the 6. Remove the self-tapping screws and the knob (A).
cover (A) from the climate control unit.
7. Remove the trim (A) and the panel (B).
4. Remove the circuit board (B).

5. Remove the self-tapping screws and the circuit board
(A).
(cont'd)
Climate Control Unit Knob Climate Control Unit
Replacement (cont'd) Removal/Installation
8. Remove the knobs (A) using the flat-tip screwdriver 1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-83).
wrapped in protective tape.
2. Remove the self-tapping screws and the climate
NOTE Take care not to scratch the climate control control unit (A).
unit.
9. Install the knob in the reverse order of removal. After 3. Install the climate control unit in the reverse order of
installation, operate the various functions to see removal. After installation, operate the climate control
whether it works properly. unit in various functions to confirm that it works
10. Run the self-diagnostic function to confirm that there properly.
are no problems in the system (see page 21-10). 4. Run the self-diagnostic function to confirm that there
are no problems in the system (see page 21-10).
Refrigerant Recovery System Evacuation

Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can Compact Electronic Vacuum Gauge Robinair ROB14777,
irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. commercially available
Be careful when connecting service equipment. *This tool is available through the Honda Tool and
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE:
A C A U T IO N
manufacturers. Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant NOTE:

recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the
high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure work area before resuming service.
service port (C), as shown, following the equipment Additional health and safety information may be
manufacturer's instructions. obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
Do not allow moisture to contaminate the A/C system
oil. Moisture in the oil is difficult to remove, and it can
damage the A/C compressor.
Using a thermistor vacuum gauge may decrease the
required evacuation time because you can measure
actual moisture removal with this tool.
A more efficient way to measure moisture removal is
with a special tool called a thermistor vacuum gauge,
measuring vacuum levels in microns.
Connect the tool according to the manufacturers
instructions, and allow the vacuum pump to run until the
gauge reads 700 - 750 microns (29.89 inHg).
Shut off and isolate the vacuum pump, then observe the
gauge reading:
If the vacuum level remains stable for at least
3 minutes, all moisture in the system has been
removed.
A slow increase in the micron reading means there is
still moisture boiling out of the system. Restart the
vacuum pump and continue evacuating.
A quicker increase of micron levels indicates a leak is
present in the system or your service equipment.
Determine the cause and correct the leak before
continuing.
2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed from
the A/C system after the recovery process is 1. When an A/C System has been opened to the
completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it
refrigerant oil back into the A/C system before must be evacuated using an R-134a refrigerant
charging. recove ry/recycl ing/ch a rging station. If the system has
been open for several days, the receiver/dryer should
be replaced, refrigerant oil should be drained and
replaced with new oil, and the system should be
evacuated for several hours.
System Evacuation (cont'd) System Charging
2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant ik C A U T IO N

recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the
high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure
service port (C), as shown, following the equipment
manufacturer's instructions. Recover the refrigerant, Be careful when connecting service equipment.
if any, from the A/C system (see page 21-113). Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
NOTE:
manufacturers.
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant
recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the
high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure
service port (C), as shown, following the equipment
manufacturer's instructions.
3. Evacuate the system. The vacuum pump should run

fora minimum of 30 minutes to eliminate all moisture
from the system. When the suction gauge reads
93.3 kPa (700 mmHg, 27.55 inHg) for at least
30 minutes, close all valves, and turn off the vacuum
pump.
4. If the suction gauge does not reach approximately
93.3 kPa (700 mmHg,27.55 inHg) in 15 minutes,
there is probably a large leak in the system. Partially
charge the system, and check for leaks (see page
21-79).
2. Recover the refrigerant in the A/C system (see page
21-113).
3. Evacuate the system (see page 21-113). If the system
cannot reach a vacuum of93.3 kPa (700 mmHg,
27.55 inHg) in 15 minutes, or cannot hold a vacuum
for at least 15 minutes, there is probably a large leak.
Do the refrigerant leak check (see page 21-79), and
repair any leaks before charging the system.
4. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the
system that was removed during recovery. Use only
SP-10 refrigerant oil.
5. Charge the system with the specified amount of
R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system; the
A/C compressor will be damaged.
Select the appropriate units of measure for your
refrigerant charging station.
Refrigerant Capacity:
450 to 500 g
0.45 to 0.50 kg
0.99 to 1.10 lbs
15.8 to 17.6 oz
6. Check for refrigerant leaks (see page 21 -79).
7. Check for system performance (see page 21-86).
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM {SRS) (if body electrical maintenance is required)
The CR-Z SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering whee l hub, a front passenger's airbag in the dashboard
tensioners.
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) SYSTEM (If electrical maintenance is required)

Body Electrical
Special To o ls....................... . ...................22-2 C... . .............. . 22-128
General Troubleshooting Information. 22-3 B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode
D ............................... . ............................................................ 22-12
R e la y a n d C o n tro l U n it L o ca tio ns B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode
Engine Compartment.................... . . . . 22-7 1 and Test Mode 2 (without the
Dashboard..................... ....... ............ . . . 22-8 H D S ) . . . . . . . ......................... . 22-130
Door and R e a r.................... ....................22-10 Sleep and Wake-Up Mode Test-------- - .22-132
Seat.......................................................... 22-12 Circuit Diagram ............................. . . . . . . 22-133
DTC Troubleshooting................... . 22-135
C o n n e c to rs a n d H arn e ss es
MICU Input T es t............. ....................... 22-141
Connector Index. . . ..................... 22-14
Connector to Harness Index............... .. 22-16 K e y le s s /P o w e r D o o r
I w iX ^ /S e c u r ity S y s te m
F u s e /R e la y B o xe s
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box I ndex. . . . 22-69 Component Location Index................. . 22-145
System Description ......................... . 22-147
P o w e r D is trib u tio n Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . ----- . . . . . . . . . . 22-148
Fuse to Components Index.................... 22-76 DTC Troubleshooting............. 22-152
Symptom Troubleshooting Index. . . . . 22-156
G ro u n d D is trib u tio n Symptom Troubleshooting................... 22-158
Ground to Components Index. . . . . . . . . 22-81 MICU Input T e s t........................ . 22-171
Door Lock Actuator Test . . . . . . . . ----- .. 22-176
U n d e r-D a s h F u s e /R e la y B ox Door Lock Knob Switch T e s t . . . . . . . . . . 22-177
* Removal and Installation....................... 22-82 Door Key Cylinder Switch T est---------.. 22-178
Driver's Door Lock Switch Test . . . . . . . . 22-178
12 V o lt B a tte ry Hatch Release Actuator T est................. 22-179
12 Volt Battery T est................................. 22-85 Security Hood Switch T est......... 22-179
12 Volt Battery Terminal Disconnection Hatch Outer Handle Switch
and Reconnection.................................22-86 Test/Replacement.................. . . . . . . . 22-180
12 Volt Battery Removal and Transmitter Tes t...................................... 22-181
Installation........................ ................. 22-87 Tripped Sensor History............. 22-183
Parasitic Draw Check............. .................22-88
Symptom Troubleshooting.............. 22-91 Im m o b iliz e r S y s te m
Component Location Index-----. . . . . . . 22-184
R elays System Description............. . 22-186
Power Relay T est.................................... 22-92 Circuit Diagram ....... . .................. 22-187
DTC Troubleshooting ....................... 22-188
Ig n itio n S w itc h Symptom Troubleshooting
Component Location Index....................22-94 Information..................... ....................22-191
Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-95 Symptom Troubleshooting Index........22-193
* Key Interlock System Circuit Symptom Troubleshooting ....................22-194
Troubleshooting.................................. 22-96 System Check................................ . 22-196
* Key Interlock Solenoid T est................... 22-99 Status Log .......................... . . . . . . ------.. 22-198
Park Pin Switch T est.................................22-99 * Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit Input
* Ignition Switch Test............................ 22-100 T e s t . . . . ..................... ........................... 22-199
* Ignition Switch Replacement................. 22-100 Immobilizer Key Registration............... 22-202
Registration for Immobilizer System . . . 22-203
M u ltip le x In te g ra te d C o n tro l * Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit
S y s te m Replacement..................................... . 22-203
General Troubleshooting Information . 22-102 H o rn s
DTC Troubleshooting Index................... 22-105 Component Location Index........... 22-204
System Description.................................22-109 Circuit Diagram ....................... . 22-205
Troubleshooting Horn Test/Replacement........ ............. . 22-206
B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode * Horn Switch T es t........................... .......... 22-207
A ............................. ........................... 22-126
B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode E x te rio r L ig h ts
B ..................... ............ ..................... 22-127 Component Location Index......... 22-209
System Description.................................22-212 Power W indows
Circuit Diagram - Headlights................. 22-213 Component Location Index............. 22-277
Back-up Lights.......................................22-217 System Description............ .................... 22-278
Brake Lights......................................... 22-218 Resetting the Power Window Control
Fog Lights.............................................. 22-219 U n it............... .........................................22-279
DTC Troubleshooting..................... ....... 22-220 Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-280
MICU Input Test................... ................ 22-229 Power Window Master Switch Input
Combination Light Switch T est..........................................................22-281
Test/Replacement.................................22-234 Power Window Master Switch T est-----22-284
Headlight Adjustm ent............................. 22-236 Passenger's Power Window Switch
Bulb Replacement................. ................. 22-237 T est..........................................................22-285
Bulb Socket Replacement....................... 22-241 Driver's Power Window Motor T est-----22-285
HID Unit Replacement..................... . 22-242 Passenger's Power Window Motor
Headlight Replacement........................... 22-242 T est..........................................................22-287
Taillight Replacement................. .......... 22-243 Power Window Motor Removal and
Fog Light Replacement.......................... 22-244 Installation............................................ 22-288
Fog Light Adjustm ent............................. 22-244 Power Window Master Switch
License Plate Light Replacem ent.------- 22-245 Replacement........................................ 22-289
High Mount Brake Light Replacement. 22-246 Passenger's Power Window Switch
Brake Pedal Position Switch T es t.......... 22-246 Replacement................................. ....... 22-289
Automatic Lighting Sensor
Test/Replacement.......................... 22-247 W ipers/Washers
Turn Signal/Hazard W arning Lights System Description................................. 22-292
Component Location Index................... 22-248 Circuit Diagram - W indshield............... . 22-293
Circuit D iagram ................. ....................... 22-250 Rear W in do w ........................................ 22-294
DTC Troubleshooting............................ 22-252 DTC Troubleshooting..................... ....... 22-295
MICU Input T e s t . . . ................................. 22-254 MICU Input Test................ ..................... 22-302
Side Turn Signal Light Replacement. . . 22-257 Wiper/Washer Switch
Hazard Warning Switch Test/Replacement........... 22-306
Test/Replacement.................................22-257 Wiper Motor T est..................................... 22-307
Washer Motor T est...................................22-308
Interior Lights Washer Fluid Level Switch T est............ 22-308
Component Location Index................... 22-259 Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement. 22-309
Circuit D iagram ..................... .................. 22-261 Rear Window Wiper Motor
Individual Map Light Replacem ent........................................22-310
Test/Replacement......................... . 22-263 Wiper Arm Replacement...................... 22-311
Interior Light Switch Washer Reservoir Replacement............ 22-312
Test/Replacement................................22-263 Wiper Blade Replacement..................... 22-313
Ambient Light Test/Replacement.......... 22-264 Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustment. . . . . . . . 22-315
Vanity Mirror Light Test/Replacement. 22-265 Washer Tube Replacement................... 22-317
Cargo Area Light Test/Replacement. . . 22-265
Hatch Latch Switch T est......................... 22-266 Gauges
Console Box Light Replacement.......... 22-266 Component Location Index................... 22-319
Glove Box Light Replacement............... 22-267 System Description .......... ...................... 22-322
Courtesy Light Replacement................. 22-267 Self-Diagnostic Function......................... 22-325
Footwell Light Replacement-------- . . . . 22-268 Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-328
Rear Tray Light Replacement............... 22-269 DTC Troubleshooting ........................ . 22-333
Symptom Troubleshooting Index........ 22-344
Dashlights Symptom Troubleshooting.................. 22-345
Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-270 Gauge Control Module Input Test........ 22-347
* Multi-Information Switch
Entry Lights Control System Test/Replacement.......................... 22-350
Component Location Index................... 22-271 3-Mode Switch Test/Replacement. . . . . 22-351
Circuit D iagram ......................................... 22-272 km/h, mph Change Switch
MICU Input T es t...................................... 22-273 Test/Replacement.................................22-352
* Ignition Key Switch T est......................... 22-276
Rewriting the ODO Data and
Transferring the Maintenance
Minder Data to a New Gauge
Control Modu le .................................... 22-353
Gauge Control Module Replacement.. 22-354
Outside Air Temperature Indicator
Calibration. . . . . . . . . ............. ............ 22-355
Resetting the Lifetime Points........... 22-357
Safety indicator System

Component Location Index.................. 22-358
Circuit D iagram -----. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ------ 22-359
Control Unit Input Test....................... .. 22-360
Reminder Systems
Component Location Index. ................. 22-363
Circuit Diagram . . .......................... .. 22-364
Control Unit Input Test.......................... 22-366
Accessory Power Socket

Component Location Index. . . . . . . . . . . 22-370
Circuit Diagram .......... ........................... 22-371
Test/Replacement. . . . . . . ----- . . . . . . . 22-372
Power Mirrors
Circuit D iagram ...................................... . 22-374
Function Test . . . ...... ............................. . 22-376
Power Mirror Switch
Test/Replacement............................... . 22-377
Power Mirror Actuator T est.................... 22-378
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement. . . 22-379
Seat Heaters
Component Location Index-----. . . . . . . 22-380
Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . ................... . 22-382
* Seat Heater T est. . ...... ......................... 22-384
Switch Test/Replacement. . . . . . . . . ----- 22-385
* Seat Heater Replacement.. . . . . . . . ----- 22-386
Rear Window Defogger

Component Location Index................. . 22-387
Circuit Diagram ......................... ............. 22-388
Function T est............................. ........ . . . 22-389
Defogger Wire Repair. . . . . .................. 22-390
Special Tools

07AAC-000A1 AO or 07AAC-000A2A1 Relay Puller 1
(D 07AG K-000A1 AO Relay Socket Extension (4 Pin) 1
(D 07AG K-000A2AO Relay Socket Extension (5 Pin) 1
07TAZ-001020A Back Probe Adapter, 17 mm 2
07WAZ-001010A MPCS (MCIS) Service Connector 1

Tips and Precautions Some connectors have a clip on their side used to
attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on
Special Tools Required another component. This clip has a pull type lock.
Back Probe Adapter 07TAZ-001020A Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected
unless you first release the lock and remove the
Before Troubleshooting connector from its mount bracket (A).
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay
box.
2. Check the 12 volt battery for damage, state of charge,
and clean and tight connections.
In o t ic e !
Do not quick-charge a 12 volt battery unless the
battery ground cable has been disconnected,
otherwise you will damage the alternator diodes.
Do not attempt to crank the engine with the 12 volt
battery ground cable loosely connected or you will
severely damage the wiring.
Handling Connectors
Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their
wire terminals. wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with Always reinstall plastic covers.
dielectric grease (except waterproof connectors).
All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).
Before connecting connectors, make sure the

terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
Checkfor loose retainers (A) and rubber seals (B). Handling Wires and Harnesses
Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with
their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).
The backs of some connectors are packed with

dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the
grease is contaminated, replace it.
After installing harness clips, make sure the harness

doesn't interfere with any moving parts.
Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust components
and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and
holes, and from exposed screws and bolts.
Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not
leave grommets distorted (B).
Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is

securely locked.
Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces
down.
DOWN
Testing and Repairs Five-Step Troubleshooting
Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. 1. Verify The Complaint:
Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break
with electrical tape or shrink tubing. Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to
Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. verify the customer complaint. Note the symptoms.
If there is an open or damage to the SRS wiring or Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have
terminals, replace the harness. narrowed down the problem area.
After installing parts, make sure that no wires are 2. Analyze The Schematic:
pinched under them.
Look up the schematic for the problem circuit.
When using electrical test equipment, follow the
Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
manufacturer's instructions and those described in
tracing the current paths from the power feed through
this manual.
the circuit components to ground. If several circuits
If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire fail at the same time, the fuse or a ground is a likely
side (except waterproof connectors). cause.
Based on the symptoms and your understanding of
the circuit operation, identify one or more possible
causes of the problem.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit:
Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in
step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure
is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the
most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at
points that are easily accessible.
4. Fix The Problem:
Once the specific problem is identified, make the
repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe
procedures.
Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A.
5. Make Sure The Circuit Works:
Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all
modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem.
If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of
the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no new problems
turn up and the original problem does not recur.
Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for

identification and replacement of connector terminals.
(cont'd)
Wire Color Codes How to Check for DTCs with the Honda
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire Diagnostic System (HDS)
colors in the circuit schematics: NOTE: For specific operation, refer to the user's manual
WHT.................................... ... White that came with the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS).
YEL.............................. ....... ... Yellow Make sure the HDS is loaded with the latest software.
BLK...................................... ... Black
BLU..... .......... ......... ..... ......... Blue 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A)
GRN.................................... ... Green located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
RED......................................... Red
ORN .................... ................ ... Orange
PNK....... ...... ....................... ... Pink
BRN..................................... ... Brown
GRY................................. ........ Gray
PUR.......................... ........ ..... Purple
TAN......... .......................... ..... Tan
LTBLU ........ ................. .......... Light Blue
LT GRN................... ........ ...... Light Green
The wire insulation has one color or one color with
another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.
7
A
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle; if
it does not, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-383).
4. Enter BODY ELECTRICAL, then select the desired
SYSTEM MENU.
NOTE: If the DTCs do not pertain to the selected
menu, select the All DTC Check icon to view all Body
Electrical DTCs.
6. If any DTCs are indicated, note them, and go to the
Engine Compartment
D a s h b o a rd
PGM-Fi MAIN RELAY 1 (4P) ELECTRONIC THROTTLE

I GNITION CONTROL SYSTEM (ETCS).
COIL RELAY (4P) CONTROL RELAY (4P)
REAR WINDOW
A/F SENSOR RELAY (4P) DEFOGGER RELAY (4P)
STARTER CUT RELAY (4P)
MICU
POWER WINDOW (Built i nto the under-dash
RELAY (4P) fuse/relay box)
ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR (ELD)
BLOWER MOTOR
RELAY (4P) ,GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
LIGHTING RELAY 1 (4P) IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS

CONTROL UNIT
LIGHTING RELAY 2 (4P)'
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
UNDER-DASH 1
RELAY HOLDER B
SRS UNIT HANDSFREELINK

CONTROL UNIT
(With HandsFreeLink system )
UNDER-DASH
RELAY HOLDER A
HATCH RELEASE DRIVER'S DOOR

ACTUATOR RELAY (5P) _ UNLOCK RELAY (BP) FOG LIGHT RELAY (4P) _HORN RELAY (4P)
f W ire colors: RED, F W ire colors: LT GRN, f~ W i re colors: GRN, ~] f Wire colors: WHT, 1
L.BLU, BLU, BLK, and YEL_ L B L U , RED, BLK, and BLU L W H T , WHT, and RED J LPUR, PUR, and ORN J
AUD IO UNIT (Without navigation)
I l
EPS CONTROL UNIT USB ADAPTER CONTROL UNIT

Door and Bear
Driver's Door
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT

(Buil t into the pow er w in d o w m aster switch)
Rear
IVIOTOR CONTROL MODULE (MCM)

Seat
\
0
RELAY { L O W ) (5P)
fW ir e colors; RED, BLU/YEL,1
L.BLK, BLK, and PUR/WHT J
Connector Index
Identification numbers have been assigned to in-line connectors, junction connectors, terminals, and thermal joints. The
number is preceded by the letter "C" for connectors, "G" for ground terminals and "T" for non-ground terminals.
Harness Harness Location Notes
Code Engine Dashboard Others
Compart (Floor, Door,
ment Trunk, and
Roof)
A/C wire harness (BL) C113, C117 Connector to harness
(see page 22-67)
Battery ground cable (GA) ( )/ G1 Connector to harness:
M/T model (see page
22-16)
CVT model (see page
22-18)
Cable reel subharness (AA) T10 Connector to harness
(see page 22-68)
CKP sensor subharness (JA) C202 Connector to harness:
M/T model (see page
22-22)
CVT model (see page
22-26)
Dashboard wire harness (BD) C113, C115, Connector to harness
(view of middle) C11? Cl19^ (see page 22-42)
C120, C121,
G502, G503,
G504
(view of driver's side) C114, C116, (see page 22-38)
C118, C122,
G501
(view of passenger's side) C123 (see page 22-46)
DC-DC converter ground (GC) T18, G4 Connector to harness
cable (see page 22-54)
Driver's door wire harness (DA) C114 Connector to harness
(see page 22-60)
Driver's seat position sensor (SC) C501 Connector to harness
subharness (see page 22-62)
Driver's seat wire harness (SJ) C504 Connector to harness
(see page 22-64)
Driver's side wire harness (BB) C106, C107, Connector to harness
C109, C110, (see page 22-50)
C111, G701,
G702, G703
Engine ground cable (GD) G2,T7 Connector to harness:
M/T model (see page
22-16)
CVT model (see page
22-18)
Engine wire harness (M/T) (EB) C124, C127, Connector to harness
C202, C203, (see page 22-20)
C204, G101
Engine wire harness (CVT) (EB) C124, C127, Connector to harness
(engine section) C202, C203, (see page 22-24)
C204, G101
Engine wire harness (CVT) (EB) C201 Connector to harness
(transmission section) (see page 22-28)
Harness Harness Location Notes
Code Engine Dashboard Others
Compart (Floor, Door,
ment Trunk, and
Roof)
Floor wire harness (SA) C115, C501, Connector to harness
C502, C503, (see page 22-48)
C504, G601,
G602
Front fog light subharness (Bl) C104 Connector to harness
(Canada model) (see page 22-30)
Hatch wire harness (BC) C107, G801 Connector to harness
(see page 22-58)
IMA motor power cable (IA) T11, T12, Connector to harness
(cargo area branch) T13, T14, G5 (see page 22-54)
IMA motor power cable (IA) T2, T15, T16, Connector to harness
(engine compartment T17 (see page 22-52)
branch)
IPU wire harness (IB) c m , C401, Connector to harness
C402, C403 (see page 22-54)
Left engine compartment (BF) C124, C127, C102, C110, Connector to harness
wire harness C128, T3, T4, C112, C122, (see page 22-32)
T5, G401 Cl 25, C126,
T9, G402,
G403
License subharness (BG) C109 Connector to harness
(see page 22-58)
ODS unit harness (SB) C502, C557 Connector to harness
(see page 22-63)
Passenger's door wire (DB) C123 Connector to harness
harness (see page 22-61)
Passenger's seat wire (SK) C557 Connector to harness
PCU wire harness (IC) C401, C403, Connector to harness
G901 (see page 22-54)
Right engine compartment (BA) C104, G201, C101, C102, Connector to harness
wire harness G202 C103 (see page 22-30)
Roof wire harness (BK) C116 Connector to harness
(see page 22-56)
Seat heater switch (CB) C503 Connector to harness
subharness (see page 22-66)
Solenoid wire harness (EA) C201 Connector to harness
(CVT model) (see page 22-28)
Starter cable (EF) (+ ), T1, T6 Connector to harness:
M/T model (see page
22-16)
CVT model (see page
22-18)
Transmission ground cable (GB) G3, T8 Connector to harness:
M/T model (see page
22-16)
CVT model (see page
22-18)
Torque sensor subharness (JO) C128 Connector to harness
(see page 22-36)
Visor switch subharness (BE) C118 Connector to harness
(see page 22-40)
Connector to Harness Index
Starter Cable (M/T) (EF)

Connector or Terminal Ref' Cavities Location Connects to Notes
(+ ) 4 Left side of engine Battery positive terminal
compartment
T1 3 On the battery Battery terminal fuse
box
T6 2 Middle of engine compartment Starter solenoid
Battery Ground Cable (M/T) (GA)

Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
(-) 8 Left side of engine Battery negative
compartment terminal
G1 7 Left side of engine Body ground, via battery
compartment ground cable
Engine Ground Cable (M/T) iGD)

G2 9 Right side of engine Body ground, via engine
77 1 Right side of engine Engine
compartment
Transmission Ground Cable (M/T) (GB)

G3 6 Left side of engine Body ground, via
compartment transmission ground
cable
T8 5 Left side of engine Transmission housing
compartment
M /T model
(cont'd)
Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)
Starter Cable (CVT) (EF)

(+ ) 4 Left side of engine Battery positive terminal
compartment
T1 3 On the battery Battery terminal fuse
box
T6 2 Middle of engine compartment Starter solenoid
Battery Ground Cable (CVT) (GA)

Connector or Term inal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
( ) 8 Left side of engine Battery negative
compartment terminal
G1 7 Left side of engine Body ground, via battery
Engine Ground Cable (CVT) iGD)

G2 9 Right side of engine Body ground, via engine
11 .1 Right side of engine Engine
compartment
Transmission Ground Cable (CVT) (GB)

G3 5 Left side of engine Body ground, via
compartment transmission ground
cable
T8 6 Left side of engine Transmission housing
compartment
F l
BODY |
CVT model
(cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness (M /T) (EB)

A/F sensor (sensorl) 7 4 Exhaust manifold
Back-up light switch 22 2 Transmission housing
CMP sensor 9 3 Middle of engine
compartment
ECM connector B 18 44 Left of engine
compartment
ECM connector C 19 44 Left of engine
compartment
ECT sensor 1 13 2 Middle of engine
compartment
EGR valve/EGR valve position 34 5 Middle of engine
sensor compartment
EVAP canister purge valve 36 2 Middle of engine
compartment
IMA motor rotor position 15 6 Transmission housing
sensor
Knock sensor 30 1 Middle of engine
compartment
MAF sensor/IAT sensor 20 ' 5 Middle of engine
compartment
MAP sensor 5 3 Middle of engine
compartment
Neutral position switch 21 2 Transmission housing
No.1 ignition coil 1 3 Middle of engine
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
No.1 injector 33 2 Middle of engine
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
Oil pressure switch 29 1 Middle of engine
compartment
Output shaft (countershaft) 16 3 Transmission housing
speed sensor
Reverse lockout solenoid 17 2 Transmission housing
Rocker arm oil control 27 2 Middle of engine
solenoid compartment
M /T model
(cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness (M/T) (EB) cont'd)

Rocker arm oil pressure 26 2 Middle of engine
sensor compartment
Secondary H02S (sensor2) 6 4 Exhaust manifold
Starter 23 1 Transmission housing
Throttle body 10 6 Middle of engine
compartment
C124 12 13 Left of engine Left engine
compartment compartment wire
C202 8 3 Middle of engine CKP sensor subharness
compartment
C203 (Junction connector) 24 24 Middle of engine
compartment
compartment
G101 25 Middle of engine Body ground, via engine
compartment wire harness
CKP Sensor Subharness (M/T) (JA)

CKP sensor 35 3 Under the engine
C202 8 3 Middle of engine Engine wire harness
compartment
M /T model
(cont'd)
Engine W ire Harness (CVT) (engine section) (EB)

A/F sensor (sensorl) 7 4 Exhaust manifold
CMP sensor 9 3 Middle of engine
compartment
ECT sensor 1 13 2 Middle of engine
compartment
EGR valve/EGR valve position 30 5 Middle of engine
sensor compartment
EVAP canister purge valve 32 2 Middle of engine
compartment
IMA motor rotor position 14 6 Middle of engine
sensor compartment
Knock sensor 26 1 Middle of engine
compartment
MAF sensor/IAT sensor 18 5 Middle of engine
compartment
MAP sensor 5 3 Middle of engine
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
Oil pressure switch 25 1 Middle of engine
compartment
PCM connector B 16 44 Left of engine
compartment
PCM connector C 17 44 Left of engine
compartment
Rocker arm oil control 23 2 Middle of engine
solenoid compartment
Rocker arm oil pressure 22 2 Middle of engine
sensor compartment
Secondary H02S (sensor2) 6 4 Exhaust manifold
Starter 19 1 Transmission housing
Throttle body 10 6 Middle of engine
compartment
CVT model
(cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness (CVT) (engine section) (EB) (cont'd)

Cl 27 11 6 Left of engine Left engine
C202 8 3 Middle of engine CKP sensor subharness
compartment
compartment
compartment
G101 21 Middle of engine Body ground, via engine
compartment wire harness
CKP Sensor Subharness (CVT) (JA)

CKP sensor 31 3 Under the engine
202 8 3 Middle of engine Engine wire harness
compartment
CVT model
(cont'd)
Engine W ire Harness (CVT) (transmission section) (EB)

Connector or Terminal ie f Cavities Location Connects to Notes
CVT input shaft (drive pulley) 5 3 Transmission housing
speed sensor
CVT output shaft (driven 1 3 Transmission housing
pulley) speed sensor
Vehicle speed sensor 3 3 Transmission housing
Transmission range switch 2 8 Transmission housing
C201 4 8 On transmission housing Solenoid wire harness
Solenoid Wire Harness (CVT) (EA)

CVT clutch pressure control 7 2 In the transmission
solenoid valve
CVT drive pulley pressure 6 2 In the transmission
CVT driven pulley pressure 8 2 In the transmission
Inhibitor solenoid 9 2 In the transmission
C201 4 7 On transmission housing Engine wire harness
r - 1
BODY
CVT model
SOLENOI D WIRE HARNESS (EA) ENGI NE WIRE HARNESS (EB)
(cont'd)
Right Engine Com partment W ire Harness (BA)

Evaporator temperature 1 2 Under middle of dash
sensor
Outside air temperature 7 2 Behind right side of front
sensor bumper
Right fog light 12 2 Behind right side of front
bumper
Right front impact sensor 14 2 Behind right side of front
bumper
Right front turn signal/side 15 3 Behind right headlight
marker light
Right-front wheel speed 17 2 Right side of engine
sensor compartment
Right headlight (high beam) 5 2 Behind right headlight
Right headlight (low beam) 6 2 Behind right headlight
Under-dash fuse/relay box 3 36 Under left side of dash
connector A (see page 22-70)
VSA modulator-control unit 4 2 Right side of engine
compartment
Washer fluid level switch 11 2 Behind right side of front Canada
bumper models
Windshield/rear window 9 2 Behind right side of front
washer motor bumper
C101 18 4 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-46)
C102 2 13 Under middle of dash Left engine
compartment wire
(see page 22-46)
C104 10 2 Behind right headlight Front fog light Canada
subharness models
G201 8 Behind right side of front Body ground, via right
bumper engine compartment
wire harness
G202 16 Right side of engine Body ground, via right
compartment engine compartment
wire harness
*: With fog lights
Front Fog Light Subharness (Canada models) (Bl1

Right fog light 13 2 Behind right side of front
bumper
C104 10 2 Behind right headlight Right engine
compartment wire
harness
(cont'd)
Left Engine Compartment W ire Harness (BF)

A/C compressor 56 3 Front of engine
compartment
A/C compressor clutch relay 34 4 Left of engine In auxiliary under-hood
compartment relay box A (see page
22-72)
A/C condenser fan motor 2 2 Front of engine
compartment
A/C condenser fan relay 47 4 Front of engine In auxiliary under-hood
compartment relay box B (see page
22-73)
A/C diode A 46 2 Front of engine In auxiliary under-hood
22-73)
A/C diode B 45 2 Front of engine In auxiliary under-hood
22-73)
A/C pressure sensor 57 3 Front of engine
compartment
APP sensor 13 6 Under middle of dash
Brake booster pressure sensor 5 3 Middle of engine
A compartment
Brake booster pressure sensor 4 3 Middle of engine
B compartment
Brake fluid level switch 50 2 Left of engine
compartment
Brake pedal position switch 16 4 Under left side of dash
Clutch pedal position switch A 17 2 Under left side of dash M/T
Clutch pedal position switch B 18 2 Under left side of dash M/T
Clutch pedal position switch C 28 2 Under left side of dash M/T
ECM connector A 37 44 Left of engine M/T
compartment
ECT sensor 2 55 2 Front of engine
compartment
EPS control unit connector A 25 11 Under left side of dash
EPS control unit connector B 26 16 Under left side of dash
EPS motor 8 3 Left of engine
compartment
EPS motor angle sensor 3 8 Left of engine
compartment
Fan control relay 33 5 Left of engine In auxiliary under-hood
22-72)
Fog light relay 12 4 Under middle of dash *
Horn (high)/security horn 41 1 Behind left side of front
bumper
Horn (low) 48 1 Front of engine
compartment
Horn relay 11 4 Under middle of dash
*: With fog lights
m body m
(cont'd)
Left Engine Com partment Wire Harness (BF) (cont'd)

Idle stop switch 29 2 Under left side of dash CVT
Left fog light 42 2 Behind left side of front #
bumper
Left front impact sensor 39 2 Behind left side of front
bumper
Left front turn signal/side 36 3 Behind left headlight
marker light
Left-front wheel speed sensor 30 2 Left of engine
compartment
Left headlight (high beam) 40 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight (low beam) 38 2 Behind left headlight
PCM connector A 37 44 . Left of engine CVT
compartment
PGM-FI main relay 2 32 4 Left of engine In auxiliary under-hood
22-72)
Radiator fan motor 49 2 . Front of engine
compartment
Radiator fan relay 44 4 Front of engine In auxiliary under-hood
22-73)
Security hood switch 1 2 Front of engine
compartment
connector B (see page 22-70)
Windshield wiper motor 14 5 Left of engine
compartment
*: With fog lights
(cont'd)
Left Engine Com partment W ire Harness (BF) (cont'd)

C102 9 13 Under middle of dash Right engine
compartment wire
C110 27 20 Under left side of dash Driver's side wire
C112 24 4 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-40)
(see page 22-40)
124 10 13 Left of engine Engine wire harness
compartment M/T model (see page
22-22)
CVT model (see page
22-26)
125 (Junction connector) 19 12 Under leftside of dash
126 (Junction connector) 21 12 Under left side of dash
127 35 12 Left of engine Engine wire harness (see M/T
compartment page 22-22)
127 35 6 Left of engine Engine wire harness (see CVT
compartment page 22-26)
128 7 6 Left of engine Torque sensor
compartment subharness
T3 53 On battery Battery terminal fuse
box (see page 22-69)
T9 22 Under left side of dash Under-dash fuse/relay
box
G401 43 Behind left side of front Body ground, via left
bumper engine compartment
wire harness
G402 31 Under left side of dash Body ground, via left
engine compartment
wire harness
G403 15 Under left side of dash Body ground, via left
engine compartment
wire harness
Torque Sensor Subharness (JO)

Torque sensor 54 6 Left of engine
compartment
128 6 6 Left of engine Left engine
harness
J ^ odyJ
(cont'd)
C o n n e c t o r t o H a r n e s s I n d e x ( c o n t 'd )
Dashboard Wire Harness (view of driver's side) (BD]

Cable reel 9 10 In steering column
Combination light switch 11 12 In steering column
Driver's airbag inflator 10 4 In steering column
Driver's door unlock relay 4 5 Under left side of dash
Driver's footwell light 24 2 Under left side of dash *
Gauge control module 7 32 Behind gauge
Hatch release actuator relay 3 5 Under left side of dash
Ignition switch 15 7 In steering column
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 14 7 In steering column
Left tweeter 2 2 Left side of dash
Steering angle sensor 12 5 In steering column
Steering lock 13 6 In steering column
connector AA (see page 22-70)
connector AB (see page 22-70)
connector AC (see page 22-70)
connector AD (see page 22-70)
connector AE (see page 22-70)
connector AF (see page 22-70)
connector N (see page 22-70)
connector Q (see page 22-70)
connector R (see page 22-70)
connector T (see page 22-70)
connector Y (see page 22-70)
Wiper/washer switch 8 8 In steering column
*: With footwell light
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS (BD)
VISOR SWITCH SUBHARNESS (BE)

(View of back side)
(cont'd)
Dashboard W ire Harness (view of driver's side) (BD ; (cont'd)

C106 20 12 Under left side of dash Driver's side wire
C112 23 4 Under left side of dash Left engine
compartment wire
C114 19 18 Under left side of dash Driver's door wire
C116 21 13 Under left side of dash Roof wire harness (see *1
page 22-56)
C116 21 2 Under left side of dash Roof wire harness (see #2
page 22-56)
C118 16 24 Under left side of dash Visor switch subharness
122 22 20 Under left side of dash Left engine
compartment wire
G501 1 Under left side of dash Body ground, via
dashboard wire harness
*1: With ambient light
*2: W ithout ambient light
Visor Sw itch Subharness (BE)

3-Mode switch 18 7 Left side of dash
Km/h, mph change switch 6 5 Left side of dash
Power m irror switch 17 13 Left side of dash
VSA OFF switch 5 5 Left side of dash
118 16 24 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness
r - - + i
(cont'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness (view of middle) (BD)

Accessory power socket 20 2 Under middle of dash
Audio-navigation unit 14 24 Middle of dash *1
connector A
connector B
connector C
connector D
Audio-navigation unit 13 14 Middle of dash *1 .
connector E
Audio unit connector A 14 24 Middle of dash *2
Audio unit connector D 9 12 Middle of dash #2
Audio unit connector E 13 14 Middle of dash #2
Auxiliary jack assembly 25 5 Under middle of dash
Climate control unit 4 36 Middle of dash
Console box light 17 2 Middle of dash
Data link connector (DLC) 26 16 Under m i ddle of dash
Front passenger's airbag 8 5 Middle of dash
cutoff indicator
Hazard warning switch 7 5 Middle of dash
Humidity/in-car temperature 27 4 Middle of dash
sensor
SRS unit 23 39 Under middle of dash
Stereo amplifier A 15 20 Middle of dash
Stereo amplifier B 5 12 Middle of dash
TPMS control unit 3 20 Middle of dash *3
USB adapter control unit 16 14 Middle of dash
Yaw rate-acceleration sensor 22 4 Under middle of dash
*1: With navigation
*2: W ithout navigation
*3: With TPMS
(cont'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness (view of middle section (BD) (cont'd)

C113 18 2 Under middle of dash A/C wire harness (see
page 22-67)
C115 21 18 Under middle of dash Floor wire harness (see '11 model
page 22-48) (CVT)
page 22-48) (M/T)
page 22-48)
C117 19 16 Under middle of dash A/C wire harness (see
page 22-67)
119 (Junction connector) 28 12 Middle of dash
G502 1 Middle of dash Body ground, via
G503 6 Middle of dash Body ground, via
G504 24 Under middle of dash Body ground, via
(cont'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness (view of passenger's side) (BD)

Automatic lighting/Sunlight 2 5 Right side of dash *1
sensor
Front passenger's airbag 3 4 Right side of dash
inflator
Glove box light 1 2 Right side of dash
HandsFreeLink control unit 8 28 Under right side of dash *4
Passenger's footwell light 9 2 Under right side of dash *3
Right tweeter 4 2 Right side of dash
Sunlight sensor 2 2 Right side of dash *2
C101 6 4 Under right side of dash Right engine
compartment wire
C103 5 20 Under right side of dash Right engine
compartment wire
C123 7 23 Under right side of dash Passenger's door wire
*1: With auto light
*2: W ithout auto light
*3: With footwell light
*4: With HandsFreeLink system
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS (BD)
(cont'd)
Floor Wire Harness (SA)

Driver's seat belt buckle switch 3 2 Under driver's seat
Driver's seat belt tensioner 24 4 Left rear tray area
Driver's side airbag inflator 2 2 Under driver's seat
Front passenger's seat belt 9 2 Under passenger's seat
buckle switch
Front passenger's seat belt 16 4 Right rear tray area
tensioner
Front passenger's side airbag 10 2 Under passenger's seat
inflator
Fuel pump 20 4 Under floor
Left side impact sensor (first) 25 4 Left side of floor
Left side impact sensor 23 2 Left rear tray area
(second)
Park pin switch/shift lock 22 6 Under center console CVT
solenoid/A/T gear position
indicator panel light
Parking brake switch 21 1 Under center console
Passenger's door switch 12 1 Right center pillar
Right rear speaker 14 2 Right rear tray area
Right rear tray light 13 2 Right rear pillar
Right-rear wheel speed sensor 18 2 Under floor
Right side curtain airbag 15 2 Right rear pillar
inflator
Right side impact sensor (first) 19 4 Right side of floor
Right side impact sensor 17 2 Right rear tray area
(second)
SRS unit 5 39 Under middle of dash
C115 6 18 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness '11 model
(see page 22-44) (CVT)
(see page 22-44) (M/T)
(see page 22-44)
C501 4 2 Under driver's seat Driver's seat position
sensor subharness (see
page 22-62)
C502 8 4 Under passenger's seat ODS unit harness (see '11 model
page 22-63)
C502 8 8 Under passenger's seat ODS unit harness (see '12 model
page 22-63)
C503 7 12 Under center console Seat heater switch With seat
subharness (see page heater
22-66)
C504 1 5 Under driver's seat Driver's seat wire With seat
harness (see page 22-64) heater
G601 11 Right side of floor Body ground, via floor
wire harness
G602 26 Left side of floor Body ground, via floor
wire harness
W ^ t
iff BODY
(cont'd)
Driver's Side W ire Harness (BB)

Cargo area light 8 2 Left side of cargo area
Driver's door switch 3 1 Left center pillar
EVAP canister vent shut valve 17 2 Under floor
FTP sensor 16 3 Under floor
IPU module fan 13 4 Behind right side of
cargo area
Left rear speaker 4 2 Left rear tray area
Left rear taillight/brake 9 6 Behind left side of cargo
light/back-up light/ turn signal area
light/side marker light
Left side curtain airbag inflator 7 2 Left rear pillar
Left-rear wheel speed sensor 18 2 Under floor
Noise condenser 19 2 Left rear tray area
Right rear taillight/brake 11 6 Behind right side of
light/back-up light/ turn signal cargo area
light/side marker light
Subwoofer 10 2 Left side of cargo area
Under-dash fuse/relay box 2 - 49 Under left side of dash Under-dash fuse/relay
connector D (see page 22-70) box
(see page 22-40)
C107 6 12 Left rear tray area Hatch wire harness (see
page 22-58)
C109 14 2 Lower side of tailgate License subharness (see
page 22-58)
C110 21 20 Under left side of dash Left engine
compartment wire
cm 15 20 Behind left side of cargo IPU wire harness (see
area page 22-54)
G701 12 Behind right side of Body ground, via
cargo area driver's side wire
harness
G702 5 Left rear tray area Body ground, via
driver's side wire
harness
G703 20 Under left side of dash Body ground, via
driver's side wire
harness
(cont'd)
IMA Motor Power Cable (engine compartment branch) (IA)

T2 1 Left side of engine Battery terminal fuse Terminal of DC-DC
compartment box (see page 22-69) converter cable
T15 4 Under air cleaner IMA m otor Terminal of U
phase cable
T16 3 Under air cleaner IMA m otor Terminal of V
phase cable
T17 2 Under air cleaner IMA m otor Terminal of W
phase cable
(cont'd)
I MA M otor Power Cable (cargo area branch) (IA)

T11 13 Intelligent power unit DC-DC converter Terminal of
DC-DC converter
cable
T12 8 Intelligent power unit Phase motor current Terminal of U
sensor phase cable
T13 9 Intelligent power unit Phase motor current Terminal of V
sensor phase cable
T14 10 Intelligent power unit Phase motor current Terminal of W
sensor phase cable
G5 11 Intelligent power unit Body ground, via DC-DC
converter cable
I PU Wire Harness (IB)

Junction board 12 12 Intelligent power unit
MCM relay 1 17 4 Intelligent power unit
MCM relay 2 18 4 Intelligent power unit
Cl 11 19 20 Behind left side of Driver's side wire
cargo area harness (see page 22-50)
C401 14 4 Intelligent power unit PCU wire harness
C402 (Junction connector) 15 12 Intelligent power unit
C403 16 28 Intelligent power unit PCU wire harness
PCU Wire Harness (1C)

Motor control module 1 31 Intelligent power unit
connector A
connector B
connector C
DC-DC converter 5 4 Intelligent power unit
MPI module 7 12 Intelligent power unit
Phase motor current 6 9 Intelligent power unit
sensor
C401 14 4 Intelligent power unit IPU wire harness
C403 16 28 Intelligent power unit IPU wire harness
G901 20 Intelligent power unit Body ground, via PCU
wire harness
DC-DC Converter Ground Cable (GC

T18 4 Intelligent power unit DC-DC converter
G4 21 Intelligent power unit Body ground, via DC-DC
converter ground cable
DC-DC CONVERTER GROUND CABLE (GC)
PCU WIRE HARNESS (1C)
U PHASE CABLE
V PHASE CABLE
W PHASE CABLE
IPU WIRE HARNESS (IB)
IM A MOTOR POWER
CABLE (IA)
(cont'd)
Roof Wire Harness (BK)

Driver's vanity m irror light 4- 2 Front of roof
Passenger's vanity m irror light 1 2 Front of roof *<!
Individual map light 3 3 Front of roof
Interior light switch 2 10 Front of roof *2
Interior light switch 2 4 Front of roof *3
Under-dash fuse/relay box 6 8 Under left side of dash Under-dash fuse/relay
connector H (see page 22-70) box
C116 5 13 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness *2
(see page 22-40)
C116 5 2 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness #3
(see page 22-40)
*1: With vanity m irror light
*2: With ambient light
*3: W ithout ambient light
ROOF WIRE HARNESS (BK)
Hatch Wire Harness (BC)

Hatch latch switch 9 2 Middle of hatch
Hatch outer handle switch 8 2 Middle of hatch
Hatch release actuator 10 2 Middle o f hatch
High mount brake light 6 2 Middle o f hatch
Left rear tray light 16 2 Left rear pillar
Lower rear w indow defogger 7 1 Right side o f hatch
\()/
Lower rear w indow defogger 14 1 Left side o f hatch
(+ )
Rear antenna ground 2 1 Left side of hatch
Rear w indow wiper motor 4 Left side o f hatch
Upper rear w indow defogger 5 1 Right side of hatch
t\ \/
Upper rear window defogger 3 1 Left side o f hatch
(+ )
C107 15 12 Left rear tray area Driver's side wire
G801 1 Left rear pillar Body ground, via Hatch
wire harness
License Subharness (BG)

Left license plate light 12 2 Lower side of tailgate
Right license plate light 11 2 Lower side of tailgate
C109 13 2 Lower side of tailgate Driver's side wire
m
bo dy
(cont'd)
Driver's Door Wire Harness (DA)

Connector or Termina l Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
Driver's door courtesy light 9 2 Driver's door
Driver's door lock actuator/knob 1 10 Driver's door
switch
Driver's power window motor 3 6 Driver's door
Driver's door speaker 8 2 Driver's door
Left power m irror 4 13 Driver's door *1
Left power m irror 4 6 Driver's door *2
Power window master switch 2 22 Driver's door
connector F (see page 22-70) box
connector G (see page 22-70) box
114 7 ' 18 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire
harness (see page
22-40)
*1: With power m irror defogger
*2: W ithout power m irror defogger
2
Passenger's Door W ire Harness (DB)
Passenger's door courtesy 6 2 Passenger's door
light
Passenger's door lock 5 10 Passenger's door
actuator/knob switch
Passenger's power w indow 3 2 Passenger's door
motor
Passenger's power w indow 4 8 Passenger's door
switch
Passenger's door speaker 7 2 Passenger's door
Right power m irror 2 13 Passenger's door
Right power m irror 2 6 Passenger's door *2
(see page 22-46)
(cont'd)
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Subharness (SC)

Driver's seat position sensor 1 2 Driver's seat
C501 2 2 Under driver's seat Floor wire harness (see
page 22-48)
DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR

SUBHARNESS (SC)
Inner side front passenger's 3 2 Under passenger's seat
weight sensor
ODS unit 1 18 Left side of passenger's seat
Outer side front passenger's 5 3 Under passenger's seat
weight sensor
C502 2 4 Under passenger's seat Floor wire harness (see '11 model
page 22-48)
C502 2 8 Under passenger's seat Floor wire harness (see '12 model
page 22-48)
C557 4 5 Under passenger's seat Passenger's seat wire With seat
harness (see page 22-65) heater
Driver's Seat Wire Harness (SJ)

Driver's seat cushion heater 4 4 Under driver's seat
Driver's seat heater relay 3 4 Under driver's seat
(high)
Driver's seat heater relay (low) 2 5 Under driver's seat
Driver's seat-back heater 1 2 Under driver's seat
504 5 5 Under driver's seat Floor wire harness (see
page 22-48)
Passenger's Seat Wire Harness (SK)
Passenger's seat cushion 1 4 Under passenger's seat
heater
Passenger's seat heater relay 4 4 Under passenger's seat
(high)
Passenger's seat heater relay 3 5 Under passenger's seat
(low)
C557 2 5 Under passenger's seat ODS unit harness (see
page 22-63)
(cont'd)
Seat Heater Switch Subharness i[CB)

Driver's seat heater switch 3 6 Under center console
Passenger's seat heater switch 2 7 Under center console
C503 1 12 Under center console Floor wire harness (see
page 22-48)
SEAT HEATER SWITCH SUBHARNESS (CB)

A/C Wire Harness (BL)
Air m ix control motor 1 7 Under middle of dash
Blower motor 4 2 Under right side of dash
Mode control motor 2 7 Under middle of dash
Power transistor 5 4 Under middle of dash
Recirculation control motor 3 7 Under right side of dash
C113 6 2 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-44)
C117 7 16 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-44)
A/C WIRE HARNESS (BL)
(cont'd)
Cable Reel Subharness (AA)

Audio remote switch 1 12 Steering wheel
Cable reel 3 20 Steering wheel
Cruise control combination 6 12 Steering wheel
switch
HFL-navigation voice control 9 5 Steering wheel *<!
switch
HFL switch 9 5 Steering wheel #2
Horn switch 8 1 Steering wheel
Multi-information switch 1 6 Steering wheel
Paddle shifter 2 4 Steering wheel CVT
(Downshift switch)
Paddle shifter + 5 4 Steering wheel CVT
(Upshift switch)
T10 4 -> 1 ' Steering wheel
*1: With navigation
4
C o n n e c t o r t o F u s e /R e la y B o x In d e x
Battery Terminal Fuse Box

Socket Ref Terminal Connects to
T1 1 Battery terminal,
Starter
M/T (see page 22-16)
T2 2 DC-DC converter cable (included in the IMA motor power cable) (see page
22-52)
T3 3 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-36)
(cont'd)
C o n n e c t o r t o F u s e / R e la y B o x I n d e x ( c o n t 'd )
Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box

Socket Ref Terminals Connects to
A 10 36 Right engine compartment wire harness
(see page 22-30)
A/F sensor relay 3 4
B 11 36 Left engine compartment wire harness (see
page 22-34)
Blower motor relay 2 4
D 12 49 Driver's side wire harness (see page 22-50)
Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) 7 4
control relay
F 17 12 Driver's door wire harness (see page 22-60)
G 16 6 Driver's door wire harness (see page 22-60)
H 15 8 Roof wire harness (see page 22-56)
Ignition coil relay 5 4
J (optional connector) 14 8 Not used
Lighting relay 1 4 4
Lighting relay 2 19 4
M (MICU service check connector) 13 3
N 20 10 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's
side) (see page 22-38)
PGM-FI main relay 1 6 4
Power window relay 1 4
Q 21 34 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's
R 22 8 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's
Rear window defogger relay 8 4
Starter cut relay 9 4
T (SRS) 30 4 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's
Y 29 16 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's
AA 28 28 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's
AB 24 3 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's
AC 25 2 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's
AD 23 1 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's
AE 27 3 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's
AF (Electrical load detector) 26 3 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's
T9 18 Left engine compartment wire harness (see
page 22-36)
BODY
Auxiliary Under-Hood Relay Box A

A/C compressor clutch relay 1 4 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page
22-32)
Fan control relay 2 5 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page
22-32)
PGM-FI main relay 2 3 4 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page
22-34)
n p .
Auxiliary Under-Hood Relay Box B
A/C condenser fan relay 1 4 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page
22-32)
Radiator fan relay 2 4 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page
22-34)
A/C diode A 3 2 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page
22-32)
A/C diode B 4 2 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page
22-32)
(cont'd)
Under-Dash Relay Holder A

Fog light relay 1 4 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page
22-32)
Horn relay 2 4 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page
22-32)
HOLDER A
Under-Dash Relay Holder B

Driver's door unlock relay 1 5 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see
page 22-38)
Hatch release actuator relay 2 5 Dashboard wire harness (view of driver's side) (see
page 22-38)
HOLDER B
Driver's Seat Relay Holder
Driver's seat heater relay (high) 1 4 Driver's seat wire harness (see page 22-64)
Driver's seat heater relay (low) 2 5 Driver's seat wire harness (see page 22-64)
Passenger's Seat Relay Holder

Passenger's seat heater relay 1 4 Passenger's seat wire harness (see page 22-65)
(high)
Passenger's seat heater relay 2 5 Passenger's seat wire harness (see page 22-65)
(low)
SEAT RELAY HOLDER

F u s e to C o m p o n e n ts In d e x
Battery Terminal Fuse Box (A)

Fuse Amps Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Number
A1 100 A DC-DC converter, Under-dash fuse/relay box fuses No. B1, No. B2, No. B3, No. B9*\
No. B17 (Via power w indow relay), No. B25, No. B26, No. B27, No. B28*2, No. B29,
No. B30, No. B32 (Via lighting relay), No. B33, No. B34 (Via lighting relay), No. B37,
No. B39, No. B40*3,No. B42, No. B43, No. B45, No. B47, No. B4S (Via lighting relay), No.
B51 (Via lighting relay), No. B52, No. B53, No. B57, No. B58, No. B59, and No. B60,
Lighting relay 1, Lighting relay 2, Power window relay
A2 70 A EPS control unit
A3 20 A No. B23 and No. B24 fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box
*1: With fog light
*2: With HID
*3: With Seat heater
NOTE: These fuses are not serviceable; replace the battery terminal fuse box as an assembly.
BATTERY TERM INAL FUSE BOX (A)

Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (B)
Fuse Amps Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Number
B1 15 A Audio-navigation unit*1, Audio unit*2, Cargo area light, Data link connector (DLC),
Driver's vanity m irror light (With vanity m irror light), Passenger's vanity m irror light
(With vanity m irror light), Driver's door courtesy light (Via courtesy light diode),
Passenger's door courtesy light (Via courtesy light diode), Left rear tray light, Right rear
tray light, Gauge control module, Immobilizer-keyless control unit, HandsFreeLink
control unit*3, Individual map light, MICU ( + B BACK UP), Motor control module (MCM)
B2 7.5 A TPMS control unit 4
B3 20 A Power window master switch
B4 Not used
B5 10 A Audio-navigation unit*1, Back-up light switch (M/T), Back-up lights (M/T), ECM (BACK LT)
(M/T), Transmission range switch (CVT), MICU (BACK LT)
B6 10 A SRS unit (VB)
B7 10 A PCM (MISS SOL) (CVT)
B8 7.5 A ODS unit, Front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator, SRS unit (VA)
B9 20 A Fog light relay*5, Fog lights (Via fog light relay)"5
B10 7.5 A A/C compressor clutch relay, Blower motor relay, Climate control unit, Driver's seat
heater relay (HIGH) (Via Driver's seat heater switch)*6, Driver's seat heater relay (LOW)
(Via Driver's seat heater switch)*6, Fan control relay (Via A/C diode B), Optional
connector, Passenger's seat heater relay (HIGH) (Via Passenger's seat heater switch)*6,
Passenger's seat heater relay (LOW) (Via Passenger's seat heater switch)*6, Power
m irror switch, Radiator fan relay (Via A/C diode B), Rear w indow defogger relay,
Recirculation control motor, Seat heater switch indicators*6, 3-mode switch
B11 7.5 A EPS control unit, VSA modulator-control unit (MTR), Yaw rate-acceleration sensor
B12 10 A Brake pedal position switch (M/T), Idle stop switch (CVT), DC-DC converter, EVAP
canister purge valve, Reverse lockout solenoid (M/T), MAF sensor, Secondary H02S
(sensor 2)
B13 20 A Accessory power socket
B14 7.5 A Audio-navigation unit*1, Audio unit*2, Key interlock solenoid, HandsFreeLink control
unit*3, MICU (ACC), Optional connector
B15 7.5 A MICU (IG2 DAY LT)
B16 10 A Rear w indow wiper motor
B17 20 A Power window master switch, Passenger's power w indow motor (Via Passenger's
power window switch)
B18 Not used
B19 Not used
B20 15 A Immobilizer-keyless control unit, ECM/PCM (IG1)
*1: With navigation
*2: W ithout navigation
*4; With TPMS
*5: With fog lights
*6: With seat heater
(cont'd)
F u s e t o C o m p o n e n t s I n d e x ( c o n t 'd )

Fuse Amps Com ponents) or Circuit(s) Protected
Number
B21 15 A MICU (IG1 WASHER MTR)
B22 7.5 A Electrical load detector (ELD), Gauge control module, Motor control module (MCM)
(IG1), Shift lock solenoid (CVT), TPMS control unit*5
B23 10 A MICU (+ B HAZARD) (Via hazard warning switch)
B24 10 A High mount brake light (Via brake pedal position switch), Brake lights (Via brake pedal
position switch), MICU (+ B HORN), ECM/PCM (BKSW) (Via brake pedal position
switch), Low horn (Via horn relay), Horn relay
B25 20 A Stereo amplifier*1
B26 10 A A/F sensor (Via A/F sensor relay), A/F sensor relay, No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse (Via A/F sensor
relay)
B27 20 A MICU ( + B DOOR LOCK)
B28 20 A MICU ( + BH/L MAIN)
B29 10 A MICU ( + B PARKING LT)
B30 30 A Radiator fan motor (Via radiator fan relay)
B31 7.5 A Engine oil level sensor, A/C condenser fan relay (Via A/C diode A)
B32 15 A Right HID unit*2
10 A Right headlight (Low beam)*3
B33 15 A Ignition coil relay, Ignition coils (Ignition coil relay)
B34 10 A Left headlight (High beam)*2, Left headlight (Low beam)*3
B35 7.5 A Passenger's door lock actuator
B36 10 A Driver's door lock actuator
B37 30 A VSA modulator-control unit (FSR + B)
B38 Not used
B39 15 A CKP sensor*4, CMP sensor*4, Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay*4,
Injectors*4, ECM/PCM(IGP)*4, PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN), PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL
PUMP)*4
B40*6 10 A Driver's seat heater (Via driver's seat heater relay), Passenger's seat heater (Via
passenger's seat heater relay)
*1: With stereo amplifier
*2; With HID
*3: W ithout HID
*4: Via PGM-FI main relay 1
*5: With TPMS
*6: With seat heater
Fuse Amps Component(s) or Circult(s) Protected
Number
B41 Not used
B42 7.5 A M otor control module (MCM) (Via MCM relay 1), MCM relay 1, MCM relay 2 (Via MCM
relay 1)
B43 7.5 A A/C compressor clutch (Via A/C compressor clutch relay)
B44 7.5 A Starter cut relay (ST CUT), PCM (STS)
B45 7.5 A Hatch release actuator relay, Hatch release actuator (Via hatch release actuator relay)
B46 Not used
B47 30 A A/C condenser fan m otor (Via A/C condenser fan relay)
B48 15 A Left HID unit*1
10 A Left headlight (High beam)*2
B49 7.5 A Passenger's door lock actuator
B50 Not used
B51 10 A Right headlight (High beam)
B52 15 A ECM/PCM (IG1ETCS) (Via electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay)
B53 15 A IPU module fan (Via MCM relay 2), Motor power inverter module (Via MCM relay 2)
B54 Not used
B55 10 A Left power m irror defogger*3, Right power m irror defogger*3
B56 30 A MICU (IG1FR WIPER)
B57 30 A Blower motor (Via blower motor relay)
B58 30 A VSA modulator-control unit (MR+B)
B59 30 A*4 Upper rear window defogger*5, Lower rear w indow defogger*5, Noise reduction
40 A*3 condenser*5, No. 55 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box*5
B60 (IGN) 50 A Ignition switch
*1: With HID
*2: W ithout HID
*5: Via rear w indow defogger relay
(cont'd)
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX (B)
m oi
C 1I C 113 [~56~[ [ 57] [^8~| | 59 |
C 21C121C20H C26l C32D L383
L zlL n l C21I] C27D C33D C39H
C rU D C l C22D C28H C34I] C 40l 4 4 3 C48] 523
L s l L w l L 2 3 l C29H C35D C413 C451 C49H C53l
C 6U C16D
C241C303 C36D C.42J L46*: C503 C543
C 7DCull C251C313 C37G C431 C 4 7 l C 511D ad
C8 3Ei8g
C 9 X 19*
V 9P
*: Not used
G r o u n d to C o m p o n e n ts In d e x
Ground Component(s) or circuit(s) grounded

G1 Battery
G2 Engine
G3 Transm iss i on housing
G4 DC-DC converter
G5 S hielding between the DC-DC converter and the battery te rm i nal fuse box
G101 CKP sensor (LG1), CMP sensor (LG1), CVT clutch pressure co n tro l solenoid valve*1, CVT drive pulley
pressure co n tro l so le n oid valve*1, CVT d riven pulley pressure control solenoid valve*1, Data link connector
(DLC), EGR valve/EGR valve position sensor, Im m obilizer-keyless control unit, Ig n it i on coils, ECM/PCM
(LG1, LG2, PG1, PG2), Rocker arm oil co n tro l solenoid, Transm ission range sw itch*1, N eutral position
sw itch*2
S hielding between th e IM A m oto r roto r position sensor and the M o to r co ntrol m odule (MCM)
S hielding between th e ECM/PCM and the knock sensor
S hielding between th e ECM/PCM and the secondary H 02S (sensor 2)
G201 Right HID unit*3, Right fro n t side m arker/turn signal light, Right headlight (High beam)*3, Right headlight
(Low beam)*4, Right fo g lig h t (W ith fog light), W indshield w asher m otor, W asher flu id level sw itch (Canada
m odels)
G202 VSA m o d u la to r-co n tro l u n it (FSR GND, MTR GND)
G401 A/C condenser fan m oto r, Fan control relay, Left HID unit*3, Left fro n t side m arker/turn signal lig h t, Left
headlight (High beam)*3, Left headlight (Low beam)*4, W in d sh ie ld w ip e r m otor, Left fog lig h t (W ith fog light)
G402 EPS control u n it
G403 Brake flu id level sw itch, S ecurity hood sw itch, Clutch pedal position sw itch A*2, Clutch pedal p o s i tion
sw itch B *2, Clutch pedal position sw itch C*2
G501 B low er m o to r relay, D river's do o r lock actuator/knob sw itch, D river's d o o r unlock relay, ELD, Gauge control
m odule (PG, SG), Hatch release actuator relay, Interior lig h t sw itch, Km/h, m ph change sw itch, Left pow er
m irro r defogger (W ith p ow er m irro r defogger), Left side tu rn signal light, MICU (PG, SG), Power m irro r
sw itch, Power w in d o w m aster sw itch, VSA OFF sw itch, In d ividual map light, D river's v a n ity m irro r lig h t
(W ith v a n i ty m irro r light), Passenger's v a n ity m irro r lig h t (W ith v a n ity m irro r light), Left rear tra y light, Right
rear tray lig h t
G502 Accessory po w e r socket, Clim ate control unit, Cruise co n tro l com b in a tio n sw itch (Via cable reel), Data link
connector (DLC), Passenger's do o r lock actuator/knob sw itch, Glove box light, Ignition key sw itch, MICU
(PG, SG), Paddle sh ifte r + / (V i a cable reel)*1, Power transistor, Right pow er m irro r d efog g e r (W i th pow er
m i rro r defogger), Right side tu rn signal light, Stereo a m p lifie r (W ith stereo a m plifier), TPMS co n tro l unit
(W ith TPMS), Y aw rate-acceleration sensor
G503 A ud io -na vig a tio n u n it (W ith navigation), A u d io unit (W ith ou t navigation), HandsFreeLink co n tro l unit (With
HandsFreeLink system )
Shielding between th e A u d io -na vig a tio n u n it (W ithout n a vig at i on), A u d io u n it (W ithout n a vig a t i on) and the
Stereo a m p lifie r (W ith stereo am plifier)
G504 SRS u n it (SRS GND 1,2)
G601 D river's seat heater sw itch*5, Front passenger's seat belt buckle sw itch, ODS unit, Park pin sw itch*1,
Passenger's seat heater*5, Passenger's seat heater relay (HIGH)*5, Passenger's seat heater relay (LOW)*5,
Passenger's seat heater relay (LOW)*5, Passenger's seat heater sw itch*5
G602 D river's seat belt buckle sw itch, Driver's seat heater*5, D river's seat heater relay (HIGH)*5, D river's seat
heater relay (LOW)*5, Passenger's seat heater relay (LOW)*5, Driver's seat position sensor, Fuel pum p
G701 IPU m odule fan, Left license plate light, Right back-up light, Right brake lig h t/taillig ht, Right license plate
light, Right rear side m arker light, Right rear turn signal lig h t
G702 Left back-up light, Left brake l i g h t/ta illigh t, Left rear side m arker light, Left rear tu rn signal light, Noise
condenser
G703 Shielding between the ECM/PCM and the M o to r control m odule (MCM)
G801 Hatch latch sw itch, Hatch outer handle sw itch, Hatch release actuator, High m o u n t brake light, Lower rear
w in d o w defogger, Rear antenna ground, Rear w in d o w w ip e r m otor, Upper rear w in d o w d e fogger
G901 M o to r control m odule (MCM), MPI m odule
*1: CVT m odel
* 2 : M /T m odel
*3: W ith HID
*4: W ith o u t HID
*5: W ith seat heater
U n d e r-D a s h F u s e /R e la y B o x
R e m o v a l a n d I n s t a lla t io n
USA models 8. Using the relay puller, carefully remove the relays by
prying under the base of the relay (see page 22-92).
NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers w ill damage the relays,
SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and
which could cause the engine to stall or not start or
cause other functions to fail.
doing repairs or servicing.
Removal
NOTE: The imoes unit is built into the MICU which is part
of the under-dash fuse/relay box. You must register the
imoes unit when replacing the under-dash fuse/relay
box, or the engine w ill not start.
2. Remove the fuse lid panel (see page 20-85), and
remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page
20-85).
3. Disconnect the connectors from the front side of the
under-dash fuse/relay box (A).
4. Release the lock on the under-dash relay holder B (B),

then slide it forward to release it from the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
5. Remove the mounting bolts (C) and the terminal (D).
6. Release the lock (E), and pull the fuse/relay box away
from the body.
7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the
Installation Canada models
9. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the SRS components are located in this area. Review the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and
under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before
removal. doing repairs or servicing.
10. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of Removal
removal.
NOTE: The imoes unit is built into the MICU which is part
11. Do the 12 volt battery terminal reconnection of the under-dash fuse/relay box. You must register the
procedure (see page 22-87). imoes unit when replacing the under-dash fuse/relay
box, or the engine w ill not start.
12. If the under-dash fuse/relay box is being replaced, do
the following with the HDS. 1. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection
-1. Have a all registered keys and the ECM/PCM code.
-2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 2. Remove the fuse lid panel (see page 20-85), and
-3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page
-4. Select IMMOBI from the System Selection Menu, 20-85).
then select IMMOBILIZER SETUP. 3. Disconnect the connectors from the front side of the
-5. Select REPLACE MPCS/MICU/IMOES. under-dash fuse/relay box (A).
-6. Do the registration according to the instructions on
the HDS screen.
13. Confirm that all systems work properly.
4. Release the lock on the under-dash relay holder B (B),

then slide it forward to release it from the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
5. Remove the nuts (C), remove the stud bolts (D) using
double nuts (E), then remove the terminal (F).
6. Release the lock (G), and pull the fuse/relay box away
from the body.
7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the
(cont'd)
U n d e r-D a s h F u s e /R e la y B o x
R e m o v a l a n d I n s t a ll a t i o n ( c o n t 'd )
8. Using the relay puller, carefully remove the relays by Installation

prying under the base of the relay (see page 22-92).
9. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers w ill damage the relays, under-dash fuse/relay box (A), then install the
which could cause the engine to stall or not start or under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of
cause other functions to fail. removal.
10. Remove the double nuts from stud bolts (B), then
install the nuts (C) to the stud bolts.
NOTE: Apply high strength type liquid thread lock
(Loctite 277 or equivalent) to the stud bolts before
reinstallation.
removal.
13. If the under-dash fuse/relay box is being replaced, do
the following with the HDS.
-1. Have a all registered keys and the ECM/PCM code.
-2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
-3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
-4. Select IMMOBI from the System Selection Menu,
then select IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
-5. Select REPLACE MPCS/MICU/IMOES.
-6. Do the registration according to the instructions on
the HDS screen.
14. Confirm that all systems work properly.
1 2 V o lt B a t te r y T e s t
it W A R N IN Using the ED-18 Battery Tester

A battery can explode if you do not follow the proper NOTE: For set up, customization, and other available
procedure, causing serious injury to anyone nearby. features, refer to the ED-18 user's manual.
Follow all procedures carefully and keep sparks and
open flames away from the battery. 1. Connect the leads to the positive and negative
terminal of the battery.
Special Tools Required 2. Use the arrow keys to select the battery test, then
Honda Electrical System Analyzer (ED-18 Battery press ENTER, then follow the prompts.
Tester): Model Number INB17191840* NOTE:
Honda Battery Diagnostic Station (GR8): Model Number Make sure to enter the correct cold cranking
MTRGR81100P* ampere (CCA) rating of the battery. You can find the
CCA printed on the label on the top of the battery. If
*To order, go to the Honda Tool and Equipment catalog the CCA rating is not entered correctly, the test
on the iN, or call 888-424-6857 result w ill not be accurate.
Software Version Make sure you select FLOODED for the battery type.
3. Here are the four possible battery conditions:
Make sure you have the latest software for the ED-18 and
GR8. Good-Battery: The battery has at least 60 percent of
its charge and requires no action.
To check the version on the ED-18, do this: GR8 Diagnostic Needed: The battery voltage is
Press the POWER button. below 60 percent of its state-of-charge, and the
Read the version number on the screen. It should condition of the battery is unknown. Use the GR8 to
appear for about 3 seconds. charge the battery and properly diagnose it.
Or you can select: Language> Options> lnfo> Version. Replace Battery: The battery condition is poor.
The version number w ill appear near the top of the Replace it.
screen. Bad Cell: There is an internal problem with the
battery. Replace it.
Write down the version number, then call Midtronics at
800-776-1995 to verify you have the latest software
version.
To check the version on the GR8, do this:
9 Press the POWER button.
Read the version number on the screen. It should

appear for about 5 seconds.
Or from the Main Menu, select: Options> lnfo>
I Version. The version number will appear on the
screen.
Write down the version number, then call Midtronics at
800-776-1995 to verify you have the latest software
version.
1 2 V o l t B a t t e r y T e s t ( c o n t 'd ) 1 2 V o lt B a t t e r y T e r m in a l
D is c o n n e c t io n a n d R e c o n n e c t io n
Using the GR8 Battery Diagnostic Station Disconnection

NOTE: NOTE: Some systems store data in memory that is lost
For set up, customization, and other available when the battery is disconnected. Do the following
features, refer to the GR8 user's manual. procedures before disconnecting the battery.
On the GR8, you can select two modes: DEALER 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio
INVENTORY or CUSTOMER VEHICLE. system or the audio-navigation unit.
- DEALER INVENTORY: Use this mode for vehicles in
dealer inventory. The GR8 charges the battery to 2. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).
80% of its state-of-charge. If the battery condition is 3. Disconnect and isolate the negative cable from the
OK, the GR8 states the battery is GOOD. If you leave battery.
the GR8 attached to the battery, it changes to Top
Off mode, and continues to charge the battery until NOTE: Always disconnect the negative battery cable
it is at 100% of its state-of-charge. from the battery first.
- CUSTOMER VEHICLE: In order to give a waiting 4. Disconnect the positive cable from the battery.
customer quicker service, the GR8 charges the
battery to 60% of its state-of-charge. If the battery
condition is OK, the GR8 states the battery is GOOD.
If you leave the GR8 attached to the battery, it
changes to Top Off mode, and continues to charge
the battery until it is at 100% of its state-of-charge.
1. Connect the leads to the positive and negative
terminal of the battery.
2. Use the arrow keys to select Diagnostic, and follow
the prompts.
NOTE:
Make sure to enter the correct cold cranking
ampere (CCA) rating of the battery. You can find the
CCA printed on the label on the top of the battery. If
the CCA rating is not entered correctly, the test
result w ill not be accurate.
Make sure you select FLOODED for the battery type.
3. Here are the three possible battery conditions:
Good-Battery: The battery state of health is good
and state of charge is at least 60%.
Replace Battery: The battery condition is poor.
Replace it.
Bad Cell: There is a problem with the battery.
Replace it.
1 2 V o lt B a tte r y R e m o v a l a n d
I n s t a lla t io n
Reconnection NOTE: The 12 volt battery terminal

disconnection/reconnection (see page 22-86) procedure
NOTE: Some systems store data in memory that is lost must be done before and after doing this procedure.
when the battery is disconnected. Do the following Some systems store data in memory that is lost when
procedures to restore the system back to normal the battery disconnected.
operation.
Removal
1. Clean the battery terminals.
1. Do the 12 volt battery term inal disconnection
2. Test the battery (see page 22-85).
3. Reconnect the positive cable (A) to the battery (B) first,
2. Remove the two nuts (A) securing the battery setting
then reconnect the negative cable (C) to the battery.
plate (B), then remove the battery setting plate and
NOTE: Always connect the positive cable to the the battery (C).
battery first.
2.95.9 N*m
(0.300.60 kgfm, 2.1 -4 .4 Ibfft)
4. Apply multipurpose grease to the terminals to
prevent corrosion.
5. Install the terminal cover (D).
6. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system or
audio-navigation unit.
7. Set the clock (for vehicles w ithout navigation).
(cont'd)
12 V o lt B a tte r y R e m o v a l a n d P a r a s itic D r a w C h e c k
I n s t a ll a t i o n ( c o n t 'd )
Installation Special Tools Required
1. Install the battery (A), then install the battery setting LH41 AC/DC low current clamp meter, FLULH41A*
plate (B). *: Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, 888-424-6857
2.95.9 N*m
1. Make sure the battery is fully charged, and that all the
vehicle's electrical accessories are turned off.
2. Open the hood.
3. Disconnect the security hood switch 2P connector to
allow the security system to arm itself with the hood
open.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the
ignition key from the ignition switch.
6. Get out of the vehicle, and close all the doors.
7. Lock the doors with the keyless transmitter.
8. Make sure the map lights are turned off and the
security alarm system is armed by confirming that the
security indicator is flashing.
9. Wait at least 20 minutes.
10. Attach the LH41 AC/DC low current clamp meter (A) to
the battery ground cable (B). Follow the equipment
manufacturer's instructions, then measure the
parasitic draw.
NOTE: If you are using a digital multimeter, g oto step
11.
2. Tighten the two nuts (C) equally until the battery is
stable.
NOTE: Do not deform the battery hold down plate by
over-tightening the nuts.
NOTE: Make sure the battery is installed correctly, and
the positive terminal and the negative terminal are
not connected in reverse.
Is the parasitic draw 30 mA or less?

YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 11.
IF * 1
|j BODY j
11. Check the following items before measuring: 14. Slide the negative terminal of the battery ground
The multimeter dial is set to the DCA (direct current cable upwards from the battery negative terminal
amps) range. post to avoid miseonnection. Then connect the black
The red test probe is plugged into the red A (Amps) () test lead (C) to the battery negative terminal post.
jack, and the black test probe is plugged into the 15. Disconnect the negative terminal (A) of the battery
COM jack. ground cable from the battery negative terminal.
To avoid blowing an input fuse, start by setting the
range above 10 A.
12. Loosen the nut (A) of the battery negative terminal.
NOTE: Be careful not to disconnect the battery ground
cable terminal from the battery negative terminal.
16. Measure the parasitic draw.

YES-The system is normal at this tim e.B
NO-Go to step 17.
13. Connect the red (+ ) test lead (A) to the negative 17. Check if there are any aftermarket electrical
terminal (B) of the battery ground cable. accessories installed on the vehicle.
Are there any aftermarket electrical accessories
installed?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 20.
18. Make sure that the aftermarket electrical accessories
have been properly installed.
Are the aftermarket electrical accessories installed
correctly?
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Repair, reinstall, or remove the aftermarket
accessories, then recheck.B
P a r a s it ic D r a w C h e c k ( c o n t 'd )
19. Disconnect the aftermarket electrical accessories one 22. Install the No. B1 (15 A) fuse to the under-dash
at a time, then measure the parasitic draw. fuse/relay box, then measure the parasitic draw.
-1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and then back to -1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and then back to
LOCK (0). LOCK (0).
-2. Get out of the vehicle and close all doors. -2. Get out of the vehicle and close all doors.
-3. Wait at least 40 seconds. -3. W ait at least 40 seconds.
-4. Measure the parasitic draw. -4. Measure the parasitic draw.
Is the parasitic draw 30 mA or less? Is the parasitic draw 30 mA or less?
YES-Replace or repair the aftermarket electrical YES-Disconnect the control units from the B-CAN
accessory that reduced the parasitic draw to 30 mA or circuit one at a time, perform steps 14 above, then
less when disconnected. measure the parasitic draw. Do the input test for the
control unit that reduced the parasitic draw to 30 mA
NO-Go to step 20.
or less when disconnected.
20. Remove the No. B1 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash
NO-Disconnect the control units from the
fuse/relay box, then measure the parasitic draw.
No. B1 (15 A) fuse circuit one at a time, perform steps
Is the parasitic draw 19 mA or less? 14 above, then measure the parasitic draw. Replace
the control unit that reduced the parasitic draw to
YES-Go to step 21. 30 mA or less when disconnected.
NO-Go to step 23. 23. Remove the No. B60 (IGN) (50 A) fuse i n the
21. Connect immobiIizer-keyless control unit 7P under-dash fuse/relay box, then measure the parasitic
connector terminal No. 4 and body ground w ith a draw.
jum per wire. -1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and then back to
LOCK (0).
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UN IT 7P-CONNECTOR -2. Get out of the vehicle and close all doors.
-3. Wait at least 40 seconds.
-4. Measure the parasitic draw.
_SZZ_ Is the parasitic draw 30 mA or less?
B-CAN (GRN)
YES-Go to step 24.
JUMPER WIRE NO-Remove the fuses from the fuse box one at a
time, perform steps 1 4 above then, measure the
parasitic draw in order to isolate the circuit which
contains the fault. If all circuit are OK, check the starter
W ire side o f fem ale term inals circuits and do the starter performance test (see page
4 -9 ).
24. Install the No. No. B60 (IGN) (50 A) fuse in the
25. Disconnect the ignition switch 7P connector, then
measure the parasitic draw.
YES-Replace the ignition switch (see page 22-100).
NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the
No. B60 (IGN) (50 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay
box and ignition switch.
S y m p to m T r o u b le s h o o tin g
Low or Dead Battery 4. Lock the doors with the remote transmitter LOCK
button. Make sure the security alarm system arms by
NOTE: A battery might be discharged under these confirming that the security indicator is flashing
conditions: slowly, about once every 3 seconds.
Driving a vehicle 6 miles (10 km) or less per day.
Is the security alarm system armed?
Leaving a vehicle parked w ithout removing the
ignition key from the ignition switch. YES-Go to step 5.
Leaving the vehicle idling high electrical loads such as
NO-Go to the symptom troubleshooting for the
headlight, seat heaters, wipers, rear window
security alarm system (see page 22-160).
defogger, etc.
Parking the vehicle with the hood unlatched prevents 5. Check the following items with the ignition key
the security system from arming, which causes removed from the ignition switch:
excessive parasitic draw. The brake lights are o ff when the brake pedal is not
pressed.
1. Check the battery (see page 22-85). Recharge or
replace the battery (see page 22-87) if necessary. The courtesy lights are off with all doors closed.
The cargo area light is off with the hatch closed.
2. Start the engine, and check the charging system
The radiator and condenser fans are not running.
indicator.
The audio unit (including navigation) is off.
Does the charging system indicator go off with the There is no operating sound from the VSA
engine running? modulator-control unit.
YES-Go to step 3. The rear window defogger and the power m irror
defoggers are off.
NO-Do the charging system indicator stays on
symptom troubleshooting (see page 12-200). Are all of the check items OK?
3. Check the following items: YES-Check the parasitic draw (see page 2 2-88 ).
m The hazard warning switch is off. NO-Troubleshoot and repair the affected c irc u its .!
The individual map light and interior light switches
are off.
All of the doors, hood, and hatch are closed.
The brake pedal is not pressed.
Are all of the check items OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Turn off the applicable switch, and check the
parasitic draw (see page 22-88).B
P o w e r R e la y T e s t
Specia l Tools Required Normally-Open Four-Terminal Type

- Relay Puller 07AAC-000A1 AO or 07AAC-000A2A1
Relay Socket Extension (4 Pin) 07AGK-000A1A0 Checkfor continuity between the terminals:
Relay Socket Extension (5 Pin) 07AGK-000A2AO There should be continuity between terminals No. 1
and No. 2 when battery power is connected to
Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the terminal No. 3, and body ground is connected to
test listed for it. terminal No. 4.
Relay Test There should be no continuity between terminals
A/C compressor clutch relay Normally-open No. 1 and No. 2 when power is disconnected.
A/C condenser fan relay four-terminal
A/F sensor relay type
Blower motor relay Resistance type Diode type
Electronic throttle control system
(ETCS) control relay
3 2
Fog light relay*
Horn relay* r i in n
Ignition coil relay
Lighting relay 1
Lighting relay 2 u i t49 L 1
MCM relay 1*
MCM relay 2*
PGM-FI main relay 1
PGM-FI main relay 2
Power window relay
Radiator fan relay
Rear window defogger relay
Starter cut relay
Driver's seat heater relay (high)*
Passenger's seat heater relay
(high)*
Driver's door unlock relay* Five-terminal
Fan control relay type
Driver's seat heater relay (low)*
Passenger's seat heater relay
(low)*
Hatch release actuator relay*
*: Use the relay puller to carefully remove the relay from
the relay box. Do not use pliers. Pliers w ill damage the
relay.
Five-Terminal Type
Check for continuity between the terminals:
There should be continuity between terminals No. 1
and No. 2 when battery power is connected to
terminal No. 3, and body ground is connected to
terminal No. 5.
and No. 4 when power is disconnected.

1 3

Test, page 14-199

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID (CVT)

IGNITIONSWITCH
UNDER-DASH
BATTERYTERMINALFUSEBOX FUSE/RELAYBOX
BATTERY No. B60(IGN)
No. A1(100A) {50A)
-ctxjo ctxjo-

UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAYBOX
J7 TRANSMISSION
RANGESWITCH
Sy (Closed: PARKPIN
|3 inPposition) SWITCH
(Open:
inPposition)
i
K e y In te r lo c k S y s te m C ir c u it T r o u b le s h o o t in g
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 10. Check for continuity between steering lock 6P
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
doing repairs or servicing. STEERI NG LOCK 6P CONNECTOR
1. Check the A/T system DTCs with the HDS.
Are DTCs P0705 and/or P0706 indicated? r ?
6 5 4 3 2 1
YES-Go to DTC troubleshooting P0705 (see page
KEY LOCK SOL (LT BLU)
14-89), P0706 (see page 14-90).!
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Move the shift lever to P and set the parking brake.
3. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-96). W ire side of female term inals
4. Disconnect the steering lock 6P connector. Is there continuity?

5. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I). YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
between the key interlock solenoid and the MICU.IS
6. Check if the ignition switch can be turned to LOCK (0).
NO-Go to step 11.
Can the ignition switch be turned to LOCK (0)?
11. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
YES-Go to step 7.
box connector Q (34P) terminal No. 1 and steering
NO-Replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock lock 6P connector terminal No. 4
(see page 17-17).
7. Check the No. B14 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash CONNECTOR Q (34P)
fuse/relay box. W i re side of fem ale term inals
Is the fuse OK? KEY LOCK SOL (LTBLU)

P ...ri... ...r1.i i.ri.. ...ri_ _ jn
YES-Go to step 8. 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
NO-Replace the fuse. If the fuse blows again, repair a
short to ground in the No. B14 (7.5A) fuse circuit.
8. Make sure the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
9. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q
(34P).
KEY LOCK SOL
(LT BLU)
6 5 4 3 2 1
STEERING LOCK 6P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire
between the key interlock solenoid and the MICU.B
12. Move the shift lever to P.
p BODY

9 H1
14. Disconnect the park pin switch 2P connector, and 18. Check the A/T system Data List with the HDS.
disconnect under-dash fusel/relay box connector Y
Is the transmission range switch indicated ON when the
(16P).
shift lever is in P, and is the transmission range switch
15. Do the park pin switch test (see page 22-99). indicated OFF when the shift lever is shifted to any
position other than P?
Is switch OK?
YES-Go to step 20.
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 19.
NO-Check the park pin switch installation. If the
switch installation is OK, replace the switch (see page 19. Do the transmission range switch test (see page
14-225) and retest. 14-199).
16. Check for continuity between park pin switch 2P Is switch OK?
YES-Go to step 20.
PARK PIN SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR

NO-Check the transmission range switch installation.
If the switch installation is OK, replace the
transmission range switch (see page 14-200) and
2 1 retest .
P-PIN SW (GRN) 20. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector B
(36P).
connector.
between park pin switch 2P connector terminal No. 2
and the MICU.
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Check for continuity between park pin switch 2P
PARK PIN SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 18.
between the park pin switch and body ground
(G 60 1).l
(cont'd)
K e y In te r lo c k S y s te m C ir c u it T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ( c o n t 'd )
22. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay 23. Check for continuity between transmission range
box connector B (36P) terminal No. 14 and switch 8P connector term inal No. 3 and body ground.
transmission range switch 8P connectorterminal
No. 7. T RANSM I SSION RANGE SWITCH 8P CONNECTOR
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX GND (BRN)

CONNECTOR B (36P)
W ire s i de o f fem ale te rm in a l s 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5
W ire side of fem ale te rm i nals
YES-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/relay
box.B
4 3 2 1 USA models (see page 22-82)
8 7 6 5 Canada models (se ppgp
JATPP (BLU/BLK) NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire
TRANSM ISSION RANGE SWITCH 8P CONNECTOR between the transmission range switch and body
W ire side o f fem ale term inals ground (G101).H
YES-Go to step 23.
between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
transmission range s w itc h .!
Key Interlock Solenoid Test Park Pin Switch Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 1. Remove the center console (see page 20-79).
2. Disconnect the park pin switch 2P connector (A).
doing repairs or servicing.
2. Disconnect the steering lock 6P connector (A).
q---- p
6 5 4 3 2 1
3. Check for continuity between connector terminals No.
1 and No. 2.
There should be continuity when the shift lever
button is pressed or the shift lever is moved out of
P.
3. Insert the ignition key in the key cylinder, then turn the
There should be no continuity when the shift the
ignition key to ACCESSORY (I).
shift lever is moved to P and the shift lever button is
4. Connect the positive battery terminal to steering lock released.
assembly connector terminal No. 3, and connect the
4. If the continuity is not as specified, check the shift
negative battery terminal to terminal No. 4. Check that
cable adjustment (see page 14-193). If the cable
the ignition key cannot be turned to LOCK (0). Release
adjustment is OK, go to step 5.
the battery terminals, and check that the key can be
turned to the LOCK (0) position and removed from the If the continuity is not as specified, replace the park
cylinder. pin switch (see page 14-225).
5. If the key interlock solenoid works improperly, replace 5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
the ignition key cylinder/steering lock (see page
17-17).
Ignition Switch Test Ignition Switch Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS components are located in this area. Review the
SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and SRS component locations (see page24-1 H a n d
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before
doing repairs or servicing. doing repairs or servicing.
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-96). 2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-96).
3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the ignition 3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the ignition
switch (B). switch (B).
4. Remove the two screws and the ignition switch.

3 2 1
7 6 5 4

switch position according to the table.
5. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition

switch (see page 22-100).
MICU GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

(Has a built-in under-dash fuse/relay box) Input Test, page 22-347
Input Test, page 22-141 Replacement, page 22-354
Removal and installation CLI MATE CONTROL UNIT
-USA models, page 22-82
-Canada models, page 22-83
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT

(Has a built-in receiver)
Symptom Troubleshooting, page 22-193
Key Registration, page 22-202
Input Test, page 22-199
Troubleshooting CAN Circuit Related Problems

NOTE: Check the ECM/PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot ECM/PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication
errors first.
Using the HDS (Preferred method)
Connect the HDS to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
There are two ways to read B-CAN code with the HDS:
First method: On the HDS, select BODY ELECTRICAL, then select the subsystem that relates to the problem (for
example: door locks, keyless, security, etc.), and then last, select the DTCs.
Second method: Ground the SCS circuit with the HDS, then read the DTCs displayed in the multi-information display
(MID) in the gauge assembly, then go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-126).
Using the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 (Use only if the HDS is unavailable)
1. Checkfor communication circuit problems using the B-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode 1 (see page 22-130).
2. Check for DTCs.
3. If there are DTCs stored, sort them, and then troubleshoot the DTCs in this order.
-1. Battery voltage DTCs
-2. Internal error DTCs
-3. Loss of communication DTCs
NOTE: If DTC B1000 is stored, troubleshoot DTC B1000 first (see page 22-135).
-4. Signal error DTCs
4. If no DTCs are retrieved, use the B-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode 2 to check all inputs related to the failure (see
page 22-130).
How to Display DTCs on the MID-of the Gauge Control Module
Enter the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 (see page 22-130). While in Test Mode 1, the DTCs which have been
detected and stored individually by various B-CAN (Body-Controller Area Network) units are shown one by one on the
multi-information display when communication between the MICU and the gauge control module is normal. To scroll
through the DTCs, press the SELECT/RESET knob.
DTC SERVICE
DTC detected (the four digits after the
letter "B" represent the DTC)
PA 50 Control Unit I .D. Number (the two digits after the letters
DTCB1 152 "PA" represent the control unit number)
No DTCs detected
All DTCs have been displayed
The control unit that has stored the code can be identified by the number shown after the letters "PA on the
multi-information display (MID).
Control Unit Control Unit

I.D. Number
MICU 10
Gauge control module 50
Climate control unit 51
HandsFreeLink control unit 94
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 96
How to Clear DTCs

1. Enter the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 (see page 22-130).
2. While in Test Mode 1, press and hold down the SELECT/RESET knob for at least 10 seconds to clear the DTCs.
Loss of Communication DTC Cross-Reference Chart

When an ECU on the CAN circuit is unable to communicate with other ECUs on the CAN circuit, the other control units
set loss of communication DTCs. Use this chart to find the control unit that is not communicating with the other control
units on the CAN circuit.
1. Find the Transmitting Control Unit that is in the same row as all of the loss of communication DTCs retrieved.
2. Do the input test for the transmitting control unit.
BUS-OFF and Internal E r r o r Codes

DTC type Related Unit
M IC U Gauge Control Climate Control Immobilizer- HandsFreeLink
Module Unit Keyless Control Control Unit
Unit
BUS-OFF B1000 U1280 B1200 B190Q U1280
ECU (EEPROM) Error B1002 B1152 B1902
Transmitting Message Receiving Unit/Loss of Communication DTC

Control Unit M IC U Gauge Control Climate Control Immobilizer- HandsFreeLink
Module U n it Keyless Control Control Unit
Unit
MICU WIPSW B2969
MICU U1281
DRLOCKSW B1905
Gauge Control VSP/NE B1011 B1205
Module A/T B1906
ENGTEMP B1206
ILLUMI B1207
ECM/PCM ENG U0100
VSA VSA/ABS U0122
Modulator-
Control Unit
EPS Control EPS U0131
Unit
Motor Control BATT U0111
Module (MCM)
SRS unit SRS U0151
TPMS control TPMS U0127
unit
NOTE: Record all DTCs, and sort them by DTC type using the following DTC troubleshooting indexes, then troubleshoot
the DTC(s) in this order:
Battery voltage DTCs
Internal error DTCs
Loss of communication DTCs (beginning with the lowest number first; for example, if B1011 and B1028 are retrieved,
troubleshoot B1011 first).
Signal error DTCs
MICU
DTC - Description DTC type Page
B1000 Communication circuit error (BUS-OFF) Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
communication (see page 22-135)
B1002 MICU internal error (EEPROM error) Internal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-136)
B1011 MICU lost communication with gauge control module Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
(VSP/NE message) communication (see page 22-137)
B1028 Rear wiper motor (Park) signal error Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-295)
B1036 IG1 Power supply circuit malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-138)
B1077 Windshield wiper motor (Park) signal error Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-297)
B1078 Daytime running l ight for Canada circuit malfunction Bulb failure ; DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-220)
B1079 Daytime running l ight for USA circuit malfunction Bulb failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-220)
B1127 Driver's door key cylinder switch input circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
malfunction (Simultaneous input of lock and unlock (see page 22-152)
signal)
B1128- Driver's door remote switch input circuit malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(Simultaneous input of lock and unlock signal) (see page 22-153)
B1129 Driver's door knob switch input circuit malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(Simultaneous input of lock and unlock signal) (see page 22-154)
B1275 Headlight switch OFF position circuit malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-222)
B1276 Headlight switch PARKING position circuit malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-222)
B1277 Headlight switch AUTO position circuit malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-222)
B1278 Headlight switch ON position circuit malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-222)
B1279 Dimmer switch circuit malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-224)
B1280 Turn signal switch circuit malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-252)
B1281 Front wiper MIST position circuit malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-299)
B1282 Front wiper INT (AUTO) position circuit malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-299)
B1283 Front wiper LOW position circuit malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-299)
B1284 Front wiper HIGH position circuit malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-299)
(cont'd)
MICU (cont'd)
DTC Description DTC type Page
B1575 Auto light sensor circuit malfunction Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-226)
Gauge Control M odule

B1152 Gauge control module internal (EEPROM) error Internal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-333)
B1175 Fuel level sensor (Fuel gauge sending unit) circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
malfunction (see page 22-333)
B1176 Fuel level sensor (Fuel gauge sending unit) circuit short Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-334)
U0029 F-CAN communication line error (BUS OFF) Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
U0100 Gauge control module lost communication with Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
ECM/PCM communication (see page 22-337)
U0111 Gauge control module lost communication with motor Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
control module (BATT message) communication (see page 22-338)
U0122 Gauge control module lost communication with VSA Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
modulator-control unit (VSA message) communication (see page 22-339)
U0127 Gauge control module lost communication with the Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
TPMS control unit (TPMS message) communication (see page 22-340)
U0131 Gauge control module lost communication with EPS Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
unit (EPS message) communication (see page 22-341)
U0151 Gauge control module lost communication with SRS Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
unit (SRS message) communication (see page 22-342)
U1280 Communication bus line error (BUS-OFF) Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
U 1.281 Lost communication with MICU (MICU frame) Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit
B1900 Communication circuit error (BUS-OFF) Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
B1901 Immobilizer unit internal error (CPU error) Internal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-188)
B1902 Immobilizer uni t internal error (EEPROM error) Internal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-188)
B1905 Immobil izer unit lost communication with MICU (door Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
lock switch message) communication (see page 22-188)
B1906 Immobilizer unit lost communication with gauge control Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
module (A/T message) communication (see page 22-189)
HandsFreeLink Control Unit

B1775 Microphone input/output shorted to power Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(with navigation) (see page 23-259)
Microphone input/output shorted to power Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(without navigation) (see page 23-260)
B1776 Microphone input/output shorted to ground or open Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
Microphone input/output shorted to ground or open Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1779 HandsFreeLink steering wheel switch failure Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
HandsFreeLink steering wheel switch failure Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1780 HandsFreeLink steering wheel switch line short Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
HandsFreeLink steering whee l switch line short Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1792 HandsFreeLink control module error Internal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 23-270)
U1280 Communication bus line error (BUS-OFF) Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
(cont'd)
Climate Control Unit

DTC Detection Item or Symptom DTC type Page
B1200 Communication bus line error (BUS-OFF) Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
B1205 Climate control unit lost communication with gauge Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
control module (VSP/NE message ) communication (see page 21-34)
control module (coolant temp message ) communication (see page 21-34)
control module (illumination message) communication (see page 21-34)
B1225 An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-36)
B1226 A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-37)
B1227 An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-38)
B1228 A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-39)
B1229 An open in the sunlight sensor circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-40)
B1230 A short in the sunlight sensor circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-42)
B1231 An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-43)
B1232 A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-44)
B1233 An open in the air mix control motor circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-45)
B1234 A short in the air mix control motor circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-46)
B1235 A problem in the air mix control motor circuit, linkage, Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
door, or motor (see page 21-47)
B1239 An open or short in the mode control motor circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-49)
B1240 A problem in the mode control motor circuit, linkage, Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
door, or motor (see page 21-51)
B1241 A problem in the blower motor circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-52)
B2967 An open in the humidity sensor circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-55)
B2968 A short in the humidity sensor circuit Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-56)
B2969 Climate control unit lost communication with MICU Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
(WIPSW message) communication (see page 21-57)
System Description
Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) and Fast Controller Area Network (F-CAN)
The body controller area network (B-CAN) and the fast controller area network (F-CAN) share information between
multiple electronic control units (ECUs). B-CAN communication moves at a slower speed (33.33 kbps) for convenience
related items and for other functions. F-CAN information moves at a faster speed (500 kbps) for "YeaI time" functions
such as fuel and emissions data. To allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates
information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN. This is called the Gateway Function.
GAUGECONTROLMODULE
(F-CAN)
F-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
F-CANL
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
DATALINKCONNECTOR(DLC)
SRSUNIT UNDER-DASHFUSE/RELAYBOX
VSAMODULATOR-
CONTROLUNIT (B-CAN)
YAWRATE-ACCELERATION
SENSOR
EPSCONTROLUNIT
TPMSCONTROLUNIT(WithTPMS) IMMOBILIZER-
MOTORCONTROLMODULE(MCM) KEYLESSCONTROL
UNIT
CLIMATE
CONTROLUNIT
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROLUNIT*
:CANline
*:WithHandsFreeLinksystem
(cont'd)
Gateway Function
The gauge control module acts as a gateway to allow both systems to share information. The gauge control module
translates and relays the information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN.
BAT IG1
Network #*Loss of Communication" Error Checking Function

The ECUs on the CAN circuit send messages to each other. If there are any communication malfunctions on the network,
the multi-information display (MID) on the gauge control module can indicate the error messages by entering the gauge
control module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325).
COMMUNICATION
CHECK
F-C A N ERROR
B-CAN OK
Self-Diagnostic Function (On-Board Diagnosis)
By connecting the HDS to the data link connector (DLC), the HDS can retrieve the diagnostic information from the MICU
via a diagnostic line called K-LINE. The K-LINE is separate from the CAN lines, and is connected to the CAN related ECUs.
The MICU is a gateway between the HDS and B-CAN related ECUs, and it sends B-CAN diagnostic information to the
HDS. When doing a function test with the HDS, the HDS sends an output signal through the K-LINE to the MICU. The
MICU either relays the request to another ECU or commands the function itself.
F-CAN(500kbps) \ I B-CAN(33.33kbps)
SRSUNIT
4
4 MICU
I
I
I
I IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
ECM/PCM "T-1-4 t CONTROLUNIT
I
1
I
I CLIMATE
.-I-. t CONTROLUNIT
EPSCONTROLUNIT
-4i
I HANDSFREELINK
I CONTROLUNIT*
I
VSAMODULATOR- -!~4
CONTROLUNIT
AUDIOUNIT
1 (Withoutnavigation)
YAWRATE- -J -
ACCELERATION
SENSOR -41
AUDIO-NAVIGATION
i UNIT(Withnavigation)
1
I
MOTORCONTROL 1-4 (K-LINE)
MODULE(MCM)
4
S
1
I
TPMSCONTROLUNIT
(WithTPMS)
I
I
I
1
1
I
1
(K-LINE) I
I
I
DATALINK
CONNECTOR(DLC) 7
1
*:WithHandsFreeLinksystem
CANline
*.Othercommunicationline
Wake-Up and Sleep Function

The multiplex integrated control system has wake-up and sleep functions to decrease parasitic draw on the battery
when the ignition switch is at LOCK (0).
In the sleep mode, the mul tiplex integrated control system stops functioning (communication and CPU control) when
it is not necessary for the system to operate.
As soon as any operation is requested (for example, a door is unlocked), the related control units in the sleep mode
immediately wake-up and begin to function.
When the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0) with all the doors and the hatch closed, and the driver's door is opened,
then closed, there is a delay of about 40 seconds before the control unit goes from the wake-up mode to the sleep
mode.
The sleep mode will not function if any door or the hatch is open or if a key is in the ignition switch.
Electrical draw is reduced from 200 mA to less than 35 mA when in sleep mode.
NOTE: Sleep and Wake-Up Mode Test (see page 22-132).
Fail-Safe Function
To prevent improper operation, the MICU has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode, the output signal is fixed when
any part of the system malfunctions (for example, a faulty control unit or communication line).
Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that fixes the output signal when there is a CPU malfunction, and a
software fail-safe function that ignores the signal from a malfunctioning control unit, which allows the system to
continue o p e ra tin g n o rm a lly .
Hardware Fail-Safe Control
Fail-safe function
When a CPU problem or an abnormal power supply voltage is detected, the MICU moves to the hardware fail-safe
mode, and each system output load is set to the pre-programmed fail-safe value.
Software Fail-Safe Control
When any of the data from the B-CAN circuit cannot be received within a specified time, or an unusual combination of
data is recognized, the MICU moves to the software fail-safe mode. The data that was not received is forced to a
pre-programmed value.
Power Supply Voltage Monitoring Function
The MICU monitors the power supply voltage (back-up voltage). If the voltage drops below 10 V, the MICU does not
store DTCs.
Input Output
MICU Battery voltage (VBU)
B-CAN MICU (UNDER 10 V) message
Combination Light Switch

The MICU controls the lighting system based on inputs from the combination light switch,
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Headlights (LO)
Combination light switch (PARKING) Headlights (HI)
Combination light switch (OFF) Side marker lights
Combination light switch (ON) License plate lights
Combination light switch (DIMMER) Taillights
Combination light switch (PASSING)
B-CAN Combination light switch (PARKING) message
Combination light switch (HLLO) message
Combination light switch (HLHI) message
Combination light switch (PASSING) message
Fog Lights
The MICU controls the fog lights based on inputs from the fog light switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Fog light relay
Combination light switch (OFF)
Combination light switch (ON)
Combination light switch (FOG)
B-CAN Combination light switch (FRFOG) message
RM (FRFOGRLY) message
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Light

The MICU controls the turn signal/hazard warning lights based on inputs from the turn signal switch and the hazard
warning switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Turn signal lights (LEFT)
Hazard warning switch Turn signal lights (RIGHT)
Turn signal switch (LEFT)
Turn signal switch (RIGHT)
B-CAN MICU (HAZARDSW) message
MICU (TURNRLY) message
Turn signal switch (TURNL) message
Turn signal switch (TURNR) message
Entry Light
The MICU controls the interior light based on inputs from each switch and B-CAN signals.
I nput Output
MICU IG1 power supply Individual map lights
Ignition key switch Rear tray lights
Driver's door switch
Passenger's door switch
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
B-CAN Keyless door lock signal
Automatic Lighting
The M I CU control s the automatic lighting system based on inputs from the automatic lighting sensor and B-CAN signal.
I nput Output
Automatic lighting sensor (SIO) signal Headlights (HI)
Ignition key switch Side maker lights
Licence plate lights
Taillights
B-CAN MICU (SGI) signal AUTOLT signal
Cargo Area Light

The MICU controls the cargo area light based on inputs from the hatch latch switch.
Input Output
MICU Hatch latch switch Cargo area light
Daytime Running Lights

The MICU controls the headlights as daytime running l ights based on inputs from each switch and B-CAN signals.
Input Output
Combination light switch (OFF) Headlights (HI)
Combination light switch (ON) Side maker lights
Combination light switch (DIMMER) License plate lights
Combination light switch (PASSING) Taillights
B-CAN Parking brake switch signal
IG1 METER signal
Automatic lighting signal (ALPARKING)
Automatic lighting signal (ALHLLO)
Windshield Wiper/Washer (Normally Operation)
The MICU controls the windshield wiper motor and the windshield washer motor based on inputs from each switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Windshield wiper motor (INT)
Windshield wiper switch (INT/LO) Windshield wiper motor (HI)
Windshield wiper switch (LO/HI) Windshield washer motor
Windshield wiper switch (MIST)
Windshield washer switch
Wiper switch intermittent dwell time controller
Windshield wiper motor (AUTO STOP)
B-CAN IG1 METER signal Windshield wiper switch (FRINT) message
Windshield wiper switch (FRWIPLO) message
Windshield wiper switch (FRWIPHI) message
Windshield washer switch (FRWASH) message
Windshield wiper switch (FRMIST) message
Windshield wiper motor (FRWIPAS) message
Windshield wiper switch (FRONTVR) message
Windshield Wiper/Washer (Vehicle Speed Operation)

The MICU controls the windshield wiper motor and the windshield washer motor based on inputs from each switch and
B-CAN signals.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Windshield wiper motor (INT)
Brake pedal position switch Windshield wiper motor (HI)
Windshield wiper switch (INT/LO) Windshield washer motor
Windshield wiper switch (HI/LO)
Windshield wiper switch (MIST)
Windshield washer switch
Wiper switch intermittent dwell time controller
Windshield wiper motor (AUTO STOP)
Transmission range switch (P) position (CVT)
B-CAN Parking brake switch signal Windshield wiper switch (FRINT) message
Vehicle speed pulse signal Windshield wiper switch (FRWIPLO) message
Windshield wiper switch (FRWIPHI) message
Windshield washer switch (FRWASH) message
Windshield wiper switch (FRMIST) message
Windshield wiper switch (FRONTVR) message
Rear Window Wiper/Washer (With Reverse Linked Rear Wiper)

The MICU control s the rear window wiper motor and the rear window washer motor based on inputs from each switch.
I nput Output
MICU 1G1 power supply Rear window wiper motor
Back-up light switch (M/T) Rear window washer motor
Transmission range switch (R) position (CVT)
Windshield washer motor switch
Rear window washer motor switch
Rear window wiper switch
Windshield wiper switch (INT)
Windshield wiper switch (LO)
Windshield wiper switch (HI)
B-CAN Rear window wiper switch (RRWIP) message
Rear window washer switch (RRWASH) message
Windshield/Rear Window Washer

The MICU controls the windshield washer and the rear window washer motor based on inputs from each switch.
Input Output
MICU Rear window washer motor switch Rear window washer motor
Windshield washer motor switch Windshield washer motor
IG1 power supply
B-CAN Windshield washer switch (FRWASH) message
Rear window washer switch (RRWASH) message
Power Window Tinner (Key-Off Operation)

The MICU controls the power window key-off operation based on inputs from each switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Power window timer
Ignition key switch
Collision Detection Signal (CDS)

The MICU controls the door lock actuators based on IG1 and SRS (CDS) inputs.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Door lock actuators (LOCK/UNLOCK)
B-CAN SRS (CDSFR) message
SRS (CDSSD) message
SRS (CDSRR) message
SRS (CDSRO) message
Power Door Locks
The M I C U control s the door lock actuators based on inputs from each switch.
Input Output
M IC U IG 1 power supply Door lock actuator (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Ignition key switch Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Hatch latch switch
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
Door Lock Response Operation

The M I C U controls the door lock actuators based on B-CAN signals.
Input Output
M IC U Door lock actuators (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Hatch release actuator
B -C A N Door lock signal
Kef less Entry System*

The MICU controls the door lock actuators based on inputs from each switch.
Input Output
M IC U IG1 power supply Door lock actuators (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door switch Hatch release actuator
Hatch latch switch
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
B -C A N Keyless door lock signal Relock message
*: This system can be customized in the multi-information display (MID) to suit the customer's needs. For more
information about the system options, refer to the Owner's Manual.
Key-in Reminder
Input O u tp u t
M IC U Ignition key switch Door lock actuators (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door switch Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Key Interlock (CVT)

The MICU controls the key interlock solenoid based on inputs from each switch.
Input Output
MICU Ignition switch (ACCESSORY) Key interlock solenoid
Transmission range switch (P) position
Park-pin switch
Security Alarm System

The MICU controls the exterior lights and the horn based on inputs from each switch.
Input O u tp u t
Ignition key switch Side marker lights
Audio switch Taillights
Hatch latch switch License plate lights
Driver's door switch Horn
Passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Security hood switch
B-CAN Keyless door lock signal MICU (SET1) message
Door lock signal MICU (SET2) message
ALARM (ACTION) message
Security Answer Back

The MICU controls the exterior lights and the horn based on keyless signals sent by B-CAN.
Input Output
MICU Side marker lights
Taillights
License plate lights
Horn
Answer Back Response Operation"

The MICU controls the lighting system and the horn based on keyless signals sent by B-CAN.
Input Output
MICU Side marker lights
Taillights
Horn
B-CAN Answer back (PARKING) signal
Answer back (HLLO) signal
Answer back (HORN) signal
*: This system can be customized in the multi-information display (MID) to suit the customer's needs. For more
information about the system options, refer to the Owner's Manual.
Hatch Outer Handle Switch Operation
The MICU control s the hatch rel ease actuator based on inputs from each switch.
Input Output
MICU Hatch outer handle switch Hatch release actuator
Auto Door Lock

The MICU control s the door lock actuators based on inputs from each switch and B-CAN signals.
input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Door lock actuators (LOCK)
Hatch latch switch
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Brake pedal position switch
B-CAN Vehicle speed signal
Engine speed signal
Auto Door Unlock

Input Output
MICU I G1 power supply Door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Passenger's.door switch
Hatch latch switch
Passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK).
Brake pedal position switch
B-CAN
Keyless Panic Function

The M I CU control s the keyl ess PANIC function based on PANIC signals sent by B-CAN.
I nput Output
MICU Headlights (LO)
Side marker lights
Taillights
Horn
B-CAN PANIC signals
HDS Inputs and Function Tests

Certain inputs happen so quickly that the HDS cannot update fast enough. Hold the switch that is being tested while
monitoring the Data List. This should give the HDS time to update the signal on the Data List.
Because the HDS software is updated to support the release for newer vehicles, it is not uncommon to see system
function tests that are not supported.
Make sure that the most current HDS software is loaded.
Input
System Menu Data List Data List Indication
Lighting Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Hazard Warning Switch OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (OFF) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (PARKING) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (AUTO) OFF/ON
Headl ight Switch (High Beam) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (PASSING) OFF/ON
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) OFF/ON
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) OFF/ON
Fog Light Switch OFF/ON
Rear Fog Light Switch OFF/ON
Autolight Sensor Input Voltage V
Autolight Sensor Malfunction Detection Voltage V
Max
Auto light Sensor Malfunction Detection Voltage V
Min
Door Switch Interior Light Command OFF/ON
Left Turn Signal Command OFF/ON
Right Turn Signal Command OFF/ON
Rear Fog Light Command OFF/ON
Cargo Light Command OFF/ON
Autolight Parking Command OFF/ON
Autolight Headlight Command OFF/ON
Autolight Warning Command OFF/ON
Autolight Headlight Backup Line Command OFF/ON
Headlight Command OFF/ON
Headlight High Beam Command OFF/ON
Parking Light Command OFF/ON
Fog Light Command OFF/ON
DRL Command OFF/ON
Input
Gauges Cruise Control Main Switch (ACC switch) OFF/ON
Cruise Control Set Switch OFF/ON
Cruise Control Resume Switch OFF/ON
Washer Fluid Level Switch OFF/ON
Gauge Select/Reset Switch OFF/ON
VSA off Switch OFF/ON
Parking Brake Switch OFF/ON
Brake Fluid Level Switch OFF/ON
Select/Reset Switch OFF/ON
IN FO Previous Switch OFF/ON
INFO or Next Switch OFF/ON
km/h mph Select Switch OFF/ON
ECON Switch OFF/ON
SPORT Switch OFF/ON
NORMAL Switch OFF/ON
Fuel Sending Unit Input 1
Fuel Sending Unit Input 2 V
Judging Equipment of CLOCK Display OFF/ON
ABS Indicator OFF/ON
EBD Indicator (Electronic Brake Distribution) OFF/ON
Cruise Control Main Switch Indicator OFF/ON
MIL Indicator OFF/ON
VSA Off Indicator OFF/ON
VSA Indicator OFF/ON
Low Oil Pressure Indicator OFF/ON
Charging System Indicator OFF/ON
Cruise Main Switch ON Indicator OFF/ON
High Beam Indicator OFF/ON
Parking Light ON Indicator OFF/ON
Input
Gauges ECON Indicator OFF/ON
Low Fuel Warning Indicator OFF/ON
Security Indicator OFF/ON
Fog Light Indicator OFF/ON
Master Warning Indicator OFF/ON
Seatbelt Indicator OFF/ON
Tire Pressure Warn OFF/ON
IMA Auto-stop Indicator OFF/ON
IMA Indicator OFF/ON
IMA Battery Level (Number of segment to turn on)
IMA Assist/Charge Indicator A/B/C (Neutral and
Charge/Neutral/Neutral and Assist)
Door Open warn Multi Information Display OFF/ON
Maintenance Minder change oil indicator OFF/ON
Fuel fill cap caution Multi Information Display OFF/ON
A/T system trouble warn Multi Information Display OFF/ON
SRS system trouble warn Multi Information Display OFF/ON
Side Airbag Cutoff Indication Multi Information OFF/ON
Display
Trunk Open Indicator Warn Multi Information OFF/ON
Display
Normal Mode Indication Multi Information Display OFF/ON
Speed Indicator (km/h) Command km/h
Speed Indicator (mph) Command MPH
A/T Gear Position Switch (R) OFF/ON
A/T Gear Position Switch (P) OFF/ON
EPS/ECPS System Trouble Warn Multi Information OFF/ON
Display
Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch OFF/ON
Input
Door Locks Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Passenger's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Rear Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Passenger's Rear Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Door LOCK Command OFF/ON
Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Driver's Door UNLOCK Command (Individual) OFF/ON
Wiper Brake Pedal Position Switch OFF/ON
Rear Wiper Auto Stop Switch ON/OFF
Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (MIST) OFF/ON
Rear Wiper Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (INT) OFF/ON
Windshield Washer Switch OFF/ON
Rear Washer Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor PARK Switch OFF/ON
Rear Wiper Command OFF/ON
Rear Washer Command OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor HI Command OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor LO Command OFF/ON
Windshield Washer Motor Command OFF/ON
Keyless Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Transmitter Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Trunk Lid/Tailgate Switch OFF/ON
Trunk Knob Sw. (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Trunk Key Cylinder (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Trunk Handle Switch OFF/ON
Drivers Door Lock Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Trunk Lid Release Command OFF/ON
Input
Security Ignition Key Cyl inder Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Trunk Lid/Tailgate Switch OFF/ON
Trunk Knob Sw. (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Trunk Key Cylinder (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Trunk Handle Switch OFF/ON
Radio Harness Connected OFF/ON
Hazard warning switch OFF/ON
Security Hood Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
D r i v e r ' s D o o r L o c k Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Trunk Lid Release Command OFF/ON
Headlight Command OFF/ON
Headlight High Beam Command OFF/ON
Parking Light Command OFF/ON
Horn Command OFF/ON
HVAC/Climate A/C Pressure Switch/Thermal Protector OFF/ON
Control
HDS Inputs and Function Tests
Function Test
System Menu HDS Description Note
Door Locks LOCK all doors Outputs LOCK signal 1 time (for 0.6
seconds) to all door
UNLOCK driver's side door Outputs UNLOCK signal 1 time (for 0.6
seconds) to driver's side door
UNLOCK all doors Outputs UNLOCK signal 1 time (for 0.6
seconds) to all door
Lighting Ignition Key Cylinder Light Command Illuminates for 30 seconds
Interior Light Command Illuminates for 30 seconds
Foot Light Command Illuminates for 30 seconds
Left Turn Signal Command Blinks for 5 seconds
Right Turn Signal Command Blinks for 5 seconds
Hazard Flasher Blinks turn signal (left and right) for 15
seconds
Headlight Command Operates headlight (low) for 15 seconds
Headlight High Beam Command Operates headlight (high) for 15 seconds
Parking Lights Command Operates Parking Light for 15 seconds
Cargo Area Light Illuminates for 30 seconds
Floor Light (Rear Door Ashtray Light) Illuminates for 30 seconds
Keyless Release Trunk Lid/Tailgate Outputs UNLOCK signal 1 time (for 0.9
Transmitter seconds) to trunk
Keyless Buzzer Operates keyless buzzer 1 time
Security Horn Command Operates horn for 1 second
Wiper Windshield Wiper Motor Low Command Operates windshield wiper for 5 seconds
(low speed)
Windshield Wiper Motor High Command Operates windshield wiper for 5 seconds
(high speed)
Windshield Washer Command Operates windshield washer for 5
seconds
Rear Wiper Motor Operates for 5 seconds
Rear Wiper Washer Operates for 5 seconds
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
Check the ECM/PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot 3. From the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, select B-CAN
ECM/PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of CONTROL UNITS INFORMATION, and then select
communication errors first, then do this diagnosis if the CONNECTED UNITS listed to see if the following
symptom is related to the B-CAN system. control units are communicating with the HDS.
1. Compare the symptom with this list of B-CAN related MICU
systems: Gauge control module
Gauge control module Immobilizer-keyless control unit
Immobilizer Climate control unit
Climate control HandsFreeLink control unit
HandsFreeLink NOTE:
Exterior lights Ifa unit is communicating with the HDS, DETECT is
Entry light control displayed.
Turn signal/hazard warning lights Ifa unit is not communicating or the vehicle is not
Horn (security and panic) equipped, "Not Available" is displayed.
Wiper/washer The HDS only checks the connected units status
Power windows one time when BODY ELECTRICAL is selected. To
recheck the status after repair, reboot the HDS and
Security
repeat step 3.
Keyless entry
Power door locks A r e a ll c o n t r o l u n its c o m m u n ic a tin g w ith t h e H D S ?
Key interlock YES-Go to step 4.
Is th e s y m p t o m r e la t e d to th e B - C A N s y s te m ? NO-lf any of the control units are not communicating,
YES-Go to step 2. go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B (see
page 22-127). If all units are not communicating or
NO-Go to the system troubleshooting for the system only the MICU is communicating, go to DTC B1000
with the symptom. troubleshooting (see page 22-135).H
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A),
then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode B
4. Select the system that has the problem from the Do this diagnosis if any of the control units are not
BODY ELECTRICAL menu, then select DTCs. communicating (Not Available is displayed on the HDS)
as found by the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?
(see page 22-126).
YES-Go to step 6.
1. Using the HDS, select the system that has the
NO-lf the problem is related to one of the following symptom from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
items and the system that is malfunctioning does not
2. Select the DTCs, and then check for loss of
stop or turn off, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test communication DTCs.
Mode C (see page 22-128). If the problem is related to
one of the following items and the system that is A r e a n y lo s s o f c o m m u n ic a tio n D T C s in d ic a t e d ?
malfunctioning does not work or turn on, go to B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode D (see page 22-129). YES-Go to step 3.
Exterior lights NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
Entry light control box.H
Horn (security and panic) USA models (see page 22-82)
Wiper/washer Canada models (see page 22-83)
Power windows 3. Do the power, ground, and communication part of the
Power door locks input test for the unit(s) not communicating with the
Turn signal/hazard warning lights HDS.
Key interlock
________ Unit not communicating_____
If the problem is related to one of the following items, MICU (see page 22-141)_______
go to the troubleshooting for that individual Gauge control module (see page 22-347)________
system. Immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page 22-199)
Gauge control module Climate control unit (see page 21-30)___________
HandsFreeLink control unit* (see page 23-282)
Immobilizer
Climate control *: With HandsFreeLink system
HandsFreeLink
Security
Keyless entry
5. Record the DTCs, and sort them by DTC type.
6. Troubleshoot the DTC(s) in this order:
@ Battery voltage DTCs.
Internal error DTCs,
Loss of communication DTCs.
Signal error DTCs.
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C
Do this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by the 6. Check the switch, then check for a short in the wire
B-CAN system does not stop or turn off. between the switch and the control unit that monitors
the switch.
NOTE;
If the component does not run or turn on, go to B-CAN A r e th e s w it c h a n d w ir e h a r n e s s O K ?
System Diagnosis Test Mode D (see page 22-129).
YES-Replace the control unit that monitors the
See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list switch.il
of input and output devices and the control units that
monitor the input and control the output devices (see NO-Replace the switch, or repair/replace the wire
page 22-120). harness.H
1. Checkfor DTCs by sel ecting the MODE MENU from

the HDS.
A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A

(see page 22-126).
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Turn off the switch that controls the malfunctioning
component.
3. Select the applicable system from the system MODE
MENU, then select DATA LIST, and check the input of
the switch that controls the component.
D o e s th e H D S in d ic a t e t h e s w it c h is O F F ?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 6.
4. In the DATA LIST, check the output signal of the
malfunctioning component.
Is th e o u tp u t s i g n a l O F F ?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the control unit that controls the device
that wi l l not turn OFF.H
5. Check the relay that does not stop or turn off, if
applicable, then check for a short in the wire between
the relay and the component, the relay and control
unit, or the component and control unit.
A r e th e r e la y a n d th e w ir e h a r n e s s O K ?
YES-Replace the control unit that controls the

component that will not stop or turn OFF.H
NO-Replace the relay or repair/replace the wire
harness.il
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode D
Do this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by the 7. With the malfunctioning output device connected,
B-CAN system does not work or come on. connect a voltmeter between the malfunctioning
output device input and the ground wire that the
NOTE: control unit uses to control the output device circuit.
If the component does not turn off or stop, go to
B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C (see page 8. Select FUNCUTIONAL TEST from the MODE MENU,
22-128). and do the forced operation test of the malfunctioning
See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list component.
of input and output devices and the control units that Is t h e r e a c h a n g e in v o lta g e ( 1 2 V t o O V o r O V t o 1 2 V )?
monitor the input and control the output devices (see
page 22-120). YES-lnspect the ground for the component. If OK,
replace the component.!
1. Check the fuse of the malfunctioning output device.
NO-Replace the control unit that controls the
Is t h e f u s e O K ? malfunctioning com ponent!
YES-Go to step 2. 9. Select DATA LIST from the system MODE MENU, and
NO-Replace the fuse. If the fuse blows again, repair a make sure the switch signal input for the
short to ground on the fuse circuit of the malfunctioning system indicates a change when
malfunctioning device. operated
2. Check for DTCs by selecting the MODE MENU from D o e s t h e s w it c h in p u t in d ic a t e O N w h e n t h e s w it c h is

the HDS. ON?
A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ? YES-Replace the control unit that controls the

malfunctioning com ponent!
YES-Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
NO-Go to step 3. 10. Check the switch and its ground (if applicable), then
check for an open or a short in the wire between the
3. Turn ON the switch that controls the malfunctioning switch and the control unit that monitors it.
component.
Is th e s w it c h a n d th e w ir e h a r n e s s O K ?
4. Select the applicable system from the system MODE
MENU, then select DATA LIST, and check output YES-Replace the control unit that monitors the
signal for the malfunctioning component. sw itch.!
Is th e r e a n o u tp u t s ig n a l? NO-Replace the switch, or repair/replace the wire

harness.!
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 9.
5. Check the relay and ground, then check for an open or
a short in the circuit for the malfunctioning
component.
Is th e r e la y a n d th e c ir c u it O K ?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the relay, or repair the circuit.!
6. Do the function test for the malfunctioning
component.
D o e s t h e o u tp u t d e v ic e p a s s t h e fu n c tio n te s t?
YES-Go to step 7.
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2
(without the HDS)
Special Tools Required 6. Check for B-CAN DTCs indicated by the
MPCS (MCIS) Service Connector 07WAZ-00101OA multi-information display (MID) on the gauge control
module while still in Test Mode 1. Press the
Test Mode 1 SELECT/RESET knob to display the next code. After
you get to the last code, the display shows END. If no
Check the ECM/PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot DTCs are stored, the display will read NO. (see page
ECM/PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of 22-103)
communication errors first, then do this diagnosis if the
HDS is not available. NOTE: If the test times out, remove the MPCS service
connector, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and
1. Check the No. B1 (15 A) and the No. B22 (7.5 A) fuses repeat steps 3 and 4.
A re th e fu s e s O K ?
YES-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the fuses. If the fuse blows again, repair
the short to ground on the fuse circuit(s).H 7. Record all DTCs and troubleshoot them in this order:
Battery voltage DTCs
Internal error DTCs
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and move the Loss of communication DTCs
interior light switch to the DOOR position. S ignal e rro r DTCs
4. Connect the MPCS service connector (A) to the 8. Clear the DTCs by pressing and holding the
multiplex control inspection connector socket (B) in SELECT/RESET knob for at least 10 seconds.
the under-dash fuse/relay box.
9. You will hear a beep to confirm the codes have been
cleared. Operate the devices that failed, and recheck
for codes.
Test Mode 2
10. Remove the MPCS service connector from the
under-dash fuse/relay box multiplex control
inspection connector socket for 5 10 seconds, then
re-insert it to enter Mode 2. When the system enters
Mode 2, the individual map lights flash two times
quickly and then goes off.
NOTE: if the MPCS service connector is disconnected
for too short or too long of a time, or the ignition
switch is turned to LOCK (0), the system returns to
Test Mode 1.
5. Wait 5 seconds, and watch the individual map lights.

When the individual map lights flashes quickly once
and then goes off, the system is in Test Mode 1.
11. The following table lists the circuits that can be D o t h e in d iv id u a l m a p lig h ts w o r k p r o p e r ly in a ll s w it c h
checked in Test Mode 2. Operate the switch that is p o s itio n s ?
most closely related to the problem. If the circuit is YES-Go to function and input test for the system
OK, the individual map lights blink once. If the circuit related to the failu re.!
is faulty, there is no indication.
NO-Repair the open, or short, or replace the faulty
M I C U __________________________ sw itch.!
________ __________ I t e m ____________ _____
Brake pedal position switch __________
Driver's door switch_______________________
Hatch latch switch_________________________
Windshield wiper switch (LOW) ______
Windshield wiper switch (HIGH)______________
Windshield wiper switch (INT)_______________
Windshield wiper switch (MIST)_____________
Rear wiper switch_________________________
Windshield washer switch__________________
Rear washer switch________________________
Wiper intermittent dwell time controller______
Turn signal switch (LEFT) _______________
Turn signal switch (RIGHT) __________
Hazard warning switch_____________________
Headlight switch (OFF)________ ^ __________ ._
Headlight switch (PARKING)_________
Headlight switch (HEADLIGHT)______________ .
. Headlight switch (High Beam)_______________ ,
. Headlight switch (PASSING)________________
Hatch outer handle switch__________________
Transmission range switch (P) (CVT)__________
Ignition key cylinder switch_____
Security hood switch_______________
Back-up light switch_______________________
Windshield wiper motor PARK switch_________
Passenger's door switch____________
Audio unit or Audio-navigation unit connected
Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK) ______
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK)_____________
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)______
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK)________
Driver's door key cylinder switch (UNLOCK)*
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK)*
* A second key is necessary to check the key
cylinder inputs. Be sure to rotate the key
cylinder switch two times to each position (lock
and lock, unlock and unlock) to ensure the door
lock knob switch is in the appropriate position.
Sleep and Wake-Up Mode Test
1. Shift to the sleep mode:

Close all doors. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the key, then open and close the driver's door. If the
MICU receives no signals from the inputs listed below, it will go into sleep mode in less than 40 seconds.
2. Confirm the sleep mode:
NOTE: Check any official Honda service website for more service information about parasitic draw at the battery.
Check the parasitic draw at the battery after 40 seconds; amperage should change to less than 30 mA in less than 40
seconds.
3. Shift to the wake up mode:
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the MICU, gauge control module, immobilizer-keyless control unit,
climate control unit, HandsFreeLink control unit, and ECM/PCM wake up at the same time without "talking" to each
other through the communication lines. When any switch in the multiplex integrated control system is turned on, it
wakes up its related control unit which, in turn, wakes up the other units. After confirming the sleep mode, look in the
following table for the switch most related to the problem. Operate that switch and see if its control unit wakes up.
NOTE: If any control unit is faulty and will not wake up, several circuits in the system will malfunction at the same
time. Below is a list of the switches and the input signals that wake them up.
Driver's door switch (door open)
Hatch latch switch (hatch open)
Hatch outer handle switch (switch pressed)
Security hood switch (hood open)
Hazard warning switch (ON)
Combination light switch (Parking, Headlight, High Beam, Passing)
Ignition key switch (key inserted)
Audio unit or audio-navigation unit switch (switch pressed)
Passenger's door lock knob (UNLOCK)
Passenger's door switch (door open)
Circuit Diagram
BATTERYTERMINAL
FUSEBOX UNDER-DASHFUSE/RELAYBOX
1 1
1 1
1
17 1 131 27 >25 28
IG1 +B B-CAN B-CAN IG2 ACC B-CAN +B 3-CAN +B 1G1 K-LINE
BACKUP BACKUP BACKUP
CLIMATE IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
GAUGECONTROLMODULE CONTROLUNIT HANDSFREELINKCONTROLUNIT*3 CONTRO LUNIT
S-GND P-GND P-GND GND GND
4 32 14
-LL _L -O. -1L

G501 G501 G502 G502 G503 G101
(cont'd)
*1:Withnavigation
*2: Withoutnavigation
*3: WithHandsFreeLinkcontrol unit
*4: WithTPMS
-------- :B-CANline
...........:Othercommunicationline
UNDER-DASHFUSE/RELAYBOX
;A5
K-LINE
TPMS EPS
DATALINK SRSUNIT CONTROLUNIT*4 CO NTROLUNIT
CONNECTOR(DLC)
AUDIO UNIT*2
_LL _CL _ l _Q_ _Cl _ l
G101 G502 G501 G502 G501 G502

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1000: Communication Circuit Error 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(BUS-OFF) 13. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connector
Y (16P).
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis 14. Checkfor continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
Test Mode A (see page 22-126). box connector Y (16P) terminal No. 6 and body
ground.
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Y (16P)
ON (II).
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
B-CAN (GRN)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 in d ic a t e d ?
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
YES-Go to step 5.
Check for loose or poor connections, or worn/shorted
wires. If the connections are good, check the 12 volt Wire side of fema l e terminals
battery condition (see page 22-85) and the charging
system. Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the
6. Disconnect the appropriate connector at each control under-dash fuse/relay box connector and the affected
unit in the table. control unit.B
Unit Connector NO-Fa ulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay

Gauge control 32P connector box.H
module USA models (see page 22-82)
Cl imate control unit 36P connector Canada models (see page 22-83)
HandsFreeLink 28P connector
control unit* 15. Reconnect the gauge control module 32P connector.
I mmobil izer-keyless 7P connector 16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
control unit
*: With HandsFreeLink system 17. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
ON (II). 20. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
10. Wait for at least 6 seconds. Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 in d ic a t e d ?
11. Check for DTCs with the HDS. YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-354). H
NO-Go to step 21.
YES-Go to step 12.
21. Reconnect the climate control unit 36P connector. DTC B1002: MICU Internal Error (EEPROM
22. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n switch to ON (II ). Error)
23. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
24. T u rn th e ig n itio n switch to LOCK (0), and then back to Test Mode A (see page 22-126).
ON (II).'
26. Check for DTCs with the HDS. ON (II).
Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Replace the climate control unit (see page Is D T C B 1 0 0 2 in d ic a t e d ?
21-112).
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
NO-
box.B
With HandsFreeLink system: go to step 27. USA models (see page 22-82)
Without HandsFreeLink system: Replace the Canada models (see page 22-83)
immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page
22-203).11
Check for loose or poor connections. If the
27. Reconnect the HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connections are good, check the 12 vo!t battery
connector. condition (see page 22-85) and the charging
system. B
O N (IS).
YES-Replace the HandsFreeLink control unit (see

page 2 3 -2 8 2 ).B .
N O -R e p la ce th e immobilizer-keyless control unit (see

page 2 2 -2 0 3 ).B , '
DTC B1011: MICU Lost Communication With 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Gauge Control Module (VSP/NE Message) 7. Check the No. B1 (15 A) and the No. B22 (7.5 A) fuses
NOTE:
If you are troubleshooting mu l tiple DTCs, be sure to A r e th e fu s e s O K ?
follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the No. B1
Test Mode A (see page 22-126).
(15 A) and/or No. B22 (7.5 A) fuse circuit.H
Before troubleshooting, check the No. B1 (15 A) and
No. B22 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. NO-Replace the fuse(s). If the fuse blows again, repair
a short to ground in the No. B1 (15 A) and/or No. B22
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. (7.5 A) fuse circuitH
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to 8. Measure the voltage between gauge control module
ON (II). 32P connector terminals No. 4 and No. 32 and body
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. ground individually.

Is D T C s B 1 0 1 1 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 5. S-GND (BLK)

1------------- f
N O -Intermittent faiIure, the system is OK at this time. 16|15|14|13|12|11 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 |
Check for loose or poor connections of the gauge |32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
control module 32P connector and at the under-dash P-GND (BLK)
fuse/relay box connector Y (16P). If the connections
are good, check the 12 volt battery condition (see
page 22-85) and the charging system.
5. Measure the voltage between gauge control module
32P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 17 and body
ground individually. Is t h e r e le s s t h a n 0 . 2 V ?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the ground
+B BACK UP wire or poor ground (G5G1).
(PNK)
!------------- f 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
16fl5|l4|l3|l2|l1 1o| 9 I 8 I 7 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 1
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17 10. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Y
(16P).
IG1 (L T B L U )
(2) (2)
Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
12. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay DTC B1036: I G1 Power Supply Circuit
box connector Y (16P) terminal No. 6 and gauge
Malfunction
control module 32P connectorterminal No. 31.
NOTE;
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Y (16P) If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to
Wire side of female terminals follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
B-CAN (GRN)
Before troubleshooting, make sure the No. B22 (7.5 A)
p n r I n n fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box is OK.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
ON (II).
i------------- r
16 15|l4fl3|l2|l1 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 l l | 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
|32|31130|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21120| 19| 18| 17
B-CAN (GRN)
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR YES-Go to step 5.
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Check for loose or poor connections at the gauge
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay control module 32P connector and at under-dash
fuse/relay box connector Y (16P). If the connections
box.B
are good, check the 12 volt battery condition (see
USA models (see page 22-82)
page 22-85) and the charging system.
Canada models (see page 22-83)
5. Measure the voltage between gauge control module
NO-Repair open or high resistance in the wire 32P connector terminal No. 17 and body ground.
between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the gauge
control module.B

CO
ef 1 5 11 4^1 3 11 2 111 6 | 5 | 4 13 | 2 1
' 00
1
0
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20| 19|18|17
IG1 (LT BLU)
Is th e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ?

box.B
between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the gauge
control module.B
DTC B1200: Communication Bus Line Error DTC B1900: Communication Circuit Error
(BUS-OFF) (BUS-OFF)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode A (see page 22-126). Test Mode A (see page 22-126).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II). ON (II).
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is D T C B 1 2 0 0 In d ic a t e d ? Is D T C B 1 9 0 0 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-13B).H YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-135).B
time.H time.H
DTC U1280: Communication Bus Line Error

(BUS-OFF)
ON (II).
YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-135).H

tim e.il
MICU Input Test

2. Remove the fuse lid panel (see page 20-85), and remove the driver's dashboard l ower cover (see page 20-85).
3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors A, B, N, Q, R, and Y.
NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals.
CONNECTOR A (36P)
BLU
CONNECTOR B (36P)
, P lReTsTTlSPI RfTfT
I 34I 112111|10| I9I8
1 2] |3i)ib|i7|16|3q|29| [2b|15[1411312f[26|
5*
BLU
CONNECTOR N (10P) CONNECTOR Q (34P)
1__ r BLK
4 3 J L 2 1 _r cI V i rI rTL_ n
17 16 15 14 13 12 II 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
00
10 9 6 5 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
Li Ky
BRN BLK PUR
CONNECTOR R (8P) CONNECTOR Y(16P)

PNK BLK BLU GRN LT BLU
__r 1 An i r i n r
3 I I. 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
j 1 ...u
/ \
BLK RED
4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to make sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, go to step 5.
(cont'd)
MICU Input Test (cont'd)
5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors.
If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
result is not obtained
A18 BLU VSA modulator-control unit Check for continuity between An open or high resistance
32P connector disconnected terminal A18 and VSA in the wire
modulator-control unit 32P
connector terminal No. 8: There
should be continuity.
B16 BLU EPS control unit connector A ' Check for continuity between An open or high resistance
(11P) disconnected terminal B16 and EPS control in the wire
unit connector terminal A5:
There should be continuity.
Y7 BLU Under all conditions Checkfor continuity between An open or high resistance
terminal Y7 and data link in the wire
connector (DLC) (16P)
connectorterminal No. 7: There
shoul d be continuity.
Y7 BLU Immobilizer-keyless control Checkfor continuity between An open or high resistance
unit 7P connector terminal Y7 and in the wire
disconnected immobilizer-keyless control
unit 7P connector terminal No. 3
: There should be continuity.
Y7*i BLU Audio-navigation unit Check for continuity between An open or high resistance
connector A (24P) terminal Y7 and in the wire
disconnected audio-navigation unit
connector terminal A13: There
C

BLU Audio unit connector A (24P) Check for continuity between An open or high resistance
M
disconnected terminal Y7 and audio unit in the wire

connector terminal A 1-3: There
Y7 BLU SRS unit connector A (39P) Check for continuity between An open or high resistance
disconnected terminal Y7 and SRS unit in the wire
connector terminal A5: There
Y7*3 BLU TPMS control unit 20P Check for continuity between An open or high resistance
connector disconnected terminal Y7 and TPMS control in the wire
unit 20P connector terminal
No. 7: There should be
continuity.
Y6 GRN Immobilizer-keyless control Check for continuity between An open or high resistance
unit 7P connector terminal Y6 and in the B-CAN wire
disconnected immobilizer-keyless control
unit7Pconnectorterminal No. 4
: There should be continuity.
Y6 GRN Gauge control module 32P Checkfor continuity between An open or high resistance
connector disconnected terminal Y6 and gauge control in the B-CAN wire
module 32P connector terminal
continuity.
*1: With navigation
*2: Without navigation
*3: With TPMS
Y6 GRN Climate control unit 36P Checkfor continuity between An open or high resistance
connector disconnected terminal Y6 and climate control in the wire
unit 36P connector terminal
continuity.
Y6*1 GRN HandsFreeLink control unit Check for continuity between An open or high resistance
28P connector disconnected terminal Y6 and HandsFreeLink in the wire
control unit 28P connector
terminal No. 25: There should
be continuity.
A18 BLU Disconnect VSA modulator Check for continuity to ground: A short to ground in the wire
control unit 47P connector There should be no continuity.
B16 BLU Disconnect EPS control unit Check for continuity to ground: A short to ground in the wire
connector A (11P) There should be no continuity.
Y7 BLU Disconnect these connectors: Check for continuity to ground: A short to ground in the wire
Immobilizer-keyless control There should be no continuity.
unit 7P connector
TPMS control unit 20P
connector*2
Audio-navigation unit
connector A (24P)*3
Audio unit connector A
(24P)m
SRS unit connector A (39P)
Y6 GRN Disconnect these connectors: Check for continuity to ground: A short to ground in the wire
Immobilizer-keyless control There should be no continuity.
unit 7P connector
Gauge control module 32P
connector
Climate control unit 36P
connector
HandsFreeLink control unit
28P connector*1
*2: With TPMS
*3: With navigation
6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connector.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result is
not obtained
R2 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501)
positions There should be less than 0.2 V. An open or high resistance in
the wire
N5 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G502)
the wire
Y16 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501)
the wire
Q2 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G502)
the wire
R3 PNK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. B1 (15 A) fuse in the
There should be battery under-dash fuse/relay box
voltage. Faul ty under-dash fuse/relay
box
An open or high resistance in
the wire
Q34 PUR Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. B14 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ACCESSORY (I) There should be battery under-dash fuse/relay box
voltage. Faulty under-dash fuse/relay
box
the wire
N7 BRN Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: o b l own No. B20 (15 A) fuse in the
box
the wire
Y1 LT Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. B22 (7.5 A) fuse in the
BLU There should be battery under-dash fuse/relay box
box
the wire
Y11 RED Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. B10 (7.5 A) fuse in the
box
the wire
7. If multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the
MICU).
If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace the control unit.
, AUDIO-NAV I GATION UN I T (With navigati on)

AUDIO UNIT (Without navigation)
PASSENGER S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/

HEADLIGHT KNOB SWITCH
(Built into the door latch)
Actuator Test, page 22-176
Knob Switch Test, page 22-177
HATCH RELEASE ACTUATOR/

HATCH LATCH SWITCH
(Built into the hatch latch)
I Latch Switch Test, page 22-266
IMMOB
CONTR
(Has a fc
receivei
Trouble
Replace
HATCH OUTER
HANDLE SWITCH
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/

KNOB SWITCH
(Built into the door latch)
Knob Switch Test, page 22-177

System Description
Security Alarm System Keyless Entry System

The security alarm system automatically arms after the The keyless entry system is integrated with the multiplex
doors, hood, and hatch are closed and locked. For the integrated control system. The mu l tiplex integrated
system to arm, the ignition switch must be in the LOCK control unit (MICU) receives LOCK, UNLOCK, and PANIC
(0), the key must be removed from the ignition switch, signals from the immobilizer-keyless control unit
and the MICU must receive inputs that the doors, hood, (keyless receiver).
and hatch are closed and locked. The alarm can be
disarmed at any time by unlocking the driver door with The keyless entry system allows you to lock and unlock
the key or pressing the UNLOCK button on the the vehicle with the transmitter. When you press the
transmitter. LOCK button, all doors lock. When you press the
UNLOCK button once, only the driver's door unlocks.
When everything is closed and locked, the only inputs The other doors will unlock when you press the button a
that are grounded, and have 0 V, are the driver's door second time. (Depending on the settings in the MID, all
lock knob switch (LOCK position) input and the audio the doors may unlock when you press the button the
unit or audio-navigation unit (if equipped) security input. first time.) The doors will not lock with the transmitter if a
In other words, all of the other switches are open, and door is not fully closed, or if the key is in the ignition
have about 10 to 12 V, including the key cylinder switch.
switches. The security indicator in the gauge control
When the switch for the ceiling light is in the middle
module begins to flash immediately after the vehicle is
(DOOR) position, it comes on when the UNLOCK button
completely closed and locked, and 15 seconds later, the
is pressed. If a door is not opened, the light goes off and
security system arms. If the security indicator does not
the doors will relock in about 30 seconds. If the doors are
flash after the doors are locked, the system is not
locked with the transmitter within 30 seconds, the light
arming.
goes off immediately.
If one of the switches is misadjusted or shorted
NOTE: The keyless entry system can be customized in
internally, or there is a short in one of the keyless/ power
the multi-information display (MID) to suit the
door lock/security circuits, the security system will not
customer's needs. For more information about
arm. A switch that is slightly misadjusted can cause the
alarm to sound for no apparent reason. In this case, a keyless/security system options, refer to the Owner's
significant change in outside air temperature, the Manual.
vibration of a passing truck, or someone bumping into
Panic'Mode
the vehicle could cause the alarm to sound.
The panic mode sounds the alarm in order to attract
NOTE: There is no glass breakage or motion detection
attention. When the PANIC button on the transmitter is
feature.
pressed and held for 2 seconds, the horns sound and the
The system sounds the alarm when any of these occur: exterior lights flash for about 20 seconds.
A door or the hatch is forced open. The panic mode can be canceled at anytime by pressing
A door is unlocked without using the key or the any button on the transmitter or by turning the ignition
transmitter. switch to ON (II). The panic mode will not function if the
The hood is opened. ignition switch is in ON (II).
The audio unit or audio-navigation unit (if equipped) is
disconnected. Door Lock System
The transmitter PANIC button is pressed. The system has a pair of circuits between door lock
When the system sounds the alarm, the horn sounds actuators and the MICU to improve safety of the system.
and the exterior lights flash for 2 minutes. The alarm can One is for driver's side door lock actuators, and another
be stopped at any time by unlocking the driver's door by is for passenger's side door lock actuators. Each circuit
pressing the UNLOCK button on the transmitter. has two fuses, and even if one of the fuses is blown, at
least the driver's side, or the passenger's side actuators
NOTE: The security system can be customized in the continue to work normally. When one fuse is blown,
multi-information display (MID) to suit the customer's another fuse in the same circuit must be checked (for
needs. For more information about keyless/security example, when the under-dash fuse/relay box No. B35
system options, refer to the Owner's Manual. fuse is blown, the No. B49 fuse also must be checked).
Circuit Diagram
G501 G502 G501 G502

;B-CANline
KEYLESSRECEIVER
UNIT(Built inthe
immobilizer-keyless
control unit)
---- { transmitter)
+BBACKUP
LG
GRN I
I I
1
BRN/YEI - GRN---------------------------1
1
i
I Y6
No.A3(20A)
FUSE
(BATTERYTERMINAL
FUSEBOX)
V
*1:Withnavigation
SILAS
UNLOCK
SW
DOOR
LOCK
KNOB
A12
AUDIO-
NAVIGATION O P ASSENGER'S
DOOR
UNIT*
or UN LOCK LOCK
KNOB i SECURITY HATCH
AUDIOUNIT*2 LOCK SWITCH nN HW00 .. LATCH
M|\ S ITD
CH Qft SWITCH
g U (Closed:
A1 (Closed: ^ Hatchopen)
Hoodopen)
PASSENGER'S
DOORLATCH
Xl _a_ _a_ _L
G503 G502 G403 G801
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1127: Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch 10. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector F
(12P).
Input Circuit Malfunction (Simultaneous input
of lock and un l ock signal) 11. Check for continuity between body ground and
under-dash fuse/relay box connector F (12P)
NOTE: terminals No. 3 (UNLOCK) and No. 4 (LOCK)
If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to individually.
follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (12P)
You will need two keys to do this troubleshooting.
LOCK (PNK) UNLOCK (GRY)
ON (II). 6 5 4 3 2 1
3. Insert the ignition key into the driver's door key 12 11 10 9 8 7
cylinder, and turn the key to the LOCK and UNLOCK
positions at least 10 times.
Is D T C B 1 1 2 7 in d ic a t e d ? Wire side of female term i nals
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the driver's door key cylinder Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
switch system is OK at this time. Check for loose or YES-Repair a short to ground in the LOCK or UNLOCK
poor connections. wire.B
5. With the driver's door key cylinder in the neutral NO-Go to step 12.
position, select KEYLESS TRANSMITTER with the
HDS, and enter the DATA LIST. 12. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
box connector F (12P) terminals No. 3 (UNLOCK) and
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR No. 4 (LOCK).
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
A r e b o th in fo r m a tio n in d ic a t o r s O F F ?
YES-The MICU is faulty. Replace the under-dash LOCK (PNK) UNLOCK (GRY)
fuse/relay box.B
00
CM
6 5 4 1
00
12 11 10 9 7
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator/knob
switch 10P connector. Wire side of female terminals
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST. YES-Repair a short in the wire between the LOCK and
UNLOCK wires.
A r e b o th in fo r m a tio n in d ic a t o r s O F F ?
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
YES-Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch; replace box.H
the driver's door latch (see page 20-11 ) . USA models (see page 22-82)
NO-Go to step 9. Canada models (see page 22-83)

DTC B1128: Driver's Door Remote Switch 10. Check for continuity between body ground
under-dash fuse/relay box connector F (12P)
Input Circuit Malfunction (Simultaneous input
terminals No. 11 (LOCK) and No. 6 (UNLOCK)
of lock and unlock signal) individually.
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (12P)
UNLOCK (LT GRN)
2. Lock and unlock the driver's door with the driver's
door lock switch. 6 5 4 3 2 1
3. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 12 11 10 9 8 7
I LOCK(GRN)
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the driver's door lock switch
Wire side of fema l e terminal s
system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections.!
is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
4. With the driver's door lock switch in the neutral
position, select KEYLESS TRANSMITTER from the YES-Repair a short to ground in the LOCK or UNLOCK
HDS and enter the DATA LIST. wire.BI
5. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR NO-Go to step 11.
LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK
SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
box connector F (12P) terminals No. 11 (LOCK) and
A r e b o th in fo r m a tio n in d ic a t o r s O F F ? No. 6 (UNLOCK).
YES-The MICU is faulty. Replace the under-dash

fuse/relay box.H UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (12P)
Canada models (see page 22-83) UNLOCK (LT GRN)
NO-Go to step 6.
6 5 4 3 2 1
6. Disconnect the power window master switch
connector. 12 11 10 9 8 7
LOCK (GRN)
7. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK
SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
A r e b o th in fo r m a tio n in d ic a t o r s O F F ? Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?
YES-Faulty door lock switch; replace the power YES-Repair a short in the wire between the LOCK and
window master switch (see page 22-289). UNLOCK wires.B
NO-Go to step 8. NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay

box.ll
9. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector F Canada models (see page 22-83)
(12P).
DTC B1129: Driver's Door Knob Switch Input 7. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator/knob
Circuit Ma l function (Simultaneous input of
lock and unlock signal) 8. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Test Mode A (see page 22-126). A r e b o th in fo r m a tio n in d ic a t o r s O F F ?
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. YES-Check for an open in the driver's door lock knob
switch (LOCK) wire or the driver's door lock knob
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to switch (UNLOCK) wire between the MICU and the
ON (II). driver's door lock knob switch. If OK, replace the
3. Operate the driver's door lock knob switch several driver's door latch (see page 20-11 ) M
times. NO-Go to step 9.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is D T C B 1 1 2 9 in d ic a t e d ? 10. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector F
YES-Go to step 5. (12P).
NO-lntermittent failure, the driver's door lock knob 11. Check for continuity between body ground
switch is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor under-dash fuse/relay box connector F (12P)
connections. terminals No. 5 (UNLOCK) and No. 10 (LOCK)
individually.
5. Select KEYLESS TRANSMITTER from the BODY
ELECTRICAL menu, and enter the DATA LIST.
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and the DRIVER'S ---------- UNLOCK (LT BLU)
DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK).
6 5 4 3 2 1
A r e t h e D R I V E R S D O O R L O C K K N O B S W I T C H ( L O C K )
i n f o r m a t i o n i n d i c a t o r O N a n d t h e D R I V E R S D O O R 12 11 10 9 8 7
L O C K K N O B S W IT C H ( U N L O C K ) in fo r m a tio n in d ic a t o r LOCK (YEL)
O F F w i t h t h e d r i v e r s d o o r l o c k k n o b s w i t c h i n L O C K
p o s i t i o n , a n d a r e t h e D R I V E R S D O O R L O C K K N O B
S W IT C H ( L O C K ) in fo r m a tio n in d ic a t o r O F F a n d th e
D R I V E R S D O O R L O C K K N O B S W I T C H ( U N L O C K )
i n f o r m a t i o n i n d i c a t o r O N w i t h t h e d r i v e r s d o o r l o c k k n o b Wire side of female terminals
s w it c h in U N L O C K p o s it io n ?
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

box.Hl
YES-Repair a short to ground in the LOCK or UNLOCK
wire.11
NO-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 7.
box connector F (12P) terminals No. 5 (UNLOCK) and
No. 10 (LOCK).
UNLOCK (LT BLU)
6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7
LOCK (YEL)
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the LOCK wire

and UNLOCK wire.B
box.B
Power Door Locks/Keyless

1. Check for B-CAN DTCs. If any B-CAN DTCs are indicated, refer to the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page
22-126), and resolve them first.
2. If the door lock system and the keyless operation do not work, troubleshoot the door locks first.
NOTE: The system does not function when the ignition switch is ON (II).
Symptom Check Items Also check for

The security system sounds randomly Tripped sensor history (see page 22-183)
while the doors are locked.
Both doors will not lock or unlock with the Poor ground (G501, G502) oran open in the Faulty door lock
door lock switch or the transmitter. ground wire actuator (see page
Driver's door will lock and unlock with the Blown No. B27 (20 A) and/or No. B45 (20A) 22-176)
door key cylinder switch. fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box
Blown No. B35 (7.5A), No. B36 (10A) and/or
No. B49 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
Door switch test (check the door switch
ON/OFF information with the HDS)
Door lock switch test (check the door
switch ON/OFF information with the HDS)
MICU input test (see page 22-171)
Driver's door will not lock or unlock. Poor ground (G501, G502) or an open in the Faulty door lock
ground wire actuator (see page
Blown No. B27 (20 A) fuse in the 22-176)
Blown No. B36 (10 A) and/or No. B45 (20A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box
Passenger's door will not lock or unlock. Poor ground (G501, G502) oran open in the Faulty door lock
ground wire actuator (see page
Blown No. B27 (20 A) fuse in the 22-176)
Blown No. B35 (7.5 A) and/or No. B49 (7.5
A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box
Driver's door key cylinder switch test (see
page 22-178)
Hatch will not release. Poor ground (G501, G502, G801) Faulty hatch release
Blown No. B45 (20 A) fuse in the actuator (see page
under-dash fuse/relay box 22-179)
Hatch outer handle switch test (check the
trunk lid/tailgate switch ON/OFF
information with the HDS)
Keyless operation does not work (LOCK, Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-158)
UNLOCK, PANIC).
Doors will not unlock with the transmitter, Symptom troubleshooting (see page
but will unlock with the door lock switch 22-159)
and the door key cylinder switch. Door lock switch test (check the door
Doors will not lock with the transmitter, Symptom troubleshooting (see page
but will lock with the door lock switch and 22-159)
the door key cylinder switch. Door lock switch test (check the door
Symptom Check Items Also check for
Doors automatically relock 30 seconds Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-158)
after being unlocked with the transmitter
even though a door has been opened.
Only driver's door wil l unlock or door Driver's door lock knob switch test (see page
locks relock immediately after unlocking 22-177)
with the remote.
Keyless operation will work even though Ignition key switch test (see page 22-276)
the ignition key is in the ignition switch.
The horn does not sound when the PANIC Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-159)
button on the transmitter is pressed.
Security alarm system will not arm Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-160)
Doors automatically relock 30 seconds after Keyless operation does not work (LOCKr
being unlocked w ith the transmitter even UNLOCK. PANIC)
though a door has been opened NOTE:
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If If the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons work OK, but the
any DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN System PANIC button does not, see the troubleshooting for
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-126), and The horn does not sound and/or the headlights do not
troubleshoot the indicated DTCs first. flash when the PANIC button on the transmitter is
pressed (see page 22-159).
1. Place the individual map light switch in the DOOR
Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If any
position.
DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN System Diagnosis
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Test Mode A (see page 22-126), and troubleshoot the
indicated DTCs first.
3. Watch the individual map light and the door
indicators on the gauge control module. 1. Insert the key into the ignition switch, but leave the
switch in LOCK (0).
D o th e in d iv id u a l m a p lig h t a n d d o o r in d ic a to r s c o m e o n
w h e n t h e d o o r is o p e n , a n d g o o f f w h e n t h e d o o r is 2. Open the driver's door, and listen for the key-in
c lo s e d ? reminder beeper.
YES-Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay D o e s th e b e e p e r s o u n d ?
box and recheck. If the symptom goes away, replace
YES-Go to step 3.
the original under-dash fuse/relay box.B
NO-Do the ignition switch test (see page 22-100).
between the MICU and each door switch. If the wire is 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
OK, replace the door switch.
4. Try to start the engine.
D o e s th e e n g in e s ta rt?
YES-The immobilizer system is OK, go to step 5.

NO-Go to the immobilizer symptom troubleshooting
(see page 22-193).
6. Do the transmitter test, (see page 22-181)
Is th e t r a n s m it te r O K ?
YES-Replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit

(see page 22-203).
NO-Replace the transmitter.!!
Doors will not unlock (or lock) w ith the The horn does not sound and/or the
transmitter, but will unlock (or lock) w ith the headlights do not flash when the PANIC
door lock switch and the door key cylinder button on the transmitter is pressed
switch NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If
NOTE: any DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN System
Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If any Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-126), and
DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN System Diagnosis troubleshoot the indicated DTCs first.
Test Mode A (see page 22-126), and troubleshoot the 1. Press the PANIC button.
indicated DTCs first.
D o e s th e h o rn s o u n d ?
The security system can be customized in the
multi-information display (MID) to suit the customer's YES-Go to step 3.
needs. For more information about keyless/security
system options, refer to the Owner's Manual. NO-Go to step 2.
1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Press the horn button.
2. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch. D o e s th e h o rn s o u n d ?
3. Close and lock the doors. YES-Go to step 3.
4. Try to lock/unlock the doors with the keyless NO-Test the horn switch and its circuit (see page
transmitter. 22-207).
Do t h e d o o r l o c k a c t u a t o r s w o r k n o r m a l l y ? 3. Turn the headlight switch ON.
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. D o th e h e a d lig h ts c o m e o n ?

Check for loose or poor connections. YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 5. NO-Check the lighting circuit (see page 22-213).
5. Open the driver's door. 4. Do the transmitter test (see page 22-181).
D o e s th e k e y -in r e m in d e r b e e p e r s o u n d ? Is t h e t r a n s m it te r O K ?
YES-Faulty ignition key switch, or a short to ground YES-Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay
on the ignition switch wire. Repair the wire as box, and recheck.B
needed.
NO-Replace the transmitter.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Do the transmitter test, (see page 22-181)
Is th e tr a n s m itte r O K ?
YES-Substitute a known-good immobilizer-keyless

control unit, and recheck. If the problem goes away,
replace the original immobilizer-keyless control unit
(see page 22-203).
NO-Replace the transmitter.!!
Security alarm system will not arm Hatch latch switch circuit troubleshooting
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
any DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN System
2. With the hatch closed, select SECURITY with the HDS,
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-126), and
and enter the DATA LIST.
troubleshoot the indicated DTCs first.
3. Check the ON/OFF information of the TRUNK LID/TAIL
GATE SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
2. Select SECURITY from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu,
Is d a t a lis t v a lu e in d ic a t e d O N ?
and enter the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.
3. Check the ON/OFF information in the DATA LIST
when each switch is operating. NO-Go to step 8.
TRUNK LID/TAILGATE SWITCH
4. Disconnect the hatch latch switch 2P connector.
SECURITY HOOD SWITCH
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) 5. Check the ON/OFF information of the TRUNK LID/TAIL
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SW GATE SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
(UNLOCK) Is d a t a lis t v a lu e in d ic a t e d O F F ?
DRIVER'S DOOR SWITCH
YES-Faulty hatch latch switch, replace the hatch latch
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH
(see page 20-140).
DRIVER'S DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK)
DRIVERS DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH NO-Go to step 6.
(UNLOCK) 6. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector D
Is t h e e a c h s w it c h e s in fo r m a tio n O K ? (49P).
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 7. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
tim eJI box connector D (49P) terminal No. 17 and body
ground.
NO-Troubleshoot the indicated cireuit.il
Hatch latch switch circuit troubleshooting (see page
22-160). UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR D (49P)
Security hood switch circuit troubleshooting (see
page 22-162).
Driver's door lock knob switch circuit
troubleshooting (see page 22-163). ilflfTTlfR R e R F M RlTTTTpipil tr
|18|17|16| ' |l5|l4h3|~ |l2|ll|lor
Passenger's door lock knob switch circuit |45)27l2(|2s|44pi] [^24|23|22[4i|4o| |39j2l|20|l9[38]37|
T/G SW (ORN)
Driver's door switch circuit troubleshooting (see
page 22-167).
Passenger's door switch circuit troubleshooting
(see page 22-168).
Driver's door key cylinder switch circuit Wire side of female terminals
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.H

box.B
9. Connect hatch latch switch 2P connector terminal 12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector D (49P)
No. 1 and body ground with a jumper wire. terminal No. 17 and body ground with a jumper wire.
HATCH LATCH SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR D (49P)

T/G SW (ORN) R eiyTylffisi] RrrrrrRii] a
JUMPER WIRE |18|17|16| |1 5 |1 4 [1 3 |~ ~ |12|11|101
49 I|45|27l2l [2s|44143| [4^24|23l22[4l~|40l |39j2ll20|l9|38|37|
T /G SW (ORN)
Wire side of female terminals JUMPER WIRE
10. Check the ON/OFF information of the TRUNK LID/TAIL

Is data list value indicated ON? 13. Check the ON/OFF information of the TRUNK LID/TAIL
YES-Go to step 11.
Is data list value indicated ON?
NO-Go to step 12.
YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the w ire.B
11. Check for continuity between hatch latch switch 2P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
box.B
HATCH LATCH SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR USA models (see page 22-82)
GND (BLK)
YES-Faulty hatch latch switch; replace the hatch latch

(see page 20-140).B
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire or
poor ground (G801 ).B
S ecurity hood sw itch circu it trou blesh ooting 9. Connect security hood switch 2P connectorterminal
No. 1 and body ground with a jumper wire.
2. With the hood closed, select SECURITY with the HDS, SECURITY HOOD SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
and enter the DATA LIST.
3. Check the ON/OFF information of the SECURITY

HOOD SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
HOOD SW (PUR)
JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 8.
4. Disconnect the security hood switch 2P connector.
5. Check the ON/OFF information of the SECURITY 10. Check the ON/OFF information of the SECURITY
HOOD SWITCH in the DATA LIST. HOOD SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
Is data list value indicated OFF? Is data list value indicated ON?
YES-Faulty security hood switch; replace the hood YES-Go to step 11.
latch (see page 20-135).
NO-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 6.
11. Check for continuity between security hood switch 2P
6. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector A connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
(36P).
7. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay SECURITY HOOD SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
box connector A (36P) terminal No. 28 and body
ground.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR A (36P) GND (BLK)
33 32 [24 )6| 5 | 4 M 22 I |ii] 3 | 2 11 |20|19|

|i2liiTioT if fllfr ^ Wire side of female terminals
36 35 |30)18|17116[29~l28| [27]15114[13[26~[25l
T = rl E Is there continuity?
YES-Faulty security hood switch; replace the hood

latch (see page 20-135).B

Wire side of female terminals poor ground (G403).B
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B

box.B
12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector A (36P) Driver's door lock knob switch circuit
terminal No. 28 and body ground with a jumper wire.
troubleshooting
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR A (36P)
2. With the driver's door lock knob switch in LOCK
position, select SECURITY with the HDS, and enter the
DATA LIST.
R y m y l^ l N y rz T y m 3. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR
112|11110[ ~ | 9 | 8I 7|
|3o|18|17|16[29|28| [^15|14|13|26|25| LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
HOOD SW (PUR)
JUMPER WIRE YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 8.
Wire side of female terminals 4. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator/knob
13, Check the ON/OFF information of the SECURITY
HOOD SWITCH in the DATA LIST. LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Is data list value indicated OFF?
YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.B
YES-Faulty driver's door lock knob switch; replace the
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay door latch (see page 20-11 ).B
box.B
NO-Go to step 6.
Canada models (see page 22-83) 6. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector
F (12P).
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Is data list value indicated OFF?
YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire.B

box.B
8. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator/knob

9. Connect driver's door lock actuator/knob switch 10P 12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector F (12P)
connector terminal No. 8 and body ground with a terminal No. 5 and body ground with a jumper wire.
jumper wire.

DRIVER S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB
SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR I UNLOCK (LT BLU)
6 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7
10 9 8 7 6 5
JUMPER WIRE
UNLOCK (LT BLU)
JUMPER WIRE


10. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES-Go to step 11.
ISIO-Go to step 12. box.H
11. Check for continuity between driver's door lock
actuator/knob switch 10P connector terminal No. 10 Canada models (see page 22-83)
and body ground.
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB

SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR
YES-Faulty driver's door lock knob switch; replace the

door latch (see page 20-11 ) .
poor ground (G501).H
Passengers door lock knob switch circuit 7. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
box connector Q (34P) terminal No. 28 and body
trou blesh ooting
ground.
2. With the passenger's door lock knob switch in LOCK UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (34P)
position, select SECURITY with the HDS, and enter the
DATA LIST.
n_ I _1ju . I T1 _r1_ _n
3. Check the ON/OFF information of the FRONT 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SW (UNLOCK) in 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
the DATA LIST. UNLOCK (PUR)
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 8.
4. Disconnect the passenger's door lock actuator/knob
5. Check the ON/OFF information of the FRONT
PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SW (UNLOCK) in YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire.B
the DATA LIST.
Is data list value indicated OFF? box.B
YES-Faulty passenger's door lock knob switch; USA models (see page 22-82)
replace the door latch (see page 20-11 ).B Canada models (see page 22-83)
NO-Go to step 6. 8. Disconnect the passenger's door lock actuator/knob

6. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector
Q (34P).
9. Connect passenger's door lock actuator/knob switch 12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (34P)
10P connectorterminal No. 7 and body ground with a terminal No. 28 and body ground with a jumper wire.
jumper wire.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (34P)
PASSENGER S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
4 3 2 1 UNLOCK (PUR)
10 9 8 7 6 5 JUMPER WIRE
UNLOCK (PUR)
JUMPER WIRE

Wire side of fem a l e terminals

10. Check the ON/OFF information of the FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SW (UNLOCK) in
PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SW (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
the DATA LIST.
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 12. box.B
11. Check for continuity between passenger's door lock
actuator/knob switch 10P connector terminal No. 5 Canada models (see page 22-83)
and body ground.
PASSENGER S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB

4 3 2 I 1
10 9 8 7 6 5
GND (BLK)
YES-Faulty passenger's door lock knob switch;

replace the door latch (see page 20-11 ).B

poor ground (G502).B
Driver's door switch circuit troubleshooting 8. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
box connector D (49P) terminal No. 26 and body
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ground.
2. With the driver's door closed, select SECURITY with
the HDS, and enter the DATA LIST. UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR D (49P)
SWITCH in the DATA LIST.

j lg jrftfF I PtfTfTflfW WfTfTTliiFI 01
|18|17116| ~ Il5|l4 h 3|~ ~ |l 2 |ll|lo r
YES-Go to step 4. |45|27|28|25|44i43| |^24|23|22|4l| 4oj |ag|21 N t9|3e(37|
NO-Go to step 9.
DOOR SW (DR) (PNK)
4. Remove the driver's door switch.
5. Disconnect the driver's door switch 1P connector.
6. Check for continuity between driver's door switch 1P Wire side of female termina l s
connector and switch ground.
YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire.B

box.B
9. Remove the driver's door switch.
10. Disconnect the driver's door switch 1P connector.
11. Check for continuity between the driver's door switch

1P connector and switch ground.
DRIVER S DOOR SWITCH

Is there no continuity when the switch is pushed and is
there continuity when the switch is released?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Faulty driver's door switch; replace the driver's

door s w itc h .!
7. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector D

(49P).

YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Faulty driver's door switch; replace the driver's

door switch.B
(cont'd)
12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector D (49P) Passenger's door sw itch circu it
troublesh ooting
2. With the passenger's door closed, select SECURITY
with the HDS, and enter the DATA LIST.

Rfm yliiH ReTsTTffl HTIaTTffl PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
Il8 ll7 ll6 l |15|14|13| I 12 10
IIII I
|45|27|26|25[44|43] |42]24l23l22[4ll4o | |39|21 |20l 19[3s|37|
Is data list value Indicated ON?
DOOR SW (DR) (PNK) YES-Go to step 4.
JUMPER W I RE
NO-Go to step 9.
4. Remove the passenger's door switch.

Wire side of female terminals 5. Disconnect the passenger's door switch 1P connector.
13. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR 6. Check for continuity between passenger's door
SWITCH i n the DATA LIST. switch 1P connector and switch ground.

PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH

box.B

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Faulty passenger's door switch; replace the
passenger's door switch.B
7. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector D

(49P).
8. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay 12. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector D (49P)
box connector D (49P) terminal No. 27 and body terminal No. 27 and body ground with a jumper wire.
ground.

B p|18|17|16|
p rjjg mppdpm BM M Si tr
|15|14|13|~ ' |12|11|10T
RiTiTTHiil ES teS Ri HFppI |45|2Vl26|2s|44p3| |g24[23|22{4i|4p| |y |2oll9{38|i7|
|18|17|16| Iis|l4|l3r~~ _|l2ill|l0|
[45j27|26l25|44|43| [4^24l23|22)41piol [ag]21120|19[3s|i?1
DOOR SW (AS) (BRN)
DOOR SW (AS) (BRN) JUMPER WIRE

Is there continuity? PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH in the DATA LIST.
YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire.B Is data list value indicated ON?
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.B
box.B
box.B
m Canada models (see page 22-83)
9. Remove the passenger's door switch. 9 Canada models (see page 22-83)
10. Disconnect the passenger's door switch 1P connector.
11. Check for continuity between passenger's door

switch 1P connector and switch ground.
PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH

YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Faulty passenger's door switch; replace the

passenger's door switch.B
Driver's door key cylinder switch circuit 7. Check for continuity between driver's door lock
actuator/knob switch 10P connectorterminal No. 10
troubleshooting and body ground.
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If
any DTC is indicated, refer to the B-CAN System DRIVERS DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-126), and SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR
troubleshoot the indicated DTCs first.

2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the driver's door
lock actuator/knob switch.
3. Connect driver's door lock actuator/knob switch 10P
connector terminal No. 6 and body ground with a
jumper wire.
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB Wire side of female terminals


CM
4 I 3 box.H
10 9 7 6 5
00

LOCK (PNK)
JUMPER WIRE
poor ground (G501 ) M
Wire side of fem a l e termina l s 8. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box connector F (12P)
4. Select SECURITY with the HDS, and enter the DATA

LIST. UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (12P)
5. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK (PNK)

KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) in the DATA LIST.
6 5 4 3 1
CM

12 11 10 8 7
CO
YES-Go to step 6.
JUMPER WIRE
NO-Go to step 8.
6. Test the door key cylinder switch (see page 22-178).
Is the switch OK? Wire side of female termina l s

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch; replace 9. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR
the door latch (see page 20-11 ) . KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.11

box.H
M IC U In p u t T e s t
NOTE:
Before testing, make sure the turn signal/hazard warning lights work properly.
Before testing, check the No. B1 (15 A), No. B20 (15 A), No. B22 (7.5 A), No. B23 (10A), No. B24 (10A), No. B27 (20 A),
No. B35 (7.5 A), No. B36 (10 A), No. B45 (20 A), No. B49 (7.5 A), and No. B60 (50 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay
box.
There are two circuits that each have a pair of fuses (No. 35 and No. 49 fuses, No. 36 and No. 45 fuses). If one fuse is
blown, make sure to check the other fuse in the same circuit. If necessary, replace the blown fuse(s).
2. Remove the fuse lid panel (see page 20-85), and remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-85).
3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors A, B, D, F, G, N, Q, R, Y, AA, and AD.
CONNECTOR A (36P) CONNECTOR B (36P)

BLU
|ii| 61514 123I22I [ii] 3I 2 I 1 120I19I [25I |24|rr^23|22| [21]312| 1|2o|l9|

I12I11I10I I 9 I 8| 7 I J I12I11I10I . . . . . .
[30]l8|l7|l6|29|ii| |27jl5|l4|l3|26j [ii| |3l|l8|l7|l6[3o|29| [2g|1s|14|13|27|26|
\ -
PUR WHT
CONNECTOR D (49P) CONNECTOR F (12P) CONNECTOR G (6P)

ORN LT GRN LTBLU PNK GRY PUR
liiirnlTTliSH I33]e1514132I31I [5o|3 12 11 M 28! 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 I1 1

liir M ..'w i i i r .. 6 5 4 3
49 b fl 1 |4^l |42j24|23|22|4l|40| 392120
[ ) 1 119138|37| 12 11 10 9 8 7 Li L
/ \
BRN PNK GRN YEL
CONNECTOR N (10P) CONNECTOR Q (34P) CONNECTOR R (8P)

BLK BLK
n..... n
___n
4 1 1 _11_ _j,1_L, -1_E]_ _r1_ _n
CO
CM
f t 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 I-----1 2 1
10 7 6 L-
5
00
9 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
LfT* 8 7 6 5 4 ,
Li
GRN PNK BLU BLK GRN PUR YEL GRY
CONNECTOR Y(16P) CONNECTOR AA(28P) CONNECTOR AD (1P)
GRN RED
1 n ir i n n
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 fa
?8 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
\ /
BLK YEL
4, Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
5. With the connectors still disconnected, do the following input tests:
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result
is not obtained
N6 BLU Connect the battery Check actuator operation: Faulty driver's door lock
AA0 RED positive terminal to The driver's door lock actuator
G1 PUR terminal N6, and actuator should unlock. An open or high resistance in
connect terminal AA6 the wire
and G1 to body ground Faulty driver's door unlock
relay
Poor ground (G501) or an
open in the ground wire
G1 PUR Connect the battery Check actuator operation: Faulty driver's door lock
positive terminal to The driver's door lock actuator
terminal G1 actuator should lock. An open or high resistance in
the wire
Faulty driver's door unlock
relay
N10 GRN Connect the battery Check actuator operation: Faulty passenger's door lock
N9 PNK positive terminal to The left rear door lock actuator
terminal N10 (N9), and actuator should lock (or An open or high resistance in
connect terminal N9 unlock). the wire
(N10) to body ground
N6 BLU Connect the battery Check actuator operation: Faulty hatch release actuator
027 YEL positive terminal to The hatch release actuator An open or high resistance in
terminal N6, and should work. the wire
connect terminal 027 Faulty hatch release actuator
to body ground relay
A20 BLU Under all conditions Connect terminal A20 and Faulty horn
terminal B32 with a jumper An open or high resistance in
wire: The horn should sound. the wire
Poor ground
6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and do the following input tests.
If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box:
- USA models (see page 22-82)
- Canada models (see page 22-83)
is not obtained
R2 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501)
positions ground: There should be less An open or high resistance in
than 0.2 V. the wire
N5 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G502)
Y16 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501)
Q2 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G502)
Q29 GRN Under all conditions Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G503) or an
ground: There should be less open in the ground wire
than 0.2 V.*3 Faulty audio-navigation
unit*1 or audio unit*2
the wire
D1 PNK Hatch outer handle Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G801) or an
switch pressed ground: There should be less open in the ground wire
than 0.2 V. An open or high resistance in
the wire
Faulty hatch outer handle
switch
B32 W HT Under all conditions Measure the voltage to Blown No. A3 (20 A) fuse in
ground: There should be the battery terminal fuse box
battery voltage. An open or high resistance in
the wire
AD1 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to Blown No. A1 (100 A) fuse in
battery voltage. Blown No. B60 (IGN) (50 A)
fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
Faulty ignition switch
the wire
*1: With navigation
*3: If the factory-installed audio unit or audio-navigation unit is removed from the vehicle, this voltage will be
between 1012V.
is not obtained
D26 PNK Driver's door open Measure the voltage to Faulty driver's door switch
ground: There should be less Faulty driver's door switch
than 0.2 V. ground
the wire
Driver's door closed Measure the voltage to Faulty driver's door switch
ground: There should be at A short to ground in the wire
least 5 V.
D27 BRN Passenger's door open Measure the voltage to Faulty passenger's door
ground: There should be less switch
than 0.2 V. Faulty passenger's door
switch ground
the wire
Passenger's door Measure the voltage to Faulty passenger's door
closed ground: There should be at switch
least 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
D17 ORN Hatch open Measure the voltage to Faulty hatch latch switch
ground: There should be less Poor ground (G801) or an
than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
the wire
Hatch closed Measure the voltage to Faulty hatch latch switch
least 5 V.
A28 PUR Hood open Measure the voltage to Faulty security hood switch
ground: There should be less Poor ground (G403) or an
than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
the wire
Hood closed Measure the voltage to Faulty security hood switch
least 5 V.
F10 YEL Driver's door lock knob Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501) or an
switch in LOCK ground: There should be less open in the ground wire
than 0.2 V. Faulty driver's door lock
knob switch
the wire
Driver's door lock knob Measure the voltage to Faulty driver's door lock
switch in UNLOCK ground: There should be at knob switch
F5 LT BLU Driver's door lock knob Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501) or an
switch in UNLOCK ground: There should be less open in the ground wire
than 0.2 V. Faulty driver's door lock
knob switch
the wire
Driver's door lock knob Measure the voltage to Faulty driver's door lock
switch in LOCK ground: There should be at knob switch
is not obtained
Q28 PUR Passenger's door lock Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G502) or an
knob switch in ground: There should be less open in the ground wire
UNLOCK than 0.2 V. Faulty passenger's door lock
knob switch
the wire
Passenger's door lock Measure the voltage to Faulty passenger's door lock
knob switch in LOCK ground: There should be at knob switch
Q18 GRY Ignition key inserted Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G502) or an
into the ignition switch ground: There should be less open in the ground wire
than 0.2 V. Faulty ignition key switch
the wire
Ignition switch in LOCK Measure the voltage to Faulty ignition key switch
(0), and the ignition key ground: There should be at A short to ground in the wire
removed from the least 5 V.
ignition switch
F4 PNK Driver's door key Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501) or an
cylinder switch in ground: There should be less open in the ground wire
LOCK than 0.2 V. Faulty driver's door key
cylinder switch
the wire
Driver's door key Measure the voltage to Faulty driver's door key
cylinder switch in ground: There should be at cylinder switch
neutral or UNLOCK least 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
F3 GRY Driver's door key Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501) or an
cylinder switch in ground: There should be less open in the ground wire
UNLOCK than 0.2 V. Faulty driver's door key
cylinder switch
the wire
Driver's door key Measure the voltage to Faulty driver's door key
cylinder switch in ground: There should be at cylinder switch
neutral or LOCK least 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
F11 GRN Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501) or an
switch in LOCK ground: There should be less open in the ground wire
than 0.2 V. Faulty door lock switch
the wire
Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to Faulty door lock switch
switch in neutral or ground: There should be at A short to ground in the wire
UNLOCK least 5 V.
F6 LT GRN Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501) or an
switch in UNLOCK ground: There should be less open in the ground wire
than 0.2 V. Faulty door lock switch
the wire
Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to Faulty door lock switch
switch in neutral or ground: There should be at A short to ground in the wire
LOCK least 5 V.
Door Lock Actuator Test
Driver's Door Passengers Door

1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-4). 1. Remove the passenger's door panel (see page 20-4).
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the door latch 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the door latch
(B). (B).
.....q' F=\
4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and
ground according to the table. To prevent damage to ground according to the table. To prevent damage to
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.
Terminal Terminal
4 3 2 1
Position 9. Position
LOCK LOCK
UNLOCK UNLOCK
4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, the 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, the
actuator is faulty; replace the driver's door latch (see actuator is faulty; replace the passenger's door latch
page 20-11). (see page 20-11).
Door Lock Knob Switch Test
Driver's Door Passenger's Door

1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-4). 1. Remove the passenger's door panel (see page 20-4).
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the door latch 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the door latch
(B). (B).
n L F =l n
4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5
3. Check for continuity between the terminals. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals.
and No. 10 when the door lock knob switch is in the
and No. 5 when the door lock knob switch in the
LOCK position, and no continuity when the switch is
UNLOCK position, and no continuity when the switch
in the UNLOCK position.
is in the LOCK position.
and No. 10 when the door lock knob switch is in the 4. If the continuity is not as specified, the switch is faulty;
UNLOCK position, and no continuity when the replace the passenger's door latch (see page 20-11).
switch is in the LOCK position.
Check for continuity between terminals No. 9 and
No. 8 of door lock knob switch. There should be no
continuity in either the LOCK or UNLOCK positions.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, the switch is faulty;

replace the driver's door latch (see page 20-11).
Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Driver's Door Lock Switch Test
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-4). 1. Remove the power window master switch, and
disconnect its connector (see page 22-289).
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the door latch
(B).
CM
10 9 T16 15 14 1 3 1
19
CM
o
22 21 14 13 12
2. Check for continuity between the power window

master switch 22P connector terminals.
There should be continuity between terminals
No. 21 and No. 14 when the door lock switch is in
3. Check for continuity between the terminals. the LOCK position.
There should be continuity between terminals No. 7 There should be no continuity between the
and No. 10 when the door key cylinder switch is in terminals No. 21 and No. 14 when the door lock
the UNLOCK position. switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position.
There should be no continuity between terminals There should be continuity between the terminals
No. 7 and No. 10 when the door key cylinder switch No. 19 and No. 14 when the door lock switch is in
is in the neutral or LOCK position. the UNLOCK position.
There should be continuity between terminals No. 6 There should be no continuity between the
and No. 10 when the door key cylinder switch is in terminals No. 19 and No. 14 when the door lock
the LOCK position. switch is in the neutral or LOCK position.
There should be no continuity between terminals There should never be continuity between
No. 6 and No. 10 when the door key cylinder switch terminals No. 19 and No. 21 in any door lock switch
is in the neutral or UNLOCK position. position.
There should be no continuity between terminals
No. 7 and No. 6 when the key is in the neutral
replace the power window master switch (see page
position.
22-289).
replace the driver's door latch (see page 20-11).
Hatch Release Actuator Test Security Hood Switch Test
1. Open the hatch. 1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the hatch lower trim (see page 20-66). 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the security
hood switch (B).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the hatch
release actuator (B).
3. Check for continuity between the terminals.

There should be continuity between the terminals
No. 1 and No. 2 when the hood is opened (lever
released).
4. Check actuator operation by connecting power and There should be no continuity between the
ground according to the table. To prevent damage to terminals No. 1 and No. 2 when the hood is closed
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. (lever pushed down).

Ny Terminal replace the hood latch (see page 20-135).
2 1
Position
UNLOCK
5. If the actuator does not work, the tailgate lock actuator

is faulty; replace the hatch latch (see page 20-140).
Hatch Outer Handle Switch Test/Replacement
1. Open the hatch, and remove the hatch lower trim (see 4. Checkfor continuity between tailgate outer handle
page 20-66). switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
There should be continuity when the hatch outer
2. Remove the hatch outer handle switch (A) from the
handle switch is pressed.
hatch by plastic tool (B).
There should be no continuity when the hatch outer
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the seal. handle switch is released.
replace the hatch outer handle switch.
6. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the hatch outer

handle switch (B).
Transmitter Test
NOTE: 5. Open the transmitter, and check for water damage.

If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but the If you find any water damage, replace the
LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED is transmitter, then register the new transmitter.
faulty; replace the transmitter. If there is no water damage, go to step 6.
If any door is open, you cannot lock the doors with the
transmitter.
If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do
not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the
doors relock automatically.
The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if
the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch.
With HDS
1. Press the transmitter lock or unlock button at least 10
times to reset the transmitter.
If the locks work, the transmitter is OK.
If any of the transmitter buttons do not work,
replace the transmitter, then register the
transmitter programming (see page 22-202).
If the locks don't work, go to step 2.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
3. Select the KEYLESS TRANSMITTER from the BODY

ELECTRICAL, next select INSPECTION, then enter the
6. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one,
KEYLESS CHECK.
and press the lock or unlock button and check the
4. Follow the screen prompts to check each button receive condition on the screen of the HDS.
operation. # If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE WAS
RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK.
NOTE: The door lock actuators may or may not cycle
when receiving input from the transmitter. If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE WAS
NOT RECEIVED is indicated, go to step 7.
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE WAS
RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK.
If DIFFERENT KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
CODE WAS RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter
is working but not registered to the vehicle. If
necessary, reprogram and register the transmitter
(see page 22-202).
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE WAS
NOT RECEIVED is indicated, go to step 5.
Transmitter Test (cont'd)
7. Use a different known-good keyless transmitter Without HDS

assembly, and repeat steps 3 and 4.
NOTE: The keyless transmitter does not need to be
If the engine does not start, go to the immobilizer
programmed to the vehicle for this test.
system troubleshooting (see page 22-195).
If DIFFERENT KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
If the engine starts, go to step 2.
CODE WAS RECEIVED is indicated, replace the
keyless transmitter, and do the immobilizer system 2. Press the transmitter lock or unlock button at least 10
registration (see page 22-202). times to reset the transmitter.
If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE WAS If the locks work, the transmitter is OK.
NOT RECEIVED is indicated, the If the locks don't work, go to step 3.
immobilizer-keyless control unit is faulty, replace it,
and do the immobilizer system registration (see 3. Open the transmitter, and check for water damage.
page 22-202). If you find any water damage, replace the
transmitter and register the new transmitter.
NOTE: The keyless transmitter is combined with the
If there is no water damage, go to step 4.
immobilizer transponder, so when the transponder is
registered by the HDS, the keyless transmitter is also
registered automatically.
Tripped Sensor History
4. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one, The security system stores information on the last
and try to lock and unlock the doors with the tripped sensor if the security system has been actuated.
transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button at The information can be retrieved using the HDS.
least 10 times.
To retrieve the last tripped sensor data, do this:
If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.
If the doors don't lock and unlock, go to step 5. 1. Select HISTORY DATA from the SECURITY MODE
MENU.
2. Scroll through the data list.

Sensors that were actuated will indicate ON.
Sensors that were not actuated will indicate NONE.
3. Inspect the ON circuit for these problems:

Misadjusted or damaged switch.
Loose or corroded connections.
Intermittent short to ground.
NOTE: If PANIC Frame Reception is indicated ON,
inform the customer that it could have been set by
something pressing the panic button of one of the
registered remotes while in a pocket or purse, under a
stack of papers, etc.
5. Reprogram and register the transmitter (see page

22-202), then try to lock and unlock the doors.
If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.
If the doors do not lock and unlock, substitute a
known-good transmitter, register it (see page
22-202) and recheck. If still not operating, replace
the immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page
22-203).
TRANSPONDER
(Built into the transmitter)
Registration, page 22-202
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT
Symptom Troubleshooting, page 22-191
Registration, page 22-202
UNDER-DASH FUSE/
RELAY BOX
(Has a built-in MICU! IMOES UNIT (Built into the MICU)
System Description
The vehicle is equipped with a Type VI immobilizer system that disables the vehicle unless a programmed ignition key is
used.
This system consists of a transponder built into the ignition key, an immobilizer-keyless control unit (has a built-in
receiver), the MICU (has a built-in imoes unit), an immobilizer indicator, and the ECM/PCM.
When the immobilizer key (programmed by the HDS) is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to ON (II), the
immobilizer-keyless control unit sends a signal to the transponder. The transponder then sends a coded signal back to
the immobilizer-keyless control unit, which then sends a coded signal to the ECM/PCM and the MICU (imoes unit).
The ECM/PCM and MICU (imoes unit) identify this coded signal, then voltage is supplied to the fuel pump.
Immobilizer key
* : The immobilizer-keyless control unit can store up to 6 immobilizer keys per vehicle; the original 2 keys that came
w ith the vehicle, and up to four more keys can be added.
If the wrong key is used or the code was not received or recognized, the indicator flashes once, then it blinks until the
ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0). When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK (0) position, the indicator blinks 10
times to signal that unit has reset correctly, then the indicator goes off.
Circuit Diagram
- - : CAN line
BATTERY TERMINAL - - : Other communication line
FU SE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1901: Immobilizer Unit Internal Error DTC B1905; Immobilizer Unit Lost
(CPU Error) Communication With M I CU (Door Lock
Switch Message)
DTC B1902: Immobilizer Unit Internal Error
(EEPROM Error) NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs be sure
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs be sure Test Mode A (see page 22-126).
Test Mode A (see page 22-126). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
ON (II). 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
3. Checkfor DTCs with the HDS. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC B1901 or B1902 indicated? Is DTC B1905 indicated?
YES-Replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit YES-Faultyimmobilizer-keyless control unit; replace

(see page 22-203).H the immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page
22-203).
tim e.S
NO-lntermittent failure, the immobilizer-keyless
control unit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections between the immobilizer-keyless control
unit and the MICU.
DTC B1906: Immobilizer Unit Lost 6. Measure the voltage between body ground and
gauge control module 32P connector terminals No. 1
Communication With Gauge Control Module
(A/T Message)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs be sure GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
Test Mode A (see page 22-126). +B BACK UP (PNK)
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1----------------- \

1 6 fl5 |l4 13|12|11 10 |9 | B | -7 6 | 5 | 4 f 3 | 2 T 1 |
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to |32|31|30|29|28 |27|26|25|24|23 |22|21|20|19|18|17
ON (II). IG1 (LT BLU)

Wire side of female termina l s
Is DTC B1906 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 7.
Check for loose or poor connections between the NO-Check the No. B1 (15 A) and the No. B22 (7.5 A)
gauge control module and the immobilizer-keyless fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is
control unit.B blown, replace the fuse and recheck the DTCs. If the
fuses are OK, repair an open in the wire between the
5. From the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT menu, under-dash fuse/relay box and the gauge control
select B-CAN CONTROL UNITS INFORMATION, and m odule.H
then select CHECK CONNECTED CONTROL UNITS.
7. Measure the voltage between body ground and
Is the gauge control module detected? gauge control module 32P connector terminals No. 4
YES-Go to step 8. and No. 32 individually.
NO-Go to step 6. GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR
SG (BLK)
[j-----------------n I
16 15|14 |13 |12|11 10 |9 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 ) 4 f s | 2 | 1 |
|32|31 |30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
PG (BLK)
Is there less than 0.2 V?
YES-Go to step 8.
poor ground (G501).B

(16P).
10. Checkfor continuity between immobilizer-keyless

control unit 7P connector terminal No. 4 and gauge
control module 32P connector terminal No. 31.

Wire side of fema l e terminals
CD
00
"Nl
16 1s|i4 13|12|11 6|5|4l3|2fl|

o
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
B-CAN (GRN)
V*
B-CAN (GRN)
<r ~?
CO
CM
7 6 5 4 1
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT 7P CONNECTOR
22-354).
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the w ire.B

Symptom Troubleshooting Information
General Check Before Troubleshooting

Before troubleshooting the immobilizer system, check the following general items and solve any applicable system
issues:
The battery is low; charge the battery fully, then troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
The ignition key is not a genuine Honda part; use a Honda-approved key blank, register the key, then troubleshoot the
immobilizer system.
A key ring, keys, or a key case is used; remove the key from it, and troubleshoot the immobilizer system with the key
only.
An aftermarket electrical part is installed; remove it, then troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
Symptom Troubleshooting Using the Immobilizer Indicator Lighting Pattern

The pattern of the immobilizer indicator can help troubleshoot the condition of the immobilizer system. Here are
descriptions of the four possible patterns:
Normal operation
If the immobilizer code is identified, the immobilizer indicator quickly flashes once when the ignition switch is turned to
ON (II).
The immobilizer indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
Immobilizer code is not identified
If the immobilizer code is not identified, the immobilizer indicator quickly flashes once, then blinks until the ignition
switch is turned to LOCK (0). When the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks 10 times, then goes OFF
to show the system has correctly reset.
The state of the immobilizer key registration and the S-NET line can be checked by doing a SYSTEM CHECK (see page
22-196) and STATUS LOG (see page 22-198) with the HDS.
Immobilizer indicator does not come on
If the immobilizer indicator does not come on after turning the ignition switch to ON (II), there is an open or short in the
F-CAN lines between the ECM/PCM and the gauge control module. Watch the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). If the
MIL stays on, go to the PGM-FI system troubleshooting (see page 11-3).
Immobilizer indicator does not go off
If the immobilizer indicator does not go off after turning the ignition switch to ON (II), do the gauge control module
self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325). If the indicator drive circuit is OK, do the SYSTEM CHECK (see page 22-196)
and STATUS LOG (see page 22-198) with the HDS.
(cont'd)
Symptom Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
Symptom Troubleshooting Using Malfunctioning Circuit Functions

If a malfunction occurs in the immobilizer circuit use the table to cross-reference the malfunction criteria to the line(s)
that should be checked in the table:
Function
Line Error \
Immobilizer Engine Start Key Tester
Terminal Indicator Registration Keyless Operation
Communication
No. Cause of
(WireColor) Malfunction
7 +B l ine open Comes on,

Possible Possible Possible Impossible
(PNK) or short then goes off.
6 IG1 l ine open Blinking Impossible Impossible Impossible Possible

(BRN) or short
5 S-NET line
open or short Blinking Impossible Impossible Impossible Possible
(PNK)
Immobilizer:
4 B-CAN l ine Comes on, Possible
(GRN) open or short then goes off. Possible Impossible Impossible
Keyless:
Impossible
3 K-LINE line Comes on,
(BLU) then goes off. Possible Impossible Impossible Possible
open or short
KEYSW line Possible
2 open Comes on, (even with the key
Possible Possible Possible in the ignition switch)
(GRY) KEYSW line then goes off.
short to ground Impossible
1 GND (LG) line
(BRN) Blinking I mpossible Impossible Impossible Impossible
open
System Check (Current status) and Status Log (History log if the immobilizer system kept engine
from running)
NOTE: The HDS can be used to:
Check the state of the immobilizer key registration and the S-NET line by doing a SYSTEM CHECK.
Check the number of times the immobilizer-keyless control unit did not permit the engine to run by checking the
STATUS LOG.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC), then turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and follow the prompts to the
SYSTEM SELECTION MENU.
NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the vehicle, go to DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-383).
2. At SYSTEM SELECTION MENU, enter IMMOBI, then select the IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
3. Do the SYSTEM CHECK. If there is a system check number, do the troubleshooting for the item indicated.
4. Check the STATUS LOG using the HDS (see page 22-198). Troubleshoot the line with the highest counts first. If all the
lines are 0 (zero), the problem may not be caused by the immobilizer system; check for ignition or fuel problems.
Refer to PGM-FI System Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 12-5).
NOTE: Once repaired, clearthe status log by removing the No. B1 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or
disconnecting the battery.
Troubleshoot the immobilizer system in the order shown:
Order of Symptom Possible cause

Priority
1 Immobilizer indicator blinks. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-194).
2 Engine does not start with the Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-195).
immobilizer key.
3 Immobilizer indicator does not come on. Check the MIL indication.
If the MIL comes on, go to the PGM-FI System MIL
If the MIL does not come on, go to the gauge control
module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325).
4 Immobilizer indicator does not go off. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-195).
Immobilizer indicator blinks 9. Back-probe and measure the voltage between

immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the items listed in terminal No. 6 and body ground.
General Check before Troubleshooting (see page
22-191).
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL U N IT 7P CONNECTOR
2. Connect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to _SB -
ON (II). 7 6 4 3 2
3. From the SYSTEM SELECTION MENU, enter IMMOBI, IG1 (BRN)
select IMMOBILIZER SETUP, then select System
Check, Number of Keys, and Status Log.
4. Select the SYSTEM CHECK.
Is SYSTEM CHECK indicated? Wire side of female term inals
YES-Troubleshoot the immobilizer system according Is there battery voltage?

to the result of the SYSTEM CHECK (see page 22-196) YES-Go to step 10.
and STATUS LOG (see page 2 2 -1 9 8 ).
NO-Check for a blown No. B20 (15 A) fuse in the
NO-G o to step 5. under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OKf repair an
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). open in the BRN wire between the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the immobilizer-keyless control
6. Enter the vehicle, and remove the ignition key from unit.H
the ignition switch, then close all doors.
10. Back-probe and measure the voltage between
7. Operate the keyless transmitter LOCK and UNLOCK immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector
several times in the vehicle. terminal No. 1 and body ground.
Do the door lock actuators work normally?
YES-Go to step 8. IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UN IT 7P CONNECTOR
NO-Check for a poor ground (G101) and/oran open or

CT~?
high resistance in the wire between
immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector 3 2
terminal No. 1 and body ground (G101).H LG (BRN)
Is there less than 0.2 V?
YES-Replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit

(see page 22-203).H
NO-Repair a poor connection or an open or high

resistance between immobilizer-keyless control unit
7P connectorterminal No. 1 and body ground
(G101).B
Engine does not start with the immobilizer Immobilizer indicator does not go off
key 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the items listed in 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
General Check before Troubleshooting (see page
22-191). 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
1. Try to start the engine. 4. From the SYSTEM SELECTION MENU, enter IMMOBI,
select IMMOBILIZER SET UP, then select SYSTEM
Does the engine start? CHECK, NUMBER OF KEY, and STATUS LOG.
YES-lntermittent failure, the vehicle is OK at this time NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the
Check STATUS LOG (see page 22-198) and check the immobilizer-keyless control unit, check the power,
line indicated ta b le .il ground, and K-line connectors.
NO-Go to step 2. 5. Do the SYSTEM CHECK with the HDS.
2.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is N-1 indicated?
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the YES-Do the indicator drive circuit check (see page
immobilizer indicator. 22-325). If the indicator does not go off; replace the
Does the indicator blink once, then stay off? gauge control module (see page 22-354).li
YES-Go to step 4. NO-Substitute a known-good immobilizer-keyless

control unit, then register it and recheck. If the
NO-Go to the immobilizer indicator blinks symptom goes away, replace the original
troubleshooting (see page 2 2 -1 9 4 ). immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page 2 2 -2 0 3 ).
4. Turn the ignition switch to START (III).
Does the starter motor run?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to Starting System, and check the starter

motor (see page 4 - 3 ) .
5. Try to start the engine with the immobilizer key.
Does the engine start?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to the PGM-FI System Symptom
Troubleshooting (see page 11-3).H
6. Wait for a few minutes with the engine running.
Does the engine stop?
YES-Go to the PGM-FI System Symptom

Troubleshooting (see page 11 - 3 ) .
NO-The system is OK at this tim e .ll

System Check

3. Monitor the SYSTEM CHECK in the IMMOBILIZER INFO with the HDS.
NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the immobilizer keyless control unit, check the power, ground, and
K-line connectors.
4. If the HDS displays NORMAL N-1, the immobilizer system is OK at this time, refer to the STATUS LOG. If the HDS
displays any other messages, check as follows:
System Status Log. System Check Possible Failures

Check No. Indication
A-1 Possible The key is not This key is not registered in the immobilizer-keyless
registered control unit. Try to register keys using the HDS.
No communication between the antenna and the
immobilizer key because of interference from metal such
as key chains/key rings/other keys.
Low battery voltage.
A-2 Possible Communication Intermittent interruption between transponder and
error between the immobilizer-keyless control unit.
key and The immobilizer key type is different. It is not for this
immobilizer-keyless vehicle but for another one or for another company's one.
control unit Key failure, (transponder failure)
A-3 Possible No communication The ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with a
between the key non-immobilizer key.
and The immobilizer key type is different. It is not for this
immobilizer-keyless vehicle but for another one or for another company's one.
control unit Key failure, (transponder failure)
Immobilizer-keyless control unit failure.
B-1 Possible The ECM/PCM is The ECM/PCM was not registered. Try to register the
not registered ECM/PCM using the HDS.
No communication between the ECM/PCM and the
immobilizer-keyless control unit because of low battery
voltage.
No communication between the immobilizer-keyless
control unit and the ECM/PCM because of electrical
interference.
Open in the IG1 line
B-2 Possible Error of The ECM/PCM was not registered. Try to register the
communication ECM/PCM using the HDS.
format in ECM/PCM No communication between the ECM/PCM and the
voltage.
interference.
System Status Log. System Check Possible Failures
Check No. Indication
C-1 Possible Imoes unit is not Imoes unit was not registered.
registered No communication between the imoes unit and the
voltage.
No communication between the imoes unit and the
immobilizer-keyless control unit because of electrical
interference.
Try to register the imoes unit with the HDS.
C-2 Possible Error of Imoes unit was not registered.
communication No communication between the imoes unit and the
format between immobilizer-keyless control unit because of low battery
Imoes unit. voltage.
interference.
Try to register the imoes unit with the HDS.
D-1 Possible S-NET line short Harness short from the ECM/PCM to the
immobilizer-keyless control unit. (S-NET line short)
No communication between the ECM/PCM and the
voltage.
No communication between the immobilizer-keyless unit
and the ECM/PCM because of electrical interference.
ECM/PCM failure.
D-2 Possible No communication Blown fuse.
between imoes unit Harness open from the imoes unit to the
and immobilizer-keyless control unit. (S-NET line open)
immobilizer-keyless No communication between the imoes unit and the
control unit (S-NET immobilizer-keyless control unit because of low battery
line) voltage.
interference.
Imoes unit failure.
D-3 Possible No communication Blown fuse.
between the Harness open from the ECM/PCM to the
ECM/PCM and immobilizer-keyless control unit.
immobilizer-keyless No communication between the ECM/PCM and the
control unit (S-NET) immobilizer-keyless control unit because of low battery
voltage.
interference.
ECM/PCM failure.
E-1 Initial registration of The immobilizer-keyless control unit is not registered. Try to
E-2 immobilizer-keyless register the immobilizer-keyless control unit using the HDS.
E-3 control unit is not
E-4 completed
E-5
F1 Special Mode Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and to LOCK (0) with the
F-2 registered key.
F-3
F-4
F-5
Status Log
If you suspect there is a immobilizer system problem, check the STATUS LOG in the HDS.
3. On the HDS screen, at SYSTEM SELECTION MENU, enter IMMOBI, then select IMMOBILIZER SETUP, select SYSTEM
CHECK, NUMBER OF KEYS and STATUS LOG, then select STATUS LOG.
4. Check the STATUS LOG count. Troubleshoot the status with the highest count first. If no counts are listed, the
immobilizer system is OK. Continue with normal symptom troubleshooting.
Status Log No. Detected Item Probable Cause
A-1 KEY CO D E M I S M A T C H The key was not registered
(Code format normal, but code I nterference from metal such as key chains
data is mismatched) Low battery voltage
A-2 KEY CODE M IS M A TC H Ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with another type of immobilizer
(Code format failure) key or aftermarket key
Interference from metal such as key chains
Low battery voltage
A-3 KEY CODE M I S M A T C H Ignition switch was turned to ON (II ) with another type of immobilizer
(No key code or key or aftermarket key
non-immobilizer key) Interference from metal such as key chains
Low battery voltage
Key failure
Immobilizer-keyless control unit failure
B-1 ECM/PCM CODE MSSMATCHd) ECM/PCM was not registered correctly
(Code format normal, but code Low battery voltage
data is mismatched) Poor or loose terminal connections at the immobilizer-keyless control
unit
Communication line electrical noise
B-2 ECM/PCM M IS M A TC H * ECM/PCM was not registered correctly
(Code format failure) * Low battery voltage
Poor or loose terminal connections at the immobilizer-keyless control
unit
Communication l ine electrica l noise
C-1 IMOES UNIT M IS M A TC H Imoes unit was not registered
(Code format normal, but data is The communication was not good between imoes unit and
mismatched) immobilizer-keyless contro l unit by battery vo l tage low
The communication was not good between imoes unit and
immobilizer-keyless control unit by influence of some noise
C-2 IMOES UNIT M IS M A TC H Imoes unit was not registered correctly
(Code format failure) The communication was not good between imoes unit and
immobilizer-keyless control unit by battery voltage low
D-1 S-NET LINE PROBLEM Low battery voltage
(Short to ground) Poor or loose terminal connections at the immobilizer-keyless control
unit and the ECM/PCM
Communication l ine electrical noise
D-2 S-NET LINE PROBLEM Blown fuse
(No communication) Harness open from imoes unit to immobilizer-keyless control unit
immobilizer-keyless control unit by battery voltage low
Imoes unit failure
Immobilizer-keyless control unit failure
D-3 S-NET LINE PROBLEM Open or short in the harness from the ECM/PCM to the
(Open l ine or ECM/PCM failure) immobilizer-keyless control unit
Low battery voltage
Poor or loose term ina l connections at the immobilizer-keyless control
unit and the ECM/PCM
Communication line electrical noise
Poor S-NET data communication due to electrical interference
Im m o b iliz e r -K e y le s s C o n tr o l U n it In p u t T e s t
NOTE:
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-11 )f and precautions and
procedures (see page 24-13) before performing repairs or servicing.
Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control unit first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-126).

2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the immobilizer-keyless control unit (B).
(BRN) (GRN) (GRY) (BRN)
3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
4. With the connector still disconnected, do the following input tests:

Cavity Wire Terminal Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
name result is not obtained
4 GRN B-CAN Disconnect the Check for continuity An open or high
gauge control between the terminal No. 4 resistance in the wire
module 32P and the gauge control
connector module 32P connector
terminal No. 31: There
Disconnect Check for continuity An open or high
under-dash between the terminal No. 4 resistance in the wire
fuse/relay box and under-dash fuse/relay
connector Y (16P) box connector Y (16P)
terminal No. 6: There
5 PNK S-NET Disconnect Measure the voltage to A short to ground in the
ECM/PCM connector ground: There should be wire
A (44P)* (see page about 5 V. An open or high
11-6) resistance in the wire
Disconnect the Measure the resistance Faulty imoes unit
battery negative between the terminal No. 5 (built into the MICU)
terminal and body ground: There Faulty under-dash
should be more than fuse/relay box
50 kD. An open or high
resistance in the S-NET
wire
Disconnect Checkfor continuity An open or high
ECM/PCM connector between the terminal No. 5 resistance in the wire
A (44P)* (see page and ECM/PCM connector
11-6) A (44P) terminal No. 44:
There should be
continuity.
*: To disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and jump the SCS line with the HDS.
5. Reconnect the connector to the immobilizer-keyless control unit, and do the following input tests;
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page 22-203).
NOTE: After replacing the immobilizer-keyless control unit, do the immobilizer registration (see page 22-202).
Cavity Wire Terminal Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
name result is not obtained
7 PNK + B BACK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to Blown No. B1 (15 A) fuse
UP ground: There should be in the under-dash
battery voltage. fuse/relay box
An open or high
resistance in the wire
6 BRN IG1 Ignition switch Measure the voltage to o Blown No. B20(15 A) fuse
ON (II) ground: There should be in the under-dash
battery voltage. fuse/relay box
An open or high
2 GRY KEYSW Ignition key inserted Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G502)
into the ignition ground: There should be Faulty ignition key switch
switch less than 0.2 V. An open or high
1 BRN LG In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G101)
position ground: There should be An open or high
less than 0.2 V. resistance in the wire
3 BLU K-LINE Under all conditions Measure the voltage to Faulty control unit on the
ground: There should be K-line
pulse voltage (digital Short to ground in the
signal). K-line wire
Immobilizer Key Registration
NOTE: All Keys are Lost

The HDS is required for registration of the immobilizer
keys. 1. Prepare all new keys and have the immobilizer
ECM/PCM code.
Programming the immobilizer also programs the
keyless transmitter. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
Check for aftermarket electrical equipment that can
cause problems with transponder operation.
The immobilizer-keyless control unit can store up to 4. Select IMMOBI from the System Selection Menu, then
six immobilizer keys. select IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
Add O ne New Key/Keyless Transmitter 5. Select Add and Delete keys, then All keys lost.
1. Have a registered key, a new immobilizer key, and the 6. Do the registration according to the instructions on
first password from the iN system. the HDS screen.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). 7. Check if the engine can be started using all the
registered keys, and check that the door locks operate
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). using the immobilizer key transmitter.
4. Select IMMOBI from the System Selection Menu, then
select IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
5. Select Add and Delete keys, then Add 1 key.
6. Do the registration according to the instructions on

the HDS screen.
7. Check if the engine can be started with the newly
registered key check that the door locks operate using
the immobilizer key transmitter.
Add and Delete keys/Keyless Transmitters*

Then Select Delete or Add keys
1. Have all registered keys, all new keys, and the first
password from the iN system.

4. Select IMMOBI from the System Selection Menu, then

select IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
5. Select Add and Delete Keys, or Delete or Add Multiple

Keys.

the HDS screen.
7. Check if the engine can be started with all the
registered keys check that the door locks operate
using the immobilizer key transmitter.
Registration for Immobilizer Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit
System Replacement
1. Have all registered keys and the ECM/PCM code. NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review
the SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). performing repairs or servicing.
4. Select IMMOBI from the SYSTEM SELECTION MENU, 1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-96).
then select IMMOBILIZER SETUP. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the
5. Select REPLACE IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER/CONTROL immobilizer-keyless control unit (B).
UNIT.
the HDS screen.
7. Check that the engine can be started with all

registered keys, check that the door locks operate
using the immobilizer key transmitter.
3. Remove the two screws and the immobilizer-keyless

control unit.
4. Install the immobilizer-keyless control unit in the

5. After replacement, register the immobilizer-keyless

control unit (see page 22-203), and make sure the
immobilizer system works properly.
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
-USA mode l s, page 22-82
HORN RELAY
Test, page 22-92
HORN (HtGH)/SECURITY HORN

Circuit Diagram
B A TT E R Y
Horn Test/Replacement
Horn (High)/S@ curity Horn Horn (Low)

1. Remove the front bumper center upper beam (see 1. Remove the front bumper center upper beam (see
page 20-149). page 20-149).
2. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-128). 2. Disconnect the 1P connector (A) from the horn (B),
then remove the bolt.
3. Disconnect the 1P connector (A) from the horn (B),
then remove the bolt.
3. Remove the bolt (C).
4. Remove the bolt (C). 4. Test the horn by connecting battery power to the
terminal (A) and body ground to the bracket (B).
5. Test the horn by connecting battery power to the
The horn should sound.
terminal (A) and body ground to the bracket (B).
The horn should sound.
5. If the horn fail to sound, replace it.

Horn Switch Test
NOTE: 6. Disconnect the cable reel subharness 20P connector

SRS components are located in this area. Review the (A) to the cable reel.
performing repairs or servicing.
Check for a blown No. B24 (10 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box. If it is blown, check for a
faulty horn relay.
1 .Turn the steering wheel 180 degrees from the center

position and remove the cover (A).
7. Check for continuity between the cable reel

subharness 20P connector terminal No. 20 and horn
If there is continuity, go to step 8.
If there is no continuity, repair an open in the wire or
faulty cruise control combination switch.
2. Disconnect the horn switch 1P connector (B).
3. Connect the horn switch 1P connector terminal No. 1
and body ground with a jumper wire.
If the horns does not sound, go to step 4.
If the horns sound, go to step 11.
4. Remove the jumper wire from the horn switch 1P

connector.
5. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page

24-166).
(cont'd)
Horn Switch Test (cont'd)
9. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 20P

connector (A) from the cable reel (B).
Wire side of female term i na l s
pjrt-
6 5 4 3 2
16 15 14 13 12
10. Connect the dashboard wire harness 20P connector

The horns should sound.
If the horns does not sound, check these items. If
O K f fa u lty M IC U .
- Horn.
- Horn relay, horn diode.
- An open or high resistance in the wire.
If the horns sounds, replace the cable reel (see page
24-183).
11. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page
24-166).
12. Check the installation of the driver's airbag assembly
and the steering wheel. If OK, replace the driver's
airbag assembly (see page 24-166).

Bulb Replacement, page 22-240
(cont'd)
TAILLIGHT and BRAKE LIGHT

Bulb Replacement page 22-240
BACK-UP LIGHT
Bul b Replacement page 22-240
REAR SIDE MARKER LiGHT
Bulb Replacement page 22-240
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR FOG LI GHT INDICATOR LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
System Description
Headlights System Description

The headlight system is composed of the MICU, the headlight and dimmer/flash-to-pass switches (inside the
combination light switch), the left and right headlights, and the high beam indicator.
The MICU controls the side marker lights, the headlights, the taillights, and the license plate lights.
Low Beams
When you move the headlight switch to the ON position and the dimmer/flash-to-pass switch to the low position, a
ground signal is supplied to terminal No. 13 of under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (34P). The MICU then energizes
the low beam control circuit, supplying battery voltage to the low beam of the headlights, turning them on.
NOTE: If there is a B-CAN communication failure, the headlight high beam indicator will not come on.
High Beams
When you move the headlight switch to the ON position and the dimmer/flash-to-pass switch to the high position,
ground signals are supplied to terminals No. 13 and No. 15 of under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (34P). The MICU
then energizes the high beam headlight control circuits, supplying battery voltage to the high beam headlights, turning
them on.
Flash-to-Pass
When you pull the dimmer/flash-to-pass switch to the passing position, a ground signal is supplied to under-dash
fuse/relay box (MICU) connector Q (34P) terminal No. 14. The MICU then energizes the high beam control circuits for as
long as the switch is held, supplying battery voltage to the high beam headlights, turning them on.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) System Description

The daytime running lights system includes the MICU, the left and right high beam headlights, and the parking brake
switch. The daytime running lights operate with the ignition switch turned to ON (II), the headlights off (headlight switch
OFF or in the parking position), and the parking brake released.
When the daytime running lights are on, the MICU turns the high beam headlight control circuit on and off (duty cycle),
which provides a reduced voltage (approximately 4-8 volts) to the high beam headlights (via the No. B34 [No. B48] and
No. B51 fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box; the high beam headlights come on with reduced brightness. If there is a
problem with the daytime running lights system, the MICU sends a signal to the gauge control module, and the word
"CHECK DRL SYSTEM" shows on the multi-information display (MID).
[]: Without HID
NOTE:
The daytime running lights are disabled when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0). To keep the daytime running
lights from coming on, apply the parking brake switch while the ignition switch is in LOCK (0) position. When you then
turn the ignition switch back to ON (II), the daytime running lights will not come on until the parking brake is released.
The headlights revert to normal operation when you turn them on with the headlight switch.
C ir c u it D ia g r a m - H e a d lig h ts
With HID
B A TTERY TER M IN A L
FUSE B OX U N D E R -D A S H FU SE/RELAY BOX
G501 G 502 G501 G 5 02 G 5 02 G401 G401 G201 G201 G401 G201
(cont'd)
Circuit Diagram - Headlights (cont'd)
*1 ; HIGH BEAM IN D IC A TO R (LED)

* 2 ; LIG H T -O N IN D ICATO R {LED)
- : B-CAN line
GA U G E C O N TR O L M O D U L E C O M B IN A T ION LIG H T SW ITCH

Without HID
BATTERY TERMINAL
G501 G502 G501 G502

Circuit Diagram - Headlights (cont'd)
*1 : HIGH BEAM IN D IC ATO R (LED)

* 2 : LIG H T- O N IN D IC A TO R (LED)
- : B-CAN line
GA U G E C ON TRO L M O D U LE C O M B IN A T IO N LIG H T SW IT C H
Circuit Diagram - Back-up Lights
IG N IT IO N SW ITC H
B A TTE RY TE R M IN A L
C ir c u it D ia g r a m - B r a k e L ig h ts
BATTERYTERMINAL
FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAYBOX
No. A3 (20A)
-< r \jo ------

WHT WHT PUR

C ir c u it D ia g r a m - F o g L ig h ts
: CANline
BATTERYTERMINAL GAUGECONTROLMODULE
FUSEBOX
BATTERY No. A1 (100A)
-"CrvD-----
0 -
CPU/POWERSUPPLYCIRCUIT/
CONTROLLERAREA
NETWORKCONTROLLER
n FOGLIGHT
B-CAN INDICATOR
TRANSCEIVER (LED)
B-CAN
----------------- 1---------------
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAYBOX
GRN
i
I
No, B9
(20A)
MICU IY6
COMBI
FRFOG FRFOG GND
SG RLY SW (LIGHT)
AA4
HT
RED WHT WHT UNDER-DASH
BLK BLK
jC l jQ - _q_ _ ll _Q _
G501 G502 G501 G502 G4Q1 G201

DTC B1078: Daytime Running Light for 9. Check the headlight bulbs.
Canada Circuit Malfunction Are the headlight bulbs OK?
DTC B1079: Daytime Running Light for USA YES-Go to step 10.
Circuit Malfunction NO-Replace the bulb and recheck.B
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure 10. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors A
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis (36P) and B (36P).
11. Disconnect both of the headlight (high beam) 2P
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). connectors.
2. Pull the parking brake lever. 12. Check for continuity between right headlight (high
3. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. beam) 2P connector terminal No. 2 and under-dash
fuse/relay box connector A (36P) terminal No. 27.
4. Release the parking brake lever.
ON (II). Wire side of female terminals

33 32
Is DTC B1078 or B1079 indicated?
36 35
YES-Go to step 7. T-J

Checkfor loose or poor connections.^
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and turn the
R H /L
headlight switch OFF.
8. Check the No. B28, No. B34 [No. B48], and No. B51
fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box. RIGHT HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAM):2P CONNECTOR
[ ]: Without HID Wire side of female terminals
Are all fuses OK? Is there continuity?

NO-Replace the blown fuse, and recheck. If the No. NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire
B28 (20 A) fuse is blown again, replace the under-dash between the right headlight (high beam) and the
fuse/relay box. If the No. B34 (10A) [No. B48 (10 A)] or under-dash fuse/relay box.H
No. B51 (10 A) fuse is blown again, repair a short in
the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and
the appropriate headlight (high beam ).H
13. Check for continuity between left headlight (high 14. Check for continuity between each headlight (high
beam) 2P connector terminal No. 2 and under-dash beam) 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
fuse/relay box connector B (36P) terminal No. 29
[No. 20]. HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAM) 2P CONNECTOR
[.]: Without HID
W ith HID
GND (BLK)
Wire side of female term ina l s

box.H
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the BLK wire

LEFT HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAM) 2P CONNECTOR or poor ground (G201-right side, G401-left side).H
W ithout HID
L H /L H IG H (PNK)
LEFT HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAM) 2P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 14.

between the left headlight (high beam) and the
under-dash fuse/ relay box.IB
DTC B1275; Headl ight switch OFF Position 5. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system
select menu, and enter the DATA LIST.
Circuit Malfunction
6. Check each combination light switch position value
DTC B1276: Headl ight Switch PARKING with the DATA LIST menu.
Position Circuit Ma l function
When the combination light switch is turned OFF
DTC B1277: Headl ight switch AUTO Position Data List Value
Circuit Malfunction Headlight Switch (OFF) ON
Headlight Switch (PARKING) OFF
DTC B1278; Headl ight switch ON Position Headlight Switch (AUTO) OFF
Circuit Malfunction Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure When the combination light switch is turned to
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis PARKING
Test Mode A (see page 22-126). Data List Value
Headlight Switch (OFF) OFF
Headlight Switch (PARKING) ON
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to Headlight Switch (AUTO) OFF
ON (II). Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF
3. Turn the combination light switch to the PARKING, When the combination light switch is turned to
AUTO, and ON (low beam) positions for at least 6 AUTO
seconds in each position, and then to the OFF
Data List Value
position.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Headlight Switch (PARKING) OFF
Headlight Switch (AUTO) ON
Is DTC B1275, B1276, B1277, or B1278 indicated? Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF
YES-Go to step 5.
When the combination light switch is turned ON
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. (HEADLIGHT)
Check for loose or poor connections. Data List Value
Headlight Switch (PARKING) ON
Headlight Switch (AUTO) OFF
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) ON
Are all data list values correct?

box.B
NO-Go to step 7.
H BODY |
8. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P 16. Do the combination light switch test (see page
connector. 22-234).
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is the combination light switch OK?
10. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Replace the combination light switch.B
with the DATA LIST menu.
(34P).
Data List Value 18. Check for continuity between the under-dash
fuse/relay box connector G (34P) terminals and the
Headlight Switch (PARKING) OFF
combination light switch 12P connector terminals as
Headlight Switch (AUTO) OFF
shown:
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF
Are all data list values indicated OFF? Under-dash Combination light
fuse/relay box switch 12P connector
YES-Go to step 15. connector Q (34P)
NO-Go to step 12. 19 7
11 8
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13 9
10 10
13. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector G
(34P). COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH 12P CONNECTOR
under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (34P)
terminals No. 10, No.11, and No. 13 individually. 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (34P) COMBI GND (BLK)
PARKING LTSW (GRY) H/L OFF SW (BLU)_______ H/L ON SW H/L OFF SW (BLU)
(RED) PARKING LTSW (GRY)
H/L ON SW (RED)
n_ _ri_ __rU - i r f fi
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 PARKING LTSW (GRY)
H/L ON SW
I co [
Io l
34 33 32 31 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 (RED) H/L OFF SW (BLU)

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
COMBI GND (BLK)

Is there continuity? UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (34P)
box.B YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.B
19. Check for continuity between the under-dash DTC B1279: Dimmer Switch Circuit
fuse/relay box connector Q (34P) terminals as shown:
Malfunction
From terminal To terminal NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
10 11,13,14,15 to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
11 13,14,15 Test Mode A (see page 22-126).
YES-Repair a short between the wires.B
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay ON (II).
box.B
3. Turn the combination light (headlight) switch ON.
Canada models (see page 22-83) 4. Change the dimmer switch from low beam to high
beam.
5. Turn the combination light switch OFF and then to the
passing position.
Is DTC B1279 indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
Check for loose or poor connections.B
7. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system
When the passing switch is operated

Data List Value
Headlight Switch (PASSING) ON
Headlight Switch (High beam) OFF
When the headlight switch is turned ON, and the
dimmer switch is changed from low beam to high
beam
Data List Value
Headlight Switch (PASSING) OFF
Headlight Switch (High beam) ON
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) ON

box.B
NO-Go to step 9.
Fl
b o d y M
9. T u r n t h e ig n itio n s w itc h to LOCK (0). 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
10. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P 18. Do the combination light switch test (see page
c o n n e c to r . 22-234).
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is the combination light switch OK?
12. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL system YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Replace the combination light switch (see page
13. Check each combination light switch position value 22-234).
Data List Value (34P).
Headlight Switch (PASSING) OFF 20. Checkfor continuity between the under-dash
Headlight Switch (High beam) OFF fuse/relay box connector Q (34P) terminals and the
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF combination light switch 12P connector terminals as
Are all data list values indicated OFF? shown:
YES-Go to step 17. Under-dash Combination light
NO-Go to step 14. fuse/relay box switch 12P connector
connector Q (34P)
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14 1
15 3
19 7
(34P).
13 9
16. Check for continuity between body ground and COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH 12P CONNECTOR
under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (34P) Wire side of female terminals
terminals No. 13, No. 14, and No. 15 individually.
PASSING SW
DIM SW (LT BLU)
6 5 4 3 2 1
PASSING SW COMBI GND (BLK)
(WHT)______ H/L ON SW (RED) ___________ 12 11 10 9 8 7
H/L ON SW
PASSING SW (RED)
n.. i rjr i r1 .. rT_
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (WHT)
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
DIM SW JL
(LTBLU) (g DIM SW H/L ON SW (RED)
r JT L - __ I1 1 A J 3---- ji n
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
W ire side of female terminals 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
Is there continuity? COMBI GND (BLK) |
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.H
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay W ire side of female terminals
box.ll
Canada models (see page 22-83) YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the w ire.!
(cont'd)
21. Check for continuity between the under-dash DTC B1575: Auto Light Sensor Circuit
fuse/relay box connector Q (34P) terminals as shown:
Malfunction
From terminal To terminal NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
10 14,15 to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
11 10,14,15 Test Mode A (see page 22-126).
13 10,11,14,15
YES-Repair a short between the w ire s .!
ON (II).
box.H 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
USA models (see page 22-82) Is DTC B1575 indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
Checkfor loose or poor connections.
5. Disconnect automatic lighting/sunlight sensor 5P
connector.
(34P).
7. Check for continuity between the under-dash 9. Reconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q
fuse/relay box connector Q (34P) terminals and the (34P).
automatic lighting/sunlight sensor 5P connector
terminals as shown: 10. Measure the voltage between body ground and
under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (34P) terminal
Under-dash Automatic No. 2, and between body ground and under-dash
fuse/relay box lighting/sunlight fuse/relay box connector Y (16P) terminal No. 16.
connector Q (34P) sensor 5P connector
22 5 UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (34P)
21 3
SG (BLK)
20 1
p_ __r1_ _r LJ __r1__ _ri
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR G (34P) 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
n_ __ri_ fi I i..f1... ... J 1__ _T|

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
IC
ro i
34 33 32 31 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
OI
AUTO LT SIP (WHT) W ire side of fem ale terminals

AUTO
AUTO LTSIG
AUTO LT ------- LT SIO (BRN)
SIO (GRY) (GRY) UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Y (16P)
5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
AUTO LT SIP (WHT) AUTO L TS I G (BRN)
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
AUTOMATI C LIGHTING/SUNLIGHT
SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR SG (BLK)
YES-Go to step 8. W ire side of fem ale terminals

NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.H is there less than 0.2 V?
8. Check for continuity between automatic YES-Go to step 11.
lighting/sunlight sensor 5P connector terminals No. 3
and No. 5. NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire or
poor ground (G501, G502).H
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING/SUNLI GHT 11. Reconnect automatic lighting/sunlight sensor 5P
SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR connector.
5 4 3 2 1
AUTO LT SIP AUTO LT SIO
(WHT) (GRY)
YES-Repair a short in the w ire.B

NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
13. Measure the voltage between automatic

lighting/sunlight sensor 5P connectorterminal No. 5
and body ground.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING/SUNLIGHT
SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
5 4 3 2 1
AUTO LT S I P (WHT)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the automatic lighting/sunlight sensor
(see page 22-247).
box.Hl
MICU Input Test
NOTE: Before doing the input tests, check the No. B1 (15A), No. B5 (10A), No. B9 (20A), No. B15 (7.5A), No. B22 (7.5A),
No. B24 (10A), No. B28 (20A), No. B29 (10A), No. B32 (15A) [10A], No. B34 (10A),l\lo. B48 (15A) [10A], No. B51 (10A), and
No. B60 (BOA) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
[]: Without HID
3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors A, B, D, N, Q, R, Y, AA, AB, and AD.

LTBLU
[PNK]
J ii] [i^ y r p ir lp ii] F ly r f j r W

| 34J [12|11|10| 191a | / 1
[32] |31|18|17|16|3o|29| [gaj 15114| 13|27[261
GRN RED PNK PNK RED

[LT BLU]
CONNECTOR D (49P) CONNECTOR N (10P)
LT GRN .W H T
1__ CO __n
CM
~l^m f 8 | 7 |35|34| (ii] 6 | 5 I 4 |32|3l| |
3o] 3 | 2 | 1|29|28| 4 1
". i... Tiji4!i3|.. .lffiiiioT . .n
OO
.
CO
* [45]27126125[44R3I |42|24l23|22[4l|40| [30)21|2o|l9[38|37l 10 7 6 5

U-----
RED BLK
CONNECTOR Q (34P) CONNECTOR R (8P) CONNECTOR Y (16P)
LT BLU WHT RED GRY BLU BLK BLK
n rI 1 * JLIJ__ r1
__ n
n 1 n i i n n
17 16 15 14 13 12 I I 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 ..I I.. 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 8 7 6 5 4j 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
j
/ \ y
BLK GRY BLK
CONNECTOR AA (28P) CONNECTOR AB (3P) CONNECTOR AD (1P)
ORN
JL. JTL.
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 b 1 ^
Ifool
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
C
M|
H IT
/
RED
\GRN
YEL
[ ]: Without HID
(cont'd)
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not
obtained
AD1 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. B60 (BOA) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
the wire
A30 GRN Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals AD1 and A30 Blown bulb
with a jumper wire: Faulty HID unit*1
The right headlight (low beam) Poor ground (G201) or an open
should come on. in the ground wire
the wire
A27 RED Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals AD1 and A27 Blown bulb
with a jumper wire: Poor ground (G201) or an open
The right headlight (high beam) in the ground w ire
should come on. An open or high resistance in
the wire
B29 PNK*1 Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals AD1 and B29 Blown bulb
The left headlight (high beam) in the ground wire
the wire
LT Connect terminals AD1 and B29 Blown bulb
BLU*2 with a jumper wire: Poor ground (G401) or an open
The left headlight (low beam) in the ground wire
the wire
B20 LT Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals AD1 and B20 Blown bulb
BLU*1 with a jumper wire: Faulty HID unit*1
The left headlight (low beam) Poor ground (G401) or an open
should come on. in the ground wire
the wire
PNK*2 Connect terminals AD1 and B20 Blown bulb
The left headlight (high beam) in the ground wire
the wire
A22 RED Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals AD1 and A22 Blown bulb
The right front turn signal/side in the ground wire
marker light should come on. An open or high resistance in
the wire
*1:With HID
*2:Without HID
obtained
B28 RED Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals AD1 and B28 Blown bulb
The left front turn signal/side in the ground wire
marker light should come on. An open or high resistance in
the wire
D40 RED Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals AD1 and D40 Blown bulb
with a jumper wire: Faulty LED
The taillights, rear side marker Poor ground (G701, G702) or an
lights, and license plate lights open in the ground wire
the wire
D18 LT GRN Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals AD1 and D18 Blown bulb
with a jumper wire: Poor ground (G701, G702) oran
The back-up lights should come open in the ground wire
on. An open or high resistance in
the wire
D30 WHT Ignition switch ON (II) Connect terminals AD1 and D30 Faulty LED
with a jumper wire: Poor ground (G701, G702,
The brake lights and the high G801) or an open in the ground
mount brake light should come on. wire
the wire
6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and do the following input tests;
obtained
the wire
the wire
the wire
the wire
Q18 GRY Ignition key inserted Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G502) or an open
into the ignition switch There should be less than 0.2 V. in the ground wire
Faulty ignition key switch
the wire
Ignition switch in Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty ignition key switch
LOCK (0) position and There should be at least 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
ignition key removed
from the ignition switch
AB1 ORN Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. B60 (BOA) fuse in the
the wire
G10 BLU Combination light Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light switch
switch OFF terminals Q10 and Q19: An open or high resistance in
Q19 BLK There should be less than 0.2 V. the wire
Combination light Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light switch
switch in any other terminals Q10 and Q19: A short in the wire
position than OFF There should be at least 5 V.
Q11 GRY Combination light Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light switch
switch (PARKING) ON terminals G11 and Q19: An open or high resistance in
switch OFF terminals Q11 and Q19: A short in the wire
There should be at least 5 V.
Q13 RED Combination light Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light switch
switch (headlight) ON terminals Q13 and Q19: An open or high resistance in
switch OFF terminals Q13 and Q19: A short in the wire
Q14 WHT Combination light Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light switch
switch lever pulled terminals G14 and Q19: An open or high resistance in
Q19 BLK (Passing) There should be less than 0.2 V. the wire
switch lever released terminals Q14 and Q19: A short in the wire
.......... (OFF) There should be at least 5 V.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause i f result is not
obtained
Q15 LTBLU Combination light Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light switch
switch (Dimmer) in high terminals 015 and Q19: An open or high resistance in
Q19 BLK beam position There should be less than 0.2 V. the wire
switch (Dimmer) in low terminals Q15 and Q19: A short in the wire
beam position There should be at least 5 V.
AA24* GRN Fog light switch ON Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light switch
terminals AA24 and Q19: An open or high resistance in
Fog light switch OFF Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light switch
terminals AA24 and 019: A short to ground in the wire
There should be about 5 V.
AA25* RED Under all condition Connect the terminal AA25 and Blown No. B9 (20 A) fuse in t h e
body ground: under-dash fuse/relay box
The fog lights should come on. Blown bulb
Faulty fog light relay
the wire
B17 PNK Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty MICU
There should be battery voltage. Blown No. B60 (50 A) fuse in the
Blown No. B5 (10A) fuse in the
the wire
*:With fog lights
Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement

2. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B).
6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7
3. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch.
4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheek the system.
If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables.
- If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
L ig h t switch (With automatic lighting system)

\ Terminal
3 10 9 1 7 8
Position \
r \ r \
OFF KJ
900: C \
KJ KJ
AUTO
Headlight switch
LOW r \ r .\ ........ r \
KJ kJ KJ
C \ n
ID KJ KJ
HIGH r \
\J KJ
OFF
Passing switch
ON k J U
Light switch (W ithout automatic lighting system)

Terminal
3 10 9 i 7 8
Position \
OFF o o
-I00r o o
Headlight switch LOW r s iH i
K J kJ k J
=D r \
K J K J K J
HIGH r \ r s
K J K J
OFF
Passing switch
ON o o
Turn signal switch Fog light switch

\ Terminal Term ina l
6 5 7 7 11
Position \ Position \
LEFT C ^ - O OFF
NEUTRAL ON
o o
RIGHT O O
Headlight Adjustment
ik C A U T IO 3. Measure the height of the headlight's center mark (A),

Headlights become very hot during use; do not touch then on the wall or screen (B), mark the same height
them or any attaching hardware immediately after of the headlights with masking tape in a straight
they have been turned off. horizontal line (C).
Before adjusting the headlights;

Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Make sure the tire pressures are correct.
The driver or someone who weighs the same should
sit in the driver's seat (or an equivalent amount of
weight).
Unload the vehicle.
1. Clean the outer lens so that you can see the center
mark (A) of the headlights.
4. Turn on the low beam headlights.

5. To see if the headlights are adjusted properly,
observe the beams of light projected on the wall or
screen. The highest edge or "cut line" (A) of the
headlights should be equal with the masking tape (B).
NOTE: To help determine which headlight is out of
adjustment, block one of the beams with a large piece
of cardboard or equivalent, and observe the other
beam on the wall or screen. Repeat this for the other
headlight.
- A
2. Park the vehicle so that the center mark of the

headlight (A) is 7.5 m (25 ft) away from a wall or
screen (B).
Bulb Replacement
6. If necessary, open the hood and adjust the headlights Headlight (High Beam)
by turning the adjuster (A).
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the cover (B).
Headlight (High Beam): SOW
2. Turn the cover 30 counterclockwise to remove it

from the headlight assembly.
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (C) from the bulb socket.
4. Turn the bulb socket 45 counterclockwise to remove
the bulb.
5. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure the notches in the bulb align with the tabs
in the headlight.
NOTE: Do not touch the glass of the bulb with your
hands. If necessary, clean the glass area with alcohol.
The illu s tra tion is show n from

back side of rig h t headlight.
Bulb Replacement (cont'd)
Headlight (Low Beam) (Without HID) HID Bulb (Headlight Low Beam)
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the bulb socket.
A W A R N IN c .
Headlight (Low Beam): 55W A transient high tension (25,000 V) occurs at the bulb
sockets of the high intensity discharge (HID) lamps
when the combination light switch is turned ON, that
may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if
you do not observe the cautions.
Never turn on the combination light switch before

fitting the HID bulbs to their bulb sockets and
completing the reassembly of the headlight
assembly.
Do not service the headlights assembly in wet
conditions, such as rain or snow, near a sprinkler
system, or when your hands are wet to prevent
electrocution.
Do not touch the surface of the HID bulbs with your
bare hands and do not stain it with any oils and fats.
Do not disassemble the inverter unit and the igniter
2. Turn the bulb socket 45 counterclockwise to remove unit.
the bulb (B). Do not turn on the HID bulb by using a power
source other than the battery mounted on your
3. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal. vehicle.
in the headlight. 1. Turn the combination light switch OFF.
NOTE: Do not touch the glass of the bulb with your 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Turn the cover (A) 30 counterclockwise to remove it
2 2 2 3 8
5. Turn the bulb socket (A) 45 counterclockwise to Front Turn Signal/Sid Marker Light
remove it from the bulb (B).
1. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the front turn
Headlight; S5WV signal light.
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light: 28/ 8W
6. Pull the retaining spring (C) away from the bulb, then
2. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 counterclockwise to
remove the bulb.
remove the bulb (C).
in the headlight.
(cont'd)
Bulb Replacement (cont'd)
Taillight Fog Light Bulb Replacement

1. Remove the taillight (A) (see page 22-243). 1. Remove the screws (A) and clips (B), and pull down
the front section of the inner fender.
Brake Light/Taillight: (LED)
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W
Back-up Light: 16 W
Rear Side Marker Light: 3 CP
NOTE: The brake light/taillight (LED) is a part of the
taillight assembly, and it cannot be replaced by itself.
Fog Light: 55W
2. Turn the bulb sockets (B) 45 counterclockwise to

remove the bulbs (C).
3. Install new bulb(s) in the reverse order of removal.
3. Turn the bulb (B) 45 counterclockwise to remove it

from the housing (C).
Bulb Socket Replacement
With HID 6. Disconnect the cord (A) from the bulb socket (B).
ik W A R N I N
A transient high tension (25,000 V) occurs at the bulb
sockets of the high intensity discharge (HID) lamps
when the combination light switch is turned ON, that
may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if
you do not observe the cautions.
A C A U T IO s
Never turn on the combination light switch before
fitting the HID bulbs to their bulb sockets and
completing the reassembly of the headlight
assembly.
Do not service the headlights assembly in wet
conditions, such as rain or snow, near a sprinkler
system, or when your hands are wet to prevent
electrocution.
Do not touch the surface of the HID bulbs with your 7. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
bare hands and do not stain it with any oils and fats.
Do not disassemble the inverter unit and the igniter
unit.
Do not turn on the HID bulb by using a power
source other than the battery mounted on your
vehicle.
1. Turn the combination light switch OFF.

4. Turn the cover 30 counterclockwise to remove it
5. Turn the bulb socket 45 counterclockwise to remove
it from the bulb.
HID Unit Replacement Headlight Replacement
1. Turn the combination light switch OFF. 1. Remove the front bumper center upper beam (see
page 20-149).
2. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-128).
procedure (see page 22-86). 3. Remove the three bolts (A), and pull the headlight (B)
out slightly.
4. Remove the headlight assembly (see page 22-242).
A
5. Remove the three mounting screws (A) from the HID
unit (B).
housing, and disconnect the connectors (D) from the

7. Inspect the gasket (D) for damage. If damaged, bulb sockets.
replace it. 5. Remove the headlight with the corner upper beam (E).
8. Install the HID unit in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the headlight lens and
9. Do the 12 volt battery terminal reconnection the fender.
procedure (see page 22-87). 6. Remove the bolt (F) and the screw (G), then separate
10. After replacement, adjust the headlight (see page the corner upper beam and the headlight.
22-236). 7. Install the headlight in the reverse order of removal.
8. After replacement, adjust the headlight (see page
22-236).
Taillight Replacement
NOTE: When replacing the bulb for the back-up light or 4. Release the bezel cover (A), and remove the two bolts
the rear turn signal light, skip steps 2 and 3. (B).
1. Open the hatch.
2, Remove the damper maintenance lid (A).
3. Disconnect the taillight 6P connector (A).
5. Pull to remove the taillight (C).

6. Install the taillight in the reverse order of removal.
Fog Light Replacement Fog Light Adjustment
1. Remove the front bumper center upper beam (see Before adjusting the fog lights:
page 20-149). Park the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-128). Make sure the tire pressures are correct.
The driver or someone who weighs the same should
3. Remove the three screws (A). sit in the driver's seat.
Unload the vehicle.
The fog lights should aim down slightly. To check for
proper adjustment:
1. Park the vehicle in front of a wall (A).
4. Remove the fog light (B).

5. Install the fog light in the reverse order of removal
6. After replacement, adjust the fog light (see page
22-244). 2. Turn the fog lights on.
3. Determine if the fog lights are aimed properly:
Measure the height of the fog lights (B).
On the wall, mark the height of the fog lights with a
piece of tape (C).
Check each fog light beam's height. Adjust them
both so they are approximately 4.5 cm (1.77 in)
lower (D) than the height of the fog lights at a
distance of 3 m (10 ft).
For example, if the vehicle is parked 3 m (10ft) from
the screen, the top of the fog light beam should be
4.5 cm (1.77 in) below the tape mark.
License Plate Light Replacement
4. Adjust each fog light by turning the adjuster (A). 1. Slide out the license plate light (A) from the rear
bumper.
License Plate Light: 5 W
NOTE: Adjust the fog lights to illuminate lower than 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the license plate
the specified value of height. light.
3. Separate the lens (C) and the housing, then remove
the bulb (D).
4. Install the license plate light in the reverse order of
removal.
High Mount Brake Light Brake Pedal Position Switch Test
Replacement
1. Open the hatch. 1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal
position switch (B).
2. Remove the hatch lower trim (see page 20-66).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A).
High Mount Brake Light: LED
2. Check for continuity between the terminals No. 1 and

4. Remove the four nuts (B) and high mount brake light No. 2.
(C). There should be no continuity when the brake pedal
is released.
5. Install the high mount brake light in the reverse order
There should be continuity when the brake pedal is
of removal.
pressed.
No. 4.
There should be no continuity when the brake pedal
is pressed.
There should be continuity when the brake pedal is
released.
4. If the test results are not as specified ,adjustthe switch
or adjust the pedal height (see page 19-6). If the
results are still not as specified, replace the switch.
Automatic Lighting Sensor Test/Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard.

1. Pop out the automatic lighting/sun light sensor (A).

3. Measure the voltage between automatic lighting
About3.6V in direct sunlight.
About 0.2 V when the sensor is covered up.
4. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the sensor.
NOTE: In auto mode, the headlights should turn on at
about 1.4 V or less, and turn off at about 2.2 V or more.
S I DE TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

REAR TURN SIGNAL LI GHT

TURN SIGNAL INDICATORS
MICU HAZARD W ARNING SWITCH

(Built i n to th e under-dash fu s e /re la y box) Test/Replacement, page 22-257
I nput Test, page 22-141
Removal and Insta l l ation
-USA m od e ls, page 22-82
-Canada m odels, page 22-83
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
(B u ilt in to th e co m b in a tio n lig h t sw itch )
Circuit Diagram
BATTERYTERMINAL
G702 G401 G501 G502 G201 G701

*1 :With power mirror defogger
*2 :Without power mirrordefogger
*3: With navigation
No. B29(10A) FUSE

(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAYBOX)
Y
HAZARD
WARNING
SWITCH
V
GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
G501 G502 G501 G502

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B128Q: Turn Signal Switch Circuit 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(O).
Malfunction 8. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P
connector.
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
10. Select the BODY ELECTRICAL system select menu,
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. then enter the LIGHTING SYSTEM.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to 11. Check each turn signal switch position value with the
ON (II). DATA LIST menu.
3. Operate the turn signal switch in the left and the right Data List Value
positions, and wait for at least 6 seconds. Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) OFF
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) OFF
Are both data list values indicated OFF?
Is DTC B1280 Indicated?
YES-Go to step 15.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 12.
Check for loose or poor connections. 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL 13. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q
SYSTEM SELECT menu, then enter the DATA LIST. (34P).
6. Check each turn signal switch position value with the 14. Check for continuity between body ground and
DATA LIST menu. under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (34P)
terminals No. 12 and No. 16 individually.
When the turn signal switch is in left position:
Data List Value UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (34P)
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) ON
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) OFF TURN L SW
(LT GRN) TURN R SW (BRN)
When the turn signal switch is in right position: _r
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Data List Value 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) OFF
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) ON

box.H W ire side of female terminals
USA models (see page 22-82) Is there continuity?

Canada models (see page 22-83) YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.H
NO-Go to step 7. NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
box.H
16. Do the combination light switch test (see page
22-234).
Is the combination light switch OK?
YES-Go to step 17.

NO-Replace the combination light switch (see page
22-234).
17. Check for continuity between combination light
switch 12P connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6.
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH 12P CONNECTOR
<n>
TURN R SW
TURN L SW (BRN)
(LT GRN)
6 5 4 3 2 1
CO
00
12 11 10 7
W ire side of fem ale terminals
YES-Repair a short in the wires.

box.B
MICU Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, check the No. B1 (15 A), No. B22 (7.5 A), and No. B23 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors A, B, D, F, N, G, R, Y, and AD.
1A
33 32 j24[6lsl4l23|22[ R 3 j7 ]T C T i| j j R y r y n g g R y f y iy f f l 33 ro
|12|11|10| | 9| 8j 7j | 34 j I12I11jl0| I 9 I 8 I 7j --- 36
36 35 |30jl8ll7ll6|29[28] [2jl5|l4|l3|26|25|
1 ^ |3l]18l17i16l30|29| |2g|l5|l4|l3[27|26| 35
j
W HT BLU
CONNECTOR D (49P) CONNECTOR F (12P)
BLU
_____________ /
SsTbTtPW R e T s T im F lfTfTTHal tr
|18|17|16| |15|141131 |12|11|10T 6 5 4 3 2 1
[4s)27l26|25[44|43l jj24|23|22}41|4o| |^2ll2oll9[38|37]
1 2 11 1 0 9 8 7
r ii
\
WHT BLU
LT GRN BRN BLK

n__ __ r
4 3 2 1 fl _____1
3__
0_____ IoIlJ1 1 f1 rj__ _n \
17 16 15 14 13 12 I I 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
| co j
10 9 8 7 6 L 5_ j 34 33 32 31 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
I
j
\ /
BLK BLU BLK
CONNECTOR R (8P) CONNECTOR Y (2SP) CONNECTORAD (IF )

BLK WHT
1__ __r n. n 1 n .r
3 rp. 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 j6 5 4 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
\ BLK \ \ YEL
YEL PNK
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is n ot
obtained
B32 WHT Under all conditions Measure the voltage to Blown No. A3 (20 A) fuse in
battery voltage. An open or high resistance in
the wire
AD1 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to Blown No. B60 (50 A) fuse in
ground: There should be the under-dash fuse/relay
battery voltage. box
the wire
B27 BLU Under all conditions Connect terminals B27 and Poor ground (G401) or an
B32 with a jumper wire: The open in the ground wire
left front turn signal light Blown bulb
the wire
D31 BLU Under all conditions Connect terminals B32 and Poor ground (G702) or an
D31 with a jumper wire: The open in the ground wire
left rear turn signal light Blown bulb
the wire
A29 WHT Under all conditions Connect terminals A29 and Poor ground(G201) or an
B32 with a jumper wire: The open in the ground wire
right front turn signal light Blown bulb
the wire
D41 WHT Under all conditions Connect terminals B32 and Poor ground(G701) or an
D41 with a jumper wire: The open in the ground wire
right rear turn signal light Blown bulb
the wire
Q32 BLU Under all conditions Connect terminals B32 and Faulty gauge control module
Q32 with a jumper wire: The An open or high resistance in
left turn signal indicator the wire
should come on. Poor ground (G501)
Y3 WHT Under all conditions Connect terminals B32 and Faulty gauge control module
Y3 with a jumper wire: The Faulty LED
right turn signal indicator and An open or high resistance in
right side turn signal light the wire
should come on. Poor ground (G501, G502)
F12 BLU Under all conditions Connect terminals B32 and Faulty LED
F12 with a jumper wire: The An open or high resistance in
left side turn signal light the wire
should come on. Poor ground (G501)
6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and do the following input tests:
obtained
R2 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501)
N5 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G502)
Y16 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501)
Q2 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G502)
R7 YEL Under all conditions Measure the voltage to o Faulty under-dash fuse/relay
ground: There should be box
battery voltage. o a short to ground in the wire
Y12 PNK Hazard warning switch Measure the voltage to Faulty hazard warning switch
pressed ground: There should be An open or high resistance in
battery voltage. the wire
Q16 LT GRN Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light
turn signal switch in left terminals Q16 and Q19: There switch
Q19 BLK position should be less than 0.2 V. An open or high resistance in
the wire
Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light
turn signal switch in terminals Q16 and Q19: There switch
right or neutral position should be at least 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
Q12 BRN Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light
turn signal switch in terminals Q12 and Q19: There switch
Q19 BLK right position should be less than 0.2 V. An open or high resistance in
the wire
Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light
turn signal switch in left terminals Q12 and Q19: There switch
or neutral position should be at least 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
Side Turn Signal Light Replacement Hazard Warning Switch
Test/Replacement
1. Remove the mirror holder (see page 20-24). 1. Remove the center panel:
With audio-navigation unit (see page 23-232)
2. Remove the mirror housing.
With audio unit (see page 23-119)
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the side turn
signal light (B). 2. Remove the two screws and the hazard warning
switch (A).
Side Turn Signal Light: LED
NOTE : The illustration shows with audio unit.
4. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.

Hazard Warning Switch Test/Replacement (cont'd)
4. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the cover

(A), and replace the switch (B) or bulb (C).

INDIVIDUAL IVIAP LIGHT

MICU
(Built into the under-dash fu se /re la y box)
Replacem ent:
-USA m odels, page 22-82
-Canada m odels, page 22-83
HATCH LATCH SWITCH

(Built into the hatch latch)
Test, page 22-266
CARGO AREA LIGHT

DR I VER'S VANITY MIRROR LIGHT PASSENGER'S VANITY MIRROR LIGHT

Test/Replacement, page 22-265 Test/Replacement, page 22-265
INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH
AMBIENT LIGHT
DRIVER'S FOOTWELL CONSOLE BOX LIGHT PASSENGER'S FOOTWELL GLOVE BOX LIGHT
LIGHT Replacement, page 22-266 LIGHT Replacement, page 22-267
Circuit Diagram
BATTERYTERMINAL
FUSEBOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAYBOX
*1 :Withambient light
*2 :Without ambient light
*3: Withvanitymirror light
LEFT RIGHT
REARTRAY REARTRAY
( l) LIGHT
(3.4W)
(I) LIGHT
(3.4W)
CARGO
AREA DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S
LIGHT vDOOR s\DOOR
(5W) ) COURTESY
LIGHT
1CLIG
OURTESY
HT
(3.8W) (3,8W)
INTERIOR UNDER-DASH
LIGHT FUSE/RELAY
SWITCH BOX
1
HATCH DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S
LATCHSWITCH DOOR DOOR
2 d(Coloorseodp:en) SWITCH
(Closed;
door open)
SWITCH
(Closed;
door open)
1
Individual Map Light Interior Light Switch
Test/Replacement Test/Replacement
1.Turn the individual map light switch OFF. W ith ambient light
2. Carefully pry off the lens (A). 1. Remove the individual map light (see page 22-263).
Individual Map Light: 8W x 2 2. Disconnect the interior light switch 10P connector (A)
and the map light 3P connector (B).
L r
CM
3 1
u y
3. Remove the interior light switch (C) from the map

3. Remove the two screws, then remove the individual light housing.
map light (B). 4. At the interior light switch 10P connector, check for
4. Disconnect the connectors (C) from the individual continuity between terminals No. 1 and No. 10, and
map light. between terminals No. 1 and No. 8.
5. Check for continuity between the terminals. and No. 10 when the interior light switch is in the
There should be continuity between the terminal DOOR position.
No. 3 and ground terminal with the switch in the ON There should be continuity between terminals No. 1
position. and No. 8 when the interior light switch is in the ON
There should be no continuity between the terminal position.
No. 3 and ground terminal with the switch in the There should be no continuity when the interior
OFF position. light switch is in the OFF position.
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb. If 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the interior
the bulb is OK, replace the individual map light. light switch assembly.
7. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. 6. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.
(cont'd)
Interior Light Switch Ambient Light Test/Replacement
Test/Replacement (cont'd)
Without ambient light NOTE: The ambient light is built into the interior light
switch.
1. Remove the individual map light (see page 22-263).
1. Remove the individual map light (see page 22-263).
2. Disconnect the interior light switch 4P connector (A)
and the map light 3P connector (B). 2. Disconnect the interior light switch 10P connector (A)
and the map light 3P connector (B).
T , ............i i .....;...... ....... r
CO
CM
|1 0 9 |8 7 |6 |5 |4 1 I
3. Remove the interior light switch (C) from the map

light housing. 3. Remove the interior light switch (C) from the map
light housing.
4. At the interior light switch 4P connector, check for
continuity between terminals No. 2 and No. 3, and 4. At the interior light switch 10P connector, check the
between terminals No. 2 and No. 1. light by connecting battery power to terminal No. 7
and ground to terminal No. 6. The ambient light
should come on. If the light does not come on, replace
and No. 3 when the interior light switch is in the
the interior light switch assembly.
DOOR position.
There should be continuity between terminals No. 2 5. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.
and No. 1 when the interior light switch is in the ON
position.
There should be no continuity when the interior
light switch is in the OFF position.
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the interior
light switch assembly.
Vanity Mirror Light Cargo Area Light Test/Replacement
Test/Replacement
1. Remove the sunvisor (see page 20-68). 1. Open the hatch.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the sunvisor (B). 2. Carefully pry out the cargo area light (A).
Vanity Mirror Light: 1.8 W Cargo Area Light: 5 W

vanity mirror cover (C) position according to the table.
light
Term ina l
1 2 4. Check for continuity between the terminals No. 2 ( + )
Position \ and No. 1 ( ). There should be continuity. If there is
Open O 0 o
no continuity, check the bulb. If the bulb is OK, replace
the cargo area light assembly.
Closed
4. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulbs
(D). If the bulbs are OK, replace the sunvisor (see page
2 0 -6 8 ).

Hatch Latch Switch Test Console Box Light Replacement
1. Open the hatch. 1. Remove the center lower lid (see page 20-89).
2. Remove the hatch lower trim (see page 20-66). 2. Turn the console box light (A) counterclockwise to
remove it.
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the hatch latch
(B). Console Box Light: LED
3. install the light in the reverse order of removal.

No. 2.
There should be continuity with the hatch open.
There should be no continuity with the hatch
closed.
5. If the continuity is not as specified, faulty hatch latch
switch; replace the hatch latch (see page 20-140).
Glove Box Light Replacement Courtesy Light Replacement
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-94). 1. Carefully pry off the lens (A).
2. Turn the bulb socket (A) 45 counterclockwise to Courtesy Light: 3.8 W
remove it
Glove Box Light: 1.4 W
2. Remove the bulb (B) from the socket.

3. Remove the bulb (B) from the socket.

Footwell Light Replacement
Driver's Passenger's
1. Remove the driver's kick panel (see page 20-52). 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover (see
page 20-94).
2. Turn the driver's footwell light (A) counterclockwise
to remove it. 2. Turn the passenger's footwell light (A)
counterclockwise to remove it.
Footwell Light: LED
Footwell Light: LED
3. Remove the light.

3. Remove the light.
Rear Tray Light Replacement
1. Remove the rear tray light (A).

Rear Tray Light: 3.4 W
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the rear tray

l ig h t
3. Turn the bulb socket (C) counterclockwise to remove

it.
4. Remove the bulb (D) from the socket.
Circuit Diagram
*1 ;With navigation
*3 :Withseat heater
(With automaticlightingsystem) (Without automaticlightingsystem)
V V V V
ATGEAR VSAOFFSWITCH GLOVEBOXLIGHT AMBIENT RIGHTTAILLIGHT LEFTFRONT RIGHTFRONT
POSITION STEERINGWHEEL DRIVER'S LIGHT LEFTTAILLIGHT SIDEMARKER SIDEMARKER
INDICATOR SWITCHES FOOTWELLLIGHT RIGHTLICENSE LIGHT LIGHT
PANELLIGHT AUDIO -NAVIGATION PASSENGER'S PLATELIGHT
Km/h, mph UNIT*1 FOOTWELLLIGHT LEFTLICENSE
CHANGE AUDIOUNIT*2 PLATELIGHT
SWITCH HAZARDWARNINGSWITCH RIGHTREAR
DRIVER'S POWERMIRRORSWITCH SIDEMARKERLIGHT
SEAT LEFTREAR
HEATER FRONTPASSENGER'SAIRBAG
SWITCH*3 CUTOFFINDICATOR SIDEMARKERLIGHT
PASSENGER'S CLIMATECONTROLUNIT
SEAT 3-MODESWITCH
HEATER CONSOLELIGHT
SWITCH*3
-Q- _Q_ _n_ _Q_
G501 G502 G501 G502

M I CU
R eplacem ent page 2 2 -2 6 9

Circuit Diagram
*1 ;With ambient light

*2 :Without ambient light
- - : B-CANline
BATTERYTERMINAL
FUSEBOX UNDER-DASHFUSE/RELAYBOX
G501 G502 G501 G502

r - 1
J BODY [
MICU Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, check the No. B1 (15 A) and No. B22 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors D, F, H, N, Q, R, Y, and AD.
CONNECTOR D (49P)
j j a j E i i ] B n jE g H
1181171161 ll5|14|13| 1i2|i1|
1q1
[45|27|26|25|44|43] [42|24|23|22|41po) |
^21|20|18|3s|37]
CONNECTOR F (12P) CONNECTOR H (8P) CONNECTOR N (10P)

LTBLU BLK
_r i __r
6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 r~ i 1 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 8 7 6 15 j
4 10 9 8 7 6 L5,
u Lr J
/ \
YEL PNK BLK
CONNECTOR G (34P) CONNECTOR R (8P)
BLK BLK
p il fLJ.. uri_ _f_ _n

_X]
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 T I I 2 1
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 8 7 6 5 4
J ""L
/
GRY
CONNECTOR Y (16P) CONNECTOR AD (IP )
. n i
C4
i .n
8 7 6 5 4 3 1 cnoD
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1
\ \
BLK YEL
5. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and do the follow ing input tests:
not obtained
R2 BLK In ail ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501)
the wire
the wire
Y16 BLK In a ll ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501)
the wire
the wire
AD1 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. B60 (IGN)(50 A) fuse
There should be battery voltage. in the under-dash fuse/relay box
the wire
D26 PNK Driver's door open Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door switch
There should be less than 0.2 V. Faulty driver's door switch
ground
the wire
Driver's door closed Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door switch
There should be at least 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
D27 BRN Passenger's door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty passenger's door switch
open There should be less than 0.2 V. Faulty passenger's door switch
ground
the wire
Passenger's door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty passenger's door switch
closed There should be at least 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
Q18 GRY Ignition key inserted Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G502) or an open
into the ignition There should be less than 0.2 V. in the ground wire
switch Faulty ignition key switch
the wire
Ignition switch in Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty ignition key switch
LOCK (0), and the There should be at least 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
ignition key removed
from the ignition
switch
F5 LT Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501) or an open
BLU knob switch in There should be less than 0.2 V. in the ground wire
UNLOCK Faulty driver's door lock knob
switch
the wire
Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door lock knob
knob switch in LOCK There should be at least 5 V. switch
A short to ground in the wire
not obtained
F10 YEL Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501) or an open
knob switch in LOCK There should be less than 0.2 V. in the ground wire
Faulty driver's door lock knob
switch
the wire
Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door lock knob
knob switch in There should be at least 5 V. switch
UNLOCK A short to ground in the wire
H5 PNK Interior light switch in Connect terminal H5 and body Blown No. B1 (15 A) fuse in the
DOOR position ground with a jumper wire: The under-dash fuse/relay box
ceiling light should come on. Faulty individual map light
Faulty interior light switch
Blown bulb
the wire
H2 BLK Interior light switch in Connect terminal H2 and body Blown No. B1 (15 A) fuse in the
ON position ground with a jumper wire: The under-dash fuse/relay box
cargo area light should come on. Faulty individual map light
Faulty interior light switch
Blown bulb
the wire
Ignition Key Switch Test
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review

the SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and
repairing or servicing.
2. Disconnect the steering lock 6P connector (A).

No. 6.
There should be continuity with the key in the
ignition switch.
There should be no continuity with the key
removed.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, the ignition key
switch is faulty; replace the steering lock (see page
17-17).
POWER W INDOW RELAY
(Has a built-in c o n tro l unit)

S w itch Test, page 22-284
System Description
Auto Reverse Power Window Operation

The system is composed of the power window master switch and the driver's power window motor.
The driver's power window motor incorporates a Hall 1C unit (pulser) which generates pulses during the motor's
operation and sends the pulses to the driver's power window control unit. As soon as the power window control unit
detects a change in the pulse frequency from the Hall 1C unit (pulser), the power window control unit makes the power
window motor stop and reverse. This prevents the window from pinching your hand or fingers during auto-up
operation.
HALL 1C UNIT
POWER W INDO W IVIOTOR (PULSER)
,4 Position when obstac l e

i is pinched
Period of _ r u n _ i| i___ i
pulses 1 4
Threshold value for
judgm ent of obstacle
Resetting the Power Window Control Unit
Reset the power window control unit after doing any of the following:
Power window regulator replacement or repair
Power window motor replacement or repair
Window run channel replacement or repair
Driver's door glass replacement or repair
2. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch.
3. Open the driver's door.
NOTE: Steps 4 7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.
OPEN
Driver's
Door
CLOSED
O N(Il)
Ignition
S w itch
LOCK(O) Power w indow
mem ory cleared.
ON
Driver's W i ndow
Down Switch
OFF
T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T i T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
T1=Less than 5 seconds

5. Push and hold the driver's window DOWN switch.
7. Release the driver's window DOWN switch.
8. Repeat step 47 three more times.
9. Wait at least 1 second.
10. Confirm that AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN do not work. If AUTO UP and DOWN work, go back to step 1.
11. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch.
12. Pull up and hold the driver's window UP switch until the window reaches the fully closed position, then continue to
hold the switch for at least 1 second.
13. Confirm that the power window control unit is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN
functions.
If the window still does not work in AUTO, repeat the procedure several times, paying close attention to the 5
second time limit between steps.
If the window still does not work, refer to the master switch input test (see page 22-281).
Circuit Diagram

Power Window Master Switch Input Test
NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch.
1. Remove the power window master switch (see page 22-289).
2. Disconnect the 22P connector (A) from the power window master switch (B).
Power Window Master Switch Input Test (cont'd)
4. Reconnect the connector to the power window master switch, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do the following
input tests:
1 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501)
positions ground: An open or high
There should be less than resistance in the ground
0.2 V. wire
14 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to Poor ground (G501)
positions ground: An open or high
There should be less than resistance in the ground
0.2 V. wire
4 ORN Under all conditions Measure the voltage to Blown No. B3 (20 A) fuse
ground: in the under-dash
There should be battery fuse/relay box
voltage. An open or high
5 BRN Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to Blown No. B17 (20 A) fuse
ground: in the under-dash
There should be battery fuse/relay box
voltage. An open or high
22 RED Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to Faulty power window
ground: master switch
There should be battery An open or high
voltage. resistance in the wire
16 BRN Under all conditions Check for continuity to Poor ground (G501)
ground: Faulty power window
There should be continuity. master switch
An open or high
17 YEL Ignition switch ON (II), and Measure the voltage Faulty power window
driver's window switch between the terminals master switch
moving up or down. No. 16 and No. 17: Faulty driver's power
There should be 0 V about window motor
5 V 0 V about 5 V An open or high
repeatedly (a digital resistance in the wire
voltmeter should read about A short to ground in the
2.5 V while the window wire
moves).
18 BLU Ignition switch ON (II), and Measure the voltage
driver's window sw itch between the terminals
moving up or down. No. 16 and No. 18:
There should be 0 V about
5 V 0 V about 5 V
repeatedly (a digital
voltmeter should read about
2.5 V while the window
moves).
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then disconnect the 22P connector from the power window master switch again.
If all the input tests prove OK, replace the power window master switch (see page 22-289).
NOTE: After replacing the power window master switch, reset the power window control unit (see page 22-279).
2 LTBLU Connect the terminals No. 4 Check driver's power Faulty driver's power
and No. 2 and the terminals window motor operation: window motor
No. 3 and No. 1 with jumper The window should go up. Faulty driver's power
wires window switch
3 PNK Connect the terminals No. 4 Check driver's power An open or high
and No. 3 and the terminals window motor operation: resistance in the wire
No. 2 and No. 1 with jumper The window should go
wires down.
7 WHT Ignition switch ON (II), Check passenger's power Faulty passenger's power
connect the terminals No. 7 window motor operation: window motor
and No. 5 and the terminals The window should go up. Faulty passenger's power
No. 6 and No. 14 with window switch
jumper wires An open or high
6 YEL Ignition switch ON (II), Check passenger's power resistance in the wire
connect the terminals No. 6 window motor operation:
and No. 5 and the terminals The window should go
No. 7 and No. 14 with down.
jumper wires
Power Window Master Switch Test
1. Remove the power window master switch (see page 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
22-289), position according to the table.
2. Disconnect the 22P connector (A) from the power Driver's Switch
window master switch (B).
The drivers switch is combined with the control unit
so you cannot isolate the switch to test it.
Instead, run the power window master switch input
test procedures (see page 22-281). If the tests are
normal, the driver's switch must be faulty; replace the
power window master switch (see page 22-289).
Passenger's Switch
N\ ^ Termina l
5 6 7 14
Position Main \
Switch \
ON
OFF
OFF
ON O - - 0
a - -O
UP
CM
CO
5 4 18|17|16|15| 3 OFF O - - 0
CO
14 13 12 11 |22|21|20|19 10
00
ON O - -o 0 - -O
DOWN
OFF O - - 0
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch

(see page 22-289).
Passenger's Power W indow Switch Driver's Power W indow M otor Test
Test
1. Remove the passenger's power window switch (see Motor Test
page 22-289).
1. Remove the power window master switch (see page
2. Disconnect the 8Pconnector (A) from the passenger's 22-289).
power window switch (B).
2. Test the motor in each direction by connecting battery
power and ground to the power window master
switch 22P connector according to the table.
Terminal
2 3
Direction
UP
DOWN 0

Terminal
Position CM
7 6 5 4 18|17|16|15| 3 1
OFF 14 13 12 11 |22|21|20|19 10 9 8
UP
DOWN Wire side of female terminals

o
3. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, go

4. Connect battery power to terminal No. 8 and ground to step 4.
terminal No. 4 (or No. 5). The switch light should
come on.
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch
(see page 22-289).
Driver's Power W indow Motor Test (cont'd)
4. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-4). Pulser Test
5. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the driver's 8. Do the power window master switch input test for
power window motor (B). terminals No. 16, No. 17, No. 18, and No. 22 (see page
22-281).
6. Checkfor continuity between the power window

master switch 22P connector terminals and the
driver's power window motor 6P connector terminals
as shown:
Power window master Driver's power window

switch 22P connector motor 6P connector
2 2
3 1
DRIVER'S POWER W INDOW MOTOR 6P CONNECTOR

UP+ (LT BLU)
POWER W INDO W MASTER SWITCH 22P CONNECTOR

7. If the wire harness is OK, the driver's power window

motor is faulty; replace the driver's power window
motor (see page 22-288).
Passenger's Power W indow Motor Test
1. Remove the passenger's power window switch (see 5. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the passenger's
page 22-289). power window motor (B).
2, Test the motor in each direction by connecting battery
power and ground to the passenger's power window
switch 8P connector according to the table.
6. Check for continuity between the passenger's power

window switch 8P connector terminals and the
passenger's power window motor 2P connector
terminals as shown.
Passenger's power Passenger's power

window switch 8P window motor 2P
connector connector
4 1
5 2
Wire side of female terminals PASSENGER'S POWER W INDOW
IVIOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
3. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, go Wire side of female terminals
to step 4.
4. Remove the passenger's door panel (see page 20-4).
U P + (LT BLU) D O W N + (RED)

3 2 I---- L 1
8 7 6 5 4
j
U P + (LT BLU) DOWN+ (RED)
PASSENGER'S POWER WINDOW

SWITCH 8P CONNECTOR
7. If the wire harness is OK, replace the passenger's

power window motor (see page 22-288).
Power W indow M otor Removal and Installation
Removal Installation
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-4). NOTE: The holes for the mounting screws (C) in a new
power window motor (A) are not threaded. The screws
2. Remove the door glass and regulator (see page cut threads in the holes the first time they are installed.
20-13).
1. Install the power window motor (A) onto the regulator
3. Remove the three screws (A), then remove the power (B) as shown, and tighten the screws (C) until the
window motor (B). screw head contacts with the linkage.
NOTE:
Keep the screws (C) perfectly straight while
screwing them in.
Do not use the air tool and impact wrench.
Do not use any other screws; these screws (C) are
designed to cut the threads.
2. Loosen the screws (C), and retighten the screws to

specified torque.
3. Install the door glass and regulator (see page 20-13),
4. Install the door panel (see page 20-4).
5. After replacement, reset the power window control
Power W indow Master Switch Passenger's Power W indow Switch
1. Remove the pocket cap (see page 20-4). 1. Remove the pocket cap (see page 20-4).
2. Remove the switch panel from the door panel. 2. Remove the switch panel from the door panel.
3. Disconnect the 22P connector (A) from the power 3. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the passenger's
window master switch (B). power window switch (B).
4. Remove the four screws and the power window 4. Remove the four screws and the passenger's power
master switch (A). window switch (A).

6. After replacement, reset the power window control

REAR W INDO W WIPER ARM
Blade Replacement, page 22-313
Test, page 22-307

tf/
WIPER/WASHER S W ITCH
System Description
Reverse {Gear Position) Linked Rear Wiper

When the shift lever is shifted to R with the windshield wiper activated, the rear window wiper operates automatically
even if the rear window wiper switch is off.
Interm ittent operat i on (Basic)
ON
Back-up l ight
OFF _ r
INT
Windshield w iper switch
OFF
ON
Rear w indow wiper switch
OFF
- 0.70.1 sec.
Rear w indow wiper ON
auto stop position 7.0+1.5 7.01.5
OFF sec. sec.
ON
Rear w indow w iper motor
OFF i u i
Initial Intermittent activatisn

activation
Continuous operation (Basic)
ON
Back-up light
OFF _ r
HI or LO
Windshie l d w iper switch INT
OFF
ON
Rear w indow w iper switch
OFF
Rear w indow w iper ON

auto stop position OFF u ju u r ^ m j- r -
ON
Rear w indow w i per motor ___ R J U U L ____ n _ p j i ____
Continuous intermittent Consecutive
activation activation activation
Circuit Diagram - Windshield
BATTERY TERMINAL
GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
2 WASHER
FLUID
LEVEL
SWITCH
_ (Closed:
-j Floatdown)
-LL
G201 |
i
(Canada models)
Circuit Diagram - Rear W indow
BATTERY TERMINAL
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1028: Rear Wiper Motor (Park) Signal 9. Measure the voltage between rear window wiper
motor 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
Error
NOTE: If you are troubl eshooting multiple DTCs, be sure REAR W INDO W WIPER MOTOR 4P CONNECTOR
1G1 (PUR)
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1
V
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to 4 3
ON (II).
3. Operate the rear window wiper for at least 15
seconds, then turn the rear window wiper switch OFF.
4. Checkfor DTCs with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals
Is D T C B 1 0 2 8 in d ic a te d ? Is th e r e b a tt e r y v o lta g e ?
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire
Checkfor loose or poor connections. between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the rear
window wiper motor.H
5. Do the rear window wiper motor test (see page
22-307). 10. Check for continuity between rear window wiper
motor 4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
Is th e r e a r w in d o w w ip e r m o to r O K ?
YES-Go to step 6.
REAR W INDO W WIPER IVIOTOR 4P CONNECTOR
NO-Replace the rear window wiper motor (see page
22-310).B
6. Check the No. B16 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash GND (BLK)
fuse/relay box.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck the system. W ire side of female terminals
7. Disconnect the rear window wiper motor 4P
connector.
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES-Go to step 11.
between rear window wiper motor 4P connector
terminal No. 3 and body ground (G801).H
11. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connector 14. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
D (49P). box connector D (49P) terminal No. 10 and rear
window wiper motor 4P connector terminal No. 4.
12. Measure the vo l tage between rear window wiper
motor 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground. REAR W INDOW WIPER MOTOR 4P CONNECTOR
REAR W INDOW WIPER MOTOR 4P CONNECTOR RR WIPER 2 1

COM (BRN)
4 3
RR W I PER
COM (BRN)
RR WIPER
COM (BRN)
17]i!Hp35@ BfL.,.
49||45j27|26l25[44|43[ |^24l23l22[4i|4o| [a^21|2o|l9}3b|37|
Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ? Wire side of female terminals
rear w indow w iper motor and the under-dash YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
fuse/relay box.il box.H
NO-Go to step 13. USA models (see page 22-82)
13. Checkfor continuity between rear window wiper
motor 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground. NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire
between the rear window wiper motor and the
under-dash fuse/relay box.H
REAR W I NDOW WIPER MOTOR 4P CONNECTOR

rear window wiper motor and the under-dash
fuse/relay box.H
NO-Go to step 14.
r-^ 3
BODY |
DTC B 1077: Windshield Wiper Motor (Park) 9. Check for continuity between windshield wiper motor
5P connector terminal No. 3 and under-dash
Signal Error
fuse/relay box connector B (36P) terminal No. 9.
NOTE: If you are troubl eshooting multipl e DTCs, be sure
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Wire si de of female terminals
Test Mode A (see page 22-126). FR WIP
AS (LT GRN) i
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. {3 2 1
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to \5 4/
ON (II).
3. Turn the windshield wiper switch to LOW or HIGH for
FR WIP
at least 15 seconds, then turn the switch OFF. AS (LT GRN)
D o e s th e w ip e r m o to r w o rk ?
[is] [24]61514I 23I22I |iT|~3
YES-Go to step 4. 34I I12I11I10I I9IsM
H [3lJl8|l7|l6|3o|29| |28|l5|l4fl:
NO-Go to step 13.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR B (36P)
Is D T C B 1 0 7 7 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 5. I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ?
NO-lntermittent failure, the windshield wiper system YES-Go to step 10.
is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections. NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.B
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Check for continuity between windshield wiper motor
6. Do the windshield wiper motor test (see page 22-307).
D o e s t h e w i p e r m o t o r r u n a n d d o e s i t p u l s e n o r m a ll y ? WINDSHIELD W I PER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 7. FR WIP

A S (L T G R N )r
NO-Replace the windshield wiper motor (see page
22-309), and recheck.B 5 4
7. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor 5P connector.
8. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connector
B (36P).
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.I

NO-Go to step 11.
12. Measure the voltage between windshield w iper 17. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
motor 5P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. box connector A (36P) terminals and windshield
wiper motor 5P connector terminals as shown:
W I NDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR
Under-dash Windshield wiper
fuse/relay box motor 5P connector
connector A (36P)
19 1
23 4
W I NDSHIELD W I PER IVIOTOR 5P CONNECTOR
FR W I P LO (BLU)

FR WIP HI (GRN) '-----LJ -
Is th e re v o lta g e ?
YES-Repair a short to power in the w ire .B
FR WIP LO (BLU)
box.B |24| 6 | 5 | 4 H 22I [il] 3 | 2 | 1|20|l9l'
USA models (see page 22-82) |12|11|l*0j | 9j 8| 7 |
[30[18117|16[29|28[ |27|15|14|13|2b|25|| 34
14. Check the No. B56 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash Wire side of female terminals
fuse/relay box.
Is th e fu s e O K ? I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ?
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck the system.B NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the BLU
(low) or GRN (high) wire.B
15. Do the windshield wiper motor test (see page 22-307).
D o e s t h e w i p e r m o t o r r u n n o r m a ll y ?
YES-Go to step 16.

NO-Replace the windshield wiper motor (see page
22-309), and recheck.B
16. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connector
A (36P) and the windshield wiper motor 5P connector.
18. Checkfor continuity between windshield wiper motor DTC B1281: Front W iper MIST Position Circuit
5P connectorterminal No. 5 and body ground.
Malfunction
WINDSH I ELD WIPER IVIOTOR 5P CONNECTOR DTC B1282: Front W iper INT (AUTO) Position
Circuit Malfunction
3 2 1) DTC B1283; Front W iper LOW Position Circuit
\5 4 / Malfunction
GND (BLK) |
DTC B1284: Front W iper HIGH Position Circuit
Malfunction
W i re side of female terminals to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/rel ay
box.H 2. Turn the igni tion switch to LOCK (0) and then back to
USA models (see page 22-82) ON (II).
Canada models (see page 22-83) 3. Operate each windshield wiper switch position, then
NO-Repair an open in the wire or poor ground turn the wiper/washer switch OFF.
(G401).B 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is D T C B 1 2 8 1 , B 1 2 8 2 , B 1 2 8 3 , o r B 1 2 8 4 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 5.
Check for loose or poor connections.^
5. Select WIPER from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Check each windshield wiper switch position value
When the windshield wiper switch is OFF:

Data List Value
Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW) OFF
Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) OFF
Windshield Wiper Switch (MIST) OFF
Windshield Wiper Switch (INT) OFF
A r e a ll d a ta lis t v a lu e s in d ic a te d O F F ?
YES-Go to step 15.

NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Check each windshield wiper switch position value
8. Disconnect the wiper/washer switch 8P connector.
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). When the windshield wiper switch 3s ON (LOW):
Data List Value
10. Select WIPER from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW) ON
11. Check each windshield wiper switch position value
When the windshield wiper switch is ON (HIGH):
Data List Value
Data List Value Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW) OFF
Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) OFF When the windshield wiper switch is MIST:
Windshield Wiper Switch (MIST) OFF Data List Value
Windshield Wiper Switch (INT) OFF Windshield Wiper Switch (MIST) ON
A r e a ll d a ta lis t v a lu e s in d ic a te d O F F ?
When the windshield wiper switch is INT:
YES-Replace the wiper/washer switch (see page
Data List Value
22-306).B Windshield Wiper Switch (INT) ON
NO-Go to step 12. A r e a l l d a t a li s t v a l u e s c o r r e c t ?
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
13. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connector box.H
Q (34P). USA models (see page 22-82)
under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (34P) NO-Go to step 16.
terminals No. 6, No. 7, and No. 8 individually.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR G (34P) 17. Do the wiper/washer switch test (see page 22-306).
FR WIP INT&LO SW (ORN) Is th e w ip e r /w a s h e r s w itc h O K ?
FR WIP M IST
FR WIP HB&.OSW (RED) SW (GRN) YES-Go to step 18.
n ri f1 1 i rILL. __tis__ _n
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NO-Replace the wiper/washer switch (see page
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 22-306).
18. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors Q
(34P) and Y(16P).
YES-Repair a short to ground in the w i re.H

NO-Faul ty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay
box.Rl
19. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ?
box connector Q (34P) and Y (16P) terminals and the
wiper/washer switch 8P connector terminals as
box.B
shown:
Under-dash Wiper/washer switch Canada models (see page 22-83)
fuse/relay box 8P connector
connector Q (34P) NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the w i re.B
6 2
7 3
8 1
Under-dash Wiper/washer switch
fuse/relay box 8P connector
connector Y (16P)
4 8

FR W I P MIST SW (GRN)
FR WIP INT&LO
FR WIP H I &LO SW (RED) SW (ORN)
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
I CO I
fo l
34 33 32 31 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
FR WIP I NT&LO
<n><n) FR WIP MIST SW (ORN)
SW (GRN)
FR WIP H I &LO
SW (RED)
4, 3 2 1
8 7 6 5
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH 8P CONNECTOR


GND (BLK)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
GND 4 3 2 1
(BLK)
8 7 6 5
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH 8P CONNECTOR
MICU Input Test
NOTE:
Before testing, check the No. B5 (10 A ), No. B16 (10 A), No. B21 (15 A), No. B56 (30 A), and No. B60 (50 A) fuses in the
If there is a malfunction of the rear window wiper operation, and no DTCs are detected, check the rear window wiper
motor and an open in the ground circuit of the rear window wiper (see step 10 on page 22-295).
3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors A, B, D, N, Q, R, Y, and AD.

GRN BLU GRY
|24mTr4|23|22| jg_1Ejffllgl 11 .H W fF g P lil F ly rfT rM

|12|11|10| |9|8|7I I 34 j [12111|10I I 9 f8] 7 I
|30[1&l17116|29[28l |27jl5|l4|l3b^ 1 j j |3lj18jl7116 130129 1 |28[l5|yll3|27]26|
WHT GRN PNK LT GRN
CONNECTOR D (49P) CONNECTOR N (10P)
1__ CO __r
CM
n[ii] 9j aI7|3s|34| |33] 6I514[32(311 |So| 3|2| 1feM r am 4 J v 1
118117|16[ |is|l4li3| I12I11I10I 00
[) |42|24|3l22[41|4t)| |ag|21l20|l9[|g|37| 10 9 7 6 5
J--- nl
\
LT GRN BRN BLK
CONNECTOR Q (34P) CONNECTOR R (8P)

RED ORN GRN PUR YEL BLU BLK BLK
__ n
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 ..r i. 2 1
Irl
34 33 32 31 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
O
O1
8 7 6 5 4
j i
CONNECTOR Y (16P) CONNECTOR AD (IP)

BLK PNK
' ________ / _ /
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 n o n
1
1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 12 11 10 9
YEL
BLK
. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
not obtained
AD1 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. B60 (50 A) fuse in the
the wire
A23 GRN Under all conditions Connect terminal A23 to battery Poor ground (G401) or an open
power: The windshield wiper in the ground wire
motor should run at high speed. Faulty windshield wiper motor
A19 BLU Under all conditions Connect terminal A19 to battery An open or high resistance in
power: The windshield wiper the wire
motor should run at low speed.
A26 WHT Under all conditions Connect terminal A26 to battery Faulty windshield/rear window
power and terminal A25 to body washer motor
ground: The windshield/rear An open or high resistance in
window washer motor should the wire
run.
A25 GRN Under all conditions Connect terminal A25 to battery Faulty windshield/rear window
power and terminal A26 to body washer motor
ground: The windshield/rear An open or high resistance in
window washer motor should the wire
run.
B9 LT The motor stops at Check for continuity to ground: Faulty windshield wiper motor
GRN auto-stop position. There should be no continuity. A short to ground in the wire
Connect the terminal Check for continuity to ground: Faulty windshield wiper motor
A19 to battery power There should be continuity. Poor ground (G401) or an open
momentarily, and stop in the ground wire
the motor operation An open or high resistance in
before the motor the wire
reaches the auto-stop
position.
Y2 PNK Windshield Check resistance between the Faulty windshield
wiper/washer switch terminals: The resistance should wiper/washer switch
Y4 BLK (intermittent dwell vary between 0 to 1 kO. An open or high resistance in
timer) turned the wire
D23 PUR Connect battery Check rear window wiper motor Faulty rear window wiper
power to terminal operation: The rear window wiper motor
D10 BRN D23, then connect motor should run. Poor ground (G801) or an open
terminal D10 to body in the ground wire
ground momentarily. An open or high resistance in
the wire
D18 LT Transmission shifted Check for continuity between the Faulty back-up light switch
GRN to reverse terminals D18 and B3: An open or high resistance in
B3* There should be continuity. the wire
GRY Transmission shifted Check for continuity between the Faulty back-up light switch
to any position other terminals D18 and B3:
than reverse There should be no continuity.
*: M/T models
(cont'd)
6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do the following
input tests:
not obtained
R2 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: o Poor ground (G501)
the wire
the wire
the wire
the wire
S i? * PNK Transmission range Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G101) or an open
switch in R There should be less than 0.2 V. in the ground wire
Faulty or improperly installed
transmission range switch
the wire
Transmission range Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty or improperly installed
switch in any position There should be at least 5 V. transmission range switch
other than R A short to ground in the wire
Q8 RED Windshield Measure the voltage between Faulty windshield
wiper/washer switch terminals Q 8 and Y4: wiper/washer switch
Y4 BLK (LO or HI) ON There should be less than 0.2 V. Poor ground (G501, G502) or an
the wire
Windshield Measure the voltage between Faulty windshield wiper/washer
wiper/washer switch terminals Q 8 and Y4: switch
OFF There should be at least 5 V.
Q7 ORN Windshiel d Measure the voltage between Faulty windshield
wiper/washer switch terminals Q7 and Y4: wiper/washer switch
Y4 BLK (INT or LO) ON There should be less than 0.2 V. Poor ground (G501, G502) or an
the wire
wiper/washer switch terminals Q7 and Y4: switch
*: CVT models
not obtained
Q6 GRN Windshield Measure the voltage between Faulty windshield
wiper/washer switch terminals 06 and Y4: wiper/washer switch
Y4 BLK (MIST) ON There should be less than 0.2 V. Poor ground (G501, G502) or an
the wire
wiper/washer switch terminals 06 and Y4: switch
Q5 PUR Washer switch ON Measure the voltage between Faulty windshield
terminals Q5 and Y4: wiper/washer switch
Y4 BLK There should be less than 0.2 V. Poor ground (G501, G502) or an
the wire
Washer switch OFF Measure the voltage between Faulty windshield wiper/washer
terminals 05 and Y4: switch
Q4 YEL Rear window Measure the voltage between Faulty rear window
Y4 BLK (RRWIPER) ON There should be less than 0.2 V. Poor ground (G501, G502) or an
the wire
Rear window Measure the voltage between Faulty rear window wiper/washer
wiper/washer switch terminals 04 and Y4: switch
Q3 BLU Rear window Measure the voltage between Faulty rear window
Y4 BLK (RRWASH) ON There should be less than 0.2 V. Poor ground (G501, G502) or an
the wire
Rear window Measure the voltage between Faulty rear window wiper/washer
wiper/washer switch terminals Q3 and Y4: switch
Wiper/W asher Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-96). 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
2. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the
wiper/washer switch (B). Windshield
Terminal
1 2 3 4 5 8
Position n.
OFF
INT KJ n
rs -T Pi
LO KJ\ -
HI r\
KJ L/
M ist ON o r\
vj KJ
W asher ON vj
in te rm itte n t dwell
tim e c o n tro l ler o - o
turned
Rear window
Terminal
3. Remove the two screws, then slide out the
w i per/washer switch. Position A
Washer switch ON,
4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all w ip e r switch OFF o -o
making good contact.
OFF
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair
them as necessary, and recheck the system.
W iper switch ON,
washer switch OFF o- -o
Wiper and washer o- -o
switch ON o- -o
6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
Wiper M otor Test
Windshield Rear W indow

1. Remove the wiper arms (see page 22-311) and the NOTE: If there is malfunction of rear window wiper
cowl cover (see page 20-153). operation, and no DTCs are stored, check the rear
window wiper motor and an open in the ground circuit
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the windshield of the rear window wiper (see step 10 on page 22-295).
wiper motor (B).
1. Open the hatch, and remove the hatch lower trim
2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the wiper motor
(B).
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to

terminal No. 1 and ground terminal No. 5 of the wiper
motor 5P connector. The motor should run at low
speed. If the motor does not run, or fails to run
smoothly, replace the motor.
motor 5P connector. The motor should run at high
speed. If the motor does not run, or fails to run
motor. The motor should run. If the motor does not
smoothly, replace the motor.
run or fails to run smoothly, replace the motor.
5. Connect an analog ohmmeter to terminals No. 3 and
4. Connect an analog ohmmeter between rear window
No. 5, and run the motor at low or high speed. The
wiper motor 4P connector terminal s No. 3 and No. 4.
needle of the ohmmeter should pulse. If it does not,
The ohmmeter should indicate continuity and no
replace the motor.
continuity alternately. If it does not, replace the motor.
Washer Motor Test Washer Fluid Level Switch Test
1. Remove the right front inner fender (see page 20-162). Canada models
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer 1. Remove the front bumper center upper beam (see
motor (B). page 20-149).
NOTE: The illustration shows USA models. 2. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-128).
3. Remove the washer fluid level switch (A) from the
washer reservoir.
NOTE: Fluid may flow out of the opening.

terminal No. 1 and ground to the terminal No. 2 of the
washer motor. The motor should run.
If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
replace the motor (see page 22-312).
If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no washer
fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected or
blocked washer hose, or a clogged washer motor 4. Check for continuity between terminals No. 1 and
outlet. No. 2 in each float position.
There should be continuity when the float is down.
There should be no continuity when the float is up.
Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement
Removal 5. Mark lines (A) to show the original adjustment, then

remove the connection rod (B) from the linkage (C).
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or damage the hood and
the body.
1. Remove the windshield wiper arms (see page 22-311).
2. Remove the under-cowl panel and the hood hinge
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A), and remove the
cover (B) from the windshield wiper motor (C).
6. Remove the nut, and separate the linkage from the

windshield wiper motor (D).
4. Remove the four bolts and the wiper linkage
7. Remove the three bolts, and separate the windshield
assembly (D).
wiper motor from the linkage assembly (E) through
the hole.
Windshield Wiper Motor Rear W indow Wiper Motor
Installation NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or damage the hatch.
1. Before installing the motor, connect the 5P connector 1. Remove the wiper arm (see page 22-311).
to the wiper motor, and turn the windshield 2. Remove the cap (A) and the mounting nut (B).
wiper/washer swi tch ON to (LO) or (HI ) position, then
OFF to return the motor shaft to the park position.
NOTE:
Do not use the windshield wiper/washer switch INT
position in this step.
Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts.
2. Install the wiper motor to the wiper linkage assembly
in the reverse order of removal.
3. Install the linkage to the wiper motor shaft, then align
the mark (A) of the linkage and the mark (B) of the
wiper linkage assembly.
B
8.4 N-m
(0.86 kgf m, 6.1 Ibf ft)
3. Open the hatch, and remove the hatch lower trim

4. After installation, adjust the wiper arms (see page

22-315).
W iper Arm Replacement
4. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the rear window NOTE: Set the wiper arms to the auto-stop position
wiper motor (B). before removal and installation.
Windshield
NOTE: Always pull up the driver's side wiper blade first.
1. Remove the wiper pivot cover (see step 1 on page
20-153).
2. Close the hood.
3. Remove the caps, the nuts, and the wiper arms (A).
18 N-m
5. Remove the three bolts and the rear window wiper

motor.
6. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
Rear W indow
Grease the moving parts. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the hatch.
Before reinstalling the wiper arm, turn the rear
1. Remove the cover (A), the nut, and the wiper arm (B).
window wiper switch ON, then OFF to return the
wiper shaft to the park position.
Check the wiper motor operation.
Align the position marks when installing the seal
(C).
(0.81 kgf-m,
5.8 I bf-ft)
Washer Reservoir Replacement
1. Remove the front bumper center upper beam (see 6. Canada models:
page 20-149).
Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer fluid
2. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-128). level switch (B), and remove the washer fluid level
switch.
3. Remove the headlight (see page 22-242).
4. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer
motor (B).
Washer Reservoir Capacity:
2.5 L (2.6 US qt): USA models
4.85 L (5.1 US qt): Canada models
NOTE: The illustration shows USA models.
7. Remove the three bolts (C) and the clip (D), then
remove the washer reservoir (E).
5. Disconnect the washer tubes (C) from the washer

motor.
NOTE: Fluid may flow out of the opening.
Wiper Blade Replacement
8. USA models; Windshield

Remove the two bolts (A) and clip (B), then remove 1. Lift the wiper arms from the windshield.
the washer reservoir (C).
NOTE: Lift the driver's side first.
2. Gently pry up the lock (A) of the wiper blade assembly
(B), and remove the wiper blade assembly from the
wiper arm (C).
(B).
(0.96 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)'

9. Install the washer reservoir in the reverse order of
removal. Check the washer motor operation.
(cont'd)
Wiper Blade Replacement (cont'd)
4. Align the groove (A) of each rail (B) with the tabs in a Rear W indow
new blade (C), then install the blade and the rails into
the blade holder in the reverse order of removal. 1. Lift the wiper arm off the rear window.
2. Push the lock (A) of the wiper blade assembly (B), and
remove the wiper blade assembly from the wiper arm
(C).
5. Install the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arms 3. Locate the word SET (A) and the arrow on the wiper
in the reverse order of removal. blade holder, then pull the blade (B) in the opposite
direction of the arrow to remove it.
6. Check the wiper operation. If the blades slip, turn the
wiper switch OFF, and reinstall the blades securely.
4. Install a new blade in the reverse order of removal.

5. Install the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm in
the reverse order of removal.
6. the wiper operation. If the blade slips, turn the wiper
switch OFF, and reinstall the blade securely.
W iper Arm /Nozzle Adjustment
INOTICE I
When you adjust the washer nozzles, carefully move the outside of the washer nozzles (A).
Do not insert tools into the nozzle hole (B), as it may cause the washer fluid to spray incorrectly.
Wiper Arm /Nozzle Adjustment (cont'd)
Wiper arms stop position

1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn the wiper switch ON, and then back OFF.
2. When the wiper arms stop at the park position, make sure that they are at the correct position.
Windshield
a; Position at about 45.9 mm (1.807 in) from the top of cowl cover (A),
b: Position at about 31.9 mm (1.255 in) from the top of cowl cover (A).
Rear Window
c: Position at about 22.4 mm (0.881 in) from the black ceramic area (C).
Washer nozzle position
3. When you turn on the washers, make sure 50 % or more of the washer fluid lands within the spray area. If the spray
area is not within the standard positions, adjust the nozzles.
Windshield
d: Position at about 501 mm (19.72 in) from the top of the cowl cover (A),
e: Position at about 585 mm (23.03 in) from the top of the cowl cover (A),
f: Position at about 532 mm (20.94 in) from the top of the cowl cover (A),
g: 200 mm (7.87 in) from the windshield center line (B).
h: 400 mm (15.74 in) from the windshield center line (B).
i: 400 mm (15.74 in) from the windshield center line (B).
Rear Window
j: Position at about 62.4 mm (2.456 in) from the top of the black ceramic area (D).
k: Position at about 93.4 mm (3.677 in) from the top of the black ceramic area (D).
I: Position at about 90.2 mm (3.551 in) from the rear window center line (E).
m: Position at about 10.7 mm (0.421 in) from the rear window center line (E).
Washer Tube Replacement
1. Remove the right inner fender (see page 20-162),

2. Remove the washer nozzles and clips, then remove the tubes.
3. To install longer washer tubes routed inside the body, remove and replace them by joining the old tube to the new washer
tube with a straight washer tube joint. Then pull the other end of the old washer tube out, pulling the new washer tube into
position through the body with it
Washer Tube Replacement (cont'd)
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
(Canada models)
Test, page 22-308

Self-diagnostic Function, page 22-325
Rewriting the ODO Data and
Transferring Maintenance Minder
Data to a New Gauge Control Module, page 22-353
Outside Air Temperature
Indicator Calibration, page 22-355
Resetting
the Lifetime Points, page 22-357
TACHOMETER TURN SI GNAL

INDICATOR
SELECT/RESET KNOB
SPEEDOMETER
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
VSA INDICATOR
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER (With FOG LIGHT)
INDICATOR.
L1GHTS-ON INDICATOR
VSA OFF
INDICATOR
FUELGAUGE
IMA SYSTEM CURRENT FUEL

INDICATOR MILEAGE GAUGE
IMA BATTERY
LEVEL GAUGE
CHARGE/ASSIST
GAUGE
SEQUENTIAL MULTI-INFORMATION
SHIFT MODE TPMS INDICATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY (MID)
SHIFT INDICATOR (USA models) INDICATOR
(CVT models)
LOW TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

HIGH TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR
CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR
SPORT MODE INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL EPS INDICATOR

INDICATOR
NORMAL MODE INDICATOR

BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(Canada models) ABS INDICATOR
ECON MODE INDICATOR

BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(USA models) SRS INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE SECURITY INDICATOR

INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR
MIL INDICATOR. (USA models)
SHIFT UP INDICATOR
(M /T models) SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR
(Canada models)
SHIFT DOWN INDICATOR
(M /T models)
32P CONNECTOR
16 - 1
ir r lZ K r v
32 17
System Description
Driver Feedback System

The gauge control module receives the Eco drive profile data that is accumulated in the ECM/PCM v i a F-CAN (see page
11-75), and the Eco drive information is displayed on the ambient meter and the Eco guide feedback monitor.
ECM/PCM Gauge Control Module
ECO DRIVE PROFILE DATA

Changing the speedometer
AMBIENT METER background color
REAL TI ME DRIVING DATA Acceleration/Brake condition

ECO GUIDE (Eco Drive Bar)
F-CAN FEEDBACK Eco Drive Profile Data
LIFETIME POINTS MONITOR
(MID) Lifetime Points
Eco Stage up/Eco Stage Down
(Eco Stage)
Real-Time Driving Inform ation Display

The real-time driving information display shows the Eco drive profile data from the ECM/PCM with the ambient meter
and the Eco score and the Eco drive bar in the Eco guide feedback monitor (see page 11-77).
REAL-TIME DRIVING CONDITION DISPLAY
AMBIENT METER
ECO SCORE
ECO DRIVE BAR
ECO GUIDE
GAUGES
Eco Guide Feedback M onitor on the M ulti-Inform ation Display (MID)
When the 3-Mode button is pressed, the selected SPORT/NORMAL/ECON pattern indicator appears for 2 seconds in the
MID and the gauge control module indicator comes on.
Then the MID screen returns to the previous screen. Turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0) displays the Eco score (Eco
drive profile data) and the Eco stage indicator (Lifetime Points) for 6 seconds.
Note: The Eco score and the Eco stage indicator are not displayed unless the vehicle has idled for 3 minutes or driven at
least 218 yards (200meters).
ECO GUIDE FEEDBACK

MONI TOR SPORT MODE (2 seconds)
IGNITION
SWITCH -
ON (II)
ECO SCORE (6 seconds)
3-MODE
SWITCH
Eco stage
When the lifetime points reach a prescribed level, the multi-information display (MID) shows the Eco stage up/down
indicator for 6 seconds from when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0). The MID then displays the Eco score for 6
seconds. When you advance up a stage, it displays for 12 seconds.
ECO STAGE
Stage up displays
Stage down displays

Self-Diagnostic Function
NOTE: Before doing the self-diagnostic function, make sure the No. B1 (15 A) and the No. B22 (7.5 A) fuses in the
under-dash fuse/relay box are OK.
The gauge control module has a self-diagnostic function which consists of the following checks:
The indicator drive circuit check.
The beeper drive circuit check.
The ambient meter color variation check.
The switch input test.
The multi-information display (MID) check.
The gauges drive circuit check (tachometer).
The communication line check of the B-CAN (body-controller area network) communication line and the F-CAN
(fast-controller area network) communication line between the gauges.
NOTE:
Indicators are also controlled via the communication lines.
Entering the Self-Diagnostic Function W ith the HDS
Using the HDS, select BODY ELECTRICAL, GAU GES, then FU NCTION TESTS and do the SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION.
Entering the Self-Diagnostic Function (Manual method)
1. Push and hold the SELECT/RESET knob.
2. Turn the combination light switch (-DG-) ON.
4. Within 25 sec.f turn the combination light switch & Q z ) OFF, then ON and OFF again.
5. Within 5 sec., release the SELECT/RESET knob, and then repeatedly push and release the knob three times.
NOTE:
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the dashlights brightness controller operates normally.
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the SELECT/RESET knob is used to start the Beeper Drive Circuit Test and the
Gauge Drive Circuit Check.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 1 mph (2km) or the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), the self-diagnostic mode ends.
The SEL/RESET button of the multi-information switch can do the same functions as the SELECT/RESET knob.
ON (II)
Ignition
sw i tch
LOCK m
Combinat ion
light switch
SELECT/RESET
switch
Move to self-diagnostic mode.
2 5 sec. 5 sec.
Self-Diagnostic Function (cont'd)
The Indicator Drive Circuit Check

When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the following indicators (if equipped) blink:
ABS indicator, VSA OFF indicator, VSA indicator, brake system indicator, A/T gear position indicator, shift up indicator,
shift down indicator, charging system indicator, cruise control indicator, cruise main indicator, EPS indicator, high beam
indicator, high temperature indicator, immobilizer indicator, lights-on indicator, low temperature indicator, low oil
pressure indicator, low fuel indicator, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), seat belt reminder indicator, security indicator,
door indicator, sequential shift mode shift indicator, message indicator, SRS indicator, side airbag cutoff indicator, IMA
system indicator, SPORT mode indicator, NORMAL mode indicator, ECON mode indicator, auto stop indicator, low tire
pressure indicator, fog light indicator.
The Am bient Meter Color Variation Check
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the color of the ambient meter varies to red, blue, blue green, and green in that
order.
The Beeper Drive Circuit Check
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the beeper sounds 5 times.
Switch Input Check
After the beeper drive circuit check, you can check the switch input. The beeper sounds continuously when any of the
following switch inputs are switched from OFF to ON:
Cruise control main, SET/DECEL, RES/ACCEL, CANCEL switches, VSA OFF switch, multi-information switch (includes
SEL/RESET switch, NEXT switch, and PREVIOUS switch), 3-Mode switch, parking brake switch, km/h, mph change
switch, select/reset switch.
The M ulti-Inform ation Display (MID) Check
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the word "CHECKING NOW" shows on the MID, and blinks 5 times, then a
communication check result is displayed.
The Gauge Drive Circuit Check
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the tachometer needle sweeps from the minimum position to maximum
position, then returns to the minimum position.
NOTE:
After the beeper stops sounding and the tachometer needle returns to the minimum position, pressing the
SELECT/RESET knob starts the Beeper Drive Circuit Check (one beep) and the Gauge Drive Circuit Check again.
The check cannot be started again until the tachometer needle returns to the minimum position.
Self-diagnostic ON | ;-----------------------------------------------------------------------
mode OFF I
SELECT/RESET ON
switch OFF
ON j--------------------------- 1 j-
Gauge needle
OFF U
| I
Beeper
The needle sweeps from the
minimum posi tion to the
maximum position, then returns
to the minimum position.
The Communication Line Check
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the Communication Line Check starts after the Multi-Information Display (MID)
Check.
If the communication lines are OK, the word "OK" will be indicated on the multi-information display (MID). If there is a
communication line error, the word "ERROR" will be indicated on the MID.
Indication pattern
There is a malfunction in the communication line between the F-CAN and the gauge control module. The B-CAN is OK at
this time. Check for DTCs in the ECM/PCM, and troubleshoot any DTCs found.
There is a malfunction in the communication line between the B-CAN and the gauge control module. The F-CAN line is
OK at this time.
There is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge control module and the F-CAN and the B-CAN.
Check for DTCs in the ECM/PCM, and troubleshoot any DTCs found.
Ending the self-diagnostic function

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: If the vehicle speed exceeds 1 mph (2 km/h), the self-diagnostic function ends.
Circuit Diagram
*1 : With TPMS
*2 : With HandsFreeLink system
- -: CAN line
BATTERYTERMINAL UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
FUSE BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
No.A1(100A)
crx-o
(>
| Y1 R3
LTBLU PNK
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 17 1
IG1
BATT/ FUEL/INSTANT
ASSIST FUEL LCD 5V
LCD CONTROL
TACHOMETER CIRCUIT
DRIVE DRIVE
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
ON/OFF
5V
CPU/POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/
CONTROLLERAREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
F-CAN TRANSCEIVER B-CANTRANSCEIVER q q

ILLUMI ' ILLUMI ' SELECT/
(+) ' H ' RESET
. 2.6kQ .
, F-CAN L , F-CAN H
I 20
I I I
PNK GRN GRN No.B29 (10A)
I I I FUSE
I I I (UNDER-DASH (UNDER-DASH
I I I FUSE/RELAY FUSE/RELAY
BOX) BOX)
ECM/PCM IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONTROL UNIT
SRS UNIT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
VSA MODULATOR- HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT CONTROL UNIT*2
YAW RATE-ACCELERATION MICU
SENSOR
MOTOR CONTROL
MODULE (MCM) i Ii
i SPORT i ECON i NORMALli 3-MODE
TPMS CONTROL UNIT*1 , LIGHT , LIGHT SWITCH
' (LEDx3) ' (LEDx3)
6800 330Q 330
CLIMATE
CONTROL
UNIT
*1: M/T model

*2: CVT model
*3: With navigation
ILLUMINATION ILLUMINATION ILLUMINATION ILLUMINATION ILLUMINATION ILLUMINATION ILLUMINATION CONTROLand

CONTROLand CONTROLand CONTROLand CONTROLand CONTROLand CONTROLand DIMMINGCIRCUITFORLCD
DIMMING DIMMING DIMMING DIMMING DIMMING DIMMING (SPEED/SEQUENTIALSHIFT
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT MODESHIFTINDlCATOR*2)
FORLCD CIRCUIT
FORRING FORRING FORDIAL FORDIAL ASSIST/FUEL) FORMID
(BLUE) (RED/GRN) SCALE FACE MID(WHT) COMPULSORY
SHIFTINDICATOR (AMBER) TURNING-OFF
LAMP*1 CIRCUIT
TT TT
HLED) )(LED) (^)<LEP) (^)(LED) HLED)
CPU/POWER SUPPLYCIRCUIT/
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
Tu
KM/H MPH CRUISE CRUISE CRUISE WASHER
CHANGE SW MAIN SW SET SW RESUME SW LEVEL SW
No.29(10A)FUSE
(UNDER DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
V V V
CRUISE CONTROL COMBINATION AUDIO
SWITCH NAVIGATION
UNIT*3 WASHER FLUID
AUDIO UNIT*4 I LEVEL SWITCH
I (Closed : Float down)
(Open : Float up)
XL
G201
(Canada models)
* : With fog lights

*1 : With TPMS
*2 : With seat heater
MICU
YEL ORN
BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL SWITCH PARKING
HAZARDWARNING
SWITCH LIGHT
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT V (Closed:
Float down)
BRAKE SWITCH
CONSOLE LIGHT VSA OFF (Closed :
POWER MIRROR DRIVER'S FOOT LIGHT SWITCH (Open ; Lever pulled)
SWITCH LIGHT PASSENGER'S FOOT LIGHT 2 Float up)
AUDIO UNIT AMBIENT LIGHT
(Without navigation) FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
AUDIO-NAVIGATION CUTOFF INDICATOR
UNIT (With navigation) DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER
STEERINGWHEEL SWITCH LIGHT*2
SWITCHES PASSENGER'S SEAT HEATER
VSA OFFSWITCH SWITCH LIGHT*2
LIGHT
A/T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT
_LL J l.
G403 G501
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1152: Gauge Control Module Internal DTC B1175: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
(EEPROM) Error Sending Unit) Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode A (see page 22-126). Test Mode A (see page 22-126).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to 2 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back
ON (II). ON (II).
3. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 3. Wait for at least 30 seconds.
Is D T C B 1 1 5 2 in d ic a te d ? 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page Is D T C s B 1 1 7 5 in d ic a te d ?
22-354).
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the gauge control module is
OK at this tim e.ll
Check for loose or poor connections between the
gauge control module and the fuel tank unit.H
8. Checkfor continuity between gauge control module DTC B 1176: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
32P connector terminals No. 21 and No. 22 and fuel
Sending Unit) Circuit Short
tank unit 4P connector terminals No. 4 and No. 2
respectively. NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR Test Mode A (see page 22-126).
i ------------r 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
16fl5|l4fl3|l2|l1 10| 9 | 8 [ 7 6 | 5 |4?3|2 11|
|32|3l|30|2t|28| 27|26|25|24|23|22| 2l | 20| l9 | l8|l7 ON (II).
FUEL UN I T (BRN) FUEL GND (BLK) 3. Wait for at least 30 seconds.
p (a I s D T C B 1 1 7 6 in d i c a t e d ?
FUEL UNIT (BRN)
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the fuel level sensor circuit is
OK at this time. Check for worn/missing insulation or
FUEL GND (BLK) an internal short in the w ire .ll

Wire side of fem a l e term ina l s
I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ? 7. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.H 9. Wait for at least 30 seconds.
9. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page 11-309). 10. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is th e fu e l g a u g e s e n d in g u n it O K ? Is D T C B 1 1 7 6 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page YES-Go to step 11.
2 2-354).
NO-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page
NO-Replace fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-305).
11-305).
13. Checkfor continuity between gauge control module DTC U0029: F-CAN Communication Line Error
(BUS OFF)
NOTE:
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR SRS components are located in this area. Review the
16 15|14|13|12|11 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 | 4 3 I 2 1|
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26| 25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
performing repairs or servicing.
FUEL UNIT (BRN)
If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to
Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM
and other vehicle systems. If it does not, go to DLC
Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 11 -383).
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the gauge ON (II).
control module and the fuel tank unit.H 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
NO-Go to step 14. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
14. Check for continuity between gauge control module Is D T C U 0 0 2 9 in d ic a te d ?
32P connector terminals No. 21 and No. 22.
YES-Go to step 5.
Check for loose or poor connections, or worn/shorted
wires. If the connections are good, check the battery
condition (see page 22-85) and the charging
16|15|14 13112111 fl 019 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 | 4 [ 3 | 2 system.
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25| 24|23|22|21|20|19| 18|17
FUEL UNIT (BRN) | | FUEL GND (BLK)

gauge control module and the fuel gauge sending
unit.H
22-354).H
(cont'd)
6. Disconnect the appropriate connector at each control 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
unit in the table one at a time. Clear the DTC, then
8. Disconnect all the control unit connectors in the
recheck for DTCs after each unit is disconnected.
following table.
Control Unit Connector
Control Unit Connector
ECM/PCM Connector A (44P)
ECM/PCM Connector A (44P)
SRS unit Connector A (39P)
SRS unit Connector A (39P)
Gauge control module 32P connector
Gauge control module 32P connector
VSA modulator-control 32P connector
unit VSA modulator-control 32P connector
unit
EPS control unit Connector A (11P)
EPS control unit Connector A (11P)
Yaw rate-acceleration 4P connector
sensor Yaw rate-acceleration 4P connector
sensor
Motor control module Connector A (31P)
(MCM) Motor control module Connector A (31P)
(MCM)
TPMS control u n it* 20P connector
TPMS control unit* 20P connector
* : With TPMS
* : With TPMS
Is D T C U 0 0 2 9 in d ic a te d a fte r e a c h in d iv id u a l u n it w a s
d is c o n n e c te d ? 9. Disconnect the HDS from the data link connector
(DLC).
YES-Go to step 7.
10. Check for continuity between body ground and gauge
NO-Replace the control unit that was disconnected control module32Pconnectorterminal No. 19 and
when DTC U0029 did not s e t.il No. 20 individually.
1 6 |1 5 |14 |1 3|1 2|11 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 |5 |4 |3 |2 jl |

|3 2 |3 1 |3 0 |2 9 |2 8 |2 7 |2 6 |2 5 |2 4 |2 3 |2 2 |2 1 |2 0 |1 9 |18|17
F-CAN L (PNK) F-CAN H
(GRN)
&
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.l

NO-Go to step 11.
11. Check for continuity between gauge control module DTCU0100: Gauge Control Module Lost
32P connector terminals No. 19 and No. 20.
Communication With ECM/PCM
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
I----------------- f
1 6 | l5 | l 4 il 3 | l2 | l 1 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 | 4 3 | 2 1 1 | 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22 |21|20|19|18|17
F-CAN L (PNK) F-CAN H

(GRN) ON (II).
Is D T C U 0 1 0 0 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the F-CAN communication,
I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ? line is OK at this time. Checkfor DTCs in the ECM/PCM
YES-Repair a short in the F-CAN wire.H with the HDS. If F-CAN DTCs are present, checkfor
loose or poor connections at the gauge control
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page module and the ECM/PCM. If the connections are
22-354). good, check the battery condition (see page 22-85)
and the charging system, then clear all DTCs.HH
5. Check for DTCs in the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
YES-Go to the ECM/PCM indicated DTCs

troubleshooting, then recheck.B
NO-Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between gauge control module DTC U0111; Gauge Control Module Lost
32P connector terminals No. 19 and No. 20 and
Communication With Motor Control Module
ECM/PCM connector A (44P) terminals No. 36 and
No. 37 respectively. (BATT message)
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
W i re side of female term inal s to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
^1sf15j14-f13112111 10[ 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
|32|31130|29|28l27|26l25|24l23|22l21120| 19|18|17
F-CAN L (PNK) F-CAN H 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
(GRN) ON (II).
3. Wa i t for at least 6 seconds.
3 | 4 | 5 | e jT 8 Is D T C U 0 1 1 1 in d ic a te d ?
h i 2 I9 I
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
YES-Go to step 5.
1
26 27 28 29|3o|31132 33 34 35
3 6 137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |42 431441
F-CAN H F-CAN L gauge control module and the motor control module
(GRN) (PNK) (MCM).B
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) 5. Check for IMA system DTCs with the HDS.
Term inal side of female terminals
YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, then
recheck.B
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), and recheck. NO-Go to step 6.
If the indication goes away, replace the original
ECM/PCM (see page 11-209). If the DTC is still present, 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
replace the gauge control module (see page 7. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P connector.
22-354).11
NO-Repair an open or poor connection in the wire (31P).
between the ECM/PCM and the gauge control
module..
9. Checkfor continuity between gauge control module DTC U0122: Gauge Control M odu le Lost
32P connectorterminal No. 19 and No.20 and motor
Communication With VSA Modulator-Control
control module (MCM) connector A (31P) terminal
No. 23 and No. 22 respectively. Unit (VSA Message)
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR NOTE;
Wire side of fem a l e term ina l s If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to
16 15I 14I13112I1T 10| 9 [ 8 | 7 6 | 5 I 4.| 3 | 2 j
|32| 31130| 29l28|27|26l25]24|23l22[21120ll9|l8|l7
F-CAN L F-CAN H If the HDS does not communicate with the VSA
(PNK) (GRN) modulator-control unit, the VSA indicator stays on,
and no VSA DTCs are stored, go to symptom
troubleshooting for ABS indicator, brake system
3 IU | 2 | 1 indicator, and VSA indicator do not go off, and no
30
CO
10
9 DTCs are stored (see page 19-118).

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
31 30 29 n 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
F-CAN H (WHT) 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
F-CAN L
(RED) ON (II).
MOTOR CONTROL MODULE (MCM) CONNECTOR A (31P) 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ? Is D T C U 0 1 2 2 in d ic a te d ?
NO-Repair an open or poor connection in the wire NO-lntermittent failure, the F-CAN communication
between the motor control module (MCM) and the li ne is OK at this time. Checkfor DTCs in the ECM/PCM
gauge control module. and the VSA modulator-control unit with the HDS. If
10. Reconnect the gauge control module 32P connector F-CAN DTCs are present, check for a loose VSA
and motor control module (MCM) connector A (31P). ground or poor connections at the VSA
modulator-control unit or gauge control module. If
11. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. the connections are good, check the battery condition
(see page 22-85) and the charging system, then clear
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to
all DTCs.B
ON (II).
5. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS.
I s D T C U 0 1 1 1 in d i c a t e d ?
recheck.B
NO-Go to step 6.
22-354).
NO-Replace the motor control module (MCM) (see
page 12-212). 7. Disconnect the gauge control module 32P connector.
connector.
(cont'd)
9. Checkfor continuity between gauge control module DTC U0127: Gauge Contro l Module Lost
32P connector terminal No. 19 and No. 20 and VSA
Communication With TPMS Contro l Unit
modulator-control unit32Pconnectorterminal No. 6
and No. 5 respectively. (TPMS message)
NOTE:
Wire side of female term i nals If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to
'

-<1
16| 15|14|13|12|11 6 I 5 I 4 I 3 I 2 ~1I

CO
00
o
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17 If the HDS does not communicate with the TPMS

F-CAN L control unit, the TPMS indicator does not go off, and
(PNK) no TPMS DTCs are stored, go to symptom
troubleshooting for TPMS indicator does not go off,
and no DTCs are stored (see page 18-65).
F-CAN H (GRN)
| X M l 4 l l 3 | l 2 | l 1 |l0| 9 | 8 j 7 | 6 | 5 IXlXI 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
X|19|18MX1i 7[XIXD^
ON (II).
|32|31 |30j29l28|27l26|25|24|23| 2 2 lX | 2l|20|
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 32P CONNECTOR 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Check for poor connections, power, and ground
to the VSA modulator-control unit. I f the VSA NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
mod uIato r-co nt roI unit was updated and symptom is Check for loose or poor connections between the
still present, replace the original VSA gauge control module and the TPMS control u n itll
modulator-control unit If the DTC is still present, 5. Check for TPMS DTCs with the HDS.
replace the gauge control module (see page
22-354). A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?
NO-Repair an open or poor connection in the F-CAN YES-Go to the TPMS indicated DTCs troubleshooting,
wire between the VSA modulator-control unit and the then recheck.B
gauge control module.
NO-Go to step 6.
8. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
9"9 1
. NOT: j
9. Checkfor continuity between gauge control module DTC U0131; Gauge Control M odu le Lost
32P connector terminals No. 19 and No. 20 and TPMS
Communication With EPS Unit (EPS Message)
control unit 20P connector terminals No. 9 and No. 20
respectively. NOTE:
If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
Wire si de of female terminals Test Mode A (see page 22-126).
If the HDS does not communicate with the EPS control
unit, the EPS indicator stays on, and no EPS DTCs are
CO
oo
-Nl
16|15|14|13|12|11 6 I5 I4 I3 I2 1 I
o
| | | |
|32|31130|29|28 2 7 |2 6 2 5 24|2 3 |2 2 |2 1 |2 0 19|18|17 stored, go to symptom troubleshooting for EPS
F-CAN L F-CAN H indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored (see
(PNK) (GRN) page 17-60).
F-CAN H (GRN) 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
CD
CM
CO
CO
10 7 6 5 4 1
CD
OO
CM
20 17 16 15 14 13 11
j F-CAN L (PNK)
Wire side of female terminals YES-Go to step 5.
I s t h e r e c o n t i n u it y ? NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
YES-Substitute a known-good TPMS control unit, and gauge control module and the EPS control unit.H
recheck. If the indication goes away, replace the
original TPMS control unit (see page 18-68). If the DTC 5. Check for EPS DTCs with the HDS (see page 17-22).
is still present replace the gauge control module (see
page 22-354).
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire poor
recheck.B
connection in the F-CAN wire between the TPMS
control unit and gauge control module.H NO-Go to step 6.
8. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (11P).
(cont'd)
9. Checkfor continuity between gauge control module DTC U0151: Gauge Contro l Modu le Lost
32P connector terminal No. 19 and No. 20 and EPS
Communication With SRS Unit (SRS
control unit connector A (11P) terminal No. 7 and
No. 9 respectively. Message)
NOTE:
W ire side of female term ina l s SRS components are located in this area. Review the
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and
---------------1
16 15114?13112111 1o| 9 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 j 4 1 3 | 2 l | precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17 doing repairs or servicing.
F-CAN L (PNK) F-CAN H If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to
JG R N )
'T
F-CAN H (GRN) Test Mode A (see page 22-126).
F-CAN L (PNK) If the HDS does not communicate with the SRS unit,
the SRS indicator stays on, go to symptom
|11|io|9 7 6 5 4 3
troubleshooting for SRS indicator does not go off, but
no DTCs are stored, or cannot be read (see page
Ll 24-160).
Wire side of female termina l s 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
YES-Substitute a known-good EPS control unit, and 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
recheck. If the indication goes away, replace the
ori ginal EPS control unit (see page 17-80). If the DTC is I s D T C U 0 1 5 1 in d i c a t e d ?
still present, replace the gauge control module (see YES-Go to step 5.
page 22-354).B
NO-Repair an open wire or poor connection in the Checkfor loose or poor connections between the
wire between the EPS control unit and the gauge
gauge control module and the SRS unit.H
control moduIe.H
5. Check for SRS DTCs with the HDS (see page 24-23).
YES-Go to the SRS indicated DTCs troubleshooting,

then recheck.B
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see
page 22-86), then wait at least 3 minutes.
8. Disconnect the gauge control modul e 32P connector.
9. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (39P).
10. Checkfor continuity between gauge control module DTC U1281: Lost Communication With MICU
32P connectorterminal No. 19 and No. 20 and SRS
(MICU frame)
unit connector A (39P) terminal No. 6 and No. 7
respectively. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 32P CONNECTOR ON (II).
16 15|l4fl3|l2|l1 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 I 5 | 4 f 3 | 2 T1 I 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
|32|31130|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21120|19|18|17
F-CAN L F-CAN H I s D T C U 1 2 8 1 in d i c a t e d ?
(PNK) (GRN)
YES-Faulty gauge control module; replace the gauge
control module (see page 22-354).B
F-CAN L F-CAN H NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
(PNK*) (GRN*) f = = : ...)
gauge control module and the MICU.H
33 32 31 $0 2$ 28 27 26 25 24 1
9 8 39 38 7 6 5 4 3 2 37 36 35 34
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
tr
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (39P)
*: Wire color may be substituted for SRS circuits

YES-Substitute a known-good SRS unit, and recheck.

If the indication goes away, replace the original SRS
unit (see page 24-185). If the DTC is still present,
replace the gauge control module (see page
22-354).H
NO-Repair an open or poor connection in the wire
between the SRS unit and the gauge control
moduleH
Symptom Possible cause

3-Mode drive system does not change when the mode Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-345)
button is pressed
3-Mode drive system does not change when 9. Disconnect the 3-Mode switch 7P connector.
the mode button is pressed 10. Measure the voltage between 3-Mode switch 7P
2. Check the indication of SPORT, NORMAL, and ECON 3- I VIODE SWITCH 7P CONNECTOR
mode indicators.
Is th e r e in d ic a tio n ?
YES-Go to step 4. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
MODE SW (PUR)
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the indication of MID in gauge control module.
D o e s t h e M I L a n d / o r E P S in d i c a t e d ?
Wire side of fem a l e terminals
YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO-Go to the DTC U0100 troubleshooting (see page Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ?
22-337).
YES-Go to step 11.
4. Press each button ofthe 3-Mode switch, and check the
NO-Go to step 13.
indication in the MID.
I s t h e i n d i c a t i o n c h a n g e d w h e n t h e s w i t c h is p r e s s e d ?
12. Check for continuity between gauge control module
32P connectorterminal No. 2 and 3-Mode switch 7P
time.B
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Select GAUGES from the BODY ELECTRI CAL menu,
and enter the DATA LIST with the HDS.
MOE)E SW GNt) (LT GRN) r
6. Check the ON/OFF information ofthe SPORT SWITCH,
NORMAL SWITCH, and ECON SWITCH in the DATA 16h5|l4|l3|l2|l1 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 | 4 3 | 2 " l |
LIST. |32|31|30| 29| 28|27|26|25| 24|23|22|21|20| 19|18|17
D o e s e a c h s w itc h in d ic a te O N w h e n it is p r e s s e d ?
YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page MODE SW GND (LT GRN)
22-354).B
NO-Go to step 7.
3-MODE SWITCH I P CONNEGTOR
8. Do the 3-Mode switch test (see page 22-351).
Is th e 3 -M o d e s w itc h O K ?
YES-Go to step 9. 22-354).M
NO-Replace the 3-Mode switch (see page 22-351 ) . NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.B
14. Check for continuity between gauge control module

32P connector terminal No. 12 and 3-Mode switch 7P
MODE SW (PUR)
16 15114f 13112| 11 flO| 9 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 | 4 13 | 2 1 |

|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
)
IVAODE SW (PUR)
n ..J .......... I
6 5 4
1
3 2
3-MODE SWITCH 7P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 15.

ISIO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.B
15. Check for continuity between the gauge control
module 32P connector terminal No. 12 and body
ground.
n n n I I-------------- ! II 11 ... PI
16|15|14|13|12|11 10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 | 5 | 4 T 3 | 2 l 1 |
|32|31|30|29|28|27|26|25|24|23|22|21|20|19|18|17
W ire si de of female terminals

22-354).B
Gauge Control Module Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325), and make sure the B-CAN
communication line is OK.
2. Remove the gauge control module (A) (see page 22-354), and disconnect the 32P connector (B) from it.
W HT BLU LTBLU W HT BLU BLK PNK
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
If the terminals are OK, go to step 4.
Gauge Control Module Input Test (cont'd)

not obtained
16 WHT Combination light Attach to ground with a jumper Faulty bulbs
switch ON wire: An open or high resistance in
The A/T gear position indicator the wire
panel light, hazard warning Open or high resistance to
switch light, power mirror switch ground (G501) to terminal No. 4
light, audio unit light,
audio-navigation unit light (if
equipped), and VSA OFF switch
light should come on full bright.
15 BLU Combination light Attach to ground with a jumper Faulty LEDs
switch ON wire: An open or high resistance in
The front passenger's airbag the wire
cutoff indicator, steering wheel Open or high resistance to
switches light, and climate ground (G501) to terminal No. 4
control unit light should come on
full bright.
8 WHT Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty MICU
turn signal switch in There should be battery voltage Faulty combination light switch
RIGHT when the lights are flashing. An open or high resistance in
the wire
7 BLU Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty MICU
turn signal switch in There should be battery voltage Faulty combination light switch
LEFT when the lights are flashing. An open in the wire
31 GRN Disconnect Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the
under-dash fuse/relay terminal No. 31 and under-dash B-CAN wire
box connector Y (16P) fuse/relay box connector Y (16P)
terminal No. 6:
There should be continuity.
Disconnect the Check for continuity to ground: An open or high resistance in the
immobilizer control There should be no continuity. B-CAN wire
unit 7P connector
5. Reconnect the 32P connector to the gauge control module, and do the following input tests:
If all the input tests prove OK, the gauge control module must be faulty; replace it (see page 22-354).
not obtained
1 PNK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. B1 (15 A) fuse in the
the wire
17 LTBLU Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. B22 (7.5 A) fuse in
There should be battery voltage. the under-dash fuse/relay box
Blown No. B60 (50 A) fuse in
the under-dash fuse/relay box
the wire
32 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501)
the wire
the wire
9* LT BLU Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty washer fluid level
washer fluid is half or There should be about 5 V. switch
more in the washer A short to ground in the wire
reservoir
Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G201) or an open
washer fluid is empty There should be less than 0.2 V. in the ground wire
in the washer Faulty washer fluid level
reservoir switch
the wire
27 ORN Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty brake fluid level switch
brake fluid is full in the There should be about 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
reservoir
Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G403) or an open
brake fluid is low in There should be less than 0.2 V. in the ground wire
the reservoir Faulty brake fluid level switch
the wire
26 ORN Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty parking brake switch
parking brake lever There should be less than 0.2 V. An open or high resistance in
pulled the wire
Ignition switch ON (II), Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty parking brake switch
parking brake lever There should be about 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
released
*: Canada models
Multi-Information Switch Test/Replacement
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review 4. Measure the resistance between the
the SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and multi-information switch 6P connector terminals
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before No. 3 and No. 4 in each switch position according to
repairing or servicing. the table.
1. Remove the lid (A) from the steering wheel.
s r*
6 5 4 3 2 1
Position Resistance
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (B) from the
About 33 0
multi-information switch.
SEL/RESET About 1,043 0
3. Remove the three screws, then remove the w About 363 0
multi-information switch. 5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the switch.
If the switch is OK, but the system does not operate,
check for an open in the wire between the switch and
the cable reel.
3-Mode Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-83). 3. Remove the two screws, then remove the 3-Mode
switch (A).
2. Remove the five screws and the cover (A).
4. Measure the resistance between the 3-Mode switch

7P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 7 in each switch
Position Resistance
SPORT About 1,043 0
NORMAL About 33 D
ECON About 363 fi
5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the switch.
km /h, mph Change Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-83). 5. If the continuity is not as specified, remove the cover
(A), and replace the switch (B) or bulb (C).
3. Remove the two screws, then remove the km/h, mph

change switch (A).
11......... 11.
5 4 3 2 1
u u

o o
Rewriting the ODO Data and Transferring the Maintenance Minder Data
to a New Gauge Control Module
NOTE: How to release locked odometer mileage to
Obtain a new gauge control module before starting the original gauge control module
the rewriting process. Only new gauges can be
rewritten. If, after you attempt to transfer mileage to a new gauge
Rewriting is not possible on a gauge control module assembly, the odometer display has dashes (----- ), is
that will not communicate with the HDS. garbled, or shows an incorrect value, the original gauge
Check the official Honda website for more information control module can be unlocked and restored to its
on how to write odometer information to a gauge original state In this way, it can be used again for
control module that will not communicate with the additional attempts to transfer the mileage:
HDS. 1. Confirm that you have the latest HDS version of
Make sure that the HDS shows the correct VIN for the software.
vehicle you are working on.
2. Make sure that the HDS shows the correct VIN for the
Once you have started this procedure, you must
vehicle you are working on.
complete it before removing the HDS from the data
link connector (DLC). 3. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), reconnect the
Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery original gauge control module.
charger) to insure that correct battery voltage is
4. Completely re-boot the HDS.
maintained.
5. Clear any stored DTCs.
1. Before replacing the gauge control module, connect
the HDS. 6. Navigate to BODY ELECTRICAL/GAUGES/
ADJUSTMENT/GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
2. Select GAUGES from the BODY ELECTRICAL
REPLACEMENT.
SYSTEM SELECT menu with the HDS.
7. Select LOCK RELEASE.
3. Select GAUGE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT
(ODO Rewrite) from the ADJUSTMENT MENU, and 8. Follow the prompts and the odometer mileage is
select READ OUT DATA, and save ODO value and the restored.
Maintenance Minder data into the HDS.
9. Start over and make sure the screen prompts are
4. Replace the gauge control module (see page 22-354). followed.
5. Select WRITE DATA and follow the instructions on the
HDS display, install the ODO value and the
Maintenance Minder data into the replacement gauge
control module. If the data transfer fails, refer to the
instructions below to release the locked ODO value.
Gauge Control Module Replacement
NOTE: Before replacing the gauge control module, retrieve the ODO value and the maintenance minder data from the
gauge control module with the HDS (see page 22-353).
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-83).
2. Remove the four screws from the gauge control module (A).
3. Disconnect the 32P connector (B) from the gauge control module.
4. Install the gauge control module in the reverse order of removal.
5. Rewrite the ODO data and transfer the mai ntenance minder data to the new gauge control module (see page 22-353).
NOTE: Check the official Honda website for more information on how to write odometer information to a gauge
control module that will not communicate with the HDS.
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Calibration
NOTE: To test the outside air temperature sensor, refer Troubleshooting

to the outside air temperature sensor test procedure
(see page 21-73). If the indicator displays-------- F (--------- C) for more
than 2 seconds after selecting the outside air
D e sc rip tio n temperature display mode, checkfor and resolve all
B-CAN related DTCs, then check the outside air
The outside temperature sensor is located behind the temperature sensor or the gauge control module
middle of the front bumper. The gauge control module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325).
uses measurements from this sensor provided by the
climate control unit via the B-CAN communication line
to display the outside air temperature. Fahrenheit (USA models):
Because ofthe location ofthe sensor, it may be affected
by heat reflection from the road, engine and radiator
heat, or hot exhaust from surrounding traffic.
These conditions can soak the outside air temperature
sensor in heat and cause inaccurate readings. Logic has
been written into the gauge control module to help
prevent abnormal or fluctuating outside air temperature Centigrade (Canada models):
indicator readings.
Outside A i r Temperature Indicator Logic c

Initial outside air temperature is indicated after the
ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Engine coolant temperature is 140 F (60 C) or higher:
Calibration
If the engine coolant temperature is 140 F (60 C) or
The outside air temperature indicator's displayed
higher when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the
temperature can be recalibrated 5 F ( 3 C) to meet
outside air temperature when the last time the key was
the customer's expectations.
turned off is displayed regardless of the current
temperature measured by the outside air temperature 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
sensor.
2. Push and hold the INFORMATION (NEXT or
Engine cool ant temperature is less than 140 F (60 C): PREVIOUS) button for at least 3 seconds to enter the
customizing mode.
If the engine cool ant temperature is less than 140 F (60
C) or lower when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the 3. While in the customizing mode, select the CHG
current temperature measured by the outside air SETTI NG, and enter the METER SETUP. Then select
temperature sensor is indicated. the ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY, and calibrate
the value with the SEL/RESET button and the
INFORMATION (NEXT or PREVIOUS) button.
(cont'd)
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Calibration (cont'd)
4. When the desired correction value appears on the 5. The snow mark is displayed when the temperature is
display, release the button, and the recalibrated 37 F (3 C) or less the first time you turn the ignition
outside air temperature will be displayed. switch to ON (II).
NOTE; The recalibration temperature is not the value
the sensor sees.
Therefore the temperature can only be adjusted 5
degrees from sensors reading.
Example:
Incorrect value = 68 F
4 \ LOW
O U T S ID E
(20 C) TEM PERATURE
Desired correction value = +2 F

(+1 G)
Correct value = 70 F
(21 eC)
Desired correction value = -2 F

M X)
Correct value = 66 F
(19 C)
NOTE: To recal ibrate the display to the true
temperature, remove the outside air temperature
sensor (A), but leave it connected. Submerge the
sensor and a thermometer (B) in a container of ice
water (C). Select the calibration mode as described
above, then recalibrate the display to the true
temperature.
Resetting the Lifetime Points
NOTE:
Do steps 1 through 5 within 30 seconds.
If the ambient meter color is set to always display blue
with the custom setting, cancel that setting by
following the instructions in the Owner's Manual.
2. Confirm that the NORMAL mode or SPORT mode by
the multi-information display (MID) or indicator.
NOTE: If the ECON system is in the ECON mode,
change it to the NORMAL mode or SPORT mode by
pressing the NORMAL mode switch or SPORT mode
switch, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then
repeat this step again.
3. Press and release the brake pedal at least twice.
4. Confirm that the ambient meter color is green.
NOTE: If the ambient meter color is set to always be
blue with the custom setting, it will not change to
green.
5. Press the ECON mode switch once, then press the
SPORT mode switch or NORMAL mode switch once.
6. Confirm that the ambient meter color disappears.
NOTE: If the ambient meter color is set to always be
blue with the custom setting, it does not disappear.
NOTE: The Eco score and the Eco stage indicator are
not displayed unless you let the engine idle for 3
minutes or drive for at least 218 yards (200 m).
SAFETY INDICATOR
fuse/relay box)
DRIVER'S DOOR SWITCH HATCH LATCH SWITCH

Test, page 22-266
Circuit Diagram
BATTERYTERMINAL
BLK BLK BLK BLK
DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S 1
DOOR SWITCH DOOR SWITCH HATCH
(Closed: (Closed: LATCH
Door open) Door open) SWITCH
(Closed:
Hatch open)
BLK
_Q_ _Q_ _L _D_ i

G501 G502 G501 G502
Control Unit Input Test
NOTE:
Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system first, using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode
A (see page 22-126).
Before testing, do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325) to make sure the door indicator
LED and the B-CAN communication line are OK.
MICU
3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors D, N, Q, R, Y, and AD.
CONNECTOR D (49P)
ORN
nliefiTsffTMM PS]eis14 (32(311 |5o|312 11 NHn

lisKfjiel liTOal liliiiiol' -
[45|27l26l25|44[43] |42|24l23)22[4j[4o| (39)21120|19|38|37|l
CONNECTOR N (10P) CONNECTOR O (34P)
BLK
n r
4 2 1
r n
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
00
CD
10 7 6 5
j "
L _ J 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
BLK
CONNECTOR R (8P) CONNECTOR Y (16P) CONNECTOR AD (IP)

BLK
r i ___ r n

r
..n
CM
00
3 I l 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 1
LT
8 7 6 5 4
d
/
16 1 5 14 13 12 11 10 9
/
BLK YEL
5. Reconnect the connectors, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do the following input tests:
not obtained
the wire
the wire
the wire
the wire
AD1 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. B60 (50 A) fuse in
the wire
ground
the wire
There should be about 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
D27 BRN Passenger's door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty passenger's door switch
open There should be less than 0.2 V. Faulty passenger's door switch
ground
the wire
Passenger's door Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty passenger's door switch
closed There should be about 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
D17 ORN Hatch open Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty hatch latch switch
There should be less than 0.2 V. An open or high resistance in
the wire
Hatch closed Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty hatch latch switch
There should be about 5 V. Poor ground (G801) or an open
in the ground wire
A short to ground in the wire
Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
Gauge control module

7. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-354), and disconnect the 32P connector from it.
BLK PNK
n n n i---------------: r \ n n r n
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 | 1 |
CO
O
CM
00
CM
r ^
CM
CD
CM
CM
CM
CO
CM
o
3 2 31 29 2 2 21 19 18 17
7
BLK LTBLU
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
9. Reconnect the connector to the gauge control module, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do the following input
tests:
not obtained
the wire
the wire
17 LTBLU Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. B22 (7.5 A) fuse in
Faulty under-dash fuse/relay
box
the wire
the wire
10. Substitute a known-good gauge control module, and recheck the system.
If the symptom is gone, the gauge control module is faulty: replace it (see page 22-354).
If the symptom is still present, the MICU is faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box:
Component Location index
'G AUG E CONTROL MODULE

VSA OFF SWITCH Input T est page 22-347
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

Test, page 19-12
(Built into
the under-dash
fuse/relay box)
Removal and Installation COMBINATION , llkii,
-USA mode l s, page 22-82 LIGHT SWITCH SRS UNIT
-Canada models, page 22-83 Test/Replacement, page 22-234
PASSENGER'S
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
DRIVER'S SEAT BELT

BUCKLE SWITCH
Circuit Diagram
*1: With TPMS

BATTERYTERMINAL *2: Wire color may be substituted
FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX for SRS circuits
CAN line
_Q _
G601 G501 G501

*1 : Without auto light
*2 : With auto light
: B-CAN line
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
V
GRN
Q15
H/L PASSING H/L PARKING

DIM SW OFF LTSW ///
SW SW
(HI) H/L COMBI
ON GND
SW
DOOR
SW(DR)
D26
BLK BLK BLK
6 IGNITION
KEYSWITCH
(Closed:
Key inserted)
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
^ _Q_ _Q_ _Q_ _Q_
G501 G502 G501 G502 G502

Control Unit Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325) to make sure the beeper
and the indicators in the gauge control module work properly, and the B-CAN and F-CAN lines are OK.
MICU
3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors D, N, Q, R, Y, and AD.
CONNECTOR D (49P)
R 9|8|7MM |ii] 6I5|4[32)311 |io| 3I2| 1H 28I u

~ lielfflel.... ...nsCTal' ...(iliiTioT
|^27|26|25|44~|43l [4g|24|23l22|4l~|iol |39|2l|2oll9|38]37|
PNK

RED GRY BLU BLK
n r
CO
4 2 1
J L
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CO
00
10 7 6 5
Lj L _ J 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
BLK BLK GRY

cr...........................
CONNECTOR R (8P) CONNECTOR Y(16P) CONNECTOR AD (IP )

BLK
1 ..._r
3 1 1
2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
05
CO
7 5 4 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 11 1 0
J 9
/
BLK YEL
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
5. Reconnect the connectors, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do the following input tests:
positions There should be less than 0.2 V. An open or high resistance in the
wire
wire
wire
wire
ADI YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. B60 (50 A) fuse in the
An open or high resistance in the
wire
ground
wire
There should be about 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
Q18 GRY Ignition key inserted Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G502) or an open in
into the ignition switch There should be less than 0.2 V. the ground wire
Faulty ignition key switch
wire
Ignition switch in LOCK Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty ignition key switch
(0) position and ignition There should be about 5 V. A short to ground in the wire
key removed from the
ignition switch
Q10 BLU Combination light Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light switch
switch OFF terminals Q10 and G19: An open or high resistance in the
Q19 BLK There should be less than 0.2 V. wire
switch in any other terminals Q10 and Q19: A short to ground in the wire
position than OFF There should be about 5 V.
Q11 GRY Combination light Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light switch
switch (PARKING terminals Q11 and Q19: An open or high resistance in the
Q19 BLK position) ON There should be less than 0.2 V. wire
switch OFF terminals Q11 and G19: A short to ground in the wire
Q13 RED Combination light Measure the voltage between Faulty combination light switch
switch (Headlight terminals Q13 and Q19: An open or high resistance in the
Q19 BLK position) ON There should be less than 0.2 V. wire
switch OFF terminals Q13 and G19: A short to ground in the wire
(cont'd)
Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
Gauge Control Module

7. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-354), and disconnect the 32P connector from it.
BLK PNK
n n n I------------------------- _ V n n / n
16 15 14 13 12 11 . 1 0 9 8 7 6 5
4 3 2 1
3 2 31 3 0 2 9 2 8 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 21 20 19 18 17
/ / \
BLK ORN LT BLU
Wire s i de of female terminals
9. Reconnect the connector to the gauge control module, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do the following input
tests:
not obtained
4 . BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G501)
the wire
the wire
17 LT Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: Blown No. B22 (7.5 A) fuse in
BLU There should be battery voltage. the under-dash fuse/relay box
the wire
the wire
26 ORN Parking brake switch Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty parking brake switch
ON (Lever pulled) There should be less than 1 V. An open or high resistance in
the wire
Parking brake switch Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty parking brake switch
OFF (Lever released) There should be about 5 V. o A short to ground in the wire
10. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-325), and check the beeper and the seat belt
reminder indicator.
If the beeper sounds and the seat belt reminder indicator flashes, go to step 11.
If the beeper does not sound or the seat belt reminder indicator does not flash, replace the gauge control module
(see page 22-354).
11. Substitute a known-good gauge control module, and recheck the system.
I f the symptom is gone, the gauge control module is faulty; replace it (see page 22-354).
If the symptom is still present, the MICU is faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box:

Circuit Diagram
BATTERYTERMINAL
FUSE BOX
BATTERY
No. A1 (100 A)
c r\jo
-
WHT
ACCESSORY
POWER
ci) SOCKET
-
G502
Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement
NOTE: I f the accessory power socket does not work, 6. Check for continuity between the accessory power
check the No. B13 (20 A) fuse in the under-dash socket 2P connectorterminal No. 1 and body ground.
fuse/relay box and ground (G502) first. There should be continuity.
1. Remove the center lower cover (see page 20-89). If there is continuity, replace the accessory power
socket; go to step 7.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the accessory If there is no continuity, checkfor:
power socket (B). - Poor ground (G502).
- An open or high resistance in the wire between
accessory power socket 2P connector terminal
No. 1 and body ground (G502).
7. Remove the socket (A) from the housing (B).
3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all

making good contact. 8. Remove the housing (A) from the panel.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair
them as necessary, and recheck the system.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I).
5. Measure the voltage between accessory power
socket 2P connectorterminal No. 2 and body ground.
There should be battery voltage.
If there is battery voltage, go to step 6.
I f there is no voltage, check for:
- Blown No. B13 (20 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
- An open or high resistance in the wire between
accessory power socket 2P connector terminal
No. 2 and under-dash fuse/relay box connector R
(8P) terminal No. 6.
9. Install the power socket in the reverse order of

removal.
POWER MIRRORS
*: W ith power mirror defogger

Circuit Diagram
*1 : Without power mirror defogger

*2 : With power mirror defogger
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAYBOX
BATTERYTERMINAL
FUSE BOX REAR WINDOW -RED-
No. B59 (30 A)*1 DEFOGGER RELAY
No. A1 (100 A) (40 A)*2 No. B55 (10 A) F2
crxjo---- c r \ j j ----- - -BRN-
(+> - C T X j O .......
j No. B60
IGNITION SWITCH (IGN)
3(50 A)
No. B10(7.5A)
ORN- ---- ctvjo----
-BRN----(|s
-BRN
RED PUR
36 I29
IG2 Rr DEF
RLY
SWITCH A Ai RDEEAFO
RWINDOW CLIMATE
INDICATORLVJ GGERSWITCH/ CONTROL
(LED) X H POWERMIRROR UNIT
DEFOGGERSWITCH*2
i i
GND
j 31
BLK
jQ_
G502
* : With power mirror defogger
pf]: With power mirror defogger
[~2~|: Without power mirror defogger
No. B29 (10A) FUSE

(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
0 RED-
1
RED
y
Function Test
1. Remove the power mirror switch (see page 22-377). Left mirror
2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power 6. Connect power mirror switch 13P connector terminals
mirror switch (B). No. 4 and No. 9, and power mirror switch 13P
connector terminals No. 1 (or No. 7) and No. 13 with
jumper wires.
The left mirror should tilt down (or swing left) with the
ignition switch in ON (II).
If the left mirror does not tilt down (or does not
swing left), check for an open or high resistance in
the GRY (or PNK) wire between the left mirror and
the 13P connector.
If the wire is OK, check the left mirror actuator.
If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left,
repair the ORN wire.
If the mirror works properly, check the mirror
switch.
Right mirror
- /G R Y
7. Connect power mirror switch 13P connector terminals
5 4 3 1 'I 7 1 .( 2 1 \ Wire side of
No. 4 and No, 8, and power mirror switch 13P
13 12 11 |10| 9 | 8 | 7 6 j female terminals
bu connector terminals No. 1 (or No. 6) and No. 13 with
BLU jumper wires, and the ignition switch ON (II).
The right mirror should tilt down (or swing left) with
BLK RED ORIM LT GRN the ignition switch in ON (II).
If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing
left), check for an open or high resistance in the
3. Choose the appropriate test based on the symptom: GRY (or BLU) wire between the right mirror and the
Both mirrors don't work, go to step 4. 13P connector. If the wire is OK, check the right
Left mirror does not work, go to step 6. mirror actuator.
Right mirror does not work, go to step 7. If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left,
Mirror defoggers don't work, go to step 8. repair the LT GRN wire.
If the mirror works properly, check the mirror
Both mirrors
switch.
4. Measure the voltage between power mirror switch
Defogger
13P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground with
the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Connect rear window defogger relay terminals No. 1
There should be battery voltage. and No. 2 with a jumper wire. Measure the voltage
If there is no battery voltage, check for: between terminal No. 4 ofthe mirror connectors and
- Blown No. B10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash body ground. There should be battery voltage and
fuse/relay box. both mirrors should warm up.
- An open or high resistance in the RED wire. If there is no voltage or neither warms up, checkfor:
If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. - An open or high resistance in the BRN wire.
- Blown No. B55 (10 A) or No. B59 (40 A) fuse in the
5. Check for continuity between power mirror switch under-dash fuse/relay box.
There should be continuity. If only one fails to warm up, check:
If there is no continuity, check for: - Its defogger.
- An open or high resistance in the BLK wire. - Poor ground (G501, G502).
- Poor ground (G501). If both warm up, check the defogger switch or the
If there is continuity, check both mirrors rear window defogger relay.
individually.
Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-83). 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
Power Mirror Switch

3. Remove the mirror switch (A) from the instrument

panel.
- -n
5 4 3 2 1
13 12 11 10| 9 | 8 7 6
Power Mirror Actuator Test
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-4). 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and
2. Disconnect the power mirror 13P (or 6P)* connector ground according to the table.
(A). Power Mirror Actuator
*: Without power mirror defogger
Term ina l
6 7 8
Position [3] [4] [5]
TI LT UP
TILT DOWN
SW I NG LEFT
SW ING RI GHT
[ ]: W ithout power mirror defogger
4. If the mirror fails to work properly, check for an open

or high resistance in the wire between the connector
and the mirror holder. If the wire is OK, replace the
power mirror actuator (see page 22-379).
l W ith
5 4 3 2 1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
W ithout
y F=\ Y power
6 5 4 3 mirror
defogger

Power Mirror Actuator
Replacement
Defogger Test 1. Remove the mirror holder (see page 20-24).
5. Check for continuity between power mirror 13P 2. Remove the three screws and the actuator (A).
connector terminals No. 4 and No. 12. There should
be continuity. If there is no continuity, remove the
mirror holder (see page 20-24), and check for an open
or high resistance in the wire between the power
mirror 13P connector and the mirror defogger
terminals (A). If the wire is OK, replace the mirror
holder (see page 20-24).

removal.
Test, page 22-92

DRIVER S SEAT HEATER SWITCH PASSENGERS SEAT HEATER SWITCH
Test/Replacement, page 22-385 Test/Replacement, page 22-385
Circuit Diagram
BATTERYTERMINAL
FUSEBOX UNDER-DASHFUSE/RELAYBOX IGNITIONSWITCH
BATTERY No. A1 (100A) No. B60(IGN) (50A)
-
-- crxjo---
No. B40(10A) No. B10(7.5A)
i-<r\jd----
TH:THERMOSTAT [ON:84-102F(29-39C)]
[OFF: 102-117F(39-47C)] D33 Y11
BR:BREAKER [ON:77-95F(25-35C)]
[OFF: 115-129 (46-54C)] BRN RED
G601 G601
Seat Heater Test
Driver's seat P a s s e n g e r 's S e a t

NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review
the SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and the SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and
performing repairs or servicing. performing repairs or servicing.
1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-109). 1. Remove the passenger's seat (see page 20-109).
2. Disconnect the connector A (4P) and connector B (2P) 2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the seat heater.
from the seat heaters.
Terminal side of Termina l side of

male terminals male terminals male terminals
3. Check for continuity between seat heater 4P

3. Check for continuity between seat heater connector B connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2, No. 2 and No. 3,
(2P) terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be and terminals No. 1 and No. 3. There should be
continuity. If the continuity is not as specified, replace continuity. If the continuity is not as specified, replace
the seat-back heater (see page 22-386). the seat cushion heater (see page 22-386).
4. Reconnect seat heater connector B (2P) to the
seat-back heater.
5. Checkfor continuity between seat heater connector A
(4P) terminals No. 1 and No. 2, No. 2 and No. 3, and
terminals No. 1 and No. 3. There should be continuity.
If the continuity is not as specified, replace the seat
cushion heater (see page 22-386).
Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the center console (see page 20-79). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
2. Disconnect the 6P (or 7P*) connector from the seat
heater switch, then remove the switch. NOTE;
*: Passenger's seat heater switch Make sure the correct test lead ( + or ) is placed
on the terminal.
Driver's seat heater switch
When checking for continuity across the diode, use
the diode setting (-M -) on the digital volt/ohm
meter to check the diode bias.
Be aware of this characteristic; a diode is one that
Passenger's seat heater conducts fully in one direction (forward) and not at
switch all in the opposite direction (reverse).
Terminal side of
male terminals V Termina l
I -j
Y Position \
7|6|5|.4|3|2|1
7 o
HIGH
AAAr-@-AAAH4- >
Terminal side of
male terminals ------ VSA------
-WV-N-WV
ON
a
AAAr-@-AAAr+#-
LOW
-AAA------@-
-AAAr+4-AA/V
OFF
-AAAr >
a -AA/V-M-WV

Seat Heater Replacement
Seat Cushion Heater Seat-Back Heater

NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review
the SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and the SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and
performing repairs or servicing. performing repairs or servicing.
1. Remove the seat cushion cover (see page 20-123). 1. Remove the seat-back cover (see page 20-117).
2. Carefully remove the seat cushion heater (A) from the 2. Carefully remove the seat-back heater (A) from the
seat cushion pad (B). seat back pad (B).
NOTE: The seat cushion heater is glued to the seat NOTE: The seat-back heater is glued to the seat back
cushion pad. When removing it, take care not to pad. When removing it, take care not to damage the
damage the seat cushion pad. seat back pad.
*1: W ith power mirror defogger

*2: The rear antenna ground eliminates e l ectromagnetic waves from the battery m odu l e to prevent noise
in the A M /FM radio, and does not have a defogger function.
Circuit Diagram
BATTERYTERMINAL *1 ; Without power mirror defogger

FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX *2 : With power mirror defogger
Function Test
NOTE: 4. To avoid damaging the defogger grid, wrap a single

Before testing, check the No. B10 (7.5 A), No. B59 (40 A strand of bare copper wire or aluminum foil around
[30 A]), and No. B60 (IGN) (50 A) fuse in the the voltmeter probe. Use the foil or wire as a contact
under-dash fuse/relay box. brush when moving across the defogger grid.
[ ]: Without power mirror defogger
Aftermarket window tinting should be removed
before testing.
When testing the defogger, hold a cup of hot steaming
water near the glass. The steam can help diagnose a
broken or under-performing defogger grid.
Be careful not to scratch or damage the defogger
wires with the tester probe.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn the rear
window defogger switch ON.
2. Measure the voltage between rear window defogger
A (1P) positive terminal and body ground. There
should be battery voltage.
If there is no voltage, checkfor:
5. Touch the voltmeter positive probe to each point on
- Faulty rear window defogger relay, (see page
each defogger wire, and the negative prove to the
22-92)
negative terminal.
-Faulty climate control unit.
- An open or high resistance in the BLU wire to the NOTE: Touch the copper wire or aluminum foil
positive terminal. wrapped around the probe, not the probe, to avoid
If there is battery voltage, go to step 3. damaging the defogger wires.
If the voltage is as specified, the defogger wire up to
that point is OK.
If the voltage is not as specified, repair the defogger
wire.
- If voltage is more than specified at one ofthe
points, there is a break or high resistance toward
the negative half of the wire.
- If voltage is less than specified at one of the
points, there is a break or high resistance toward
the positive half ofthe wire.
3. Measure the voltage between rear window defogger

B (1P) negative terminal and body ground. There
should be less than 0.2 V.
If there is greater than 0.2 V, check for an open in the
ground (BLK) wire or poor ground (G801). If there is
0.2 V or less, go to step 4.
Defogger Wire Repair
NOTE:
Aftermarket window tinting should be removed
before testing.
To make an effective repair, the broken wire section
must be no longer than 25 mm (1.0 inch).
1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)
with fine steel wool, then clean it with isopropyl
alcohol.
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion of

the defogger wire (B) with cellophane tape (C).
3. Using a small brush, apply a heavy coat of silver
conductive paint (commercially available) (A)
extending about 3.0 mm (0.1 in) on both sides ofthe
break. Allow 25 minutes to dry.
4. Do the function test to confirm that the wire is

repaired.
5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it
dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If Audio, Navigation, and Telematics
maintenance is required)
injury caused by unintentional deployment ofthe airbags, side airbags, side curtain airbags, and/or seat belt
tensioners.
A u d io , N a v i g a tio n , a n d T e le m a tic s
A u d io , N a v ig a t io n , a n d
System D e scrip tio n .................. 23-149
T e le m a t ic s Circuit Diagram . . . .............. ......23-172
Special Tools ....................... 23-2 System Diagnostic M o d e ........23-174
DTC T roubleshooting ........... 23-198
A u d io S y s te m
S ym ptom Troubleshooting ....23-214
C om ponent Location In d e x .... 23-3
CD, DVD, and PC Card
R em oval/Installation ...... . 23-231
In fo rm a tio n ............ . ...2 3 -6
* A udio-N avigation Unit
S ym ptom Troubleshooting
R em oval/Installation ............ 23-232
In d e x ............................... .........23-7
* Voice Control Switch T e s t...... 23-234
System D e scrip tio n ................2 3 -9
* Voice Control Switch
C ircuit D ia g ra m .........................23-42
R eplacem ent...... ................... 23-235
Self-Diagnostic F u n c tio n ........ 23-49
HFL-Navigation M icrophone
Error C odes................................ 23-56
R em oval/Installation ......... 23-236
S ym ptom T ro u b le s h o o tin g .... 23-59
GPS Antenna
Sound Q uality D ia g n osis........23-115
Rem oval/Installation ............ 23-236
* A udio U nit
R em oval/Installation.............23-119 HandsFreeLink System
Stereo A m p lifie r Com ponent Location Index 23-237
R em oval/Installation............ 23-121 General Troubleshooting
Speaker Test/R eplacem ent 23-122 In fo rm a tio n ........................... 23-239
* A udio Remote Switch T e s t 23-125 DTC Troubleshooting In d e x ... 23-249
* A udio Remote Switch Sym ptom Troubleshooting
R eplacem ent.......................... 23-125 In d e x .......................... .............23-251
USB A dapter Control U nit System D e sc rip tio n .................. 23-253
R eplacem ent........................... 23-128 HFL System T ro u b le s h o o tin g . 23-255
A u xiliary Jack Assem bly Circuit D ia g ra m ........................ 23-256
R eplacem ent.......................... 23-128 Self-Diagnostic F u n ctio n ......... 23-258
AM /FM Antenna DTC T ro u b le s h o o tin g .............. 23-259
R eplacem ent.......................... 23-129 S ym ptom Troubleshooting 23-270
W in d o w Grid R epair................. 23-129 HFL M icrophone
R em oval/Installation............ 23-280
N a v ig a tio n S y s te m
* HFL Switch T e s t.........................23-280
Com ponent Location Index 23-130
* HFL Switch R eplacem ent........ 23-281
Control U nit Input
In fo rm a tio n ............................ 23-131
Test/R eplacem ent................. 23-282
DTC Troubleshooting In d e x ... 23-142
S ym ptom Troubleshooting
In d e x ............................ ........... 23-145
Audio, Navigation, and Tel ematics
Special Tools

07AAZ-SDBA100 Diagnostic CD 1
07AAZ-SDBA200 Skip Test CD 1
(D 07AAZ-SDBA300 Skip Test CD 1
W ith Navigation
STEREO AMPLIFIER
Connector Inputs and Outputs, page 23-40

W ith Navigation
Test/Rep l acement, page 23-124

RIGHT REAR SPEAKER
DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER

Without Navigation
Connector I nputs and Outputs, page 23-37

Lewer-Loeked Connector Connecting
Disconnecting To connect the connector, push the connector into the

connector sleeve (A). As the connector is pressed in, the
To disconnect the connector, pull the lever (A) while lever (B) moves to the locked position.
pushing the lock tab (B) down, then pull out the
connector (C).
B
With navigation
Poor AM or FM radio reception or Symptom Troubleshooting AM/FM antenna lead and/or sublead
interference (see page 23-59) short or open in the wire
Audio-navigation unit power switch will Symptom Troubleshooting
not turn on (No information display and (see page 23-67)
no sound)
Audio-navigation unit power switch will Symptom Troubleshooting Coins in the CD player
not turn off (see page 23-70)
No sound is heard from the speaker(s) Symptom Troubleshooting
(display is normal) (see page 23-72)
Auxil iary input sound is low or cannot be Symptom Troubleshooting
heard (see page 23-82)
Audio system sound is weak or distorted Symptom Troubleshooting
Radio preset memory is lost Symptom Troubleshooting Internal error
(see page 23-85)
Volume does not change Symptom Troubleshooting
(see page 23-85)
Volume does not increase with speed Symptom Troubleshooting
(see page 23-86)
Volume is too high or too low when Symptom Troubleshooting
driving at freeway speeds (see page 23-88)
Radio tuner does not change stations Symptom Troubleshooting
(see page 23-88)
Audio-navigation unit button Symptom Troubleshooting
illumination does not work (see page 23-90)
Audio remote switch does not work Symptom Troubleshooting
properly (see page 23-93)
Audio disc does not load Symptom Troubleshooting Label on the disc
(see page 23-96)
Audio disc does not eject Symptom Troubleshooting Label on the disc
(see page 23-96)
Audio disc does not play Symptom Troubleshooting Unsupported format
(see page 23-97)
Audio disc skips Symptom Troubleshooting Tire pressure (over-inflated), disc
(see page 23-97) smudged, dirty, or scratched
USB device does not function Symptom Troubleshooting Compatibility ofthe USB device (see
(see page 23-99) Owner's Manual)
USB input sound is low or cannot be Symptom Troubleshooting Compatibility ofthe USB device (see
heard (see page 23-109) Owner's Manual)
Audio disc cannot be inserted and/or Symptom Troubleshooting
ejected (see page 23-113)
Display can be opened and/or closed Replace the
even when an audio disc is being audio-navigation unit (see
inserted or ejected page 23-232)
PC card wi l l not play/card icon on audio Symptom Troubleshooting
screen cannot be selected (see page 23-114)
(cont'd)
W ithout navigation
Sym ptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
Poor AM or FM radio reception or Symptom Troubleshooting AM/FM antenna lead and/or sublead
interference (see page 23-63) short or open in the wire
Audio unit power switch will not turn on Symptom Troubleshooting
(No information display and no sound) (see page 23-69)
Audio unit power switch will not turn off Symptom Troubleshooting Coins in the CD player
(see page 23-71)
No sound is heard from the speaker(s) Symptom Troubleshooting
Auxiliary input sound is low or cannot be Symptom Troubleshooting
heard (see page 23-84)
Audio system sound is weak or distorted Symptom Troubleshooting
(see page 23-84)
Radio preset memory is lost Symptom Troubleshooting Internal error
(see page 23-85)
Volume does not change Symptom Troubleshooting
(see page 23-85)
Volume does not increase with speed Symptom Troubleshooting
(see page 23-87)
Volume is too high or too low when Symptom Troubleshooting
driving at freeway speeds (see page 23-88)
Radio tuner does not change stations Symptom Troubleshooting
(see page 23-88)
Display does not dim or brighten with Symptom Troubleshooting
dimmer (see page 23-89)
Audio unit button illumination does not Symptom Troubleshooting
work (see page 23-91)
Audio remote switch does not work Symptom Troubleshooting
properly (see page 23-94)
Audio disc does not load Symptom Troubleshooting Label on the disc
(see page 23-96)
Audio disc does not eject Symptom Troubleshooting Label on the disc
(see page 23-96)
Audio disc does not play Symptom Troubleshooting Unsupported format
(see page 23-97)
Audio disc skips Symptom Troubleshooting Tire pressure (over-inflated), disc
(see page 23-97) smudged, dirty, or scratched
Audio unit button does not work Symptom Troubleshooting
(see page 23-98)
Audio unit disc indicator does not work Symptom Troubleshooting
(see page 23-99)
USB device does not function Symptom Troubleshooting Compatibility of the USB device (see
(see page 23-104) Owner's Manual)
USB input sound is low or cannot be Symptom Troubleshooting Compatibility ofthe USB device (see
heard (see page 23-111) Owner's Manual)
System Description
Overview
The audio unit or audio-navigation unit acts as the processor for all audio functions. Select audio functions from the
audio unit or audio-navigation unit, the audio remote switch (on the steering wheel), or by using the navigation voice
control system (with navigation). The audio display provides the current audio status. For vehicles with navigation,
additional audio information is available by touching the audio button on the navigation screen (seethe Owner's
Manual and the navigation manual for more details.).
The audio system is equipped with an auxiliary input jack (AUX) in the audio unit (without navigation), or in the
dashboard center lower cover (with navigation). The system accepts auxiliary audio inputs using a 3.5 mm stereo
miniplug.
The audio unit or audio-navigation unit has a built-in EEPROM (electrically erasable programmable read-only memory).
This memory holds the audio presets (AM/FM radio frequency, sound settings, etc.) even when the 12 volt battery is
disconnected.
For vehicles with navigation, pressing the open/close button on the navigation display allows access to the CD slot, the
PC card slot, and the navigation DVD.
A security signal is daisy-chained between the audio and vehicle components for integration into the vehicle's security
system.
Speed-Sensitive Volume Compensation (SVC)
The audio system is equipped with speed-sensitive volume compensation (SVC). The audio-navigation unit or audio
unit receives the vehicle speed pulse (VSP) from the ECM/PCM. The system processes the speed input and increases the
navigation or audio system volume level as the vehicle speed increases to compensate for the various interior noises
that occur at higher speeds. When the vehicle slows down, the volume returns to its normal level. The SVC has four
settings: SVC OFF, LOW, MID and HIGH that can be adjusted using the audio-navigation unit or audio unit. The SVC
comes from the factory with the MID setting as the default.
To change the audio unit SVC setting, press the sound (J*/od) button repeatedly until the SVC is displayed, and rotate the
VOL/SELECT knob to adjust the SVC to the desired setting (SVC OFF, LOW, MID, or HIGH).
To change the audio-navigation unit SVC setting, press the AUDIO button, and then select the SOUND icon on the
navigation display. Press the navigation display to select the desired setting (SVC OFF, LOW, MID, or HIGH).
Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a favorite station and display the program service name provided by the radio data
system (RDS).
Program Service (PS) Name Display
The program service name display function shows the name of the station you are listening to. You can turn this
function on or off.
Rear Antenna Ground
All models are equipped with the rear antenna ground attached to the upper rear window that is connected to the body
ground. This antenna ground prevents the electromagnetic waves that are created the IMA system from interfering with
the reception ofthe AM/FM radio frequencies.
M u tin g L o g ic
The navigation system allows voice control of the audio, the PC card, and the CD player. Voice control commands are
communicated on the GA-Net. When using the navigation TALK/BACK button, the audio is muted on all speakers and
you get navigation sound on the front channels. When using the navigation or route guidance (RG), the front speakers
give the navigation sound and the rear speakers continue to play. For more information, see the navigation section. The
outline ofthe interruption function is shown in this table.
Contents Audio output
Left front CH Right front CH Right rear CH Left rear CH Subwoofer CH
Pressing Navigation Navigation Muted Muted Muted

Navigation output output
TALK/BACK
Buttons
Route Guidance Navigation Navigation Audio Audio Audio

output output
HFL Telephone Telephone Muted Muted Muted

output output
HFL and Route Navigation Telephone Muted Muted Muted

Guidance output output
U S B A d a p te r
The audio-navigation unit or the audio unit can play digital music from portable audio players, USB drives, etc. when the
device is plugged into the USB port. The audio-navigation unit or the audio unit uses the GA-Net to allow you to control
the device from the audio-navigation unit or the audio unit when searching and playing the files. Not all players and
player functions work with the USB adapter. Please see the Owner's Manual for more information.
GA-Net Bus Configuration
The GA-Net bus passes audio and navigation commands throughout the navigation and audio components.
These commands include navigation touch screen and hard button signals. Because the entire bus is daisy-chained
between components (see diagram), any open or short in the GA-Net bus harness will cause any or all of these functions
to become inoperative. The addition of any audio accessory must maintain the continuity ofthe GA-Net bus by installing
the Y cable included with the accessory kit.
Anti-Theft Feature
With navigation
The audio-navigation unit has a coded theft protection circuit. Make sure you have the anti-theft security code before;
Disconnecting the 12 volt battery.
Disconnecting the audio-navigation unit connector A (24P) and C (8P).
Removing the No. B1 (15 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
When the audio-navigation unit is reconnected to the power and the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), CODE appears
on the display. Enter the 4-digit anti-theft security code.
If the code cannot be found, use the interactive Network (iN) to look it up. You can view the serial number in the ECU Info
diagnostic screen (see page 23-183). Alternatively, you can find the serial number on the underside label which is
located on the audio-navigation unit in the dash.
When replacing the audio-navigation unit, be sure to give the customer the new anti-theft security code.
If you cannot find the code, refer to the Anti-Theft Feature in the navigation section (see page 23-131) on how to retrieve
the code using the iN.
Without navigation
The audio unit has a coded theft protection circuit. Make sure you have the anti-theft security code before:
Disconnecting the 12 volt battery.
Disconnecting the audio unit connector A (24P).
Removing the No. B1 (15 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
When the audio unit is reconnected to the power and the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), CODE appears on the
display. Enter the 5-digit anti-theft security code.
When replacing the audio unit, be sure to give the customer the new anti-theft security code.
If you cannot find the code, refer to the Self-Diagnosis Function (see page 23-49) on how to retrieve the code using the
iN.
(cont'd)
Basie Audio Operation
1. When you press the VOL/SELECT button, the mode changes to the SELECT mode. When you are in the SELECT
mode, use the following buttons or knob to navigate through the various audio inputs.
BUTTON or KNOB RADIO CD-DA CD (MP3/WMA) iPod

USB
VOL/SELECT knob TUNE TRACK selection FOLDER selection Tune retrieval*1
FILE selection
VOL/SELECT button Exit SELECT mode Start playing the When a FOLDER is When a FOLDER is
selected track selected, you move selected, you move
down to the next down to the next
level. When a music level. When a music
file is selected, the file is selected, the
file begins playing. file begins playing.
Exit SELECT mode Exit SELECT mode Returns to the Returns to the
previous level*2 previous level*2
Exit SELECT mode Start playing the FOLDER/FILE PLAY MODE
selected track sel ection and play*3 selection and play*4
*1: There are four basic play modes (PLAYLISTS/ARTISTS/ALBUMS/SONGS) and the layered structure under
applies to the specification for the iPod.
*2: When you are in the top hierarchy, selecting ^ exits the SELECT mode.
*3; When is pressed with FOLDER selected, it begins playing the first music file in the FOLDER.
*4: When is pressed with PLAYLIST/ARTIST/ALBUM selected, it begins playing the first music in the
selected category.
2. When any other button is pressed, the SELECT mode is canceled, and the audio unit changes per the button pressed.
3. When you are in the SELECT mode, the selected radio station or music file continues playing until you select a new
input or file (for example, you can l isten to the radio until you find the song you wish to play on the CD).
USB Function
Music files can be stored on portable USB devices (flash drives and approved iPod products) and played through the
audio-navigation unit or the audio unit by using the USB port. Although a customer can create many different folder
levels on their USB device, the audio-navigation unit orthe audio unit only recognizes two levels and automatically sorts
the music to meet this requirement.
To play the music files, use the dial selector to find the folder where the music file is located, then select the album or
music file (see the Owner's Manual for more information about selecting and playing USB files and approved iPod
products).
USB Device Requirements
2.0 High speed USB capable (maximum speed is 12 Mbps)
At least 256 MB storage capacity
USB formatted to be compatible with Windows-based operating systems
I f the USB has a security feature, like write protection, it must be turned off
There are many different USB drives, manufacturers, and configurations with new devices being released every day,
which makes it impossible to test all USB devices with the audio system. Even if the USB device meets all these
requirements, it may not be compatible.
To check if a USB device is compatible with the vehicle, test the USB device in a known-good vehicle of the same model
and year. If the USB device does not work on the known-good vehicle, assume that it is faulty or not compatible. A USB
device may work on a later year ofthe same model vehicle because the audio-navigation unit or the audio unit software
is constantly updated.
The audio-navigation unit or the audio unit displays the folder differently than what you may see on your PC because the
audio-navigation unit or the audio unit only recognizes two folder levels. The audio-navigation unit or the audio unit
overwrites the data for the track order when you connect the USB device. The audio unit does not modify the music files
or the structure on the USB device.
Hard disc drives do not support overwriting the data for the track order, which is why they are not recommended.
Reconnecting the USB Device
When you disconnect a USB drive, the data for the track order remains in the audio-navigation unit's or the audio unit's
memory so when you reconnect the same USB drive, the audio-navigation unit or the audio unit continues playing from
the location where it was disconnected. If a new USB drive is connected, the data for the track order is rewritten and you
need to select the album or music file.
USB Function List

Item Specifications Remarks
MP3 Supported MPEG1 Audio Layer3
standards MPEG2 Audio LSF Layer3
Supported .mp3/.MP3 Half-size character
extensions only
Sampling 32/44.1/48 MPEG1
frequency (kHz) 16/22.05/24 MPEG2
Bit rate (kbps) 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320/VBR MPEG1
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/144/160A/BR MPEG2
Supported tag ID3v2 (v2.2/v2.3/v2.4) Prioritize v2 over
ID3v1 (v1.0/v1.1) v1 No guarantee
for asynchronous
tag
Tag information Title/Artist/Album
Max. Tag Max. 64 Byte ID3v1: Max. 30
character count Byte
Partition Top partition only
Max. layers 8
WMA Supported WMA Ver7/8/9
standards
Supported .wma/.WMA Half-size character
extensions only
DRM file Unsupported Count as a number
of files
Sampling 32/44.1/48
frequency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps) 48 - 320/VBR (Peak 384)
Supported tag WMA TAG
Max. Tag Max. 64 Byte
character count
Max. layers 8
AAC Supported MPEG4/AAC LC Only the file
standards MPEG2/AAC LC encoded with
iTunes.
Supported .m4a/.M4A Half-size character
extensions only
DRM file Unsupported No count as a
number of files
Sampling 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48
frequency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps) 8 - 320 No guarantee for
VBR fil e
Supported tag MPEG-4 header Prioritize over ID3
tag
ID3v1/v2 Same as MP3
Max. Tag Max. 64 Byte ID3v1: Max. 30
character count Byte
Max. layers 8
USB with Audio Units
When you plug in a USB drive, the audio unit automatically searches the USB drive for playable music files. See the
Owner's Manual for more information about navigating USB menus and selecting music.
The audio unit organizes the music folders and files in a similar matrix that appears on the USB drive. The exception to
this matrix is music files that are not located in a folder. The audio unit automatically creates a folder titled ROOT or
FOLDER 01 and lists all these playable music files in it. If your customer complains that they can't find some songs
loaded on their USB drive, recommend that they check the ROOT folder or FOLDER 01 for the missing music files.
USB with Audio-Navigation Units
When you plug in a USB drive, the audio-navigation unit automatically searches the USB drive for playable music files.
See the Owner's Manual for more information about navigating USB menus, selecting music, and music file
compatibility.
The audio-navigation unit organizes the playable music folders and files that appear on the USB drive. If there are any
music files that are not located in a folder, the audio-navigation unit automatically creates a folder titled ROOT, and lists
all these playable music files in it. If your customer complains that they can't find some songs loaded on their USB drive,
recommend that they check the ROOT folder for the missing music files. If all the music files on the USB are in folders,
the ROOT folder does not appear.
When there are music files not located in a folder, the audio-navigation automatically creates a folder named ROOT (A).
FM1 | FM2 | AM | CD | cARd| USB
1:A 7 vm 5 IS!!. ...I

MikM
Itrack 101 Title 1 _______
|fold| r|01 ROOT ------ ~ "
I TIME 10' 40
fscANl*S
FO
Cl-D
ANER Track List Sound Background
FO
REL
PD
EE
AR
T FO
RAL
D
NDEO
RM REW FF SKIP- SKIP+
Select the Track List button to see the ROOT folder (A) which is automatically created only when there are music files not
located in folders.
Select a track:
CG 1 m ROOT A
OUSB
2 CD Album 1 n
3 CB Album 2
4 Album 3
5 QH Album 4
Return
All the music files not located in folders are listed under the ROOT folder.
iPod
When an iPod is connected to the audio unit with the USB port, you can navigate through the iPod's music files with the
VOL/SELECT knob and the key on the audio unit. You cannot use the iPod's controls.
The AUX terminal is a sound input terminal. When you connect an iPod to the audio unit using the AUX terminal, the
audio unit cannot control the iPod except for the volume control. To select and play songs, use the iPod's controls.
Because hardware and software continually change, make sure the iPod is compatible with the vehicle by referring to
the applicable Owner's Manual.
iPod Operation with Audio-Navigation Unit
When an iPod is connected to the audio-navigation unit with the USB port, you can navigate through the iPod's music
files with the joystick and the key on the audio-navigation unit. You cannot use the iPod's controls.
The AUX terminal is a sound input terminal. When you connect an iPod to the audio-navigation unit using the AUX
terminal, the audio-navigation unit cannot control the iPod except for the volume control. To select and play songs, use
the iPod's controls.
Because hardware and software continually change, make sure the iPod is compatible with the vehicle by referring to
the applicable Owner's Manual.
System Diagram
With navigation
Audio-navigation unit
W ithout navigation (Separata stereo am plifier type)
AM/FM
AM/FM signal
Digital Signal
Stereo amplifier Processor (DSP) receiver AM/FM antenna
Auxiliaryjack 1 CDplayer ECM/PCM

assembly (CD,MP3,WMA) (vehicle speed
pulse)
Speaker(s)
CPU LCD
USB adapter
control unit
Mie T >Comm BUS

HandsFreeLink
control unit Illumination
Audio signal Accessory i
remote switch (lighted buttons) l (CDchange,MusicLink,etc.) i
Microphone
Without navigation (Built-in stereo amplifier type)
AM/FM
AM/FM signal
Speaker(s) Stereoamplifier Digital Signal
Processor (DSP) receiver AM/FM antenna
Auxiliaryjack i CDplayer ECM/PCM

assembly (CD,MP3,WMA) (vehicle speed
pulse)________
USB adapter
control unit
Illumination
Audio
signal Accessory
remote switch (lighted buttons) I (CDchange,MusicLink,etc.)
Audio Glossary
NOTE: All items may not apply to this vehicle. See the Owner's Manual for more information.
Item Definition
Active noise cancellation The active noise cancellation system cancels some ofthe vehicle
noise. This occurs in the 1,5002,400 rpm range. Microphones
detect the low frequency sound, and the system outputs a
canceling sound from the audio speaker.
Active Sound Control The next generation of sound control that eliminated unwanted
sound in the passenger compartment.
AM (Amplitude Modulation) The type of transmission used in the standard radio broadcast
band from 530 to 1,710 kHz.
Amplifier A device that increases the level of a signal by increasing the
current or voltage.
Antenna A device used to send or receive electromagnetic waves through
the air.
ATA (PC Card) A type of card that has been tested for use in playing WMA and
MP3 music files in the PC card slot. Sizes of up to 1 GB have been
tested.
Audio remote switch The switches on the steering wheel that control the audio system.
Auxiliary jack Allows the customer to use a portable audio device to input audio
recordings.
Balance A control that changes the relative volume ofthe left and right
channels.
Band A range of frequencies between two definite limits. Bands are
assigned by the Federal Communications Commission for specific
uses.
Bass An adjustment for the low frequency sounds of around 160 Hz and
below.
Bluetooth Audio Allows the customer to play audio recordings stored on their cell
phone through the audio system.
Byte A unit of storage for computer files and memory. A CD holds
approximately 700 million bytes.
Compact flash A standard for small-size (3x4 cm), memory cards used in mobile
computers, PDAs, and digital cameras. Compact flash memory
cards are available in size of 32 MB up to 4 GB or more and can be
played in the audio PC slot. Sizes above 1GB have not been tested.
CD A 4.5-inch plastic disc containing digital audio recording that is
played optically on a laser equipped player. Never use discs with a
paper label. I n a hot vehicle, labels can curl up and jam the unit.
CD changer CD player that can store and play more than one CD. Two types are
available. Some units accept CDs fed into the changer one at a
time, and others accept a magazine (with CDs stacked in a
container).
CD player A component designed to play compact disc recordings using a
laser optical pickup. The signal from a CD player usually requires
amplification.
CSF (Cold Start Fix) screens These screens are displayed if the system requires a GPS
initialization. The vehicle should be moved outside into an open
area away from buildings/power lines.
dB (Decibels) A method of measuring sound or radio signal strength received by
the audio unit antenna.
Distortion I nexact reproduction of an audio signal caused by playing music at
levels the audio system cannot handle, you will typically hear this
as static, pops, or crackles.
Dolby (noise reduction) A processing system developed by Dolby Laboratories that
reduces the background noise on recording media. The result is a
cleaner playback from the audio system.
Item Definition
DUET A serial data communication line used for sub display.
DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) A 4.5-inch CD-like format used for storing movies with digital
audio and video features. The DVD-A format is a DVD format
designed for DVD audio systems. Some vehicles can play DVD and
DVD-A formats.
Equalizer A device that changes the relative volume of individual frequency
bands to suit personal tastes of the listener.
Fader The control that adjusts the relative volume levels of front and rear
speakers in a four-speaker system.
Format To prepare a PC card to receive files this function is done on a PC.
Always choose either FAT or FAT32, as the NTFS format is not
accepted by the system. Pick the default sectors for the format
method selected.
FM (Frequency Modulation) The form of modulation used for radio and television sound
transmission in most ofthe world. Less prone to interference than
AM. The FM broadcast band in North America covers roughly 87.7
to 107.9 MHz.
GA-Net The GA-Net allows the audio unit to communicate with all the
audio and navigation components in a vehicle. If there is an open
in the GA-Net or components, the entire audio and navigation
system may appear inoperative.
GB (Gigabyte) A unit of memory or disc storage equal to one billion bytes (1,000
million bytes).
HDD Hard disc drive. The navigation does not use a DVD, but uses a
hard drive to contain the navigation software. Can be updated with
a CD or DVD that is inserted into the audio disc slot.
Hz (Hertz) The unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second (cps). One
kilohertz (kHz) equals 1,000 cps; one megahertz (MHz) equals 1
million cps.
I ntegrated amplifier A component that combines a pre amp and a power amp into a
single unit. A receiver combines an integrated amp and a tuner
into a single unit.
iPod Portable digital audio player.
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) A type of digital display that changes reflectance or transmittance
when an electrical field is applied to it.
Memory Circuitry or devices that hold information in electrical or magnetic
form, such as the AM/FM radio presets.
MB (Megabyte) One million bytes. Written as 1MB. Megabytes are used as a
measure of digital storage space. For example, a CD can hold 650
MB.
Mic (Microphone) An abbreviation for microphone. For vehicles with navigation, the
microphone accepts navigation voice commands to control audio
and navigation functions.
Mute When the navigation gives guidance, the front speakers are muted
(no music). When you use the voice control system, all ofthe
speakers are muted.
Noise Unwanted random sounds like buzzing, hiss, pops, static, whine,
etc.
PC card The slot used for playing MP3 and WMA music files. The PC card is
usually a combination of a small flash card in a PCMCIA adaptor
that slides into the slot. The ATA, SD, and compact flash types of
cards have been tested up to 1 GB.
PCMCIA A computer standard for the slot that the PC card slides into.
Another term for the PC card slot.
Processor The part of an audio device that performs tasks/calculations. In the
audio unit, the processor handles muting to allow the navigation
system to speak its voice commands, and the decoding/playback
ofthe sound files, etc.
(cont'd)
Item Definition
Radio A head unit that combines a tuner, a preamplifier, and often a
power-amplifier.
Route guidance Spoken voice used for turn-by-turn navigation from the audio
speakers.
Stereo A recording of at least two channels where you can hear sound or
music from the left or right side.
SD (Secure Digital) card This compact type of memory card allows for fast data transfer
and has built-in security functions. SD cards have a small
write-protection switch on the side.
Shield A metallic foil or braided wire layer surrounding conductors which
are designed to prevent electrostatic or electromagnetic
interference (noise) from external sources which you hear as
buzzing or popping sounds which you hear on the speakers.
Loudspeaker A device that converts electrical energy into acoustical energy
(sound).
SVC (Speed-sensitive volume compensation) The SVC increases the audio volume to compensate for increased
interior noise when the vehicle is driven at freeway speeds.
Subwoofer A loudspeaker made to reproduce the lowest audio frequencies,
from about 25 Hz to 125 Hz.
Track A sound recording on a CD, tape, or PC card.
Treble An adjustment to control the volume of the high frequency
sounds.
Tuner A component (or part of a component) that receives radio signals
and selects one broadcast from many.
Tweeter A speaker designed to reproduce the higher frequencies (treble)
only.
USB Universal serial bus. The USB is used for playing audio files (MP3,
WMA, AAC, etc.) on the external device through the audio unit.
USB port Allows the customers to play data such as input audio recording
from portable audio devices (such as iPod) or data from USB flash
memory.
Woofer A speaker that is designed to reproduce low (bass) frequencies
only.
XM radio Satellite based radio transmission, which also uses a ground
based repeater network to ensure seamless reception. The
channels originate from XM's broadcast center, in Washington
DC, and uplink to two satellites. These satellites transmit the signal
across the entire continental United States.
XM receiver The external component that receives and processes the XM
signals from the XM satellites, and terrestrial (land) stations. The
audio unit communicates to the XM receiver over the GA-Net bus.
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs
With navigation
CONNECTOR E (14P)
NOTE: Refer to the navigation section for audio-navigation unit connector C, D, and H inputs and outputs (see page
23-162).
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)
l--------------- f
2
00
CD
xf- 1
CO
CM
7 6 5
o
4 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 3
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector A (24P)

Cavity Wire Color Terminal Name Description
A1 BLK MAIN GND Ground for audio-navigation unit (G503)
A2 WHT ILLUMI Detects illumination control signal
(BULB)
A3 PNK + BBACK UP Continuous power source
A4 RED ILLUMI + Inputs parking light on signal
A5 RED RLPRE + Outputs sound signal for left rear speaker
A6 GRN RL PRE Outputs sound signal for left rear speaker
A7 Not used
A8 Not used
A9 LT GRN RR PRE+ Outputs sound signal for right rear speaker
A10 WHT RR PRE Outputs sound signal for right rear speaker
A11 WHT REMOTE GND Ground for audio remote switch
A12 GRN SCTY Security signal from Multiplex integrated control unit (MICU)
A13 BLU K-LINE Detects scan tool signal (serial data)
A14 Not used
A15 YEL FL PRE+ Outputs sound signal for driver's door speaker and left
tweeter
A16 PNK FL PRE- Outputs sound signal for driver's door speaker and left
tweeter
A17 Not used
A18 Not used
A19 GRN FR PRE+ Outputs sound signal for passenger's door speaker and right
tweeter
A20 ORN FR PRE- Outputs sound signal for passenger's door speaker and right
tweeter
A21 WHT SWD+B Outputs voltage for stereo amplifier switching ON/OFF
A22 PNK REMOTE SW Detects voltage for audio remote switch
A23 BLU VSP Inputs vehicle speed pulse from ECM/PCM
A24 PUR ACC Power source for accessories
A UDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (24P)
it .............. n Jl
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CM
CM
CM
24 23 21
o
19 18 17 16 15 14 13
Audio-Navigation U nit Connector B (24P)

B1 LT GRN HFL COMM 4 Communication signal for HFL
B2 LTBLU HFL COMM 2 Communication signal for HFL
B3 GRY* HFL COMM SH Shield for terminals No. 1, No. 2, No. 13, and No. 14
B4 RED TELMSIG- Inputs sound signal for HFL
B5 BRN HFLMUTE HFL MUTE signal
B6 Not used
B7 Not used
B8 Not used
B9 Not used
B10 WHT AUX GND Ground for AUX DET signal
B11 GRY* AUX SH GND Shield for terminals No. 12, No. 23, and No. 24
B12 BRN AUX S GND Ground for AUX signal
B13 PNK HFL COMM 3 Communication signal for HFL
B14 ORN HFL COMM 1 Communication signal for HFL
B15 Not used
B16 GRN TELM SIG + Inputs sound signal for HFL
B17 BLU HFL ICON HFL ICON signal
B18 Not used
B19 Not used
B20 Not used
B21 Not used
B22 YEL AUX DET AUX DET signal
B23 ORN AUX RCH Inputs sound signal for AUX audio right channel
B24 YEL AUX LCH Inputs sound signal for AUX audio left channel
*:The shielded wires have a heat-shrink tube insulating the outside ofthe wire. The color ofthe insulating
tube, typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire shown on the circuit diagram.
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR E (14P)
6 5 4 3 2 1
14 13 12 11 to 9 8 7
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector E (14P)

E1 WHT GA AUDIO L+ Inputs sound signal for GA audio left channel
2 BLK GA AUDIO R+ Inputs sound signal for GA audio right channel
E3 GRY* GA AUDIO SH Shield for terminals No. 1, No. 2, No. 7, and No. 8
E4 GRY* GA BUS SH Shield for terminals No. 11 and No. 12
E5 BLU GA SYS ON GA audio control signal
E6 ORN GA+B Power source for GA audio
E7 GRN GA AUDIO L - Inputs sound signal for GA audio left channel
E8 RED GA AUDIO R - Inputs sound signal for GA audio right channel
E9 Not used
E10 BLK GA GND Ground for GA audio
E11 BRN GABUS- Communication signal for GA audio
E12 YEL GABUS+ Communication signal for GA audio
E13 Not used
E14 Not used
*: The shielded wires have a heat-shrinktube insulating the outside ofthe wire. The color of the insulating
tube, typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire shown on the circuit diagram.
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR G (3P)

2011-2012 Honda CR-Z Service Manual

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

2011-2012 Honda CR-Z Service Manual

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

INTRODUCTION

DANGER You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if

First Edition 10/2011

2011-12 Honda CR-Z

INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) SYSTEM'

Vehicle Identification Number

jhm zfi c 4 * b s mmm

Vehicle Identification Number

JHM ZFI C 4 * C S 000001

Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification

Engine IMA (CVT)

GABLE REEL CAUTION

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations (cont'd)

Rear Compartment; Doorjamb Area:

REAR CARGO CONSOLE

AIR CONDITIONING EMISSION CONTROL passenger's doorjam bs

HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY HANDLING

BATTERY DISPOSAL HIGH VOLTAGE

DISPOSAL DANGER DANGER

Emission Group Identification Test Group and Evaporative Family

B HNX V 01.5 1D3

B HIMX R 0096 VZA

NOTE; If you are going to remove heavy components Floor Jack

Safety Stands and adjust them so the vehicle is level side-to-side.

If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional Rear:

To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are IMA System

Standards and Service Lim its..............................2-2

Design Specifications....... ...................................2-17

Camshaft End play 0.05-0.25 mm (0.0020-0.0098 in) 0.5 mm (0.020 in)

Exhaust 35.614 mm (1.40212 in) -

Fuel and Emissions

Manual Transmission and M /T Differential

Item Measurement Q ualification Standard or New Service Lim it

Manual Transmission and M /T Differential (cont'd)

Shift piece finger width 15.9-16.0 mm (0.626-0.630 in) -

CVT and CVT Differential

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit

and top disc Reverse brake 0 .55-0.70 mm (0.0217-0.0276 in)

CVT and CVT Differential (cont'd)

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit

CVT and CVT Differential (cont'd)

Wheel alignment Camber Front

Manual Transmission and M /T Differential

Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning

1,394 mm (54.9 in)

Lubricants and Fluids

Application Lubricant or Fluid

API CERTIFICATION SEAL Recom m ended Engine O il

Application Lubricant or Fluid

Resetting the Maintenance Minder Resetting Individual Maintenance Items

OIL LIFE RESET

5. Press INFO button repeatedly until the "RESET"

A Replace engine oil (see page 8-10)

B Replace engine oil and oil filter (see page 8-11)

Check front and rear brakes (see page 19-3)

Check parking brake adjustment (see page 19-8)

Inspect suspension components (see page 18-3)

Inspect driveshaft boots (see page 16-4)

Inspect all fluid levels, and condition of fluids

Inspect exhaust system* (see page 9-17)

Number Maintenance Sub Items

Rotate tires, and check tire inflation and condition

Replace air cleaner element (see page 9-3)